Full text of "Colour cinematography"

See other formats

GOVERNMENT OF INDIA 

I 

DEPARTMENT OF ARCHAEOLOGY 

CENTRAL ARCHAEOLOGICAL 
LIBRARY 


Cali. No. * 77 8 > 


t 












I 





'1 




m 


2^c 





^'iW 




• s 


A 


*"' ‘j# r f ^ *1' Li *•;'■ 

‘ ■^:^VV1’’*' t*’ ’ 


\ ' 


9 _ ’’ 

• a 


’ ^ f » ,. ■» -'“ 

V . ->' >’« 




4t 


1- < 


* ^ "■ 


. • 4lj 


^ V 

A 


# #4, ^ 

«k, 


%t A. 


C ' 

s ■ 


t . I 


■V',. ., 


m P ,1 


-f’rv ? 

^ t |l ^ 


i 


V‘ f* , % 

;„?«> 




’h * i 

* - -ft 1 


UitSH* 8’’®' " 

.4*1!-!*. u. ‘'/'"^■•‘‘^■i., 

• * ^ Jf<<P 


>x - 

''t -Ji?^**- 

^ ' . ti’^' 


jn -v '“s 

F 



I 



COLOUR CINEMATOGRAPHY 


I 



4 


9 








^ou^^JtT Df ihe SL-ieiicc uf Colour PhoiOBrap 







COLOUR 

CINEMATOGRAPHY 


By 

Major ADRIAN CORNWELLCLYNE 

F.R,P,S. 

Aimurtmt nt Stnntiy n# Mori** fi4Xmf 

tmi Tthtltton Eafttutti 
U.Mtw, Thw Brfitilt S9ttei7 


15062 


O ■ 

TUIRn ede^on 
lt£Vld^ AND IINLARC^ 


119 ,- 5 'bU-Z 

Coy- 




LONDON 

CHAPMAN & HALL, LTD, 
57 ESSEX STREET, W.C2 
1951 





nwn wmimw 
flBTOKD fjwnofi 
tiizE& FjocnoN \ 95 1 


CENTRAL ARCHAEOf 

library. NtW 

/S O o 

A«. hi. 


Otu^KoCkac Hd, i^/4 

FMUBd w O-tciii linjM bv iEivi«£wio4 fM iliL. LoMvn 
ikffiAd bjr 4 J. Ilitcoi Lu».^ UridtiB. b^o^^baijL miv4k« 



, pRETArt: ro the thikh edition 

T he production of a buok flf ihis kind in Engitind sines the w; 5 t 
biis indeed bccottie a rormJdnble task^ ^5^ stage is com- 
plcicd only aficr such serious deJay that n 3 vision at one time 
-V providing reasonably up-to-date infontiation becomes quke inadetjuate 
long before a book goes to press. The adverse conditions under 
which the hritisli pubUsbing industry labours ure the writer’s excuse 
t for ihc imLidv final state of thi* treatise, ftevifiion was eompicied 
in 1946 and during the ctifiuing four yenrs of debty mttch additroniil 
%| infonnaiion had lo be added or inserted it* or^f to cover the con- 
tetdponiry siination at ihe eventual time of publication. 

Significaiir advances in the Lechntque of molion piciurc colour 
film during the Ust leu ytars are withoui exoepiion tbe outcome of 
chemical fcscareh. All imporiani processes, other than Tcchnicolorp 
item from the concept of the foimatiofi of coloured compoucidi 
(or their destruction) in the immediate neighbourhood of the dc- 
_ Veloped silver image. So far such art approach ncccsiurily involves 
several coated layers. Tlte high co^t of ilw miinufacturc ol‘ ^uch 
materials has so far kept ihe price of colour film loo high lo odnui 
of its universal adoption. nevcfihelcS’i the proportion of colour films 
made has sleadily risen in let^i years. U is ddficult to conceive ihat 
there will be any uunsutional advance on chemical tines during the ne^i 
few years. On the contrary, one good reason for expecting invention lo 
5hift iU point of dcpaniifc once mure from the chemical to the phyiicnS 
is iliai the techuiqiic of television in colour will in due course bring 
about entirely new dwtrica! methods of both i^orUing and m prod ueing 
^ colOLitcd imageSh There is nothing fanUistic in supposing that the 
whole chemical basis of the pbotogiaphic record may be Lilt™dy 
, on its way to the museum^ iti which case the oontctils of this book 

' will have become of Jitife interest. , 

^ The public history of processes of colour dncmaiography ^ 
<111 ihe whole discouraging and disconccftiDg. bur the reader may be 
;; assured that the privale hiatory is hardly credible, and wtlJ^ 

be made known* constitute n riogular commentary ut>cin inc least 
ralional aspect's of otir ^ocicly nnd its eulliire- At rimes the scicdtisl 
must suffer n fit of discoufagement when he contemplates the adiicve- 
: tncnis of the colour film Tn the world of cnieriainmenL Must all 

that aitaly beat prowess* all ifmi nuiihematica! ^eslhclicSp end us euloorcd 
^ plastic buried in the vatilii of the Briti^ih Film Instiltiie. 

When the names of the plciures in a catalos^*^ the numbers 

•J V 


PREFACE rO THIRD EOlTlDK 

UT] Ehc ^itc ^ll| ihi4i ri-nn:iin^ ir liitimubiting to why the golden 

light of a four by six inch Turner waler-colouf will outlive and out¬ 
shine the once fiitnous "" glory of the film. We mmit console our- 
«:Ivc^ by supposing Jhiit Ute Uue reward for the pioneefs* cumc and will 
etiine in the cduc-ntioriul field, in medicine jsnd tlie scitinccb, iind in the 
domestic record. 

The wTiiEr\ pcr^al viev^ k lhai ihe itsthetu; content of ihc urt 
of colouring in iilnn^ has so fur been of very lovs order. In the 
so-called liiit arts the use of colour its a means uf emotiojial expres- 
siOEi lias only very rurcjy achieved great stgniJSciiiice, but there arc 
certain PcrsIuEi rugs arid embroideries^ and some Cliinese ceramics, 
in which the colouring hits fur rhe ifnincd observer a singular nobiiiiy 
of tyfnlimrnt comparable to thui conveyed by music. Bui ihese wens 
not the creations of ordiiiary men, ilicy wei e ihe supieme efilorcicerice 
which crowned the imdition of a thousand years* the cud'pnxluot 
of an evolution ary process which began in the tents of nomadb and 
ended in the palaces of enlightened niojiatchs^ 

But why should we casiig^Uc the makers of filmic measured lo the 
ouUural level of the average citizen of the democracies for lacking 
vuiacs which have never been asi^:ubk by more than one In a 
thoasarid? The film show is a commodity, hke ice cream, prepared 
TO titiriate I he jaded amitomies of j^ert lihop-girls. The DJm is ersatr 
Ufc, the final ignominy m a doomed civilizatioiu the Last shadow^ 
with its writing upon ihc walk We are here concerned with the an 
and science of costing moving cotoured shadowii upon a dead screen 
in such a manner as to deceive the eye by simulating redity. But 
perhaps these shadows have no more iind no Ics^^ substance ihuss ihnt 
reality they set forth to reproduce, in which case otir rather superior 
4C0rn U hardly justified. 

The author acknowledges his debt to nearly every firm engaged In 
manufacluring or processing colour fdin. and to many techniednSv 
F^articular acknowIcdgmdnLH arc due to the following firms, all of 
whom have provided data or given their permission to indude extracts, 
or to reproduce figures and iltustiaiions, from papers: Ea!]tmaa 
Kodak; Kodak Limited: Du Pont de Nemours; Ansco Ltic.: Techni¬ 
color Inc,; Photo-Produit$ Cevaert; DEifay^Chromcx Limited: 
Gasparcolor lac,. The General Eleciric Company, IJ.S.A.; The 
National Carbon Co. Inc,, U-S.A.; Mole-Richardson Inc.; The 
Morgan Crucible Company Lid.; Cinecolor Ine. PefTuission hm 
been courteously grunted by the Society of Motion Picture and 
Television Enginctrs, U.S.A.. md Ansco, to reproduus certain papers 
complete. If permissjon ha.^ not been obtained in every iiisiance of 
quotation, espcciaUy ftom the Jaurmd of fhe Soewfy of Ahrimi Fiotuu 
and rc/mwfM EngitwErx, the author apologizes both to Ibe Society 
and to the author^, but effort hei$ not been spared to refer the feeder 
vi 


PREFACE' I'O TlJtftD EDITlOji 

io tlie in every institice. The saiac reiiiiulcs apply in iiiMiy 

other as in a work of this type the compUndoD of eiiracts 

from extsting papers and pubUihed matcrinl in cverj' form is inevjiabb^ 
Iq previous prefaces acknowledgments have been pven to the Con' 
iroUcr^of H.M- Siadonery Oflice and to the ConiroJfer of H.M. 
Patent Oflice. 

Finally the author expresses bis gratitude to Mr^ Sydney Groonip 
B.A.. of ibe Science Museum, Loudon^ for his padeiit reading and 
correction of tJw proofs, Qtid to Miss Juan Crawford for typing Ihe 
fxmnuscnpt and compiling the index. 

AOHtA?d COttMWEtX-CLVNE, M.BhE, 


London. 1^51, 





PREFACE TO Tlll\ URSl' EDITION 


T he lifiK has nl arrived far Uie dcEicalc inMnuncnt Hishionfid by so many 

iinrew'ard*d ni^ unhonDural ntumr^ tu be hantied pver it> the direuiors of 
illni^ to the prodiioci^. (heir army ofassbianii, recfmical and nQti*tMinic&l 
—for Uwen ui 11^ ask ihck lalcfsti Jtad ibcjr irtclmttona pcrmii C^^matp^pEiy in 
c^^lour^ has nken ihiny yean lo bring to \ts present aiage of twbfucal dcNeiotimeclT 
& itagc ^hic^ it is ailmitu?d « last makca praetteahte cotnnKreta j pfodoction on W 
flnmd spit . Men of many naii£kiiaUEjc$ tmtEribuifil to the solulicni or Uig pm bterm 
Fomincs hivc b«n ipmi by priviato individuals. MjJUotis of poiinds luve bm 
invaEcd bv lEm ifjeaerai imblk. (Probably less ihim tbrt^ a^ peropps n« 
ttiillton pouTKti.) Yet there fm hem LsieW to them for alE thh efTori. 
ihal I he pioneers could not have been successful unUE substaiary problems rinu been 
solved vthUHi had b direct bearing upon the nmEn nrwareh- and th™ were prohktns 
of ETcas (JifTtcyliy. The of cmuldooi bad to be multiplied by a btmdreO, mw 
sensiii^eft had co be dbeowed hy Ebe phoiosrheinistj qihJ Muijio illumuiatiou had 
lo be cnorniottf Ey increased before there was (he fcmoteslL I ikcJlhoocJ of making nlnm 

in nalural cokHit praetLcablc. . , , 

The hissory of invenrion le.*chci tts that piOEnfiS^ ^ rapid and conlimMus wm 
nibcc ihc riulit Way to do sontcihing has been revealed. U is like cLimbmg an eniirdy 
unknuwtt nwuniBio— half Hie baitk fct if we cun choose lire most fn^iurabTc 

Eoute, There were so many attractive shcrt-oiu Co mislead cany wwkm who 
lousht 10 achieve cincmaiography in colours. For example., ii i» likely that all the 
work lavished upon the ” uddtiiw " rlKlhod of tjtifh&H, in which ihi« ^arure 
imaoes in ihc pj-imary ooloursi are proieciod in aipcrpoxjticHi upon I he sefetn* wns 
wasted, th^sli for ittany ycBis ihU uppeared to olfer a simple and clcgam solution. 
The Es^hclk: and lectinical problcmt wlilch ihc jrtki tiuial lolvie'm col^r film 
are of greater compkKiiy a nd difficuEiy lhan i it the izt of pamiw ihnt o ts likely 
that mujuers and maMcrpkces wilt be aUII f^ttr^ In llic art of jsiinlujE tbcic have 
bKu few K/cat colorists. \\ is true thul the Elm colortst n freed rrom imiatmg 
diffreukies of manual cntruttiainship. He is free to compose mentally, while applito 
phyvies (md cJiemlBlry are ready (o obey his stibllcai diroctioias—ncvertbcScss, EEic 
powm of TTimd demanded lire of m higher order in «> far m colour composition 
in time adds another diniuujon io the geotnetty of hia imapnativc cmiceptlon. 
Vul^iy is invariably the outedow of liK gilt of stlfexpecssiOT winch ar^lW 
seknre hsa hy vorltiMa liuUuinnics given the lory and ilinllow inmoii of cnEcnainefSj 
la ihere a (itm nrt? Of ii the film entcltainmonll U cnEcttainmeni aiC The reply 
lo the tasl qtie^tkm ts^ lhat cnEcrtuinment is mi an. But itic Elm, it cod be anpicd., 
cixitd partckke of ihc nuiure of line ert: and films Iiare been made whith arc 
uPdOiihtedfy works oran. But is any purproe smed by disctaslni ihc creulkm ofa 
Elm u ont discusser the creation ofa pkiure. or a s^Tnplioay? From ibcsiandporinr 
of Ihc prodmKT of sucodsTuI nin» il U 4 wisle of bnadit *Jid a producer of suuh 
filtm would be the first lo asrertihHt Lhccalc^rrwsofttrlflrf by- ihenatmToffhccase 
knapphoqble to iIks tonrmcfdiiJ film. It must follow-, thetefone. that Hk commercial 
prociiicer UhiLcrestcd In icchnical principles of colour eomfmllkin cun iddliEkmal 

spednibt aipc^-t of lilm production only in so for m such principles gbh CfihftPCQ the 
lelhng power, siniJ th* booking pewpr^ of a Elm, tndeed, the prindpla ofcolptmtiun, 
whit*, if folk! wtd, woiddcTHuretlwssllKl^ halgureoft film, might come into acltml 
confiictviith what cun he lefcrrrd to a* its cammereia! quality. Thu oonflkt betvreen 
The condLiiQua nf a work of an and of comtncrchiJ luoccss iv abuduiely fundammtak 
and only Tools deceive ihcmscKcs in this moticr. tf any producer hcslTaiefl between 
ibe dentandv of Heaven and MLLmmnnp he will fkll inlo t^hc ready pit of Ikttlldcliou 
which lies yawning between Ihc iwo. 

The ciLftoofi fiJm is ibo Iasi rernaioing hope of the highbrow, la ihii tUm-fotm wc 
iuiEujiTty approach ihc coudilions of a work of art, Unagine ihc possibiiilica of this 
piwre in the hands of a very Rreai arUii \ WaU Di^y \m exqubitc wit^ and fantasy, 

viii 



PUKFArt TO I-IRST tiDlTlON 

>«Kt Cflprict, iUBi ;lI Iini« i. Sin«ulsf deliaKy. jn atausi if■I'ifuM 
peroeplwn. bui fttriu ibf littw Iw imtptitiowl ^otouf jnio hti ^ 
nwoient he hns fdikd to bring hii cotouf a* an **l”f??{)'®rt[?ST?nrfBvcnrSQn But he 
Ibe lewftl of the rein «f ibe woric—ihe intwiion, niid the c^cur 

i$ listmine to be a cotorUt by degrea, and we nw a 

I hat bi, coloof which, by ha cnwiKiMl intensity, and h> lt» wBniliiance, 

pennnnent contribntktn to out imaipnathe life. . uihUi mavenKnt «a a 

Whatc^vF wo may say about oolwt coinpoaitwn in j„ tutlf tnuri 

fimtoi. wv murt ob«fvo the rr^lh that aa an 

mbotainiue to other facton which wc resognifli aa m ^ i^ir 

It ia in iho ladt of recognition orihisSubonJmaimn 

will be nude in the eady hiateny of the colour Him. mticss inej^™» ‘ 

actuilly ecrauibnie* some ftirthtr value to the S!Sd 

the mi ml by Ibc aim as a whole. 1« presence is unnefie5sjit>, and mtn tiHUuioMifi 

"**tM!as**oncn been obrerved Uwt ihe edition 
slitfhtty Jirti importJuii ihnn tUt ymtrffiJ 

■*?£r ™ ™. b »» 

I^?e hnportant faiHor. and in others the ^ 

diieed into Hu film in its pt«em form ^ 

lellinBofciUiertheBctionOTthcimmd Jt can only asstsl. Uowcaii it assist 

1. It can induce a mood m the (ihserver, , 1 ,, Mcitire nlnno 

2 . It tun isoiKtutrale attention iipm some one a^ iitlhe l'W“« f^- . 

j. It can assist ilK impTciaion of lequmwi— Hie apP"JinJi to ernes, and iiw 

4, It brma about an increaseof 

-the t^ din^sim^by aerial j»ct3P«ti%t, and the plasllcitj ct Hu 

5. By “SShocw or?be four type of os^cdogiotl percepnon' it can provide 

iubfccihx^omnicnt on dramiitkraiUiaiipii. . 0 ^. 

fc, II can heighten Bencrelly Hu sentiment of reutily owing U) Hu favl Hut 

noimal Vision includes the teiwailon of Colour. 

•riic rarest chamcwriviic in the ceninwciaJ film*of H« day is rwiRimh In w far 
colour he has an oppoTtmnty to make. ^ diicovered colour— 

wUl Hicir undying firatitiKte. 

.rfWrfinti-i. ^ HsiiFCX»«ktflC« t.iTJhf 




IX 



PREPACS plRftT EDiTrON 


II itil but lo iLtpi>aeic lJ)aL utcn irttlour luiinet tw ti* itie 

pfwEuxn mil txhibft rettraiitt nl fill. Already Iht ijeiniciHjy li fbr culctir to be 
incd, ig the ftw nims which been niadc^ in m preuy niudi tike; that of the 
iKlwenisemcnt The liril tnirintwin ihc art director hm im lo ute red— 

aiKl unjduJtci^iod jpcciTuni rqdi Beocralty conEzusiod with blukh —the 

^4rnpksl lind jtkhi pbvioiu of ei^ipIcEnenUiT^ iiilcmiU. But id tw hope lhi» h only 
j icjTtfwrairif M:tpe tn l he e^'qfiiiiion of the tihs’i, oolcmr itiise. It will take very j^sal 
tk ill to oo^troi 1 hi^ cojout ^ subi ly thrft the jiu Jicikcc ii hirdJy jiware of the pieaeuL-e 
111 oo[ei4r m the piviutt, save in ihcrtc morrcntv duhni whH^ ihc dirtctnyr ihc 

<LL|diencv to cpiKjenirciEc on somecofour incldenl ti 9 cWeMr. 

\hn book etlotiT|!i{ in fuzske^ broad aunty orihe tcnllory whiidi ihe pioiiceri 
m\v cAplaml. Vie ure rowr m a poiiitiort for iha llm ultm to forget cxperirneniation, 
and tonuik^ me offolottr a&aconmbutJi^o lo^isrdlL on end—and lluii cmJ^ UTahoiUd 
a \way% rtjTiCTt\b«* U the tmkJng tsf a jf£P«f 

ill the film world ihcrc h wch u woofuf lack of ktiowlcdgc of fundameniaJ 
ntn^tplcs, iueb Enabiiiiy on tbe tHtf t of those who ihhijld kiu^w better lo tudge rigid ly 
0\ iJw rchiilwc mcfiii of maor ao-cafted ntw prncetsa, ihnt ii U high litnt there 
Was rruioe evutCablc u reliable irenttse on ihc siiojcct of coloitr cie^uiogtnphy. An 
tfodeavour hni Iseen oiadc lo tneel ihi^Tti^uirEnKiil, 

Thqfe n no alu^ijTpi u> pr^seni ejare than a simiimry oflhc hrajory oflhc aul^t. 
Fw ^mlcd uratmttni llic f?iuk( it reTemsd co E 3. Wall'* great worit, n* ttitfoi-y 
Of 7fl;#t*-Cs/^ f^ionraf^r. The i>hj«*:t hoii been lo give Uw read^ a reliabtc 
acscTjptioiii of pTtxxs^ Dow bfing worked^ and lo |[ive a tiiripk oiniitw oftbir piifi- 
cir^ upon whkii all sy^icms have been b^xd. 

pic WTit^'iackjfiDwIeileniBnia are due lo the Cotiuolkr of H.M, St^tiemety Office 
and to tlje Controltef of Pntent Office for petmisiion lo Evnriirt axtrncia from 
paten^ and t© ferrotW fotne ctf the ligirns in Special Repon Serks^ No. 
J3V+ of I he Meo^l Rncareh Cotmrik London. Permission haa jutm^ kindly bpcn 
gjttjn by thcEdiior of tlx Jotiinal of ibe Sc^^icty of Mmlpn Picnirc Enginwi to 
repfodiw certain dJagnuruc and to reprini cstlracts from i:e:chnic?l uAocn. 

Ifobton. Ud..the E^imof Vaiiirr,and Mr H. Vv. L«lie™giten 
their to the rcrpfinhng of the intcrcaiittg account of'" The Lenm Employed 

in the TeciinKoEot I^omss ot Cihematovranhy." Tbe asaJHiiiM given bv miijiv 
rtirnt cupped In exploiting cokitir p^ocifsao hntn very valuable. Wtltre lli 
mrer^tkra teprdlrtg a ptoecss »acsnly, or rx^rhapi inacajmle, this H due 10 the 
unwillrngncss, of the owners aft lie proocs^ to dividgK; infornuLikm- 

LoSraoM, IOy&. 


PRtn^AOE: TO SECOND EDmON 


D hklSki the two yesnt which have cliipwd dcv,c Ihc ftnu pubUtat^ ijf itm 
IwvcEsa of^lour Gnemntography Um been macit cornmoialally 
^kvadable winds can chiini lo Ik nmcl In any rundanientid rc\mt. The 
Agrjcalor moTKipiwk lots provided 40 aiuaetlvc aiktiiion to Hit tolo«r 

tu™ nvatEfihkr m ihc suhGJordajrd nujfkeL The proocsstng is v^tf wmiile sintt the 
ibtct Bjblracti^ pnni;iri» are siitiuhiincomly formed in the ihm U^tet durtnElhf 
dcvclniiinefli of a tevtruj irmagt, 4I] slhi^ being removed oflerwn^s. ^i4Xtenientf 
hare been made th^t ihu tnierwurig produti will be uvnilahle ihortiv for J^^irtL 
mo^n pkiurc wotk^d that copiei cm be made uiinraaofity. 

pie |wic^ hn% bm i-eriiEirkiilrfc for paient rwlivOy, purifcuktrlv m itie mononack 
and lenircut&f tlcWs Eighty nr npr« rKdcriLs corei ibe corLeenu^icd Cjemum ajlack 
on lim mpblcni ofixipying ipnl iculur film. Pr.. tfcda G-aiipar hiu alno been v&rv Active 
(ttiCdW (wvcfloB. tnainJy, proposal for monopact ttciwiivt 
Jllm, twt|uxl»i>rrapyjitg. Dud ccilouTKlQ^cbpineiif. I, C. FarbcTunduawrAktr^kik 
f*^***^*^ ^w!a«f-dcv«lopn>eflt in hmk ninety patertU. dikI ihji 
KoilaV hflve Uxn workings the unniEregion isevWmit bj <tw n)nr««w liaiifiiii. 


to SaCOND IDttrON 


Lfi 1^39 Biul ihrK pri»«s« ihc IrnSL of ibc ^“qrlJ's ilcfnBfid for 

prors3uinal motioa picture 55-ciiin- colour fjJfn^Tischaicolojf. DuJiiycolot ttio 
CiUspamjEcw. Tht progress tmdc by Dufay color Itm been \€ry rmpid ihe nist 
tucemfuE ntoof of jKgatne-posiJive praceuin^ the Corotwtkm ISSiti 
rcTatsod, The remiuiLahte simplicity of DuifnyooEot. Ihe phnloirapliw iciJrrtlquc 
being aubstanliaUv lo tJftck iinO ttltJte, haJ coittnhuiled to ili 

for m many retpeciR thh prodtici fuiniR tbc pratik^tl reqtiiwnuailt whiuh tnotMra 
pictLirt etiipncef^ liad EunB aj?o formukECCt- ^ 

In^cmon 51 SI} oiiiiribuic new opt teal comh-hmUom for bctirhapJliNng* but the 
nerfed Ainclconinfi ^ o prism h ooJ made motTe likely by ific multipliCii^ikKi of ll* 
pam. thouih it t* k tliii dirKflon that new cffortii jem ipairily lo twd. Among 
otber prumalK pfropOsals wc nienlion Hudcl^'s tE.P- Jot* 

prJam Xiongs so cnassiffc^stKJn 3D (see ^37)* there bejog thra; objodina b^d 
ii pri^rn systtni and thfoc auh-stoiMljird ptctprci Jn dw upact cT one nofirnul mtinc. 
Further patent on ttie &ix*UTtfir caTnem bl H-P- 4^0,673, TiAt><olnof beanvijihitct^ 
remiTii^ccnt of Rnyool Tc-cipcf|je in Tliofnini acil Br>'anV H. P. 453t2_l. One 
ka\^ thought it bt* b lustnn for Otis spe^id of iwt^ob^r ud^nw proc«. The 
wry compid prism tlcscjLbcd id BellLngham aod htiink(y’'s fc.P- 459^6h4 \tiiiB- uctlgtH^ 
in oix'tirfSuKc with iJi* writer"irwjujfsnwwiJTft*f Gjsp^otoi*m W5S. Aoefliun 
aniQuni nf practicui wa* aKomplishnl, btii 1l n^* fnund eniremely Jilwult !0 
tt<!iin ijrrfcci iqdsttutkm of (he tnltiraed sutmtindanj c’*n lho«^ iJw 

oriaiiuri* quiEc ftxM frcmi panllia* mon. Thru pfimi li ufnl m comjunetion wHli 

Reninsfaam luid Slaaki'^ 11*. which cotxt* xm bifimiiiut ertso^ntenl of 

ih* ihrtc juh-jAaiMl»«l ftames ipreiid over i™ iwtttiol frtmes, A. H, M^cr 
propascs (O tiike fE.P. 4^9,159) and rroject (E.P. 4T8,7*A; fouTMlonr Kub-iinirdud 
jocoriH Sn succfttaivciy Mptwed paiitL L iCiaser dof^ih^ o cEcificnt pf jm 
cen^nted cube giviniit irnnEO on ilsfce tUrnsr divider being behind iw ohjectftE 
CEP. 472*4^8). A. », Kicin n(iknl*sil a simSInr heanvap-liltcr m EP. 475,41^ Wtb 
V<i!oiir fiJteri btPKiutttt w ithLfi (he bkick tt? that any stray lighi reflect^ froiti q 
portion of the lyinji beyond the reflecting (dane rwponjil^ fnr the fotmaii^ 
of n imcnjl Image will* wrhen fni»Uy emerging from -[he of the pmnn adjAamt to 
Ebe plnnc in whkii ihci said inuye is lo bq- nKonIcd. be tnums tight wdneh ihc r^rd- 
infi ftttoris capabkrof iransminme, or* if a pbolognjphfct cmuUwn b dom 

rwjt jTeLiuirc inch q UUcr^ which I he emubton ls cocobk of rccordingr Thb priam 

woris very wcH bdeed, U b doubtful, howawr » it cmmu wUl over be mndo to 
iiccommodate ht . . n ^ ™ 

W. H. and E C. Hnirbon UAtcribc n iwo-coloiir hcam-i^titfor tn ¥^P. 

The ^rrangcjnen! showis n semj'tranfpeimt mnrof umi ■ prkrn m fropl ofpwi* ot 
uiwn-^objcditei pf cjviiiin^ l he usual two irib-slenckiti negaPveA wlhm the ai^Df 
one normal frame. Further Hilintnn psUipts arc EK 47^,3(11^ the In^r 

tkalme with addithx threMOlovr proiection ^ more latcl> he m lujnrt to 
in ibrcKOlour beanvspilEtePc of conniderablt conTpkxfly. F-P. 4«3,817. 4^3,SIS. 

494333, 494334. L. Hofsl Would hslc 4^5.190^ Ihree-Miknir reconii 
tide iidc 2 aos> ihe On imncccssqrOy dimcull procodupe. 

Pairt of colmirrocoN imugjra ertangftl side by side luwl sadt ti|pcrmo«t 4ifc pr^ 
vided by ft oompiox beinvtpUtier pencniial by Cwtkkcw Coit^i^ EP. 
4ri9 113 and 474^tC)0_ Hic nrroDgeftimt on Ihc film is IIm same ^ ihc Bi^h proc«s 
(set page 36S^ Cosmoco^r S^ * iwo^lour wib^racityepaidcisd^^ type.^Ti| 

for the nnut i donblc^ooatcd positive siocfc . Pircfumiuhly the *u ^ilaoda rd rtna^rds 4 le 
enliirced by ah opUcnl printer and Uifc Images lotied a ^tbe oramilC d 

hkoro^Lc; tonmsi mcthcnls It is repcinjed as Ihe uimiliiin of Otlu C, Cilimiwe. 

devoted^ design llltk «it, lo 

faf OiwCDcnci to the diufireeftbleoonchisSflO that many Var^t^ 
kJf^nxwitlDiit v> hieh hflvt JOHB iin« hwn prirt«i lawtwwWean: devrttd. 
M ^SSiSIwit!! (htcmwoutirt^i orJcft«oam*oncof i^^nsutar 
«sSt» to lw«r in cf«c pro»i(»n(> to colour pholopupiiK 

I -Tifip- itndn^ kflow to bc mnst annojed with- the cortfldinicc tradclies 

menk Th^t^tiatftablvnoiiEccssJiy to bcsympatbfltjcaboui ibcbrter * 

ready 4nd to idvc the ranws of rdiablt sc™si(k 

antldrwted licmfindoui euliiiisieym ftfiin ibe bciktjI pubLi^ 

<*> C*«t a A,«uU 



Pft.£F4Ct TQ £i>ITIO^ 


t>J’ ilic KKlutik^i of ilic totbnkni problcnr of culcTniilojfrapliy Iq tiatiinsi 

^■okiiir- Wc tnnw rttsw lh?it tbms^ jIkJ not tom mtl tn iJm u’ay m whi^’h il wnifc 

nnlicEp^ttcd Mint they would ^ To-diiy, in there nolhiD^ lite unnuinuly in the 
Ruikjrt to colixir of the ipJtv-kUiil tttcmbcfi Whett ootonr soiwtiorj 

i$ wuxrnfiid. CTcryow Is an CJtperii To Ull soitkcmw thm the cokiur ofiomc piart ijf a 
rjmJJijr infiagc is rightly f^inoduced w£ien he lliinki it does oat oomKpond to hi^ 
horiTUl visual erperknoe, ts fo io.mll hnov it 'H'U cao jtidfc hy Im reaetloiL tm ihtift 
CK^fions. He Is as UDques^ooafaly cntit^eil to owtI tMl Ih^ U s^owthioj^ wtod^ 
with the cchloiir, «s he would be lo obsenic an fl^najcni dtsEonj an of fonti. Vei cofouf 
tcfhnkioiu uri^tituiini^ly uccusC him oflsck of tno^'lcd^ oroffEikilly ob^crYUtiOiri 
Now ouch 4ceuRaUom arc only Juilifiablc provided that wc osauitw un awareness on 
Lhe |iarl of the uudknL'c of l£e cnoet phjikaf uJid idi^'sbHogkol limiLatioos within 
whith Ebc colour moiioc pictun nimt conlirtoe for jtmfiy ycun to Ttiuclioa* The 
u^errrgc iiwiihcr of iiie auuieikie oinnot be cnpc€:4cJ lo be atlaroof ibe naliJte of the 
“ conveiniou " lie is requested lo ojxepl as ixjrrescntatire of rcilityp nnd froni ihrs 
■State of oJfjJtfa ihctc nrisci a wioiis oao^ict wkh we Mt et pmscul mcuptihlc of 
resol^Shit. 

The leeOjqiitiocL of iho airlom triiitsforttmtiou wbkh tbc or^ul \m$ unddraone 
usually tftka ihc form i>f driubr aa to it* which b only Mmi we should 

expect, the addiilon of colour lo ihc iiTui^ hcin| ussuroed to be o further stage to¬ 
wards the a::b i4^^trieoi of tisutrf iliwfktti. 

Tht: reactkrn Of flilTcTenl ilidiviilimls to the coJout Qlni b muleriid of immense 
interest to the irtycbelopst. Those of us who ojredstly bmigbi into eoiitjict wiii} the 
inecopdbihlc opinkua of peuplc whu^ vkw tohiur hlrnsj fiod ourselves Edterrnimi^ 
bciwecn □ slate of inriiatlrm omJ surprised wioTidcrmcnl depending upon 

v^'hether a Shot \& oondeenbed for beEbit (m the one hcind too blue when we £naw it 
lo ao:uijle!« or on the otiuEt hantJ prvbcd as beinif rrujEst^TleHisly ^aod when 
privately wc are aware th«f tl is Evosilivefy wrong. 

Fuinters Eire Uie must satisIheUTry' people of nJl lo whom to colotcr 
They ohwn'^ app^Kintivc and Tx\m milicui of ihc illusion riulure. For thtm the 
colour of a him is not examined as if it were ihcrc to be measured or checked up 
—it h " Fiiw colour/' or " iutcrosfitng eok»ur or '* poor cdkiur ’**; bit! wvtr* or 
hnnliy evcfp true colour " or “ wrong colour/' Whereas for lilns directory, pro- 
docox diitdbuif^ni and exhihitm H it alwo>-s ** all wroiiEi*' ami l}iai genendly 
when evnything hat behaved about 3i well as it can be expected to in The state of 
cxhtlng knowledge. 

Most clnema-goerk seem to 4 gw ihnl ilw e^ilour film u nwre " i^l Lhon ihc 
blfick-^tnd-white ftlni, nl though rhey gjcocraHy mention ilmt, of course^ ih^ are not 
fcfcrriug to '* those liwfid early cotmir filrnx'" hut io the muAi recent onci The 
Eimpkht ccimJitions of nrtkiie iinii>\ iheoretically. nx least, required iho coluiation 
of the monocbremc imagr, because I be exiremc rcallini tiniir sovdid repretenlaliotL 
conflkted with ihtetilirei> artlhcial nature ofthf visual imu^. ^ly Theexcepliortal 
obAUL^^r. gcnemlly nn ortist, is capable of an unuli^s iuffidently penetrating io be 
ll ware of Ihc fact ihni die ooLour lilmiuay fail to [ic hieve iho kncrea.%ed I'euimm hoped 
fOFi and thtil the addition nf ltdIout ecniUiuilcs a move baekwaids lowa/d4 the con- 
iicnlkMiul limitELlioni of iTie siJfifit film; ^more, in fact, nway from roiilijm Icwanis Ihc 
i^nn of on ait form. Iilut aufh preocctipoilons wiih Juihctk^ will nover \x in ihe 
mind of the average irianrtii viewer, i'or htin (be colour film u more real rffio is 
not entfrely safislicd li h of ioicnai 10 pul furwurd the ptoNble re^oni for ihe 
VLjgite feeling id" uoeaiiiTtess %hpch ihc pcojretieil nxm to cause many people. 
To ondemiaj!^ the probtem property. >l is cssemiul that tbc $lijJcnl ^ould be nwnre 
of Ute fundamentphy ddferont stimulus arimmiiing from the lutten us Cflmpnrtd 
w ith ttwi: derived from vision of the ooitnal ihrcc-dtmcnsiMtJ world. 

Tliojptindpul ddfncnces arc I lime; 

i. Tto uppCT llTiut of perccplihlc btighlnm diffrmw in tbc rmngt derived frum w 
nw lural Mteripr may Ik rttmdrcdsof times gtenicr ibuil tfiul of the screen image. 
On the othfr hand^ ibc ibrtsholj luianinvEd up, so iluii iIk length of the loiaj 
^imsl vcok may be Ihc aume pinpotuonaldy. Tbc psycholngtodef^i of 
rugfl Dii^iii£$s levd of adapiiitimi lit, hnwiew. net idtoiicai to Unit of a low 
Icrelp quite ii!^rdlesa of ibe ihiTmftecs perceptibLe in the ci.mirjisi jcalc at 
any giren adapmtteti 1erel. in other words ji does nor maitcr whctlicr ooc 
can Set a llmii of one hundred iicn;rocs of di^enre in a tu'i^Uy \h CKtcriof 


I^REFACE TCP SECOHO CPlTlON 

and rHK Inindral dt-sroa. of difftm^e in a pootly jf^ [{* 

fonucr vault cxpcdem is (fiiitc diflfcrent. Rcgiudica of a^taitan, Uk 
cKtcTpor jiiQ '* briji^i." nntl iltf p«^^^y IJi sctehii u jfloomy 
fquuhlatii^ effect) 

f. ss.fnb’s.^ rssr^sE« "rT.KS»"S,k 

difTcKiKu) m the " upper” and ’ lt>w:r liinit* gf ihc phffli'isrJfHijt 
rcwidLfir rapid “ |(«a?™adapl#Ucm the can spprep»« !«*< 

Shadow ai^s undcf natural wuuJitioiw nrv;»ioni No viuial appmltt^ 

4 riM ^pen^ueSt? of iwrkieil to ‘jj: 

cocDi-teuit of u Kiwit «! of ncpioiitKto'O pnms^. The 
nuilidtr disHTum sndffled hy iJuse pnimimes will ody conijinse a parr of 

. A'S.’SSK iSJS 2SSu<.-«i» ™'!» ^ 

stimuli ofipmiijnEin ibcMterior thrw-dimOJSKsnal Odd, a riuiM of«n»iiim 
dlUcteoliuticm it perceived which a niuch gMlier than land iiuiilHi|t!wly 
HjtTexciat io1 lhai derived &oiti a tiAo-dnntttfiJODHi 5(ereen“irna^ ataiiicc o 

row bn£m«. pr^tvidioft tn ihe teiinn a wireptmdintfy low 

A •Tt^cwnuiisi ofiheUluitiinAfedscfwi utcu, perhaps jtiii filliny the againM 

th?S*SrrS^ is a vhnale*t«iieo« hearing nti rcUbon to In^g® of 
ihfr iKiTfnsil wpfld- h ii afSdloiSftHit lo obsen mg rlic inElcr wrid throxigii the 

7 The brishiiitH rani^ ntMiltt m dktoitioP of ‘^ohw^hUli 

attHiKs piytdMjlgEiiail diisaiiafQciion. H luc akrts Mcm f co darfc and too blue, 
shadow* too bluclt and ctnpty. 

ThceTToragfludBrnent lu which «ti iw aectibcdJiwriv deSMrUarc pcculi^y li Wy 
to hTtSinufartuMs of epedal liltn stock for wlourcwemtWpby. 

Cl^ly.^ Vonditioit* of »itc of a sccsilMed prodttet in the open mwiirt irteke h 

S^acticoble fox a Tonnufatturef to pruvliie mhHn! 

In the »kki of every ctiriieniman who baa piit^^^ a few feet of ^in , Neverthdw 
eauctnc caue ihei the Tetlinieolirf nuthontitt lw« exercaoJ to enitirc 
nob^y shall l» petmitted to iIk special Lsunen^tilpiwit wthiwii superswu'ti 
iHd^ntrol has ^ Iht key to the high ytapdani achiev^ hi this - 

Were it as easy to spot eirore ifi the phoiogrnphk: tcchnrtue of luoia^nMiae its it 
is in colour, the audience would be nmch inote eriikal of photograp^ thao 
They are at piwent (;uiie iCKuiKiblc of temaJkiuB any quali^ ® 

•a pbotosniphy is concerned, ioMhe level of the plioio^apli«' eehhktue b frftiu^K 
!o low^ weie fui emuiskm dianiai to find hm«tr m the ftudaaw he 
■.iT j ^ iwi from wchctdcnois why he stinvtil liaw slaved for yean to pm vide ili^lc^ 

industry vuith that mirade of upplied wicoce, the roo^rii T^f ^ 

fMin nc»tive, or for that mnnef wilb on cqnilly pt^ect positiw matenol. 
ood curkws to «fkct upon the fbci that the siMnert is 

toto B eotisidBrablP^siTOphe, the otw being (iimPg lo llie ieSjal 
inieliiscDt ofihc aiitUHtcc, and that Imnoeforth the technician wiii not he obte to bi^ 
Idl^a^nKtenoe behind a foolproof film. Unfoitimaicly, fitr tome itmc ti* com the 
mnmd hft u^ will probably bo blamed tor all icisuK of he product—mtil 
S™ Ut^uDTcaM, M will sen’s «r prow Utii ecitalii openilore Invatiably oblato 
nsolts. while others as certainly fail. j ■ i 

*^*TtS*^lciut‘ iliTrttwtt of fib™ In the fast two years leaves a lot m be dcM^. 

Te2^ Sdvti^ha* (mtdiManwd the ability to«pk»Hrolly 'bf *^ie 
Ctooimscialb minded prodooefa itrt unlikely to uppreMle that ihey 4re 
Il^^S^Sfa^nstniinatt wltiiii only trained arim* cun iserfom upm, far this 
Suk «c^ hta been done which manifcM* eysn imUigsm AppUwtmw ^ 
reasrtn utw «or'v '.w. imaginsiioii of cremivo art. It nmy well be 

cploirt f_- lutyihuii; (^]y KW and thrilling from i faim of entm* 

Ol developed tusic and artutic cuHure are 

ISSSSfkab^f^ advance, ilie hist two veara arc >ety impuriani m 

Sm 


PREFACI^ TO 3ECON|> EDITION 

the hhtory ornltNir duciijjiiD^pliy for tl» m»ii tiui duruv ihu period Ihop hu 
beep Mjd pom e penmnat Ibundsikm of thoory upm which k it nirly eertaift All 
Miuctutt ^ bttilt. Fw this worii all of us jmctcdied in this: 

^are i^lebud to Praf. A. C. Hardy, whose ^lUtqEitJoli o/Cobirimariiyjuid 

impofunoe, Md the «am I* ttuo of 
M fihofography, by Dr. G. B. Hurr^anud 

rad H d' AaufysismefjSii CoUmr Jbpforiwrriwr. by Or, O. A. Spencer 

H* C.I.E. Oittribution CocIBcinus are given in ihkoditionon U| and a 

Srt^ih Sydw Groom, EA., of iht Scteau Motcuni, 

^ih Ke^_g«, London, [or rame wry helpful " Note* on Cakulejjctui rthUu* 

^ pemuHjcmheve 


LwDON, J9J9, 


CONTENTS 


t^EFAlT-TO THmo Editiom . .. .. V 

Pketaces to rmsT and Stoond Ei>mtiN$ . . ., viii 

PART I 

CHAno 

1 Hi^ORICAI, SeTHMARY . > • •. . • 3 

2 THETHBDRBTlCAl-BAaa ► ... 38 

3 ADcmvE PitocisBs .. „ , ♦ 2<i3 

4 SuBTRAcnvii PiUTiCESses . ► . . . . 325 

5 Colour-Camijras AND BHAM^SPtrrnNO SwrEUS .T > ■ 509 

6 Bipacr . , .. .. *. 567 

PART El 

7 Backokuund Oft Process PRorfiCTiDN .. . 583 

8 Colour FiUf S(^t^ND Traocs ,i .* ,.588 

9 TOfilNO .. .. fiOO 

EO The PftocEssiKG op Two-Cowjur P«ini5 bv Deep Tank 

^Ehthoos » — ,, a, #■ ,B 6JE 

11 The STEHEOSOOPfc Motion Picture IM Colour a. . . 614 

12 Mar^-up .. .. 619 

13 Colour SENsrTOUBTRv , . .. , . . 624 


PART nr 

14 The PKETfflMR.'^A OF COlOUft VISION ANO THE MaRINO Op 


Fil.'RS w OoujcR -T .. 632 

After-Images. Colour Fati^e 
Simulumeous Contrast. Visual Data 

15 COLOUft Harmony .* -* -* , .. 644 


16 Colour Standaros* Mba.surement ano SPGctFiCATiON 656 

Colour Scores. The Future of the Colour Film 


IV 








CONI RNtS 


APPENDICES 

1 British Pat^t List .* . i .. ►- 665 

2 MwitAt Ansco Processing Machine - - - - 673 

3 SuRVET OF LG. Fakben Brittsk Patents deaung httn Ttoi 

Question of the AJcn*i>iFFUsi<»N PftOFERTtK of Colour- 
tQRHERS UNTtL ]939 •. .. .. - 691 

4 Survey of Kodak and related British Pate'nts deauno 

WtTH THE PROBLEH OF THE ANn-DIFFESION PROPBtTtES 
OF ColouR'FOrmers UNTIL March 1942. , .. 697 

J NoiK ON THE Uja OF Ansoo Color Camera Film Tyfe 735 705 

6 Processing Comthoi. Proceoukes for Ansco Color Film 707 

7 Analysis of Developers and Bleach for ansco Color 


Film - . .. .. ->■ 724 

S Metaluc-salt Track ON Ansco 16-1414. COLOR Fuji .. 712 

9 Du Pont Color Fuji . . .. 740 

10 GBVACmOR . 743 

11 The Dugromacolor Peoc^ .. .v • ■ ■* 750 

12 Chromart Process AND Alfacolor .. ... ..752 

13 Recent UoimiNOi Equipment .. .. 757 

J4 Colorimetric Specifications of Wratien Light Filters 759 

EmersonAL Name Index i. •• .. .. 762 

Subject Index .. .. .. .. *. 766 


kvi 




















Fkj, 1,— Lisui* Diiii 20 & Duhiiurtni. I'jnendTi biumlot. Ln 1^69 he ile**cribwl in .gjrejii 
deuH ev«y aipevt of^ wrfiwry (he ncstofuslKkve iinoew.-uidcnNi aboui b. A Drat- 
cLlu ^nita who dusJ^ m mbet tuvc dkJ, uiihqnuurnJ nml iinsmiK. 


< fai^ #ww 1 rf ««tl 


PART ONE 


Hie Hto of method vt 4i pn^ertniva imnutioEi rrom {»ic 
Slep lo dln[M^)c^ in zn^ et^ume. IT in the right emicie# ii vdll be 
the fnie fncihod: if in Ube vbo oaiinot hope to pmjpen. 

CdERfDGfn 






















CHM^TER I 


Historical Summary 


1672*—oomtaimicatioQ lo the Royal Society led direcily 
to tile first foimuJiitioris of the iBree-coloyr theory of coloirr visiOD [1]^ 
l!W2.—Dr* Thtsmiis Young [ 2 ]* In hh ffimotis paper rciid iit Um 
R o>'aI Society in t80L propountlsd the theory ihni them rtiuisi be 
three types of optic nerve tibfc^ to account for the pbenoineiio of tho 
adnaiMum of coloured lighu. which Imd originiilly been observed by 
Newton. This was the ongin of the so-called trichromatic theory of 
colour visIoHh 

ISSS.—Efelmholt^ developed the maihemaitcal treatment of the 
theory [3]. and Clerk Maxwell [+] was the fir$t to conceive bow these 
principles might be applied to photography for the reproduction of the 
colours of Nature {Froc* Moy^ 1855). He said: "'This theory of 
colour may be dliisiraicd by a supposed case taken from the nirt of photo- 
gruphy. Let it be required to ascemin She colours of a lindsGapc by 
means of impressions taken on a preputation equally scn^iiivc to lay^ 
of every colour. Let a plate of red glus^ he placed before tlie canwra 
and an impression taken. Jlxc positive of this wM be tninspamnt 
wherever the red light has l>ecii abundant in the landscape and opaque 
W'bere ii has been wanting. Let it now be put in a magic lancern 
along with the red glass and a red picture will be thrown on the screen^ 
Let this opcmiion be repeated with a green and a viokt glass, and by 
means of throe magic lanterns ki Uie three imegies be superimposed on 
the screen. The colour of any point on the screen wiU then depend on 
that of the corresponding point of iht* landscape^ niul by ptoperiy adjust¬ 
ing the intensities of the Lighu, etc.» a complete copy of the laniLicape, 
as far as visible colour is concerned, will be thrown on the screen/" 
lfl6t,--ln a later leciure ax well gave a demonstration, and re- 

produced the colours of a bow of ribbon with some approximation to 
truth (Prot\ Rov. Si>c., 185?, 60, 10, 404. 484? Brit. /oum. jp/to;., 
186U8, 272). 

1862 *— The French invcnior Ducos du Kauron in 1862 described 
a ^"hSelanochronioscope ” (an optical instruinjenl for the additive ad- 
TniKiure of three primary colour intages), additive projcoUoti, the 
mosaic screen process, bipacks^ and even tripacks; thiit he anticipated 
nearly all fub^uent pn^etke. The Academic des Sciences refund 
♦ Kninvn rediiy mt '* «he iJirce-resiwiae liypmbesis." 


3 





COLOUR CINEMATOCHAFHY 


[0 allow !hc presentation of ihc paper* Indeed, it was not published 
until \m 15]. 

tfi tfj Cotdlears en PlM&grapfih^ Soluttori du ProMimf^ 
Paris* lj!E69p he describes addiiive iricolour projcciion. 

CliarEcs Cras was prior to F. E. Ives in ihc design ofctuortioscopes 
iCompt. Rt^nd.f 1879, 88* i, 121), and in a paper in Lcs Afowt/<*j (Feb¬ 
ruary 25* 1869) be discusses annlysis by successive and simiitUtnoous 
aduiixture. This is Lhe first stiggesiian which ultimately was realized in 
the motion plciurc additive colour processes. He proposed lo accocn* 
plish synthesis by persistence of vision with the aid of the phenakisto- 
scopc or the iocirope.* 

A friendly controversy between du Hauroit and Cros appeared iit 
CosfMos (July lEb9); and they both ogreed ilmt^ though wx^rkiug 
independently* they had dcdttccd the same results ffom the same 
priiKiples* Belli men described the solutions known as additive ajid 
subtractive. 

It is curious (hat Clerk Maxwell does not seem to ba\^ mentioned 
the reluiion of the subtractive colours to the faking, or auBlysiSi, 
colours. 

Among others who ad^'anced the science of three^otour pholo- 
gmphy in the nineteenth century were: 


F, £, Aw. 

A, vm HuhL 

A. 

5/f WWfam Abney, 
H. W. l^ogel 
L. Dither. 

E. Konig. 


A 1^^ AfeD^nough, 
X* J, Newiifn* 

//ottwt/ farmer, 

£. Sunger-Shepherd. 
A. y. Bail 


l897^The commercial success of black-and-white cincTtinLography* 
which was-the ouicoimi ofihe inventions of W. Friese-Greens. natuniily 
soon led (o the proposal ici make moving pictures in natuml colours. 
The earliest paiem is ihai of H. Iseii™ of BcrluHD.R.P. 9i,m, 


imiciucd bry Pbieau, A Cdnlboird dk: nerTmatcd si 
«UtaT diiiamw^jud ihc {Kripbery by vrt jlf iloH, One side of the dos b btscketwd 

iihiuOo vfhkh cencjpond m ihe niMsssin pliaKe of a movement. 
WtiCT IFm tlMe r, ^mn toiind on m a^u oniwtiie to n mirror anJ the eve umilied tn 
if« br.ekencd .We . tevd wiO, ihe «vt,U4nfi .Jit., u,e mHeeiioS tXiw 
obj^ -i-oiher eon^pondins u, lhe difTeten. attitude. 

ZtKrrupe.^A cytimfricat chamber levolvln* on a vertical »lt 

nb«n..tii«oscope t^uTi^cdoMd. uriptessMii a. ihai cuuioJ by the 

d 


HiStOftlCAL SUMMAkV 


December 17, 1897), He says: “ By means of this Invemion ilie pro|ec- 
lion images should appear to the eye of the observer lit naiurat coLours 
by means of the images hein™ projected rapidly one after the otlicr 
and in regular set)ucncc in the colours ned, groen, blue. For this purpos; 
there is placed eccentrically before the objective a disc with three 
sectors of red, green, and indigo-blue glasses. From the negatives, 
positives are made, and projected by the series apparatus. In the well- 
known analogous process for the reproduction of ooloured images, 
for insiaitpe, with Ives's* Heliochromy.' three differeTil coloured linages 
of one object are formed ut one and the same period: here dilTireni 
coloured tmagies follow in successive periods in sudicient rapidity■ 
and there is formed in the eye of the observer a moving picture in 
natural colours.” 

189H.—William Fricse-Greenc, then living in Brichton. described 
in rather vague terms an impracticable raethod by which a lens was 
divided into three sectors, or a rasaty shuller might be used (B.P. 
21,649, 189S). ]4e appears to have used a single plate and a single 
image. The rotary colour shutter was significant, but this had been 
anticipated by Isensee. A demonstration was given *l the Royal 
Photographic Society, February 27, 1900 {Brit, Jour. Phot,, March 2, 
1900). 

He woa the victim of a a<»d deal of heckling, but he snld ho wi« not i«nu«d To the 
adverse criilcism of early idcitv with regard to an invenllini which liiid been ftswivtd 
jTart aDiUrwiiids with popular approval. He nuiDted some of the remarks which 
were passed upon hit introdijctioa of oninialcd pholottrjphy, of which he wht 
adiniued to be the originator. 

Apparently, associated with W, Friese-Greene, in the same year. 
Captain William Norman Lasceites-Davidson, also of Brighton, 
patented a triple-lens motion picture camera (B.P. 23,863, 1893). 
The colour filters revolved cither behind the lenses or just in front 
of the film, or tbe diaphragms might revdve, or slide synchronously 
with the film, or with the positive in a similar projector. This camera 
anticipated the work of Frederick Marshal) Lee of Wulton and Edward 
Raymond Turner of Hounslow,* to whom is usually accorded the 
credit of achieving the first practical results in additive projection. 
Their experimental work was 8nanced by Charles Uilxio, a well- 
known impresario and showinBij of the day. Records were madie in 
a camern with a single lens equipped with Totaling flltcrs of ittd, S™"- 
and blue. Projection was attempted with three lenses vertically disposed. 


‘ F e. Irei sohJ tr™nT. Set. Mat, Pic. &ur., I 9 JS, Mo. 25 . P- 741 : TTm 
ft,A« fvmnled Hiegestimi Is llw Brillsh jwwnt of L« 4ftd Tiinwr. two >oun» nvJii 
who were cmplovwl in n.v in London, and who w.ih my eo iwni PTienwJ 

e f tc them but which I m| 4 them woi of oi we th«im^ 

Ihdn ... at ilwt H™. t comide«J li a itreM (oke wlwi iheJr paien 

riahu were oftermire* wW fw «*' " > pnslicled. the merhoU wai mu 

pniaically ' 


COliOUR ClNEMATOCItAFIIV 


ApiKjrcDily fiacli picture was prujccieJ through each of the Isijses Iti 
turn, anil three pictures always projected simultaneously (B.P. 6,202, 
1S99). This schcDic in some respecu anticipated Hillman's iwo-calour 
arfangemcftt. Tune-parallax was inevitable, and considerahlc ftinainc 
must therefore have been present. 

i^.—W. friese-Grane patented a tantem for three-colour 
additive projection. 

Iiwa,—[>r. Benjamin Jumeaux and W. N. LasecHes-Davidson de¬ 
vised three-colour projection appamtus described in B.P. 3.729 1903- 
7. [79, 1904; 27.419. 1904. 

19«?. -Otto Pfeiminger of BrlEhton (in B.P. 322, 1905) iuvcnicd a 

^ d'Juhtful practicability. Friese-Greeac's 

B. P. ^,465, 1 90S, \\*R% equ^ly hopeless. 

About this time inventors became doubtful of the possibility of 
lluce-colour additive projection, as they always cncoomcTcd rringinM 
circcjs dtic tc> spuce and lime^par^Uax. 

V *>*■ <^orsis Albert Smith. 

F.K.A.S.. Of Bnghton, who in B.P, 26,671 of 1906 patented tite method 
which everilually was commercialized as •* Kincmacolor," In this 
patent he proposes to substitute rirw evtuHfi for the three which everyone 
□d been trying to get. Alternate red and green filters were rotated in 
front of the lens. Double the usual number of pictures were taken 
-namely, 32. Smith menliotut projeciioa at 30 pictures pc? second. 
In a lecture delivered at the Royal Society of Arts (December 9, t90!l) 
he Tc^rks that two colours seem to give a ranee equal to three. He 
exhibited a harvesting scene and a yacht race. The greys were said to 
be cxccllpt. He said: "In 1902 I wjis invited by Mr. Charles Urban 
tpjissisi m a thorough trial which he was maJung, roaardlcss of reoson- 
ante expense, of a thrw-cotour process (it was probably that of Lee 

L^scellcs-Davidson also). At ihat 
lime htllcwas knownabout the possibilities of sensitizing film to red and 

^ handicapped. Ncvertfieless, in good 

sunlight wc did succeed in inking a few negatives.'' He goes on m sav 
luil supcnnipositioo was found impossible; registration was terribly 
un^m; and parallax troubles always defeated them. Simultaneous 
supmrmposti^n was first pttenipicd (Ux and Turner), then ■mccessivc 
El succcsslul up to a point, but required high speed— 

^ely. 4S pictures, or even 72 pictures, per second, which wiis entirelv 

projectors. The death of the original 
[w^tcc (Turner) put a further damper on the cnuuifv Durixm 
the Iasi four years 1 have renewed enquiry,*' said Smith •" I iLtc f\' » ^ 

.i.h Urton Bio«„pc C.n«™., 32 m 

6 


HISTORICAL St/MMAHT 


—W- Friese-Grecnc gave 4 dcmtHisimUou at ibe Royal insthu-^ 
tion, JaELuary 25. in this year E.J,Wali sug^ted imblbitton prinling and 
the subtractive synthesis as the proper soluiion lo the problem. Accord¬ 
ing lo Walh Jumcaux and Davidson were the firsi lo apply I be two- 
colour princtplc Eo ihe additive system* They are said to have e.xhibited 
in Paris in 19(W (B-P. J J29, I903>- Their system was dumonstrated by 
Capinm Lascclles-Davidson and W, Fricse'Greene at the Pboiogfaplifc 
Convention of Great Britain In Southampton, July 1906. The British 
Jpitrmi of Pfutfo^mphy, July 27, 1906, says^ 

Wc hikVc here apjrikJ 10 tht liintem pmjtsdy the «.Tnc prindplti whkh 
A Curtner of Bcmc ulJEiEKJ iit hh twinMUlour process (the WriX pfflcliaE 
bipock, iXR.P-146,149. I902j. I he ital reds are ignored, and whiht thii may be 
useful for pure landscape work, H can never ho tnna sdenlific record of colour by 
ihc aid of cinemniearaphy 

l^iT.^The BfUhtf Joitr/iitl of Phot&iiFophy of December 6, 1907. 
notes: 

Wc have had an oppt>niiniiy of seeing some resulu achi^vitd by Mr. G, A- Smith 
of the Urban Tnwllps OMTirminv, Rupert StrteL in cbcmalOEnipbj in mSours* and 
whilfti tlicre H vet room forcon^crjbteimpiiovcnKnl ibcprogreis madtif cMnfftidy 
satisfactory. weft lEale to compEire ihe cokiunt m the pLtind pooiecicd wlili 
MUM of the Jictiial accessories used, and ibe mnderiii^ of the cokMirs was strikin^y 
ammiDft, pafttrahub in ^ of il« uidnif and projecting (Uten* 

were used, on onLDgC'Hed and a blue-giw[k. the u^al third Of bluc^violet fiber bdrtg 
dispensed with. Naturally the whites obtained jtni net rmra, but haw 4 yellow- 
i%h iixi&a, ycl when projccled oa the senen wicJi brilliant colours tbis liercct Is hardly 
noticeable. The progress achieved h so fialisTiclory ihat we ans vniminicd m ^ying 
thut the proeesa shoiild bo comrrwrdally valuable m a very aiu>ft time. 

l%g,_F/jcsc-Gfcciie Pawnis Lt4, w-as formed. The ciipilal wus 
£2,400 in £1 ^bdrcs. “ To acquire rights of A. Rarr^say from G. VV, 
Chapnvan. W. Fricse-Grecne, and C J. Hairts.*' 

This sum wus perhaps ihe first mon^ iitvo$ied of iht sevenl fniiiion 
pounds which were to he invited in colour proocjises within the next 
twcnLy-five ycan^* 

In this year G. A. SniiLh i^xhihhed at Ihc Royul Society of Arts 
m December 1908 {JoiittttJ Royal Sock-iy of Arts, 1908. 57, No. 2.926). 

find in the British Journal of Photography^ March 5, 1909: 

Tbc edmiiSLon into the programme ot Wa Theaim of Variatici of ihe 

Smlih-Urban clncrrwtogrjphy pktura in naunol coloui'r marks aiinther era fn tlw 
Lipphcalkn of pholosnlplsy UJ cniertiLirimfinL The dcnirtJiwurjlioni at the Hcm.sc ot 
lha Urfioii Company* and raorc rojaiUy at the Royal Sudety of Arts, ha^c shown 
ll^ remarkable ituxesi of the method, ami the cufogies which uxhmciajts Imve 
Dosaal ution the prLwfiss ha^s becu rt^wiEcd with added emphaui hy tlw ptw and 
nu^ who have Seen the prdjoctiom fmin tlie aticUtorjunt of ihti handtoma thHirc 
m Cambridge Circui. which cipiin leads ibe way In IntrodiKing Ihc public thH 

blest triumph of the dnemntosrnph. 

Thui " Kiiwimiiolor was bunched, tho first colour process to 
be eommercbliztd. The Ir-ide name Kinomacolor wus regUlcreiJ 

7 


COLOUR C^^JEMATOORAPHY 

by C. Vxhm fNo* >33,708) by the Nacural Colour Kincmaiofliraph 
Co. Ltd., Kinemacolor Buildlne, S0-S2, Wardour Street. London, 
May E7. 19 tL 

1911.—Many will rtcall the performances which now began at 
the Scala. The Briihh Joumal a/ PhatQgraphy (April 17, t9tl) notes 
that: 

The proBmmmc oF KlnoliaColor perfonrumaM opensd cn MoiuIiiy last with 
n prniito viei* crl which Messis, Chark^ UstNih and Albert Smilh pmented a moM 
cotnprehetiilvc,.. 

and so on. There were^ U appears, 

rBrrii>Tird and tarjcntuiml soeius, topical events, portruil siudits. and a muvini 
piclufr pby, oiul growing The entenatnmera coneEtided with a speclncuiilr 

p!ay iidfiptcd From the Cemuirk of Ffaii Iditn pcrfomKcl some eight or nine jears 
iti the Apollo Theatiiff, IkrlinK The pramoten oF Kinemncolof may be MU' 
BmiulKiied on having otiginated an c^tnitia of cofnbificd inelmction bihI cTUcrtain' 
ment u'hkzh is uniime orii^ kind and diould prove ^pable of Lakiog its pLiu^among 
I he etmbhshcd AttricUons of i hw London ihmim. 

This it did, perfomuinces comirkumg tmiil 1912. There arrived the 
'itn^uliirly benulifiil film ofThe Durbar of Delhi, " which was the 
rage of London. In Pnrb it was shown at ihe Salk Peleiier* where it 
wman cquiil success. 

For some peasoTi Kincmacolor of America failed to commereialbc 
the process in the United SlaieSp and afrerwards prolonged Ihiption 
endued apparently belwccn Kinemacolor and the rival group surround^ 
ing W, Fri«e-Greene, 

Wc mij!ht note, Ln passifiE, that almost nil these pioneers were living 
m Brighton and that they were all “m their Indtvidimllsiic and several 
ways certain that they. Eiiid they alone, had Inventions worth a fortune. 
Why did they not coilaboraie? Were they mutyally eequainted? 
We shall probably nev'er know^ 

The dcfocis of the additi^'C meihod were soon obvious to all: the 
Budknee sulfercd fmm excessive eyestrain, a phenomenon always 
associated with colour admixture by persistenee of vision if the recur- 
renee is only just above ihe fikker limit of sisieerv aJtcinaiions of the 
quatiiy of tlie stimulus per second. The projcclion speed of 32 
pictures per second used for Kincmacolor necessitated a spcebl 
projector and the life of the film w-as short. 

To obviate these defects, C. N. neimcU, F,R.P,S.. proposed to lake 
the pictures.(C tteclt and Bennett. TI.P. 1,643. 1911, gnd B.P. 24.IS9. 
1912) two lit 4 time through two vertically disposed SHiwn-afT objectives! 
This ideii had been suggested for thice lenses by C. P. Chrlstcascn iii 
B.P, 7,514.1908. and by Otto PTcntiiiiger in B,?, 25,908,1906 Bennett 
alw would project through two lenses (B.P, 1.900, 1912, and B.P. 
10,639,1912). And he describes a skipping printer in B.P. 26,173,1912 

190S-35.—Wc mutt now go back for ji mnnieni to W, Friesc* 



m eikihii In jAv ScliMfCV 

Pio. 2.—Urhfln lhrDC-<*k>ur pntjcciof, I'^OD 


tjPMar 


» r 4 


Ml 


3 






FKJ 3A.—KtMmjicttbr oimcr* on I be UrbsiFSmilh 

film. ■' The Dutbor of Tk\hi, 1^11. 


I iWri S] 


I 





Frk width film with ociiitaI jxrforQtloiis, by 

Kodak. Uwd by CtiKchronic Ud. in 1921. XwoiMjkiur 
poiill%c for aililhivc pn>iectronH 








HISTOfllCAL 


Gneene Paienis Ltd, Through this courtesy of Mr. Samuel Cot^ one 
of rht pioneers of colour photography and colotrr dncmotography^ 
the following inien:»ting facts have been obtained 
U iippcsTs ihnt while G. A. Smith was working on Kincmacolor 
at Bfightoti, Friis$c<ir«nc had been expcrimcniing on two-colour 
persESiciKT of vision principles also* but insUiad of projecting tlirouj^^ 
u routing coLptir disc be stained cadi frame of a completed black-and- 
w hiie prim alEcmatcly red and greets The little staining machine with 
which he did this Ls still in Mr, Cox's collection in London, A him 
of FrijesC'Crcene^s was being exhibited ai a theatre in Brighton^ and ;i 
Mr. Lyons, who held certain Kinemaeolor righis in Brighton^ persuaded 
Kinemacolor to bring an action against the Fri^c-Greene theatre 
TO prevent the showing of ihe piciurt. F- S. Edge, a well-known 
racing car expen, financed the Fricse-Greene defence. KincTnacotpr 
lost the action and appealed* winning their □ppeaJ, The ca-je wus then 
carried to the House of Lotxis, anti the judgment reversed in favour 
of Friese-Greene. This litigution ruined Kinemacolor fi-nsincinlly* 
When. Friesc-Greenc Patents Ltd. was formed m t90S* the negative 
was taken by exposure of 32 pictures per second successively through 
red and green filters {Kinemacolor tjsed the same type of camera, 
which was made for G. A. Smith hy Darling of BrightonJ. Fmding 
that rringing was experienced, CoUn Bermett made his proposals 
for a method whereby the two pictures were to be taken simuttuneously 
through two Lenses {sawn-olT). CoUn Bennett Ltd. w'as formed in 
1911 to take over from Fricsc-Grccne Patents Ltd, Sir William 
Hanley had assisted financbliy in the earlier company* and it was 
his finance which was behind the nciv company. Various defects 
were then discovered* and Cincchrome Ltd. formed in 1914 a 
TocoiistniCtton of Colin Bennett Lid* Cmechrome Ltd* procoKied to 
develop the patents of F. Twyman, F.B S- (of Adam HiJger Ltd.j^ 
J. S. Higham (son-in-luw of Sir W^Uiiam HanbyL and IL Workman 
(ILF. 7*659. 1915: B.P. LW2. 1915: Twyman s B.P. iS,6lU 1915; 
and li.R 16,BIO, 1915), .Attempts were made in these patents to solve 
the panithtx problems which hnd arisen in connceiion with Beek 
and Bennett's B.P, 24,159. ]9I2. The new GinechrOfne beam-sphtler 
had two lenses which were placed bt^iund the prism divider* whereas 
Colin Bennett had tried lO develop on the lines of division into two 
beams behind a smsic objeeti^o. Atiempti. w^ce also made at this 
lime TO take thr<?e pictures, one beneath the oiher, on a single noimnl 
film. The rweturcs were spaced with two fnimcs between &ich pieiiire. 
An ckbonitc triple projector was also tried* 

r-nam this period until !921 pictures were taken side by side, fuJI- 
si/c* on double-width film* the {ihn not only being perforated on the 
edges but nUo down the centre between the pairs of imagers. This 
film was made by Kodtik (Fig- 4). 


9 


CatOtfR ClKEHMOOR,^PBy 

In 1921 Mr S. J, Cox \vtrki lo India to phoTOgraph ihe visit of the 
Duke of Windsor^ then Prince of Wales. The pictu-m taken on 
the wide film referred to* The film was exhibited at the Roy^l Society 
of Arts in 1922^ a special projector with a wide gate being employed. 
It was later shown at the Stoll Picture Theatre, London. Mr. 
Daponle, one of the ptincipal patentees of Cinecolor, exhibited in 
France for the benefit of the Red Cross, and the French Government 
were so impressed tliat they formed the Syndicai de Propapnde 
Nationale par le Film cn Coulenrs Naiurelles* with a list of presidents 
and vice-presidents of formidable dimensions. 

The wide fdm was rejected in 1925, and a now bemn’-splkter adopted 
based on patents of D. Dapontc and also of Adam Hilger Lid. (see 

Beam-Splitlcr Cameras}. The pictures 
were now turned sideways in i^iis on 
55-mm. film, each pair occupying the 
space of one frame* These piciare$ 
required a rather elaborate optical 
projection unit lo erect ihe images. To 
exploit the new patent sittiaiion there 
was now formed, in 1929. Gnecolor 
Ltd- (After the decease of Sir Willbm 
Hartley the business had been taken over 
by S- J- Cox and D- Daponlc.) Tlic 
Cnaneial backing for Cinecoior was 
supplied by Sir P. Malcolm Stewart 
(Chairman of British Portland Cement 
Manufacturers Ltd.)* Subsequently, a 
holding eompanyi Chromes Ltd. (in- 
corpomted tn Canada), wis formed, 
and Sir P. Malcolm Stuwnrt and Cine- 
color Ltd- vested in thb company their 
full righu in the group of patents 
CDvefing this a^ttivTc process. Dufay-Chromex Ltd. in 1937 mcrgpd 
the CinccoloT rights with Lhe parent Dufaycolor mterests. 

Thus we see that this most highly developed of the addilive processes 
relates back step by step to iltc founder of the motion pkture. W. 
Friese*CfeeneK 

Societe EtablissementsGaumont paiertred a triple-lens system 
(B.P. 3,22a, 1912). Some pictures were projected in London {at the 
Coliseum?), but serious paraUax wtis the cause of very aoticeablc 
fringing. Gaomonlcobrwas fim shown in Paris, April 4* 1913, 
the programme including Bouquets of Flowers—Life in the Country— 
Trip to the C6re d‘Azur—Carnivai at Nice—FashioHi-M qJotcu 
I n June it was shown in Ne w York at Ihc 39tti Si. Thealre, and aciimlSy 
included synchronized sound from gramophone records. Three 
10 




dAUl>tOHTCDLaR 


- — TKII. lU ^ 

1 # ieiw m m hM 

th-Ll 14 MiOiiiwHtt 

CNRtOMOCNROnE 
f;- 4^(J^lOMT V- 


-.1-^. mi 



1-Ki. 5. 










HlSTORtCAL SUMVlAltV 


fraincs wcfic tccorided one abo^H: the oilier ffoni tbree vertically super* 
poiied lenses. Each frame wji$^ H mm. high (3 perforations). The pro¬ 
jection optical system was similar. EleclricaJ remote control of regis- 
IrtttiOR was atlemplod. 

By now moRt experimenters hod retUbted that additive projection 
presented immunise difficulties. Ever as far back ns 1906 H, J. Wall 
bad said: “ However idealistic tbe suggesUon is. this is what we wunt— 
a leogtli of cincmatogniph ftltn, each piciure in which shall be a iccotd 
of the movement at the instant of exposure and at the same time in 
itself a complete colour record.” Wall himself cxpctimented with a 
dichromated gohuine process in 191hut without much success. 

The first suggestion of double^iooied film tor two-colour subtractive 
priming is by E. Levy <D.R.P. 238.M-1* 1910). but nothing was done 
commermally until A. Hcnuindcji-Mejia announced the details of 
hi* process from the United Stau* iU.S,P. 1,174.144. 1913) (see 
flrrf, Journ, Ptioi., 1912, 59. 805), He HaxUed his process “ Cinscolor- 
graph.” " The amount of emulsion on boih sides of the film is no 
greater than the amount now used on one side only (see .Vth' 

P(cturft, 12, October 5, 1912). 

This vviis followod by Iwa-colour processes by Ives, W. van D. 
Kelley.'William Francis Fox, and John E, ThomtOn. 

The bipnek method of obtaining two-colour nc^iivos is tntceuble 
again to Ducos du Hauron (F.P. 250.862. 1895) and A. Gurtner 
(l).P. 7,924. 190.3). One of the first to apply the bipack system to cine¬ 
matography seems to have been P. D. Brewster (B.P. 2.465. 1915, 
and U.S.P. 1,322,925, 1917). He was also the first to use registering 
pins in cameras and projectors (U.S.P. 1,359.024, 1920). 

C. H. Friesc-Grecite expenmented with a two-colour additive 
process fB.P. 233,129) [Phot. Joum^ 1924, 64. 397). A colour dUc was 
used in the camera carrying a red filter only, the aUcriuiiive Frame 
being exposod without a Biter (suggested previously by Kelley). Contact 
positives were printed and stained successively red and btue-grwn. 
Projection was at normal speed. Visual fatigue due to colour botnbard- 
menl was excessive. The process was based upon the patents of 
C. H. Fricse-Greene's falber, the pioneer W, Friese-Greenc. A company 
called Colour Photography Ltd. was formed (B.P. 4.774, 1912), 

19J5,_Tt,e originnl ” Kodaehronic ” process was the invention of 
J, o/Capstaft’ of Kodak Research l,al>s>ralories (B.P. 13.429, 1915). 
The ncffiiivcs were lakon by a beam-spUtler caroem. Positive pnnls 
were made, and from these neptiw Linages were printed in register 
ofi double-coiciicd film. The Liiagcs wen? bleached, the bath hard?nm^ 
ihc films on1> in ihc purls where the imitgc had been. The twti stde^ 
ihcn dyed in ibe lisual two coIwuiSp naiMly red-amitge and b!oe- 
gireen, the dyes ctitcring the emulsion only in ibe untmfdened arraSi 
thus giving positive ittiagea. The *ilvt:r wto finally emir^ly amoved. 


Ct^UOUK CINJ; VtAlOLiKfcPHY 

l9lS-4$.—[his period ihc natne “ Technicolor” first appears. 
The Technicolor Motion Picture Corporation had its origin iit a Him 
of UostOTi cn^ne&rs: Dr. Herbert Katmus, Daniel Frost Comstock, 
and W. B, ^^c3tcoti. Apparently the^ were assisted by E. J. Wall, 
F.K.P.S., in their curly work. They began by ntictnpling a two-colour 
additive process based on the patents of W'estcott and Comstock. 
{U.S.P. 1.231,7101. Comstock patented a prism divider behind the 
ohjeciive. Two images wiere obtained with two unejtposed frames 
between them. The Him was pulled down two pictures at a time. 
The rUm was projected by means of a special lens, registration being 
cfTocicd by two movable plane fntrallcl plates between the film and 
the projection tenses. 

The first film made by this additive process was ” The Gulf Between,'* 
with Grace Darmond and Niles Welch playing the leads I l9i7), Tiic 
manifolLt troublt^ of additive proieeitoo were soon discovered. Dr, 
Kalmus has ssidt “ 1 concluded that the operator would have lo be a 
cross between an acrohat and a professor." At this periud, the Techni* 
color laboratory was housed in a railroad car, which contained com¬ 
plete processing equipment (Fig. 6), 

William Travers Jerotne, the well-known American lawyer, assisted 
with ftnantx in the early stages f 1920). The nddiii^t method was then 
abandoned. Prints were made froin the negatives inker by the above- 
described beam-splitter. A skipping contact step-by-siep printer 
separated the two components and thus two continuous positive prints 
were exi meted from the negative bearing the alternate two-colour 
separations. The positives were now developed in a tanning developer 
and reliers formed. The two reliefs were dyed and finally the. two films 
bearing the dyed Tcliefs were cemented together back to back (B.P. 
209,404, 1923), This idea Imd been suggested earlier by A, R, Lawshe 
(B,P. 131,319, 1916). 

A small laboratory or pilot plant was built in the basement of the 
building occupied by the Technicolor engineers. Kalmtis, Comstock 
Sc. Wcstcoti Ine., on Brookiine Avenue, Boston, Mass (1919). The first 
Technicolor subtractive film was " The Toll of the Sea," supervued by 
Mr. Joseph Sclicnck: Chester Franklin, director; Anna Mjv Wong, 
lead; and J. A. Ball, camerainan. later the outstanding creative engineer 
of Technicolor. This film was first shown at the Rialto Theatre. New 
York, November 26 . 1922. The picture grossed more iban $ 250 , 000 , 
of which Technicolor received 1150,000. The cemented prints rasi 
27 cents per fool! .Another plant was built in Boston and a sttidU 
Ittboralory in Hollywood. Technicolor und Famous Players Lasky 
Corporation next made ** Tlie Wanderer of the Wasielund” Prints 
were supplied at 15 cents per font. Both pictures were exteriors, Y irst 
anificial light photography was earned out in “ Cythena ” (1924), 
to the fall of the same year Mctro-Goldwvn-Mayer made " Ben Hur " 
12 




Fk>. fc^TKimicoksf Ubcirawrk^. 
\ Ifl 

B- in EnH&nd. 

4b0ve- Roilvta^y air 


#, ill 









I 



Fk-. 7-— Tochjik'tNklT Buih Roikti 

H^rmondAwonhi West Droylon, MkWJtwjf (Sec jj-16.) 


^ ih 




NtSTORICAL 


" The Black Pirate ” was made. This film produced by Douglai 
FaiTbanks m 1925, and at that date it was the best iwo-cotupr film 
which had been so far made. 

Dr. Kalmus has said: *' So far as audience reaction. Press reviews, 
and boK-officc were ccncemed it was a triumph from the i^rt. but for 
the Technicolor Company it was a terrible headache.” Prior to I92<t, 
more than $2,500,000 had been spent without very eucouragmg 
financial results. 

In 1926 Technicolor went into production and made a number of 
shorts, dislribtjted by Metro. Of these Dr, Kfllmus remarks: In 
toy opinion Technicolor would not have survived without the experi" 
cnoe of ibis scries of short subjects " [6]. ^ 

Technicolor made llicir Iasi silent feature in 1929,' The Vjkjug, 

It cost $350,000. Metro reimbursed its cost. 

In 192S the printing method was changed to an imbibition process 
(B.P, 307.659, 1928), sisgreat trouble had btenespcrienced from curling 
of the film in the projector, which gave rise to focus variation. 
imbibition process was successfully working in l929fU.S.P. 1,919,6731. 
During this and the following year the following films were miJe: '* On 
with (he Show,” the fiTsl all talking Technicolor feature, " The Cold- 
Diggers of Broadway." " The Mystery of the Wax Museum, and 
many short films. Though these were admirable two-colour fitms. the 
audiences complained oflack of definition and consequent eyeslnim. 

in November 1929 Dr. Kaltnus was reported .is coming to London 
to discuss construction of a processing plant. At this date the Dully 
Film Senter of London commented: ” Stniugs ihiii Mr, Maunce 
Elvey is at present in New York negotiating with American oompiirnes 
to cSccl a deal in Raycol *' (see page 265), At the wme date Mr. Kay 
Elumson of Gcrrard Industries Limited claimed ihul On^lor (sec 
page 27T) w'as" the only process of purely British origin which had been 
dcreloped." This was the Mr. Harrison who was subsequently to 
become the managing director of Technicolor Lid. Cm^toi' Ltd, 
had been registered in August 1929. with a nommal capiml offl.OSO, 
However, the Technicolor fabomtory had ui wait unit! 1935. 

Jn [>:ccintrr Df- Katmus satd ihni there were Iheu ihmy- 
four Technicolor catnems in Hollywood and fourtren fealtirei in 
production. He said that in 1928 the U.S. plant hud a capacity of 
I"* 000 000 ft P<tr annum. For the coming year cotiiiacts trquii^ 
ifiria'Vi(lQ3 ft the ll-S. alone. PcrliajK with an eye oh OncColor 
S a nounred: " You can be ossurrxl ^^Uivcly of the 
venes! of any additive process to get anywhere ever. He 
estimated that the British plant would cost £100,000 and ij recorded to 
have said " We have b«n perfecting our process for iwdre years, and 
I that the only future for colour lies in a process which can 

comply wllh 


COLOUR ClNEMATOCRArHY 

t. tl mast not inquire very much more tight in the studio or in 
projection than ordinaiy monochrome. Technicolor in pm- 
jeclion nciufllly requires less, 

3. Jt must not require special projection equipment or modification 

of existing projection machines. 

3 . l i must be capable of a three^olour process. 

4. It must be reasonably cheap." 

He concluded by telling the Press that Technicolor owned eighty 
world pat«its and that the capital appmached twenty-five million 
dollars. 

in 1930 the Warners said that they were ** going orer 100 per cent, 
to Technicolor.” They were to make '* Song of the West/’ ’* Under a 
Texas Moon,” *' Hold Everything/’ and ’* Golden Dawn.” On 
lanuaty 22, Knlmus said: ” Within two years the blacic-nnd-white 
motion picture will be as out of date as die silent picture is today 
a prediction which w'as not to he rcallred. In February he said that 
the sixth Technicolor laboratory would cost a million dollars and that 
their ret earnings for the year would be a million dollars. Whtit a 
comcnient sura this *’ million dollari” is to tite film industry! For 
example, in February 1930 the Daiiy Film Renier said: " Fox is 
spending a million dollars on a laboratory being buili at the Westcni 
.4renijc Studios. It will be used exclusively For ilic Fox ’ Nature 
Color Process.*” Poor Nature! Poor colour! Always a million duHurs. 
!t WAS also Slated that the experimental work had cost a milhon doHam. 

In March 1930 Finst Natfoniii claimed that they were the first 
to truike an uU-talking exterior colour film. *' Heart of the North.” 
During the same Tuonth Mack Scmieit claimed to hare invented a new 
colour process. One i$ curious to know whnt that process was. 

Technioolor now adopted a beam-spliltef camera (.B.P. 398,339. 
1932) of the type In which two films are exposed iit iivo gates at right- 
angles to each other, the beam from a single objective being split 
by the scmi-reflccting diagonal of a prism cube, the ctfkcting face 
being placed at 45' to the axis of the beam. The prism block consists 
of two 45 ' prisms cemented together to fonn a cube. This idea probably 
originated in J. W. Bennenn’s B.P. 28.920, 1897, known ns the *' Semi- 
dialyte " system. With such a camera three-colour negatives arc 
obtained by exposing bipack in one gate and a single film in lie other. 
The imbibition process was now changed to three printings, and later a 
1‘ounh key printing in black was Mddcd. In spite of these adsiuices, 
great difficulty was experienced in getting support from the industry! 
Ultimaifily Walt Disney adopted Hirse-colour for bis ” Silly Symphon¬ 
ies/' 1933, and the firal filte, ” Rowere and Trees.” was a great and 
immediate success. This was fallowed by *' Santa’s Work Shoo ” 
and the famous “ Three Little Pigs.” 

14 


HISTORCCAI. SUMMARV 


llic AmcriviUi lituiUiCi^r Julm Ilay Wbitney became interested at 
thja stage, and he formed a prudtiction company known a$ t^oneer 
Films exclusively for the taalting of films in Technicolor A contract 
was signed between Technicolor and Pioneer Pictutes Jnc. on May 
IS, (933, whicH provided for the production of eight pictures. Positive 
priming for 1953 was doable that of 1932. The number of cameras 
was increased from three to seven. The first complete picture was a 
delightful little film called *' La Cucamcha,” 1935. The production 
of this film marked an important luming-poLnt in the history of the 
colour film, as it was the first conuncTciahy successful three-colour 
picture. It was followed by a sequence Lntrodijeed into the Twentieth 
Century-Fox film ** The House of Rothschild,” and by the closutg 
se<}tience in the Cantor picture ** Kid Millions.” Later ” Becky 
Sharp ’* was made by Pioneer Films, their first full-length three-colour 
film. This film created tnimensc controversy in the film industry nil 
over the world (London, July 11. 1935). 

Of this film Sam Goldwyn remarked; ” It contaius the most marvcl- 
Jtiua colour 1 have ever seen, it may do n great deal to show whether or 
not films in the future are to be 100 per octiL colour.” ” Becky 
Sharp ” was directed by Rouben Mamoulian, and the art director 
was Robert Edmund Jones, a well-known New York stage designer. 
It was first shown at Radio City Music Hall. The Cinetm said; "* The 
whole film world recogiu£cs in * Becky Sharp ’ exueily the samo test 
for colour that ‘ The Jazz. Singer' was for sound. Public reaction 
to Ihis film will decide the future of the screen as colour or black and 
white.” Today, in 1949, the controversy is by no means deeided [12J. 

This year also saw the prodviction of ” Trail of the Lonesome 
Pine '■ and ” Dancing Pirate.” 

tn 1935 Dr. Kalnvus announced a cross-licensing patent urraogemeDl 
with Kodak, and forecast ihe possibility of soon adopting a multi-layer 
single original coloured master po.sitive film for taking titc picture, 
the feasibility of this being clearly indicated by the advent of the new 
Kodachromc process. Several years were to pass before this method wiis 
adopted, tt cannot be said that so far results have been obtained w'hkh 
compare with Technicolor prints derived from beam-splitter negatives. 

Leonard Smith, A.S.C.. was the first director of photography to use 
Technicolor monopack oa a major studio production—shooting the 
exteriors for MGM*s * Lassie Come Home " in 1942, while the 
interiors were made on the usual three strip negative. Monopack waa 
improved, and its speed increased, to the point tlmi it was used entirely 
for both interiors and exteriors on the 20th Century-Fox production of 
” Ttiundcrhead ” in 1944: with Charia G. Clarke, A Ji.C.. as director 
of phoiography. For the past several years, monopack has been in¬ 
creasingly used on productions for ult or part of the camciti record 
[ 17 ]. 


15 


CuLuilM criNUMA lUCiMArHy 


In \^35 there was formed In England a cmiipany nnder the name 
of TccbnJcolor Ltd. with a share capital of 020,000, owned oquallj 
by the American Technicolor Motion Picture Corporation, The 
capital was subscribed m England, the imcresied parlies being London 
Film PtcKluciions Lid*, Garrard Industries Ltd., and certain oilicrs^ 
including the Prudential Assurance Company^ The AmeKcan parent 
concctn acquired 50 per cent, of the stock, approximately^ in reiurn 
for I he pa lent rights, secret processes, and so Jortb, A magnt^ni 
Ihboniiory ifras built at hiurmondsworth* Middlesex, and is now ser¬ 
vicing all Uritish produettons in T^hnicolor and prims of Amoricaii 
colour produetlans for British distribution (Rg- 7). The first Techni¬ 
color Eiiglish feaiure was“ Wings of the Morning/* Ollier early pro¬ 
ductions tt-cre “The Divorce of Lady X/* ''The Dnim/" “ Sixty 
Glarious Years ” <produced by Herbert Wilcox), and Tlic Four 
Feathers fa Korda fllm)p 

BciW'cen 1926 and 19J9 oiJber feature-kngth Tocfiiucolor producliDiis 
were: 


**A Star u Bojjh/' Imal Ciaynor amJ Piederk Marth ^Selrtikk fmcTnalinnul 

Garden of Allah," M:irletn^ Dietrich iPionoer PiclitrtSl 
Goil'i Country antt the Wrutun(Warner Bum.) (t936). 

" Rumopifl (Twenfiffh CcrtHiry-Fo* ProduclkrnsMI^m 
'' Bbb TMe " (Puramoimt) (193^}. 

** Cold H Where You Find Li (Warner BroiJ 11^37). 

I^Coklwj'n^s Follfci ' (Samuel Goldwin Paiures lfM:,>(l937>. 

^ Her Love'' IParaniountp 

" Noihing Sacred (!^rtiick fnicriieiional Picutres) tl937>. 

** Voffuci of I93S ** (Wallet Wan^f Pn^tieiiuiu) (I9J7>. 

“ Snow While end ihe Sei.xn DwaHa/^ Watl Dtsocy <R.K.O. fEtcuttiej t t9|7j, 
**Toin Saw>cr" (Setr.iiii;k InlerruitJonal Pl^-Eurea) (I937J, 

*' Corocatkin Film " 

Men WirifiFt" (T^nimounlJ (l93Sh 

Ad^vritiires of Rohio Hood " {Wmiier Brm ) (19311. 

** Vrtiky of the Cwiua " (l93Si. 

** Hetiri of the Nurih CI93?)^ 

** JmC iHTTtK " 

" Kentucky” 

” Sweethearlx ” (1938). 

” Lmie Prjisertv'" (1938). 

WiianJ orOi"'(f93S). 

"Dod«caty*NI9J8L 
■' Cone with the Wind ” (I9|9). 

The number of subsequeni Amedcan productions rutii into hundreds. 
British feature-lcDeih Technicolor rtims from 1937 to 1947 vvne: 

'* Wines of the ** (New Wofid) (1957). 

'' Viaortft the Creai " fparT colour only) (tnipQr[iEOrHl927l. 

*■ Claudius " i^Tf compTclcd) (Korda) < J937) 

Pn^iacd " fTraralrarHI937K 

Divnioe of Lady X " (D^lutri Films) fi 938). 

The Drum: ” {London FiEmt) rt93S>. 

'* Sixty Cli?ijDU)i ftmncrnior) 

The Mikado " (a ^ SJ (1939). 

Four Ffejthetn'^ (Lendofl Filnixl 11919). 

16 


N 1 $n)|tlCAL 


** Osxr ftie Moon " Itondon fUms) (1939). 

'* Sons of iho Sea '* {Bnlish Coasoliilaied) (( 940 ). 

Tluefaf aagiljtd ** (Konk)(|94!), 

" The Cnai Mr. Himdct ” tC.M.WJ (J943). 

Qu«n Victoria " (coni|ia»itc rtissuc) (tiTipcniti>r>{1942>. 

“ The Life and Deaih of Colonel Blimp ” (Archcra) 1J943). 

” This Mappj Braal “ (T*o Cilics) <mJ). 

■■ Kifli! Kerry V 

■■ Western Aroroacbes " {I943>. 

Blithe Spint ''(1M4). 

“ Ctaar and aeopaita " 

■' Men of Two Woricti " (19461, 

" Londou town “ (1946}. 

“ A Matter of Ltlb and Death " (1946). 

“ Uii«h(n« U({y ’ 11946). 

’* The Man Wlihin ” (1947). 

" filaclt NarcBam *' {1947}, 

Bonnie Ptinoe Cbariie ” (1947), 

“ Son of Lapland '* (1947). 

RjedShoH" (J947). 

Scoil of the Antarciie " (1947), 

'■ Santbond for Dead Lovers(1947). 

" An Ideal Husband " IIW). 

'■ Uliuichc Fury " (I947>, 

** Jassy'* (1947), 

•• XtVth Olympiad—The Glory of Sport " II94S). 

TechnicoJor delivered ifec enonnotis total of 165,027,297 feet of 
positive colour prints in 1946, covering 33 American and S British 
productions in addition to many cartoons nnd short subjects. During 
1947 this figure was surpassed and the capacity has now been increased 
to handle 300,000,000 ft. per annum.’ 

1910-34.—One of the outstanding ligurea of (his period was William 
van Dorea Kelley (1876-1934), Ip 1913 he formed a company called 
Panchromotion for the development of an additive colour pro^s 
somewhat similar to Kincmacolor. in ord-cr to minimiie colour fring¬ 
ing hfi irKreased (he number of pictures taken per second. He attempted 
three-colour additive projection by successive projection. During this 
period a douhlc-coatcd stock and a blench formuln. which hnd mijcli 
to do with the later Priema process, were perfected. Somewhat 
Inter Pritma Inc. was fomted, with suflkient capital to undertake 
regular production. The fun Prizma film was ** Our Navy,” released 
in 1917 at the 44ih Street Theatre. New York City. The colour was 
produced by an additive process using a colour disc on the projector, 

KcUey was not saiisfied with the additive system and believed 
that colour could be applied directly (o the film. In order lo cany out 
this Idea be entered inlo parincisbip with Carroll H. Dunning and 
Wilson Salisbury, and a laboratory was opened at 203, West 40th 
Street under the name of " KcsdacoJor.'' Their first film made by 
the subtractive process was a picture of the American flag. In a length 
of 50 ft, it was shown at the Roxy and Rialto, New York, on Septem- 

’ la (940 Uk output wsi opprOMtiuilcly BO.OOO.OOl) fee*. In 1941 il vru 97,014.757 
feet, ftij I Ik pifitli wa» T. or one ilaltar per luuidMa-fooi run. 


rOiOUR CrNEMATOGRAFlIY 

tier E2, I9l4f. Shortly after the Auccess of ihb ^howing^ Kdli^y returned 
10 ihe Pnzma Company, ii^hich rrorgarnsred, Lon^r filim tvcrc 
undertnkcii, mid in 19\9 a ^ngk-rei:! IniYtl subject wa* ^ubtr^tdively 
coluurtd. J, Stuiirt Black ion of Vlingnipli taw this psciuitr and was so 
impressed that he decided to make a fen lute-length picture in Priimu, 
" The Glorious Advemure " was made at the Slo!! Studios, Crickle- 
wood, London, with Lady Piatta Matiiiers in the principal part. Some 
i:] 50,000 was spcnl on this prcniuction and The Virgin QueeiL *^ wkh^ 
oui much success being obtained. The nepdvc seems to have been sem 
to America for processing, Frizma charged 25 cents a foot for pnnts. 

In Ketley produced n series of coloured cartoonJi which were 
drawn by Pitilo Colvig, In 1924 he inlroduced “ KdJeycolor/’ which 
WTii an imbibition process. Two coloim were imbibed on a black- 
and-white key image. In 1926 he became ussoclnled with Haild' 
scheigi in the formailoii of the KcUcycolor Company, which 
bought by Harriseolor in I92S. In 1929 Kelley started eitpcrimonting 
with bipack^ and at the end of fiis life he was expcruneatjiig with mcihods 
for oemeniing bipack emulsion xo cmiilSLOn. 

KcUcy was an mteresting and importani figure in the early days of 
colour emematography. He ootnbined the work of Friesc-Gtecncp 
Hcrnundeiz-Mejiu^ and others. Prizma patent riEhU were subsequently 
ucquired by Magnacolor^ which w^as operated by Consolidated Fitni 
Industries Inc. At oae lime it was abo siaied that Vitacolor had 
taken over the Priiima patent rights. Today Consolidated Film Indus¬ 
tries is using Tiucolor/ whose sponsors can therefore claiin an unbroken 
descent Erom Kelly, 

1922*—The late Aron Hamburger, mt Attierietin chemist who 
resided in England, paicnlrd a dyc-toning pfocess which ultimatdy 
became known as the Puljthromidc ’’ process |F„P- 203,358, 1922). 
Tlie negatives w^cre taken in a beam-spliller camera which m many 
respects {intictpatcd the Techtiicolor camera. TTie positive film wm 
double coated. A very lightly ertposed and developed print wns dyed 
by a coating inHchine with mixtures of basic dyes. On one side the film 
wns dyed with ma^nta and aura mine mbEed, and on the other with 
malaclittc green and a basic blue mixed. The film entered a chromic 
add mordanling hath to dyeing, which uas an Interesting 

innovation. Later an iodide mordanUng b^th^ was used In place of 
chromic acid. Tlic process was commercially worked in London 
for many years* the plant and machinery bcimz cvenivmliy dispersed 
and sold in 1937, 

1920-9,—T. A. Milh. was the inventor of a process known as*‘ Hoe- 
chrome " (B.P, 172,714+ 1920). One full frame w^as succeeded by three 
small piciures occupying the space of a normal rrame. All four pictures 
were exposed at the same time. TIsc three small piciurK were exposed 

' B P. t26i>T9. * The tmimh was out bj ihsr writer in 1^34. 

IS 


mSTDlttCAL SUMMARY 


through tricolour filters, while the large pictun: was a oomial pan¬ 
chromatic record. The black-and-wbil* negative was taken with an 
/}15, 3-in, lens, while the small negaU^tss were made wilb three 
Censes of about>T4 0 aiul of shorter focus, bundled wscihcr to reduce 
parelUiA, and placed imnicdiately below the main lens. All four lenses 
wore mounted together for focusing. In printing, the altoimto full 
images of the negative were printed in succession; the positive 
developed as usual, varnished, and then KViMted with futuhitut. One 
of the small images was printed by enlurgeinttnl in register with »lw full- 
sized image, developed, and dye-WnetL The film was again v.-imishcd 
and recoated with emulstOD, and the cycle of operations was repeated 
for the two remaining colours. Tlili process is no longer being worked 
cornmereially. 

19211-35.—.A company was fornicd in England to exploit an additive 
process known as “ RajxoL” In July 1929 Muurico Elvey announced 
demonstrations of the process at studios and laboratories at 10, Great 
Hurl Street, London. He quoted patent agent’s report and counsel's 
opinion as to the novelty of patent applications. In September, sis 
films In Raycol to be made by British International were announced. 
Nothing was done, however. A subsidiary CiilJcd Talking and Sound 
Films Ltd. was formed, but the scheme whs dropped, as Elvey 
said A ^uflident number of production comjianlcs were already in 
negutiaiion. In 1930 ElvTiy said that he would make ” licvcn features, 
including the life of Shakespeare.” AUts! a great deal of money was 
invested by the public, but compariiiively little pregnss was mude 
towards adequate commerdaitzation- In 1933 ” Tlie Skipper of the 
Osprey." by W. W, Jacobs, was filmed in London by the Ruyeot 
carnet Additive projection was required, and when the film was 
distributed all the ptacticai difficulties of this method soon stood re¬ 
vealed. Mechanics had to follow the fUm about in order to ensure 
that the projection lens was correctly adjusted, and telegrams were 
often received by the distributors informing thcin thui the projectionist 
could not get the pictures into regisiratiqn. However, when perfectly 
projected, much of llw colour of” The Skipper of llic Osprey " vna 
comparable to anything which bad b«n shown up to that date. In 
!933 the writer usnstod Ihc JLiyCOl British Corporation in the design Of 
an iinti-paradox prism objceiivc syiietn. t'p to that lime the Raycot 
optical system had exhihited serious parallax errors (E.P, 39K. tOO. 1933). 

TIjc Raycol British Corporal ion was wound up some years ago, 
thus supporting Dr. Kalmus's views on additire processes, which 
neverthetess periodically reuppcsir with ulmos! tidal frequency. In 
this region conlidcncc tricksters .>(bound. 

I9M^35.—R. Hcithon was the original patcfitco of an important 
invention now calletl the *■ Icniicular " proocss (B.P. 10,611, 1909). 
In assoctaiion with A. Kclter-Dorian (B P 24,698, I914), methods 

19 


COtOV^ CtKEMi^TOGRAPKV 

were paKnLed for embossuig films with eytiadrka]^ or other type, 
refracting elctneais, Thi^ process was exhibited m ParU in 1923. 
being then known as the Kcllcr-Dorian'BcTthoa process. The method 
was successfidJy comitierclallzed for 16-nim. film by Eastman Kodak 
in 192& nrider \ht name “ Kodacolor/’ the rights having been pur¬ 
chased ia J 925. 

In England a great deal of public monej' was iiivested in the Benhon- 
Kdlcr-Dorian patents: but problems of copying uliimaEcly prevented 
any practical application of the lentbculaT process to the commercial 
rnotian picture. Jn America the KeUer-Dorian Color Rim Corpom- 
tion experimented for some years without solving the probably in- 
surtuounLable optical problems. Lenticular film is an ouisiauding 
instance of a riKlhod which at the beginning was capable of providing 
results of an attractive nature^ but which nevertheless contaiited 
certain inherent weaknesses which its proRioters refu^ to reeognbe. 
It is said that at least ten million fr^cs have been expended upon 
re^rch in France, about 050,000 was invested in En^nd. arid a 
very large sum has been spcni in the United States. Other modih- 
caiicDS of thi: lenticular process were for a time exploiiedby the KLsIyn 
Corporation in America, and by various companies in France and 
Germany fsee descript ion of Agfacolor kmicular film, page 321). 

1925-35,—Originating in ihe Dufay Dioptochrome ” plate, ihc 
DufaycoLor mosaie him has so far b^n the only successful attempt 
to apply the rnicro-colour-screcn mclhod to motion piciiire film. The 
Dioptochrome plate was made under the patents of Loub Dufay^ a 
French photographer, and his screen plates vvene on the market from 
1910 to 19 I7 h From 1925 onwartb a very large number of paietiis were 
granted for various aspects of what was then known as the Spker- 
Dufay^ process, A great deal of money wm spent by Spicers Ltd., 
Uio well-known paper manufaclurers, on perfeciing this proccK. The 
technical work in Eaglund was under ihe supervision of T. Thome 
Baker, F.R.F.S., who with Louis Dufay and Charles Bonamico had 
carried out ali the earlier r^rseaich previous to the Spicer period. 
Baker has recounted that scycm! thousand of negative were 
made in the south of France on S-iine (per mm.) and prints 

from these were shown at the Pavilion Theatre* London, in 192S, 
but the \ms of nssoUing power must hav’C been excessive. 

In 1937 the various interests of the Spicers, IMbrd* and others were 
merged with the mtenests of Sir Malcolm Stewart, Mr. D. Daponte, 

^ Spkcr-Dufqy Lid. iitcorronucd fn ynd ifie name changed to 
DuCaycolw Dd. in 19J3, ifie capital bdiijg £21^.000 Jn S.\ The i^pital was 

iiicrei$ed in. to £630.000. K. E. Lamhton and SpJoen Lid, assigned to 
DuraycoloT Ud.. and aj> iuteesl in Uie Spiecr'Dafay patenu i&sjigaed to 
Cotenooe Holdings. Hd, In 1934 F. S. Coitori was managing diroctor, and a 
dirtctsjf of Urord Lid. (the hue Mojch' Mclii) wii <m the Beard. Colmoiic 
Holdings un4 C^ttoo hteld beiv^rcn ihern a conirolling latnx£t 

20 




and others Sn theCinecolor proows (not to he confused with the American 
process), and u large public company ^\'bs formed under the name of 
Dufay-Chromex Ltd. Prior to 1939 the United States market w'as 
handled by Dufaycolor Company Inc. This company hits since ceased 
to opemte, largely owing to the poor exploitation of the mo lion picture 
possibilities in America. 

In 1931 the fiist satisfactory hims were exhihUed in England, but 
ul this period the problem of copying the original film (a coloured 
reversed positive) had not been salisfactorijy solved. In 1934 Ilford 
Ltd, aciiuited the control of the British Empire righia. and during 
this year they placed on the marjeet Ifi- mm, glm which received an 
enthusiastic welcome from amateur ctnematographers. During 1934 
3 ctmin amount of work was produced in the studios, notably n 
sequence in a film called '* Radio Parade^'* a British Iniefnational 
Pictures production. The film was diroeted by Arthur Woods and made 
at the B.I.P. Studios^ Elstree, Claude FricsoCireene was canteiaman. 
This film was pliotographcd on reversal Dufayeolor. and the prints 
were also meiaa) positives. It was trade shown on December 12, 
1934, at the Regal, Marble .\rcli. The griginal appearance of Dufay- 
color W'as disappointing. During 1935 British Movietone News 
exhibited some Dufaycolor news pictures of Uw Jubilee processions, 
which nocessiiQied printing a lar^ number of copies very rapidly. 
I'hese prims were reversal copies and they suffered from a granular 
effecL known as** boiling.” The work at this period was carried out by 
Kay’s Laboratories Ltd, of London. 

The inveruion by Dr. D. A, Spencer, F,R.P,$., in 1936, of the 
depth thvehper made negative-positive processing practicable, since 
the restricUoti of development to the layer of emulsion in immediate 
contact with ibc r^semt reduced spreading of the image with its con¬ 
sequent desutumrion: also iTradtation was reduced to a minim urn. 
PuTthentiort, the work of Dr. Q, B, Harrison and Mr. R- G. Ilomcr 
of Ilford Ltd, led to great improvements in the illumination system of 
contact printing machines, moiri patterns bciugcomplctely eliminntcd. 

The improvemenis resulting from this research work were first 
put to a practical test in the Corotiaiioii tiira, ivhicb was produced 
by Dufay-Chromex Ltd. nnd distributed by Pathc Piciores Ltd, 
The prorossing work on this occasion was carried out by Jlford Ltd. 
ut their laboratories at Brentwood, Essex. 

Negative-positive printing of Dufaycolor film was a success, mid 
the beauty of the Coro nation film made a great impression both on 
the film industry and on the public. During 1937 and 193S a lar^ 
number of shorts were made in England and on the Contineni, while 
in the U.S. an admirable record was made of the great yacht race 
which was released under the title ** Sails and Sailors,” Among other 
pictures made during this period the following should be ntentioned; 

21 


COtAiV^ CINEMATOGltAVHY 


*' Tfoopirtg the Celotir " ( PiitheJ, “ Itoja! Nas^il Rcvimv ” (Faihi}, 
■’Sl Morit/“ (Ku);>inL Pictiinji), *' Farcftieli 1'opsiils‘‘ (Dufay- 
Chromex), Studio pictures such ds “ OJd Soldiers Ncs«r Die ” 
{Greatorex'PearROft) and *' Souvenirs *' proved that pufaycolot could 
ctjujil flay process in dclinitiori and ■iccunicy of colour nsproduclioit. 

In 1937 Dufay‘ChfoiBM J.td. establish^ u prinressiite labortiLory 
at Thames Dkton, Surrey. Special Dufay color pKnting machines 
were designed and consliutlsKl by W. Vtatm Lltl., Ihe luiwley Ap* 
poratus Company, and by Andre Dcbhe of Paris* 

PrcKsssing labmuitiries arc EOthiy equipped tn priul DuTaycolor 
in Parts, Geneva, Rome, Johannesburg. Bombay* and Burcelonn. Fn 
1938 a modified rdrerni considerably extended the range of hue repro¬ 
duction, and an emulsion ivas perfected for photography by lungsten 
libtrieiu hiitip Uluniination. fhe world requirements of r^wmi are 
at present entirely supplied by the comp.'uiy's fttclory' tk Sawston, 
Cambridifeshire, The precision machinery for ruling tie tnicToscOpic 
lines on the lUm base Is chielly the wort of the French en gin eer 
Charles Bonamteo, 

It is likely ilmi u still finer screen will shortly be uvaiJahlc: ihe high 
resolving power w'hicli will then be obtained, combined with the very 
beautiful colour reproduction for which the process has become 
famous, will ensure a continued life for this make of colour film for 
some years to come. 

I93A-35,—At this dale, in America, processes being w'orked com- 
mermlly were: Multicolof, .Scnneit Color, HarriscoJor. Vitacolor, 
Magnacotor, Fox Color, and other processes which we refer lo later. 
Multicolor had installed an elaborate and costly plant in Hollywood, 
but by 1933 this process was no longer being worked.‘ 

From 1928 onwards there appeared a very large number of two- 
colour proces^, both additive and aublractive. No further advance 
of hisimical intpotlancc was made until Gaspurcolor filnt appeared 
in 1934. For the first ittnc a triple-layer coloured-cmtilsiort positive 
material was made which Could be printed and processed with quitc 
oiinor mndifkations of cornernpomry laboniiory technique, and hv 
which a full thrcsc-colotrr emumuous loot image could be obtained 
without resort to chemical tonine, coluur development, or the use of 
dyes in proctssiiu:. This first Butrcraful appheution of the blcach-out 
type of process was achiered by Dr. Bela Gaspar, ji Hunganan clicmrtt, 
who spent several years in resenreh work before saiisfucloiy prints were 
exhibited. Given normal lhrec^;olnuf vepu rati on negatives, Gnsparco lor 
Wm ts capable of ytcldiiig extremely beauliful prints. The process was 
first worked in Germany, 

In 1934 Gasparcolor Ltd. was formed in Great Britain TTiis 
company made many successful advertUing filins, but lack of a beam- 
^ MuttJeotor was Hie direci wicMtof of ihe Ciwcorof pf«M* of today. 


22 


HISTORICAt. SUMMARY 


splitter eamcra t>r<;vcol«id the me of the process for cntcrtaiiimcaL 
Glrm. Films printed on this niatcrinl were shown to the Ro>a! Photo¬ 
graphic JJociet> in Fcbrxmry 1935 to iilu^trato n paper read hy the 
writer, A paper was also presented and &Jnis shown ai the Proceedings 
of the fntematloiral Congress of Photography in Paris (July I93S). 
The film w'as rnantifactnred by Gevucn In Bcigiuin, hot the war ptit 
an end to ilie opemtions of the British company. Dr. Gaspar and his 
associmts emigrated 10 KoUywood, where they fomiod an Ameriistfi 
company. Exploitation of Gasparcotor motion picture film in tcv 
origiTUit form has ceased, but a modiriod aegntive-poshive prcxxss 
will in all probability ultimately emerge [il], 

1935^“"* Kodacliromc " was adopted for the second Ume by Kodak 
as a jmnuc for a colour process devi^loped in the research bboralofies 
at Rochester, U.S,, from LJie mo no pack patents of Leopold Mannes 
and Ijco Godowsky. Both men were anticipaicd by earlier inventors 
such as H. Kuhn (B.P, 6,921/9!), K, Schinzd (JriV. Jounf. Fhor, 1905* 
52, p. 6C®). and F. Sforea (Brit. PhoL, 1910, 57J, and Dr. L. T. 

Ttoland of Technicobr (U.S. RcU$uc IS.frSO; B.P. 370,908* 3S2.320). 
These were the inventors of monppaek/* while oolour development 
is traceable to Rudolph Pt!^her» faiher of mdiilnyer colour^xjupler 
dcvelopmcal (B.P. 15,055. 1912: and B.P. 2,562, 1913) 

In England a tlt^ exhibitiou was given nt K^^Kiak House, London, 
on April 5, 1935* utul hlim were exhibited at the Ninth Jmemaiiomi 
Congn^s of Photogmptiy in Parts (July 1935)^ Kodachrome film wa$ 
made available to amaLcuris in the form of 16-mm. film in the spring 
of 1935 in the United SUttes. In England it was marketed flrai in 1936. 
The old tenticubr Kodacolor process was withdrawn from produclion. 

J n 1940 the earlier processing p^^K3edu^c was ahcn:d from a controlled 
diHusion principle to differential re-exposure with coloured light, 
much simplifytng the process. 

Ttic use 35-iTim. Kodachromc for motion pietum has hithenu 
been used only by Tcchnl^lor; 16-fnin. Kodachrome iv* however, 
generally available, and it is bdng increasingly used as the original 
record for Tcchukolor IllmsJ It also been used by Gasparcolor 
Inc- and Cinceolur Corp. 113], ft eatinoi, however, be said ihal prints 
made from separation acgaijves from Kodachrome cuti equal the 
delicacy and accuracy of colour oblainiLblc from those derived from 
separation negatives made froin the onginal subject '7 . 

Kodachrome film has been an enormous Jts subtractive 

primaries arc cjF high saiuraiion, and publblicd absorption curves, 
particularly of the cyan and magenta, iudiciie purEicularly suiUible 

* Tht firsi rcaiiinD-fUm io be ^hotogratihDd entirely by mortojwick tn ibe tJnlieil 
Stnlei " TTntrulrrlunJ—Son of Flkko."" a TwtrUNfib Ccnlury-FoA prudildimi, 
in I9^5 -«l U was prinlcd by Tfi\:bnh:i>lorj (be tnoncslfick probably, IS-mm, 
KodiK^hmne. M^inopack wo* twed for the titti in M.G.M S " Lawiic Cestte 
lltmic.** 


23 


COLOUft ClNeMATOCH^P^MV 


characteristics. The colours are reasonably stable. East man say; '■ We 
believe, bui do not guarantee, that a life of many years can be eitpecicd 
for pictures made on present Kodnehrome film, providing reasonable 
precautions are taken.'' 

fn 1942 lEastman introduced a new monopact three-colour 
film under itie resuscitated name *’ Kodacolor," formerly applied to 
the lenticular process. Kodacolor appears to be based on the patents of 
M. Mortificf (Lf.S.P. 2,269,15S; B.P, 505,834), proposing the use of a 
coupler dissolved in a resin which is then dispersed in the emulsion. 
Martinez wa$ followed hy Eastman, Barnet, DuPont,ond Ilford. The 
notion of a w.'ilcr-permeable binder so that colour couplers will not dif¬ 
fuse is merely ofie sotution of the general problem of diffusion which was 
solved in A^ffacolor by Qtlaching long-chain molecules to the coupler. 

Presumably Kodacolor film could also be used as a positive tllm, and 
there would appear lo be no reason why this process should nol provide 
a negative-positive maieriai equal in quality with .^gfacolor or Ansco 
Color. Developments on these lints may be expected. Up-to-date 
Kodacolor film has been made available only in the form of roll-hlm. 

Kodacolor film was the Drst monopack material to incorporate an 
emulsion layer giving a neutral grey masking image [8], 

I9J7-9, — ^^Agfflcolor l6-nim. integral iripack film (reversal process) 
provided u welcome addition to the colour lilms then available in ihe 
sub-standard Held. The emulsion layers incorporated non-diffusing 
colour couplers of the lyjw now familiur to us and s ycllosv filter of 
colloidiil silver was sandwiched hciw'een the uppermost blue sensitive 
und the middle green sensitized emulsion layers. The period was 
remarkable for patent uctlvlty In the integral tripuelc and lenticular 
embossed film regions. Eighty or more patents covered a conccnfniicd 
German attack on the pcrenaial problem of copying lenticular film. 
Dr. Beta Caspar was also active with about thirty new patents covering, 
mainly, proposals for integral iripock negative Him, methods of copying, 
attd colour-development chemistry. I.C. Karbeiiuidustiie covered 
various aspects of the chemistry of non-diffusing colour couplers and 
of processing ftlm embodying these. Eastman filed over forty new 
palerits dealing with similar monop.sok problems. 

At this peri^ three processes shared the bulk of the world’s demand 
for professional moitoit-picture 35-mm. colour film—Technicolor, 
DufjnycoTor and Gasporeolor, The first process was prcdominani, 
Dtifuycolor achieved considerable success in Brliain bui was unable 
to compete seriously with Technicolor owing to an inherent weakness, 
the inabiliTy to make duplicate negatives of the requisite quality. 

Optimistic inventors comribuicd still further optical combinations 
for bciim-.spUtling, but the perfect functioning of a prism is not made 
more likely by the multiplication of its parts. There was Hudeley's 
(B.P. 444.n5t>, This prism helnngs to riassifiCiitinn 3E (see page 541). 


^IlSrO^lCAL SUMMARY 


ifiere btiiig throe objocUvej behind ,i prism system and three iubh 
standard pictures in the space of anc ncmial frume. A further patent 
on the Brewster ciimeru is B.P. 450,6^3+ Two-colour bcanirspUuers 
TciujnLiFCCrt uf R^tycol tc-enicrgp m Thomas and Bryant E.P. 433,221. 
One would have thought it late in history for this species of two-colour 
additive process. The very complex pri^ui described tn BclEiigham and 
Slanky^s B.P. 45^^664 was designed in accordance with the writer’s 
requirements^ for Gasparcolort in 1^35. A certain amount of practical 
work w'Bs accomplish^, but it was found extremely difhcuU to retain 
perfect rcgisiratiou of the enlarged sul>standard negativ'es, even though 
the originals wore quite fnce ffoin parallax errors. This prism is used in 
coniimction with Bcllingliam and Stanley’s B.P. 451,274. which covm 
an ingenious arrangement of the three sub-standard fmmes spread over 
two nonmul frames. A* H. Kumfer proposed to iake(B,P. 4d93S9) 
and project (B.P. 4761*7*4) four colour sub-standard records in 
s^uccc’asively exposed pains. 1.. Kbver described a four element prism 
cemented cube giving images; on three films, the divider being behind 
the objective (fl4\ 472,468). Hie writer patented u similar beam^ 
splitter in B.P. 475,415^ with colour filters introduced within the block. 

so that any simy light reflected from a portion of the prism lying 
beyond the reflecting plane responsible for the formation of a lateral 
image will, when finally emerging from ihe face of iho prism iidjaccni 
fo the plane in which the said image to be recorded, be minus hght 
which Ihe recording filler h capable of transmitting, or. if a photo- 
graphic cmulstcn is used, whkh doe^ require such n filter, which the 
emulsion is capable of recording."’ 

VV. H. and E, C. Hanisoit described u two-colour beam^spLitter in 
B.P, 473 JS2. The arrangcmeDk a sciiU‘'transparciit mirror and a 
prism in front of n pair of sawn-olT objectives providing ihe usual two 
sub‘Siandard negatives within ihe area of one normal fr^me. Further 
Hillman paients were B.Fh 478,500, 478,WU the lutler tlculing with 
additive ihrctMrolouf projection: later he lumed hb attention lo three- 
colour bcam-splitiers of considerable c^imptexity. B.P, 483^17, 
4833 tv. 483,820.494,334, I. Korsi would lake (B*P, 4S5.1W) 
Uire^olour records vide by side across the film, surely un uuncees* 
inrily diflSculi procedure. Pairs gf colour-record images arranged side 
by side nnd ^^Ide iippemiosl arc provided by u complex bcam-sptiitcr 
patented by Cosmocolor CoTporatioo. B.P. 489,333 and 474*800. The 
arraitgeiticnl on the film is the same as the Busch process |>ee page 268)* 
Cu^riioeolof was a two-eolour subirucriw process of normal type, using 
for the prim a double-coated positive slock. Presumably the sub¬ 
standard records were enlarged by an optical printer nnd the images 
loned by a variant of the orpnic or tnurganic toning mcthi>d:q. tt is 
reported as being the invention ofOtto C. Gtlmore.* 

' Sh H P- of ih«Co«iKic0lur CorpnrdTimt 


25 


COLtJUK riNHMATOGRAPHY 


1945-49,—When the AUied photographic service experts entered the 
Agfa factory at Wolfen they found no outstanding improverticnt on the 
ppff-Wiir A^acolor reversiil film. I'liey found, however^ thni 

the Germans hail successfully made hotli ni^gativie and positive motion 
picture monopQick iUms, the chemistry of manufactune being aimesf 
likniicid to the rcv^^al product [30]. Feature films had b&en made by 
UFA, and it Lmnspited that prints liad bwn made in Parts and Pragne 
and perhaps elsewhere. The Germuns instnlied £i processLug tnachine 
at the Stale Laboraiory in Prague, prcsuntubly to be relatUely safe 
from feombuig. Some liurtccn feature pictunes and ^ number of shorts 
wcrii made and Europe got quite Ei,sed to Agfacolor. The AJited in¬ 
telligence auihoritie^ circulated Lbc full irtaniifaciuring data to oil 
photogniphit manufactorcTs, most rsf whom tuc probably now engaged 
in the task of reproducing Agfocotor film. Tt will not prove u simple 
tusk. Of interest is the face that miiterial made subsequent to the 
mcltulon of the Agfa works in the Russian zone of occupation exhibits 
a marked ttnprovemenl in colour range. A lilm recording the trium- 
pbant entry of Jhc late Dr, Benes into Prague contains reds and flesh 
colo^ superior to those observed in the cap Lured wartime Gorman pro¬ 
ductions, in which the redi %vcre marked by a biownuh hue and tlie flesh 
L^ked pinks. This b true nliio of films made by the Russian^^ such as 
Spores Parade, Moscow/' and "“La Fleur de Pierre/‘ the lalTer made 
at the Barrundor SiLidbs in Prague. This advance istraeeabk loan im¬ 
proved magenta coupler. The ultimate result of tiie frccdorn fitjm pattni 
^?ktramt now enjoyed by Bntish and tqhcr manufacturers b difliciiit to 
forccayi, but one can be fairly sure that the user will soon linve quite ji fw 
makes of colour film qf t he tripack class from which to make his choice, 
m the United States before the war Ansco Inc- (then Agfa-Anacoh 
a branch of Gctierol Aniline and Film Corpomtion, had rmturaUy 
full aoexss to the German technical data and the adii'iintages of patent 
protection owned by the peireitt compatiy, rSie sJuisier I.G* Farbcn- 
meuitrie. Ansco kid placed jiti AmcricaH'niadu Agfocolor on the 
market before the United State,s entered ihe war. This was christened 
Ajwo Color Film and issued oj 16-mm. reversfll fdm, 35^mm. cartridges, 
and cut film. General opinion was favourable to tlic new product 
among oihcr ii^sons owing to ilic general release of prowssitig ifistmc- 
lionsr ixs pnticipal competitor at ihe lime could not follow this policy 
owmg to the ramplcKity and difficulty of the Kodachrorue processipH 
pro^duns^ which had until recently been reserved in ihc manufacturer.^ 
la 1^946 three types of 3S-mm. An^o Color reversal film for motion 

* nwerstti roknir pcntiJi-c filin, nnJ " EklwMlor," a coJour 

26 


HISKiRirAI- SUMMARY 


ptcium made available Aiflcritsin film prodilKfs, and full 
phxx^&ing in&lruclionH publislicd [j4j. Ncgaiive and positive 35-min. 
films for tin: motion picture industry will eventiniUy be released, and it 
may be presumed that these materials will be practically idcnitcai to tlic 
latest German producL (B,P. 6I>2.8S1, etc,) 

Ansco designed during the War automatic processing macUincry for 
l6-intn. reversible fUm, aud special 35-iiim. machinery Juts been con” 
strutted. Tbe processing of the reversible film needs very rigid control, 
and in general every precaution bus to be laken to control temperatures 
and the chemical state of the baths. 

in 1949 Du Pont iwinounced a release colour positive film for pro* 
fessional use. This is known as Type 275. The product it tnieadcd for 
use in printing from three-colour sepjfatiori negalivet. Hie film has 
three light-sensitive layers, each sensttired difTcrently so tluit the dtsired 
layer can he exposed by suitably fiiteicd light. IB.P. 61US4t-7,J 
The light-sensitive stiver halide grains in each layer arc sutpended in 
three synthetic polymer layciv wliieh combine the functioDt of carrier 
and colour generators. The polymer rnolcoules have aiiached lo litem 
chemically the necessary culour-forming structure to produce the three 
subtractive primary colours: yellow, insgetita and qyan. 

The siJwr grains, when developed, are inlLmaiely in contact wilh the 
colour-forming poups. This resulh in very high efficiency of dye 
formation and the use of very thin layers for inenensed resolution. 

The important tuageiita layer is on top. while the least important 
yellow layer is on the bottom. This contrihuics to sharpness of dcUiii- 
lion. (S« U5.P. 2,462.151; U,S.P. 2.414,201;; fl.P. 600.039-40, 
619,553. ctc.j 

(n the tripack multilayer solution of the problem of colour phoio- 
graphy vve have relumed to one of the proposals of Ducos du Hauron, 
riamcly the *' Polyfolium Chromodiaiytique," in which he hud con¬ 
ceived an ideal multiple-layer imiulsioti in each straltim of Which s 
ditfercni pwi of the spectrum could be recorded. Only rarely has such 
imaginative foresight been equalled in the hisinry of applied .vcieiicc. 

In 19411, Herbert J. Yutus. president of Repiihtic Picture* Corpora¬ 
tion, of which Consoliduled Film Industries h a division, annoiuieed 
the Trocolor process. In it* present form, ihis process comprises a 
two-colour Him, but the method, wlikh lakes advunioge of manufactur¬ 
ing tKhnhjuc perfected in producing products such us Bktachromc and 
Ansco Color lilm, is novel. The tilnj support is coated on both sides with 
single layers of emulsion containing Tion-diffusing res in-protected ^Inur 
couplers- The classical processing proccduie for iwo-coJour films iiihus 
much simplified since metallic or dye toning is avoided. It i> required 
only to print the two emulsions with the usual bi-pilck regattvia aud to 
process the film iu a suitable parophcnylEjic diutnine formula. According 
to Y.ii«. Eastman Kodak have oc*?r:picd an order to manufacture twelve 

17 


qotouit CISBMArOORAPHy 

million A»i of Trucolor raw iitwL l\ will be interesting \o see whether 
a three-colour process is evolved from the present procedure. U has 
DMO reported t^l Arthur J. Miller, general mmutger of the Fort Lee 
plant of Consolidated, was the prime mover in the development of this 
^lour-coupler proctsss. There would appear to be no impediment to 
tfte expimtation of similar mclliods by European manufacturers in 
view o^lficiaJ publication of the manufuctuTing deiails of the Agfacolor 
non-diHusing colour-coupler containing eimdsions. The application of 
SUCH iniorniHUon to specific variations, for example, lo double-coaled 
emulsioto on one or both sides of the support, can hardly be conceived 
locoosutute patentable inventions fl6l.’ 

A process Wng worked in HoUywo^ at the Trimble Laboratories 
IS ^ Qown as FuUcotor As far as cun be determined a typicul two* 
T«« prot^ure is employed. Thus duplituced Eastman 

■Jp* . IS used one side bdng toned u Prussian Blue and the 

oUiCT side dyctooed. The sound track b Prussian Blmj. It seems 
ilicretore to fwallel Qneeolor in leehnique. Muster negatives are 

or bipaclc. The plnnl capacity is 

tiaimed to be 35,000 ft. per day. 

In Fratioe a pr^ess which hils attracted some attcntioii is known as 
LIumicolor. This is a ihree-eolour subtractive him printed from 
ihrefrstnp negatives exposed in a beam-splitter cuncru fuadamentatly 
to the Technicolor camera. Doublc-coatod aim is dyctoned bv 
rdonung, one side niagenta and the other side cyan. Suhsequcullv 
^ with bichromate aad exposed to a 

Tt,ic;f t «posed and therefore insolubilized gelatine rejecis dye. 
nf I ^ t®<^hnique of the Pinutype process 

differ^ntt'it' .337,054, 1903). The third printing is hence by 

surface. 

PumlofSftr sponsor k R. Valeite. who was a 

tk-i W ^ ™ iisi^ate of the great Ducoi du Haiiron, 

so inai tile process cim boast a sound micestiy, 

sun atioiher French process is caUed - Thoins6n<olor.”* The 

hv^-fr^^ P«st.mnbly the camera record is 

processed u> a pwitivc. From this positive three separation 
on^ existed by optical printing (see Lenticular Film), The 

dowbliKOated film. It ts mordtmied and dyu- 
side cyan. One side is subsequenUy 
tod With emuisjon, and finally toned magenta with a nickel salt 
^ialicbrome for which is^LimedThJ mi- 

h'*"’ ‘"i •»"! J..b].r«ed 

The uuiel di,, mordanting and re-coalmg teiib cimihion is employai 


28 


I In ipJtc of [iK granitiiii of S.p, mo V7V 
CumpstiaiH: FTMcaHe pow TExploltiiijon 


Jfli rnooidj* Thoitiion-HotHLon. 


H^^TDRICAL NUMMARY 


io obtain ihc third colour by once again mnrdanUng and dye- 
toning. 

Much been heard of the bjotbers Rom.^ who have recently 
obloincd wide publicity for their additive system. It doos not appear 
that any marled advances \m\c been made on Uie optical system de¬ 
scribed in B.P. 3K5^14L 1932^ The loss of h^tin projection is inevitably 
very serioiis^ with the resuk that the inventors are said io be relinquish^ 
mg their additive projeedon beajn'fegisicnng lens in favour of a 
subtractive print made from tbc three, or fouTr sub-standard ntgatives 
In the area of a 35-itim. frame provided by the Rqux beam-splitter 
optical unit. The negative arrangemeitt is not dissimilar from that of 
Francita and Thomascolor. It is propo^ to prim opticiilty by enlarge¬ 
ment from each miniature negative direct to a 35-mm. colour positive 
monupack ruatcri^ such as A^acolor, Gevacolor. The chief difficutt>' 
would be to obtain perfect jxgistraiicn. 

Cinecolor (American) now plays a much more important part in the 
colour nitn situation than it did a fevv years ago. This process is the 
direct descendant of W, Van D. Retlcy^s"" Prizma.'" from which a large 
family of " processes stemmedL araougst others Kcrsdacoior/" 

Keiieycolor/' Magnacolor and Multicolor." W. T. CrespincJ 
Itus stated that he was asM>ciated with Kelley, und that in I92S he was 
Irtterested in MuJLicolor. Ciespmel claims to have been instrumental in 
developing a practicable bt-pack with the assistance of Du Piini. Ke 
recalls that liioy culled the earliest bi-pack *’ Rainbow Negative"! 
Du Pont subseqocnUy marketed this material as Dupuck/" The first 
major feature was Gallant Bess"" photographed by John 

Boyle. There is no published mformaiion as to the precise processing 
procedure, but one side of duplitlzcd him is doubtless toned PrusaiLm 
Blue (ferro feiricyanide) and the other side i$ dye-toned by use of a 
suitable iodide mordiint fS.P. 506,450), Alternaiively uranium toning 
pins subsequent surface dyeing can be employed. The method of 
application b mont likely lo be by Qouitlon of ihc film. All printing 
is necessarily earned out on step by step tegisieriug printer^. Cinecolor 
i& today processing both and S-imn. prints. Reduction 

negatives are made from the 35-mm. original bi-pack negatives, h ts 
staled thai the company has developed p three^jolour ^iystem of 
producing colour prints. This syslcm hits been in use for the lust three 
yeyrs, particularly for cartoons and blowups froin l6-inin. Koda- 
chromc." It is impossible to deduce from this description how die 
ibird colour is added, but it is most likely that imbibition prinring 
is employed. In this case Cinecolor muit possess a pin-belt 
transfer machine similar in prmcipic to the Technicolor '' t.B/" 
niuehine> 

The rather une.^pc^ted revivaJ of inicresi in twci-colokir processes has 
bmughi Cinecolor into the foreground as a major competitor and today 

29 


COLOUR Cl^^H3^IArCIGRAPUV 


Iheie U an output from the Cinccolor Laboratories iit Hollywooil of no 
less than tl0p(W,000 ft, of print per onnuin. This ejtiraordujary turn 
of events in the history of a ootour fiLm ts to be exphiined partly as ao 
economic phenomenon and partly as an to ihc InsisPEent demand 

for a product possessing acceptable t]tia)ity but which for its pruduction 
docs not necRSiiute a bcam'i^plUtcr camera and I he rather mciicuJous 


Tittf attii fVtpfriJ 


ArirM 

" Admtiiirc {feliiTul " 

(CmiDcoion 

l^lme-Tbomas 

Diitributof 

” Who Filled Dm Robm " 

iCiixcokir^ 

HaJ Roadi 

_ 

“ Twin Sombicms '* 

(CniDcotQr) 

Odlumbii] 

Ce^lunibiii 

*' Son^ of Old WyofiiinB ** 

(Cniceolvri 

F.E,C^ 

i^tbt 

" EuchUJilcd Fore^i ” 

(Cincco-lorJ 

P.FLC. 

Fetlsc 

Wildhrff " 

(CiiiiCcokn’t 

Guild 


■* Nctrlhifrcsi Trail " 

(CJoecoli:]]') 

SiiEWi GolSti 

Euduilv^ 

" Gv4\ OxrtHry ** 

(Chlecoloi) 

Scccen GuiicJ 

Exclusiw 

“ Hwic on tins Kan^ " 

iMiigjuia^luri 

R^ptitflpc 

Brkish Linn 

" Mim, fwn Rainbow Valley " 
" UiiujLuiil Oomruliaiu 

iMuj^acolpT) 

Republic 

firitisJi Lion 

{Mjjgniu:dlCfTj 

Pofumuufil 

PatEniwuiiL 

'* Popular Sdeiii^ “ 

(Ma^naookKl 

P^ramDiint 

Parommitu 

" G^^nl Hess ' ' 


MXi M, 

M.G.M. 

The Michigan K[d ' 

tCinccaloO 

Uniflcraal 

a.F-D, 

■" Cuflcy ** 

tCinocoJori 

Ihil Rotich 


“ Down Qtlifomiu Way " 

(Tnicolorl 

RepnWic 

Hriildi Linn 

R<Kieh Rhlem of Cheyenne 

(M'jgnflooloT) 

Republic 

Rriliiii Lion 

Ijit rrmtiScj- Uprising " 

{^iagmnnidkiTj 

RetHiblk 

Itruhh Lion 

Fc Sunset " 

tMagrtuodoi) 

Repubik 

RriikK Uoij 

TmU w ATosLn 

{Cinecolor) 

Monpgnam 

_ 

** Q?lorjdp Scromde 

(Clnixolor> 

P.ft,C 

Pjthd 

The t:ara%'3»Tnii1 ** 

iCjiTOultirl 

P.k.C 

Fialh^ 

D™Ji Valley 

tCiiMcolor) 

Screen Guild 

EucEuuve 

Sauvil tu Dcilii 

tCinccolor) 

Sewn Guild 

ExetuSA^ 

" Yosemile '* 

(Cmisooiari 

Sctcii Guild 

Fxiduiiw 

" KcreCorncs T^ublc *“ 

(ClmxsQlor) 

Hill Rix'icb 


” Vtgilajiic^ Rcluin 

(CifWttOlor) 

Uui^erul 

G.FXi. 


Imiitaiions and controls imjjoscd by Uic niore complex iliree^ofonr 
compeiitors. A two^:Q1our pmccsis can io ihc nature of ihitigi only 
provtde a minute proportion of ihe tota! range of colour wnsalioni and 
the undoubted satis faclioa ^bkh has apparcntlv been registered bv 
uncritical iiiidictJtws confirms the belief held by mmy colour Rim 
experts that the awenigc Rfm-goer is tar loss seusiiivc to the subtleiici of 
colour than had been gcneriiliy supposed. It docs not s«m that two* 
colour lOms have impressed even film technicians os bcinj ruiirkcdlv 
inferior, or indeed dHTereni in imy way. frortt fitms possessuig a full 
colour gamut, and whHst producers can hardly be blamed forwpfoitiog 
ihe advantages which this situation piescnis, it is difficult not to feel 








Hl^tOKlCAL SUMMARY 


^Dmc regret at ihe ratura lo a suigc of progress whiih iDurkcril an carlici 
phase in the evduCion of Ihc colour film. Oie bw (Mat and ease of 
handling of two-qoloor film have alimoLcd the attention of new^ filra 
producers and an nltempt U to be made to intnodnee regular issues in 
the United Stales. Two-cobnr films whidi have recently been 
produced are shown cn the previous pagt^. 

With regard lo the rtequciitly advanced objection to fdin bas^ 
carrying emkdssan coatings on both ^des as not being capable of being 
projeeiod with petfeci definition, ft. IL Cricks has observed, 
“ Mnihematics disproves Uiis idea. The thicknesi of the tlim base is 
*005 in.; assuming a 5 in* projection leus, this means a dilTerence in 
image plane of M, 1000 the focal ^engtll, At a throw of ItX) fu this 
tucans a difference in focas of only just over 1 in.; qintc normal ungles of 
rake produce a difference of 2 or 3 fl. which passes unuoliccd." 

If colour pants made from bi-p 3 Ck ncgniives suffer from luck of 
definition this may palely be ascribed lo ihc scattering of the light In 
pacing through the tlrs! emulsion lo reach the back elcmcni of the 
bi-pacle, for which reason every- tcchtttca) device must be adopted to 
ensure the maximum contact between the films. (IS). 

In 1^45 An&cu aanuunced three ticw types of 35-Tnm, professional 
eoloui fltm^ These were Reversible Type 737+ a soft gradation film 
intended to act as a master record. Reversible Type 732^ a release 
positive pritiiing film^ and Type 132+ a dupheating fllinH The former 
two types are available on aitrait or ncetale film base. Later on 4 new 
*" One-Strip Color Sepnration Film '' marketed^ intended for 
rinking ^pnrataOEi rtcgitlives from original fcvcr^l colour positive? 
comprising the micrmcdiate stage in the prepnrntiu'n of the niuiiix:hronie 
positive mastery for printing on Ansco Release Positive Type 732- 
Equal ganunai^ for Uic three separations arc a valuable eharacterifiiic 
of tbb product. Adsco Color has been u!a;d for u recent American 
filiD^ Sixteen Fathoms l>ecp/‘ remarked that ''In some 

scenM Ansco Color seemed far more natural than the 
Technicolor/* This reference lo comparaTive cost seem» unlikely \o be 
based on fncL^ 

Thomascolof^ of which there has been much written of late in 
American journals, is nn additive system based on tlie j^tenu of Richard 
Tliomiis, The optical system provides, it is claimed, four ^ub-suindard 
paralllixTTCc Images within ihc area of a 35-tiim. camcm aperture 
(B.P. 453,221). A corresponding fouEr-ekment projection kn$ includes 
means for elTu'cliag accurati? mgistriiiioii on iht screen of die part 
images. Thui Thomas offers only w^hat has nlready been nocomptished 


• The first Amco Color 35 tism. feicase iMoiwtPiinj waa," OinOtlti^ the Maiusr- 
Nenru" *hoE In I94ti b> Irving Alkn. " Aik* in WoiHScrbud ” wju coio^teicd in 
I94'> by the J. Anhar gjink organhaiiOEJ. In 1^ A. & T. prodiNxd: in 

Parii,"* Tlic Man on ihe Eiffel rowrr/’ 


31 


COl^OUft CjSEMATOCHAfKV 


by ihe Roux opiicnl Jsvices, by Fraiunta, by Dasssui, and muny others. 
The usi^ extmvugiiat claims have been made. Whaiever support ihc 
cnierprise may succeed in allnicimg it i$ pretty safe lo prophesy that its 
subsequent history will not be unlike thui of its predecessors. Needless 
to say such opiicfil accessories can always be“ invented "and developed 
10 the stage of an impressive dcmonstmlion. Between this point and 
(be invariably threatened *' revolution in the industiy ’’ is ati abyss, 
and nobody has crrwsed it. One newr can tell, however. Richard 
Thainus Enterprises is exploiting the process. In an article ( 19 ) in the 
Anierican Ciiiematographer, on Thomnscolof, u statement U made 
which the wriier cannot forbear to quote, '* In projection, tlie light 
from an ondinaiy lamp-fiousc is ample. Since there is only white light 
projecting through the single emulsion trafisp^tionl print and Lilt! 
ligh( traiumj^sion h great “wlih bfack-und-whiic^ with po dyes to 
hold it back} the light tran^misiskip to the screen h iicarly toiaJ. \i\ 
umiiiual brightness range is the How huppy Mr. Thoinas 

musi be! 

!n England the mosl promising development is tod^y known as 

Dufaychrome.'* This name wm adopted by Dnfiiy-Chromcx iiftcr 
acquiring rights to what had hiiherio been known bs British Tri- 
wlour.'* The private company wbteh had sponsored the development of 
the paEtiiU of Jack Coote^ FpR.P.S.,, a well-known authority on colour 
photogniphy, was known as British Tricolour Process limited. Coote 
bad contributed a cupsiderable body of pntents coveKng a complete 
situaJton, njiniely, a beam-splitter camera^ b ns.w type of negative^ and 
2 iCVeniJ poAiiiv'c print techniques. The camera has been fully described 
in the June 1943 issue of the Journal of the SrM.P.E. The generat 
design closely parallels the Technicolor instnmient, and similar throe- 
strip litm stock h used. The print process makes tisc of a Ewo-bjer 
emulsion coating coniaiiikng aon-ddftising colour oouplcrs^ and this 
coatiiig after prinring is subsequcaily re-scrisithwd by quite a new 
technique, and primed. Development foUows the gctieril fomiL!* and 
twhnique of Agfacolor and similar processes, aad is carried out as a 
single operation. laboratory resources are to lie rapidly expanded, 
but the present limit^ output b of first*raie quality and shows par* 
ticubrJy good dednition. Since the price is pginparable to Technicolor 
an important future for Dufaychrome b assured. 

The first extensive use of Tochnichroine " was in making a colour 
film of thfi Olympic Games:^ 1948. Tbb film wus mndt for the j Arthur 
Rank Organization Ltd, by Caatlcior KiiiBhi. Fig, 7A iUusUares wfint 
musi surely be ihc largest jiccumulntion on record of cameras eg nipped 
for the exposure of bi-pack Tlie shortage of beam-spliuer cameras 
and possible economies effected in production cost presumably led to 
t^s production being made in two-colour “ Tcchnichrome." Techni- 
chrome pnnts are made on the same machine used for Technicolor 


Pmqt. C B. WlMca. 1703 


— 5ulv^taicni^ ^ 


/>>T *r Xfrjal 
O^ltwr DmtijprmM, tic. 


A. IWae. JV05 

B. P* I(U5S-1007 
Gtt. l&7^ 


J. O. CimAF? 
BJ*. ! 3 . 429^1915 
U.S,P, IJ 96.080 
]p35l.834— 
£dilii^iiwff (ol4l 


— W* V. D. KHAtv. Hr76*19W 
P.R 

UjS4^, 1,249.41 
—1925 
L Ma^ 
ujs.p. 


flj*, 22a*8«7-l9U 


tuesiloK^or 
Caaocl TX^tochq 
aP* 130,403—1930 


1921 

CcTnaoUddtcd Fibii imluain^ Iik. 


-Vii*«Air. U.S. 


PbJydmnljk' 
hW9t Hamwhchw 
B.P . 21XSeO—1911 
B.P.J03,35€™192I 


CbHcciv] 


Tbc, 

Odgdniucd by PAt Pqwdw 


CdJotfllm, VS, 
IJ^.P. 1,613,651 

<4y£Wttlitp 1929 

vs. 


CoiWitiA 


iLvcch, 


1929 


S^flidki3&if. U S, 
1910 


uLr, ] 


Mulll<:^ldr, 1931 
339,31:1—19^ 
etc. 


PMvwlor Cnm 1910 
CNmHjr 

M. tn 1, Da990H\uxx, bdsuin 
B,P. 377.411 


^btfnkir, 1931 
Agfa 


-S^fiKitMtOfot, 1935 


BlUith EqurvaktU UfKvkH' 
Futeiakr 


Sjum^fitv Cahur Ihv^lopimemt 

FolftakiL, U S. 


i^ihih^thm Ff^Uu^ 


£. FiiWAjetM 
B,P, 1,362—1 STS 


J. W. iwA 


_VANN 

B.P. 2.M9-1S79 


Uk' 


r. 1924 


Honrlsc^r t925 

Tedi&lJL, 1904 

B.P. m6S9. Cl& 
U^.P. 1.919.673. Die. 




R. Uwitu, 191^ 
B.P. t3l4lB-l9tti 


D, J-. Comshjcil 
ft-P 188,329—19ZJ 


T l ,1 ■ 

fCOHlEfMKir^ 


1921 

B.P 1IO».404~1M3 


L. 


nutf. HEKMAm L R voH Hulm- 
laa -Tf, ia21'-IG94 


PolyToltiim OnniDodi.iiytilisiK'' 


U Wavrex 
B.P. 1881 


IL J. Wall. FJLPA, 1906 


W, V. D. KnxEir. 1916 
U.S.P. im78? 


|„T.TRoumd. 1923 
8 i'. 2 Q 4 /U 4 


llipact «wf Malttiaytr 




Ducen mf HAtfuoe^ 
F.P. 216.465—»895 
344.666 


KttkuifaiWp 1930 
Eutniao Ko^lnk 
l-I>. MiU^NSI 
UCOOOWWCY 
iU*. 327 . 714 . ftla 


J. W. B^HNErtD 
BP. 2 S, 9 Kl-iS 9 t 


O. BATOriTNI 

BP 873-1915 


_ r.l9Ji 

qAsrut 
379,579, etc. 


W. BucttA>iA>»-TAVtiJit 
B.P. 12.469—1914 

TachnkJLr. 1931 

B.P. 373,429, «c 


Agf^uolur, 1936 


. 1948 

( CitriKiA poknit of J H. Cooioi 


Dx. WlUIELAI 

ftfld i>ihc» ' 


Coiot, im 


MlCHA£lr M arti i« 


r*mi 


eklK^nn^ ms 

Eaomflii KxtdRk 


Ttscolor 

QrocUdutt^ Film liHliisincs tne 
U.S„ 1947-a 

Mlt-LtK und Eailnxm Kodjik 
Duplax Cojatioc- O-cxHoikr 
BLP. 


DuTHycfarniic 

Dufi5:r<3troii« Lhnlud imd 
J. A. CoQtc 
GL Biitam. 1949 

T^j^lpyef oofllbf^df Affuslot type. 
Tlilrd layer 

IH PtnL, 1949 

l^ksm Gdmir Pwilhtr Typ* 273 
3 Fotymer lAyen which cattibtoe 
Axactlona 4}f canicr ood cdlout 
senentora 
BP. 601X039^ 

BP, 611,846 
BP 611.WXct£ 

VS.P Z4H,m 


Oil* 


Poalthc 
]>avch 7 p«d &PC] Blladiit^nle 
Eutnui CdIw NotiLtm 

U.S.P. 1,4SJ*661 


Anveo Cok4 Nmlttv. 1949 
tl.&P 2,431.996* dc. 


Gmicdto* 1948^9 
Qcvurt, of Bcl^nim 

Uford eJoBT, 19«V 
&!■, 591,123 
fi,p. 626,714 
B.f. 626,726, dc. 


Citiiikft r.Wwi') 

I 

F. D. BUfWVlTR 

J, A Lujts 

ZoachninM 

ILP. 172,714—1920 


D^itJ CiMtiS^ rjui drir 


Aiiwfkc4ifr 

CbKcokr Sooltiof 

I 

Oiktion&ar lFmi»^ 


EIrtikti IrkokH# l'i‘ac«fi*i Mrf. 

Jack Qxm, 1945 




J. SMrm, 1903 
DJLF, 165.544 

I 

twtnitolw, m\ 

l:':t. Trolakd 

BP.37D^ 


Brttkti Trinitotir Fm« 4 «v Mk 
1945 


Eutttiu Stripp^ Ncikihv 
B.P. 374,138 
BP. 574, !64 
aP. 583,436 
BPa 5S1A3B 
BP, 582,439 
aP 6^.032 


THtnkelor Strknttiit Needifv 
B.P. 5S,836 
ap, 565pS3I. eit 


iMaychronWi 1 H 8 


5im lMAC>hrAT3i9. 1643-1 



Ygd^.1773-1^ 


Pitit, James Clmi: M/^w^clu - 




iJiTGoy pu Ha«hw. 1i63^^CicAiu-B l»69- 


J^-Fiu^ic 

0^039 CBU liAilftON. 1895 

FP. lMJy62 


A Qcinw, 1902 
Gonjl. 146,149-1902 
B.P. 7,924^1903 


D. teBWSTW 
BP-2,465—1913 


,2.4|3-l 


w- V. 0. ksim, 1915 

4 


Culwr Ptidniciwfin LCd., L 93 £» 
BP* 363,000 


DalW" Du^ao:^ 

ap. 369.799-IMI 


A OtttNWBlJL^VNfc, t935 

fi.a 449,591 


Houtilr nmtvit Podtliv 
lOcn^UiUed 

e,lLwv 

tier. 23S.i*4-19J0 

A. USHAMDEZ-MAnA 

I,l74,14*-m3 


-J, (..CAZmiT 


1; B.P.13,«S—1915 

\)_ 1 

4: J - - 



n, -(, u. KELLH 

Ea bp. 1JJ9,4U 


^.Aal^A-Dlfe ElUi 


I 


Fivews 


1 

:.^fli4dK 

Duct;^ tHi:jAuiUiH, 186V 
-|M» 

.. W. McLc^nwew 

BP, 5,597—1894 


I. 


i. JbCA 

B.p. 14,161—18W 


L V^. 18» 


K. LUKltAE 

B.P, 22,988-190* 

1!. P. BlQlllEWL 

B,P, (94—1907 


siwA 


Uicq^PirrAV 

BP- 11,698 

" i)l(;prectfv<nr," 1908 


Ih^AyicdlM' 

1 

OP, 217,557-1923 
SpwcT-'Duisii' Ltd, 
ouTisycolcr Lid. 
Duf^ycolbc Bac. 

O^t^cof^htmitx UiL — 
C Pr OtmmEMHp i92> 

Aufac^or Sewn FUin 
ap. 216.^53—1923 

UiBkuliir Flint 


R. Bemtho^, <909 
BP. 10,611—1909 


Ak KlM-Or-DOIttAN 

BP, 14 , 69 ® "1914 


hodJKDtot 


koL.t^ 


1923-1931 



^dhnUjTJ'drf 
ITXcuf FaridhiXf 


«44PI, 9S.79S^im 


'iV. Faiese-Gre^ 
BP, 


Siamtimrituf ,4i£iiAr.vrMtW 


w. 


jWEfNE. mi 

l.F, I3JSI—l«W 


W NWAAt tAlicmJJ»-I>AVtl»l4A 

BP. 23^61-4191 


F. E. 1v^ 


. Ji 


i FuDuuot M ARSfULt Lee 
S . Ei>w-arp Raymond Tiriew 
B.P. 6,302-1899 


GfunoL AiWirtSMTiM 
^incmffcahf, 1909 
BP. 26*671-1906 
Tlw N;atunil Colour 
KLOemRio^p^ Co, i.id. 


Fritst’^^mn Fateub Ud, * —: 

1903 


Dk. BtNKAMlN JUMbAUC^ 

BwP. 3,725^1903 
lit Jrcbt AihllOve 


Omo PtfNSiNcitK 
ftp, 25,90e^l9Q6 


J, H CHR»flNi*Tw 

RP* 7.514-^1901 

34A9c4iWf> 


CUJPv M. FRP^, 

C. 13kiCJC 

BP. 1,642^1911 
BP* 24. W-1911 
BP. 1.900-11312 
- Cnlk BHtMii l.td,- 


iLkil ilkB ejiiiifliifc 

B.P 3.220-1912 

t cclow pfi^ldclur 


I C^iuitr PhetoiBT^' LUL^ 1912 
BP, 47774-1912 
J C H. 1912 

I BP. 233.129 


rjpfiay 


J, 


WtULiAiii VAH Ka-unr, 1876- 1934 

Fanchniniolluii, 1913 
prinaiB Tek,. 1916-1917 
RP 402.111 

I 

Unmieohir 

t 1^ Grck' and A. BEaNARDi 

flP^ 312 . 248 —IWS 


C^^ctemLcd:, 1914 
H. W<iw;«AN 
B.P, 7 a6S9—I9TS 
F. TWYMAN 
B.F. 16 . 61* -*191 Ir 

1 

CbxMkr lAd., 

S : i. Ok 
F> DAniNT* 

OvF. 344,10? 

J. Tl Duwa t 
B P. 349,107 
B.P 3W,7i* 
B.P.427A)iJll 


Asia Lenticuln (Bt{3kV) 
1«1 

B.t'. 3«.(24 


AiffiwhA UQticular FilitL 



W. B. Wtttuni lutd 
O, F. CwutTOC*. l? 2 « 
P,P. 101,972—1»15 
U3J.1^1J|0 
Origia aiTwiiuPOtoe 


A. BtftSAkiiL 
P, L. tbAG» 
iuio Nitwil FBaH 
B.F. 29S.«1—t9Z? 


W, Camivan 
B.F.^W. lOiS—19» 


t JaipantUHL'] 


-ibl>«il Bdtbb GaipattUoiL 1928 

B.F. 312,24* 

B.F. 321,80(. R. S. AiXMlucii 
la.P, 329,438 


nild N^Uaky 

n.p.miiio 


Emil BlKli iHtCkikl Ql 
Cctnua ZcoL lUldiiin 


Ftocbm 

llieBelLHowellO}. 


t-RtKitlX 

ILP. 385.(41—4933 


fjalOiaj^KiiaA Ltd.. $93 T 
A, G. HtUAUK 

iromicTly «f Oneeotafi 
BP. 404,307 
&,P.AM,0» 

8;P. 4l4j(f6S 


rLi.: 


BnM)—1 t^Bg.: I PA^iti 
SoatidOiiaOMai^ 


I^WKUa.1930 
OtrOoploT 
FraachapKaatlix 
DJP. 419,894 

nj;i437*4N 


^temSpUtiins 
l<^tioal Amiiyiist 


J. W. BwNiEtTO. 1897 
»;F. wao—is?! 


£.1,llimiz, 189? 
a.F. 29,353— (891 


e. SA^AltA-SHEnuaU 
B-P. 21,2311—1900 


B,r, 10.043—1901 


b|U DUnlAlftN lltMtAUZ 

B-f. 


Ono FffiNMlMqB3l, T905 


A- £■ CdMTMM 
A. HAiiausctEX 
BJ'. 2B.722-T912 
B.P, 1M,»J—1918 
B 237A41 
W- E L-Dav 
PnIjpctuciciiidA Cjunna 


T A Mio*. isai 
B.P. 172,714 


Siiui?a Fliiibi><, 1919 
®.P. 316,141 
1. Hour 


P. Bklvhtml 1930 
fl.P IWjOOi-WJO 


PhOiocolar Cvrw., C'iiA., 1930 


Tadedenlw loc., (932 

B.P. 349.318. Pnxm Camm 
EP. 371,429 
B.F 3i0.112 
B*P,3«i39 
BJ, 398.138 


BtmTrlHW PmtAH Lid., 19*5 
-- JAtut Coaix. F.EPS, 

ftf 4n Hi |f Mlrnn 


T. B. Dauuew, 1898 
8.P, 22v6'B-I«»» 


X W. itAii 


D, W. PlaV»k 
EP. 23,142-19(2 


TecMndtf lac. 
B.F. 350.836 


p. D. Daiwrnai 
EP. ( 00 . 082—1913 
U 5 .P. (. 733 . 477—1930 


r, 11.5., 1BT7 

3 2*^ 1 Ffunc 

* Neg I ptlRM 


iFwntrp.^l 








































































msTOfllCAl JlUMMAltV 


tliree^olouE prinis, and in onltf lo Avoid any hold-up in itiB nonnaJ 
output i}i!! tw(w:o1oirr print is msdu from three matrices. Thus the 
yellow and magenta matnees are made from the same green-blue 
negative record, These two matrices can. if desired, be developed to 
difTcrent gammas, and this could result in a colour scale emphasiaing 
red in the darh colours while the tones of increasing lightness would 
heceme more predominantly orange or yellow-orange in hue. 


Fui^Uf .Yuwj^r 


Outstanding Patnits 


Futitttte 


\m 

F.P. 81.081 

Duj#^s du Hautc^ti 


B.P. 4,382 

F4lhrjEi(U, E. 

im 

B.P. 2,973 

Dui?Ds du Kmonsn. 

\m 

&.P. 1.969 

J- W. 

iSiil 

B-P, 1,436 

WiiTwkc.. L- 

ms 

F.p. mse2 

E>u>c0s du Huiirf^i 

mi 

B.P. 28.920 

BeiineiiD. J. W 

l£97 

B.P. 29.353 

Burleff i=- T 

1897 

O R.P. 98.799 

Uertvee. II. 

mA 

B P. 21.649 

Fric5c-<jttefEie. W. 

tm 

B.P. 23.863 

DuvidscrlK W, Liwltei- 

tS1>9 

fl.P 3.560 

Edvrardi, B. J* 

t«99 

tt.P. 6,102 

Lee 4iwJl Turner. 

\m 

B.P 11.881 

Frtese-Greenc, SV. 

{900 

B.P. 2hm 

^iil^-!ibephcTtl. E- 

1901 

B.P* I0.W1 

Davids. W, Luseclla^ 

1902 

B P. ! 1.463 

Davidson^ W, 

I903 

B.P. 3,729 

Davidson, W* Utscellev 
And Dr. JumKtuA. B- 

m% 

F.P 328,321 

Conipa^nk <j6n6niic 
d« Phmiofraphei 
C^it6m.nlo£Tnphcs ci 
Appnrrilsde Pr^cinirm 

1901 

F P, 311,859 

Ditto, 

L9&I 

H.R 7,1T9 

IlavidsOfl^ W. L^aseclkv 

1905 

B-P* 311 

Pfenntnuer. O, 

190J 

B.P 9,465 

Ffic$d-<iiwaie. W 

1908 

B,P. 25,903 

PfeiTrdEtjSLT. 0. 

1906 

a. P. 20.671 

Stniih; G, A. and 
UrbAii* C 

1908 

F.P. 364,369 

Bcrthmi ct Gainhs- 


Svhjfvi 

** I^Cotileur^oiPJtolDtitaphKi 

Solatlon du Problsifit. (^rili 

Pint imbibiUcFti i>alcni. 
Thfct^toiir process. 

Rci^ 

Rctkf ImogH 

Bask kkq PT bi-puiclc la " Foty- 
folium ChnHnjsdiftlyiitQuc,'’’ 

" ^yntcni^ 
pacK und lUni. 
Hirp^cciour slill csiiUCTa. 

Three r aiitli Live projecticnii 

Rotary ootoiir shUKcr. 

ThJt«c-Iciu conicnL 

Euriy ihrcc^otouJr still 
Thrtx^pOiour udditEve pmjjDC- 
tkm ond specui movetn^i. 
ProjeLiion latilcm for i-P 
21,^49- 

lisrly prvHti Nituvapliiicr. 

** Scfui-dlalyLc iJi][ cairicr:a. 
Camera vrith tbm mhtm ifi 
frooi on IsDS, 


FroduciK>n in^caniquc de 
cedonb fKSttr mb^rii m Phns 4c 
cinpfnaLogTapheSr 

Colonw imemiittcm ci com¬ 
bine da bdrulra on Ulim 
dnAmatp^r^pb kfues. 

Pri^m beaiThsplitteJX 
Pmicction iiisi aud prisni for 
2r 07 3~cokMir projcciKMi 
Tlie unKv 

Tliicc Mwifolf tenser 
" KirusiTuiColof ** s^yitvni. 

Projectimts cin^imncvpiphiqua 
rcprodukaiit 4iiilontEitk|Mc< 
ment cl phOTDsmphkpicmcni 
1^ touletiTL 

3J 



CQtQUR Clf?lWATOCRAFFTV 


l^archi 


SubJ^a 


F.p* 

CompApiM 

Oes Thonogispfacs^ 
Cin^Ktojirapbtt e< 
:jp|)CLi%]h dc [HvdsiDQ. 

M;j4:liJiie pcmr cakrtier 
lU^ticmciit Ic4 UlwA 
df^matcisniphiqija). 

1906 

F.P. 3B1.4M 

Joly.J. 

Fmotdi lie pKsjGCtiOn cdii^ 
nutogniphiquc ca ixiyleiui «l 

mi 

F.P. 375.110 

Bcnhoit (cf iiuiTOK 

l^KilEMDemEiiU 41UX pmieC' 
tkjrl& dfi^(Uo^phk|ijQ ^fi 
■.‘ouleun. 

mi 

F.P.m616 

Durav^ LiMii&. 

I^nxxik do fi&brkAtJoji d^eirmm 
tmQ3pdrem& a demciit^ pely- 
chiTFmo p<mr la phulogrtiphk 
d«« cotildxrs- 

iwr 

F.P, 394,199 

Socidti dc* twbllsse- 
inenti GaumoDt. 

MiuzliLrK 4 cckKnei- 1« bomEe? 
dn4inQlo$t4lpb]q:i^ pat traitl- 
pctrt dc! fa ixiDleur. 

1907 

F.P. 19^,236 

EHtto. 

S>Tlbalo dc coliBiapc da Ikadei 
cin^maiognif^iiqua. 

190$ 

F.P.399ja2 

Bcnhoii, H. 

PcrfflctiojUMmeiiLi uim prociid^ 
dc colcriti^ da dtiema- 

logmphiqua. 

190S 

B.P. 4S3 

mvidson^ Lasccllcs^ RndkSi OUct batiEl 

1909 

B.P,10,$U 

BcrUuin, R. 

Drigiii <kr LeniJmliir Sy$td:i. 

1909 

B.P. 5.945 

Pfeiuiiiiftrr^ Q. 

OvtTEkppitis coEouj Sect CVS. 

19 LO 

F.p* 423.640 

Cdmpn^lc 
dfib PiKumj^pbes. 
Cin^miUQ^rspbo d 
lie pri^dimru 

Machine tiocutqiic A dcc^Kipcr 
ha Kmdei podiain paur Ic 
cotomBc cto illms cmffiia- 
\Q^phk\m^ 

]9ro 

F,P.4m7J 

Sddct6 dvs. ElnblisK^ 
mm\% GdunwnL 

Dbpodtif d&im la 

nmihina colWer fa films 
diOdtiatoiviipHJqucK le tetkr^ 
du pochoiTct dc la pcllkulc. 

1910 

RP. 430,4W 

Bcnbcm, H- 

McUii^ do ptioiQgmphlc cl dc 
pcojedion domumt rifimioEi 
dii iclioT.^lfirneut appikrabk 
aux pccjcctioiu cnuoukiir*. 

IVIO 

F.K 434.002 

Bcrthfin, R. Et Audibol, DifpouttT dc prUe dc Yas% tt 
M • projBTtion drh6mnLQBniplm|uc 

Od phoii^giaj^iq^uc cn coih 

1910 

D.K.P.23S.514 

Lcwy, E* 

Douldesmied ftlin. 

mi 

F,P*437,m 

Sod^t^ 4i£i 

Qoufiiuni. 

CiMhnflit^phe perfocikmiil 
pour projctcf cn couJciira 
ruiUiTclks d 'up^ It proc^ 
trichixjfne. 

19U 

O.R.P. 257JM) 

Ntiue Fhoio^pEiihdic 
GcEcHsciufi 4 pbcbcry. 

Vcrfahi^n lut Hcmdlims voii 
Fat bcQpboio«mphkn, 

Calo^iir doveJopment. am] 
muklkycr eiiu. 

1911 

B.P. \M1 

C. 

Two veriically WjpcrpcHcdkfiM. 
OriRin of Briiiib CQUM>!or, 
** BiycoJ/' and tmh odditjvf 


lyttems. 


34 


historical summary 


Faimi Samher 
1912 F.P.450,SKI 


19J2 h\P. 44ili,5«5 

1912 B.P. 

1912 FP. 430,412 


1912 a.P. 3,220 

1912 aP. 10.J50 
1912 B,P. 24,159 

1912 B.P. 25,142 

1913 USwP. 1,114.144 
1913 FJP.46I,24S 

1913 F.P. 473,8*2 


1913 F,P.4«.7ei 


1914 B.P.24,M>8 
1914 F,P.4T1.0A1 

1914 UJS-P. t.l 1 », 0 W 

1915 B-P. 13.429 
1914 B.P. 1W,CIG2 
1917 U-SJ*. 1.573,595 
1917 y,S.P. 1,573,M6 

1917 y.s.p, l .m.BW 
1921 U-S.P* 1.677.309 

1921 UJS.P- J. 3 * 3 ,IDa 

1922 U.SvP, 145^1,30« 

1923 B.P. 217.557 
1923 U.S,P. l.fiW.SW 
1923 U.S.P, 1.51M34 

1923 U.S.P. (,«>7.44n 


PaUnice 

SodeiA ck* BialdissA' 

menu Gaumom, 


KonibuiRer, A. 


UTtnac, C. 

Utbon, C- 


Soo^ii 4ei £tablls3e* 
menu Oaumnni. 
Btamctt, C. 

Bnlk, C. luid Beimell, C. 
Pla>cf, D, W. 
Ketnnndnt'Meita. A 
Oc Gcn4ralc4de4 
liiseineni&Fiathd Fitnn. 
Ditto. 


Keller-Dorian, A. 


Kelkr-Dorian, A. 

Sodai dct eiiibluK- 
mffifili GauMont, 
Comitack, D. F, 

J. G, 

BrcmtcTp f*. D+ 

Wall* KAtmug, Coitir 
RtOCkp WcfflOOtL 
Ditla. 


Wdttoll-W. B 

Trol^andtL Ball, 

I. A. 

Ball, I A. 

Comiiodto O- 1^' 
Dofliy^ L* 

D, Fr 
L anil 

L- 

OviutflcK O- F 


Subject 

EVifcCEionnoneiit ma appai^li 
dJrianatofilii^ijues 
jcctitm DU coulran 
d'apfiH Ic pf0eid4 likhronw. 
PafeaiotineirHnil dans in phuto- 
g;faphie (la (Xiuicto^ 

Twd iTtintira behiiul quc toes- 
FctfeOiomicnlcill mix FLppaidii 
ptititdgtuphiqna Dqmpley^ 
dam In cn 

XlurcD sau'i^uir Inosa Tef 
camenib 

in froiU of ob^tiv^ 
Origio or *' Cinecckir" ^Bmisb). 
Rotitimg mirrcmi 
DoubteHioated fiJm. 

Sysiunw optique applicobk' Hbx 
apjriitiits irictironiCft^ 
pto^idt powr k dtem/FiBp da 
pmirom m pociiotn^ sn par- 

utni da lilinE dniifiato- 
grjphkiua. 

Sysitm d« grav-uit pour pro- 
jedjwn pHotogniphiquc* 
prodiinont la ctH^leyn de la 
imiurc 

FtiitraviiiS cdloloid for Lcnticu- 
\at lUm. 

ApparciJ ik prist dt vw&ctt mu- 
Icurs par k piortdi 
Fftotograpba m cobr and 
iticihod ol niukil^ game- 
"nie carUtr Ktidnchmmc ” 

prDC£S& 

PeifoTEiicti mlnn^f A% bCAm- 
splltfern 

Pj'c Gomposltion. 

Treaiins phoiosrajjItJc otuI- 
wn Old color 
ompotiJlicm. 

TrtaimDnL of tincmaitsfim^ 

Rjc^p^Kfing and cdnentiiig 
dBcmiiiogniplik fditis. 

Coior cLncmaio^rapHy* 

Color dnemjtogtcinhyn 
Ofigin af ** Dqfiiyvitlor.** 

Color dncmi^togrzipNy- 
Colcu’ pbolography IKoda* 
diromej- 

CJiicKrKa(ograplii.i: filin ii^llrig 

35 


rOLOUR ClMCklATOGRAPHY 


PaifUf Ntmibrr Patentee 

15f25 U-S P. 1.677,JtO Trolond. L. T. 

1173 U-S.P 1 , 7 ( 6 ,T«*.ibI, L, T 

IMh US.P. 1.807,803 Suitdcfi. 6. and 
Tunlt B S,' 

1937 U.S,P. 1,707,093 Trotuntl, L. T. iinil 
WWincy, J, 

[937 U.S,P. 1.707,710 Comsloiik, D. F- 

1927 U.S.P. 1,873,239 Bull, J, A. 

1928 U.8,p, t.860,912 Tmland, L T. 

1939 U.S.P. 1,900, [40 Sudden, 8. iii>J 
Tunic, B. S. 

1929 U.S P. |,«44.377 TiPbnd, L T 

1929 U.S.P-J.871,649 A, 

1929 U S,P. 1,919,673 Troliind, U T, ujtd 
Eaifm. R. D. 

1929 1.934.890 rjri)]:Lnil. l_ T. 


Cinetnatisgt^iphk Ajifumtuv 
Reg^imiicm mcasi fcpi- ftiin- 
Iinntu^ rnuihine), 

Pocpuniliwi 47 coIorcI njoro* 
ductniiis by unbjtiiiiDn. 
Suction a4]piiraiiUifgr IrnlHbiiu'in 

piiming. 

Mcthful timl 4p[wraiti» fm 
imbibition pnntino. 

Color dneRiaiogr. appamas. 
TvpfHstagd rttctbod ot' jjyvrnii 
frimt end resulting ptwliict, 
Slotbod of iT.tb bitioo orinthtg 
with piLns priioiify colors, wid 
r^oduct. 

Fhinil inutgeopiKdl system. 
Hired-color oncmaiogr. cunerit. 
Technlcolnr process. 


Method at pteparinjj getmin 


1929 U,S.P. 1.821.6*0 Tiolund. L 1. 


1939 

1929 

1929 


U.S.P. 1,924.901 
U.S.P, |,(M4,377 
U5,P. 1,938,714 


Biill. J. A. 

BiilE. J. A. 
Whhney, J, il. 


1930 t72i.P *,974.M5 Troland. L T 


1930 

1930 


LI.S.P 1,928.709 
U.S.P. 1,996.92s 


Irotand, l_ T. 
Mjiutics, L and 
Codowsky, L 


1930 O.R.P. 546.470 |.C Ferben, 


1930 U.S.P, 1.889.030 BjiU, 1. A. 


1930 

1931 
1931 
1931 

1931 

193} 

1932 

1933 

1933 

1934 


ll.S,P. 2,013.116 
U,S.P. 1,923,764 
U-S.P. 1,926,255 
U.S.P 200,058 
U,SP. 1.919.673 

U.S.P. 2,032,401 
U.S.P. 2,159,884 

U.S.P. 1,993,576 
U3.P. 2.068,879 
F,P. 767.707 


Trolfln4, L. T. 
TnMiin4 L T 
BaM, i. A. 
mi J. A. 

Trybott, Lr T, iwiij 
EoCcm, W. ^s. 
Qark, 

Munno^ L an>u 
Godawtig^, 1_ 
TmbiMt L T. 
Trobihi^ L T. 

Siofitn:i ci HLilikCr 


olnxm. 

i\\m Hitd pipcm of 

ritakinB- 

Color ducmaiD^. appanuus 
Colof cioiimiLU^giiLph^. 
AppattL{ij& for <iff|3g|ng le* 
lOCUll bfilEl. 

Fiiiii edvofing merhod und 

NfujUia^ lUni Lirvd (tecUkhI. 

phoEygmphJc ck- 
mciiEs iind rroceu of making 
«rne 

Vcrfsihrcft aitr Ubciifuhrung 

phoEographiSchon SllbcTl>El- 
dqan dun;h Ox^OniiDn und 
Verwendung \mi Leuko^cr- 
bLndiuigcm. 

Mu fl bcolor phcumpuphy with bt-^ 

FhotugrapbUr imtfti. 
FhoEdgrAphL' gelatine rdief. 
SubtraLtlvc naalar ptmingmpiiv 
ThreMolor phoie^graph^. 
PhoiogRipiik! rdkf 

Color photo^ptij . 

Coltrf pbotogcuphj 

Pfcoto^aphic relief pmom, 

Ptwidt dc Ffodurtiem de wpt» 

ikniirudtruiiJc icjti kiuiisira. 


B. StiEtden and Mn, B s. Tuiifc (rTTwhnicoior Mm Pki. cip'r^I! 


36 





HIST08tCAL SUMMAKV 


PsietfT \iimAer 
19M F.P 

1*^34 <i.P l0Ty,4T0 

m4 

1935 a.P, 4S7,94I 
IV37 U S.F. 2.075,0^3 


^wfrfl/Pie 

Dc 


U ui)d 
Tuttle, B. S- 

Burbortl: 

LB. CcnwyBort^ Wea- 
vet^E-H., ImliiyKlt. 
Ball, T A. iind 
Rsekeif, G. F. 


Siihjta 

PriKi^^ ^ ili$po^Liir pout U 
copic dc niim guuTrds &tir 
lllnu ^ufr^ et le projection 
ccrrrcclc dc o« copks. 

MeiiiLXf of n^kin^ imbibjilchn 

Mei bod of muk ing tLanlefti^ gcbi - 
tin fUmsi aiiJ rciUkliin^pcodEu:i!. 

friibiMikcm printing inudiine. 

Tlic T«c3iEils^Dlor caiiicri. 


Kefertnew 

( 1 > Njswroj^p Hu iJAAf t l(i 424727 L EKTfiwiir^ Of!kiF„ Qunb«dBi% ^ 69 , 167 {M. 
Opfitr^y^ 171)4, 

(7* Y<g>J*3, Utt. THO*tAi tl773-Ji29>, B4k^i4n tcciiirc. Roful Society, 

T302; Lee I am ou Maluial FfiilOttOphy. 
f 3 > Ht:t.MliaLTd£^l-|Ek>l4r^!4 Von, ikr pAjrJtkihtgimh^ii Opiik, Jli 67 ^ 

( 4 ) Maxwill, James Clerk, FfW. Ray.SiK., 1 ^ 53 , 2 hiW„ IS 59 , tO, 404 + 4 B 4 . 
( 3 > DtJ HaURq^, Lcitri$ l>vrtA^ Phyiigior tA* Prvht^fne Ji* Aj 

iiti Cifiif^itr:i Aj Paper uriiifn in l£li^2: tint pMbliKinrd 

iiniil 1^7,^ 

La dey Ctmlcvn r/tnpwintfrir^ tijf Akidc tUl 

Ig97, 

((i) Kauhus, it T.+ *' Tfsdinkolnf Adveniuf*!/' Sa€^ A Aw «f, 31, 

Mo. * (I 938 J. p, 374 . 

<7) Davies, E. R., *' The KodMCbrnnie Process of Ir^ircni, Colnot Kinernato- 
gmphy,'^ PhaL Jomtj., 76 ( 1936 ), p. 248 . 

(8) .MEEt, I3«. C E. K., Kodacolor and Riidiiehrome,** CamEniinka-iinn No 
S3Z, Kodalt Bcscuicb Ljiboralorks, Arntr^ P^i.^ 3ri(1942L p. 8- 
(91 E'iscfKR, R., iLiid Siehrist^ II, TLm Fomislioo of Dye&tui^A hy OAklelton 
tiy Mcoe^ of HsposciJ Hih-er Halide,*^ Phitf. K^r. i 1914), p, 20. 
tIO) FniEDMAN, J. M&MpJtk Pfoctsses,'' Moj, Pic.Etig^, 42 (Ma) 

I944J. p. 271. 

Hixtary ^ €<ffar PhviQs^^ty Ii945j, Asner. Phot. INib. Coy. 

(]| ) Gaipak^ IkiA, " The Oaspafcwlor Proocsi/* 31*1 Sicmt-Annual Cuiivciiiktn^ 
!kic. Mot. Pic. Eng. (3 942). 

{12) Kttnt, W,, "Tecttnicokif Cinematofimphy,’' Jontil SiK. Vfo^ PU. 39 
tAug. m 2 ), pp. 96 - 108 . 

( 13 ) Clarke, C G,, Pmctk^l UUli^iiati of Monopotk /o»rfr. Svc. Mar, 

Pit. 45 (Niiv. J94$>, p. 327. 

(14) FoRB]f$r, L L.> Macliihe ^ocessing of le-rrun. Anseo Cotor f-'ilm,"* Jokrrf. 

Sac. Afof. Pk- 45 (Nov, 1945 ), p. 3 ) 3 - 
(IS'i Mee 5^ Df^ C E, Pirnct ProoHse^ fm Mnkins Photographic Prmts tii 
CoJor,' * /<UirfT. Mat. PA', fjtg^ 45^ 4 (April (944), p. 

( 16 ) Fleet, R.," ThcTrucofcor ProcHS^^' Afttcr. Cirtrrmia£Ti^fr{MMiiAi l 94 tfL p. 79 . 
fn> GRttTi'E, W R., “ 30 Yearn of Techfvlcolor/' Amrr Cinemtiifrgtapter (Nov 
1947 ). 

(I8i CRfSPmtw, W T., " History of Eh-pack Photography*'* littfrmt. Phai. tDcc. 
t946u p. 5. 

( i9j WrCKOff, A.+ *^’ TliKMmicoTor/^ Am^r^ CmtmfmKrapitrr ihi^ky (944>, p. 154. 
f 20 ) PrOEucfr, F. W , "‘DftitbpTncrti of Moiio^iHctiire C*>loiir Fllim afterlhe 
War/' Foio-iiiit€^Tei^htiL II94SL I, pp. 171*173 

J7 


CHAPTER 2 


The Theoretical Basis 


Th' invmllidii all and each» how he 

To be tti* mvmior fliissed; w wy Jt seemed, 

Oficc fouiulj which yel unToimd mast would tia.vc ihoughi 
itnpo^ible. 

Mjltdn:. 

T hrough the agenay of our sense organs we percciv^e certain 
aspects of ihc physical universe. The eye b a specially imtre- 
menL for respondiiig to n certain Limited range of nuiiani energy 
which we call h'gin. The car responds to molecular vlbraiion^^ ns of 
air* or of waier^ or of a solid. 

During ihc last fifty years men of science (or perhaps the men of 
applied lienee, esUed^' Inventors ") have solved most of the problems 
of recording and reproducing the physical siimoli which originate oar 
sensations. 

Reproductive processes liave two aspects: 

1 . Recording, 

Reproducing* 

In the case of colour photographic processes^ these may be aJtema- 
lively expressed as: 

1. Amtysis, 

2, S}vf)w^'s* 

Gene rally the apparatus by which recording is done copies in much 
of its construoihie detail one of the sensory organs. If we record 
sound we use an arUlkial car, the microplione. If record light wo 
use an attificial eye* the camera lens and film. 

Betw-cen the analysis and the synthesis there cun be inserted a 
tTUnsfonnatitin process by which the origiaai physical stimulus niuy 
be temporarily changed into uuotber mode of energy ttansmissioit. 
This may be for reproduction at a distance. Hence in telephony 
sound waves at s given pkee are iraiisfomied into electrical impulses 
and iron-unitted by a suitable conduetor to a distant point, where they 
may be transfomied again by a reproducer inio air waves comcspondXug 
to the origiiiaJ sounds. The problem of tcLe^'ision is stiU more complex, 
for here we are tmnsfomiijig the vibmtiorw of liglit* comprising every 
point tn un image, thirty or more times per second, Imo modulated 
dectficnl waves of a type suliablt for radio broadcasUng. and sub^ 
38 



THE TltCORETiCAL BASIS 


t|uenlly retrauiarormstiE iIksc at some distant point into light spatinlly 
so disposed as to rona an image of the origin^ subject. 

Recording images of the visible world in colour has proved a par- 
tkulojiy difficult task* As colour is u special quality of vision, before 
much could be done some woTkitig theory had to be evolved as to the 
mechanisin of colour vision. In the apparatus and ih«ry of colour 
phototuaphy wc have a very pretty esample of a recording mechanism 
designed to function simibrty to the sensory organ concemed- 

Some twenty-five years after the Swedish chemist Karl Wtlhelm 
Schcele (n42-SS) had first noted llic viiriablc durkening of silver 
chloride by the different nys of the spectrum, and in the same year 
(1802) that Thomas Wedgwood publislicd in the Jtivfnai of the doyat 
tnstUutloa an account*' of a method of copying paintings upon glass, 
and of making profiles by the agency of light upon nitrate of stiver,'* 
Dr. Thomas Young had given his paper before the Royal Society 
m which be had hypothesKcd that colour perception depends on the 
presence in the raiina of three kinds of nerve fibw whose r^ponsc 
to the stimuli of light wave* give® rise to the sensations respeetivcly of 
ted, green, and violnit- It was nevcrthdltiss nol until twenty years 
after William Henry Fox Talhoi (1800*77) announced itie discovery 
(ISM) of photographic printing of images upon paper’ lhai Clerk 
Maxwell (1855) suggested means whereby photography in colours might 
be achieved by a^lhiee-coJour pUotogniphie aiuilysis, based upon the 
ihrac-cotour theory of colour vision.* (I) 

Clerk Maxwell, Ducos du Hauron, and other pioneers must have 
approached the problem somewhat Uius: By means of phoiography 
it is possible to record images of the visible world in ^idalions of 
the sralc white—grey—black, How cun the photugiaphic process be 
made to conform to the response of the eye in all respects, including 
its sensations of colour? Now, it has been shown by experiment that 
three colours of the spectrum can be chosen from which all other 
colours Can be matched by mixing various [iroportions of these three 
fMaxwell had chosen red, green, and blue). The experiment of the 
mixing of lights composed of isotaud wavelengths of the spectrum 
chosen at points where the red. green, and blue hues seemed most 
intense had shown ilmi varying propdrtbns of iluaw matched other 
parts of the spectrum ill such a way that each primary was lipread over 
a region of, roughly, a third of the spectrum. Evidently, visible light 
mu,st be divided into ibree groups of waves, each of which roust be 
caused to form a record of the proportion in which each of the mixture 

‘ Joseph N. Niepce. FrwKh lihjiJdsi tl7a5-IS3J>. had hexun tm re 3 ean.'ti» 
upon phoioanipli}' uriy a* I»t4. UtM he iKiitcd in asioctoiioti with Loun 
Jneeutt MAnde Dauuerre (T7a9*ISJ1). ihc oatcoma of Iheir Ksenrehe Iwoh ibe 
" I irreriwjtTpe process. 

* fcjT-.W,, Eainmir«]!i. 1857. l\,2iy 

3CP 


COLOL^ft CESEMA t OOkAPHV 


primaries wo\i\d be prescni to itLiLch ilie origiiml Mghi coming from ^ 
given part of the im^ge. Thas the light would have lo be hltored 
Lhrce times. The simplest kind of ajialyser will be ^ coloiued glass or a 
pic«: of gcliitine dyed with an appropriate dye or dyes. Red, greeiip 
and blue Jilters must be placed one at a time in from of the lens of 
the cainera, or symewhcfe in the Dptjeui system, lo act as selectors, 
or amitysors, during die time of ih^ exposure of the sensitive photo¬ 
graphic efnulsian to an image of the suhicci, a photographic 

emulsion must be made which \$ capable of recording radiation of 
any colour (that is* sensitive to light throughout the speeimm) w^ich 
the analyser may transmit. Then k( three pictures be laken of the 
subject through the three analysis filters. One neptivc win bear 
various denshtes represeming the amount of the red sensatioD-causin^ 
UeIu in the original subjeetp another the green record, and a third the 
blue record. Then let us next make ordinary htack-und-while positives 
from these negatives. These positives will be tniiisparent in propoitioti 
(negfccting certain failures in the functioning of the photographic 
process) lo the ninounl of light recorded by each of the negatives, 
if with a triple "magic laixtcra” these transparencies arc projected 
one on top of the other upon a screen, projecting ihe positive of ihe 
red record through a red filter^ the green through a green, and the 
blue through a blue filter, the respective coloured lights in their vary¬ 
ing anaiys^ quantities whH thus be added together,, and the final 
combineal image should recompose the original colonrs of the subject 
photographed. Though the 5rst attempts were not very succcssfuli 
the combined pictures of colouied light did roughly resemble the original 
subjecL This method has become known as the AddltiTe Process- 

hy the means described above the three positive^t were modtiiiiting 
by thcii various densities the stimuiatien value of red, green, and blue 
light in all parts of the original image^ and the colour fillers were provid¬ 
ing suiuibty chosen trichromatic sitmull. Every pint of the tripk com¬ 
bined image represemed various propoiiious of the chosen trichromaiic 
$tiniuh. Where ail Utrec plates happened to be tfanspqreitt in the 
same part of the pkiure there was transmitted to the screen and from 
thence reflected to the eye of the observer the full value of red, green, 
and blue light from tlie Eigh^sources in the three lanieru^. The resulting 
wnsaiion derived from thm part of the image was w hiie. Other relative 
proptmioiu of the three stimuli gi3ive rise to ncarlv every other colour 
sensatiorv- 

When these principles have been grasped the theory of the subse- 
qi^ul attempts to solve the problem will be readily understchad. 
First, there must be the analysis of the light into three parta of the 
specttLim (or three spectral distfibutioos constittiling stimuli confined 
to three parts of the spectrum which^ by additive mixture in varying 
prnptminn^.. can he made u> match a large range of colours) ■ next. 


tHIi rhl£0^£TJCAl. RASJS 


ibc photogmpKk recording of tbi^s uipLe finnlJy^ \li^ rcproJtii:- 

t'lQB, or syiuhesis, aceompibhed by necombiimiiofi or the tnchrom^tic 
siimuti in ihclr original propKirtion^L 

Bcfoi% dc$ctibing vnriatioitii of anal>'^ methods ii b necessary 
to tvht lo an mclhCNl of synthesis. TMs is best kjndci^tooiJ 

by realizing that there tnusl be two ways of rflcombinin^ the primary 
elements, or LnctirOmatie sliniuli! 

I* Adding three suitably chosen coloured Jights lo^iher^ smiling 
with no light* 

2. Sorting with while light (namely, a combination of the whole 
range of visible radiation) and from it vnfioufl 

atnourds of trichromatic stimuli* 

The latter aiternative b known as die Subfractivt Frr>cess, 

The principle liad been familiar to artists for centuries, and their 
practice had been the origin of the faUe msumption Ltml red, yellow 
and blue were the primary visual stimuli. Those tlucir colours which 
are found to be correct ^ubtraciors of each of the primaiy lighi'^ources 
must necessarily be reflectors, or tninsitiittcrs^ of the lemaining two- 
thirds of the spectrum. Thus we find that the three subtractive pirmaries 
are: 

1. Red subtractor—reflects (or transmits) green and blue. 

2* Green sufalmctnr—reflects (or tmnsniits) red and blue* 

3. Blue subtractor—refleetj (or tninsmits) red and green. 

The three sublnictive piimaiiei are therefore: 

t* Cyan (green and blue light reflected or tran£miuod)i 

2. ^iagefda (red and blue light redocted or tnnsmiticd). 

3. Yellow and green light reflected or ttattsmiticd), 

Ducot dc Huoron was ihc lirst to dcfuac clearly the relation 
between the three-colour scpanatiofi iicgHtlves and the production 
from them of n subireciiv*? prim or colour transparency. The gradations 
of a hlack-and-wlhtc positive print, as we have remark^ made from 
n colour scpiiratEon negative, represent the Jighl which W'as fjoi re¬ 
corded on the ncEili^e. Used as ii traiutpnrenc}^ placed in front of a 
source of light it can be made to funciion ns an absorber of the pitnicukr 
primary^ colour recorded on ibe negative from which li was made. 
To this end the positive print must be rendered in such a colour as 
will be trunspiment to the remaJnilcr of the spccttiim unrecorded on 
the negative, and opaque to the colour which was recorded^ So that 
from the three negatives three positives are made, each in the colour 
complemcniary (namely, the balance of the spectrum) to the light 
recorded on the negative uwd. When assembled in supcrposilton, 
wc have in fact made an infinitely variable ibfcc-colour sublraciive 

41 


COLl^UVi CtSi9.t4l0GKAP«iY 


dlLt^ which cun be pLioed between the eye und a squire qf while light. 
Thus the ftd filter negative has to be printed in irwn-bliJe (cyan), 
the green filler negative in red-blue (inugenta]!, and iht blue filtef 
ctegative in red-gieen (yetlow). 

The additive and subtntcLi^'e methods of finally rccompvosing the 
Lhrec-cclour ima$e will be further simplified for the non-techniail 
reader by refereiiix lo Figs, b and 9, In Fig. 8 h shown a diagram 
of the additive prcccss- The three projection positives arc repluced 
by three densiiv wedges or scales whidi in this case have a diagram- 
maiic significance only. Let m suppose that each of ibesc wedges 
can be moved up and down behind its own projection lens. And let us 
suppose [hat the lenses are so disposed that their projected images 
are corrotly superposed upon a screen. In the diagyam the prunaiy 

SL 



colour filters are plaoed \n front of their nespeettve lenses. It is assumed 
that one or more ilghi-saiuccs are placed lUhind the wedges to supply 
the light for projcciioiL Suppose Ltiat the percentage of light tratii- 
milted by each of the wedges were divided iulo the foUowing eleven 
values tscc table): 


TKA^5hns»taN Factor 


f 0 per DcnE 

16 „ 

M 

2-5 

H 

4-0 „ 

1. 

6-3 


10 0 

1^ 


IS ’8 [Kt ceau 

iS: : 

63 I .* 
iro *. 


In the positian m which the Umcc vrcdgiesauc ithown in the dkgnun. 
ihe tnnsmissjoii factors of the steps opposite the respective lenses are: 

42 

























THE THEORiTJCAt 
kixl JD^ 

Creoi p« -4 59-8 „ 

Bktt: K- .p tO-0 ,j tt 

Such a coloixr would bo a pukf whldih groeit li is obvious that by 
sliding Ihese wedges up and down m OQOrtnous number of colour mix¬ 
tures is pos$tb1Cp The principle is identical when three positive pictures 
are projected om on top of the otlia* the steps of the wedgies being 
then replaced with inlinitely variable densities. Of course, the colour 
Alters could cqmliy wd! be stained e\^n]y all over the ^urfucd of the 
bkclc-mid-white wed^. and, a$ wc shiill see, this method was adopted 
by some of the earlier workers employ mg additive methods of ^ntheais. 

In Fi^ 9 the pmciple of the subtractive process is dingratumaUcally 
presented, but in this instunce it will be observed that the wedges 
are placed me in fr&m of tfte other^ Each wedge cciTiSists of a series 
of coloured steps, one end of the wedge being white^ while the other 
cud IS Ji step of concenmicd cotour with iniervetting colour steps 
graded between. Each w'edge is comprised of gradations of one of 
the prmurry iuhtra€(orS. 

Thus we have a grcen-hlue (cyan) or taintis red w^edge. This is 
supposed to trsiismil all the green bli^ along its whole length but 
to absorb varying percentages of nrd. Similarly, we have a red-blijc 
(mn^pla) or minus green wedge and s fed-gteen {yellow) or minus 
blue wcdgL\ The percentage of red, peen, or blue absorbed is jii each 
case: 


AnsnnniON FAcraM 


(Ml per ceiiL 

„ II 

.1 

1*9 „ I. 
Mi ,. 

WO „ I. 


93*7 per cc«l- 

«0 „ 

97*5 .. „ 

96* .1 

99 0 M 1. 


in {he position ihe wedfes occupy in thti diagram it u suppo$ed 
(hnl the projection system is so armn^d that the light is limited to 
the width of one wxdgc step. The paniculur steps which are supef' 
posed in ihedbgrani hu^'e the fotlowingabsorption fuctors: 

93-7 pH' rent, red 
Ml „ „ jffocn 

0 „ „ blue 


Cnnsidenng ihc incident light to be made up of 100 parts of each 
of these thiev colours, the amounts transmitted me clearly 

100 —9i'T !■ 6’3 pnnj red 

H»-«) - Id „ srcoi 
too- 0 - too „ blue 


43 


COLOUR ClNCMATOQItAPHy 



which, cjtpressed as pcreefUaiEs of the hml tfunsmitlcd liglit, e^juals 

S'# ted 


FKfL.if,—Duiiriijn of iJit subtnictlva pj 


























THE THEORETICAL 


Tliis colour wouJd he a scry fine coball* blue. The three wedges 
here represent diagraitimniloally the three superimposed pritiUngi. 
cmulsEoo layers, or other continuous colour priittEiigs used in a sub- 
tracii%-c process. As in the addiii^-c process, an enormous number of 
colour mixtures js obtainable, the range being ttmiled only by the 
approiiimatjoii of the primary subtnictois lo ideal requirements— 
namely, that each subiractor should, at its ma^timum absorptioiii, 
completely absorb the primary and peifeitly inmsmit the rctnnining 
I wp-tbirds of the spectrum. .As we shall have occasion to point out later, 
tl is unforluiiate that the colouring matters available for the different 
processes approTcimatc only roughly to these reqtiiiemeuL^ an in¬ 
herent defect which is one of the causes of whatever failure the three- 
colour subtractive process may exhibit in the perfect transformation 
of Eltc vfilueiii prcseni in the recording negatives. 

THE RCCORDIlSG AMJ REFRODUCnON SEQUENCE 

The proper comprehcuHion of colour cuiematography requires that 
one should constanily bear in mind the series of transformations which 
take place between the incLdence of the light which jUumirios the object 
being photogrLiphed and Lhe last ^lage of alh in w^hlcb the light reaches 
(he eye from what w'e witi cidl the repto^cH&n ptmie. For we are 
endeavouring to siimulate on observer's eye by radiation (reflected 
from a w hite Krecn* or from a two-dimensional surface of some kind) 
intended to produce approximately the $airie sensaliotis of vision as the 
origJTial light w'ould ba%'e done. 

The following ore the principal stages or aspcctip of the recording and 
reproduction sequence: 

1. THE PRIMARY UGHT-SOURCE 

2. THE SECONDARY LIGHT-SOURCE.^ 

3. TRICHROMATIC ANALYSIS 

-4, THE PHOTOCHEMICAL RECORD, 

The Recording Plane. (Trictirpmatic record*) 

5. THE POSITIVE REPRODUCTION IN ADDITIVE OR SUB^ 

tractive primaries. 

6- THE PROJECTION LIGHT-SOURCE. 

7, THE SCREEN REFLECTOR. 

The Reproduction Plane, 

8. THE PSYCHICAL AND PHYSICAL RESPONSE fO RADI¬ 

ANT STIMULUS. 

The accompanying diagram (Fig. lOl conveys schematjcally the 
relationship of the different singeia lo each other, bui it h obvious that 

* Or uEimimirirtff. 

* A “ sccoodiii^^ suurec can be dcHncd m d body Of objeci Uanvitiufiia of 
fetkeUAjS hihl rE.tlin]| mi it from any dlhnr «auivf Iprtnury ot mcmdmry l 


45 


COLOIR CINeMATOGKAPHV 


small errors ai any mu si hrmg about a serious variaiion between 
sensations A "** and ** B/* These errors wUI be multiplied progress 
sively from stage to stage with Importmil consequences^ Throughout* 
it U s matter of luo-st deJicate babndng of three factors. Sensation 
never does match sensution B except under conditions which ate 
almost impossible to lealize in practical dnematogmphy. Bui the 


Qp ijght 


7hrce<Q/oijr 

i^ppAr>stt/s 


Tht C^mem I 

comprtsfhf' s 
7h^ Jfe€crdf/TfP^e \ 


l^ht Pbt- ^ 
J^pr&ductieTi 



Seasstifjn 


^ A^gsfs 

le^S / jsm ^ P/s^^ 
^P^ree-pArt Se^ar^ttAf} Aws^/i^e 

P/v^is rn Mw 
/VwTur/es 


Cofff6f/ttd TpAnsps/^ffCif 


Ee oroductw 



Th^ Vie f*' 

re&n ^ J Sens^tim 

Three^co/ouf^ *Q ■ 
AppAf^e^tus 


Fk>. lO.—The rtcordin^ onii rtpriHliictMii leqoeocc ui the sub<tiu;Lcve FVuoaa. 


achievemeni of equiv'aJcnce between the two sensations mu^l always be 
our objcctire, and the causes of Tail ore must he carefully studied nt each 
stage of ihc iransition. 

The capacity of it corttmema! process to reproduce colours cun be 
gathered by consideration of the results tabulated by R. TL Bingham 
of An^ico. Ill Table I wc tiiive the chromatidty coH^nlinaics of five 
Munsdl samplc^i and their rcprodticiions by the materisit developed 
respectively, lo a gumma of J-0 and 1-5. It will be observed that the 
46 









THE THEORETJC^L BASrS 



iw tfa? m 

Fin, li. 



Fh 3. I^—QimiUfitkitka cif R^ralucUionA c^lciildted a two dJfTimU 

Noie: D0fijcd liixi fndkalc Sample ftofl repnxIuctiDn polmi ossocuted «dih cash 

cokHiT (R- H, fifmiuwi. 


47 














COLOUR CINEMATOCKAPHY 


higher gjiitiiDa reduces the ituninance bill iiKrteases Uic saitiralion of 
the teproductlon colours. 


Taale J 


MunseJJ Simiple 


y 

IH90O 

X 

mu 

y 

0^33* 

NIO 


\-m 

mu 

0-358 


r-1 5 

1-000 

0-^22 

0^33» 

Red 

Smnpk 

0^331 

0-572 

0-314 

5 R 4 /I 4 

r* I’O 

0 1J7 

049^ 

Ch337 


i+5 

0-04^ 

mn 

0-329 

Vdloiv 

SiotEpk 

0-570 

0466 

04S8 

SY A[12 

r= I’O 

Q-m 

0426 

0451 


f=J -5 


(M 5 « 

047t 

Green 

Sample 

tym 

0-25« 

0-431 

30 5 IZ 


0153 

tym 

0-356 


r=l'S 

0061 

0304 

0410 

Elue 

Sample 

0 113 

0305 

0-2S2 


1 0 


0-257 

0-2^ 


r*l 5 

0-032 

0^235 

0-254 

PurpTo 

5P4/I2 

Sample 

0-121 


0191 

f=l^ 

0-140 

mi\ 

0263 


I'S 

IHJ54 

mn 

om 


Id these calcutatiom the illuminani was token to be daylight at 
6,000' K. The three dyes used in the process are shown in Fig. 11. 
It will be seen that the approxiinations to ibe originals are in most 
vases singularly near when the itiimense diSlculties involved are token 
into consideration (Fig, 12). Let us now proceed to examine In some 
detail the various stages of what we have called the Recording and 
Reproduction Sec)uenee. 


I. THE PRL\L^RY LIGHT SOURCE (FOR RECORDING) 
NAttIRAL iLLtJMmATlONt OaYLIOHT, SUNUOflT, ETC. 

It is generally supposed that the colour-temperature) of average 
ctoylight varies over a wide range. This h not so. Only under excep- 
lionaj conditions is there considerable shift, otherwise it would be 
necessary to make constdot adjustments by means of compensating 
filters. It has been shown by F* H. O. Pitt and E. W. H. Selwyn [tj 

‘ Tbe colour iHT^KnUire of a llaht toufw ii me tempenttme ai which s fiilt 
mdunor would emii radiation of ubstanihilly the same spertmt diitrOhilbn in the 
viHhle reshm as the ladiaiiai from the ilght soatve and which vreutd have the same 
colour. Chotnarietty is (he colour muUiy (Jf * «iniultti, wlihnui lefcrence (o ihe 
lumuianw, t» dofirKd by ivo uf ihc cAramuticiiy cdOitiinales ruMHlly x ami y) 


THE TNEOR^TirAI. BASIS 


thm ibe^ mt£gTUt^ light from i mimber of exicTior subjects ftUrcted 

inca a cameiEi kns is 


itTiirwuUblc On the nvcriic by a colour-ternpcraturti of K. and ilutl none 

or the subiocts departjed markedly Trom thi$, uithouith components of tlic nibiocti 
4udi u± niu! iky ave some way (erTKn«d from while. The oi'eniii colour rcmalnt 
the Kunc during the day lOWAri^ lunscf. wticii the mpklly becomes more 

blwj- 





(hT 


Fifl. 


th —^Thc integrated cotour oT r^picil cxiedor Bubjcclt 
tPitI and Sdwyii)- 


M£^A MLl/£ 5C£/i£S 
^3SJX*S^^Y^0 2072 


A$wiU be seen from Fig. 13,ihe mterestlng faei emerged that the 
colours of the varioiis scenes (bllowcd the locus of the black bod)/ 
radiators of diflerenl tempenituies raiher closely and all duster about 
the point representing 4,800 K. It can tltits be concliHled liutl the 
latcgTtitod colour of the average subject is very nearly while, and that 
it will he represented by a curve of roughly the same shape as the energy 
curves in Fig. 14, and will be approsimatcly between Umiis thot/tu 
by the curves from 5,500^ K. and 3,500’ K. 

D 


49 








VOimJK Clhf^MATOGRAl'HV 


Tfac auihais of thh piipcr fnudt; ihi$ \xry iiUcn^ting abscrvTitioii; 

Otinq^ Utc period of cn^e^^iiiiorL i]iea.wjicrneoL was nudje of i|ie t'iMein of ilic 
cK^ui;^ in o^tmU coSouf of q typical ot^ect diitifus ttw dav^ The idea n 

thiu tte colour £cis bluer as ijic fuji: jcnds townids its zmth, and then Eicts less blue 
U'bcn It lilts poim, No appmciiibk of colour was d«ti!v‘ied duiin^ iht 

day* but there was a striking dTcd close on sunset. TKii change, lUustruted in 
Fitf, iS^fKit only bmost miirked but aUo occun fairly rapidlyv In^cftmiJ, she sceno^ 
as St whoEc, comiiHmcK to get bluer about twvnty^fl^T TfunuLcs befont sunset tmd the 
whole change occun in approjuiriaioly fifteen mimitct, and then, ^ for os lUeasur- 
able, thecoluLir remnimeortstant In quality. Two cumpkiely diffenertt jCertra, n led 
building and « sctiscapc rneosureeJ on Uie 6ih and \5%k S^tember resj^eeiKeiy^ 
nlmiMt idcntknl results. This o^pcnUisentt repetiteil in No^wnber* the subject being 



Fjo, J4-—Enci^ airm of various jlliinrinualL 


B imall peen dcidp with uwa Mid red buildings in the baebgroimd, confirmed the 
cnrlter meastifemiiflts. Tlicsc mulu suggeM iliiii the frequent siatcment iJiui ihr 
wftfMTOfSfviJKf gets rcrftifjr irt titircvenim-htrwneom. In fiatl, tipprotrinutecoilstlinc)^ 
of the mlouf of llw: total lighl from sun ami sky fiMing on a hnriMmial lurfoce wat 
a lesuli arrived m tjy Kimbali in 1924 [2J and I92i^ p] by cakuhikua based on the 
ookHir of sunlight and of skyhghl and iheir reJalive imcnsltie^ nt dJfTcfcnt lima gf 
the day. Also the cakulaHoni predkled a ehiifisc tow4rtU btucfwss when the iim 
was ctee to tho horizon. Wliut happens Is that tlw iitrei light from the sun heconwi 
more red ^ sunset upproflcha. but Lhii shiwl Ught ii dbphihlUns in tmenshy. The 
scattered light, which Ji hiifish ami oauiing from like whbU? area of ihc skv alw 
(llumioala the subjecl, and nIUictugh aiininjMhiiig in intensity does so at a 
nite ihim tJw tfiieci acd ihc *«ld«ir«i of th* 

ctK.ntwta^™ Wtie of itehi Very simihr mulls tieS 

reporiKj by Pw« [#J. Who hndi s rapid decrease to colour-terapcrawra ai lui^ 
50 

































THE TFEOurtlCAl. BASIS 


Mm »cn$i]iY]e methods of mhasanmeiitp minff photockctric sppmtus* confirmed 
ihc facts that the ovemll odour of a typk^ tttmiita onolimd duiins Uw dsy 

iuid that the only itiArkcd change In coloor occurs about half an hour beTope sunset. 



FlO. 1—Qiangc of colour Loimcduitdy before sunset 
(Piu ml Sehvyn). 


ReferLUces 

\il Prrr* F. H. G., nnd Ss4.wyi4* E. W, H.* “ Colour of Outdoor Fhtotosruphic 
Suibiocts,”*KQdAi£ Conmiuitkatioo NOh H-MI froniUie RosiaJxhLoboratoda^ 
Weaidntonc, MiddJeae^. 

(2^ Kjuiau* H. Mfmihly Wgmhuf 52*473-1^ I $24. 

(3> Kiusall* H. H., Inicrfutlaiuil Gtmmis^Ei on EliumiimtH)ii^3QI-l5,Sep4.1$2i- 
DAvn« R., iirtd Oib 50 N« K- S-, Mtc. Bab. Bar. Sfwtdurdf, No. 114^ 1911 , 

Davi^. R.* Proc. fiWr Kbwrvrt. No* VIS^ I93J, 

H) Pnnot. i*0.i V.€>X4.. TB-9p J9U. 


15062 


SI 















COLOUJl CtN^MATOGFlAPHY 


ARTIFICLIL ILLUMIN’AMS 

ArtilicUiI illumuiants cnay be divided into Tour categories^ 

illumittaDts having discontinuous spectra. 

8. lllumiiuittts having fairly continuous spectra. 

C. JJlujninnms having continuous specira. 

D, Uluminanis having coniinuous und discontinuous spectra 

mixed. 


A. tUiuninanis haviitg DIscootinuiHis Spcctn 

Incandescent gases emit only certain ^vavebands, generally very 
oatTotv, or even one or two wavelengths, Such line spectra serve as 
the basb of spectrum analy^s. in gaseous eioctiic discharge tubes 
there may he great gaps in the spcclrum of the emitted light. The 
overall colour is the integral sensation of (he retinal stimutation by 
the radiant energy of the various wavelengths present. 

Exaiaples 

Atm'ury Vapour Tubes (old low-pressure tubes]. 

The visual appearance is a green-blue white, 

(Lines ai 0 578>i. 0-546^. n’436^, O^OS^t.) 

Ttibe. 

The viiual appearance is a plnkbh red. 

hftHtre b/itrogea Tube^ 

The visual appearance it a pale pinV. 

Such illumlnants are useless for colour photography, in spite of the 
fact that some inventors have suggested baLutemg several dilTerent 
discharge lubes in such a way as to imitate the. white ii ghi of an equal 
energy spectrum. 

The emission of both the neon and tiitiogen tubes is so feeble that 
nei titer lamp is of any value for cinematography. 

The sodium vapour lamp n«d not be considered, sioce the radtation 
consists almost entirely of 5.S90 A, and 5,m A. (spectrum yellow) 
which is useless for colour photography. 


B. UlununaDlv bavlng Fairly ContiniMius Spectra 

CcMua types of arc lump using specially cored carboni have a very 
crowded Une spectrum with powerful emission oAea m the ultra-violet 
and considerable gaps in the visible region. 

52 



Tilt t Hi;att£TU:AL 


C. UluinLiuinL'i haring Confinuocis Spectra 

Examples 

The TitHgsicn Fiieanitesce/if Fiiamient Fed Lamp 

The commerciiil tung^en lump ii saliiifsctory source of light for 
colour pbotogmpby in the motioD picture studio^ but it is far from being 
ideal, since we stmt with an ovcn^helnung predomiiumee of red, 
orange, and ^'ellow rays (Fig. [6% Hence, in the begmning cf our 
recording »lagc wc buve unbahinced fjiianilLies of the three prifufirics. 



Pe/^ Cef^t /^oma/ l/clts 


Fto I6A —orocciniliig a tiii]flsici] fiEumenT tiuiip u other than rated village. 


Using lamps run at ihc voltage far which they were designed, namely 
far the maximum life of the bmp, the poaitioit U that the red, green, 
and blue rays must be pnaent in such a proportion as will upset 
the balance of the photographic effect. The balance has to be itistored 
at a later stage, and this must entafi loss of dficieocy, ^iiKc the excess 
rays must bedimlnatcd. TMs is generally done by altering the analysis 
filters, taking into consideration their rebtion to the sensitiveness 
of a given emutsloo to red, greeny and blue. 

But there is an alternative solution of this problem which has been 
gis'en a practical trial in American studios. This is to rtm the tamps 

53 















































































COtOVH CI»EStATOGHAl*MV 


at sitch a voltage tis will redtice their u$efd life but in a ooa- 
siderable rise id the letnperatun: of the incandciicent lungsteo lilamcat. 
The requinmfifll is to obtain not only a larger irroportion of blue snd 
violet light in comparison with the emission trf and orange, but 
also a greater volume of light for a given wattage, since the amaitni 
of heal on a set is governed chiefly by the total w'aitagE in use. 
Comparing a lamp of the usual type operating at 2,980' K. with an 
ovemui lamp burning at a JUament temperature of 3,435' K., the in* 
crease in hluc-violet radiation is ao less than 140 per cant, (Fig. 17), 



^^1 Sinr , fi nrw Ad 


^ JiW. Iwo. 


Fig. I?. 


Thus, by the simple process of operating the lamps on over'voluige 
we receivu noi only a greatly increased volume of light, but aUo light of 
an improved quality for the purpose of ooloiir photography, and ihiii 
ai the mijiunmn wattage. To be sure, there is still some caccss of red- 
orange which iniisi be filwrcd out. but the losses are very much re¬ 
duced. Such filtering can be accomplished by a suitable colour filler 
m from of the camera lens, by gelatine or glass screens in front of 
the Ught-sourccs, or possibly by the ure of coloufed hniht 




THIf THEORETIC A1- BASIS 


wiiitu) angles wherein il enn be used. Fig. 19 iUustrstes the candle- 
power' disiribution obtained from a ^OOQ^watt lamp of the type 
developed for colour photoftraphy, and Fig. 18 that from a siandBid 
l,50(Fwatt lamp usually employed in the studios. The 1,500-watt bmp 
directed 17.000 lumens in the 60'^ usefbt angle, whereas the 2,000- 
watt lamp gave 32,000 lumens in Ute same angle, an increase of nearly 
100 per cent over the standard type. 

When overrun these lamps have a life of from 15 to 18 hours. 
The 2,0Q0-waii lamp is used for general hghilng, but for modelling 
or spot work the 5-K.W. and lO-KW, lamps arc used. They are Identlca! 
lo the standard lamps, but ate rated ar 10S voks. Such lamps normally 
operate at 29-30 lumens per watt; and the ovcx-voltage lo which they 



Fxi. tB.—btsTnul 1.300-wiUt tmnp in Mole-gJchnrtbon" Rilk'* 
KcQKlor (JqU. 


arc submiiivd when operated on ) 20-volt dreuits not only increases 
the tjuaniity of light emitted, but also makes the quality of the radiation 
the same as that of the specially designed " photoHood ** type of lamp. 

In Fig. 20 is shown the dtsiribuiiou of visible energy radiated ftoin 
the tungsten filament at various temperaiuies. Hie area beneath 
each curve represents the energy in the visible light radiated at the 
temperature indicated. These curves show* that as the temperature 
of the filament is increased the relative increase of energy in the shorter 
wavelengths is much greater than in the long wavelengths. This is of 
special signihcance to colour photographic illumination. 

' 1 equivaknl foot-cmdle (c.r.et r the bnehtness of ■ peifecth'dlgiisina *urfa« 
of too per onii. rrflociJeo factor nceiviiia an Hlnminatioa of t Rwt^nndk. 

I 

I e.r.e, ~ canUie&isq. ft. 


55 







COLOUR CINEMA roOKAPHY^ 


R. E. Farahfliii notes tliat 

The widely |,£(XF end J,SQ(LwRtt lampj operate at ad cftKiemy of 21 Itmteof 

^ WAM. Iwi if the Ja inertaaed tn 31 or 34 tjin«q> pcrwait the penxntou 

ofWiifrvlfllci rmdwuiw a iboiu doiiUed. A J.SOO-waii lamp apetaiine ai the Iniiw 
dBoewy hw a vistml llghi output of a 2^wan luip. The life of theae lamr* ii 
l^js hours. An onalysb of cost* Shows £1e worth of IsnqM is miOiekni 
to light an unerase vt and permits the cspoims of £4*0 wonh of filoL This ii 
conjutered a Mttffhetoiy ratio. VVhlle [^eparing for ihoottag they should be tm) 






X.£i30 

»£f.ii06- 

Tt.m- 

aaij» 


Fid, [9.—C^odl^povwer dUtribuikirt otHtained from a 2 OOftowairiamn 

^ Ulc typo Mol«y^icltordiiOrt 


i the relatively gnat U^x oalpeic, ihc waiiap« fof coJour 
MW of ibc same order of rttajuuttoJe m fgr t 4 ac k atid wfiiic 


Ir. ordrt ,o Boi bolaoad n«aih^ ,h,o„eh the standard tl««H»louT (thtrt 














1 

Jh^ Ek^iroTTidgnetk 
Spectrum 



- VcIcKH/ 

( 194^000 mU^ P4? 


thAAlDA Urtip* J 


The Rdd«dlrt>n Domain 
of Mazda Ldmp? 



1 . 

Si90( 

> 

««I0 SfSiQO 

7000 j 

eooc to 1 ^ i4 la 


f ^ f 

1 ' ■ rr ' "1 ^ 

1 

r' ■■ ^'K 

^ i||JcHcdMp<ikJ*i rOM !S^nfttS(3p ‘1 

1 |l 

}' '■_ 

BL 



:SHd^Rf.WAVE 


Hon nF C 

.1 

1 

1 INFRARED"^ 




__ ___ '.*3. 

THwPpy^Dryjifcgg 


1 

ao 


^1 


t 


— ynjlow - 'G lii^r- - 








Spectral Energy 


Wid. 

ISovcihl 

larei pfvtiuci 
eo U^l/aviDltl 

do^wfi I&2Q OOA 

’^lO 


Diiiritutrori of Limpf^l l 

43 - 


r I i M I 

DpirCNT 

FtUQftESaKT 


Ssciiifin 
Maricul'if IPd 

of 


jPrLfKipii U;. 

I RjpdiajiQP dV 
JCerfn^idal 

{Um|iS 

ZOOO 

t AngifrCn^i * O.OWOdO01 cr^i frmPMj-«fl.OWOWOOW 7 


3DdC 


4W} 


45W 


»doo 




60<» 


BtOO 


WAVELENGTH ^Angtt^oni UniH 


l^adiiiKVfi P«q^i 
f*r U^fipi «t 4iii«fth| 

[friifUMni op*i'iTrti| t*in. 

_ [^itutn 

'TN rtM^jF^ipOffl nn|# ftt fl liOUKPPt 

lilittipl, fiLriiLii t4-1 

ImC.OOD Art4*irpr»Ti — « 

itii bii3b Tcrripprit^T^ 


f — Ikit 5kutfi:rm:ii!nclk;i^fi^M^ni,e^4Ktjicff rjilibu imn iOurt;ics uml ikn^ikti ibiiiJiMi 

of' cnfir^v of I hHt- iBv ruirr/F.t.r f>/ V. S . /bf 

[iktw^ni iffh f6-S?, 



































































? 

ii 


I 



I 



I 



I 

■ 

J 








tHE TlfeoRFTICAL (JAStS 





Cctming GUss Works woro requested to copy the gelatine fitter as 
closely as possible, and tbey proiIutKd a gloss now known as Coming's 
Lunar Wliitic No, 570. AcmnI density nteasureRients from sensitornciric 
data taken at the time the colour phoiographs were made show the 
light from this combination of lamp ani filter to have 100 units of red, 
102 units of green, ami 99 units of blue—an almost perfect white 
(FiS. 21). 


J40 

!30 


4000 4400 4800 5200 5600 

Wa^-tengthjn Aogstpom Units 

Ffo, —Spoctml liislribulion io tha vlaibTc [i^gioa from tinigitcill flliiiTxni^ of 

equal wnttqye hul di^rrcnt UtiipcTTUunn. (Llmiermaii, HunUley* EiMlsgcnO 


At u rnc^rting of the Society of Motion Picture Engineers held in 
J955 Mr. MUi ssidi ** Test^ nMdc in our laboratory indioite u 5 per 
certi, drop io vol wilt tower the colour^temperatun: of the LUumionot 
by abou[ 75 in uihor words, ifihe colour-tcndpcraiunc of n photoflood 
lamp (ihb type of lamp now koowni ai * MovicflcN>ii ') at US volts 
is 3.500' K., a drop to 11*> vntu will tower the tempemuire to about 
3^425" K. and n rUe to 120 volts will mi^e the lamp to 3,575^ K/" 

St was noted that the temperature of ihe MovieJIood kmp U 
3,450" K-*" Tungsten melw at 3,655 K., so wc arc not a ^renf dcaJ 
below the tnclliog-polnl of tungsten. 

57 















































COLOUR ATOORAPHV 



^na 

Fitter- 


■W awi 

Wa vtfie/t^h (A, 


im. 


Fio. 2t. 



80 

>* 

4 70 
+) BO 


,8a»' 

aioo* 


JJO 


r/2: Sf*-fi<)al Itmcten l»ni)» when apemuA a vouosei 

other linn iheir nte«l value*. Accurate vo tage {nratiol« ow^n i^i i,, „kS? 

snphy. (S.M,P.t Studio 

S» 













































rJlF tHfilJkETtCAl. BASIS 


It would W5>rUi ^hik lo usi* hmpi in series with a very imaU 
rheostat and adjust for coiu$Uint voltage in order that the blue to red 
ratio in the vLsibk speclmm tnay mti change during the course of 
shooting a scene/* 

In America the foUovviug tUDgstcii filiiineeiL Male-Richardson lamps 
arc avaJkble for oolour photography: 


Tti/sgsiiLn filanu^nf Spottumpx and fh<fdtaitjps. 

l“ig. 23 (Ah (B)p and (C) illu-^traie the various lamps dCiiCrlhed below. 

(10) ^ A/.i?. Type 16 CmeUie. —A spun aluminium reflector, Imishcd 
ii^ide by wire brushing and chemical treatmeni, which gives it a 
ditTusing characteristic: used where lighlness and poitahiUty arc re¬ 
quired. 

(11) Broadside iDoubtes), —^l‘wo flood-type reflectors boused in 
one ujiit, used for floor, side^ and overhead lighting. One of the first 
incandcscctit unlLs madCi 

(12) Brotidild^ — Similar to Lamp Mo. 11. but occommo* 

cLumg only one bulb. 

(15) M.R. Type 43 Ri/le lamp ^ —Slamped metal reflectcfi ebromiam 
pluted vviih r^d corrugaUnnA for diffusiaiL Used for genenil floor 
lighting. 

(14) Sky tight — A shallow diffuse reflector about 24 im in dtamcicf. 
Used below and above sky backings and screens where Dat, even 
light disLribuiioa is rcquiTed. 

(15) Ov£rki:ad Sifip £ 411 ^*—A tnough-LLke unit containing sockets 
for five 100-wutt PS-52 bulbs. Used to supply fill-in light where it k 
difficult to use a more bulky bousing. 

< LG) M./f. Type 4!4 Senwr Sainfspot —A 14-ta. diumetcr Fre^ncf* 
type lens. An Alzac spherical mirror ts u^ ai the rear of the bulb 
to direct the light towards the kns. Uicd. where high-wattage units 
are desinible, for bocMightijig, front-light mg, and side-ligh ting, 

flT) ^ Semor ^ — Simlbr use to Ltimp No. 16„ 

(IS) A/,/?. Type 410 Irniar lO-m. diameter Fre^nel- 

lype kns. An Alzac spherical mirror Is used at tlie rear of the bulb 
to direct the light toward the lens. Used for back-lighting, front- 
lightings and modelling tvithin its iniensity range, 

(19) M. Af* Jutiior ^ — Similar use to Lamp No. IS. 

(20) Type 406 Bahy Snfar.Tpnt — A 6-in. diiinietur Fre,'fnd- 
type lens. An AItbc spherical mirror is used at the rear of the bulb 
to direct the light toward live tens. The ^mafi ofthk lamp permils 
its use in ptucc^ where the larger bmps cannot be accommodated, 
panictilarly where it is necessary to cooceat a source of higli-lttlenstty 
light 

» Kbuibtrrs rtfer m MoTc^Rkhardson identiiicauotr 

59 


COI.OUR ClNBMATOGRAfHV 


(21) B. & M, Baby Similttr use to Lamp Mo, IB. 

(22) B. li M. Dinky fitky.—An extremely situiU Fresnel-lype !en$ 
uiiii fioeucnmodatuig 100* or 150-W4ti bulbs, For use where high* 
intensity controllabk light is needed at close range from a uwU which 
may be hidden behind a pillar, mounted on the camera dolly, or emried 
by an assistant. 


Tabl^ 2. — Lastfs (TiiNGmiN FiLAMi-Sfr) fou Skt Liuiitinc» 


M.R. 

Lamp 


Uj/rfh 


ID 

u 

12 

n 

u 

15 

|[S 

u 

IS 

1^ 

20 

2i 

72 

23 

24 

25 


M.R, Type iB Cbcllte 
BfOiKbide |!>oiii7Cci^p . 

Broudside (Sii^C3> .. 

M-R. Type 45 Rife L^p . , 
SVfisht , 

Ovcrhtstid Strip Laitip 
M.R. TjTt 414 Senior SDiiirspoi 
a^M-Senbr 
M.R. Type 410 Jiiidiir 
B. St M- Jynbr 
M,R. Tjpc406 B»by 
A sM, iiaby Kc^Lite 
B, ^ M. Dinky Inky 
MR, Type 226 24'iQH Stm^poi 
M.ft. Type 360 SuTL^t 
R. A. Or Mr. Leri^Type 

Sut Jio Spoiiimip 



1 

Jlr/16 jVfi. 
iB.a 
R'Jt 

Bulb fto. 
iCfiburi. 

AfKfl. 

Max. 

60 

bd 

11 


90 

90 

11 

9 

90 

90 

5 


60 

60 

IDot 11 

_ 

m 

ISO 

7 

2 

■— 

— r 

n 


10 

44 

2 

2 

10 

44 

2 

2 

ID 

44 

3 

3 

ID 

44 

3 

3 

« 

40 

5^ 

5^ 

ft 

40 

5-6 

3-0 


— 

TpfS 



44 

1 

T 

12 

24 

i 

T 

e 

40 

1 t 

2 


■ 6)F^ irfmilt la UMJiJ* pJhaEDvnpklc IUlT. 

i Fur bjulcnidil^hilc pbiyloenip4i^. 

(22) Type 226 24-m. l>'u/ispot,—A 24-m. diameter 

mjTTOr, with a spill -ring that alloivs only projected light to leave the 
lamp. Used for back-llghiing large sets, b wlitcb case the 
are lemov^ frmn the pedestals and are mounted on pandtels or 
plmforms hiuli at the top of the set or hung from the stage loof or 

(24) \f.R, Type 360 36-rff. Suitipot.—A 36-in. diameter glass 
J^ror. Used where the highest Intensity of projected light is required 
rrom an incandcsoefii tungsten source. 

The FfiiQreseefit £4>w-Ff‘es^ure i\fercwy Vapour Lump 

Tht^ arc very low'-prcssure mcreuty electric discharge tubes, known 
|o Bntain as Type MCF, coated on the inside with phosphors, which 

fluoresw mainly to radmuou of 2.S37 A., of which the lube is an 
etncicnl generator. *’ 

6 () 

























& 

If 

^ hfl 

11 

si 

kK 

is 


33 


C- 1^ 
■5 qi 
|j c 

fi 

p 

1^ 

Ig 

^q£ 

-i 

« «c. 


t/^dc/sw^, 60| 



















{Courtesy of Genetai Electric Co., U,S.A.) 


THE THEORETICAL BASIS 




O 

> 


Q 

> 


g 




tJ 2 iplieripit^ PSpear fthn^Kd. T«"tuhular. A—miMlincti pear-tshuped. l^unilKn rtftfr la diamclcr in | ]ac|a, 

X Approximai«: inrended to impidcnwjit dayliQlitp 









































COLOUR CINEMATOGIlAFHr 


The pressure of mercury b of the order of 6-10 microns (approxi¬ 
mately one-huodred-lbousajidti] of m ai nios|i^ere). A range of phos¬ 
phors b available giving many colour possthiliiLes, Zinc beryllium 
silicate and mapesium tuagstale used in different combinations give 
a close approximation to various phases of nntural daylight. The 
eflickncy is very high, a 40-W. lube delivering 50 lumens per wait 
against a Class A-i tungsten hbmeni lamp which k rated ai 20 lumens 
per watt. In Britain {S-W. lo SO-W. lamps are available. The 
characteristics of the 30-W. lamp arc as follows: 


Limip 

LcJlUlh of SOUfK 
Diameter of source 
Supply' 

Supply %d[£ 

LnitiAf efikicoo' - - 
Ljtnp voltaic drop 
Lamp oinrent 
Ufe 

ConUol (Star 


.. n 

v. 5 ft* 

. . 1 ) in. 

A.C 

200/250 volw 
. 35 LM 

. 110^^14 

3>000 Jiom^ 

.. Chok^ Jintl ilanin^ 
switch 


In the U.S.A. a large rutgc of tubes is Jivaibble, varying from 6 
watts to 100 watis^ and in length from 9 in. to 8 ft, CaSour-tempera- 
turcs arc roughly approximulcd of 3,SOO'A5tM)' K. and 6.500' K., the 
laiicr being the equivalent of Ultiminanl C of the l.C.I. system. The 
rated average life of these tubes varies from 1,500 hours for the 6- and 
8-W. T-5 tubes to roughly 5.000 hount for the IQO-W. T-17 lube. Tlicse 
lamps arc used in the U.S.A, on D.C. circuits by employing a series 
resistance in connection with a suitable induction coil and starting 
switch, but the clVicicncy must tuitumlly be greater with normal A.C. 
operation. However, since the stroboscopic effect must be eliminated, it 
Is necessaiy to run nuorescent tubes on D:C.drcuiufor motion picture 
photography. Large banks of ihcw lubes are very' useful in the studio 
as a source of generally diffused light giving the minimum of shadow. 


0. HJumiiauiiv hsTing Cuatinuuiis aud Discuntinuous 
Spcctni Mixed 

Examples 

ftigh-hitenslly Carbo/t Art, flane Are. 

Hiih Prtsttirt Meretiry Vapour Latupj. 


CyVHBON ARCS 

Carbon arcs today in use in Uic motion picture indiwtry fc»r photo¬ 
graphy and projection, are of three types-ilie low intensity arc the 
flame are, and the high-mtcnsity arc. The former will be described in 
another section. 

62 




T}[E>0KE7K AL IIASIS 

Mr, W. W. Lorilir of ^ National Carbon Co. Int*,. U.S,A., has 
kindly supplied llie following authoritalivc inrormaUoii;— 

(.anttilijr <?/ Sattoitil! Carhvn (Ttfi tnc.^ 

■' The fliunc lire is one in which ihe cniinr arc siream is made 
lumme^l by tfiu* presence of fliune muteriafs. A photograph is 
shown in FijL 34. The electrodes dittfr from low intenshy carbons by 
haviiijE a somewhat Iiirger core containing chemical compounds capable 
of radiariflg eflicicntly when volatilized into the arc stream. This arc is 
characterized by a high luminous efficiency. The chief motion picture 
usage of the dame are is for the production of general lUnminalton in 
motion pLatirc studios.’' 

*' The highdntenshy carbon arc is one m w'hich, in addition to the 
light from the menndescent crater surface, t lie re is a signilicaut amount 
of light originating in the gaseous region immediately In front of the 
carbon as a result of the combination of a high current density and an 
atmosphere rich in flame materials. The brightest portion of this arc 
occurs in the crater on the cud of the carbon. The looitiou of the 
source of radiation is shown in Fig. 35, Tiie elcctiodes for this type 
of arc conmin chemical compounds simitar to those used in flame an; 
electrodes. The current density of high mtensity arcs is generally about 
5(X) amp^s per square inch, whereas thin for (iatnc arcs is ordinarily 
below this value. The use of the cerium family of rare earths produces a 
higli crater brightness and a while light. The crater brightness of 
comtnereiul carbons ranges from 330 to more than 900 candles, sq. mm. 
and citcecds 2,000 cundlcs;sq. mm. for experimentnt carbons. The 
color temperature of the light from the crater is in the neighbourhood 
of &,tXK>' K. file high-inlcnsuy are u±i4!d it) cojumcnriiiI fQirni 
powcf input of as mu-cb as 17 KW, It thun combijits the piopertio of 
high source brightness, daylight color of light and very high power input 
and radiation output per lamp. Tliis light sounx U used both for spot 
tamps in studio lighting and for projccUon of moliou piclufea," 

For description of lamps embodying carbon arcs set below, under 
" Studio Lighting.*' 

HIGIf-PRFSSURE GASEOUS DLSCElARGli: LA>U*S 

In tugh'pressure mercury lamps a gas such as neon or argon at a 
pressure of a few centimetres of mereury is used to Initiaie the dis¬ 
charge betweeu ilic cathodes, which arc raised to a icnipcrature at 
whicli they act as ihermkmic sources. Owing lo the liigJi energy 
input the mercury becomes vaporized, the pifessure ijtcrcuscs to 
i atmosphere or even higher, depending upon the design of lamp 
and operating conditions, and the spectrum exhibits only those Un ^., 
that are charactcrisUc of mercury along wiih a certain amount of 
continuous radiation. 


63 


CDLOUk ClN£MATOGItAFHV 

When on clccijon iMissessiog ihc vclociiy comspondiit^j to ao 
flCcckmtEon through 4-9 whs collides with a naereury atom, the latter 
is excised to a lugher energy statep and when the system pa^s spontane¬ 
ously from this higher state lo the aomiat^ monochromatic rtudintioa 
is emitted in accordance w iih the rcktion 

w here v is the frequency of the radiation and /r is a uaiversaL constant 
(known as the qmtiium constant)-* The corresponding wavclengih 
U given by the relation 

where c is the irelodty of Hghtp anti X is the wavelength of the mdliition 
in Cm. 

In the ease of Tncfcury the Gist excited stale of the atom ^ves rise 
lo a resonance Line of uliru-vioki (X—2,537 A). These invisible 
radkhons are absorbed by ihc atom end are known as resonance lines.* 
In order to obtaiii vksibLe Ughi from mercury it is necessary to excite the 
mercury atom lo about 5-7 volu or higher, and the whole spectrum 
appears only wbeu the election velocities exceed that correspondiog to 
to 4 volts. 

The various designs of the high-pressure discharge bmp may be 
divided into two categories i 

(1) ihose operating at \ aimosphcre and uiilizing glass envelopes, 

and 

(2) those operating at higher pressured and requiring the use of 

quartz envelopes. 

In the former lamps the icmpcraLure of the inner glass wall h about 
350 the pressure of mercury' 1 atme^phen:, and the iniiiaj efficiency 
40 lumens per watt. The average brightne5:s- of the light'source itself 
is about 30 candles per aq. cm. These bmps rudkte very little 
mom than the nomial mercury spectrum. Tlicy are useless for studio 
illumimition unless balanced with suitable tungsten sautces to com¬ 
pensate for the absence of red lighL Even nnxtiirc and distribution 
have proved a very difficult problem. 

Recently the Briiish Thomson-Houston Company have perfected 
an extremely imporlanl type of high-pressure eloctric discharge lamp 
in w^htch the deficiency of red in the earlier types is made good by the 
introduction of cadmium- Low-pressure cadmium mercury bmps 
have been available for some years, and they have Iscen used with 
conspicuous success for the printing of Dufay color film. A lamp 
worldng at a. few atmospheres was produced In America before ihe 

■ A=PlMuiX^*C(Mi5iAni‘-6'SSx lO"” ^^rg. 

” HtsoTouKc ndjaUon s the TOdiiiijoa produced by ironsfiioEis from the low'est 
cxcKcd lii the numull ^tele. 

64 




14 —Qirbon ait: dUscHufgc. 



Fig. is,—D.C inKMlty CJirhon ak *M1i rotalini posiiivc oarboa 


^ 6 * 






tfvm fi- 


THE THEORETICAL BASIS 


but inns bi^-prcssuic kunp presumed peculiar probkma 
wliich have only very recently been solved, Tlic new bmp belongs to 
a type now known as “ Compact Source^"" and the Britisb. Thomson- 
Houston series h ideDti0ed as Typo ME. This i$ an air-coolcij lamp 
and consists of a strong qiLirtz bulb with walls several millimerfes 
thickj approximately spherica! in sbape^ into which ate sealed two solid 
cylinders of tungsten, known as the main ckclrodes^ which art supported 
on tungsten shanks. On each of ibese shanks is wound a spiral of 
tungsten wirCt coated with an emitting material^ which is known as 




SrO 


g 

I 




^€00 SCO(> ^ TOGO 

Fm, 27^.—S|5«tral eoeriy dtsirfbuiion of the 7S0 W. Type ME xVlciciiiy Oidniiijm 

Lamp. 

the slatting electrode. An auxitjary electrode of bare turtgsten wire 
is scaled into the bulb with its end adjacent to one of the spurting 
electrodes and spaced atjotit 1 mm. from it, and connected throufh 
a high resistance outside the bulb to the other lenninaJ of the bmp. 
The arc gap measured between the two tnain electrodes is approxi¬ 
mately 5-10 mnii The bulb comains a filling of gas at a low pressure^ 
The current is led into the main clectrodwi through molybdenum- 
foil strips which mate a ’^ncaum-tight seal in the quarts. This has 
proved a difficult task, but seals capable of carrying no Ics tiimi 
t 65 











M^rci/rg drcf^f'i/Jrt lamfi. 














































i 


1 



s 


Vk 

o 


SI 


ifl 



1 

























1 









































COLOUR ClN^MATOC^RAPliV 


s^vercl htiiidrcd amperes into dcctrodfis in a quartz bulb have bow 
beea made. 

Lamps rated ai 2*5 KW* and above liave been used for Ihc pho|o+ 
graphy of colour ^Ims Jo the studio* find the haUuice of the separation 
negatives is practkally identical to that obtained wiiii the usuai high* 
intensity ates. h will be observed from die spectral di$mbution of 
energy (Fig. 27) that the cadmiirm va^ur h responsible for a suong 
pnission nt the wavelength 6^438 A. This emission is at a useful position 
in the red region^ since the transmituinces of red and green fillers do not 
overlap here. This is ii-ur of additive processes^ such as Dufaycotor^ 
besides those processes in which scpantie films are employed, such fis 
Technicolor. 


5 


4 



30GO 4M> sm ^ $m 


pKi* 17A.— spectra! d]:atrihiJlion of ladinlian aftet cadmium h ^5 boeo addfU to the 

iTcnniry urc \smp^ 


A prevtous dfifect of lamps of iliis type was that the maximum embsioa 
took sevuraJ minutes lo be attained. In fact, the lump had to wami up 
until all the mercury h*ad vapomed. This would be a nuisance ia 
the studio, htii the duadvantage has been etiminuicd by onetatius 
the lamp in an oven, so dmi the mercuiy ts kept vaporized and ilw 
arc a ignited whenever unjoired by applying a high-voltasc imuulse 
to the lamp. Full light <»rt then be obtained with virtuidly no dclav 
The high*preisurt cadmium mercury Ump will onemte from 
supplies down to J10 volts, and will operate on D,C. or AC Sn«3 
design is used for DX. intbe la^CT sizes, ' ' 

available in England of thb tytw is **50 
500. and 1,000 watts, and eapefimemal lamps have been raSe in 5-' 
66 1 





































Fhj. 26.—Three forms tif 250-walt Coinjiacl Lamp. 

iOy Sriiai, ^ol M,! 


1 




V-Ki. 2«Aj~2SS>-wtt[i Type M£ 

Cuiupuct Source Boit Lamp, 

(VT^ nMirft4r ^ r4^ rhMu.>iiN 

liaifiM&M Co. UjrfJ 


Fia. 5<X3.wfln Type ME ali- 

cDotcd bmpf. 























Fb. 2SC.—Tji»e ME Fio. Type ME Single^ 

Compaci Soiuve Liirnp, etttled Compact Sowcii Lanip. 

Odirih Cfl. 




Fffl. ISEL—lO-Kw. I>OLib]iixndcd CMtipiact Soilrcc Lnn^. 

r Cs^fn «r //j jh Tli^iDiHlffiNircM 17#, tjjf j 




THE THEORETICAL BASIS 


S(K, and 2Q-KW. shcs. The bigh^power l^mps no outer glass 
vclope^ and ihcy mav be either sih^c- or double-ended in consimeiion. 
(Figs. 28 A,B,C,d;e.) 


Table S.^CHARACTEUttsrtcs Compact SociLcn Mercury Vapour 

Lamps 


(CoKrfejy British Thomson-tloifsion Co., Ltd,) 


Ruling of kmp 

250 

500 

1.000 

5.000 » 

lO^OQO • watts 

CurrtJii ^^ppiro:i^) + ^ 

‘t t 


{&6 

72 

150 A. 

Voliago drop 

60-75 

60-75 

60-75 

60-00 

60 80 volts 

Supply voltoacf -, 

200/250 m/m m/m 

2W250 

200/250 voUa 

Ajk kngtti 

3-75 

5 

55 

10 

10 mm. 

ApproA- acc widia 

1 5 

2 

75 

75 

10 mm. 

NLix. briphtoru inMaJ .. 

20.000 

20,000 

15.000 

45.000 80.000 e. per iq. 4^111 

Luminous d!l:jcncy finp- ■. 

PTEM,) 

40-45 

40-45 

45 

50 

50 1. per w. 

Ovemn IcnaUi 

IJO 

240 

245 

340 

450 mm. 

Diikinctcr of outer bulb .. 

64^55 

65 

45| 

85-90t 

|]0t nun. 


• EipmiimttUl tw™. 

I A C. m u.C. ivtKM tH D.C. 'm rxiingi mbyhvt. l^iJOG Will oA 

lICf-iRib with Ipdnik KlAlni^ECillt. 

I ouurt in tiu^ ikf | j(wO v«ja 9 .bt 3 vv. 

The brightness at the centra of the ate ranses from iOfiOO to IOO.DOO 
eandJes per sq. cm.^ depending upon the arc length and the 
of the bmp, and the effidcncy is between 4f and 50 Jumens prr wiitL 

The light output h more constant than a carbon arc, and nuctmtions 
in the voltage of the supply cau^ smaller vumttons iii the light output 
than in the esase of a tungsten lamp. For cample, a 10 per cent, 
rise in mains voltage inurcases the output by IQ per cent, in the 
ease of the MH lamp and by 36 per fxnu with a ttmgsten llbinent pro¬ 
jector bmpH 

There can be no doubt that this beautiful lamp will play ii most 
important part ui the fimirc of studio illumination for colour photo* 
graphy. The steadings of spectral ctuality and quaniity of the light 
emitt^ will roconimead it strongly lo directors who have suffeied 
from arc troubles in the pcLsi. Furthennore, there U bound to be a 
comidenable saving In studio persoruieL shtce there does not seem to 
be any reason why one man should not opemte a iaige number of 
lamps.^ 

It has been dcmonittrated that both Technkolor and Dufaydirome 
colour balance and rendering are hardly distmgiiishablo from those 
obtained with Ihc standard higb'inicasity arcs corrected with Y- 
hlteis. 

^ A full ™rj(c of comptett studio uniu h now avaEiibJe in En^nnd, from MDh^- 
Rkturdsorf. Lid. 

B7 


COLOUR. CIMeUATOGKAPUY 


STUDIO illumination 

Twfnli' year* of resenrch and devolopinsni lie behind the efficient 
bmp^ whidt today are ready in the iiudio to obey the imaginative 
faculty of a lighting artist. The instrumenial means which the artist 
employs In the case of the motion picture are of eatraordinary com¬ 
plexity and refinement, bat while it is true that within ihe province of art 
the creator of the ineata is unlikely to receive a glory equal to that 
bestowed upon the creator of the eiid which it is the object of the means 
to attain, we technicians have our own roll of honour and high upon 
that list stands the name of Mole-Rlchardson. This famous partnership 
originated in !?27, when Peter Mole joined E. C. Richardson and set 
up iheir business in a ^rage on Santa Monica Boulevard in Hollywood. 
They developed the first complete range of high-wattage units which 
represented a revoluiionaiy change in lighting lecbriique. There were 
'* Broads, Low Broadsides, Hi-low Broadsides, Bunchlights, Rifles. 
18-inch Sun Spots, and Id-inch Sun Spots ” and other famous types. 

The advent of sound ted to fundamental alterations in design in order 
to eliminate sound ori^nating in expanding metal or bolts and nuts 
adjusting them selves to temperature gradients. 

But it was Technicolor acting as taskmaster which forced Mole- 
Riehardson to lum back to the discarded arc as the only practicable 
source to satisfy the greed (ai ihai time) of colour phoiograuhv for 
" light, more light," 

Wc are told thut m 1933, Technicolor requested Molc-Richardson to 
investigate the possibility of dev'cl oping s motion picture arc lamp for 
use as a general lighting unit. The spectficQlions they submitted were: 

1. The bmp should produce an Ulujiunatjon level of 200 foot- 
candles, as measured at fifteen feet with a standard Weston 
photometer. 

2. It must have a compamlively fiat distribution curve over a 
projection angle of sixty degrees or more, and the field of illumina¬ 
tion should be devoid of any hot spoti, f.e., areas of iUumination 
that are photographically objectionable. 

3. The feeding mechanism of the lamp should be so designed as to 
provide a rcasotntblc uniform level of light intensity during jis 
period of operation, and the Kpceirum of the light emitted should 
not show any alteration of its characteristics during the period of 
operation. 

4. It should be silent in upcralion, so that it may be satisfactorily 
operated in conjunction with modem sound recording apparatus. 

5. It should take such a fonn, and be so mounied, that it wiU be 
convenient for plaoemenl, and be of such weight a$ to be easily 
handled on (he set. 

68 





F». 2 ^.—Speclnl chaia^erUtica of littrioua typa of anc« (F. T- BomUtd) nrtd 
A. C Ddwdcs, Jciit'H. M&l jP/c. £J^., 25^ No, 3^ 1935). 


TUB THEORSTICAL BASIS 


6. It sbQuld be ^onomkR] in opcxaiion witH regitrd Iw tiLieodiificc, 
the consiunptian of current, arid carbon electrodes. 


With ihc EssisLincc of the National Carbon Company in the design of 
spcclnJIy coned carbons and with a new app/oacb to control of gap, a 


VECTMt OCKr WTIh&JtpOH 
HE 

I l^ffiMflOuATTU flrt 

* I _ i ifl £W AT C f T 

^ I—i^C0»«Cia*rr4«A 

***- _ |i* aa CH At FT 



0/7its 


?0&o 


Fk. 3Dv— Ww: Speoml tatjsif dlsinhuiion^ 13-0 mm. Il.l. carEioa arc ii 
volts, tl5 amp.—tbronidi V-i liher- 

Dotitd lint: Sa!iir radkikm oi w Icvd* 


great improvement was effected. These lamps housed the White 
Flame arc in wWch the major proportion of Ific li^t Hus is derived 
from the tncandcscent panicles of the rate earths such as ceriimi 
streaming out in a flame from the targe cores of the carbons. The 

69 









































































COLOUR CiNB^ATOC^RAPliV 


(lame is tlie source of light rusher ihati the inten^dy hot tips of the 
carbons^ At first Mole-Richardson produced a Twin Broadside and an 



“PPtotio™ on itin so^alkd •• Hish-InKusiiy " 
70 

















































































































THB TREQRETICAL (JA51S 


ThiJ bigh-inlcnsity ^ire was developed to cneei the requireroent^ of 
optical projecLtoo which demtid a small j^inmolricalJy-ihaped source 
of the maximum InieasUy. Tlic source, if ii was to be [he crater of an 
aic, bad to be unobstructed by the negiiiive curbop, whkh was even- 
lually pkcecl at an angle of 127" to the positive. To obUiin even 
emission it was found necessary to rotate the positive carbon and to 
feed it fon^'ard mcchaniciLly, (The rotation must be in excess of 
10 r.p.m.) The passage of the (Tow of electrons frofU the negarive 
carbon on their way to the core of the positive thrmgh the voIatiii7-ed 
particles of the flame issuing from the posiiiveT superheats these in the 
ensuing bcnibardmeii;i and thus there i$ built up the tremendous 
temperature of from 9,440-t F. This state of offait^ h present 


no 

too 

■Ii 60 

Vi 


70 
EO 

sa 

40 

S so 
20 
fO 


I 

.Sr 




%00 








































■ ti 

























f 

1-^ 


















/ 


P-"’ 





































1 


/ 

(L 


















7 

j 













































































4000 $000 6000 

Wo^-fengthjn Angstrom Unit^ 


7000 


Fio. il Utw: SpectniJ (listtihuiicm, S rum.'? mm. Ml* studfa carhotu 
at 37 volis, 4U amp. Dotted /in^;: Sot^r mdioiion al sea Ic^'tl. (Lmdemton, tiaiidEr^ 
atiil ftoJeers. Jovr/t, Sac, .yfoL Pic. June 1^3.) 


not far from the bottom of the crater of the poslUven Since the true 
temperature is equivalent to that of the exterior of the sun the spcctml 
distribution uf energy is ibniiar (Fi^. 29,30, 3DA, 30B. 3 1 ) and so is tB 
colour lemporatufc (afthough not identical owing to the spectruin of 
ihd eniis!tu>ii of a carbon arc notcomespouding exactly with ihat of a 
thcorclically perfect radiator)^ However, U is quite near enough for the 
purposes of colour photography and we may regard the mdiution of a 
high“intensily arc as □ppronching very closely that of sunlight in all 
respects. Actually the bombarded rare earths emit too much deep blue 
and uLtra-violct and these radiations have to be diminated by use of a 
pak ydlow (minus blue acid violet) Bhrr, which is at ways used wtih the 
H J. arcs. 

Originally the HJ. arcs were available in two siites* the M-R Type 90, 
operBling at 120 ampero and the M-R Typo 170, operating at 130 

71 


































COtOUR CmEMATOGRAPtlV 


amperes. Today these units are known as the ** Molan; ” and the 
latest addition to the range, namely M-R Type 450, is an immensely 
powerfuJ bmp opera ling at 225 amperes. 

These H.L bmps have been the prineipal souree of light for Techni- 
eolor productions, and it is tiardly pmctlcabie to undertake any serious 
production in a studio unequipped with an adequate range of Motarcs, 
Difficulties w«e experienced with the light distribution given by 



Fm. 32-—.M-R T>r« 4S0 Art SpoKtunp. 


spoi^ps in the eariy days: parabolic mirrors gave dark spots when 
flooded and normal condenser lenses were unsatistactorv far manv 
reasons. The probity of even distribution was solved by combining a 
bJih^Pr^^ type plancHronvex lens, originaUy invent 

u AuguiUnc Jean Fresnel, for lighthouses, 

o?n ** ofconcCTirtc facets are cut tato the convex face 

of a pUno-wnv&t lens. It cun be made very large in diameter vet^ 
short focal length and nevertheless thin in Slion Vijs. 34 . 35 ) ’ ^ ^ 

72 



Fiik 34. — Frtfanf view of a FfesiieS f^pc pf 4 i 4 iD-eaiive)< kns 
US iiwd in MoloRitlun^soin S|iotr4iinpi. Tihis HTn&v.ilkjn 
rcvol<JLii>ni/^ spotlrghllnij tqiiiptnetil- 


7tr 







Fie, M. M..R.I>iMirL Bf<Kidside. M,.R.Ty;«i7S«er anJ m..r ,24 Broadside. 















Fjjf. 3ftA.—M.-lt. Dmfc Tyfw- -lo. 











FKi- JOO-Wflit Junior 

SoIiir$|hii Lirntp. M.-R- 

r>i^ 4&S, 


r-lll 1^/ Mvir^Mii^ui^difin t l.'jif ^iwJ L / tii ^ 


FKi. 3 *C^S-Kw, Senior 
Sobriipoi Lamp. M--R. 
Type 414 h 



Fkj. 3^D. — 2,000^ w.^1 
Junior Sobr^ixx Lamp. 
Type 410. 


Fwl JifiE t,000 - Fkj, 

vnui IScKibEt Ljgbi BroaO- watt 

side Lamp. 

|fl;» rtn^hri F of MvffM^kiuB%hTfn l&ifiyttJj 


36F.—1,000- 
Sjnglc Utflu Rraad- 
^idc Lamp, 












FiQ. 3&G.—M.-R, T>-rie43 Eiflt Lump, 

%0)f fvfiFinr ftf Aii^tikitvridw^m 



Fio. SpOtlampj 4-7. 



F»o. 3^.—l>T[ira H.1 Arc SpoEtamij, 

Type 170, Current: ill votis; 145-150 amperti' D.C 

r>e^jt 5 ne<l orij^lrmUy ta ttkxi ihe rcijuJfcaiicnii oi'phoio- 
SinipbinK coIuureU rmitian ffltiitfci, ih^ ldini|h ha^c Ttnllul 
uic irt tHjth ihdi fletd and in Tor ncrmal 

irKPlwn^pJciuJc pboiJfismpKy, Operating Mu^ly so ihal 
I bey m*y be uwd in a injtzfophone, i hey 

hnvx such Olunimaiing capuciiy that tlscy are lending lo 
dhpla^e 3^' Sun fires. TTwy oft: appllta Wfi for back light¬ 
ing, cress hihlhiB. kty lighlin^ for wide atvd mnw ongk 
froni lighlfns^ dfixH Lightings and Tor all phntograpbk 
iLlunbrialwn dciWKling a hghi of bi^ bfilliance, cnn^lanl 
spcefium giuiliiyp and unifonn dcj^ty. 





¥m. 39.—MoJc-RJiihaittson " SciLif^npt, 

Tvf»c 20A^ t^ith (rrpoti achJ fpkicd. 

Jo boih still nod Fnutiojii-piaunc phou^ph> there nra 
rtinoy where smaik;r light-ptoicelLOB liniH hc&t 

KrtT ihc nhotogrjiphcr. Thfcic hn^'t d wide ntn^ pf baim 
COntrqL T\Ky can be spotted down Iti an OkverEc™e 
iiihl ftocMkd l^^ a 4tV divereengc with no exedteoE photP- 
jgraphic Held «uiinbJc for rncKieltEnB, badt fmni 

nod iiraas hghtbg The tmnti slm of thes* SJX>^v.-dU 
ioJTips penoits ihcir use in spam v^hich i;;:3nnot iicujmnhs- 
(Jfite the tarwr uoiu, unO to tription-pii;iure w«irk in par- 
liculiiri penoits Their concealnieni wiihjo the mDijpn-pitiiire 
wiicti Uiis 














THE THEORETTCAL HASIS 


RkhiiTd$c^ns^d \n 1936: in ihemaiion pktujc industry^ it t* seldom 
neces^^ry to project ^ ^poi be^iin nurrowr ih^n 10 degrees, which 
provides a spot oT light about eight feel In diameter ai a distance of 
50 Feel. It is, however, desirable lo be able to Rood a lamp to a diver¬ 
gence as ETCai as 40 degrees^ provided that the projected beam at this 
wide angle is of suflkieat intensity to be of photographic use."' 

And further: “ For the conditions under which spa damps are used, it 
is desirable that ihe beam have its highest iniensity at the <;:entrc and that 
the edge^ be sofLr as lo permit overlapping die beams of several lamps 
without building tip high inlcnsitics in the areas overlapped."* He was 
describing the Ni-R Type 210 Juntor Sokrspol using a G-48 C 13 
pipost Mazda globe. 

To-day all live Mol*>Richardson spoilufnps employ this principle of 
light projeclion. 

W. W. Lozier, of the National Carbon Co, Jnc,, U.S.A., slates: 
“ The lighting of motion picture studios for motion picture photography 
can be classified into three types of application: general Lighiing^ 
modeling lighting and background projcClion Of special effects lighting. 
General lighting is a term used lo describe ihc flaL diffused illuminatioii 
used on the seL It renders ihc ^t photographically visible* ilLiuninates 
shadows and is the coimterpun of $ky light. Modeling lighting or key 
lighting arc terns used lo describe that ilSuminaiion whkh is highly 
direcltonal and is used lo creaie high lightH and conirasts. It b the 
caunterpnii of sunlight. Background projection or process projection 
are terms which are genereUy used to describe ihat Ulaminaiton which 
is highly direciional and is u^d lo create high lights and conirasia. li 
is the coupLierpad of sunlight. Background projection or pr^ss 
projection are tenns which are gciicratly used to describe the practice of 
projeclLng a background on a translijoeni screen at the rear of a set, to 
accompany the live action on the set** 

■^Modeling Ijghiing levels for Technicolor^ for exatnpki range from 
250 to 900 ft* candles* General iiluminalion is usually only J to i as 
greaL Screen iniciisities required with rear projection depend on the 
transmission characierislics of the screen hui must be matniained high 
enough to blend with the foregruiintl aciion." 

Table 6 shows ihe chamclcrisiics of tJie most ooimtiott carbon arc 
lumps: used for motion picture set lighting^ Tlic first three lamps listed 
are examples of units used for general iHumiliation. The type 40 M-R 
broadside lamp h an improved version which is superseding the other 
two. The optical system consists of a meial rdlecior plus diffusing 
glass. In each of these uaits two unes are employed side by side 
connected in series, M-R 40 lamp is shown in Figs. 36 and 36A. 

Lumps Nos* 4 to 7 are examples of modem spotlamps (Fig- 37), 
All of tlicst employ a Fresnel type glass lens w'liich provides a well- 
controlled bcum. By meani of a simple lidjustmenl the beam spread 

73 



COI-OUD. CINBHATUGRAFHY 



I 





74 















TUB TKBDItETICAL BASIS 



'pjff *' fvfveztjotf it/fjwkfie aStvw*' 


75 





























































COLOUR ClN£MATOOR4PllY 


can be varied from a ^malL spot to a wide ilocKi. The carbons aiid 
opcraling conditions employed for these different lamps are shown m 



Table 6 p The Type 170 lamp is shown in Fig* Lamps Nos. B nnd 9 
are examples of earlier types of itniu employing a parabolic mirror 


Table 7.—Carbons for Set Ughtino Lamps. 
(£b' tf fAc f'iathfa! Carbtm f/K.^ U.S^n} 


Carbmt 

No. 


1 

2 

3 

4 

5 


6 

7 

a 

9 

to 

IJ 

II 


Pastfiw CorAiw. 


8 jTOfl.x 12 inch CXL MF Studio 

9 mm.x20 inch H.L ProJtCEor ,. 
13-6 nun.x 22 inch H I- Studio , ^ 
16 pun.x^ (nch HI. SEudio 

16 rnm. ^ 22 inch Super Studio 


i nim-x 12 Inch CC MP Studio . , . ^ 

7 mrTLx9 inch C,C MF Studio Negative 

f r K B inch CrC- MF Studio Negiitlve *. 

X $ iiteti C,C MF Sludiu Negative . ^ 
iS x9 inch Keaiy Duly Omiip Negultve 
7 fmn.X 9 inch Siipres Negativ<e 
11 rnuL X 10 iflicli plam MP Studk> ^ 


Atnpms.* 


Am 

Voif*. 


ISMJ 

65^70 

imi5 

I40-LS0 

215-225 


IS40 

52-54 

54-56 

64-67 

72^75 


* A* msd Ift MS IdjBgw. 


which are still used where U » desired to project narrow beams of very 
great penetrating power. The Type 65 spoUnmps are being replaced 
in most cases by the more modem and ellkicnt Types 90, 170 and 450 
lamps. The candlcpower distribution for various adjustments of beam 
76 

















tHf theoreticai; sasis 


divergences are shown in Figs. 39A-Q for three spotiamps and one 

broadside lamp. ,, , 

Typical spectral energy disirihution curves of the nidiaUon on the 
arc shown in Fig. 40. The curve for the Type 170 l^P is typical of 
radbtion from carbon arc spotkmps using the highrinlcnsity are. pie 
slight atcess radiation at the blue end of spectrum « ramov^ when 
photographing Technicolor by the use of a Ughi straw Brigham 
Eelatine Y-t filler (Fig. 41). The effect of this on the spectral enstgy 
distribution is also shown on Fig. 40. The energy distributioo for the 



kti.m 

I 




Fmj 39'A-“-CoiMllepoirtr disrribuiiao from * Mole-tlKbiirdwn *' luidgtf spot 
a mwiii, T-10 bulb d-e a biyowi base lamp. 

Type 40 broadside lamp shows that this radiation can be used *‘*001 
nil^tcation for Technicolor to blend with the tillered spodarop. Both 

of t^n^$e can be mixed with dayli^l- a * t 

Tlic power sources employed with carbon are lamps used in siudto 
photography are I^h«aUy special dirret current motor |*«eratore 
delivcSig appioximalcly 120 volts across the ^o i* 

distribuu^tn system. These are generally equipped with lltteT 
remove the commutator ripple which would otherwise produce an 
undesirable noise on the set when burning the arc. 


77 

































COLOIFR ClKEMA-rOGRAPHY 


Terns used in Siudla Lighitng Practke 

terms applied to Uw various units of motion picture studio 
bghtmg equipment are legion and vary from studio to studio, and 
even from month to momb. Sometimes a lamp is described by its 
type number alone; or by the^mted current, in the case of arc spot- 





iOjMJ 


Oegrees of Divor^r^et 







(*0/r.SfitftAO} 

fffX LtJMtdta 

f ^ _ , 


1 7 

\ 

1 

^a£AM. 

IXdMeAl;^ 

SS* St AM 

MAX Ml£AA) 

1 — 

' ! 

1 f 

1 D-; 
1 ^ 

1 — _ 



^-1- i 

orw 




^1/ 




II 






M 4 









fX^ 


" MoJfr-Rieftarfsoai 

int 406 wlih a 7j0^tt, T'24 bulb medium bipost 


*' baby " aofw 
MJ*. type lamp. 


tights; or by the kiiowau rating of tucatidescent units. In some in- 
stanees the m^r diameter supplus the’name. Below are some 
c^moniy used terms, the “ Lamp Numbers " referring to the ore- 
oedmg sections t 


Taalb 8. 


Trrm. 

Lamp f^Ou 

1 r^rirt. 

Lamp NP i 

Broifd 

aic 

Ninety 

T^^y-four 

Thin>-*ix 

tS" 

T-S 

2r^n-ll 

2-1 

4 

5 

6 

1 

25 

Twcmy-r<w inky 

5 KW. 

Baby 

Keg 

JtiiUor 

Senkrr 

or Skypao I 

Doublet 

JOKW, 

Strip 

23-25 

33-25 

2IM1 

21 

is-id 

TfrlT 

14 

11 

24 

15 


7 « 














































THE THBOBETICAI BASIS 



WME^ 

C-^*S£AM 
2S.S00 W^MS 

D-EirS£4M- 

47.WJ.OMiJrS’ 




m.m 


€DO,0O& 


4$Q,900 




Fb 3 39C--Ciiiidlcpov^i difiT?ibmi<Ki from « Mole-Ricfiiml$tm '* i^or " 
‘ ipot type^* Vfiih a 5.000-wtut, G-64 bulb lUoguJ hipoai b&K lamp. 


wi^iir 



Fki, 19 D.—Ciftdkpovw tUiirihtrtioii fimm « yol^lLKAajTt^ “ j 

spot lyjw 410 1 2.O0CMwasi, CMS nwmJ b^^oat baso M,P. type IwnjL 


loler 


79 













































COLOUR 

The fcUowing Rre a few used for maiedal and equlproent 

R&socbtcd with the use of studio iRmpa : 

Silks. Frames equipped wixh ehma silk diffusers, hung on the 
fronis of lamps to diMisc the lig^t aad reduce the inteiviiiy. 

Mties.^ Fiamee equipped with chemicalJy treated gebiine; used 
for the same purposes as silks. 



BJack gauze i used in various places lo redutu iniensitv nnd 
diffuse light 

Diverging Doorj.—Siri^ of cylindrical glass tenses; used on 
$un arcs far light diffusion. 

A><«iir,-yarions shapes of black sheei-meiaJ hangcra; used on 
the fronts of lamps to block out undes'tred light. 

SpUl setks of sboeuntial tubes; ttsed m froiu of incan- 

descent b^bs m mjrroMypc lamps to block off angular layi cmsna\ms 
from the front surface of the bulb or fibmeni ® 

«0 












































^v^rage -pofver. 



(focAf f k 

























































Dsgrets of Oti/^trpofKO. 


izm.mr 




6.m,m 






3,OOO.COi^' 


2.m,ooC' 


t 

4— * 

-1^ 


?- 

j 

i— 

1 

p 





1 

c — 

n 


f 

t__ 



fp— 

M 




3' 

3 nf. 





_ 

1 


'" 4:1 

—-+^ 


s,m.m 




S- f£*£oj^ 

fumtf 7 S 

_ ff2M^ futOt/73. 
D-3d^Bosfo 
223,00l> /votoos 
- ^joox. 


Fk 5. 3^C^—Cundkpowcr iWsii^utioB ff oto ibc Mole- 
RictiiirxUan T> pc 450 Arc SpotljifTfp- 


r. «ij 











































THt THEORETICAL ftASIS 


Spi>i ProJecTor .—A unit equipped with ii condenser siy^teni that 
tits on the frotii of E Type 170 carbon arc lamp ia place of the Fresnel- 
type tens; to produce a diorply defined >ound spot of light* 



Fio^ 4(3.—Spoeinil d'liergy dhtribuikm of studio iioht wenxi. (Ikmditdip F* T. 
Null iu 3 d Zjtvmiky.) ifour. Soc. Mot. Pit. VoL 46 044^:11 IHIU 



Fjq, 41Lijhi inmsinisuon offclutinc tiltijr No. 53> ** Very Liafei Straw knum hi 
“Y-pI ” Gdulin CoJ. iF. T. Bowditeh and A C 1>owdo^ Jmr- SoC- Mot^ 

Frr. Enjtft 


Barn D^jcrt, Gobas, Cheesecatifn, rfr.—It i* often 

desirable to place opoque sercenfi ai various points on a set to keep 
all or a pan of the tight froin reaching certam areas Of objects. These 
Bcrccos arc painted duU black and are lectanfulnr, square, or cijcular, 
us ibe octasion may require^ 

¥ 


SL 

















































COLOUk ClMeMATOrjRAPHY 


Refmuccs 

Bo^hitch, F. T.p djiil DcwtfMa, A - C-, ** rhuiogriphu EiTcctivtiiHdd of Caibon 
Arc Studio Juftfn, Mvi. Pic. No- 5 ^Nov* 1^35), 

p. 375. 

The Kaiiimii EnCfSiY tteiivexicd on Motion Picturt Seti by Cart™ Arc 
StuiUo Lighi-ScMirces,*'^ /ajvm. Soc. Moi, Pic^ 25^ No. 5 (Nov. ISIS|, p, 3i3^ 

DusliMAN; S./^T1 m SiKirch for Hi0-FJ&den0' Lijiht-Soiirceap" Jihttn. Opir S<f€ 
Amcr.^ 2% No. 1 (Jaa^ }91Di I ^ 

roifsu, C. G., " FuiiMlaitierLiiila of Etectric Dischafps Lamps," 7r<BT,t. [Utmt. Eng- 
Soc-i SepL 1&37. 

BuTfouH, L. J./* High'[EiiciiSity Mcituty ftmi Soditum Arc Lamps," Journ. Sdc, 
Moi. Pk. 24, No. 2 (Feb- 1H35), p. ilO. 

Rvde, 3. W,+ The Eccukal 0]anicleri9tk:s of the New ' Osto ' Lacip," Gen 
EhK. Co. fEiisland)^ 4 (Nov, 1933), p. 199. 

St. Lotus, J. A., "" of -IW^Wau and 250-Wall Type H Mercury 

Lamps," Traiis. Jlltan. Eijg. See.. 31^ No. 6 (lime I936L p. JGJ. 

Elznbaas, " Ubet die mil dco ^'OssergekUhhen QuecksUber-Sup«'*HQchdruc]c^ 
mhfeoefrc^bare Letid]tdii:hte,^*.&l/.y2irrefAi7.M;?jA', I?* No. 2 (Feb. 193^, 

p. 61. 

H£LLfiJt, G„ DyaamicnJ Simtlnjily Laws of the Mercury JIlgh-Frcssiire IS&- 
chntsc." Ffysic£, 6, No. II (Dee. mS), p. 389. 

Ncuii.t E. nod Fv^hnham, K, " A WaKrf'Cookd Quum Mercory Arc,'* Jetirn 
Sof. MffL Pk* £ngr, JL No. 3 (Sepi^ (938), p, 221. 

GJi£mtii, C. E-, O^ta Lighi-Sources for Photochemical 

ftcaclioiis,** JoMTn. hiL mrti £>?jf. C/rejii^ tJ (Mjy 1931). pp. 508-11^ 

GreideiIp C, E.. and DowKis, A. C, “ Sunlieihl—Namral and SynthcOc,*' Traru* 
mm. ^ (1950), pp. 37ff^, 

Jones, JU A-, " Use of Artificnd Ulnuiljmiiti in Molkm Pictuincr Sludios,'' Trwu. 
Soe. ^tQl. Pk. S, No. 13 (1921), p. 74. 

OowbrrcH, F. T-, and Do^tjis, A. d," Spectral DUuibitl^ and Golcit-Tciii* 
penttiircs of tiK Radiant Energy from Csrb^ Aics.uscd in the MoEmn Pfetune 
Industry,^* &r- Mer. Fit, Btg.p 30 (April 1935), pp- 4(KMS9. 

C. G. HJtvo-HAUifTT* A-, " Der-elopnwma In Sluctm Aics^" the 

Btiiiik Kaicimiegroph Seciffy\ 2, Nrc 1 (liui. 1939), p. 35. 

T. T. BftKEB. F.K.FJ4., Some Ughlinf FrobJeJw In Colof CinotMloamphy," 

Jtmfif. Sec^. Moi’. jPic- 29 (Nov. t937L PP- 471-5., 

SocHTif OF WofnoN FKJiniifi E^ik^ecrs^ Report of ilic Siadio LcirhlJnv Commaiiee, 
32 (Jam 1939). p. 44 h 

BotiRKt, H- K.," IttotofrapliiiC Fropenica of MercLuy Vapotu Eloctric DE^lLarfe 
Lampi,** Phoi. Jmrrt. lApnl 1943J, p. 135. » 

RKiiARO^, E. Cv. " Receto Dff\'elop™iti in High-IntsMiiy Arc Spoitomps for 
Motion Picture ProdoCtioit," See. Pk- Big,, 25 (Fdi. J93D. p^ 207. 

McRff P,j New Dc^iciopmcfils 'm Cnrboti Arc Lighlmg*" l^Tvnt. Sue, Afpf. 

£«g., 22 (Jan. I934L p. 5 Jh 

loir* D. B., Bqwoitch^ F* T.. and Dowsici, A. C, A New HliLte-Fhimc Carton 
Arc for PhotopJiphk Le^i," Jemt. Sac. Mcti. Pk. 22 (Jan. 1934), p, Jg. 

Society OP MmioK Pictupir EtioiNEERS* Report of the S(:tidio ligMiiif CommiUH, 
30 (March I93SL p. 294: iibo 23 iNov. 193SL p. 432. 

rAOKttAM, R, and VVoitrau^ R. E., " Color Qiittlitj- of Light of Iticmuksceiit 
Lamps," J&um. Soc. Mot. Pk- Btg., 27 (Scpl. 1936), p. 260. 


52 


tHl THEO^ETlCAt- ftA.SlS 


BowiNt* Hr Colour Mod45«l Compact Uirrjp* for Film and Tde- 

vtiicKi/* Jmrrtt. Brithk Kiiieimio^mph SitcUty\ 10 (Mamli I9*T^ pp, [07-H6. 

Handijev^ C. W.t ** Ligliilqg for Techfaicjoki' Pkturei/' /ifum. A/o;, Pir, £lu^^ 
Z5* No. 5 (Nov. mS]*p.4i3. 

K AU. W. C.* Prwfit TrondJ in tlio Applicaiioii of Uw Oarboji Ato lo the Monon 
PiL-turc Imkistry/* /Oum. Sptf. Btg„ T7 (Scpi. 19^}, p, 253- 

toiWNe, H, K., " Disd^arfe for Phologinphy und Projection " (Chupn^Hn 

£nil HnU, Londcri, \94&y. 

MAcTliEi^N, H- G-. A Suggest^ C^ridcBlion of Qirixin. Arc Tcrmincdog^ 
Applied to the Motion Piuitire Iodustn\" Jmm. Soc. Sfat Pw. 37. ^ 
tNov. 194!)^ p. 410. 

UNUt^AN, R. Q., H4M5Lf7r+ C. AKD {tfVDGEfts. A., " tUutTfumlkKn in 
Picture Pre>dii£tiaii,” Jaumr Sor. Mot. Pic~ 40, 6 (June 1943)^ p. 331. 

Bowqpoi, F. T.. Null. M, R.. aHO Za^kY, ft. 1.," Carbon Am Tijr ^totion 
Picture nod Tcicvuioit SEiidio Lightmj,” Jaunt. Stx-. \fcti. Pfr, -Mp, fi 
(Jiw t^Kp. 441. 

Kahejn^, KL A^i ** Reoeot E>cvdopniaiift of Super-iligh-liiteauty Carbon Aci 
L4iiTips/‘ Johru. &w. jWijf, Pic. ^.,49, I (July I!*47>. p, 3T 

Noix, M LoxiEft, W. W.^ Jar, D. B , “ Tl^ Color of Light on the Projection 
ScnjeiL" /uum, Jijfi. .Vfor. Pirc. £n^., 38^ 3 tMerch 19+2). p. 21 y. 

j^AVESKY, R. J,, Null. M, R,t Lozteft. W. W.p ” Study- of Rndilini Energy lit 
Motion Pii^ufe Film Aperurre," Jiumt, Sfur. ftV. siag--, 45 . 1 (Awguil [9451. 
p. 102. 

/aVesky^ R. J,, Gertie, C. J., and Laftiiiip W. W,^ " Screen tlliiinjiilEkiii with 
Qubctn Arc Molion Picture ProJ^tiott SysitCJn*/* .1^. Mitf. Pic. Btti , 

48, J Qan. mn, P- 73. 

H antjley, C- W.* " Report of the Commrtlcc on Studio Ll^hling/* Awn, S&c, Aftri. 
Pic. £h?., 47, 2 (Aup. I9WI. p. JIL 


COLOU R-TEl^TPUR ATU R£ 

The system of coIortmciKcuJ spcctilcation, knowo us tlie LC-i.^ 
Chromatidty Diagram, which toduy has been internattonnUy adopted, 
is based on data repress h ting the iiii3iiure of real spectral prininries* 
Since no ikri^ wavelengths cm be selected From Ihc spectrum with 
which all others can be matched without iavolving negafive values, it is 
n«c$sary^ m order to represen! uLI possible miJttwrei as positive, to 
hypothesise three primaries which Lie outside the vpeclram locus and 
therefore have no real exbtetice. Next it is ncces^sary to assume that the 
energy of every wavdengih repre^nicd h exactly eqmiL FinaUy that 
equal proportions of Lhe> ba^c sttmidi (iheoretic^il prijuaries of the 
^y:sicni) give a white difTeient to :ill other white;^ in that we suppose it to 
he the one neuiraJ |>oittL alJ other whiter being relatively coloured. It 

• LCl- refeni to the Inscnuuionil CammisHCKl m lUumiiMljorL, 1931 * il which 
ihe chromatidty dugram bused on tlie siandiird uNcrw and coordhiate 
was adopted. Tn Britain ECJ. [ii known w C-I.E (Ccnimiwlwi Intcnuumnafe de 
I^Eclairage^, 

RJ 


COLOUR CEMfl^ATOGRAPHV 


must be dear Ihcrefore Ibal any change m the rehulive dii^tribution of 
energy m the spectnun departing from ihc condition of equal energy 
miirr muts in a cohiif stmmitis, smoe only an equal energy $pecLrum can 
provide a colourless sEunutus, by argument. By umthematic computa- 



Fio. 4L—CJifofmtidi> dm^mjn ihcHving ioeu* of diroJniticfifegi of Piaodciiui 
ruUiuor¥ and Imt of cofm^iut cmteLticd colour icmpcrnTime. 


don we can plot ihe colour stimutus which must ropr^cnt every possibte 
dtfitribctjon of citergy* 

Colour-icmpcrature has been defined by a Committee of the Colour 
Croup. The Physical Society^ LondoOt si5 the Lemperatnre at which 
a Ml radidtor would efnii radiation of sub^huitiaLJy Uic some spectra] 
distribution in the vbibb region as ibc radiotion from ihc light source 
and which would have the t-amc cotom^/' 

Max Planckp the great Gctmiin physidsi, determined the precise 
U 





































THE THEOitJETirAL 0AS4S 


cebitotii between energy emission and leniperaturc. No emUior of 
energy ciin be perfect unless k is an idetil radklor and it can be showr 
iliat inch a body would be abo an ideal absorber^ ^uch a bodj 
would be ub^ulutely black. This is the black body/^ whose cbaroc- 
leristkii of radiation provide us with a scries of energy curves derived 
from con:fiHni:i calculated by Planck, and now accepted as fundamenta] 
physical data. If the standard trisiiniulus values are multiplied by the 
Flanckian cnrveii for various tempetatuTes of a bkek body, we get a 
curve which can be platted in the Chromancity dkpaiu (Ftg- 42). 
U then becomes cTcar \imi a perfect radiator wouid provide a series of 
wlaur stimuli varying with it$ tempemtiire roughly in the order shown 
in Table 9.^ 

Table 9 


Deep Red , ^ 


SO0= K. 

Oi^ngc 

,, 

I.WK, 

Whrftsh Ormigic .. 

1 .. . 

.. 2pOCIO K- 

Cioldcu WJute 


Z^SOO^K. 

Warm While 


.. )p3O0"K. 

White 


.. 3,500 K. 

BEu^h Wliltc 


. e,500 K. 

Whitish Blue 

^ - 

.. 7,500'* K. 

^Euc 


10,000 ‘ K. 

D«p Blue .. 


. 25,000" K. 


But at no point does this curve coincide with the ctjual energy white, 
known as E, and to which we refcincd. Since this curve is a physical 
standard it has become increasingly the practice to refer the colour of 
light sourscs emiidug continuous spectra, nnd therefare roughly iCorre- 
vponding to bbek bodks,"' to the nearest point they ivodd match in 
bhick body lempemiurc scale. Alihougb nuoresceni lamps and 
discharge lumps generplly provide whites of difTercnt hue wc 
cannot truly assign such whiles to a position iu the colour-temperatuie 
Tange, ncveiiheleys they can be given an cnuivnlcnt position (Fig* 43), 
-II points in the scale have been adopted jis standard 

uluminanrs: IlluminanB A* B and C, ricprerientbg respectively, K., 
4S00 K., and 6500^^ K, 

The mc^uremeni of colour-tirmperatiire may be elfecled by com- 
with a tungsten tiunp running at cxacily determined voltages* 
but direct use of this method is limiied to colours produced by tempera- 
tuTO below the melting paim of lunptcn. 

1 he second method r^uires u spectrophotometric measure of Uie 
tela live energy at each wavelength in the spectrum of the course being 
tneosured—followed by compuiaiioji enabling its chromatidty point 
I hctiee its colour) to be plotl^. 

Tlius wc find that the domestic 100-W, incaudcsccnt tungsten lump 
hus a colour temperature of2,S65" K., whik a EOOO-W. projection lamp 
has a colour temperature of approximately 3,250* K, The low-mtensity 

S5 



COLDL'A CINBUATOORAPHV 


DEGREES KELVIN 

— ?a.ooci— 

Esclrcvn^ty blue cl#jf p, ” 26,000 — 
northweil iky 


B\v* tiOit^wevl xlty 

Blue With th^ft 
white dt^udi 

Glut iky 

UiT^f&jni fiveicdit iky 


Avtf*^ tun 

3^10 p.m. 

4:10 ^.m. 

2 houn 
» 1houn 

1 h&yt 


€ 

V= 


40 miiL, 

30 min. 
20 mifv. 
Sumilt 



Aritliciil Souicti 
1 blwt #nd I deyll^ht lluaieiictfil t»mp 


Blue noilK ikyli^t hhen 
eveiUbla ^ivc # rjn$e 
S,4Q0 30.000 


1 bEut «jid 2 diyJishi l^uprcictiii tempi 

1 bfu« i^d 4 d«y]i^h| JIuc^Ktttt temiH 
Deylighl fTuprticttst lemp 

4 deylighl jnd t while J!uoiticrnt Iims4 

* 3 deyhghi and 1 whi^ff fTuoicictnk Umpi 

sii 


. ^dlyfk^k and 1 i while ffijQrei£tnt Umpt 
Tigln tahpjpfiopd 


— 4,500-4,500 *K While fluPtncenl W 


4.000 ^ - 5QO.watt Deyllsk tamp 
— Photollfih 
Z * 1 SO^walt Diyli^ Ump 
3,500 ^ " Wkit# Bucfiiexni lamp 

_ " CF Pfwifl Eampt—^otonoodf 


I i 

^ E 

1*1 

X ^ 



G«t-r)ll«l 


Rjtts^ ^ Syndeid 
flbmtnl Wpi 


VaciAun 

H«it and Drying lampi 

Gndlf flamt 


Til 

III 


Fkj, 43.—'Coldur tempcnillin; chwi. 
iBylmurtay tkt ^tntrd BirtWif Company. 

arc is higiicr at 3>550'‘ K., and finally the higtHintensliy arc at S,0(X)>‘ 
6,500' K. is close to sunlight. Liglt sources above this Letnperatuie are 
even nnore blue. 

Fig. 44 shows the relative sensitivity of panchrottiatie 6lm to ladiaiion 


Fluoifritfnt [#mpl ind Vliibui combi natiarti 















the theoretical basis 



24 


’§14 

^J2 

.s 

■M 

I» 

Ck; 



Ftt. 44.^ft*|aijic KiHitivjiy qI jjhoioariphfc film st- i««velensth of nilbikin. 
lUnUermna, HaiHUeyand Kod^.J 


Pwj- 44^,_colDuMcTnficniiLLrc vi, ddkkocy of C a.imUTmiin. 

Hundky and R<fd££t»<> 













































































































COLOUR ClNEMAlOORAPljy 



Wave-h!igth.in JtfigsSi^m 

F«. 4S.~.tl.doliv(i phtiH)gffl(i|ib efTttHvtiqeu oF Ifghl-Mutaa oroqiut ^rdtUKc und 
varwiu <»imir-tenipcn(tdr«8. ILtodennan, Hiutdicy nncj RodfsrsJ 


TOO 


Uj 

*|eo 

r 



































































































































TH^ TITEQRBttCi^t. 


in the visible region» Fig. 45 iUustm|je$ the shift in rebtive photogmphic 
cffeciiveness with chRtigt of colour-tempentiiirep the light iource being 
of consiuDt Fig, 4f> sets forth the relative photographic 

effectiveness at dlfiereoi colour-temperature?. 

,4 Cohiif-Tcmp^rafurc Mtfer 

Smdt differences of coloifr-tempenitijrc are sufficient to shift the 
bolaace of exposure in aU systems of three-colour photography. 
Integral layer material such as Kodachromc or Ansco Color film are 
indicated by the maiiufactuTef as balanced for expos art by light of a 
stlpuloicd colour-tent pern tura. Titc user can check the colour-tem¬ 
perature of a given source of light by using <1 simple iustrumcni such 
as the Easrntan colouf-tempcraturc meter. This apparatus fancUons 
in the following manner:^ 



Fid. 47.—DfebgniEn shjuwbg spoeunl rc^iwu used in ihe ooKjiirHctripcmtLirfl fn«tdr. 

Suppose that in &ornc way we block out or absorb certain, components 
of the light from an incandescent source as represented by the shaded 
areas iti Fig, 47. We have left naTTOw bands in the green and red which 
if (^mbiti^ will produce a vbual impression of yellow or orangr. 
T^s orange will appear to the eye as though the shaded areas in 
Fig, 47 had been removed and only a single narrow strip allowed to 
pass. In other words, a mixtura of a property selected iuutow^ baud 
of wavelengths- from the green region with anothcf from the red will 
prcKluce the visual impresdon as that of a single small group 
in the jf^llow-orange portion of the conliniious speclriim. 

In the Etistman colour-temperature meter ihe sdccttnn of the proper 
portions of the spcciruiti b accompHshed by ineuns of carefully con- 
itmeted ligjit fillets. Otic of these filters is so made up ihst it pos$c^ses 
transmission bands with mnxiiniiin tran'smiiiufice at about 570M;i 
and 6S0M/J respectively. The second filler is so compu?«d ifiat the wave ¬ 
length of its inaxtnium tnansmittunce is at approximately 5S0 Mh* The 
rclntive transmiuances of the bands in the two-band or dicltroic 

* cxtructod fitmi Comnutnkalksil Nn Kodak Reafitreli 

t-iboraiorkg;, ** A Colw^Teflrpcnitiiiv ktetef,'^ by E- M. Lowiy and E, 5, Wfeirer. 

1^9 











COLOUR CJNEMATOGKAPIIT 


filter art so adjusted that, when cxnmmcd by Light—for exaiDpte, that 
from u [ungsien lamp operttmg at a coloar-tetnperatiw of 2,100* K, 
—its colour will be the same as that of the fitter with its ma.^iinum 
tnuismitiAcicc at 5S0M;i. For coiatur-tempcrtattii^s higher than 2,t00* 
the dichroic filter will appear more green than the monochromatic 
out, while for tempemture^ lower than 2^100' Kp it will appear more 
red* TMa property of dichroic ixiaiemis was shown by in 

bis work on anomalmis dispersion^ and was discussed by Wood in 
his Fkysk4:il Oprks. 

The rca^n for this; behaviour muy be explained by reference to- 
Fig. 49. Cim'c A represents Uie spectropbotometdo trammissiun 



Fio. 4B.—St»ecCiiipboloriictrJe tmosoikslou curv^ of ftdd (titers lued in edour^ 
tempenLitue rmicf ami relathne dlinribiiiidtn fpc ev^lom^iempcmtura 

2J00 K* 3^ K. imd 5,000 K 

curve of the two-bmid filter, which has two maximn, nl 52QM^ and at 
6S0M>< rcspecUvdy- Curve B is lhat of the monoebromatio filter, 
which possesses n transmlLiancc tnaxinatiin at 5S€M^. As stated above, 
the rcblivc transmittanccs of the two bands for filler A hav^ been 
so adjusted that, when examined by tight from a source operBdng 
ui 2J0&'^ K., ihis filter will appear to be the same colouf as filter ft* 
The cme labelled 2,100" K. represents the rebelve etierg>^ emitted 
al the various wavelengili^ of the visible spcclruni by the source 
opemting at 2»t00^ K.^ which is the temperature at which the filters 
will be colour-nmtdtcd, A souree working at a colour-tempciuture 
of 3^00" K, will cmil imcrgy of somewhat diSereal di&tdbution at 
the various wimdciiglhs, Examimiiioo of the two distribution curves 
utj 




THE rHEORBnCAi BAS«^ 


;»hows itwt the cfwrgy emitted is rdaiiveh higher at 520 M^ and relati\i'eiy 

less at 680M>i for 3.200" K. ^b^^\ for the 2J00' K. Murte. This tviU 
fesah m more light pasmg througii ihe 520M^ batid in A arni less 
at and ihett wiH be a cfiangc in the colour of l]ie filter snch 

dial ii will appear mom green than when examined with the 2,100® K, 
lioarce. In the case of filler B, however^ there will be rebtlvdy little 
chMige iti flue and it will still be ycllnw^ If the colouMcmperaturE 
of the source Ls reduired below 2,100® K—for e-iampUj, to 2^000 K — 
ibe filter A will appear more red thjin B beoiuse the ratio of cnerEies 
in the regions of the spectrum at Iho positions of msiimum transmit* 
UuiDe of the fillers has changed so that there is relatively more energy 
in the red portion, than at the original maich^poini—immely, at 
2 , 100 ® K. 



Fiq. 49—Graph ihcwifig fcliitive jpectni! dlstribuitfla nT energy for a lOtFwiU 

ikitii^tea liiTTTp. 

In order that ihc two filters shall remain coloar-matched when ihe 
colour-tempemiure of the source is oiher than 2,100'’ K. it is necessary 
to modify the energy distribuiion of the source in some way. This 
tnodifimtion may be accomplished by changing ilie voltage applied 
to the lamp until tis colour-icmpcraiure is once more that of ihe original. 
The necessary change in voltage may be used as a measure of ihe differ¬ 
ence from 2JOO^ K, Another oictliod of occomplishing tlie dsLred 
result i$ to absorb a portion of the radiant energy selectively with 
respect to wavelength in such a way that the retnamder matches tiuii 
fti the ini tial leiiiperature- Filters of this type, such as the so-called 
daylight glajsscs or the Wmien Photometric Series of fillers* are well 
knowrt, In the present instance we are intcreslcd in reducing the colour-^ 
temperature, since the maich-poinl for the fillers is loiver ttun that of 
most pnicrical light-sources, and we reiiuirc an umbef-coloured filier. 
This amber filter is made up in ihe form of a arul thii amount of 

91 











COLOUR CINEMATOGRAPHV 


sekciU-c absorption h dependent upon Ibe thickness of ibe v\Tdgc 
at any poltsi. The greater the thickoKS of the portion of ihe wedge 
ased^ the greawf ia the reduction in colour-temperature of the light 
transmitted. 

In the colonr-teiupcraiure meter the principles imi descfibed 
hjivu been applied as illustrated in Fig. 50A. A cinenlar photometric 
Held P, with a fine dividing line across the centre, is formed by the 
narrow band-fihets whose absorption characteristics are Ulusimted 
in Fig. 43, 

fhe left half of the field, which is shown in detail at B, is foimed 
by the dichroic filler, and the right half is formed by the moncH^hTomatic 
One. Between the eyepiece lens E and the test field b on amber wedge 
W for the purpose of modifying the energy distribution of the light 


E. ~ ijg^t Source- 

^ /vtf4/. 

E- jfi/eys/ecc le-rjs. 

W- ^Yirdge . 

^ 5 ^ . 


^3} 

Fio. 50A.^||l!En:inufve diagram of colour-tempcEnLiin; meter, 

from the source being examined. This wxdge is ciretibr and the portion 
of the wedge to be used is selected by moans of a smidJ knurled knob K* 
The Scale of the Instrument S Is so caUbmted that it reads directly 
the colour-temperatuxc of ihe soureo tn^'CStigated* 

Rg. 50 is a photograph of the instrumcm depicting both trout and 
side views. Comparison of Ihc reproduction of ibe meier with the 
fi-iiL rule at the bottom of the picture illustrates the compactness and 
conveniem size of die design. 

Actual operation of the meter Lx aucompUshed by the obscn'cr 
directing the visual axis of the insmunent (dotted bnc in Fig. 50A) 
towards the sourec in question. He then observes whether the two 
halv^ nf ihc field of view are eolour-matehed and, if they are not, 
adjusts the position of the wedge uniiJ such a colour^nmtch b obtained! 
A clockwise mniion of the wedge increases the amoimi of absorption, 
while a counterelockwise motion decreasea ii. The farther the wedge 
must be Inserted, the higher la the coircsponding coIour-iempemiuTi: 
tks read rrom the scale. 

92 




fA} 
















« —^ _ . . . , Lh. 

■^ ^ ■ ■ V il «'L ^ ■ W.^^M 

Fiq. 50.—EoitiTULri c^lour-tcmpcciturc nMtcr« 


fii 







I 




tHE tHEOBBTICAL BASIS 


Ete: 4 :ause of the fact dial ihcr« are certain slight differences betw’een 
the eyes of ditTcreai indi^nduals, the dichroic and monochiomaiic 
filtere ore not always colour-matched at the same colour-tern peiaiure. 
For this jeasoji some means of compensation must provided if 
detemunaitoiu made with the msirtunent are to be in wiisfaciory 
agreement for two or more observers. To overcome this difilcutty an 
accommodation scale has been provided whidi enables each indiidduat 
10 select the iiiitM setting of the amber wedge which suits his particulaf 
e>T:. Before milking any measurements, each observer must set the 
scale of Ihe insuumeni at the value correspnn^g to a source of known 
colour-temperature. A tungsten lamp which has been calibrated 
properly would servo adminibly for this purpose, but, since such u 
lamp must be operated at constant voltage, auxiliary onuipment is 
renuired which is not always available. Beeswax candles, such as, for 
example, the XXX Superior Candles made by the Socony-Vucuum Oil 
Company, are ea^y ohiuined and, since they possess fuirly uniform 
lemperaturc diaracteristici <1,935 K,ilO ), they are quire stiimble 
for the purpose of adjusting the accommodation scale when used 
with the auxiliary blue filter. That filter, which raises the colour- 
temperature of the candle flaine to a point above Z, lOO K,, is supplied 
on an easily attached mounL 

To make the initial adjusimeni the operator first the point 
in iht scale marked C opposite the index. Then, while applying 
pressure to the scale with tlie thumb of nne hand to prevenl any 
displacement of the scale relative to the index, he rotares the knob 
with th^ Ollier band untii a colour-ro^i^ili obtained in Ib^ field of 
view. During this opcnilion the candla flame is the iUumuiaiil. 
After the preliminary adjustment this tnclcr is in condition for tea ding 
the colour-temperature of some unknown sonroc- 

Tlie precision of the measurements made with the colour-tempcraliire 
meter depends upon certain fundamental rcQuiremeiils. In the first 
place the operation of the instnimeni is based upon the ability of an 
observer to do coloux-matchinB, and therefore assumes hiS colour 
vision to be normal—that is, he must not be colour-blind or have any 
Roiiceafale deficiencies in colour vision. In the use of llie meter, as 
in all operations requiring the application of optical instrumenL!, 
rhe precision of setting is coiisiderahly unproved b>' practice, Tlic 
first few attempts to balmee the field by an mdmduoJ unski led m 
this type of m^uremeni are likdy to show very erratic results, but 
Bi he becomes accbsiomcd to the manipulfllions nectary hrs repeat- 
ability wiU improve and his resaris will he quite satrsfactoty. 

In Table I0 arc shown the aieragc dimalion'i from ibe mean of 
ten settings made by each of three observers at the colour-temperature 

vS'Slist not overlook the fact that colour-teinpermure is a visual 

n 


riNlMATOOR AFH Y 

Table 10.—Skowjno pBECisiotJ of Measurements with the 
Colou8-Te,mperature Meter (Eastman Kqpak) 


Ob^ver^ 

' K, 

D^pssrnirt fivm 
Mrm i^Titt Sittiinsj^ 

£ML 


t4 

AS 

2.T60 

24 

KSW 

2^60 

15 

EML 

2,«60 

15 

AS 

2.660 

10 

KSW 

2h660 

22 

EML 

2.S50 

22 

AS 

i,ejo 

26 

KSW 

2,m 

21 

EML 

3.200 

21 

AS 

3.200 

35 

KSW 1 

3^ 

34 


nicasuremtiu oiiiy^ a siven positioJi on thcchromaticily irliart not being 
n definition of energy distribution, since a practically infinite miniber 
of possible difitribuLiotis of cner^ can evoke dus same sensation. Wc 
ntnsi remcjnbcr ihui in colour photogmpby we at* supremely coE^eemed 
with distribution of energy in the light-source on the one band and the 
«iisitiYily in die region of the visible spectrum of the photographic 
material we are employing on the other- The measurement of colour- 
temperatufe wilt therefore be understood to be only a tough guide as to 
the suitability of a given source of light. On the other hand, any local 
vhxtngc in a very restricted part of the spectrum would be likdy to give 
rise to a change of Polour-iempeiatuTe which would be perceived with an 
instrument such as the Eastman meter—that is, under practical con- 
ditions- Tl would not be dtfBcuIl to imagine tnsiHncts, however, which 
would lead to incorrect assumptbns being made as a result of the 
mcasuncnient of colour-icmpemiure alone. 

Other colour-temperaturc meters have been recently made available, 
such as the Norwood colout-tcmperature mcier^ desired by Capt_ 
Don Norwood, of Los Angdes^ the SpectrOj** made by the Photo 
Reticarch CorpoTsttion, of Hollywood, and ihc ** Hdios," made by 
Hetios^ of London. 


V4 












THe THEOKETICAL 1»ASI3 


GENERAL ILLUMDSATON DATA 

Table 11 (Bowthtch and Oowtffis).—CjwXJifR-TbiupjjBATURB op 
Carbon Arcs wmt Dominant Wavelength and peh Cent. 

PURTTY KEFERRED TO AVERAGE DAVLICKT 





Cohur- 

Tan- 

Otmhmf 

FFbw- 

/Vr 

Ughf-SOittCifr 

CufWiii. i 


teaf^thf 

Ceitt. 


fflTwfiin?, 

AT. 

Aaj^tirv»m 

Pmity, 

- 

, 

1 

Ualts^ 


Airtfagt Daylight: 

n 


6,500 



U-cmiL HI. dfbw .. 

1 w 

56'5 

6>400 

sm 

4 

J-mra. Supfcx Cartmiu .. 

63 

3B 

6,400 

5,650 

5 

Suprex Cubwia «. 

16*0^ H.1. Corbom , * 

56 

ISO 

43 

SL 

6^50 

6.000 

VW 

5J40 

5 

7 

7H(mn. Suprex OulK)m 

50 

U 

5p9SO 

5.710 

9 

i w 12 Cnrboaf 

6-flim. Sum^ Cadwcu . 

9-mra. H-L Cadracs 

B& 

3J 

5,600 

5.900 

9 

40 

70 

32 

5^50 

5m 

5p750 

5J60 

9 

9 

T-mm. Suprex C^rboni , . 

42 

JJ 

5.800 

5.740 

10 

13 6-rani, Syptfr ILU Oarbotii^ 
13-6-flfiin. HL Curbcrns ^ . 

J85 

75 

5,430 

5.740 

10 

123 

63 

3,650 

5.730 

12 

6-nim. $Mpftx Cnrboiu ,, 

30 

23 

5,150 

5,770 

16 

^-nirn. NaL M a Studio Dirbotu 

40 

375 

4.650 

5,730 

25 

12-niiD. L.L C^rboos 

30 

55 

3.550 

5.630 

40 


Table 12 (Rowpttch and Downes).—C oLOtnt-TeMPERAiURE or 
Carbon Arcs with Dominant Wavelength and per Cent, 
Purity reperaed to Noon June Sunuoht at SniuNcimo 
Lake, Ohio 



CUTTfMlL 

1 

Cb6/iir- 

7ifAr^ 

Ipvmrm, 

■A-v 

Units. 1 

fpr 

Pmity* 

Jumf SmUght: ' 

NH M.P, Studio Caduia 

40 

37-5 

4,200 1 
4.650 

4,750 

6 

12*fniii. l^E. Carboos 

30 

55 

1,550 

6,050 

9 

6*iTim. Supmx CxrbHMu .. 

JO 

23 

sm 

4.780 

13 

13'6-flitn. Super H-l. Carbon^ .. 

m 

75 

5p>l30 

4J00 

14 

tl-frcrun. ILI. Ckrbuiu .. 

125 

63 

S,6S0 

4,800 

16 

^mm. H.l. Carbow 

70 

49 


4.780 

17 

7-miru Suprex . • 

42 

31 

5.800 

4,790 

11 

i H !2 Rotofy CerbodA 

O^tntti- Suprex Cutont .. 

16-01111.3iJ. Coiboiut .. 

m 

53 

5.600 

4.750 

17 

40 

la 

5.850 

4,790 

18 

150 

31 

6,000 

4,780 

13 

7*miTu Supcex Ouitoia .. 

50 

16 


4,300 

1> 

3-nim- 5ii|»ex Carbcm» .. 

56 

41 

6|230 

4,790 

20 

3-0un- Suprex Coubotn ,. 

1 l-mciLHJ.Carbotn -r ^ 

65 

J3 

6v400 

4,800 

21 

1 « 

565 

6,400 

4^ 

22 


95 

































COLOUR CINHMATOCRAPKV 


TAnLE Tjie CifROKAficm Coorpinates of Important 

lUUMINAlIfll (A. C. Haroy) 


BiikkSciiytit: 

■■ 

Jf.- 

2’v 

IJOOO* K. 




0^^524 

0344# 




• A 

0-SSi2 

CH3934 

1^' ic. 


4 # 


0^5373 

0-4114 




-■* • 

0-4893 ' 

0.4150 

2,m'}L 



' I- A 

0^4476 

0^4075 

4.800‘ K. 



■f A 

0 4049 

O'3906 



S * 

0 3S06 

0-3560 




. 

0 3133 

0^3^ 

m.ooo^K. 

t, A 

^ 4 

• H 

Ch2S0ti 

o^Tssa 

24,000'^ K. 



■ ■■ ■ • 

0-2532 

fr2531 

tCL tllumiEumt A 



' w m 

O'4476 

0-4075 

KCX inmniiiazLt fi 



4*“ 

0^3485 

oaars 

tCl> l!liuii.rii^t C 



. 

03101 

>316J 

Mean Noon Simligbt 



■ m » 

03442 

0-3534 

Sub OulAido Aimc^pbcco 



032M 

0-3301 


Table 14 .—Range Of £Li-ctitOMAGNEtic Radiations 


F^iHSafipti, 

Lowtr cf ^tiMhngth^ 

Angstrom 

C/ttitL 

ElecMM FbraL 

Gamnw Ruy^ . « 

:■ *. .p* 

0-1 

J23360 



1-0 

12*336 

Far Ultra^vliJkl 

'* * •« w 

!.0D0 

12-34 

N«&r Ultrtk-vblot 


■ 3,000 

4H 

Visible .. 

* *> -mw 

4JQ0 

101 

In&a*red ** 

■ * • t 

7;b» 

l'7l 

Sliortcsit Hertzian Wa\vs 

■ft# *m 

ItP-Olcfiu 

10* 

aadtoWa>u 

11 T1 

] metre 

10* 



1 kikunom 

10-* 


I AilRMTjSxtl UDh=^ia*CRL 


The Uiird column (Table 14) gives the voltage through wtiicb an 
electron would have to be accelerated to cause the emission of the 
given wavelength. 

Theie Is a deitnUc relation between the two ma grtintijt-A which is 
cApicssed by the relation 

1 V 

whetc h is the wavelength tn Angstram uniQ and V is measund 
in volts. 


























T»fE THEOKETJCAt 9AS1S 


Based upon ihe data of ihc dislribuiioji of energy Lq the spcciniiu 
of any ligh^source and the rclati^i'c spectral luminance curve (see 
324>, ihe theoretical optimum efficiency can he calculated. Call this L,,. 
Table (5 gives valuer ofl^ for different sou ices compared with efficiency 
values L, oblaijicd on actual tumps. The ifiird column gives the 
penoentage 100*/ of the total energy emitted by the source that is in the 
visible range. This is deduced by tneans of the relation 

1 >> 

The last column gives the eneigy utilization ratio e—that is, the ratio 
between the total watts input and the waits emitted as visible tight 
(which is measunsd in terms of luntcns). 


TAbL£ tS,—LuMiNOtK Efficiencies of VAajous Soitrces of Ltcut 
(Lumens per Watt) (S. Dcshsian, G.E.C., TJ.S.A.) 


Smira. 

f- 


lOOf. 

tCOcs 

Black Body at 7-4,500 „ 

2i^ 

mi 

39^5 

13 9 

Sun .. 

250 

100 

40 

}&*] 

Tungsten (Gulled) 

143 

15-30 

10-20 

2- 5^50 


2 M 

45-75 

20-34 

7-2-12-1 

SotJiuni Vq(kriz , , 

475 

50-75 

10^15 

£ -12 

M<»uiiry Vapour {Low ^rcisim) 

m 

t5-20 

6- ^ 

2-5- 3-2 

i Atm. (Type H) .. 

2% 

JO-33 

JO-IZ 

4-^S- 5 0 

Higher Prtimnc!:! „ 

2% 

40^50 

15-17 

6 4- i O 

- -- 

m 

15^ 

7'5-20 

2*5- 6 4 

Heimm 

_ _ 

4-ro 



Ciirbofl Dioxide ]. !! !! 

_ _ 

2-4 



Ouluiiun] 

_ 

0-5-1 

_ 

_ 

Green Flmresocni tl_P. Meieuiy> 

475 

60-«a 

\l-6-t6 9 

9-6-lZ^ 


Tasu 16,—Temperatures of Ltcirr^ouKccs' 

Tiuia*^ hcnodckxnt CsAtUlea Bulh, >.000 wait* (30-3 t.'w.J S.OtO' K. 

Lamp. Tuiiesiicn Lamp at overwJtaj^ .. j,500'K. 

Aitukiul Doylishl Lamp, [tcluiii'c lOTniMr^ituie .. K. 

NmindCDmlCaitwii Aie . . - 4,000 K. 

^eh-lRicmicy Ak _ „ .. .. 4,SOO‘5.0«r K. 

l^troctSunlJighi .. . 5,100 K. 

Nocift^llihifALiiitiHleprWdslihiaton .. .. 5,4»-K. 

ToraJ Daylighi . J.640 K. 

* Gal0uis.(ianptrjitiires are expressed od tba absotuic Scale m which lempcraiuies 
are mnsureJ fn/m a lecu appnnjniatsly 173 ' below the iretuin^'fiolm of waier. 
The absolute scale Js also known os the Kelvin scale. 



















COLO^IRfc 


Table E 7 *—Coi^UR-l^Mi'ERA’miE Amy Wave^^ctth of 
Maximum ENiiKCV 


Co^OHT-r *Trtpmim 

C*- 143 S 4 -|. 


j.oocr^K, .. 
2 , 00 a- K. .. 
2 . 50 a K. .. 

IJOOQ^K. 
3 .WK. .. 

4,000 K. .. 

6p000^ ,. 

fljmK. „ 

JOkOOCTK. 


£4itry[y 

I 

ChtvmuricHy Co-etnGfKttF$r 

JC* 

y- 

13^ 

0 6524 

0-544® 

tp440 

0-5366 

0-4135 

l,t52 1 

1 0-476? 

0-4136 

1 

1 0-456a 

04040 

m 

0^4052 

o^mft 

720 

0^3W 

0-5767 

4@a 

1 0-5220 

0^3517 

360 

' 0-2951 

0^504® 

m 

0-2^ 

0-2685 



F« 5 , 5 L—PktDcltian dixuibutiodfi of flntfgy 0* vaiiuus taripcraliift$, Flnack^t 
cwtant, nricftiintesrffia. >^iiniben atiik£j 3 «d w tile 

iQdic34e (ciri^AtimA in (ebeoliito tempefomre:). QrUimite* of the diiSiczeei 
mr^ aic iiblir^y made cqu^il at ir^vefetifth 5^. 


98 

































rm THUJPETICAL &AS(S 


Table 18.—iNTRfNSic Ll^«^^^A^■CE of Ligkt-Sourcs 

CaiK^ Fffwer 

Usfit~So¥rv€^ JMf Sq. A/m. 

Wiltis-FLiinc CaibOB Atc (Fomdl „ „ i|200 

Pure Caitol Art i>i 22 *- «.* .. ** J^CKW 

Sim fll Zenith .. .. 92Q 

Bigb-liiieiKity Wtihc-Flamc Carbon Are m nuiiilJy Ofiecaud 
FiosMvo Crater oTTvnjuhmi Arc (ttbout) 

ii *t u SnUd (i^rboa Arc on D.C . ^ L80 

„ „ Osrat C^riMQ Arc on D.C. .. *, 13<> 

YdJovv Are Sotam . • • 

Are SiccfiTn .. ^^2 

Meremy VapoQT Tube .. .. *. *h *. 0^021 

Moore Carbon I>k>;ui^ Tube „ ,, „ ,, <1009 


Table 19.—CotomauCitv Co-ommnatis w VARiom Illumkakts 


UshhSoUTCf. 1 

Corrtlal^ Cakfur^ 
Tfntpmiluiv. 

Ch^smtakrlty Co^wtfi/aat^r 


y* 

l.C.t. tthiminam A 

2,as>^ K, 

1 

0 44T& 

0-407S 

LCX Ulumlaiuii B ., 

4.!«W a. 


0^3435 

0-351S 

t.C.L llhtniirujit C 

6.740 K. 


0 3101 

o-Jiej 

Mc;;!in Noon . . 

5.0M’ K. 


0 3442 

0-I5M 

Direct Sunlight bi Scz Lbv^ 

5.«»0‘ K. 


0 343J 


Dined Sunlight 

5.33r K. 


<M362 

0-3502 

Sun plus Sky .. 

tjooa K. 


(V3213 

0-3348 

OvercasiSky .. 

6.500' K. 


(M134 

0-327S 

North Sky on AS Plenc 

10,000 K. 


0-2773 

1 0-2034 

Equal En^' Spectrum 

5.5D0 K. 


0-1333 

0-3333 

Cfifbon Are . * .. „ | 



<b3l52 

0*3325 


NOTES ON PlIOTOMETkIC: TERMS 

The iinii of solid unglc is Iuicpwil as a 

1 SieTiidf^=Wf\\d angle subtended at the centre of a sphere by un 
area on the sphciical surface equal to the square of the rodiusL 
(Area of a sphere^4Trr^. Thus Lotal solid angle nt a pomtr=4^ 
sietadiBn^.) 

Units of Hire 

The tinil of luminous Huisr is known as the Uumm. 

I iLinn«7ii3Eihe Hus emitted m a stemdian by a uniform point source 
of T candle. ^ 


99 














COLOyR CfKeW^TQGftAFHY 

Jfttensiiy or Cmdi^Po^ver flux in 

JLim^n^- 

llluminALton at a pninl of a surface is ihe density of the luminous 
flux at ihai pomt^ t>r ihe quotient of the flux by the area of 
the surface. 

1 Lux= I Lmnert per sq. dl 
I Fao£-€mdk— I Lum^n per sq. ft. 

Unite uf Lumitutiicc 

The luminance iti u given direction of a stirfuce emittjitg light is the 
quotient of the luminoiis tntcfisity measured in that direction 
by the area of Lliis surface projected on a plane pcfpendicubr to 
the direction considered. 

The unit of Siuninance is 1 cmdk per unit area of ^Tirface. 

Ul iiTTiin fltion in foot-candles X incident rehection factor of surface^^ 
luminiince in Foohhmberi.u 

1 iMiHbert—R perfect diffuser emiiting I himea per sq. cm. 

Lamberl 

I MWdambert^ IOOO”" 

1 Foot-Iambt!rr=B. ^uiTacc emitting I luracQ per ft, 

A perfectly reflecting and diffusing surface illuminated witii an 
intensily of I foot-candle would possess a surface luminance of I 076 
millilambcrts. 

Unit of RictiBal lUuminnllun 

1 pJ;ofoj!i= 1 candle persq, m. received through pupil area of I sq. nira. 

Uosi energy perceptible to the eye==42xl0 * erg. per sec—viz,, 
0-00156 lumens per watt for wavelength 5.560 A. Or, t wait 
should yield 641 lumens. Energy value nt [he absolute threshold 
is 4*2x10 ” wau; therefore value in lurnena is 2-7x10'“= 
?-2x 10 * candle 1 m. from the eye. 

Under dark adaptation a square whose sides subtend an angle of 2^ 
at the eye must have a luminance of two-mtUiontbs of a foot- 
lamben if it is to be detected. 


2. THE SECONDARY LlOHl-SOLRCE 

The colour of a surface of matter varies owing to Its power lo absorb, 
reflect, or transmit light. These cSccts may be selective, and, indeed, 
generally are so. We know that our sensation of hue is caused by 
light lacking in some component which if added would gi ve the sensa¬ 
tion white; in this way, by the subtraction of some of the ctemeats of 
lOU 


Table 20,—CoNvigisioN Factors tor iLLU«iNATH>N UrJn3 


THE THEORETICAL BASIS 























































COtnt>J« CtKEMATOORAPilY 


white ti^t. (he colours of niatcriiil objects originate. If (lie surface 
J the material is polished and regular Uw reflection tbererrom will 
be of that type known as direct. In this case, regardless of the tight- 
absorhmg property of the material, within a certain angle nearly all 
the incident light will be reflected. The surface of a piece of red gkss, 
(or example, can redect light just like a mirror within a certain angle, 
whereas at another angle it wU] appear u saturated red. Sometimes 
Miecuve al^rption occurs in the outer layers of a polished object. 

i loe acigtc at which dii^'i reflisctioa h avoided an object will 
be more sainted in colour than a non-polished, diffusely reflKiing 
surface. This effect is familiar in the increased richness " in tlie 
appeumnee of a surface after polishing or varnishing. 

Tire characte^lic absorption of the principal pigments and dyes 
should be studied by those engagoil in the art Erection of colour 
filTO, because it is important to be able to predict the rcproducUon 
wth some approximation to accumey. Tlic usual method of presenting 
the absorption, or refleettoo, factors of a pigmcni. or a dye, is In 
the form of a curve repTcsrating the leflecuon, or transmission, 
■actors of the colouring medium for radiant energy of all wavelengths 
in the visible spectrum. When tht^c are plotted we have the curves 
repn^nting the spectral leHsction or transmission faciore for the 
visibie spectrum. Typical spectrophotomclric daia are plotted in die 
curves tn Rgs. 52 and 53. from Color ami iij Applkathta, by M 

spectral reflection factors of a number 
of famthar pigments. Table 31 gives lire data from which the curves were 
ploEtctL The method generally adopted is to compare tire intensity of 
die hgbl reflecuid from the pigment with that reflected from the surface 
of some sta^ord white such as n^nestmn carbonate. 

The eye is not an analytical instrument. We cannot detect for 
exampli^ iho presence of the band of rays in the extreure red end of the 
s^tnim m n^rly all the basic dyes and many pigments. This hand of 
IS of considerable importance in colour photography, and is one of 
the rasons why cenmn greens, bluc-grceia. and hlum, commoniv met 
with m do^ fabnw, arc so diflicult to reproduce; for if there is' light 
through the red (ilter we shall obtain dcjuiiy on the negmfve 
and therefore proportionately less cyan primed on die posiUve. 

Dye lakes known as ** poster colours arc generally used for the 
paling of rartuoM in colour. Such poster colours are nearly always 


li ii Um ideal blue for purpose! of wtuirr nhob^.^*^ flrevioiis Wue pigmenu, 
red lijdit It «.pplirSr«,S ll 

bw. x«», „ ,w tZ “ ” 


THE TKEOHETTCAt BASIS 



103 


























COLOUM CiNEMATOORAPHY 



tfp— 

A 

t. J. 3 

fi/Awfjd&Wjt 





















7 ■ ^. ^A«wtf>vywi 

nur 

m/ 










-k 












c 


'1^ 



y 










-^ 

'i 

A 


/ 











1 

1 



/ 









£ 
















1 






■^--4 

y^' 

" 1 

r' 







- -' f 





c 


h 



h -*~^ 



! 

I 









\ 

1 



hSarf 
Ro. S2- 


w ^ ^ M ^ 



104 


Fw. 5J, 

































































































THE THEOKETtCAL BASIS 


Table 22 - 


//iv. 


ill Eir/rtwfif 

(M/il 

m 

460. I 

1 440, 

Biue-fineen 

MeJochitc Greaa 

O-SO 



Bloe-Brcai 

MflhyJ fiJtie 



— 

Green 

Brililuni Green iHihyl 

CiTBai> 




Blue 

Victoria Blire 

0-71 

— 

0-52 

Blue 

PalflU BLiic 

078 

091 

pai 


From Table 22 it is evident that dye lakes made frem such colnurs 
are dangerous lo use. Note, fo r example, that Victoria Blue rcRwis more 
red of vruvriensth 700 itmii blue of vvavekngtfi 440 M>i. Poster 
colours arc at present being used in studio<s engaged In making cartoons 
in colour; and these ore made from basic dyes of whicb the table gives 
typical examples. Certain of the familiar pigments arc safer (Table 23). 
Should it be required to reproduce a pure blue or gieeu it would be 
advisable to use the following; 


Table 23 



RffietUmct 

V H^4ive- 


Ungtft in W/is 



700. 

1 

550. 

460. 

WnsorBItiC *, ,, 

DO 


0-71 

tmcmkl Gmn (jineaitc i>f c»pper) ,, 1 

Dn 

0 8? 

0-0» 


Similarly, If it should be desired to repmsduco a maximum red, 
care must be exercised that the chosen pigment Joes not reflect a 
band of blue mys; in other words, that the supposed r^ is not. in 
fact, a very red cerise, or cardiftol red. Certain cheap scenic and poster 
reds are made from dye Lakes which are purplish in hue. although this 
may not be apparent at Isrst glance. 

It is not to be expected that the art direcior wdl have instruments 
available, even In the best-equipped studio, for the maisurement of the 
spectral reflection rectors of pigments, nor that Im will possess the 
necessary scientiflc iralning which would enable him lo use them lo 
advantage, so that recourse must be had to some rough-aad-ready 

105 



























COLOtra C4?J^MATOCR APH V 


method of examming the spcctnd rcflcclinn factors of ^ colour. The 
d.mptest way is to have three pieces of gelatjnc ftlicr of the primary 
tricob Ilf analysis colours (Wratien 25+ 58* 47] and to place a small 
square of the colour to be examined betwe^-Ti a strip of while and a 
strip of black paper. By noting the rclsitrve lurnioosity of the colour 
through each filter us compaTcd with the white and bhick» a fough 
estimate cun be mode- A still better methodL perhaps^ is lo use a small 
grey scale such as is avaikbk io the Mattsdl Bo^k af Color, published 
by the Munsell Color Company* Baltimore (distributed by A^m 
HUger Ltdp+ Londou). A note can then be made as to the position 
on the grey scale which the test colour matches; this will give a fair 
indication ofiu spectral icRcction factor in three parts of rhe spectrum. 
It will also give a good idea of the deiisiiy Ukdy to be recorded on each 
of the three negative records. Such examination of colours is very 
insiniciive. Wc learn, for iosiancc, that maiiy appaieutly pure hues 
arc very poor reflectors of those parts of the spectrum they reflect most 
effkzieutly; because it is clear that for a certain colour to be reprodur^ 
with maximum intensity it is essential for the negative to record density 
equivalent to that whki would be oblaiued from while. To fcproduce 
pure red tt is necessary to record maximum density through the red 
filter and lo record wof/jti?g through the green and blue filters- This 
means ihul a red to be reproduced eis pure as the reproduction colours 
permit would have to appear to the eye throu^i the three filters as a 
match to white through the red rdter and as iudistinguishiible from 
black through the green and blue filters. 

Refcrcoce 

fwOVD A-# ’■ Thft T^to^phk ftcfbcLing Pcwis oT Cgteured Ohjccli,'' 
T/Wf. Site. M^i- Fir. It. Ne. (1927). 

CDminiinicaiiDii No. J27. Kodak Rcseaixh Laboraiorks^ 


trichromatic analysis 

Fundamental ComUtioiEi for the Reproducttuii of CoJoiir^ by a 
Tfaree-Cofour Proctsi 

Almost invariably it has been the practice of writers on the subjcci 
of colour photofn-aphy to introduce tbetr discussion of dicory by some 
refciencc to the trichromniic theory of colour vision. Unfortunately* 
this approach haa been the origin of tnneh mhunderstandingand much 
unococssary inystincation. In fact, ihe foundiitton upon whkh the whole 
science of colour photography rests does noi require any Tcrcfence 
whatever to theories of the functionifig of the visual process. The 
matter b completely covered by the science of colorimetry, the mHihe- 
matk:il Li ws. of which arc derived frcnn (he pheno tncrtu of colour mixiurr. 
106 


THE THeOJfctrRAi iAsis 


It is SI fact tlml thrt« wavcItngtM can be selected (tom the range of 
visible mdiatiofi so timi when combined in various proportipns they 
will stimulate nearly the whole range of colour sensation. The colours 
sdected are generHUy red, green, and hluc. Secondly^ if two colours 
arcmatched in turn hy mijtlufcs of three mdiattons. then the two colours 
together, when mixed additively by auitabk optical mcanSi. will be 
matched by the &um of the two inixtures aiitiibrly combined. Upon 
These two observations cotorimecry depends. 

Early in the mi^tcenth century observation of tliis pbeuomenon 
led to Young^s hypothesis that the physiological mcchnnisni for lighi 



Fio^ 54. — Trkhmn^ik Tni^duntoirvciof snoiitml primarkaO^^Sdni* red, 0530ii sreen, 

biiis (W. D, wriglit). 

dciection must in all probability include some kind of tripk reecpiof 
amslyscr, and recent investigation has provided strofig support for 
the existence of such a fiinciion at the redital stage of the p^lio physical 
chain of evenis. But it should be noted thm the e^xperimenfut fact 
(hui practicatty ^ery cpinJ/f cdn be mtuched by the admixfure of three 
colours is mdependent of uny theory of cohur vish^x odymeed tfcroa/J/ 
fortU 

It is helpful to conceive of the means of colour phoiography as 
constituting a measuring tool fot colour- Tlie colour photographic 
ptocesg is subject to the principles of the science of colorimetryi 
A photographic emulsion is used 05 a dctocior (selective) of radiant 
energy, the selocilvity being obiained either by photochemical charac¬ 
teristics of the emulsion or by use of a itelccth^ filter modubfing the 
spectral composition of ihc radioiit energy to be recorded. 












CrOLOCTft CTKEMATD^^RAPiry 


Standardizatioa of Uw colour mixture chxracteristica of i nornm) 
observer and a ^ta nd a r d franicwork for xpcctScfUioo vvere adopted 
in 1951 by the Commii^ioo IiUcrnatioiiafe de I'idaim^ {C.I.E.). 
The standard QLE, (known in U^SJk, as LC_L) observer was based 
upon mixture data of components consisting of narrow bands of wave* 



WAV EL tWQTM («ILL lU IC PO «s) 

Pin. 5^5.—DfUribullion coemcknta die SlitmiarU Obserrer (CLP *l 

Itnimiii dtmtvy hnvins ihe lodrcateJ wmUmgtt 


ncQEiirtd lo colout fnateb a uiifl atin^xml i 


I I I f ■ I I ■ t I I 


kngths averaging 650 530 and Thc*c data wer« 

dttermin^ hy W, D Wright, DA., of the ImperiaJ College of Science 
and Technology, nitd indcpendenlly by I. Guild of the Naiion«l 

^oscly (Rg, 54)^ Tlic CpI^ tnchromalic syslcm of colour specifica- 
tion employs three reference siiniuii which iire hnagijiflry and are 
108 



THS THEORETICAL BASIS 


linearly transformed fiom tlie data based on real s timuli having 
mathcmaticat significance only. In which negative values (in the real 
stimuli) have been eliminated and one curve of the three, namely the 
green, is made identical to the spectral visual sensitivity function. These 





Flo, 5SA.—Colour miHtm cunes usins leal iwrcrenec tirlnvuk*. Ift.G.B. Dii^ 

tributkia coeflSdcnls.) 

data can be used to caiculute itccuiasely all stages of the transforma¬ 
tions which take place in the recording and reproduction processes of 
colour photography (Fig. 5S), 

It has been shown by C. &. Harrison and R. C, Homer that a 
perfect colour process would have to reproduce a spectrutn perfectly. 
Equations cun be developed which will ^ve for uny spmtied emulsion 

IW 












COLOUR CIKEHATOOAAPHV 


seiuitivUy ibe foriQ of tbc tbeorciicatly idea] laking fillers for any 
given se I of viewing fi}(e» (R^ 56A, 56B. 560, but oegaiive values’ 
are obtained for tlM transtnission in certain regions for the spoctruni 





™ m m wiPfR 

Fto. SAA.—aimbimJ tafclite viewhiR Alien for me with on dnubion 
of stxxtml Bcmunity slHWn in Fie-^ CKairiaon ud Hcrner). 





and as a fdier obvioudy boa only jiosUive transroissions. it follows tbat 
reproduction of ^ coloure is impossible by any threw»lour 
additive process (figs 56D and 56E), just as it is imposjibto to match 
aU spectnim colours by admLiture of three monochnjouiiic primaries. 

» A iwaalivo amount of a mmairy (» olitaliied br tnuttftrrina ihn tts th, 

op^ aid^ the divided Add of a eotodrmdS. cSwKth 

rskduuon Mhewe inttioudu* valaet are lieinf iktennliied 
HO 












TmhmutiJS VatuftS 


tHt THKOUBTICAt BAiilS 



300 


Fro. TbeowliaJ tcp^roduaion of cnofloctMODoa^ n pnxw uaiii| 

rhe f\ltcn und mulAiofn tcnsitivUy jtiown in Fig*- 5tA uml 4Harn*eiiwrtna 

Konier). 

la facl, ibe Bqualions obtained vltc Ibc distributive coetTuicats of ap 
energy spoctruiOi wiih tho viewing fSltcrs taken as voitaiy stimuli. 
Thus in the case of ao additive traiispareDcy: — 

d\%*\ 

( tfibuikui of I ^ 
lOie wlourJ 
VfTpmtucUcdi f 

/Relative hitcnsityv /SpcctniJ 
f of llahibehlml ted V | tiibuiioo 
Ifliicf or WBfl off 
\faldetwtl / 






COLOUR CENLKATOGRAF'HY 

Prof. A. C. Hardy of Massackusetis Institute of TecbnoLogy has 
determiccd the charactcrisUcs of locordiag tricolour filters wtakh wotild 
provide negaUvrs to modulate reprodudion prunuries at every point io 
the teproduclion PJ. 

Say that the light iacldeut upon the camera lens origumting from a 



Fio- S&D.—Theoretkn) spudral MmUiviikj for • iypkal addltOe praoeu (G. B. 

Huruonl- 

given area of the subject has a spectral energy distribution E. The 
trichromatic co-ordinates will be 


X- Erd», (l0> 






where x, f, £ are the distribution coefflrients of unit amounts of the 
spectral colours in the colorimetnc system used. 

Suppose the tristimulus values of unit amounts of the primaries 
that am mixed to provide ibe leproduction position me V Z^., 
X,. Z,, aral X,. Y„ Z,. respectively. Then, if an area of the reprolluc-* 

Uon contains r units of the red primary, g of the gi«n, and b of the 
blue, the irichroutaiic co-ordinates of this area me 



112 







the TMEOftETICAT BASIS 




Theoneiical rcpioductiott ot £0 Mf* booid b^f a process inLrig like nuers unJ cmulsian 
senailivigf shown m Fignt. 56A aod S6H (Hurison aod Horoor). 


3Gk»|- 

5 


Fic, 56E.—Theoreikisl ropfovhiciiotk of 6(1 Nt^ Iksmi by ^ 
process CHiirTison ikiitf ElDmcr) 

If ibi* area is to evoke the satne viiiua! sensation u the area of the 
subject chaiacterized by the tnitgy tiistribution E, the necessary 
condition is 

It 113 














X'-X. 

Y^=Y. 

Z"=Z. 



Over a v^ide range of tuminance level the rept^nlactloii would be 
enliTuly saitsfacLory if the tristimuljja valuer of the reproduction 
were proponiomih hut tiol uet’esaarily equal* lo tlicKc of ihe eort^ 
iponding aieu of the originaL 

Let the efTcctivc spectra) sensitivities of ihif three negative enitibions 
be represented by Sr, S^* and Si respectively* then when exposed to 
spectral energy dEslribiiLion E the three exposure arc proportSonaL 
respectively* to 

r,=j ‘ ES^ 

2,- P CS,d», 

Ef^ f ’ ESaifl. 

« * 

Each exposure determines the amount of the Teproduetion primn'nes. 
Ef the conditions for tone rcpnxlucilon are satisfied. 


4a) 

<■«>) 


r^krEr, l5o> 

m 

(5f) 


These five sets of equations may be oombined alsebmkaUy to yield 
(he folio wing equations; 


ES^+*,X,[‘EVi' t-Ji*X 4 | tiStiilp. r EUft. (M 

- * m * J } 9 

*,y,| ES,Kft-;-A>Y,|* ES,fl5H-AtYJ I' ES*rfl= | * EjiJK. m} 

l,Z, f ns^ j ' E3^ hJkiZal * ESirfA^ I" EfidA, («c) 

Tliese define the CGsential conditions for correct reproduction of 
one of tbe subject colours. Inspoaion of ihese equations reveals 
that one subject colour is corroctly reproducible in an infinite number 
of ways. In other words, regardless of the form of the emulsion filter 
seasUivtiics S'* Ss. and S^, or the tristimuhis values of the repro¬ 
duction primarica, the constants nuiy always be chosen in such a manner 
that equations 6 wilt be satisfied for a given colour in the subject. 

To reproduce all colours, equaiioits 6 must be satisfied sunnliarte- 
ously, regardless of the fonn of the function E (spcctml distribution of 
energy of original colour). This would be true if at every wavelength , 


-t-A i. 


fJo> 

(Tt) 


114 


THfi TPTECtlimCAL 


Only relative values of S^i, and St are requUed in practiee, $p 
that oc^uations 7 can be "wriitcTi frione simply in tenn^ of the ii> 
chroinatic cocfficienis of the ncproduotion priiriiiries rather than in 
terms of their tristimultJS values. Then the fandamentaJ conditioni 
for exact cototiT reproduction by a tricolour process become 


XjSw f Jt,Sj-|-3rifrSh“^. 



Hardy notes that " these conditions arc ptifccily gefleral m the 
sense that the colours of the subject nrtay be either real or imagmary. 
Likewise the reproduction primaries may be either real or imuginai^. 
In * prttetlca! process the fcproductlon primaries arc red, and ne^tive 
amoLiiits of the priimaries cannot be employed. This lltniis the Tcalizabk 
colour gamut, but in no way alters the fuudjimental requirements 
which must be fulAUed by any thtee-oolouir process, rta! or imaginary. 

It is relatively easy to apply equations ft to additive processes^ 
but not so easy in the case of subtractive proce^. In m ided sub* 
tiuctive process each dye absorbs rudiatioa unifonTdy [n a spectral 
region not absorbed by the other two, so I hut a reproduction primary 
i% determined by tbc colour of the ligbl absorbed by one of the ihiw 
dyes. By substituting the values of the reproduction pniruirics in 
equations 8^ the spectral sensitivities of the colour-scparaUoti negative:^ 
can be cakuLated. 

In subtractive processes one dyis only is noi actively absorbent 
at rveiy waveteagth. A composite subtructive priiuary can be deier- 
miiicd by taking into constderation live absorption contribution at 
ail wavelengths of the three dyes combined. Hardy determines such 
primuries by slanmg with the spectral tratismltlanoe of piece of 
film whose colour ts^ say, a Ughi flesh tint when projected (curve^ F 
in Fig, 57). He then takes another pii:^ in which Uie conecutrayon 
cf the rctLabsorbing (cyan) dye is slightly reduced Icurvc R). AHuming 
a projection source corresponding lo iUumiaaut C, the iristimuJus 
values calculated from curves R'. G\ and B of Fig. ?7 are showri 
in Table 24. 

Table 24 


Rcii Pfinvv'X- 

= 0-J346 
Zr - Q 


4}mff Pfjmftty. 

X, = 0’1^^S 
V_ = 0442S 
tJ = iy3592 


BhiC PfliTKir> - 

Yh - 

34^0^09 


Substituting these values in equations 8. the values of S^, 
and are ihox ithown iii Fig. 58. Naturally, sve have iregative valu^ 
far theseemulstoi) responses, aid ih^e can bseffcctsvely obtained only 
by maskitig. 

Hardy coniinucs the argument thus; Three iKSgaiivei may be 

115 


COtOGK CrNEMATDGRAPHY 



SCO 600 

iVatv-length (m/i) 


















p 
































— 








=□ 

[ 






_ 












1 











t 
























Fm, 5T.^The«e ipectrophoiomeiiie cunv iJtuitme u nwilKxl whidi the 
iluction primnrwi hi a ■ulnniciive pr ixew cdr tie idemhied (A, C Kuily). 


made to suffice abuadouittg the assumption incorporaicd in cqua’ 
tioBs 5. Instead, let H be assitmed that the emotmt of the red priitiary 
is to be made ilependent to some extent upon the exposure received 
by all three-colour separetioa ite|attvn. If a similar ussumption U 
116 











































































Tttfi THEORETICAL RASIR 



Pio, 38 .—TIkw bi«i» inilitau! I he neluiiw f pectmi. 


117 

































































































COLOltft a!<tEMATnGftArHV 


made with lespecT to the green and bine pritnnnes, equations 9 act 
on expression of the proposed technique " 

f’~krSfric^t+l(^4 (9<i) 
f 9 fri 

To realize this in practice involves comrallins the red pfimarji' by 
ineiins of an image that is a composite locord of the red, green, and 
blue negatives. The extent to which each exposure is weighted by this 
re^rd is determined by the uiagnttode of the constants Jti, ft-, and its. 
When one of the consianU is less ihnn zero, a positive Image rather 
than a negative ttnage is to be employed in making the composite 
record. Care inusl also be taken that the characieristics of the photo* 
graphic materials are substontuilly linear in order that a true addition 
or subtraction of exposures may be efGecled. 

To^ quote Hardyr “ With this tindcistandmg of the proposed 
^hhique, let equations 9 be substituted in the previous development 
instead of equations 5, The conditions for correct colour rendering 
are then found to take the form 


KtS,+KA-i-KA=-Jf. 
K,S,4-K,S,+K,S,- k 


(((Vri 

(lOtl 

(tOef 


where the constants in the above equations (iiulicnted by capital letters) 
have the following values; 


Ki =■ ft,?t f-T"k,X 

K4~k^^k,Xt-i*^ 
K,=*,VH-A.Vv+ft,y 
K,=.ft.yH-ft4Vr+ft,Y 
K*=ft,yrt A.Yrfft.V 
Vi,^k,7^+k,Z,-hk^ 


Kardy concludes bis beauiiful analysis thus; " Equations (0 are 
of the same form as equatiniu 7, and can be used in the some 
manner. In this case the spoetrel rensiiivtties, S„ and S*. may be 
cverywliere positive and are therefore readily reaUzafalc in ptactice. 
Those familiar with the conoepis of colorimetry will recognize that this 
technique involves, in effeei, the preparation of a «l of three negaUves 
which would properly control the reproducUan primaries employed 
in any process, additive or subtractive. In the applkatlon of this 
technique to subtractive processes, the number ofconstatiis b so great 
that the reproduction may arbltrurily be made correct at seveml 
points within ibe boundaries of the realirable colour solid. 

**li may he added by way of conclusion that the requirements of 
the theory herein set forth are inescapable. They are the direct consc* 
quence of the chaructcristics of the visual processes of the hninan 

ns 


THE THEOBHTtCfcL BAMS 


observer. No tluee>colour process can ever duplicate the ewrgy 
distribution of each point of the subject, but it can be made to duplicate 
ilw visual effect, provided the necessary conditions are satisfied. 
Thai the convemional colour separation negatives do not pro^rly 
control the reproduction primaries has beep given tacit twognilion 
by the ernpirica! aitompts ut' correction ' such as nwiUtig^ Although 
such methods of correction arc incapable of salisfying the oondilioM 
for perfect colour reproduction, the iittprovemenl resulting from their 



Fki. 59.-^Vufi!itiaa ef s Telatue iiwcmiJ Rn^uvJiy (as a fiutctioa of ilemityj for a 
corUtin omulAiOT aful rtitcr coinbinMioii (0. B- l-futtisoii). 

u» £ccm$ to indioite the de&ir^btlity of wnploy^g ihe lypo of correction 
that u n^mous af the probJerri prescribes." 

Nortt—The writer hw endeavoured to do Prof* Hardy's dassk 
Ptiper justice, apologizing for sudi abridgaoenis as were dictated by 
restriclioiis of space. 

Stmilady, MacAdam and oibers have shown ihitt the flcbievertient 
of perfect ttsprodtiction of not only the relative lumiitance but alMt 
the dominant wnvekngtlt and purity of every dcinJJ in the subj^ 
photographed Ls thcoreucally imobtiduiible tinlea^s the speetmi wnritivity 
cnrvTcs of the eniulsions used for tricliro malic analysts are in (juanlitaiiw 
agreement vsith curves which specify the oriour-nialching properties 
of nomwl human vision. Thew spccinil wnsiliviUcs should be linear 

M9 





COLOtlft CIMKMMOQRAPHV 

conibiTiaticns of the colour tnixturc functions^ The fetjuired photo- 
graphic s^itivity curves wilt depend on die chromjtucities of the 
rtproiluctzon primaries. The negative portions of these cur\'es corre¬ 
spond appi^xinuiicly in crnignitudc and spectral locaLloii to the tocalions 
oF the portion of the colour mlstDre diagram lying whhin the spcctnmi 
locus, but outside ihc trumglCt which represent the rcproducuon 
primaries. Dorortunately^ the contrast characienstics of an emulsion 
vary with w^avclcngth* vvith consequem vamtions of spectral sensitivity 
exposure {Fig. 59)- Only when emulsions con he made having 
conirasi characteristics independent of wavelength will Lt be possible to 
design fillers which will render the rcBpori!^ of the emubioti ct^uivalent 



Fku. 59A.->CaninA4i (y) vmat diaractoiaiki of m certain 

material iQ. B. Hnfriiron), 

lo that of the eye for ali normal levels af illumination. Sets of filters 
can be used whose itansimuances closely it^tohle the positive portions 
of the colour mixiuie functions t\ negative mode with jueh filters 
is called ihc prmclpiil 

Another filler combination can be chosen to provide relative spectral 
jcnsilivities proportional to the values of the negutKe portions of tlie 
mUtune curves. ThU tWfiative is known hs a tofrecihn ttrsative 
A posiiiw iranspareflcy primed from this negative is known as a 
monk. 7116 principal nejfiitiv<e and the mask nm finally superimposed 
in register to form what MncAdatn hiu called a caFi-eftfd st^paratioft 
twgiiHw, masking method has been shown by mmhomatical 
aMly^ to be superior lo normal sepomtions. Compulation* show 
that tittle improvement can be effected by any of the methods which 
haw been suggested for improving normal colour separations in which 




THE THEORBTICAi BASIS 


the spcictral seai»ittviik$ atre proportional to ihe po^kivc portion 
only of the tiistiinutus ^-nlucs of Lhe spirctrum compuieil on the basis 
of the akTtuiil projection priniarie9> We must disLin^ui^h, hovvover, 
between thcoreticaUy perfecl photo^rapliic meUiods for nbtaming 
perfeei reprodueiionfi and the methods which are feasible inoommeiVEal 
pnicUce, 

MacAtLiin [4 \ has discuised also tlie theoretical basis for a law of 
subtractive nurture analogous to the accepted methods for com puling 
additive niKiur^. i-rom this law calculations show that in itif case 
of ihe dyes used tn the wpsh-ofT re!ief process ihe masks would have 
to be prepared as follows: 

A positive irmsk niadc from the ipeen camera negjitive is tegbtered 
with the red earners negative to form the cyan printer. This mask 
should have a gradient of D42 wdth relation to the gieen aimera 
negatives. A positive mask rrom the red camera negative should 
be regbtenod wlLh the green camera negative to rurtii the magenta 
primer. ThU should have a gradient of with respect to the red 
camuni negative. Fiimlly* a positj%*e mask from ihc green camera 
negative should be registered with the blue camera negative for Ihe 
yellow printer. Normally the lua^k made from the gnrcit neplivc 
can be used for both the cyan and yellow printers. Thus, only two 
masks need be made. 

It is not proposed iti this t reatbe to presem a rhnmi of the iuimeiisc 
htemture which has siccumuiated in the last few years covering the 
theon^tical mathstnotieal treatment of the problems of colour photo¬ 
graphy. Those aspccia of the science of cotorimetry with which the 
serious student must acquaint himself in order to master the subject 
are fully dealt with in ihc works cited under the references given below. 


Tricohnu- Filter kadtrs 

Wt know^ that the densities of tlie image of a scaJe of greys obtained 
through each of the three fillers must be tdctiticaL Tlie ratio of ex¬ 
posure will vary for :t given set of filters and for difTerent makes of 
fUm, and also with ihe ^pecirul character of ihc light-source. The 
principal manufacturers supply correct exposure nttiosn h is, howwer, 
advisable to rei^ the balance obtained under any particular set of 
eonditions. In the ease of a htLim-splitlcr camera ihU iv ts^vcniial* 
the light reaching each primnrj filter will depend upon the dciiign of 
a special optics! beam-dividing untL 
Perhaps the simplest method is lo place a patch ot the filter to direct 
contact with Ihe film and to teke an exposure with the lens facing a 
surfiicc of dhTuscIy reflccling while. For this purpose pot opal " 
gljiss, backed bv white drawing paper, makes a sattafaetory reflector. 

121 



COLDliR CIK)!MATOGitAl»HY 


We might obtaiit tlie following densities using Kodak Super^X Motion 
Picture Negative rUm at a given exposure: 





Dayli0il 





JUmnbitkfUm 

iJoffp 





O.ODO K. 

25 . 



Dcmity M4 

i-n 

5& .. 

-. 

* ^ 


til 

47 

-- 


-p Ml 

1-03 


Developing the film to a gamnia, of. say, 0-6S* it wUl be seen that for 
this particular film the compensation required is very little. Talcing 
the icreen as the lowest and compensating for red and blue, we have: 

M4-|-0i8«.(M» ^=0«2J 

J‘lI-l-(»=0O3 ^5=0^ 

Now these figures rcolly represent excess densities obtained, and since 
density U pTOportional to the log of exposure, their antilogs, represent 
the factors by whkh the effective exposure is in excess. Hence the figures 
may also be regarded as lepresentmg densities which must be added 
to the fillers to reduce the dfcctive exposures, while the reciprocals 
of ifio aniiloes. represent the factors by which the exposures (e.g., the 
areas of the filters) must be reduced. 

Now the aniilog. of 0'09'2 i$ 1-236 (addUional density for red), 
and the aniilog. of O'Ote is MI ladditiciml density for hluei The 
reciprocals arc 0‘809 and 0>!K)1 respectively, or expressed as percentages 
the red and blue filters must be reduced to 80-9 and 90-1 per cent, 
respectively of their original areas. 

Correction for Tungsten IJ^t 

This time the blue is the lowest and wc rsorrec! for red and green. 

For red, 

1-3J HB=0‘3 0-4^ ladUtddcmity). 

For green, 

I'tl — J-Ol=-?0'OS ^^—0-123 ftddrd dcnulyt, 

Antilogs, of 0 46 and 0123 are respectivdy 2-88 and 1-33. 

Reciprocals of these arc 0-3472 and 0’752. 

Hence red and green fillets have to be reduced to 34-7 and 75^2 
per cent, of original areas respectively. 

Now it should be simple to fjci firotn these figures the required 
compensation to convert perfect daylight lilicis to perfect ones for 
lungsUsn. Thus, using the corrections determined above, the mtcT 
areas for eqim! dcttstics are: 

122 


THE THEOaETICAL AASIS 




T^lAgSttH. 



8CW 
IDO 
90 -( 


W-7 
75 2 
JOO 


Equa!»mg for blue, we have: 


DayJi^i, 

90 

MJ 

100 


Tmgstea. 



M'7 

75-1 

IDO 


Hence, to changie from daylight to uingsien, the red area has lo be 
reduced from 90 to 34-7, which works out as a reduction to 3S'iS 
per cent, of original area. Simitaiiy the green is reduced from 111 
to 7S'2— i.t,, to 68 per ceaL 

Entirely satisfactory tricolour hlters are manufactured by the (euditig 
photographic firms, such as Kodak. Itford, Dufay-Oiromca, and 
Atuco. TTic relative spectral transmlttances of these filters dilTet only in 
iniiiior respects. Ilford Ltd. supply sets of compensated filters whldi 
jpve correctly balanced exposure for the grey scale when used with 
panchromatic and hypersensitive panchromatic materials. These 
filter sets consist of the existing stnodaid trichromatic blue filter, 
whereas the green and red filters have been made by dj'cs which have 
been mixed with u certain proportion of neuiTU] grey. Such filters 
obviate the necessity for calculating filter ratios. 

For two-colour work with bipack it is generally unnecessary to use a 
filter. On occasions it may be desirable to use a K-1 or K-2 (Wratten) 
or a Beta or Girerma tlford Filter for exterior work. When using bipack 
for tricolour work by aliematc exposures the best pair of filters is 
Wratien No. 12 and No. 47 for artificial li^t and No. 15 and No. 
49 for sunlight. 

Two-colour fillers for additive work are: 


Taeisg Filters: Sitnught 
Wiatten No. 28 (Rcd-oraiigeX 
Wratten No. 40a (Blue-green). 

Taking Filters: TonostesJ Lamp (3,500* K.) 
Wratten No. 28. 

Wratten No, 56 or No, 40. 


pacuEdioN Filters 
Wratten No. 23 b. 
Wratten No, 69. 


123 



COLOUR CmEMATOQRA^Hy 


FILTEK CaIXUI-ATIONS FOR TRlCI[ItO\UTlC yVJS^VLYSIS 

S. H. Gloom, of tht staff of the Science Museuni, London, has 
mad^ some intcresUng calculations of the filter-balance problem, and 
the following material is included with bis kind peimlssioiL 

On first considctailon it might appear that if a given combination 
of fillers and emulsion gives correct results for one type of illuminaiion, 
it would do so for rdl Olliers. For it may be argued that a change in 
the composition of the lUuminani will afhsct equally both the eye 
and ihe pTiotogmphic record- If wx really desired to neproduee what 
we actually see, this would appear to be the case, in point of fact, 
however, ihc eye tends to accept a grey pigment as grey under widely 
dEficreni conditions of ilhunimtion and to adjust its whole colour 
scale nccotdingly. In any case, practical experience shows that it is 
normally desirable and in fact necessary to ** balance ” the three 
negatives so that they give equal densities when a grey pigment Is 
photographed with the illuminant Ln qucslioiL 

In the balancing process the principal faclois involved arc (o) the 
spectral composition of the light, E61 the transmission cliamcleristics 
of the hiters, and the sensitivities of the emulsion for red. green, 
and blue. 

Of these three it is usually much easier to adjust the values of (frj 
than of (a) or (c), and hence ia practice we usually choose filters 
which arc approximately correct fora given illuminanl and a given 
emulsion and then compensate them (e.jj,. by reduction in area or 
addition of density) to ghx equal densilies for a grey scale. 

For a differeat iliumLnnnt we may eitber choose differcal filters or, 
in some cases, use the same biters with dilfcieiit compensation. In this 
way various types of arithmetical problems arise which are extremely 
simple in lliemsclvcs but in which mistakes are easily made unless 
the principles are clearly understood and unless a nomencliiture is 
used M'hich avoids ambiguity. 

It should be remarked that in problems of colour photography we 
are not usually concerned wbh actual values in detiniu units so much 
as with the raf/o of the quantities concerned, sucli as intensity, sensitivtiy, 
cic„ for each of the three primaries red, grren, and blue. Such groups 
of three numbers are irequcnily expressed as pcreentiiges—i.r„ so that 
they add up to IDO—but when we are concerned with a ratio there Is 
no pariicular virtue in ibis, and ut the courre uf calculations it is a 
sheer waste of time to reduce to percentages, m any mie before rctich- 
ing the fmul ratio which is being soughL 

Before discusing problems of the type referred fo U will clearly 
be necessary lo define the various terms to be used: 

The Heliiihv Intc/tsHia of red, green, and blue in 3 given illuminaiu 



TItt TKEOfltTlCAL 


are expressed iis the ratio of \hc amounis of comitined in the 

three wavelength bands md in colour phoiography. This T*itio could 
be obtained from an energy dbUribuiioti cur^-c of the iUuminunt 
by deiermining the aretu under the three portions of the carve tn 
question, intensities will be denoted hy L in* ete. 

The Tfijnspare/icy of a filter is defined as the ratio of the mtensity 
of the iransmilied light to iha\ of die Lncldenl light. Thus, if Ught of 
inLensity I| falls on a filter and Ii is transmiUctU 

Transpancficy » K 
h 

By the Rf^taihe Transparencies of a set of tricolour 

filters tve shall mean the ratio of their transparencies for lighl of 
their own colour. Note that, smee each filler trnnsnui^ lighl of its 
own colour orJy^ die Lransparcncy of each filter for an equal energy 
illuminant would be onc-ihird of it^ imnsparency lo light of its. own 
colour. Hence, smee all three transparencies would be reduced in 
the Same raltOf wc might have defined rehttive transparencies as the 
nttio of the iatensities ininsmittcd by the fillers when a ** white 
light of the same intensity was incident on uU three niters. Actual 
imnsparenetus can, uf course^ never be greater tJiun U but thb will 
clearly not apply to numbers which wc may use to rt present relauvc 
transparencies, 

Opadiy is dclmcd os lie reciprocal of transparency—/.r., as A 

Note that if one filter Ims a transparency 1/3 and another a trans¬ 
parency 1/2, the two logcihor will transmit 1/3 of 1/2 of the incident 
light and the transparency of the pair togcllier is S/6* In gener^^ ihe 
iranspurency of any combination of fillers may tic found by midtiplyhi^ 
together the Individiml transparencies^ Simihiriy, the opacity of a 
combination of filters equals the praituer of the Irtdj vidua! opacities. 

Density is defined as tog- ^opacity)- Since the log, of a product 
equals ihc sum of the lop, of the factors, lo obtain the density of a 
combinaiiuii of fillers we must add the iscparatc densities. 

ihe terms “ dcfisilyand opacityshould not be confused. 
At the same time it ^ obvious that when the opciues are eqaul 
the densities arc also equal, so we can speak of filters or neguti^Ncs 
of equal density or of equal opacity without ambiguity* 

Metatlte SefLciihUies S» ; will be defi^ as ihc rauu of 

the photographic effect given by equul iniensilies of G* and! B, 
other things being sqiml, of as tins fotio of ibc reciprocals of the iii' 
tensities requircil to give equal ilciwities. 

We afe now in a position to eoniilder cefUiin types of problem 
involving some of the above factors. 


125 


COLOUR CtKEUATOORA^HY 


Rtlatire Tr&ospaFCDcies 

(l> Given an itlumijuint of equal intenshies for R, G, and B, and 
given the relauvc sensitivities of the emulsion, to detemune die re¬ 
quired relative imnsparcncies of the filters to give equal denstilcs 
for a grey scale. 

For this the values of 5XT must be equal for R, G. and B. 

Hence the values of T must be inversely proportioakl to those of S. 

Hence 

T*:T, iT, miut enusi 

For example, if the semitivities are 6 ; 30 : 64, the transporeacies 
ttiusi be 1^6 ; i/30 ; 1/64=160 : 32 !5. Ilf reduced to percentages, 

this becomes 77-3 :15-5 ; 7'2S.) 

(2) Given the rdative intensities of the illuminant and the relative 
sensitivities of the emulsion, to find the required relative transparencies 
of Alters to give equal densities for a grey scale. 

Tlie values of IXTX S must be equal for R, G, and B. 

Hence the values of T must be inversely proportiotial to those of 

For example, suppose the relaiire intensities are 60 : 27 r 13 and 
the relative sensitivities 6 : 30 : 64, ihcn 

T'• 6^ 27 K30-TJ76* 

- 936 ; 4161405 

or, expressed as percentages, 53-2 ■ 23 7 ; 23-05. 

|3) Given the desir^ reblive Unospareiicics (r) for an tllumiiunt of 
known relative intensities(i), to find the required relative transparencies 
(T) for another Uluminant of known relaave intensities (1) used with 
the some emulsion fof unknown rclailre secsitiviiieSi). 

Since the emulsions are the same in both cases, ihe transparencies 
must be invmcly proportional to the relative intcno i j es 

Hence 

T.tT,; T,- r. > '* :r, J', 

i‘ I* 1* 

For example, suppose the relauve transparencies 70:20 :10 give 
equal densities for grey with an illuniinant of relative imeasiiis 
50 : 30 : 20, then, using the same emulsion, ihe required relative 
traasparcncics for an tlluininam 60 :25 ; IS will be given by 

T.;X.!T.-TOx||:2a «g: tO * g 

= IT5;72: :23:14 (sptiT(iix.J. 


TK£ THIsOMHilCAL BASIS 


Tfae Compcnsattoti of Fll^trs 

Th^ct. are two prinqipal [Qetliod£ of coitifMsasating filters: 

0) By Lhe reduction of ar^. 

(2) fly tltc addiUoa of density. 

(1> To nedtioe the total tnmsttuwJon of a filter from n valiie T* to a 
viluc Tj we need only rediioe the anea in Ute same pfopartiooi* 

If the problem occurs inconnecticifi with three RUers, we proceed ns 
follow'S: 

Suppose the relative transmissions are 6G : 24 : 16 for R, G. and B 
respectively^ and we require a ratio 40 : 32 ; 28, Multiplying the latter 
throughout by 16/28, it reduces to 22 8 ! 18"3 H6 (eqmdifuig for 
bluc). 

22*8 

From this we see that the red filter must be reduced to (=-33 

DU 

18'3 

per ccjit«) of its origmal area and the green filter to - — (^76-2 per 

cenL) of its origins] area, 

(2) To compensate by the additiun of density* 

If we require to change a filter of transparency T| to one of trans^ 
portmey we could obviously add a filter of iransparency T such that 

TX T|=T^f,<’.. stieh that T=^, The opacity of such a filter 

T, 

T 

would be and its density would be 

*■ 

fog, I*- log, T,- iofl. Tj. 

I i 

Suppose, for example, that wc wished to solve the previous nampte 
by the addition of densities, we first equalize for the blue filter as 
brfore. Tbea; 

Required additional density for the red filter=^ 

lo^ «O-l0r 1-7781-l^t2=033t- 
Similarly, for the green, 

lofr M-lot 18-3-1-3802-1-ZS2S-0-I I77. 

Note also that the untllo^ of density gives opacity and the redprocal 
of thi* gives iriinspatcncy. Hence the addition of a density. D, to a 
filter of traospaiency, T, gives a filter of 


127 


colour ciheautography 


Te jtmre a Set of fiUm by Mmmt of dft 

Determ^uition of /Ar heasities produced 

Before proceeding to Ihis exumpk it will be neew^^ry to introduce 
SL fiiriber deflnltion. 

It h found Lhai over the region of corra^t expo^um the dilTerence 
of densities obtuinjcd is proportiona] to Ihc difference of the Lognriihtm 
of the exposures^ This ratio b kno^^n as gnmmn. so that we have 


= . 

log. E, 


or Ictf. Ej-tog. 


y 


Now to reduce an exposure of E, to E, wc miisl dearly add a filter 
ihc transparency of which is Its opacity musi therefore he 

Ej 

and its denstiy log. E|—log- But this has been shown to be equal 
Y 

Heace this Last expression gives the density of the required compett- 
sating filter. 

The corresponding tiansp^iTcncy is 


I 

AnOto^ 

y 


and if we wish to correei by a reduction of area, the area would ob¬ 
viously have to be reduced by tfii$ factor- 

For example, supposing that with a certain emukion and iilumimini 
and develepitig to a value of gamma=0 h5 wc obtained the foljowlng 
densities: 


llfier. Ddrruhy. 

Red «. i. ** ,, i'’J3 

Qtc/oi .. .. L4I 

Blue .. .. .. t<l1 


As the blue gives ilic lowest density we most clearly correct for the 
ltd and the green. 

For red* 


D.-p. « 


0S5 


^0^5= 




SimUar)y» for green^ 

l ll-t<lJ=C 03 awl 


Kenev the requinsd added densities are 0-46 and 0-123 i«$p«livc]y. 
Also the anlilogs. of ihese are 2-88 and 1-33, and Ihc reciprocals 
of these OR 0-3472 and 0-752 respectively. 

These are the factors for the Tcduciion of ams which would tlicrc- 
fore have to be brought down to 34-7 Bitd 75-2 perceai. of the originals 
if This method of cotopeosation were adopted, 

128 



TH£ TH£D]l£t h;aI- 


Referenced 

(1) Maxv^'ELU Jasuh Cijuk. Pki£i^xi>irhittil Tramacrimt^ ISO p, 7®, Royal 

JnsiitulkHL 

(2) HAhiUd^ Ct. Br, ami Hoic^tn, R. G., ‘‘The Tbeory of Addislirc Thnec^tiloiLr 
PtioiOErapby/' Pftat. 67 (!>»:, p. 706. 

(7) Kakdv* a. C.. Htimiboiik of MassaiJitiialli In^titiibo uf TecJmology. 

*• Tte Tbeot^ ol Tltfw<^Sar Reproduetjon/' Jovrn S&c* Pic- EiV£*^ 
Jt. Np. 4 (Oct. i9m, PP J71-M3. 

HAftfiv, A C-, ttiHl WoRKliLifio, F. L-^*^ The Tlieor>'of Throe-Cofor Reproduclioii.'^* 
Jouni. Opf^ St?f. Amr^^ 2?* Mo. 7 (jy]y 19J7>, 

H) MAf Adaw, David 1«, "Phc^iosniphic Aipcctf of ihc Thociry of Tls«frCoTor 
Reproduciicm," GoeiWtfiicaticin No. 6S0, Kodult lUseanch Laboraiprkd, 
Phoi. A’brm. (JLily 1941), p. 733. 

Su^vlroclivc Colw Mitlim? and Cotoi RepfOdPOion/* CiamTnimiciiliOfi 
No* 6Slt Kod:ik Rraeardr^ Luborytorka^ Pktif- Jourtt. {\m- 1941 p, 777- 
** Tha Fondamcnlais or Color Measurement,'^'^ Jimn. Svc. Fit. 

31, No. 4 (Oct. 1935), p- 34J. 

Yul-r, J. A. Cr*' TheThcDiy of Subinctivc Color Photography*'" ComrmintcaliOfi 
No. 6W, Kodak Rcscaaii Uborntorics, Jotun. i Nov. 1940).^ 

** Predation of Eiiora In Colour Reiiiierme under Given Coodltioni,*" 
Cornnnmkalioii No. €£5, Kodak Rescorch Lalxtratorks. Phot, /cpwjt. (Nov. 

* ‘ The Theory of Subtrovti^ic Color Flioto-^Emphy,^* CmifUTtiinua^tjoii No. 764^ 
Kodak Reseaah Ijaboraioriej, Jemo. (Feb. S94I), p. 7<X 

Spc»{^fA, D. A*p" Aemriuiy AluirmNc hy Stiukhiforwurd Colour RcprodwJtlon,** 
Ran Ip Phot. JovFn. (July 193S), p. 777. 

WAhJHT. W. D., Tht hfiasurrmi^i CuW 11945), Mj^cmiPafi. London. 

A Rc-ikicfftiinaifim of tht TH^r^imtitk Mixturt Dota„ Sp&i^S Report 
Series, No, 139, Medical Rcstarch Council 11929), LofKlon. 

MtniRAV* H. D.. and SPEKds, D. A.,’’ Analyiis Filtcr^i m ColourReprodudion*" 
Fhotu Journ., Til (liiJy 1935^ PP- 474-S2. 

14ANSOK, W. X* *ml Rkiiiv. F. A., ^'ThM-Color Subtraetb^ Photography. 

Soc. MiU. Pit* Bfg„ SI, No. 2 (FcIk I949>+ p. US. 

EvANa, R. M t Viittiii Processes and Color i'hoicimtphy," Jouxn- Opt. Sot. Amur., 
33 (Nov. 1947), pp. 579-6S4. 


4. THE photochemical RECORD. THE RECOKDING 
PLANE (TRICHROMATIC RECORD h 

The phoiograpihic record roastitoUng the original or rruisier film 
For n motion piclure in colour insy take one of die Following fomii:— 

L Successive Frame. 

Separation negative? of normal dimenwons succesilvely recorded 
on A SI agio fil m strip coated with a p^nchrontatic cmulitioiL Camera 
normat. 

2 * '* lltree-Siripr 

Namely, three films for ejcposure in a bcum^splhter camera em¬ 
bodying two exposure aperliifei. Two of the Elms conslitiite a 
, t29 



rOiQUH EIIGRAPltV 

bipaek wiu^h u&ed in one of tilt apenunc^ or gates, and rhc 
Ttmainmg uhn is cacposcd in the other gale. 

Exi^jpte: Three-strip film as supplied for TecbJiicolor 

and Dtifaychrome, 

fntegralTripiick (Moaopacit, Mululaytfl. Cnracm nomd. 

^““‘i Uyers containing non-ilifruSLijig 

Unginal is a ODlouredi posiuve colour cDupEcrs, 

by reversal processing. Exarrrples; Ansco Color, Agfacolor 

RevemJ, Gevacobr ReversaL 

B. ProcesiOd by controlled colour 
dcvclopmenL 

Examptes: Kodachrome, Ilford 
Colour, 

(A) u a coloured negative. Mxampla: Agfacolor Negative, 

WithoLi integral mask. Uyeri Gevacalof Negative 
containing non-diETusing co- 
lour couplers, 

(c) With integral masking. Ex<^ples: Eastman Color Ncga- 

live, Ansco Color Negative p 

4. As alter/iative 3 obave, buj sub-sfmdard. 

•!*"“ have been •* Wowa-up " from 16 mm. 
S niethod is equally applicable to Ansco 

«aniir? Agfacolor 16 mm, reversal positives. Qimcra is sub- 

5. Additive Screen or Mosaic Negarii e. 

Camera nonnal, ExampU: Dula^’color Negative, 

b, Einppiitg Tripaiik^ 

Wiihoul colour dcvcioptpcn!. Exmiplai: Technicolor, Du Pont 
Camera normal. ^<otour btpacit), Gevaert. 

Cooie, imd Kxxiuk putenu^ 

Such a material would Kscmble Kodachrome, but flic layers 
wouU) have to be separable, yielding normal separation negatives. 

7. 5/jng/t Frame Muititde Image, 

Separation ne^tiv«of sub-standard dimensions simullaneouslv 

2- 05 mm.). Nonnal motion piciyre panchromaiic film it m 
ployed. B^m-splitter camera required^TuehTlS^ cumeL^f 
Thonmcolor, Roux* Franctta* Cinccolor {British), 


TUG THGOREtlCJ^L 


S. Bipdck iTwo-colourl. 

Exposed ift B. ttoriml c4imem equipped with ipecud gate and 
ma gazin e- Camera modUkd. 

9. Leiiikiit&r Bim. (In dTect, an additivt screen process,) 

Eicposed in a nonnal camera. 

1. Successire Frame Method 

TitlCp canoon, or animated puppet dims are generalJy made by 
succKSssivdy expciiing a or rramep of three exposures made respec¬ 
tively throng red, green and blue iricolour Eliec^i use being ittade of u 
normal high-grade camera equipped with re^ster pin movement. It 
oertain that only ftr$t-cbss apparatus is good cnou^, ance mieroscopic 
iniiccunidejr of film podlioning between successive exposures will 
result in colour fringes tn the fiJiBl print li is al$o cssentb! that the 
single frame cmnetu-turning meckamsm^ by which the successive 
exposures am lUEwk, should be extiemdy aecuraie so that there arc no 
variations in the exposure time given for each single frame. 

Detailed insmictions will be found in the Technicolor and Diiray- 
chromc sections (see pages 414. 451). Reference will only be made 
here to essentials. 

A. TJw order of expmure ithonld be ihrougb the colour filters Blue, 
Red, Green. (Required by Tcchnioolor.) 

R- Wrattcja fUters A, B and C should be used, namely* Nos- 25 (Rctl)^ 
58 (Green) and 47 (Blue)* Generally usttl a$ unmounted gelatine. 
Optical flats can he ujicd, but it is difficult to ensure perfectly 
parallel rnounting for the three. Fibers made by Dufay-Chromex 
used for Diifaychrome are Chromex 523 (Red). 524 fCreen) and 
525 (Blue). 

C. Negative film T^tocl^s recommended are Eastman Background X 
Of Plus X. Filler fuctot^ for ilie former for VVmucn fillers 
25t 58* 47 are Tiesipcclivcly 4—6“l0. The $pcfid of Buckgrownd X 
to tungsten lighting is approximately Wci^ton 16. 

D. DeliDJiioA of the negative should not fall bdow a resolving 
power of 50 lines to the millimeirc. 

E. Picture Apertufe os per B.S- 677+ 1942. viz.^ 22x 16 mm^ 

I, ** Three-Strip ** Film mid FtntilsHm CmuhlnatiDii?< for wse In Beam- 
Splitter Canteruv 

When the Technicolor orpiiiiation firii began to use their three^ 
colour camems. Ihc combi ruitiun of hlm^ they employed^ comprised a 
bipack which wai intended prEmurily for iwo-colour photography and 
which recorded blue on iu front element, red on tlic rcur film* and b 
separaie high-speed (Super XX) panchromatic film to record grceii. 

The front film of ihe two-colour bipssek carried an oron^red fUrer 
layer over itsemutsion, and this, cogelhcr withfl magenta (minujr-green) 

1^1 


COLOiSR (.INBMATOtiRAFHy 

filler placed in front of both jUms, ensured that only blue fight was 
recorded on iJic from film arjd red on the rear ekmcnt« A trincoloitr 
green filler was used idtead of the panchromatic fibi. 

A minus-green filler* such a$ Wmllen 32^ was necessary because 
both front and rear elements of a twcn:olour bipack have some green 
sensiliviiy. T he lypc of magenta fiHcr required has a daylight factor of 
approximuieLy 5, while the tricolour green filler hu^. a factor of <i under 
the sarne conditions. 

These losses due lo tiller incfiickndes were largely climmated when 
Technicolor was able to employ three films which had been made by 
Easimn Kodak specially for the be^am-splitter camera. The new 
comblnalion of films (first used about 1940) comprises a bipacL with a 
purely blue-sensitive frottl. film together with u blue and r^ sensitive 
back film—a suiiabte red filter being carried by the emulsion of the front 
elcmeni. This type of bipack requires no ejnernal filler us ueiLher 
clement lias green sensitivity. For the sepamte green record a hi^ly 
green sensitive emulsion b used together with a minus-blue lycilow) 
filler to iiccount for the inevitable blue senshiviiy^ The ycUow filter 
required w ill probably hav^e a factor of appro^timaicly 2 ^—repressnling 
a considerable saving on any iricolour green filter. 

It is likely that the original two-colour bipack und single panchro- 
tnaiic film had un effective speed of Weston 3, while the new set of three 
films has a speed of appronimately Weston 6. 

3. Ijitegnil Tripflck 

Inicgrul Tripaek, or Mnanprick^ as it is culled in America, has not 
quite come up to ihe expcctalions of those who thought it would 
eliminate the inconveniences of Ihe beam'^spliuef eumera. The problem 
of makitig perfect threc'colour separation negatives from a poaitjvc, 
or a ncguiivc. Colour transparency immediately piesents itself, and wc 
know that this necessitates masking* If ihe mai^ks ate separate films 
registration ii almost impossible to apply as a standard laboratory 
technique. In general^ is now w^ell recognized^ magentas have 
excessive £kbsojT^on of blue and, to n lesser degree, of green, while 
cyans also ftavc excessive absorption of blue ^nd green. One of the 
altcrnativeij is lo make a low- density positive frcjiii one record and to 
Superimpose this upon the second record. In some mullihiycf materials 
a separate layer may be included which is converted to the desired hue 
for a colour ma^L Kodak patents cover an elegant solution of ihe 
problem. In ihe tUtiaci^lor* negative ihe cyan cnupler is orange in hue 
instead of colourless iti, say, Agfacolor^its absorpdnn being designed 
to be just sufficient to esmeef the excessive blue and green absorptions of 
ihc cyan. When completed iteoranp colpiiris^^mulUineously destroyed, 
thus providing a negative cyun image combined with an orange 
positive* the ktlcr caDccUiog lie densily to blue and grcepi light* Such 
' riLis nuilerfii] will be known M " CeJor Ne^aliw.'* 

133 


THE TlItORETICAL BASIS 


'4 Diaskcd cyan im^ge will hnvc normal conlr^si to red light and ^ro 
cdnirast lo blue und green light. Similarly the magenta is yettow in hue 
suiTicicnl lo equal the Bbsorption of blue by the mitgento. The combined 
magenta negative and yellow^ positive 45 the cyan iicgalivc and 

orange positive just described—ii will have correct contrast to green 
light and no contrast to blue light. From such a master masked 
negative, separations showing marked improvement cun he made. 

All ingenious altcmalivc solution of the problem m the case of a 
miUtUaycj negative material is described in B.P. 602,1551 tjf the GencraJ 
Aniline and Film Corpomtion, makers of Ansco Color Film. The layer 
carrying cyan coupler contains a uniformly distributed non-diFTusiing 
yellow or red a 7 ,o dye of low density^ and the miagcnta layer a yellow 
a 7 JD dye of low density. After development and hxatiort by llw usual 
technique, Ihe 320 dyes are bleached by acid thiourea as in the Gaspar 
process, l^s bleach has no inever^ible effect upon ihc dyes produced by 
the colour development The yellow iw.o dyesiufT in the mugcnla byer 
and the red azo dyestuffs in ihc cyan layer arc destroyed In Jiiui wiili 
the negative diver in the two byerSv Any retfuciion of the cyan and 
magenta can be restored by a short rinse in a dilute sotuiion of sodium 
carinate* The contrast of the masking image$ so produced bcontrolled 
by the bleaching lime of the acid thiourea. Sub^tiently. the silver is 
renaoved by the usual fierricyanlde bleach and fixation. AJternuttvely the 
BZO dyes may be added by use of a dye precipitating solution sucit us 
diphcnylguanidine acetate and after drying controlled diffusion effected 
by washing in water containing isopropyl alcohol, whkh removes the 
prccipltaUng agent from the top layer only. After precipitation of the 
yellow dye tn the magedUi and cyan byers by inimersion in a solution 
of a yellow azo dye, the yellow is washed out of the top luycr^ The 
rcrmiEmng steps mc identical lo those described above.* 

Such masked negative mtegrai tripaeks have not been used so far in 
any inajor produclion- It may wefj be, however, that $ueh tnalerials 
will yield results superior to those so far obiatned with mono pack as an 
original record for processes such as Techmcolor* A panchromatic 
matrU maiefial would enable positive master pfiaters to be made direct 
from the colour negative. Otherwise the maJdag of separ^Ation negatives 
would involve an intermedmte positive stage, Ihc separation yielding a 
set of positives. The weaknesses of the Caspar processing technique 
would soon reveal themselves in achieving colour miiskmg by such a 
method on a commercial scale. 

If the monopack original record is a reversal positive* better separa¬ 
tions wiU be made if it has been slightly underexposed in order to give 
good highlight detail. The total density range of Kodachrame^ for 
example^ Is approximately 2 6* the total range being 013 to 2'75- 
Where the density range is 3 4 or less the exposure of the sepuration 

* See ilM IT^. 2.431*9^, Dsc. 3, 1947. 


133 


COI,OUR CIMEM ATUGHAFFI Y 


tjcgaii VC should yield a dcndiy of 0'3 for the deepest stiadow on the 
tnuisparency in which deialt is to be iecx>rdcd Suitable nesative 
maicrbis are Ansco One-Sirjp Cobr-Sep&ruUoo Film Type 155,* or 
Kodak Super XX. Recommended Kodak filters for separation from 
Kodachrome are Wmilen 29 (Rod), 61 (Green). 49 (Blue). The filter 
factors and relative exposure Tetpiircd will be:— 


FUtef. 

Wfnien 2^ 
6t 

>, 49 

Plus2A 


Exp(^$urr. 
to 
J 5 


nfmr 

fdnon, 

5-3 

21-0 


Scpaniiiciis can be nuuic by coptact of by opticol projection. Tins 
negativcii should be developed lo a gamma of approximately 0-75. It is 

24 


20 


*1 

51*2 

<z 

04 


IS 0 M it ^£ 

Icff E 

Fm, ^--OianKicTiMiii:! tuf^cf for Aosco Rlro. Type IS3. 

Ctfiirirty ^ jifutv: fL C Hiirth. E X /W?dlwuM tmi Jcum. A/ef. 

pr«umed that a reference grey scale chart bos been included in Uic 
ongiiial and the moximuin density of the white step should be readcTcd 
in the separation negative of density not exceeding 1-5. All stejs of 
the chart must be rendered os nearly ideniica] densities in the three 
separation negatives. The htgh^hts must not be so “ bttmt np as to 
have lost detail. When making scparsiJons by an optical printer, 
condenKf illunriiiation is usually employed, and diffusion is not 
essential, provided a point source, such as a Siemen‘i“ ^lid Snurce ** 

' 5«e aliii} pda 



134 
























^ kidti ULr 

c' .’vi ri,KV. 


si^jaiesirnHBK 



Bo, fiU—AiHcoOni>StnpSepaTiiUan Film. 

Wcd^ ipcctxPKmm »liowinc ^pKtml «nnthrily. 


fF4i^ #v IMS 











TtlEORf-nCAl. BASIS 


tungsten fibiiTicnL lump iv cfnplojNJci. TTiij gjily advanrugc in djiftisloi] 
IS to obtain perfectJy cvcjt iltutfiin^on. 

When using Ansoo Type 155 "Oiie Sirip Calor-Separaiinn Fiim" ii 
IS the inientjoii of ihe maniifuctiirier that the separations shotitd be made 
as successive friuncs on the one 35 tnm. strip to ensure that during pro¬ 
cessing the skrinlcflge or other cbatigm in the physical properties of (he 
him wifi remain tdeniical for all three separations. In this product equal 
cnnuasi is obtained for the red. green and blue Jlltcr exposuteSi The 
gamma recommended for separation from Ansco Type 735 origitials b 
Cl'65, If (he original is masJkcd the gamma woufd have to 1>e appreeiabty 
hi^er and the material has adequate gradation latitude to permit this 
without using puralklism of contrast against colour. The normal deiiaity 
range of a T)'pe735 origuial is approsimoiefy 1-6. It will be observed 
^ai this range Ls covered in (he straight line portion of the di.iractcr- 
islic curves (Fig. 60). 

According to H. C. Harsh and J. S, Fnednuin.* “Another feature of 
thb new fiim is the sensitization which b extended farther into the red 
than a uormaf j^jichromaLto film. The reason for this is apparent 
hy rrfercnce to Fig, 61. tt tviU be noted tliat the cyan-dye image has a 
maximum absorption ai fiitO Mp.. which corresponds to the maxi mum 
of the red sensitivity of the Blm. This enables one to use an extremely 
sharp cutting filttr such as Wmttcn T(l, the eut-olT of which is well 
beyond the sensitivity range of a normal panchromatic lilm." This 
fpvcs a red filter separation which is neatly ideal, increasing the saiura- 
lioti of rcd.s and of those colours rich in red. 

Tltc tricolour onc-strip aanJysh Type 155 film b used on an oplitil 
printer equipped with regisiraiion pins and the copy head must have a 
skip frame action. A filEcf wheel is synchtonlzcd to die action and a set 
of three frames made frena each frame of the original. At the optical 
stage, fades, lap dissolves, or other special effects can be iMinded. 
Development b carried out in a hulTened borax formula of the tvpc 
used for variable density sound films. 

From Ihe suaKssive-frame separations a duplicate set of separali; 
negatives can be made via inwnuediate positives by ilic usual technique, 
or a SCI of scpamle posttives can be made which arc used as masters for 
printing direct on to Type 7.^2 Anreo Color Printing Film, use being 
^dc of a standard contHcl step printer equipped with registration pins, 
^ts mciliod involves three separate printings wiili the appropriate 


C. G, Oarkc* has giveii eonsidcrublc iaformaiioii on the employmenl 
o1 ^stman Moimpack " (vb,, special Kodachrome) in photograph- 
ing the Twcfiheih Century-Fos Film production *■* Tliundcrhcad/'' 
. rncd rpi-ue* h N-. New On^Slrip Color-Scttimtioii Filni m 

p Ifiiiiiatlofi of Film/* 


rOLOUlL Cr.%'£MATOCRAPI!Y 

tt'hich wa^ rirleasfd in Technicolor. The whole Rim wa^ pbotograplied 
in monopack including a wide range of background projection shots« 
He claims an H^uivalcnt increase of speed of 25 % aii compared with the 
heam'SpliLter. Warning is given as to a tendency lo increase contrasL 
and it is Slated that sUghUy dUFnscd daylight reproduces as bright 
sunlight, and light blue skie^ “ become vivid blue." Cloud-filled skies 
arc " most ideal'" Shadows should be tUuminated with the aid of 
reflectors and booster lights. M-R lamps, using Y.1 filters, arc used for 
this purpose. Bunting diffusers are useful to soften overhead siinUghi. 
An ultra-violet absorbing fihef is used for all scenes, exterior and 
interior — Wratten I14A. 

Apertures varied beiwccn7;2-8 and/ 16. f nterion were pholographed 
at/)2'S, Exterior exposures varied from^f^'S for the dark canyon and 
^iilerfalt scenes to an average of jit for the open landscapes. Exterior 
night scenes were tBkcn in daytime, and for these scenes the Rtm was 
one stop underexposed to inereasc density of shadows. Colour grading 
of the final Technicolor was forced in the blubh direction to simulate 
moonlight. 

Rushes were made as a reversal black-and-while print from the 
original colour positive. After a little experience in judging these 
reversal prints, the cameraman can gain quite a good conception of 
what quality the final colour print will be.*' 

Ititcriqr sets must have v^ery soft lighting lo avoid excessive conttast 
in rendition of flesh modelling: 

Many scenes in ' Thundefhead * would nol have been put on the 
screen had it not been for easily pcrtable cameras. Not only is produc¬ 
tion rime saved in placing cameras, but extreme camera angles can be 
employed and a greater selection of phologmphic lenses may be uEillzed. 
This i$ piirUculaTly so with the shorter focal length lenses, commonly 
caUed wide-angle lenses. Modem pictures uriUzc die ad vaamges of wide- 
angle tenses for their grearer depth of focus and interdicting perspective.^" 

4, SulFvtandard intc^ia) 1'ripdclc 

Sec puragniph X page 132, 

5, AddUiie Screen or Mosaic Negative 

The full technique is discussed under ** Dufaycolor/' We will only 
remark here that this type of negative colour film has hitherto only been 
of value as comprising the meariK of printing Dufaycolor positive. The 
screen Of f^hioiu dimensions forbid its use as an original for subtractive 
analysis. Expeiimcfits were made in 1940* using Dufaycolor negative 
from which black-and-white/jq.r/fivc separations were made fof prinring 
Gasparcolor (dyobkadi process). The resulting print exhibited marked 
granularity and unpleasant “ boil/* A reseau of some ISO lines to the 
miltimotre would yield a mnstef negative fromi which prims of accept- 
136 


TKF THEOftPTICAL ftASlS 


able definition and tranquillity could he made, bui the likelihood of 
fuch a Krcen being nuuiufacttircd very petnote indeed. 

(t. Stripping Tripack and Bipack 

In B.P. 565.K3S and 565.S36 of Tcchnicdlor, ihett is described tiic 
itiachiner^' for successiTni^ly stripping lnyei^ froiit a maltitaytr film let a 
new HItii base, wherein tbe ouier Hioc of the liiyer and its old base is 
weakened^ or a preliitiiniiry weakcatng is conjpleiedi while the two bases 
me ttavelliing tn superimppsilioT] on a camcc " (pin bdi) end the 
tiew iKiSc, carryifig the transferred hiycr. Is peeled apart rrom the old 
base, either white still on the carrier or after Uae composite fdm hag been 
retnoved from the emrief- More than one layer of a mutulayef 51m may 
be so stripped-—either by re^threading the films into the same apparnttis 
or by making provision for successive stripping opcraiions at differenl 
points-'* Mullfliiyer materials may have the same svtbsiraiura between 
successi^'c layers* being softened before stripping by controlled penetra* 
lion of the same solvent: or they may ha^xr $tiaxssjvc substrata soluble 
in different solvents. water and akoholf The belt may have m^^rk- 
jfigs so thfti when the layers ere being tmnsferred conrcspofidifig sprocket 
holes of ihc difTcrent films may be caused to engage the some teeib of 
the pin belt in order that slight irregularities in ihe pitch of the band 
may not impair subsequent regiiiniUon. 

B.P. 574,139 and 574.137 of Kodak describe a stripping iripack of 
a type obviously suitable for handling by the machinery just de^rilwd* 
end B.P. 574*138 dcaU with alternative tncchantcal devices of n similur 
nature to the Technicolor patenL® The Kodak patent states that the 
muliilayer stripping film which tm most suitably be mployed in such 
a process comprises, in its sLmpiesi fonOp a support having on one aide at 
tensi two superposed silver h^ide emulsion layers separated by a layer 
of colloidal material soluble in an iiqucrous m^ium^ or at Icusi so 
soFtenabk by an aqueous medium ihiit it will strip readily from one of 
the ernuLsion byers. Preferably it comprises a support having on one 
side ihrctf superposed silver halide emulsion layers,, the iw'O outer 
emulsion layers separated by a layer of colloidal matcradp soluble or at 
least permeable in an aqueous medium, the inner two eniolsion 
separated by n layct of watef^insolublc colloidal maieiifll soluhk^ m 
aqueous organic solvent media or alkaline sotuiicm. Hie separating 
layers preferably oonsist of cellutose esters and may be so composed titai 
they are both waler-solubk. The principle employed is to interleave 
the bottom red sensitive emulsion and the middle green sensitive mem¬ 
ber of the tripack with ii thin Liver of cclliilose acetate of say 19/* 
acetyl liolublc tn water and alcohol. The coating may eontaui I % of the 
cdlutosc acetate iu a mixture of 30 parts of ethyl akohoh 30 ^ 

ethylene glycol mono-methyl ether and 39 pans watefi This is soAcned 
^ .Sw Avs^ B P. 574. IM. and ^3^.032. 

137 


i OlQVH^ CINEMA T CJGRAMtV 


in the $trip[>ing sequence by a <itlute ukohoi Nexi the inter- 

leaving layer bclwesen the miho tniildl* Liya^ niiil ihe blue-sciiMtivc 
top Layer h a water-soluble cellutosiic ticelatc of j^cetyl content 17 % from 
a 1 % solution of cellulose acetate m water. To strip the top ctnulsion 
treaiuteDt with water h sufficient to bring about separation. Such a 
stripping tripack Is used to provide separation negatives by stripping 
the upper two kyers rnechanicaJly and in aecuraie registration to two 
new' film supports* the bottom layer being allowed to remain on its 
originaJ support. Development is carried out after stripping has been 
i^omplcUaL (Also B.P. 582,4» and 582*436.1 

Sec also Du Font B.P. 537.231 

Du Pont in B.F. 505,861 describe a bipack from whkfa Ihret separa- 
tioD ntgaiivcs c^n be obtained by a sequence of opeiattons applied to 
the rear element. The bipick consists of a front blue-sensitive yedtiw- 
dyed clement single-coated of the fiormal type. The rear ckmcni 
carries a iwo-kycr eoating, the front Layer being green sensitive and the 
back layer red sensitive. Between the two layers is a red filter layer* 
The yellow dye in die front emulsion and the red tiller iuterkavtng 
layer arc destroyed in the developer* 

After developmcfi! of the rear element n positive intemiediatc print 
is made from the combined green atid red negative records. Nest, the 
double-byct negative is bleached and the lop hycf only is re-developed 
with a vbcou^ developer. On fixation the bottom layer is eliminated. The 
iniermediate positive made previously from the two-layer film is now 
used us a mask and a print mnd* from the two corUibined* The resulting 
print w'ilj be a duplicate negative of the dwh-oyed image which consti¬ 
tuted the rear emulsion. We ihcrcforc now have three negatives. The 
front dement of the bipack, the front ncg^ibvc of the double-coated 
rear clement and a third negative derived in the muniier described* 

The claims aret—1* The method described for the production of 
independent colour separation photo graphic records from two or more 
colour sepoEation records inseparably superposed cfu the seme support* 
characieiizcd in that the elimination of one of the records is effected 
after the records have been developed to silver muiges* by bleaching all 
the reooids to converi iliem to silver ^Its, re-developing all but the 
innennost record by means of comrolled devriopment and finally 
diisoLvmg aw'ay the undeveloped silver salts which formed the inner¬ 
most jneooitL 

2. The method according to ckrm 1 applied to the processing of the 
multilayer clement (or clcmenis) of u bipack In which one support (or 
both) carries two superposed emulsion layers each sensitizj^ to a 
partkuliir colour range and in which the layers of both membcnE of the 
bipack have been exposed simtiitoncously to form the original colour 
sepaTation records.* 

' atw B.P. ^23.t44. May 30. |^. BirMack. thi Pont pstcnl 


138 


THE THEOkKTJCAL HA3IS 


Contemporary Technical procedure in the cmpicymeiit of bipaclt is 
well described in a recent paper presented by John Boyle, A»S,C*, si a 
ccinT.eoUon of the S.vM.P.E. in October 1946, to which ^ve are indebted 
for most of the infomtittioD here given. 

The foUowiijg changes are nec^sary to convert the N.C type Miichell 

for biputik: 

fll Move lenses (owardi- the film (emulsion) plane a disuuice of 
0-0045 in., then use normal cnlibraiions for focus. Cameras with 
standutd instead of" slip-ring " lens mounts would have to be 
either eye focused or recalibrated. 

(2) Adjusting leniws will nocessiiate " skimming " the ground glass 

back 0 0045 in. ^ , 

(3) Remove " stripper " shoe at back of maid sprocket and replace 

with “ cuiuway shoe, 

(4) Lock off clutch, 

(5> Substitute either a four-roller pressure pkte, or a wild 

plate. In the four-roller pbte the lop roller is straight while the 
other three rollers arc crowned 0-003 in. The fo u r-roller pressure 
plate is patented by the Cinecolor Corporation and license for 
use is granted by ihe patentees. The solid type plate is crowned 
0003 in, and is of polished chrome,' Pressure can be obtained 
with u solid screw or by use of a spring liaving twice the tension 
of the normal spring. In practice use is generally rawte of the 
solid screw for the four-roller plate, being careful to avoid” run¬ 
outs.” 

Mr. Boyle states that the proper adjusimetil of the prcMurc j^is k 
very important; insufRcicnt clearance with consctiu^cnt ' puitCTing 
will cause perforation damage and out-of-register images, while im 
much deiirance will destroy contact of the rear negative, resulting m 
” breathing " and out-of-focus pictures. 

A test chart is photographed at the end of each day i work ana ins 
paired negatives carefully cjiamined for contact, any lack of which ^ 
ruinous to the rear image. The back negative should be compared with 
a standard of e^ireltence retained as a control, 

Coated lenses have ^ven the best results and satisfactory picions 
have been made with lenses varying in foci from 24-10 mm., but sue i 
wide-anele lenses muial be used with discretion- . 

Owing to tbe difficulty of obiaining adequate illumination with 
tungsten lighting and vuriolions in colour [emperature. only 
type orbipoek has been used in the Hat Roach Studios, m * large 
number of two-colour films have b«n made, Gener^ly H.l. arc* are 
employed, the geueral illumination being identieal to T«iu«color. 
Boyle notes that back fight should be kept to a mintmum. only (be 
' The solid lypv pyiumiitjlly tfownttl » as«l by kepuhlic Pisuova Cotp. for ihfii 

Tn^lijT bipadi; MilchcU carncTi^. 


COLOUR. tINE&UTOQRAl'HY 

ncccMary amcitjnl being u^d to m\c deiail in tiair ^n<I 5 cp;iriiU: the 
colour phnes. An undue amount gives bluish highlights^ In exteriors* 
back light ciau^.^ gmsi and fclkge; to reproduce as brownish in hue and 
should be avoided. Far street ixeiies and cxtcriof$ where there are no 
deep shadows, overcast weather conditions have given the be^i results 
{H.f. arcs and booster UghU agisting) for fanegraunds and fnccs. The 
use of an ultra-violet absorbing fiUcr helps in rendiLion of Oesh catours 
and textures* Ta genenil+ the $ct inhould be fully lightedt avoiding deep 
shadows^ With coated lenses al an aperture of/ 2-8 a keylight of 500 
foot candles is employodf filled to an overfall iLUHiuaacc of 650 foot 
candies. For night effects and somew'hai deeper shadows^ less fill and 
more cross-light should be used^ Night effects are accentuaied by the 
use of*" praciicab and brightly lit windows* Generally some 20% 
of the lights used are tungsten lamps used with Macbeth Whiterlite ” 
filters. Cfccasiomtlly ordinary incandescent spots are used without 
correctEon to cmpliasize reds; or orange. Bocuuse of the volume of light 
necessary, large units ore used as far away from subjects as set construc¬ 
tion will permit. The familiar V-l filter is used on all H,l. spots, to out 
ihe excessive blue-violeu but as in. Technicobr ligl^ting, the Mok- 
Richardson broadsides arc used without filters. Tliic side arcs ipve a 
colouc-tempcraltire of 5,500^ K. The HA. arcs with 170.Y-t Briglnmi 
gelatines arc 3,900’ K. 

Make-up should be on the light side to avoid u red^orange or sallow 
cotuplcxion. Lip rouge should be an orange-red. Grease has givcd 
beit« results than “ pancake and no make-up is used above No, 25, 
Owing to the light make-tip^ blended modelling is used to prevent 
masking appearanoc and to break up colour into planes. For men, a 
beard cover must be Uiodt oUicrwiic the beard will reproduce 4 blue 
shadow. No make-up is used on children. Three-colour nuike-up haw 
not been a smxeis, indeed standard hlack-and-white make-up tn fighter 
values has been found more suitable. 

White shiriSp towels and bedding should be dyed u buff, otherwise the 
whites will be too’* cold/* 

Fluorescent clotJi hus been successfully employed to obtain a colour 
of high saturationp 

Very complete pTelintinary tests should be made lo deienumc the 
precise reproduction (in adMuice) of all ihe princip.Yl costumes and 
furniture and interiDr dcconilion, 

7. Single Frame Muliiplc Imag^ 

It docs not appear that the Lcchnicians responsible for the develop¬ 
ment of thr^Hcolour subtractiviJ processes such as Technicolor, Cine- 
color (in its three-colour fonn), Oufaychtome, have been impTcsscdl with 
the possibilities of opUcul systems capable of providing two^ three or 
more separation negatives within the area of a single frame, Befotc the 
t4l> 


TKE THEORETlCAt BASIS 


demise of Gosp^ircolor in England owing to the outbreot of wiir m 1 W9t 
the writer had proved that this method should by no means be despised, 
[f designers of bciam-spliiiing prism-Icns uQits far additive processes had 
stopped a: the camera stage ihey wou Id, often have made a useful contri¬ 
bution. GcnerulJy, further refinement of the taking system never occurs 
because the inevitable insolvency which overtake'^ these optimists puts a 
slop lo fujiher work, WUh ftne grain negatives it should be possible lo 
make dupe 55 mm. optical blow-ups of adctiunte quality^ Needless to 
say, ihe negatives must be absolutely free from parallax, and p^itioning 
of axes must be constant. The method wairants ftiiibcr ijivestigaion. it 
wotdd be of great mterest to examine the resuJi of blowing-up " 
Tbomascolorp or Roux miniature negaiives. 

ft. BIpack 

Bxpock is still popular as a eonvenieni way of recording* Its survival 
has been due firstly to the incoavouenccs of a 35 mm. beam-spliltcr, 
secondly to its low production cost and lo the low cost of iw^o-colout 
prints. Toning of daublc^onied positive (coated on both sides of the 
film base) remains the cheapest of colour printing tedmlques* In Anierkis 
I he predominance of Technicolor wa^ bound to arouso cotnpcUdon. 
and so we s^sw the resurrtetionof Mulilcotor^ in the fuim of Cinecolor, 
of Mugnucolof/ and of other ancknt and r^pectabk processiDg 
procedures. In due course Technicolor replied with** Tcchnjcbrorne, 
three^Inur dye transfer from three mauices derived from the fiw? 
bipack negatives. Other newcomers arc FuUcolor and Trucolor* 

As has been slated in the Historical Summary/' the bipack was 
suggested by Uie progenitor of all colour prooesseSp Ducos du Kauronp 
in F P. 350.862, 1895* and by A. Gurtner, B.P. 7,924* 1W3—the latter 
paten ling the idea ofcoinbinuig iwo pkte:^ emulsions face to face* the 
plate nearer the objective to be coat^ with a slow silver chloride, or 
chlorobromide, rmubion unsensilixedp and the emulsion surface coated 
with a red-orange fillet^ the rear plutr being coated with a red-orange 
sensitive emulsion. Other bipacks foliow-cd. G. BatUstini patented <be 
arrangement ofbipack and single film in two gates at right roiglcs to give 
three-colour neguiives^ B.Pk 873, 1915. W. Buchanan-Taylor and others 
patented a simibr airangeincnt in BhP- 12^449. 1914, This camera 
embodied a scml-tfafisparent mirror to refiect the light lo ^te B. 
accommodating a bipack^ A. Hamburger and W. E. L. Day in B.P. 
136,595, 1918, patented the same * spni-dialytc " type of camcrii. 

The bipack bad the green sensitive element in the buck amJ the 
front unsensiiivsed emulsion presumubly was surface-coaled with u 
minus-blue filter. In the ?iccond gale a panchroitiaiie emu^ton used 
in conjunction with a red filler. Hamburger never used ibis airangement 
because he never perfected a three-colour process, 

* Still wrkolTCMtJtVflt ihcHalSyvtcw^labcwawriesoi Jndu*Hfies. 

Nil rapidly tapplanied by Trucolor, pfottuced by the same ifim. 


COLOUn C]MEHATO<jRA1>nY 


P. D. Brewster was one of the carilesi workers to use a bipack for 
iwo-coiour recording, B.P. 2,465. (915, and be was one of the Gist, if 
not the first, to use registering pins in camerBs and projectors, U.S.P. 
1,359,024. J920.1 

For A d^ber of years the Du Pont bipack, known ns“ Dupac," was 
the materia] generally favoured. It ts not listed as a resular product of 



iL g 

^41 


ff/ttr 


iug£uivc!t itblAiDCU witfa bcam^ptillcr camcoi usl^g bjpack 




///rirr 

(f/Vtmf/y _ 



1*-E 

1 ^ 
1 1 

1 ^ 


'a 

irAs/w^JD 



1 


1 

^ /Aiwir 


ef 

//tc/defit i^/tf 

Du Pont any more, and ihc film gciK!r.illy used loiljiy b Eit^tman TypNe 
1234, a red dye overcoaied onhochromauc negative matE^iiat of medium 
Colour s«n$itiviQ' and contrast h balanced to daylighu This is 
used as the firocit libn in combination with Bipack Panchromatic Type 
IBS* Type 1236 b an attermiiivc front element baUnced for tungsten 
Ulitmlnation at 3 W K. to 3^" K. 

* Sc^a&o W. V, D. KcSlcy* p. 


t42 






























Hffc THEOl^ETtCAL 


Moiliik^lJon &!' ttoniiaL catttcfas io acconunddaiC bipack bccsi 
studk^ by Ihc kaidin^ cimiera oianuractupets- In general ibis involves 
special mngai^^nr design, adequute piessura pads in the g^iic to ensure 
contact, and ro^aUbration of ibc nomicil focus. 

Bipack can be made lo yield ihree^iolour separalions provided a 
bt^tti-spLiiier ts used which gives Iwo sub-slatida^rd images y^ttMo the 
area of a single Frames as in the systems of Roux (Freiicb}* Ctnecolor 
(BritishJ, and otbem L W. Oliver, il. D- Murray and D, A. Spencer 
described in B*P. 363.000 such a meibod. The pair^ oF are 

exposed through yellow and ma^nta liliers. Other al tenia Uve com- 

faina Lions are described (Figs. 61, 63), . . l i 

In B,P. 395,124 Agfa described a Icntieukr bipack from which thr^ 
colour separatioiis could be made* The front Him was u normal 
lentkubr embossed base coated with an onhochromatk emulsion, 
The rear lilm is coated, as In siuiidard bipack, with a panchromatic 
emulskm. The emul&ion of the from film is coated with ihe Uiual red- 
orange filler. The Front him is caused to record two colmm by means of 
a banded filler in front of the caiticm lens. The band b diyided into 
three soctionsj magenta in the middlCji aud yellow on either side. Tlius 
ted is Iraasroitted by both filieis. The front film will bear a record in 
parallel bands of green and blue light The rear film bears a continuntis 
image which h a record of red light only. Tlic films arc reversal dcvel- 
opedf Or developed as normal negatLves if desired- To print from either 
Ihc green or bUie record iCparatcly it b necessary to use oolcnrcd light, 
using ^ bunded filter in the same position as wbon the picture was 
exposed. The priniing is generally done on a panchromatic materitd 
using a registration pin contact siep-by'Sicp printeri For illumination 
a snmll source musl be used, the filament being at right angles to the 
filler bHnds. and therefore honiootaJ. By lemporarily blocking out 
one or other band of the filler one record at a lime can t>e separated. 
The dimensions recommended for the filler bauds vary for difTcrent 
objectives. The following is an example^ as for daylight:— 

AsfKo F^l'8—-SO mnip III 

mrr. JWlfr. 

Hcighi of Band Id ™i. 15 mm, 

WlS vf Hand ^ ^ 

For priming from nesuiives tukea with ihe above len^? 

Hcieiit of WUJids 25 mm. 

Width of Bands tl mnL 

Excetleni separalinn can be obluhtt^ but the loss of resolving power is 
excessive. 

Ell B,P. 449,591, ihe writer and T. S, Wilding patented a btpack 
whinch is vs'eli worth further itiaL The ohjeet is to improve the definitiuii 

143 


COLOUli ClNlihtAtDGkAf’HY 


of two-colour pnnts by designing a bipack in which the front deincnl is 
the cyan printer* The frmt dement is sensitive to red and blue only^ a 
well recognized type of ^sitizing used today for tJte rear layer of 
integral Lripack;^. The rear ekment is a high-:^petd crlhochnimaiic 
cmulsiott,. Using a minus blue taking ftlLer we obLaiu a record of red- 
orange on the front negative and a record of green on ihe tear negative. 
The cyan printer being ihe front negative this image wilL have maximum 
sharpness* and the improvement in the final print is markedly superior 
to that yielded by the classical bipack with cyan printer Jii the rear. 
Obviously this blpaek can be used in a beani’Splittcr* giving two images 
and using, say* magenta and yellow filters^ we shall get four printers 
from one pair of negatives^ ihe cyan primer from the front negative and 
the magenta printer from the rear; and from the other pair, a yellow^ 


1- 1 

nfoanr 

fjiHiIjJAiT wwrtWjW- Tk/A biMnd 

mmsmirnM _i_ \ 


500p^ 

1 




rive rc ^ ^ 


(Asf/n/s £fui) 


Fjo. 64 .»BEpiiCk 


printer from the front clement and a second magentu primer from the 
rear elemeni. The latter is an extra record which will not be used 
(Ftg, 64). 


9. Lenticular Fibn 

in the I9i9 edition of this book the author wroie* Indeed, it is 
very likely ilnii nothing serious will ever came of it.” Ten years Live 
passed and there is yet no cause to alter this opiniom Tlie French me 
still £n;iJiioured of die idea, and optical priming systems appear in the 
patent liieruiare now and then, but the flood feys passed and there is only 
a trickle of effort left,* When ihh vein of ore was opened by the Frcnch- 
num, R. Berthon, in 1909^ it looked tike a new Klondike* but nothing is 
left now but a disused shaft or two and the debris of innumerable 
patent tiles. Tlie history of this elegant notion b one of the minor 
tragedies of colour photography msirks one more railuie of the 
optical dciiignm in their conlacl with ehemisu fur an ideal solution. 

* Eutinsii law beiiui cxpcrimentii] w^k ogam, in {tedwsten with the ^parent 
idtETtlinfi of employing kntieuiiir ftEm fcif ibe piojectkiii poiithv oui^- 

144 












THE THEOHEtfCAL Ba$|S 


A Ml description will be found ebewhere of how lenticular film works. 
No material is today commesrcially available. The stereoscopic possi- 
hilities of cylindrically embossed film so often commended are little 
more ejtciting than those of colour photography. 

The method failed owing to extreme difficulties of printing and to 
ihc presence of parallax fringing in the negative, espcdally when wide 
apcrliue lenses are used of focus longer than 50 mm. In projection, light 
loss is as great as in any other additive system. The projection lei^ and 
banded filter require high precision optics and rneehanical mounting. 

Unless there is some basic diange ta the of the pitotogjaphk 

response of seitwtb'C tnaieriab used at present in photography there b 
unlikely to be any further improvtment as regards the limitations of the 




Fio, 65.—PhotOfliaplilniUy ^imlEiir, jwctmlljf difJcreoi colours f&iIT. Other, md 

Spencer). 


colour recording in the Uirec-^olour process* These limitatiotw 
to bo taken into account. Thb aspect of the ihrec-cotour process has 
been exhaustively meated in a paper by A. J* BuJl^ L* ’W, Oliver, and 
D. A- Spencer* from which the following extract h given [I]; 


Tbcie 4ue 4 :ertaui qiKUion* in 5 iibtra<ibTt ^lotir phoimtrapby wliith cja oobf be 
by experment wUh li procefis livin® con^tbble nail 
Ophiiom oi th« questiuas uppcw froni lime te tun ihe« ^ usually Hacd 
opoo personal capcricnec with i;Mi£Ke4«4 brgejy to pciwja 

Owiuu i* tlw Mure or ilic redproGity law {I} ii la iJTfpo«ybk: to 
n««i 5 ity mio cquivn^car opacity for nil cknsitto In ibe U 

h Impossible to make use of colour nittfs wboic tr^nsmimons h«m 
curves. A«««din8ly. for «*kch l«ye 

il |i mcidm pcactfce K» divide ihc ipectruin into five diHUKt regain* 
three iilUiht (y ovetiappin*. Jhafp-cutiin* filter*. Thb comproniire. ^ ^ 

•yatem to far evolved, tmp«e* iphaeot lumUtiont upmt the imilifttfiiga of totour 
tcnderinii obteinubk. Amoti* iJeit the negaliw, poiitive. and pitiUins 












COLOUR Ci^BhiKJDG^Al^Hr 


aH liiivc sUnigjLi^liiic chnmcuiwics (bt otJicf v^tTcii^ ibai ftivuii itwiigviiiuaic 
lint to ihe cnrisiiMl wUl be tcpnvduced m ibe iame tin in the FcpmliKtiCKn), it can 
e^ily beslu^wn toot thns^coIcHir j^bgtLitsnajihy u 4I jmxnl ii rtgt 

Teprodudns coJiSur exactly as it appear^ In itoi oj^gmal. Conskfcr^ foi 
luuutiple, the tasc of two colours represented by the lnmBmissjoD enrve) siwwri in 
rig. 65 y^lien photogniphcd ttiroEiieili nennal irlcolouj fUtcOk It is obvima tkif they 
will pat appear ir bu^Uy IdcnlicoL oad yei, stoce they both huve ihe $anv phoiogitipiik: 
cnef£i>' distnbution through the ted und butuc BUers,. the roprodticedi eolour wdi be 
idraticaL Di^cotties of this sort are lisoalty disrrm^ by siaitog (hat cd^ouis w3th 
such ttansnussions uie rare tmuide the toboruiory. Ouj own expeiiecee m ihis 
respect has, perhaps, beenimfortimate. Wc havcoocasionany met with fabrics wfai^ 
c^Uf ii depeodent upon narroW'boiMied. shiup-cui ohsoiptions mdi rdketlDns, 
The nuigciua oolour Found in sticb fldnA^eis as chjtfwin. t$ a lypidl g gn-i nptp. 



Fki . 6^ 


in «n idsl let oT $e{>aniloii negaiitts the vauyiii; livieisitia of the {»inieiy 
coloun would be convened into equlv.tleel ojntatie». Owing, bowe^'cr, (o the 
railwe or the recipnidty law, thu equivalence k only posuUe over h ilmlfed raefe 
0 / df/afiki. Thk Citt. of little inquomace ta moiwcbrogne pktgiiai phoiogmphy 
has e drfiniie ugniiicaiHe in oaloor wort- Thus a inngcntu. for example, rosj 
« a comklenhleaaKiuat of nd ((tooridinf, thcreToiie, on ilie itniKhiqhie ponioa of 
the plmecu/vel end a imall ommuit of blue {reconUng on ihe tintlcrtxravtre portinol 
sml the iKonl ii ilicterDro not t iirictly prcqioriitinnl one, DllHcultiis sucb ns 
are khemnt la the dumretcrktics of the plioiogi^hk cniutMiKi. bat ihem arc even 
more iaiponani radon, wtiofe cocvol s within the photegnipber's power. LTnled 
theomUfMt of the ihree negaiiiw k ideiiiidtl it wUi be quite imposiblc to mniatun 
truihrul colour teMtcrrciB. 

Thf diegnm 66>ihoon ihc curres of n tiicolpurtcpamlon set Dfe rHutnJ 
wtttse in irtieb nottUcmpl has been made to bonj iheciiotirtvi of lIm neaaltves into 
line by giving iJte blue niler Dej^tinc drvwiopnurjfti. 

If * print H miMie by ipving hjiliI eipcmires iNiWih wh ^ the tinw fumatives. 
otJ> hi itep X, wbm ihe carves er™, whl n neutral mr he ebtaintd. the diutet 
steps betog brown aiuJ the llghler purple, if iIm expauttg is iMUusUal tu ralfce 
Stic hcavkil dually blwrk. ihc purpk caloLir ef itw Ugliter sicp^ i«ltl be iKcentuMJad 
[46 




THE THEOUBTJClAt BASTS 


Reference 

( l> Bull-, k. h, Oi_Tvm+ U W,+ aitd SpEM<3ft» D. A., An;ara^ AUainabTc by 
Stnk^irofWAfid Colmir RcppodiurtioiiV' 1*^ t, /awirn,, 73 (193J|, p, 15f, 

(2J ioh~Es^ 1_ anJ W^n, J , H,, l^fr^fvcr/fy Lsjw /a Phi^iosrFaptik Exp0^ure$, 

CpcnmunicaLion KtJ. 5J\, Kodak lia&trch Lubomiorbs- 
t 3 ) B^p A. hf aijj^ JoiLLtYi A- C, Ojpf. 5 i!W-. ( 1904 }^ p, 261 . 

Nftw™. A. iJHl llEfi.L, A. J.p PAaJj- p. 26J. 

t4> ^FEKCER. D, A.^i Colour PtM}[D^apliy In JVactLea ” (Pitman^ London^ I948j^ 
p. 103 . 


5. POSITIVE REFEODUenON IN .\DDIT1VE OB 
SUBTRACllVX PRIMARI1?:S 

(ft) Additive Syndi^is 

Referring once again to dimlysiii^knownig (Jus fipficinii iraasnaissioiis 
of a set of chosen synthesis pritnaricis R. G. B. (for example, Wraticn 
Additive Primary Filters Nos. 24. 59 and 47J by the use of Uie disiri- 
bulioti curves (Figs. 55, 55A) of ibe ^itandurd observer (in the C.E.E* 
system of iricfaromatk colorimetry) ii is possible to ploT R. G. B. in 
tetmt of the co-ordimtes X Y Z of the C-i.E. ciuromaiidiy diagram 
(colour triangle) and nie^dsun: the lotn] range of colours ^vhkh can be. 
yielded by this purtkulAf of Rp G, Bh primaries (Fig. 67). The choke 
of synthesis primiijii!^ R. G. B. is dictated by convenience. They must 
not be too dark and they must include the brg^t possible gamut of 
colour jnktune*' It is to be noted that ilw original spectrum mixture 
daia upon which the C,LE_ data is founded wai dcterrniTied by the use 
of three selected mouochromatk spectral componeuis. Iliese are caUed 
re/eraii'i siimufi. By linear Lransformatjon equations we cart express 
this same data in terms of the distribuiiort curm of any other set of 
refereneo stimuti, real or imaginary. Thus X Y Z arc imaginary stimuli 
ealeuJated so as to yield more data than hue and satumtioo only. 
(Se^ C.I.EL Sysleoi*) Wc refer here to these foets to make it dear that 
many sets of R. G. B. arc po^ihle. It h highly deritable that the 
range bctw'eeii R. and G. should be tts near us possible to the tocos of 
I he spoctrum* otherwise the mixtures of lliPic two would not yield 
Saturn ted red, orange, yellow and yellovr'-grecii. On the other hand 
blue*grccn8 arc rarely me I with hi oalute and it is less imporlaot that 
the rnrtge between G- and B- ^should he close to ihc spceiriim locus. 
It is cteariy iirrpossibk, owing to the curvature of the locus, for any 

< In meuili: the lakine fibers mill die vievviog or repreducUiTfi BILcol arc 

ibe same, chekx iv ihercTere u mutter oJi cotepmini^^ The ht%i let would hsrk't 
inmamifiiuiu lyiu| between ihc bcM iw&ajhie taking ami vinvjuf 6ll«, if thoe 
were wpamcc tFig. 56A). In iho Dufaywlof jiftscMs tlw spoctrai trunmi^tslortE. of 
die n£sc.tii (ifirnarks ire sliown ui Fiji ^ .irtd I he vhrrtTnjUklty rttn^ In Piip. 69, 

147 



colour CtNfUATOORAfHV 


ihfce points id be chosen which will contnia att the spectrum cotours, 
and the distribution curves of any rest primaries must show negative 
values. Any colouis iytng outside the triangle R. G. B. obviously 
cnnnol be teproduetd. (Sec, however, the possibUities of “masking.") 

The aimlysb Alters, as we have niready teamed in Section 3 (Tri- 
chromatic Analysis), must be such Uiat the product of their spccttnl 
iransmissiuns and spectral sensitivity of an coiulsion, or alternatively 



Pas. 6‘7.— Synibmti [trinuris nnmenied by Wntten fillers 2*, 59. 47, ptoiiAd qo 
C.I.E. dnwaatfdtr chart. 

the emulsion sensitivities alone in integral [tipack squaraiions (known as 
effective spectral sensitivity) is such that the resulting curves would 
have been obtained from actual colour matching experiments using the 
R. G. B. synthesis primaries for matching stimuli (Figs. 56*58). When 
R. G. B. of the synibesU have been chosen, the sensitivity requirements 
of the rest of the process can be calculated by the methods of standard 
coloripietry.’ (CT.E. System) (1) (2). 

^ See p. 112. 





























THE THEOltETlCAl 



Fw. 47A.-M.i«ure turva ^ Wl^lUa ^ke?3 24. 59, 4?. (Cwjrrtj;^ w/ 

CkriMtfx Ltd.} 



F». 68.—Tyitkal tpcctmi innmiiakm cttnei for DiLf-iy Eat coloacs. 


The wricer must be wcused fur caUlag attcntLou to the fact that ht^ 
trcdUncnt of the analysis problem In tbc 1939 edition of this wotk 
anticipated the subsequent mathcmatica! presentation in the bands of 
MacAdamr Hardy and otbersn The passage wilt be quoted because it 
was one of the cartie^t statements of the true nature of tTichTomatic 
photography :— 


149 

















































COLOUIt 


“ Tli« spectrum con {has be divide^l mio ihret ilighily ijvcriiipfiiig 
and graduated, or ‘ vigncticd ' wavekngxh groups, ilic inicgratcd 
$iUmuU of whidt will giN-c three sensations closdy approximaisng the 
sensations stimulated by chosen Tnonocbromatk: w^avelengths of red, 
greet! and blue. Thus tlie colour sensations which can be obtained 
with difleTeni pfos>ortionit of these three will be contained in the 



0'7 


0 5 


.3 


0 1 


0-2 


]/aiues of ^ 

F», 69.-t:M«x »6wnu PrimariEi ptoiinl on the ChTfiflUikit)’ Du^nuni 


0-0 


08 


inan^ boundetl by ibe posbion of the paracultir prinmiics cho««i. 
The choice of prunerie» sJtuuU be mnde for ihe S 4 me eojisidcralions 
which guide the choice in ihe «« of a trichtomaiic colorimeter 
Nicely, It IS de^rable to lediwc as much is posiible (he region of ihJ 
colour belli which lies oubdde the working trbnglc Guild 10> 
Guild's prinisTin were provided by Wrailen filierj (jj; 

,, . WWittif A. Exellatie), Purilr V 

.. 'VivelHtglli 63* looo 

MM " +1 »R S34 u^.- 

ISO ^ 










































THB THeo}inric.vi pA$ts 


" The position of Guild's and Bidl's pnnurtHra (4) is shown on the 
L'olour tnangle. Fig. 70. There is very litdc difTerence, iBull those 
640 Mu, 537 Mu und 464 Mu.) 

“ Each of the three photographic records of the three chosen 
wavelength group!) will record an imegraied density representing the 
measure of the degree to wliich the original light can sUmtdate 
colour sensation corresponding strictly to that which t$ sliinulated 
by the wavelength group transmitted by that filter. Wc have seen 
that these filter sensations nearly match the sensation received frotn 
monochromatic 11^1- Consequently such filters arc satisfactory 
analysers of primary siimiilns value in any light, in spite of their 





Fki. TIX—Full line tnleder (rianide ttpreseols Bull’* r^uoiziet. Dolled Ium non* 
tents Ciiihl*f r a tuurto . 


non-monochramatic iransmissions. This statement is a fundamentaJ 
definition Of the thcorcfical basis of Thtee-colonr photography. 

“ Jf now we transfonn these densities into trampatendes and 
illuminate them with tight filtered into wavelength groups capable 
of stimulating idcnllca] sensations to inonochromatk light of wave¬ 
length, say, 630 Mu, 537 Mu, 450 Mu, we reconstitute the ori^naJ 
sensation^ depending upon the three denaiUes recorded in a given 
instance, 

*' Considered thus the three-colour process is a spirelcs of analytical 
trichromatic colorimeter using photographic registniiion of tri¬ 
chromatic values ns densities, transforming these into transparencies 
and reconstituting the original colour by addJiion of primary coloured 
lights the values of which ait modified by the variahte densities in the 

I5i 



COLOUR CtNEKATOdtAPHr 

tninsparercy. Thi& Is the' ad<liiive * synthesis. Equally welt we may 
use primaries of minus value to reconstitute the original. This is the 
' subtractive ‘ process.” 

If not rigorously soimd, this was sLagutarly near to being an accurate 
presentation of the prol^em. 

Bui to continue—if for additive synthesis primaries we had at our 
disposal three monochromatic radiations of wavelengths 6S0 Mu. 
530 Mu and 460 Mu respectively, then the speclral senritivitks of three 
phrrtogrnphu: emulsions whose recorded densities were to control the 
proportions of the above stimuli such as to comprise all chromatidties. 



Ubfrn^rt^tffmmiitlamifar Cm1twtttr4f H.U, Smtoimt Ojfifr, 
F». 71.— Mean cocfltirteBi atfv» from imuIi of to pbaenTis (W. D, Wrighn, 

would have to be identical to the distribution curves of the refcreoce 
stimuli R. G. B. of Wright's original trichromatic mixture data 
(Fig. 71% 

For correct reproduction therefore the efleetive spectral sensidvititt 
of the emulsions or filter-eniiilsions should match Uic distribution curves 
of the chown synthesis primaries and the three processes most each 
have a stmighi line” response with a gamma of unity. Since the 
distribution curves of any real primaries have negarive portions and 
ensulrions have not been made with negative responses, mashing to 
cancel ih«c has to be resorted to. The meihods will later be dealt with. 
Aocording to W^righi, typical errors whkJi may ate these;— 

(1.1" Errors caused by neglecting the negative parts of the sensitivity 
curves, using insUmd all-positivt Curves dial are linear transformatioos 
152 
























THE THEORETICAL EAStE 


from tht C.l.E. system, but a» as similar as possible to the pcuiive 
portions of the ideul sensitivity curs’cs. For true icproduction with 
emulsions having ail-positive spectral sensitivity curves, neproduetion 
primaries lying outside the spectrum locus would be requir^t Instead, 



bio. 12.—(d) Dbuibtitloa curves for llw equal-enwiiy spectrum in t«mi of Ai. A, 
and A, as pHmaiics. tft) Energy dlnributlon curve of light radiaiM w oiqect 
pbatpemrMd. te> DisuibuUon cunt* for OKrjy diiirij^on in «fve {*> 

p^jj nni by snulliplyiAiff iflj nnd li&l lo^tbcf tWp D. wnghlj- 

Ai. A* and A., say, arc used (Fig. 72), Tlw primary most in error would 
be the green. A*, and colours cojiiaining uny green would suBer a 
change in hue- Alt colours would be too desaiurated, and the general 
trend would be as illustrated qualitatively by Fig, 73, 

(2) ** Errors caused by neglecting the negative parts of the senritivity 
curves, using instead curves that follow as closely as possible^ the positive 
portions of the ideal sensitivity curves, without being linear tranS' 

153 






















COiOUH CIMBM^TOGRAniV 



Ppj. 7?.—Colour truuiBlo tn lenra of A,. A, jukI A,. Anowi show dinKtlon of 
crtoii catHcid by umv neiiitivc eomltiou with son^tivity euiw* that an aJUtoshive 
tnfnronrulions of Cl-E, dutiilxulon curves ^W. D. Wtiiht). 






(54 












THE THEORSTICAL RAS)!i 


formalioiis from Ihc C.I.E. system- The main negaiivc area belongs to 
tbc red pnmaiy and occuts in the blue-gieen pari of the spectnim. 
Coloim whkh radiate ener^ in this part of the spectrum will therefore 
be reproduoed with loo targe a red component The error trend is 
itlustraied in Fig. 74, and corresponds mainly to a loss of ssturalion. 



Fm. 75.—Direction aferEvn ewnwt ty la> ualnB ?. iluin one, jind 

tty a gairttnti fes* ihaf^ one (W. ii Wr^jui. 


ii) Errors hy ujsio^ sensitivity OEtrve^ thui are gm%^y 

difTcrcDi from the ideal corves, bat still, of course, ktsing Ai, Ag as 
the reproduction primaTies+ It is imposstlrie lo deduce any general Jaw 
in this case since the errors depend cniirely on the way in which the 
^nsitivity curves depajrt from the cotrect curves. In any particular case 
the effect can be deduced by subtracting the theoretically correct curves 
rroat tlte actual curvest if a pCfSitive red area b IcA in the nuddle of tbc 
spectium, greens and blue-greens will be too desaturated, and so an, 

155 








COLOUR C1NEHATOGAAPUV 



Pn. 76.-MacAdiiin‘» Muidviiy onw* for iha enkbliuCon of nscnKbiciiwi of 
suniH» plotted in Fij, 77. 



TJ.^nJiailnua (tproduokw of )2 fawly tnisht ™_** ■ 

(D,UMSvdnm.*««. !S'!? 


156 








THE THBDRETKCAt BASIS 


(4) Errors caused by using a gamma diScrEnt from unity. If the 
gamma is grcatt^r tbmt ooe. colours in which one primary tends to pre- 
domlimEe over the others will be reproduced with the excess of that 
primary still further exaggerated. Colours will therefore change in hue 
and also become more saturated^ in the sense indicated in Fig, 7S. With 
B gamma less than one, the colours will chaugc in the reverse direction 
and become mote desatunatedt as shown tn Fig. 75A. (MaeAdam (5> 



FIG. 


gives quantitalive rcstilis for the cffcci of a change of gamma ^ and for 
certain of the other errors just described^ Figs. 76, 77, 7S.) 

(5) Errors caused by using the non-linear part of the characteristic 
curve. When the exposure extends to either the toe of shoulder of the 
characteristic curve, the effect is similar in trend to that of a gamma less 
lhan unity, the colours becoming strongly desnturated. 

It ts ai once apparent thot adjustment of the contrast of the photo* 
graph in order to produce some special effect is Ukcly to be diflSculL if 
distortion of the <mlour lenderiag is to be avoided. Special methods 
must be adopted, such as the udditioii of a black and white emulsion 

157 








COLOUR ClNEMATOCKAPUy 


superimposed over ihc three colour compuucjits. The contrast of this 
extra layer can then be coalroUcd la give any desired gainnui to the 
overajJ picture;, at a cost, of course, of loss of light nnd additionid 
technical contplicatiORS.^' 

More by ueddent than by design the specifal iraitsniission of flltcrs 
(^ncrally dyed gelatinel which have been used for colour photography 
from early times have exhibited u vignetted or trailing^off ehetraeter 
instead of the sharp cut ” wnter-iight cocnparirneni " form which the 
early workers supposed desimbte ^Fla. 69>. Now these sloping, some¬ 
what overlapping, curves when used in conjunction with the type of 
spccual sensitivity wccun impart to un emulsion yield tffectivespeemf 
sensitivities closely approximating the form of the distiibuilon curvns 
of the reproduction primaries, which is what is required. (See Table 25 
for the trunsnussions of Wratten Tricolour Fillers.) 

Tlie colorimetric speciricutioii of Wratten Filteis 25 , SS and 47 is as 
fidiows:— 

CJ,E. ll.Li;stiSAis4 C 


. 

X 

r 

1 

X 

[ 

r 


Exelhflwt 
tufity % 

23 

38 

47 

1 

■ym 

■ D «»1 

0862 

-2451 

^{1240 

00^1 

0219 

4730 

■6«0S 

‘2500 

■t47T 

■3193 

0412 

613-J 

541-5 

4*1-3 

lOOD 

968 


Tlie spectral transmission curves for this Wratteu Tricolour set of 
filter* are pven in Fig. 79. 

This is why the empiricol trial of filters of different type of spectral 
irapsimssioti always yielded Ihe best ttsidis with the slighdy vicitctiistl 
curves. This t* especially true of additive sysletns in which reproduction 
pnmancs locnied in the spectrum locus are obtainable, thus yielding 
both a wide range and high saiomtion. (Certainly ihe red to green hues) 
Given correct emulsion sensitivities ihc visiujl appearance of analysis 
pnmsnes might depart radically from that of the synthesis prhnaTies 
In an integral tripack system of the negative positive ivpe the emulsion 
jensilivtucs of the negative would be ihc all important considcralion. 
Its ultimate columtion U of significance only in relulion to the positive 
rensitJviJies. Convemely the colours of the positive are all important 
but^ senstuvities arc only of significance in relation to the coloration 


(b) Suhtnetire Synlfaesls 

But In subtractive processes the fiulute is m the uistrumem we have 
to play upon with oitr modulators. Sin« the 5o-call«l suhtracuve 
process « m effect on iiddilive process it U right to ihinli of caob 

















THt THEOftETTCAL EASl^^ 


Taule 25 


miwtrnsrhiMu}. 

FHUr Nif, 

II Grvtn fKtur i 
m25. 1 ^*>.58. ' 

1. 

BiutfUlt*- 

400 



k A 

1 ■ 

*r 



25-1 

410 






— 

— 

354 

450 



_ 




— 

49^ 

430 





k M 

i 


49-5 

440 








43-0 

450 

'«p 




- 1 

— 

— 

47-8 

4eo 






— 


43'T 

470 






1 ^ 

— 

37-4 

4S0 

A k 

a a 



, , 



303 

4W 






— 

IIS 

114 

500 







30-3 

12 3 

510 


•W V 

i i 


1 - 

_ 

50^1 

541 

520 







60*2 

1*30 

m 

a _ 





-— 

■M7 

0*J5 

S40 

* ■ ' 

it* 

■ ^ 

* r 

■n* 



' — 

550 


■^4- 





302 

— 

560 

m m. 


W i 



— 

25^1 

— 

570 

* P 

iti 


M. M. 

J * 

— 

no 

— 

560 


■s « ■ 


■ -A 


(M6 

iD*0 

—r 

590 


- *' 


#’y 


10-2 

5^3 

'■— 

600 





■ C 

»l 

262 


610 


M _ 

* ri 

M a 



M5 

^—- 

620 

■ W 

a - 




80-5 

0*57 

— 

630 

* 



'4 * 

4 V 

84^ 

0*11 

— 

640 

M. M. 


■r ^ 



855 


— 

650 

** 

- - ■«' 



i p 

874> 

— 

— 

660 


m * 

V~l 

a a 

: 4 « 

870 

—- 

— 

670 

W W 

— 

H i 




— 


680 

»:'!■ 

■■5 ■"' 



m 

IT-O 



690 





— 

870 

0^10 


70Q 




-*• 


87*0 

1'97 

— 


imblractor in terms of the priinoiy it i$ Asked tu abwrb. if vif plot on 
the C.I.E. chronmticity chun the primaries which am absorbed by 
typical subtractive dyes, we are horrified to find that they are located 
well inside the triao^ (Fi^ ftO). Hence the ohuunable colours will be 
limilcd in range and laturatod hues will be inferior to those obtainable 
by the additive synthesis. The distribution curves which woukf 
modulate such reproduction priinaries so as to the results of 

additive inixtiirc of the reference primaries R. G. B, of the CJ.E, 
system would resemble those in Fig. 51t. After alt, whije we cart alter 
the percentage of each absorber pteseni on a gjvco occasion we cannot 

159 






















COLOUR 

alter its own nature. If we are given the ingncdienlii for a salad dressing 
it is onl}* po$^bb to alter the proportions^ 

i. An ideal instniEnent for tricolour synlhtsb by subtracdon from 
white light would uiUke ihite absorbers of variable density, 
each having its maximum absorption strictly limited to one third 
of the spectrum, for which third the other two absorbers would 
have to be perfectly transpaceni (Fig. 81). Note that if die trail s- 



Fkj. ebwrpdHiii airw of U» itBudsint Wr^itea trini^Ejuj fitter for 

coknar pbciU^ph)-. 

ntissitiiB were toial of angle wavelengths (vie., monochromaiic). 
provided these were selected from the right tttpons, the instrument 
would stiU function satisfactorily, but the synthesis wtrald be 
unpractically low in lightness. Sudi fljlcrs are. of comse, purely 
imaginary^ 

U. As has already been stated, three analyses of the recording light, 
of which comprises wavelength ^ wavelength Ihc spectral 
distribution of one of the reproduction primmy stimuls, are used 
to modulate the densities of the three absorbers. One type of 


160 
































































TMB TttEtlRETICAL BAAtS 



«tui}ysi 5 may be the product of the spectral [ranamisstoa of 4 
filter and ibc ^pcctr^ sensitivity of an cmulsjoa (Fig. S 6 B), 
another may be an inte^l (ripack in which tlie li^t may be 
analysed by the spectral sensitivity of one or other of the emulsion 
L (61 

































































C01.OUK CtNEMATOCVlArHV 

tByerswithouta tilter. In pniftice the analysis may be a sepa^ton 
negative in whicb silver densities reprc^nt quantity of a primary 
stimulas, or alternatively the developed silvtr may be an ioter- 
mediate agent to the produc^on of a dye as in " colour coupling.” 
lit. The subtractive sytiihetfs is ineflkient owing to the non-existence 
of stnbk dyes which conform to the requirements. For euimple. 
there is always failure to absorb completely Utc r^oo deri^ 
and to trtmamit completely the correct wavekiigth bands (Figs. 
82, 83. 84). Also decreasing densities of the dyes do not exhibit 



Fio. at.— Idea] tnuumlssios ain«t of qntheaia dye* inatibtraetivc process necessary 
rot tbc ptooca to opemioexectb' ss iTit were on additive ryiian. td) Mima ltd dye. 
(t) Mtmo sreco dye. (e) Miout blue dye. 

non-selective absorptions in the one-third region of the spectmin 
in which absorption sbould alone occur, in general the result is a 
compromise which is surprisingly etfeciive when we consider the 
defects in the system. 

Each ideal dye iilustmted in Fig. 8) would control independently one 
strip of the spectrum coiuiiiuting the syntherized colour. The three 
sections of the spectnun would correspond respectively to three additive 
primaries 5i, S* and S«, and the colour synthesized is due to some 
additive mixture of these. Let us e xamiiws how actual dyes in subtractive 
mUtun function additively, tn Fig. $$ (from a paper by W. D. 
Wright} (2) the transmission curves of three dyes typical ofcommecdal 
162 

























THF THEttRETICAl. RASIS 


processes are shown. Assume an tncidcnl beam of unjfomj spectra! 
distribution of energy passes In turn through the dyes A, B nod C. 
Without referring to the mathematical procedure sufllce it to say that 
the energy distribution for the tight transmitted by A, B and C con be 
derived (see Fig. 83). Its colour wiil be found by multiplying a set of 



Fin. a2.—Specinil rellcction chflweicriitk* of istneenM coloure of varioui 

mamil^uaure. 

distribution curves by curve D. The distribijiion curves might be the 
CLE. group or linear iransformations of these, say of S^, S, and S| of 
Fig. SI. The product of curves D and E is shown in F. being the 
relative amounts of S„ S, and Si required to match the colour of the 
transmitted light, D, Unfortunatdy. a chan^ of density of any one of 
the dyes affects the areas of alt lAiw of the distribution curves and, an 
Wright has shown, the extent to whicli the three areas will be aiTcctecJ 

163 






























































tOLOUtt CrNBUATOGRAPHY 


by changes in ibc density of one of ihe subtractivt prnnsiiet will ^rv 
acco^iliiig fa the denudes af (ke other /wu. 

The problem presents three aspect;— 

i. We must s«k primaries Sj, S| and S, yielding vhc minimum errors 
if their subtractive mixtores are described as additive- 
3, Otlennination of type of ernirs arising froin defective primaries■ 
3. Having calcukied nstiuircd effective sensitivities to control Si, S, 
and S, as additive synthesis primaries^ allowance must be made for 
impcrtecl curves and processing conditions. 



F». Itl.—Spwiral rctleainn ctumtcicrtiticf of yenow cotouts of vnriom nuaiiTaciurt, 

Wright point4sd out (2) that “ each of the absorption curves A, B and 
C have a point of maximirm absorptinn (tnuiimmn transmission) at 
4 certain part of the spectrum.” Designate the mean posidons of these 
absorption maxtnta by Aj, a, xind Each of the distribution curves has 
a maximum. Assume that theie maxiina also occur at or near to X A 
and A*, It follows that the areas of the distribution curves ii/Vir 




































































THE THEOHETlCAt HASJS 




Fjo. ftflcictibn chnmwtulics of htue-^gfeai coloim of Vttnout 

numur^ictuK. 


Wright shows in Fig, »6 distribution curves for thtw sets of reference 
primuries, which ate linear iransformations of the C. I-E- curves (Fig. 55) 
using the following prunnries:— 

(!) 0-46/f, 0-53IJ, 0^5^. 

(2) 046^1, 0‘53u. 0^1/J. 

(3) (Hti/J. 0-55U. 0‘6l/J, 


nelghhourfiooil of the^ uuvelengths will do most to control the Bmountin 
of Si, S, and S« in the final colour. At first sight it looks as if the best 
way of separating iht actions of the three dyes would be to describe this 
mixture in terms of three additive primaries Si, S, and S*, selected to 
provide a set of disiribuiion curves whose maxima coincided in wave^^ 
length with the absorption maxima of the synthesis dyes. Unfortunately 
the di.stribution curves cannot be adjusted so as to make this method 
work. 


-. J<4J 

— /fttm 


165 



















































DistfUAOM/iV^m Tratfsfftisshtt T/xtnsmisshn Transmksidn 


cOLOutL ciNbHATaCiiAPify 



hic^t Light Fpsm tque^-Eftem/S^rvm. 

„„ jjHotin* 


Wavekiigth 


W^veici^gth 


W^rv^fksogth 


W 

WM:hr>gth 


m 

mvei&ttgih 







4 

i 



/%y 


k 

P 

L—J-J 





m 






\ 

Sly 


s 

y A 




(d) 




\ 


iF) 





166 












































THK THlEOttmCAt BASIS 


Note tliat in each set ihe maxima art appn>iiniatdy 045/ii O'M/1 and 
0 61 / 4 . It chances that dyes of this type Mt fairiy common in sub- 
iraciivc processes for these cases ihc colour td-xirtg should Iw 
described in tenus of these "wavelengths. The blue curve in each case is 



more or less Isolated and thus can be used in all cases as the best 
approximation for the equivalent additive primary. The red and gjun 
curves are impossible to separate ovdag to tlie invariabie overlap in the 
ydiow region. Wright says' 

Assuming ihct that the minus red and minus green dyes both 
transmit ait appredaMe pcrceiUage of the yelloiii' and that Ihe ^vt- 
lengths of maximum absoTpunn arc at \ and ^ the colour rendering is 

167 

















COLOVK tlNEHATOGHAFKY 


likely to be represented as an additive mixture to the closest appro xima * 
tioii if the hypothetical additive primaries are taken at wavelengths 
wmewhere between 0'61;( and X,. for the red, and between 0-54fi and A* 
for the green. The precise position b not iikeSy to be of special impor¬ 
tant and 3 value midtvuy between the iimiis b the most obvious 
choioc- The throe primaries in the subtractive process that should be 
Used to describe the colour reproduction in terms of additive mixture 
are therefore monochroinatic radblions with wavelengths ^>.|-r-Ch6l^) 
Red, Green, and (M5/r Blue. (Some adjustment of these 

Values might be called for if it were known that the photographs were to 
be Uluminated with a light source having on energy distribution very 
diflerent from that of a n etjual-cnergy spectrum,) Using these primaries 
the ideal spectral sensitivity curves for the negative emulsions caii be 



calculated and the error trends due to departure from tbe ideal curves 
can be delennlned/' 

The subtractive process is not as efTective os the additive because 
the difference between the ideal curves of Fig, 81 and the practical 
curves of Fig, 85 signifies that' * when the density of filter B. say bt such 
that the light at wavcktigth k, is efleetbrdy eliminated there' is still 
transmuted a signifeant amount of light in the yellow and the blue- 
green. Sirailur tendencies will be shown by miefs A and C. Reds will 
therefore tend to be reproduced as too ornoge, greens as too yellowv 
pen. and so on; there will also be some tendency for the colours to 
^me d^turated ^e error trend is therefore of the type shown in 
Fig. S7, The mapitude of the error will vary with the density of the 
dye, becoming retaiivfity smaller as the density irverewes. Any material 

departure of the irenMni^ton curves from the type of curve shown in 
Ib8 




TWE TMBOftSTtCAt BASIS 


Fig. 85 can only be treated as a special ca^ and the effect on tbe quality 
of tepraduction analysed acoordinglv,'' 

Figs. 73, 74, 75 and 85 all show eirors directed inwards into the 
triangle, not necessarily towards the centre. Masking reverses this 
tendency and the use of sensilisity curves greatly differcni rtom any 
possible transformation of the CJ.E. curves could be made (o reverse 
this direction, in certain parts of the colour Iriangk. 


Table 26—Ideal Rectas'GUI.ah Primaries 
CClarkson asp Vickkrstaff) 

(a) Primaries; 400-470 M//, 470-600 M,w, 600-700 Ml,« 


LifChtariLi. 

10% 

20% 

40;; 

90% 

JT ' 

r 

A 



> 

X 


Q-an 


<3^456 

0-329 

0^456 

0 

(M56 

0360 

0441 

MjLguttiUi 

547 

233 

547 

233 

5J2 

m 

436 

3S0 

VcHow *, 

m 

4eil 

4S6 

4«L 

446 

m 

4^ 

461 

Red 

m 

309 


J09 

S80 

352 

472 

3M 

Green 


546 

366 


366 

546 

392 

502 

Blue 

190 

200 

346 

275 

3S8 

356 

428 

1 

1 400 


(b) Primaries; 40£M90 490^580 M>i, 580.700 M/* 


LifihrnrUr 

10% 

20% : 

40% 

40% 

X 

y 

X 

y ' 

X 1 y 

X 1 

>■ 

Cyan 

250 

466 

250 

466 

ISO 

466 

3fl4 1 

426 


521 

275 

328 

275 

528 

275 

470 

372 

Yellow 

5W 

473 

504 

473 

504 

473 

504 

473 

Red 

65J 

347 

651 

347 

651 

347 

493 

791 

Green 

299 

648 

2W 

i 648 

299 , 

648 

412 

464 

Blue 

250 

182 

130 

260 

390 

342 

432 

392 


tc) Primaries: 400-510 M/r. 510-560 M/f, 560 - 7 D 0 M/i 



to% 

2)0 


40 

% 1 

80% 

X 

y 

X 

y 

1 t 

y 

^ 1 

y 

Onfi 

176 

435 

t76‘ , 


na 

434 

400 

414 

Ma^nta 

497 

332 

457 

' m 

457 

1 111 

476 

364 

Yelbw 

521 

471 

531 1 

1 471 

32i 

471 

S2I 

471 

kcti 

609 

391 

605 ^ 


60V 

391 

»R 

402 

Gtecfi 

231 

731 

231 

VJ7 

206 

6J6 

424 

436 

Blue 

180 

m 

27* i 

1 1 

1 264 

1 

567 

1 346 

428 

392 


169 

























































COLOl'K CJNEUATOGKAPKV 


Table 27.—Sujfing-sided Primames 
{Clarksok and Vickerstaif) 

Steep Slope <see Fig. ff 9 B> 




20*/, 

40% 



-c 1 

y 

X 

y 

X 

> 

X 


Qran 

Ydfovv 

Green 

, I 

Q-IEJ 1 
5J7 ! 
529 
*74 
240 
256 

' <^M4 
24S 
4M 
326 
733 

m 

0-163 

537 

523 

674 

240 

316 

0^ 
345 
4«4 1 

326 

in 

2*4 

(M63 

524 

m 

630 

264 

3S8 

0444 

m 

464 

146 

6^ 

336 

0-3«4 

464 

S19 

4^ 

420 

436 

0420 

ISO 

464 

400 

451 

400 


Gradual Slope (see Fig. &9C) 



loji 

! 20?i 


»% 


X 


X 

r 

X 

y 

X 

y 

Cyan 

Magenta .. 
Yellw .. 
ftttl 

Orwi 

ttfLl5 

' 116 
567 
562 
690 
224 
276 

iia 

229 

439 

310 

739 

106 

m 

559 

562 

690 

259 

124 

319 

13S 

439 

319 

696 

276 

220 

520 

562 

6J0 

356 

196 

412 

m 

439 

156 

552 

352 

400 

466 

562 

500 

424 

436 

416 

3B0 

419 

m 

442 

199 


Table 28.— Denmty in Transmithno Regioss auEAL Rectanoglar 

PftlMARtES) 

CoRipIcte transmission (see Fig. 9 JA> 


Ujfhlmai 

loy. 

30*/i 

«5S 

»% 

X 

y 

X 

y 

X 

y 

* 1 > 

Cytii 

Magtatu . 
Yeiknt 

Eted 

Green 

Blue 

Msa 
528 1 
5IM 
651 
299 
150 

0466 
275 
473 
147 
649 
' 192 

0250 

529 

S04 

651 

299 

320 

0466 

275 

47J 

347 

649 

260 

o-iso 

529 

5CM 

69t 

299 

190 

0-466 

275 

473 

347 

649 

142 

1 0*194 
470 
504 
493 
4L2 
432 

0426 

372 

473 

192 

464 

192 


170 




































































THE rHEOH^rtCAt BA3IS 


Uav^aatficl Deadly 0-2 (Sftc Fig. 91B) 


U^hTttfss. 

10% 

20% 

40% 

80% 

X 

> 

X 

y 

JC 

y 

X 

j ^ 

Cyan 

230 


150 

466 

269 

464 

402 

422 

Maecota . 

6S1 

347 

651 

347 

651 

347 

473 

376 


504 

473 

304 

473 

504 

471 

5M 

473 

Red 

m 

347 

£51 

347 

m 

347 

495 

396 

Green 

299 

64a 

299 

m \ 

31£ 

626 

424 

449 

BEuc 

312 

332 

560 

290 

m 

356 

433 

292 


Unwarned Density 0-4 Fig. 91CJ 



10% 

20% 

¥>% 

80% 

Jt 

y 

X 

y 

X 

y 

X 

y 

Cyan 

230 

466 

250 

m 

m 

449 

412 

41^ 

Mofenu -- 

651 

347 

651 1 

347 

631 

3+7 

4T4 

376 

VcHdw 

504 

473 

504 

473 

504 

473 

304 

473 

Red 

651 

347 

6Jl 1 

347 

651 

347 

49S 

m 

Giteu 

299 

64S 

304 

, 640 

354 

576 

430 

425 

Blue 

3£2 

263 

3% 

312 

426 

364 

442 

396 


M Ikr a$ lightness leprodtictioa ts ixoiccraed, Wdghi has pomted 
out that Uiis must obviously be governed by the shape of the chan^ 
terisdc curve of ihe overall process as in bkck-aod-whjte photogr^aptiy. 
Correei rendering of lighmess valaes will depend upon ibc degree to 
whicb the negative sensilivltles approximate to the ideal curves, in 
those parts of the spectrum where the ordinates are higher than they 
should bCp the lightness will be too high and v/te versa* This b par¬ 
ticularly so in the subtractive process owing to its tnabilily to equal the 
ndditi\'e process in the independence of control of its primaries. It 
can be seen that any absorption overlap would tend to reproduce that 
purl of the spectrum with loo low a lightness, and failure of the 
absorption bauds In mcel would g^ve too high a lightness value in I bat 
part of the spKiTiun. Wriglit stales that the error will be of a simtlar 
type in the case of actual as compared to ideal Absorption curves, hui 
will naturally be modified by the more gradua] slope of the absnrptiDn 
curves and will also vary to some client aecording to the densities of 
Ihe dyes- 

Clarkson and Vickcrsiaflf (6J examirifid !he possible gamut of colour 
reprodudhk b>‘ hypothetical subtractive synibests primariES and by the 

171 




































cot fJlJH riNtMATOG KAntV 


priman^ of Technicolor and Kodochrorac* Comparisons ttcrc made of 
the ijitrit of ihrec icts of imaginary primaries conristing of spectral 
divisions into three tectungular and contiguous idea) ahsorpdons* 
Tlie cuts were at (a) 470 M/f, 600 ; (b) m 580 M/i; (c> 510 M/*, 

560 A niaiiimiiiTi optical density of 20 was assigned lo the stan- 
dart! strength of the primary dyes. Absorption cun ts at four different 
strengths h^vmg densities in the absorbing re^ons of 2-0, 14), 0-5 and 
0'25 were converted to transmission curves* and then by ihe weighted 
ordinBEe method into chromalicity co-ordinstes in illumiiianL A. By 
plotting X and y separately ;igamst the Jightness, carY« were eonatructed 
from which the chronmticities at lightness kvck of 80. 40. 20 and 10% 




aox 


Fia. M.^HyTKitti£iprar rccianBulnr primiijle* fOarksoa luuT VkLerstaff j. 


could te plotted (Tabk 26, Fig. B8J. Set (c) is preferred and it h noted 
thai this set« tn agreement with concksitms of previous workers. 

differ from t^ ideal in having (1) sloping absorptions and 
(2) a^^tion in the wnvelengtii range reduinng lo be completely transr 
milted. The rekUve importance of these two effeeu was assesid firet 
by companng the tnplets shown in Fig. SO with the ideal. The slopes 
wwe ndjustt^ to mterm«t at half the masimure density at 490?ii<l 
580 Mp, so that the total density of ati e<}fial mijiture of the primnrie, 
w^s constant ^rms the sp:irum. Treated as before the rSuIts are 
jD. Table 27 and Fig- 90, U U apparent that at low Lightness 
l«eb the vignctt^pr^tj control an area in escess of the wnical 
sided pnman«. Tiui is dtie to the fact that ihe purity of a green ^ 

‘he complete waveknd 
4^580 M/I, wWe a green of approaching 100% purity results from 
h^h concenirutions of yellow and cyan at. say. 535 M/r, At higher 





THE TIIEOEETICAL BASIS 

iTghing digs of 40/0, filopine priioaries (c) were inrerior but primanes 
(b) stiU haw the advantage. At B0% ihe differences arc ncfiJlgible. 
Wright has pointed out that with slopiiig sid^ to the curves and oyer* 
lapping, a change of coneenimuon to one dye would be apparent m u 
part of iltt spectrum where it should not be. The sigrificance of the 
second chaiacteTblic of real dyes (namely, unwanted absorptions) is 


i'O 


D 


o\ __L- 

4K> ““ 

d 




Fia. fvetanfuiAf primeirics (Clurfuon iUHJ VkkmtaiT)' 

next conaidcred* In Fig. 91, since dyes are common ^^ilh idea^n^ 
ndssion beyond 500 Mii^ yellows tim given aj fully transmitiing beyond 
500 The cyan is assuined to have zero density between 400 and 
580 Mu. and a deimty of 24^ from 580-700 M/i* and is comtmed with 
others having densities of 0^2 and (M in the 400-580 M/i region. Agaiiit 
with the magenta it is as^rumed that it is completely transparent to wave¬ 
lengths higher than 580 M^* Table 28 and Fig* 92 give the rcsujli* 
The chromatic area shrinks at ah Ughiness levels as the unwanted density 



























ijicr«a$c$. The condtisicms arc that primaxics dyes for a sxibtiBctivio 
process should have absorption ban^ covering approximately the 
ranges 40(M50 M/*, 450-580 Mm. and 580-700 Mm* The absence of 
absorpiJoD in traninuttiiig regioiis is more itopoilaiii thaw steep lid^ 



Fjo. 90, 



- Hi 


tfv 




«l 




to Je absD^tion and should provide one of the mniij criiena 
lit the selection of dyes for colour phoiography^ 

behaviour of Kodachrotne was wtajjjined. ttcproducUon of feal 

^ours was mcasurol. Noting that Friedmao's curves (7) for the 
Kodachrome pruttanea show a baefegtound density of ubotit 0-2. Ibii 
174 













































TH( niCOUtllCAl HAStS 


valuf was subtracted frojo bU thicc cufves al every wavelength. The 
curves were then multiplied by Q factor sufficient to give_B majtimum 
density of 20 , and from these basic curves, density curves at full, half. 



Fk>. 12,—KjTjMvUtcticaJ priiiiafte ntwrijiciJS ^ noitiiAaHy trflusoiiiiicii repiow 
(OarkAoa fuul Vidcentnn'). 



Fso. W.—Koilacliroim prinwiTia (Ciuikson uni Vtckrtstam. 


quarter and one-eighth strength of the thf« primaries and th« 
binary mixliires. were constructed and. as before, convw via c 
transmissioo currei to chTomiiiaty co-ordinates, results at 

different li|^ loess levels are given in Table 79 and Fig. 93 . 


175 












COI,DUR C 1 N£MATOGRAP»V 


Table 29,—{Clarkson and Vickesstait) 
KodachromE Primaries; (Friedmun) 


U^hfni'ss. 

lOJi 

20j; 


80% 


J 

y 


> 

X 

X 

^ 1 

1! y 

Ciiui 

Mo^ta 

Yeltow 

Rea 

Gwen 1 

SJuo 

572 

jtfci 

416 

36ff 

0^412 

256 

4J4 

J24 

526 

m 

0-253 

524 

580 

612 

m 1 

402 

0^416 

300 

414 

356 

494 

34^ 

CHI40 

492 

SSO 

546 

442 

426 

344 

414 

5m 

m 

m 

0-430 

45® 

m 

474 

446 

440 

0 412 

m 

438 

400 

421 

398 


"^e diagrain also contains points neprcsenting reproduced colours of 
hj^ saiuration dyeings of tdatcrials. The area covered by ideal 
pDinanei i» also shown and ihe small volume of the colour solid 
Kod^rome covers relaUve to ideal primaries will be observed. 
Maximum defects are at high, lightness levels. 



P«- <H.^-CWHiTki(y Ermf^ K«I«hr««c “A'- (Cl^rtaon .ml VickcisnrffL 


Clarkson and Vickerstaif have drawn atteniioo to the fact that the 
Pf™"^aPPWach most closely to the ideal primaries in 
Tnl fegions. because in these r^ons onS 

one dye ^ mvo^d. When two a« present together to mVe r^d 
green or blue colours, the densities of each dye io nornlmflv ‘ 

,da ,«„b„ .„d 






































TffE TliEORETlCAL BASIS 


woollen patterns dyed in saturated eoloun? and covering the spectrum 
wene photogmpbed on Kodnehrome A by an illummant or2J00'' K. 
A neuiiut step wedge was included and a range of exposures mack in 
each pattern. Table 30 gjves the results and Fig, 94 the chramadcity 
errors. Rech and tnagenms become yd lower, greens yeUower^ blues 
^cener. Deep blues arc gr^er. As die authors point out^ the reproduc¬ 
tion is minu s blue and this Ls borne out by the chameter of the published 
curves of Kodachrome priuwies. The purity is less for aU colours 
and worst for blue. Except in one case, the neprodueed lightness is 
lower iu relation to while than in ibe original bul ihe ratio of the 
apparent lightnesses varies from pattern to pattern showing thn^e 
minima at C> H and which are cyan, yeilow and magenta in colour 
respectively. These colours have been reproduced by one of Ihe sub^ 
traetiv^cs only and as there h negligible absorption overlap the high 
lightness b explicable. 


Table 30 .—(Clarkson anp Vickesl^tah^) 
Kodachrome Reproduction 


An- 

iftit. 

CTioAwr,. 

Ofiglntll 



A 

r 

i. 

Ugh- 

£. 

X 

J 

Ugh- 

iwsr. 

Ughmeij 

Lh 

t 

V 

A 

Eluc^violel 

0153 1 

1 0-255 

4-6 

0413 

t3-3S^ 

033 

4'1 1 

1 K 1 

B 

Blue 

325 

295 

3-1 

363 

393 

M3 

5-6 

l'3 

C 

Bluc'pecp 

217 

m 

12-1 

243 

417 

20 

9B 

t 2 

t> 

Blus-grem 

235 

439 

9-9 , 

299 

473 

&54 

2‘6 

38 


CrBeq 

353 

554 

3i-S 

3^ 

530 

(347 

2-3 

8-2 

F 

Grt»n 

415 

527 

25-3 

44.^^ 

506 

1 52 

7-3 

34 

C 

Veltow-tfreen 

472 

491 

33 2 

493 

474 

2-61 

i2-e 

26 

H 

YtUow 

555 

435 

47-2 

m 

421 

7-a 

385 

1^2 

J 

Or^oBE 

640 

359 

33^8 

616 

m 

365 

1841 

19 

K 

Qraage-red 

m 

337 

24^4 

640 

360 


!3 3 

18 

L 

RcU 

652 

325 

2i‘5 

634 

m 

34 

16'7 

1-3 

M 

Maaeniii 

m 

270 

14^9 

591 

350 

343 

169 

' 09 


Technicolor ntproduction range has been calciihiicd by the same 
workers (see Table 3l>- 

Fig. 95 shows theckronnaiidty range of Tcdmicolor and Koduchrome 
priroiiries and the position of some real dyed fabrics Obviously 
Technicolor priemrks have much the larger rnjige and can reproduce 
most of the pa items. Tn fact, they compare favourably with ideal 
primaries. The djugram forth the advantages of imbibition dye$ 
compared with the dyes so far obtainable by colour development. 

M 


iT 7 


























COLOUR ClNEMAlOOKAPItY 


Table 31—Technicolor Prihawes (0.areson and Vicrerstaff) 


lighfrtfis. 

10% 

-. 

30% 

4U% 

aoy. 

^ 1 

1 ^ 

3t 

3^ 

X 


. " 1 

r 


0-J60 

0'34U 

£^236 

0^376 

^31S 

0402 

0^24 

0406 


m 

270 

600 

2S2 

516 

326 

460 

393 

ydio* 

576 

420 

576 

420 

576 

420 

534 

44S 

Red .* 

TOO 

34)0 

660 

22E 

5S0 

370 

46« 

400 

Often e. 

3t0 

610 

3S4 

554 

4f>4 

476 

440 1 

4n 

Blue 

330 

2T0 

37S 

122 

420 

356 

44^ 

400 


Imspeclivc of piacticB] colour processes Clarkson and VickerstaK 
invcsugated how closely existing dyes approach the ideaL Dyes were 
sought in which half the maximuTR density was reached at 490 and 580 
respectively, with the steepest possihlc stupe. They* selected for 



F». 95^T«chnleelcr pHmdna COutson anil Vickceu^. 


yellow, Meianil Yellow VK (C.1.138). For the magenta, an experimen¬ 
tal dye known as Experimental Minus Green, For cyan, Filter Blue 
Green, which has splendid absorpUon in the far red. and high trans¬ 
mission for green and Wae. The absorptions are ^ven in Fig. 9fi, The 
colour range of the best set is given in Table 32 and Ibc range in Fig. 97. 

These dyes arc superior to any subtraciives at present in use In any 
proccM and the authors from this take heart for the future of subtractive 
processes in general, but there is good reason to doubt the validity of 





























THE TME0»1T»CAL &ASi5 


tfidr cundusian lhat stoping-sidcd primary are to be preferrod on 
purely theoretical grounds to rect^giilar idea! primaries, since only 
With such primaries could ihere exist a linear telption beiMwa each of 



Fita. 96w—Abvorpuon curves of tClarlsoii jimt 



Fto. 97.—R&l <bo prlirmria (Oorkson ami Vtekemaff). 

the emulsion responses and the ooncentmiion of minus dyes in the 
reproduction. 

A* Dresler (S), Hoermann and SchulUee. Lciber and others, have 
investigated the reproduciion by Agfacolor ncgatJv>pdsitive and 

179 














COtOt^R CINEMATOGRAPHY 


Table 32.—Metaml Veu-OW YK, ExPERTMEfriAL Minus Crepn, 
Filter Blue-green (Clarkson and Vickehstaff) 


Ldjhmesj. 

n>% 


40% 

SOJi 

1 * 1 

1 y 

X 


X 



y 

Qfon 

Q-m 

0132 

1 O’lso 


OISO 

i>406 

0400 

(Ht6 

Moffcnla . . 

m 

264 


2B4 

S3J9 

124 

466 

m 

Yelfow 

u\ 

44S 

541 

44fi 

541 

m 

54J 

443 


?w 

296 

m 

320 

59S 

310 

430 

401 

Grm 


674 

332 

620 

3^4 

540 

432 

436 

Bluf 

340 

264 

3^ , 

314 

416 

366 

433 

m 


reversal (Um oriight filters, pigments, leaves and flowers. The reversal 
lilm gave slightly better repn^uction itaan the aegative'positive process. 
Coloured light sources as the subjec t show larger chiDmaticity distortion 
ihao pigments, due to the IraoviRbsioa curves of filters displaying 
steeper absorptions and narroiver cuts than the spectral rcfieclions of 
the pi^ents. Faulty lightness reproduction is often serious. From a 
pictorial standpoint it is more important to achieve accuracy of the 
toisaJ scale (reblive lightness) than to make any sacrifice of lightness 
accuracy to hue or saturation, in both of which considerable itificcuracy 
is fote^ble without exciting the least aticntioo from the vast majority 
of individuals who conitiiute the motion picture audience. 

A. Marriage (9) pomiiag out that the effective apeclml sensitivities 
of taking materials in general do not confonn to theoretical mixture 
curves for practical reasons, sugg<»ts that musking should preferably 
be such as to give an aewrate reproduction of three selected colount in 
the origin cl. one of which should be a non^selectivc neutral and set 
forth a method of calculating the required masking. He chooses for the 
three coloius, a non-selective neutial flesh colour'and grass green. He 
ultimately concludes that" by using with the green fdler negative two 
masks, one from each of the other two negatives, we can obratn a 
reproduction nearly correct irt hue. with the contrast increased to !-5J 
and with grey added to those colours which had a high absorption 
in the green.” The mathemaUcally inclined reader is referred to the 
original paper for a plcasanL afternoon's recreation. 

To sum up then, ihe law is that a primary suburactor must be a perfect 
transmitter (or reficctor) of approxtmutely two-thirds of the spectrum 
range, and that it must have preferably a sharp boundary to its selective 
absorption. We hav^e seen that this luw is by no means to be kept with 
materials al our diipoial and iinl^s masking U resorted to the 
deficiencies are ax follows:— 

ISO 





















THU THEt>ftETlCAl BASIS 


l>c1iriciicie» 

M&gentas 

Vellowv 

Cyans 

Fffects 


Reflect (or trammit) the red region ivcU. but insufficient 
of the blue; and their absorption of the green region is 

not complete. . , , 

Approximate reasonably M-ell to the requircmenis, but 
they do not L-omplelely absorb blue and violet of which 

10 % is often reflocifid (or transmitted). . s f 

Arc poor or very poor reflectors (or transniiiters) o 
green, and ineflicicni for blue. Neither do they by any 
means entirely absorb the red region they are in theory 
requited to do^ 


I 


Reds 

Oranges 1- Reproduce well. 

Greens Are rendered loo dark; too brown; too desaturatatL 
Blue-Greens Are rendered too dark, too blue; often purplish: loo 
desalurated. . 

Blues Arc rendered too dark; too purple; too desutura 

Purples Brownish. 

And the distortion may be even grenier in desatuiated tones of these 
hues. 

References 

lit Hamit, A. C. and Wur/iifiio. F. L-. Joum. Op< Sue. 

m WaiDin. W. r>,. « Tlie Problcio of Tone Rctsoduction Esjei^ed m U)(oiit 
P hoiuHraphy and CliMUJitosniphy," Pirnt Jotn .. Vol. *0 1*^. 

£3j OttiLD, J,." A Tncivonuitic Colorimeter iultaltle for Slrtndnt^i^inion Work, 
li'wa. Optical Soeltiv, 38, No. 2 (J S>lS-6>. p. 11 fi, 

IM BUU, A, J. anil Jotltv. C A., Pmr. Opi. £ 912 ), p. ^ 
f5) MinwAV.R D.andSmicet,D. A..PhQi. did, t9M; ' T 

J. QpKSor. Amer,. 2«, m mti Fdtisra. H. «id 
rhytik. 10, p. 77, IMS; MacAda**. D, L,. /. Opt. 4mfr., ». 
ViCKEMTATt, T., I^rpe. Phyf, Soe., 57, 13, 1945; « »«* 

t9J7:SarAJMra and Acesii«an, Z. ^ P;^* 1927 , Aai-rY, rt»/. 

Jour. 39,193, IB99; ClaV, Pree. Huy. Siv.. 69, p. 26, 1 wi. 

(6) Clmmssojx, M. E, Mid VimtEitSTArF. T„ ' MnfJSlASS 

Dyes in Relmion to Coimit rhoiesraphy,'* Aiur-, Vot. *80 iMareb-Apni 

1948JL pp. 26-29. 

(7) Fwedmam, Fj6p/.,3?,p,-t3. 1943. » i Jiuv 

tS) DRisira, A.. £ IVo, Ptm,.. 40 tJWI>. rP 145-153; 5. 

80119401. p, 40S; Evam!. R M . J. Sftc. Mot. Pin, — 

19 ) MAtreiAUiv A. •• SubtnicUre Col«n ReprtHluction. Pkca. Jour., VoL Wa 

Ha>wS!i!w: T. Jr^ and Rk-hit, F. A, " TTirw-Olor Subi^Tiw PtiMogtaphy. 

Jt/um. SiK- Aftir. Ffc. Ctf., 52 , No- ^ “ J Out Sc/c 

J, A. C., “ Ttw ’Theory of Subirwiiw Cobr Ptioloirtphy. J‘ Opt. Mtt. 

4aj(T., iO ^Aug. IMOK PXf- 322^^31 . 


roLOuit cinematographv 


(c) E*riDttitg Addilitc Fttira (R^seaii or Mosaic Type) * 

From (lie earliest days of sctccd ** platen ** copying lias been found 
to be a verj' tough problem* Before nn addiUve process like Dufay- 
color could be announced as a piacticable process for motion pictures, 
the pecu^r difficnlties of copying had lo be snrtnomucd. 
Negatise-posiUve processing of Dufaycolor film was first described 
G. B. Harrison and D. A. Spencer in their paper delivered before 
the Royal Photographic Society in 1936. They first empliasize tliat in 
tlK past mosme or screen processes m which the emulsion is coated 
direct on to the talcing screen had tccfuired to be processed by reversal 
for the following reasons: 

!. If a negnUve were first obtained it would be necessary to 
make prints, an operation of great diflKulty for a variety of reasons. 

2, The cost of making one positive by the ncgaitves-posiiive 
pfoecM is greater than by direct reversal, though ilie cost of making 
a number i$ the same, 

3. Copies by the negative-positive process have hitherto been 
taTermr to copies by reversal from reversed originals. 

Previous attempts to make negative-positive prints had resulted in 
prints so degraded as to be useless, Spencer iPhot. Jown., 1933, p, 19) 

effects of light scatter within the cmuUion 
(or UTadtalion ), with the result that light w'hich had passed through, 
say, the rod eletncnls of the riseau gave an eventual silver deposit 
ottendmg beyond the rod element, in revefsal this negative image is 
removed and in so far as the spreading causes panb] uncovering of 
1^ neighbouring semn demctits the final colour will be dcsniureied. 
This clfcct is vroisc in a reversal copy. Moreover, the spectral overbp 
^thc demeais increases iht desatuiation. Scattered light iheti, 
i^uees satuintiOD by reduction of density dilTcrence between odiaccnl 
elements. This effect would be equally present cither in a reversal 
copy or a negalivc-posilive copy. 

It il here Ihal the " colour contrast effect" becomes operative 
Sdiw bromide solvcnii in the ftrsi developer of a rew:ml process 
haw, amongst other propertiw. the following importani function* 

The development processes occurring opposite two adjacent colour 
dcraenK mfluencc one another in such a way that any inherent den¬ 
sity differei™ IS eaaggereied. This effect tetids to reduce density 
differences. Ovw a considerable range of densities the colour contrast 

^rr , ® matenal is developed in a normal 

dove oper. If a sdver solvent such as ammonia is present in a negative 
itnaiK is foggy and stained with silver. 

♦ OA * >iCBative-pflsilivc screen process is that light 

1 32 


Tflfc T HEORtTICAl- ftASiS 


nas$ing through a "jven colour cbment imdere cmulsimi onJy itiuncdi- 
atciy underneath that clcment ckvelopabte, Unsatisfacioty solulions 
of tilt problem wort: 

1. The iiiKnsmcation of paniahy developed images to ensure 
that the image is built up mainly from the more fully exposed gmtns 
(most suocessfiil from the point of view of the result obtained). 

2. The division of processing into ten stages to permit of the 
removal of the surface image (poor). 

J. The use of low potential developers such as caustic hydro* 
quinone. Many of the inradiated grains have m^ived less than the 
threshold exposure, but the results, although vivid in colour, are 
loo contiasiy. 

Experiments were then carried out with active developers containing 
sodium thiosulphate—the ” simultaneous developer fixers’’—reason^ 
ing that, “ in fixaUml, tiijfasiifa of fresh stippiies of fixing agent into 
the etmdsion from the bulk of liquid is more imporrant than Is the case 
ivitk ^ is nictott th^ 

is cXfreiti^lv One ihere/bre* pic lure fixatiott proceeding 

layer by /aj^r threugh the film, ifie ouremvasi layers, 0wittg ro ibelr 
nearness to the bulk of the ^o/ntiont fixing out first 

In ihe Kice between fixaiiori, tbcnGfb[fi+ il wj^ 

hoped th»l the laycre nearest ibc stipport would receive prefcTtnlial 
development relative to those nearer die surfaci:. Later it W'as thought 
that the ihiostilphaie functions as a retafder of surface develop* 

mem. ^ . 

Harri-^on and Spencer staled ihm the particular value of liumuiphatc 
is believed to depend on the fact that whereas in relatively small 
coaccmraUotis ii slows down developmeiiU la still smaller conceopn-^ 
lions it actually accelerates developmeni. and» as a resulti it is possible 
wiib a properly balanced developer to cause the majority of develop- 
ment to take place id the depths of ihc emulsion. 

Thiosuipliale does noi+ apparently, pvic rise lo ihe colour contrast 
cfTcci to any deicc^ble e?«tciit. Traces of soluble iodides or sulphides 

will also produce depth development. 

The optimum concentration of thio^ulphaic depends to some cxicni 

iip<m the emulsion coating weighi. ^ i 

The advantages of negative-positive processing of DufaycoJof are. 


L Simplified processing. _ 

2, Control oFconimsi in both negati^ii and posiuvc by varying 

development time. 

i, Impfovemcitl In sound due to: ■ ■ t 

ia) Sound is primed direct from sound negative without 

inlermcdiale positive. 

1S3 


COLOUR CtNEMATOGRAPHV 

ftormiil positive motiort 

4 TtJ v^ *" *c«rore or relatively high gamma. 

Ifi^ nommj way round, ob- 

Lr"^- *“'' - 

5, Absence of exaggeruicd coJotrr. 

6, More accurate rendering of hue. 

pnictiK^Sto fm'ikion resembling black-ami-white 

density In the positiv^ S«5W«r maximum 

S. Greater tranquillity on the screen. 

V, The use of a standard processing machinery. 

dewlopmcnt cordkt^e h material, but under the normal 

range If o^rTf P- 1 n^ 

rcisS-rr” 

i. “r 

Refmnces 

HAMawf. b. B^Twid 's'pisiii^ D^Is^: NeMi - Ti Il933t. p. JJS- 

wlor Fiin,." Phet, ^ N*Wt've-P«,me Prw*ssir« of Dufaj- 

6. PROJECTION LiGHT-nSOURCF. 

^ ™"i 

rtangs. in ,bc modulainr. AlKmpl, <lI?*Si!S“ni^e 

the Kreeo tllumirtation both as to quality and alZt standardize 

mendauons have dealt only with lUminanw ^ ^“0'"- 

bo.hti!«Vr “'t?" '“™ I"*- >»<?■ »;.b 

of 35 mm. motion pictures in theaiiw ^ i systems for the projection 

condenser lens ^pS^SettTe 

motion picture projection though they are 

spot lamps. TTic low intensity irbon are wSh^ Sr'' 

184 V « ujc wiin H reLector system is also 


Tfte THBOHETTCAL BA31$ 


becoming obsolete^ The lighi needed for modem coloured 

pictures can only be obtained from Ihe high intensity i::irban arc- Two 
diScrent forms of higli iitlensily ares arc used with the two different 
types of optical syatams. The ori^nal form of the high intensity carbon 
arc employed a plain rotating positive carbon with the negative electrode 
placed at an angle below the positis^ astk as shown in Fig- 25. This is 
widely used with a condenser leni optical system which picks up the 
radiation froin the positive crater and focuses it on the Sim aperture in 
the projector. The other form of the high inte^jsity arc employs a pair 



Fk. 9S.-^pcctrat cner^ Ui^lritsulkifL d:iii for lljihi ci ccttirc of projoctioil serKtk 
with kiw-inicnwty Iiuitei *i lunps,, loinj' ni *0 ompSH and aRnUmscr- 

type tamp tn IlS pmps. with of «urm adjaMed id equal root-canOkii 

fNull. M R,. Lffider, W. W. and Joy, D. n,. jear. FtCL hUrch 

of copper coated non-rotating carbons burned coaxiaily with, ihdr 
common axis cainciding with that of an ellipiical reflector which 
focuses the light from the crater upon the him. Tn either case the Image 
of the positive craier is focused on the film aperture and this In luni is 
focused on the projection screen hy the pro|ccLioii lens. The light out¬ 
put on the projection screen with various typical projection system md 
carbon combiaaiioos is shown in Table 

The spectral energy distribution data for light ax the cenirc of the 
projection screen i$ shown in Flg^ for u low inleasity system and two 
common high intensity combinattons. 

The radiant energy inteasity at the ceitirc of the film apenufc is 
given in Table 34 for $evenil typkeil projection systemsh. Relative 

m 























t'otol'll CJKtltAlOGKAfitY 


founts of eiierg>' in Ute various wavelength bands tat also shown, 
fw tniensiiy mnges from 0-35 watts per sq. mm. for a low intensity 
arc to more > watt per sq, mm. for the mral powerftiJ bifth 
mtensiEy arc. The high intensity ares have relatively twice as much of 
ihctr total energy m the visible region as the. low intensity are and are 
tnenefore cooler sources. 


So long as the spectrum b continuous it would be possible for the 
processing laboratory to balaow the ihre&colour prinling in order 

blue or red in Lbc projection light, as the 
that raced by the dbappoiniing fact 

iSttL picture « destined to be projected by a great divfJty of 

for Jaboratorv control on 

cuuSnS’ S r ^ be quite safe in the average theatre 

Sni H projection, but the projected picture 

reibk tw ^^ If "" iow-intensily ares It is 

Smeilhat mn Could make a Carbon giving a 

iu7he ^ - greater source of trouble than any defects 

ivf ‘■'baractenstics is to be ascribed to faulty projection, 

the importance of this hnal stage in 

paraUcl to ^lo broadcasiingL Enormous efforts are exoended to 
‘’f t«hiuque of iransmission is aU that science'a^dt^ncy 

thf 1 "i«res of apparatus of great compiS 

the syraphnny concert is radiated into space. But if it is “ nicked un ** 
^ an indifferen, receiver the Iasi Jink Tihe chin mly nuCy a7thc 

aSr^. ^ itie Driginai sound ins reaUy tike 

Simi^rl>, ihe projeciion a?c and {he aptitui sysiem of the uroteciar are 
on absolutely vital link in a t«hrical chainV 7i?^e 

have Ms cS dfsimte£! 

indorf just as ^ntral ns that the picture should be in focus. 

We have Jiui spi,« ip enlarge upon the important factor of ihe 
optic^sysiem used in the various makes of projector now in antral 
Projection systems may be divided inlu three categories. 

1. Mirror dncs<Ftg 99}. 

2. Condensing lens. 

‘. Mirror are and condensing lens combined. 

A. HotElllJig |K»5UivC. 

B. Non-miRiing fhand fed), 

I K6 


7MF rilCUHETICAt. BASIS 



187 


1. lumcJi Jiiinc li Tor lyitprm with no^ktuHcr, Mim^ i&i imtu of uiiy kiEid. 

Z- I'^r cenL 4ii|n1^ilon r^fen id mt^n cf Kiglit Inicrtsliy lii Mt jcoike^ to lhai ni Uic eaiirc. 

3, MiiAimum liahi It v^luo with \a i>ro4iM:x niJiKtiHuPn lijfJjt inicntliy m ilwcentre of ihe fcrecn- 

4- 1 tuL hlLd^ miic^Lury: lipht 1 j(>% If A\m m Phiunh4iLc iflibu. j« u^J 














































COLOUS CtMlMATOGRAfirV 


I8» 



4 


* Nn HtfisK^iLiritMErtAr^r nUm juhJ pulilaa aid imwnp spild^t o^utti w^|uufd (kif wprvrmknAwljf rKR^nnir) iwirri 





































THE THEOnBTlCAi 


Each of these t^pes has its peculiaiifies. Maladjustment of mirtor 
arid arc, wrong choice of carbon comhiruitions, incorrect focrasing 
of the arc image on the gate* and other fault^i can profoundly modiTy 
the distributiDD of light upon the screen and the general colour b^nce. 
Most inirrot arcs give an image on the scrccrt which i^ concenlutled 
in brightness in the centre and which folk off towards the edge. There 
ore little data to go on, but there is probably considerable varhuion in the 
colour quality of ihe light in different pans of the screen. The dtstri- 
butJDii varies continually. Tlie light may at one moment be blue- 
violet white, and at the nest it may be greem^ in it$ dominant hue. 

To sum upt 

1. The processing laboratory must have a siarirdard white light 

for viewing the work. 

2. The projeetton illuminant for the colour him must be standardiaed. 


7. TTIK SCREEN HEFLECTOR. THE REFRODLlCnON PLANE 

There is little to be said about screens save thai they $bould be white, 
wherea^i they ar^ often very dirty* and sometimes yellowish.^ The 
polar curve of the diffusely reflated light should be as everdy distributed 
as possible. Beaded screens or those giving semi-spcculat reriection are 
undcsirahk as being unfair to members of the audiences seated beyond 
the narrow irutxtmum angle of rejection. 

The American Standards Association have adopted the followiug 
standard of screen luminance fsee ASA.—Z22 —1944}. 

The brigblne^ (luminance) at the cemre of a screen for viewing 
35 mm. motion pictures shall be ft. lamberts when the projector 
is running with no film in the gate/* 

ColuTiT uf the Light on Hic ProjCCti'iHi Screen 

we have obrerved* the carbon arc is still by far the mOAi usual 
source of light tired for the proj^^iott of motion picture film. Recent 
ikvelopmcius by the British Thom?soti-HouaLon Company of compact- 
souree high'prcssn re mereury-cadmium vapour discharge lam pa gi ve 
promise of providijigp perhaps before ^'ery Jong* an fllrernativc possess¬ 
ing tniportant advantngi^* and no doubt such sources will be used for 
theatre projection with as much success as they have attained for 
studio iTlumi nation. We have seen that the oJiisiing rarbon are? are of 
two kinds, low intiensity and high mtensfty. These two differ oonr- 
siderably in their distributioa of energy— enough to make a print 
cotour-bulanced for high intensity lack blue if projected with low 

* They fpMlUHitly abstn-b 25 per cent, of the triiideni liahi* and sometuna n^tieh 

more. 

139 


COLOtm CINE.VATOGK.4PHY 


inieiisiti/. Siift similftfiy a print balancttl for low intensity will be much 
loo blue and lacking in red if projected with high intensity. 

Chief points slTecdiig Utc colour of the light on the projection 
screen, assuming no film in the gate, are: 

I. Type of an: lamp—-vk., tow intensity or high intensity. 

-- of carbon — ^viz., emission spectra of the elements present in 

the core. 


3. SelectJ^'e absorptance by the optical system. 

4, Selective absorptance by the screen. 

Adjustment of arc position relative to the optical system. 
tOOr 



i^a/ues of' X 


40 




3S 



— OCjJiiv 




33< 




37 



^f'^IotensA^ 





■flb 

_ ^ 


Super HI. 

434 




^33 


1 

^fnm.St^r^x 



32 


Dotted Sectiffli 

3J 

' magnifieri 30 tifiTcs ’ 


» 


■J—1-1^ 


^^3^^36 373^39 
tfafi/es of X 


CUiKrtin^thcwtnB C.l.E wiloui«HKditmtes oT wrious 
tamp and cartwn comljittjujuns. The rielii>haiul fiiitire showt a leiXjd 
ofiteindicaudpoxn^cf ihelcrr*h«^|^W. 

D. Soc^ Mot Pirf. Maiih IWlj. 


Inie^lmg data ww presented by M, R. Nall, W. W. Lozier, and 
O. 13. Joy. of the Nanortal Carbon Company, U.S.A. They measured 
the spe^cnergy distribution of the Ught at the centre of the projection 
wnsen for u number of arc lamp and carbon combitialions. It is known 
thut the fifth factor in the above list is the chief cause of kek ofuniform- 
ny m both colour and brightness over the whole area of the screen. 
Bui for there measurements the carbon wat mainuiined at Ihe 

spectral energy dhtiibutioji 
nidmtoit mcident upon the projection screen 
for ihree i^dy used types of arc kmp-viz., lowduietisitv - Snore* “ 
and true high mtcmily at m amperes. The three curves'are adjusted 
for equal lummosiiy. U wOl be observed that the low-intensity lamp 




















35,—Cojjouh Meajuremw^ts at GEwnte of Screen whb Complitte OmcAL SvstEMi Carbons Positionbo 

TO cavE Uniform Vbual Cowwr ovbr Screen 


THt TH£Oi(liTlCAl- 



3% 

u 

h 

I! 

2f 

S'? 

p 

Id 


1^. 


ift 

N 

3 C 


Sit 

■il 

H 

<3 


191 




























COLOUR ClNf:MATOOftAPKV 

^ibits a marked maxlmuin in the cwl region, whereas the high- 
intensity tumps haiiic a rcLilively even dtstiibiiljOTi of energy with a 
slight prepoitdcninoe in tlie green. Tricbromatic coKjrdInatcs have 
been pJotted on the C-l.E. (l.C.I.) cbromaiicily cJiart for u number of 
bmp and carbon combinaiiotis (Fig. 100), Table 35 gives the trichro- 
matic co-ordinates of the whole laitge of lighi'-sources studied. Re¬ 
ferring the measurements to ihc locus of Planekliin rudbtors, it is 
noted that the colour-temperamre of the screen light for u low-intensiiy 
lamp is 3.g70' K,, while the high-jnicnsity screen light ranges from 
5,03i0‘ K. to 5,620' K. Owing to the close correspondence of carbon 
arcs to** bbek body " iwurcea, colour-temperature Isa good inHii-jtiio n 
of spectral energy distribution. Fig, 9B shows the spectral energy dis¬ 
tribution of the low-intensity ** Suprex “ and condenser-type high- 
jnicnsiiy screen light in comparison with spectra] energy distribution 
curves for black bodies at the same colour-tempeiature and same 
candle-power. || will be seen I hat the spectral energy distribution 
of the scieett light from the low-intensity inmp eonesponds ituitc 
closely through the visible spectrum lo that of a black body at the 
same colour-temperature. 

1 he authors of this paper say ." In Table 35 are shown also colour- 
temperatures obtained in the earlier measurements on the direci crater 
radiation from some of these ares. This has been unaltered by trajis- 
(Ti^ion ihioiigh any optical system, and compurison of these values 
With our valims for the coloiir-vcmpeniture of the screen light gives 
icieresting infomiittion on the cbjnigcs of colour produced by the optical 
systems of the particular projection lumps used. With the low-imeostty 
lamp and the condenser-type luBh-intensily lamp the colour-tcmpcra- 
lurcs Of the light on Lite screen show relatively small departure from 
that obtained on the bare sources. The low-in tensity lamp shows a little 
higher coiour-iemperaiurc for the light on the serren compared to the 
bare soince. and the condenser-type high-mtemily lump shows sliahtly 
lower colour-iempcrutuFcs on, the screen. With ihe 7-mm, and 
' Suprex ■ pDsitivir carbons the colnur-tcnipcratutc of the bare souroe 
ranged fiom 5.SflO’ K. lo 6.4()0^ K- These lighi-sourcts show a colour- 
temperature through the oplicul system on the screen bOO'' K. to iWO'"' K 
lower than the bare sources." 

The main coudasioiis to be derived from the data are first that there 
is u very big difference between the dLsiribution of energy of the low* 
intensity arc and that of the high-mtensity, large enougli to warrant 
the statement Ihiit a colour print bokneed for one cannot be totisfactory 
if projected by the other, and vice versa. In practice the Techiiurolnr 
and Dufaycolor laboratories balance their prims for a liigh-btcnsitv 
projsLiioii lilummani and overlook the disrortioiw which must 

with low-intensity 

m 



Fio. W,—l-lorirtmuil atc lamp. 



Fm^ 10 L—Margin Colaar CorapaniJor. 


(Faeh^ ff. mi 







Fic, H>3r—OiScil tognipl] Screen of Mgr^nmie Co^tlf 
Coinx^arugr. 



Fio. (04.—Teivirtmute foctird d" Mwipuiiic Cole>ur 
ComparflCDr, 


ifadr^r- km 







The effect of a slaincJ or ji^gwish screen may be extrcfnely niiirked 
in selectively absorbing blue light in the projected imug^ and die loss 
cannot be properly appreciated without a simultaneous comparison. 

Alt lodjcatlug Culour Comparator 

D. M. Neale, of the Morgan Crucible Comi^oy Ltd., has described 
a very lAioresiing apparatus for direct indication of small diffetenceiir 
in due colour of ibe whites eniiLied by carbon am lamps. Successive 
measurcitiems of red, green, and blue content proved cutubersome 
and elaborate. Unstable light-sources meant that a vaiiaiion of 5 per 
cent, in the light intensity during the taking of tlw readings would 
produce a correspomling error in the calctdated colour. It became 
evident that some device was rertuired which would fulfil the following 
leqnirenients; 

(1) An indication of the cotour should be given cominuously, and 
it should be given upon a triangular colour chart; thb would enable 
tmnsicnt phenomena to be investigated. 

{7) The instniment should ha^'C the highest possible seitsiiivity, 
in order Lhal near-whites mighl be compared with priecision. 

(3) Changes in brightness should not affbet the magnitude of the 
deflection for a given colour. 

(4) The insLrujiicnl should be stable in operatioa without mcjuiring 
readjustment or ** baianciag up " for each reading. 

(5) It slioutd be possible to compare dilTcreiit light^scmtce^ wiLhuui 
having to move cither a heavy instrument of the lamps themselves. 

Tlicsc requirements are met in the coloiu comparator 05 foUows 
(Fig. 101): 

(1) A cadtnde tny oscillograph cjubles the indication to be presented 
on u two-dimensional scale or duigmni where U ts continuously viaiblt. 

(2) MaTiimum sensitivity r$ obtained by comparing the diffttenofs 
in the proportions of red* Wue, and green Ughi from the source. 

{Jl An automatic gain control device ts fnicd in an etecironic 
amphtler to compensau: for brightness chung^-s. 

(4) Stability is obLoined by using an A.C. amplifier. 

(5) The measuring head of the instrument snmli and portable, 
and is connected to the amplUkr and oscillograph by socral yards 
of cable. 

The comparalof head, which iiicasure$ only 5 in. by 5 in* by in. 
contoim a momr-driven drum shutter which revolves in front of 
three photocells mounted behiud tricolour filters. These photocells 
deliver to the amplifier three small voltages pulsating ut about 70 
N SW 


COLOUR CtKEMA-TOGRAPOy 


cycles per sccood. Tlirec sc{unitt lunpLilieiv each ha\ide u max- 
imutii gain of aboin 106 db. (250.000 ; I), are mounied on ibc oiic 
etiassis. LiJ;e the colour calculator, thia comparator also apcmies 
OP ibe equal green " pnnciple already mentioned, and includes an 
automatic gain cotiuol whereby the gam of each amplifier is made 
inversely proportional to the intensity of the mcideni green light. 
This embks^ brightness changes to be ignored over a useful range; 
thus if the light intensity ialls to half its ongiuEil value, the. scale 
of die colour chart on the osdUograph remains the some and is not 
reduced. A meter on the side of the chassis indicates whether the 
instrunjent is operaiing within the range covered by the automatic 
compensation.^ If the illumination is outside iliis range the com- 


Creeff 



rtthiction of tiHirni ftom 

IM Mip,. to IJ5IHIHM, (liiBtHinieiaUK »n:). tS) 

lanuor ^,id is moved to or from the light-source unUT approximately 
the required level is obiained. It would be possible to provide vintiaUy 
complete compccLSdliot^ for brightchange but for iht fact that 
me charactcnsticsoftbc phoio-cdls used are linear only within certain 

iLlTkltS. 

Controls arc provided on the chassis for maLitig the cetiite of the 
colo^ chart represent any *■ ncar-wbiic ” light which is being investi- 
pied. and switches also ptovided for callhration purpose® and for 
living tlw wale of the diagram when markedfy diffcreiu liglit-sourees 
JSred * IKWichromaiie ” carbons) are Esing com- 

Uhen the comparator is operating at maximuin sensitivity each 
conccnmc ttxangle on the colour chart represents 5 per cent colour 
saturation, zero satureboo being at ibe cemre of the diagram. FulU 
194 


THB THEORETIC^t llASIS 


scale defkcticji thca teprsenis (iboul 20 per cent, satiiratiniii Since 
ihc instminent is intended to be used iti a colour cemparator, as opposed 
to a colotlmeter, it i^bould be recognized that these preoeniagcs njfer 
(0 a purely a.rbiLrury scale Viiiicli ii has been found coitvTSiticnt to 
in the laboratory. On this scale ihc stuudard Y-1 filter* used lo correct 
a high-inletisiiy arc to match daylight, is indlcaicd us Li per ceuL 
ydlow- 

The mw comparutor tms already proved of gieai value in the 
e^catnmation of carbon urcs used fur studio Lighting. As an c^antplc 
of the type of infonmition which nrny be obtained by this unusually 
flexible instrument may be quoted Fig. 102, irt which arc recorded the 
transient colour chanj^s resuiling from a sudden rciluchon by 10 
per cent, of tlw current lu a high-intcusity arc, Tlie immediate effect 
h a pronounced fall in total light and a considerable colour change. 
As the crater “ bums in*’ to the new shape required by the lower 
curram. however, die light puniaUy recovers and the colour atmosL 
completely returns to its original value. In the diagTsm it wLU be aoeii 
tliat in the first ten seconds the colour changes to about 17 per iC^iU- 
blue-mugcnta and dunng the next two und a half minutes gradually 
necovers to a value of 3 per cent, magenta. 

This shows that if a fi^t of a constani colo^ is required on a studio 
set it is more important to obtain a steady line vcltagc—evtn 10 per 
cent, below the optimum—-ihan to maintain approximately thfl correct 
voltage at the expense of itisUthiUty. From this point of view, therefardp 
it would be a trad pmclicc to readjust ibc luifi voltage immcdtaiely 
before taking n shot. Any ndjustnients should be tnade two minutes 
or more before shEtoUng. 

Tlie sbove ts only one cwyimplc nf die many types of useful invostiga- 
tion which arc made pH:?$siblc by tlie new colour comparator. In 
codj unction, wiili a steady reference source iJic insiruniont can abo be 
usim! to measure the colour of glasses* diffusing screens* anil colour 
correction fibers. 

An important application ot the new instrument has been the nt^s- 
urement of colour stability and average colour of diflcrent types of 
arc. Ey taking a time exposure of the cnthodB ray itilw a record is 
obtained whidi shows nt a glance the limits of colour tmiiatJon and the 
proportion of time during which the are is producing light of a paittc^ 
alar colour. Figa. t03 and 104 were produced hi thi^ way. Tlie use of 
this technique hiut permit led 0 considerable aoccleratiun uf the develop¬ 
ment of improved oubons for specific colour purposes. 

Lumlttiiiice Fadar of the Proitetiun Screen 
C. G, Hcy^HLillctu of Mote-Richardson (Fogland) Lid., has made 
an cxhii lisii VC study of the screen lominunos of Eiiti^b cinctitas. He 
has developed an instrunieni known ax the Muripmne Rcflcclo meter ^ 

195 


COLOL R CINEMATOCRAPHY 

The uistmnneni is livailable in fiortBblc form or il may peiTOancndy 
moujiicd in the projcdioii box, ^vbert^ il be tised by lbs prajcctiaiiist 
to standardize ibc screen luiiiinance in a given theatre. Tbe Instrutnent 
consists of a smail camera unit embodying a lens which throwi an 
image of the screen on the Eargci of a photoeteclric cell Tlie ima^c 
being smaller than this target, the gaJvanornetsr with w bkh tbe cuniera 
unit is connected gives a continuous Lndteatton of the total amount of 
light collected by ihe lens from the screen, A disc bearing light htiers 
is ftiounted immcdinLdy in front of the photootectric oeh, so that 
by rotating it, any desired filter may be insened in the path of die light. 
A slide is provided between the pbotoceU and the Oiler wheel in which 
suitable mask^ may be inserted. The instrumeni may be used to measure 
both the quiintUy and the colour of the light reflected cither from the 
whole or any part of the screen. It is aUo obviously capable of measur¬ 
ing the reflected light from any suiface—for testing screen materbts. 

C^Jireeticrti of Readings 

Service work iavariably carried oul witli the reflectomctcr mounted 
in the opemting box, and it is mqjst desLmble that these readings 
should |>c cottjpnnihEe for the purpose under le’^iew. Early attempts 
to correct these readings bj' cakuLiiion failed, owing to inaccunite 
data. It ttas found that the great majority of o)>erators would, when 
Bsked, Immediately state the throw and screen dimensions, but usually 
smte them wrongly. Success has, however, been obtained by using one 
dimcnsioii which can readily be checked by the service engineers— 
iimi is, ilie focal lettgth of the lenses. This method has emblctl a 
considerable amount of data, obiaincd in the ordinary course of their 
work by the ^rvicc engineers of British Tliajiisoii-Housion Company 
and Mor^nitc. to be placed at the disposal of the Committee of the 
Briii.sh Siandards Institution, wlwn the question of standarduntion was 
under considcniiian. The method operates as follows: 

The rradings taken in the box are called ” reHectometer readings." 
anti ore corrected by the expression — 

Reflcctonietcr reading <0153/-=screen luminance factor, where 

/is the focal length of the lenses and (he constant 0163 contains the 
dimensions of the gate. 

The screes luminance factor obtained from this formula is itw reading 
which would be obtained if the relleotoineier hud actually been 
mounted in the Mis of the beam at n dittaiKfi from the screen equal 
10 three times iis width. Tlic screerr luminance factors for different 
cinemas are dirucUy comparable, beniusc, were they to be obtained 
directly with the rencclomelcr. (he image on the phmocleciric cell 
wotild be uf constaTii The instTument could tbereroie be call* 
broted to read directly in foot-Iamberts, but ntiempls to do so led to 
196 


Table 36.*-T¥VICal Conditions (C. G. Hbvs-Halutt} 


THE theoretical BASIS 


i 

e 

1 

S ■SS I 

1 "SS 2 ^ t 

I HSigS- 3 fl ^ 1 

? llll g i iJ 1 

Sfl ill® Is# J 

■5# I-® Is =^2fi :& 

|i ifciJ ^ 

I's l|lii| 11 |l allf ^ 

li 

«« 1 »sr 1? 1 j 1 t t 1 

—o ’ oea ’o'* c— ' 


SSSSfis: Sr. 1 ]&{: |Si ( ?o fill 
oo-^-'oa o— ^ -- 

* 

4 

{astsssjsssi 3:2 


S22sas ss«»«s»ss[s: assa 

[ , 1 1 it y t 1 4“4-++ 4-'i' t 1 -h * 

i 

1 

1 

-. *| ■ s 

e# 3 >. ■= 

- * :|i ll’l!:^^- 1 1 

■3 ■g'als is J ^ 

w t:i il|^ ;|||||l : f « 

t E ill II 1 -SB 

1 1 Hi |i|sl|llll 1 1^ 

i 

siSSo:S P; im 


19T 


t« tUJW II „ ifflraMlS W 

































COLOUR CtNEM^TOGRAf^HY 

coitfusiaii And were iibarsdoriAl. Php^timeiricul uiii^s are iinftsrtunaidy 
very complicated^ and quoting rooL-iambcii valuer, which are uiiuaUy 
xibour half tlie vdue of the incident li^ht in fooKm^iUei^^ leads lo cndlc^^ 
cxplLifiittioas which rrequertily leave the exhibilui worse olT than before. 

Specific Erightiie^^^ 

The primary funciion of the figures which we arc drscussing b t<i 
convey an Impression as to the excellence* or oiherwise* of the projec¬ 
tion. and this ertd can best ho obtained in tbc Ibilowing maimer 

A large nirmber of readings obtainod m cinemas was examined, 
and a weighted average worked out by clirntfiattiig at! freaks and very 
oteolete equipmenU and this average, corresponding lo a screen 
brightness ’* of 60* wns adopted by the Morgan Crucible Company as 
standards All tnstninienis arc calibrated on the satne bench, and the 
scale divisiom have been used as punch arbitrary unim Actually, 

I he slandaid com^ponds lo an average luminance factor of about 
S fiiot-lamberlj. 'fhe screen luminance is always expressed as a function 
of this standard, and rhe result is termed the specific hrighitte^ of 
the dneoia. 

4i-in. tenses. 

Refleciomctcr r»dEo^: 20 uiiifci. 

Screen hrtghuxss^ 30 ^ O 163 ■: 3(5-^ 

Spoclfic brightness:- 

w 

This cinema is titcfcfoiu 10 per cenl. above standard. Each jli¬ 
st runieitt is provided iviiJi a diagram (1%. I05)rroni whieh ihc specific 
brifthtness may be read. 

Ii is renliaeij, of course, that the response of the bunum eye is, like 
ihat of ihc cor, logarithmic, hut it is considered that over the mtativcly 
atnall range of brightness encountered m the problem under discussion 
a linear method of eapiession is the mosi suitable. 

Table 36 shous readings taken In a number of represenmiive 
cinemas, and indicates the wide variation encotiniered in pracucc. 

PireettvU}- of Screen 

It is necessary to mveitligate the behaviour of the screen in all 
dimniems, and it was in coniwction with the preparation of polar 
curves fur typical screen surfecas that dilfictiliies were encountered, 
it being foimd that a number of factors afTeclcd the shape of the polar 
curves a* measured. Some paioU fluoreace to a measurable extent, and 
intensity and type of light used m the test may therefoie be 
important. The relative positions of light -source, screen, and reftccio- 
meter also utTect the observed distiibotiorL 

Ttic luminaucc factor of a perfectly difTiising surface 1$ dependenl 
on the jpctdcnt luminous flu* and the nature of the surface and 
I9S 


TFfE TllEQRETECA.t EASES 


it is not by moveinoni of the viewer lo or fnini tiw screeti; 

but tf the screen surface acts as a icBBCior* ihe amount of light received 
by the of the obserj^ will vary as the inverse square of the sura 
of the distance of the eye lo the soiteri *uid of the screen lo the 
soiiroe« 

Commcrdal scroeiis are fafdy perfect diffusers, and the shape of 
the polar curve may therefore be capecicd to vary according to the 
method of test. 

Polar curvra were mcasuml m the laboratory and cure was taken to 
inutatc iitnema conditions. A bigh-latcitsity arc was used logeihet with 



3 a 4 ^ SO 


Fki, lOS. 


a stand aid projection bns* the screen was vcrtJcalp the projector raked 
down at an angle of 10% and the measurements were tnken looking 
upwards at an angle of 7^ 

New screcfli Ee^ted show reflecUoD efTects within about 10^ of ihe 
aormaL The curves were plotted for an incident light of 100 foot- 
candies, wlien a perfect diffuser would have a brightness of 100 foot- 
lumberts, while that of a tninor would be about 7,000. 

The lowest curve was that of an old icreen, representing about the 
average amount of dctciioTation occurring in cinemas before retreat- 
tnent h curried out. 


















COLdUR tl\EMATC>qRAPHY 

American and Ccraian RecoiDinRndarioiB 

The Pfojcciiian Prasnicc Commhiee of Lbe S,M.P.E. b;iscs its 
ncommenda^tbn^ on the incident Jight^ Tlicy recammcnd ihnt the 
aver4gc of nine readings shall lie helwten 10 ami ^OfooKandles. They 
place 7.14 fooi-lambcrts in brackets after these figures, hut it will 
be appreciated that the connection between incident light and screen 
luminance factor is very indchnile- 

Thc Cerrttau nxommendations, on the other hanil, arc definitely 
based tin screen luminaticc. They recommend a value, in the centre 
of the picture with shutter running, of S-75 rooi-lambcrts (3 milli- 
—^specific hriglitness 1'75}, and state that the values in practice 
should not be more than 30 per cent, under this. This reading is to 
he made from tJic scat nearest to the fiomuil to the screen, but, as has 
oircady been stated, the ascertainntenl of this position presents con¬ 
siderable dilhculty, and is not so practicable as the proposal to 
the measuremenis from the operating box. 

Appreciation of the polar curve of the screen is sfiowm by the further 
stipulation that from no point in the audilcriiim shall the screen 
luniinoncc be less than 4-4 fool-lamberts (1’5 milJistilb—spocilic 
brightness O'Sff) or more than It -7 ^4 mdlislijb—specific brighttl^s 
2-34), The niethod of mcasureTDcnt which they rcconttaeiul eon.sists 
of tneasurement of the incident tight followed by determination of 
the luminance factor of the screen by means of small test surfaces. This 
is a much slower :utd more inaccurute method than taking direct and 
instantaneous readings with an instrument of the reBcctomcter type, 
ft aUo suffers from tJic serious defect that it is not capable of measuring 
the apparent colour of the screen. 

Mcasurentciit of Screen Colontjon 
Mcusurcmcni of Enciio? Bands 

The first tncihod tried in the Morguniie Laboratories involved the use 
of a spcctrophotomcicr, which enabled the energy at each wavelength to 
be platted The method wm iaborioiu; and could be attempted only in a 
luboratory. Even then, however, it was found hnposiible to predict 
from (he graph wlinl the visual effect would be, Tlie spectrum of the 
light from a projection are is « commuoua one on whL’b lines arc 
superimposed. Jl was. thought at first that the failure was due to Ihc 
great difficiJlly of measurinB the ener^ on n particular line, and aUo 
of keeping the liglit constant during the hour or so required for o set 
of measurentents. 

A method was therefore developed of splitting the visible spectrum 
into eight bands by nicans of filters and intcgruting the energy in each 
band. In this manner li was possible to obtain the ccmpictc set of 
eight readings in about a quarter of a second, thus eliminaiiug errors 
200 


im TBKORHTICAt Blasts 


due to V'Eriadoti m iht ti^Jn ouiput of ihe uj^. Ofice again it proved 
impossible to predict ibe visual effect of changes in The colour of ihe 
light. 

Success was e^cuioally achiev-cd by reducing the tuimher of fillers 
to three bands only. If ihe band^ of these three llUm coriespond 
to those used in colour film process^ accuraie ptedietioiis. lire possible. 
Early work wns earned out with Ilford filters 205 * 304 , and 404 , hui 
latterly U was found ihni the red fitter 2 W gave slightly bcuer reSMlts, 
and aJ] Morgaoite rcflcctonictcrs are now fitted with 204 , 

Two met hods of expcessiiig results are in. use. Prediction of visual 
effect can obviously be based only on comparison of the light under 
review with a standard- Hcys-HaUeit w^s therefore forced to adopt a 
standard at the commencement of his work, and the standard selected 
might be described ns aa average based on tlw projection perfarmauM 
of high-intensity projection arcs. 

“ Equal Green ^ Method 

This method of comparing two colours depends on climitiating 
one of the filter readings — always ihc green—by ejsprcssing the set of 
readings as a pfitceniagc of The gtecri reading. Even then the act of 
teadings for u cinema w^ould be quite meaningless to everyone, and 
recourse U therefore had to tjie solotion worked out for 
luminanee—that is, ali readings art expressed arbitrarily as a function 
of a standard^ and lermcd** specific colour.’^ 


Table 37 ^ —** Spectpic Colour 


Colirat^ 

Cifuma 

dff/ptH' — 

205 
, 404 

304 

CuUmt, 

AcimL 

Expressed ai 
p€r Cent- ilf 
Qimt. ' 

Red .. 



49 

1 JL 

Given .. 

10'? 

too 

1^ j 

10 

Blue 

40 

31-5 

1 

«> 1 

1 0-75 


An example is given in Tabic ^7* showing rtsaduigs of a cmeuiu 
which has a light which ts 31 per coil, high in red and 25 per cent, de¬ 
ficient in blue. It hi possible with a liiile practice to get some idea of 
what the visual effect will be, but as two spMfic colours are involved 
it Is not easy;. This example is ode of ihe simpler ones^ hut sometimes 
boih blue arid red specific colours exceed unity. A method of reducing 
the description to a single expression has therefore beca ewived. 


201 
















rOLOUtt ClNEMATOGKAPtlY 


Domlnattr Ww.—Knowing the specific colours, calculate the percent¬ 
age of the total represented by each, thus: 


tlicrefore 


PR J-M 
PG 10 
PBO-75 

Jt)6 


3 : 05 — 


-42'1t 


%C=3;*7 

%B=245 


Similar treatmeui of the standard colour iPr. I-O Pf I-O PA l-O’l 
ohvLously gives 33i for each. . ■ 

TIksc colours are then plotted on the wheel diagram (Fk. I W). Stan¬ 
dard otIout is leprcwmed by the point ut the centre of the diagnun, 
since if ive plot 33^ units towards greem, luni 60' and plot 33i units 
towards blue. foUowed by 33i units in the direction of red. we return 
to the point from which we started. Tlic other set is then plotted in a 
stiniiar manner, and the triangle fails to close, indi c aiin g a colour difTcr- 
enec of 15-6 per cent, oran^, the visual effect of which is easily pictuied 
in the Et^ind. 

When using this diagram to compare two non^landard lights, 
Hc>'5-HatlcU proceeds as foUoTiVs: 

Fim multiply each colour reading of one light by the requisite 
factor to bring it to 334 and thus make it the oontre of the djagraiu. 

Now multiply each colour reading of the other iT gtii by the same 
factor os was used for the same colour of the first light. Add up the 

I fin 

three results and multiply each by The results thus obtained 

w'ill add up to 100, and are the percentage readings required for the 
colour wheel. Note that in this case it is not necessary first to calcubtc 
the specific colours.** 

This method is not very accurate if the lighu are far '* off-white," 
but is sufficiently close for the purposes under review. 

Keys-Hal let t uses an arbitrary cireukr diagram which departs 
radically from present-day methods of colour specilicaiton. 

Useof Cohtir Circle.—TIhe colour of projecUon arcs varies for a num¬ 
ber of reasons. The shad^ area in Fig. 107 shows these variations for a 
representative modem high-intensity mirror ore designed to operate 
round about 50 amperes. The lamp wus tesiod over a range of 10 um- 
ptrres with several grades of carbon of different mokes. The lamp wtis 
properly handled ihruughout the lest, and the shaded area tlierefore 
repre^ts the envelope which wifi be obtained when the tamn is run 
stncily in accordance with the maker s inienttons. Cases of under- 
or over-loading will, however, occur In practux 
202 


TUB THEOkettCAL 


Ttic diAerencc bfltwcen high Lntemity and jnicmijy mcsst 
marked. The poini A lo the dtaciam mdicaiifs ihe aveniEc itf low- 
intensity mirror arcs when correctly run at approximately full rating. 
Reduced loading wUI^ of couraep make the light tedder. 

The effect of imusuid design is shown by point C, which indbaics 
the difference between ihe Stdmar arc and snothcf lump, represented 



Fjo. —Mctluhl *tf f lotElrte fitedominant hve* on caloui circle (,C. O. 

ItaJbeU^ 


by the shaded area, while B b the pim\ for an A.C. high^kitensity 
projection arc. 

Some attempts luive been made lo use meuit mucrors instead of 
glass, and point F, compaimg a rhodium mirror with u one, b 
therefore of inlerest. 

Screens have a powerful inllucacci 4is iHustiattsd by point H, which 
show's the change in colour during ihc Hie of the serecB. Point K is for a 
beaded screen, wbiJe all other typw of screen testi^S lie, when new, 

203 





















CElSEMATOaKAPtlV 


between 2-5 per coit^ orange and 3'5 per ociii* blue-green. Poiol E 
show* liic chanac effected by ic-treating the screen in n puriicular 
cinemil. 

ii >« .Yfli safe^ with A diHgraio of this tj-pcv lo attempt to guess the 
combinations. For example. & biue-green projeetion light, 
_.. iescmeiJ by the point L, would be nltered to the points L and F 
if the glass mirrof vverc repUoed b>' the rhodium mitior F. 


Fin lOT.—Ex^unpks of readiaai plonod on colour cirele fC, C. 


Conclusion 

The eflcct on the contrast of the picture due to stray lieht reaehina 
the sci^ii from directions other than the projection lens ^ imponanf 
nn^ It IS therefore necessary to draw up standards to cover this point 

A^Tding to Hcys-HtiUcit a satisfactory slandaid code must cover 
the rotlowiQg points, which have been shown to be of intpomnee. 

204 









TIIK THEORETICAL BASIS 


(d) Maximum and minimuin awnigc brightn^ii^ of the icmen 
as viewed from the opetating box. 
lij) Maxiiuuni differenoe in brightness as vicw'cd from any two 
seals in the audiloriuJn. 

(c) Maximum dcvLuiion from standard apparent colour of the 

(rf) Maximum screen brightness due to light reaching the semen 
from dircciioiu other than that of the projection lens, es* 
pressed as a percentage ef the actual screen brigJitness derived 
{torn the projection liahl alone^ 

We might at this point discuss the relation between the lighting 
of the fludiioriuni and iis colour ridaiionship to the projected film, 
(t is u fact that the conditions for appreciation of dellc^ie colour eon- 
trusis- ai^ at their worsl wiib the present projection sj'stcni^ ^it>cc the 
frame of ihc picture Is a Large area of Intense gloom—more or lci» 
black. It h certain that if we could surround the picture with a frame 
of ncutnd wbUc of lower lightness than the white of Uic picture (ncUlral 
grey, in faci)* the pale, desamrated tones of tlic picture would 
Immediately lake upon themselves a new value.^ WThen wc are a tong 
distance from the sciecn we mighi compare the effect to looking out 
upon an inienisely lit exterior from the depths of a cave,. Under these 
conditio ns it is quite impossible to apprecialc the colour of n delicate :^ky, 
for cxitmpk. The theatre mariager would probably reject this p^ject 
if il were pul before hiitiK but iK remains fairly sure iHtit the qu^lny of 
ihe colour plciure would be vastly improved by surround of palo i^cy 
light, fitting it quite clusclyi Uke a mount or frame. The pracUcal dim- 
culiies are slight and as un experiment it would be w1 w^onh trying. 

lire present habti of throwing a flood of red on to tJie sc^n* dimming 
this, and then fading ituo the picture^ and perhaps simuliariieoiisiy 
withdrawing a curlain* will have to be given up if colour pictufc 
Is about to be prefeeted. The after-unagii pf the approximate comple¬ 
mentary hue would seriousiy affect Ihe colour baJiinee of the liiie for 
an appreciable cime. For the suitie reasoti il is impofixmt Uini the 
audience sliould not be subjected to any colcmr fatigue just l>cfore the 
picture h shown. 

Rrfercoi-'es 


Uivs.HAj.Lrrr, C Cm., " Hi* MtnsuremeiiE q( BrieHiftOA .nnl CoEouTh** 

JouTfi Bfh. Kiitc. Soc.. NO. I (July imh P ^53 ^ 

Nuti^ M. R-. LOTJiA. w. W'., JiriJ JOV. D. K/* ITic Lolof of lifini OQ iIm ProJjo-- 

ilm Screere" J^ara StK. f P 213. . _ ^ 

StALt> a M., hn InUicalln^ Colour Comparatar. Joarp- ftnt. ftinr. 5^, 

Repon of LrwcHtlii^uws% Conimtiiec. iwficr/i. S^ac- Vnr, Pt<. Hjfsr. (Mardi 

pp.2^27J. _ _ . ___ 

* See" lltijmiiifltma the ScreenSuiTi^^ ATinr |I>cc. L 

No ???:>. ij 37 Tbb refciiftce ^feHcribefi the " Kolorlg French 

205 



COtOUH ClNF.UATOOftAPHY 


8. THE PSYCHICAL AND PHYSICAL RESPONSE TO 
RADIANT STIMULUS 
Tlic Phvsica] Stimiiliu 

- itimultu is Radiimt Energy tmvcUinf througji space 

in lUe rofm of ckctromagnetic waves of various Icngilis. Ttic wave- 
length linuis of radiant energy capable of evoking visual sensation 
extend roughly from 700 to 400 M/i {mUlimicrons). 


Tile P^chical and I'hyswid Response to the Stimulus 
There are two appn>;iches to die gerend subject of light and colour: 
Physical, ObjectiYe. 

Psychical (or Psychological}, Subjective, 


Spocificationii of physical stimuii in terms ofcauality, ordifTefctice of 
Jeuw/WiT expeneneed by human observers are somettmes called 
psychophysical measurements,' * 


UGtiT 

v.wfrt ytiimtiiflng ibe eye and cauiing The seiuatioa 

Often extaufed W raih'iithn near to the visible tegiati of the 
light, infio^rej light, IJgl,t aciuatlY mLing 
the eye may he ntore sp^eifiealiy referred to m the yixmUthnalus (I), 

COIOVR 

tbeYhml sensation yehlch emUes the eye tii 
distiitgtatth dlfferestcex m Us quidity, such as may he rttused by differetices 
in the Sjwiral disirihuthn of the light rather duin by dljfefeacvs in 
t/MTifa/ difrnbuthn of Jiueimdon.^ ivj7/i ii'irie- 

16 ) As hut ^lied directly to the stimulus, (,r the source Ipnmary 
orsseor^ary}g,y,rfg ^e to the senmtlon. For brnrity thestimtdus is often 
rtfirrrea io af me colttur^ 

^ ^talily of a visual 

seftxaittm, distmguished by its appearame of redness, greenness, etc. in 
c<fntrQdi^uncti&n tQ achr^mmif: cahur^ ^ 


The characteristics of light which constitute colour can be specified 

IP * 

timaucy (Lununance, Ltiminous 

{3} Dominant wavelength. 

( 3 ) Purity, 

206 


TH13 ihboiietk;a.i. basis 


I'hcse L’haraulcjistks of iight correspyiid li> ihe follow inij Lhrcc 
miribulcs of visual urmatio/i, specified in: 

Tewis 

{]) Lumm&sUy (and applied in scnsniinni and sccoudai^ 
only* U^lness). 

(2) Hue. 

(3) Saturation. 

LL'MiKoartf, a psychological lenn. cap be dehned as fhni uUNbute 
wUh respect in a colour may raieil as eqmvattni fa s&me 
of u series of j;reys of winch biaek and white are the terminal owmbers, 

AM colours pos^s$ lunfiluosily and fall naiurally Into iwo classes: 

1» Tbo^ wMch possess no oihcr atiribiiifi* 

2. Those which possea^i other utiribuie^^ in addition lo luminosUy, 

Colours which possess iio attributes other than luminosity arc called 

LutniiiosLty is the attribute of colour sensation which Is rnosi distinctly 
quuittitativc. Thw h a consequence of the fact Uiat ii is the attribute 
which varies most markedly when the magnitude of the stimtdus is 
changecL The terms M^h mi'dia^^^ Iwmnosifyt and ion 

Itiitiinosliy arc appropriate for the description of the luminosity of 
colour sensations. 

The objective term Lumtnas^cI’ corresponds mih luttiinosUy. Ughi 
is rarely temporally constant or spatially uniform throughout the 
entire field of vision- Nevcrthclcssn, in aoKjrchtncc with the O-S.Ar 
ddinilion of colour^, the Sight from each portion of the field which is 
uniform and constajit during an appreciable time has u defintte colour. 
Those variedes of light which are oocastormUy called coloiirkss 
have a colour ^uxording to the usage recommended by the O.S.A, 
Colorimetry Committee^ the purity of the colour of ncuiial, orwkitc/^ 
light being £czo and the dominant WEivcIength indeterminate. 

Hoe^ a psychological term. Is that atirihofe of certain visua! srnsutmts 
fry which Wc distingtiish red^ hfuc^ ydtow^ parple^ etc^^ /mm me 

another and by which the eye distinguishes different parts of the spectrufm 

The corresponding objective term is Dt>Mi\AVT WAVti^atii. 
TTie dominant wavelength of a sample colour is the wiivelcngth of 
spectrally homogeneous mdiant energy which would have to be mixed 
wUh an uppropriatc amount of achromaUu> white/ li^t m order 
to match the chrcnmiicity, Tlie term CHaoNtA^Ticmr rcfcra to the 
irharactcristies specified by domiiuiut wavelength and purity. Any 
ps^vho|dsysicnl Eipecification of colour which embodies the $aiiie 
titfariiiiLiiiiii dominant wavelength and purity^ but not photometric 
magnitude^ is a $pecilioation of diromatkiiy- 


107 










5 


I’M. I«, 


iljfi ctironutUc component is tucn«$cd, the satumtion of th 
sensation varies conospondin^y. in the sense that it vmie 
uJHicr Jis the proportion of the djrojnaiic componen 
m me sUiiiulus, saturaiion may be considered a quiintitative atiribui 
of colour seosation. 

The coT£«spondiji£ objective term is Puftttv. Purity is an espitssioi 
01 the pro^rton of the spcctraJJy pure comporepi in (be mixtur 
mateJiiitg the chmmaticity of the saropte. 


The Eye (Condensed Description) 

The eye is much like a camera, in vhich the cornea and crvitalfitte 
km icpresem the lens-syslem. the trls the diaphragm, and the retina 
the sensitivie pbte, 

20 » 


COLOir^ CINlfM^TOGltAPlIV 


Sato^tjon. ji psychoiogjeal term, has been deBned by the Colour 
Group Commitiee of tJie Physical Society as tim attrihute of \fsuat 
Semati^s ^hkh f^rmits a judgment to be made of the ptoportion of 
cohurfuiness fn {he total senxatioiu 5e#itflrioflj of the same hue and 
Imnaostty eon be arranged in a series of increasing saturation ranginM 

As IS the case with luminosity, saturation also has a quantitative as 
lAcll as a qiiahtativt, character, and the use of the terms high saturation, 
mcaium ^tufotion, aryl tow saturation, an suitable for the descrip¬ 
tion of the saturation of colour seiuations. When, in a stimulus con- 
sisLog of u combiniitioii of chromatic and achromatic light, ihcpropor- 





















































THEUPETICAL BASIS 


The optical sysiom of itii? eye is noi achromatic (natnely^ ihc focaJ 
length h dilTiircnt for diifetiint wpvclcngths)p 

The iTtioa m m wUdlc conaasis. of m (HaiOncE tajtri 

(n The rod and cane li>vri lyina below an uuicr llmiijng nieintinino. 

(3) The outer nuftfitr luyet, conteinio# the nuclei of the rod and cone cells. 

( 3 | 'fbo outer nioleeufar lnycr, ivhcre ihc rod iind wlikli lOficther form 

uw first of ihc optk d^Lt^ temiityiie: ftnd make roniact wlih ihc 
ihrced-like processes of ihe hipolitr ecl^a, utitcli forni ihe second layer of 
the chtuit. 

<4) The PilTEr nueba r layer, oaniiiiiune the nudd of the hipahr ceRs- 

The inner motoailar l^yer^ w-bcie ihe b^Kslar oeib tennhuUr dod make 
contact with the ptixetseo of ihc gangtiun odlk ibe UJird relay of che 
CUCUlL 

(6i The coll layer, vvhicii coniiins nho tbc neno llbrcs nmnio^ lo the 

opilcr rpcrvc and thcncc to the b<aiiL 



F>o. IDI^. 


Rg. IW represents a diRgnmiinatic sccUom of ihe eye- R is Ihe 
jBliiui: L is the bns, containing a Uqtud, the rtfraciive index of which 
is HJ7I ■ VH is the Yiirrpm consisting of u jctly-lifce material 

oontnining chiefly witieft the refractive index being 1*13^5; ON h ihe 
optic nerve connected with ihe bnsm (eontains aboul one million** in* 
vubted ** nerve cnbics—probably one for each cone in Ihc jfomr 
wmralisy, OX is the optical axis nf the lens; FC b the /i>Yea emtratix, 
a sniall depression in the fjm^ula lutea, or yelhw syoL 
Tlic Retina.—The av'erage tbicknesa of the retirul is J5 tnnL There 
are several layers of cells and oeuroiics^ tluougb which the light hu 
to travel bcfoic it readies Lhe sensitive layer of Lighi reccptioji ^nown 
as iJw r<fd5 and 


o 


209 



COLOUa CINBMATOGRAFHY 

Rods and Conis.^—There are 6,500«000' cones und some 120,000,000 
rtJds (Fjg. 110), 

The cones are conoemmted in the fovea, which has no rods. The 
proporlion of rods steadily increases towards ihe periphery until tlie 
receptors are all rods. Each cone is believied to be connected to one 


•l 


nerve Gbre, whereas €0-100 rods converge on a single fibre. The rpds 
contain a highly light'Semitive substance, visual ptirple. 

The cones also exude^ a similar light-sensitive compound. 

Each rod has two distinct ports, the outer and lower limbs. 
The ouiM limb is a cylinder about ih mm. in length ami Ti/b nun. 
in tUameter. It is tiansparent and doubly refractive, and is probably 
made up of a very large number of discs of about ts§^ nun. in 
2i0 



Fw. I to. 














Tnuiivcfw ssrtJon thrtnigii tbc jtkI^ 
and canes of ihc 



Scirlk^n of ihe tiuter hycr of the 
retma rwartq ihc 




Tlf^iuvei^scdioft (Jturoiigh ibe canes of Qie rciiiial cancs at ihc 

of ihc miaii ai the fen'ea. fovesL. 

TlO. L11.^—PhcnamicfOKttipIti^ of (he RcUo^ tFiiictinm. Phof, 7&, 3643+ 1936). 
















THB TUiORETJCAt. BASIS 

ihtckness ctfnwntc4 together. Tlie cylinder is sensitive to light, tueliing 
up under its ^ticrn, and shrinking again under prolonged e.\posun; 
to light. The inner limb is tnincated and tapcr^ to a delicate thread 
which eventually connects -with the optic nerve. 

The rods, owing to their visual purple, are far more scimlive to small 
amounts of lighi than the cones. Rod vision is colourless. The visual 
purple is decomposed by li^t and rafonned in the dark, giving the rods 
adaptation power after being in the dark for half an hour. Rod vision 
is often referred to as lisuat purph vision, because in the cones there 
occurs somethiiig fumlamentally diOereni which origiaBies colour 
peicepilon. Rods are the receptoTS for night vision, and as they an: 
not present at the fovea this is almost blind, so night pilots arc taught 
Ito use the periphery of the retina for majthnum perception in the dark. 
The rnarimum absorption of visual purple is at 502 M/*, and ihe darh- 
atUpied luminosily curve has its masinaum at 510 M/,. This shows 
fairly close agreement. 

CoACT —As closely crowded os 13,000 per 01 sq. in. ta the huiruiB 
fovea, the uonts are each about 0 002 mm. diameter at the lighi- 
receiving end (the base) and 0’05 mm. long. The light-sensitive substance 
is probably secreted within und spreads over the surface. The products 
of the decomposition by light of the photochemical substance initiate 
nerve impulses which travel innards to their “ receiving end " in the 
brain. In spite of the incontrovertibtc evidence of triplicity in the 
phenomena of colour mixture, there is as yet no evidence for the 
existence of three kind.s of cone adaptor, nor of three phoiosensilive 
substances in each cone. nor. idteraatively, of three groups of corns 
each containtiig a dlifcrent light-sensitive substance. 

Dr. Wright says {“ Survey of Modem Researches in Colour Vision, 
Institute of Ophlhaimic Opticians," Thf Re/wiimivt, 31, 1942, 
p. 53): '■ As a working hypothesis that is most in accord with cummt 
views we may assume that w produce a visual respon.w ihe light has 
to pass inside n cone and react with light-sensitii'c material on its sur¬ 
face. In the centre of the cone we will also assume the cxkienioc of a 
i^rvoir of inactive phoiochenucul substance for use in maimaining 
the supply of active substance on the surface. These suggestions are 
only tentative, but in tbc present state of our knowledge all wo can 
attempt to do is to discover the most probable mechanism in the tight 
of the information available.^’ 

Information conocming the light-sensitive subslancc or substances 
in the cones seems to be less than that known about the rods, but 
this is due to the'ir presence in very minute quantities and in dilute 
form. 

Elcctriei] Impohcs,—^Professor E, D. Adrian jn 1932 showed that 
sin^e nerve tibres from certain receptors convey un eJcctrical impulse 
which varies in frequency but remains constant in intensity for stimuli of 

211 


COLOCft riNSMATOGRAFHY 

various mtictisttks (3). Professor R. GraniU of Sweden has dcinflopcd a 
lochniquc whereby, using micro-elect nkles> threshold lasponses of single 
nerve hbiet to various wavelengths have been measured. Retina: of 
animals, consisting of rods otiiy and chafed with visual purple, gave a 
response against wavelength closely agreeingwUh the photosensitivity of 
visual purple, bcurve known lo be almost identical with the lutninosity 
curve of the human daik-adapted eye. In order to isolate the cotic 
response, experiments were carried out with the eye of the s n a ke^ which 


140 


t20 


WO 


SO 


60 


40 


ze 


0 

•400 -450 -300 ^50 1«K? ‘650 -TOO 

f Jc. 1J2^—S^iliudiit of human irhotcniHc lumiuosity cum; |Uj d.% s3ertid:iTiitiKl by 
jiTtd £fni:rs<Mii (Bnll Bur Smd. W,talk No. 301. S917}. tffi iU& iKisis mt 
three funcumtcnEiiK curvei Q nml B. Hw Jl-^curvc ii^ialcU w Ik ihc 

tym 4jf iwo iTH>0tjJitDr% anrd Equ^l cnersy sptcLifum (Omnh. Jpur, AVwm- 

phyjwL Ik I945h 

c^nsisis wholJy of cortex, A broad curvi: was obtaioed with a maxi" 
mum til 5<50 and xhh curvt Critrilt calb she {iomlnBior (_Fig- U2}. 
Optic; fihft umU being conv^rgctict iinU^ of a number of roceptoi^* 
it is probabk that several reoerptors combine In yield ihh dtMnlrtfUot. 
Occasionally much naiTowGr crun^es are obuiincd and the striking faci 
eme/ges that these narrow curves art conflned to three preferential 
regions of the spectnim. Ihcsc oatrower curves Gmnjt oills rn^^didatar 
corves. A chiiiactimstic modubtor has a ma3t jmum ot 600 M,«. Ta 
the frog Ite found a yeliaw mpdiilmor with a maximum at 580 M/i* 

* t*roloKjf CTTunii ot ihc Neumphi-sacal Ikapnmeiii of the Carouble 

ImUlulf. Stock tinho. 

212 


























































THE THEORfjTtCAL Ei.>SI5 


Green modniuioni aic found in all eyes with beween 520 M/r 

and 540 Blue Tnodulaioi^ around 460 Mu occur in the 
pigp which ixs^iesses sin exclusively rod eye. Cmnil tfurn asked himself 
wheihtr the iittmimnar could be regarded us being formed by grouped 
moduLiton^. Mcasumnents by Dr. W. D. Wrighi of the luminosity 
curve derived frmu ilic fetioal image of a very snudJ point of light 
had exhibited a hump {foveal stimulation) in the red in the re^on 
600 Mfi. Oranit obtained a similar hump in the cat s dominalor curve. 
By adapting the dark-adapted eye of the animnl to narrow spectral 
regions., mc^ubtnr curves were ohtamed which^ w'hcn averaged» were 
found lo sum Lo the ammaFs phoiopic dominator. Granit re murks; 

lu the light of these experimcjits it seems permissible to maintain 
that the dciminaloT is a composite curve consisting of modulaior^. . p . 
Why modulators never been found in the human eye with sensory 
methotU? The main reason would seem to be tlmi the analyttcol 
unit field coniuins loo many elcjneats, perhxLps up to a hundrnd thouiand 
nerve fibres, . . . It should be cmphasij:ed tlial these dec trophy siological 
experiments ha not provided any evidence for the existence of three 
fundamental respond curves. From the physiological point of view^ 
colour vision must be undemood in icrms of moduktoni and 
dominatoni/' 

Granit concludes that the stanoard photopic and &coiopk lumin* 
osity curves of the human eye represent typical dominators, both 
of them being responsible for while sensation, or lumiBOsity, The 
colour aspect is carried by the modulators as a kind of “ local sEgn/“ 
Accordingl^y, Gmnit considers white as a separate scusalicm In sup* 
port he noie^ that “ The distribution of suiumiion m the spettrum 
is very cbaracieristic. The ends are saturated and at the SFOiinc time 
dark, extreme red and extreme blue being examples of suidi dark 
and saturated colours. On the dominalur-modulator concept thk b 
explained by the fatl that at the ends of the spectrum the domtnaior 
values me very low, so that the modulaLors in these regions are re¬ 
sponsible for the greater part of the sensory experience. Again, in the 
yd low region, the large cofilnbution from the dominator mpkes the 
sped rum apx>eiir rdaiivdy wliitc and the colntir unsaturated."" 

Adaptatiou 

If Lhc eye has been exposed to Intense radiation it is smd to be 
If the eye has been free from rudiution for & considerable 
period it is dark-itilapu'-d. The jicnsilivily depend? uptut the relalivc 
decomposition of die light*sensilive compounds in the relinu. Reduced 
concentTution iniliaies a propoTtionaiciy weaker ^ensaUon, 

Re^poosi; and C.'lrcumstance 

The colour concepts are ultimately psycholof^cal, and indeed 
wholly subjective i but the usual onginal ttimulus is radiant energy. 

213 


COLQUA CrNSUATOGRAAHV 


Die colour sensation is stiictfy deienntned not solely by the radiant 
energy but also by the circunnljinces or coiutUioiUi under which the 
mdiani cne^ is incuJent upon the reiina. These conditions include: 
{I) the siiB of the Held; (3) the state of a dapuition resulting from previous 
exposure as well as present stimulation; (3) the type of the individiiai 
observer’s visual system; (4} the particular part of the retina receiving 
the energy; f5) the simultaneous stitnuialion of other parts of the idinu. 





PsychiHihyslcBl 4sii«is 

^fore giving Mme tables of the rcactiotn of the eye to mdiation, 
refetCTce shou d be made to the psycbo-physical plienomena. We know 
that Ihm IS a long and infinitely complicuicd process of tronsIbrmHtion 
ironi ifte pnysicnJ stimulus to the mental process, 

psyffuhphytiad process U well set forth in " The Cooceoi of 
CoIm, Chapter tl of the report of the Coramittcc on Colorintdiy of 
he Optical Society of America, Fig. [J3. from this report. roprSots 
the categories of visual psychophysics, ^ 

214 















TII^ rilEURI^TJCAl- B\SI& 


Krf TO Fig. 113 

1. Tlifi nidintor, or smmfe oTIig^it. 

L Absurptiofi OQCumiig hetvpveti source and ntj«L 

3. TTk object u|Htn which tfctc milkition U En^id^t 

4. t^Dssibb nutlemls between ob^ udiI e>Yr, tnodii^j^EOj^ intcniiiy und qnuHtyK 

iQdttding \mi& bfy miunni; ^iiul pc^iion. 

$ ami 6. RiadEiifii energy enter; ihee>e, being nelVd^ted By the varknia e^emcnis and 
formitig an image cm— 

7. The cetiiui, at the j^nint— 

0. Itisage pbM, where, the nidUtu cberEy fallitig uison Uw rods afld cone$ givc^ 
rise to g pbotocBemfoil or photoeldctrical reartiorL 
TBiit eJidmitoTt leads to nenic irnpijisei which arc propiigalcU thriHjgb ihe nerve 
dbrn mil si^TtJipw connecting [beso cbincnts with ihc iitirea of the apt3e 
rkTve, 

lO. Tfie optic nerv*?! 

M and 12, S^ubconica! iKutmn of the ccrebruiit Synaptic processes controlling 
ImpubE; l^jng into the coftCT. 

13. Soismy projection area of the cortex, 

13- 16. CoTEi^ meas of the cerdmnn. 

14- 15. A^ocution arcu^ 

16, Motor pittjectiOQ areas. 

J 7. Otrt^ing or tffmni nerve tetjvnting Uie nnitick^ autl mcitor nerves. 

J8. Hnd-pifltc ■' processes. 

19. Mturk tlbrcs. 

2Q. hfiiscui-ir reactkiiis finally imhiced- 

Everything whi^h ocoun from I to Is af a purely physical or 
objective nature. Thu chttracEcristo of^h link in tJic chain of events 
cmi be measured and specified conipleidy in phy^hieal tenns. Moreovof, 
the InLcrrcialions between these various phenomena can be expressed as 
purely physical funcUons, Wo can, fof lubtanoc, express precisely the 
characteristics of ihe image, S, formed on the retina In tentis of purely 
physical units. These characLeristics, of course. Include shape, ske^ and 
position of ihe retinal image^ as well as the intensity and quality of the 
radiant energy at aU points in the imagtr/" 

It is proposed in ibe same report that the chain of kading 
up to the fomadrtt of and including ihe image on the reUnn should be 
called the the immediate slimulus being ihe rt/huit 

Ofiagtr, *' Tlic fejrpiwue pr^»crs.i begins in or around the receptor ccHs, 
with the slfiKt which occurs as a roauJi of tlw absorption of radiant 
energy of which ihe retinal image is^ composed, and continues in ward 
along the afferent nerv'c fibres to the central nervous system and ihence 
ouiwsrd along the cITerent nerve fibres tenninaimg with the cpitheal 
(that is* eitlicf muscular or glandular) reaction and its effect on the 
oTgnuism or iu cnviTonment. This entire chain of physiol ogicaf even is. 
9 to 10, inclusive, is called the phyxkai rfjspafne £irc, The terra 
physical j; applied to iihe events from 9 to 20, a% well rat those from 1 to 
becaiu^ thig. entire chain of events. 1 to 20. appears to be cauially 
eonnccied nrtd governed by objectively discoverable principles. Only 

215 


COtOUa CIMEMATOGRAPKr 


jhff event$ froTTi J to 8 can be inveistigsted by the techniques employed 
in the spccintiiKd science of physics. The methods of physiology which 
ore more appropriate to the invcsligntion of the phenomena froiij 9 to 
20 are adaputtioas of the methods of physics and chemistry to the 
study of living organisms^ and Uie science of physiology can be grouped 
with the physical sciences in the same sense that chemistry is a physitul 
science. In the same sense the physiological and chemical phetiomena, 
9 to 29. which are not proper subject matter for the spccialixcd scien'oe 
of physics, are nevertheless physical in a generalued sense. In this sonsa 
the phmse physical rcspotise arc is used to emphasize the connections 
between the events I to 20, in contrast with tJio cssentkt distinction of 
all these concepts from psyr^icnl or subjective concepts. The physicaf 
response are is divided quite naturally into two parts, namely, the 



Ifl/ rouririy of ihf C.>hrimgtry Comufiitu of ikt Opiirjtl Society of America,) 

iiffercni arc including oonduciioD into the cerebrum, and the efTcreot 
arc, including conduction from the cerebrum along the efferent nerve 
fibres.” 

The (nformaiton presented pictorially in Fig. ii3 is represented 
diagrammatically in Fig. 114. Everything below the liorkontal line A» 
belongs properly m the general physical category. The vLvial mmuitts 
extends frotn I to B, the phyiicaf resp^imc from 8 to 20, subdivided into 
afferent and dfcrenl responiic arcs. The one ends and llic other lvgi» ^i 
at some point between 12 and 15. The psychicitl «rea lies above the 
Unc AB and to the right of the vertical line OC. The psy^cal aspect 
of the response to physical stimuli is experience and consciousness 
compn^ of more specific psychical activities such as stensatioti' 
perception, memory, etc. The diagTBijj also indicales by its structure 
that nervous activity in the sensory projection areas of the cortex. 

























THE TIfEClKtiTtCAl. BASIS 

13a and Hb, gives rise to sensatioTi. The propagation of nerve impuL^ 
frota the sensory areas of the cortex into the adjacent assoctiiiive area, 
14. of the cortex and the mieraetion there wjth other possible cortical 

actintieE^ ^ives rise lo percoplion. 

Suminarizing, Uiercpon notes iihfcc^neraJ classes^ phyiicat. 
physical, and psychical. The psychical resp&n^se is The subjisett^c aspect 
of the in^pubeiv m tlie s<?nsoTy projection areas and in the Ji$socintionaI 
artus of the coricst. 

Psycholo^cat rcIadoTt$hip^ include correlations betv^ecn s^bjeciivc 
aspects of the observer’s response and are csLibli&hcd by application 
of the criterioa ihiii ihc reliiticiiship must be evident introspcctheJy or 
percepltioJly to the observer Individual differences are accepted and 
conser^uenily, it is not to be exf^ted that all observers will report 
I he same psychological relationships, Dhagreemetit is not uJway^ an 
indication of incorrectness of psychological concepts or relationships. 
Under some condiiions group agrecmciu may he expected, 

No doubt this approach to the treatment of the iolality of the 
phcnoincnEi of the experjcnce of vision may be challenged on one score 
or another by physici$ts, phy siologists and psychologists in turn, but [o 
I he WTtter in any case, it appeals as a philosophicHlly $ound conccptiori, 
and 4 WS a fruitful thought pnllem. 

One of the foimdcrs of modern psychophysical meLfiods was Weber, 
He noted that"" a stlmultis must attain a certain iiiicn&ity in order to 
exciie a scnsaiiont and tiuit stimuH of greater intensity excite stronger 
sensations."' Tl^crefore there is a quanlitativc rdaiion^hip between 
the stimulus and the sensation. The mtnhnum ctfcciual truensUy of 
stimulys IS called the gtmml threshold or the getirnd Hmmd vatm\ 
Thus a iighi of low ifiiensity may awaken only a grey rensailon when 
^t a higher intensity it ntoy excite a sensation of hue. 

The mtensity has to be increased by a definite amount before a 
difference m the amount of the sensation becomes perceptible. Tliis 
IS the ifijffi'mttiat threshidd or the tifnifud discrimiucuiofi value. 

Eifimt itfcrftiscs of physk<i{ mtcnsrty do not gne ci^uul imTcuscs of 
aemotioit, 

Weber Rtated hb conclusions m the form nf a Uw r 

The jmt apprtcmhle hcrense of stimulux hva/s a conxkmt nitlo io 
j/if origt/u^i ^iiimduj — Le., two st ini nil, in order 1o be discriminated, 
must l>e m a constant ratio which if= Independent of ibc absolute 
magnitudes of the stitnuil 

Fechner went furlherand expressed iicnsations in quantitalivc terms. 
Frchner stated that just noticeable differences of sensalioii contain 
an cqunl number of sensauon units. The sensalion^ he saya* i'ories m 
the lognrfthrtt of the stinndus — the sensation changes in arithmetical 
proponhm as the stimulus incrciises in Beonietncal pnoponion. 

Stated ulgebraiciilly: If F is the measare of a sensation and JE the 

217 


COLOUR ClNEMATOCRArHV 


ji»t appreciable differenoe, S the mca&tire of the sctnitilus, and SS a 
snulll increment, then 


SE=C^ (Weber^f Ltwj, 


where C Is a consiam; therefore, on the questionable asauntpiion 
that it is permissible to integrate small finite quantities (SE), etc.. 



C log. S-f C' (Fochner's Law), 


where C ts another constant. 

Weber's law does not hold for very low or very high intensities. 



«o ^ ^ mosoo jtfo Jso fioo' e» eio 




I’B}, ift. — iluesUKnmtiiHtton curved for flve ncuriul obwvxni tW. D. Wr^ht). 

The principal psychologicni factors of vUion are; 

1. Fredispositton to associate ecflain hiw churacteiisties with ohjem 

regardless of local mdiatiiio conditium or Ihnltations. For 
example. Ups ore thonglii to he itUI red, atthoiigh they may 
uppear quire black by tnerctiry vapour li^i, ns if the lips had 
cm uttribuie of hoc in themselves. Dm the riHlncss ts. we know, 
not on attribute of the Ups. ljut of ooi scnautioti, 

2. Rebitiflty of Jndgmefit. The hkclt prtnlcd letters of a newspaper 

may reflect more light d-lcring) illuminatod by sunlight Llian 
the while paper on which they are printed when illuminated 
by arttficial fighL Therefore, what b called black under one 
cticumstanre may be perceived us white under another. 

3. Hue. Psychological acudyris indicates that there are four ideas 

of hue; red, yellow, green, blue, fftiese form a dosed series 
via the purpkti.^ 

4. Ltfro]mHit>\ 

5. 

218 



















































Fid. 111—Luiransuittf lighlnc^ji. 

The dUTcrcrtce be ween ot^uve arul liijhjctcSvc nifii-uito of itw 
ifuaniity <3f lijebt 

Tb* light rcfltvlcii fram A ii lUenttail m tptanlfciy tD ibe light 
refitted from B. 

Photonvrtcf X give* reiding fli photometer Y. 'Riis is an 
oivrrfDr tiijei^Miremcnt The word fof w^t rmsr been inui 
mowiirwJ k LUMLNANCE. Jhi% t$ % psychophystcal Lprn, ilnK 
ii hypothec iws a tiMHirmbk phi'iical iaus« iw its rcbtioti lo inc 
rraclion of jl percipient, 

A lighter Uiiirt B, 

TtiBlsa wJSs^wnwjudBnicnt of mea^. 3>ti*0fil for wlwt Im 
b((ti thus mciuuied: is LIGHTNESS. This ii a psjfcholi^tal tent*, 
singe if i» dcseriptive of paiwntion. 

ClearU LUMINANCE ciui be lelatftJ to an ahsolule measure of 
qu&iuhy bnSeil upon the visual eflWienCj of ruduinl encfis> • 

On Ibe oihcr hand, LlGffTNESS is a ff 
inhuntenibtc cowlitioiw- in tiK 

Hence the eje ii oof n teliohlc pboiartarlcr tapablc of abw^tc 
kldrrtninaii^ of Uw quantity of light. St ts 

cwtsiikiablc nccuntcy hi dlHeti«iiiflin'6 masinTiidcs under eaierulty 
4:«lUtjHcd ^JwJtwos. 


y. im 






















THE TtiHORETiCAL 


6. Ugittiiess. Thai ai^bute of visuiil eensaiio^ by ^hich one 

is judged lo rdicct a greater or ^?mllcr proportion of ihe 
Incident light than another (Fig. [ iS),. 


SensibiJjiy to DiiTerenees of >Va>clejig;tli 
Hue diseriminittion fias been measured by many observers. A 



Fig- II6A-—Human hue libcrtminaiian neceniii;^ to Wridit ami Pitt {Mv, Fhyi, 

JCoc.411.1934). 



117.—Mlmmiuii d^nge of wa^eJenaih pcivcpttti-lc ih, A Joiw), 


recent mvescigaiion by Wnghi and Pill fsj sho^^ the difference: in wave¬ 
length necessary for discrinuiiiilion of hue at adjocent mivetenglhs 
(see Fig. 116), Mmima in the curve represent maxiMa of diicrimimtiofi. 
Between 5it0 and 600 M/j wa^'dcngtbs as little apart as \ M^j can bo 
distinguished. L. A. Jones [6] made a similar deteiminalioii and deiivod 

219 




























































COtOUR CINEMi^TOflKAPHV 

a hue «c!ilie of about 150 «iepsi of ju»i diiitinguLihabtu dilfmitee in tlie 
spectrum (see Table 39), Note the tiigh sensitivity to the yellow ntgion 
{580*550 M/j) anti m the bliie-peeo at 490 M^t (Fig. 117)* 

SeR<in)i1lt> Id pafer^c« of Lmnlnancr 

The TdinA is sensitive to diHerericos of luminanoe over Q very wide 
razige, falling off at low and high mtemilics. KOnig artd Brodhun 
detemined ihe least perceptible lunilnancc increment for light of 
mrinus hues and for white. As ihc intensity deemses. the sensibility 
dimiiiishes more rapidly for rays oF longer wavclengtli tlian for rays 
of shorter wavelength. (Tins antt of Itimiimiioe la Table 40 is O 064 
fntllitamberts, whkh isi approximately O-CW fbol-candks.) 

The mblo shows the lisasi lumiimjice increment from iibout O-QOMS 
Foot^ndles to 4,000 root-candles. From tlic table it will be seen that 
the range of luminance which gives the best discriuiination is between 
TtQOQ and 5*000 ttnits^viz., beivvecn 8 and 20 fooC'Candies. The a vcmgje 
luunaous reflechince of scrctos in large theatres rarely exceeds 7 foot- 
candles {Itmimoiis reflectance of the screen measured during proj^- 
tion, indusiK of dark period). 


Taul^ 36 (01 SNCWAim Lowry) 


LbmJ0j37!rrf' Crnfiif£!r| 

c/Tw0jast 

UtmiHanm. 

'i 

Srrn^bHUy: Ratip p/ 
B rifjmt N&iicicobK 
Difffftnet it/B. 


B CuiilUlunbcm) i 

Ic^B 

Bf^iB 


C^fJOOO.tS 

-441 

1-9 

Q-m 

OOOOOW 

-4 02 > 

2-7 

0-372 

BOOOt^ 

-3-71 

33 

0-302 

r>t)0039 

-341 

3’9 

0-254 

<KlOOd9 

-34H 

44 

0246 

tH»3^ 

-2 41 

?6 

0^131 

<H>i9S 

-F7S 

16-7 


om 

-141 

2J-d 

0042 

0078 

-t 11 

3i-2 

04)32 



40-0 

CHKS 

O'62 

-frU 

374) 

04)27 

o-9a 

-oox 

47-6 

04)21 

2i4 

B35 

474 

04)209 


0-51 

59-2 

00169 

13 a 

)'M 

66’7 

0-0150 

25-1 

1 140 

734) 

1K>IJ7 

ssu 

1'74 

73U 

00137 

97-7 


72-5 

00)39 


MS 

704 

00142 

2244) 

235 

1 690 

CM314S 


ScoHbility h> ImiuniuKe Uwo-pan AeM mth uniUirniinated suireurid). 

<V;ihics of fur 5* fickle by BUmchaud ftivcit CO thrw dfidmaJ vaIlus iu 

JiB.^ f<>r J' Add. by Luwfy gi™ (o fmir places.^ 

220 













THE THEORETICAL BASIS 


Other data by Blartchanl and Lcwiy aic given in TaMe 38. 
These data are gives in the third coltunn in the fonn of a ratio of the 
greatof of two Just noticeably difiereat luminances to the diJTerence 
between these luminances. The fourth column of the tabk |pves 
the nsctprocal of the sensibility, which has been called the difierence 
rraction, the Fechner fraction and other names. Data of this fcind are 
very much subject to the particular method of computation or repre- 
seniatioD employed — for example, the type of field u^ (7) (8)* 


Table 39,—Mimmuw Change op WAmitNCTH PEnciFnati 

(L. A. Jones) 


Sitp 

iS'fl. 

fy/frekrvtf^ 

(WjO. 

Dlffi/T<fter 

Sup 1 
are. 

Warelmstti i 
Wji). 

tJJffmnet 

1 

■BKW 


36 

5864 i 


2 

m-0 

22-0 

37 

5853 

1-1 


665-0 

1341 

3S 

5844 

13 

4 1 

659^0 

641 

39 

582^7 ^ 

13 

5 

654'D 

543 

40 

581-3 

1-2 


649S 

4-5 

41 

580-3 

12 

7 

64&Q 

3-5 

42 

5791 

it 

S 


3-2 

43 

577’9 

11 

9 

640^1 

2-6 

44 

5765 

H 

m 

637 8 

2^ 

45 

5752 

1-3 

11 

63S'5 

M 

46 

573-7 

15 

12 

633-1 

24^ 

47 1 

571-7 

i-0 

J3 

63IH» 

3-t 

4«: 

i JWt 

1-8 

!4 

626-5 

3-3 

49 ’ 

^ 5684 

1*7 

J5 

62J-0 

3-5 

50 

5666 1 

1 l-« 

16 

62CH) 

34> 

51 

564-8 

1^8 

17 

6173 

2-7 

52 

563-0 

1-8 

If 

614^ 

24 

53 

56M 

1^9 

19 

6125 

24 

54 

558-6 

2 5 


610-2 

2-3 

55 

557-0 

2-6 

21 

6084} 

2’2 

56 

5544 

24 

22 

606-0 

2-0 

57 

551-8 

2^ 

22 

604^1 

1-9 

58 

549-1 

2,7 

24 

6023 

I'S 

59 

546-1 

30 

25 

600^6 

1’6 

60 

5434 

3^1 

26 

399<3 

14 

€J 

539^8 1 

1 3-2 

27 

597-4 

14 

62 

536 5 

3^ 

28 

395'9 

14 

63 

533-2 

3^3 

29 

594-5 

14 

64 

53<M 

3 1 

30 

593-1 

14 

65 

527-1 

30 

n 

591-8 

1-3 

66 

524-2 

20 

32 

5»5 

1-3 

67 

52M 

2-8 

33 

589^5 

i-0 

68 

519-1 

' 

34 

SSf 5 

14 

69 

5168 

2-3 

IS 

587 5 

i-0 

70 

5146 

< 2-2 

i 


221 


















CbtOtlR ClWEMAtOGRAi^HY 


TABLE n 



(AC*). 

Difftrtnt* 

iMpty 

Step 

m. 

Wa^ltugth 

(ACi). 

D&ertntf 

muh 

71 

5126 

20 

100 

470^5 

24 

72 


20 

101 

4682 

2-3 

73 

508^) 

10 

102 

465-8 

2-4 

74 

mo 

io 

103 

461^ 1 

2-2 

75 

5054 


t04 

46M ‘ 

24 

76 

5040 

14 

105 

4587 

2-5 

77 

X2-i 

14 

106 

4565 

1-2 

78 

901-3 

1^3 

107 

4544 

23 

19 

5C»'D 

1-3 

108 

452 1 

2^3 


4987 

S-3 

109 

4504) 

21 

ai 

4974 

1-3 

no 

44B-0 

2^ 

82 

496-1 

J-3 

111 

446^J 

20 

iJ 

494-8 

1‘3 

112 

444^2 

t« 

M 

493^7 

i1 

IB 

443 5 

1-7 

E5 

492-6 

t 1 

114 

440^8 

1-7 

86 

491 5 

M 

115 

439-0 

1 1-8 

87 

490^ 

11 

116 

4572 

1 18 

U 

48M 


117 

435-J 

1-9 

89 

4882 

1-2 

118 

453-3 

2-0 

90 

487-0 

12 

119 

431 3 

24> 

91 

4858 

M 

no 

1 429^3 

21 

92 

4845 

J-3 

t2l 

4270 

2-2 

93 

4S3'2 

1-5 

S22 

424'8 

3-2 

94 

481 7 

1-5 

125 

422-3 

23 

95 

4804? 

1-7 

\24 

419-7 

2-8 

96 

4782 

18 

125 

416-7 

3-0 

97 

, 4765 

L7 

126 

413-8 

2-9 

9« 

475^ 

LS 

127 

4104 

34 

99 

1 4T29 

24 

128 

4058 

4-6 


tied 

Onu^ 

Cfccd . 


WAVlULKNaTU LJtttrS Dr THE pRlNClEAl HUES 
(ifl 

ilf/j 


700-630 

620-^90 

590-578 

STB^StS 


Bllbc-sreen 

Hliw 

UtetniMine 

Vioki 


^fn 

315-500 

SOO -^3 

46 J-M 5 

445 ^ 


■* Note^— JkfifSitr^iOt^ Is ^upTQ&cd AS Mu ttndl is luii'&inini nun^ This £& to 
mik- f t in Tile wAVGlenith rksi U^Ehi is, fdr cimipae, ibiHit m. 


Th« LmnbidiltY of Riulijint (Rdatii SpKt»l LimiiEiam;i) 

Vadalmo in liic wavdengih oFihc ^^Lknulus produces besides variuiion 
in httc, a irbange in ihe seiusilon of liiminodty. Thus th: blue of the 
spKlnini is ksi light than ihe 3wUow-er«n. Compitting Uie amounts 
of cncfgy of taicb wavelength throughout the spectrum wbidi will 
fciimulote an cqujU seasadon of Luminosity, wc can cakalatc the rdutlve 
(ummoDcc of nn equal energy spectrum. Pbited with mlaiive luminanoe 
as onlLnutes and wavelengths as absetssx, these data give a curve known 
us the Relative Spectral Lunurnince carve of the eye (Fig, HB>, The 
221 

















TaM-B 39.—LbA 5T PeBCBiTUILB LUM/NANa^ CONIHAJT (KONiO AN» BRODHUN) 


THE theoretical BASIS 



S 

I 

4 

I 


|| 

l| 

Tl 

|| 

A 

111 

Si! 

iii 

u o K 


I? 


fi 

^ 2 . 

ti 

«_g 

s 

S'! 

£*» 

u ^ 

I 

223 






























COLOUR CtNEMAT00R4Flfy 


tudunancc Icvd at which observeLionfi arc made (hut part of the 

spectrum which QOmmily appears luminous to move towards the short¬ 
wave legiort if the iatcasity of the light forming Ihc spectfum is much 
Tcduccd. This is known as the Furkioje phenomenon (discovered by 
Fufkinje^ IK 25 ). In light of very low iuteosiiy the blues appear coti- 
sidcmbly lighter than the reds. 

Gibson and Tyndall [9] of ihe Bureau of Standards^ U.S.A., deter- 
mined a Relati ve Specrral Liunitiaace curve for ihe"“siajiduTd’^ eye the 
values of which were ^tdopted by the LnieraatiODal Commisslori an 
lUumUialioit In 1924 . Table 41 gives the values. 



Table 4U Rjelativb Sfectral LuAtiNANCx (Gi&sok and 





~ ^ ■ 

■ r 

i I 

*“ 

h # 

if 

u® ■ 

570 

560 

m 

+ « 



. 

** 

h ^ 

000025 

530 







r. 

OOOOSl 



4 * 



- rr 

= . 

.. 

000105 

530 


■ 



F 

•" I 

1 fi 

0 0021 

520 


B 1- 


► n 

.r.. 

T '. 

._ 

CHWl 

510 


+ m 



* b 

. 1 ;. 

i-. 

<tom 

500 


♦ - 



<1 ii 

■ b 

i,* 

0017 

4» 


T W 




mm. 

km, 

0032 

4S0 


+ ■ 




mm 

bm 

ooer 

470 





*.. 


r .- 

0107 

460 







. . 

0175 

450 






. 1 1 

1 * 

0165 

440 








03SI 

430 


1 * 




+ 


0-503 

4Z0 


ih B. 






0-631 

410 


W » 





._ 

0737 

400 

4i 

+ ■• 




« # 


0570 



^ 6 



}ymltnsfh 
in M\i, 


iVav^CTfitth 
/rt J/m. 

7« 

750 
740 

m 

710 
710 
700 
«90 

m 

670 
6fi0 
650 
640 
630 
630 
6t0 
600 
m 

5 S 0 h « . r ^ v~ 9 i\r 

*yrt™**''*'***ofihe hiiiinutliB ^ 
224 


iiOil IVndJilll. 

Tvkdatx)^ 

VktMUy. 

• * 0951 
0 99S 
.. 0993 

0954 

.. om 

D-710 
.. 0-50J 
*. 0323 
i- Chios 
(hJ39 
0^091 
.. 0-060 

*. 0 <r 23 
.. OH»tl6 
t. 00040 
OOOL2 
0^0004 

ht \ht C.I.E. 








































The mbilurc of A jind W iind \mi u purily- of I7'\ fviz.^ ihc ktrniriuncc cif A divided 
r:^ Ihc luminance nf A nuiieficv the olhcrvcJ J>t. 









THE THEORETICAL PA5JS 


SeoslbiU^y to Purity DifFtritat^ 

Any colour can be nmtclicd by mixing (adding or subtractbi^ in the 
colortmctric sense) a spcetraL stmiulus wkh an aebromatlc slLmuJus. 
The TniRture is nieuSiJTed by /wo quantitles: 

L DdmiDaiit aveleiiKth^ which is defined m [he report above 
rcrcTTcd lo as/' The wavctengih of the spectral sdniulus required vo be 
mixed (added or subtracted in the colorimetric sense) with a standard 
itcliromatic stimulus in order to match rhe observed stimulu-s/* 
Purples are given a complemefrtary M^y^lcnglh if sub I tact ion is necessary, 
and ihis is defined by tlte Sub-Commitlee on Coloriinelry of the 
British Naiioiial lilumLnation Committee as: The wavelength of llie 
portion of ihe spectrum wliicb* when combined with the s^iniple 
stimulus In suitable proportions, matches the adopted achromatic 
stimulus according to the data for ihe standard observer/* 

2. P^nrity^ 

{a) Colorlnj^trk Purit}', which the Physical Society Report defines 
as the ratio Bd3« where B is ihe luminanpe of the sampJe stimulus 
and Bd h the luminance of a speclral stimulus (or of a suilable com^ 
binadon of extreme spectral red and extreme spectral violet) whidi^ 
by additive mixture with the adopted achromatic stimulus^ forms a 
match with the sample stimulus in both luminance and chromatidty 
according to the data for the standard observer. ” 

(ft) Excitation Pirfftw which i$, The talio of the distances, on a 
two diimensiomi] dtromatidly diagrajn, from the adopled iichromalic 
Stimulus to the sample stimulus and to die stimulus lying on ihe 
specif urn locus or the fttraighi line joining lu; extremes^ which by 
additive JTikture with die adopted achronnitic siimulus can form a 
match with the sample stimulus. An achromuric sirmului^ hajs purity 
A chtomfltic stimuJua has purity > o and < L A spcctrol slimylus 
has purity=|, Tlic dominaul wavelength und purity of a stimulus 
correspond to the hue and saturaiion sensations but there is no strict 
parallelism. Thus* a constant hue scries of increasing saturation is not 
necessarily a series of constant dominant wavelength, although the 
departufc will not gencmlly be large and may be very small for certain 
Hues. (Since the selection of a standard illuminunt is arbitrary, this 
close correspondence depends on v^hether or not the sEuiidard illumi- 
nant i$ acceptable as achrcmtatlc under the conditiocts of observelioti.l 
Dominant wavelength and purity as objeelivc quantities are indepen¬ 
dent of luminance* but the hue and satiiraiion sensations may vary 
with the luminana:. Although the purity jncreaja?s with saturation^ a 
Wile of equal steps of saturation does not agree with cither the colons 
metric or excitation purity scales. In like manneft luminance corre- 
spends to him inosity sensation bui there is no strict proportion ulity 
P 225 


COLOUM. CtMeMA.TOQRAl>KV 



Since ihe scabs of cquai steps do not agree. If the lummance is specified 
as well as the dominant wavelength nnd purity relative to some standard 
illuminaai, the colour is completely defined. This system of colour 
spedncation carresponds to the representation of a sector in polar 
co-ordinates. For comparing colours the characteristics of a sdmultu 
are oQjnpletcty defined by three quautities—dlbcr the three trichromatic 
co-ardinat«, or the hmuiancc, domiaiint wavelength and purity. 
Normally it is stilficient to consider only the relative lununance of 
cotoun.'' 


n M 

Purify 

Fki. Ii0.-«aauaiion iciiiibdttiy (L A. Jams md E. M. Lowryl. 


-tfc I! cornsspondUig to puritv, is 

that attnbutc of visual sensations which pcrmils a judgmoii to be 

made of the propo^on of eotourfulnesi in the total wnsatjon. Sensa¬ 
tions of the same hue and laminosUy can be arranged in a series of 
inoumi^ Mtmatton nuiging from grey id that member of the series in 
which tbc hue apf^ iwsi marked.” (Report oa Colour Tcrminoloity 
by a Committee iifThc Physioil Society Colour Group, London 1948.1 
L A. Jonfis^ E M. Uwny I lOyiiave detcrniiaed the number of the 
least pempbblc Mtureh^ Steps between each mo^imidly satunitcd 
colo ur and white (hg. 120). The curves representing the sensibility of the 
eye odi^rences of mm re. ion possess two rmsinia. one. thcgriref of 
the two. being at complete saiuraiLon. and the other at lero. Complete 
226 



THE THfiORETICAL BASIS 


SAttitattcra means t>iqt for purposes orphy^cai specilicBtion the spectral 
colours arc lOO per cent, saturated. An cxcqjtion to the order of sen¬ 
sibility ta found in (he case of the bliic*green (490 M/j), for wMcli hue Ibe 
mximum Appears al zero punly. The reason is uukfiawn. Ji will be 
seen from Table 42 (hat the niitnbcr of saturation steps varies for ihc 



Fio. I2I_— colour SMHi platicd in the RJtl.CS- chart For la of the Ttnca Jested by 

W. D. Wfhfhi. 


dilTorcnl Golours» the larger number of steps beutg found in the red and 
blue, and the smaller in ihe yellow [1 1 !, 

W. D. Whgbt (12) has measured comfortably discnminalivc slcps 
uloDg thirty*five lines across the C.LE. (t*CJ,) chromaiicity charts The 
mean of such stqis of four observera turned out to be some three times 
thejuAt noiBxabtedifrcteace- When plotted on the standard G.LE. chart 
ihe steps are found to be very badly distorted, and the data are inuclt 
better presented on the Bra:kGrmdge and Sdtaub rcctangidar*uniFonn- 

227 





COLOirX CIN'EMATOGRAPHY 


chromnticity scale chart (kaown a.^ ths R.U.C.S.). Bui no Jinear 
projection of the C.LE. diagram can give an caaci equaUiy of the colour 
steps. Tlie purples and the spectrum locus were also examined. 

Plotted on the C.I.E. staqtLud chart, the smalksi fitc|>s were in the 
blue comer and the longest in the green and yellow. 

For Wright the steps on the R.U.C.S. chart all vary between 0-017 
and 0 034 of the bngth of the line joining two wavclcn^hs (Fig. 12i 1. 

Tabie 42 ,—Saturation Scale Data (Jones ani> Lowry) 


tFuT^/ensrAi In Mtt {Fercntifigi PutiiyX 



+10. * 

4TO. ! 

1 

490. 

540. 

575. ! 

<»5, 1 

1 


680. 

1 

97'^ 

970 

960 

980 

980 

980 

97-2 

970 

2 i 

95-0 

937 

91-5 , 

95^ 

95-3 

95 5 

943 

93-3 

3 

920 


86-5 

935 

915 

93‘K 

9L4 

9175 * 

■1 



sto 

88-8 

869 

S9’7 

SB4 

S7-0 

5 

S44 

02-0 1 

750 

a4-3 

805 

860 

850 

B3-0 

6 


7SO 1 

68’5 

79^5 

725 

820 

81 5 

784 

7 

76^0 

?i-5 , 

61-5 

735 

64-3 

T7’7 

77-5 

744 


710 

68’5 ' 

$48 

66-5 

55'8 

72H 

73 5 

69-5 

9 

C.64 

630 

47‘T 

592 

474 

670 

690 

64-7 

10 

MS 

574 

4L0 

51-5 

380 

60-3 

64-0 

597 

n 

! 

11-8 

34-5 

444 

2S3 

530 

58-5 

542 

12 

SH> 

460 

28-3 

370 

30-5 

458 

52^5 

48-5 


45 5 

39-7 

228 

mo 

137 

385 

470 

i 42-5 

14 

39-7 

334 

17 9 

230 

80 

31 4 

4S 5 

3fr5 

15 

340 

270 

n-5 

ITO 

1-5 

Ut 

25-7 

30-5 

16 

ZS-1 

215 

96 

HI 

00 

190 

3&3 

250 

17 

230 

170 

60 

6*5 


142 

254 

3l>6 

IS 

17-5 

12-3 

24 

17 


90 

20-1 

163 

19 

no 

8-5 

00 

00 


4-5 

n-5 

12-3 

20 

9-0 

50 




0-0 

li-5 

9-3 

ZL 

3^7 

2J 





71 

60 

22 

2-S 




1 


33 

28 

21 

OO 


( 


1 


ao 

0^0 


Trichromatic Cnteiir Mixture 

The expcrinientat fact that practicaily es'ery colour cun be matebed 
by the admixture of three colours is inJefvndent ^fm} theoty of colour 
vixiafi mfvimceil to account for it. The reader is referred, for a study 
of the theories of colour vision, to the literature of the subject. Here 
we have only to note that, were it not that most colouiscan be matched 
by the admixtuiv of three, colour photography, as we know it so for^ 
would not exist. But it is always imcttstini' ^ suggestive to tocall that 
iIjc tliree-ooLour lucthad need rm! be the ftoal solution, for if we cun 
discover some light-sensitive substance cupoblc of assuming the colour 
22g 


























TItE THrORfiTlTAl, BASIS 


of I he lifilu lo which il Is exposed (or the complentcntary colour thereto) 
and the means be found for fixing it. there would no longser be any need 
for three-coloitr pbotography. 

So that the Young-Hclmholtz theory of colour vision is immatc^l to 
the facts with which we, as colour phoiograptreri. should be acquaiiitcd. 
The colour-receiving apparatus would appear front the facts to have 
three functions of some sort or othet isee Granil), but the true explana- 
don of what happens has formed the subject of argument, and some¬ 
times acrimonious urgamedt, for the lasty sixty yean or so. And there 
we propose to let the mutter rest. 

It is very helpful, however, to represent the three sensations hypo- 
ihestzed, as a mciuis of conceivinig what tfuiy underlie the facts of colour 



Fk. (tuminosilv) ciin« for while IJjJit spectnini(aftiiiiariSyKJe*,tisiJ 

piinutnes) <W, D, W rlghttv 


mixture. Three prinmrics are chosen such thni all visible radiations 
stimulate positive amounts of them, Now a stimulus of some 
energy distribution will produce a sensation which may be regarded as 
the composite elfect of three component sensations. The proportions 
in which the three primaries are stimulated are raeasurcd on a 
basis, as this duality is the only one they have in rrMWow/Mwe know tluu 
blue is less bright than yellow, for example). As W. D. Wnght well 
expresses it: 

The fact thfli H iv diflkiUi. wh=n making > dUwi oomiHi^ to 
lilt CMct iwtBi til wliich iwci diffeitaii coloucs Iww i^ 

TIMS) Is ihrUult or a fmrkai dilTctw* 

seusiUviiy io a irnaJJ diflerenoo in nnoiher ^ullUty, bikI (I«» «« ngiurr imi ux 

common qimtliy of tiimiiioRlj- is 





















































Cni.OUR CtNEMATDOft J^PIIV 

Tig. ] 23 gives dtc rckUve luminosity of the three sensations in the 
various spectrum hues, referred to a white light spectrum (S.tKX)'' K,). 
The areas under the three curves ^ve the proport^n stimulated by the 
imegiaj light of the spectrum. 

The next thing is to separate the hue pan of the sensation from the 
luminosity. To do this Vrv must adopt the convendon that equal 
amounts of the thice primary sensations make white. We have to find 
factors for making the areas under the three curves equal. These factors 
enable us to express a colour apart from its huninnsity ns certain 
amounts of red, green, and blue, multiplied by the equality factors and 
expressed an coeQidents addmg up to unity. This is called a trichromatic 



^ lib# CWsMfcr V HM Sewitai*#? 

Pd. 124.—Coknir iriangle (chnunttlicity’ diasratu) shewing tpccUxI locus reTencd 
U) hypethetiMl priminlejt {W. D. Wri^tt. 

unlit Such a unit fulfils nialhcoiaticsl lavra. If we mix X units of a 
colour Cl with X units of another colourCj, then we tiare 2X units of 
some third colour C^, and so on. 

This syst^n has led to the use of the triangular method of represent¬ 
ing a coloui. An equilateral triable has generally been used, but ibis 
rod bod uses a superfluous co-ordinate in that once two out of the three 
coefficients arc known the third la given by (he djlference from unity of 
the sum of the two. Hence a two ciMtrdinate system is feasible, and has 
tiic advantage of possessing lectangtilar axes. 

In Ftg. 124 the abscissa of a point gives ils red and the ordinate its 
gPKn coetheient, and these completely detennine the colour repre- 
«nlcd by the point. The units being based on equal quanlitiei of the 
primaries muichiitE while, the white point has the co-ordinates (ffi333. 
The positio n of the spectrum hues is shown, A colour which is 
230 





Tiff: THBOUfTlCAt HA^I^ 


Utt mixiufc of twD Others will lit in the strajglil line jominglbt points 
iocaling these. II fottows from the properties oF the colow triangle that 
the coiouF itsulLing from aoy visible radiation must fall inside the ^ 



bounded by ihc spectrum hues, sJitce such a colour must be composed of 
one or more monochroiniitic fudiatiom. 

The primaries In the above figure are impossible to mutch ^nor 
we any normal experience of fhcro) without nssumit^ negaiive values^ 
The negative eoeffieienc can be found by adding sulfudent of the primniy 













































COLOUR CINEMATOGRAPHY 

cuncemed to the spectral colour until the mixtui« cun be matched, and 
then meastinng tbe amouitt of dcsuturaling primary Introduced. Sub* 
ttuction of this quantity from the quantity of the primary in the mixture 
gives the requin^ negative amount of primary. 

W. D. Wrighl^s famou!i determination of the trichromatic data, 
averaged with that obtained by ). Guild of the Nationul Phystcal 
Laboratory, was adopted by the Intematioiuii Commissjoa on lilumina- 
tion in 1931 as the basis for the C.E.E. (hCiJ tristimulus values. The 



,|f rb Cmrmtikt H.M. SfMHamrr 

Fio. S26,—Colour td«iisk ibowing nxm iocm of 10 toid •&thiio 

^oinU of 36 abysrym ( Wk t>. WfigJu). 


mejin WBvcJenglhs of the primaries used by Wright were 650 M/t red. 
530 M/( green, and 460 Mp blue. 


'* Provided the racHIcients vTimh Ht oT prlnurMsam tnmm in iimm of lUKHher 
ML the cwificienti of biij mlotiT emr>»ed in out systatn tan be upRased on the 
•HlMT sytieni sanply by motna of ndlhiwiicd InuHTmtiiai iom. Hj, it impottant. 
At It Kt once reOowt ihjit ft it ef no thceRtkAl cdnsHiutnar vImi prjiniries ew 
UMd— since the rcuilts tan be ttontTetml to enotho m( |f dcrired, The idm that 
•pecitJ primnhes mma be used j« Mic etut ibe jututjmf ftd™to*a ef ime set tHicr 
another one «e ell that hire to be comhkred ” (W, D. Wrighi) 


In Fig. 71 is fihown the mean set of curves obtained from Fig. 125 It 
232 






tut TJrtlORETJCAt IIA51S 


musL b« irmembcrcd lhat ihcsc ian; mixture curves and Imve no ihcft- 
reucal signific*ince, they are not sensation curves. 

The data of Fig. 125±tra repre^nted in Fig. ]2t by tJie spcclral k>cns, 
the scale along the line piviTig wavelength in microR^i. Note that the 
did’etcnce betw^n this triangle and the triangle in Fig. 124 is due lo the 
ii$c of bypotbetJea! primiines in the first cose and real primaries in the 
second. Inside the triangle Wright has plotted the white points ** of 34^ 
observers. The \iaTiation in the posilioa of white ts concluded to be due 
to the vari^iiort in the density of the macub pigment and its variation 
in domirtant hue. Tlie vaimtion is iuq^nsingSy big. 

Fordctnilcd treatment of the methods by which tlie iristimuitis values 
went calculated the reader b referred to the original paper 13], 


Colorimetry 

Tfm C,LE. {LC.L) TnVAramfftfc SyTfem 

L A nomiaJ observer can match any colour sUmuJus by mixing the 
light from three suitably chosen stimtili m the proper proportions, 
but the matching of spectral radiations involves the use of nega¬ 
tive coeiBdents. 

2 - Colour-mixture data have been determined for aa internationnlly 
accepted group of observers by use of h colorimeter with which 
chosen primaries were mixed to match monochrome lie light 
throughout the spccmim, 

5- In (922 the Colorimetry Oimmittee of the Optica) Society of 
America published siaadard datii. In 1928 Guild and Wright 
re-determiued these fundtuneniul datUf and the International 
Commission on lllumimtrion standaidi^d the data in 1931, 

4. All sets of real sitmulj make it necessary to use negative amounts of 

ut IcHst one of ihe pri-ituirics- To avoid negative amounts sriitiuli 
mmi be aiicd which could have rsoaduiil existence. Such iiuaglnmy 
REFHRENCE STIMULI have been adopted in the C,I.E. System 
and are known as X. Y. Z. Tfie units ore so chosen as to make 
a mixtUTt; of equal quantities of the three lioitiogenecjus stimuli 
chromaticiilly equiv%i1ent lo n heterogeneous siimuluv for which 
the lotal energy of the radiation of all wavelengths iDclwcen any 
two limiting wavelengths within the ip^sibk spectrum U a constant 
multiple of the difference Iwiween these limilin^ wavelcngihs- 
The rebtivc luminosttic& of ihc units of the three liomo^nMus 
stirrmLi for the Stumtard Obh%T\*^ r arc In die ratio 1: 4^5907: u^OnOi. 
These stimuli are generally denoted as R+ O, II. 

5 . Tlte four stimulit known as CARSTfrlf t Ll, which define the 

standard colorimetric scales consist of homogeneous radialions of 
wavdenaths 700 546 I and 435-8 imd the radiation 

333 


cotoutt CINBMAT0GKA]>UV 

from siandard [ItumiDunt 
foflowing values: 


8. The^ sUmuU are assigned the 


X+*2$53J Y+IHWOOO Z Tor 700 

YxO-OOeSJZ for 5«-l M-. 
ft1»S8 X+D-00886 Y+(l-8Mi6 Z for «i-8 M^. 

X+fr^SlSi Y +0'299S7 Z Ibf lllmninqot B. 

D' 3333 } X + 0 ‘ 333 t 3 V + 0 ‘| 1 J 33 Z fur l:<{tiiiJ*enci]ty Sliinutttt. 

6. The DiyrRIBunON COEFFICIENTS of these siimuU in an equal 
energy spcctnrm ure denoifid by f iiL CI.E. Syutem and 
defined as a table of figure!^ which represents the chnraclemttc^ of 
rhe Stwidatd Observer (see table bdow'). The values indicate the 
atnount of each of X* required to match a onii quantity of 
radiant energy of the various wavetengihs. 

7 s The three co-ordinates of a colour iti the CI.E, system ore known as 
CliROMATiCiTY CO-ORDINATES and are denoted by x, Vp ^ 
These quontilies are respt^tively u/fu+v+wL v/(a+¥+w) and 
w/(u-hv+wK where 




ti*"? 


J 

* 

I S* E. ft, dA 

E)^5»dA 

{ 

W=j=-—- 

S--Spa:tniT TellKtion « Ifanuniiiiioti fBcUirfirihcbudv 
*nil E^'^Sfwctnt diniiibutkan tjf tbe llluininiitit. 

8. u, V, w. respectively are tlic amounts of R, G, B (or In Uic cs«e of the 

CI.E. system, X, Y, Z), required to uiiitch a colour C measured in 
lonre convenient unit, u, v and w acc known as TRISTIMULUS 
VALUESm 

C can be npresMd nigebreically by Ihc equntiou 
C=n.R+v.O -bw.B 

9. The C.r.E. trkbnunafic system of colour specUkation employs three 

imaginary reference stimuli denoted (*« pant, 4) by X Y z 
T "",1^ T ^rdinnic axes are chosen to lie in Lhc pVne of 
the alyclttie.« They therefore have zero Jumitianct so that the 
" The kxui in a IfiiJtrDiiiatfe ct^nlimtc sivxtm _ 

234 





TIFE TirEORF-TirAl B^SIS 


relative Jumiiiunoe of any ^iinmliis h £ivcn dirccUy by its Y ct>- 
ordimte^ The XY pluite of ibc Syitem is made tangential lo the 
red end df ihc spcclfuni lociis f^vtiicli approach^ a plane La llus 
rt^onVand the YZ plane passc$ elo^c tn the spccLnim locn^, with¬ 
out louchin^* ID a direction wliich gives d favourabledbpositiori of 
the speetruin locus within the sector formed by the co-ordinate 
daces. The C-LE. tristimulkis values u, v^ w are therefore positi^'C 
for ail real stiifiuLI including spectral coIqut?^ An equal energy 
!>tiniu1u$ is used for the bask stimutus (1). 


Slmdard Cobur-Mixture 

The colour-mkiuie curves (Tristimulus Vnlucsl upon whkb the Cd.E. 
cotorijneiric system is based, are geomcLrical, Linear transformations of 
Wright’s anil Guild^s curves avoraged Guilds PML Trans* Ray. Sac., 
A230fc 149,1931). Tliese two sets of curves possessed ncgaiive valuers for 
some wavelengths. The CJ*E, curves are convenienlly computed so as 
to have no negative values, and they correspond to wholly hypoihetica! 
fundamental stimuli, iuid, moreover, the green carve has made 
identical with the tclalive spectral lummance function (see page 2!^4h 
Of course, no actual observations orUic mixlurc values of realcoluiins of 
ihc spectrum or i>iherwii!;c could possibly result ijn such curves' never- 
ihelc$s they express and Encladc the factual data upon which they arc 
based, Tlie w^holc system fms been dcviicd for convenience of cakuln- 
don. The ordinates of the curves are expressed lu arbitrary units so as to 
mate the areas- under cuch curve equal when the data are plotted to 
equal scales. 

As we hs.vc find previous occasion to remark, such eolour^TniKture 
data are absolutely indepeudept of nil ihcorii;s uf colour vision. They 
nre based on a phenomenal fach the possibility of matching praciicaJly 
all colours with three. They do not explain why this is a faci^ The 
knowledge cf this fact M^outd hate been emogh upon which io hn-tr ike 
methods by which aihar photography hm been aihk\ed without inking 
into cmitdcrntwH utty hypothesis of ike nyerhanisni of eotonr vision^ 
whether it be that of HehnhnUz or,, m our day, Gramt, 

Tile chromatidty co-ordinates of u given sample of radiant energy arc 
computed by Inlcginting the product of the ordinates of one of the 
standard misture curves multiplied by the distribulion of energy wave¬ 
length by wavelength in the sample. In the cose of reflected mdiant 
cpcigy the spectral composition is the product of the ^kkni emergy 
and the radiant feBcclancc of the surface. ThcchronuiiicUy co-ordiniite$ 
so cateuluted are made numencally equal in the directioniiJ luminous 
reflectance of the surface for a given distribution of radiant energy.. 
Chromaticily cu-urdinatev of the radiant transmittance of a sample are 
coktUaicd in the some fa.shiop. 


235 



Mr 


Fw. 127.— The tvectrjiJ ttion pluunj hr « nciimeular 

of a point in a plane diagram. Such a diagram is calkd a chromatichy 
(fia^am [ 14 :. 

The chrcimoticitiee of ihc specirum coloum can be computed by 
dividing the ordinate of each of the colour-mixtuie cuncs at the ap¬ 
propriate waveWfigth by the aum of (he ordinates of lhe tfuaj curves at 
that wavdeogth. The locus of the spectnim is iheciirve on the chroroa- 
cicity chntl m Fig. 127. Ths horizontal co-ordinalc rcprtstndng each 
236 


COLOUR crNEMATOOAA.PHr 


Specification of Chromatietty in the Chnmtattciiy Dlasrttni 
Cfiromiiiidty can be specified by use of the proportions which two of 
Ihe chramaUciiy ccHordiimt^ beer lo iho total of the th™ chroaiaiicity 
co-ordiiiates. These? two praportion$ can be employed as co-otdirtates 
for the representution of ihc chromaticily of a sample by the position 































































TtiE THnOBETlC.-sL SASIS 


Spectrum colour is the miio of the ordioatc of i in Fig. 55 lo ilic sum of 
the ordinates al that i^avckngtli of x. § anti The veritcal co-ordimitc 
ii the ratio of the oMiimte S in. Fig^ 55 at the Indicaiod wavelength to the 
sum of the ordinates^ U will be seen that the curve dcfinetl the co¬ 
ordinates repfeseniing the ehr-oraaticUies of energy of the Tarions wave- 
lengths is smooth and continuous, and that its cxtranjlics ane quite fur 
apart. The point tepresenting the chromaticity of the light from a 
soiin ?0 mdiiiting equal umounts in equal inicn’als of wa vetength through¬ 
out the spectrum haa the coordinates 0-333J^ 0'J333- Tlieie CMrdi- 
tiaies ncsult from the fact thut the miegrals whidi give ihe tristimulus 
values of such hght are propostionaJ to the areas under the three 
colour^mutture cimes* which thiw areas am all cquai 


C*L£. Sfiindard ///fi/nfjidiirs 

\, Daylight consists of a mixtu^ of all the camponcnls of tiic visible 
spectrum in nearly equal proporticms- At the CT.E, meettng in 
1931 a tight^souToe was adopted having a distributiem of energy 
given by a filter used in conjunction with a tungsten lamp 
opemted at a standardized lempeiatiirc providing a source 
closely approximating daylight. TTiis source 1 $ known as CT.E. 
Illuminani C. 

3. Two other standards were adopted — Ill mama nts A and B. 

A i$ a projector-type gas^fiiled lutigstea fihimcni lamp bumiiig at a 
colourqcmpcniture of 2 tS 48' K. CJ.IL llluntinant B ftpresents the 
yellower pheu^ of daylight and is ohiaiticd by filtcfiug Jlluntmanl A 
with liquid solutions in a double gUis& celh TIte colour of this filter with 
standard liluminnnt A an inumiitatit is 0 34SI X-f-0 35161 \ + 
0 29997 2 (Smith and Guild. 1931). The transmittance is 249 per 
cem. and the colour-tcmperaturc 4^860" K. 

Lurninunci^ 

In order to record the relative luminance of a colour at the same litne 
as iis tiistiniulus values it was decided to mate one of the three 
functions J) oorTcspond with The nrlutivy 5 |>ectml luminance 

function for Lblight-adapted eye. Hence the ruLativc spcctrnl luminance 
of a colour is indicaicd directly by ihc value of % on a s^Ie that 
TeprcMnts an absolute black by srero and n pcfTcci wbite by lOO. 


l/iwfdnanr C 

The bght-sdurcc is a rungsten Ump operated at a tempcnilure of 
K. The National Phy-sicuS Laboratory can supply lamps which 
ha.e been properly calibiaied and aged. The fUter consists of a double 
glass ceJi (white optical glas.v)* each layer being 1 cm. 
foUowing solutions^ Cj and CL; 


thick, of the 


237 


COLOUH Ctl^EMATOljItAFHV 


Sointhn Ct. 

Copper suIpMte CC\LSO*,5HtO) , . 34^2 gm. 

■■ .. ^412 „ 

pyridine (C,H|N) . . *+ .. .. *, 30-Q CX. 

Dd^tlod WAls (0 Rulfe ,« ... LCMXH> ^ 


Sttinfhfr Ct- 

Cobalt-anmiociiinn nilphnlc (Cc7SO|,CNIiJ,Sk)|. 


6 H 4 OI K>5S0pn. 

OlippCT sulphate (OiSO^.SU^) _ . . 22-320 „ 

fSdlphnric Add (density 1-S33) .. «. (O'D 

DhftiUect water la nufcke .. k* .i. 1000 ^ 



tCi? i» *m iia 

WA'n k 1: MQTM iM p| *-^ -W '' 


rt4t(. !! 
ri4^ - 

Tl r . 


Fid* lit,—trciAiTitsswii nf Chrumciii T.D <v7iipaFnl whh 3 colour* 
tcmpmium-itiising filler of Ideal ehnnicicrisiiia. iCtHiftnuy, f fdX 


Du&y-Cliroinex Ltd. nuuiufactuie &coloar-teinperatuj^'raisuig filler 
known ns T.D.*' which gives m e;!ice«dingly dose approstmatioo to 
the calcttlated ideal. The nccuncy of colour fODdering of lltiuiiinant C 
is to within 0 005 in y value on the C.1.E, (LCX) chart for any 
initial coJonr-tempenitiiTe and for alt corrections normally used- ['or 
IJIuminanl B the accuracy is whhin 0-002. U is siable both to hcul and 
lighL This remarkable filler 1» in some respects superior to the liquid 
fillers, wilh the obvious advantages of lower cost and esse of manipuhi- 
tion. It IS avaibbie in gdutioe or cellulose aeetau; or oememed in glass 
of iujy specified (iuelity. T.D. t j is the equivalent of Illummflai C, and 
T.D, 1 tubes the colonr temperaturo from Ulumlnont A to llluniijmnt B 
{Fig-123j. 

23E 

































THE THiORmCAL BASIS 


The piocedure of evaluniing the chrontatkiiy co-ordiitaia (x. y, f) of 
u colour is much amplified by use of the tables available in Professor 
Arthur C. Hardy's Handtxfok o/Cohrlmmry [10- ’ni™ give amo^^t 
other data the product between the C.LE. iltuminanis and the distribU' 
tion coctficicfits (aocofdmg to Judd). The spectral iiansmilUiBce or 
reflectance valuesare multiplied wavelcngUt by wavelengih by the values 



Fin. 129 —The caktiLuioii of die trinimuJui speciOattion for a cq1i>uiw1 surfuoe. 
fo) Tile caersy diMribulioa of iIk mtimiiwrL (ft) Tlic pnodiKt of (o) wwb ibe 
dUirtbutiUfl cBivw of FIk. 5S, W Tba .si>c«a«l rtffcctlon ^e of ‘*^“1®??: 
Of) The pjoduet of (ft) and (c) lo ffve the iruiiniultii oTUte surfu*. The ^ 

under iIk tbnse curves nrwiJ Hi'S iutmiHtUorXi Y SlUl Z renmred le fiuiBek the mrlaOT 

^W. D, WriahtJ. 


of Err (where Ec is the energy diainbuiioti of C.LE. niumijiaiil O and 
^ is the ttistintultiji value for the red priifidty). The product Is summed 
for all wavclenglhSi and this process is repeated for $ and S. 


*■ tlliunuuni C exnrcmoAili wUh a Wodt body m K. 

Illmniiipiit 8 cornesponds with a Wis-’k body *t ■t.tfdO K, 

innminiuit E (coflal ensigy speclnun) is off the tnuil radiilor l«i^ but it 

iituminani D Iti^tly owieaU ii,y)<foi'ie 4 poniit to u toLilTadintor ai 7,JtKt K. 
ItluijiiiiJMiiS (toy Wue tlyJ. od.txff X. 


239 


























































COLOUR CINEMATOGRAPHY 


This gives ihic values of X, Y. anil Z. 

The chfomaticiiy co-ordinates .v, y, ■ are then derived as follows: 

x+v+z 

X+Y-t-Z 

z 

^"X+Y+2 

Only two of these qiwtititics are iadependeal, sinw 
regard]*® of the values assigned to ar, y and r. Hence, to sp^fy the 
c^nutictly of a ^mple it is Becessary to give the values of only two of 
the three quunlttic^ {x msid y hav^ generally been sdccted for ihis 
purpose). Tims x and y are the chnoniaiiciiy co-ordinates of the light 
pigment, or dye la be spedfied. 

In the case of a glass, the transmiitajKe can be detemuned for a given 
il.uimimL by finding the ratio of the value of Y for this glass to the 
value of Y for a hypothetical gloss whose trunsmillaoee t$ l OOO for 
every wavckngUi. The valuM of X, V, Z for Illuminsnt C in Hardy's 


X=J,0i4| 

Z—J^71 ^™***** illumnmai dbtribtcUaa ofAiergy and Mt yv L 


Thus 


V for the iami;rie)x lOO 

Y trnnamillimM per coii, 
wa^tloTigtluij 

III ibc ease of IJluminum C the value of Y for 1-000 tmnsitiittance or 
rencctanec ai aE 'i^avdenglhs eqiuLli t,064. 

E^CLly tile sumc method is pursittid for determinailon of the visual 
efficiency of the re^ciitcd light from a pigmenif dye, eiCa 

Avsjf.—The symlHth i, y, i tkncuc distrlUiUaii weifkienu £br ijwtfam coSoim 

Tbe »>-inbtiU j, j. t denote cbrunvuictiy oo^fdiimter for ihc «n.ni. , 
(pectnim colour). ™ " 

The distribution coefficients ihat WTie adopted by the imentalional 
Commission on tlbrminaiion for the various specimm colours are fliven 
in ammpanyingTabIciW, The values oT£, g, i iodicnic the amount 
or the CJ^ pnrnafis required to mtch a unit quantity of the various 
wavdengthsH 


240 






rut Tlt60il£TtCAI. BASIS 


Table 4J — C,LE, DlsrBiBtrrtOK Coeiticients y. * tHBOUOH twe 
fiqUAL-ENERGV SPECTKUM. (C.l-E. TJftlSTtMULVS Vali/ES.) 
(Abridged) 


[XfiJltmicrtw}. 

.. 1 

.. 

e. 

4(» . 

0<»]43 

00004 

00679 

410 . 

0-0435 

00012 

02074 


(MJ44 

00040 

06456 

430 .. 

om9 

00116 

l-3t56 

440 .. .. n 

0'34&3 

00230 

1-7471 

4JO . 

0-3361 

O0J80 

1 7723 

460 . 

0-2908 

00600 

16692 

470 . , 

0-1954 

00910 

l-2fl76 

4«0 . . 

0^0956 

0-090 

08130 

490 ,, 

(>0330 

0-2D80 

0-465Z 

500 .. 

04XH9 

03130 

0-2720 

510 

00093 

0-5030 

01582 

520 " 

00633 

07100 

0^7S2 

530.. 

01655? 

08620 

00412 

540.. 

029M 

09540 

00203 

550 . . 

D4J34 

09950 

00087 

|.d| mi. ' 

0S945 

09950 

00039 

STO . . 

07621 

09520 

00021 

SflO .. 

09I6J 

08700 

00017 

590 ..* 

1-0263 

07570 

oooti 

600 ., 

i-om 

06310 

00008 

6J0 . 

10026 

05030 

0-0003 

6a),. 

08544 

oatio 

00002 

630 ,, ,, .. .. 

06424 

02650 

OODOO 

MO . 

04479 

01150 

0-0000 

630 *, ,, *, ,, 

02S35 

01070 1 

ooooo 

660 ,, 

01649 

00610 

OOOOQ 

670 .. 

00874 

00320 

OOOOO 

680 ,. 

OD468 

00170 

ooooo 

WO .* 

00227 

00082 

0-0000 

TOO-. .. 

00114 

00014 

ooooo 


o 


241 






















COtOUH CJNEHiATOCJKAFHY 


Table 44.— CimoMATiciTV Ox>i^nates of the SFBcxRmw 
(SEE Fig. I27) 



tVartfmfs^h 


Xm 



400 




0-1733 

OKKMS 

0 -S 319 

4 J 0 




04736 

o^om 

08226 

430 „ 

mm 

«->> 


0-1714 

000511 

03235 

430 .. 

m t 

.. 


016 ^ 

(HMM 9 

08242 

440 ** 


« i > 


I >1644 

04)109 

08247 

450 4- 



+ - 

0-J56& 

04 >t 77 

0-8257 

4 ti 0 +, 

A 1. 

«; 


OE 440 

(>0397 

08263 

470 



n *_ 

0 ‘II 4 I 1 

M 5 Ta 

08181 

4 fi 0 ^ , 

+ >1 

•■ If ■ 

4 1 

(K »13 

frl 327 

07760 

490 . 

- ^ 


4 ■. 1 

043454 

0^2950 

06596 

500 .. 


*• 

-■ -m 

0 0063 

0-5384 

045 J 4 

5 JO 


■ I 

-m * i 

00139 

07502 

02359 

530 i4 

m 1 

m* 

•i m] 

00743 

0^338 

0-0919 

530 . ri 4 

m-i 

MM. 


O’lM? 

omo 

0*0194 

540 ,, 


m ■ 

•1 m 

0^2296 

0'7543 

0016 t 

550 .1^ 


* * 


03016 

0*6923 

0006 L 

560 -- 


■ww 


0^3731 

0*6345 

000(24 

570 ■, 


*# 

m # 

Ch 444 l 

0*5547 

OOOIl 

S »0 ,i 


* M. 

M m. . 

0-5125 

04866 

0*0009 

590 

■■ I 

*# 


0*5752 

04241 

00006 

600 .A 

_ , 



0^6270 

0^3735 

00005 

6 t 0 




0665 « 

03340 

00002 

630 .» 


* 1 

!ri ■! 

06915 

0^3083 

00002 

630 -- 

■»•■< 

■■■ W 


0^7079 

(^2920 

(HlOOt 

640 .. 

fi 

*« 


0*7190 

02809 

OOOOi 

650 -- 


m * ■ 


o^im 

02740 

041000 

660 „ 




0^7300 

02700 

0*0000 

670 .. 




0^7130 

026 ^ 

0-0000 

6 S 0 .. 


1 ^ 


07334 

02666 

(HlOQO 

WO .. 




0^7344 

02656 

0^0000 

TOO 


' -’.n: 

■w #• 


0'7547 

02 AS 3 

ooooo 


« 7 ^ ^ '«iw>liii«iJi 530 lA, has trsUniultfl ~t— rf 

CM33 0-995 CPh ami (HKinj (f). Nijw 4f-^X+VNiij from ifuc addilion 

* 0W9 we get 1439; x Wilt Itotfoiit bt Bgimi to 0413/1^39 of fl-lft 
Ojfl valite fe Oic Qtmo tnil, vtUI tie ecjiuil ip ^995/1439 cir 


242 





















THE TltEORIfTlCAL 


EtECTANcvLAR UMmiui Ceuumuticity Scalb C<K>fUltNAm (E C. 
SltECKEKUIK^ AKD W. R. SCUAUB)—FOMIULA! AND TaDLES 



I A 




Fiq. laa-B U C-S, a««Mnaticljy<U^m tad Scbuuh). 


General cnmfifoniiation equatioai for transFomuiig tristlmulus 
cqeflideiits— 


(a) I.C1. Into R.U.C.S.: 

J!'— -h0OtlWM £+0‘0(W00J!-t-O»33OT i. 

- 2J2JKMiiT«4«05i W *, 
>- f 2-96827V-T 2-24730^-055176 1 


(<■) 


243 































COLOUR CJNEMATOGRARHy 



Fk. af Uiite diagrams with Cl E 

by Biwltoindge mmI Schmib. mickiiui hsou is ia wa5ldH«B^h^ 
TTw dugnim bavt been n^l«<l and cootuKied to 

ooloiin IBredkieiirid^ and SchsuhL ” ipcctnim 


{*) R,a.C.S.>ato J.C.i.: 


J* ^■^^1^07t r~ (H1M3* y-r 0-26455 i’ 
-0-138S7 Jf'40'12162 ^■'4009554 i-* 
e- 4 l-ySOC Jr'4000000 ^40 -Od£o e. 


m 


244 














































THF TKEORtTiC'AL 


Table 45. — TftisrtMtjLus DirrtitBvriOM Coefficients tost CowPimNe 
R.U.C.S- Cg-ordikates (X=^77tl M/i m .x'’=0, >■'=00 

(&HECIEENRilFGE AND SCKAUR^ 


f4^ / &4irfr^ 

HW 

rfnm^iu/t .ScMIftif' Of X355" K. ^ 

^^4 


r. 


i 

r£. 

4*6: 


ITfl 

V£. 

rfi 

uo 

601 

60 

3*0 

2 

3 


HB 

6 

7 

1 

IM 

l.UQ 

1*0 

300 

10 

11 

1 

390 

2J 

25 

2 

1>JT 

^272 

59? 

400 

*7 

4$ 

s 

400 

04 

lU 

10 


ift.ni 

Z.TII 

410 

1*5 

1*4 

IT 

4[D 

31* 

jtt 

33 

53.154 


3.164 

420 

613 

732 

63 

420 

1.260 

1,415 

la 

IligW 

131,050 

10,4^ 

430 

I.Tt] 

2,00t 

I 

4l0 

H” 

3j6l9 

291 

U3.224 


12,123 

440 

2fi9» 


22ft 

440 

4,641 

5.54* 

1 191 


ISf.W 

HU24 

450 

U2^ 

4.J00 


450 

X4» 

7^056 

' 391 

ilfM 

3W.iTl 

7*1^ 

440 

3.7*5 

5466 

2il 

4fi0 

5^5? 


1 5KI 

IPM04 

m.497 

7470 

470 

3p456 

6.179 

241 

4?0 

5.131 

0.173 

' 357 

«kW9 

ITV^II 

14.777 

4S0 

2,570 

M6I 

5*9 

4S0 

3j644 

9.72* 

BOj 

38jrr7 

EW.2»1 

Jn^w 

400 

1,719 

*.543 

1,371 

400 

X33D 



njin 

244.m 

39 jM 

5DD 

1.164 

Ei704 

SjOTO 

SOO 

Jr5l3 

164S3 

XiO^i: 


' 34X731 

IO7»«0 

310 

™ 

70.546 

6v40l 

510 

S71 

2JjHT 

X9ft7 

K44I 1 

1 443v6i$6 

1^.013 

520 

439 

10,051 

JliJT* 

520 

327 

3T.I3J 

14^46 

I 

1 52X900 

240.525 

i 330 

26* 

40.441 

19.602 

530 

3l0 

46,719 

1 21,490 

t,*7* 

' 55Cl'I4t 

2H.44^ 

540 

146 

47,927 

26P91 

540 

W5 

5X307 


m. 

; J4l,6ri 

553.0H1 

550 

70 

^33 

34,114 

550 

76 

5Va4 

1 

1 16%W6 

m 1 

soj.ftsy 

m.m 

560 

34 

54.679 

41,423 

540 

16 


45,14* 

1?D 

4A3,510 

440,045 

570 

30 

JX»i 

5X931 

570 

21 

5X929 

55,262 

126 ; 

347.73* 

467,410 

5*0 

17 

46,076 

61,014 

590 

16 

44.926 

6DC19] 

9i ; 

24».JJ4 

474.790 

500 

14 

>6iw 

69.0*4 

590 

13 

34,240 

65.251 

« 

i 330,422 

4ifiy>6 

W 

JO 

23.J23 

72,501 

400 

9 

33^ 

64^6 

31 

VQ.i^ 

4l0jt»7 

Old 

3 

MsUI 

TO,919 

6iD 

5 

^ I3,n2 

61J23 

16 

4«,7M 

139 J47 

620 

3 

9,719 

6X113 

620 

3 

7^71 

3S1W 

t 

ilJ7| 

1 250.24* 

610 


4.213 

5X3M 

630 

1 


4X611 

KXT26 

A 

l,S4t 

1 17X765 

640 

1 

IJ50 

JT,283 

640 

1 

X325 

0 



650 


6Ai 

25J^ 

650 


551 

1 20il6l 


»» 

4X661 

660 


229 

1®>« 

660 


1*9 

lXi67 


iaj 

53,13* 

67B 


74 

9,729 

670 


57 

6fc6f* 


71 

17,702 

6A0 


» 

4i94* 

6*0 


IS 

X706 


7 

1473 

690 


3 

LH* 

69(3 

1 

1 

1 1,959 


0 

4.291 

W 



1.140 

700 

1 


9thi 



X»ft 

710 



733 

710 



307 



ijm 

720 



179 

720 



jtti 




7.10 



l»7 

730 






261 

740 



99 

T40 






t25 

750 




750 







^GD 




760 



r? 



31 

770 



11 




1 

tTV.Itl 


JJWX77r 


13JW 

4»9J77 

6*4,191 

Touai 

15,622 

mo7« 

647,04* 


y* 

1 1\ 


.jr. 


I*. 


r. 

y'. 

£*. 

«-OT40Wl 


04aW6 

IkMMPfX 

!!H|19303 

o4«e72i' 

0STI969 

SadlCt 


0-419450: 

0^511340 


MtX’-* 

*'-X' 

T an 


IrOTi or ZI^Ra, r-JJTT* «r XfWlj- " WfiRi. 

x*Ai«ooeo r+e-isui i'\ iir. 


r-x'+v+z-. 


' Tcttptntuns concipwiJ lo Mt foOcrw^: 


•JT- 







































COLOUR ClNIUATOORAPn'V 


Table 46.—Tbilinear CtMjRDiNATEs of 
Spectruih Looju. 
(BRECEFKRiOCE ANO ScKAUB) 



L»770 jUiK oi 

If4i> 

1 A^TTDfUuar 

00790, 

jr. 


X-. 



! 

mT. 

‘im 

O^SOGO 

■5CK» 

(W(» 

■o«i 

ocis 

m 

m 

400 

- -ITB 

- -3T5T 

OdOGO 

■OW5 

■0015 

117M 

l-jMa 

1 JT42 

44«1 

43^1 

•«Z£3 

-5058 

-J2J» 

■0413 

■(HOi 

037D 

■OKW 

410 

4» 

410 

440 

4» 

- JTSJJ 
^ 5754 

- ■17!J 

- -Mti 

- ■M75 

00» 

029 

■0120 

oua 

■ono 

1 rw 
f-Wfi 
t'lSfii 

1 

MOO$^; 

■3957 

-5»0 

■1477 

■0$ST 

-sm 

-toe 

-7500 

-0324 

41544 

•MOd 

•1190 

•1315 

460 

47a 

460 

490 

500 

- 

- ■ JFJO 

- -It20 

'SSI 

ow 

-1256 

•I3«a 

■ai43 

-2W0 

1'»4« 

I-I4M 

'9958 

■t3«4 

7417 

■oeti 

‘aim 

■OHS 

-ooao 

■OODt 

-74n 

-TIM 

£MZ 

'fi0» 

-IM* 

-1156 

■3310 

510 

no 

550 

MO 

w 

■0460 

■Wd 

4170$ 

■0150 

•1411 

-2IM 

-lilt 

-X463 

■10» 

•T47T 

TtOft 

-BlaiMl 

-00(33 

-oora 

-Wf 

-OQIOI 

-5572 

■344J 

■2S«t 

44tt 

-5731 

■T4U 

MO 

570 

530 

5» 

6M 

lilll 

■vm 

'-0011 

-4>7U 

-■1559 

'-2411 

•■««2 

0271 

9m 

I-OAIO 

MI65 

Wl 

^1111 

■1211 

■07W 

•0471 

>0247 

■0144 

-ootu 

-ODW 

■0009 

■IIM 

■37W 

-W37 

■9IM 

^14 

4940 

-W1 

t^OOD 

«jd 

420 

oo 

640 

450 

uo 

670 

AdO 

HO 

TOO 

■«4» 

■01 so 
■OTiO 

■OT5D 

i™ 

■0750 

■OT5D 

-oxw 

-*17» 

-*■4211 

-^10 

- 4»W 
-4«dl 
-■MOO 

IWP 

1 3040 
l-MOT 
l-nTT 
1-WJ 

l-4tH 

MIH 

1-42113 

1*4^1 

14230 



143000 I 

lOOOD 

14KK» 

l-oa» 

■•ow 

no 

7» 

7» 

T40 

750 

41750 

■0750 

-OTIO 

0750 

0750 

- -WOP 

- 50«O 
-■MOO 

—sm 

-■34100 

I^MO 

J 4230 
1^4aM 

|42» 

I4i» 



1 ODDO 

i-om 

76U 

no 

0750 

0750 

-■50W 

-1-3000 

14250 


Tmnsfoirreidofi equaiians for ironaformiDg iriUneai coHirdinatc*^ 
(c) LCJ. into R.U.C^.: 

^0-823M D-f33a3 

i'OOOOOx- 7 <t 5136 jf- L 64023 ' 

locum X-7-05336 ^ (4402}' 


246 




























THE THEORETICAL RASfS 


Table 47,—^TiiiitTV Selected Ordinates for COMPUTiNfl 
R.tJ,C,5.. Co-ORDLNATES—Pl-ANCKIAN SOURCE AT 

2,842* K. {C,=t’432 cm,^ 

( BrECKENKHXJE AN 1 > SCllACB) 


(MAiMif N0. 




1 

415-42^ 

440^13$ 

S07IS6 

•a 

4UI74 

443-4^ 

514'f54 

j 

42I4J9 

«tl-7tl 

5>4r5l< 

4 

4fl^3l 

4W’2T5 

M2472 

*5 

434^ 

3«t^i2 

H*-4ll 

6 

4JT'TH 

413'^ 

554^J 

t 

4¥^iS7 

3ltf-5fi4 

5S9W 


442-TIJ 

521 It* 

543.W5 


445410 

527-217 

M7'I5) 

10 

4«T-W 

511-01* 

571-410(2 

^11 

44M9I 

sum 

573^ 

12 

451^35 

M'Oti 

575-213 

13 

WTW 

541 531 

5S3n3 

•14 

4557n 

5«'S55 


15 

4y?-4i3 

S47-7I9 

5WII* 

le 

459*44 

590-144 

JW-TIT? 

•r? 

441-171 

5531HI 

5^4m 

II 

46i^n 

557^351 

5W-2» 

IV 

46^-au 

»0‘I74 

60-517 

*2fl 

4tti50 



21 

47tK5lJ 

H4-5T1 

409 Iti 

22 

47J 102 

?«^Jl 

412-440 


473444 

maw 

614-254 

14 

4TB-50I1 

m-wa 

420-164 

25 

4*3-2®^ 

»l-032 

624575 

*ie 

4*«-54l 

345 404 

42lk-flfr 

77 

41kt^ 

5W4I5 


2i 

' 49B>271 

3W4W 

44h3n 

•» 

307^391 

M449J 

43fr322 

M 


6I9-5W 

6«S^1 

¥vfUr». 



ft'. 

anthfiin 

04nil»l7 

Ih0l77«»4 

4^1 $4^5 

*10 

Q-oeisw 

00511051 

4HI447W0 


Tar^K^-Li'jrjT^^t awn t h twji J0~, 


id) R.U.C,S.intDl.C.J,: 

+CH»6a2Sx--0-340TJ/.+M3C!6* 

+T-'oeiS 66 r- 0-31 j«l 9 r 

_ -O-iaSS jr'+CW12SW_^+IM»124 

^~ 4 TdiCl 6 o;^- 6 -Jl 3 «*>^ 

(e) Luminosiiy coelBoieots for R,U.C.S. sysiem: 
t«^l3S57, L,-*--0-12182. 

l/) Luminosity codBcicflts adjusted to make Ly a^ual unity; 
L<*-H 27 St. Lr=lW»(». Lt— O'WJI. 

Tribnear co-OTdinaia of importaal iUumiimatfi; 


247 








COLOUR 




Stackb^inif’ : 


J.fiCtPK. 

(H374I 

1.500 K- 

(KlTai 

1.900* Kr 

(J«44 

2.3fO' S. 

CHIS57 

2.848* K, 

IHH57 

3.K»‘K. 

l>032fi 

4.81XPK. 


6,500* k. 


10,000* K. 

^(WJ296 

24,000* K. 

-CKKl® 

9t 

-CHJ668 

Eqtu] EneriO 

(HIOOO 

I.Ct. lilunuRant A 

0-0457 

1-C-L thiuniDiiQi B 

(KI096 

I.C.I, JJIwniiiDDt C 

-thonj 




><- 
— 0-2^1J 
-0-1859 
-0^1315 
-0-0912 
-0061* 
-00351 
— OilOSl 
001J5 
00291 
004t* 
00475 

OOOCW 

-00616 

-00051 

0^114 


CJ.E $j'5Ccm of mcosuting colour may be explained to the iion^ 
tcctmicai leader perhaps rnore clearly by inference to a dtagram by 



Ll 

\ 

r 

- 

^ tt 

1 ^ 

1 

4 

t 


\ * ^ 
0 0 0 


1^ 


O. L. MacAdam iUustradnj bis rt-dl-known paper ■* Funduiuentals of 
<^lor Mrasuremcnl (Fifl, 1 SIX The curve in ihe upper ten comer of 
Ihe diagram rqnresents the spectral reflectance of n green obiect for 
every wavelength of the visible spectrum from violet on the left on 

i2'4& 















1HG THl'dtETttlAl. 




4A7 W 6PB 

Wa^t-Stngth f WWV/mif/ws J 

Fm. 1J2.~Selo.-tiHl OnlknaK mcltwrt of wmiHitiw trltiiniulu* ■ 
fcenttB) V, (lo«f> Z. iO. L MacAilatn.^ 


lujrpirr} Xj 


249 

































































































COLOUR CtNEMATOORAPHY 


tbcrighi. This is known as n spectrophotomctrii; curve. The curve in the 
upper rifiht corner represcms tfle distribution <if energy of lllurainant C. 
The energy reflectance of the sample in this illummant at a. given wave¬ 
length is the product of the values at that wavelength indicated by the 
upper curves. The product of these is shown in the curve below. 
TTm three colour-mixture functions adopted by the International Com- 
tuissitm on liltiminaiion are represented by the curves ic, z. Light of 
cacli wavelength reflected from the sample conbribuies to each primary 
of the colour specification an intensity proportional to the procluct of 
the energy and the corresponding function. The three curves resulting 
from these mulLiphcstions throughout the visible spectrum are shown in 
the bottom three curves. The areas under these cun'cs are the totals of 
the contributions of every- wavelength throughout lire visible spectrum 
of the intensities X, V, H of the standard primaries necessary to match 
the sample. 

Another and more rapid method of computing the tristlmulus values 
has deviaed. This is known as the setectied-ardiTiatc method and 
consists in aveniging the values that the reflectance curve of each sample 
attains ai certain wavelengths, wliieh have been published. The thir ty 
vcrticui lines in Fig. 132 are drawn at the wavelengths at which the 
reflectances should be read from the curve of the sample, and avmgcd 
in order to compute the triaiimutiu value X. The values of the reflet- 
ittucc at tire wavelengths indkared by the vertical lines in Fig. 132 {it) 
should be averaged in order to compute the tristimulus value V. 
Finally, the values rctid from ilic curve of the sample of the wavelengths 
shown in Fig. 132 (cj should be averaged to compute the trislimidus 
value Z. Ttanspnreni templates, on whicb lines are ruled corresponding 
to tbs xxnkul lines in f igs. 132, (a). (W. and (f), can be prepared, to be 
piatxd lemporarily omr the speciropholometric curve dmwn to a 
standard wavelength scale, us aids lo calculation, 'fhe three sets of 
wavelengths have been derived from the colour-mixture functions 
adopted by the Intereational Commission anil shown in Kig. 55. and 
from the energy distribution of the light-source. 


Rerereflcn 

in Reptm Dn tiotmir TetmiiiahiKr. The Ftiyskat Sooeiy. London a«Sl Hv =l 
C cHnJt oX Th£ CulDitr Cl RH I). 

{If iNd. 

<31 E •• Sioidutnism of Kcrvijai Atilojj," Oxford UniYcidty rw* 

<ai WiKiiiT. W. P., iVnliirr, I5l (IMJh p. 736. 

(Jl Wsrout, W D. and l*irr. J’. U. G., Pfdc. Phys. «. i J934), p, 4S9 

(61 C A,.** The FiiriiLanwiis] Scukef Pure Hue und Rtiinol Settnbiluv to 

IFlit Dllfcrcmscs/" p *5 

<7| J., fiiyt J 1 p. SL. 

Lijwrt, E- M . /uurn. Opi. SkK- Amtr , 5l iJl 

250 



THF THEORETICAL WASlS 


Uli 


Guiwin, k. s, iit«l Ttsimu., I: F ." tiK Vliibiihy o( HidliuwJtt;' ii^r^u <■/ 
.Ve^475 0V^3>. ^ 

riov loNts, L A- aiMl F-, M-/* Rctirtal Stussbtliiy toSiitonitiPii IT^ITcrcnw, 

Jvttm. Opt. Sot'. Arner^ atni RJi J , 1>, Kfl. L |>. 25- 
Maktiw, WAftuuitTOfi dud ^foft(lA^ Report No. 13, Cornmiue* on loe 

Phywology of Vinon Couftcil* H.M.S.O., IW 

Wnumi, W. D.p Thfi Srniitivdy of the Eye to Sma[l Colour DafforencR. 

Pj^eJCr PAi-j, StJf.51 (l^2:)i Pr 93. 

S<e aKo. MalCAdaM^ O L, CIpf. SixL Arntr.^ 32 P- 247, NeciceR- 
SWJ^ Dorothv, Summary of AvAilabk Information on Small 
DifTcivnocap lnUr-$ockly Color CoiiiH:n (MJiroli I944lh, An^r. Dytit^ 

lUpfyftcr, 33 1944}. Nic^KEJIsgj^* Tht SpccifkainJH of Color 

T^kmxtr terriftf ti 0^}, pp. 505-14. Baukkin. C H.. 
mtaal and I>«ivnaiion of Smidl Color Diflerenoct," BuIL si/ fflr Anwr^rrH 
Soc.. 10 (1941). pp, 392-401. JUPP. D. B.,' • SriO(;ifKtnKm of Llnifom 
Tokfarwj for T«tii3o." fter - 9. Not 7 aivtJ » i i939J. pp. 25>30S- 

(I3j WRHHrt, \V D.. " A Rc-Df:ti?miinBtii>n of Oic TiichromnlK MiAlufe 

Speciiil Report Serie&p No. 1 39, Mediial Rcwe^rcli CouocU. ^ndon u^M). 
tl4j Repon ^ the CokiriiiTcljy Committee of ihc Opiiral Socitiy of Amcncn, 
Chap. VI, JotfT. Opt. JJor. 14. No. 5 (May E944j, pp, 261-6. 

See Juop, D B,. " tHe 1931 C-l.E. Spimltird Observer anJ O>’ 0 mi^c 
Svftteni for Colorimetry,” J^ur. Opt- SFr. .4wr,+ 25 (Oct I933>h p. 

IvK, H. E./* The TramfcmnaTttjfi of CoJour Mottupr E 4 ijationi jrn& 
Syitou lo Anolijuer/^ Jtfiifn. Frankiin inSLt 495, No. I Cl925>, p. hJ. 

Ap\m; D, U. The Fundanwnlalj of Color MeMitemcnt,” Jt^tirn. Soc. 
Vof Fif . Etijs.u li t<kl. 1938), p. 341 

Sirmi, T. ond GatrLOr 1., C?pr. 11. T3 (19311 i- 

Wfiifcin:, W. D,. Colcmr Vkiun amJ the Film Indaistry," Jaarn. Hffi. ajh. km:., 
tl (July I9WL pp. 1-11. 


SwftiTiiify 

By this time the Deader miiy ha^’C some idta of the compkK process of 
transformtiari which musl be caTrietl from sutge to ^tugc with tbo 
minimum of toss (see page 45). 11 is very wonderful iliat the repro-* 

dticlion focused upcm the rctiPii bears as close & tesembkuoe ns it 
does to thut image wJiieli it would Inive received from the originali 
especially when w'c consider that distortion can so easily occur at any 
Huge in the process (Figs. 10 and 113). There must be a compcTenl 
spcciulisi in control ai each stage in the recording and reproduction 
sequence. Coniidcf Lhe following recapiiakiioa*; 

1. Tlie right subject matter must be chosen for photography. In ihc 
studio there must be controlled selection of pigmems» miikc-up^ 
textures, found by experiment to ttprodtiM consistently 
2. Suitable illummution must be used; lt5 spoctml energy distnbuuon 
well understood rehiiivc lo the scnsiiivhy of the film and the 
transmission of the fillers, Ii3 distribution must be such us to 
avoid undue contrails of lumiuLince. ils imensity sulScierti to 
e\|K>se fully the negatives. 

‘ Ift ihi* panKftpUii numbe^ 2 to 6 

by liiiegTuI Ifti'er materiiits a» KoU^dlmifnei. Atiscu Color, Ajjatok r. c 


COLOUR ClNEMATOOfLAPHV 

.1. The highcst-speed, (inest'graiu, panchroimuic cniidsioR ttilsi b# 
cno5£n to rccDrd the coiour analysis; as even in its response to 
ihc visible specinjin os it can be made. Thk is iivaikbk now, 

4. Coi^ctly balanced anedysb liitcrs inust be used such as to record 

identical densities for atl steps of the grey scale. 

5. A beatn^spliiting system must be used for the camera, capable of 

providing livtj geometriciilJy idemicol imaj^s. parallax free 
and of identical magnified!ion. The finest colour-corrected 
objective is cssemial; the images to be preferably of nomal 
dimensioni. 

6. The negauve or ncgalives must be dtvebped in a Hne grain developer 
to n gamma of, say, 0-65, Jf ilu; negatives are on separate filnii, 
tlwn they should be deveioped to diJTcrent limes to compensate 

identkar ihcir gamma shaeld be 

7. A ^ublmeiive printing pro«ss must be chosen vt-hich is capable of 
registering every gradation in the negative for each subtractive 
primary. The subtractive coloims must be as neariy Iheoreticoliy 
^rraci as it Is possible to obtain—magenta, yellow, and cyan. 

ic CO ours must be reasonably fast to light and as iranspareni 
Bs possible. The balance of the three printings must be such 
^ to yield a pcrfecliy neutral grey scale. The priming must 
K consistent. The sound reproditcliDit should be equal to 
noiraol black and white. Tliese conditions should be iitherem 
Characteristics of the material and are largely met by the manu- 
racturer ra (he case of integral layer Aims suirh as Kodachrome, 
c (.olor, Agfacolor. or Ekiachiome. 

». So far w e have Eiyimt he sized a subtractive process. There is, 
iiovtever. one pracitcal additive process, Duruycolor. Conditions 

V except in w far as the objective is con¬ 

cerned Balance of Iricliromatic printing must be obtained by 
Hircful grading. ^ 


ptojecied with as neutral a while tight os we can 
ontara with exisiuua carbons. thi> ,1... ..r 



oswe t^n get, having no elective absorption and possessing the 
ntaximiiin rriloctiun power, * 

* ** ^cotour°^ observer will, ue hope, be normal in its response to 

*ha‘ they are ihe owners of the 


wwld righta of a perfect three-colour 
252 


pfiscevv tf sufilcmntly impressed 


TMt THEOftETtrAt BASTJi 


by a demunstraLioEi ml and desirous of pvlng the process a practical 
iest„ tlw followiag Lrizils of the sySLom are sitg;^cstcd: 

L A perfectly neutral set must be rcproducedn Blaclt::> grey* and 
white costume, tn fact, black, whilc^ and grey everywhere 
c;w:epl the flesh of the actor. If the set is photog^phed mmus 
actors, when it is projected it should be practically indisltngulsb- 
able from a black-and-white (dm. This condition is very dLflicuU 
indeed to fuJflL 

I No fdttging whatever must be vi^siblc, even on closest inspectiofi. 
Such fringing as occurs is due to faulty registmiipii in priotmg, 
unequal size of images^ pamlluK, cic. 

3. Adequate e:cposure must be obtained wiih kss Uian three times the 

HJumination brightness norimlly usr^. 

4. A /e#^^^?^|-yel1ovv band should he pointed on a white background 

and photographed. The lemon yellow should be aecurateSy 
reproduced. Against a neutral grey background photograph a 
band of vivid ememld green; ditto with violet, ultrnmiirine blue, 
magenta, cerise pinkn oUve green, turquoise blue. Note the 
reproduction of these, 

5. Finally, photograph a close-up of a face with no and 

inspect the reproducuon of Jhat puiticabr completion. 

t. Photograph a draped cundin of $onic desatumlcd colour such us 
pale blue* Take 100 ft* of film and eiamlfic the prini for 
variation. fluBhing, nnd steadiness gencmily* 

7. For SL rough resolving power test, photogniph a newspaper so as 
Just to fill the frame, and see how much you can read on the 
screen and also how much can be read ihrough a magnifyuig” 
glass when iJie film is iiispccred in the hand. 

Sp Photograph a dorj^n of the studio staff standing 30 ft- aw^ay from 
the camera using a qCKmm. lens^ and ?^ee whethcf you con 
recognize Usem mdlvldually on the screen- 


rwn^Colnar Cinemstagraphy 

If repfodudion of nalure Ss attempted with two colours oiilyi our 
choice is deiermLncd by practicut considcTations, and cenain com¬ 
promises must he rnadc. 

That a representation of nature in two colours only is u^eptable to 
the eye is due fo the fact that pairs of hues—namely^ Iwu visual stimuli 
differing in spectral distribatipti—may be chosen which, when added, 
produce the sensation white (sec table of complcmeniaries^h which* 

* Catiip]cmchiii.ry (wir» of cohnif^ aic Oefioed tis dime whidi wUcti ffimbjiJod 
prajiicc VL Tnihiuie<Diou[ niutcbiiii spa^o a^rced-upufl nearmi ctr adiromiUK cower, 
f^tin of 4ilkrem of Ituhi whicli jaixliice w tdaiomiiud itiniultEt when 

353 


COLOUR aVEMATOCKAPHY 

when constitullng ilje traiutniuaiices of ttansparent subsianccs and 
subtracted from each other, completely absorb each other’s tranamiited 
liehi. No pair wiU be of much use unless we can obtain biaefc and grey 
(therefore a complcmentaTy j^ir), and of ^ssibk pairs tcd-OKia^e and 
green-blue Is the only one suitable, since ii is evident that it would not 
be possible to nepresent an appposimaiioa to the general appeanince 
of nature with any other pair—as, for example, yeUow-qiange and blue- 
green. or yellow-grccn and Wuc-violct, thou^ such pairs are quite 
capiibJc of giving perfect grays and blacks. And the same applies to a 
pair such as magenta and green, it is essentia] to tepresent, with some 
semblance to truth, the sky, and flesh, and foliage- This m«i n!t that we 
murr choose ted-oiange and green-blue. The nKords must be the com- 
plemenlancs of these repTodnetion hues; therefore I he negatives must 
be recorded through hUem which respectively absorb these two regions, 
or which in any case absorb ladiartl energies whkh are capable of 
stimulatitig these two colour setisations. 

But it is impracticable to use recording fillers which are truly comple- 
mentury, for the following. reHsons. 

Consider the reproduction of pure blue-violet and also of viulct. The 
trailsmtssion of a filter which is complementary to red-orange would 
ntscessarily transmit the remninder of the spectrum — namely, everything 
from yellow to violet itltis is a grecn-bluc such as Wratten No. 43). Now. 
it ncgitive exposed behind such a liltcr would record density for all 
Wavelengths, say, froin 5SII M/t to 400 M;/. Traospureiicics on this 
negative represeni values to be printed in the colour of the light «or 
recorded by llie negative—vii., r^-crangc, or minus green-blue. There¬ 
fore no rtd-oran^ is printed for the nsjpon 580 M/i'to 400 M/u Simi* 
larly, ilie red-omnge filter records density for all wavelength# from 700 
to 580 M;t. Tnmspurercies on this negative represent values to 
bo printtjd in the colour of the light it did nos record—viz., grceti-blue 
(minus red-onmge), Therefore no green-blue is printed for tJtc region 
700 Mn lo 580 M/t: but full green-blue « printed from 580 M/r to 41)0 M u, 
and we have observed above that imj red-orange is printed here. Henoc 
deep blues and vtolcu of 4S0 M/i it* 400 M^u are represented in die sytt- 
ihesb u pure ^cn-blue, which is a very unsatisfucioTy elTccl. Fur this 
reason a filter is chosen which does not record between 450 Mh and 
^ Mu. Tlierefure this region is printed in rcd-orargc. It is also primed 
in green-blue (see above), so that the region 460 Mu to 40iJ Mm is syn- 
Lhesi/ed by green-blue and red-orange superposed—or htaik; a better 
cfleci thau green-blue, ,as the psychological cflm is not unlike tliat of a 
deep blue. 


In »dtable praportlom *i« to have ci^mitffmrntury chmm<wrlties. 
ttaniTite# gf tight which have ctiinpieiTicntary duorrmtkitJes ajid ulso the riocvt 
auKiuais or lujidiKiiiA Ru# lu rrtHJuM en achnaniitk mtuare are «iid lo have com- 
pternciiutry' coToitta. (See Table ( 9 . page 6Ji8.> 

254 




the theoretical EASIS 


Constder tlu! nfproducUon of ihe speclrun]: 


RettMnmgn Rnorti. 


Red 
Oran^ 
Vellow 
CilWI 
B!liC-<jpccn 
Blue 

B3uc-Violel 

Viokt 


J Dcnlil^ 
Rc^rded 

PrinUid In 
GrocD-Blue 


Rtewti, 


Red 
Orange 
ydlow 
G^mit 
Blue-Orecn 
EIub 

Bluc-Vinki 

Viokt 


I Priiited 

J Rcd-Orsin^ 

Demity 

Rtcomed 


The superposed subtractive syotbciiJs wonid theu be: 

I, 


Rod 
Omn^ 
Ydiow 
Ctecn 

Blue 

fiLue-Vkikt 

VioJei 


Red Omn^ 


BlucOiecn 


A ^atisihclory comfMXutiisc is to use a grccn-bluc filler which docs not 
tmiLsinit bJuc-vtoLet or violet, thus: 


Gnera ( 

Printed M 

Bhltvtoki 

v»kt 


(i Rec^d* 

I IViiUCTl in 
fRedOnnum 

&rwn|^^ 
BJuq )HaMnkd 

ftliie^Vioki \ Printed in 
Viqkf i Red-Urun^ 


The (epiwluclion of the spcciniin would thon be: 


Red 

Orange 

Ydlow 

Green 

Blut-OiQcn 

0}ue 

BWVtokl 

Viokt 


Red'Orangt 

GrooH&liiB 

RcdO'j'iLBfie r»lniM ttiiic-Gfccfi: nr Rkttk 


The reproduction of the ijpecmim iSe of course* only of thconetknt 
interest, Wc know thnl omup and yellow objects reflect grecjt light in 
abumiiiioe. Therefore the«e objects will record through both filters, 
'llte recoidihg of the priodpul hues as oidimuiJy occumog in nature is 
thercTore; 


255 








COLOUIt CtMEMATOdRAPHY 


keJ 

ii 

Offlfifft 

Vdlow 

Green 

Bluc-Greui 

Blue 

“'1 

Bftie-Vioki 

1 

a 

Vk>lei 


Hence the yellow region will be rcprudm^cd with etjutd tjunnltUes of 
mjnus red-orange and jnJiius green-blue—or grey. This is not ^rry 
satisfactoiy, since yellow is imponniu in fle$b tones. We cannot possibly 
obtain a yellow by any tnixtare of red-oiange and green-btue, but we can 
represent yellow by a pale red-orange (e.g., a pale salmon pink). This is 
accompLshed by arrenging for the two filters to have the same trains- 
tnission at a point .somewhat further tn the green region inthcr than at 
the yellow' part of the spectrum. It is found that a green of about 575 
Md is best chosen as the part of Uie spectrum to be reproduced as grey. 
This is the case if we make use of filten such as Wmllen Nos. 28 aiul40.*i 
tccommetided for two-colour recording with htgb-intensity tungsten 
lamps 8$ the light-source (Table 48). 

The total range of colours obtainable from u pair of complementartes 
is found in a cross-section of the ” colour solid ** (a construction 
coitsisiing of two pyraniida base to base, having two sides curved and 
bulging somewhat irregubrly). Such a section will consist roughly of 
two triangles base to base (Fig. I39]i. 


TabuI; 48 




WrftnfnfUiitr‘ 

l| 1 


Filter 



A'a,40A ( 

1 

1 A'ff . 2S 

40A 

in Afii- 



In Afii. 


iGreen-^iifj. 

400 



560 1 

1 O-M 

I 

36t 

ID 



70 

2^ 

225» 

20 



80 

109 

lla 

30 



W 

Jt'S 

500 

40 



600 

S4-8 

1^5 

50 



10 

70-5 

0-71 

fiO 


5-24 

20 

3tHl 

0-20 

70 


17^ 

30 

SJS 

0 10 

80 


54^ 

40 



90 



50 

86-7 


500 


72i 

60 

*7-5 


10 


730 

70 

87-8 


20 


Tin 

sa 

880 

1^7 

30 


560 

90 

880 

7^5 

40 

010 1 

500 

700 

880 

157 

50 

017 

306 

1 


25ti 



















I»E THEOHilTJG-M. liASiS 


Thfl Wiattoa Filters 4 a\ have the dirainttiicu^ csp^f^mstesi in 

Jthimmitiit C. Ddffliiwii i^d ^^biiion purfty ons altio iivoxi: 





1 


No. 2* .. 

0-66J5 

0-3361 1 


1000 

Nd.40 . 

turn 

U-$366 

S]4-1 

44-6 


This is anath^^r wtty of sUitmg ih^i wt can obtain every degree of 
dcsaiUTsuion of each of these hues and every degiec of lighmess. The 
range may be diagmmmmicdly represeated, but the diagnijn Itas no 
real siguifictuioe in so far as the rektive posiUon of the colours shown 
below is concerned. 

Table 49 indicates how the principal colours arc repfoduoed iu a two- 
colour process^ 

Table 49 

Caibttr qf Or^gint^. Ccflwr Jbeprvdmvl. 


WSiilfs 

4* 


.. White 

Gri^ 



.. Grey 

Black 

i-m 


BhU^ 

awl 



. Etcd-Ofjui^ 



-■♦ 

. Light Acd^Tnui^ 

Ydlow 


■■ li 

Very l^te Onitigc iPinkiihi 

YdlowOnocn 

+ - 

- m 

#. Grej- 

Greca 



. . City GiBcn^Bluc 

Blue-CirecQ 

* - 

- ■« 

Gnocn-B^ut 

Blue 



Deep Gnxn^Bliic 

Bluc-Vio^ct 

* * 

A % 

BlDckkb Gnxa-Bljjc 

Violci 



Bhbck 

PujpTe 



, * Rcttelih G ray 

ftw 



Grey 

Flc^ O>l0tEr 


ii ■* 

» , Fair]y cofrotl (loni» of i^hnon FfnItJ 

Fotiiige 


■“ 1i 

.. Qrcy BEte^li <jMn 

Sty^Bluo 



,» BliteOvetQ 






























COLOUR. CCNtMATOOftAPHV 


The table shows why, io two-colour processes such as the earlier 
TochdiHiNilor^ aisd m some cxtetit in the new Tcchnichrome^"’ there 
Wfls such insistence upon a curious salmon, or conilt pitikisb oran^, 
and in ccntrftst to It tones of grectiish blue. 

In order to recover the missing yellow, ^mc workers have dyed the 
whole film yellow or used a yellownlj^d base for the positive film* but 
Lhi$ trick invulvos the sacdMce of most of ihc blues, sifice yellow t$- Uic 
stibtracior for blue [minus blue h yellowy 

Jn Hamburger's"' Polychroniidc "" process the two colours wer^caeh 
mi^cd from a pair. For jjislance, the red-orange a mis lure of 
magenia and aur^mine [yellow). Hamburger held tltat ihe auramlne 
had some mysterious sympathy for the parts of the image correspond¬ 
ing to yellow in the uriginal. This was absurd, but there was an un^ 
questionable tendency for tbe hglitcr tones to be reproduced as pale 
gold, or at limes even as yellow -and this effect was due to the fact that 
in ihc clearing'balh, which followed the chromium bleach mordant »the 
magenta was removed more quickly limn the auramine, wiLh ihe result 
ihiii ihe lighter denshics of silver dy^ with this mUture w'cre very nearl> 
fnee of tlw niugcnta component. Exactly the mme principles upplicdl to 
the grcen-blije^ which he mixed uith Tuahtchitc green and a deep purpl^^ 
blue dye_^ This spedcs of dichroic efiect can be made good use of in 
two-colour processes to camouflage their shoncomings. Hurnburger 
clamied to reproduce foliage as green, and the sky os a purplish blue: 
and some prints which the writer lias seen nearly substantiate his claims. 


Twtt-Coknrr .Analyiiis and Suhtractive Synthesb 

The methods of recording are discussed elsewhere. Perhaps the 
simplest method Is to use a bipack, and thL** has been ttsed far more 
frequently than beam-splitting On the other hand, the beam-splitter is 
the only means by w^hich quite potfect negatives can be made. If ihc 
synthesis is to be by some suhtreciivc system of printing, fuJJ-smed 
tmages should be retordetL iJuitable cameras have bees made by 
Technicolor, Oufay-Chromex [Cootc)i Hamburger, Brew stcr, etc. The 
Cinccolor (Brillsti) and Raycol type of bcim-spliiiifiE prism system, m 
which pairs uf small negatives occupy the ure^ of a normal frame, could 
probably be ik.^igned to take two full-sirred pktarc^i but such sy&tenu 
have the disedvanuigc of requiring two or more lenses. Focusing 
ddiculc and change of focal length of ibts lenses is extremely didicidt. 
Each focal length generally invol^^ a separate prism divider. Printing 
from a single film carrying full-sired pairs of records necessitates an 
optical printer by w hich ^im oth^'r negniii^^ Image can be successively 
primed on one side of a doubk-couted him. Thus ihc neeatlve printing 
gjte of the optical printer moves tbe film two frames to one of the 

‘ HcEkj Safranlcic. 




THB THEOStETtCAL BASIS 


positive g^le, SO Ihjii only iiUeniAtn frames are prtBied, the other fnimcs 
being skipped* Kdley dcsipied a skipping contitet slcp-by-step printing 
machine which eLimmated the necessity for the slow-working upliciU 
printer, while at the same time definition was improved. 

On the other hand, bipack negaiives can be pfrinlcd contact on to 
cither side of doublC'Wated filnL The only requireniem is that the 
printer shaiild have pilot pins which ought to bo reversible, so that 
when the positive Qlm is turned over for printing the other side the full- 
pQot pin always engages the same perfbtations. 

Debrie made a very good contact siep-by-stcp printing machiiw 
based upon a patent of Hamburger, in which, the double^oj^led posi¬ 
tive bhn is sandwiched between the tw'o negatives. Both sides of ilw 
film can be printed simnUaneously, Uwte being two light^ouroes which 
are independemly conirolled by the usual Oebric light+changc insch- 
anisnL Multicolor imiuted this type of printing machine- 

Duplex printers w ith pairs of gates ride fay side arc used to¬ 
day for printing Trucolor at the laboratories of Consolidated Film 
Industrici. 


Additive Twd-CoIoiit Sj'itihesis 

From a colorimetric point of viiew^ the colour resulting from the com^ 
bination of two kinds of light—for instance, the colour of the light 
rejected by ji surface illuminated simultaneously by two sonnies— 
tristimulus values which are the ^ums of the comsponding tiistimiilus 
values of the two colours which are produced by the separate action of 
each of the constitucfit lights, if the tristimutus values of the colour 
produced by one of the compoiLCDt lights arc fepresemed by Yp Zji 
:ind if the Lrisiunnlus values of the colour produced by the other com- 
ponem arc Yj, then the colour produced by the combined action 
of ihc two lights is specified by the tristitnulus values: 


(i) 


Y=Y|^Y,. 


(2) 

t3) 


The corresponding cbromaiiciiics are represented by the coordinates 
(X„ Y,), and (X* V). h can be shown ibiit the pdnt re- 
presenLiDg the mixture is Che centroid of the tW‘0 points (Fig. 133) 
representing the cornponents, these points being weighted with the sums 
of the corresponding trtstimulu^ valuer: 

where 


HI, ^ X j * Zj 


und 


X|+ Y|:4- Z^* 


a 


2S9 


COLOUB ClfiEMATOa«AI*HV 


Similarly, tt]<i paint representing tiie chromiiticity produced tiy the 
miKtuie of any number of component li^ts can bo shown to be the 
centroid of tlie points represaiulng the constituents, eucb of these points 
being weighted by the sum of the tristimultja valtiics of the corresponding 
constituent. Therefore the point representing, tbe mixture must lie on 
the straight line between the points repneseating the constituents, and 
the chromaiiciiy of any sample of light is the centroid of the points 
represeDtiog all the spectral coinponents. All spectral components 



Fail tlJ.—ChTomailt-tiiB trf aruln pain «rWratten (ifien C* twu-edew idiliUw 

luutysa. 


are represented on the curved locus of the C,LC, (I.Ci.} diagram ; 
ihenfure the centroid reprueniing any colour must lie within the area 
enclosed by the spectrum locus and the straight line connecting its ea* 
tremities. This itrca therefom represents the total extent of physkalty 
icaiixable chroumticities. 

Additive two-colour synthesis is capable of a remarkably close 
appruxlnmtion to the appearance of nature. Although there Is a total 
absence of genuine ycHow, yeltow-green, blue-violet, purple, magenta, 
rote, pink, and all desaturations of thew hues, nevertheless, by a partly 
psychological process, these c'olours often appear to be present in the 
260 
















































THF t<nCiR£lJCAl. tlASlS 


picture^ perhaps owing to our expcctntioti that certain colours are 
associated with certain objects. One bus seen a field of daifodus repro¬ 
duced convincingly, yet there can bavc been no pure yellow on i c 
screen. The same phenomenon is seen with many other coloure. ^ 
some magic of simuUaneous coiiinisi blonde hair will seem blonde 
when it is really rendered as a pale greyish orangp; grey-blue-Ereen 
leaves look yellow-green and browns masquerade as violet. 

But the full wonder of simultaneons contrast is revealed m the 
device of substituting the unfiUcred light of the ate for the grecn-bluc 
(liter. This was invented by Wilitam Fox and William Harrison 
Hickey and Kinemacolor of Amenca m the earliest duys of colour 
films. It was kier " re-Lovenicd " by A. Bcniardi for I^yool. who 
probablv discovered the elToct aceidcntiilJy. In any case, it is siirpnsing 
how much can be obtained if one picture be pfoyecled through a red’ 
orange filler and the other with no jf/rer H^x/roc-irr, Under ihc« con¬ 
ditions w'e can consider one of the two addUives as a desaturalM b uc- 
violet (bluish %vhite>. because ihU is the appeamnee of the radmtioii of 
a cerium-cored carbon arc (high iiucnsity). This bluc-whire will 
throughout ihtf picture tn proportion to the presence of gteen-olue 
light in the original subject. By fueafis of siQuiltaneous contrast 
liic various tjuts swd of red-onmge, the iipp3.reiit satiirtilion o 

tlie blue-violet becomes wry tuuch intensiricd. The writer has ^icen 
pictured thus projecied in which bluebells have nssomed theii' normul 
hue. and a pale blue dress was udoiirably le produced. The gettcral 
colour eflccl is dignified, restiuined, and veTy pkasanl to Iwk 
Tbc mrnd overlooks, soroehowv tbe nunibcrlc^s iniiCCtiracKs which 

must be inevitable (see page 266 ). l ■ . 

U would be easy to apply ihc sainc principle lo the iubtracLkte sya^ 
thesis. The image printed on one side of double-coated stock 

would have to be dye-toned, or mciul-toiicdH or colour-dcvclopcd red- 
ofaogc: while the other side would h^ive upon it a nofrail biack-smtl^ 
white image wbicb had been left imchattged aJ\er nomml processing. 

When the syntbesb of a iwoH:oli>iir process is additive, the qiie^iOTi 
of the heat to which the projectioii filters are subjected becomes 
In ihc Raycol process it will be recalled ihiii a split projection lem was 
used. This unit eonsistctl of two projection kn^cs of. say, focus, 
which had each had about one-third of the lens cut olf. By this mca^ 
Lbc centres^ or axes, of the lenses brought close enough toyc cr o 

correspond to tlic separation of the axes of the two litUc piclurcs (say 
7i ram.) occupyiilfi tbe area of one normal fnuiur, TIk only place for a 
fiftcr is Lmmedbtcly in front of ibc lens, Gclatiue fiitcra w this position 
rapidly tlcicrioralc, but there are coloured passes nvailtibk whose ab¬ 
sorption chaiMieristics are clow to the theoreucal twixolcnir additive 
primaries. A selenium gkss is suitable for the red-oran^, and ati iron 
and copper glass (Chance s - Calorex -) lias the requisite ahsorbUincc 

261 


COtOUR ClHt:MATO0R>A1>HY 


of led and Uttnsralttanoc of ^neen and blue, Tonlay Ibe piubJem iiT 
Mtved by heal>absotbine glases possessing little selective^ absorption 
in ibc visible le^on. sucb as Chance's ON 20, A piece of ON 30 ^ss 
3 mm. thick will absorb at least W’i, of the heat and irammil 87% of 
light. 


CHAPTEft 3 


Additive Processes 


- Lei tlwre U UuhL" «id God: and foilhwih UtiUi eiHeJM!. Uni of 

pure, irtmuj iiom ibc dcwi und. fnJiii her native cast, to journey 
Lhrou|}h lira aery gloom b«an* splicxeJ in a ratlumt 


Im-iijtiiig OpUod AcceSK^es In Projection, or Sped*] CamerS 
Amwecmtnts^ or Btiih 

I N addiiiv'e proe^wes of itibchiss thfi primary clement^are combiiied 
{viz., added lo each other) upon the ansen, or added as sen^tions 
received suwxssivdy at such a frequency that the mdividuaJ stim^J 
Wend, Thus images may be combined simultaneously or suct^tvcly. 
Each prinuiry-coloured picture which is to form pan ot the combinaooii 
must be separately projected- Each elsmcnt represents correct pro- 
ponioiw of one of the primary colours. In this category the posi ue 
film is generally black and white, alihouah it has ^ been propt^ to 
Stain separate iniagc wiih i\s comecl projection Dlicr. ^ 

process of C, H. Fri^-Oreenc e3thihite<t m 1925 the alternate frames 
stamed red find bloe-grwn, thus dispensing with the rotaimg 
colour disc on the projector which pcrsistcoce of vision systems tcqiurc. 
Each positive part-picturc has to be projected through a filter sum r to 
(but geoeraliy mote saturated; narrower wayeicngtir c^O f '’f 
was used for tailing the cortespniHling negative. 


addition BV SlhlLLTA-NEOLIS PROJECTION 
The principal disadvamages of this class of additis-c procMses is that 
two projecEOT^ are its«l il alwmyt ncc'^sary tn 
the ordinary projection lens a special lens unit before the additive filin 
can be projected. It is argued by cnthusmsis ibui this is “"{V “ 
mcchankal aspect, that some Und of arm cm be attached lo ^ 
projector head upon which the existing black-and-white lens and ^ 
"peJial colour prajeerion unit can both be mounted, and ih^si it requir^ 
only to be moved oxer into the axis of the proj«tion m order 
to correct focus iastnmly, Nexerthelts-s projectionisisdtsUkc moving 
ihiS lenses for quite tiaiund reasons. In so.™ systems it is “ 

spend considerable time in adjusting a culour lens uui in 
obtain accurate superposition of Ibe two or more , 

screen, The adjustment will be required m every theatre owing to Io« 

Zol 






COLOUR tlNrVlMOORAMHV: 


condiiions, [cngili of ihrow, si^e of scrMJi, anJ so on. UnJess every 
thcalre could be equipped with a standard colour projcciion urtit v^ tiich 
could be relied upon to give pcifecl restills at all Limes, ii is diHicuU to 
see bow the sponsors of such a process could avoid spending a great 
dc3l of money on special service mechanics, who would have to make 
the essential trial of projection before xhe arrival of li colour fdiii at a 
theatre. Fimhcmiore, in tlie event of several dilfereiiL proccsse$ each 
endeavouring to exhibil their lilms at the same theatre, the piojecLiQEust 
w ould have to be something of an optical expert to effect the rapid 
changes of kns uni t between ihc show ing of successive dims. Neverthe¬ 
less, money continues to be i^pent on the development of addiiive 
processes, and hlms have been completed only for their producers to 
find ihat the task of rcniing them* and at the same ttmc making certain 
of adcqunijc projection, limits their exhtbhlon lo the very few theatres 
having metnagers who can be persuaded to experinrent. It sDejm almost 
certain that projection troiiblcswjU inevitably bring about the extinction 
of additive processes, mure c^pcctaJly now^ diat satislactoiy colour-on- 
film processes are available. 

On the oiEier harid* the additive processes possess the undeniable ad¬ 
vantage of cheapness of production, since the cost is identical to black- 
and-while, and the projection positive isa1wa>i^a straight print from the 
negative. Tfu; p^n-pictures usually occupy the space of a single framc^ 
so that nu cxira fittn ii needed, tind ihe stock used is^ of course^ ttoimai 
fitie-grain posiiivc. 

Another defect of processes of thi-s calegory b loss of ti^l iti proj^- 
tion, lu iwocolour processes the luminous efficiency may fa 11 well 
below 25 per cent, of the black-aad-u^luEe image, and cannot possibly 
exceed 50 per cent. TTic projection lenses, when arranged In pairs, must 
have their centres not more than 7*5 mm. apart. Thus to obtain n 
reasonable apcrtiire the lenses must be almost cut in half. Ihe three- 
colour lenses am no more cfTtdcjit; in these the norma! aperture of the 
bLack-and-whilt leas is divided into three Kegmcitts. The loss of light 
due lo absorption by the colour fillers iv very serioiis^ as $atumlcd 
colours of narrow spectral transmissions should pniperly be used in 
order to conform to the theoretical condJLtons,^ U was no doubt owing 
to poor illuaiinaiioii that in the Raycol (two-colour addiiive) process 
while light was substituted for the green-blue Oltei, 

ADDm%£ PROCESSES; TWO-CQLOLR 
GtSSkM. RtOUIHEMEhTS 

A pair of lenses of focal length suitable for substarulait] 
film, 5ray of 25 mm. or 35 nint., mounted vtry close together, with 
centres at 7 5 mm. As the two pictures wftl have been taken froro two 

* A pcKsibtt fct of wmite bctTmiwe^ Og 2 LRciJl, OGr I rGrtefi^.Oh 10 
(Itiue). 

2M 



Fid. 134 .—Rayed pos^tirt, 

(Noe# Jlwittl ftirai^|KincfH*1 


FiG. 135.—Raycol tw^lh*- 

lAbovi: 1433.1 



Uiu, 


-Rrf- 



FWJ* poahivt. 


(r*kj A 













^DDITIVP PROCESSES 

iwinu (here will be pamlla^ fringing unless ihe lighL is split into two 
osmaitefore teaching the lenses. This probfem has been solved by 
JWre than isne upiicat aira^gcmcrtt, llie size of e^ch picture i&^ipprojt- 
i^iely 3 y 12 nmi. The iwo pktum may be placed side by side, or one 
beneath the other wtihitt the space of one frame (16>:24 nun.), or m 
some position on two adjoining frames provided the catnera has a gate 
oi Uns right dimensions. The appearance of the finbhed wisitive is 
noimal, except that the pictures look like a print fom a substandauf 
negative on 3T^n(n, fUoL The picinics are grouped in pairs slightly 
sei^rated from each other by the masking. It is important that the 
piaures should carefully masked off from each other by a "septum,*’ 
otbe^ise there is some chance of the rays overlapping into tltc neieh' 
uounng picture area. 

/'ro/pcrfwi.—-Projection is usually effectod by a divided kns (in effect 
wo n^s, as in the camera). Each half of the lens projects a complete 
piciuos m one of the two chosen colours. A red^range filter b placed in 
trout of oue of Uie lenses, and a blue-green filter in front of the other, 
^ttruauvely. the blue^green filter may be omitted, and the blue part of 
the picture is then projected in the blulsh-v-hite light of the htgh- 
mtcnsiiy projection nrc. By this tnclhi>d surprisingly good subiu'ctiv^ 

^ obtainable. Mechanical or opticul adjustment must be 

^ovidcd to move one half of the lens relati™ to the other in order to 
cn^ accurate registration upon the screen. 

™ theatre, accurate cslibration has to be 

instance to ensure superposition of the part- 
pictitres upon the screen. 


EXA.MPLES 

ProcMs. (Obsolete.) 

Oirti^^OperaUons were begun in 192&-9 with a rather dabomte 
divider placed Iwhind a single-projcclion Jens (Fig. I34h Various 
I iritd, but paralUix wus cootiouaily encuuntered. 

r M a “ association with Messrs. BclUngham A Stanley 

designed for RayooJ n beam-divider incorporating a plate of 
1 .^^” ■ time that a double refracting mcdiinn 

employed b,% ihe dividing dement of a beam-splitter for 
..flit ^ P'ly* Two objectives iiere mounted behind the prism 

itflhV resulting pictures were entirely free from paralLw. As (he 
gJil was plane polarized there was some reason to think that tJrere wns 
an impr^emcut in the phoiognipliu: image owing to reduclirm of 
sea tCT. ThL- two pictures were disposed vcrticnlly one beneath the other 
fc- frame, size each Sxl2 mm,, centres 7-J mm. anari 

(Mils. 133 and I3fi). Taking filters were Wraltcn Filters 28 and 40A, 

Zd5 



COU1UR ClNEMATOOIlAPHr 


The optical was mounted on a aormal camefa-kns turret 

mg- 137), 

Projection.—A divided projectioo lens consisting of two sawn^ff 
leases. The respective half-lenses were separated by a metal spring, ajid 
means ^'cre provided for incieasing or decreasing the, separauon of the 
axes of the two t^if-kn^es in order to oh^io superposition upon the 
screen. The colour filters were made of gla^p as considemfalje tnjubfc 
vm experienced wUh gdatine owing to the great heat to which the filter 
was exposed during projection. A seienlum pot glass uued for the 
nsd-omnge, and a very thin piece of** signal green copper ghiss for 
ihe bhie-grccn complcmentafy componeni. Originally Raycoi had 



dispensed with the blue-green glass altogether^ using white light only, 
and a patent was obtained, althou^ ihk suggestion was by no means 
new' in the history. The effect was aslonishin^y good, and it is worth 
while considering in some detail how it comes about that a. ” one- 
colour projeetkm system can gi\T; a fnlr range of colour tones. 

Consider the result in the case of an Driginat cotouf whicli b not 
recorded upon either red or blue-green negatives; namely^ a bluc^vEolcL 
Them will bo inmspniency on either negative^ hence maximuin deniity 
on both positives* hence nothing will be projected, therefore blue U 
represented by bbok (Rg. 13S). 

Consider the reproductitin of priimiTy green. There will be no density 
cm the red negative record and full density on the green negative; hence 
we have full density on the red positive and transparency on the white 
266 













AD£>lTlVe PROCESSES 


projected positive Inorwiiilly projected in blue-grticn); Uttrefore giece is 
reproduced as wA/rr, Desaturmted greens must rcptodui^t more or 
IcK wELrm greys if JiglU, and cold greys if dark. Thus onl^ red is 
objectively reproduced with any approximation to truths the Temniiiing 
colours being reproduced as various degrees of reddish grey, neutral 

AiLiilyjLS SyiLthesis 

m Scretf} I ^ 

Fio. 138. 

grey, or subjectively blubh grey^ Yellow will be red plui whiie^a pink. 
While tnu$l necessarily turn out a light pink. By sitnulian^us contrast 
with the warm tone of reddish grey, the tones which minus red will 
nppear singularly blue* especially in the higher lightnesses, liiese 
portions of the picture ncally consist of the light of the arc projected 
through a gfcatcr or less detisily of silver m the film. By the Jaws of 


a' »!' 



com rust they tend to appear a colour compleraentajy to their nrigh-^ 
bourtng tones (in this case blue-gfeen, witich is eompletnentary to red). 
The eifect is further exaggerated by projection with a higb-iotensiiy arc* 
the lighi of which b a ^^ry blubli white, 

The loial range of colourobtainabb in si^h a system can be nspre- 
scjUod in one triangular s^rion of a pyramidal colour soJid (Ing. Id'S) 
bounded by whjte> red^rangCp and black* which means that the spec¬ 
trum would be reproduced approximaicly thus: 


267 













COLOIFK C(»iEM:ATtKjR\PHlf 


TaRLE so 


IfOi. RtptOiluetieit. 


RiMf .. 




Red 

LOO 

White 

0 






Red 

m 

White 

25 


Ornni^ 




Red 

!00 

White 

50 


Ydlow-Onmijf 

■■ .«■ 


, , 

Red 

m 

White 

75 


Yfi31ow 



f- 1 

Red 

lOd 

vhiite 

m 


Yefiow<lrecn 




Rtd 


White 

100 


Gmn 

m* 


■ 'I 



White 

100 


Blue-Green 

** 





Whitt 

75 

(Ctey) 

Blue 



V * 



White 

30 

(Gity) 

Biue-Vjokt 

*■ ■ 

1 « 

^ h- 



Black 



Violet 






Blibck 




Coniider Ihe nepToductioa of white by additive syslctns sitch as 
Raycoi, The white represents tm:iimuin Iransmission by both orange 
and white halWenses, 

Orange half transmits 22 per cent, of Uic incident lighL 
White half iransmiis tOD per ccDt, of the incident light. 

The additive eoJour is 6J per cent, of the original light, and this 61 per 
cent, consists of LS per ceni* red-oiange and 82 per cent, white (a 
pinkish white). 

With a bluC'gieen filter transtnitting 60 per cent, of the lisht, 
22 60 32 

y +-y=y =41 per cent, will be present o£v the screen. This4l percent. 

consists of 27 per cent, red and 73 per cent, blue-green. Thus the red- 
oniRge and bluc-grecn combinnlion would be two-thirds as bright us the 
red-orange and while addition, which b in its tom less than two-^thirds 
of nantul blnck-and-white brightness. 

Thus it appears that the substitution of white for blue-green in two- 
colour additive systems b a device which sacrifices colour range to 
obtain increased screen lumiitancc, and there is no question that a blue- 
green fitter must give a much expanded range of hue. 


References 

”71ie Raycn) Praaesi." Brih Jwwn Pha!., Colour Supjt- XXiV tNo». 1930), p. 43. 
AlldiiitKe Patent. Brir /ount. Phot.. Cdfaiiir Supp. XXJ V, pi t2. 

BnKAMi]. A., dQj TUvoQL Lm.. E.T. (IV29), 

Auuftimr. R. S., E.P. 322,901 11029)- 
BESNAfiin. A., ami Raycvl Ltd.. E.P, }29.43» 11929). 

Gaoc. E. L., and BrsHAUDt, A,. E.P. 112.249 (]929). 

Beu-Ikjiiaw. t_, and Stamut, F., liP. 399,100 (1933). 

Busch Process. (Obsolete^) 
iLoilt Buuti OptkaJ Co. Lid., Leodoti-) 

German iwo~coloLir additive process. 

Cai«e«r,— The beam was divided ni the hfilf-transporent mirror 
surface SJ of a double prism (see Fig. 140), and the mys then passed 
268 








AI>I>lTrVE PROCf SSES 


panly dcflcctc^i and partly direct into the objectives 01 and 02, FS 
and F2 were red and green filters, S2, S3, and S4 mirror surfaces 
of prisms placed behind the objectives. The two pictures were brought 
to a focus at BJ and B2_ The ray paths were identical in this system, and 
it was clai med to bc entirely free from parallax. The ima^s were 
luitied sideways to the length of the film. An in^nioini finder was 
provided by the mtsrtor surface w'hich did not reflwi the whole of the 
light to prepuce the red piciure BI«but sent one-fifth thereof undiverted 



Fkj, 140. 


on io the ground-gjass plate M and liicre produced an image Bit 
which ^-1 hough wcak^ was light cnougli for observatioUi. Thss was turned 
upright by Ihe in verting system 03 and could be observed as imnge 
B4 through 8 he enlarging eyepiece 04. 



Rs>. HI, 

pMj^ction .—Tlic rttprodtictng apparatus compriTied a Bu^iCh aitach- 
mcni to an A,E,G projector, though ihis att^hmeni could be with 
ether projection machines. It consisted of a double objective, Ihe upper 
one of whkh could be adjustisd by a hori^ntal and vertical screw to 
cover the part-pioiures of the colour fiJm. This objertive sy'sicm was 
mounted on ihc same elemeni as the black-and-white Icns^ which was 
undcntcath lE, By movement of a handle the change could be made 
from normal black-and-white to colour without delay. The projec^n 
tyzutm am bc seen In Fig. l^S- The illuminant was a tuirror art The 
prism system mereased the a^is disUiiice heiwcen the Iwo imap. and 
thus permitted ihe use of wide-apenure lenses for projectionvThc prism 
system also turned the images through 90'. 

269 











colo!;r cinematoghaf'HY 


Remarks .,—"niLs camera (Fig, 142) and projector were designed 
chiefly for medical tesmeb. The prism system would noi permit the u<ie 
of a shori’focits camera objecltve, and there would be iosuificient 
illuiaination for commereiat cinematography, it will be noticed that the 
arrangement of the images on the liim is Ihc same as in earlier British 
Cinecolor, to which the whole optical system bears a dose resemblance 
(Fig, i43). 


Morgana Process. (Obsolete.! 

<The Befraal Kowdl Co., U.S.A.I 

This was an additive process for ib'imti. Rim. Eucit successive pic* 
tore frame was photographed through a red and a blue-grecn filter 
nlternatcty. The convcncional colour filter w'heel was replaced by an 
osdilatTng element ihai brought the proper filter into po,silion between 
the lens and the film at each exposuie. (Note the similarity to the 
oseiibting filler in the Hillman camera svhich was claimed as original.) 
Normal ponchromatic reversal film was used. The speed was 24 frames 
pcTsecond, though other speeds could be used. During projection two 
successive frames move forward and one backward, or in reverse, in 
the following order: 1-2; J-2-3: 2-J-4; 3-1-5; etc. The result was that 
although the film was running at a linear speed of 24 frames (I j ft.) 
per second, 72 trames were aliernatiitg at the aperture during the same 
Icngih of time, each picture being projected three times upon the screen. 
This accrued projcctiou speed diminated colour flicker and greatly 
reduced colour fringing. A coaventional filter wheel was rotated before 
the projection lens at a speed of 2,160 t.p.m. 


Kefereace 

DeMAY. J. A., " The Moreunu Pracess." Jtfiirn. Jlic. .Witf, pir. 2t, .Mo. 5 


Gilman! Color. (Obsolete.) 

An American two^lour additive process 

Ctpjwm.—Two images were taken in pairs ude by side on 35-mm. film 
by turning the umges Icngtliwisc upon the film. 

Ftujecltmu—A projector equipped with the usual two-colour additive 
filters had optical means for erecting the two images by means of a 
prism system. 

Bewarkr.—This process s«ms to have had tUfioities with the Busch 
two-colour catwrti, and also with the Cinecolor (British) camera and 
project in II systen}. 

270 


ADDinVJ! ^ROCES^ES 


Cinecolor FrcKress^ 
ilhjiiiy-Oiramt^ Lid., Lfflido»n.5 

Iwo-cfiiour additive system based upon the patents of 
D. Daponte. S. J. Cox^ and certain patents of Ad^iiit Hilgcr Ltd. and 
J* DcjvteU. Later tbe patents t^^cre acquired by Dufay-Chramex Lid. 
(Fig. 144). 

—Beam-splntcf of ifie type in which a prism divider b pbecd 
in front of two objectives. (For details see Chapter V,) in the earlier 
Cl nccolour cameras the irmge.'t wer^ turned sideways with respect to the 
film, a pair blling one normal Fnime. in more feceni cameras the pair 
of is central to tlic frnme and normal way up (as in Raycol and 

other systems)^ each picture being approximately 8i< 12 mm. ifl si^e. 
The prism has been very earefuJiy corrected for mfraciion errors due to 
unequal path length of the long and short wavelengths, and there is 
complcie freedom from parallax (see Chapter V) (Fig-145), 

Projciition *—-An ingenious prism erecting devnee was formerly used 
for prints made from the negative on which the images wm lumcd 
sideways. Latefj a pdr of pToJetEion lenses w as used in associution with 
a prism s)^tein in which one element was movable, enabling one beam 
to be moved with, lespcci io the other in order to obtain ucciimic super- 
position of ihe two imaged upon the screen^ The colour projection 
optical unit is so constructed that by a single movement of an arm ihc 
change can be mode immediately from normal black-and-white 
projeeUou to colour. The colour filters in the projection system arc 
made of glass, and not of gelatine, presumably lo withstand the hi^ 
lempcratuies to which a filter is subjected in an additive system of this 
lype (Ftg. 146). 

—Films which have been exhibiled in England and cUe- 
w here have demonstraicd that the optical system is of a high order of 
precision^ no pamIkA occurriiif. Accurate vuperpositioa is obiaincd 
on the screen during synthesis—always u dlBicult achicveznciit in 
additive pnojeciion, ihe smallest error resulting in extremely unplcoMnl 
cfTects of fiiugitig mi loss of general ckhnition. The quality of the 
projected image leaves liule to be dcsdmd, which is somewhat remark¬ 
able when the size of the origlcaJ image is recalled. 

The colour range of Cinecolor Is (he maximum possible with tw^o 
prtmariesp the colour having the mddinable delicacy and chami of 
additive mixture# The only criticism which can be made is that from a 
commeroinl standpoint this process must Face cemin disadvantages 
inherent in any additrixr projection process—nomcly, i he necessity of 
equipping tbeutnes' with a special pTojcction device wlikh must be 
universally adopted in order to make the world-wide ciMbition of a 

• TTiSa pfoom should not be conAuod mih Cm Aiocricjn inbtrwUix CiueeoEor 
piwcs- 


271 


COLOUlt CiNEHATOGRAPHV 

picture practicable—and lliat it is doubtful whctbcf (he reiiolvtixg power 
can conaparc with Lhnt obtainable in any prooe^ Imviug nottnal picture 
Recent improvenicnts m the resoLvinf power of positive film, 
ho^vei^er, would greatly improve the quality of the picture, 

ClNECOLOS pATEim 

£P, 346,406, JS30 
E-P. HC.434, 1^30 
IIP, mrm. 1^30 
E.P, 1SS,754, m} 

EJ*, JS4,3«5. 1911 

Reference 

£ril^ Mvfti. 2®, Colour Supp. (Dec. 1934), p. 4B. 


RooxcoEor 

{1^ Av. V}ctqf-Hu®o. Vanves (Seme).) 

A Flench additive process^ {Two+ or thiec-ootuitr.) 

Cainem ^—The optical armngement Is ba^d upon a paient of 
L. H. Roux (B,F. 315,141, 1912), la the spcciflcaiion the immior 
begins by pointing out that previous optical systems having several 
objeetim iKhind a single primaiy object lens had certain defects. One 
system of this type was composed of a single ptintary object lens which 
gave a real image of the object^ to the plane of which image was placed u 
converging lens which directed the i^ys coming from the primary object 
kns on EO a s^ond optical system fonned of u group of identicnl 
secondary objective lenses all situated in one pLEuie and whoi^ number 
ei|imlleil that of Ihc number of monochronmiic lecorth k wus desired to 
obUtiur thus llic secondary images aiM all fomti'd in one plane in which 
is plstxd a sensiiiaicd surihee. Now in such a s>iuem the plane of the 
emulsion of the Qlm is conjugaiie with a oortain plane in the object (kid 
of the sccondaTy objectives. The result is Uiat suflkicni simipneas will 
be pven only by images from a voSumc or zone of the object field which 
is contained between two planes which am very close together^ whoso 
distance apart b at the most equal to double the fo«aJ length tdismncc 
from the foeus within which eaeh images of ^ point object does not 
exceed a given tplerance) of the seeundary objectives (abou: mm.),. 
For m^ctioil purposes thia volume would be a plane wtiich iiself U 
conjugate wtQi a certain volume tn the objeel field of the anterior 
objcxlive^ w'hkh volume^ when focusing to kUinity, would Ik between 
inirnity and the hypcrfoo^il length, Tlius there would be a sharp image 
only of ibc space enclosed between ihe hypcrfocal length of the anterior 
272 









I-Hi. 142,—Tbt cqmemi 






























Fjo. M3,—Busch 



Fits. Cineuptidwpme 
pojim'c, rSMp.375.> 



FiCi. S44.—EarJj Cinccoior pilsoi unll for cstlFa wkllh tihti. Consrnicfed bjj 
Adnm Hiljper Ltil. iHilscr-WarkFniui t*uicnli.} 









Fffi. —GTiwIor cniticiti Vjiiben Ud, 

Anii AJum Hil^r Ud, 



Pio, I4&.^ —CineoolOf prpjcctkin udIl Noic 
AllemAlivt N^k'nnd'Whllc anil colmir ktit* 







ADDITIVE PROCESSBa 

objective SlUl infuiLt)?.: ali which Um on the near sUte of this Limit would 
give only a sharp image bebiod the senstixod surface. There woujdalso 
be residual parallax due to the fact that the beam which traverses each 

Ft£^ / 



Fi^.3 

(XovuemUSr 

Fig, |47.-tbiitib Paient 3SS,I4I. )9}2 (1- a Roux). 

secondary oliji^Lvta has first of &H passed throit^ & drculor peripheral 
^grait in the nnierior objective which is the inuige of this sccand^iry 
objective given by the interposed optLca] system, and not through a 
common region which would b«e the centre of the anterior objective. 

3 273 



































COLOUR C^^^ESlATOGJ^APHV 

ll]c iavcBior io overcome these defects in the roUawing way. 

A lens is placed rnimediniely in front of the secoadary objecd^'e, and 
iliis lens projects to inibuty Use Louige romed by the primary objective. 
The focus of this lens is in the plane of ihc real image fornied by ijie 
primary object leas. Fig. I in the dlostrelioa (sec Fig, 1471 to the spccih- 
cation rcpresenis a diagrammatic section of iho optical system. Figs. 2, 
3, and 4 leprc^jeot various aliemativ'c airangcjocats of the secondary' 
optical system. Figs. 5, 6, and 7 represent the corresponding urrange^ 
mcnli of the images on motion picture film. Fig. ^ is the projoction 
system. 

In Fig, 1, A is a saJmble objective tens which produces a plane linage 
fl* In the plane B is placed a diaphragm so as to limit the field, and a 
field lens D so as to reduoe the divergence of the light bea m after forma¬ 
tion of the image B; this is not absolutely necessary, however, 
pother Jens E. tlie focus of which is situated in Ute phm B, is placed 
immediately in front of a group of oecondary objective lenses FF* of 
suitable equal focal kngUis. Each of these secondary lenses pjtHluecs 
from & a new ima^ or G, Ln the single plaruc of their fociT the said 
images being identica! with B and with each other as a result of the focal 
lengths of lenses F' and F' being equal. 

The introductiori of the fens E in front of the secondary objectives F 
casting a double advantage according to the inventor. While in the 
older arran^menti the secondary objectives F gi^'e multiple secondary 
Images of the single image formed by the primary Ieos A serving as 
object for these objeettvei F* in the amangement which is ihe subject of 
ihi Invemion Uie imago formed by A is mpfoiceicd to infinity by Jens E* 
and it h the image given by this lens E which acts as objeci for the 
secondary objectives F, Whereas in the older ^yjUems the sharpne^ h 
deiErmmed by the focal depths of the secondary objectives, here it is 
determined by ihc focal depth of the lens E. The food depth, for a given 
aperture, can be shown to be proportional to the focal length, so that 
the focoj depth which is effective in determining the sharpness of focus¬ 
ing is increased in the inttio 

facd krtgth of ^ 
foc^\ Ui of F 

a ratio which in practice is beiwicen 2 and 2-5, resulLiag in a considerable 
improvement in the focusing. 

FurLher, the lens E practically eliminates puraUax. Since the image 
from the objective A reprojccted lo infinity by said lens E has ^thn re- 
projccted rays bdng paralkl) the same aspect In relation to each of the 
bcconiiaty objeett^-es, the laucr give images without parallax defects. 

] t Is churned tlia t the preaEnte of the letis E in the projection system 
pemUs of working u jf ti the saine spacing of ihc centres of the secondary 
objectives F as was employed in the camera lens arul therefore obviates 
274 



ADDTTJVE PliOCC^Se? 


any necessity for aJjtiittng said objectives. If the lens E were not 
provided^ it would be necessary to malce these objectives adjustable to 
enable the txacl superposition of ihe mtages on tke screen. 

The claims are: 

1. Appaiaius for cinematograph or other colour photography of the 
tind in which a ftrsi objective gives a real image of which several 
secondary objectives ihen give their several images, which may be 
superimposed smd are all situated in one plane, characterized by the 
taci that a lens^ rcprojecling to infinity the image fotmetl by the prin¬ 
cipal objective* is placed in from of the secondiiry objectives and in clo5< 
proximity to these objcctivcSp the focus of this lens being in the plane of 
the real image given by the principal objective, 

3. Apparatus for ctnemato^ph or other colour projection, com¬ 
prising the elements of an optical system arranged as claimed in Claim 1, 
the direction of projection being the reverse of thai defined in said claim 
for the purpose of photography.* 

Frqfecs^f. —Lens as described above for the camera. Sec Fig. 147 
(Fig, g in $pcciBcaiion). 

This process was demonstrated at the Institut d^Optiquc, Paris, 
March 22^ 1^34^ and again in Paris in 19^^ 

Reniarks.^Tht writer has not had an opponunhy of seemg any 
pklures projected nor of ascertaining to wliat extent the claims of the 
patent are siciuidly met in practice. Apparently four pictures were 
cirigiitally taken within the space of one frame (Fig. W). 

Monsieur J. Vivie of Paris has reporticd to the writer lltat the brothers 
Roux hav'fi coniLnued thdr researches in spite of the war^ having further 
perfeeted tltt optical systeiti of the camera, and daim to have ciimtuftted 
rrioging. Four sepatarions are now^ being taken on each normal frame. 
As for prcjcction, they had concentrated on the problem of luminoua 
cflBcicncy. Ji liad been found that 'm order to cijual normal screen 
average luminance (Lcn foot-Iamberts) they were proposing to use a 
source of light at Icaet six to eight limes the normal uitensity. il would 
Speern that uo such increase is io the least possible* unless it Is proposed 
to reduce correspondingly ihc screen magnification. 

l-miinan ComerB 

{Cnla^rgrurure Lid. iiuj titrrrjrd IniliuLrks Lid i 

The paimiiU of A. G. Hillman are d^ribed in Chapter V. ll seems 
that Mr. HiUitum was at one tim* engaged upon the mechanical work of 
the CLnecolor process for S. Jk Cox uud [>. Daponte. He left Qnecolor 
and interested Mr. Kay HEffrison of Gen^rd Indnsiiies Ltd, A com¬ 
pany was formed kter, known as Colourgmvurt Ltd., in which com^ 

^ Quoutiuir^ from firitijh P^il^ut ^podO^tim b> pcnnkslnn of the Commller 

H.M. Slaliooer} OJtiiK. 


27S 


cfttot'H rrSEv/kTOCRAPHY 

pany Mr, Alexander Korda became interKied. LoAdon Film Produc¬ 
tions taking a share interest. Owing to the associmiCHi of London F ilm 
Productiotii with the Hiilmiui process it received considemble publicity 
in 195S-4. tl was announced thal picTiiies ftouid be hlmed by Mr. 
Korda, but no pictures W'ene ever released, and this may have been due 
to Ibc fact Uiat a camera made according to the Hillnuin patents would 
Iiave little chance of avoiding senous defects of time-f^r^ax, and to a 
less extent of space-paraHax. Nor. at ilie time, was any aonouoce- 
meni. tnadc as to the proposed method of presenting fibns taken with the 
erunera. Were they to be projected by some additive device? Or were 
they to be printed by one or other of the available two-cglour processes? 
But when London Flim Productions adopted Technicolor (subscribing 
some £50,000 to Technicolor Ltd.) it bec^e unlikely that the Hillman 
camera would ever be used. 

Ir the Hillman camcru iwo frinties were exposed simultaneously one 
above the other, in front of the apertures in the gate was un osciliating 
ftlier clement haviitg three filters—red, green, red. Tbc first two frames 
wcm exposed through the pcen and red filters, say, the film was then 
moved down oneffatite and the filters moved too, so that at the next 
exposure the frame, which had already been exposed to green, rreefved 
a Sfcuttd vxpojure thfou^ the same /illifr, while ihe next unexpoSed 
frame ettme into position above to receive an exposure to led. The film 
tlwn moved down another fraitur and the filter moved up, so that the 
frame which liad just received a red exposure mccived an nrhgf exposure 
through the other red fitter, while the following frame was exposed for 
the first time to green. Thus obviously each Irainc received two con- 
wcutive exposures through its appropriate filter, finic-parallax fringing 
would thus be inevitable. 

The two images were obtained by a pair of lenses in front of which 
was a mirror system com prising an inclined stainless steel mirror in 
front of the upper lens with a hok through which rays passed to that 
kns. the remainiDg area of tlte mirror reflecting the be^ to the second 
mirror, which was in front of the lower lens am) inclined thereto at an 
angle of 45’. 

noscribed in F.P, 478,501.—Films oinying groups of 
three colour record images were fed through a projoctor by single- 
image shifts at approximately the same speed as the negatives from which 
they were made, and the images were projected simultancotisly in pairs, 
each first witli the preceding imnee and upin with the foltowing image; 
the negatives, from which they were primed had images exposed in a 
similar manner, or pairs of images simulUuicousty exposed together 
twice. The projector had two udjiiitabk objectives, a twu-image giitc, a 
single-image iatcrmittcni ntcchiini-sm. and a rotating filter disecompris- 
ii^ groups of filters of which I and 4 were blue, 3 and ft were mecn, and 
S and 2 were red. See alro E.P. ■183.817. 

276 


ADDITIVE VftOCESSES 




F»,*l 51^ ~<Jfluiiwnl^S!«ce**ive;,Es*>Oiww. 

pictures were taken by three sawn-alT leases disposed venicaily one 
beneath the atber^ Med owing to the presence of serious pandUx. The 
pictures in this camera occupied 2'25 times the length of a normal frame 
iostead of three tiroes the length (Fig. 149). Comont also tried suooes- 
wvc exposures using a rotating colour lUtcr disc in fronl of the objective, 
Fringing fiotn tune parallax vras obviously excessive (Fig. 150). 

' Sdcteic EinbtJ^scircnlt Cmimoifl. 


ADDITIVE PROCESSES ; THREE*COLOUR 

The design Of a bcam-spUttiog system fece from puraltax and capable 
of uikiog three geometxicaily identical images is a matter of extreme 
dtfOculty. The attempt made by Guumont' in 19 f2, in which the 


Fw. l<W.-GiiiinK»tSv»i«n. (£,?, 1 . 230 . 191 X 1 •‘Sawn'or’ lease* wwc ms«» 1 . 


277 












COLOUR CINLhtAtOG&APHY 


Ttc process of }. S^c^panik in (925 was impracticabk, lit* used a 
cion-intctmiltcDt camerfi having a chojji of eighlccn tenso moving 
togcLher wUh the film behind a colUmaUng lens, three pielurts bemg 
simoliancously exposed* 23g,973) (Fig. i5l)> the wriiar came 
across this i^aeer camera a short lime ago and look Ihc opponimity of 
recording the grave of one more invciilor^s brighi hopes (sec Fig. I52j. 
The camera has aimx been destroyed. 

A number of aUempts am of French origin. M- Audiben pamnicd 
an optical sygtiem (E^R 355,S35, 1930) in which litree objectives were 
used behind a brge div^rgient lens. Such an arrangement coasIdeFably 


s 


r 


\ 



Fki. 15\. 


reduces paraUas. A camera was made which rook four fuU-aized 
rratoes on 65-mm. film (Fig. 153). By means of a special opiicat printer 
these negatives were printed with the aid of analysis litters on Lumitre 
mosaic film. This type of film had an irregular starch grain screen 
similar to the Lumidre senen plate, but it was very opaque and the 
results were not very satisfactory. 

P, E. Bonneau proposed to take (E,P. 408.499, 1923) three full 
nonnal'Siml negatives on ealia-wtdth film, and to reduce them (o 
njinioturc positives by optical printing so that they occupied the space of 
a normal frame. V. Hudeby would take three pictures within the 
space of a single frame, aflerwards eniatging them and printing through 
colour screens upon lenticular film (E.P. 408,764, 1933). 

* A (hreo-coloar cmuinuiMu sioiion cuncra ww woriEni oat by w. £, Ji,hn» 
|E.P. IftvJOO. ISIS). FilteenliMfisiboitwaftliouwnncn ToiK-pantUMh preieni. 


278 















cCrknix 


Fjo, J ^1— S^Bczcpanik aiultiplc l«tt coi^linuous ttioiioD 


p, nt> 










Fkj. I33-—Ntgalive ci^po^ by Audtbiiri 
Dptkul sysiciTi. 6S-miii. fllm^ 



Fkj. 154.— B;3$saDi segmivcH 





AODirtVF PKOCRSSRJI 


EXAMPLES 

Bassani Pr«»ce«. (Probably Obsoleie,) 

(Sod£t^ ChromotltFii. FariSuj 

Cattiera^—An Uiteresiing camcTii was eimde hy the Swi^tc Cbromo- 
Pari^. An 4 t&toriishing Tnechanism Tnovi^ tlifi entire gaie^ and Him 
wiiiiin itj at each eiposnns, wiih reference to ihe nortnal lixed objeetive^ 
Three miniature negatives were cspoawjd^ by the successive mox>etiienis 
t>r ihe gate, within the space of a normal frame* Actually there were 
96 movements of the gate per second, but the picture were exposed at 
the rale of 72 per second (Fig. IM). 

Proji^aion .—The positive was projected with ^ triple-di vidod sawn-off 
lens with suiiabk regisiering tidjustment. Save far i^Ught timcvpanillax 
fritigcs (especially in close-ups)^ owing to the non'Slmultaneity of ihc 
negative records, the results were admirable, apart from the question 
of practicabjhty of addUi^'o processes of projection (E.P. 447.225 )h 


Francitn Process.^ 

rOpcniied in Gmi Brittun pHor re 1939 by BfitLih Beilhia Syiulii::^(e i.lii, Sec aiiff 
SDci^t£ di: FUmi &t Civul&ars Naturellei Fnmdtad 

Camera .—^Two substandard picturestcacbapprosimaitely S x 12 
were taken on two diagofiaUy arranged parts of a normal image area. 
These w-erei the red and green filter negattves. The film was LbErn moved 
by half the height of one frame and a third picture exposed in the then 
remaining space under the upper of the two pictures already exposed at 
Ihc dkgoiuds of the frame. Thus only two knscs were required. The 
beam-dividing system consisted of a pair of polished metal mirrors 
placed in front of the two objectives* one of the mirrors having an 
aperture. This type cjf beamsplitter exhibited a certain amount of 
parallax^ since one objective was nearer the object pboiographed titan 
the other by a distance equal to the separation of the two mirrors^ Tlie 
pictures were taken at the rate of 4® per second. Thus a red and a green 
record were always exposed together, followicd by a blue record. The 
thne^parnUax fringe was undesirabk {Figs. 155 and 156)/ 

Projectfm.—A natmal contact black-and-white print was made (mm 
the ncgaiUc and projected* as usual with processes of ihis type, by 
means of a split triple objecti^T embodying the additive primary colour 
filters. Means were provided tbr independent registration of each 
image wpon the scTceni 

* KnewTL litsD Fronpia-Reiiliu. In Enskind called Optkolor. Ptoce« de¬ 
veloped by* Mnurjks Voile. 

' Fnmcit:! tiinir fave up thu type ef baam-rphiRS*- later fna4c uf the 

patenu of J. M. Cuumimi add P- AtiprakiaX* The duec wr^^ntioiit one made 
tinmlian«nidy and pm^thu ffu dsirmd to heve been eSimiruit^ 


279 


tnuoifR riNFMArOGRAPHY 


Remark.t.—A feature flhn wa» made in France by the Frandin 
process, and it w-as erfiibiied in July 1935 at a Parisian cinema The 
colour WHS vc^ flue indeed m parts of the film, and any defects 
due to poor lichlmj rather than to the process. This film proved that 
wure It not for the senous commereiul problem of a special projection 
apparatus, with the likelihood of its getting out ofadjitiiimcnt, the sub- 
tj^ive pr^ss« would have a serious competitor in nddiiive systems of 
rais type, Canstikring that I he positive part images were of substandard 
dimeosioj^ il is remarkable how good the defwitioii vms. .4 limited 
amount of fringiiiE was pciceplible in dosc^jps. 

Films of the Coronation of H.M. George VI and Trooping the 
Colour wwe exhibit^ m London at the Cameo Tliealre iind else- 
w in 7 with cottstdcrable success. Might fringing was oticasiomilly 

Cirttfhf) nonf wtjV 



SMutma Filir' 

(c^ewn Tj" pluJV> 


i'lo. IS7.—Hie Fi^nciifl PnKas. Scheiuatic Hiuaram, The airangeiiKiiii ofinifnirs 
m mid M ai 45 lo ihe axis of the ot^ectlvi; Oi niuibler coincidcniar to he made 
^ween itiAiuB ilw «ts of live ObJwivE Diittng the mill perliKl ^ihe I'dm o 

niw Oik IE luoicd. in rroni of the letists- For a cetrain pusitiun of Oiler nnd Him 
bolli biM and green imuBes are simidUurPitiily cainowl, no t|we parellflX bdoB 
mvoivyd. After moving die film fotwatd half-i-frame nnd die filus a hnlf-touuiin, 
I he red image u rocordol. which involves tiriK tiurjUtu is rektion io the fanner iwo 
itevetivea. The pmJcctkHi system h iilMikol. 


apparent. The brightness of the projected picture was rather poor, as 
must iitcvilably be the case with additive processes. These films were 
also shown in France, Belgium, and Holland. 

Appareotly wort on ^is syijtcni had not been abandoned in 1945. 
Keeping Uie camera optical system unchanged, il is now proposed to 
make prints rrom the subsliindiird negatives so obtained by some 
umpecified suhiraeilvc process using optical enlargement. Ansco Color 
or Agfacolor might be used, or an nddiiive process such as Dufaycolor 
could Ik used if the prmtiog were done by three successiv'e stages 
employing tricolour filtera (Fig, 159), 

Pinchart Process. (I94K) 

French additive three-colour process, 

Crmjcrrt,—The qiuidruple objective**A"records four images on ihe 
film. In front of this bundle of lenses is a seciioual filter divided into 

2eo 






















Flo. 1^5.—Fnincibi n<%£l(ivc. 
(EArlkr 



l~KJ. 136.—Friind[j 


ifrndm 3M> 







ADDtTlV£ l'ROC£S££S 




blue, green, red, nnd n iwiitra] grey which is supposed to improve 
modeUing, in optkal sjrstcms tncorporoliag sawn-oET o^celiv» the 
imaged of a piint are not ciiculnr and are in fact luymmetrical. Conse^- 
quenily the four point images correspondlug to uny real points are not 
identi^^ (B), but leave all arouiul Uic square middle part, areas lacking 
coiDpletc synthesis, which, if nothiiig was done to compensate for this 


Fki, (SS^-FiodiiUt PrtKtH. 

error, would lead to lack of colour iKilunoe. To eliminate this defect the 
filter unit is rotated one quarter of a turn for each exposure, which 
results in a cycle of colour records dtfTering from one four-pait frame 
to the next. This would require a rotating filter for projection (I> shows 
the system in side elevation), but this is ingeniousty dispensed with by 
dyeing each part frame uniformly with tho correct colours (Fig. 158). 
Pr^Jectfoti . — No description available. 


pjii. IS9A, — llKHnaiptrtur ProJeOJOn Lena. (tLP,433,HL> 



























































Qm the 
appro- 


COLnlfH CfNEMATOOftAPIIY 


li«r:itilc TridiroEiK Proci^ (Prababiy Obsolete,) 

Addkive throe-colour process^ 

Pri^jection .—^Thc black-and-white positive made by contact fr 
on^'nal negative was tmied in led, peen, and blue dyes on tlio 


Fio^ ThoriitascoJor Cmnstn LcjiaL 

prune Trains. It wtt> itien addilivety projected ut 24 fremes per second 
by a non-iniermilicTii projector (F,P. 6&5.)i07>. 

Tliutiia.wn4)r (Richutd Tbomas Enlerpnuit.) 

aorjr/frai/on.y-American additive prooessw Quadruple objective 
camera lens unit (Fissi 1S?A and Bj. Anli'pataUai optical system 
282 









































































Fig. 160 .—^T^iomjiAcolor cnmeia. 







Thomasoolor sinwa lens. 



Prckfaciiofl lec$, 
Ftc. *«JA. 




AtJDTTIVF PROCESSIfS 


ufiknowR. Fouf^imiigcj. occupy ihc area of ^ oormal ^tiindurd frame 
(E.P, *153^221)* Type 3D beam-splitter (see OiapLei V), 

Ciwierfl,—Nomial, equipped with ihe Thomjiseolor quadruple 
objective. A number of foci are available (Fig- 160), 

—Normal. 

Posisfve. —Normal. 

/'fo/i?cjjwj."Specia! qundnipte objective with single control of 
registration of the four Images on the serceu. A locking device is 
claimed to prevent subsequent shifting, 

Commenis. — ThomH^lor is the only additive process at present 
being commcTcbily exploited in U.S.A. Mr. Ridiard Thomas has 
spent fifteen years in developing the optics of this system, but so far 
there exists no reliable informabOD as to tfie detailed design of the 
camera objectives nor of the projection unit. An extreniely unioforma- 
ti ve and very verbose description appeared in American Cwifi?iiirojfrap/?rr 
(May, 1944), p, t54* but from this article nothing whatever is to be 
extracted of the slightest vnluc. Jt would not seem that Tliomas has 
improved in any vital fcspeci on very similar optical systems already 
made familmr by French processes such as Francita and that of Roux. 
It is stated in the d^^ription referred to above that Air Chief Arnold 
was much imprest. And the foliowing absurd cluini appears: 
“Since four color separation images take the place of a single 35 mm- 
black-and-white frame, the same urea of light is actually Iransmilted to 
the screen as when black-and-white pieLures are shown.“ Thiiv is 
supposed to imply that the screen luminance wi!l be cquall We need 
not any farther comment. Another marvellous sinicmcni is 

“Sutwrimposiiion of one colour upon another elitufnates any dis- 
posidon to graininess and iotensthes the brightness mtigo of the 
colors,” (Sec Kisder, L. R.. Init^ra. Pcajectionlvt, 20 (July 1945^^ 
pp« 12-14.) Wc may take the liberty of suggesting to Mr. Thomas that 
he would gain ihe respect of technicians more surely by presenting his 
process to the world in lungnogc GomprehcDsiblc to men of sriejiee even 
if he bus to risk unpopularity with newspaper reporters, 

MOSAIC PROCESSES 

Inrolvinc do Optica] Outnge from Normal Frocediire 

Again wc must give that genius Louis Ducos du Hauron the oredit of 
being the first to conceive the idea of dividjng the photographic record 
into a large dumber of saaai-mkfOBCOpic primaiy clroieotit. cacJi one a 
minute colour fUter^ instead of making three $epanitc ** eontinuotif 
records IJJ. 

E, J. Wall suggests that du Hauron thought of applying ihe principle 
of technique of the school of French painters known us the “ Poiit- 
tillistes/* and this was the bying-dowu of juxtaposed minute dot* of 

2S3 


COLOUR CimMArOOltAFHY 

colcTtir instead of superposing three Wall notes that: it h 

obvious Uml t!ib k essentially nn additive process, and not subixaclivc, 
as lo make violet, minute dots of rod and htoe are placed stide by side, 
and to make yellows* minute dots of red and green/" 

Ducos dii Himron. in hk French patent* said! 

PoilQ. U unc mcdiode pztr liquelle h uiple e>p4niLjon fiih uir 

uuc scute suifucc. La dcs mjis ceulcuj^ $jniriles s'aCDoinplil non plus 

niDyans Ur ^trres cokirb nutb ju finj^en J'mie feuilk tPiiiiliiciUc ncouvme 
mticmliqLEcmciit d^tm grjiu Uc truis ceulcarsL 

Which may be translated: 

Finnllirp iJurre li iLpipiher mciboJ by nleirts of v^tkh \ht Iripk operanon may 
he clTrgied oa one iuufw^e. The aepuTAiioa of ihnw durKniary coluun need be 
elToclcd DO laofict by I Jute colourkl but by rnc^ nf one tjBmjMretil 

»h«i cohered mcdliaiikally with □. uuin of lbs three coJours. 

Tlie following claesiheatloR of mosaic processes yrds sug^sted in a 
paper on the subject by C t. K, Mccs and J. H, Pledge [31; 

T- Ruled UnesH 

2. Dusiing-cn methods. 

X Section cutting. 

4. Mechanical pniiting, or combination of mechanical metliDds and 
dyeing. 

Tile fii:*t Lmc screen probably made by Ptofessor J. July [J]. He 
ttes followed by J. W, McDonou^ and others. McDonough was ap- 
panrnliy the first to patcni the dusting-on method [4],. This mcihod was 
«v<iitually coimiierciaLi^ in Ihe Autochromc and Agfa plates and 
Jilmfi, The fo itncr wits based opon the patents of Soci<^i^ Aaoayme des 
Plaques et Papiers, A. Lumtire et ^ Fik (5]4 The Agfa plate was 
based upon J, H. Cliristtrtsua’A patent [6]. 

Proposals for the apprication of the mo^c principle lo motioii 
picture film date back in any t^se to L. Vidal, who suggested iJjc use of 
the Joly scTocji [7]. 

l! has been showm Uiat the resolving power of the eye i& of such an 
order that it wUt coloured lines as separiite if tbeir"^ period (twice 
their vqmralidg distance for line^ of cqU 0 l width lo the spaces) is about 
.vAfl of Iheir distance from tht eye. W, Scheffer* tind show n that horizon¬ 
tal black line* w^re visible if tlieir period waa f „ of iheir distance from 
the eye. E, J, Wall noted that blue and gti^n lend to blend bdorc red. 

Diifaycolor 35-mm. film has 2D \ltm to the miEirTOtTc. From Wall's 
statement it should follow' Ituit the Screen would still be vkibte 

' The uml atto ibc whole lehool of ptiiDten gmuped ^ Um l^t^ 

pncsudulilv tse^er profwl> iprup^d ihe jtsLlLuc of Uk iH^dilivT jince lliBy 

inviUMbly referred to these m red, ydbv^. ddU bluf. Jiixiupcdui£ yellow aini bhie 
with ibe iiUxfiiioii of teniicring iiten. 

* i9l9L Bfii. /. 1909. Citi. PJufi. J. 62 70' Ph^r 

Ifflfr., S9J0, 47p 5Sa. 

2a4 


ADDITIVE l*ftOCG3$B5 


al swms 6 Q ft in A theatre hiivm^ a 25-ft, scrwn, since ihe lines would 
be about 8'5 tnm. wide on tJie screed. As a matter of fact the screen is 
invisible at GO and also at 30 ft. The magniricatiun being 340 times 
linear, and each tine being 0'025 mm. ia width, ihe size on the screen 
would be 8-5 miTi,^ which would subtend an angle of 1' 35* at 60 A. 
(V 30* is the limit of resolving power for thtJ eye)* However, the 
visibility of the semen image seems lo be much reduced at smaller dis¬ 
tances by the additive effecis due to movements of the position of screen 
elements during tlie projection of 24 siuKewive pictures per $econd, 
Dufaycolor is the only mosaic film which hits so far been used with 
any success for cinematognipbic work.^ The proce.ss tmd iis orlein in the 
screen plate of Louis Dufay, which was sold from !91£> to as the 
Dufay Oioptochrome ''' plate. E.R 11,698. of 1908 h describes the 
method of manufactme. A master ruled screen consisting of parallel 
ruled lines is used to print upon a bichromated gelatine suriicc coated 
upon gla^ or film. This b developed and dyed in one of the three 
primurles. It is then inked up like o collotype plate. The ink takes on the 
hardened parts of the plate and noi on the coioured lines. An impxeissLOn 
IS taken upon a plain gclatinc-coutcd plate. The hitter is then varnished. 
The Tiurrthb adheres to the parallel tines between the impression of the 
greasy liniw. Upon dissolvitig the greitsy linos* [3j with benzine, cleur 
spaces are alternately left between parnillel coloured lines. The second 
printing is done at right angles to the first/ La^Uy^ the third colour 
ts applied ah owr the plate on a surface of ^aiunited gelatine. Thus 
a screen was made by a series of imbibliinns^ 

E.K 2041 1, of 1908, of Sodet^ Anonyme dm Plaques ct Papicran, .A. 
Lumitre cl scs Fils, largely covers the same grounds It U proposed to 
^^pply paralld iLiuH of sonic resist, such m a greasy Ink^ to getattne dyed 
with Que of the colours, and to destroy the colour tn the inier^^mng 
space. A second series of lines was printed at right angles to the former 
and the same operaiion repeated. At this angle a moird pattern would 
have been produced, however. la E,P. 322,433 is described the angles 
used in! he Dufay screen to avord moire. 

E.P. 217*5S7| of 1923, dcficribes a munurzicturing tcchnitine whiefi 
when fuSly developed led 10 ihe present Dufav^br process. 

DDFAYCOLOR 

{Mantifncmnni bf l?ir/a>^CVjriWfw;i: Ltd, Lomtim, En^famt) 

Ctassfficadon.--lhrt*>co\our additive screen Imosuic or r^stuti] 
process. 35-mm. negativc^positive profcssionul ttidIidii picture fifm^ 
Ctmtera *—bformiii 
Prnjt'c/fwi.—Normal. 

^ htondijimlCRr. a French fixir-coknii mos^tc OEiin, hni. bjoa dH^obed^ 

i i h to hare LOdO elefneiUi ref ^qtuire mlUimemr {I 
* First Bcrcc^al. 


285 


COtqun rrNQ^ATOORAPHY 



f'Ju. |6^A>' pf 0(1 the R^sosu prinlui^ iTuchira< 


The MAMTAtTXJBE Of RllsEAt 


The illiia ba^e hitltcrto used for the numufacture of Dufayeolor Glm 
has been ceHufose acetate, or butyiaUi (safety illJti). Methods hat® been 
worked out for its manufactuie tn the rutuie, it need be, on ccUuLose 


nitrate base identicat to that hitherto used for standard black«and-whiiE 
motion picture film. 

The process of niakinB ibe exceedingly fine paitorn of red, green, and 
bl ue, constituting the resenu (French; rwcou—a network) of Dufaycolor 
film, involves a number of stages nil of which require riaorous control 
(Rfr 161 ). 

TJic preparation of hint base for the first maiii operation of coating 
with bluC'dyed collodion Is divided into two sutges: 

266 














(i) iljeil LliUTp 

GV(r-prinE?4! whh greasy 
in litKf. 



(ij IVImc JiU'^'licfi 



(l) tJytil (i) Tint st-iht wiihcil off 

Atui rcpTinicul In Utxi ix 
righc tu the fkm #irt. 



( 5 ) Bl^-aLLtil i^) Bnil rtrilvt Jt- 

rniiv«il la iViuit fi»cBu. 


Fw. lei.—P1i«<HiniiT\igfaphH DuHiyiootw Rescau. 

Mjiipiilic^aD K IDQ Lifiair. 

Tbesc phoKOinkjOfiraphi wii^laken on Dufaytcdlor Film.therepiffKlut-tkrm 
being iitakle fmm ilie irampdreifctoL 


iJkLiBv ^ 3 * 6 ^ 








■ V 




ADnmvi? pjioriSSEJ 

(1) Ex^iuattun of base for defecrs. All defects ate cluirted, SttcH as 
casiiag'Skijn dryiDg marks. 

f2) Wiping 10 remove dust. 

Coating of Bltie-D>cd Collodion 

The coating machine consists of an unwind assemblj^, a backing 
device^ n coating devke, a means for imparting motion to the film with* 
out making any contact with the coated facc» a drying track» and a 
rewinding appamias. Motion is imparted lo the film by suction on the 
back of the film eserted ihrough a travel I ii^ endtess blanket. An 
assembly of rollers enables an anti<ur| hacking to be applied lo the 
fiim prior to the application of ihe blue collodion layer. The blue col¬ 
lodion is coated from a trough of special design by pick-up method,^ the 
deplh of coating being controlled by tlw viscosity of the solution. 
Variation of speed will also afiect the thickness of the coating. The blue 
coating is dried at not less than 95* F, and takes about four hours. 



Printing First Set 

The film is wiped and examined and is then ready for the printing of 
the '* first «t,” namely the first set of rwiat liniis between wliich the 
blue-d>-ed collodion will bo subsc<tuent1y bleached and rc-dyed green. 
Fiffu 162A and 162B show the general arnnifement of the Dufaycotor 
printing machine. 

The printing is accomplished by means of an eDgrat*ed roller or 
printing cylinder (Fig. 163J upon which is engraved a helical groove of 
twenty lines per millimetre at an angle of 23° to the edge oflto cylinder. 
Fig. 164 indicates the dimensions of the engraving. The printing ink la 
finely milled in a special medium and coloured pak blue for recognition 
purposes. The utmost care is taken to eliminate dust at this stage and 
photoelectric and inktometric conlrols track each stage. Fig. 165 
shows the roller engraving in section. ^ ^ 

At the end of each roll a portion of tlic film is tcR unpnnietL Ptirt of 
this unprinicd film is coated with a layer of bliunicn so that the Oftgitift} 
blue collodion coating is unaffected by the subsequent blenching and 

287 





CQLOUlt CINlfAtAT<HihArilY 


drying, providing 3 large ancji of green for specirojrfiolonictric dicck 
and record, 

Ulcacliiiq< and Dyeing Operation 

The film, now hearing printed Linea in greasy ink, is drawn over a 
suction table, throtigb a hoi box, and coaled on Ibe bock with bitumen. 



Fn. i 6&A.—Flow of Aim ihroirgh Drifaycolor^Dycintt^Machlne. 

^1* me• lumiuiir ^uUen^jlO 

u iio Cl wr j Jiijtii.v9 


fhtpEwcia' _ _ _ 

SEffil AUId4oitUtlW(lf> 1$ uwd/i^f 

^ luicfeJi^ fii^Er f 16^1 nkkJi ijkfiiyiAli 1 ksv wi tJw aiuk¥ii4? 

t ^ diwd br JWWR^ tlM tibH th| 3 Mf#i 41 MSiMUf kni bm'fl T> 

iLililJ ilSk wr^Ir WH a 1* tileielml, Wrt. tmi chniMd nirtw . „ iqjiia; 

hJlrfl * fftllM <l»j tfiruu^ P f^ii cumin U 

4}iiniidffJi It biitb n| tsfipwfei'loj hiui JsoaJij n4ter tS * mfiad 

^*** «BUS flT ifltndi k 1 mmija M (^12) 

ImStia tte drt ftfialicn liHC MrniFKimTCTi oftita wuliKt^y^ 

Ihi I<}'*tiiii ikrntw L«(t»i^ilirtit|||h4iia^NEtM^ Imei befmJi»Tiiif llama* 

pomu k™i ToiSau HJiw iftiirit tUs tiku piiiHL 
^ **!“ mifatt. Mf tbc Pllrt ira ttan imtn^ b'f Silfh piwm lif bk>#aw diTw wWdk 
pgub ili^uiii p ^iqg ^jnber fH]. ™ 

iwibid UiKP 41.11 i 4 , hui lira wimim riM Imci nitJ iiu 
tkj roqniw itT xb* toikl liom wul ItH pijtccaiw }4>i^ h dew Iw tMuuqg clu nbi 
itkAipEh 1 L^ulkk fcilVffli M C^ntplwd In A wrkx of ifliuLf * 4 tich ui h pkp 

«ii4n a ilkMik Idui-imdkte uon jQ 4 d iIm Ih^i 
ironi 14 'aiTHd ain./ fiuis l1kf- 4«aj'iijfui gi|Lkpd: 4 ifl 4 ii in weN> aiik i,fE ttm neaciu^T jnUdw idn 
IMaim,^ in ^yjf MX«b^uL? 

M^llNi idCT Ilm pr^ICCtrrtE UfSEf. ™ 'a- 

... - ■ dtf Ipi C^nbCf mj.bofqh; »-WiHtud fisr Ch* WM 

llWl. A ii4p*Hlf k MhUAkd b ct^Wii a lils idunlbE^ jund IIm TV-rida j ki aw^W Lhal ytUdi mmtKiiilJLm 
«ai Hi niuiJt <ir ike it*aEh* or tbi 4ti td^ opBTallueL PIiw™u 


dried, mul ihcn carried through a itrst and second bleach weir. Now il 
enters ihe dye tank, to be dyed green, from which it passes to a spirit* 
water wash, thence ihrough a spray waicr waih. throu^ blowers for 
psmoyul of excess W'otcr. over a roller running in diatill«J water and into 
a drying chamber. Next ti passes Uirough four ink solvent ninki with 
wipep to jussifil rcmova] of the ink traces, after whkli Uu film enten u 
lioal drying chamber, and Fioni tJicncc If is mwound (Pig. 

288 






















































Fw. t&li —priTi^ins machint. 

Thb macbitie prmll id 3 ercas^ ink 20 puwlEc! rulinp.to 
the mllliiTKrifc 3t uq nni^^ of 23' to lh€ cUfiff of ine 
Tht iTaDspoi^t non-flatti- bawf ha* tJftprtiMijIy 
lintTomily coated with (lie btue pnnwy ffllo4jf iiw 
(sutvHinc Oafaji^olor lETtiasx ink bems cniploycd as a 

Sufsscqucntly tlic space bcHfcccn these lii^ is bl&wJied 
mMl dyed wilh the green fwiireiry colotir. and fwal 
diswived: thus leaving pantltel coloured limiv e^iJi 
A mm. <(Aii iDCh> in widlh- ..*,.*„* 

The owmtion i& again fepented wrth primary 

colour III an nnaJe of 67" to the edi^ of ihe filrm 


FlOi^ fm 3tl) 










roller »i up for exmnjnation Thi* 
« engraved *v,h » P^rBlIc) mijn^ ^hc n^illbnetre. 

a.1 4n unjfk cf 23 lo iho of the rolkr^ 



Fw. 16 } -PhdioiRicrDsraph cf senwn of Duraycotor printjnB cylinder. 






Fici. l66.^|>tir;uycoUir iljr^np anil hkschtnp unlL 

The insp&;tion enJ uf the machine ii nrancijT Ihc izurncm. The fiiiiih^il ¥rs¥WM 
any ^nnpc JKrwi ihc ^c^virtg J KghI iind ii fciKpeiCEod hne. 










^ DuHi^rolciT rf^^rfftf. Magnifioilimi tOO 
^ «Q:uarc^ are blue, Uw FiftbEm and ibc conimudtu 

ttbrt arc red. 1 ^wre ant nearly uiic mitlido at ttoc elemcnU in one snamjUn] 
eifli J5-fiim. tnmc^<yt^^l ixL k tn.>. 


2SS) 


AtiDtTlVE PROCeSSES 


lns|wctiuD of Fint Set 

When the first set has been coiupktctj the whole roll is examined, 
The roll is uawouoii in front of fl view-box illuminated with tuitgsten 
light corrected to lllmninJiiit B A visual match is made con¬ 

tinuously along aptt hgtoss the roll with a card bearing standard pieces 
(graded) of first-set r<£mii 4 X. A copy of the recorded data is passed on to 
the production department for their use prior to the second set being 
printed. The view-box is fitted with a microscope permitting inspection 
of any point on the film. Routine examination consists of; 

(1) O^riplion of the line (Btraightness, ewnness of edge, number of 
breaks, etc.) under both high and low porvet objectives. 

(2) An estimate of the amount of pcnelrdtton of the inlced line. 

(3) An exaininauon of n sample of any spots, noting whether they are 
normal or abnormal. 

PHntiiig Second Set 

The rditiau is prepared for prinling, bleaching, and dyeing ^ond set 
in a precisely similar nutnner to first set, Sccond-scl cylinders ate 
engraved with Unci at right angles to those of the first set. 

Bleadtuig and Dyeing Second Set 

TTie only dilTerence to first set is that the dyeing is red. 

Examuuljan nf Second Set 

Co/aur.—Thc viewer is fitted witli a colorimeter wbicb cun be moved 
horizontaily across the width of a roll so that nteusutements can be 
made of any desired spot. Ihe area measured is about 1} in. 
diameter circle and is mniched in terms of additive values of tricolour 
fillers. If the colour is found to be outside a certain lolemnoc area 
the film 15 buck-coated with a subtractive fitter for modification of its 
cbromnltciiy, A detailed map is prepared of the colour characteristics 
throughout each roll. 

Varnish Coating sod Backing 

The flnai operation prior to emulsion-coating consists in applying a 
nesinuus waier-iinpcrmeable layer to the surface of the reseoji^ the dyes 
of wiiich would otherwise descnsLliw the cmtlUianH ImmediRtely aAcr 
application of the varnish layer, a solution of gelatine is coated on the 
lackv varnish and if necessary a corrective dyed gelatine back-conl 
applied by the same machine at a point immediately following Uie 
vnnush application. The varnish takes about fourteen hours to dry at a 
tempemture of about IIS' F- 
T 


289 


COtOUlE CrNIJF^TATlKlEtArHV 


Kidnl ]iti$pih^jon 
FoIluWitiJ bv! 

Prepsratjoi} for l^iulsiiid CoMllug 

The film Tccd vcs a firtal wash in a spirit-water mlxiune to remove any 
micToseopic traces of loose dye. ll is then spooled and packed for 
storage imlil it is to be coated with emulsion. 

Dufaycolar Ls printed with twenty and for oemin 
puqxjses with iweniy-thrct lines to the miUiinelte, each line iKing 
+ nun. in width (Fig. 167). ConsidciidgUificonipIcxity of ifwittanu- 
faciuring process, it mim ceiinlnly bcconsiderHi the most extraordinary 
piece of prlntlog ever achieved. The printing h remarkably even and 
very few^ irfegiUuritIcii occur. The indivhJuai line under die microscope 
is not absolutely even in w idth, but this iicompctisaled for by a venting* 
The printing machine is a superb example of precision enginefifing. 
especially when the speed of prinlmg h lecalkd. namely 10 fi. per 
mindle. 


Coi^OSlMt-ffliC SpECtnCATlON OF RHSiiAU ELEMENTS 



1 



y 

Dom^ 

Red Ekmen l 


0633 1 

0 36 5 

J7’7 

6CU 7 

Giw 3 Elenmnt . . 


(h233 ' 

0647 

43 1 

1 5496 

Bine EkiWd .. 

— 

0^14 1 


>7 

4660 


>icgQljv^Fo5itive FroecssiDg 

The original Dufaycolor 35-mm. cine dim is developed as a negative, 
and prints are made by eoruuct on Dufaycoior positive^ a practically 
mmnal mochtne being employed, except for modidoLtlDds in the light- 
source and light-contPoL 

By m£ans of the depth developer^* of 1>. A* Spencer (sec page 
112), ik%^opnieni t& restricted ID the lownr level of the emulsion layer 
in immediaie oomact with the risemi^ This eliminates desaturation due 
to LrmiiiaLion and resma jmage'Ckment spread. In the wordii of Ihc 
invenlor [ITy, 

Axiume tlmt « pure red. ubgcd tu* bwi pba^oitrapbcd. In Uk negative 

the red ctmicois alKiuld be mossed by blvKk silvcfp and ttKr and Idye 
UiTough whkji iba red Eig^l fntm the mhjecd onnoi pa^ diCN 4 ,ld be tnu^parenc 
Owirrit t4> like ipreuding af the iLK« hoiwer, Ihcie dcfncnu are paitiaUy 

mtukoJ by developed fiber. When iww ^ print from Uiii ac^.iiiva upon similar 
material to obtain the Einal positive, n sbiiitir luiivjntcO roatterin^ lake& place 
iocoaipaoicd fay n rtirtht:^ degimdaikra oE calomih. 

|i tuijght at iffii be chouidiE lhai m lOcimM 4n tntmure thnini ornitina wTHild 
compensBle for ihe rcduclion in ihc of m emn jtid blue cbmcnif 

2W 








AD»1TIV£ ^ROCESSHS 


vitikih froin the demUy ptf^d^ced b>> liglu Acaltentd fr^ nsd [ccDfdifii; 

Tc^oa. lx mmt be remember^ bowew, tkut \ht of ihc taking 

place frpni evay elem^t thmuyb i^’hlcil Ei^t passes and b, Jbetefare* in ctfoei 
tcDdins (A even mi Ihe tntowt of opactiie silver prodiioed iinikT cadi element 
Since Uk icnderm^ ^ cchiur o dEpendcnl upon lie nutEnitudo oT tl^ diifeinnoe 
bctwKti tJic salw deposits under esih of Oie ttirce sets of frtementfl4y colour Utlcr^ 
tba estnnig out h A dmtanatmf effect tending to toiroy ootour, and 4ii itwiissc 
in cspojmre when priming will do nothing lo restore ibe lost cO’louTi 



ImrrtM > i >-w 

£*## rirf i 4J# g^f'l'w*} 





iiHT 4 ^ miA-w 


Fki, I 67A.—CiuAd of lusd of satiiTjittoii whoi (me tnosoic image is prlntirJ upon 

unoihcr (Spmoer^. 


FnrtjMimiorc, the scnticriitit whldi oooun only once in the nrverpii procesiog of u 
camchi cspcwim^ and which h larfcty counseratrted by the colour control effect, 
operaua twice lit njc;pttv^poaltitTe processing to ptoduee an Intdemble de^dation 
of ihc cdkfur nsodealng. Accotdingl)^* to mala iwiiiw^pe^d'o& pto^^ 
comhiiiad malcrial n pittcticidpre^jositlflii, the irnidintijoa wHhuiiivomtdslon 
must bo reduced to n mmimum. Since ibcdcc^ the Iraasee^lcnd*into the ctnuliton 
the greuifii: the iitadinlcd bectmics, Aity technique which will confina the imagp 
to those hiycrs of tiur emulsion iwnnsat the i^jenn ekfiiRnts should uninimizE the 
scatter mpmisiblcror the dcgraiiaEjaiL 

Tliifl hpd in fact, proved tci be Uw case* ond ilic depth developer lias 
been found to give tt^uUs which arc indistiiigulsliabl^ from rc^-ersal 
positive origtoab A- SpeaL'ert E,,P- 47fl>855j. 

291 











COLOUR CiNfMATOGRAPlIY 


MoNOTHRaMATlC PjtlNUKG LlClTT 

Colour dilolion may aJso be due to Uu* ^puctral overlap in the trans- 
missions of tlic colour element!; of the r^seojj. This ttuty be reduced to 
the minimtirdi by restrictirtg the priming light to three narrow wavciengih 
groups corresponding as ebscly as possible to the rtiaximum tnuuunis- 
sion of the three rdveau colours. It is possible to print with three tiuigsteii 
filament lamps used in conjunction with narrow-cut ftliers. the light 
being combined on the printing plane, but a more elegant arrangement 
wa$ made possible by the adveol of blgh-pTcssure mercury discharge 
bmps. Such a lamp is used in conjunction with a tungsten hlament 
“ Class At" projector tamp of 500 watts which U hlteicd with a 
glass having mirow-cut tiansmisston in the ral region of the spectrum. 
TTiU lamp is housed behind the mcicuiy discharge lamp, the red li gh t 
being completely dilTuscil with a sheet of flashed opal glass. The mercury 
bmp has a very powerful fine emission at 577 M/i, which is at an unfor- 
lunate position where the overbp in the Dufaycolor red and green 
elements is at its maximum. Happily, a saturated sobiion of didymium 
chloride completely absorbs this line, while still transmitting Urn 
\mloobie emisaiou at 546 M/t (green), which is ideally pbeed. The mixed 
li^l of the TttcrcuTy and tungsten sources after passing througti a cell of 
didymium chloride (didymium glass is atmi^st equally eCfectis'e) consists 
of three manochrornatic bands whose wavelengths am 

*10 M /*‘—605 M/t (red), 

54* M/I ter«flj. 

436 M/i (ItIub) 

(wilb certain oihirr faint lines). 

This trietirooiaUc monochromnlic light prevents each primary colour 
element of the flUn-mosaie from transmitting light which has originated 
from the other two elements. The ideal is that light originating from 
one colour negative ebmem. say red, should be totally absorbed by 
the green and hlue positive clcmenis. and this is realized b the above 
urrangemcni. 


RnuuVAL OF Moltts' 

The Dufaycolor negativt record consisTs of silver densities variously 
distributed over the tiseau, the purtieubr distribution dciennining the 
colour wen by transmitted light. For example, if ihc silver densities are 
distributed so Ibai they occur only on the red eleiiuniti, the negative will 
appear mhms red (or bluc-gtcen) and willrepiesem the photograph of a 
red object. Tlic negative records tie colours of the subject as comple- 

' Ihe loudtiviiy of ibtimihinn fii»B off rapidly ei iiO Mit, w thul die picsaioe of 
uTuickngth of liJlhE QQfii^iien^ 

* StcprinlMl from Jh- Vol. (.May 193 *> pn bv 

kind peimkiioji cif ihc floysd Scdciy, c. B. Harri^. O B E. "mid 

B.O. Hprncr. . . p 

292 



AUOlTlVfi PROCtiSSES 


wCtttarics, lhat is lo the colours rellectwl by the subject ub&cnt 
from the ticwiiive. all othercoloui^ bang prescni. If ihe negative .s now 
used as ibc subj<5Ci and photographed cither by meiiiis of a camera or toy 
simple contact, the colours present in the negative will be absent from 
the print. The print will Uiepcfore be correctly coloured. For exampte, 
if the subject is red the negative will be minus red or blue-green; the 
print will be minus blue-greeri or red Tliis companiiively simpte pi^ 
wdurc is, however, complicated by the fact that the ne&itH-e, unlike the 
subject, is divided up into a icgubr pattern of three colour elements, aim, 
as is well known wlieti two simitar putiofos are placed tc^t^f, loi^- 
ference shows itself in the form of moire, which may be visible in the 
form of itnes or squares hundreds of times larger than the ditnunsions oi 
the clemcnl pattern and therefore clearly tisihle to the naked eye. 

These moire piUierns in the special case of Dufaycolor arc prodw^ 
briefly as follows—lhe dark ports of the pattern are regions m which 
elements of one colour on the negative are positioned over elements ot 
dilTcrent colour on the positive, so that the light has to pass through two 
Clements of different colour—e.g.. red and green. The lighter pans ol 
the moir^ pattern are produced in regions where the cicmeius or one 
colour on the negative cometdc examly with clemcais of the same colour 
on the positive. Such a combination obviously transmits more light 
than when the coincident ektnents are of dilTcreni colour, Pnnts made 
under such cotidiiioTiv will show corresponding dark and light areas. 

In order lo eliminate moire patterns it is necessary to do one of two 
things—citlicr to arrange that the two roreuujf, the negative and poslUye. 
coincide exactly at all points, or to destroy tlic identity of die ncsalive 
reseau in some way such that the tight falling on the positiw s 

perfectly uniform and is doi divided up inio small cleirients uf dincrenl 

colour. . . 

Ii is noi possible to apply the former method of exact regisu^ion o 
the two rtsvauM because, apart from the extreme difficulty of cnecting 
this registration with sucli small elemcois. sliritikag: due to processing, 
etc., renders it impossible lo ensure continuous registration over areas 
comparabk with the sixe of a cini picture. 

It is well known that the moire pattern produced when two refrriwx 
are superimposed varies in siw aitj character as the angle ortween e 
two r^setaix 1$ varied, und an angle can be found at which the patietii 
becomes almost invisible. The pattern is, however, stilt piesent, but is o 
very small sire, and if printing were carried out under »wh cortUiiions 
wilU no farther precautions the effect on pfujcclion would be wiy un» 
satisfactory. It must be realiircd that the paitcrn is not only undesirato c 
becau.se it produces a visible puriern on the screen l>ul because he ac 
areas which do not transmit light will fail to blacken the colour elements 
which should be blackened and to cause an addition of whire to lire 
colour photographed. For example, if the colour photographed is green 


COt-OtrR ClSEMATOGftAPHY 


the itcgHtivc wiU tniEismii red ^ind blue. In. ilns part of the prini ^^ Ijcre 
the red of Ihe ocjHtive falls on the blue of the positive, mid vice versa^ 
the blue and red eJements of the positive when finished will tra.nsfnic 
light and the overall colour of this section will be white {since the green 
elemcDi of the print will transmit m uny case). 

Et appears, therefote, that a suitable adjustment of the angle betw^n 
the negative and positive films cannot ciimiimtc mojri: a!l it can do is to 
render the pattern rather less stanhngly visible than it would be if the 
angle were such that that pattern sjjse was se^-eral mJliurbctres wide on the 
Blitt. Thb fact is made use of in the actual process because it is not 
possible £o eitsiire complete absence of moire ail the time owing to 
small vartaiions in film shrinkage and thickness which are beyond con- 
troh so the optimum angle between the r^^waux is always used so that 
any smaU residual moird pattern has kss chance of maMng itself 
apparent. 

From what has been said it will be apparent that the problem is lo 
devise a meihod of destroying the identity of the negativeby the 
lime ibc light reaches the posilfvc mean. In other words, to arrange 
(hat the positive r^stau is unifonnly illuminated. Ofp to put it in yet 
another to ensure that the lichi iliut passes through the aegati^'t 
is thoroughly mixed before it strikes llie positive 

If the two r^seaiLx are in perfect coniact* no mixiag of the liglit can 
possibly take place* and it is therefore necessary io stun by ^pirating 
the two rimnx. This can rotdily be done by placing the negative and 
positive nims front to back, or back to hack, thus separating the resmux 
by one or iW'o base thicknesses as the case may be. For quite another 
reason^ bound up with the desirability of arraneing that the posiiive 
film is projected with the emission facing the screen as for black and 
white so [hat die M>und track is correctly focused, the films nrc placed 
front to back and are thus separated by one ihkkne^ of base only (this 
tnusl be the posiTiv'e so that tiie It^l through the positisic 

r^j^eias befoit sifiking ihc pdstrivc emuhianX 

By usin^ a source oflighi of finite ai opposed lo a poini source, 
the projected image of the prgati^o r^sem will be diiTused, and by using 
an extended source of definite shape and size it is posable to dinTuse ihc 
projccietl image of the negative f^seau completely^ whilst retaining the 
nuiximuJit fK^iblc definition. 

Consider iml a pinhole camera. The image produced by such a 
camcm is a perfect projected imAgc of the object; it has the Same shape 
as the object and its ibe b simply related 10 the size of the object and 
the rraition of the pinhok (Fig, 168). Tlie Dufaycolor rheau maybe 
regnrded aA composed of a number of juxtapou^ squitre$^ each con¬ 
taining one red, one greeiu and one blue element < Fig. Ifi9). The red lines 
art actually continuous^ but we can regard ihcnt as divided up by 
imaginary lines as mdicated in the figure: let if be the length of ihe side 
294 



AT>1J'|TJV1 pROCeSSeS 


of the suuttn: mm,—005 mm. for 2(Kliiie /Viraif). Now coo- 

sider a wiy smaU nn& of any one of the aquaria pinhole in fact; il 
does not mailer what colour elcnicci it falls in, Let u$j^oie 
pitiholeby Ain Fig. 169; the rest ofthc/eseaM is considered black for the 
moment. In Fig-170 a perspcciive sketch shows the effect of casting an 



Flo. 168 . 


image of a square iUiiininated aperture by means of the pinhole A. As 
indicnied in Fig. 16®. by altering the size of the souiw or its disiaooewie ^ 
can make the image ofthe sotirec any size we wkh. Suppose we urrange 
that the image is » square having its sides pundlel to the unit squares of 




■Btu« 

1 

1 

* 

"rn 

1 - 

k 

TTfi; 

—i - 

i 

1 

1 

( 

i 

( ' 

— 

1' 

; 1 — H 

X 

r*--- 

n—^ 

( 

I 

T - 

1 

Lk 

- 1 

1 

h- 

'—{ - ^ 

♦ 

i _ k — 


( 

1 

1 

I-.- 

J l 


FKi.i69. 


the f/««a and equal to d. Nowconsidcr another pinhole B (Fi& 169) in 
an adjacem sqiiiire, situated in exactly Ihs same position rclmiwe to its 
square. The distance AB will be d. Under the same oondiliotB the 
image cast by B will also be a square of side d, and the images of A and 
B win just touch, since AB=d. By imapning a similarly situated pm- 
liolc in every square^ all pfoviding image* accordme lo the same rule* 
the result will be perfectly uniform niuitunaUon on the screen. Now we 
























COLOUR CimUAJOGRAPHY 

can furijier exteod this to include another complete set of simnady 
iitunicd pbiliolcs but diiTerent from the AB sci, and exacUy the same 
arguments apply, until firmliy we have extended the pinholes luitil ihey 
cover the whole surface, and we stUl tiavc perfccily imifonn 

iltuininationp U fottows from the above ar^ojcni ihnt the dLunufiation 
remains uniform if any part of the squares is rendered opaquCp providing 
aJJ squares are affected in the same way* so that if all the red element!!! are 
opaque the illumiEuidon, although changed in colour* remains uniform* 
Tills, then, is the method* employed for destroying the identity of the 
negative ri^stau on the copy screen, and it only remains to hud the for¬ 
mula rekting to the varioiis distances and sbes, Rererring to Fig. 171, 
the negative r^£m^ has been drawn as a pinhole because this leads to 
the nesessary condilion^ The source Ls squiire and its side is D* and the 
condition of uniTorta illumination is that the projected Image of this 



square souroe on the positive rejseau is equal in size to the elementary 
square of the negative rescai ^— be.* to the reciprocal of the number of 
lines per mm, (other dimensions must, then* be in mm.). It must be 
remembered^ however, that in this case* alihough ihe true thickness of 

the base is, $aypi*ilie effective Optical thickness h wliere « U the refrac- 

tive index of the base (its value may be taken as 1-4). 

From the geonvetry of the figure it is obvious (5.:ii[|rttar triangles) that 

t]_ /ui 

t“ r’ 

when: ihc Itlters denote distances us shown in Fi^ |Tt. The values 

</, ft. and f are more: or less fixed, so chai ratio ^ a ffsed, but eiiher D 

or T can be varied providing the other is adjusted to compensatie In 
practice it is desimhie It) make T fairiy large, say 10 cm,, otherwise 
parallis errors are iniroduccd at the edges of the fnime which mighl 
senously afTect the efficiem^ of (he elimumlion of moiii at these places, 

* Sec E,P. 44<s,67!t ip. J-tfj. 


296 











APOSTIVI: PROCKSSES 


Tsking a typical cxtunplc. let d^G<3S min^ (20 *Ijiio), t=»TiArT 
0-125 and let usIixT at tO cin.=l 00 Tnmr 

The side of the square source wmild under these cojiditioM have Xo be 
5^6 cm. 

It is clear from what has been said Ih^t the sides of ilie square source 
must be parallel it> the square r^seau unitSi or in oilier words parallel lo 
the red lines in the negaiivc rdseau. This accounts for the angle ai which 
ihe square mask is id in the printer^ 

In pmcticc the above formula may be us^ In dsaigning pnnterSt but 
It is always desi ruble to nUow h liliAe latitude ia the position of the mask 
lo allow ndjusimfifiis to be made. It can be seen from the formula ihal 



Tto. iJh 


if ihc po^tive base thickness changes from 5 to 5| thousandths of an 
inch» the coirect disiauoe of the mask will chan^ from 10 cm. to 11 cm* 
The diffcreiicc In moire between two such dJsiaaoes omi and 

if the very best results are to be obtaintd the base thickness of the 
individoal positive uinteda! being used should be nUomd for. For al) 
ordinary purposes, how^evrr, the distance tnay be set for the average 
positive thickness. 

Finally* it is useful to make any final adjustments of distxmoes by moans 
of a lest assetnhiy. This coiisists of two pioescs of film* one of which has 
been fixed oui* The r 4 :*sem side of ihe fixod-oui film ts cemented (sec- 
cotine) to the base of the raw stock so thut the red Irn^ of the iwn 
r^sfatix are almosi pamliel and a large moire pattern consisting of durk 
bandit about 2 mm. apart is visible when the assembly Is placed in front 
of a point source^ The white emulBion lay^r uf the raw stock acts as a 
pcTfcctly diffusing translucent screen and so shows the paitem as H 
would be recorded on the emulsion. By placing this assembly in Lht 
gate of the printer the final adjustmenl of the mask position can be 












COLOUR ClNEHATOGRAPilV 


readUy delcimiitcd as the position at whkfa the pattern is least visible (U 
stiould dEMppear entirely at one poshlon). IT it is r^uirod to adjust Ute 
primer for a special print, a test assembly can be made'm a few minutes. 




Fm. I72A.-EP, 446.670. (S- IX ThnarfsOW). 


usttxg a sample of the positive stocit to be used hi the actual prinimg as 
the raw stock; say piece of plain r^secni will do for the other piece (jho^ 
adding it has the same sh» risem ai the negative to be printed, 20* 
tine, etc.). (CEMrikifoa of quoratim from Dr. Harrison V paper,) 


29S 


























ADDITIVE FROC^SSIS 


Table SI 


AwT^dtufiTj 

fiu^oTior of t56-rfW.> 

OriTiti^ 

Aperttfrt in mm. 

fym 

too 

<y\ii 

101 

0-I2S 

102 

0)29 

103 


m 

0-lM 

105 

0-133 

106 

OU5 

m 

0137 

109 

0'i3a 

ItO 

0140 

111 






FW. 112B-~British ftilnil 1934 (S. D- Tlwieailroldl. 


299 



































COLOlfR CiNEifATOGRAPKV 
E-P, 446,679 

S. n. UM. !i„ o,. , 

sn«i> nulcrial m priDtwJ by 

« s" ™ ai u S '’*• ot'dillUKd Heiii from 

io ihl^.f ‘ ^ ^ ctoss-Mcuon otlhe beam isadjusitJ, ajxorOins 

SalL aaaociawd wilhVhc 

»py ""“S' W ofd» orisiJa,^ 

bv thi- <nii^ or - anginal anil i:opy Jicrei&Bs, ifie angle 0 subtended 

i*=2 tan ’,7d ‘f» Sh-cii by ihifomola 

ana™”/! {‘*1 "?''>■ "S^‘ ■'‘'‘■“Si <>«> 

inifu- ” I Jbrough the cfcmenis of one colour (c g red) 

wfl T ihefcaver: 

comprisioc r«! oilier colour of a thret-coluur screen 

soSiW^ “Id smpes fomieJ of alicmate blue and green 

desired spread'^*^h light-souree, is ciikulaied to give Ihc 

.-n J blue 

Printing MaeUne^b 

mac&ii<ls^£vc a^jS''ulSrstondJS"m’ rP'^pritidng 

example W ViitZ^l nl r.!n Dufaycoinr. Por 

desigjt conixS. ■ “ 'tiechanicai 

prSerK'ihi^^";?^ Vinten-Dufayx^or 

fiJm printing machines '" rotary contact 

their respective mke-ofrE anH a* .“'’d posPive are brought from 

ing an exposure slit. The porioteE incotporot- 

sproctet. n»e hvo JTer 

sprocket whkh is di-^n l ® ™ gaiCi puja over a common 

ohmliwd between the driven w^tl« ^ 

iains the tivo films in close spr<^kci tnaiti- 

AJlcr leaving the driven sprocltci ihr n *t ^ slut in tlic gate. 

spool. The 'positive mtiSTltb 

to * second printing head, where it cLiiI!”rtr 

negative, and evemually the " married " Zinr< 

of the machine. Tile tw o heads mav Vw ^ *Poolcd up at the end 

independently of one another, The sJiu^dSd^Tte ZdT^ 

ordinary bbek^-white stock if nccessaS^r mt 


iOO 



Fid 173A ^Vintcn-Duffl^lo^ 35*10111- Him combmctl sound 
and ifKtim praiUng oaidiJiK <4»fitimio«* 







ADDITIVE PROCESSES 


Ught-Saur^ 

T1i« ligJji used for priutiRg Dufaycolor consists of a SOO^wolt tuitspscen 
lamp, ibfi light from which passes through a rtaiTow-ciii Chromex 523 
tamiimted glass filter on to a prism (Fig. 175B). The pmm turns the red 
beam through an angle of 90"' and passes it through ihc arc of a 400- 
wall mercury high-pressure discharge lube. The combined tight from 
the two lamps is now taken through a liquid didymiuiti-chloridc filter. 



Fm. l73R.“En£rE>' Di&tnbulion of Lifiht fr-nin haUWAtt souree (JllumlnAnt \ i 
rihci^d by Q Stamiimi Nuitijw Cut ftctl fCbctwnei S23}i 

Above the didyminm-chloride ceir is a sliding filler holder for a 
compensati^ Rfter which meoTporates the Harrison aperture of special 
form and dimensions (Fig. 174)^ 

Light CtJfttrol 

The priming light is under control boih for (a) imensity and 
(h) colour. In the case of (ci) there are three neutral filters of difTerent 
densities mounted in slides which are Inserted into Ihc li^l track auio- 
maticaUy (Fig. 17!^^ In the case of (fr) there are si* colour fiUers in 
Bimihtr slide mauntings. These slides are operated by solenoids, 
which in lum are conirolkd through the wcIt-known synchronously 
moving band principle^ which operates as follows! The negative to be 

* Didyjuiuta aliUs iicquaJly etfoctn'e. tConmiB No. 5120 or Chonm ON I6J 

301 


































COLOUR tJN£MA.TOORAPlIY 

printed is pbiccd on the grading inachtac, and this punches a pardunent 
band, 70 mm. wide, vrith the combination ofilgfat intcnsUy ami colour 
correction whicb is required. As the negative is wound ihroiigb the 
grading utachine so the papw band moves in a ratio of 1 :100 with the 
negative, and at each requisite change of light the chan is punched 
accordingly, This method obviates any mutilation or damage to the 
negative^ and the chart, once punched, will last for the printing of JOO 
copies. When printing, the chart is placed on the machine and the 
negative laced wi^ its synchroni^ng mark at the printer gate. On 
starting the machine, the light changes come into action at the point 
Jetemuned on the grader; the whole process from then on ts fully auto¬ 
matic, The light for ihe sound printing head is a noimaj iOO-watt 
tungsten lamp. 



nerncMtnir liwqji « 

QUFByau.QB PHinrin 

FW. IT4, 

Pholwneirk Light C^irolftted to f^i/iteti-Dufayeohr Printers 
Jti practice ti has been found that the mercury vapour lamp forming 
pa^ of the Dufuycolor ti^t-souree is incHned to vary in emission. The 
object of the photomciric control is to enable the printer operator to 
check the light emission from ihe mercury vapour lamp during printing, 
Tlie apparatus consists of a photronk oeU luounLcd integrally with 
the printer brnp^housc, and a micro-ammeter in circuit with this cell. 
.A hand^lieel control icsistaooe in the mcicury vapour lamp circuit is 
also pan of ilw system. The use of the uppuiniiis is us foUowsr At any 
tiuio the operator pulls out a knob on the front of the bmp-house, this 
section opening a shutter which eaposcs the pboironic eeU to the light of 
the mercury vapour, thus causing a current to pass ihrmigb the micro- 
amnyrier The latter mstnimenf then shows the emission of the lump, 
and if any vuriaiious occur froai the prodetennined setting the variations 
one compensuted for by the use of the wheel control on the tamp 
rraistunce. 

302 












AXH31TIVI: PKOCES3ES 


Colour Gradidj;. Diifaycotor 

Dufii3'X^>!or prince is eflbctcd by Jight cojisisting e^crtlMly of three 
TnoncxilirDmalic bands, and the coJour control is obtained by nitana of 
three sets of compensaLing biters each designed to reduce the intensi ty of 
one of the tends without affecting tlic othm. 

Tliese hiLers^ w hich axe njageflta+ cyan (blue-green)* and yellow in 
colour^are oiade in an arbitrary series of depths numbered t, 2,4p and K. 
and these may be added logcihcr in combinaiions to obtain any desired 
internediare toIiic. Thus Magenta 4^ Magaoia 1, Cyan I, \'ellow 2* 
Yellow I mighi be used, and these would be referred to as a setting 
of 5-1-3. 

The action of these fitters on the print is to increase die complc- 
memary colour as each filter is iocreased in depth, and liiis may be 
worked out from first prtiudples thus: 

Suppose the yellow filter to be increased in depth, this will decrease 
the blue printing ILgbl and decrease the silver deposit under the blue 
squares of the rSjsem^ lea^ng the red and green elements unchanged, 
lids will incrense the blue on the print| and in a similiir manner an 
increase in depth of the magenta Ditcr will produce a greener and, in the 
case of the cyan filter^ a redder print. 

The first step in producing a print is the choice of a representative shot 
Of shots for tesin These shots should be chosen to contain a good variety 
of colours, c:spcctalJy ligh t dcsalurutcd tints ond nculXHls^ as these arc 
far mure nfiecred by colour correction than more saturated colours; and 
after printing al a trial setting, or in cases of dauhi ni a range of settings, 
they are process!^ normnUy and allowed to dry before esaminatiojit as 
otherwise paralLix difRodiics wilt arise, due to swollen gebtdtte. 

On viewing either by daylight or pTcfcKibly by a good artificial day* 
Jlghu colour correcuons may be applied either by first principles of by 
the use of Table 52, an increase in the filter Itt each case meaning an 
increase in the depth or number an the arbitiaiy scale. 


Table 52 


Cfcfiits'r h 
tnereoK Uepth of 
(Minus Criten) 

Incrause dlcpth of 
(Minus Rcdt 

1lK»4«4 dct^ltl of VflLLOW 
(Minudi ftluej 

Docreaw depth at M.^o&fTA 
(Minud Gma) 

Drereue d£$3Eh of Cr^ 
(Minus Red) 

T>ei:rease de^ih of YiaiiOW 
< Minus BSuep 


m Print CeJter. 

TncreaBc of 

gf Reo 

tiicieiuc of Bi-Pt 

Increuc of Roi Jud ULtrt 

locieax gf Btui und Ojjien 

fmrtiease of Rpd and Qwn 
rrhu b equAl to Kti incmiSB of 
Ytilaw PT decfeax of ltEuc.1 


J03 


COLOUfl CINEMATCKjRAFHV 


In certiitn cases i1 may be desired to deoneose a particaUr filter by 
more thiin there is acitmlly present at \hc to make a jnint 

which had beei^ made at 2J.0 more yellow—and this rnay be done by 
increasing both the other filters together, since if we decrease both Uie 
red and green priming lights we shall rdaiivtly increase the blue, h 
follow* from this that it is never necessary to use all three types of Hlter 
togetbe/^as any one may be replaced by a reduction in the other iwo. As 
a patter of convenience in the piesent machine a small amouni of 
magenta Qiter is usually retuined in order to Dvoid changing tivo fitters 
at once. 

Two points of pnicticaj iruponance arc, firstly^ an ineiease in lUters 
implies a decritase m total light avadabk. and the neuLr^ gruding should 
be increased by one point for each iwq filter points; secondly, the 
magenia filters are not as cfTcctivc as the cyan or yellow and two points 
of magenta arc approximately cquivaJent to one point of i;yan or 
yellow. 

The final lest of any film must necessadly be on the screen, but by 
using dayligb or a good artificial daylight for viewing, and in particular 
by always tiffing the same light, it will be found that a very' gocNJ idea of 
ihc colour balance can be obtained. 


Cmapeiisatuig Fitters 

It b undoubtedly bad practice to use a large number of gelatine filters 
between the priming irast am) ihe film. The jiumbeT, except under 
c3(£epiioual cifcumstajiced^ should bo kept down to two or at the most 
ihree. \Vhcn a number of gelatines are placed together they aJwnys 
appear"" milky " und scatter light to a greater or less extent according 
to their freedom from munipHlatJoii scratches. Fikera that become 
scratched stioidd be discarded immediately. 

The siTe and position of the printiiig mitsk arc accurately determined, 
ma any iculicr ininoduccd between the mask and die fiim will cause a 
chan^ in size of the nm&k as seen from the film and also 

modify the distribution of the light. The greater the diffusion or die 
nearer the difi'us.mg medium to the film the greater will be the disiurb- 
^oc to the illuminating system. The cITect b roughly analogous to the 
iniLroduciioit of a difTtisiog filter into a camera bet wee it the lens and the 
film, iti diis case the nearer the filter to the lens die greater the disturb¬ 
ance of the image. 

The result of using filters which dilTuse the light beiwccn the mask and 
the film in the prmteT will be to cause loss of dtfinUion and loss of con- 
Irast. Loss of defimijon rwults iVom the effective size ct the mask being 
increiw^ ami losi of contmst will be due to light cnlcring obliauely 
through the negative being rcflecled several times between ihe 

ticgattve and posiuve reborn am) causing a gcncml spread of light which 


A1>E}ITrVR PROCESSES 


i> DuikiQg no cnnlributinn to ibo inuge proper. This wi]1 approKimate 
the rc^till whicb would be obtained by siving a uniform flash exposure 
to the posilise film before processing, st procedure which would cause 
fog and loss uf contrast. The final result will be that exposures will be so 
adjusted as to give clear whiles, in which case blacks will Imse a low 
density, and a £o|\ print with low maximum black wjH be obtained, A 



Fig. Bliick-aud^Ulio <iad DiUaycelor eooipiinaJvie rrsqucocy respoose. 

further undesirable conser^ucncc of using diffusiog filters will be ihoi the 
system will no longer eliminate moire as it was designed to do, though 
m practice this will probably not be apparent. 

The ItMis of definition and coattasr is a wry real effect, and precaU' 
tions should be taken to employ the minimum dintuion betw^n ihe 
mask and the film in the same way that no good oamemman would use 
a dirty or icmiched filler on his camera. The use of a large number of 
filters can readily be owrcomc by having available a sufficient range of 
ti MB 

























































rOLOCB ClNEMATOCRAPHY 

ihfi ticccssury colours. U is ijiea thcortitically never necessary' lo use 
more tbaa iwo liliers at u time, but nJlotving for praetksij difDvUltic$ 
whtcb may ansc occasionalJy, allowance for Ihrac fillcri at a lime should 
be ample. 

SiniiHt Repfodnetjon 

Ttiking ihc distance apart of ibc ted lines on the r^semt set ni an an^ 
of 23'—0-05 mm.—und assunting a 450-iiim. speed per second, we get 
9,000cycles, at wjiich a ^ght sound might be gtvetL This is comparable 
to 0 )5 in variable density, and is not serious. There U a loss of about 
14 db. in ouiptii, which is negligible, and a slight tncnnise in the loss 
from 3,000 cycles upwards (Fig, 176). 

Varinbfe density tracj; has to be printed witll red lighl owing to the 
lack of penetration in ihc case of printing with blue ITghi. The very 
advantages which are given by reduction of scatter and surface printing 
with blue or ultm'riokt light are ncgaiived by the cfftxt of the hypo- 
devetoper, which is active on the surface tirst of all. With red light 
mntimum penetration is obtained. ELKcellciit variable area traclts 
are priaital, since I lie ^titiition is actually improved by the depth 
development. The conditions In so far as gamma is concerned are much 
the same as in normai blacfc-and'white practice. Positive is geticmIJy 
developed to n gamma of I'SO-l'OO. Density of unntoduloied trick is 
0-60 (rdieau density lakcn as zero). 

The sound track is printed on the emulsion side of the film by a 
normal sound-priniing machine. Sound track has been quite succcss- 
fidiy recorded on Dufaycolor vc. Even when recorded tfirougii the 
rernn/, the quality is good enough for news lilias. 

Camera 

DufiiyeoJor 61m may be exposed in id existing cameras. There are, 
however, one or two miiioi refincmeats which must be attended 
to in Order to obtain perfect results, First of nil, since the picture h** 
to be exposed through tlie fistau^ ii follows that ihc emulsion is 
turned awTiy from the !ens iiitd the image is therefore formed on a 
plane which is behind the normat, a distance equivalent to the thick* 
ftc$s of llie bitu^ Taking the refracUve index of the base into con- 
Mderaljtin this distance s^uld be four thousandths of an inch furlhor 
back. The matiufaetuTer can re*scalc the Sons, and similarly he can, in 
enme^ lUch us die Vitiicn or the SiticLiir, adjust the ground^^ass 
focusing screen. Altcmntivdy, any competcfii opemtor am determino 
a new iulmity point on Iijs existing scale by pboiogniphic test, and, 
placing an arrow at this point, all other dislanccs marked on the 
will be correa when brought oppoaic the new arrow. This is a perfectly 
reliable ctnpiricul method. Refocusing is of imponance for shonrfoctis 
306 


ADDITIVE PftOCESSES 


fcn^c«—say for any kns of Iftss ihan 3 in. focus. Anoiher nseitoii can 
be uKd for camtra$ which have mcan^ for Jonking directly through 
the filwi. Place a piece of Dufaycolor film in ihe gate; the lens being at 
full apertitre. (It wdJ be observed ilieL Jt is easy to see the image as long 
*is the object is iUumifmLed by sunllj^t.) Foe its iho telescope of the eye¬ 
piece sharply on the rejcau pair era* which can just be ob^rved. Then 
Tocus the lens on infinityr always turning the focMsing ring, or other 
control, in the same direction (coming on to inGnity from a point beyond 
it). When the image is at its sharpest point it will be found iliai the 
pQsiiion tcachcd on the engm^'ed scale 15 a little beyond the nornial 
mfinity murk. Engrave a point opposite the position found and proceed 
as instructed above> It is of interest to note that if one cannot sec the 
iitiBgc clearly through the film tt is of liItJe use to attempt exposure. 

The fact that the emulsion i.s the Opposite way round in the 
necessitates great care 10 avoid scmichcs. W. Vinten Lid, recess the 
back element of the camera gate eapcciaUy for work with Dufaycolor. 
The Dell Howell Company polish the bask of the Eyemo camera gate 
and burnishnD metAl parts which might eomc into contact with the Gtmp 
Lit tie imuhlc lias been expcricncod with the NeuTOan Sinclair camera, 
nor with the .Debrie, Tlie rollers used for pressure in the Mitchell gate 
ate perhaps rather dangerous. It has been suggested that it might be 
desirable to recesis these rollers by a ihousandih of an inch, in any case 
o\TT the picture ansa, if not on the edges of the film. Undoubtedly special 
precautions should always be taken with Dufayvolor to be ccrinin that 
lire gate is perfectly clean and that no emulsion psirticlcs have adhered to 
any slide or pressure pad. The film should be frcquEntly ins]KCtcd 
between shnts^ 


Two Ttpts of NfcCADVp Emulsion .AvAtt-Amj: 

Dufaycolor cUti filni is made in two types, known as Type and 
Type LG. The former Ls for work in daylight or high“iiitcn$ity arcs, the 
latter is wdusively for photography by the Dght of iacundcsccnL 
{ilament lamps. Type LN. has a daylight Weston rnltng of 6, The 
exposure Table 53 gu-es a rough idea of the apcriure far various 
condiiioEis in England in the summni’, 

Neither of these siocks requires a fitter for their respcciive illniumant^. 
Type LG. is bhluTicccI for filament lamps of about 3,000^ K, colour- 
temperatutt. On the other hand. Type l.N. Dufaycolor is balanced for 
sunlighL nr for it 5 eqiuvnlenL high-tntensity arcs having a oolour- 
tempcmlure of 6,tXlO' K- 

For exterior work Dufaycolor lechniciEuisi utlvige the use of nn 
exposure meter ^uch us ilic Weston Cin^ Exposure Meier, with which 
the correct aperture may be read dJtcetly. This rnetcr possesses ihc 
advantage of a smal^ acceptance angle (approx!mntely 251 correspond- 

307 


COLOUR CI?JE»AtOCRAPH¥ 


TAflL£ 53 .—Exposure Tabi-b 



iW/iite 

1 

1 

Sumhiat 
(Bfvw 1 
Skifx}. 

OrvroLsf 

{Swt 

1 yiyUttf 

L(^ht ' 

Com- 
pktvfy 1 

Oitf^W 

IMHf. 

1 

afui 

DiilL 

Disldm builidings . 
Wide ftrccts 

Open 1 

/7W 


m 

m 

my 

or max. 

availibk 

aperture; 

Near view^ of boux& 
ffigum miikUe 

/f5 

1 

m'i 

my 

1 

1 

Ckl9C-Up5 JUbd |{tOUp» 

mi 

' m 

m 

Full , 
apertiiie ^ 

1 

1 


ing to thm given by a SO^mm. riiti Jens. Type I.N. emulsion has a 
fjiirty long iitraight4ine response, hut ihc user cannot cjcpcct u latitude 
equuJ to btock'and-whiis emulsions. For this reason serious crron in 
exposure arc not pcmtissible. Ovcr^JxpoiUhc is much 10 be preferred to 
under-exposure. The limited scale forbids eonecl rendering of light 
values exceeding a scale of five to one. The object should always be to 
record every part of the subject on the stmighi-line part of the response, 
but in many ^tuntioos this is ttnpossible and a compromise must be 
made. Certainly extreme comrasU of light should be avoided unless a 
ftpeeial effect is requiml. 

1.0. sloek has a somewhat longer scale ihjin Type I.M., and it bas 
shown itself capable of rendering the subtlest gradalioiis of eotour, 

Aitiflcial Lighting far Dufaycolor; Type LN. 

The makers strongly reconamend ifuit any production, the majorily 
of sets of whkh exceed the dimension of. say, 2(1 f(_X 15 It. should be 
photographed on Type I.N. stock. It is essenrial that individual lumps 
emit light which is steady in quantity and quality. The colour-tempera- 
tutc of oil the lamps on the set must be matched, and the distribution 
should be as even as it b possible to obtahi. Hot spots must be avoided. 
The Mole-Richurdson rungc of studio arc lamps meets all the required 
condiiiojis. Earlier types of arc lamp semetimts found in studios in 
Europe are as a rule uosatiaEactory, and are obsolete for colour photo¬ 
graphy. Such tumps are unsteady beciiuat they are hiind fed and Ihcif 
colour-tempcraturc is unmatched. 

JOS 








AomriVE paonssts 


Tunptea glandetii lamps may be oocasiojialJy used with Type J,N. 
stock, but the wattage iequtreiiUea«ssive. A Dufaycolor filler fT.D*> is 
available for laiung the coloyr-icitipemture oT the tun^ten light to ihe 
equivalent of the high-intensity arcs, namely from 3310’ 6,000" K. 

The luminance levels required for LN. slock, assuming a lens aper¬ 
ture or/y2. shutter at 170'. and 24 framea per second, wilt be; 


I Front U^hiinc - 
Indfknt light • Hlgbfighu 

\ Shadow urcM 


650*750 foot-ciMidJei 
750^1,000 ,, 


Any pan of ihe subject the luiT(inance of which is less thitii 250 
root-^anilies will be nndciDnpo^. 


Type LG. 

The principal rsquirement is ihai ihc iiingsten filaitieni lamps for 
which ttij!; stock Is baLancct! im$>i be carefully ceuitched in colour^ 
temperature. It is filghly inadvisable to use old lamps. Studio projector 
lamps of high wattage should not be nuACd with general service liimps 
which arc jilted dilTcrently and have a loiver oolour-leitipcrature. 
It is Impracticable to mist natunil daylight or liigh-intensiiy anrs with 

tnkics-** The lamps should be run ai iicotour-tempcratutcof not less 
than 3^00° K. The lummanfs levds given atnive for arc Jighling also 
apply to LG. stock. 

Loao in Ktt^wATTS REQUium tOK ^ Given Set 

As a rcugli indiattlon of the load needed for Type LG. slock to light 
H given set with lurvgAtcn fitaindni lamps^ the Following formuU will be 
fotiniJ helpful: 

(1> Load in kilowatts^ CO% 

where D is ihe distance froin the esmera to the back of the set 
w feeL 

(2) Also load in kilowatts—lOTb CD\ 

where D is the distance from the camera lo the back of the set 
in mctM. 

C in both formulie h a constant for each lorn; see tabic below: 

Ci^mtarri C. 

Qdl 
.. (IhW 

.. CK^S 
*. 0-03 


Lrrrj. 
3S mm. 

SO p, 
75 


^lnkeHzp for Dufay color 

The public in their judgtnenl of the rightness of tlie colour quislity of 
films are tiniumlly prone ^o concentaraie uptm those colour lones with 

3W 


COLOUH CJS'EVfAT6GItA(»KV 

M^bkh tlwy suppose thcmsejvei la be most familbr, und perhnj^ ibcrc 
h£iA been ao objcctioii more promineni thiii ihe \lesh colour is noi 
rigibL The best jnKull u achieved by the use of tlie absolute minmiLm 
of itLakc-up, and it l£ quite certain that any womun^ or for that matter 
any man, properly ma^c up fat Dufaycolor could be %ecn irt the $trcct 
without attracting undue aitCBtion. 

There is. no standard make-up to be obtained from one jar and ap¬ 
plied to alJ complexions for colour mematography. Each todividuaJ 
must be considered sepanitely. There are tw'o gui^ng factors for con¬ 
sideration: 

The natund colouring of the IndividuaJ, which musi form the basis 
on w'Uch to work* 

2. The type of ebameter to be portrayed. 

According to these factors am determined the amount of make-up 
and the actual tones of tnake-up used. 

IssrnucTiONS on Appucation of Make-uf 

It is impoitoai that ihe under which ihc colour make-up is done 
IS dayli^ii; or a good ortifkbl dayUgfiL Special glasses cai^ be obtained 
ou application to Diifay-OiTDinex for use by the make-up artiat wluch 
will enable him to sec his work exactly as. tt will appear on the soroeUi 
Max Factor ouike-up has proven saiisractory^ and it should be used in 
accordance with the following instriictiniu. A table of Max Factor 
shades Is attached. 

Applying Ci^e Make^up ^—First clean the face wiiii melting crnam^ 
and wipe clean with soft lissue. Pat on a Liny bit of skin freshener. 
Then moisten the sponge, squeezing out ihe surplus water. Rub sponge 
firmly over cake und apply to the face, beginning with the fotehead. 
You can either wait for it to dry, err pat gently with soft tissue, which 
wiU hnswn the drying process. Then brush over with a powder brush, 
and complex your make-up as muni All areas of flesb visible to the 
camera must be made up in accordance with the individual make-up. 
It is importfljiL Uml this shoidd be applied direcUy and evenly, and then 
brushed over. Quantity of pancake used iv as required. 

Applying Uning Cotours.-^Bdor^ applying:, the lining colour should 
he s^tficncd with cnam, reducing the present consistency about SO per 
ociit, Tlwn apply by patting. Do not rub. 

PtiH>deti/tg,~FoT cotour make-up neutral tinisonly an: used. Powders 
the same tone as the foundalion are generally used. The purpose of 
powdering is to heip the texture of the skin, i.t. to give a man surfuoe, 
nnd it bus nothine to do with ilic colour of the skin. In some cases 
iadc or no powder js required, (.e. for some chaructets a slightly greasy 
texture u preferable. Before applying the powder be sure that the make¬ 
up is thoroughly dry, then, wUh a powder brush, brush briskly to remove 
all surplus make-tip. Tlie bnislting helps to Smooth the enttre surface 
JtO 


APDITIVE J»JtOC£SSES 


And ^$0 lo remove an^ Aurplu^ amoimt which would ordiaarily 
appear too hca\7. Then powder by setting ii over the entire^ area lightly, 
using about one-iliird of the usual arnoutit that is used in comparisoii 
with grease-paint mukc-up. Aflcr you have powdered, again brush it 
wiih yotir powder brush—iMs lijne lightly. 

Applyitl^ Rouge.^Dty rouge is the most saiisfectory for females. 
Tlie dry rouge for tine cheeks is applied with a powder brash+ and is 
blended so ihat thero w-ill be no demarcation on the edges. Gtouk 
rouge is better for males. This should be sUppled on. Use only suFficient 
colour for Street Tnake-up, Watch the complexion carefutly during 
shooting, since changes nmy dccot- 

Apptymg lip Rouge. —Apply the lip rouge in the usual muuncr, bui 
sparin^y. There should only be enough Up rouge colouring to cover the 
natural tip pigiticnl. tr in applying, there is a surplus of rouge on iho 
lips, remove by inserting a tissue and impressing the lips on this tissue, 
which wilt absorb the excess quantity. Lip gloss used sparingly is 
advised^ This helps to keep the ip rouge even in appearance, and 
prevents caking. 

Applying Highlights SiuidBWs .— ^Wbc never it Ls necessary to use 

liighllght^ or shadows apply 11 lo the areas before using the b^se 
colouring, in other words, the highlighti^ and shadows are undenieath 
the base make-up. The highlights or shadows can be applied with a 
water-colour brush. The brush is first mobtened and then rubbed into 
the proper colOEinng of cake moke^upt and then applied to the neces¬ 
sary areas. Have this thoroughly dry before applying the base make¬ 
up^ The base make-up will nut mudge the hi^lighb or shadowy. 

Use of Greose-Faint. —Grease-paint is never used as the foundation in 
place of pancake for Dufaycolor* It can be tired in certain <^scs for 
highlights, shadowy, to cover scnr5, etc*, hut then only in very small 
qtianiities* The same nin^ of tones is used as in pancake. 

Sponges. —The reliction of sponges ts very important. Be ^urc to 
select a fine-gialn sponge of a ver>^ resfl silky texture, and if possible of 
Ore typo that has not been bleached. 

Artificial Eyrlmhcs. —If required these can be used quite satisfac¬ 
torily, 

Geocrat Remarks .—A colour make-up is best an hour or two tiBer 
application, when traces of aoticcitble artlfidaJily disappear and the 
natural $kin texture of the individual penelralcs the make-up. The 
nuike^up has by that lime become pAtl of the imlivldual. Usuiilly a 
make-up will last for the whole day’s work. It can he retouched and 
repaired as nccetSHiry. 

TTie above outline applies to stiaight nutkc-ups for eolemr ctnemn- 
tugraphy. The same principles apply to chameter work: i!ic more 
natural in appearance and colour these can be made to look the more 
satisfactory the result 


311 


COLOUM CINUMATOC^RAF^KY 


Ta^lb 54. Max Factoj^ Make-uf for. Oltbavcolor : Su-ggissteb Usb3 


For Nonml C^mpkxions 

For pnth Bfid VeEfow Compleiiom , * 

For itniFKlicf^ — Vcfy Fiiir Coroplexiorw 

- Salfow or Etarfc Qiptipleiiont 
For ^ndcs^Vcry Fair Compb^ionv 
For Kighijghu _ „ 

For ShfhloiviTig _ 

For Pip^^dcring .. 

ForUim , 

For Oiijekt {Ury Rouge) 

FtjtEy^ - 


Ko. ilM Pmic^kr 

iSTo. 31L 

No.^m 

No. 2AQ 

No. 21R 

No. 2(P 

No.^H 

No. lA Nculnl Pow-der 
VeminkifL and CarmiiK Up$ti^ 
Carmine Rou^ 

No. ^ Eye Lining 


For NotniflJ C^mptsikm^ 
For Very Dark Completions 
For Fftir Complextoni 
For Shadotviag ., 

Fi*r Higlilights 

For ^iftrne Highlighta 

For PoweJering * ^ 


Afra? 

- . h. No. 24EI PaocaBc 

, r No. 24K^UL or 25HV Pancato 

a- .. No_a4G 

.. N0.35HY 

.. N 0 . 2 IM 

N0.2JP 

, » No. 3A N^futra] 


Negative Dcve{o]»iieiit 

The various types of Automatic developing machines found in 
fflodefn processing inboratories are oil suitable for the development of 
Dufoycolor negative. Tank machines are periiups preferable to tubular, 
as the latter may cause “ flow ” marks. The time of development h 
short. In standard VijitM machines with the following formula the 
time is five minutes at d5’‘ F., and development is carried to a eumma 
of 0 95 (sec Fig. I77>, 


Diifaycouir 35*mm. Negative DEvaopra—F ormula D.S,9 


M«yi 

Scoiuffi Sulphite tCiysUd) 

TlikouIrhitelHypoI *" ” 

m. itromidc 

Dissolve A In SOOcx, ^uater. 
Sodiuni Hydrauk (Caimlc Soda! 

DUsnlvc B In 300 u. of w-aier. 
Take equal roiu of A and It. 


2*5 cm. i 

I 2'3 I 

5 .. I 

M .. ' 


2-5 gut,—B 


Sotulions A and B keep well scpnratdy. When miaed Ihc life of the 
developer w shori, A 24-giiIlon tank will develop 5.000 fl, of Qlm. imd 
It ^ouJd then be thrown away. The developer is not very cosily to 
make up, otherwise the rapid deterioration of the bath would be a 
^rioug dtftrcL from tins laboraioiy c^^ing ^pect. 

ft-oyfei/nn.—Norma! But Diifuycolor Rim cannot be properlv 
appnxiatcd in theatres equipped with lighFsourees which are in- 






PRUCi^SSf^ 


adequiite for black xind while: and thk cun be unfortimately^ of 
many Hritish iliaitres: Since the r^seau is responsibk for ihe abHorption 
of at least 70 per cent, of the light, ii follows ihai in whisiever thcauc 
the (i!m is shown the whites of the picture are only 25 per cent, as light 
as normally. This would unquestionably be very serious were It not 
for the adaptation powers of iht eye. Even so, if we oonclude that the 
average luttiinance of the screen in the largest theatres h 1 foot-lainberis^ 
I hen ihc screen luminance for clear Dufaycolor wilt be only 

1-7 fool4ttmberl^^ Therefore it h highly desirable that Dufay color ftlm 
should be projected with the nuiximum light. 



Fkj. 177 .—QianifitHbtkcur^ti or Oufajiifoksf 3$ pnm. RJm 


/frirwr^;j.—No colour process can daim all qualilies, and Dufaymiof 
ha;^ many points in its favour* It is a stniightforward negative-positivt 
process; thus the analy^i^ and ^ynihesis is reduced lo a purely phott>- 
graphic opemtion with the minimum chance for defects to arise during 
a series of difficult transforTiinrioiis, The colour range is all that could be 
desired* delicate tones belne rendered wiih great beauty. As a technical 
uchievcment m ttianiifncturc nothing more remarkobte has been tiono in 
the histofy of photography. Had the whole project been pul before 
cjtperienccd photographic mnnufaclwrcrs in the first place, it would 
probably have been rejected ns chiniericaf It could only have reached 
the present stage orpmcticubility by ihe untiring befief and support of 
privnie individual determined, in $pitc of crtdlc$s obstacles and the 
prospect of ulmost cenaiii fnilum, to solve the prodigious prcibIcTn*i 
involved. 


3J3 

















tTPiovB cineiiAroGHAPHv 


DuTsvculor t6-tnm. Rercrul FUtn 

fttstructlons .—TEie camci:^ should be threaded in the usual way, but 
the gtassy side of the film musl face tlw Jem. Tlicrc is a tnetnJ band 
around the spool to protect the film from tmwaatod li3ht dtirtng innH in p 
Do (loi remove this until the last possible moioeiit. But do not fitfget to 
rrmove it. Loading and unloading should be carried out in a shaded 
place. 

Colouf Fiiter .' — ^No filter is required for dayli^l photography, 
niters are supplied by the makers for various types of tungsten filament 
lamps. 


Table 55 ,—Exposures m Sunshike tw Biotish Istes and 
Similar LArmnsES 



Afmt^ hley„ furu. 
Mint Ayf^mtt, 

Otta^m 

fWtVtttlwr. 

Tfmofdfty 

11-3 


U-2 

t3-« 

H »- 
l2-» 


Sea kiul Rkv, Qiwi Uftdtaip* 
KflKMt 





1 


Lt|[hl 4tr rmr 

m 






SfiWt KMi;,. fuliMSC ifbd 
tmat bvlldiniii dot 

ofdimi .. 

^3 & 



/rij 

/?15 

/34 

Nut&iv xttHki 


m3 

A3S 




WnoiJltaMl 




) 


toa 


unu Olan^ apm tmMixos nMiny^ Sliiborai^RKanli EoteAUeiu 

ui>dv-<iifOHin WItM in doulri bcim m ipcn^ pnwrwieiu 


Correct exposure is, needless to say, essentiiil. A leliable 
exposure nwter ahottld be used, such ss the Weston, Model 819. A 
geneial tndication of ihe exposures leqiiired is contained ia Table 55, 
Table 56 gives the apeed ratings for Dufaycotor reversal film given 
by the more commonly known still and cint exposure meters. 

i’ro/ecfiw.—With Ihe orditjary home projector a piclure 2 ft, 6 in. x 
I ft. 8 bi. is a suitable siae to show. Larger ptctum tend to emphasize 
the pattern of the screen mosaic. It ts advisable to me a 3-ln, projection 
lens. Do not use too much light. A powerful projector fi only 

when it h required to show a picture several feet wide. 






















jvPDirrvF PROCESSES 


Table 56 

Expwwr £>aytiahi 

A.SA. ,, .. .. » 

Avo *. 400 H. AD* 

A^tHSnxihLint Hi^ight . , ., . . 7 

fHot^waU 1} 

(Phoioftood 31} 

BknduK .. . -- 17iJfOa»C 

Betti ,, p-. .* *H *. (rScfanDO' 

Etecirodrvm ,, „ „ ,, 2V 

Cr.E^ iic .. ■« -- -I. to 

Hdi» .. .-20^ *. 

lIFoni *. ** .. .. GfOUpC 

icnmeta *- »• J7* Wealon SchdfKl 

U&fuvkk „ ,, .. „ 30" Sclidner 

Omtaix .. .* .. *. ,# 17* 

Photoso^ .. .. .. -- .. iV „ 

Prfatten.: >p .• 400 H. & D. 

Si«us . , ** ,, ,* U/IOBIN mfuUffinliiht 

9/to OlN other cJcpOiiifca and 
irrdoor» 

Tetnpiphot SchdrKt 

W<«tafl.. * 

Extintfhft Mrttrr. 

Leudi «. .. ,. .» 22VSchdfl£r 

JiKtopbot ,, 4* 16-19" Scheificr 

Jiutod^m ... .. ** 20-23'' 

^/aiiivt Paper Mefm. 

Wynu's lafalHblc *i. -* jJTt 

WftlkiQ^»B« .. .** .. .. .. ds 

Cakuhlor. 

Burniagtu-Wdltx>fne *t ... i 


kcfcTtnces 

Ct) F.P. 81*061 tli68>i HeoK^ iks brtvtn 104, S6t^ XVIL Art* 

IndiiiliiclSj Ov^ 3* 8. 

(Z> McEt, C. E. K,> and I^JEticii, J, H.. JWf. Jiftifn. Phot., Ctibavt Sttpp. IV, p 45, 

<J> JOLV. J,. E-V, 14,16] tIBM): JoUfti-PftOf-. 41 ()894>, pp, 458, 7». 

(4> McDwwwm, J. W,, E.P. 5,597(1#92>; 12.W II896). 

15) LuMliu, A,, E,P. 22,988 (1904). 

(«) Chbtonjbn, j. H.. E.P. Zlfl,»53 (1923). 

(7) VmAL, ]_, JaMfudi, 9 (1^5). 2£». 

m B£Hxa«^ EJ. 194 (1907), 

(9) Photogmpkisdu ftimdiiehm (1909); Brit, Jounu Phot,, S6 (1909), Colour Stqip. 
lU. pp. 62, 70. 

(10) nwH.T,TllI»^a.PI«i.AH«K.(M!llV^ m 

(Tl> Carson, W. ft, ** Tho EiMiluh DufaWfltof Film Prhsss," 7>ww. Soc, Mot 
Pk- Tto, t. p. 14, 

S?CKCG1L D- A., **IUp^tii:in 4 Screen pjaU*.” Phot. Awnr,, 73 fj«n, )93l>, 
p. 19. 

Ill) SPt;4CGtt, D. A,, Cohmr Pfioiogftfpli]t:lH Prattiet, p. 200. 

SnwcBt. D. A., l%e.r. Joura,, 77 <l«7). pp. 250. 3». 45*. 

flARtt, T. T„ " Kegtavp-Bpiitne Te^uie. wilh the Dufa)W)lor Prooen,” 
Joum. SOf. hiet. P(e. Bk^ 31, Ho. 3 (Sept. 1938), p. 140. 


3)5 















CrN^MAtflGIlAPHV 


Mi;iiiiAY« D., and Smcom, D, A,*** TSh Addition of S^^ Rea^tanu 
to Orpmic Dcvvlupiog SoJiitijcmi/' Plu>i. 77 Uuly 45S- 

Dt>$iii4AN^ S./' K^Knt Pt^clopintnts in liJiscous Dkictuugc Lafiipa,'“ /mm. 
Fit. Mq. I (Jan. im), p. 58- 

GRAhY* D- R, rtiftimg DufayvoEoi Inhn/’ Jjimh Brtt, Kinf. S&c^ 2, No. 3 
Uul> ^m}, p. 185. 

Kahkison^ G. .0,, tnd Hox^:e:H. K. G., “ Tlsc PrrttdpW of Ehirdv-eo^or Print- 
ing.” Fhnf.JdifTp.t 19 fMa>’ 1^39)^ pp. 32D-t». 


£-p. 2mii 

1925 

E,i>. 243,m 


f,.P, 2fi2ja£ 

mi 

EP. 274,13» 

my 

E.P.2SI,603 

mi 

a.P, 282.4!80 

]92& 

ilR2}f7,*35 

im 

E.P. 294.0Cra 


£*!►. 30MW 

l9CEtt 

t.!*, 307.4J7 

tm 

£.!► 321.221 

im 

E.F. 322,432 

I'm 

EJ». 322,433 

I93S> 

E,P. 322,454 

152V 

E.P, 324,043 

L930 

E.P, 333.8*5 

im 

B.P. 334,243 

1930 

EJ>. 334,245 

|93a 

E.P. 335.«$9 

[95Q 

E,P. 337,0*0 

1910 

E.P.337J375 

1930 

E.P. 339,23® 

1930 

E.P, 4I74M 

\m 

£P, 454/43* 

1934 

E.P, 437,8?® 

t9J4 

H-P. 44*wt7!> 

1934 

E.P. 44? J64 

1914 

E.P. 444.773 

1931 

E.P, 451,2*3 

1935 

E.p.47],ja6 

I93S 

EP, 470,g5S 

193tS 

E P 411,083 

1946 

E.P.6Jjj0M 

1946 

EJ-. 6I1.095 

1946 

EE.«lljOM 

1946 

B-P. 611,097 

1946 

EP, 414.441 

sm 

U,S.P. 1,805,561 1 

316 



CEKtAiN Dut-AVCtiLOa 
Faiir-4:]dour sowi. 

Trtpkx BbB_ Ac^tc bc:T-H«cn nilmStilktoM. 

I h^o separate For uiJk, 

New pTji$Liaim swell a« hcaactilorpropane. 

Iknibkt cuaJJitg of hue. 

Qpui^ec Exliilltjse nnji4nlali. 

Evnporjtcbfi of satvtniA. 

New pliatki^m sntii 4i* di-phcni^Ml^Myl-plioiphaie. 
To reduce siaik; char^. Apptimm ilwtcfo^ 

Piintei^ ced. .Tful blue wrecn. 

Spochl Dictiiscus coatmif cneehinc. 

The Screen row nnidr on ediidose aodnur- 
Angle of Etnes cir si.TMrL 
Pnuting itiRcbtnc fot r^smu, 

iotccutBaitkni of ihe origmu]. Dilution of ooloui in cop^ 
^voided pme hues in onguuil ween, 

Trealnieii.1 of surfuze wiUi dikeliuc neo^^t Aueh aJ 
catisne L>oia&h iw'ious ^ dYcjn#. 
tnduftipn of d>^ in ink nssbi. 

SurTuos id>ei of celluioso Acetute. 

SoujhII record Itadk for r*l:wige rUnt 
Strippdiii; postlivcs for opaque priming. 
l!tolmfari owiini Iteiwecii eel. aot£iai« bus md colikxtion 
lo avoid dia^Ivirg di:ci in tlrrauu 
Appliwion of dj'cs^ m noo-penetniti>^ sUiite, powder or 
owif otL 

Frinlmg withspectrum beam. 

DliplkaLkoa cd nuisler nc^live- 

Fdmbtg, Mtuipje soiiPW. 

Prjniing aperture. Fof eliiniitjiilmi of mtHit. 

FriuLiiig apparatus. DiOWion of ^icreuti clenwmtjL 
Thin><oEoui prints 

Paper prinlti fuMn Diiib>eo1or ortpmil trtLmpmrcncaflL 
Piinlln^ 

Depth dcs-doper ffw neipid^ expositive prnocssiitt 
Ditnircn caviling. 

Btoijdi emtiuii. 

AckI Slop bulb. 
ilQX bosu 
D^gi^ng, 

AdAputbie rollers. 


A£>DtTlVe PROCESSES 


THE lXVnCLIL.\R PROCtSS 

lavalvjng SpecLiIIy Adjusled Filter Unit for Camerft und Projectur 

Like all screen prcKcsses, ihis process depends upon ihc power of the 
eye Eo iftEcgmte the colour sensaiioii^ derived from miouic ai^s of 
coloured [ighi of various huK- Individual cIcTncnis consisting of 
primary colours blend into a single sensation at a distance which i$ 
determined by the resolving power of the €yc. Such a process is evi- 
denUy rightly classihed as additive.^ 

The knlkular process is^ then, a semen process in principle^ but the 
screen i;^ formed cniiiely by optical the colour filter elements 

being placed in die kns system ami ihe screen image formed as an image 
by microsenpk: optical elements embossed upon the film bajae. 
physicists would coniilder the Jcnricultir process as ibc mosl elegant 
solution of the problem of motion pictures in colour so ftir discovered. 
It must be agreed that there is fiometlting very pretty about the idea of 
making the film base itself provide part of the opltcal system^ Vet with 
all its tlieoretka] perfecliEin Uiis system has certain defects which must 
have been overlooked by the pioneers of the method and which still 
effectively prevent its commercial success; or, tfthu defects wtcfc realized 
then^ tiicre undue optimism ihut they would soon be overcome—la 
ytty common fault whih the pioneers of colour systems, 

ITie best lenses in tnininture carucruA or cine hnve for, say, 

a focal length of 50 mm. a disc of confu^inn equul lo c l 5 . or 
0H15 turn. The Icnticuk ii 002 mm. in width, and for accurate results the 
image should fall only on one icnticuJe. Tlxh is why out-of-rocti.-s and 
marginal images are very poorly portrayed in lenticular systems, 
Friedman points Oiil ihut insufiident jusficc lias been done to some 
of the precursors of Berthon, This i^ true. Thus Lipmann Uni con¬ 
ceived the possibility of using a film matctiul embossed with tniimte 
lenses {Brit- Jwni. Phot-, 55, I901J. p. 192>. Tlie (iltu was to be 
embossed with a honeycomb of nucroscopic lenses. And F. M. 
LonchestEr, an English engineer of genius, first suggested the replaoe- 
Tnettl of a eolouiicd screen in contact with the emulsion by means of 
forming an image of a rectangular silt divided longilutliitally by three 
filter bundi of gtccni timl blue. An image of tlic AUhjecI in lenuA of 
this slit will be recorded us u of pantlkl lines of dcnsiiy relative to 
the colour of the light, and of eoursc die seimtivhy of the emalsicn— 
an optical screen Ln eUect. R. E. Licsvgitng was the first inventor to 
use a bunded fdter (Brit, Mirn. FItot., 43, 1S56, p. 

* The MTialleit vj^iiul ingle in wlOdt iwa- Ub-duct polau cna> be ebtened h 60 
seti^indj. Bekjw Hits llic two seuiiiuitms fuse into one The rednnl image com- 
vpondin^ In ihb angle b CKXW rntn.* nearly dw diameter of a wniilc tod or coftc^ 
The eve caa sec u i.pot of m diameber of ^ L in. 


317 


COLOVH CINEMATOGHAFHY 

Lcnticuinr fjLiti ncpr^nt^ the phy^ici&rj» soluti^B of \ht problcai of 
colour photogTuphy^ bui attractive though ii is nt Drst sight the process 
loses its charm wheo subjected to closer scruiby. to the im^ 

possihitity of confomiLog to ideal geometry in the design of a tens* tJie 
IcnikuJar piocess stiflfers from: 

A. Marginal rays which \m\c excessive dtcle of confusion und arc 

focused on more than one Icfiticuie, with consequent colour 
ermi^ such as desaturation. 

B. Necessity of using nearly cnaAimuni aperture, with repairing poor 

depth of fields the focus for many planes of the subject 
occurring in front of the focal plane and thus covering more 
than one lentlcidc. The effect of ihis error will be eoiour 
desaturation and potaUactic fringing. 

Thcic doftets would. hQw^\xi^ be largely avoided by tht? use of 
knUcular film as the projecUott posirive only and printing upon it froin 
a master monopack negativie such as Ansco Colort Kodacolor, or 
Agfacolor could now provide. Ttiis is pcrfeclly pmcticablc in theory, 
but it involves the almost insurmountable drawback of necessitating 
special projc^oiT optics. I.G. (E.P. 392,^57) patented the process of 
coniact'printjng three sepaniiion negutives {normaJ) placed in contact 
with the embossed side (fiLm-ba^ side} of tlie leniicukr T^ositivic film. 
The exposing beam is an angular divergenoe with respect to the 
Lenticular axeit such that the image will be formed in the corzect zones 
behind each cyUndTical Jcniicuta-T element. 

Tire first imporlaiit f^lent was that of R. Benbon, a Frenchman dis¬ 
tinguished in astronomical oprics. Tlie patent (E.P. 10,611, 19®) mny 
thus be summarized: A three-colour screen is phieed in the objective nnd 
a scries of microscopic images of the ohjective arc obtained on the 
negative^ carrying on one side a panchminatjc emulsion and on the 
other side lines on a transparent embossed, striatedL or grained surface. 
When the screens in the objective are armn^d as parallel slits the film 
is embossed with scmicyllndrical striated surfaces. The negative may 
be developed as a mrgaUve or posiltve and used for ceptoducUon ihrotigb 
the same objective. The screen may be replaced by one with comple* 
oienttiry colours, depending upon whether a positive or a tiegatiiie U 
used (Fig. mi 

An Lmportnnt feature of Borthon^s patent was that tic tricolour 
filter should be placed at such a distance tn the cone of rays that three 
elcmenis were included from any point on the sensitive surface, 

A. Kdlcr-Dorlan patented the methods for embossing lie film by 
Txissing it through two cylinders, one of which had its surface engraved 
with llw pattem of the knlicuLttions* wluk ihc counkr-rallcr was^ to 
have an ehatic surface, lie elasticily of whidi aUows of varying the 
depth of the impressions from the engraved turfaoe on the film and 
3ia 


ADDilJVE processes 


conscqucnity also ilie profiles of thfl lefracung domcau (E.P. 24,6^8, 

1914 )* 

\n pre-war Gemisny ihe firms of Siemens and l-ftilskc of Berlin, 
Ferutz of Munich, and LG, Farbenindusuie were active m the technical 
de^idopment of the lenticular process, Opticolor Afcr. Ges. WJis jalntty 
formed by the ai>o\"e interests to handle the European exploitation. 
Some ei^iy patents had been granted to these interests during a period 
of three Yet ihe lenticiibr process is still in the developnientai 

stage in spite of ail this tavish expenditure of brains and money* It is 
now douhtful wheilier anything will ever corn? of it. 

In 1925 the Easlman Kodak Gonipany acquired ihe Ifi'dim. rights of 
the Bcrthon-Kellcf-Doriaii patents, and in J92g kmicuiur film was 
placed on the market under the trade name of Kodacolor. The following 
description of tbc process was giv'cn in a paper cntiilcii '* Processes 
of Photography in NaturaJ Colouts/' by Glen E, Matthew's, of Kodak 
Research Laboratories, Rochester. New York. 

THE KODACOLOR PROCESS^ 

Kodacolor is a Uinpc^lourfiddilivio process u-hkH realitts Ute i^rindp^f a ^inc 
wtihout the added dinkullv of ruling n iciocn on ihe film suEtpori. 
Hie process k bosod on « nwoi of impressifi^ a senea of ntlooscopk eyiiniirk^it 
lenws ifno djctoss the supp<.Trt side of panchcoirmtic fiira (Figs. 17?, 183)^ A 
haiidnj ihnM^l^dur filter li fitted Imo 4 Itoiiiet in fnml Of 1 Fie Jciw of the anirra aind 
rrcjocior. The film is threaded m the aimena wi tfi th\i eniiikkm side awjy fomn ilic 
kiti sa lhat the before it reaches the scjimiKx cmalsinrr^ imist be tranifninDtl 
hy the litvy enibossod knxls each, one of uubich thus IrB^fiCs Uw tmritb of the celour 
filler 0 T> the film, tf the subjaM'l; is while, till th™ coloiir fillers allow li^i lo pass 
and three Una ace cxpuscd uiider each kru clcanenc Jf the ubicut la red, that k 
ir it ftflccEs red Jighi, only die red pam of the filter transput the tighi, nad the 
ernubJon mnai iEliiTnliunied by ihia wtion of ihe filter wifi be exposed. With odours 
that ure made up of more tHan oxw priiruiTy U fehaws Hut uiorts than tmm pan of tlic 
uiedour filler will trsiunut the light 

Perhaps ifiii may be trude a little dearer if only oi-ie km clomcni and one caelour 
^ light, uy tdue.Uconsidered us shown in rigi 1150. Here it k «cn that the Iriue 
light expoM an ocea ^b<mi onc-lhird tiult under lha tens demmi tNo. J), On 
dc%eloprrH:nt this urea bocom^ opaque (No. 2). The film U ihen bk^icbcd, and the 
leindnlac siliiw Eilbs jife glwti a controhed espcHtirc I No, 3 ) and drrelopeii up. 
Now the area oirecicd by ihc blue light boDomes clcai and triiospareul* whiic the 
a™ copeiporulinf to the red aitd green fitrer »* opaque (No. 4|. WheTi 

white lifhi is iJirect<ed on this singk kns sceiton, it passes ihmugh the area wiiere 
the blue h(^U exposed the filni; and since ihe qptii^l System is ixkxrsiblc, d follows 
thai Ihe liglii strike the blue vfmeflt of the filter and form a bbie spot on ihe 
sceren, dttoe TM> tight reudvs eitlw iho ereen ot red filter regimuts- In utijcr words, 
all the ttny line areas tmnsrnU slU pan« or no liirht, luwonliD:^ -t* ihe lubjo^ ndli^iCls 
all. pars, or none of the correspofiding cotoured hghL The various coluuri axe 
KVOmbiooii on the screen lo reproduce the tuiliiral ojloura of ihc lubjecl photo- 
snipbed. 


'■ The uame " Kodacolor wjh orichmlly applied lo ihe 16 mm. leutieulQr 
process m opmmereiaUy exiNoded by Easiman Kodak. The ktuL-ufar prveesi h 
Tww extioct, artd ihe ojutk adoplcd for the iwsaii^e multfUycr toll-film. 

119 




COLOt’k CINEUATOaRAPKV 

lixanHoBtioa dT oa actual pictunc uriit lliit priacipla cluicr- Fit. 4U 
on Uw It^Vi n pidim on Kodaoulor lilm (.mctuiil tixtl of a ild wcatiotf o red tut. 
The vhlhl'ti hcotl Mamb out In ttltvouctlc ateinu a Uue dtf. Ifl the ealengecncai on 
die right of one ptciiue oT the aenci the cba^lcitistic IkvecootpiHitiDa of s Kotbtetdor 



FKt. 179. 



Fio. 180. 


picture « nadily dismnibie. Note that the lines uto ultetneiel:> darh nut Ibht 
whBfe the nil hai H neprodnoed tahown li> am» A), thw aUowmg ftsht to ^ 
Ihroti^ IlH inuBe go tJml it udll bo innsniticd only by the red port of U» 

^ *«a npiowting the blin rty the tiuei nn dmt anil ffghi, btii they en 
dnplaced tli«hlly from their iMMitim Ip the arm of the nd hat. TTti» it best lera in 
U* wm of d« aky n^t to ibe fey arrow B), The 

deh Pnrt of the filter will m^vc eiSWtnul 

ligni mot (urt of me pmitrCr 

320 


































HECCJRPIM^ 

«£□ Cfl^CT POttvT 


HEPWObuClWi 
PflOJKtKJ \V^ 
nio 



Fin. JTff.-^Prifidjifcor tlii Lenticulzir Procesa. 
















FtQr 18L—K^.-icolor Him, siH^ingeiribDssedsRjrfiu^ fAddllm Kodaoalor,} 



..... ;2jr- 

Fto, iS^-^P^iomkliDsraph of cross-socdon of Kodn^ 
oolot nirn (thick bbi:V Kile is tbe emutsian). 


32t| 




A.i>Dit|vs pftcx^Eiises 


THE AGFACOLOR LEIvnCULAR PROCESS, tAdditive,) 

(Obsolete.) 

At tbti risk of repeaiiDf ouiMlves, we give here exifocis ftom a paper 
oQ the above process which makes vciy dear certain aspects of the 
lenticular process. The paper is by F. Weil under the title The Optical* 
Photographic Principles of the Agfacolor Process '* (a translaiioii 
appeared in the yorrm. ^oc. Mai. Pfc. J5ig., 20, No. 4, t933>, 

Weil notes that the resolving power of the eye is a visual angte of one 
minute, corresponding to Q-O^ mm. at the natural viewing distance. 


f - -—=— *1 



Fu. Its. 


The width of each lenticale or embossing on the filni is about (KI2S to 
0-043 mm., the focal length being 0-10 to 0-14 mm. 

TJic Imtioildr icmn pnKm jw developed by Brtlhoo solved lliif problent hr 
very slrnple siwJ inecelout uKans. dmtioq aimnilwiRl fftim Hk very be^inituis die 
iden of ailachina the fillers, cortespondint; to the diflferau tniface ele^nu. to ihe 
flfai (iiufiia elements of a ■.mn of ihc tnouk typo), and of prw*dkn} the fllni 
iiHir witli a fwil colour screen On ihc ooinrnfy, the scnwi is (srodoDcd on the 
aim ortkulTy dorinfi the efcposure. mJ no the dur^ ^rojeiakpa. The film 

Verves oijiy as d uipport for on optical lyslcm of tiny cyliodtical kriMs onhoxsod 
on the tiim Iims. The width of each Iciu b about tHK* to IMMJ mm,, the fwal 
Icogtli being 0-1 to 0-14 mm. The lenUeblnt acrecn b adjusted to dx taking or 
projoeijng lens sytwm, as shown in Fig, (SJ. A ookwr filler having three ctdenivd 
Mteas. red. gnen nrtd blue, in three iMtellcI lecilons, b pfaewd clihcr instde or 



















roi OLR ClXtrfctATOGRAPlIV 


OKjtiklL^ tin; ScDi Ay^bcm. ki docs ugi wbtrc the ffltcr a pkixd, ^o l&n^ as il 

cOfUTPls the apertun:. furihemuirc. ihc fllia- lUepkriiEni, ot iii vutuul Imiife, rmnt 
nel Dbsew the enimiiL-c pupil of tlte lurts from iiny part of the filin. The oiiter 
p'4fl wf itwr Mier would Iw $0 vieu^U freni itic margxm of Urn film area. 

This defixir win be itwre fulty described later- Onoe Use poslilon hiu hstn li.v^d for 
ihc film^ Uus {KTsiUon becDFocs an u^^eparabk ciianiCEerisik of ihai 
porLvcubr nbu. ajiJ ctHUrols tho inw ookiur rcprcdiiciiorL ITw illusrreiikoo siww* 
the ooloBT lOtei |RCiH> placed in front of the lertfl, as oewt in pmetke. The virtim[ 
Inifljtf appOQta at Ibc dlnuih^e from ihc filtn, ihe wkilh D lepre^tnig xbt 
^pbrsBin. Each of ihc c^lktdrkai leaser embossed on the fllju produces a naJ, 
inviiirLeih and reduced inuii^ of ihc trkokiur filter in the focal pluae of 1 he embossed 
lcn:$cs, since die ilhitaricc from tlw him to the fillrfp ta compariwii with the ^xiy 
\hml TmI knu^ of ihe embossed keses. U practkalljr infhUtc. The filter Image 
replacoji llic grains of u mosaic screen, each uiuibc correspoDiiinK lo one of the 
jcrecrt units. The iruuimuiit width is equa l to the wkflh of one embossed lens, and 
its Icn^lhiLitefldio^cr the entire Ifcejght of each pictiifep in tb£ direction of ihc judi 
of ihe cifilndricnl kna. Howtiin', the units do not curry their own lijal threc-eolour 
screemh but louk^ w ID speakn ihrou^ telescopes to ihe one comnion colour sciwn^ 
pinced in the trmitiD^ 4iiuphmBm of the Imi The film itself appenn colourless 
umkc oFdiniiiry obser^alkim 

The dtii'elopment la I be same as in the colotii screen process: fr., ibe original 
loEisi be to a positive m oidcf 10 obtain ^ ditect reproductioti in ime 

eoEoura. But whde Ihc strecu positire cireirouiiiains ihc reccifd of all oolcRin. it b 
norerary to provide cennin opUcal urrangements for pmjwiJnj the lenEkular fiimt 
in colour. The simplest astan^nnent would be 10 uw foi projection the same lens as 
tired m Uic camera, which would dimply re veree the paih of the cApesins iight. When 
lonsn of other focal lengih ami can&tmctioi] are used, care must be taken t 3 uil iho 
Lwsjuort and Vildth of t^ colour filter nppWrfram the poinE of vie* of ihc Itmiindar 
rertwft. ideMiAl 10 iheir rehiyoni dnrinfi esposurt* || h only (hen that, nt tiw £ivcn 
t^l kngtb orihu krtikubf elemenu, the position ^pd widih of the fitter images 
initrul the huilioilur screen a re idcoticaJ to those of silver imaues foruitd bv eJUKM-urc 
uiid dcvdqpnKDl of the film. ' 

If the colouf of the pnyteted is to be ai tis best, the senwi iwtsi 

siitidy cettiiin TequicKmisi 

l- Hk mi imaBc of the hltet its {trcrjisrirtJ beltind iIse Jens eleitienis nniM lie in 
f '!««’«>«<»; »tw Ihiciness of the filffi bate and the foatl 
fcngjUi of the iois trfcnnsrt* depend on each >Mv(. Tlie root length of the knsw 
in (uiit ikpendt on ite ^mstme indcs of il« base gnd on the cimatufe of the 

mtisi be dote h, a funicular »tiy. 

I ~ , I behind the screen should cover the wpenute of the lens 

light ihouM bo aElo^ed to pass between the tilicf imnees. u the while linht iluis 

pacing-'oxlfThesi«ofihe,e!urtlS'i^^^^Ti!dthfirSi 
IS ^ic-rmuKd by Ibll^ng sunpic optics! njiuitm: if. ueonling to ]&:?. D is 
the eppareiii width tsf the filter tut viewed from ihe tUm and i* i. ifci 
dBtance of the rtlt«. u«n F|T> will be .lie aperture ni STe filtS 

SSaiiS *"**** Iwse, the following 


d “ D 


If ^ m « gsven by the focsl IcnitiJt of ihe lent end tlic eniingenierit of 
‘®«' '<^1 “(■»»« •«™ element h linvitcd. ss^c width 
onbe filter nimgecannot be gjcuier ihoit the whllh of the cylmdritatl kns cremcmi; 


ArUJlTIVE processes 


Lenticular Pa'tents 
{British Patetit i\'umhefs) 


3W .. 


304,669 

mi.. 

ITJ50 

314,995 

1914 .. 

24,27^ 

3l?,05t 

I9H .. 

34,698 

319J(J7 

mi 


33L97J 

1915 . 

7,540 

339,511 

r9i5 .. 

4,934 

340,^1 

1921 .. 

1^,656 

341.948 

1923 .. 


343*369 


207.837 

349,267 


2\IM^ 

350.4B1 



353 J 21 


245JI« 

353.579 


246.829 

154.167 


247J68 

356.701 



356,977 


262,466 

358.643 


264.123 

359*474 


265,0S9 

360.524 


272.191 

362,490 


Z74,B48 

363*397 


279,^37 

363.409 


2W.99S 

363.447 


285.03S 

364.559 


m,6S4 

364.627 


2a7,4flfl 

365. [(K 


289.86+ 

366,175 


2S9,8S6 

367/411 


2W.493 

367,4)4 


294,579 

368.970 


297.773 

369,26Z 


298.242 

371,546 


29^.951 

373,861 


J0IJ32 

mm 


303456 

374.993 


>03457 

375,225 


304.643 

375,229 


375.301 406 J7T 433,875 

373,33S 408.IW 434,208 

375JM ■«SJt,33S 434.305 

376.317 40SJ84 434.875 

577.177 409,270 435,8J3 

377.717 410.513 433.859 

378,240 410,517 435.929 

378,245 410,609 433.95** 

382.974 411.024 436,457 

383.26 J 411,407 436,483 

383.975 4l2.0il 43(».46S 

383,978 4(4.079 438.587 

384,009 416,602 438.80K 

384,275 417,020 436.871 

3*5.431 4l7ji»fi 43S.3S6 

1*5.680 418,040 438.448 

3*7,159 421.084 4J*,740 

38*.0«2 421.120 43S.74S 

389.830 421,582 439,947 

391,110 422,017 440,025 

392,9*7 422,933 440,049 

394,305 422,991 440,187 

395,124 424,799 440.273 

395.200 424,906 440,300 

397.832 424,950 440,156 

399,379 424,951 440,567 

399.977 425,058 440.583 

399,9*4 428,366 440,3W 

400,057 428,875 441.02* 

401.963 429.121 441.709 

401.982 429.211 441.713 

402.384 430,467 442,522 

402,902 430.503 442,920 

406.013 430,585 443.266 

406.!6> 430.867 443.546 

406,187 432,401 444,191 

406.304 433,083 445,934 


446,282 470,801 

446.752 470.959 

440,977 471,520 

447.317 471,522 

447,483 474,165 

447,4*9 4n.421 

447,4«) 478,067 

447.644 478,644 

447.834 478,714 

447,917 480,123 

448,024 480,487 

449,762 430.546 

449,954 +92,06* 

451. T75 4*2.690 

451.333 483,319 

451,347 484,797 

451.65* 436,434 

451,659 4*6.495 

454J(BS 4*6.496 

454.163 4*6,839 

454.357 486,916 

454*42 487.6*5 

455.220 488,398 

456,617 4*9,ISS 

457.37* 4*9,355 

457,656 4*9,529 

458,418 4*3,G23 

459,027 492,850 

459.634 4513,303 

469,533 493.80* 

460.653 494,456 

461.559 495,103 

4*1.621 495,348 

4fii;794 497,751 

463,996 500.312 

464.723 503.909 

467.330 S06J18I 


w, by loine j trlcolinir filler, ihe od^oinin^ iiiiagfis on the outer filler itrip mwltl 
oyedijp. dtid reJ eM hUieaiHaiurs wvuld upretr tnorv or lcs» purple. 

3. The turiDwer the ludividuul sawn lensts, the less Ihe stfiped screen of Itio 

liiuige will be visible (in projeetionT on the oiier (wtiJ, Uie iMohrtnu poww iuentam 
niMl enables even ihn > nuil l«4 imaisea lo he resol^iod iolo their dstetli. Naiiuttlly, 
•he graiikt of the entultion elwuilil be HJall tscwnparctl wiili the ivi4ih of the itripea 
of ilv Qlier imujw, h itic AsEiwlor process, in which the v^tii of itw le/ukotw 
elements i* 0-02* nun., the imogn of ibe individtial eoliwr tiripo h:ive e npudiniun 
wiillh ofOOtW niri-. or twenty lime* the «- 4 Vclenslh of Wuc I4(hl. With to 

resolving power, Ok Tcuticiiiar screen is superinr to the mwlcr cokviir Kncn. 
Owing to the ^cclnVctTicnl co^ 3 t^li^illon of the oJjjiKt, lens, aciceo. innl imsge, 
dctnils even smnUet thnn Uk width ofthe Joi»es are reproduced in their ttirrect 
ttosthifi as Tesml* colour- With imafst nrusJkr than ano-thinl the width of ilic 
tccveti, {ni«d colour details nnoat be resolved inio iheirindivHtuul co^ireletncnis. 

4. The Quality of the picture depends Ltr^^y ou the phott/grephic tt t i sh t m of 
the rJiiuhion, iHttkitlsfly on iu colout sen-tltiviiy. The Tutter. in Him. deicnniiies 

m 


CtJtOUH riNGMATOGRAPNV 

iht chok« of tJjc lliccr cofoun wjih mpcct i* thm 4|>DCtnkl tnmurriaiarL Hm 
J udsiticnl an4 4Joctifcn on ihls nmllcr and tht choke of ihc jjkcf cocnbination ninil 
be Ixtscd jnwely on pf^uKiplei of luhjcctivc and on avefi|;g)& ui^tei 

ThcanTtidlly knticttlaf Hlmt cad be pnntcdf but noi fey the ordinary contact 
method—cTumcrtJU5 posubjlidi^ of doing ihi* ha-« been desaibed RDd pateiiud. 
U h impciruini to presave Ihe odgtimj oo-onUnatioti between the density and the 
lens clenKnte. The f^metfkal co-ordimiUon betn^ the mIvw grain* the tens 
cloncnis, and the piojcciion lens most be idcniioil bi both the copy nm! the odgiiiiil. 

Rcfcreiic« 

CsKTAff, G., and SEYHOUip M. W*|. The Kodatolor I^rocess Ibir Am&teuy 
Color Cinematography/' Th^jw. 5i>r. Mol /Te. Cite,, 3t&. Ho. 3* (192^}, 
pp. WO-7. 

Muip C E* Kh+ " Motion Pktmes in Njnaral Cokn.** Comm 3& <I92B)| 
PP- 303-S. 

■■ Amateur ancnuiography and tlu tCjDda4:aEDr Ptocesa,'* /ourn FwAUv 
inn.. 207 (Jan. }92S>, pp. 1-17, 

Wciu F„ ■- The Otnteal-t^ojogrBpliic Priiicipls of Ute Anfaeolur Prows.” Jeum. 
SVjt. P/e, pjjs., 20. Na,4 (I933>. 

FmiHJSMs. T, S.. ‘'>lrslor>- of Color Photogniphy." Bntoa, U.SA. {1943). 


324 


CHAPTER 4 


Subtractive Processes 


What ^Lijral (imaerc'cf lioulj dwwsff 
To paiiu ihc rtiinbctw’s var^mg 
Unlcta Xi^ mortal ii %\^m 

To ttip Ilk bnish Lri ol' hedvcnV 

Scan 

Projection NiitiiiaJ; Camera may be Nomial or Otherwise 
A- TWO-COLOUR SUBTftACnVi: PROCESSES 

Ganerai Frbtdph^.—la suhtriclive processes the film h itself 
coloured, each picture being a complete colour photognipfiF it may be a 
iw<>coloQr print of limited colour rau^, ox it may be a ihroeKrolour 
print providing differentiation in chromatkity adequate to reproduce 
with remarkable accuracy iho colours of the nalural world ^ Untj! very 
recently all subtractive colour fikns ^vo^e two-colour. Subsequent to the 
early productioiis of Hcmande^-Mcjia in a considemble number 
of processes appeared* Reference will be found to some of these in the 
Historical Summary in this book. Early itt'o-cobur Technicolor 
aroused criticism from the public of the d^lnilioo: and. the peculiar 
variety of colour hiirtnotiy« w^hich was the outcome of the parUciUar pmr 
of roughly complcinonlary^ colours chosen, was never really popular. 
The ** reds ■' hud an unpleasant saimon-pink tone* and the blues ” 
were of a very green hue. But defects of this kind are inseparable from 
twok:oloiir. because oue is always dTecUng a compromise and engapug 
in stmmgems in the endeavour to rob Peter to pay Paul ! Jt U poHible 
with careful choice of iwo dyes» or mixtures of dyes^ or of certain 
inorganic compounds, to get fairly true Qesh colours and a very^ pleasing 
general effect which in many ttspecis is nc^t unlike the restricted paleitc 
of some of the eightcenih-centufy pamwfs^ but the t-oUtl absence of 
genuine blne$^ violelSi purples^ pinks, Uvenders* and^ above all, yellows 
and yclIoW'^gTecns, severely iimits the polcaUahiies of a two-colour 
process* The recently Lnifodticed TcchnichromCt which is printed in 
two colours^ is an Improvement on the original iwo-cotour fechnicotor^ 
btit it bievjtn.bly ^idTers from dcfisciive colour rendition and the definition 
leaves much to be desired. Nevertheless, itu: colour is attractive whhin 
its range. 


325 



COLOtlft CfNejyiJ^TOailAE>HY 


The Dr. Trofand of TcchnJcolur saiid, iit disctt^iDg the hmi igtmn^ 
of two-colour: 

In lonw two-oolour pfetures which have spfcaied \n the the selccikHi of 
pnni^^ coknirs wa* ilt-advi?ed, cvm tbt ficih rims, which nfc the moti 

important colours ta be nenden^d very poorly, [f ibcr fle^ Unl» are properly ri^pro- 
CLice^l, i^Uxa'colOiiiicLB tjikeare of ibcm^ 

The fact Omt tW'b-oolour negatives ate obijamcd by means of 
bipack exposed in a normal camera has lengihencd the survival of tlie 
Miter tw^o-coJour processes. Examples arc Cinecolor and TruMlor, 
Some funher di^ussion of bipack negative will be found in Chapter Vl> 

Bipnek iicg3ti\'cs are generally printed for two-colour subtractjve 
Work on doubk-coated positive fiJnL An Eastnma film stock stiitabk 
for this ptiiposc is Ditphtized Positive, Type L509. This Is a yellow- 
dyed emubion coated on both sides of standard Him feose, A sj mdiir 
prMuct IS made by Du Pont and Gevaert^ Technichromc is pTinted by 
imbibition on single-coated fi!m base. 

As typical of two-colour processes involving inorganic colour laningH 
^ lowing formulffi represent rcluibk dota ^by courtesy of Dufuy- 
Chromex Ltd.): 

Fllm-Stocfc .. ^ Ckvnefl lloublisCufltcd P»iiivti {vir,, coated Ois 

.. .. .. 


TwoCoLOUIt TonIKG OCfiRATlON 

Thrfi^iiihU 


Opermtijn, 


I- E^iminary Wash and Wipe 
2* Jiliic Toftiftfi Cociu ddc> 

3, Wnish 

4, Cleqr^ Eafh 

5 , Urenhmi Tonins (ci^r pidej 
t WEwh 

7. nxAiiofi 

S. Wflih “ 

AauTKinla Bitb ,, I’ 

to. W«h 




1 Tiitats. 

ft' r 

t * 


i 

4 

1 

4 



m ^ 


<n 

# |r 


- . 

s , 



* T 


1 1 

i5i 

*.-• 

« - 

. . 

5 

20i 

. - 

- + - 


J 


■r 

^■P * 

. . 

] 

%| 

- T- 

■- 


a 

34i 

•*■1 



1 1 

' 35* 

P ■ 

■ " “ 


’ 1 

1 361 


formula, 

{trern-Bitir 7 <wif?r- (Cjtfflr) 
I Aitnnoniuirii Pvrvuinhtue 
A I Feme Aitiin 

Iwatcf .. ;; ; 

3 l^dlc Add fCTYitj 
iWmef ^ 


-1 W fm. 

- 125 ,, 

- 2WCJ3. 

• > 150 Bin. 

2,000 c.a 


326 


I * 




















^ ^ WqI- Feirkyimkle 
^ (Wiuet 

I AiTDiiwiiiun Alum 
i Water 


JIUBTRACTIVE PROCESSES 
IQOgjn. 

. . 2J»CI(W: 


f<fr «jf tote; 1 FMin A 
2 parts a 
I mn C 
21 pam D 

Dilute with equal quuntily of wcUef. Atiil hydroctilonc IP fur 50P&^ Pf batli. 
Taocf Jipplij^ by tw^^lvc idt^en'enid ri>lbrt (or by ihc Bolulbn Utettiod). 


Ctetiriftg MCf^afv Trmsparvitcy tt/ Urvmi^t TtMfing. 

Hydituhklrk Acid (cotiu.1 -- 260 cXi 

Pot, Ox^ilate ., .. » -. "M Sfu. 

Wtttef .. „ , .. g.UOOM. 


Pot. 


Ureutium Tmurr (JleiWmrtgJj—Ttftol ftrttomtort. 
Outatc .. ..- ^ pn- 


Uramuin Njtrate 
fl>^ilrDcblorkc Acid (wv;.) 
Pot. Fcmcyimjd? , ^ 
Water -* 


U 
256 cx, 

nm^ 

,, B.OOOcfl^ 


Hypo 


Flxinff &ift. 


3Pp^i:alu 


A/fmmia Rinst^so ftt(^fy </ 

Amfnorua-B60 . .> .. ■« i- Sex. 

Water -- fl.OOO k> 


The unexpected tevivai of mtcresi In two-colour proccssK has 
brought Cinecolor into the forcgtoiiod as a major competUor to 
Technicolor, and today there is an output from the Cinecolor hbora* 
lories of no les^ than one hundred and twenty ttilHion feet of print per 
i^nnum. This extiaordinary turn of events in the history of the colour 
lUm is to be explained portiy as an etsonomfe phettumenon* and partly 
as an answer to (he insistent demand for a product possesring acceptable 
quality but which, for Sts production, does not necessitate a beam* 
splitter cuTnera and ihe rather Tuetleuloos Uinitatioiis Imposed by I he 
more complex three-colour competitors, 
f n fact, a two-colour process can, m the nature of things^ only provide 
a minute proporlion of the total range of colour sen^atior^, and the 
undoubied satisfaction which has appurenily been registered by 
audiences confirms the belief held by many colour film experts that the 
average film-goer is far less tsepsUivo to the suhilciics uf colour than had 
been ^ncralty supposed. It does not seem that two-colour films have 
impressed even film lechnidanii as being markedly Inferior, or Indeed 
diFlerent in any w^^y, from films possessing a fall colour gamut, and 
whUst producers con hardly be blamed for exploiting the advantages 

327 



rnLOUR C|NE\MTOOftAPIf¥ 


which (his situation pr««rts. ii is dirhcull for the technicians not to feel 
some icgret at tlw re-emcrgcncc of a type of process the liiaihitions of 
tt'iikli marked an earlier phase of the evolution of the colour film. 

t’rom these remarks it mnst not be concluded that Cinecolor, for 
cxiunple^ is not of its clasd admirable, but it may be safely predicted 
that it Would cither have to be so ittodilied as to become a lhree*colour 
l^ocess or suffer n decline in popularity the moment there is offered a 
three-colour product of companiblc cost and case of manipuhition. 
And this prediction can be made because, white it may not be obvious 
to audiences, producers and directors ant perfectly well aware of the 
grave limitaiioiis imposed upon them by the two-colour process, forced 
as they arc to select subject matter and to devise treatments which will 
conceal the fimdcimeiitsU weaknesses of the two-colour ranee of 
chromaticities. 

It is to be noied that the ease of hondling two-colour film has 
flitiacted the attention of new^-film producers and an auempt is to be 
made to introduce tegular issues made in the United States, Furihcr- 
niore. not to be outdone, the Technicolor organisation has recently 
announced its intention to make available their product in a (wo-cobu'r 
form under the new trade name of" Tetdmichromc.” This is certainly 
[i c™ or hutory confonnuig to the cydic law, since we return again, 
^rhaps in « sli^ily modified form, to the pre-Cucarucha days ofThc 
Wax Museum ond Tlie Bbck Pirate, 

With regard to the rrcqucnity advanced objection to doubloooated 
^sihve as not being capable of being projected with perfect ddlnition, 
R. H. Cricks has observed, “ Mathematics disproves lliis idea. The 
thickness of the film base is WS m.; assuming a 5-in. projection lens, 
ihts iMiins a difTwnce in image plane of M/iiXKHb the focal leuath. 
At a throw of lOO feet ihi^ means a difference in focus of only just over 
an inch; quite nanml angles of rake produce it difference of (wo or 
three feet, which passes unnoticed," 

I^r colour prints mode from bipack negatives suffer from luck of 
definition this is to be ascribed solely to scattering of the light rays in 
Jjasstng Ihrough the firsi emulsion to reach the back clement of the bt- 
^k, (or which reason every technical device must be adopted to ensure 
ihc mojcimtim contact between the two films. 


' Colour,. ,m Seller Utiin CondUium are ’ JCuje 

pvA'/I'h Loud CHI (Juljf 10^ 1947 ). British Siwiiis^ Supn, n, XXIX* 
CaEWwjic, wr. T.." Hntitfr of Hf-piifl PhotoBiaphy.” /nttmai, phot, tX>ec' 

1 J’rodHciion with Two-color Hirwt. siotion 

lloty, W. R., and KAVitin. J. V.,, " (.OOO-Foot Blpa.;S Mauadne liHl AAimBr *' 
/(Mifrt. Aor. hbu. Piet, fin-,, S3 1044), J*. “ ^ ™ 

328 


5U»TftACTlVH 


t:XAMPl.ES 

CinecoLor (Produci of Corporaiion^ CaM&mia^ 

Arnerican iwo-calour subtractive process, fThree- 
colour prints have also bcon processed.) 

CtfiwrH.—Norma!, equipp^ mih specbl Ciaecolor Wpack convex 
TOller pressure plate aud suitable double magasiine. An N-C. Mitchell 
is usiiially employed. 

(Vegaihe Flitft Stock .—Eastman Bipack. Type !2J6 Onlio and Type 
1235 Pan. For daylighl Type 1234 Ortho is subsiitiited. 

Printing .—Eastman Type 5509 Dupliilaoed/' coated on from and 
rear of film support. 

There is no rdiable iurortnatioju but one side is doubtless toni?d 
Prussian Blue (ferroferricyaiiide) and the other side is dye-ioned by use 
or an iodide njordani. (Traube.) (B.P. 506*450.) Cinecotor patents cite 
the folio wing iodine bleach mordant A ‘"‘Predip^* of potassium iodide 
7 to 14?^ and genemlly 10% ; the bleach being iodine of 0-02% io0'6% 
plus potassium iodide of 1^ %- The method of application is most likely 
to be by dotatiouH All printing* opiicol or contact* is necessarily carried 
out on stei>*by"Stcp registering pilol-pin printeR. The sound truck is 
iion^toned $iIvtT| and hence blue.' 

Pi^tnurks .—Cinccolor is the direct descendenl of W. Van D, Kelley's 
Ptitma/* from which a large family of processes sleiomed, 
among? i oLhers Kcsdaeolor/" Kdleycolor/" "" Ma.gnaco!or/‘ 

Multicolor/' etc. W, T, CfCsplEiel has stated that he associated 
With Kelley and in J92S was tnlercsicd in Multicolor^ Crespincl claims 
to hove been i its tru mental in developing a practicable hi pack with the 
assistance of Du Pont. He recalls ihai they called the earliest bipack 
Rainbow Negative/' Du Font subsequcnlly sold this malcrial 3^ 
Dnpack.’' The first major feature was M.G.M.'s Gallanl Bess." 
photographed by John Boyle- li is claimed that today Cinccolor is 
prtsces&iag a hundred million feet of print per annum. CInccoksr is 
ako prixessing boih L6-mm. and S-mm. prints. Reduction negatives 
are made frewn the original IS-mm. bipack tiegalives, 

Rtfmncc 

Klane, N.. Aukt. CiffefmffTf(raphir, 38^91* 

Cinceotor 16 mm. Technique 

Stmtmary of Afe/Aorf.—Esscnllaily the normal pair of two-colour 
35-mni4 sepamiion negatives arc so oricnlaied and tt^sicred that they 
may he used for printing face lo face a doubic-coaicd positives stock 
sandwiched beiwccn* bui for this special purpose each 55-nim. negative 
bears two paraild 16-mm. separation negative image stiipci* the blut> 
' It hftf fcce^ily repealed that ilie eyan is a 1« di'c-iuoetk ihe h-vjid* 
TTiordani hclng^ cmplntyedi, as Ict the red-orpni^c itmlnft. The vnuahtraek ii imw a 
ttimiul lilver inmge Irtfccttfect-proiou-toj tlurinit tDninit ujiicniliiMS- 


329 


cotoun Cl^EMATUCik\?m- 


green printer itegativi: bearing also two pairiHel sound-itaok l6-inrn. 
ac^tivcs comecll^/ aligned in Telntloa lo their associated l6-min, 
ae^tivcs* Thus using the 35-inm- labamtury otiuipment two 16-iiim. 
prints are yielded front run of a 35-iinn. negative strip of film* 
Desmption.^TzQiluc^m Of I6^fnm. CiEierolor began in 1939* 
A. M, Gujidelfinger and J. Smith of Cinecolof olaim to have been tbe 
first to dcviM the method of printing two \6-mm. strips side by side m 
one 35-mm. strip* which could be processed on their existing machines. 
They christened this method ”* doiible-sixtceih*" Tlie pair of release 
16“iii m, positive arc slit from \ be 35- mm. strip after processi ng. Do iiblc- 
Aixteeti negatives or positives neeessiiuted the provision of alternative 
sprc^kcLs and pufkys on the processing machines with a simple 
mechamcat change-over control (Fig. 18^), 

The Cineeolnr optical priiiteri which is the pivot of this techniqiiei is 
capable of several types of aperatton (Fig. I S7|. 



IfiaSLHBLeLBLaRSBlBlBlBl! 


I. g c n a 


-ir-ft F" 


Fkj. CLaa;olor llDilbll^^iLKtcle^| umingiTnient for pritifin^ pcrfomltunHi Ami 

lEjiUng. 


1. printing optical feduetton I6^mni. negatives on 35-rDrEi. !itook 
from master 35-iiirn. ditpUcate positive iniennediiites. 

2* I lo I projeclion priming oT [6-mm. Viz.; 16-mm. separation 
ne^tives from 16-m.m. Kodachromc originat positives. 

j. Entorged 3S-iuni. sepanition negatives from t6-rRm. Kodachrome. 

Pro^tion can be from either end of the optical prinier. The projector 

lamp IS 1,000 wall, Etpkne nbmeni. 

EMh pair of parallel 16-mm. negative iniagcs must be placed on 
t L. nm, strip WritJj the ulmost precision, siticen coinplementary pair 
has ro be pnnted oa a second 35’rnm. strip for register printing face 
to face wr^ the fi^t strip with *' duplitucd •' posiUve sandwiched 
between. pjnaJty, two ncestive sound track-V have lo be printed in the 
correct ppsitfon rcLitive to their associated J6-mm. image tirips. These 
soimd-treck neptim are confintid to the eyaa-printcr eeptive. 

Cinecolor perforate atl iheir negative and poritivc stock. They use 
three rows of standard Iti-mm, perfomrions, one in ibe mEddfe and 
one along each edge, em ploying a special perforator 
330 









SUBTRACTSVE PROCESSES 


The developing niatihiftt provides the foUowmg focilitiRi: 

L Developing time variable from J to 35 rainuies. 

2* Tw^siofl on lilm itever exceeds thfro^iunriBrs of a poimd+ 

3. Tarbulation and cir^ulatioti of developing Biid Using soluUonSp 

4, MicTo-vimabk drive compensaled for film stretch in wei and dry 

stages^p without increasing lension. 

Printer light intensities are resistance stqjs brought into circuit by 
relays gectuated pneumatically^ or electrically, by means of punched 
strips of 35'mm. film stock. Nine resistance positions [wovidc 2t 
printing lights. An auxiliary resistance adtb 19 addiLional printer sieps^ 
The two sound trucks are printed stmuJiuneously- “ The imagea of the 
two sound trucks ote turned optically to permit the sound tiegaiive and 
positive stock to be driven directly from the same shaft. 

When slitting takes place a strip is renioved which contained 

one set of pcifOraltoit** 

Previous to copyingKodachfome 16-mm. origtnals they arc hardened 
by the Peerless pnicess for surface hardciiiog- A black-and-white 
reversaL print is fir^t made for editing purposes. Clear leader 

whh instructions written on it is cut into the Kodachrome at points 
where lap dissolves or other sp^iaS elfccis arc to be inserted. It is 
claimed both two and three colour separalions arc raadc. Separa¬ 
tion negatives arc developed to the low gumma of 0-35, but thb miiy 
vary for the individual colour-record negatives. 


PATE?m tTELU BV ClKlECOLOR CORPORATION—10/11 ,'46 

E.P. 447,412 
46&,m 
473p993 

mA^ 
<22,m 

523M9 
532*870 
535,812 
538,555 
538^56 

pfiifists 


Vniitti SnatSt 

i/MtfdSmrM, 

t-itutd S0re.t. 

1,744,'in 

1522.725 

Zt4l,li4 

U9s;e>j 

1528525 

2.193MI 

U62,J1» 


2,2tM01 

KTfeJ.SlS 



l.«9A,4aT 


I.2T2.5S6 

t.TM.47« 

2.005,254 

2^.557 


2j00f,322 

2^St^5 

],89T,3(» 

ijmm 

2;I95J07 

1,^3,69« 



l.927,M7 




Chcmicolor. (Obsolclc.) 

The Geman ITacolor process as worked in Engbnd (1930). 
C#»fejvi.'^NormiiL Bipach (Agfa). 

—Chemical toning of double-coated filin. Probably iron 
and uranium loning w*ith possible addilion of dyes and mordaRting. 

Colnrliliu Pmceits. (Probably Obsolete,) 

An American tW'cn?alour subtractive process (U.S^P- 1^633^652). 
Caittiera,' —Probably bipsck in a standard camera e^iuippcd for btpack. 
■ TciSv s H., pkiiio <Noa' mi>p T- 

331 



COLOUR riNTMATOGRAPHY 


Double-coated film wai used. The film was firet printed on 
both sides, using iho appropriate tw 0 <oimj.r nefatives, and then de- 
veio^d m the usual way. Both sides were then toned Tcd-orangc with 
uranium. All treatments so fat were done by immersion. The side that 
was to be lorted blue-green was then pas^ over wkks that fed a 
solution of iron and acid to one side of the film, convening tlie red* 
orange tone to blue-grten. 


Colnreraft, (Probably Obsolete.) 

American two-colour subtractive process. Worked in 1929. 

Cttmew.—Beam-split icr or idtcriiativciy blpack. 

fwifHig.r-Singlc-coated fibn was used. The images were dye^toned 
by the iodide mordanting process. No details available. Probably 
based on the Trnube patent (D ILP. 187,289, 1905), 


Colurtturt Process. (Probably Obsolete.) 

An American process which belonged to the Pailic Esehafige, Bound 
Brook, New Jersey. Two-eolour subtractive, 

Cflinero,—Negatives were made with norma! bipack in a standard 
bifttck citmcm—probably a Mitchell with the four-roller pressuro-ptid 
in the gate. 

fifirttjng. Priniing was carried out on double-coated positive stock, 
^d ihiB dye-toned on one side and meiallic-ioned on the other. 
nc doubIcHCoaied film, liaving been printed on both sides with the 
^I^bve two-colour nepUves in regisinition, wns limi given a special 
l^tmcnt on one side to make il dye selective, and from then on the 
Him was totally submerged to receive both colours, the blue-green lone 
and ibe red^rangE dye on the oUlcr side, neither colour 
mucldne ^i®'!® side. The film was treated in u continuous processing 


Fox Color, (S« Early Kodachromc.) 

Dawoloor, (Probably Obsolete.) 

Subtractive two-colour process, 

of Brussels describe ilte unusual 

The >Ws process. 

^velopnient was sponsored by M. Andri Dcbric. she 
I reniJi cmcniaiographic engineer and rminufflcturer 

be 

used if they are adapted to upoiie bipack 

rnm J'™«fid fixed as usual. The 

mtn wu ihett rc«nsttiaed by nn iron salt which blenched the sUve, 


ACTIVE 


image 411 d rendcied it cstfwibfc <?f being mqrdanted. The second image 
was printed and processed in colour^ afier whkh the fimt imuEe was 
dyed through the second. Thus after printings say^ the first rednorangi? 
negaiivep and developing md tking^ the film was resensiti/jsd with a 
solution of feme chloride comainiiig oxalic acidi dried, and expo^ 
under the bluo^green negative. After blue-toning with potstssium ferri* 
cyumdc, the film w'as wnabed and intmersed in a mordant hath of 
potassium iodide, and wns duea passed through a balb of orange-red dye 
and unshed with acidulated water. The sceond image might be printed 
from a positive and developed with potassium ferrocyanido. The process, 
[t was claimed, could be made into one of three colours by adding the 
third componenr by mecliaoical printing, by which was meanly presuna- 
nbly^ imbibition printing. Instead of ferric chloride, the oxalate, tartrate* 
or citrate might be used. 

tP. 579^558: The process in tiiis specificaiicin was modified for the 
production of n combined sound and picture film by prinling the sound 
record on ibc film ^fter the resensitizing step* During the first exposure 
the sound track wa^ masked and the imexposed silver tenioved when the 
first image was fixed. After the film had been rcMnsitiTcd, ihc sound 
rarord wbs printed simultaneously with the second colour record* the 
two being recorded on the same oegaUve. 

Ramarkx .—It was stated that iJiis procedure had been considerably 
modified, but the details of the process have not been published* 
Debric designed a special printer capable of printing both negairvcs 
simultaneously on to one frame. How' this assisted, if the process 
followed the method described in the patents^ is not clear', 

FiillcoSnr 

fPriXiiKt of the Trimble Labcralories. Inc.. lft>U)r«»o0U, CuIifuitliM.) 

Twocolour (threc-colouf also daimed) subtractive process, 

NormaL Bipackp employing siondaid aceessorie^u or 
f6-mm. standard equipment. 

i^e^oihe FUm .TrocJfe.—Easiniiin bi-puck, it is presumed, or 35-iiim. 
sepanilion neg 4 itlves optically enlarged from Ifi-mm. Kodaehrome 
originals. Two of the three-strip negatives of a beam-splitter Techai- 
color record have also been employed** 

Frtmfog .—Duplitizied Eastman Type 5509 ts used. Toned one side to 
Prus^fcLun Blue. Other sidn dye-toned. The flotation methcMl is said to be 
employed for surfuee apphention of the toning ^olution^ 

Hinocuikalar* (Probably Obsolete.) 

A two-colour subtracii%'c process based upon the work of M. Maurice 
Combes, n French chttnisL Complete equipment existed in France for 
pixKcssing film. 

^ Vif,. ihc bi|i^ pxir of^f-tmati ihrw-sinp maienul. 


333 


COLOUR CINEMATOORAI-Ur 

Tlie firsi ^howiag of an Homtonicolor film was ai the Curzon 
Cinema, London, March 23, 1936. The film was ” Talking Hands," 
directed by Ivor Campbell and produced at (he Waltoa-on-Thamcs 
Studios. 

Cffjfleftf,—Agfa bipack was used. Any cameta suitably etiuipped 
wiih bjpock gate and magazines miglil be used. Normal two-colour 
ulttrs. 

Prifirifig , — The negatives were prmied on double-coated positive by 
mca^ of a Debrie double-coated positisx contact priming Tnnehio r 
(see pjg, I85h The filcti was developed, fixed, and washed. It was then 
stirfeoe stained wUh mbttutes of basic dyes. A mixiure of rhodaminc 
and ai^mine was used for tlie rcd-orangc side of the film and a mixiuie 
of makehite green and any suitable violet or blue-violet for the blue- 
green side. The inventor claimed that the lighter densities would be 
ton(?d yeltowisb^ whereas Uie more dense silver areas would be orange or 
red. Similnrly* on the oLber side of the film the lighter tones would 
w greenish nod tlic deeper tojMss bluish or violet. Exactly the same 
^hroic phenomenon was discovered by A, Hamburger (see p. 258). 
Ue next aage of the process also closely follows Hamburger's Poly- 
chronude &iiice the film wa& then IjnrTi^nscd in a mordanting 

bath consisting of chromic acid, poiossium ferrocyamtie, and sulphuric 
acid, after which the film was cleared in polasstum metabisulphite and 
linally washed. 

The staining of the film prior to immersion in a chromic acid mordimt' 
mg bath was not original, ait this was first practised by Hamburger. 

/lemflrAj.—The dye mixture ptopordonsmight be altered, depending 
upon the nature of the subject-matter. The whites were cleim and the 
coluur range adequate. The sound tract was printed on the blue- 
green Side and was blue tn the finished film. 

Palcnis wereapp!}^ fof m most countries, but j| is dilfieult to see 
wherein Lite process differed in any imponant respect from that patented 
m E.P. M3,358. 1922, by Hamburger. 


Harriscolor. (Probably Obsolete,] 

American two-colour subtractive process operated in 1930. This 
company puTctiased llle Kelley Cdlor Co. in 1928. 

Ca/ttera.—Tvfo alternative methods were used: (I) A beamsplitter 
tramera of subst^tlally similar design to the Technicolor camera. Le. 
the usual hulf-silvcred prism and two gates at 90* to each other. In 
descriptions of the prism it is slated that the sUwring in fine lines 
or circles/* (2) ^ onginal but impracucablc system Is described in 
wtuch two Bell & Howell enmeras were mounted on a niagle base at 
right ungks to eacn other. A reflector of some sort was placed in such 
a posiuon that light was refleaed from the object at SO* to otic of 
the cameras, while the light which passed through the reficctor vias 
334 


SlTITBACTIVE raOtE5Sb'3 


fccijrdcd by Uic camera dkeeiJy beliind Lhe mirrOT. Pt>$$jbJy a f^rjsm 
block viiis employed- 

Normal ^mg^le’-coaied positive emulsion ftas u^d. Tbc 
negative mcordiag the red-orange was printed iJiroiigh she baite of the 
posiih^ film, and this film wa$ theu developed, wa^shed, and toned with 
an iron soluiioo and again washed and dried j>j ihrk^ Upon the 
rcsiduat emubion which was on the surface a print wus made from the 
blue-green negative record. This developed in a solution which 
did not destroy tJtc blue^soitcd Image beneath ; the iilm wus then (bred 
and washed, and finally the lop imag^ was toned red-orange by a bath 
which did nut alTecl feme image (presumably by ur4iuniii)x The 
base was sfighiJy yeQoWp in an attempt to get a species of thrcoHiolour 
cfTccl. 

I^marks . — A method similar to the above double-ioning is that tn 
which the fiist image is toned blue wUfi a ferric loner and before tising 
ft second image is printed in llio remaintrig siU'cr halide. During dei^elop- 
men I the alkali presem in the developer converts the blue image to a 
colourless salt The second image is then treated with a vanadmui 
mordant bkacb and dyc-toned* When the film h passed through an 
acid solution the original ferric blue image ts restored. 

KcUeycaEuT Proce^ 

Tlic late Wiltiain van Doren Kelley was responaibk for the*' PriOTa" 
process- Negaitves were exposed at a speed of ^2 picltites per second in 
a normal cniucm equipped with a rotaring filter carrying the usual two- 
colour taking filters. Prints were tnade on doublocoaied fiSm, the 
allemate frames being selected by a skipping contact printer. One side 
of the film was toned hlue-gfcen by an iron solution^ and ihe opposite 
ride was toned red-orange with uranium. 

.According to another descriptioti. the Pfizma*" process was as 
follows: 

TIm fim inrnae is torKd Wue-sreen wilh m iron toacr urorc a 

inuKc Is prJrtidl in \hs remamine silver baUdCi During de^Ttor^nienl ibc nl^i 
fireseiii EM Jtw de^elo^r cun^trls the blue image EO culourkH uail. The fcceoiul 
ii Uitfi tretUed with j \Tiividiunt irnmlotit hleadi ™S d>frlaiwiJ. w^hen Ute 
Tiim is nXHoci trough Att ACiil solution llte ofigiruJ Wue'grMn image is rtstoreU. 

The Priznia "* paieitts w^ere apparently taken over by Consolidated 
Film Industries and rnatketed imdcr the trade tiame of “Magna- 
color/" 

In F.P. 228387. 1^21 n process is etuimed in w hich two images, are 
fomicd in the same layer; one image is printed firsti developed, and 
toned, the layer then being cleared in a b^th contasiiing ammoaiiini 
bromide amd potassium dichronmte, and the second iitiage then printed 
on the untTiposcd silvitT salt, developed, and toned. As an example, the 

335 


Cdl.OL'R CINEAUTdCRAr'IfY 

is primed cn ihc layer ihrou^ (Iw tianjspiireni iuppun Trotn 
a rcd-iirange record, developed for thtiie minutes in amidol, and toned 
Wue-greca in a bath of yanadiirm ojcalatc, ferric amifiioaiLm oaalaic, 
o^ic acid, and potassium ferrocyajiide. The layer Is then bleached 
with ammooiirra dichromate and bromide. After washina and dryin g , 
the sMond miUBC is printed on the front of the layer from a blue-green 
record negBrne, developed for three minutes with amidol, fixed in hypo, 
toned T^mruage m uraruum nitrate, potassioni oxalate, hydrochloric 
acid and rerrocyanide, and finally fixed, 

Kelleyvscemis to have been the first to paicni registering pins for a 
pnotcr, bm the practice bad bc'cn common for many years. He de- 
senbed now universally adopted method of causing a full-fitiiog pin 
to of I he perforations of the two films on one side only 

w lufli s^nkage was taken up on one side only of the full-fitling pin. 
A ^ond pin fitted the opposite perroration from top to bottom but 
not from side to side fE.P. IW,363}, 

Kelley wii* n prolific parentee, A few of his patents art here given: 


E.P. r3S.63s 
h.P. I30.«03 
E.P. J(S0J37 
E.P. 228.S87 
&P. 333.M1 


rniitcrfoT doybic-oQJited itock, niuj ngistraiion imos. 
Dyo-toniijjt, 

Film d0uhli>ccHi«U on oa^ wde and incans for nm- 

Hfi’lj-'iFin i I ■ _ _ ^ 


lf.SLP, I,13J.730 
lf.S,P. I,UO;0(23 
U.S,P, I.1S0J034 


EP 402.JJi 


uUcuig twtJ-coEtJur lnii!i|pc tn ujiit 

AJlcnwte frame* only cf positive arc dyed. Tlic film i* 

prdjccicd $1 iinice aommf speed. 



KofdttL'firoinr^ (ThejEarfier Process.) 




FtO. IS4.—Poly^lir'dinLdc machide. 



Fkj. IBS.—Dcbric prinrinB itiiiichiiw for pnitiitnE 
posiiive sitniiJtaii£oiJ5^' 


boih douhtc-cvialcii 

(Ite q ^ u»i 








Fjci, IKfii,—Priutei for daubJo-siKEoctii colcmr prin[$: CintcolDT. 










il 



J*^;. 1K7.—ClnccuFor Optical Bench Cop^n Printer. 



















Fw. IW.—Gtinics opened, 1W, Sc^cnty-tivt camcremen 

Knlghl on ihc film XlVUt Olympiad—The Glory 
ot Sport. The NevrtiU bipock cameras m $hown in prepamlieFn fot (hdr mirk with 

'^Tcchnichftimc. 

iBj 4f A Ankmf MmA ^iWMi^lan iLJi#.> 


rfiatij^ jif 






5UBt ft ACTIVE I*R0CE5SES 


enable boih ssdcs of douhlecoatffd film io be Simultaneously pdnled 
from ihe single master positive bsiriag the pairs of compJetncaiiiry 
images. 

The dopbJe-cffiJted film tiaw beariiig nc^uthx* images was developed 
and bleadied; the bleach btith harilened Lhc film only in the parts where 
the image liad been printed. 'Fhe two ^ides of the film were then dyed in 
the usual nubiractive complcmentaries, the dye being absorbed by the 
gekiinc only in the litiherdened areas, thus providing posilivc dye 
images. 

The Kodachrome bleach was; 

A, Petss^iim ftitkyaniJe - 
,, bn^cnidc 
dktinimilc 
Aceik: acki 

Water . 

Br Poii^liuTi atuiPp 5 pet ceoi- lohiiton-, 

A and B weir mixed in equal proportiom. 

The filnis were fixed aflcr bleaching. The drying was important and 
Iiatl to |>c as even as possible. Hmnidity of the film had also consider- 
abk bearing on the rcsulis; Uie drier the illm the deaner the highlights 
and the greater the contrast, 

J. G. Capstaff patented the making of positives of dilkrcnt gammas by 
varying the development time. See also Comstock fTechntcoloT) and 
Brewster (U*S.R 1 ,469.811). 

pA'mm 
E.P. lW29(isi^^ 

U^J’. U96pCWJ0 

Magnaeiilur. 

fConsolidatpU Filiti EedivUria, U3AJ 

An American two-colour suhlniclive process stil] worked by the 
Consolidated Film Indu^tric^ division of Republic Pictures Corpora- 
tion. This coneem was Eioen^ by the owners of the “ Prizma ’’ patents, 
which j| will be remembered was the name under which the patents of 
WiUiiun van Doren Kelley were comracreializied, Herbert L Yates now 
opemies the ** Trucofor process, which will presjumably supplant 
Magnaeolor. 

Camem .—Normal bipack is used in a standard camcni equipped 
with special gate and magazines according to usual bipuck practice* 

P/Inr^jf.—Double-coated positive film b used. One side of ihe film 
U toned blue by an iron solutiunt and Ibe opposite vide U toned red- 
orange by mordanting with an iodide and dye-toned by the familiar 
technique of B^omtEon. Under the Mason patent each side h uruated, 
without danger of the solutions toning more than one side at a lime, 
by flouting the film on the surface of tlif£ solutions. 

Y 


375 gm. 
3623^ 
31 S „ 
l0c.c. 
I.(W 


337 







t’lo. tSa^MwIikolw E.P. J40^JS. 


FiO. E.P, J*3jit9, 

camera fitted with a specia) pressure pbue with four roUera, A »him was 
ptoccd in from of ibe grotujd glass to make Uic plane of the ground alais 
coincide with the plane of the cmulsicms of the bipack. (Fit 188) A 
338 ‘ 


COLOUR CINEMATOORAI'HY 


Mullkolor Proces 


American rwo^lour subiniciive process. Operating in 1931, 
Carmra.—Bipnek (” Dupack " was used) eaposed in a Mitchell 



































































































SLBTRAfTlVR ••ROCfiB'SES 


Bell & HowcU camera could also be used, the pins on the back prcssiiie 
plate being increased to eleven in number to ensure contact, and 
0-006 iii, was removed from the nperiure plate to itiuke the emubiom 
cam.^ in the satno plane as when usiii^ one filtii normatly* A Mn* 86 
Wralien filler was for daylight exposii:rc$p btil this waA omUteti for 
tungsten ligljting. 

Priittbtg^—-Jhc two negatives were both printed from sicaultancously 
in a eniitni^i printer of the type in which two Jtghi-fiouices on dther side 
of a gate enable both sidei of douhle-coated film to be printed at the 
same time. This type of printer was first used by A- Hamburger for the 
(^olychrouildc process^ EXrbrie having construct^ the primer (sec above. 
Fig. 185). 

The lira( opetatian t* lo apply u fcrHc nmci w one wOt ef the film- He^teciinif 
the film b then inantr^ in a lohjiion wiuch tptw* i he ffli uie 

ude leaving ihfr hlmi imasc iwmfrccteil ThU iiratilufn [oa^ ^rv'cs^ aisa 

ks a mdTdnEiL f-CFT « dyt which l rellows. and which adds ttf llhancc to the 
image. The fiim b Then pitssed through hypo, washedt difcd, and i lie 

tcrmijd. ir%dl( b priiited Oft the i^ 0 'a■^ollod lido and Is ihcrcrore blue, 1 dt. j 

MuLTicoton Patents 
£.P. 339.123. 

E_P- 139.971 

340*23K, 1929 
E.F. 360.819. 1930 
i76,5H, 1931 
EP. 31SH.3M, 1931 

PhotiKTulor Proctm, ^Pfnbably Ob&oJeLc.) 

(Fhfitoenlor Corpomikm.) 

American tw'i>-oolour subiTuctivc system. Operating in 1930. 

Camera. —Beaut-splitter taking two imjige&. !*Fism system of beam- 
division. 

Doublocoaied positive film was printed with an optical 
printer, both images being printed simiijlancously on cither side of the 
film. The prim was then dyed by conuct bliit-grecn on one side and 
red^orange on the other. No further desfcriptioit lias been divulged- 
Probably iron and urenium were employed, as in most of Lhese two- 
colour American procesye^ than worked. 

Naif .—From Cheahoive vague deso'ipUciii it is to be supposed that the 
procedure w'as nubsiumialLy tlic same oa in Polychromide^ The writer 
has not been able to trace any paimii for the camera. 

PdlychroniLde I^ocess, (Obsolete.) 

This process was developed in England by an American chcmibl^ ilte 
late Atoti Hamburger, whose name was originnlJy brought into promt- 

MJtiiv Rav^ll M.. "llic MuUioolet prooew.’^ Jmm^ Sat. Mtn. I>uc.k Itp 
Ho. i tiyjlXp. 5. 

339 


COLOIFH CfN'EMATOGRAPHY 


rencc by his portrait colour photography, for which he had established 
a studio in London before the first worid war* He had taken out certain 
putenta tor slill-colour cameras and toning processes (£.p, 2S.722, 1912, 
A. E. Conradi and A. Harabutgef; and 6,P. 20J80,1911), The former 
patent desenbes means for applying distonton to a reflector bv the appfi. 
catitra of pressuTc on diiTerent points nrouiid the edges, in order to 
correct for the unequd distortion produced in the transmitted image 
when a plain neflector is used. The latter patent was for toning a print 
yellow by means of racrcuric chloride and potassium iodide, of which 
formula Hamburger always claimed to be the originator. Later, in 1918, 
appears a pawnt ^P. 136,595, J918. A. Hamburger and W. E, L. Day> 
which ]$ described a beam-spHtier caiocra for motion pktum wiih 
two gates at right angles to each other and a tcficctor similar to that 
ile^n^ m Specificalion 2S,722, 1912. In E.P, 203.358. 1922, is dc- 
,?n t di^-toning which ultimately became known us the 

1 o yc rofiiide proce^. He describes the method of cJiposiug an 
Of ocfaromtilic film sensitized with erythrosine and a panchromatic film 
^nsiti»!d with pinacyarol, Tlicse two films w^re exposed in the 
Hamburger beam-splitter camera. Positive prints are made from these 
on the opposite sides of double-coaled positive film. A mixture of 
tnapmla and aurnmim: is then applied to the positive primed from the 
oittiochromaiic film, and a mixture of malachite green and helio 
safra^ to the positive printed from the puachromuiic film, Tlie 
positive film IS then bleached in a solution containing chromic add and 
potassium feiTocyanide, aJlerwards cleiirej in potassium me la bisulphite, 
and then washed ai^ dried. Hamburger claimed that the positive from 
him 1 lihc onhochromuirc film) exhibited a gradation from red to 
KUow. whereas the positive printed from Jilm 2 (the panchromatic) had 
oi5fi$ rom green lo the whole* therefore, giving the effect of ii 
our processJ The bleached silver image furthermore provided a 
^jf key. However, ^ cifeci was due probably far more to the fact that 
f^r fl?* tnmbtsulphite i$ quideer for the magcnLi tlian 

« ‘he lighter tones tending to become 
deeper tones remained red (Figs. 184 und IS5). 

I AmXIl. the process was still being worked in 

London m 1933 exactly as above described. Negatives were eciieraitv 
ob^ned wjih Agf^nr Ehi Pont btpaek, instead of using the beam- 
spljricr ctunera, a Dcbne bipack camera being emptoved 

“lensting cujitribuiion to the techiuqac of dv^-mordanUng 

v&i pro^bly ihc tirst lo dye the film/rerf and to bleach and mordant 
This method seems to Jave resulted in u considerable gain 
processes arc notoriously liable to ^Id 

340 


SUftTR ACTIVE PROCESSES 


POLYCHROMtDl; FORMUUC 
fffXitiw Otwhper. 


mi m A,- ■■ ? 

Sodiim] Sulphite-(anhycLV «« 25 

C3JbckDii|e ** ♦- -- 125 „ 

Pot Bromide .. *. 1^7 « 

Vfattt^m .. ,, IpOOOcx, 

Dilute t*7 


MorJaniini^* 

Pctlodkie .. 

,, Fon‘H:yD4ude 
ClWomic Add .« 

Pol. DiduomaCic 

Wdierto .. -- .. .* 

Tunc: T rttmuics 


n s Kill. 

2 J « 
0-5 ,, 

XSOm. 


Bttach Cur Discharte Bath). 

Pou Mcmhuulphlec , , S peroeni. solytiou 

Time: IS niifiutet 


DYE-TONING 

iUd-Orangv 

r er Fudom <.* <• 2^^ 

A Spirit ..r 4P -- ** 

lWmcr(212’^F)lo lOO „ 

nfAunmcDe O «■. 2 

^'cSpirli -» " 

far wf? t&ktz 100 psirts A 

25 „ B _ 

10 « Glycerine 


Bfut^m/ir 

r Nfakichita Cim *. 

A IndimdiU Alcohol 4. 

[Water 


40 URi, 

225 <LCm 

I.00Q » 


rl-ldioSarraiiin (Hdlidiiy) t. p- 40 gm- 
BI Ifulustrliil Alcotiel .. «* -- 200' cx; 

lw«e«-<2irE) -- 1.000 ,* 

i^r nwf iakf: TOD pans A 
11 » B 

5 *. Af^tic Acid 

6 *, GIvocHiw 


PotYCHROfcflDE Patents 

FP. 123 JSfi E.P- 203453 

FF 121487 EJ^-237444 

EJ*. 136495 E.F 2fil.0S4 


34 ] 








COlOtrit CINEMATOGRAPHY 

Scmoti Color^ fObsoIfltc-) 
f LAbDnlOTkv^l 

An American two<o1our subimcrive process operated In 1930. 

Canfunt .—Bipaek in a normiit comera equipped with special gate and 
iTia^zincs^ 

Prinjing. —Ooublc-^aLed fitni Was asecL, One side was loned bLue 
wiiii iin iron. toncTp and tfie otiier ^ide wus toned, rtpd-oraage witb 
uiiijiiuiii. (Processing prabably ^imUnr to Mutticolor.) 

Slriu^p Kleurefi Film MiatscliappjJ. {ObsoleteJ 
(Uincht, HolldJikd.} 

A two-coionr subtractive process. 

Cort/rm,—E,p, 33h,14l, 1929, described a bcam-spliuer having two 
gates m right angles to each other, the bejuri being diverted by a single 
imiisparcnt reflector between the lens and the film. The film shown 
in Ihc drawing iiis travdling across both gates. Such an arrangement 
would requinr a puJi-down of two or more frames. 

PrUtibig^ — 233,54fi* 1927, proposed the use of a single Layer of 
opaque scrccmng in dotibk-coaied film. The opaque layer was to be 
placed between the emulsion and the oclluloid on one side of the film 
only* Such a layer wqs lo be coloured with maai^nc^sc peroTtide Of by a 
dyestuff soluble in the devclopiiig and fixing b^lhs. 

ELP. 341^477 dealt with a machine for applying dye or liquid to 
opposite sides of a double-coated film. The nmchinc was very sinriinr 
to Hainburger^s Pnlychromide dye-apptying apparatus. 

TIic Siriuii process was* as fi^r as (he writer h owure^ a dye-mordantitig 
pTiWess^ but no detalLs appear to have been published. U has been sinted 
ikal li prism bi^in^pliiicr wm used in connection with the procosSk 

Most Of Uie Sirius patents were asslguiitcnE^ from 
L. Horst, ii German photographic in^-cntcir. 

Rdemice 

Licfn mfii&tihii, il (Au^. 17, 1K4^ p. J4. 

Spednicolbr, (Obsolete.) 

ThU was a iwo-cnlour ^ubnaclive process corfesponding lo the 
Ocrmiin Ufa process marketed fora lime in EoglantI under ibe above 
trade name. 

CimcWn‘ ^Agfa bipack was exposed iti n Vinien cameni equipped with 
spectal biptick gate iind magarine. 

Doubk-coaied positive film was dyc-tnned blue-green on 
one Side and red-oran^ on the other by a morchinting prooess, the 
details of which have not been published. 

342 


SUBTRACTIVE pftOClSSES 


ReTtujrks .—The prmls wem djean, hiivlttg cx^cal definLtLon aod 
gradaiion. There vt JAS a]» coInpIe^e freedom from variaiioa, a disr 
agFeoabk fsiitlt so oFlcn pjesem ia dye^mordantlng processes, Tlie 
printing was of c^ixaI technidl esoeJlenoe lo ihe o^tJieT TeduLtcolor two- 
colour process. 

TechDkJtromc 

ETechnkolDr limUcd, Ei^locd: j 

Tw<><olour Techmcolor process. 

Camefa. —Normal, fitled for Bipackr Special magaistie avuiJable In 
Engiand by Ncw.iU to oocommcKiate 4W feel of blpack. The two strips 
come o(f spools on one side of the magazine nnd are fed into the 
camem sepamteLy. Just obovc Lhc gate, they come tofether, witli a 
specia] roller device to cliniinate the air cushion between them so that 
good registration of ilie two frames is obmined in tlte g^ie- Focus b 
od}iis[ed one. Gve-thousandih of an inch further bacic ilian normal so 
that lhc image ts focused on a plane corresponding lo liic middle of 
the two strips* Fdm stock used b presumably EaHiTtian Bipack Types 
t234 or im and 1235. 

Friftiitig by fmbtMihttu —Av for Technicolor ihra^-colour. Sec 
Teclmicolor* 

Rrtmrks.—The re-introduction of iwiM'olour prititlng by the 
Technicolor organization i& historically TCTBorkable, Such a retro¬ 
gressive step can only have been brought about by lack of an adequate 
supply of prism three-strip cameras in Encljiiid, or by temporaty 
economic ctrcumstances. TTie prims arc made on the siatidurd ** LB* * 
pm-bell machine and ii is understood that insteiitl of using a typical 
ted-orange and blue-preen printing in two stages* three ttialriDes are 
prepared from the two negatives, ihiis the rcd-orjtngc represents the 
re&idt of two printings by the standard magenta nnd yeSItw dye%. This 
method would pcrmil mu trices EO be made of vaiA'Ing conlmst. For 
cxnmple, a soft gradation y^ow ami a high-contmst magenta would 
yield a hue-shift towards oratigc-yeBo'^' and yellow in the higJdightst 
thus making use of n dichrofc effect, (See Polychromide.) This artifice 
noticeably extends the chromaitcity range, Tlic process w ns iis^ on a 
large scale in the fllminfi of the XlVth Olympiad, at Wembky, in 
(Fig. 190), The release prints w^crc palpably inferior to standard 
Technicolor in colour and defiiiiliots 

Truc'dhir 

hy Con»ntiddleJ Film trtdlislTk». a divrtkm of Republk PkUirra Corpora- 
lion, 1740 Brondwny, Nc* Y-orlc City. N,Y,. U.S.A.1 

American two-colour (or threenrolour) subiraciive process^ 

Cumera,—Normal. N, C. Mitchell equipped with special pressure 
plate and bipock nuigaziuc. 


343 


COLOITR CINCMAtO<^KA?HY 

fitm Sfack. —En^uitan Bipack. Type 1234 Ortho for liay- 
light* Type 1236 for tungsten Uliimtnutiau at 3,200- to 3^400" Kk* 
combined in ctihcr case iftiih Type 1233 Pnn. 

Primes .—^Spccial twi^luyer Eastmim coaling* iho respeciivecinulsian 
layers incorporatiiig probably resin-proiccled, or in any case non- 
difTusing^ colokir couplers. Ndihcr of the two layers h specially 
^Tisitizcd^ as has been the practice wLLb. monopack materials in the past, 
hut arc .separated by a gelatine filter layer preventing*" crosA'piiniing," 
(RP* Application No. 34,26^ Nov. I946.> Tlie under layer of a 
material of ibb type must necessarily b* prinicd through the film 
i^tipport. Tile printer emhodles two film printing gales each associated 
with iti independent source of Hgki, relay rack* control strip and stop- 
motion unlit for the matte boxes. After leaving the first gate, the 
r^wstock takes a half twist and iltence parses through the second gate 
where an image is exposed on ihc opposite surikor of Uic film (viz., 
through the fllni support). The light sources are tungsten fiUnienl 
lamps. The processing machine is a lop drive unit with one sprocket 
per shaft. Two developing tanks* u hypo tank and wash tank are 
Jocaled in (he dark roofn section; white bleach, wash, hypo and fiaul 
wash tanks—together with the track ireaiment unit—are in the white 
light, Tlic whole process is completed in some 65 minutiCs. It is staled 
that Trucolor prinis arc on safety film base without any reason being 
advanc^ for ibis. The base is presumabty Baiiiiium aceto^butyrate film. 
Both sides of the print arc finally coated with Eastman proteedvt 
lactiucr. 

R<.*miifks ,—Consolidaiod Rtm Indus!rtes Inc* operaica the largest 
moiioji picture processing laboratory in the world at Fori Ue. New 
Jereey. This great plant h the creation of Herbert J. Yates, who also 
formed^ Republic Pictures Corporatioo, of which ConsoUdated Film 
Industries is now a division. Until rcceatly the colour process sponsored 
by Mr, \ ates vras Magnucolor (see page 337) and for mojiy years they 
encountered the worries which have ever hniintcd toiuiig processed. 
The general manager at Fort tee. Mr. Arthur J. Miller/ in ly-W con¬ 
ceived the idea of u^ing nou-colour-scusitiTed emulsion incorporating 
coloiir couplers as a substitute for dupli-Uzed film and the former toning 
proc^. The Eastman organization eollaboratcd in the production 
of this type of positive film, in effect* a Iwo-byer monopack/ 

Clearly this process is of great talere£t. li bears a close resemblance 
to Dufaychrome which, while a three<olouf process* can be worked 
equally well as b two-colour process- It is in the predicted three-colour 
Truitolor that wc might have wmc reservations until proof is forth¬ 
coming. And this is bcauic any middle layer of a triplc-eoaial stock 
can only yield a perfectly steady colour baiam?e provided that the 

' Abo ji dl/icctoT RjFpiobIk fictiun Corpomim, 

' The ioconwrated colour coupkn art of the type iiwiti In EktachionK. 


344 


SUBTHACTXVB PROCESSES 

coating of the upper layer of emubion* through which necessarily 
U must be printed^ b so perfectly coated lhal only neghgible differenm 
of coating weight arc present throughout the whok roll of liim. This 
is eJtccssivcly hard to schievt* The sittmtion b to that wnicn 

would ewsl if one tried to make n prim through a uemnd fater coo^ 
tenuously varying In density* The cflfcctive density of the top ^umon 
coating could not be pctmiitcd to vary more than ^-02 in either directioru ^ 
Such even coatings are excessively difficuii to achieve, as the 
Kodachrome. Ansco Color and Agfacolor discovered. Time will show. 
There is no reason why the cost of the iwocolour two-laytr film should 
be much ill excess of" dupti-iizcd film of the former type* The only 
extra coat is ^hat of ihe colour eomponcnis, which in any case are 
cnade by Eastman in hi^ volume. It will be interesting to watch 
evoludon of this pro«ss to the ihrw-coluur stage, Thb will mvoive 
the use of a prism beam*sp1 liter or separation negarives derived from 
monopnek, a procedure whkh has many pninis ag^nat it 

Republic has successfully made a number of feature films employing 
the Trucolor priKes-v for release prints, and lurgc plans are announced 
for the near future*’ 

Ufacolor. (ObsoIctcO 
Ccrmiin twc^colour sublractiii'c process* 

Camc^ru.—Normal. Agfa hi pack was usaJ. _ 

Doubic-coated film toned with ftTrie toner one wde and 
probably uranium un the other, Pye^toning may have been included* 

* Ttkree^:oloor pyiiU’t itre nw in prodticfion ai Fori Lw* emploring Du Pticil 
relcjisc poriiivc. Type m i^cc pnije Vl Ne^tl™ rtte iif ihe junxesai™ fmine, 
linglc strip type; ibt wbjicct»iniiitct neoesawity staiio—iMtiitfiljrp ci»rtowi*i 


34S 


Sil^iMARY OF Typical Subtsactivb Piiioa3s$Es—T woColour 


COLOUR CJNEKATOaitAPHY 



346 





























SUBTRACTIVE BftOCESSES 



J47 










































COLCHFR CJNEMATOOKAPHY 













































SUBTRACTIVE fROCeSSRS 






















Cf>LOt;St CJNOUTOOK APHY 


B. TIIREE-COLOUR SUBTRACTI^'E PROCESSES 

with two subi rsctors niugc is very res tricled. 
hi^oricoDy it became essenxial to perfecL diree^olour proc^ 5 ^®, Maoy 
years passed before the: problems of the three-colour subtractive proce^tv 
applied lo motipn picture tUni were solved. The Technicolor process of 
imbibition printing w^as w^eti adapted lo the requirsmenis, since there 
was no inherent difficulty tn adding a further printing stage to the per¬ 
fected iwo-colour technique. Hence Techtiicolor was the hrst subtrac¬ 
tive process to achieve full three-colour^ srnd having led the way they hnve 
held the dead ever since. The Tccbnieolur cutnera w^s designed for 
making Iwo-colourseptiration neg^iiivn:. it was ndapied lo thrcdHcolouT 
by the expedien t of using biptclc in one of the tw^o gates, li is not bh 
ideal onc-shoi camera^ bat marvellous resuh^ iiave been uchie^cd never¬ 
theless, The late Dr* Trobnd of Teclmicolor thought that the uhimutc 
fitclhod would take the form of a iiipack or* mther, motiopack ami 
W'iis an early patentee. Technicolor for many years foretold Lhe advent 
afaruotiopack camera meterinh By 1942 a few pictures were being 
photographed on Kodachrotne l6-mm. reversia] film. Ifnlargcd separa* 
lions w^rt made from these l6-mm. colour positives, and such negmives 
were used to make the imbibition matrices. Early pictucei in which 
sequences were photographed on monopack (Kodachromel ivere 

Dive Bomber and “ Captains of the Clouds.^' 

in EfigbnU the bleach-out Gstspanrolor positive film had a short but 
promising life before die war put a stop to its mattufocture by Gevaen 
in More may yci tw heard of this beautiful process, &iiicc 

It is known that Dr. Beta Gospar is \xty active in his kboralorics m 
Hollywoivd. 

Before the recent war Koduchromc l6-mm, had achieved univeriul 
iucccsi in the substandard moiion pictutt field, and, with Agfocolor, 
J.G, Farbcn had begun to offer an excellent ajtcmalive. Dtinng ihe 
war Kodachn^me ncveml wus employed by U.S, services, while 

the Germans during 1942 perfected negative-positive AgTiurolor, wiih 
which a considerable number of films were made. The Germans 
equipped a kboiaiory In Prague for processing. As soon as ihe U.S. 
and the British forces occiipitrd the grtai Agfa I.G. Farbcn factory at 
Wolfen (near Berlin) they extracted all ih^ relevant lechniail data, and 
thU WS5 subscquenlly transmitted to the allied photographic maau- 
faclurers. It is oettam that mlhin a shon time a substanlklly identical 
mociopack fdnt will be made by several frnns. Indeed, the .Agfa lypc of 
vnonopack may Iwcomc a standard pnaduct of all photographse munu- 
lactufCTs. Gevncri have already madfi lar^ quantities of this lype of 
film ivvL^ OcvTioolcir) 

In the U.S, during the war, Artsco Inc., a brunch of Genemt Amiine 
and Film Corp^iraLion forigiiuilly controlled by L G. Furben). intro- 
350 


^iiitiHACtrve pieocESSiis 


ducedAnsco Color Film, a reversal material bas^d on the p^jc-^var Agfa- 
color mariufactijTing fojnialii?. This made a^:ulablc in 16-mm. and 
3S-mn]. cartridges. After the U.S. cnlcred the war the Govemxiienl 
seL£i!d the great raciury at Hin^amion and coiuidcmbk quuniitECs of 
3 5-mm. re>cr&d cobur film uere produced for scrvkc purposes. AI the 
iame time experimcntiil work was begun wUb the object of peifcctiiig 
ncgativc-pofuiivc JS-mm. iHm.^ Thi% material has riot been released 
for me in the motion picture industry, but its debut Is unlikely to be long 
dcLiycd_ The duta scL^ed in Germany will no doubt enable improved 
colour couplers to be embodied, and it should then bee^^ual in perfor¬ 
mance to the latest German product. In 15?46 three 35-mm. motion 
picture reversal stocks W'Cio released for profcismnal use. Much will 
depend upon what is accomplished with these materials. 

Ektochrome, Dufaychrome, KfHJnchtomei. Anseo Ctdor, and Agfa* 
trolor are all derived from the original conception of Fischer and 
Sicgre?,( (E,P. 15.055/1912; U.S.P. 1.055,155). the fundamental 
differenoe between ihesc proce^s^s and KoUtichronie being that in the 
former the dy« oouplci^ are in (he mnnopack and in the latter they 
are in the devdoper solutionft. It is to be noted that Mannci and 
Oodo-wshy also proposed ibt fomier process (in U-S P. 1.954.452) 
ant! that their idea was preconceived twenty-live ycar^ earlier, even the 
coupler compounds being practi^y Identical. li remained for the 
Eastman Kodak research workers to bring the original concept into 
actual being. Man nos and Godowsky were Fischer mvtvalisi^. We 
ought to attend the lesson they have taught us. How many rnore 
discarded dUcoveries may be lying in a literary coma for a quarter of 
a century awaiting only the magic wand of the research director to 
call tlicm into gtoriuiu lifel Undoubtedty» the outstanding pruhlem 
in a monopack which embodies the couplers is to prevent them from 
dilTusing or wandering to adjacent layers. It i« In the means to achieve 
this substaniivity that elTorti^ have been tn the main directed, and 
success was obtiiacd by Ihc FG. chertnsia by adding tn die coui^ler 
extremely complex hydrocarbon residues such as an IS-carboxi c hain 
xtcar>i, thus providing a very large molecule wliich can move only very 
slightly, if at all, in the gektiee lattice, 
ludkins and Vsirdcn of Ansco have Ibtcd the follDwing ii!j dcsinibb 
chameterisnes of colour formers. This lUt giv^ some idea of the 
tremendous lask which faced the organic chemists who brought thi» 
process to a workable stage: 

** 1. The colour formcis (couplers I must imS diffuse from one cm ulitu n 
bycr to another. 

2> The compounds most be water or alkaltpc soluble prior to their 
Introduction in the light-sensitive emulsions, but nooHJilTusing 
from the gdaline layer [el water or alkaline solution thereaTter. 
^ A marked rciM^lin. loli timlef Um noinc I'icrtiKolOr."' tt now on the 

ATHffiCTitl Ttnttict. 


351 


COLOUR €|^E144TOGnAPFiV 

3. i be dyoi whkh l!i<* colour forroer^ eventuulLy produce must have 

the proper nbsoiption ehomclcnsiics for subtractive $yntbcsi^^ 

4. Each of the colour formers must be capable of formiDg an 

appropriate dye by conjugaiion with the oxidation prod nets of 
0 single colour developing ageni. 

5. The cotour formers must be Transparent, colourless, ojid in- 

capable of cau!»ing light scatler within the emiilsioji layers. 

6. The compounds musi be stable before and after blm development. 
7* The dyes formed during dim dcvclopnicat must have satis^ctoiy 

dark stability aud a while light stability comparable to other 
dyes commercially jocceptabte- 

B. The colour forenm must exert no desensiiizing or sensitizing 
action on, the silver halide emutsions in which they arc incor- 
pomtetL 

9* Each colour fonoer must react readily with the oxtdatioo products 
of a suitably chosen developing aiEnt to give comparable 
dye yields, but not react with die oxkluttnti products 
of the negative developer in The rever^l process. 

IOp The coipur formeri must be commercially producible in large 
quaniilies on n commercial ‘ 


ftefemices 

H^kCouET, Wtuimii M.p " Agfa Cofour/' Bdii^ Inieitwiw Objoctivig SuJj- 
CommJttat. London, H,M. SiiiUortery OlAse, B,1.0^ Repeii No. 397- 
Item No. 9, 

Siifnal COtp«K l-C, Farbeo, Agfa SubsiduiiT, 
Wolfea. CcmbiiKd Intdli^mic ObJecOiyci Sub-C:oiiim 4 itco, Item No. 9 / 13 J 
(XXJC' 17). 

OiAHCELio*, CoMbH. p, M.i U*S.>!-R., “ Iniwisatjan of Film ProJudlon mul 
Mcthols Bi ihf A*ra Film Fahrilt Plnnt, Wolfen.” C.I.O.S. No. S/13J 

(n/t T fi 

R<i«lK3(W, Ojt, F^ ■■ Agfacobr Procesi.'' C.f.O^. Trip No. 313. No. IV-M. 
Fwm^N. J. S.,’• Hiftoiy of Color Phoiopaplty.*' mS. Phot. I^b, Co. 

" The Agfacolor Nc^tivopQiitl\« Mctholl for 
FWi^omI Moikin Krtunsv*' by U..C01 Ranscr ond othea, Jim tW. 
F.J.A.T, Fjoal Report* Not 3SJ. 3®, ** CertnaD FhotMcilsittvO Product*,’* by 
C. E. RoseA[ul [tr. D, R. WhiiA rT.I.I.C,>, July'Ampuit I94S, 

Note; RF,O.S. .« Briiiih Intdiigcrico Ob;o6tiv«s Sitb^Toimniitoe. 
C.LO.S.=>CDoibmod tmcUijpcnw Obk«h«» Sub-CoRimiitce. 

FJjA.T, Field MoniHtiion Aseocy. TccbiUcnl 


3S2 


SUHTTtACTIVE PRflCBSSFS 


CoLO^ Development anp Mvltilaver Patents 


(AG* P'ixrheiiitiduxfrie AkL 


EP. J73,3T6 

EP, 457.326 

E-P. 406.043 

EF 500,945 

E.P- 376.795 

E.P. 456.400 

EP. 486,424 

EP> SOL190 

EP. 379,423 

EF 4$9;U27 

E.P, 486.493 

E.P, 5CCA665 

E-P. 379*914 

£.F. 460,580 

EP. 4*6,496 

E-P. 501>OfT7 

Ep. m.m 

E.P. 460.653 

i:,p, 486.517 

EP. 503,318 

E P. 3*3,799 

461.006 

EP 486,840 

EPv 503*832 

E.P. 3*7,197 

K.F 461,559 

E.P. 4*7.769 

EP. 304^76 

EP,3«7J519 

E.P 464.198 

EP. 488.tM0 

EF. 505*027 

E.P. 3*9.341 

EP* 465,823 

EP, 488,548 

EP. 505^14 

E,P. 390,327 

EP,467.(^7 

E-P. 488,553 

EP.SC56,5I4 

E.P. 396,585 

EP. 468.84* 

EP. 488333 

E.P. 307^009 

EP 396.646 

EP. 468.9^6 

EP* 489.093 

EP. mm 

E.F. 3993S7 

E.P.47U20 

EP. 489,161 

EP. 50S.468 

EP* 400.931 

E P. 473^ 

EP. 489.162 

EP. 511,039 

EP. 402^21 

E.P. 475J 91 

EP. 489.t£4 

E,P.5U.790 

EP. 401.856 

E.P. 476.672 

EP. 4i^;274 

EP* 512,060 

EP. 410.4*1 

E.P. 479,732 

EF 489,841 

EP. 513^34 

EP. 418.137 

EP. 479.818 

EP. M9.853 

EF. 513.554 

EP* 417.887 

E_P. 480,778 

E-P. 49041 

E.P 516*581 

£.P. 431.075 

EP.48U74 

EF. 4W,5I7 

EP, 516.606 

E E 432.969 

EP.4*i:£75 

490,844 

EP. 516^937 

EP. 436.387 

EP.48U30I 

EP, 491^38 


EP. 442,160 

EP. 4*2,652 

EP. 491,959 


EP. 444.198 

E.P. 483,000 

EP. 492.518 


EF. 446.977 

EP. 4*3,271 

EP. 492,513 


E.P. 451.347 

E.P. 4*3,548 

EP. 492,648 


EP. 454.088 

EP. 484,698 

E-F. 493.308 


EK434JB8 

E.P. 4*5,861 

EP. 493*869 


EP. 454,841 

E.P, 485.862 

EP. 494,144 


E.P. 455,536 

EP. 486,003 

EP. 499.131 



EXAMPLES 

A^gCdlar 

tMannriicturcd «t WotTea^ Gennany^ by LG. FcirttcnlnJujlrk AJsL Co- Tlie factucy 
is now in (Lw Ru^^iaji Zcrne oC oosjajpsiioii.) 

Cfciuri^rafikMt.—Thrti>«louf subtree live proce^ Integral iiipuck. 
or moRopack, with tion-difTiiiing colour cotipkrsi iiKOfporaicd ld Uiree 
emulsion UycT«. 

C£w/rftf,—Normal, 

Projec Stones ortual. 

—^Normal, wilh suitable grading for colouf- 
P/ocesj[iJ7g ^—Colour developmem with colour coupling compounds^ 


z 


353 


COliOl’R CINEMATdCRAFHY 


Agfacolor Ojugi.ns 


PtiCCt K lUlWN 

1197 ^ ll Tr^ior Ftwtgiifij^£ik|Uf/* 

'^7>* 4417 v3W3mm wdt 

imvidc tb« Ihm Jisodt 

M M lm i tatJlgtl |z7 du 
Hfe.iEqfl ' Pol^fctliiun Ctiiaitii>' 
* ■ + 


H. &WIB, IMJ, 
icThvi4 Iripfcl^, 


U«.Tllj 


LF. 711.4ft9. 


IWii 


iL Hcmdui^JWT, 

4f7j0±9^—IjiidHXl ■rtd »fcikM itit hf*f tl 
l>iwmrir 1 ^ 5tii ixw ttiJuu! 0^ 

fttipciu Fuicttw—im. ^ 

PUtF. 1 i> 

ii4iW-l»ii 

CoiflB Hit IBIB* ''^Mdow danlenBdui im 
cokror fbfiEMact,** 

UJtK IJCI7^,TJ4—tSIl. 

li^SuF. * 1 4V1 m _laij 

j ldfttrtwi 45f ifiMnns to i|«-rt|ppcn to fom 
c^OWd itt iti« tif okMiteil 

ittrcT bnuatdi^ 

WujKui SqHwm*—J9 jL 
5T9,m—l912- 

Fikvt work on *' of tfijU-ii«Lmw dm, 

FtF. tIT jA M HrJT—S MJiiM p. *ie^ 

FJi UM02—J^S^-Scfukitliis ani Urn btih^ 


FJ. m»—l!r3&-DiilDi. 

FJP. klX1i3—OTcrkip iifiint 
finttriili 

FJL 

F,r, 

F4ViA^!l?«d-^|. 

FAAlk»*—IflJt 
214.«7P— 

^iWhJVaicA. 

LP. 






CoiitnA. 





siraTRACTiVt processes 


Types op AopACOLOii Film 


WUik 

Trpt 1 

Meter 


16 mm. 

Reversible. Daylight Tyt*. 

<?-E- 
9-1D i7 

SmtHthU K. 

16 niTfi. 

Aceuue Base 

Rcv%rnble. Tunsstaj Type 

M 16 

1 Tuilg$l«R. J.axi' K- 

16 mm. 

Dupliciling, Rcveraible 





Type. 

MfUf iltiritg* 1 

Pmp09€- 

35 imn. 

35 mni. 

J5 num. 

Nc!gartive. Type B. 

Type, NiinueBw 

Negative. Tyne TunffUen 

Type, Niiratc B^ac 

PfMiUxe. Reka* AceUiitBjM 

ffVjicm. C?X 1 

» 12 

12 i6 

Camem Rccatd 

if ■■ 


Giwr^l Desvjtlpfiort ^—TTic origiiis of itiift pfoccss sie!n from ihc 
discoveries of B.Homolka (19071 and Rudolf Fischer (1911). The former 
discovered Ltmi certain intcracdiatcs^ such m those that ^ve itidigoid 
dyes* can develop c?tposcd silver bromide prunJiicing simiilluneously an 
insoluble dye. Such aBcnis are iadoxyb J^hydroxy^thio-naphihenc, elc* 
This been called PRIMARY COLO UR DEVELOPMENT. 

There Is another way, namely iliat of using ihc devdopment process 
indirecily to form dyes. Fisdier discovered that dyes, such as those 
helonging So the fjoininlmine and axomclhine class, can he fon^ed 
when exposed silver bromide Ls developed with p-phenylenc ttiamine 
together with cotipltng substances- During developmeni p-phenylene^^ 
Of its derivatives, reacts with phenols or naphthob or substancos wn* 
tainlng a reactive methylene group through the fncdiuin of oxidiEcd 
silver bromide, to form sirongjy coloured Insoluble dyestiuffs, (he 
developed silver ima^ being at the S 3 me lime produced. Ftseher thus 
conceived the idea of muting a developing agent, such as an aromatic 
diamine, or amino phenol and a coupler which cOuld be a phenol or a 
binly containing a negative nicihylcne group. This has been caUetl 

secondary colour development 


355 

























cmiyvu. riNEW^TnoRAFHy 

The neiii step was to incDiporafc the coupler in the silver halide 
layer or layers instead of adding ti to the developer, but owing to the 
apparent impossibiUiy at that lime of making the dye-forming sub' 
stance.-^ non'diiTusing, Rscherp m J9II, find to abandon his projecL for 
making a multilayer colour film by applying these discoveries. The 
physical stmciure of a gd is such that the conditions for molccubr 
diffusion arc IdcaL Hence our ability, amongst other things, to develop 
u gdaiino emulsioni As gcLiLlne can only trap coarsc-graiaed particles 
insoluble in water, the dyes produced by colour development must be 
insoluble in water and large in structure. Nexi, ifte Substances to l>e 
incorporated must not adversely affect the sensitivity of the silver halide 
emulsion. It does nm seem strange that Fischer""s idea wa$ considered 
impracticable by emidsioa experts. 

The next imponunt nimic is that of Willbin Schneider of the 
Agfa organbaiian (I.C.). He itlU Ui lhat in 1934 instructionfi were 
issued tbai a colour process must forth with be perfected. In 1935 
Schneider and G* Wjlmanns re par Led 

Vol. V, p. 29} thal a satisfactory solution of the problem Iiad been 
completed. 

Colour couplers similar to those discovered by Fischer were used 
but these were made fast lo difFEisiDfi by uituching a i&ng*cfiam aikyt 
group^ since diffusion depends upon the physical dimensions of the 
paniclcsi determined by molpculur weight and consutution. In gcrcT 4 il+ 
a chain-like siructure containing twelve carbon atoms b usually 
adequate. By virtue of these couplers containing a group soluble in 
alkaB, it was feasible to incorporate them in the gelnttne tmiilsion in an 
alkaline solution. 

The developing agent in ihe AgfocoJor process used to-day* U: 

N-diet byh/^-phenylenedlumliie sul phatc. 

An enormous range of colour conpfers is now knowfi. As examples 
w'c give three typical: 

With the above developing ageni: 

■nwcyupkr l'nhcnyl-3-meihyl-$-p|'TlizD]onetimq dye. 

,, amoiinlumUtkgh'es ft>¥r^iv Uye. 

.. M L-h>'4r<oxy iH^nphihokodd A dye 

tn 1936 Agfacolor Reversal Him was made ^vaikhU: in ^ mm, and 
lb mm*, Ehc processing being carried out solely by the manufacturer. 
These films were of both daylight and tungsten types, the speed being 
roughly the same as lhat of Kodachrome, 

[mmediately foil owing the occupation of Germany, invesLigatiun 
by ihc AngJoAmericiin Service experts of the Agfa film factory a I 
Wulfcn, Gcrmctny, revealed ihal the Germans hud developed! to a 
conimerdiil stage ike lung^prcmiiM;d 35-min, tiegative-posiitve Agfa- 
356 


SUaTRACTIVE eRCJCfSSES 


color film.* It is i^aid lhai UFA ordered by GocbbcJs to pfocKd 
with ihc produciion re:atiire^kfigth piciures employing the Agfacolor 
negative-positive proce^^, bui they did not consider the ntethod sutli- 
k'iejiily perfected for fixture pToduetions and proceeded only because 
of tlic govemmcjit directive. 

One feature piclLire, "'Die Frau meiner Tniume/" was hrOiight to 
ihe U.S. and viewed by various producefSH members of ihc Scxiiety 
of Motion picture Engineers^ manuractancts. and other groups con¬ 
cerned in colour film development. and was considered of sufltcieftily 
good quality to warrant a tboiougli inve$ligaiion of the process in all ils 
aspects. The picture Baron Miinchausen '* was in tlie opinion of the 
experts ** of good quality as far as grain+ sharpness and tone wext con- 
cefTtcd+ and the colour gertemdy pleasttii:^ None of the colours were 
particukirly saiumtedp the reds bemg quite dull. U was not as good as 
Teclinicolor." 

It does not appear tliat any new developing machines or primers were 
constructed for the processing of the fdm^ but modifications were nuide 
in existing equipment. BcLw'ccn 194tJ and 1945 thirteen ftiature pictures 
were made (see list below) and some fifty shortis consisting of one or two 
reds. The maicrial is particuhirly suitable far newsreel prtiduciinR+ and a 
picture was made of actmd combat in Russia. LL-ColoncI R. H. Ranger 
(U.S. Signal Corps) and his associrtte^ considered that "* the screen 
quality was inferior to the establLsbcd Afncrican standard {presumably 
Technicolor); the results varied^ but certain prints of one or two of the 
pictures were quite satisfactory in colour qutility, and partkiihirly 
impressive bt^ausc of the shaFpnc$s of the screened picture- The liittcr 
wais quite noticeable on medium-long und long shots- Tlie mcihod is 
capable of good results tf pro][Kr control and equipment were used^ but 
under tbt wartime conditLons in Gcitnany there was ait apparent lack of 
good equipment and a gcncraly hixiiy la quality controli resulting in 
many inferior prints being released 

Darrel Catling, A-R.P-S., one of the more Intdligctit of the younger 
British directors, had the following reaction to his first right of Agfa- 
color: In 'Immense^ ihene: wai^—with tlie exception of only one reel 
a pretty faif balance nminsained heiw«n one reel and another, though a 
mistiness was noticc^ibk throughout most of the film. In' Mlinqhauscn/ 
although the balance bctw^ccn reels w'as much less good» it nevenhcless 
mattered little; it wujt a phantasy on the one bond, and on the other the 
art directian^ costume design^ and colour planning were so briltbnL^ 
tostefufi and imaginative that deficiencies in tlie colour ays^m were 

* Squ^UlOlt Leaijer G- C. Bxodc, wins visiieU slie Agfa tfim radtnry ni lune 
aiflttd IR Ihc repcin (CI.O.S, Tnp 3lJ> tttm “ A^faoolor woclU seem lo offer 
«t kast tike ponibflity oT ^ li^ gruitiy imn^ ihjn KatliiiMlor, jnd I certaitity 
ImtmjHSKi, In the Mvened picluro which 1 mw. wJth ibc hi|^ resol^mj: pow« 
coinpaivil to Tochnicotor.” 

J57 


COLOUR CIKEMATOGRAPHY 


Agpacoi4>r Rpx£i.%^ rRiivi 1940 TO 1945 


Ficltirr, 


1- *" Ffiucs eimldodi bessepe 
Dipjomiitfn " 

2. ** Dk gfpEdcCe Slailt 

3. ^*Ba/cni MUni:iuiiscn "" ,. 

4. ■"* Daft Bad aiif der Tciuw 

5. Opfcrsfang'■ 

4 ** linnisise ” 

7^ “ Dk Frcihttt . 

Ifr ^" K^jlberg** 

§. ^‘DkFniumeiiicfTniiimt** 
10, " Die Flflkmt^^' 
n. '^Fignro^ <xJcr Ein tolkr 

Tap ** 

L2. *' Wsr beidc Ikbtcn Kaih- 
eriaa '* 

IJ. Itkiric lli>rfc<ifpKn 


DIttetof. 

CarH^rajnnn . 

SfUi/L}. 

Jswioba 

Tfcbel 

IJFA-Bsbcisbcrif 

HjirEarp 

van Ski!ky 
voa Golfunder 

Mondi 

K.fiiw 
vert Boniy 
Mdndk 

Ti\fm yiwi 
UFA-BabcUt^cTE 
UFA^EQbclftbcrg 

UFA^BabcUbeix 

KJutofr 

Karian 

JiiisH 1 

voTi Boh'aij [ 
Lkbcneincr 

11 

Kikn 

Mowll 

Tschit 

W^tfinicin 

Huffman 

IS >p 

Fiima 

, DFA'Babdsberg 
^ UFA-BdbcbbcTB 

' Wka Fibia 

RabeiisJ[ 

Vi^hoovcn 

Kriffl 

WiijseocF 

¥\lm$ und 
UKA-B^bd^ibcTii 
Tobi^Jobiiniiifllhjil 


forgii^n or forgouco. Moreover, a compteic change of toenk— 
coinciding with ilic clinnge of the reels^—often helped lo co^ef up the 
lack of balance. Some tlioughli too, wui given to the colour pfanning to 
avoid, as much as pofEsiblc, revealing Uic s^-stem^s weaknesses—though 
the revelation of one of its (at present) greatest faults was pfactically 
uimvoSdabkJ the imbility to render a firm black. A fade is a wishy- 
washy* grey^out" or" brown-otit bad, in fact, that it is held only 
for the sh orcesi time. ldcidciitally+ some of the trick wort was of a very 
high order. TTic short * East Prussia on ilic Sea ‘ was very luieswn; 
much of it being little difTertnt from sepia-ttittoj monochrome, and 
pfcily dense at that. Sat despite the eulogies whicli Agfacolor at its 
best brings forth, it appears, however, to have one limltnlioiiwlijch many 
of its supporters overlookt in the case of the fiaal Technicolor print 
there is merely one positive emulsion and three intermingled dye images 
on tliccelluloid base, whereas in the hnat Agfecolor print we have three 
tiegative eattdsions (which have to be cnrefully balanced as to speed, 
wlour, and thickness) with filter and/or isolating layers in between. 
Therefore, for the moment at least, it seems appsireni that tlie Agfacolor 
system is unable to yield cheap prints for commercial release purposes i 
the cost cannot fail to be very much higher than that of a print consisting 
of one ordinary emulsion and three dilTerent dyes," 

Post-war elfons have been confined to the Russians, who have made a 
number of new* Ftlms of events such as Dr. Bents' iriumphal return 
(followed so soon by tragedy) to Prague, and of a huge sporis parade 
iQ Moscow. Both these films were publicly erhibited in the British 
i5S 










svatitACTSVK raocE^SB^ 

and the writer heard innuiticrable people espress very giy 
their view that the eoluur was to be preferred to that of Techmcolw, 
The erpett saw that ihcte was momalous colour rendering due to ihc 
very defective fiiageiita coupler, but here md ihert shot* turned up 
of quite exquisitely aj.tisfj'iog colouTt atid it is perfectly certain that 
the Ccnnims were at the bcgiucung of a rnosi important dev^pmeDt- 
The men who were responsible for the ajehievcnient have sinoc been 
interrogated, the opimtifi unanimpuiily expressed being that they were 
forced into production before they had completed their mik* and that 
great improvernenis would shortly have trou made in the samratiun or 
the couplers and particularly in ilie design of the coating machinery. 

Figures are given in the FIAT Finnl Repoit No. 721 which do not 
support Cntliug^s view^ about the liigh cost of Agfacolor. In the follow¬ 
ing table, cost Qgurcs per foot of 35-mm. Agfacolor negative and 
positive Film arc compared with those for blnch-aud-whitc Him- Dollar 
values are computed at $0 23 5 to 1 mark^ which was assumed to be the 
averuge before the w-ar* 




Ag/acijhr. 

». * IV. , 


S. JE W. 

Sfk^ 

~^k7 t. 

Mk.\ 1, 1 litk. 1 1 

Manufoclurin]^ Cent 0055 

Sellme Fh9£ .. ' O-US | 0-l 1 

PrcKSSiirig , , 0-30 007 | 

0046 0011 
fKt4 0O» 

“ 1 

O IS ' 0O3S 
' 0-2S 005 

1 00t» 0031 

|j 

OOZI 000$ 

, O'00»S 


Production cost of the feature film “ Die grosse Frcihcit (3*000 to 
9,000 ftj. was 3*m0a0 marts, or. say* £205,000. 

Uuc in 1944 and ccirly in 1945, monthly production of Agfacolor film 
Hi the Agfa film factory at Wolftn amounicd to an average of; 

650,000 cine II of negative. 

3,300,000 cini ft of positive. 

It is claimed thnt aodcf the Russians this has been boosted to mote 
than 15,000,000 ft, per mouth, but this output is very Ukciy to fall, 
because it is likeLy that the Rassiam will not be able to obiaiii adequate 
supplies of colour couplers und ycnsiiijocrs which formeriy came from 
the present British area of occupution^ and it will be a long litue before 
production of the essential inicrmediatcs can be nssunied. 

Towards the cud of the war the UFA processing labomiories at Neu 
BabeUberg bundled: 


359 



















CdtOUK CIKEHAtOGRAPKV 


2Q0,(X)0 fu of A^iiculor negative per month. 
1,0U0,0UQ erne Agfiii^lor {mitive per mionth. 


Hie processing rate in 1946 ai the UFA laboratories at Kopenck {in 
Rusftbn-occupied Berlin) was s^id to be: 

130,000 cine ft. of Agfacolor lucgative per moniit. 

650,000 cio6 fL of Agfacolor positive per monlh. 

Release prims were at ways made froin the oiiginat negative and no 
duplii^ie negatives were made. Special cfTccts w^ere rnade by indirect 
and rriek methods which were noi very saiisfaeiory. No masking was 
used* 


UOUEUT U$IHt 

I 1 I 


reLLDW r 

PlLTE ^J^ 


- BLUE w 

Sensitive 

i-Hm J 


-AAlET 

tMTT-HAL 


Fkl 191.—Ajd'acolOT iKgalivc-positm film cmalskm diagnmi. 


Structure 

All Agfacolor films have three emukion layers and one filter Layer 
flHg, 191). The film bkise is first coated with a red sensitive emulsioTi. 
Dirccily on lop nf Uits is coated a green sectiitive emulsion. Nc:it comes 
a Ihin layer of collotda) silver which functions as a yellow (ilterp The 
firiiil coating is an cimilsian sensUive to bine only, 

The yellow filter, needless io say, has the duty of absorbing blue light 
transmitted by the top layer, which would othcrwiije record in the green 
oTid red recording layers wfiich are mhereittJy blue sensitive (Fig* 192)^ 
No non-stress snrihoe gelatine coating is u^ and no gelatiiic coating 
divides ihc green and red recording emulsion. The colour couplers 
dbpersed in these emuhions are chosen such that^ 

Vcilow h formed in ifw Blue rcoording laytr. Top. 

MiigciUa ,, ^ ai.mH .. „ huddle, 

Itnj BotUim. 

The onti-halatioii coating is on the back of the film base in the 
n^gaiive^posiiive films and beneath the bottom layer of emulsion in the 
levmal film (sw Table 57), 


360 






TaBU: 57. — STRLTCTURH’—AGFALCrt-OR 3S-Wltf- NcOATIVfr ANP POSlTlVf 


SUBTdACriVe PROCESSES 



NMfAif 1?^ luM Tw fiaiktivf. 



























totoua Cl^fE»<ATO<3aAf»MY 
Tltidracss 

Tie loidl thickness of the multiple layers docs not exceed that of 
norma] film* thecefoie the separate coatings are T^iuLred to be extremely 
thin. 

Red ftcoiilinii hiycr ., 6 mkitsiH (BoUma) 

Ydk^ fiifcT bjner «, I mkren 
Circn iccontlfig layer .. ^ mlcroiil (Middk> 

Blue nconling \^ycf .. * nikronv (Tepi 



’OO 400 IDO 4001^ 

A--- 

vEuem njm Aasofmxi 



Paj. 19Z — AbwpiUm cuTTc of untifaab&ilon kiyer of ABfisccilor pc 4 uiiw fllm- 
FiIth Base 

Nitrate base i$ iu«d fot negative, Tbkkness 130-140 microns 
(5/1000*), 

Acetate base is used for poative, TIuckness 130-140 ntiemi^ 

Spectral Seo^tivity 

Segfilive: Overlapping curves. 

Red rwonlina la>'ert nuximuni i^fi, 

Gieeo „ „ .. SSOnviH 

nlut PR I, mxnmirreapoiiAe. 

ThLi type of stnsiltzing is typical of most monopacks, audi as Koda- 
chromCj Kodapilor, Ekiachrome, and Aiuco Color Glm. The Ideal 
sermtiviOes rab be matbematically calculated relative to cither praedcai 

m 





























SUBTRACTIVE EROCESSeS 


or IheotetictU syathcsis, by additive or sabtractive tnetbodSi but tbe 
bcsicompromisebiuio be cFTected with the materiaU available 193). 

Foslttvt: Narrow band sensiUdne, sharp cut In ilic green and red 
regions (Fig. 194)^ 

Rod mndijiE l4i>«r, mmimiini ^ rp^ 

Gnea ,, .. » S30 nw. 

Blue „ ,, notnni itsooine- 



F« 193.—ScJtiiiMty <if AfiTwotor neaatKie JUm tchentukiUly. 



Fto. I!M.—Scontmiy orAsfBeotor posliiveSIni Khonunkalfr. 

Since it is desirable that the positive material should record in each 
of its respective layers light modulated by only ant layer of ihe nega<^ 
live, the sensitizing should be designed to conespond to the masimuin 
absorption and minimum overlap of the spectral transmission of the 
negative dyes (Fig. 195). The lelotian brtawn negative coloun and 
positive seusitizings can in fact be such as to overlook any letstion 

3«3 







COLOt'St tlNEMATOOKATIlY 


wluiEver lo what we might expect to be the norma) appearance of 
ooloura in the negative. By this b meunl that the negattve coloun need 
not be oomplcmentaiy to the colour of the light recorded. <See below,) 



W7M ^41 htPflf LEJlGTM 

iMTEj^v^ti to& Mwmwt 0«= ftenilTiVf 



4 Crt)-ni|t 


Fk>. |95.~A£.tuj|.l dye hnn^uvsilabli; for cokniri^it^tcisniphy; dcMity 



Fki. J9SA.—Emuldkti) Dy^ Utowinit Sai factory fs^r Colour 

Repnniuciion. 

The negative cyan coupler In ihe present product has remarkable 
ub^rpiion In the deep red and by placing the red sensitivity of the 
positive far into the red we are assured of the cyan lay^r of the itegaiK'e 
J64 








































SVttTR active peocfsses 


being rificicnt to moduLile this lajer only (Rg. I95A), Thus the 
relation between negative and positive can be expressed as follows: 


Fixed Factoi^ 
Vaaobfe FiUrlar 


Factor 

VATiable Factor 


SpCCint SenxitivJtjr 

Abs^Uon Curves of Coloui Coiuponcnts 
Foxftirr^ 

AiBorpiiOfi Curm of Colour Caoijwnculi 
5$>cctral Scnsilivily 



Fid. 196.—Positive Film with wjddy Sepamccl ScusiUzuioQ Curves. 



Fkj. W.—D>c Abwnrtlm Ci«r*«of t^pnive Film «rt«poodliH to the Posiiiw: 

Hm itrration CnTVa dlOWfl W rl*. iTO, 

Schneider and others have suggested that there is no reason ihroteiU 
tally why a positive material should not be scnsiUzed. say, m the 








COtOUIt CIKEMaTOOKAPHY 


infra-red, green, and ulua-violei regions, respectively, in erder to 
obtain a more complete colour separation (Fig. 196). In this case the 
absorption maaime of the three dyes present in the layers of the 
negative would also have to be in the infra-red, green and ultra-violet 
(Rg. 197). A dye that absorbs only in the iafra-ted ot in the ullfa- 
violet would be colourless to the dye. Such negative material would be 
magenta only. C^evertheless, the positive materia] would see " a 
grey scale in the negative as" neutral” 

Processing 

The development of Agfacolor negative or positive film requires 
only minor rnodiheatioas of the standard machines. We have lo 



pronde for a bleaching batli and for washing for a more prolonged 
period than usual. It is recommended that washing should be entirely 
carried out by fine jets, or better still by the use of a Rat jet issuing from 
an Inclined daticned nozzle. 

The developer must be maintained at I** a tolerance of half a 
degree in either direction being pcndUsible; Schneider states that the 
solution '* is first driven through ji device where it is cookd slightly 
366 




































rvhikjr fOTiiitr 
f C4il^«1pii mi^i*H, 
(ibldijr ICrflrrr 

I Cqfl-wiiiiiiif tyift «Ih?w 



PlTtJffSfl 0n ev fad'iig mjsdE to 0 rfd Db|CCt <jn fl froumf. 

1„ * ^m. 




flO$lTI^E OCHOuH STOCK 


PfiiHTmZ COLOUR tUCJUm 



Flc>. S!)«A.-Nc^- 
Uv^^ptKitivc A*&t- 
cpk»r ic- 

qucnoe, A crow- 
^ section of the Bki U 
nhvu'n 4t oicb rmiin 
proce$$ir»E smsc. 
Wdiihti, rin^d urul 
»lap ballis arc omit¬ 
ted. 

(f«d^ p. 3*A 



































































1 









SIIBTRACTI VI- PAOCBSSI-S 


below ihe working tempeniture, water from tbe mmos being used for 
cooling. Afterwards the solujioo is ogaia brought to ihc prescribed 
working temperature, this being done b/ means of electric heaters and a 
thermostatic regulator. The simplest layout constsis in inserting this 
apparatus in the developer circuit, otherwise the developer must be 
strongly agitated to ensure unifono develnprttefli.*' 

Plastie nwlerials have been found ^islactory for pumps, and in 
general, plastics have stood up welt for pipng and tanks. 



aahuwmmt m rxw 


wur Morzuis 


Fid. ]99,^Ag&oolar Procesvas Spray Moults. 



Fkj. Aarneolor Praxstina. AKetnativc oaruin nozrle for wailuiic. 

Precautions mtut be taken to prevent the formation of foam in 
circulated solutioos to avoid rapid ageing of baths by oxldutiou. 

Subs^uent to development the washing must be t^ry thoiou^ 
otherwise a geaemt blue fog will be fomted in the bleaching bath if the 
washing is uiadct{uate. It is absolutely essential that hypo should be 
completely removed in the final wash. Tanks and tubes have been 
entindy abandoned for washing at any stage. Fi^. 198 and 199 show 
the type of spray wash°' reconmiended. 


367 


COLOUR riNBWATOGRAPHY 


The batb ;^iic£ircc$ of ncgxiLiv^ and positive are res.p«iive1yi 


iVt-arui/w. 

1. Coksur dfivclopoietii, 

2. Spray wash. 

3. Biffitchinj;. 

4. Spray 

5. Fmn^. 

6. Spny w3Kh 


Fositn-^ (iiyt sifufut 

L CoSmir ile^tDlaptfietn. 

2 . Stop batJi. 

3. S^y umh. 

5, Spray wash, 

6, Flxuiij. 

7, Spr^y wqsh, 


(W/iw tratll 

I. OpkkuTdcifdopTTi^nl. 
X Slcip bath. 

3- Spnay wash. 

4. Weak bEe^h- 
3. Bleacli cUmEnattfr, 

6. Spmy vvash. 

?» Pinal bkacb (^isceus). 

8, Spray 

9. Fixing- 

la. Final WTjsii- 


Subsequent to the first spray wash^ ar in any case after the bleaching 
bath the rtrniiinder of the processing cain be carried out in ordinury 
ifluminaiion. 

The cxplanaiion of the incliision of a stop bath in the positive 
sequences is that there is some advantage to be gained from the fact that 
the developer remaining in the layers continues to be active during the 
washings but whereas the developer is soon exhausted ia the fully 
exposed arei^ the shadows still retain a suFTicient supply of fresh 
developer which continues to produce silver and dye imngeSi The resuli- 
ing slight fog is of no consequence in the case of the negative film. 
In the positive film the highlights must be free from fog, and $o the 
action of the colour developer must be intemipled immediately 4 ificr 
development. For this purpose acid salt solutioiis are suiiabte, for in 
spite of the permanent uddtticu of aikahne cotnur developing solution 
they retain their hydrogen inn concentration al a pH value nf 4 to 
5, for pme time. At the same time, hy virtue of ilie formnlion of 
eastty dissolved salts the developing agent is cashed olf more quickly, 

U should be noted ^at when a silver sound truck is desired it is 
necessary to use un additional and preliminary weak bleach to cliniioate 
the coUoidaJ silver yellow filter lay'er before applying the flital viscous 
bleach on the picture urea (see below). Tbi^ can be deme with a weak 
bleach which b not sicong enough to dTeci any of ihe sUwr in the 
sound track image. 

Furthermore it Is desirable to include n bfief iinmerslon in a five pet 
ccQi. solution of sodium sulphite (fnimdmirly ^fnr the fiml hlcuck to 
iuhihit iu action before it has a ehance to flow over on to the sound 
track during the spray wash which succeeds the bleaching bath. 


Vtscoin Blancii 

The bleach bath b a preparatory stage in the removal of the developed 
metallic silver entirely from the dye image. Having fomicd a silver 
salt, vuch 2 Ls silver ferrocyanidc, it is easily chmiiiatcd by Ihe solvent 
action of hyposulphite. Slnmltaueoiisly the uncxposed silver halide is 
climiruit^. 

m 


^llMtTKACnVf PROCBSSES 


Tlie coflvejilional photocells in use in iiu>st projector sounti repro¬ 
ducing spiems are of ihe type using a sen^iiiivc coaikig oT cutiium— 
^Iver—oiyfictip which is tnEofily &etiisiti%e lo red and infra-red radiation. 
The dyes in colour devcbpmeni processes iKinsmit radiation tn this 

region^ will] the re^iidt that a dye tract tinsaiisfactory when used in 
conjunction W'ith a large proportion of the phototubes u^ed today. 
While new photocells have been recently devdoped having lugh wnsi- 
tiviiy in the green-blue and blue regions of ihcspectruiUj andiftith the^ 
dye Lrackis are capable of reproduction equalling in quality Uiut of silver 
tracks, it i$ nevertheless desirable for the lime being to continue lo 
employ ihe silver image -^^ound truck. ‘The Cerman solution of thit 
problem was ingenious. Obviously the silver track iiuiiit not be bleached 
if it ‘is to be retained. Tlic bleaching agent, potsussium ferroeyanidc. 
b therefore miiicd with a suitably vvseou-s agent and coaled only 
on the picture area of Uie film. The bicuching solution (sec formulu 
below) is applied to the film from beneaUiT using a no^e. This noi^le 
is .support^ in such a manner that any join^ or film dips^ will not 
jam. The discharge orifice rs a Utile niirrower than the picture area and 
the width of the coatiBg is iimiicd by iw^o movable ^ges, pressed 
against the side edges of the picture area, smafi lead w'cighu being used 
for ihLs purpose/' By » bl^ device accurate separation beiwcen picture 
and sound track has been coasi&ienily retained. Thcrt is the obvious 
advantage of using film travel in the venicid direetioa for the bleaching 
stage, and thus paving Liboraiory floor sp^e. The yellow coUt^idal 
Silver layer b destroyed in ilte bleaching bath and it follows ihercforc 
ihut it will remnin In the ijound truck. presence has been fonud to be 
of no consequence provided ihrti the present red sensitive photocells 
are employed. Should the ^und track, however, be intended for use 
with the new- cx^iuin-ariiintony blue sensitive photocell it ss ncjccss&ry 
to dc!iiroy the colloidal silver yellow layer by ihe use of a weak bleach¬ 
ing ugcist which has no efiect upon the silver of the sound truck iniagf:. 
Subsequenily the final viscous bleach may be employed to remove lire 
si! ver in the picture area us we have described^ 

CunlrDl of Develupirr Potent bl 

Very rigid control wus instituted m the Continetital talvoratori« 
which processed Agfacolor ncgiib^'c-posime motion picture film. .At 
the Afifa loborutory in Bcrfjn the developer from the lime of preparation 
was analysed and coirocted if necessary. Afier -4 hours rc^i a new 
analysis indicated whether there was csiusc for further correction. The 
bath wns analysed twice a day. 

The anolytkal inethud of control has been desenbed thus by 
Schneider: *’ The ionreni ofcolour developing agent is determined by 
eolofimelfw; methods, the agents together with l-naphthol-4-sulphonic 
liciil being oxidized to a blue dye by ammoniacal copper sulphate 
.X 369 


COLOUII CIN'EM^TOGR aPHV 

solution. The potussium carbonate is titrated wiUtnyi hydrodiloric acid 
usmg methyl o^ge as an indicator. The sodium sulphite conieni is 
determined hy titration with n/tO iodine solution with soluble starch as 
an indicator. The potusium bromide M titrated with n/lO silver nitrate 
ondn/lOainnToniiun thiocyanate, feiric-amniO'nivTn sulphate serdng as 
ast uid^tor. The hydroityJbmtRe content is measured^volumetrically 
by oxidaUon with potassium ferrocyantde.** 


PaOCESSIMC FormuliE 
All baths strictly at 18* C±|'' 

Segative Devfleper or Positive Developer 
A, 


cthyiane dtiuiuM tetnucMnie (M23) 

1 iTiuNa Sj ,, ^ ^ 

H^droRvfamEiR HCl “ "" 

IDO 

m 

rts 

m 

grarm 

WqUCTh . 

r- ffc 

1 - 

j I* 

■ 

ii * 

«» 

litfts 

St/liifhir B. 





- - - - 

carboaiLte (aiihyd,| ^. 

Sodium au^phitc 

Fotassimn bromide , 

*■ 

■ w 

*m ■ 

■ *'■ 

•14 

4 -m 

■■ * 

' <1 d 

too 

7^ 

200 

ISO 

50 

VTiitniy 

i 


For u«e take cquaf parts A iUid B. 


Regeaerator Negative or Positive Deteioper 
fbrSobtlbm A. 

XI23 

H>dtQX}'liuiiiiie HQ '' " |£2 

Wfiicr.. ^ 


M21 

PiMiissmni carbonate (anhyd > 
Sodkiin nJ^te fanhyd.l 


Far SolurUw B. 




Add If e.c. per eiic mftrr. 


too anins 
yjoa 
M ittn* 


Sleachiftg SatJt. Nega/tre Pl/rtt only 

^TOhim phiaoiarttprimaty) . St-] i^Tii 

42S 

. .. 1,000 

10 hine 


Sodhim pbospluie iMoonduy) " 
PntasiuBi rerdcvBiiide 
Water 


W9 


370 




SUBTHACXrVE PHOCESSBS 


Bleachfng Bath. For Positive CoUoldaJ Silver Yethtf Filter Layer 

Ptoiawiam[ihtMpluw(pdiimi?) *• -i ■■ -■ Jf'J 8 ™™ 

SnUiMQ plMqi^le (iccondncy) .. <■ *■ '«'S 

pQlusmnt rciTKyanide .. .. -- .. I.™ „ « 

Water.. -.. . '0 

F<3f iiK dLLiiic 1 : 20i 


Bhttthing Baih {yiscous)^ for Positive Film only 

'* C^otcoB'N.KxyiiKihj'i eellulwe) . - -- ** ^ gftum 

Polas$fiuni fcrric^'aniile r. tP — ™ 

Wal^ t 'f. -1 i*ii «- p r * ■ *' I! * ^ Owtr 

The viscffitt la the ptctmmtWimlji and k ifsod wJ^ a 

Mivtr sodiMl tHk^ IS In order to prcvtni ibe blcacbm^ agieni from 

awidciHR \U it\w iwot In liie sound track owinjp to Bow-ow di^ 
the uibMueot (be film ishould next emer a 5% tuih ot sodium 
suLpyte. S«tflk**q u ie ew been employed to mnovt: 

ihe bte^h bi^dtt waib^ 


Fixing Sath 



Sodiimi ihioiUilphaie 

Water . ^ h* *# *- • V -* 

aoo 

1 

graritt 

litre 

Stop Bath (Positive only) 



Sodiuin idioipheic (primaiy) 

100 

1 

grams 

liiM 


Biith Conxiimptlm {per KUUO metres of 35^ufL processed) 


Dei^h^itr Regenentor 

Bleaching Bnth fcEr uegative B!m ,. 

Bleaching Both for ytIJow filter in pothhie film . v -. 
rixjoK Bath 

ViKOiis BJeoch « t- 


15 him 
100 
67 
143 
143 
15 


Chemicals reifuireJ per 1*000 nmtes 

N-d^ejhyl j^phroytoieidirtminc mipluile -- 

Mi^ ... .* ii. I-- -'T e^e ♦- -■+ 

KydmHyUiTuiie HCIa. ■- -. »■ - ^ 

E^jtiaaium i;ajlMnate|iinhyd.) -- «« 

Sodium lulpbite (anhyvll -* «;- --p 

Potii^iiin phospbalc (pnrn^ ** *i 

Sodium phosishatfi tiecondafy) . 

Fotaislum Rtticysuitije ^ i* v * * ^ 

Sodhim thmulTdiole 



IcB- 

<K13 


0*04 

t* 


i* 


M 

0-04 


0^3 

■ 1 

6^7 

i-i 


■P 


371 












COLOUR CINBMATOGIUPUV 


Dpvelopment Tjue-tabl£. Agfaoolor NcOATtVe AN-0 
PosntvE 




Devebpiii^ „ 

, Stop Bulh . : 
Spray Wash *- 
Wimk filwh 
Itttuch ejntiiiialor 
Spray Wiah ,. 
Bkscb Hath .. 
Vi^cuus Bleach 
St^y Witih . „ 
rUiiiv 
FirtaiWaili 
Dit . ^ 



iVi^firWiT- 

n^Uh i(yt rrafl, 

fkuA/iv 

iWfA jf/iw trade. 


Tww 

Ti/iiil 

TKme 

TYimt 

Totat 

Time 

(Af^j 

Tim* 

' Tfltai 
TTfflr 

iMinVr) 



6 

lo-ri 

ID 

t0-1| 

KO 

- # 

omii 


2 

J2 1 

2 

tl 


15 

2J 

IS 

V 

15 

27 

- 1 

omii 


ornil 


5 

33 

k I 

omh 


omit 


2 , 

34 


omk 


omw 


3 

37 

** 

4*^5 

25 

5 

32 

omD 


-* 

omit 


omit 


5 

42 

» 1 

5 

30 

5 

37 

5 

47 

k ■ 

5 

35 

S 

42 

5 

52 


20 

35 

20 

62 

20 

72 

.4 * 








16-um. AqfacckjOr Reversal Film 


development time-table 


Sttp, 




iktyfi^hi fv 

Type*. 


Copym- 


J 

I 

4 

5 
« 
7 
» 
9 
ID 

II 
17 

n 

;4 

n 


Amidol D^topmcni 
Wdfhing I. 

Mdopoii B^h 
E^poEure *. 

Waahinjs .. 

Colour Dcvck^ptnent 
Washing . ; 
lUaftthtoB Baih 
Wathinir 
rixina .. 

Wiiiiuijj .. 

Bkachtog (Zod Ekagh> 
Wjuhitic ,, 

FiaJtkg 

Wvhu^CFinaQ 


*i 


4 


TOtaj.! 


MtFtutr-M. 

35 

25 

5 

5 

2 

|] 

25 

5 

S 

S 

10 

10 

s 

5 

IB 


m 


Afinmwji, 

2D 

25 

i 

3 

16 

25 

I 

f 

5 

5 

S 

S 

5 

15 


t46 


372 
























































SIJttTRA-CTiVt PROCESSES 


l^ROTESSIWti fORrtliLA 


1 

nm 

Ocvcioper 

Tempcfaiunc 

lA’ C U 

i 

Amidol P- . 

Sodimn Sulphite (nnhyd.) 

PoliMsium Htomiia 

Water . . * . ■ - . - 

$ anil. 

30 

1 

0-5 „ 

} litre 

Ncoimn 

NckamXll.O.FarbcnWciimgAeenir .. ' 

Water 

55 gmi. 

1 lUre 

Colour 

Developer 

Tcmiieraturr 

18 C Ji' 

N-4icttiyl jsf-pTKnj'Jcnetiiiiiuiiic sulphate 
Hj^xylumine IHQ) 

Pocosshiiti ouiMnalt . r .. - * 

Sofiiuni Bubhuie 

PoLLSsium KOruitk: 

l^i-sodEum sail of clhvicrw diainiiie tcim ice- 

Water s, ^ - ► - - - ♦ ■ 

J'TJ gnu. 

13 .. 

33 

2 „ 

2S 

1 litre 


PoLijaium phosphale (PiiTnary K Kg PO| .. 
Sodium plto^pJiotc (SecOQiiar>) Ni, H Pt)j - 
1 P>.Tijjs&Uini Fi;rTk7unfEk 

1 6 IPtibL 

^ib 

4 i| 

loa 

Tcfiipcratiire 

ipcn 

Wnicr .. .. t- 

1 litre 

Fixing Biitli 

SodJuiutThiosulpliUle 

Walter -- *■« •» 

1 2^X1 gmt- 
1 1 litre 

,1 


■ Ntkjil |lX=AJV.jlnnphth«letifiriulphon3c aiAd (sodium saUJ. 


Normal contact or optical prinieis may be employed; all existing 
apparatus is therefore usable., bui minor moditications must be ineor- 
poroted in older to make provision for colour grading, tn all colour 
processes in which the print is made in one operation froin a coloured 
negative there must inevitably be two factors to control; 

t. Density. 

2, Colour balance. 

The first factor is controlled by the Iniensiiy of the printing light ivs in 
printing black-and-white. 

The second factor is conlrollod hy varying the diitrihtHioti of energy 
In the spectrum of the printing illuminnnt. 

It is the second fatior w Kich nectositates the introduction of additions 
(o extstiag apparatus, since the most convenient means of modifying the 
spectral character of the light is by the automatic inirod^tion of minus 
md, ntinvs green and minus blue filters into the Uluminaiioii system. 
The iatroduction of a minus filler may obviously nsduoe the touil energy 
of the printing light and therefore liave an eflect upon the geneiBl 
density of the print- Henec in printing colour films such as Dufaycolor 
or Agfacolor the two factors ore inluirelaied. 

373 




















COtOt’B CINEMATOGRAPHY 

fn general it ii impraoUcable lo conlivl ihc light cuctev by (he tniro- 
duetjon of a resistance m the lump circuit aiace this alters the tcmpeni- 
turc of the fil^eni with iraportaat effects upon the distribution of 
eoci^'radiated. The efTcci of tJiis will be tantamount to the introdtic* 
ion o a CO oiir filter and the results will be too ccKnpIen to predict with 
^racy. It IS essential accordingly to kwp the voltage over the lamp 
dx^ wi^in Mvere iitrau and to use fitters only for altering the volume 
01 light in dipcrenl ftgions of the spectrum. 

The r^us filters should have absorption curves closely similar if noi 
identic^ 10 ibe dyes used in the layers of positive film, thus there can 
be estflbli^cd a simple ncbliou between the dyes used in the negative 
film and those of the fillers, t.e„ the colour density of the filter can be 
added to the colour-densities of the negative, or the density of the 
nray ^ ^ detemnued from colour density which the negative 

The filters may be used in combination, each filter radudng the expo¬ 
sure of a certain layer of the positive. The colours of the flltcra will then 
mw the same m«ning or sign. Tims a yeUow filter conwts a yeUow 
bllte hue ^ ^ composed of a cyan and a magenta, comets a 

The range of filler densities was determined by the following method: 
a yellow a magenui und a cyan filter am combined and the light source 
Irlill!- soiiNe viewed through the combination. The 

filters am altered until a neutral grey is 

. .. a density of 1 '0. The ihree filters so determined are 

atoitnirdy assigned a value of 100. Tim values of all the other filters 
am decimal fractions of the calibration filters. 

Six figures are employed. The first two designate the cojiecntration 
01 tiK yeUow filter, the middle two that of the magenta filter, and (lie 

vSh!'* “ample, 30 90 means: ito 

^Utow filter, a 30cent, magenta filter and a W per cent, cyan filter. 
Tlutsc figures can be added or subtracted. 

for a positive film 

Wjiich a, neutral, and this negative has to be printed subsequently on a 
£**5^ »»a*ancc." the two filt^values may 

^ ^j positive material being deiernilned by 

expostfig a sEisp wedge th/augh colour fiJters_ 


Thus: Nc^livti niEer value 40 00 20 
PiiKtrivo fllurr vaJuc QO io 10 


Nculml print liricj- ralut 


= 40 10 30 
—10 10 10 
- io 00 M 


value of this 

materiul has to be subtracted, for example: 

374 





!tU&TltACTlVE 


Neuini] pjinL filler viJw !10 011 20 

Fllifir vsliic for new —10 QO 10 

TTUEjcrlal - 

New filter >0 00 10 

Usually 10 sleps of cacli iUitf colour are ample, but occasionally 
5 per cenL steps arc used^ Thus JO filLcrs comprise a compleie set. A 
of fillers of the values 10, 20, 30 and 50 would yield every possible 
combmalioD. 

The Coniinenial laboratories made use of the wll-known Debric 
diaphragm strips In dik machine the volume of Light is conirolled by 
of circular hobs in a paper strip. The filler ftiils are attached 
over the holes with light metai clips. The size of hole controls the mini 
light volume or a neuiraJ grey may be siddcd to the colour filler (Fig. 
200 ). 

In practice] printing filter numbers for each s^cene be ascertained 
by direct testing. E.\pcricnce showed that with a jingle frame lighi 
changecovettng every cooibmatioD, the most sadsfactory grading system 
was lo provide a ribbon eonirol carrying not only a series of diaphragm 
widths but also all combmations of the fdter numbers 3^1* 60 and 90 
consisting of 47 frames for ten diaphragm ^leps: 

Fitter Comh1natio[» 


0 

/ 

ti 

m 

iv 


17 

yn m/ 

fX 

X 

30 

00 

00 

30 

30 

00 

30 

00 

JO 

m 

30 

30 

m 

00 

00 

60 

30 

00 

60 

00 

30 

m 

60 

30 

90 

00 

00 

90 

30 

00 

90 

OQ 

30 

DO 

90 

30 

00 

30 

oo 

30 

60 

00 

!0 

00 

60 

00 

30 

60 

00 

60 

00 

60 

60 

OP 

50 

00 

60 

00 

60 

W 

00 

90 

00 

« 

60 

00 

90 

CIO 

60 

00 

90 

60 

00 

00 

JO 

30 

$0 

00 

30 

00 

90 

00 

30 

90 

oo 

00 

60 

50 

90 

00 - 

60 

m 

90 

00 

60 

90 

OQ 

00 

9D 

90 

90 

00 

90 

00 

90 

00 

90 

90 


From the developed test print, the most neulTa] frame can be selected 
with ease, and from the diaphragm series the optimum printlnE tight 
citu be deiennincd. Nent on a line control ribbon ail vomblnaiions are 
recorded in ten steps centred on the most neutral setting. For a rough 
RUef value oiTbO fit) 00 these values are; 








30 

50 

00 

40 

40 

OQ 

40 

30 

00 

40 

60 

00 

50 

40 

00 

50 

50 

00 

50 

50 

GO 

60 

40 

00 

60 

50 

00 


hU 

00 

70 

40 

00 

70 

30 

00 

TO 

60 

DO 

SO 

40 

00 

SO 

50 

00 

SO 

60 

00 






90 

60 

00 

40 

70 

00 

40 

SO 

00 




50 

70 

OO 

SO 

»0 

00 




60 

70 

DO 

60 

SO 

DO 




70 

70 

00 

70 

60 

00 




fiO 

70 

OD 

m 

60 

00 





375 



CULDlrR CINEhtATOCRAPJrV 

of this series arc arranged in a itep order of 
V 2, TTus gives a series of ton densities In steps of ](), 


Colour Correction 

The v,Tiicr IS unaware of whether or not ii is the practice lo eoncci 
the colour balance of a motion plettire print by a siibscqueit bath 
mtended to ndace one of the ihicc subtractive primaries. For the sake 
of^ompkten^ we give below data Mtracted from “ The Agfacolor 
Process " by Wilhelm Schneider. 

Reduction of the dyes, he says. ”has its irheicnt drawbacks as the 
overal density of the picture will be decreased, the shadows beoomine 
more tmnsprent and in some cases even coloured." This is a curious 
statement bwause shadows will in most drcumsUinces be cobured 
imyhow' he ts probably referring to blacks. He coniinucsi "The solu- 
rions pven offer a correction for every possible type of colour error.'' 
_ e proracds to state that while the yellow and cyan are reducible 
tndepeadeniiy. unfortumitcly the magenia reducer aeu upon the 

.K actively, if the eaeess is red. green or 

Wuc, then baths must be successively used of yellow and magenta 
reducers, cj'on and yellow, or magentit and cyan. 


L Rttiumif 

ScKilum dKjjoM fnat chlorziic) . 
Water 


upon.density Ib cs««. 

iJh^ for 20 mmiUtt 

IHc mm Ilchc* fKrt reditoe iFiv ocliviiy. 


50 

I \lt(c 

Wa[ch Ih^ action 
Dtscatoraiicfn ot 


■2- /Scffw^riT 

Sttimlmr A. 

iiy<3rotWarye fremi t^Btcr) 3 Bfiimj 

•“ "S mi-t III ■,.■1 00 M 


Bomx 

Wjt(rf 


Sa^aUmt B. 


snmf 
htfv 


Sl'taiiiu to lOOei^ with ««t«. and tb« 


3. E\^c€sj CyiM k^^ciT 

Sodium CniiHsnme fonhydj 
Aoctiuiificto 


, V O'! jeam 
„ 100 


Dtrfcroont lllumJruttfOD 

filter S!?5!!' the case of negative, AppareiiUy two 

filters are occasionally employed for a brief period should operBUon 
3/6 




F KL 200-^Dtfbrifi and colour-^gradiiift su-ip. 


liTil 




















I'ROCCJSSt-S 


demand it. For direct Ulucninaiion Agfa No. 170 and for indirrKrt 
Agfa No. 108. Both are green filtm with maximum transmisirioa at 
530 M/i, the ile:o$ity at this wavelength being 3'2» 

The »enxithdng of the positive film ihows tw'o gaps, at roughly 
SIO Mrr and 590 M/j. The btiEer position was sdccted for the rnaxinuim 
ininsmbxion of the safclight filter, owing to high sensitivity of the 
retina in this repon, and retwlving power is also higher than for red or 
green light. It is better la have high visual acuity in the darkrwiD 
than high illuminnUon, While (ilien can be made which transmit light 
of a narrow wavelength baml in the yeUow repoo they' are not efficient 
tl ix recammended to use sodiuiD vapour discharge lamps giving the 
familiar monochromatic radiation of 589 M,«. The intensity is loo high 
for safety .md the lamps are used with a iilxcr having an absorption band 
in this region. These safellghts must be mechunically air-cooled. Using 
two filters of20 X 30 cm, and u suttabie curved reflector, large rooms can 
he uniformly lighted. The safety margin for Agfacolor positive H 
.tOtninules. 

treneni] Remarks 

The German technicians do not seem to have used a special iUmniuant 
in printing machines. A system of comhtiiAlton of light soiuxcs such as 
has been successfully used for the printing of Dufaycolor would secni 
to present valuuble advoiUuges. This consists in the mixture of light 
given by; A. a 500-waLf projector lamp used with a narrow-cat red 
filtirr. and B. a mercury vapour discharge tamp used in conjui^on with 
a l>idymtiiin glass filter which serves to absorb Uic yellow lines of the 
meicury emission spectrum, and also |o absorb wavelengths in the 
blue-green region. The combined radiation consists of: 

wavekrtitth band - - <*"?0 Mm—600 

MoiUhUitiimfitiic biifiid Mm CGwfil 

M *. ,, -Ija Mfi 

(With li»«r blue liiM to iiuijri:uiy 9pcctmni> 

Tf required a Hirer may be added lo absorb the high-energy ultra¬ 
violet radbUoD. 

Tn Briiuin a suiLablodiy^hargclump is manuraciurcd by Siemca$ Bros. 
and Cu. Ltd. 

Lamp Data 

Mercury discharge lump (special direct cuiTenl type) 

mm. JWffr 

125 Prc-rocii^ ^ 1S5 115 

377 



colour C|E>^£MAigGRAI>NV 

This bmp hiis now been sUind^udk^ and its rebtlvc output ot 
ntdiatioD ihould be cotmapt after the lamp has been run cootinuoiisly 
Tor 75 hours. During this ageing period it h quite possible that the line 
speclnii cmissioji nUio varies to a mtaor meat, but no da^ is available. 

It is proposed by Dufay^Chromex Ltd. to experiment in the printing 
of AgfacoLor positive using Agfacolor negative with such a light sauiee» 
and daia will be pabiisbed at an early date. On theoretical grounds 
there arc good reasons to expect a mar ted improvcmetti over iht 
previously employed system. 

Emulsma Coating and Semitlring Data 

The following majiufaciuring dam are summarized for reference 
purposes, bui the reader is referred lo the Fiat Final RErpottT 943 of the 
Office of Military GovemmeaL U.S., for full details. Publis^hed by the 
U.S. Department of Contmttee, Technical tndustml Itiielligcnw 
Division (Table 5S). 


Tabi.e 5S.—Ssssmztfj LAnnui in AofaColor Films 


JsifiiCt/hr ' 

MafertaL 


Emtihiffn Typr find 

StnslfU^. 1 


Revew-t, (lay- 

AiitLhatcp 

Biiidsf00Sl2ii)‘"Noaate*" 

_ 


li^t 

Bottom 

3 pan* ** Proocss Colcmr 1 
aN/37«c> plus 2 pmru 
” T4tlm line grain 
(00710) 

As flbuVev bui 2 parts nnd 


F 6S4 

Hoc 306 



MlJiUe 

Rr340 1 * 
KtW 1 

z m 


Fnter 

1 f arts rCTni E^'dv 

Fitter Yettew^ Exlm 



((10SI4> .. 

— 1 

— 


Top 

1 part SoLinil-^lni IV ** 
(IX)t263>p[iN2p;irU^' ¥ho- 

toicdink A III ** {mm 

— 

1 

F5J5 

RevemL liiitf- 

Anti-ha id 

M befot^ , , 


— 

WBTt 

Botlntn 

1 pan each " S(nind*Slm 
IV mud nnc 

rt 2mi 

F 5461 



pitiit" 


F€54f 


Mtdme 

M for boliom In^tr 

RrKO 1 
KI94$ i 

zm 


PlJtfir 

An for diiyliidi^ 

— 

— 


1 Top 

■1* I. ■■ #-1^ 

— 

F 531 

RcverviL cujipr 
iiliti 

ikittein 

2 nam ” Middle inyer 
colcHir " tOU7l6c} plan 1 





jutrt " Cblmir " 

1 Rt W J 



fO(l7l70 


Fft54) 


Shiiaie 

Ail Ter bolloin byef 

Rt 340 

z \m 


ritier 

Top 

Ai^ fur dayitsht 

4 [Hiru Pouliivc^Tobis’* 

’— 

” 


100117) pirn J pm 
" Colour ^^ fOOTOW) 

) 

1 _ 

F 535 

























SUBTHACTIVE CftOCESSES 


Table 59,-^Miliweit. 


Alllfiimhr 

Matftiai, 

1 

£4>w. 

Type aru/ 

Nil.* 


CoapUf^ 

NoD-rc verbal 

Botuom 

** boodn ftne-grab Co- 

Ma im 
Rr34Q 1 
Rr *650 

Rr 15231 

¥6U 

X m 

iypqiB-2(diiy* 
Ughi DCglitlTC) 
for miniatujnD 

Muldk 

lour"rill/38l!«3 
" Mjddk-lsyer cotour 
(Ogrrtfici) 

<u% film. ‘ 
rOlJ tot AM 
35-rnro, CJiw 

Rlwf 

Top 

AfibcRire ^- 

4 MfU FwUive-TpbiJ 
(obit?) plufi t port Co- 
W*'(l»70W) .. 

— 


“ 

F535 

G^l CA-wau IK* 

DotLoni 

1 

1 

Mu im 

Fii54 

^ve) fof mi- 
ninlurt 

Mkldie 

Filler 

,, ■* 

1 -fi HI. i* V" 

Rf 340 ] 
Rr 1650> 


cut toll 


** iMpan ** Co- 

loaf ” fill/Wlal 

Rr 1523) 


ntm^ hikI 15- 
mm. CuK 

Top 

— 

F535 

Film 

fioticmri 

i pslrt ** Qjltmr Fosilive 
(a ■' (007170 pte i P*Tt 

»Al0Piiii"(W7l5dl .. 

As for fcoiiom Uiyer ^ 



R*- 

kAHo Pntuiti^ 

Middle 

Rt \955 
i RtWO 

F546 

Z 169 


FlUer 

1 As tjcfoof . - 


■■ — 


Top 

4 pans - AIM" [00513] 
Hus 1 p^ri -SlAodord 
EouiMob " (11 l/40[sil .. 

— - 

T6 52I 

Arfl!»oo!or 
him: From 
U.S. Report 

Bollom 

f^lkJdk 

” BfO'rtra SoO " , = 

-t-i' i* 

Ma im 

Rr340 

F m 
FS42 

Koe 302 

FUict 

l-llur Yellow Extra " .. 




Tofp 

” BrwiisSofI'* 

- 

F 535 


*SeeTAbk5». 


379 


























COLOUR Cti^EMATOORArHY 


Tabu 59 — 

{^Courtesy of ttw British 


AwnlWv#. 

Illfflfr ! 

in;>«it 

Mlf40la 

flOIlT 

PD2&J 

1 r. Mi-i 


44 


im 

44 

Kdf , » 1 ! 


W 

S-5 

lO-ll 

0-2 

KJ .w Ck«.V 

|^25t 

02» 

0119 

M50 

424 

NdU (kLV 

__ 



J-Tl 

— ■ 

OcbMim .. (ki.} 

l4l 

2-S 

075 

J-3 

l-t 

It Ka, iut Iwi .. 

n 

3 

1 c«h 

I «Kl| 

J ad* 

{■> Wilff ^ (Tp-I 


44 

2^5 

101-9 

71 

{Is* 

^40 

4-2J 

359 

lOrJl 

HW 

ICFI 



— 

93^ 

101 9 

12 

AlNOi 


— 

I’M 

1953 

1'7 

MI.QH.cUl, 

— 

— 

— 


1*7 

fIL GeIbiicw iki^ dir 

ts 

12-S 

50 

4LS4 

13 

Bft. 

Q«4 




— 


UttMlul 


ttEBlrttl 

IWilRHl 

— 

C. .. 


10 9 tkf. 

*1 Ort. 

4i d4 1 

f 

&i|ii4Jni!PhBf. 'linic (miii.li 


|J,U H..1 

( ) * 

Hn/I fsn. 

llA.ti 

^iHin.l u 


4 


-— 

10 

diilui^i^nli ilJmc 

llraiLlIt 

11,19 U.1 

_ 

llb/H enin. 

itb;^ 

li 

Interval 


4 

19 


s<d U J iJn/‘TOlJf1JlBt 


ltl5 U>jrJ 



-—- 

lnaml ., 

, — 

■1 



■—' 

S^tuiToiu iv>l.;plmc ,, 


, n^pml 

—1 

■— 


AdcfHitffP or HI . - 

1 V- 1 

Ya 

¥*i 

Ym 

¥=■ 

l^wmioii tkHi ,i, 

AiMilliUit wpiq ikmc.ik' 

to 

M 

A 

3 

|;9tt TO 44I1J 


Cooddiniviir 

ijnia'F4 

ijmiV4 

J JlOOrF 4 


iw:;F4 


3J01 afbif 

2.5&3 





EjlpOSUlg- 

itpdilid 

ifin 

fjtoeORd 






rlinjiNr:” 





1-49 

C|feiitlh4 Ikjrl 

tf^o 

tn 


— 

«(rt> to 

— 

Pto. 0 


— 

— 



OM 


— . 

—■ 

ft ,. . L 




O-Ttl 

— 




al5 

0-12 

— 

iFia - „ 

1 1 19 

l-S 




IPIJi ItBf. (IL) 

IQ% mctoliljtiJH 

liftK# . „ 


9$4 


— ■ 




, _ 


02 

F*J P* 



ii_i 

— 1 . 


FW .. 

Hi 


. _ 


1 “ — 

F 13 .. ^ 

TJm nUl ittfln i{£i» 

— 

— 

’ — 

1 — 


C. HCH 

1 


4(i^90dcF 

i— 

-— 

W«ief(|n ,, 

Aixiic 








! 

— 


Apparfrrt fimtt ciH^pTh 






PtrllrrF'- 

GtttUaHJ 

1$ 

114 

11-3 

14 

19-9 

SStvpr l*i af rnikt 
Indklftibcmiilf pi^ 
(tMglcCtV *AO«A| .. 

T-3 

7,1 

44 

79 

0424 

CHk2.1 

0424 

0441 

00115 


3B0 






























SUSTRACTrVE ntocsssfis 


Emulsion Codgs 
Jmamit of Pkow^raphy) 




W^IO 


Q&JiHc 

wm 



112^1 

T1 

m 


13* 

14 

TTJ 

D'lTC 

ir 

oV 

5*^ 

0-» 

B'Jf 

i? 

4-Tl 

6'H4 

ij 

IWtd 

iS 

3^ 

6^125 

40 

% 1 

2 


1 «4£l| 

~ I 

1 nch 


Sj 

iS 


3J 

j* 

’1- 


i'5 


4-5 

5-J 

3-S 

74 

0? 

50 

— 

— 




-m” 



■“ 

42 

— 

4-b 

5 

U-ll29Nfl|NO| 


m 

MMtnd. 

IW 


m 

32 

11^ nl 

ITS 

12 11, wiii«i 

«1 dk^ 



6a 


61 div. 

41dfli: 



Xi:sfi^iUJ 

JlA.rall 1 1 
li,P 



fTiriif,^ 

1 

1J;i^ij'4fi 

3Q 

1 WAe|.| 

t(a.itTfiaflf3lfl 

» 

n^EUH 

is il 41 tM§. 


— 


— 

“ 






Va 

Yh 

¥« 

im 

* ^ 
<S«i90Bln.| 

d 

ffct 2 hrj 

*• . 
4Mlj M 


« 

(^I|lkr4 

A. 

dH 76 ndn.i 

7n Mt 

S®" 

J.MZIF4 


i 

l,«M 


* 

Jjloa 

ofuSmi 



rlpraed 


rtpanm 


rsi3 







rilpADAi 














_ 


_^ 

_ 

neuHbnl 


— 


id 


61 


r-a 

— 

— 



o« 

ij 

ii 

5^J 

_ _ 

— 

— 

— 


—^ 


” 




— 



— 

m 

,* — 


— 

— 

— 



' ^ 

■ — 

— 

— 

— 

50'/M4l*(. 



— 

— 


— 

ms 

io^ 

6 

fri 

Idl 

3 


IM 

J t 

% 

IH 

>5 


0«ti 

a-oa 


OOT 

tNiaa 

Mil 



381 


J 







































COtOL'K CTNBMATOCHAFHV 


Tablc SM.- Coatimk Data 


Layrr^ 

(fmp. 


Cv0tbig tfmfi^TMun^ 

Pui. 1 WVj!. 1 

1 Rtt. 

Getaiinc 

50 C 

60 mins. 

J5"C 

_ j 

i ^ 

NC .. 

str 


W 

35' 

35 

Black 

5(r 

60 mim. 



35 

Buliom 

50' 

Ros. 

33 

35^ 

35' 



Neg. 90 „ 




Miifdle « H 


Rev. « „ 





4 S jniiis. 

n’' 

4ir 

40 

FiHer , 

P^M. 45> 

60 ,, 1 

40 

60' 

60 


Hct^ ty 

60 .. 




Taji 

Rev, e?** 

60 „ 




m . 50 

60 

40 

40 

40 


Neii- 50 

60 p. 




Rev. SS" 

60 




Ovnw(« 

Rev, 50^ 

60 .. 

— 

— 

15 


AfaitrkiL 

L^yrt^ 

itt 

rr^smirfibn-. 

TTtidmt^^ 

t^egdlive 

.. Botlain 

Middle 

Tbp(ly|»B-2^ 

34 

84 

172 

64—7"5pi 

T-Ci* 


K, (f^pe 0^2 ► 

193 


Po&iliw 

Itmtom *. 

Mfddte i. 

Top 

.. 143 

.. U4 

248 

5'5^5|i 
4-4—5-5,1 
B 


€i»u7J^. 

4 wimf OJTif 


f7A(dS0lvfnfi 
{ta 130 WrjvJu 

fimf 

Pti^ 

F 546 

7ik*.( S?4) 

Water 

75 tilce 

Walcf 


F 654 

< ly.) 

N-NaOK v'. 

5-26 „ 



NnOK .. 

iM$kC- 

1* 

9-8 



Melhstiol .. 

44 lim 



Ko306 

13 ., (io^ 

NaOH 

Wafer 

0‘751tJ^ 
15 Ihd 

Meilmiiol V 

9-1 

2 120 

2 m 

1-i .. 1 5%| 

N-NaOH .. 

II 

19 ,. 

20 2S „ 
•«'2 „ 

WitLer 

toi 

90 

F 335 

+5 .. i 3%) 


810 „ 

rt 

roi 

Ta 521 

4-5 M ( 3% ) 

Wi 


II 

105 



(»'/J .. 

iS‘0 „ 




15 MitOJJj 

NdOH 

Wntej 

11251^ 

Z-S lltf^ 


lO-3-EO^ 


383 

























sum It Active fitocEsseis 

A^fscolor Sensitizers anil CoJoar Conplers. Cheniicnl {-'onnutie. 

Wc give below the fanaulc of the {rrinci^ sensitizers anti cotoiLT 
couplers used for Agfacolor ticgotive anil positive 

MA 1068 



Fio, 3(ll.~NeeBiiveSenu!tier. Ooitinn Eaytr. 
RrtS23 



■Tr . 

202.—Ne*o live Sensiuttr. Middle tnycr. 


Rr 340 

CH*-C- 


Fkj. 20).—siul Po$iti»e Sendiber. MMilk 

RrieSO 





JS 3 


COLOUft CtN^UAtUOttAPlIY 


RrT9Sa 


CK- 



H SCff‘CH=C~S O- 

^ r.J i I 


JhX 


Fm. 205.—PoAilivc Scniitiur. floucMn kycr. 

CHp-< ^^ ^ CO.C CONH —^ ^ 

^COOH 

Fw. 20e.—Csjlour Cauphrfor Negative and FoQitive. 
F-^a MjjSiirm __ Zries 


rai—CftH. 

”-V 


”'V 

(>OOH 

6 

FW. 20?.—Cerfottr Coupler Tot Putitlve. Fw. 24S.—Colour Coupter for Ncgai ivv. 

KOEJQ 2 magenta. 


HOOC-CH, 


\ 


CWCONH 


O 


CO CH;CN 


=»«» 


FtSA&C^ 

CO>K 


Fip. 209.^Ci>lDiir Coupkr for Pmftiw. 

OH CF^-W-C^K,, 

CO-HH -f 


OV' 




Ro- 210 —Colour Couplrr For Foiit Ive. Fin. 2 1 1 .— Cbkiiu Coupler For Me«aiiVT. 
384 





ACi I vs PROCESSES 


LIMITS OF ACCURACV IN COLOUR RKPKODUCTION 
ATTAINABLE WITH THE AGFACOLOk PROCESS 

The Fiat Final Repoht No. 977, publislied by the Office of MiJitary 
Government for Cemiany (U.S.) h entitled '■ Color Reproduclion by 
Color Photo^phy/' by Dr. Paul Kcefc, formerly of ZeUs, This is ii 
very mtereiting report upon some colorimetric work carrksd out in 
Germany on reproduction deviations found tn the reproduction of 
colours by the Agfacolor films. After a review of modetn colorimetricnl 
methods, he sums up the mathematical formulation of the problem of 
colour photography by A. C. Hardy, F. L. Wurzburg and others, in this 
ncjct fitalemeoL 

"T’herc is an imattibiguous msith-cniaiical r-dation between iht 
reccpilon seusitivities antJ the chroTnuticities of the primaries aceotding 
to which perfect colour reproduction can only be ihcoreticidly achieved 

ihp iise of two assuraptioast either to apply a set of realisable 
sensitivity curves, in which case the ccnrespondiiig primaries lurn out to 
he outside the spectrum locus, or to assume a set of realisable primaries, 
in which case the sensitivity functions will then involve sections of 
negative values which are anreaUsablc.*' 

The theoretical accurucy of repioduciiou achievable with various 
primaries have been computed for an additive process by W. Schultze 
and H, Hoermaun of Agfa, Wolftn. Dr. K.ecfc (juotes from an uu" 
published paper by these authors. They caleubied the reproduction of 
three ditferent sets of samples: 

1. The Oswald eight frill colours. 

L Eight saturated pigment samples from the Baumaun-Frase Allas. 

3. Eight spectrum wavebands of constant luouiiurtce. 

The reproduction which would be given by 22 difTerent sensitivities 
(^sibk or impossible to reallcc), Including iinear shapes, parabolic 
shapes, trisUmuIus values of the spectrum, Huidy and Wurzburg's 
positive values only. 

Generally the trisiimulus values give the worst results. The best 
results for the eight full colours nrc given by linear shaped ranges 
(rectangular sections) as follows;—419^4^5 M>., 503-574 M/i, 574-640 
M>r, wiili an average dblancc on the RUCS diagram of 0 017: for the 
pigments 0019, 

For the eight full colours the best sensitivity was given by Hatdy and 
W'urzbiirg's curves, representing positive parts only of the tristimiilus 
values but separated by vertical joins. Here the RUCS distance was 
Only 04113. and for the pigments 0016. 

Summarizing, Scliultze and Hoermami state; 

t‘ Sensitivities with Urge overlapping spectral curves give poor 
reproduction. This b eM««iaUy true for the Lristimulus values 
of the spectrum used a* sensitivities. 

3S5 


COLOUR ClNRSfATOGKAPMY 

Z Sei\$ilivj[y curves calculated according lo Hardy and Wurzburg 
jd% c very good ni$iilEs if tlie deprive p^xri^, as well us the over- 
lopping secdoDSf are hcgleclcd^ 

^4 Tbe reproducliou is almosl us good as befonC' when optimuni 
colours are used which do not cover ihc whole vbibk wavelength 
range^ 

4. No cssentidi differeness between the reproduction of optimum 

colours and pigenent^ occtuTedp 

5. Spcctnun colours do not result m good reproductiQn. 

6. The best coloiir reproductions result In average devklkias fiom 

0 011-0“020 in the RUCS system. 

7^ Red and mageota chromudeities in gcDcral give rise to the largest 
differences and yellow hues correspond to the smallest ones^ 

These computations refer to an additive process.. 

The same authors hav^ publbhed TDcasuxements on colour reproduc¬ 
tion by Agfncalor reversal film of a set of 12 highly saiuraied filters. 
The illuminunl was ICl—C* using Agfacolor Reversal Daylight Type. 
The fillers were also reproducod on Agfacolor Reversal Tung&tcri Type. 
Thiis film must be viewed with a source of 2,S40" K. Dominant 
wavelength and colorimcuic purity of ilie originaU and reproductions 
were measured. The colorimetric purity values were transformed into 
exciuitioa purity. For the 12 selected samples the dcmiinani wavc- 
leagihs and exciiatioo purities are given in the accompanying Table 6C1, 
The values under Dl and D2 refer to two exposures in daylight and A 
refers lo the exposure to tungsten light. 


Tahle 6Q 


Cohvr 1 

ikffmffmfi U'avrtFft^rh in Afi*, 

Ex^liatim 

mtn, \ 

Orij\iaTnL\ 

Dl. 


A. \ 


D. 

PX 

A. 

U 

m 

53S* 

m 

585 

085 

0‘M 

048 

061 

*1 

jjt* 


590 

578 

07^ 

0-68 

065 

071 

e 

su 

sm 

SSO 

577 

0 82 

074 

a^is 

0 73 

d 

545* 


563 

562 

0-72 

064 

1 0 55 

064 

c 

SJS 

566 

563 

559 

<761 

057 

054 

0 58 

i 

517 

553 

55J 

510 

l>53 


042 

015 

K 

4% 

498 

m 

m 

tyn 

(yi5 

019 

05<^ 

h 

4S7 

493 

495 

5&3 

061 

025 

025 

016 

i 

430 


■—S55 

—524 

086 

0^29 

03a 

060 

k 


—505 

—505 

-496 

081 

0-42 

0-44 

049 

1 

-52 i 

—50S 

—5W 

-498 1 

091 


0*38 

051 

tti 

f»4l 

C02 

m 

m 

tHJi 

012 

039 

043 


The dbiortions are senous, especially with blue and vtoki hues* As 
Tar luminance is concemed: Uio tran!>paTicac}' of Uie rcproductioii is 
always less lhan that of the original filler. 

* C.LE. 





















SUBTItACTIVt 


The same aulhon mcos-urcii Ole repradtietion cbromaiidiici of tbe 
same 12 filters as reproduced by Uic A^acotor ne^aUvC'^po^iijvc process 
aod also obtained comparison reprodactions hy prinllng Aghieolor 
positive with tbree separation negatives exposed through Agfa tricolor 
filters 40. 41 and 42, The light source was ICL —A. Narrow-cut 
iKcolcr fillers were used for printing. The reproduciion of blue and 
violet filters i, Ic and 1. display larger deviation than did the reverse 
film* The print made from the sepamtion negatives wa$ jittic better* 
The RUCS average disLatiee OO?? for tlie tiegative-positivc and 
0066 for the three scpamliun negative method. 

Eight pigments of high saturation in the Bnumann^Pmse Color Allas 
were reproduced by the reversal and by the negative-positive process. 
Results are given in the following Table. 


Tabu 61 


1 

Doriiimrit lVaivfi‘fri,^fh 
i/i Afit 

j 

Orfu^tral 


! •V'lf-' 

j Orijfimt 

JliTvcnair 1 

1 

1. Red 

1 bl4 

'1 

397 

1 

593 

0-67 

066 

I>6S 

2. Dnmgt 

59S 

592 

59J 

‘ 0-83 

065 

063 

3. Veduw 

576 

57* 

573 

0-69 

065 

044 

4. Vciluw'-Giwi 

570 

m 

565 

<h63 

050 

033 

5. Green 


563 1 

1 . 

0-26 

032 

015 

G. BliiC'Grecu ! 

m 

554 

490 

0 23 

017 

023 

7. Blue 

471 

431 ' 

' 431 t 

0-71 

0'34 

036 

$, Kapb j 

—54^ 

627 

—521 

1 0-40 

Otl 

0OK 


Note the dominant wavelength of No. 8 has changed froni that of a 
purple to a rad (very Uesalurated)^ exclUtiuii purity having fallen from 
0'4d to 0-12* No. i has become more orange. The reproduction of 
No, 5 by negative^poshivc is far more blue-green ihan by rcvcRal, On 
the other hand No* fi is nearly matched by negative-positive and badly 
out in reversal. 

In gcucralt the Agfacolor ptwess gave deviutfons about rwicc as 
great ns by the best an stdditive system could yield. ReverMt was 
fhgbtly superior to negative-positive. 

Dr. Keck pos^ the question,"" How large du the chrotnntidiy and 
lucninuncc deviations of the reproductions /o compared with 
the origina]^ m order to produce the nalunil sensation under given 
projection conditioosr' Since he points out, quite correctly, that for 
projection it is undesirable that a filed should be an exact colorimetric 
i^roduclioii* owing to the physiolo^ca) and psycHologicjii conditions 
involved^ This Is an interesting questfon and there is not much data yet 
to help us to come to reliable conclusions. 



















COLOUR CINenfAtOORAfNV 


5ciinniJiry 

The ^veakncss of processes cTnptoying an onginal record m colour 
lies m jJie difRculty of mating duplicate master negatives without 
obtaining unacceptable degradation or distortioD of colour und/or loss 
of resolving power. Masking is a pastime for maihemalicians. The 
writer is ftnuiy convinced that up to the present, a set of sepamtton 
negatives represents by far the most rdkble and accurate foundation. 
Beam-splitter cameras arc expensive, cumbersome, and delicate, but they 
give the technician an odd feeling of security after experience of the 
vagaries of monopack. Nevertheless ncgative^posidve processes, such 
as Agfacolor, have their proper field of applicailoii and we must hope 
rhtti one of the manufactuters will shortly revive its production. In 
the mean time physicists are welcortie to cover pages with their symbols 
to prove that something can be done on paper which cannot bo done in 
the laboratory^ 


Rcftrenccs 

Kci:r, Paul H., "" Cofor Rcproductioti by Cotor Ptiolo^rauhv.’’ F.LA.T t-imtl 
Report No. 97T i Muy m?). 

Harcouat, WiLtJAH M . Agfe CbTtw.** Bfiliib InEctlicem Obfecirte* Sab> 
Committee. T^on, H.M- SlntiOrtcry OITim B LO S. Report Na ^7. 
EtmNo,9. 

JUKota. Lr.-Cou R. H-, U.S. Sipul Corpi. LG. Fiirbc«K A^fa Suhsidjiary* 
Wolr«L"* Dimbinod ImcITiiocooc Objedivet SubjCWiiniH^ ttem No 
(XXX-IT^ 

CIIANCHIM, OOMDR. P, M., U.S.N.R., ” InnaligHtion of Film ProdacUDn atwl 
MeitHXh 3t the Agfa Film Fabrik Pljuit Wolfen,*^ CIOS. No 9/133 
(XXVl^t?. 

Dt. Ag/acotot Ftmss." C LO.S, Trip No, 313, No, IV-14. 

FniEEiuAN, J. uTColof PliotUfcraphyf'^ 1945. American Fbot. PuF- Co. 

F.T.A.Ti FmaJ Report No. 751^ ** The AffoctiKif Nc^th^e-Pmjtb^ Method for 
Prorbf&jonjit Motkm Piciiirrt,'" tiy Lt-Col. Render and Otbettl, IniL 1946 

F^LA-T. Final Reports Nos. 355* 3S), G^maii Fhotufccsidve Ptodm^ti," by 
CR. Row nml Or, D. R, Wliiie. iT.I.LC), July-Auyuit 1945. 

*' A^ii^^r and Amcq Cotot CompJirftL" Mrlt /oww!. IIJ % |946>, 

** Anotho- F-LA.T. Report ou A:gfttJi;o3oT/" ffrli. Jomrr. ] ]4 (Feb. 14. 1941}. 
p. 70. 

•' The Asraeotor Neitatl^tsF^iivc Fronsua,” Orti, /own. Phot^ (July 26, 
l®46), p, 263, 

" Hmv to M.lie Agracoror Film.*' Brli. Jown, PhM., 114 (Oci, 3|, p. 3w, 
Note; B.t.O.S.=Qriiiih lotelliseiKx Ofajectlro Siib<k)iHmitiM, 
C.I.O.S.-CombiKc(l intelligence O^fcctives Sub-Coimdiiee. 
F-LA.T.—FwUt lofannaiJiM Agency, Tecbniciil (U,S,A,>. 


SU^TRACTlVr paDCE5SE5 


Amco Cofor.^ 

(Ntanufactursd bj'AnScO, Brnsturniton^ N.Y.* LF.SA.* ii SubsIdJaiy of Tlie Genera] 
AntUnc and FUtn CofpoimtimiJ 

Inlegnil Iripack three-^lour revtr^ subtractive 
prooe^, the emuisloQ layers mcorporating tiojwiilFiisitig colour 
couplers- 

Cffifiem,—Normai. 
f fon.“N ormaL 

Printtffx- —Nonnal^ With suitable means for grading for coloar^ 
Frcceishig ,—Nomal machinery with adaptations. See below for 
full descTEplion. 


Types op Ansco Color Film for McmoN-PicruRE Cameras 



Tjrpe. 

Spttd 

Iftumffkifhn. 

I6ttirn. 

\ 

RewmiWe 
Type 2J5 1 
ftcversibk 

IfVjf/dtf. C.£ i 
8 12 

Dayli$hJ Type 

16 mm. 

\Z 16 

Tungsten Type. J«20U'' K. of No. 2 
Pbotofbod 




yvtiiM. cr,£r 

Fmp^»€- 

35 mm. 

Re^imiUe 

*nflKt3S 

5 t 

(ASA 6) 

Camrm Ifrcon^iCJ. 

Grt^iion foncf than t6 mm. 
FIii» Bfatm colour baiance 
Kibcmicly off neuiml Doyli^i 
balance, for Mr!- Arc* altered wah 
V.l ictatine or Tungsten lUmfis 
fUtened with Mnelxth " Whiter- 
tile Gloss. On Nitmie Film BflOc. 

3^ mm. 

Rjcvwible 

TypeSSJ 

Ditto 

OittOn but coated un Acctolc Film 
Bw 

35 itmi. 

Rem«iblc 
Type 732 

1 

1 to 4 iimti 
light nood- 
cd foe B. 

& W. fiiv 
gjHib roii- 
iivt 

Rek-iiM PHtttUm. Nlnnie 

Film Biwe. 

3J lum. ' 

RevtrsiWe 

TypeSSZ 

DttEo 

Ditto. Acetate Pilm Best 

35 mm. 

RevmiMe 
T^pe 132 

Ditto 

Dapiiaitine 


* Data prevented by Riod pmnissiffiii of tbc nunufictiiim. 

m 




























COLOVJft ClSEi!\TOOftAp||r 


Typo q ( CoCvr FiloL— 

Assco Okk-Strip Goloi^^Separation Fil^i 


mirk 

Tjpe. 

^peM ^ 

riftpivr. 

M mm. 

Tyfic 135 
fijack-aad- 
while 

Equal giuiT- | 
niai fur 
Red, 

Green 
and Ultit 
cxpcmires 

t'or fcpmiien negatives fram orJ^i- 
niil irversit oulour potiioei cmn- 
pfbin^ intennediate tiaifC in 
ntepniJiliQii 01 blnick-^nd-while 
pcKifitie mjiatm for printifig on 
Ansco Rulctse Positii-e Film Type 
T53 


Ccnenil D^siription. 

Ansco C<?lof Revtfsibic mjii. film ivas first made fcr use by the 
United Stales Services after the entrance of U.S. into the war. The 
Mructvirc of the fiim is suhstantially identk'^l to the Reversal Type 
GejTTiiifi AgfacoJor fiJm^ the full Tnanuracturijig data of which were 
naturalLy at the diG|>asition of the pro-UTir Agfa Anseo CoipoiatioD- 
Snbw^tient to the war J6 mm. Ansco Color film was made gonemJly 
available to the public^ ond in 1945 three types of Professional 35 miu^ 
Anseo Reversihie Film were annoimced, including a duplicacing film 
and positive film for reteasc prints. Spxiat processing machinery has 
t>«n conslnieicd, and machinery has been insUillcil in commcTCtal 
Jabomiortes. 

The range and apcuracy of colour reproduction is eMCclItni^ although 
somewhat lacking in saturated reds due to the mageatn eoupler vielding 
II s^eivhni desaturoEcd hue. All type$ so far avaiiahle are dtsignisd for 
reversal processing, Firsi and second Rcperaiion dupes, of fidr nuollty, 
Imve been made, 

Tlih proce^ is an important addition lo the choice of cotour Rims 
avnllable to the motion picture industry, tt is probabte that n negaiive^ 
^siuvc process, simitor to Agfacolor, will taler be inlriiduccd. Fig, 
-T-^ illustrates the now familiur processing sequence. 


Structure* 

Nitrate or Cettuloic Acciaic safety film base coated with three emul- 
sioii ^layer^ (excluding a ydlow filter layer of colloidal silver and the 
eiui-halatioit coatingj sekciivdy sensiliTcd to three spectral regions, 
ted, Efceii and blue. The outermost emulsion h blue sensitive^ next 
comes BE interlayer of colloidal silver comprising a yellow filter to 
prcMml further penetration of blue light, the middle cmtiliion ts green 
•efisttired, the bottom emulsdon is red sensitised and with lillle or no 
grew sensitivity- The base is coated with an anii-haiadon backing of 
colloidal tih^r bcneaiih the bottom layer of emulsion (Fig. 212A). 















f [njiJ Pi^l^Jfef 

f Rj.:: 12_—Acii^ Cflbf rc^ncrtal lilm pr«cA^PE 


[i'tfatff* STO 



































I WufHmitItc 
J Fife*? (isrftr 
9 in^ Ortmn i»tiiT^ 
Uvt 

4 riY»r 

-S' iklil tftd Aeif 



t CwTiiTflini r*\»^ 

co^Bb^ tomtf 
? CBnCJiltiirKi uiifinii 

ccilqi|/Y forni# 

9 CanttinitiiJ €^n> UlSBur 
tArnnsr 


Oicitam ctiEirinn cn tMpmuit h bthtg mode m a ted on a b^ack gnsi^. 







Kio. 2J3A,-Answ ml« rci.«fMl rt|m. Sinicluft und mo^ of inwee ffttiraflion. 

[Fwinfp. JVI 





































SUBTRACTTVE 

The culuuf couplers are subiracOve 1o ibe gelatine in wbich 

they aXH: dispersed, ihcir nan^ifusiaii charactcrisric being ^tiievod by 
I he addition to the couplers of long cham fatty acids. Similarly the 
vcniutkcrs art tionniifFusitig. 

The camera Gim b sensitljEcd without a break through the viiibk^ 
Apectrumt the rna^mum sensitivity being at 65Q M/i, 550 M/i and 440 
M/j- The positive has sharp sca^tivity peaks and a complete br^ at 
575 M/J. The red wmsitivity Is contlnned much fiirther into the red 
than with the eamera film, the maasimum being at 6S0 Mj*. For the 
reasons for the adoption of the special cfmracleristics of the positive 
sensitizing see ihe section on Agfacolor (p, 363J. 



Ansco Color 35 nnfli Camera FXhii* 

As the 35 mm. process h at present restricted to the use of revenai 
aims at oU stages, the camera ori^nal record is dicncfort a positive 
when processetL Tfw charnrtcristies of the 35 mm. enmem recofding 
film have been modified as compared with a film intemied to be 
projection such as 16 with ihc object of meeting the 

Toquiiemcnts of printing first and second generation duplicates with 
the miniinntn loss of coiour saturation and accuracy of coIput tepro- 
duction. Ansco Color Type 735 is softer in graifijikm compared to 
regular Ansco Color Film, iho grain U finer and \ht eolaur balanoe 
purposely set ofT-natural« Fig* 213 shows a companion of the charac* 
tcfistlc curves of Ansco Color Type 715 and Ansco Color Daylight 
Film Type 235, 


391 































COIOUK CJMEMATOGflAPHV 


Anjco Color CameiH. Filni is jivailablc on both nimtc and acetiilc 
Wm base and designated 735 and m respoclively. Tlie former is 
balanced for esposure ia briBht siinlighi: or for studio exposures the 
Irt^-lighl should be provided by HJ. carbon arcs modified by Y-J 
gelaline filters and fiil-iight by tunes ten lamps f3 200“ K V filtered with 
Mac^th Whiierliie glass. The spectrogram Stmsn in 214 
relative response of the film to the visible legion of a daylight spectrum 
For optmum print r^idts the film should be slightly underexposed 
or fiomewhat heavier in density than k (he nonmal practice vvhen 
exposing for screen projection of an ori^nal, in order to maintain as 
much of the exposure as possible on the siraighMine portion of the 



Ro. 2l4.-^Wciisc spectrognuu uf Ansod Color Caumn Rten. T™ VS5 iH. 11. 
Duerr md M. C ll&ish}. 



Fm. 2IS,—Wedflv tpO-itognm of Ajik» Color, type 752 Itelcasc Film ttt H. 
tJiien- and H. C Jluah). 


characienstic curve and avoid inaccgraie colour reproduedon from 
raposures falUng m the legion of the toe. This film should be processed 
lor a somewhat shorter lime in both first and colour developer than 
ID \m tiine^ for 16 mm. proc^ising, 

Rcfe^ printing is catered for by Ansco Color Release Film Type 
732. charactenicd by low speed, very fine grain, and by sensitking 
Rowing sharp peaks in ihe green and red regions and a partial gap 
^twwn these peaks, ensuring maximum colour seputation. Release 
film IS avuitiihle on both nitrate and acetate film dcsiiuiated 732 and 
832 respectively (Figs. 215, 216), 

392 






















SUBtftACTIVlr l>ttOCESSES 


Printing machines should possess the following features:-— 

1. A light source which operutics at a colour tcmpcitiiurc of approai' 
mfltely 3.000" K. 

Z. A means for inserting prindng filtjsrs into the light path quielcly. 




PiO> 217.—Oundcrlitk Curve of Anico Duphnilnu Filin> 

3. A condenser lens system for the tight source to cottcentmte the 

light at the aperture^ Ansco Color Reteuse Film, with the 
printing fitters in place, will require 2 to 4 times the light needed 
for printing black-and-white positive hne grain stock. 

4, It is good practice to provide an sir blast or fan as a means of 

dissipating the heat from the lamp house in order to avoid 
damage to the hlters and film. 

A standanl scries of colour compensating filters in a range of densities 
of yellow, magenta and cyan, are avaikhle. 


m 
















































Prints from DupUi^tcs, 

Diipc$ ^tt essei^ctat whate special effects such as bp dissolves and 
wipes have io be ifitroduced and also to provide a master dupe for 
release printing. Two methods Have been devised. 

1. Opiica! printing of the Ansoo Color origiiial on to Ansco Color 

Type 132 Duplicating Film. 

This stock has about the same speed as Type 732 (Release Vimi). 
Processing is identical to Type 735 (origiDal camera filing This 
first generation duplicate can then be idterspliced wnlh the 
original and used for relciise ptintlng on Ansco Color Type 
732 Release Film. The characteristic curve of this film is shown 
in Fig- 217- 

Devetoping time for Type 132 is lU tninutes for lirst developer and 
9 minutes for colour developer. 

There is some loss of colour salumtion in the second geaeraiion 
duplicate by this method, but the loss is not serious enough to 
preclude its use for certain lap dis$o1vea, wipes^ and other 
special effects if perfect colour r^udilion is not esscctiaL The 
method is not recommended for making full-length master 
dupes. For this purpose the second method is preferred. 

2. Optical priutJitg of Ansco Color Film Type 735 on to Type 132 

masked with a blaek-and-white film which has been contact 
priiit^ from the original Type 735 camcfu film. The masking 
film is designated Type 154* A special low-shrink, panchro¬ 
matic, black-and-white film has been developed for making 
masks. This is a low contrast film, Hs charsemrisucs being 
inustrated in Fig. 21 &. 

In order to ensure good reg^nrationp the same printing equipment 
shuuld be used for the printing of this colour correction mask 
which later on is used for the printing of the umsked master 
dupe, Suituhle optical printci^ must poss*^s synchronized 
mteriTiittcnt movements with regisier pins and good optical 
cttuipmtmt (Fig. 31H 

To make the mask it is run m contact with the unginal in ihe camera 
head of the optical printer^ using the projection head empty as a source 
uf light. A yellow* filler is placed in front uf the source of light 

The maiik is developed in }\ negative devdoper of normal type. 

To print the muAlcr dupe the original U run in the projectiort head 
optic^illy registefed to the mask now pbeed in the aimefc hetid. Tt h 
then printed in contact with Ansco Color Type 132 DuplLciitiiig Film. 

Naluraliy sccurale optical registraiion must bo checked before 
printing can begin. Specinl dfect ma iter should be run in the proiection 
head with ibe originaL 
394 


ftl'BTK active 


This method, iL is dmtned, yield ix conformed master dupe that 
wDI show Uttle or no colour saiuratioD. 

The musked master dupe is hnaliy used for printing release prints on 
Anseo Color Type 732 Release Film in a teguiar ooniinuous printer 
eqmpped with meeiuinica! menus for the ttiserlion of competisating 
fillers (sec above). 




Fm, 219.^$cliciDailc vkw opih^l pTinicr. 


Amco One-Strip Cotor-Scparatkiii Film.* 

In 1946 Ansco announced a new monochroiRe fUm designated Aosco 
Oao-Strip Color>S«panitioii Film, Type 155, f i has ihe specif property 
of giving tdcntkaU gornma for i^, green and blue recordingt in tbe 
same development time. Tbia is eqtially tnie for tow oonlrast (0*50) 
and for hi^ contraitl (2-00). The cyan dye used in Ansco Color Film 

‘ See alto pave 134. 


395 



















COLOUtl cinematookaphv 


has a maxunuai absorption at approximately 6,80i) A. Thii enabtes 
tha use of a Wraiteo No. 70 filter to yield a red sepaiatioii that is nearly 
ideuL It is not feasible to use the No. 70 filter with normal panchro¬ 
matic film (Pig. 220), 




Ffc. m—Sjwcirwihotwueifte cunio of tljes in Amco Cok»f, Typet 735. ICwMjy 
of Ayato: H. C. ifmsit, /, S. frttdtis/n wjrf /oMre. Sue. MiH. Pie. 

The following technique is emf^oyed. The scene is photographed on 
Ansco Color Film Type 735. This is then copied on Type 15S film using 
a printer which is equipped with ngistratlon pins and r^pable of skip- 
frame printing. At tJtis stage fades, tap dissolves and other optical 


Tn» I5S. \Co^m 

of Awm- ff. C, ffitrsht J. S. attA Journ. Sac. .Unt. Pic, £nT.> 

3M 
















SUBTJlACTIVE PROCfSSfiS 


effects can be iTitroduc^d* The Type 155 film is then dcifclapcd lo a 
£dmma of apf^roiimaiely 0 65 in a buffered borax developer of the 
type used for vaxiabb density sound film. The resttUiug film b now a 
conformed masier conuiniug alJ tbe effects and with the colour records 
as successive black-and-white frameSn It serves as a proteciiun against 
damage to the original 

To conveii the sepamtion neptivea to coloui prints, they axe first 
piinted on standard black-and-white DopUeating Positive film on the 
same optical equipment for makiiig the negatives, and developed to u 
gsunina of approximately ) '4. The tinal step is to prim the sepamtion 
positives Oil lo Type 732 film three times through the appropriate titters 
The result is claimed to be a release print equal in colour leproductton 
lo a direct print from the original (Fig. 221). 

This film ha^ been designed to sohe (he specific problem in the case of 
monopack matcriah of aN'oidiiig the los of saturation when U becomes 
necessary to make second^ third or fourth generaiLon duplicates which 
will yield good release prints. 


Sound Track. 

Since the release printing stock is a reversible film, n positive hlnck^ 
4nd-white track is required for printing. The ideal wiiy to obtain such a 
[rack would be a direct-positive recording. Equipment for this purpose 
is not generally available, and the following method is rixonitneiided 
by Ansco. 

The recording head of the sound equipment is moved so that the 
tiegative recording is obtained on the opposite side of the liliUh This 
negative is then printed on lo black-and-white positive stocky which wifi 
then have the sound track in the proper position for printing directly 
on lo the Ansco Color Type 732 Release Filin in the coitvenitonal 
manner. 

Dye I racks, cspcdaHy those obtained by the dye coupling method, 
have a relatively low absorpiion in ihe infra red re^on. Thus the 
convenlional infni-red-scrisitivE photocell, for example, type 868, is 
not too well siillcd for thee dye tracks and a loss La volume, amounting 
to approximately 6 db., is encountered, Thii loss in volume, while 
serious, still comes within the range where adjustment <aa be made by 
fader setting on most 35-mm. projection equipment. Thu new' R.CA., 
I.P. 37* a gas-filled phototube, meets the requirements since the sen¬ 
sitivity of its cxsium-aaiimony surface Has jt$ peak at 4,20CM,500 A* 
being highly senritlve to green and blue. This surface is known os S-4, 
the existing tubes having the S-1 cjesium-rilver-oxygisii surface with 
mainly red and infra-red response. Levels are found to be slightly 
below those from silver tracks. SigitalHo-noise ratios are practicaJly 
the same as with silver irackSr 


397 


COLOUR riNEMATOGRAPHY 

Two-lay^r tracks {yellow and magcola) printed on the two upper 
layers of the mpitck have a slightly superior performance as compared 
with three-layer tracks. Single (yellow) layer tracks are of no use owing 
10 the green sensilivity of the LP. 37 phototube. Good inicks can be 
made from cipher direct postUves, or printed luastersp provided a good 
negative is available for making the master. .Masiers should have 
higher dcnsiticfi and more image spread for panting colour tracks than 
For rnaking t»tandard silver tracks, and the control for minimujsi tii$- 
[ortipR follows the ti^ual cross-modulation lest procedure. 


Proce^ing. 

Ihc processing of Ansco Color Reversal Film is relatively simple, 
though there are thirteen steps as against the four involved in develop¬ 
ing ordinary black-and-white negative fibn. The first step i$ to develop 
ilie neg^tisi: latent images prodiiced by exposure of the film in a camera. 
This Is done jn a high-sulphite metobhydroquinone devielopcr desigaed 
to avoid any coupling action between by-products of dcvelopmcni and 
the colour couplers in ihe three emutsion layerB, After immersion in a 
short-stop bath, and a brief rinse, the film is exposed to the light of a 
photofiood lamp so that the remaijung silver halides of the emulsions 
are rendered dcvatopable. Dcvdopmenl is carried out in n solution 
whose active ingredienr is a derivative of pamphenykne dinmine/ and 
the by-products of development react wlih colour formers in Uic emul¬ 
sion layers. Following colour dcvelopmenr. the Him Is treated succes- 
sividy in a eleanng bath, hjirdcning bath» washed, and ihcn immersed in 
a blcuching solution. Here the silver of the negative and positive 
images, as well $ l % the yellow filler hiyer and anii-halo coatingp is con¬ 
verted to silver bromide by the combined action of poia^um ferri- 
cyanide and potassium bromide^ Care must be taken to ensure that 
blenching is complete, since the dyes formed during colour development 
inhibit the action of the bleach solution by preventing its r^dy access 
to the particles of metallic silver. Aftet blciiching* the Jilm tv washed 
and fixed in ordirutry hypo. A linal wiiJil! and drying complete the 
process. 

• The devekJp^riB ‘m il» Ansen CoIcht l>;vcEDpmg CHiifii b sold un4kr 

uie iruiK name of Dicolainiiic."'' Thiii bi lUfTplieiJ ia .t liquij, mwt jmhpniE 
ffOT foremiJa it i> a iolalkm of 4 gm. of iiirthyl-pHphm>kiK diaroiiic 
nydiDclUonJa imd I ipn. of sodium bUuEnhiue- Ansco apparent^ rrefflnrd 
1 ^ desi^n&ic the developing ue/cni to ensure that only irateniil 
which b labcmito^ les^ fw Amoo Cobf Film b useJ. This k qnite Important. 
tuiDe the decree of jiuriiy of ihe dicthylif^p^ieavlmc Utantirie hydrochlOTidc ooleiir 

doping whstiLocc can xmxly influence the quality of Ulc nsalls in reeard la colour 
hol^noe nod ityo aiuin. 


m 



IJfyijiij< Md 



jnrfmieaad 


-. f ■ ■, 

1 timdtaaa 






WJi i|« u the iir«>n 4 i 4 n 44 .fBn 
Of I liKt vf ±.ll ccLaurf: f-ad 
UicAi ff 4b44rt4» ^ 
< 9 iQvr. 



TO^oido Hrw bilu4 Effglir 4ft tKfi hf^t rjiydr rht 9 ir 49 n tti ihv locand 

i^yOi AIH^ ffidi III thrfl ^flam IdyAi. tho' liriil dO«oJi^P'nKin!' 

wbli# ffp:ai$)iPi *r* 


Thw «liinvi 
foncaiifi^r 

€4te4r J»eTKiHi-rbdiif, 

Till K:'rHn i*nifU4« E#.f>or 

CEHini fli^vf. ^hit fik^(4triij. 
T'OtOuh 

Ttiv rvf iiiiikirva 
ciKiipInrnf rhiO ‘ 
cofour !(ompodi4-h|. 



All«r wd-ihmg. iho (ilrfi 4 po whifo (tglii jiiid iv<iovokiip*dL TJwj 

|iK&nd de-Vioiopniont leimt boEk m'tirj'ltic ^luof end ^rolQ^oid 1^391?* in 
P43ffparti tko tmuktan loyofi fey Ibo \inf do 


All m«li|tlie ^ilvop Ittrmod dufteip bflib fl»» HtM Jind iJfrECir'd do-^oiopniflint 
41 r«ni&¥-eidl by thf bath loAtfinig Iho dyv ima^gwi m Ph« 

thp*# anTiuliian laytn 



T>i« cyan magonr* and yoir^w dyO intagiot <0fnbi4iied rirr^rpdtkca Ih4 

OTHBinjil cplari pf Ihfl iubfed. 


TN* Um i4Wp|Li‘»c hrwr 
corTfskna. mmlfK miwmr 
if^d rp4t'‘yfv irnacat 

tiki wrtMilva Ufi* 

tsfu^irii PtHUlUc uPrer 

■nd iriifvnLi intkfx. 

TJ^t f^f^iiEhvv l■7«|- 

^■qoiai^p nhILBiPiC iirvftr 
cyi II 


Th# hppufl iftwEiivc- l*yc-“ 
^dfitilni. Iha 4j^ 

Tlia i4iTirtf¥tg lavEf 
<4ntAiiiu. ilM ftnfyiTii dp* 
rnhPiiih. 

Thw rtd MfiiJiiv* liper 
C«fULilLi>i iPua liyUi 4^0 
ltfti|^ 


TM 1liro£ afkniry 
^wflyp-fd dpt- 4*in|.-yi 
nvlkfKiiu Mid 

'wPiln coEryjnod Pa 
nrotHP ^KDpiw tK^^^v Hrrn 
Fipua-jh xr4n or blicK. 


FHi, 22IA.—Aii54rt>4^cP|ar ct^«rvil Him pfcccsslng ioqiktki:. 


[/fk/jflpp, >911 


















































1 





SUBIHACTIVI; FftOCeSSFS 


Pk(ktssino TimE'Table fuji Aksco Coloh Mottom 
PicruKE Fiun (Revbrsai. Tvfe) 




Fmt DwTlopmcMt .. 

Short Rirae , . { 

Shortstop L , ^. I 

Hardener 1 «. 

Wa«h 2ad Espouirc 
Colour DtvdnfBiKni ,. 
^3ort Hituc .. +- 

ShoftnopJL ^ 
HanknerH .. 

Wash 
Bkadi 
Waih * * 

Fit 

Wa*h . 

Final Wash .. 




Min. S€c. 
U — 
^ 5 

3 

1 — 
I — 
15 - 
— 31 
3 — 
1 - 
I - 



% - 
S — 
A — 


Tofri/ Time. 


12 — 
12 5 

IS S 
IH 5 
21 5 

3^ 5 

34 25 

39 25 
42 15 
45 25 
51 25 
54 15 

40 25 
65 25 
1\ 25 




± Idesrce. 
6SF,i:* „ 

6^' i » 

6r F, ± i 

R :J:l .. 


6S 

4a 



DhVFiGKNG Times 


type. 

fir^i Dtvefi^pef- 


Aluco CeJor Type 735 Ot 835 , 

AnscD Cakir Type 132 err 131 *. 

Adi»cd Color Type 732 ar 832 ^ . 

Mitwtcj. 

9 

a 

LO 

MfmteM. 

U 

9 

n 


Aiuontatic Processiag Madwi* for Atisco Coiot Filiti^ 

J, U Fomssl of Aosco describes the sprockctlcss deveioping nmchiiw 
which he designed for ihs processing of Ansco 16-tiwo- 
This description tnny be assumed lo be subsUmtlaJiy toi reel for 3 S^nun. 
devcloptng mnehine s atso. BottODO'drivc roechiuiisni is tiscd. Piwdsion- 
bored hard-rubber rollers having tracks and recess ensure no contact 
wjih picture in sound-track area. There are 25 units in the wet section 
and 4 units in the drying section. The whob requires more than 5,000 ft 
of leader for threading. Sestm units are in the dork and IS wet units 
in the lighL The roUer banks are about 3* fl. between rentres Md they 
are mounted 8 in. apart on the top support The range of speed is froin 
40 to 72 fL per minute—itormcd spe^ 60 ft The film is driven by 
friction applied through the bottom drive. The machine is enUidy 
^r*€DiTipcfi»ung for dimcnsioMl change in the film* 






















I'Ot-OtFR ClK^kfATOGRAPRY 


Quating from Fonesl'j papcir: 

The behiivjour of neetiue safety litti] during ihe deveipping cycle is 
rathcf interesting. There are two factors which influence the dimensional 
change. Otic wc term the ‘ Htimidity CocfhcicRt,' and ihU refers to the 
change of dimension which occurs when the GJm is subjected to moist 
air or water. The other factor we term the 'Temperattuc Factor* 
^is n^ers to the change of duneoslon in the film which occurs when it 
ts subjected to changes of temperature either in air or in aqueous 
solutions. In processing, the dimensional chmiges occur continually as 
the film passes through the developing machittc. These changes of 
dimension, seen in Fig. 222, are ordinarily not noticeable to the eye, 
but they ore appreciable. Very careful consideration must be given 



to them when dcsigiung a developing machine, otherwise the film will 
run with excessive tension in some sections and be excessively loose in 
others, 

*’ la order to compensate for these factors, ail top mllert of ihe 
developing tnnchiiie are free to move tndepeadenUy of each other. 
To ensure this, a stationary seperetor washer ts placed between each 
rolkr. This permits entinly independent movement of each roller 
without a tendency drag from neighbouring roUere, This design 
will pcrimi equalization In the wet secUon as long as the fdm is 
expandjng. for it permits each loop of film free tnoveraent and 
slippage. It will aot» however, compeniuite for shrinkage which 
must occur in the drying operation. In other words, it will lake care 
of Ihe dimcnsionai change in the film, as indicated from point A 
10 pomt B m Fig, 222. From point B lo point C a reverse condition 
«jsts and the iHm becomes shorter. In order to compensate for 
Uiii reversed dimensional change, the drying cabinet is underdriven 
400 



















PROCESSING FORMUL.t 
FOR ANSCO COLOUR MOTION PICTURE FILM 

(REVERSAL TYPE) 


firsT Otvtloper 

MiCioS 



- * 


pH 9-S-IO 

3 gfii. 

SoU. sulphite 

... 


- * 

. . 

SO .. 

KydnxiuJrtooe ^» 





M 

Soil Cilf boWLlc «^ 

k 1 




40 „ 

Pol. bromide 

. .. 



_ , 

2 „ 

Sod. tli£oc>'inate 

4 -i 


* * 

V 1 


Waler lo make ,. 




- 

1 tirre 

ShMi SiQp i tew/ if 

AcelFc acid ffloctal) 





P\i 5 

5 c.c. 

Sod. awaie 





30 gm. 

Wattr lo malcc ,> 





1 litre 

Coiiftir th^Vrkifta- 

SchL hfc^ulphitc 



-I A 

V I- 

pH to^ia-3 

t gtn. 

‘‘ Cclbrnirre 




* i 

4 

Sod. carbonute k* 



I F 

.. ^ 

67 .. 

Poi. bromide 





^ rt 

Water to TTiakc . . 



m b- 


1 litre 

HarttfHrr t titid fj 

Pot. chrome alum «. 





1’M‘S 

30 gm. 

Water to make . . 


-- 

* it 

-* 

1 litre 

fU^iXth 

Pol rcrricyanlik 

m w 



I- -e- 

pH &2 

too urn. 

Pol hrofnidti 

■I A 

m. n 


, M 

10 „ 

Dibaikc ^od, phosphate 


% il 


■■ ir 

40 ^ 

Sod. bi^l[:4luiTe 


p ■ 



r. 

Waljcf to make . . 


+ 1 



1 tfire 

flTcr 

Hypo 





pH 7'^ 

200 snt. 

Water to nmke . . . ^ 





1 litre. 




































777S 'V jjIT 

// / /// .* # tilltnill / / 


ra» BM ih«|9 (MV ^¥4K4|J| «ri> 


I-ICp. 223.—Dcvckiping Msdlinc for 16 niiti. Ameo Coldr Revgrsihifl FJfm. 


4011 




























































sirsrti M TiVf PROCESSES 


whiiih means lhai more film is dniwi? inio the eiibjnei t^n is taken 
from iu tills difTcrcnte in drive h in rehuioti lo tite dintcnsionnl chsiitgc 
which occurs in liie film- 

“ By designing each section of the machine lo compcniuite inde¬ 
pendently for these djinensloiml ckungc factors, the tcnsioJi on any pan 
of the film at any poini in the machine ncvei exceeds 30 gm. or 1 ounce, 
hVith this low sitain on the film, breaks in the machine ure exiremely 
rare. We liaw $onie mudiincs in coiiiinuotis opemtioD for more than 
six months at a lime without a film break (Fig. 223X 
** All mciullic parts of the developing machines coming m conliict 
with the solutions are made of liS-S staufiess sxect. The solution mnks 
itre made of stceL rubber coated J in. inside and m. on the outside. 

It been found thni coating the tanks with rubber on die outside 
reduces the malTuenance cost, 

“ Jn nperaiion the film is fed into an elevator. The elevator hntds 
about IM ft- of film. From the elci^utor the film pas^ over a break 
signal device into the first developing mitk. Tiicrc ore four roller hanks 
b Uie fim dev-clofwr giving a total time of 12 minuua at normal 
operating speed. After developing^ the film passe$ succcs^vcly into tbe 
rin$e^ the shortstop^ the luirdener, then tfarougli the liglvt lock into white 
light. At. this point it Ls given a second esposuie. The second exposure 
b supplied hy four G,E, PS™25 lamps, two placed on rach side of the 
film. 

** SlmulUincoiujIy with the second exposure the Him is given a 
^-minute wash and then goes into the cototir developer. Them are five 
banks of rollers in the colour developer. This gives a total time of 15 
minuics m normal operating speed. 

The next four units of the dcvelopiixg muchirtc are in single tanks 
to accommodMie the steps of rinsing, short slopping, hajdening, und 
washings After the film has passed through the hardener and its sub- 
sequcni wash, it travcU into the bleach. The bleach lank accomiaodjites 
two units and provides 6 minutes at normal operating speed, Olcach- 
ing is usaiijly completed in 21 minutes. The extra time is provided to 
ensure thorough bleaching. After bleaching, the film passes through a 
woih tank and then into th^ fixer. 

■'The fixer lank coEUams two uniuj allowmg fi minutes at nomiiil 
operating speed. This ensures complete rcnios'al of the rchiiliigonated 
silver. The dev'cloping machine ts provided with two wa^h Utnkx 
following the fixer. Tlie first lank conUiitis a single bank ol rollers and 
allows 3 minutes of washing. This renio™ most of the fixer, Tlie 
$<^0rid wash lank contains two bjtiiks and providc$ the final wash of 6 
minutes. The residual hypo left in the film after processing liills below 
OhQOS ing. per sq. in-, which is satisfactorily Jow lo ensure F^itiianency. 
After washing^ Ibe {Urn pusses thru ugh a double pneumatic squeegee^ 
operating at 7 lb. pressure^ into the drying cabinet. 

2c 


401 


rtier<J ^rc bitnk^ uf rollt^r^ in iIk dfyiii|£ cubineL jnU dryinj^i is 
ijjjoomplishid in iibouL 15 minutes. Clc^sn* dry air h fiUppli&d to liK 
€3buiel frcrm a debydmtor. The drying syt-item h entirely etojed and i£ 
is liutompLic iaopcititioiL The tcmperuinre is mamniined si 86" F. and 
the reliiLive hurmidily is hejd at 35 per ccm. In this system, if faster or 
slower drying is desired» tJie relative humidity is adjusted at iht deby- 
draiOT. The air tompcraiure is not cliangcd. We have found this 
rncthod of drying to be \'cry satisfactory from aU angles and it t‘an b? 
highly rccommeodccL 

“ The chemicaJ mixing equipment h located on the floor abo^-'e 
the laboratory and the soluiions are fed through rubber pipelines 
lo the processing tanks of the maelune. All make-up solutions are 
maintained at approximately the ^^orking temperature. This is 
accomplished by heat transfer colU located in all storage tanks. The 
temperaiurcs of the processing suluiion^ are conirqlled within nanrov^ 
limits. 

In order to ensure $harp, brilhant colour imagies, the dcvt^lopers. 
Idcudu aitd the hypo are hJlcrcd and jetted against the fdm as ii passeii 
through the tanks. Eii the developing tanks these jct& are so am need 
ihst the solution js directed apinst Ihe flow of the film. Tkh high m- 
biden^ provides a uniform development free from $tre^ks u^uulEy 
assodated with high-speed machine wort. 

During opemiloo the solutions arc continually replenished. TTie 
□mount of replenisher is determined by constant pH control and by 
sensitottLetry. Scitsitometric lests are put through the developing 
machine every' 30 minutes. These strips are checked for speedy colour^ 
and fog, A pisnorud cheek is also made, and in this test diort pioiXs of 
nijn> representing three dlfTcreni exposures of ^ predetermined set+up^ 
ure developed together at JO^minute intervals. The picioiials consist ofa 
colour char: and a grey scide. One series is given normal cxpft^ure, one 
senes is e?(^sed one stop less (thb represenis underexposure), and 
another scries of exposures represents one stop more than normal, 
which is overexposure. A coiu^tan: check is made on the grey scale for 
lo^ and the colour patelic^ are checked for general colour charuetcr- 
tsiac^. From ihrcse tests it is possible to control the chiiracteristics of 
the varjoux solutions so that ihe quality omput from day lo day Is 
uniform. 

In CO Jicl usio j| can be &aid that An:^o Color mol ion picture lilm 
should not be developed by hand procti^K^. Only a developing machine 
will give consistently uniform quality. Muchtne pixicessing is the mosi 
suttsfflctory met hod of liandliug the film. Good furhulcm^^ of the 
solutions is necc^iy to ensure dear* brllluint. sha^ colour images. 
No attempt should be imde to opemre a continuous colour Qlm develop¬ 
ing process without adequate control facilities, for to do so will msut! 
only In failure. The etmtTol prtwedures nmssarv with machine proecs^- 
402 


SUBTmACTtVE FftOCEiSES 


ing of Aiisco Color Rtmarc not difficult lo uie. to ioLerptvt 

ibe resuJ* it k obvious thiti 4 thorough knowledge of each slep of the 
process ii roqiufedp" 


Remarks 

Conimfit catmol be modified by ioertase or decrease of developmciu 
time because the Layers are developed to correct balance only at a fixed 
lapse of time. One or other layer would predominate if the film were 
developed for a diilereiit time from ilml recommended. 

Ruorescent tubes ate rntgatlsfactory for second e^eposure not only 
because of tow intensiiy but owing to differcuiial cKposiarc due to tine 
radiation. 

It h pmcticablc to dry the film after ihe flr^ development, but very 
complete washing is essential. 

Four Eolulions arc cjtculated—tsi Developer* Colour Developet, 
Bleach, Hypo. All solutioris ate continuously replenished. 

Rubber squeegees are pmvided beiwwn each tank4 

Each developing tank has horizontal and vertical pressure jet.H moving 
against the dirociton of filEn travel. 

Over* and under-<?cposuie of Ansco Cok>r Film be compensated 
for by altering the time of the first dev^clopment only. If the errors to be 

OEfEcfs IS Ausw CoLoa Fuju, and Reaiotiev 








Overall bek of denui} 


Eu3»siV'c ikitiily wUli dveiujl 
muddy ** uppearance 
djcfuuty wjib 

vented <ek>ur end cc^ntmit 
BiDwniHh meulcs or spolm 
Greyneu or dult cokam wiiti 
fuxfjmiLt overall derally 
Overall polk tLain 


Geoetaf sreeouh cut . , 


Gencrat millLy appearance 


Oveolevctopmeni \r 
litst devetoper 
&diai»ted stop iMih 
tniiu^cnt *ecoml «- 
poiure 

Tnuiffldcni colour de- 
veiopfuent 

rniumckni Util devel- 
opmenT 

Ountkvetopinaii lo 
co^r dcvclcpct 
Incomplete bleiichlPa 
incompleie blcoflune 

twen hunJenlns lUid 
btcai^lns 

l^pQ^uie uf to 
Bulphur dioxide 
funw wliflc dryina 
tnnullkieia fuiiiv 


Ntmc 


I None 

I None 

None 

None 

None 

Rebteueb^ IfiXi aid w^iih 
RnbLftii±, fijt, jind wjidlt 

Nom 

RDblCAch tJ luinulul, 
und witli 

Rcfli and vtwsh 












COLOUR CjKBMATOCRAPHV 

correct^ are two*thirds of a stop or less, the colour balance of ihc 
^nspareacy is said not to be seriously disHirbed by this procedure. 
The following developmeui times are recommended, 

FCM" O'k^r^pOAuics of 

l» kl 

»' U r* 

** w t , , 1 7 

11 CJiposure errors as large as about one stop have been made, the 
colour balance will be seriously aJTccted. 





Aosco Color Film. I6*min. Rercrejbte 

^^cversiblc. Daylight type and Tungsten type, 
(100 feet diiyligl^t Joading spoob.) 

C/ju^]/f»rr/orr.~Integra] tripack three-colour Subtractive. Incor¬ 
pora led non-dtfTusing dye-couplers, 

f//Hm/rfa/f(W!:—Tungsten type balanced for 3,200^ K, lamps, IG.E. 
500 Huti PS. 25* or PhotoJlQod lamps,) 

^Ircft.—Uy. ISf 16 mti 17, for absorption of cMcsssve uliru-violet 
rudiatjon at seaside, at high altitudes, or to reduce haze. 

-r«#fo Cu/tff CprtwrfoH mer 10. to transform dnyUght to tungsten, 
fo r u^ of t type i ndooi?. Rcq ui res 4 times exposure of Tungsieu 

typc(vjz.,2futUtop4l. 

Anseo Cotvr Converxion Fitter 1] , lu transform tungsten to daylight, 
tor use or Itingsien type in daylight. Requires a half stop over that 
needed for daylight type. 


DAVuotr E^tHMijRE CiniJi: 

Exi^ures in the table below are suggested for use in the Icmpcratc 
^nc from two hours after sunrise until two hours brfore sunset. In 
winter use a one-stop larger opening than that given in the lables, unless 
there IS snow on the ^und. With MoeptionaJiy brilliant light, such as 
mow scenes, or at high altitudes, the exposures given may be ludved. 
The exposures giveo are for average subjects. Dark subjects require 
1-stop greater exposure, while light subjects require J-stop less exposure. 


404 



StlftTftACTtVH 


Normal Shittiir Sprbd W 16 Filame^ per Second 


1 

1 

1 

SItif 

Ligh:td. 

BarJi-Li^hrrd 
or Open 
Shade, 

Bright Jionlighl 

r/« 

/m 

li* 

Ha^y siinlighl. ftoH „ 

y?s-6 

— 

— 

S\m brighl day, no thadom 


— 

— 

Sun €vcrcsK{k dnil day | 

ya« 1 

” 1 



Exposuke Guide for Tungsten Type wt™ ^200* K. Lxmvs 
OR No. 2 Photoflood 

TIus tabic is based on exposures for average subjects in light-coloured 
surroundrags. A dsrk-coJourcd subject will rc^^uire a i-stop qj grcaiet 
iacrcase in diaphragm openings whereas a Hghl'-^oioured subject will 
require about ^-$Cop smaller dlapliragm opening. Because of the differ^ 
enoc in reflectors, the iable is given only a guide. In order to lUiliKC 
the full output of tight frem the lamp, a reflector of good quaJily must 
be used» 

500-WArr A-15 3,200^ K. Mazda Lamps (cn Refi-ectors) 

Fnr A vtmge Sub/eefs tft Ughi^Cohut^d Ramns, Sormeil Shatier Speed 
af 16 Frtunes per Seemd, 


taimHQ^-SubjFtl Dtfiaacr Fret- 



1 4ft, 

6ft. 

1 «A 

10 R. 

lift. 

Qru Litiip . 

m-i 1 




/7ta 

Two liunps 

MS 1 

' /y+n 

>73-5 

fti* 



When (WO lumps ure used, the e;cpo$me$ in the tnMe aie cortoct 
only if both tamps ate close to the cumcra, and the light from both of 
them most be superimposed on ibe subject. 

The exposures j^ven In this table apply also to the use of No. 2 
Fhoiofloods in place of the 500-watt 3,200' K. lamps. With Photo¬ 
flood lamps, an Anseo UV-15 filter should be used over the tens. 

ANseo Colour Filtewl For Ansco Colour Fn.« 

Ansco colour filters a« available in two grades (Lens and Printing) 
to meet the roquiiemcnis of two essentially difTcrent needs, for comciu 
lenses and for laboratory printing. These hlters are for use with Ansco 
Color Film where it is necessary to change the cffeciivc colour {{nality 
of the ligh i by which the colour materials are exposed. 


405 






















cm (HIIt TOttRAPHY 


Botli die supplied in iht form ol gelMtine; folk only jiid ate made tu 
ti^cci ispccificatiotis xis to spectral absorption. The only difference 
between the two gjadts k in the optkd quality of ihc fillers and them is 
no difference in ihcir spectral ab^iorption chjOj^^cleriiitics. For example. 
striaiiofiB and minor imperfections which have no effect when the filter 
k iL^ over a light ^urce miiy exist in tlic ” Prinruig grade filten, 
Becau&e Aey would mierfere with the quality of the image* such minor 
physical imperffeciioiis are not present in lens Fillers^ 

Ansco colour tiJters can convcoiently be classified into three groups, 
as follows;—!. The ultra-vioJet series: 2. The eonvetsion series; 3, The 
colour compensating series. All of these are supplied as “ Lens '* 
fiitcjii, while only the wlour compensating series and the UV-16p can be 
obtained in the fortn of" Priming filter^.. The foils are edgemarkrd 
either Lens ^ Printing,'’ lu addition to the series and number. 

1. The AhstfrbiffgFitters^ aB the name implies* absorb in the 

uhra^vkitel and slightly in the blue region of the spectrum. While the 
primary pu^osc of such fillers is for haze correetton with Ansco Color 
Fitm^ Daylight Type, in photographing distani bndscapes and sea¬ 
scapes,. and in nuUrsng picture^ at high altitudes, the fact that they 
absorb at thd blue end of the spcctnim makes Ihem also useful where 
minor changes in colour balance are needed^ 

There are three filters m this scries designated In order of increasing 
ahsorpLinn as the (JV-15, UV‘^16 and UV^l?, The specific uses for e^ch 
are outlined in the table. 

2. 7j^re Conversion Ffiters arc for exposing Ansco Color Film when the 
light source differs from that for which the film was ntanufactured. For 
example, daylight ron tains a higher proporlion of blue ihim does 
3*200 JC. ^ung3ten ftluminuiion and ihcrefore Tungsten Type Ansco 
Color Fiim cxp^^cd outdoors in sunlight has a faluisb appearance. 
However, by using a convei^ion filter* it is possible to absorb the excess 
blue light S4> that sunlight becomes opproxLmatcly equivalent phoio- 
^phh^y to 3*200"^ K.. illtimtnuiinn and m this way Ansco Color 
rilin, Tungslen Type, be succei^sfuIEy exposird by suniighi. 

In an antilogous way, a conversion filter can be tj$ed to alier iht 
balance of 3.200' K. illumiimaoii so that ii iipproximaies the effect of 
MinJight. 

3. T7;e Colour Compenmfm Serkx of fdtcfs is iniended to be used for 
mm or alterations in colour balance. For example* m phn lorn icrography 
wim Ansco Color Film, the standard microscope light sauroc may not 
yield transparencjcs of ihe desired colour balance. Under these circim- 
stances, colour compensating liliers can be inserted in the optical 

lo adjust the colour quaiity of the fight source so that a bokace 
IS obtained. 

40fi 


SVailtACTlV E r-ltOCESi^ES 


The chier applicatiDns of Miour compensating fiLtem aie in making 
colour prinls on Ajuco Color Film* Types 732 and 132 . Thdr use in this 
way is discussed in ih& table which follows. 

ULrttA‘V{OL£T SeMIES 

Aksco CoiXHt Filter Fniv 

Uit- 


UV-IS I. Sl^ilia^ccorrecUofi^ ^ . 

% When csiKHic^Tiin^teu Type Ansen Color Film jihoioflcKHl lijsht 

UV-16 |» conoctfan. 

2 , When expoOha TunjifstHi IVpc Ansco Color Film phoioflASb lighi 

J. In Optical swtem in fldtUiion to locmnnierided Piters when ^positw 
Anaco Cator Filftt Types 732 or 132. iNoie^ ITV-I^P flltcr foil 
rnplAcn the UV-IR filter picvtoMsly roocnniTOiiktLl 
UV-t7 i, por gitstcf cfMTectiDii t han provided by ihc UV^l® filters. 


Conversion Series 
Ansco CoijOR Filteh Foil 

Umt^ 


No. 10 L When eitpQsirtB Dflyfishi type Amoo Cninr Film by 33 *^'^- 
Ufuntiimloti. The Etpeuare shoyld be four limes thm which 
Tiin&ica Type Awco Color Film tiould iirukr tdeniical 

coimitiom. 

No. 1 | I, When oitpoMEift Ttiniitco TVl* Ansco C 3 aloi: FBm in dayligjit. The 
CKpcsuie shoidEi be I S Times Thai whkfa TVpc Ameu 

Color Film would roquira under idenooil oondEtioens^ 

Colour Comptokatino ISekirs 
ANstco Color Filter Fo«. 

Vjc. 


These 10 filtera are prirnudly foJ use when pnnling fcleate prilil* cm 

Type 7J2 or makLog duplical-ci on Type 132. TTm: fliten are uaoJ 
lo aJia* the ookiur qiudity of tbe liEht source it$ed im the ^S-rnm- 
piintlng madiine* prtndpnlly for colour sniding^ 

When A -3 filler (23, iJp 43J U aiWfed Iq ihe liaiil system, a 
l/$ Eem Jrtop t^ponAm Incrci^ is neoessary. Th* 24. 34 and 44 
^terg are approxiiraldv iwtoe ni as Hie 23. 33 and 43 (tilers. 
When my one of tbi2 formef if added to ibc light syaem, about 
I kne stop esptniire inmax u newaary. 

TTk 25, 35 and 45 filicri are Ppprosimiticly twice u dense ^ the 24. 34 
And 44 filters- 'nwt sddilion of -3 filter* lo Ufht sysim 
iKcnulalcs about a i kns vtop ej(posurc increase. The nuigenU 3fi 
filler ts anptoJiimittly iwkt if dense as Uie J5 filter tmd nit 
exp 49 ifrc incjDOK of 11 lens ttop* is pooessary when It fcs added to 
the light tyslcin. 

For the aboifl it is apparent that when • -3 flltw Ln cmibiiiauott with 
4 -4 filtcf Is added to tbelifiht system about n | Icniiiop ckjm3s^ 
increase H ticcossryj likewise* when a —4 liltcr tli combmuiiftn 
with a —5 filler if added, abool I kni flop m^rense in npofutt h 
ooceisjy. 


Vtllow 

23 

24 

25 

33 

M 

35 

5ti 

Cya,i 

43 

44 

45 


407 





COT.OliK CI^F-MATOORAPIIY 

Partial Processinci of Anscq Color Film 

loiisinuch as Aosco Color Film, during processing, mosi he exposed 
lo while light aficr ihe first d< wlopmenl and the stop bath, it is evident 
that ir processing cannot be pompletcti at the time, it may be interrupted 
at this stage and finUhed later. If thU is to be done, the film should be 
washed for at least 10 minutes tn cold water and dried. 

Advantage may be taken of this fact wlicn working far froin the 
siLdio or under highly unfavourable conditions, fn its semi-processed 
state, the film is less susceptible to deterioration and damage than un- 
proecs^ film. It may be exposed to ordinary room light without harm. 
In adtlition, it can be stored for appreciable periods without change in 
colour quality or degree of exposure. On the other hand, exposed but 
unprocessed colot^film may show noticeable loss of the latent image as 
well us marked shifts in colour balance on prolonged storage. 

Hxplorcrs, magazine correspondents, and others who arc unable to 
carry complete processing equipment and supplies, may urranye to do 
uT ^ fifsi development and the stop bath en route, following which 
the films are return^ to lieadquartcrs for completion, with the know¬ 
ledge that the films will not deteriorate during shipment through tropical 
zones. In addition, since the partially processed films have a visible 
negative iniuge, they may be exarnlnod by cetisors, customs ofBciaU, 
etc., before completion. 

, rcTnarning steps either may be carried out by the photographer 
hitnsclf Of ihc partially processed films may be returned to the Ansco 
Color Laboratory, Aiisco, Binghamton, N.Y,, for completion. 

Warming: There U no satUfactoiy way of distinguishing partially 
proMssed films froiti unprocessed films in total darkness. Any films 
rot^ived at Binghamton will be processed through the entire procedure 
unless ihe package is dearly marked to the effect that the films have 
been given first development. Films which have been given lint 
development and are subsequently processed as ordinajy exposed 
Ansco Color Film arc irretrievably spoiled. For this reason, in returning 
semi-prooetsed films to Binghamton far processing be sure to mark the 
package dearly: ■* First Dcvcioped-Open in While Light,” or if there 
IS insufficient ipwee on the package, smiply mark if Department K.** 
Ansco Color Film thnou^ only the first three steps of 
proctssing, the wnie procedure should be fallowed as thougli the 
^ocessing were lo be compleled, with the exception that the rinse 
following the stop bath U extended to a wash of roughly 10 minutes' 
duratiOTi. The temperature of the first developer should be carefully 
Cofitrollcd Qfid kept at 68 F. (20^ C.}, while the stop bath may be used 
At beiwccTi 60 and 70'’ F. (16^ to 21 ' C). Aghalion must be in accord- 
Bficc With instructions—dilfcTing omounti of agitation in the first and 
second developers may produce marked vuriRtioTis in colour density, 
and cquiiliiy of finished iransparendes. The film can be exposed to 
qog 


StBTItACTIVE PROCESSES 


ordiiia.ry jutiticUil light tti tliccoitipl^tii^D of tiie 5 lop-bath $lcp and nocds 
only to be protfctad fram heat aiid mechanical damage from ihb ppini 
onwafil 

One (hinger involved h that of excessive swcUmg, reticulation, or 
friUing of the emiihion during the wash. Water which is too soft or too 
wartn win give trouble, so that wherever possible hard water iiboidd be 
used, and in any cusc, the temperniure should be kept below 70 F- 
In tropicoJ climates, where the running water supply is generally 
warm, it ts desirable to substitute w'a^hing in several changR of ccralod 
water for the IG-minuie wash in running water* Ten l-jiiinutc rinses 
with constant agiiatjon. using fresh water for each rifise^ is ample. 

Following the wash, the film should be dried in the normnl way* 
avoiding the application of ttcessive heal. After drying and during 
storage ii should be protected against ciitremes of heat and humid iiy^ 
as well as agaijibt mechnnical damage and strong light such as daylight 
and direct aunligbL 

RcfcrvatCfi 

R, H . “ iJewiiamcinc Evaiuation of ftevctriblE! Cdor Film.” ^tmr» 
.vfo/. /Vf. 5 i94Sr). jrp 

JuDKrss. S. Ld and Varoen, 6., ** The Anaco Color PmoM/’ Mttrtt ieci 
Amcr., 10, Mo. 9 iNov. 1044), p. 5SJ. 

FoftJtEST, J, L.^ “ Proces^ns Of Itinnim. AiuCO Color I'Uia, 

Mitr. Pit. £>rtf.. 45 (Mov. 1^51+ P 313. . 

□uEitft, \L H., and Harsh, H “ Ansoo Color for FroTiaiiotial MoUon Piciarcs, 
JouTit. Sot. Afor. ^*fc. £n|r.. 4fc* No S (Mu) IW>, p. 557, 

QrmTii, K M, And MooiiR* A, R.. " A phototube for Dye Impgst Sound Trafik. 

Journ. SkK. Miff. Pic. 46, No 5 tPday iW), p. 57 ^h 
C jumAcii, R., and CnRuen. F ^ " ft^rodi^tion of Color Filoi SmuiU RoMnii, 
Joum. ior. .Mti. Pit. £>w-, 4X No 3 (Sept 1944)^ p. 

TtjLL, A. Q,^** Noh^on Uie Cheniisuy of Colour Dcvelopincm,” BriL Jiyurn. Pmir 
tOei-14, t?38).p. 64T ^ 

BA-rt5, J. IL, “ PiDceasing Fonfiuki for Ajiko Colflf FlJni,"" Mjireh- 

April. im ^ 

lUn. R. M., ond Forrest, J. L, “ Manuah Ansco Processing .Marine ModeJ 4c 
for l6-n^H Anxv Cotor Rcverwiilc Film**'' Iti-niJii. Molton Picliirt Divbioo, 
Aeuod, Buighamlon, Now Yort^ . 

HAttSii. IL C. BOd. Fwi4>jaa^* j. S,, OiK-StTip Coksi-Scparatioo niQt /own 
Afor Ftf. 50 (Jjut I94S^ . . , 

Hav. R. H.* Usoof 35^iTun. Arod? Color Film for Color Release l^nnln 

Jjwffi. Sot- MoJ PJc- ^W-i. 53 (Aup. 1^?)* PP- 143-1411. 

Tin? Bertrand Process (Pan^ 

Ciifmru .—Kodachromc 16-miii- is used for the origiaal r^ord. 
Prmsifig—3S~mm. separation negatives made by optical enlarB^Jneni. 
Three successive printings ure said to be made on one surface which has 
been sucocssively sensiti^d TAith dmio direct printing-out dy^. 

/Vq/ecl/on.—Nonna I K 

Remofkj .—No record of prints having been exhibited publicly^ 

4U9 



CULOUh CtMtMATOOKAPHY 


Tie Brerrsler lYowra. (No longer worked) 
(U^.P. l,7J2^T7. 1930.} 


Catiiefv.—The late P. D. Brewster, on American iovenlor who wat 
one of the first to apply the btpack system to colour cinematography, 
had a number of patents to EUs credit covering various cameras and 
pnn^g machines. Jo E.P, 130,002 a camera is described for the pro¬ 
duction of twocolour films in which the usual girangsmctit is adopted 
or two ^tes at nghl angles to each other, and a prism cube wjtb 
cemenUHl reflecting lace half'SiJvered, and disposed at 4$° to the axis 

of the IjMTij. In U.S.P. 1,752,477 the prism is replaced by a rotatina 
muTOr (Fig. 224). 



Hkj. 224.—Bnwrtcr's U.S.P. 1,752^77. 


description of Brewster's cmicra appeared in the 
r/iofoxrapMc Journal (75, August 1435. p. 455); 

Biwoer * suBSBtkin tlut Ihm UHtil ilioutd bt divided m bcUvwsn lhi« 

nmuelhL to nwhe um of nwtaJiB rather like 

*9 I5r. Spenrar (who presided m the 

dSZi2ed“AnriM? HrcWVoocK 

that ifwui “ Ttmwiw^ ‘ ^ Actetied tlw dedgn wi the blockbosni, pomiins om 

viinDi on to ^ ^ ^ axis light would be reOected from il» 

^ f the entering beam, end wl^n the propeTler 

MU iTude one OTTipfete revolution Um whole of one ham woulO be otLn^ial 

Uw uT** tipwiure* hetween ihcin, light would be tiaosmiti^i 

' 1 *® ®™B*. ff el an nit^ to tlie first nrsnelkr a Mumt wrn- 

Ihe two would crow 

rath olhert path when icvolvmg wJlltuul inleHefW w+ih eatih r.* 

o« V4« Of the Bm rdketor moved out of Xr^ 

tlSute ortKrriSn».^tik^ 

^ (SeeCheWet 

410 










JIURTSACTTVK 


In adopting this tjtw of caittem Brewster attempted to avoid tfic 
defects^ nf bipack. .411 ihrte ocgalivei should be of iriaKimum definttiun. 
The film shown on the occti-sion referred lo nbeve was free rrom ttalatioEi 
and had good dehnition of detail. 

PrifUh ^^—Brewster employed double-coaled positive yUn printed on 
ojw ^idc with the red flUer negative and on the other Aide with the 
green hltcr negative. The developnient of these W'aa carried to a low 
gamma, and exposure was light These two images were convened into 
silver it^ide and dyed with basic dyes—□ process originally invented 
by A. Traube tD.R.R 1S7J89| 1905). The side printed with ihe ted 
filter neg£itive was dye-ioncd subtractive primary cyan; the side printed 
with the green filter negative was dye-loncd subtructivc primary magenta. 
The remaining yellow component wa$ priated on top of Uie dj'o-toncd 
image by imbibition from a relief inatrix film nmde in the customary 
manner by developuig with a tanning develops such as pyro or pyro 
and adiirok The unhnrdencd gebitine w-as dissolved away with hot 
w'ater after development. Such a method was eLaboraie and must have 
been scmcwhni difficult to control both as to regbtraiion and colour 
balance. 

The follow ing description appeared in I9i5: 

The led and ^cg^ilive nxooli u.re prints on to iwo^ldc* of n dotilde^ijatcd 
positive filrn. The larc hloLclieil out lo iovisibk! tiJvcr SocUde iniag», md 

jifu lotKd with basic dyes to phnk and hEue. The pink side is ih&n mated vhh 
emuhiwj^ wliich is exposed to the blue nc^aivc teoonj and €oftet|w?ndiii^y tinEed 
by ft fltw process whkh is iwt bcina tUvolaed until furEhcr paienis haw bccfi aranicd 
EflMic djea are s=uit lo gfrtie an over i)u ackJ dyia used by Tochnicafor. 

This priming system would not prove vary pmciicable for 
commercial work* and it is difficult to sec How such un claborau: 
processing sequence could have competed with Tcchnicoluj. 


CERTAtN Bnt'WSTUR PATENJ^ 


E.P. 2,4^i 



Iirewiier. R D. 

1911 

E.P, 2^465 . 




I9tl 

U,S.P, f.l4S.V6« 



^ 1 

mi 

RP. 3,435 

' T 


i* 

1914 

E,P*J.073 



. a- 

1911 

£.l>. lOO.Ofta 

i 


T. 

191^ 

XJ3.P. hm.m 




1410 

E.P. 130.001 




mt 

U.S.P. 



. . tl 

I4|« 

1.355 J33 



H 

1914 

y.SR 1339.005 



■ + 

ms 

U.S.P, ].4t0384 



. . 

1922 

U.S.F. 



.J. 

1935 

11.5.P. 1337324 



. . 4. 

19J$ 

US,P. 1.563.959 


. 

- - 1* 

1925 

U.S.P. 1352/477 



. r i* 

1930 


411 




COLOUR CINEhtATOnnA RHY 


1,214.940 

450.673 

Sec Brewiler, ?. D.^ 
Wfrf. Pk, , 16, No 


. MilLni, Hojrl, 

to Brcw-iicr Coip. 

- ^ Brewstfir, P. O. 1934 

* Three-ColDr Subtmclive CjftomtiloRmphy/^ Jinva, 
I iSoM. m\\ p. 49. 


Chlmicolur 

Fimdi pnMu tkvcIapcO by ihc Syiulk&i rfr ia Cinemafogroflite dts Cotikurs, 

romie4 in I9J], [F.P, 756,344. ek.^ 

Cii±yi)^rdf/cwi.—Threc-^obiir iiubtractive proMs$. 

Camera, —Bccim^ipliitcrp or 5uccc$5lve frami: R.G.B. negaiivc on otit 
nim or 35-iiiDi. jfiepuration negativcfi optically c.\tracteij Tcom l6-inm. 
rcvcml colour film such as Kodachroinc or Agfacolor. The beam- 
spUttcj- camera is sho^^n in Figs. 226 and 227, 

Normal miiGhincs equipped negister pirts^ There is a 
special Debrie printer made for doubie-eoated slock. 

Developed to low gamma and density. Doiibk^oatcd 
film dye-toned by mordaniliig. One side rocoated with gelatine. 
Sensilized^ with bichromaie and exposed to a positive, Exposed and 
therefore in solubilized gelatine rejects dye. This Is strict Jy m accordance 
With the technique of ihe Pil^ATVPE process of Leon Didkr (F.P. 
327,054—1003: U,S*P, 885,453—10OS; F,P. 7,557^1905). The third 
pnmmg js hence produced by difTerentha absorption of a dye applied 
lo the re-coaled surface. A protective varnish applied lo the finished 
product, 

Cettend kemnrks 

There Is oonslderable interest in France m thii process, the technique 
of which is based ujwjj a combitiation of nperafions in no respect novel 
m the history of the ari. What has been accontplished b largely the 
rwuii of a dckniiined effori lo make practicable operations which are 
ujwinlroUabie without specialized equipment and appamm.s. Work 
back to 1931, but in 1940 ihc Syndkai dc ia Ciii^miosrraphe Jes 
C&iiirurj wanL^ to re-open its research laboratories In Paris but they did 
authormaiion from theGennans^ who ordered them to close the 
abomtories, Neverthelessi the Camfr^ dc Pfndimrie Cm^maso- 
Ploquin persisted in supporting their research work 
and helped them as much as possible. But work was paralysed for luck 
of raw materials, but in spite of all tlie difficulties they succeeded in 
^mpteting a wdl-^uippcd feseanrh laboratory, whkh was vtry nearly 
discovered at the rime of the Normandy invasion. Immense difikultles 
'vere experienced with finance for tfie^iu^ efforts stnee Paris appears to 
^vc had plenty of charlatans trying to raise money for all sorts of 
colour pfttcesics. The process seems to owe a lot to M. Ttilengard whose 
cnthusU.^m carried the work on during the occupation, and technically 


SITBTRACTIVE PROCESSES 


to R. Valettc who a pypil of Leon Didler, the inventor of the 
Pinatype process. Didicr was an a3&odEt& of the greai Ducos du 
Hauron, so ihot that process can boast a sound ancestry. 

A prototype beam-splitter of the Technicolor type has been com¬ 
pleted. So far no work has appeared except aEiLmated cartoons photo¬ 
graphed by the famUiar succ^sive frame method on one film 

(Fig, 226). 

Low^density sihier prints are made on apposite sides of normal 
double-coated positive from the red and green sepanUion negatives. 
Mordanting foUows, The mordant has not been divulged. The state¬ 
ment has merely been made in published descriptions that senijiiomctric 
control is of viiaj iinportance and this is quite under^mndabte. Valetic 
has provided dyes having particularly suitable absorption spectra and 
fastness to Hght. Tbe nature of these is not revealed but they arc pre¬ 
sumably vanants of existing basic dyes. The mordanted BJm is dyed on 
a special machine wMch applies the dyes to the respective surfaces in 
succession, making use of capillarity principles (presumably by 
flotation). The sound track is a cyan dye Image. 

To obtain the third yellow prim Chimicotor is originoJ b making 
use of the principies of Pinniype, The filiti U accordingly given on one 
aide {probably the umgenta-toDcd side) a coating of gebrinc only* This 
issensiUzed with bichromate—probably a suitable mixture of pot^stum 
and ammonium bkhroctiatc. ITw printing is carried out with 
made from the blue filter negative upon tbe sensitbted gebtiiie employ¬ 
ing a very powerful source of ultra-violet such as a high-pressnirc 
compact source mercury discharge lamp (Fig* 223). Noedlcas to say ihc 
sensiri^tbrL operation will require cstiemcly accunilc conlrol of 
humidity and temperature. An btcresting pobt is that tbs dyes used 
for the first dyc^toning operation mtisi have unusually high fastness to 
light for bade dyes to withstand the mtense radio lion of ultra-vjobi to 
which they must be subjected in the exposure of the bichromated 
luyer* 


An mteresting review of ihc process was given in Ln Cin^mitto^aphk 
Ffart^aise* H76 {OcU 1946)* by A. P. Richard, from which the 
following schematic upertitiona] sequence i» derived: 

(. A. Direct phott,|raphv l\ PW on the same film. 

* ^ ' 15 primary records on 3 hlms. 

I from additive films such as 
' Dtifaycolor, from muJiitaytr 
B. Indirect Separation of 3 records - subtnictive Sluts such os 

I Kcdachrome, Agfacolor, Ge- 
I vacolor^ etc. 

2. Setisiiooictrk characteristics are deterntiued. 


3. Printing No. L—Prmtbg from 2 primary record negatives on 
double-coated fiim. 


40 


rOLOt-K ClNIfWATOCRAPHY 

4. D^lopment —- Washing-- MordantinR —- Washing- 

^ Washing-Diying—* C^JnlrnJ, 

j. Sensitizuig of one side of the doubl&costed flirt; —Drying 
fi. Punting No. 3.—Jrd image (Fig. 229). 

~ ‘ Washing ^ Drying Control (Fig. 

8. FinaJ Prpieclive vtirnishing. 

Brifcib Tricoldtir 

Duhiyrdiroine 

rMrstie b> Oufny-aifwncx Lid., London, HubIwuI,/ 

C7ojij7?t‘jrjoir.—Three-colour subtractive prinliDg process. 

Two- Or thn:re<o1our print u-n non-fi^ijsitized tnmkioits coniainini! 
^ubfti^iivc colour coupler^, involving f^n^itizing sepurutc 

printing, and single proce$sing. 

Ca^ierii ^— 

(tf) 32). Priam bcajn-spHlter embodying a 

prism block consisting of two 45' prisms cementctl together to form a 
cube one of the 45“ faces being coated with a partinlly rcncctiiis surface 
o gold. Tiu, prism divert part of the beam ongliiaiing from the lens 
to a film ptc at 90“ to the fens axis, ihe balanca of the be.<im passing 
through the pnsm to a gate in the normal position.' 

(6> Thref-srrip Negative Arrangemc/ii, BUpack records the diverted 
(rij., f^ecKd) beam. (Blue and md records.) Single film records the 
direct Ixam, (Green record.) The bi-pack consists of a n on-sensitized. 
hen« blui^iocQfding, from iitm, the emulsion surface of which is 
crated with a red filter excising green and blue light from the rear 
film which IS coaled with a highly red sensitive emulsion. 

m singte film bears a green seiiKtiive emulsion which is exposed 
^hmd a mmus blue (yellow) filler. This combination of films is known 

. rk supplied by Eastman Kodak to the special 

ttqutrcmciits of Diiraychrorae. 

(c) Su^tfsiw Ffame Negatiw. AJtemativdy to the ihree-stnp 
system for siatjc subject maticr, separation negatives me recorded on a 

A disc 

prying tlve fikeis rotate* m gear with the comcra drive each exposure 
bemgwvcredby aratouonof 120'. Eastman Background X2 geSereUv 
lued. E^urc IS balanced to yield a density of i-50 for thewhile 
step of n CTondurd chart. The •* white step " denatv should not 

»'0 Kt-ai. theih™ J|„„„c.rdi. 
To KhKvt Uoi Ihe lonmuKo of iht opoiioc li^, j, „ u„ 

® See /tuints Ade. Fit- £mf_ f Juap natjjk i-.,. *.*1 , 

Fiw^., 1^ iMay frp, 21^-21^ 1^- ^3-353; a\m 

414 


SUBTRACTtVIi 



expo&ure of ane or olhcr of ihe colour records reduced. GcneraJly it 
is the red which must be reduced by some 75% and Ihe green by sonte 
25-30%* This b accoiTiplbhed cither with fioutrul filters of density 0-60 
and 0-15 for the rod and gieea filters respectively, or the disc sectors can 
be ntitikcd proportioniiiclyp Jt is preferable to mask equally at either 
end of a sector raihw than to mask at one end only. The filters sire 
Chromes 60K (Blue); 609 {Grew); 657 (Red), 


fw. 2J3.—E>arajrchremc priniaric? mnd ctiramiticitifs of subirjiL'iire udml^duFc. 


(rf) ** Monopack It U feasible to use separation negatives derived 
from any reversal original coJoLir film such as Kodachrom^. Ansco 
Color, Agfucolor, Gevacolor* 

Frinting, —The blue^record negative of a separation sci h printed on to 
a positive (nDo-colour-scjisittzcd) emtibioii layer containing an itn- 
mobile yetlow colour fomter. The fatent image formed by the first 
printing operation b not immodblely developed, but, ijistcad* the film 
is re$easitized with positive craubion—thii lime containing an trampbik 
tnagenta coupler^ The mtigcnlBTormiog layer is printed behind the 
green-record neguLive. Neither of Ule iwo bicm images so far fortned is 
yet developed, and the film ts again sensitized with a positive entttlsion— 

41 ^ 


























COLOUR CtNEMATOORAPHY 

thu time cuntmniiif an iniiraibik cyan coupler. When the cy^ layer 
has been printed from the ltd record negative, the pack a ready for a 
idDgle colour development opemiion and the $ab«^nent removal of 
the three resulting metallic silver images (E.P. 608,507). 

A sound track is added by coating the tramparent track area with 
whatever type of positive emulsion may be required for the beisl sound 
quality. After ejiposiire, (he track is processed to a mctuUii: silver image 
In a tiormal manner, no protection of the picture area being necessary. 
Prifjectim.-^ N ormai, 

Pfocesshts,— Identical to Agfacolor posiiive. (See Agfacolor.) Namely, 



Ftn. 2je —Dufaydirenw Magetiia. S^pecrril Traiitmissioit. 


a developer, siich as dicthyl-p-phenyletie diamine hydrochloride, 
followed by wasJiing, hardening. bJcachinE for removal of silver, fisiog 
and washing. 

Qttieral Description—TY:^ process presen is a “ set-up ” very like 
Technicolor, namely, a beaoi-s^lur camera of generally similar design: 
a straightforward three-colour printing job by stuxessive printings all 
on otic side of the film base and all surface contact printed; and ii 
normal silver sound track. The credit for this remarkable achievement 
goes to Mr Jock Cool*. F.R.P.S., the well-known author of" Making 
Colour Prints,*' For once we have a process conceived and carried 
through 10 the commendjd stage by a man who before he began 
devekiping the process was master of the genera] subjeci of colour 
photography; whereas most processes are mUsbapen and geaeroily 
416 














































Fio, 22J,—Tli« Bnwiiicr roidtins-ininnr (nunofli, J93j. 


< nfib« t, *>«> 







Fio. 22fi^^in,JOTlof t»caii>ipI{ii«"ihrK-sir(p" ciimcm, 


FkJh 227,^Chltnicobr. 

Film jtBic 4Hd piiri cf adipiT. 


'Chimicolor Printing 
MBchine for I3fm cotiieiJ with 
hichromnihcciJ Bclalini^. 







fio. ChireKOlfif. 

Op[ia]| pnntcTi 














Fio. 232.--Duraydift]m Pram Throc-colofir Bcstm-^liucr for Tbro-Striji ” film, 
(Fomicrt]^ Bntiih Trwlour Proceuesn) 


<r#c^ w~ *1^ ' 








SUBTTtACTIVE PROCESSES 




Fit*. 23^, — DufjychroTne Vcttow. Spectml Tittatmwofi. 


parent and had olos^ to frvi^pccl furthermoro Lhe chUd to be gifted and 
c:xceptJi»nal. And so indeed it turned out lo be, 

CoDic always agreed with the writer entirely that (he right and proper 
20 417 


illcgiLimate offspring of doubtful parentage, (his time we know the 


^ 520 3G0 ^ 640 

Fhj- 235,—Dufayi;hiome C^ajL SpccindJTranitrtilsikm. 









































































COLOUR 

first (rtJCTfding) stage in 41 colour process is good sel of wpamtioit 
negatives, Coote has paid some aueniloA to stripping integral tripuckS: 
hut soon fouiifl that to ptifecl a new product or this type would mean 
prolonged research^ so that he decided to late the plunge and evolve a 
beam-splitter. Considciifig that Technicolor have always done their 
best to scare others away from this field, Coote was veiy bnive to go 
through the gate and chatlcfige: the T&it^ome creature within,. In this 
trial of strength he has proven himself a worthy opponent tind the 
champion must look to lus laurels (Fig. 232). 

At the time of writing the commercial espiDiutton of tfus process is 
limited to Gt. Britain^ bui mpid developments are bound to occur. 
Studio tests have proven the camera to be an dficient instrument and the 
printing proce^ yields a wide chromaticity nmge (Fig. 233). Table €1 
shows the posiuon of the Dufaychrome subtractive primaries on the 
chroma tfcity diagram, lllumiaanr C being used, and the additive 
primaries modubted by thescs Figs. 234-6 give the spectral trans¬ 
mission of the Dufaychrome subtructivn primaries. 


TaILE 62."DUFAYCHKjOMil SUBT^ACTIVB PfiJMARILS. 


i 

X. 

1 


Ydlw 1 

'4V0 

435 

Mjigcntj 2 

m . 

m 

Cyan 3 1 

1 ^*43 

m 

Red 4 

^704 

im 

Oncm 5 1 

1 -m 1 

64fi 

Bint 6 { 

1 -130 

02a 


I 


T 

X 

1 

^ /Wlf. 

% 

DanUoiffii 

Mti. 

F 

57-0 

1 

H 

37S 

2-1 

37 


14 7 1 

74 

432 

l'6J 

n 

643 

47 

76 

52ft 

OOJ 

EOO 

455 


The Dimniiig Culonr Jewess (1936) 

Coinem*—A bcam-sp9it(er wbs employed, the gates being side by 
lido. A panchromatic negative and a bipack were exposed through 
graduated filters, which were adjustable tn order to compensate for 
different lighting conditions daylight, itieandescenu^ or arcs. No 
details were published. 

PfiFfthts- Standard dotiblc-coaicd positive stock w'us used, the 
magenta and cyan Images on one side and tlw yellow on die 01 her* 

Feffmrkj,—Thc cyan printing negative was obtained on » sin^c iIIiUh 
T he bipack recorded blue and green tight. The magenta and blue- 
green images were obtained in a single layer of the double-coated 
positive. 


41S 








^UBTRATTIVt rS^OCES^FS 


The GaspifroJcif Proc^ 
fGupairornr fnc-. OiStroiiau.i 

C/fljjfiTffjrfm.—Tliree-colour sublr&ctive prcH^css. integral la>er type 
dinulsion^ incorpomting camp!ete dyes to be bleached in tidghbourliMd 
of dcYcloped silver during processing- So far avyilnble only as positive 
printing film requiring bluclc-sintt-i^hite EUlcmic^mtc pqsliives as 
printers, Belungs to ibe coiegory known ns iilver-dye-bie^cb processes 
Gasparcolorsviii fhc llrst 35^mm. integraJ layer tripleV 
itlmlkntm ti also as monoiHicli and mijliilaycr) to be used commercially. 
The credit for this htstorically important achievement belongs to Dt. 
BcJh Caspar, a Hungarian by birth, no^^ resident in the United States- 
Gasparcotor antedates by at least a year both Kodachrome and Agfa- 
color,, fmiu both of which it difftis fundamentally in its ckissifieatiort as 
a dyenkstrijeticsii process and not a dye-forming process - 
Iti J934 Gasparcolor Ltd. was formed in Great Britain, and with 
GaspurcoJor positive film stock coated by Ctvacri of Belgium a large 
number of very beauiifut release prints w^ere made. The Jaboraiory 
icclinique and general technical supervision were under the eonirol of 
I lie writer. It is imporuint to emphuiize that these were tlie firsl com¬ 
mercial monopack prinla because this honour ha^r been cLaimed cIk- 
where, They were furthermore the fir^t of such prims to be pmcftwsed 
in a siandard JS-mm. automatic prex^essing machine Installed in a 
eommercuil film hibomiory. Similarly, they can also claim to hnvt been 
ibc firsl i>f such prints to carry a normal siber sound track record, 
wlulat hiivirlg a pure dye picture image. 

Indeed. 11 seems that Gaspares position as an outstanding pioneer 
ilescrves more recognition than it has athsady rcceived, it has been 
entirely overlooked that in his U.S-P 2.B7l^6?^ irf. daim 15. page 
?, Mcond column, last paragrtiph^ &ee also E.P^ 416,566, page 6, line -^6) 
he di&closed the first colourles$^ wntcr-sulubic, non-diAusiDg, dyc- 
Ibnning substance with it convention date going biick to l>eocmber9, 
193 L befone l.G. Farben had started Jheir wwk on Agfacolor. 

I>uring the Second World Wur Caspar was domiciled in the U S,* cut 
pH from the research laboratory he had organized in Brussels, Ihis wtis 
looted by the Germans and a number of his sdentific staff imprisoTied or 
killed. Under adverse poudiUons he carried on his research in the U.S., 
where, receiving little encouragement from a motion pidure industry 
dominated by huge monopolies, he decided to devoie tiimiidf to the 
solution of the problem of still colour prints. An admirable material 
Wii^ mimufactured for Government use during the w'ur. It is probable 
that thissrtll print maicmt will shortly be generally av^rilohte. 

fifstiffy. — K. SctiinTKrs ** KuLftchromk *" (ftr/r. /mint. Phtn*, 52* 
1905. p. 60S) was almost ecrtainly the firsl monopack to he fully de- 
^ribed. A plate was to be coated with dyed emulsion layers. The top 
layer was ixi be dyed yellow and sensitive to blue li^t only. The middle 

419 


COLOUR ClKEMATDCflAl*ay 


layer was to be dyed cyan and sensitized to red, while the itingenia-dyed 
layer was to be placed at tbe Lowest Level and made sensitive to green. 
The negative after developmeiit was to Iw immefsed in hydrogen 
peroside, which, being decconposed by the developed silver, resulted in 
retea^ oxygen which dcstrojed the dyes. After removal of the silver a 
posi^ ima^ in full colour would remain. R. Neuhauss pointed out 
that it would in fact be nett to impossible to prevent bleaching of the dye 
in the non-image areas Jtunif., i9,1905, p. 239). Whether work- 
ahlc Or not, here is tile first suggestion for colouied image making by 
catalytic dye destruction. Christensen (U-S.P. 1,517,049 and E.P, 
133,034) tried to apply the dye-dbeharge methods used in textile phni' 
ing. But such reducing ageiiLs ■lv hydrosulphjtc or stannous chJoridc 
would aliiick lie dye in uowanted iUid ihere cDuld be no oerlaimy 

that the dye would be dcauoyed only in the pre^noc of fifiely divided 
silver (viz., at imiige points). Similarlyp G. P. J. Schweitzer (H.F. 
249^530) de$icoyed ihe dyes in the ihiec Juyer^ by a bleach eon^i^tiug of 
sodium bromale and suiphunc acid, tie ^ver acting upon the bromic 
acid to release riiiscent oxygtn^ which served to destroy the dye^ 

Caspar ;$<jJved the problem by discovering a group of reagents which 
have the property of attacking the dye only in the prc^nce of the silver. 
Friedman lias poiriled out that these, as a group^ all contain labile hydro¬ 
gen^ which can Lherefore form simple or complex silver salts, a coiiditlon 
that appears to be a r^uisite for the Caspar dye-bleach solution. Thus 
thiourea, thiocarbamide, guanadirtc, ihiodiglycohc add, etc., are all 
mctiiioncd ui Caspar paicnts, Tlicsc maEcnis he calls indifFereat 
solutions,’^ namely mdifretent to the dye s&avc in ihe presence of siU'cr^ 
thereby eliminating the u$e of strong reducing or oxidizing agents 
which Jus precursors had Ruined. Hius Caspar has achieved ihc only 
relmhle method of producing dye images iti a muliilftyer material other 
limn by the methods odginuting in ihc work of FiL:lKr Imcd upon 
colour dcvcSopnicn! or inclusion of cotour-forming subsLancci^ in ific 
cmulsioiL, as applied iit Kodachronte and Agfacolor or Ansco Color. 
C^par s method is histortcaJly more recent and is the only one per¬ 
mitting the mt of compicic dyes>, among them a considerable number of 
textile dyes aj3d practically ail types of aeo dyes. Thus Ga.^pior has theun^ 
doubted ]]d\^ntage of obtaining colours of high saturation and great 
fastness to light, in which properties tlie other processes are deficient^ 
Caspar claims the inestiinable advantage that since llio dye destruction h 
proportionate to the original silver imago, his colour image is a straight- 
liitc leproduction of the <iUer image. More reccmly Gaspar has dis- 
VrOVered iticans of speeding up the uciiou of the bleaching rcageitts by a 
cousidenibte range of catalysts, 

Gaspar'B pa ten ti cover a gmt many combinations whereby the layers 
may m pan or wholly be uitcotowtcd until ihe processing sta^ is reached. 
Tlie colouriesaj layers am be culoured diffusely as a stage of pioces^g 


SL'ilTItACTIVE PROCESSES 


and Thereaficr dye pro<lu*.‘^ by locni dye drainiclioiL The most 

proinising of these miilhods piropo^ ihe use of am dye forrning sub- 
stances, or azo couplers* These compotiuds would penmit the use of 
nontiaj lugh-spccd neptive emulsions* which can be developed by the 
usual lechiiid'^^ I® ^ fine-gmia, low‘gamma imagep so that high speed 
and excellent Utilndc can be obtained. After d£\'elopmcnt Uiese silver 
images ate transforroed by straight forward processing steps into muiS' 
parent dye images. 

In addition to the aJ!0 dye images* which have proved the most 
practicable, Caspar has developed a nuinbet of other alternatives. He 
first catbceivcd the principle, which has been developed by other in¬ 
ventors, of colouring alt three layers in a tnidtilayer male rial with one 
dye which wiis dncolorized and subsequently processed to another 
colour in any given layer. U.S.P. 1,956^1^^ grunted in 1934, and 
n.P. 369,660 WTis published in March 1932, The principle therein de¬ 
scribed was put lo good use in ihe earliest form of Xodaebrome. ^ Aho 
cncthods liave been described by Caspar for the use of vai dyes in the 
form of colourless and very fast reduction compounds^ the so-called 
leucchcstejns. Tliese patents date back to 1930. Little w^as done to 
develop this field owing to control of these compounds by the Geittuin 
dye trust tnomely^ LG- FarbcnL 

Cwtwra—h is essential to employ a camera equipped with pilot pin 
registration. Colour scpjiration negatives obtained with ihe aid of 
beam-splitting optical systems can be used, as well its colour Mparaiions 
mode from motiopacks (such as Kodathromc or Ansco Color). For 
cartoons it is usual to record the separations successively on one film, 
employing a title or trick camera equipped with a rotating disc currying 
Ihe fed, green* and blue fillers. From a negative so rnade every thjrd 
frame is selected by on optkul printer when making ihe pod live 
intermediaIcs froiti which the Ga^pur positive i$ printed^ 

Froj^ctio^i .—Frojectioit h normal, no change being required. 

/VlmJ iflL-,—^rd nitrate base for morion picture film is coaled 
with Lhree lytyei? of emulsion containing dyes which can be bleached by 
the action of a suitable reagent in proportion to ihe quantity of de* 
vetoped silver (Fig. 237). 

Whereas all the layers may be coated in superposition on lo itiff 
same ride of the supporL Gasparcolor film is double-coated* Lwo 
layers on one side* magente on lop and yellow beneath, ihe third 
cyan layer being on the other side. Each layer can be printed iri- 
dependemly of the other in The following manner: the magcnia layer is 
blue sensitive only* and it is printed with blue filtered light: the under¬ 
lying y^noiv layer is sdisitized to red liglil, bui as it is dyed yellow little 
Or no blue light can penetrate this emulsion* so that when the upper 
magcnla layer h printed with blue light the underlying byer is un- 
affecied thereby. Next, the ycUuw‘ layer is primed with red li^i, the 

421 


A*Sr 

jflW rWj/tf# 




of S^Sparcofit^ Fifm 

CT 1 ! I T n 


Ito 

At^ Jlypfrf 


iho s*/fy^t£}t 


*t w 


$ JHif 




^efdtr¥^ tftfXH/gh t^'chrVJT^tK 
ffM-a^P^ttW, C^tscfpr^]^ 



rawr >^yt^ / 




&a5fi^rcoUr f///p 



SrcM /7/c*f‘ /^itive 

m* , 

Fed F/JteaAdffjvE 



^ Source 


Sasj>^rcc^ ff/m 


irt 


: w/^ emd^fOM 

Mpiercohr ft/m 4[ftrr com/7/rt/o/r of/iitw 
prmtfjjgs. fyr/a j/ic«j ^epeesejai deve/oped fivVytrA. 



m 


n fliok 






GM3fMr^0fifr F//m 


After rtttr^Aod coei^^t 
Dmf k ^nas ftprtmt cJkutr ednired gwJktkje 


W=^ I 1 l ^'l^ Ai^f fWhn^j^ 


W'AreA npnr^ twiMtitted %Af 



A^.4k 

7j4^ Or/jpna/So^ect 
Flq. ?T7. TKc ClAiTuiwtff^ T^oc^ 




































































SUSTHACtJVfl PROCB^SES 


Upper layer recording nothitig. it should be noied that the upper laj«r 
being fnaggnm it will be Uansparent to the red light used for printing 
the yellow layer, while at the same lime no green light can penetrate it, 
tia colour being minus green (magenta), which is opaque to green tight. 



Fui. 2)^.^—Simultiuwnn printing uf boih *ak* of GosiwrtsQlor Him. 


On the other «ide of the film the cyan layer ia sensitive to blue light only, 
and being dyed blue it will be traniipafctU to these rays, whereas the 
blue light Will not affect the yellow layer lying on the other side of ibe 
film, and, as n't have lenjarked before, the yellow layer eicJndes blue 
light. Thus if will be cvidcni tliui the three layers can be independently 
printed with suttiibfc ihree^tour negati ves. 

The pnnnng operation is carried out on oomial contat'i siep*by-ilep 

4Z3 












COLOUR CIXCMATOCiRAREty 

printing machines, the only diflerencc between colour printing and black- 
and-white printing being that the film is printed ihitc times with ar- 
^npnate coloor filters berween tlw lighl-saurce and the film {Fig, 338 ). 
The speed of the respective emnlsion layers i$ compnnible to ordinary 
mouon fwnure posiUre film. Printing cannot be cunied out in red light, 
^ Tiijfly Ijglii. gre^rpi safe light biding 

As the ensuing processing sequence terminates in an iraage the reverse 
oJ ihccxposed and developed sUver, it is necessary to prim with positives 
me first Stage m the process is to make a set of three master positives, 
with whi^. of coitoe. any uumher of Gaspareotor prims can then be 
made. This stage of the process permits a very occunite control of 
coniras! should some modilkatioo of the character of the oriiunal 
negatives be desirable. 

^ complete, the film is now passed through the following 

baths; tt is ^vetoped, washed, fixed, washed, subjected to load dw 
dwsiriictrefi by the action of acid thiourea (in this hath the dye are 

presence of developed sUver). washed, 
bl^^hed (in this bath the meidUc silver is transfomted into silver 
enterrae in preparation for the total removal of the silver) At this 
^int the sound tract (now silver chtoride) is rapidly redevdoned, the 
devdoiwr being applied by a narrow wheel in sneh a manner that the 
sound track is alone redeveloped; then the iilm enters hypo, which 
^ves a I remaining tr^ of diver halide; finally, it is washed and 

redeveloped a sound record wUl be 

Dbtuined which is a pure dye 


GA&f.AkCXU,«ll TlMt-TAiSLE fUR PROCESSING 


Optmiamr 


Waih „ 

l^evefcpmcnt 

Wash 

Fl^ 

Dyo Biench 
Waih . 

Wash . 
Sound 

Wash , 




1 

2 

9 

U 


[3 

9 


M 1 

' 33 

9 1 

1 42 

3| 

47i 


2 

m 

. 

3 

51 


(t 

57i 

■ 

7 

m 



* Tttii wiiiilLl mu be itii ct^^vion pow ihat the 
uhk rexsiiun-unljEiiuny nlloy caibudcK 


photoiuh« tP*J7 n flvad- 


424 












SyOTMACTIVE **ftOCESSJS:S 


Guparcolor Proccs:aiiig 
Formulir 

DcTtloper 

Meial .. 

Sodtuni Suiiihilc (Anhyd-) 

Hydroquifionc .. 

Swiiim Cnrfaonale 
Potassium Brgiiiiidc 
Water to tnakc 
Time, 9 rnmmrA 
T^. 6S" F. 

OMnnna 2-2 



T2 ot, 
17 Ib. t3 w. 
51b, i 0(L 
11 IK 4m. 
2IK Hci- 
75 guJIoiis 


PbLitlvn 

SoSatn Metabi^li^tc 
Wilttf la iTuikc - * 
Tinjc. 9 minutm 


blK 

6i ot 

2 EoJIom 


Djt BEcadi 

ThtocoitKaiTiidc t + 

Fotwium ChrcfM Alum 
Uyitnx|iiiiioiie p. 

Sulphuric Acfd ,. 

Water to mote .. -* 

Timie;, llnumit^ 

Temp. F< 

Bkuch Etath 

Cup^Suiptiaie 
Sodium Chloride .. 

tiydcQchlonc Acid 
Water to moke .. .. 

Time, 54 minuiet 

Soumt Track Re^eloEKr 

hletol ■_ ■'■ *■■ 

Sodium Sulphate (Anhyd.) T. 

HydroqubKUie 

CiuAticSodu 

**NeJua" 

Detiria .. •- 

Water U> make .. 

Timr, i imuute 

(Ixathm (Stscund) 

Hypo .. 

FOtUAium Metubkiulphiic •* 
Water ID (xuUe «- - * > <■ 

Time, 6 minutes 


.. K7tb. KOI, 
„ .. IE IK Sm. 

7 IK 0OZ. 
.. 565 c,c. 
25sBll0it» 


25 IK 
.. IS IK 

p. 2S4 C.C. 

, * 35 iantuB 


p. 10 gm. 

.. lEOgm. 

,, TOiDii 

.. 50 cjc-(40% Solution^ 

... lOc^ 

„ SOOgntp 
p_ .. 400&C. 


6 tK 

b| oi, 
1 pillonc 


Any variation in the final colour gantma of the rtspcciive layers must 
be compensated by choice of such gaminas in the master positives that 
the product of Ute nspecth'c gammas shall be identical- 


425 







COLOUR CINEUAtUUHAlrHY 


UNITED STATES PATEJfTS ASSlONED 10 CHROMOGEN 
INCORPORATED OR BEIA CASPAR 


Rcttuou 21^13 fQrisiniil 
(,9S6.0i7—Apr.2J.J^34t 
I.95fi,t23—Apr, 24, )934 
I,9S5,344™1>«. 2J, >9W 
l.9S6,0M-Jdn. 1, 1935 
1.988.891—Jan- 22, 1935 
2.004,625—June ll. 1955 
2.020,775—Nov. 12, 19 J5 
ReiHue 2t,0^ (origtsal 
2.025.658—Doc. 14, 1935) 
2.038,379—JaiL 21. (936 
2,041,827—May 36.1936 
3,0+2,353—May 36.1936 
2,046,067—June 30, 1936 
3.049,005-July 28. 1946 
2,055,407—^1. 22 .1936 
3.062.301—Dec. 1, (936 
2,071,688—Feb. 23. 1937 
2.074,239—Mar. 16, >932 
2^5.190—Mir. 30^ 1937 
2/775.191-Mar. 30l (937 
2.080,041-May 11. 1937 
3.0S8,523-Jii!y 27. 1937 
2,107,605—Feb.», 1938 
3,119.323—May 31, 1938 
2,125,015—July 26. 1938 
3,132.154—Oct 4. 1938 
2.136,143—Nov. 8,1938 
^137,33e-Nov. 22,1938 
X155.S94-Apr. B! |9J9 
2.I66JM9—July It, 1939 

3.172.307— Sept. 5, 1939 

2.172.308— Sept- 5. 1939 
2.178.167—Oct, 3(, 1939 
3.(83,393—Dw. 12.1939 
3,I83.39+-Deev 12.1939 
2.I83J95- Dec. 12. 1939 
2,193.931—Mar. 19. 1940 
2207.63)—July 9. I(M0 
2.217.544—00, 8, (940 

2 217 899—OcL 15. (940 

2419.304— 00, 29. 1940 

1219.305- 0o, 29, 1940 
19.306- 00 . 29, 1940 

2.2J9.9S7—Oo, 29, 1940 
2JI9.98«-Ok3, 39. 19+0 
2J^.123- Nw. 5, 1940 
2J21.?92-Nm‘ 19. |9M 


3,231,793—Nov. 19, 1940 
2423,0C8-Nov. 26,1940 
3041,413—May 13, (941 
3035^463—Sept. 9, 1941 
2,258,755-00. 14, 194) 
Reissue 2238 (orieiABl 
2,270,118-Jan, 13,1942) 
3^7(,f76-J!ii. 27. 1942 
2,274, IST-Mat 3, (942 
2;278.9S+-Apf. 7. 1942 
2,279.309-^pi:. 14, 1942 
2481,149—Apr. 28, 1942 
2.281,281— Apr. 28. 1942 
3.283,361—May 19, 1942 
1JS6.843—SepL 29, 1942 
2,310,226-Fel(. 9, 1943 
2,J10.2I7-Fcb. 9, 1S43 
2J10J>28—Fob. 9. (943 
2J12,S43—Mar. 2. E943 
2,113,993—Mar. 16,1943 
2.31fi.7a2-Aj3i, 30, 1943 
2.3t6JS03-Apf. 10. (943 
2,3I7.1)M_Apr, 20, 1943 
17.369—Apr. 27, 1943 
2,1Je/)(77—May 4, 1943 
2,319,984—May 25. |!M3 
2,32Oj)0t3-May 25, 19^3 
3,32<U5fl—June ], 1943 
2421,195—June 8, 1943 
243IA92—OcL 12,1943 
3433.136 -Nov, 2, 154J 
2,336,560—Oca )4. 1943 
2.340,636-Feb. J. 1944 
2.341,034—Feix 8. 1944 
2.344,084—Mai'. 14. 1944 
2.345,193—Mar. 38. 1944 
2 , 347 , 1 19— Apr. 18. 1944 
2.348,7J5-M^ 16, 1»44 

2.3^.894—May 16. 1944 
Jatj £8, 194+ 
5*WS,T59—Aug. (944 

W57.5^SepL 5, 1944 
^ .S+I-Oct 31. 1944 
2461,956— Nov. 7, 1944 
2i367,9J6—Jue. 23. 194 $ 
30. 1945 
^,^.647—Feb, 6,1945 
2.387.754-.Ort, 30, 1945 


42b 


SUWTRACTlVE |*ftO€F.4S^S 


1HE EkSNCirAI- 

i7^,679 
395,718 
3517,159 
397,»70 
397 J8S 
197J92 
4O6,0L3 
40634 
40S3J 
40930 
40937 
41Z949 
417,950 
4J3,W 
415,040 
415,756 
416.566 
416.660 
416,666 
417.444 
417.585 
418,368 
41831 

419^310 

4214K 

421,727 

42433 

476.260 

428,t5fi 

430.991 

412.4M 


ENGLISH PATENTS OF DR IIEtA GASPAR 


43435 

500,09« 

434.f75 

303,330 

44t,4|J 

503.379 

441.983 

506.3ft5 

444.669 

507,tSJ 

445.806 

507.J52 

445.959 

5D7,2U 

446.2W 

507,357 

446,392 

507,418 

448,161 

507,4^5 

43iai6a5 

$JO,B34 

45S^ 

515.99B 

458.3CM 

5t«.Ba3 

464,852 

517.328 

468^508 

517,480 

468,509 

il7.551> 

472.644 

5IS.213 

472.981 

518.477 

478,735 

510.7WI 

480,854 


483,366 

520.529 

483.463 

K»,573 

483.464 

520,575 

485,552 

521.961 

488,093 

522,190 

490,451 

522.611 

491,856 

522,696 

492,672 

523v179 

492.7H 

523,507 

494341 

529.U7 

496J58 

529J79 

496,559 

498,4Al 

535,130 

560373 


llic S|i)«iidkotur Proces:s 

A thTicc^Joiir subtracuve process^ Worked in 1926. 

Cawjrrtf.—;No piibiisbcd account. ^ 

Prii^ting *—Cyan printing on ow side by iron toning The ydlow and 
irutganta ware printed, on the other side by * ‘dyed bichfomaw/^ Pro- 
iumafaly the stirface was twice coated with gelatine, sansiu^^ with 
bichromate, developed as a mlkt, and dyedt or the dyeing moy have 
been done by a process similar to Rnatype. 

Kndachrome^ 

i!E«rimiLn KeddJi CQiopQJiy» Rochester, N U^.AJ 
C/oiff^c^rrfn^i —lilted layer (tripack) ihrec^>3tour subiraclivc 
process. 

Ifitrikiiicsion ^—First introduced in 1935, this was the earliest of the 
iniegntt layer proccs^e^ to become commercially a\-ailable. The present 
matenaj provides colour photographs possessing high transparency. 
splendid colour mngie> and faithful reproduciion. In tiM form of 8-nini. 

* 11* dm b ibo«lacrirtlnn ^bichYolldws ti liir^y ttenral fToni ilie (niMiaiiions 
t»f Ensnraie Kwlnk^ by whcKc coorteiy it Inchided. 


427 


CatOUR CINEMATOGRAPHY 


iind l£fc-fitEn. rcvenial Ulxti it tuL^ beeotJic deserved!>■ poptiLar ^11 over llie 
i/v'orM- Jn the fornii of l6-mm, and 35-mm. film, Kodachrome li being 
employed increasingly as the original rceord for Technicolor 35-inm. 
posirive prints; separmlon nergatives mtiat llrsi be made, and 

from these the 35-nim. poaliive ii}atri.x imbibition films iire printed. 
Kodachromc film is abo frequently employed in ihe U.S. as an original 
record from which bhick-aiid-white release prints can be made by the 
duplicate negative release positive print method hi ijub^taudard labora¬ 
tories. Release printing on 16-tnm. Kodachrome stock is carried out 
on a large scale iri the U.S., the processing being completed at the 
Easinian laboralories. Processing of Kodachrome Is reserved to the 
manufaciurerSp no detailed formulx having been released for pubika- 
tion. Projecioi^ of special design are used to project 3 in. • 4 in. 
slides Ln Kodachromc fo r background project ion in the US, 

Cflrnerff,—No rm al. 

PrQjccli ^^ — No rmaJ , 

Priming.-*Normal, with anjtable colour grading. 

Cellulose buiyrate safeiy-film base coated with Uiree 
emulsion Inycrs separated with gelatine inierlayers. The scnsittzing of 
the emulsion layers is such as to give sepamtiou negatives recording 
S|^trul rc^ons substantially ideniical to those obtained with standard 
IrIcoJour ^ ratten filEcis, The top emulsion is blue sensiU^ne; below ihk 
in the first gelatine interlayer^ a yellow filter to cut out further penctm- 
tJOn of blue light; the middle emulsion is green senskized^ the second 
interlayer is ptnin the bottom emulsion fs ned sensitised and 

without green sensitivity^ The film base bears the tisual imtihalation 
backing. No colour couplers are incorporated in the Kodachrome 
crn^ion layers, the eouplinc agents being present with the developer, 
which yields dyes plus the developed silver (Fig. 23!^)_ 

Chtmhrr}' of Couptmg Devehperj.—Tkt general principle 

ofcolotirdciMclopmerit is that the dy'estnJTs forming irnagesare produced 
by the cOect of an oxidj^ng agent on a of a suitable devdoping 

agertt and coupJur, ami that the oxidiaitg agom may be die exposed 
stiver bft»nlde of a photographic etnubioiL One molecule of dye i$ 
produced for every 4 uioms of reduced silver. 

In soine insmws the developer may be the coupler. Thu i$ tnowi 
^ pnmary colour development,^ In other caseit this process li 
known secondary ** colour development.* (1) 


U the type in v^hkh tbe tMiCailon prtKiua 

JStfvHdpr Coh^ Oryrhp„v«t^Colf>iini images ajc obejinerf in the artsence 
cf a developer and s coloiir Muplw. In nmu ioiiaiue* «iv lumUtulol 

tn^y be lued u Uk devitoper XlL dyei thm 

or nzo^iJune 

42S 



BAW FfLM 


tOUPft ITOiT<VE 



SArtTf FILM 


aktikalatoh . 

dACHiNO 


^-YCiJjOW tfulACE 

,^ii ■ 

PMAGC 


Fic. ll^.^eciion. Kofkchrotne IIIfd. 











j 


I 


\ 


r 









I 



d 





SUSTRJVCTiVE 


As we have previowsJy rioted, RucUiJf Fischer (31 in 1912 discovered 
that paraphcnylenc diflioiTw in Ihc presence of an oxidkiQg agent will 
combine with certain derivatives of phenol to yield dyes of the irii|s> 
pherml or anne elass^ Cyan dyes are usually obtained by aromatic 
hydroxy-bodies, yellowy by aceioacclic ester derivatives, and msgentas 
by the use of heterocyclic rings such as pyrazolone or suhstitulcd aceto¬ 
nitriles. The oiddauon arises from the exposed silver bromide- An 
enormous amount of work has been lavished on this branch of chenustry 
during the Last ten yeiniH and the known couplers and developers are 
now very nuitiexoiis indeed» "Ihc fundamental reactions may be fepre- 
seated thus: 


H H 
tX 


H 

C= 


H 

C 


H,N-C 


C-NH, HvC 


^ N 


X. 


c=c c=c^ 

H H Br H H 

/?-PbenytcisMliai!iiiic-5-Sitvcr bromide i-Pbcrttil 
H H H H 

c—c oc 


Y:—N-c 


\ 


V 


li^N—c" 

H li H H 

Tn4<Huiitlnc (bttic d 5 «>“J-Silver 


'C=O4'Aa+bydt0brofn[c uckl 


Rtproducsii>n of Colours in Ptojecriott. —Diagram A [Fig. 240) 
show's how the film looks In cross-sccliou after earner^ exposure 
and first developmenl of the emulsion layers to negative iniage^. 
Diagtam B shows the appcamtice of the film after coupler development 
has been completed. In Diagram C tiK silver has- been temo^ed 
and white light from a projection lamp is transmitted thixsugh the dim 
to a screen^ giving an image- in the colours- of the origityil subject, 
A compltic understanding of the manner in which screen images 
in colour are secured with Kodachrome can best be achieve by 
tracing the passage of tight ihrou^ the dye Layers^ It is suggested 
that the reader fotlDw closely the right-hand side of the diagram while 
reading the following pamgrapb. 

While lighi (on the screen) is secured by the unoiKtrucicd passage 
of light from the projectof lamp to the screen. Rod light results when 
a my of white li^t is filtered by successive layers of magenrn and >oUow 
dye. The magenla layer absorbs groerr, tevitig only blue and redn 
The yellow layer ia turn absorbs bluct leaving only red^ To secure 
gwn light, the blue-green layer absorbs red, Icavii^ green and blue, 
The yellow layer then absorbs blue, and green light passex to the 


COLOUR CJS'RiilATOOItAPHY 


screeiL For !igh!, the blue-green layer iigim ^ubtmci^ led^ leaving 
blue and gieen. The magenca layer ihtm abjwjrh^ ihe leaving 
only blue. Jniemiedipiic colours and inhtures are secured by paniiil 
nbsorptioiis at each layer. Heavy dye deposiis in all ihw layer* 
subtrat^t hght of all cotounip resulting in a black ^rsera 
Pracemn^.—It was announced in December 1940 by Dt. Mcev {Jt 
that the Kodachrome processing procedure was no longer based upon 
iht controlled diffusion principle, hut had ndopEcd lire re-e.tfKisiirc of 
each tuyer *cpamiely pcrtnUiing its individnuJ colour dcvclopfncnL 
TItc wquence of openiiions might be ihai de^icribed in EP. 519^419 
t Addition to 50^^841)- The meihad be de^rrbed as diffcrenita) 
rc-exposure hy ^clecttve lrtycr-sen$iiuation. Retention of the ciriginni 
red scQsitking dtiritig processing is ru^c$s;iT>, and the front layer is 
scnskii^cd to red during pfoccising^ the filiii being ^^lectively sennitE:^ed 
and exposed Lu coloured light as |:mrt of Lite processing ^equencCi such 
that only one taver at y lime is 4iriecied+ The steps are- as follow si 


nSffj!. 




7 

?i 

Si 

Id 

II 


The oipctsed film I 4 dch-rlopcd lo a 
washed 

Re-capo^ Uirotigh ihc bjick ti? ^tronit red li^hi And tkveJorcd in a cyju 
coupler dewloner 
W^hed 

Tcjj iaytrr £1 lu leJ 13 ^ a aJcwly pcuctr^dnif^ {dy^ in 

tfbcerflt); Ihc UTue-arpcn image bcinw imuJiccted 
The le-sermlizcd film b then txptjsc^ fiom th«ffunt tu 4 uri^nv «d Nglit 
iibl wvciopctJ iu ii ^xlLow coupkr dcu'^Icifwr 

Nole; S and 6 m^y have been fubrJilulcd b* fc-cAiwurc cf Ihc 

rroni byisr 10 blu^ ij.RhE 
VY-aihtd 

w>»t6 Itflhi jfliLi tk^luped {ii 4 

WnJhcti 

^ilitr rcnwvcd. i.FaTnipr's miuLW. i 
W^fiihed iiiiti dried: 


Loss of scnwiiviiy in ihc Rrsi devefoper is restored bv addins 
a-napliibylnmirie tu the/»-plwnylenedbmine. Waodcring is prevented by 
wddiijg less ihjiH 1 -5 per cent, sodium or poi, pereWorate lo ihe various 
bains and wush. wafer, 

Sut^nces which are capable of prercrctitial absorption to i»nic*pow:d 
siJ^-^aluic would displace the wDsitimg dye and » devdopers niiist 
be free of such agents; funher, the developer should have no solvenl 
BCiton Oft the emulsions (notwithstanding the fact that diver solvent 
dcvdoper» are usually employed for reversals therefore sulphate must 
be avtnaed .ind sodium IbrmaJdehyde salphoiykie substitute Also 
43U 






OR to IN Al RERJiOOUCttON OF OHtOtHAl 




Di'^ILOf^D WECAT^yf AfTIR 
CAKlIITA 



tAV^RS OF triMtSlOW MJllK rRlATriiNiT 
IN ore-COURIER DtVElOREtS 



trie Sivvir a it^oMio hoia ah THtiEf 
lAr£R&. IEAVBNG COLO* f>*AO£S 
COwfOIEn OF OtfOl OtlAltH 


t t t t t r t 

Fflojcctron kght 


FIO- 240. ^fteprodkfi^iioii of coJoura by 


Kodachromc film. 

[FoTjJijf ;»* 


4JP 

















!■ Urn- 

i FHEtr Ei|i-ir 
i fliiki Ql‘4^tn 
iNi 

’I -G^liEinc kye#- 
i -Slue iBd 11*4 



4 Cni^iFiinji t^ll^ 

7 brtUlni*i| m^f#jnEX: 

nddiLir -ufTfiiiP 
> OiiiltJni^ colour 

l»rm«r 



RE & LICHT 
EXPOSUPCL 


CYAN 

QEVflOPM^Mt 


lil DEVELfSPf^t 


ELUt UCHT 
CXPOSUfit 


YELUlW 

t^fYEbOPMENt 


MiDOLE 

EXPOSURE- 


MACFNiK 

DCVELOPUEHT. 


SJiVTP 4 f tLTER 
SE-fACH- 



|-4a. ^4|\,^K<g<JAchr^ime film pnKc&%^riie 
ill ciith main prfxc&sing 


pnvWriif sttjUfltDt. A L'ryw^iion (sf the H)m It tluiwii 
bgi rin«a asid tiop ujiihs 4»e dmittelt ^ 


p. 411 



































SUBTRAt'TIVF PROCESSES 


tcniukinns musl nm have a hijiJi [odide-hmimtle raiio iv liberated 
soluble iodide during devclopntenl desen&itins iinesp<Ked grains in ihi' 
vicinity. A lirst developer may be: 


Mcml 

S^KUimi f(}rniijilij«h:y'(k mffilvmyldtr 

Siidiufn per^hhiiiUti 
Water 


^ ta JO itnv 
3 icf 10 sm. 
3 lo IS gm. 
5 giHi 

\ litre 


In the Technicolor Paient E,P. 556 + 6 Jl, which deals wkh a protective 
lacquer for $ound tmcicsp then? b an mteresdag description which is said 
to be typical of the procedure for developing K<«fcichmme (see Fig, 
241 A): 

"" Th£ miJiiopayk him illustrated in Fig. I comprises the imual tranv 
parent hacking A And three layers of emuLsion, comprising a red- 
sensitive layer R. a grecn-sensitivi: layer G, and a blue-sensitive byer B, 
While the respective layers may be exposed eiihcr succes^vely or 
simuLtaneousIy to ihe different color aspects of the beauip a typical 
printing method corn prises exposing the ih™ layers simultaneously by 
printing from another color developed film or other kind of color film, 
Either before or after the pictures are printed the sound track may be 
printed. After the sound track has been printed the sound track zone 
is ctivercd with a coating C of lacquer or varnish which is opaque, 
fiexihle, Itiis good adhesive quiiiily^ is impervious to processing liquids, 
fast drying and eusily redbsolvable. After the sound tiAck zone has been 
coated the gcbitin tlirou^out the picture zone may be hnrdcnedi Theu 
the picture eoniponent$ in the three layers are sirmiltaiieously developed 
to silver and, Jf the byers ha ve been exposed from the top* the developed 
rccof^ will appear in the upper strain of the respective layers- (ii 
printing from a positive- film these negative records wotdd of course he 
negative componcJiis, 

The first stage in the series of stages of color development cotusbts 
in exposing die remainder of the light-sensitive silver salt In the lower 
stratum of the red-sensitive layer R. By effecting this exposure with 
red light from the boTiam^ only the red-sen^sitive byer R h affected! 
and by excluding ilie red light from the sound ir^ck zone the red- 
xensitive bycr h not affected throughout tbU zone. Afkr the red- 
^nsittve byer has been fin^hed with red Hght the exposed silver ?iali m 
the lower stratum of the layer R is color developed in well-known 
maimer to produce a cyan coloted positive component in the b^i!r R. 
The upper bycr B is then fbsh^ from llic top with blue light, ihe light 
being excluded from the sound track by the aforesaid opaque coating C, 
after whicfi the exposed silver salt in the lower stratum of the B bycr is 
color developed to produce a yellow positive picture component. At 
this stage# no developable silver halide would remaio in either of the 
layers B and K if the previous developing processes iiad been carried 

45t 


COLOUR CtKEMArOGSAPHV 

It? compfctioit. However, ii luis been found ndvuntdgeoui lo uiie cynn 
pnd yellow developers wliich are too weak to cany (He development to 
completion. After the cyan and yellow positive contponenls have been 
developed as ofaresald it Is therefore preferable to subject the film to a 
suitable btack-and-white developer to convert the exposed silver halide 
remaining in byert B and R into stiver. 

The next step consists in color developing a magenta positive 
component in layer G, While this may be effected by first re^xposing 
the layer and^ then color developing the exposed silver halide, the 
magenta positive b preferably formed by adding a fogging agent w the 
rnageitta developer in well-kno wn manner, ihereby eliminating the step 
of re-exposing the G layer. 

“ After the three positive components have been color developed by 
the aforesaid revei^ method the film b first bleached to convert all the 
redu^d metallic silver into a compound which b soluble in the fixing 
S'^luTion thut bleacliEng^ Tlic fixing sol ii clop reinovK any 

unexposed silver halide remaiiiing in the picture zone, Inastnueh as the 
sound track ^ne is still covered by the aforesaid protective coating, the 
siiwr halide in the sound track zone is not removed in tJtis fixing step. 

The next step consists in removing the protective covering C by 
dissolution of any lacquer or varnish soJveat which docs not aflcci the 
picture zone. Inasmuch as the sound track zone is to be treated with 
aqueous solutions after the coating is removed and inasmuch as lacquer 
and varnish solvents are usually immiscible with water after the coating 
has been dissolved off Lbc film is Gmi washed with some liquid such as 
isopropyl alcohol which it mbcible both with ilie sobvnt and with 
water, after which the alcohol is removed in a baih of water. After the 
sound track zone bus been thoroughly washed the sound track is 
dewlopcd with an ordinary black-and-white developer. The imcxposed 
and unreduced silver haJidc is removed from the sound track rone 
wtb an ofdmaiy fixing solution. Thereafter the processing is completed 
by washing and drying the film. 

com p coraposi tions for the of o resaid coating and coating remover 


COXTINO 


Nitrpcdlulosc < |CX40 £0:3011^1 

Evlw Gum .. 

■« 

c 

□sbulyl {'hth^lciic . . 

DuijrJ Accldit 

Baiyl 

5 

- 12 
S 

a 

17 

. 2 

Amy] Acctalc 

Eibyj Al^ol 

Toluene 

C^bon Black 


432 





KODACHROM METHOO of CONTB^LED BlFFUSKJM 
OOMBlNEO WITH DYE DEVELOPMENT 



OejfCT 


UNEXPO^O T'LW 
p^ur semsjtlvE 


]]-BaSE 


EXFOStO FtLM 

REVEftSXL 

□evEUJf^tHT 



F(H5T COLW 

0£VELOPM£NT 

fiUJE 


^CONO COuOft 

OeV£l.OP^*ENT 

MAGENTA 


THkF^ GOlOR 

DEVELOPMENT 

tELLOW 


W " WHlt? 

T I- YELXOW 
A i- AED 
a ^ £R££IV 


Slue 

DV£ 





MACENT* 

DTE 


Fig. 241- 


(F«*rtirA. 4*31 































































































I'lfi. 241 A.— Technicolor I'witui h..|‘, . (See n. 431 1. 































































































































ACTIVE FROCESSE3 


CqAIINC- RtMOVliH 


Buiyl Acetat* 
Butyl Akfiho! 
Amyl 

Eihyl Alcohol 
ioSticufi 


30 

15 

[0 

10 

35 


Jn the old Kcidflchromc conlrollca diffusion lechititiuc all layers 
were colour developed cyan after reversal and ihe top two bleached in 
quuioneard potassium bromide. The bleached byers were redevc op^ 
magenta and the lop layer alonis bleached. This was hmlJy tkvdoped 

tq yellow (Fig. 241), _ 

l^nua, Kodaduome Duplicates.— Duplicates are avaiwhlc irom 
either lb-win. sUeni or sound Kodflchromc, Orders for silcat duplicates 
require no special preparation by the user. Iti the case of 'turn. 
Kodaebrome duplicates the sound record itihiniticd to ilic mami ai^ 
tuners for priming must be cither a 3S-mtn. or a I -nim Mtc ^ 
positive prim of high quality. When a sound track i$ ‘ , 

duplicating, the proper sianiog poiM on both the soundyack 
the le-mw. Kodachromc origiaal should be indiisitcd clearly and 
accurately to assure synehronizaliorL 

Tilling and Copying Service in I6-*nni. Kodachrorae. 
iff iVee,—Pictures, dniw-ings, waps, etc,, from l| x 24^ _ 

in. can be copied and supplied by the makers on l6-mm. Kodachroine 
Supplied, with a red background and a htack-aiid-yellow 
border. The order should specify whether the utlcs are for use wi^ 
an original or duplicate. These services are uvnliable only trow 
R-octLCslcr V 

Kudachrome Typ**-— Kodachromc is supplied for substandurd 
motion pictures in two lypest 

Kodachromc Film, Daylight Type ) ^-mm. and Ih-rnm. motion 
Kodachfomc Film, Type A I picture film. 

ITte colour balance of the Daylight Type ia adjusted to give the best 
readitioti of the subicci in bright vunligiii on n clear duy^hot an 
ilJtnnimitioii which h the equivalent of noon skylight, 

the colour-tempera tun of which is approsinmiely b.lW . 

Kodaebrome Type A Is colour balanced for use wit^ Fhoionood 
Lamp having an approsinwte coloar-ieitipeTalure of . ,4W A. _ 
Sluragc after Eaposorc before Praecssing under Irwpical CflinirtirtM. 
—When tropical packages are opened the film soon comes mio 
equilibrium with the air. If Iclt in the cantcm under humid condttionA 
it may detcriomte mpidJy, Therefore the picluiges shou^ not be 
opened until necessary, nnd the fllni should then be esp^d and sem 
for processing as quickly as possible. If subjected ‘f« 

film must be lesealed in tropical packing unless it ts first dried. 

2e 




C-|KF-MATO(>kANIV 


tf several dav, or ^viceks arc to ebpse before processing, Ihelilnj should 
w dried, rescaled in ihe original package^ and kepi as cool as possible. 
Drying lati be accomplisfied by placing the hint in a sealed can lo- 
geibcr with a deskeating agent such tu silica gei. nee dried by browning 
in im oven, or dried tea leaves. The drying agent should be separated 
from ihc film by a porous partition. Two Davw Silica Cel Air Dryers 
(the Davtson ChemicaJ CorpocatJon, Ballimorc, 3, Mntybnd, U,S.A.|, 
4 oz. of silica of iwo 2 lb* of drkd rioe or tea ktivies* ii^KI dn' 
ten rolls ofTfi-mia. K-odaebrome films 

Ftbeni 

Koilac^cme Filter (Wraitett No. l>.—Ab^rbs alini-vioJEi 
radiation of shorter wavdengtb than 3S0 mju Used with 
Daylight Type fUm for distant mountain views, hieh-atLitude 
ocfiat shots, etteriors under m overcast sky or in shade Hluini- 
noted by blue sky. Ko e)C{>osufe tncE^se required, 
wraiten No. 2A. — For still wanner colour rtnderlDg^ No cxiposure 
increase required. 

Wrauen No- 85.—For use of Kodnchroiiic Type A in daylight. 
The practice h not recommended by Kodak. For weenie shoti 
taken iit higli altitudes under hazy condiLion^, Type A Ghn 
wtih Wraticn A Filter gives somewhat better rendition of colour 
and dbtant objects^ than Kodachrome Dayltgfit Type even with 
tfic ha:^: filler^ Tliis filter absorbs ultni-violet* 

Wratten No* 80.—For exposure of Kodachrome Daytight Type by 
PhoioQood llluminaiion. Requires Four times the ej^posore 
b- i * ^ Plioioflood. Colour neuditton not so good* 

Kodrifc Pola-Scrceos. — Polaroid filters are used to darken blue 
sines and to subdue non^mctEiIlic refieotions. One stop greater 
than normal ci^posure required, 

UiUiiiiia 

Lam]^,^For with Type A. Mazda Photoflood Lamps Nos. 
J., 2i and R-2 are recommended. 


Data KoDACMRUMti Film, DAYUtjar Tyve 

i^merat Duplieiiita ,krt □%Bildbk fjom ]« mm. rever^a! origmuJi 


Mff/h antdahi^ Itt 5 - an^i 
I I fUm, 

StF. (OO.m rolls 
mfi. rati* 

400-rt. iQili 

254t rath 

iift,. llUi grtyj p i ^ 


i/st. 

All J6^i]in. <sknma% 

For mn^goituic oT Cfrfc^tCodflk StKeial 

ML Zei^TMovikon K 
IJ-tnm. sound pfclares 

jnoda^jlifn ta the 16 -min. widthb 
Mnfxznw C^-kodak 8 


SVtITRACTTVF 


RemttmnuM Afew 

WtJfWL 

ai=i 

d,S.A. 

Settiffftr 




8 


to 

4* 

TvatE^ .. 

i J 

i 

j 


• FldurTcr PlL^diihH9 


?hoiU>fiood .. 
H w Filter 
K«4^)c CC-33 
Kodak C023 


l*Krp^fe^ 

Pcniliu u$e Typo in Photoilood tiv^i 

\tmrba uitra^vi^, reducing diStiuit haue 
For xtst wTtb daylight numvwni lRin|k& 
wyie^flamc autmn tires 


OaMtkt Exptawt Tubk: SubstaiMJanf motion pmui* caiih;^ with ItHtim. unJ 
nifrmm. itodnd^ il W fiamo per mcowl ( A n»nil ihutier ipoed). 


iLigA/^. 

Basic 

Ewiwc 

M 

Averv^f 

ct£o 

Si^t.1. 1 

j 

CohMt}d 
Svtfiiis, 1 

Sick- 

LfeAcetf 

Bitek- 

Lifht^d 

Brighf, direct 
Minlight 

Wcakp hazy 
fuiip no di^ 
tract fhailowfr 

cast 

Sk> ovettasis 
cloudy* tmi 
bright 

Open 4hiuk cm 
bright dny 

m 1 

i f}5b 

1 

' ft* 

i 

/P-* 

1 

1 

Between 

aod/711 

BdwcenjiJi'^ 

Bndy?8 

lMw«eo //4 

j wid/?5'6 

^ Bctwocn/72-B 
! and //d 

i 

Bctwttn/?5-dl| 
and .fin ' 
Belwm //4 
and /J5-^ | 

1 

Between 

and/r4 

BctwMoTTt-^ 

Rtid/?3-8 

/T«* 

1 

1 

1 

1 

JJ56' 

1 

1 


> huMmim —I in «i«»w*Hn WMi Onm^ impMul .tadiW OfUi. W 

4ine fu-^l 


Data—Kodachrom^ Fjlm, Typb A 

GfFitra} i^rcpcrfirsi For me willi high^cffkiisncy umfstiflj lanTp* 
(Photoflood Typ«). 


RitfU avdilahtt ia 8- Mat 
t6-mnT. FUm. 

5(k lOO^ft roll* 
20D^rDU» 

50'n. fiutga/xOR 
50-ft. pac^ettfl 
tdd-,S^40CMt rcilU.. 
25^ftilh 


Vf€ 

r^-Koda^ aftd oflwr IS-mm. caimem 

SifiSSc'ffil^SSruSS M..ik,„ K 

ii|)tn Pndoelie nml Filmo 121 

iiryuriwtf perfotations for found rooJramt 

»’* in'! <»*'**' S:”™- ciiniera* ottOrnmodai- 

1^ - IC^jnun* HJ-krltha. 


^ iilm in tbe le^nun. wtdilw 

i ^Tine On^Kodnk 8 


ZJ*n, imiKaxiiKs 


435 





























COLOUR CtNEMArOGRArHV 


J^nMtirncitdpd Mfiew 
Jf/rfiHUfJ. 

tVejiim. | 


1 4^ A 

DoyUiht .. 

«* 1 

12- 

fO’ 

TuaBnen .. 

12 

2& 

16 


* ^^iEt kAdldumM Typo A filtw for OJflii^ 


fvrmit Eifpftsvfc hy 

Type A KCKkichrmiic Daylight 
Filtiit for duytiitlii 

or shieddcd-Jfoil PhotofLi^ bfnn< 
KOi^CC-4 .. _ 1,200 K. lumps 

Kodik CO 14 .. *H White i&uDre$ocnt tamps 


Photoflood Exposure Table—SDB^A^^DA fm Motion 
Picture Cameras 

With R'tnm, and L6^mtn^ Kodiu^notiie Tj™ A* of^cmiJnip at 16 rnM^n£s pci second 
Us ittond shullef spcodj. Liwag KodafSBctora iriih No. I Pboioflood lamps. 

of No. I 2 Al 9 ft, 2 M 61 ft Of 2 ftt4* ft. pf 2 at J ft* <W 

Phoioftocd lamps 3 lit 11 ft. or I at 7| ft. or 1 at Si ft. or 1 at 31 ft. 

and disunn from 4 it tl ft 4 al & ft. 4 a 1 6} ft. 4 at 41 ft. 

lampi tD 


or 


E>iaplirQ£ni openinij 
emd camem spopd 


/?I9 /iaTof/l’B /fi /7S-6 

Nomt];i} speed Normal speed Nortrcal speed Normal speed 
or/?2a or/if4 or^fi orj7S 

Hiltf speed Half speed Hair speed Half speed 


Kodac^me as OriEljial Material for Wack*aod-White Prlnls-^-Koda. 
chfumc iii mcTta^iugly iiacd in ihe U.S.a& un ongioBl focord material 
to be used in pTeference lo blnck'^nd-white IS-mni. negative. Ji has 
appreciably Io<wr contngsi than any fine-gniia reversal film, although 
from a production point of view its slowicr speed is unfortunate. 

Black-and^Wliitc I6-nuD. IntcriDcdiitle Negative from Ivodaclmime 
Original for making FioO'Crajo J6-iani. Release Prints,— This practice 
IS common in ihc U.S. W, H. onenhaitscr (4) has stated that for the 
intemiediate pattchromaiic fine-grain dupe negative Eastman stock 
520J » usually employed. The resolving power of this Glm is NO 

1 ! Sp-21 dev'chvper al a II6 conlroi gamnui of 

0-65 (development 6 minuies). In printing on rine-gralti Fnsfnian 
iwsiuvc 5302 a fiber is ukJ to limit tiie exposing light to wavelenglhs 
shorter than 5,000 A, This helps itt reduce contrast and improve 
denmtion and gram. 

The print riming turns out to be identical to that when making a 
Kod^cbTOitije dupucatc. 

K^achfome ftewlrinB Power—Kodachrome has a fesolving power 
of 75 lines per mm. 

Snund and Kodachrome Enaifaioo Positt«.-Tlic standard postrion 
436 









SLIBTRACTtVK rltOCJESSES 

in a l6-mm. projegtar is for the emulsion to face the ^m'en. 
tfr-mra. combincij KodacUromc (tuplicates Eibvc the non-siiimlurd 
emuliicn postlion—mmely, ihe emulsion races Uw liglu-soui«. . 
proioclinit tCodachromc duplicaics it is necessary to le-focusUie pic u«. 
Thus the sound optics should also be le-rocused* Only a fe'*' project or? 
possess means for accoitiplishing this. This silujjuon occurt only m 
ihc case of contact printing. 

Koduehroint Sound Track.—li is feiisible to print ex^llent Itoda- 
chrome sound duplicates at the same time as black-and-white prmis are 
being made, since Kodachrome sound duplicates are mode trom inc 
original and a positive blaclc-and-whiie sound track, while Uw Wacit- 
nnd-white prints are made from a black-and-white duplicate negatiw 
of Lhc citcture iind rroni the original nci^uve sound truck. ^ 

Wilting ItS-mm. Kodacliromc Dtipltcfltcs (ttdeiLW Pnntmg)-- 
Priniers used are fenemlly steinmntact type Imving the i^^ove^n 
claw within, a frame or two of the aperture. Light-changing is 
ihTOTJgh notches in the original. A flat gate is used to u™ *ip- 
which may be senous with a curved gate. Optical 
preferred. A rest duplicate is shipped to the Eastnuin Kodak Company 
at Rochester and prints are nut auihoriKcd until after the test pri^i« 
has been inspected and corrections made (5i. The tuning strip uKd fw 
printing Kodachrome duplicates can be used for making a black-and- 

while duplicaie negative, , 

During the war excellent KodflchronM! Ib-mm. prints w-ere iimdc 
in England by optical redueiiun froin 35-mm. DuFa^olor mas c 
prints made from the original 35-mm. Dufhycolor negative. 

Colour Cradiag of KodacJi runic Prints 

The problem of tcsimg for sceue-to-scenc colour balance and 
has been solved in the U.S.A. by a. new printer deve ope y _ 
Acme Film Laboratories Inc. (Fig- 242). It was specified dmt each 
filler combination must be rendered in a senes of densities. The com¬ 
plete strip provided by this apparatus is 55 frames in Icngr , r 
pack being kepi unchanged for eleven steps of densiiy» cac r ^ 
lights. The compicifid strip consists therefore of 5 hirer combniationh 

each in II densities. , . ... f„ 

The exposure aperture is divided inio s «ction> " ht 

bringing the filter combinations, or packs, into the pa i o ' 

To maintain tmifonitity of exposure over the whitic stop i re c. P® _ 
aperture and the film transport mechamsin is made spherical in sha^ 
with the lop segment permitting free iighi pii£sagc rom a cen r y 
positioned lamp Each of tire 5 sections of the cx^sum aperture « 
partitioned into tl suh-secUons Imviog the pensions of n l^mm. 
frame and each viiih its exposing light eonirolled by a rotating shutrer^ 

43? 


COLOOH i-rh-EiiitATDOItAPHV 


^lions jji Ibe colour baknco or speed of 
^c«nt emulsion bacches cun be detected and cotmclive uSaLre. 

«" I* .»d 



Front 
i Ctwtri 


Fm, 24Z 


Hfrfereflte 

ijAHV* *' A New Gdlor T«lcr for Ifi-nm* i™ 

.4»»r. CJtmnaioiirtnAfr, VtA. Diiplidlw.' 


43$ 
























































SllBTKACTIVt CKUCtWtlf 


T^ntatire bHiirticdons fot nukiiig 16-niiit< Kodflchminp DupHcatcs 
oit Kodadiroiiic DiqdicatiDK Filin Code 5265 

I. Pktun PriutftiH 

A. Cfrtgrat tnsiructions 

Kixlacbron» Duplicatlne Film Code 5265 wUl produre hifh- 


5 ,4 

q ^ a 

l%2 

































■M 

?d 

M 

S 














SUl/ vuif 

Fw, 24 }A«--TRuunih 1 iuw»-vvHvcl«i]^ dwiacurldo oT uiMxpo^ (lm«(oi»ed 
Ko^l^achroirK. Ko. S—KK 526S Duptidiin^ Wo* 6^EK $2B^Typc- A. 




qualUy duplicates froui 16 -nini, Kodachroftsc png|[ua!> wh^n ihc 
printing condiiions nrc properly ^electoJ, condtjlkd^ and tralanecd. 
High^q imlit y prinliug equipment is ncwssaiy to produce a stcadyr 
higb-defini^ioA picture. Both contitiuou^ nnd jntcimittcPi primers 

439 



















































































have been found satisfijcioiy, TIk voltage supplied to the prinitiui 
lamp must be descly conirollcd to avoid density and eolour balance 
JJtictuation and drift. If duplicates are to he timed, a light chfln|e 
tlml involves voltage changes cannot be used, as voltage changes on 
Inc printer Lamp produce changes in colour balance in addition to 
change in density I Fig, 243C). 

The lamp used for printing should produce sufScieni light at the 
aperture at a colour-temperatnie of approximately 2.900’ K. The 



3300 


3200 


i/ofts 


Ffo, 24JC. T>ptc*l ooloijr-<«n^tiint.V(ilt3-am|)«w daravnefistit» of v SOO-wu 11- 

iOS-vfll£ T-IOkfflip, 


I 

I mo 

I 

I? 2&0O 

h 

'I 

U 2SO0 


1709 


^ established by the use of an Eastman 
Colaur-Tempcmtute Meter, or data retaiing colour-letnperature to 
ciment obtained &om the lump manufaclurers of the particular 
^mp used. The lamp enrreut should then be adjusted by asultable rlieo* 
T' w re<l“iTcd colour-tempcnilure. A reliable ammeter 

should be provided to monitor the lump currant continuoinly during 
printing to det(xt any voltage changes or lump deterioration. ^ 

The choice of the type of tamp to be used will depend on llie tvpo of 
pmter and the design and efficiency of the optical iSb. The ligSK 
« the aperture must be suBkicnt to produce the desired^density 












































































SUBTHACTIVE PtHJC'FSSES 



Pic 2431X _ Soeclral tnowmissions of Eaatniiin ttiiniis-sreai <magoHia I c»ii^ iiveDiiifnc 

tlltew. CC-33-CC-J4^-CC-35, 


f'Hi, 



i43tL-Tnui*(iillian«-w*vdctMslh 

{cyjia) «o(tt(*enftHini filliw’. CC-43—CC-44— 


441 

















































































































































Cu'uloL^r tocrapuv 


stifled ^fovr under the lu^ading Detenninatioii of Approximate 
Mposum. A level atove the mUimttttn k deirubte, parlicubriy if 
Lining 15 10 be accomplished, and this extra light can be redue^ cither 
by the mechanical timing ct^uipment or by itetitral densitzeSi 

To seri'c as an exampic, a particular lighi-source and filter set-up 
ate as follows.^ 

I. Lfght-Soarce—A 7-S-ainp., JO-voli Photo-CcU Exciter Lamp, 
operating at a colour-teiiiiienitara of approxlnmtelv 2.900’ K. (ob- 
tamed at about 6'6 aiTtp.)^ 


f EC*. 



chjLfqeleri^kii uf rtiinuH Wuc 

(yeljtpw; mtm, CC-73^C-24—CC-1i5. 


2, Filters .— 

One WniLicii No. 2A Filter (gclaiine). 

Two heai-alworbing Aklo Glasses, each J-2 mm. thick. 

One ^tman Cblour-Componsaiing FUler CC-45 (gchitiiioj. 

^e Lastmaii Colour-Compensating Filter CC-44 {gelatine). 

One Eastman Colour-Compcniuiting FUtcr CC-34 fesJalirte}. 

Hhesc filters are available from the Eastman Kodak Company.] 

it simuld be noted tiuit the light-souroe and filter eo min nation 
specjtkd above is given only to ilJustrate a combmafion lliat has 
pven satisfactory results. Owning [o variations in optical systems 
(even (II pHnters of the same the above filter combi nation 

may ^ve to be changed to lit the individua! reqiiLnsmenis. To intro- 
ucc arthcr corrections ihe folloiving EostTnuii Colour-CompezisatinK 

^ CC-25p CC^33, CC^34, 

CC*31 CC“f4. CC^3, CC-45 h (Sec Figs. 243D-F) 

442 























































SLMTftAriiVF PKOCBSSF.S 


Thu ubU bcbi^ givia iHt; colour deiuitiesof ali ibus* filierB and a 
nciiU^l deii$Uy value to tw used for simulmocotis e^eposure correccioa. 
it will be acted that iltc- neutral ilensity yn]m of a filter h giinen 
(JTie-^fd or the colour value. This iv net spodik, bull Is included as 
n guide for ccnectios of ejc|>QfSUJc. 

Fitter — 


fi/ier No. 


Co^fiir Ormiiy. 


C023 

CC-24YcUow , 
CC -35 , • 

CC%33 

CC-34 

CC-35 

CC-43 

CC-MQfun 

CC'45 

^ pieces Akic or Catorcj: 

Gla.&^t wnn. 


CHM^mkuM Nile) 

.H 1 

0*22 i .. ^ ) 


012 ^ „ ) 

072 ( „ J 

(H)6fFiiiiim nfd) 
012 C M 
0211 

a-ie^mfam ted> 


AVtf/jnr/ 

£^j£nz^ei^r. 

0C(2 

^Oi 

D07 

U04 

00^7 

GOZ 

0^ 

007 

0 10 


Gelatine fi![crs should be tested and replaced at FCgulnr InfervaL^ 
to present colour change* caused by fading. 

4. Akh —Akio Glass is a a Ameri^n products A similar 
type of iimteiiat made m Great Britain is Oumcc's ON 20^ and this js 
equally suitable. 

AkIo Glass is an infm-red (h^t) absorbing glass. As a result (he 
tcmperaiufe of the glass will rise during operation unle^ free air 
circulation or an air stream h provided. The ^ass can be placed at 
any point between tlie ttght-source and the colour-^mpcnsating 
gelatine filters used for coIour-Eemperaiure correctiooH It is prefctubic 
to have the gelatine filters as far beyond the Akio Class as possible 
m the light sysicoL la this way the rise in temperature of ihc Akio 
Glass will 001 be transmitLed to the fiHerSi 


fnxiruciioiu for setting wp n New Prfftter n&t prerioufty fmhneed 
for Kodoehrome EtmtUion Code 5265. 

I. Oetermin^ffim of Approxioiate fs/WT/re. — 

(o) Bring printer lamp to proper colour-temperature and add 
colour-compensating filter* as ouiJIfied above under 

Fillers.” 

f6) Place additional ncotral density JHter or fitters rn the ex'- 
posing beam. Tliese are removed for exposure of ihe film 
to be duplicated, as explained later. 

(1) Gse I'2fi neutral densiiy for 5301 einulrion. 

(2) Use 0"70 neuiral density for 7J02 emtiision- 


443 



COtaiSK CEKE^ATOGftAl^ll^ 


(c) Ek|>£>sc ji short {ctv^h yf &i$tinari Cin^ Film (Code 

530J or 7302) in Ihc printer directly to tillered pniuing lighi 
with the Mposure time tht $;3mc *5 inicfided frtr duplicating 
printing. 

(i) 5301 (Ordinary l6-niin. Positive).—Develop u 

iiix-in. strip of ifie e^iposed 5J0t film in frah 0-76 
developer at 68' F. for 7 ininotes to a gumma of 
I "2, hi, wash, and dry* The density of tbi^ 5tjip should 
be 0554:0 15 to give properly exposed Kodachromc 
duplicates on 5265 for nonnal oftginals. If a higher 
density than 0-55 h obtained on the tlnst test, neuiml 
density in excess of the J'2 originally used should be 
added, or the mechanical Light-modulating control shotdd 
be changed until the 0^55 density on the tesl strip is 
obtained. If a density Lower than 0-55 La obtained 
(with M neutral density in the primer)^ then the iotensity 
of the light-source should be incncascd (cither by die 
removal of neutnd density, wriilch Is there in addition to 
the 1^2, by nuinirpubtion of the mechanical light control^ 
or by the use of a higher-wattage bmp, if ncce$sary) 
until 0-55 density on the Icsi strip is obtained, 
fii) 7352 Enmhhn (J6-mm. Flne-Cmin Release Positive). “ 
Dev-clop a 6-m. $tTip of the exposed 7302 film in fresh 
developer at 68' F, for 7 minutes to a gairmia 
of t'80, fix, wash, and dry. The density of this strip 
should be 0'55:i_0 ]5 to give properly exposed Kodu- 
chrorne duplicaies on 5265 emuhion for normal originals. 
The intensity of the light-source should be lowered or 
increased, if necessary, to obtain this density in the 
manner its explained above for the 5301 emulsion. 

2. Tesfs fiif Colouf Bor/ufici- and Kxp^su/e.^Ai the exposure bvel 
used to obtain the density of 0-55iO-15 on Code 5301* remove the 
I'20 neutml density (O lQ ncuiral density for Code 7302J front the beam 
and expo$« a series of colour and exposure variations on Code 5265 
film, using a normally exposed original for duphenting. 

A suggested set of colour variations is as foUowst 

(u) Filter cornhlnation and exposure as above, 

(6) Cx^ndiiion (a)—CC-45. 

(c) Condition (o)—CC-45- 
{ft) Condition (o)—CC-34. 

(e) Condition f£i>-CC-54. 

(/) Conditioji (u) — CC-44— CC-M. 

(g) Condition (n) — CC-44—CC-34, 


Sl/0THACTlVg PROCESSES 


The test shciiZd theD be sent m for processing. 

J. of Prinifng Cotiditwf^ for Final Cotowr 

Baki/tr^4f ami Expomre .—When the processed te^t has been rettirned, 
it should be complied to tbe ongioiili. and the variation which most 
nearly matches the origiiial should be chosen. If this is still not exactly 
conect for colouri It should be corrected on another test as follows: 


Cofiftu- Trndeirry 
ftJ Wfrr^ied, 


Method ef Conwriim, 


L Too js«cn 
2 . Too rfiit 
Too b]m 


4. Toci numattd ,,, 

5 . Too Wu^-giCeTi 
^ Too yellow 


liKrca^ mimifl irsen 

tnenrax nUrms teti * ^ 

Dcert^fnc nTuius k«*ei and niinus red* or if ow cnoo^ 
minus green fulU HfUniiA red Ut printer for ihh-i lUiJd 
minus blue 

£>cereiW miiiiu green Of minifl rod imd miims 
blue 

Docreax mrfiu^ tod 

Increax uriiiu^ fed (tnd uiiiiiii sroen 


This procedure is ittlendcd for properly exposed origiimls only and 
should give reasonably close results witfi a few tests. 


IL Sound Friridfig^ 

A. Cenem/ itmmcfiom 

Both Variable density and variable area sound tracks can bo printed 
Oft l6-mni. Kodachromc eiiher by contact printing I “I optical 
printing or by opiicnl reduction printing from 35-mnL. U ts neccssory 
to prim from a suitable bluck-and-white print rather than front Lhe 
negativcF It is also satisfactory to print from a dir^i playback typ® 
of positive—that is* a positive made diroctly in the recorder for such 
purpose. 

The printing machine used should have uniform muiion tind unifoEtn 
aperture illumination * Ho partlealar filters are rccommcndedp ordinary 
iimgsien light being couridertd satisfactory- Tlic umounL of li^l 
required for printing sound on 5265 emubiun b approjdmoiely eight 
times the light tc^^t used on the same printing equipment when ex¬ 
posing rcgitlar poritiii'e type 530L assuminE that lhe sound track 
printing positive has about the same density as the negative used for 
the 5301 work. 

The amount of light for priming the Kodachromc dupli^tmg 
emutsion 5265 would be approximuiely Twice that tequired for printing 
7302 emulsion. 

The correct printing level shuiild be arrived at by sending printed 
sa m pics of track in for processing, A listening test for quality and vol ume 
h sarisfactory. 


445 


COLOUR Cl^^MATOGfetAPnt 


The contiol dcojsides and gEinma^ of the various hlsck-and-wbitc 
steps prior to the Qjial Kodachrome prmt are important factor^ 
in the quality and fre^Jom frcini distortion of the final fesxtli. The 
following data have been decermlrted eKperiHicnially from a taJi^e 
ran of lesis^ but it should be conSEdered as a guide mlher than as a 
definite basis for all work. Cross*modulation and latcrmodnlatiQn 
studies iPc necommeaded to establish scnsitometric oonirols for any 
particular set of conditions. 


VAniABLE DfiNsnry ITungstew Exposi?jitF> 


OHgimii Utnaffvt. 

Friftiinf Poti^ht, 

FUm, 

Densfii. 


film. ' 

1 

1 

Grnmtvt^* 

1357 

IHQ-O^SS 

035-l>5a 

t30U530U 

0-70-^73 

2-2 




or 






1302, 7302 

thTO-O^VS 

1 ’? 

3357 

0‘40-0'55 

0 J5-t>50 

5301 

070-075 

23 




or 






7301 

07tM>73 

2^iA 


* Tturt in enmM 


Varjabu Area (Ui.THA-VjoijrT Expo^m) 


Orlxifmi N^lpitivr. 





fiim. 

Bfrtsiiy. 


Hhit. 

Drfsni/* 

1 Gamma-* 

1357 

19-2-2 

2'2-13 

iJOt. 

5Mt, 

or 

1302, 

7302 

2^ (35 firm.) 

(10 cnm.) 

20 (35 Dun.) 
15-1^ 

(L6 mm.) 

2-2 

22 

28 

t'S 

53ST 

1^2 

lr2-15 

3301 

or 

7102 

I5^b6 

(10 mtiL) 

(t6imfL> 

21 

in 

5372 

2-3Sr-l^St 

2^1! 

7302 

lS-I-6 

(Itimm,) 

2'8 


^ Ty^ [|b cbBlidl f TodindutTlf 4mdn ^ btiM b«w. 

440 





































SrBTR ACTIVE EftOrpsSFS 


C. Oirt^Ci Prmrttfg Fositiv^' W<trk 

The dcn&ilit^ ond gamrrms suggested a* p guide for direct recorded 
printing positive work appeof below: 

VARiABLt ARtA (ULTttA-VlOLKr EXIHlSURf) 

Film. ffi/fliffw. 

5,172 I-25*-1 45* 2-^ I d 

^ KickaHu dtttiiljf ofniu* bw. 

Kiidachraine t^-jum. 4<i Uic Drigoifij Record for Ttiebnieulqr 
J5-nim. Kekastfs 

The following dewribes tlie procedure originated by Del Frazier, 
of the Warner Brothers Studios, for using camerii equipment and 
Kodachrome filto in the production of short subject fej^iiiros to be 
released lu standard 35-inm, Techmcolor prints. 

Tile Sp^diilr equipped with 15-mni-. 25'niin.^ md SO-mm. 

lenses, has $cr\cd every purpose required and has not been fgund 
Lacking in any rc^pecL A large field professional viewfinder has 
been added to the left side of iht C3Watra» giving roore speed and 
accimicy of operation and eliminating horizotual pamilax. 

A normal camera speed of 24 frames per second is used when 
recording sound in synchroniain wilh the photography. A speed 
of 32 frames per second is used for photographiiig sport action shots 
to be presenicd with opumiion. For slow molion or shots of prolonged 
interests such as fast swimmings diving* and golf action^ etc-, a Bell & 
Howell i»peed camera operating at I2S frntBes per second h used. 
A third camera is cafried as a cover for action while reloading nuiga- 
zincs—an EasLmiin Model K eafnera with a iS-rnm. Bxcd»focus lens 
carried in a eonventent side pocket. Pnacautions should be taken id 
ielectiag grciup cameras with regard to the relaiion between sprocket 
hol^ and fmjne lines, which should be held to close tolcranees so 
us to avoid frame sJuTi when splicing imd during subsequent projection. 

A slurdy tripod should be used whenever possible, but in many 
instances work am be oceomplishcd without one, giving more freedom 
nf action. This is especially true in shots close to ihc ground or taken 
from tree-tops, or perhaps from a step-ladder. Scenes taker! from 
fast*min'ing cars or motor-boats can be complelcd in the length of 
lime it would take to faitcti down a bulky 35-nim. camera, II ul then 
again one must be very caTcAjlt, always holding the camera lirmly 
against I he body and brealhlng very lightly. 

.As in all other operations pertaining to the photography of Ki-mm. 
pictimK, attentjon must be given to exposure, for the reason 
that an under- or over-exposure shifts the colour of the scene. In 

447 


COLOUR CENEMATOCiR^PilV 

adOilion. it Is possible itial slight loss in rcnditioa might occur in 
the Technicolor print sx$ com paired lo ihe ongiiuil KotlachrotnCi 
but lius is negligible ina&Tnucti as an audience is not in a position lo 
make a direct comparison^ A Weston reading of B is us^ in most 
insuinccs, but wherever there is ti great perceniugc oP deep colours, 
blue sky. or heavy shado^ii, a slight overexposifi^ (Wesioii 6) gives 
more laUtude iti mnking separaiions. 

An imponant lesson learned is not to work with the l6-inrti. 
film immediately after processing. When the soft-surfaced cftmlsion 
is enlarged to 35-miii. size and then enlarged furtlier to Ltic size of a 
theatre screen, all the scrstches and finger marks become sadly obvious. 

The principal adv^iagcs of editing a 16-nmi. ftlin enJarged to 35-nini, 
black-and-white are^ first, the original ICodachromo needs no handling 
other than that retjuired in printing the JS-mm, negative and in culling 
to match the 35-nim. black-and-white pilot print. Second, the editor 
can work much faster, and with the same confidence its in ^fiolar 
35-mm. production; the projection of his work can be s«n in any 
available viewing room. To cut the original Kodachrontc in the orilio- 
doK manner would entail endless splicing trembles, and the required 
handling of ihe film would niin its value for reproduefion. 

The enlargement of iJie l6-mm, Kodachrome to 35-mm. black- 
and-white i$ siccomplislied in a specially const ruoied optical printer 
in which a Bell Sc. Howell movement is niodified lo take the Ifi^min 
film, and the aperture is opened on the cdge-numbcrcd side lo include 
tlie full edge figures. The iituigc is projected Llirough ^ 3-m. copying 
lens to the modified aperture of a Mitchell catneru which gives a picturic 
size of approjcimately O-fiOO x 0-825 in+* comparable to the sound- 
film projector aperture. The edge-numbers arc apprOAiraately in the 
position of the normal sound-track* and, of coiir^e, arc not proj^ted. 
'Fhc I tanovia-iype AH-4 luencuty sodium lamp is u^ed as a printing 
light, and the JS-mm. neguiive ts produced on Eastman Background 
X negaii>ie stock and developed Lo a pinma of O-fi. Subsequent 
prints are remarkably free from grainme^ and possess ^ very high 
fidelity to the original Rcklachrome picturriSH hitving been mistaken, 
at umes^ for original black-and-white productions, 

Kodachrocne Backgrouiid Prolection Slides far Professional 
35^11101, .M(»tion Pietiin; PtihIucIjoii 

According to B. H. Thompson (Ifi). rCKtarch engineer of Panimtiunt 
Pictures liic., Hollywood, the technique of frausifcTTing a Kodaclirome 
image-carrying emiiision from the film to a bntern-platc is as follows; 

With the adoption of the high-iiucnsity arc systern used in sierc- 
opticon miichines in the rnmion picture industry for background pro¬ 
jection purposes, the use of slraighl Kodachromc was rendered hn- 

44® 


SLBTftACTTVE 


possible- U was aJso Impracucable lo use Rodiachromc ccmcnled 
to a single piece or lanicm-sUde glass. .4s ifii: demand for natuml- 
coloux, suU-background iiansparcQc> platen ifltrreased:* an early solution 
lo the problem was urgently needed. After an inspection of the plates 
exposed to the heal of the light system in the siereoplkoiu was 
found that the principal difficulty was being encountered noi in the 
breiikdowti of ihe Kodachmme craulsion, bui in the disinurgniuon 
of the acetate butyraie film base. The elimination of this plastic 
therefore was imperative.^ After lengthy itjseanchp including IciLs and 
varying processes^ ihe foilowtng procedure was adopted as a standard. 

Place a dean loiitern^slitle plate inUi position on a. special plate 
holder. Next, place the Kodachrome. previously cut lo size, emdsion 
side dow'ii+ upon the lantem-siidc and affix one edge of the Rodachroiiit.’ 
to the plate holder with the use of imitspareni Sooich tope. Then fold 
the Kodachromc back, using the Scotch tape as a hinge, and wilh the 
use of a medicine dropper pkee a bead of previously prepared 5 per 
cent, water solution gelatine on the lanLem-slide at the edge where 
the Kodachrome has been attached to the plate holder. Starling wlwsrc 
cement has twn applied^ and with the use of either a sqitecgcc of n 
roller, press the Kodaehrovtir down upon the gkss„ maintaining a 
bead of cement at all limes as the taminotioii is completed over the 
entire plate area. No gricat pressure is required in this procedure, but a 
steady dmg of the squeegoe or the roller b neoesfiory, Rcnwvo the 
lantern'-shde glass from the plate holder and proceed to the second 
5lep of the transfer, 

With the use of a weak solution of onimonia and w^xtr^ dampen 
the gelatine backing of the Koduchromc and allow lo stand for severai 
mmute^. Then wilh ilic use of a razor blade scrape aU the gelatine 
backing from the plasuc base. During this stage ilie film—that is, 
the acetate butyrate film base—may be damaged, but this will he 
reinoved later it w^ill not afiect the finished article. After all gelatine 
has been removed^ pkoe the lamem slide in a Petri dkb partially filled 
with memhol cellusolve acetate, allow lo sinnd for appfoxinmiely 

4 mmuiEii^ remavc. shake off die excess, and allow lo stand for onnUicr 
JO minulM. 

With the aid of a razor blade under one comer, lift off the swollen 
plastic. It will be found that the plastic has sufficieitt strength and will 
separate rTom the emulstan readily, if the plastic film ts too tender, 
allow it to mnd uniii strength has rctnmed. This will range from 

5 to 20 minutes^ After the b^se has been removed, take a small piece of 

cotton, welt saturated with nwnihol odlusolve acetate, and swab the 
surface of the Kodaehrome emulsion to remove oil excess pbslic* 
This may require five or stx clean applications, or until ibe surface is 
perfectly smooiJi and The plate b then ready for use in the 

stereoptlcoQ. 

2f 


449 


COLOUR C1N£MATDG&AFKY 


Another way to rffmovc the acetate butymtc filiH ba^e* which wa$ 
standard bcrofc the adoption of the meothot ceUusoive solvcntt 

the use of aoclonCi The procedure up lo ihc lime of the immcTBion 
of the plate in menthol ccliui»ohe acetate ts ilte same, hul at that 
point the plate b placed in a desiccator and ado wed to stand for 
approximately 24 hours^ or until the Kodachromo emulsian layer 
b dry- The plate is then removed from the desiccator and placed in a 
Petri dish containing ai^ctonci and with the use of a catncr&-lmjr brush 
the film base U dissolved by gentle agitation. Several applications ot 
dean acetone arc used to ensure ihe complete removal of the acetate 
butyrate plastic. No furlhef ireatitlent to tlie plate is required for its use. 


Certain Eastman Kodak Multilayer Patents 


L-P. 327,714 

E-P. 454,632 

EP, 496.196 

EP.»3,V52 

E_P, 333,902 

E-P, 455.128 

E,P, 496.345 

E.P, m»J+ 

E.P. i5e^m 

tP456J79 

E_P. 498,869 

E.P. SW.SI3 

tp. m,m 

E,P. 4S«,664 

E.P. 498.800 

E.P. 503.»16 

E.P 176,795 

E.P, 430.6<i5 

E-P. 490.071 

E.P. 50M*7 

E-P 427,472 

EF 462J40 

E.P. 49S.S74 

EJ*. 503, 

E.P. 427.516 

E.F. 467,614 

E.P. 498,875 

E.P. 503.919 

427,517 

E,F. 46^^60 

E.P. 499J 85 

E.P. SO3.820 

E,P. 427^11 

E.F. 474J53 

E,P. 500,716 

E.P. 3<W,«21 

ELP. 427.519 

EP. 475.W 

E.P, 500Jit 

E.P. 30).>2l 

E,P.4274:aj 

£P. 475,706 

E P. 500.7 IS 

E.P. 503.*23 

E P. 437,520 

E.P. 477.524 

EP. 500.719 

E.P. 5(r3.«24 

^P. 440.tl32 

F-.F. 

E.P. 500,720 

E-P 503.525 

E,P. 44O.0S9 

EP 410,934 

E-P. 500,721 

E.P. »3,826 

E.F. 441.325 

EP. 470.942 

E.P* 500,793 

E.P.50J.837 

E,P, 444,m 

£P. 470.9ti3 

E.P, 500.794 

EP. 503.«5 

E.P. 446,234 

EP* 478.984 

E-P. 500.795 

EP. 501,030 

E-P *46.752 

EP. 478,985 

E.P. m796 

E-P, 503.040 

EJ*. 447.092 

EPt 478,986 

E.P. 500,826 

E-P, 303,0*1 

E.P. 447,748 

EP. 478,989 

E.P,501,tM)0 


E.P. 45 L699 

E.P. 470^ 

E.F. ^1,001 


E.P. 453.213 

E-P* 478.991 

EP. soi.ooa 


E.P 454.490 

E.P, 409.105 

E-P- 501,003 


E.F. 454,499 

E-F. 491.592 

E.P. 501.010 



Referenees 

Brii^ C1935;)i ^75- 

/oufw. SsJT. No. 1 tJtiljr p 6 S. 

f^lnfjrjoJii^rapk (London) (Aog. 1+ I9.J5>* p. 32. 

Jflum. of Ais<Kv* 3 llinw l!>55L pp. 1R2*6 h 

tiifftmiimtai PAflL (Muy 1935). pp^ 16, IT# 30. 

Mitviemak^rJt ^Miy 1935)* 197-2301 22 L 

TULL, A. G..Note^ oil ilu Otemuitfy of Cokhir Dc\clopiPCnl,*Vflfi'/. J4MttPj|. Pk&K 
W mUh PP 627, W. 

Pisriivii. R.. And Sir&Ai$T, H-, The FatmcitJipfi of DyetlufTt by DaWliIoo bj 
Meatui ^ Exposed Stiver HatlOir/* Pto. Ko^k p. 20, 


4 ^ 


SUBTRACTIVE FRQCE^SES 

Mbs. Dk. C E- K.. - Kotlacobr - 11 .I C««mankation Na S3I 

Kodak RcaciiTCh LAiioraiOfic*. Afrar, Phoh^ 36 (m-l, P- ® ^ . 

OfrEN*Ui«ii, w. H-, Jr, " Not« on H*Aj»p^MWipf F^nm. Film to 16 -iiim. 
Motion PictiOM." Jotifit’ A**"- Mot. Pie. •«» 

" The Jfi-mm. Cortimen^ Film Labonitoty, JiWtt. Soc. Mot> tA¥‘i 

sJi'? iT. -'Sao-"(.K”**™ ■^??r."'SS, 'r 

ProjeC!oi^,*Vo"m-^ >f|.N* 2 

TtHwis^- H.. ■■ K«tflCtiifln« Trnnsr^. - JiMfn. Soc. Mol. Plr. &pf., 4i. t*. 

CAub, 1944>, p. 95. 

HoMCi-E-A^ Brp A'y/r, PP- ^ 

" Kodacolor," Srif, Joum. vf PAp/,. W ltlM2l. p. M- jjfM*y tWi 

FjmiomaK, J.S.,** MDJwpciiiit Pracrtsss,” JtoJtfif.Sw. Mot.Fk. tnj..4Sl?.l*y 

p. 271. 

HJ»/ofyo/QJtirPAoftp«rt^p% (|W*>.P‘ _ 3 

OxsTTit h M- "■ Kodak CohMir ptiotogfaplij'i J^um. t o ^ ^ 

hJ^^L D.. -md GOPO^SXV. L.. " "n« Koda^i«i« 

(^Jmiaioipapby in Natural Coloura." Jiwf Mot. For. Eos.. S Uuly 

1935>, p. 65, 


The Technicolor ProcesJ 

tTechnicolor Motion PLiura Coiporoiimi. U S A.- Twhnicolor Uraitnl. Utndon, 
liingtaniip 

IntfcducUan.— Lons afi" the colour film has been snpcftcdetJ by 
some wonderful electronic device the miigic word TecMNicoioR will 
survive. Novclisti write of sunsets in gorgeous technicolor, and 
fashion iowmaJs report a tout ensemble a5“ gown in monochtome and 
hat in technicolor/’ Indeed Dr. Herbert KpJmos and his 
enriched the language on that day in Boston when they tuvcnted^ tin. 
great name, honouring their glma mater the Massa^it^ti* InsUtute o 
Technology, in so doing. To day a colour lita is aXecbmcol^ film, as 
far BS the press is coneerntd, no iiiJiiicT what the process rmiy . 

This famous process owes more to engineers ilinn to cbemis^ seeing 
that to work it successfully nothing new to photography had to 
all its dements were ready to hand, nothing new had to be invented 
that was not mechanical, or that was more than refinement upon exiiiing 
practice. Its sponsors were faced with innumernWe problems, wim or 
great complexity, but in nearly every caw pr<ws‘on enpneenng ^ 
vided the answer. Why was this? Because the Him was pouted not by 
the acUon of light upon a seosiiive substance but by the mechanical 
transfer of dye from a matrix in relief—a true type of pnmmg. 

Dr. Kalmus and his co-workers. D. F. Comstock. W. a.' ftestcott. 
L, T, Ttobnd and others, bejan their adventure by succombiug to the 
seductions of optics in the form of the additive process, but they very 

4S1 


COLOUR C^^fEM^TOQRAPHY 

soon rfaliped Xhtir trwt and rdegaied their re^sTcring pfo|ection lens 
to the museum, where the devices of oibcfs ^^'ho have trodden this 
primrose paih idso properly belong. Al this stage they must have 
considered many alternatives. They must have reviewed the whole 
history of colour photography and having made only one other fulse 
Sian, ixi which they attempted, with tittle suocc^s, to cement together a 
pair of d>vd reliefs^ they resuscitated the inventions of L, Warneket who 
dLscovericd the wash-ofT relief process (IBSI) and E* Edwards* an 
Englishman, who inveated “ Hydrotype ” or Imbibition priotins 
(1S75), and henceforward nc^tr diverged from the path they had 
chosen. How well they chose the next few yea^ were destined to prove, 
yci at dial time (l^27*2fi) imhihidon can hardly have seemed promising 
wlten the micToscopic dimensions of the dne frame are considered^ for 
U must have seemed certain that there would be present die dercci of 
unsharp copiours due to kterul dtifiBion or bleeding'' of the dye* 
a fault peculiar to tmbibitian which had invambly been experienced. 

Before describing in any detail the icctuitquc of this process ii is 
helpful to analyse the complex of problems for which solutions had to 
be found. These may be classified thus ;— 

{a) Means for obtaining accurately regktereil reparation negatives, 
cither for two-colour or three-colour analysis. 

(b) Means for tnakbig positive relief matrices from the separalion 

negitivi;^. 

(c) Discovery of siii table dyes for imHhmon, 

{d) Mcan^ for mechonicady registering a sttccession of m^ifrix filuas 
to she film dmined to bear the combine dyc-lfansfcr image^^^ 

(c) Means for printing a sliver sound irttek including, if rc^uiredt a 
silver key picture image. 

{f} Dcierminaiioii of chemical fomiulx and optimum physical andl 
chemical condldonsw 

Technicolor is &m\ but o/ir only^ successful solution of this very 
complex problem. Jn the existing slate of knowledge oilier equally 
successful solutions could Iiavc been devised. Why was ihis. not 
attempted? The answer is that compeiing investigators were efrectually 
scared away by rumours as to the mngnilude of the task and thcsi^tc of 
the investment neces-sury. Nobody dar^ fo tackle ihe job again. Yet 
there was nothing to forbid others from scaling the same peak by 
itriother route.. However, unce the original adventurers had got to the 
lop of the mountain they remained in imlitary posis^sssion. And there 
on the summit they still arc, iriumphaatty in possession not of un¬ 
available paietiU, but of an equally uiiassaitalrte " know-how. 

The early essays in the additive process liad built up a hackgrotmd 
of experierLoe in the design of beam-splitters which predisposed ihe$e 
men to the adopiiou of a spccbl camera in pteFtfence to bipack; at this 
452 


SlrBTRACTlVE 


pcrioii only t^vcj-colour wa!& tmder coiisidcraiion. Once again ihoar 
dcbl lo early pioneers must be aefcitoi^^lcdged since tbe system they 
adopted had been mvented years before by an Englishman. J* W. 
Bennetio (18^7). This inventor de^ieribes ihe present ihree-itrip :irrange' 
meiit, naroely two films face to face in one focal plane and a single tUm 
in a f^al plane ai nght angled provided by a reflector ai 45^ to the o?U5 
of the objective lens. The reflector is a prism blKk co nitsting of two 45 
prisms ceinented together to form a cabe, one of ibc 4S face^ 
coated with a p(anblly reflecting surface of metal (aluminium, gold, 

jjilver, etc.), ^ru 

Once imbibition had been chosen as die met bod of prittiinE ^ucrc 
were a number of akernative^ The technique of^' Finarype " was well 
ItnowtL Thb inwnlion of ibc Ffencbnmn, Leon Didicr, in 1®3. liad 
been dev^cloped by the Gcimaas, and had been shown to be capable 
of making fairly good dyc-tniiisfer prints (F*P* 337iD54 1903, cu.)* 

U wa^ always diffkult to get clean whites because the mastirr is not a 
rdief at aU but a surface of gelatine varying in hardness, and the 
hardened areas took up the dyes which had an affinity for hardened 
gcLatine and the unhardened areas were wasbwi free of dye. Then there 
was the possibiUiy of using bichromated gelatine* the exposed^areas of 
which arc hardened by the action of ultra-violet light, a reliel bci^ 
easily produced by exposing through die support and washing away the 
unhordened gelatine in warm water (as in the** carbon pro<xss)- But 
exposure is lengthy and requires powerful sources of ultra-violet lighi. 
Of the various idternaiivcs^^ that invented by L. Warnckc (1881) seemed 
to fulfil most of the requirements, in which advantage is taken of Ihe 
tanning action of the desifloper pyro. Indeed the tirsi Technicolor 
forniuIcC cited in the Troland patent PEP- -04,034) in 1922 differ 
negligibly from Warneke. Thereafter rcflncnicnts seek retention of the 
Lhirmrst steps of ihc relicfp the preservation of detail and the control of 
contrasL Front this period onwards surely much of the credit belongs 
Lo Eastman Kodak, who from ihe beginning made the ntutrix Bini for 
the Technicolor organization f The matefinl closely rescnibled the 
Jos-Pe film which hud been since 1916 popular in Germany for making 
paper prints by ihe dye-ttansfer process^ uiiilidng pyfo-Utnaed wash-oti 
relief films made in accordance with the patents of G. Koppmann 

(D.R,R 309,19^-1916* ciiM* . i. 

But the heart of the Technicolor set-up " lay not in these pnolfr 
graphic problems, which had been largely solved in advance, hut m 
mastering the prodi^ous difficully of bruiging three reliefs successively 
into contact with the image-bctiring film at ideniicpfly the same point. 
fltud here wc cun appreciate the irtturvdlous liccuracy ot film perforation 
since Only bv means of these perforutions uould this form o^ printing 
have become possible. To Bell and Howell goe^ the credit for predsion 
perforation- 


453 


CULOUK ClKEMATOOGtXPiiV 

Tht should pay particular attenuou to iha pattuis of the 

\3. Corporatjon of Cambrid^, Mossacliuiiclts. Quite obviously this 
firm has played an important pari in the history of TechniooloyT as 
witne^ key patents such as E.Fk 4S7^941 dealing with the imbibition 
amchine. 


£ 

M 



IP 




2 *1- 

E t 

2 I ;■ js- 

« ^ 5l-- 

a^sj 






5^ h|s§ 



Z S 

Ci 

s5k»? 

Svt £ ^ 

§lsg:-=. 


^ w 


t t- 






a 

z 

^e3 

C ■ 

|0 

^ . 


“*'3 

^5 


BS^ 

l< 

tft,: 


r 

*? ^ 

iTUh 

S| 


ul'' 





454 







SUftTRACnVE PROCESSES 


Technicolor Ls thus the famous descendant of n mo»i resp^table 
Eficestry, The story of its birth and origin generally begins with the 
youihfii! partnership of three undergraduates of the Massachusetts 
Institute of Technotogyi Dr* Herbert Kalmus, Daniel Frost Comatoefc 
and W* A. Westcotf- They gave us;— 

1. A beam-splitter camera* (Thtee-^ip Negatives.) 

2. A gelatine wash-off relief. (Matrices.) 

3. D>e-transfer printing. (Imbibition.) 

But to give credit where credit is due^ these three items were the vc- 
incamation of Ideas Qrst conceived respectively by: — 

L J. W* Bennsao, 189?. (First gemi-dialyte camera.) 

2. L. Wamcke. ISSI* (Wash-off reliefe by tanning developer^ 

3. E- Edwards, 1575. (Dye transfer printing or " hydroiype,’") 

These uns the indubitable ancestors of Tcchhicolor but at present ihcy 
seem to occupy rather obscune niches in our motion-picture Hall of 
Fame. 


Brief Histor)' 

Fniinded by Kalnnis. Comstock, and Wesicoii. Consulting Eiviiitieers, Bc»ic>n* 
Muss.. UJIK, 


Fjm Laboratory 
i9Wmi 


Firrt prodiKiion 


Camera 

Piojcc{k)ii 


A iTilJwiiy cUi ct^uipped wJifa cbeniidil lnbortirory^ darkroom^ 
fire-proof taffes. power plant end oBkes. Serrises fneludsd 
xnsUJdzt^ ptrfonUinai processing ncffadvt roiulitio ntfd 
air^ cwimittiiUofi of film and making conlitil itK^a^orementi 
and Lcsts. 

" The Gulf Between wlih Gfa« P.inniJnU arid Kibi Wekti. 
It Wit financed by Tcdmk»lor 

Single lem. Prism Divider, of af mrmai dimctl- 

tiom (vjjL, Silent frame). 

Double tiperiLire with IHteis Adjuitmem of regiiter 

with Bias wedge Special aro and jirt^ectkin optical 
lystcm. 

KnJtitwi wTitra, ' I decided that VAsh speda! alhschmmli m 
the ptwjecloff loqtitrad an operaiof who was a cuol^ 
bci^^en a cotleee prarcssoi aiui an acfolsU 


1918 

1919-1921 

1921 


Dr. Leonard T. Troland rMienied rimdumsital rnonopaak 
daiim. 

Prows ttiteinpted of cemmihtB |Wln of dyed gebtine lelkfk 
’ OririmJ bemo-spllttcr tued for the negative fecoidt. 

Pilot Planl built ki BTt5oklinc Avenue, Boitoo* 


455 








COtauM Q\UKHAlQG¥iA»HY 


1922 

TcchnicpUit produ^ “ Toll of ihe Sa ” (M(gito>. Iti- 
sufBdenl Liboratory capacity pmcotod prinu from beins 
ifclivciTd onlil foltowm^ year* J} ixnu a foot. 

Producm declared Z ctm limit. 

1923 

Nevo pIstfiT tfteted in Bceioo. Capadiy 1.000,000 It cncnthJy^ 
Smiill taboratary unit fooiiited iu HaHywqotL fanunoujil 
made WamkE^fS of Cbc WuicIuihL.*' Olte himdred and 
Kvcnly-lKie made al \5 tents per fool. 

1924 

nm Blflct Pirate.^ being ttmcoied poln of relief ainw^ 
trouble WHS cxpciiimcai in projection (Cupping]!. 

i92t 

Up to this da^c ^2.500,DDn bad been ^nt. Twctvic two- 
rcckns v^-ae tftnetioned for rrodiEiioti by Tedtni^lbr* 

nii 

The rjnbibflpoo process odopted 

Two-cokKir unbibitkm with silver iraclc. Wnmer-a produced 
fiirst iUI-mlkio^ Todidcolpr piduie " On With ^ Show,'* 

1929 

HoUMd-ood plain capacity doubled. 

im 

CouifTict} for 3b fc^tuitidcngilL Twclw miHiim foet of 
negaitve rcrtiured and 60^000,000 feel of potilh'C. 
Technicolor icppropriuied 1.000.000 dDdsrr for plaJii^ equip¬ 
ment and leseaT^. 

mt 

Seriuiu clfccu felt of depression. 1,200 ernt^oym dropped 
230, 

miAm 

FUat three^Uip bcan^iplittcr enmon RMTtpkled imi thresc- 
cokiur imbibition perfected, WaIi Disney mude Rowen 

1 unil Treea^" ihe Rnu thrcc-colPiir prod^niutv Exclusiti'e 
three year «m(tnu:i signed with DiHsey. Basic pHcs fiw 
prints S Dtola pex fooL Merian Cooper siiul John Bay 
Whitney iimtoud La Cueankcha," tint thite-componcol 
studki job. ClosinE wqueom nt^ for ** The House ^ 
ftolhschikl'' and ’’ Kkl Millicim.'' 

l9J5*l9i6 

** Bedty Sharp rd^ised by Pioncef Pkturcs. Fim femum 
thtict-palovir prodiKtim. Walter Wanger's " Trail of the 
Lormomc Pine ** with uxteribn followed Plain now 
maiinf 2,750.000 fiset of pfmua fnunih. 

“ Win^ of the WornTng,** 5rsl fuium produced tn Engtand 
with Ra> Rcnnnhan aa Dimdor uf PhiyEOgiaphy. Pro¬ 
cessed m the Kdtywood pitsm. 

193« 

Tcduiivolof' Limiicd formed to toudd Bririsb tabotaiory at 
Wesl Dmylao. By ihb dale lome 23 ctttnm had been 
built, costinir 12^,000 otelL 

(9J7 

Di^> made hit ftm artoon leamne^ '* Snow While and ihe 
Seven 







ll^ ■oiU’feiji 1^ Lp/- I 


hKi. 144.—The fechniBgfor beani^littcr'* ihf«»-«rip” lamea 


i ^ 45^> 













Klu, lUA. -Tljc Tcchnboior biaiii>»p[ii(er" fhtet^irip camem— side view. 


-iJT) 




SlUITRACTlVE ?ROCiSSE5 



pmther bbomioty eJiieiBiDfU opened in IlnUywood. 

IM2 

Mcmopufk (Kftiadirane icodilied) taed for fir^ lime for the 
czuerion only iri u mujor sniifio ptodiicsiat}, M.G.M.'s 

1 Corns Hocnt““ 

l!»44 

Monopoek first used fox n full firanue in Skh Ccniuirj-Fox 
prodoclion ThimderiiCBd," 


Tedinkobr 4klii^cred [65,027.291 tiset of pothivB pmil. 
covering J3 Aircocon and S Britj^h tcaiiirai in addiilon lo 
brye mimbcn of ditat subjects 

1449 

1.000.000 frti jirocesscd per day. 


Cf(miJi£mhn.-~Snbts&Qi\\'Q ihtociks. Two- ot ihrecHColour dyt- 
transfer printing by succi^isive imbibilions Frccn wo$h-off gelatine rielicf 
ititttriccs. RegbUnsUon cfTccucd by travelling pin-teU- Film base- is 
coated on one side witb a positive emulsion wiiich is used for prinJiiig 
the sound trsxk, picture key, and frame surrounds. The dyes are 
transferred subsequent to the completion of the silver print. 

Ccmiera. —Beam-splitter incorporating a prism block consisitng of 
iwo 45" prisms cemenied togeiher to form a cube, one of the 45“ taccs 
being coated with a partially fcflectmg sutfacc of gold- The prism di'iWts 
part of the beam originating from the leoi to a gale at 90"^ to the lens 
axls^ the babnoc of the beam passing through the prism to a gale in the 
normal position (.E.P, 393,339. E.P. 492*673) (Fig, 244A), 

{tt) Three-strip FUm AmmgeinenK —Bipack records the diverted heani. 
Single film records the direct beam.^ The bipiick consists of a blue* 
recording front film, the cmutsioti surface of which is coated with u 
red filter excluding green ^tiid blue light Pnom the tear film* whkh being 
coated with si rod senutive emulsion records ned light only. The single 
film bears n green sensitive emulsion- This bipack atid single film^ 
known as*^ ThfiC^Strip Is inanufucEured by Eastman Kodak. 

C^) Successive frimie Negative. —■Atiernaiively to I he thnec-^trip sys^ 
leni, separation ticgatlvcs may be recorded on a single film ifi the form of 
sacccssivt sets of htae, ted. and green filler records. Since each projec¬ 
tion positive frame requires three suoresdveEy exposed negatives, lime 
and space paiullax must probihit the photography by this method of 
moving subject matter. The method is ihcrefare employed for the 
photography of^lill subject matier such as animated drawings, tUJea, 
or iriclt riLm& of any dc^Tiption. 

(f) “ Mottapack,' — lise is ako made of a muliOJiyer colour film made 
by Eastman Kodak, which is probably very rimilar, if not identical, to 
Kodachrome. From this positive colour film (sec Kodachrome) either 
I6-mm. or 35-mm. separaiiuii negatives are extracted by opticiil 

457 






COLOUR ClSEMATOORAfHT 

printing technique. From these separation negatives po^tive printing 
relief maUices be printed by a suitable skipping opUcal printer.* 
Fmjectiofi. —NonuaL Samd Track .—Normal* siivei. 

Tecknicc^tar Lenses ^—These were fnlJy described by H. W. LcCk 
formerJy of Taylor, Taylor Sl Hobson Ltd., in Naiurc^ by iJie kind 
permission of the editor of which the foUoViing section U reprintecL 
In colour photography it U necessary to analyse ihc light reflected 
by coloured objects in to at least three specird regions which, where 
there are three only* may be lermed red* green* and blue tcapectividy. 
This h done by mean$ of colour Bhers which transnik definite portions 
of the spectrum and absorb the rest; the three ncgatis'cs arc produced 
cither snoccssivtly or sirntdiancously. In cinematography the negatives 
mtist^ of course, be made simultuneously unless the rate of movement 
of the film is increased threefold* to which there ara grave objections. 
Tlie three negaii^^ may be made simulraneonsly by means of thr^ 
lenses; this results in colour parallax^ and the three iittages will never 
exactly superpose. Alierauiively, the beam of Dght issuing from a 
single objective must be divided. This division truiy be made by meaiu 
of superposed hlEers, the componeniB of white light being successively 
subiractj^ and acting on scnsili^d hlms superposed. The objeetton^ 
to this are that the films and fillers mu$l be very thin if the composiLft 
tripack and filter film is not to be loo thicks and thni each layer 
of eoiulsion produces a certain amount of scatterings so that the suc¬ 
cessive images are more and more diffused. Other methods of dividing 
the beam are by successive reflections from ihin^ partly reflecting and 
partly transmitting films, which may be eilhcf isolated filius of collodion 
or films of Sliver on glass surfaces. The siU'cr may be Ln the form of 
toully reflecting films panly covering the surfaces on which th^ are 
deposited^ a method not without objection* since the areas of fdm must 
be small if there b not to be diFTerentialion between different parts of 
the light beams; alternatively* the silver films may be so thin as both to 
reflect and iransmil. The Technicolor process ts^ optically speaking, 
a combination of two processes suggested above, Ott\f scmWeRccimg 
memIJic film on the diagonBl plane of a glass cube is combined witli a 
bipack, to which the objections of Ihc tripaek do not altogcihcr apply, 
as the two sensitive Blms can be placed in contact* 

Tlic glass cube placed between the len$ imd ibfi film bus considerable 
thickness (being approximately equal to the sisk of field covered) 
and therefore produces consideniblc nbeTTUtion. This fact wasj^not 
sufficiently realized by earty experimenters in colour photography* who 
tried to combine prism “ beam-splittcri" with nonml lenses ois the 
market, which, of Goufse, liad not been computed for use with con- 
sidemble thicknesses of ghtss. The result wus poor definition and images 
‘ Tfi Dr, Kalmui icud: " I predicl that uiUtln yc«ri Technkolur wOI 
has'c done awpy unth ipocul Gutwraa." Yel i£ iiunibcr of new beanv-sp^itter cameras 
are in awne of ttHaiinieti™i 
458 


SUftTHA^ TIVE I^ROrESSBSi 


of uTiet|iiaJ Aizes. Tecbsiitolor^ Jiowcver+ early rtalizcd the necessity 
Tor taking the prism iiUo account in the design of ihe lon^ system, and 
in 1918 D. F. Comsiock toot oui a patent (H.P. 13U422) for Sreveral 
cOTtstnjcLiooSr having apertiai^ up to/^3’9* for lens syj<iems combined 
with prisms- la 1927, however, their prism system was simpl^d and 
the incjcd fek for the lenses of larger aperture, owing to the change nt 
cinema technique from outdoor to :»iud$o phonography, lechnicolor 
approached Taylor, Tayior & Hobson Ltd., who were makiEig lenses 
having uu aperture of J}1. and asked them in desipi a special lens 
for their needs. This Wiis for twi>^M3iour work. Widi the change to 
thnre-colour work in 1931, a further cliangc was Qceded. and. mort^ 
over, the matter of colour correction became more stringent. 

U is possible to equjdlzn the foettiing position and the focal lengths 
for two parts of the spetiirum which wouldp in practice, be the ccntr» 
of gravity of the spccirum bands pas^d hy the two fillers usm, 
but when three colours are in quesuon there is the difficuliy thui Ihe 
third colour mast odcessarily out of focus owing to tlte 
secondary spcciruin.''' This secondary spectrum can be reduced lit 
certain optical systems such as telescopic objectives and phoiograpfec 
lens<^ of small aperture by the aid of special glas^l bat the dispersive 
power of these gbsscs, the \o<ulIcd icic^opic tUnts/^ which have 
partial dispersions mote nearly proporiiunal lo those of crown glasses 
than the flints in ordinary use, is so lo'^ ihiii. in photographic sj-stems 
of large aperiiiEc and considcfsiblc field depetuleni entirely upon these 
ghi&ses, the construct ion is prohibitively complicated. Hovk-ever, 
since, in the new Technicolor process, cmly two images are f'“*^'** 
in a plane at right angles thereto, it Is possible to aUow for the sJighuy 
different focus for ihc grecn^ t£ ibe foci for ilie red and blue coincide. 
These, them were the conditions to be futtillcd: ihe red and blue foci 
must coincide, the tolerance being that ihe blue focus might be 0 0005 
in. lortitcT than iJie red* as the blue negative is the rc^ar one of the bipack. 
The green focus could be 0 003 in. slumer than ihc coinmon focuLs 
for the blue and red. These conditions were for rhe standfl-td 
focal length of 50 mm. The aperture required wns/Jl 7. As there 
is inevitably some loss of derinitioti in colour processings the definition 
of the leaver w«s to be belier than that of lenses for non-colour work* 
Other lenses of focal length TO mm.. 100 mm., and 140 mm. were 
also required. 

Now the secondary spectrum, which required an adjusiTnent 
of 0-003 in, for the green on iho 50-mm* lens, iiurreascs with foca! 
lengthy so thal ii becomes O-OOll in* with the 140-nim- lens, while the 

adjiistmcnL'" being made on the camera, is fixed. It thus became 
necessary to reduce the scconchiry spectrum with the latigcr focus 
lenses. Forluniiicly^ the Parsons Oplu^ OlaM COp (now Chmw* 
ParfrOns) came to the rescue with a new gbvLs^ an expcnmcntal melting 

459 


rOLOtIR ClNlMAtr^ORAPH^ 


produced ft gtosi having ft itdiiccd secondaiy spectrum and having 
the low V of 44'9 (as against 52-2 in lite old ** ti^escopic flint 
By judicious incorporation of tlm glaw in one or two cotnponetit5 
In the longer-focus thc^ were designed to gi\e approidmaiely 

the $ame diflercnee between the green focus aod tcd-blue focus'as 
in the standard lens. 

A further iTiterL'sting problem arose when short-focus Icnsos^were 
requiredp because^ with normal types, there is not suflideat clciiirance 
between the lens and the focal plane to accommodate the prism. 




Fio. a4S_ 


Mr. J- A- Ball of Tecbnicolor had incd pteoing 0 nepuve lens in 
front of an ordinary cinematograph-taking lens, the distance between 
the tw^o being greater than the foed length of the positive Lens: thereby 
be deenrased the focal length and at the time disphiced the nodal 
plane lowards the focal plnncp giving greater cleanuice. 

A ncgatitir lens so placed, however^ iniroduces considerable barrel 
distortion. BaD reduced this by using two negstive components^ 
each a cemotiied doiibleiT^ but when the problem was pul to Taylor, 
Taylor & Hobson Ltd* to provide a lens of apertunt ^2 free from 
distortion* n compleie soiutiort was forthcoming with a negative 
consisting of only two simple cktuents* Fig. 245 shows the Tayfor^ 
Hobson lens. The some itringency as to colour cornKtioiit of coursci 
applies to this lens (E*F 355.452). 

460 














StlBTRACTlVt PROCEMES 

Tiic cloSCTWs of the lynils for colour correction nccossiuies sp«ial 
pracautionii in TUnnufftcttirt, In a batch of tenses ituido to very c ose 
tolerances of radios and ihLckness and made from identi^ 
mclls. it is rare to find the chromatic oorne^tota idcnticiil to the 
Technicolor specification, owing to small vafinlioris m the 
of glass throughom the pot. The assemWed leri»s arc 
for focus throuchout the spectrum tm a coltiinaior OJurmnated through 
a constant devTution prism If necessary, akeralioos are then nuide 
10 bring the chiomattc corrections tight. Finally, a photographic 
check is made. An inclined object constsuog of parallel hn^ is photo¬ 
graphed through the actual colour filters used by Tecbmcolor. 

The Twhjiicobr arrangemeni of filins is a deriTOtive 
dtalyle svstem <rf J. W. BenncUo (E,!*. 2B.920, ^**1*1? 

system is the work of Messrs. Taytof. Taylor. Hobson & Cooke Ud,. 

of Lejcestcr, Eitglan^i, 


RECENT C^^C^tA pATL-NTS 

E P 4SOJ73 Tcchoicolot Motion Picturti Corporation- 
An oscillating film gate causing the film to engage alternately a 
claw feed mechanism and fljted rcgistmiion pms. Infect, the taimlmr 
“ shuttle gate,*' and similar to the famous BeU-Howcll Type I gate. 
This movement provides the id«l conditions for registrattoti accuracy 
by virtue mainly of the fixed registration pins. 

E.P. 537,802. TccbnicoSoT Motion tficture Corporation. 

Optical defects due to imperfect contact of bipaek in ilie «n«:ra 
gate have always presented an annoying snag. In this ^tcnl t c iwo 
films are separated by a pin ^presumably recessed! just before they cmer 
the gate, the idea being to feed the two films along a gradually con- 
verging path in order to exclude air-pockets by progressively ^ueeang 
out the air on the approach of the two films to ibe gate. Means are 
also provided for lubricailng the films with a b^t mineral od. 
This is done by oU-saiurated pads between whtch the fito run obliquely 
iinmcdiaiely before they are scparaicd by Uw pm above inciutoiwd. 
TIic use of oil for such lubrication would wero to invite trouble arising 
from spread of oil over image areas on the film (Fig. 24fi). 


E.P. 5.38,080. 

A view finder control device for cameras having an antalty and 
laterally adjustable opticul view finder system and a confined houung 
characlcmcdi in that the mechanism for adjustm^t of the 
vystem moves wilh the latter whereas as the consol mentis lor Inc 
said moctianism ismoonted on the housing, and iheadjustiog tnechanisoi 
and thcconirol means are connected by an articulated fink transmitting 
motion there between. 


4bl 


tOLOlffl CINEMATOGRAPHY 
E.P. 53Rp744, 

PamJIax compensating foenstng view Imdcf^ and arrangtmcni in 
conform to difTettcnt kni foct. 

E.P. 539,228. Tcchtiicolor Mo[rDn Pfcture Corporation. 

Thi^ invention combines the advantages of Use Technicolor beam¬ 
splitter with those of mUtHayer film. A bila^eT film is placed in one 



Fia 246^—E.P. 537.B02 nTTcchnimbr. 


gale and a monolayer m the other*. The biLayer fiJm records blue 
light on ibe outer emulsion layer and icd on Lhe inner. Needless 
to say^ a destroyablc yellow filter divides the two emulsions^ The mono^ 
layer film record greets light. The bilayer film Is prooessed loa reversed 
positive and colotir developed to ydlow*cyam The monolayer Jilm 
is sitisilarly reversed and colour developed mngi^iita. From the bi^ 
layer fihn the blue and red sepamclon negatives am extracted, and from 
Use monolayer the green sefKBnition. Clearly, imblbtUon matrices 
^ ibm be made as usna]. The method should ofier imporcapt 
advantages* as for example; 

462 



























































« i 2 } 


I k., yl,—JJ 1 > 42 >urTfldTniHtlnr, 





































































































St'HTIlACTtVE PROCESSES 

1. Tbe elimination of bipack, which smy caincranian would count 

2. AvoidaDM of the cominoti absorptances of the iubiractive djfcs 
in a trilayer maierial «hkb are the origin of faulty colour 
scparaiJon. 

To quote the paicnt; “ It is pmcticallyimpossible lo Mparmc without 
considerable falsification, colour aspects nsconled m the subtractive 
ranges yellow (minus blue), rmgeaia (minus green), and cyan (minus 
red)7 by printing with light absorbed by the respective sobliaclive 
recoids." As indicated in Fig. 247, die absorption rang^of subtraLti^ 
printing matters overlap considerably. Therefore, if. for exam^e, the 
yellow lecord—superimposed on magenta and c^n records--^ 
copied with blue lighU the maghuta record and the cyan record 
contribute undcsired density patterns, sitiw they likewise pick up a 
certain smounl of the cyan record densibes, whereas Ute red light 
provides a comparatively pure copy of the cyan recori. Accord¬ 
ingly. one of the offending cyan and macula records—for example, 
the magcnta-colounsd record of the green aspect—is separately, 

and can therefore be printed without muoducing falsifying compo¬ 
nents in the other two records, it will be evident from Fig. 2 t lat, 
for example, the removal of the magenta record merely leaves a con¬ 
tamination of the yellow copy, which is laiher sUght and, moreover, 
of secondary importance, due in ihe fad that the yellow record 
not nuiteriolly contribute to definiiioii and gradaiton of the completed 

^‘Evidently prints can equally well be made on trilayer film i^ied 
two layers on one sMc and one layer on the other, or coaled in tne 
conventional way as in Kodachromc and Ansco. all three la)ers on 
one tide. The notion is well adapted to the making of good duplicntci. 

Processing of Negative and Printing of hlalriv 

AVgflriw Technicolor negatives arc dewlopc^ a 

gamma of 0 65 in 0-76. The negatives ate drum developed in I.QOQ-H. 

iLfore development the blue record negative is treated in a blMchiii|: 
bath to destroy the red filter cooting on the surface of the emulsion. A 
of hydrosiilphiie may be used. 


Mmdx Printers 

.Wereriff/.—Eastman orange-dyed cmuUion No. 1514 on lyiMQQ 

in. film base. „ 

Prfnriwff.—Exposed through base with tungsten filament souiw 
used with ufi ullra-vlolctfilter plusaNo,39 Wratten Filter. Altematively 

463 


COLOim CINEMATOqKAI-HV 

biuc filters of varying density may be used to control contrasL After 
Mposuie llie matrix fUm is given a fiash fog to threshold value 'uvilh light 
identical to that used for prut ling the image. An ultra*violet absorbing 
filter isinsened betueea the light source and the film. 


fiivctssing 


Time-tahlc (Temp.) 


5r<^. 

t>tiCfiprkn> 

Ti me in 

J 

DcvcIojmKnt 

1 

2 

Wash . * 

1 

3 

OxidbjE^ Djiih .. ; 

S 

4 

Hot Wiiior Eich (Relkf dcv^pmentl .. 


3 

FiXJiftttti 

1 

6 

Wash .. .. .. 

5 

7 

.1 a. * ^ .■ * a. A , .. . ^ 



Matrix DEV]:LOiPMEKr Formula (EP. 393.7S5) 


£>ewkip^ 

Pyro 

QijieAcid ,, ” 

Pot Brornide 
Sodium H^^droxldc 
AmnxTnhini Chkmiic 
WAtcfio .i 


Time: 3 mlnui^ 
Temp.: 64“ T, 


14 


gq gPL 

w » 

t J t. 

tS : 

ijEOde^ 


H,0/jpH 6-9 


TImiQ:2 nunulci 


OxidWnf Ealh. 

FerTfcynnk^ .. Hperocai. 

Time: 5 itiifiijte& 

Titmp.:65* F. 
pH: W 

IToi W^irrEtcK 

H^O 

Time: J mjfuit^ 

Temp,: IJO F. 


Fixatiot 

Hypo iBpcfcait. 

Time: 1 Enniiiiet 


464 











SUBtftACTIVE PROCESSES 


PKliNTLNG 

Key 1 wa< 7 E or ‘‘ BlattK BL\cic-AWi>Wjrm Silver Pitrhrr 

In ihc Technicolor process the fiJm upon which the dye transfers 
are made is a fiormal black^and-whiter positive fiiui bearing a comptuted 
silver image soimd tnick, a lightly printed picture keyi* and frame 
surrounds. 

^ejCEOURE 

Colour sopflrmtion negative used for prtfH iag P^uira _ 
imam Tbc Green negative recant 

rrrimer) 

FiitR $tiick ciTirlo^’yed < • tnstmaii M etipn Tidtinc 

Rfilcajc Positiw 

Dc\tkipnicnl fonnulii ■ . ■ - Modified D.16 (we belw) 

Gamma ^ -. 


Modiheo D.I6 Formlila (Developmes^ of Blacjc-ast> 
White Blank 'T 


Meiol 

H^droqtdnofBC .. 

Sodium Sulpliite (anht^d.) 
Sodium CltbWlite (cnono^ 
PtirassEum Bronjide 
Clerk Add 

Pota$SEEiin Metiibtikilpbile 
Wdio- to make . . 


FSgm. 
36 ipm, 
240 gm. 
J22 

54 gin. 
4-2 ifn. 

y piL 
6 line* 


Note—T he 7tli Step of the wedge e?tpo&cd on the Type IIB Eastman 
Senskometer must have a densily of 64. 

After fixation the** blank *' h hardened in a chrome alum bath. The 
lime i« criiJcai in reladon lo the itmc during which the “ blank " can be 
kept prior to dye iaiblbiUon (normnlly 24 hours). Too short a chrome 
wash ** wiil cause the emulsion of the"" blank " to be toe soft which 
gives rise in bleseding of the dyes dariaB transfer. Too long a chrome 
WiUsh ” will otuse li!icompfete intitsfef of the dyes from the matrix due to 
itmnll particles ofatr being trapped belween ilic matrix and tbe'* blank/* 
In exiiemc cases there timy be general failure lo transfer the whole of 
I be dye with consequent false colour baJance in the prints 
Jf a blank is to be kept for it period iu excess of 24 hoitrs the 
chrome alum wash tnusl be shortened in Uine* owing lo the fiict that a 
"* blank tends to harden with keeping. Should a ** blankhave 
become cxccssivTSly hard owing to circurnsianc^ delaylag Iransfer It 
can be run through the devdoping macbtiie again with a chronic alum 
wash suited to the new expected time-lapse between chroine W'ash and 
transfer. 

The lime of development of ihe ^nnd track printed on the"* blank 
is invariably tlie same, whethcf the track be of the vatioble area or 
variable density ty-pe. Since the sound track is developed independently 
■ SflJd uaw to be omittEdi but la l«38 Dr. a »ai<L The prcittii tyuem 

h naUy ruurHXjcnpcneiir^ 

2Ci 


465 





COLOUn CTN&M«^TaOltAl>JlV 


of aqy considerations of the diAractcmtics of the picture imago the 
conditions for ideal processing are present. 


Dve Transfer (luBinmcm) 

Order of irajulw ., . . ., Yellinv, ejen, 

Dye krtlu .. ,. .. |^aitBled by wnipiessed ait at the ntic of 

172 c^. per miiuite 

Tentpenture k* .* 9 !l F.'jal* 

irrirrHSTsion 


Surplus dye washed off—20 seconds at 70“-t00* F. 

Surplus water is blown off and the scmi<diy matrix is then “ raomed " 
to the^bbnk’’' wtderde-tteraied Htirer, the blank having been pircviouiily 
pre-wetted for 30 seconds at 65’ F. in de-ueraied water (see E.P. 
48Wt). 

By means of copper water-jacketed runways the mono-mcwl re&itcr* 
pin Ira veiling band Is kept at such a temperature that the film sandwich 
is kepi beated during tho transfer. 


Tl*w cfiytm^rr. fTd&Hir. 

2 miBLiie) Vctknr 

2 Cyan 

2 „ aiatiimia 


Tntiseratt/rt 

1/1). 

too 

130 

130 


Removal of Surptui Dye (krrotvit as * ‘ Dediro f' vU .. Sodium Carbomiie, 

10“^). 

Hiiise,—2 minutes. 

S/uK- OjjT n'ii/i compressed air. 

Dry. 

Dve Bath Forshil^* 


Yethw, 

ClUoiiDOl Siilitiat Ydlow 3G, 200 ^ 2 

Chlomzol Fist OnuiBo Efti liO gm. 

AccUc Acid 2S |w cenj* ,. .. ,. tO e.c. 

Water l.DOO 


Cym, 

DbuJpliiw Own B, 150 ,, 
SoUviir Cclestcil B. 250 
LoAorniiifi Grmi B, 200 la 
Acetk Acid 2S pc^ cent .. 

Water ro i*. 


V*S |ir 

(^40 ^ 
lO&CL 
tfOOO „ 


ChSomsol Fwi Piak mL m .. 
ChlorAiot F4k!ti Rod BK. 170 
B«ttoVioJctR 
Acetic Add 2^ per Ottt 
Water tarnako 


am. 

IMS 
0 -5 ^ 
50 O.Q. 


* Time data or? ^dtentitiic and w reliom c&n he fil««d upon anr met 
con^poruknee with pie»enl prupiioc. 

466 








stii»TaActivi pdocBsies 


Tkchmoolor Dvb Equivalents 

Amtnptirf. 


BKimH ANiJ AmMCAS 
British. 

l>uulpiiiDc Gfeeti H. 150 
Sdlway Cdc^ol B, 250 
Chior>uo4 Fast Rjed K. I TO 
Cbkirax&l Fart Pink 430 
Chtonool Ftui Omt^ BR. 
ChlamzjDl BriHiiint Y<illow 3G- W) 
Lissaniine Ciwn 200 


Faai Add Giocn H. 

Aaihniqiiinone HliME ABr 
PsJrantiS OF. Red 8 BF. 

Amfidine Fasi Rost - BL. 

DunonL PcmLifiiiiic Omn&c ER- 
Dupoilt Brill tot FJl?cr Yd1ov^^ Cochu 
Pnnlacyi Grecu SN. 


In U-P* 487,941 of ibfi l.B. covering cettaio asfKscts 

of ihc Technicolor imbibilion printing madiim:, ihc following dyes arc 
meniioned: 


Cyan 

Magenta 

Yellow 


ErloglauctiiK iC.F No. 671) 
Aciii Futhsin ic.F No. 
Rt^oojnc YcUow (C-l No. 14^1 


^ l.B." Transfer Macbint (General Dc$cnptioii) 

Ttic maebtn^ry used today by Technicolor Ltd* consists of two early 
type dye ironsfer maeJunes sent to England by Technicolor Corp. to 
enable the English firm lo start output on a reduced scale t20 feet per 

Owing to the war* no replaocnieni was feasible and as a result of 
increasing demand for colour prodactioos Ihis machine has conuniicd 
to run practically non-'ftiop (wcek-cods cucTuded) tver sloce. It is 
said to be running at the increased rate of 1^ feet per minute, . 

The tmchiTic vt^ budl by Lbe 13- Corporation (U.S,A.) Juid di£$ign 
by Mr, Mack " Ames of Tbc Technicolor Moiioii Picture Corpora- 
lion (U,S,A,)* (See l.B. patent ahridgenjent below.) 

Tbt macirine Ls four banked, iht fourth not bciitg in use 
Cyan and Mageuia; in that order). Fig. 24S illustrates scliemaiicaily 
the general arrangement of the machine. 


The “ Bhuik '* 

The *' blank *' is the first stas® t^*® mabiBg of a Tccbnioolor print 
and ccmsisis of Itodak !J01 stock (Ncgaiive perforated) bearing a 
Sliver jtouud track and picture rebate and in ioiro? a tuini st'ftf 
picture image known as the '* gray " in Loudon, and the key m 

Hollywood. , ,, , . . 

These blanks ate ftd on to the machine on the yellow side by means 
of a coniinuous feed elevator, a sprocket with a double, normal, an 
stationary speed, ii form of *' dog clutch" being fitted between the 
feed reel and devator. Each roll of blank is spliced to the preceding 
one by s notmal cement join. The splicing " cue ’* for synchrtimiing 
purposes Is primed on thc;‘ blank," corresponding to the track nega¬ 
tive as edited by the negative cutting dcpiJirUiicnt. 

467 


COLOUF CJKEMATOORA^HV 

Thr blank then fun^ from the feed etevniof piist a mercuroLd trip 
(see page 472 m Mcrcuroid Trip Switches) into the yellow 
'"pre-wet bath contnfning " de-aerated ” water (sec note on “ dc- 
aer^itar "J* The yellow, cyan and magenta pre-wet baih^ are Jong 
horizontal troughs each running above appropriate colour” tablt^' 
The object of the pne-w'd is paninlly lo soften the surface of the blank 
emuiston in order to decrease the chance of trani^fer due to “ air ” and 
to increase ihc receptivity of the emulsion to the iransfercficc of dye. 

AfteTH iay, two minutes' immcision^ the blank emerges from the 
yellow pre-wet, travels past two b]ow^fr$ (one either skk of the film tu 
remove surplus waier)^ tum^ downwards post a metemnoid irip switch» 
and into the ” roll tank (enteriitg it from the top) which ts filled 
with de-aerated water. This water is kept Sowing et a rate of 9 gallons 
per tomate. 

MiuTTiiig ^tatris to ** Blank '' 

It is in this roll tank that the blank is married! " or brought into 
close contact with the yellow the blank being uppermost. Boih 

are then seated on the monel “ pin twh,” by means uf pre^sun: e\ertcd 
by four b-in, djaiticiCT rubber treaded rolJen; ihat two above and 
two below the pin belt, A jet of de-aemied water is directed nt the point 
of first coutuci beiwecp blank and matrix- Tltii is another precaution 
agiiiniin the possibilUy of'" transfer for nir/' a defect brought about by 
ihe prc^ncc of particles of air tra pped between matrix and blank f and so 
causing iransfer of ihc colour in question. This defect is most liable to 
occur in areas of great colour contrast (Le,^ uLr particles caught in the 
shelf in the ” topography of the matrix surface). 

Al about the same time aa the blank is being fed on to the muchinr^ 
ihe appropriate yellow' mitrix is also bdng run on to a continuous feed 
elevator* each toil of matrix being cut to kiigih, for synchroniz^atioEi 
with the blrnik. by the matrU itiakc-up deparEment. "nie matrix i> 
attached in its predecessor by means of a 6-inch length of monel strip 
^pefforaied in the same manner as a piece of negative cine Hlmf^ and by 
four two-pro uged clips. 

A driving $procket with a ihrec-position free w^heeL normal, and 
siaiionary type of dog clutch, supplies thL'i clevritOT from the foed reek 
AnoUier sprocket carrief^ the matrix into the lop of the dye tarik^ 
where it nm in varticaj paths past two ctscadm. These ca^oadci are 
supplied with dye pumped up from a vat below die floor. The dye U 
passed ih/ough three filLcr bags, nae large one In the vat and two smaller 
ones over the dye lank cascades. Dye corrcciions are applied by boO!il- 
tng every 15 mmute^ under the direct comrot of the cl^micol depoit- 
tiwiii who are udvls^ partly by hand mm^fer tests *' of a gray scale, 
iind partly by the viewing room. 

During tti Iravd through the dye tank the matrix 

m 


passes over a 


Sfstre 

1. 

\ 

Co^~^ 

aiti^a' to 


Ouichaftd 


ar S^'a/Tfc 

\ 


//? T^nA H-'Tce", 


Ah.r'^^ePb^ piiif/ya Vier/7N!.'jret^r 


ShveM^zcr 




Q/E4A 

4r5 

z?^#Jan5 



Fm. Gcncriil prrjirkgetncnl Of ilie"IJl^* Tmimfcr MjK’hnic ip'hsJ for prinTmB T4?chniin.>li."ir pmitivr?., (Scficmiiik imly.i 


fJBW-iWI JW. <W* <111*/4«P 





































































































































































































aUBTRACTrVE FROCEft^iES 


driving sprocket nnd i weif^btctl jocki^y pulley attaebt^ to a. cord. 'Hiis 
cord actujiics ib^ spMd conirol arm of a four-bush maior v^hkh dri^^s 
this seclioa of the xnachinc. In thb way ihc driving motor speed is 
governed by Lhc tension of the Otia. 

After leaving the top of ihc dye UiTifc, the ydlow matrix runs down 
into ihe*‘ wash back where U remains fov about 90 seconds^ tmvdling 
i [i a vertical path past eiifier end of a hot water cascade wliosc tempera- 
luTc can be easily varied by means of a muting valve. 

The object of Ihe *" w'ash-back Ls to wash off the dye superfiuous lo 
the amount ntquined to hriitg aboui the desired colour ratio. The effec¬ 
tiveness of Ibis washing off is dirwily tabled to the tempcraiLifc of the 
water used* the duralion of ihe wash-backtime being tojistafli 
(i.r,, iJie greater the temperature the greater Ihe wash-off). 

U h of itiicjTst to note that the main difference between the technique 
used ID the London plant and that used io HoUywoodp is that the 
Amerjeans keep ihe lempeTalurc constant, but control the dnniuon of 
" w^ash-back/* lo cither case the technique is directly controlled by the 
vbwing room. 

From the “ wash-hack ” the mairiji passes through a small elevutort 
the movable ckment being heavily weigh led. This does fto moie than 
supply or take up stock in the event of slight sluggishness of the con¬ 
trolled driving motors when rtiponding. 

From thii* eievaior the matrix pftsses two blovf-oiTs (one either side 
of the film), nins downwards past a merctiroid trip switch and enters 
the toll tank IVom the top. ptissmg tinder a roller on to the pin belt 
where the blank h pressed on to it by the first 6-inch roller and held in 
re^stcr by the pin$. 

The pin bell is 240 fec^ long, consisting of monel perforated filrip 
35 mm* wide, with both large and $maJl teeth soldericd in these per¬ 
forations. The small lecih me on the track side of the blank* 
The whole length is soldered into a loop* Four wheels of approitimaidy 
4{)-inchej« diamcicr ennbte tt to travel from end lo end of the machine 
four times* The iwo wbeeb at the dye tank end denned the wei 
end “) are set at a dight angle to each oihert to give lhc desired cross 
ov^r, tmd aboui 6 fret apart. The path from ihe wheel nearest the wi:i 
end parses Utrouglj the roll tank by means of a wotier gate cither end. 

The two wheels at the dry box end (“ dry end *1 run in a vertical 
plains side by side. 

Towards ihc under side of the upper two paths, which irmvel from 
the wci to the dry end, and the upper side of the under two palhs of lhc 
pin bell the side not taken up by the film and teeth) hot water 
trankiiig is placed. This tninkini is rect 4 mgular in sccilon (approx, 
6 in.\ 1) in,). The side of ihe pin belt bearing the film is protected 
with wooden covers which arc hinged for easy access. 

The temperature of thti heated surface (known as the table 

469 


COLOLtR CENlMAtOGRAl^tlV 

is con^olled. The greater the temperature the greater the contrast, 
There is ad iiteteasetl colour density to (he shadow^^ giving in severe 
cases off ratio derecU. h is therefore Technicolor policy to keep 
these table (eEsperulnres conslant accordittg to a siondtird tcchnir^uc 
by means of mixing valves. 

The matrix and blank in dose contact, and hdd in regbterby the pin 
bell, emerge from the Haler ^tc (ncaresi Lbe dye end) of the roll tank, 
and pass under the large seating b<lt. This seating beU h a loop of 
copper suipjH about 9 Snrchcs diumeter, similar lo a piece of negniis^e 
^rforated cine film, bui having stnalltr ptrfonitioit on the inack side. 
Thesc n^tforarions are seated over the leeth of the pin belt by the 
pressure or wdght of a large rubber ircaded roUer^ there being also a 
smiiil roller 3 inches away to assisi ihetake off " of the loop from the 
pm bdu The large seating bdl is followed by (he small sealing bcU- 
The latter li slmdur to tlic first but only forms a loop 7 ijichcs in 
diameier. U has only one seating roller and is of tess weighL 
ki ^b^ci of the sealing belts b to emsure the eoirect seating of the 
blank and matrix pcifoniiiDtii iiiround the pin heU teelh. Incorrect 
^^fig of the blank and matrix would enuse transfer oroutid the 
periorationis. Results of this are to be s«n in the form of half round 
^fls of colour with sharply defined edges against ihc perforiitmns- 
The defect is mosi noticeable on ihe non “track side, 

A close coniaci between blank aiid matrix h still furihcf cnnnicd by 
the use of two weighted rollers^ the first having a 4 Ib^ weight uttachedi 
and the second having one of 9 lb. 

After tiie5<; presfitrre rollers a sucker Is placed lo remove surplus water 
from around the pcrfoniiions and pins. This is then followed by *1 blow- 
off to remove any surplus water drops from the cell side of the blank. 

It IS on this pan of itie pin bell betw-ecn the hlow^oiT and the tables 
thai ihc sync, nuirks •" printed on the matrix smd blank an: checked 
to ensure against out of frame '' tuid ** oui of sync.'* <oul of ruck) 
def^Ts. If such 3 defect does occur, liie number of peiforaiions, frames, 
Of feev out (»f sync, are iticasured ami the necessary length of leider 
EitUiched iQ the next roll of blank or Tnalrix (whichever ix Uipplicable) lo 
be run on the macbinc. 

The pin belt is fricrion driven by the two dry end wheels^ which are 
chain driven by a consianl speed motor. This h the only motor on the 
colour bank that is nol conirolled, and is therefore the one that scls the 
overall spetd or Ihc nisichine, nnd is termed iht main drive mutnr. 

After comptdUog ihc i*o circuiu on the pin belt, the blank and 
rtiatri* leave it at a poinl in line with and abjut 3^ fi, beltm- the sealing 
bcUs* 

The parting is ofikcled by both blank and inalrix. runniiig over ei 
roller filled ihc stripping roUcr whilst the piji belicD[itiiiu4^ Eiloug 
Its hoREonhaJ path. 

4711 


SUBtRACnVE PROCESSES 


Th^ blank runs vcnically duwnwiird^ in a Bat pJanc wbibt ihe matrix 
runs DiTnt an angle of 45^^ downwards with a twist tlirough 130^ It h 
this twist ibat brings about the stripping or parting of the two films. A 
mercuroid switch is placed on the blank just after the stripping poinL 

0olh malji\ and bbnk run over pulleys (botli now being emuli^ion 
downwards) and run in hDiizontal paths towards the dry end, im¬ 
mediately below the lower tables. The blank ittns boiizoa tally in a dry 
bo% from end to end three rimes before emerging at the dry end to travel 
to the lop of the machine and over a captive diabob (which by means of 
a cord governs the sp^d of the matrix dry bos drive motor). The drive 
for the blank dry^ box is snpplied by a friction loaded rubber covered 
pulley powered by it chain fmm the main drive motor. 

The blank, after pitssing a mercurcjid switch, travels into the pre-wet 
bath of the succeeding colour bank (i.e,, the cyan). 

The matrix after leaving ibe stripping whii5cl tuns under ihe blank 
dry E>ox to a point bejow the targe dry end pin belt driving wbeois, 
where it travels through the floor to the “ decro tank comainbg 
sodium carbonate (nolcirciilated). The object of this tank is to wusli ihe 
matrix clear of any remaining dye (a mercuroid switch being placed at 
the entry into this tank). 

After this the matrix passes into a wash tank and then up through 
the floor into the matrii dry box ui the end of the transfer machine. It 
leaver this to be rolled up on the take-up. 

After re-winding and Inspection by ** rnatrix re-wind depl.^* it is 
held in neadiness for a further transfer. 

The cyan batik i^ tdcnitcal lo the yeliow (the yellow and cyan banks 
being built «rde by side m one anh (this formed an original two-colour 
rtiachinc))i 

The blank bearing the yellow and cyan dye Icruge passes over to tbs 
magenta bank. This bank, and a disused one alongside, forms another 
of the original two-colour machines, and stands p^raJk! to the yellow 
and cyan banks with a pngway about 6 fi. wide between them. 

The magenta bank is very similar to the yellow and cyan, but has the 
following differences. A small lank containing alcohol* with a fixed 
elevator running in it, is placed between the waih back and roll tank. 
Thiii L< only when a certain muirix is known to be bud for air and 
transfer. It h on ihe magenta that these defects arc mosi pronounced- 
The soriening effect of the alcohol on the dye laden mat rix emulsion not 
only minimires the above defect but also increasci dye spread. 

The weights attached to the rollers after the seaLjrtg belts arc in- 
^^tcased to 6 and 12 lb. rcspeciivdy. 

The table temperature on this bank is main rained 10" F. above that 
on l!ie oiher two tables. The last two iqpdJfications are introduced in 
order lo reduce the chances of ain and transfer. 

The blank on leaving the mugema dry box pusses over waxing rollers 

471 


CUti^UK CJNtfMATOGItAt^llV 

running aver the perfontion lfecIu. Afur tkb the nm^ past a 
mcrcoroid switch, oh to the take-up elevator- 


The nacTcuroitl switch is a glass phial one-third fiiled with tnertriiry, 
inLD whieh electrodes protrude at one end, the phiaJ bdng mounted on 
an arm pivoted about two-thirds of its length- On the short arm two 
wheeb are mounted so Ihai they ride on mihcr side of ihe film (i.e,. over 
the perforation tracks). Hie lerislon of the film miming vtrticaily 
causes the ami to remain horizontal* In the event of the film breaking, 
the weight of tin: glass phiaJ, or mercuroidi on the longer arm, causes 
it to faU to a near vertical pkition^ the mercury forming the circuit 
between the elecirodcs. 

The closed circuit actuates a relay which stops ihe machine, rings e 
bcU^ and switches on a pilot light (each ^tion having its own appro- 
prince Ughi), These lights are coloured either yellow, cyan or magcniu, 
according to ibcir colour bank* 

The dc-aermor is a machine siiunted on the ground floor the 
floor below the machine) iuid consists of a vacutnu pump exhausting 
air from a cylinder containing (ripes with fine jct» protr^ing from ih™. 
DisiiUtd water at 110'' F. is pumped through these pipes and forced 
through the jets, to form a fine spray within the vacuum. The water is 
then sucked from the bottom of Ibc cylinder and pumped up to the 
LB. machine* 


To beset against the great reproductive advantages of au imbibition 
macliine, of which we are all awarc^ are the foiiouing disads'entages (not 
including the difficuJUes to be overcome m the production of mniricesh 
U In the event of olTsync. or oH-fraiBe troubles, many feet of film 
might be run before the correction can be applied^ 

2. In fhe event of a fnachinc stop at least two reefs of production 
might be N.C/d (the excessive wnste in ihc wash-back*^ 
causing nn transfer frvTm tiuit pan of the matrix)* 

X Any machme stop of more than ^ minutes would cause permancnl 
register trouble owing to dlstortlnn of the matrices on the hot 
tables at leust two sets of mniriccj N-G/d). 

4. There must be a severe risk of a machine $top damaging a matrix 

Of mairices as a result of*' b&kmgon ihc tiibles—iMs would 
cause a failure to strip. 

5. Any pprticle of dirt would give a defect many times its sizc^.-e-^ 

the parucle would probably be reptcisenicd by a -f colour den- 
rity areia (that is* if ii adhered to the matrix before the dye 
tank). But tf it was deposited on the matrix after the dye tank. 


472 








rKi. Priniiinj Miittiinc hy 1. B. Corporaiion. JL!^ 4<i7,ML 

































































































































J'NJ. 2i^C —TtttHphiikifi Frinlmu Mnchmc t^y K B. Corporation. lr..P+ 































^ n-- 

Hkjk 249D.—Imbthiii-pn Priming Mai’hinc by H. Corporilion. E-P. 4S7,94U 


t 0 ^ 4iTly 
























































SUaiRACIfcVl PItOCHSStS 


or ai my ume on \hA blank, it woutd be represented by a 
surrounding nrtsa of transfer (if on ibc matrix by one colour; 
if on the blank by all the soocoeding colours). 

6. Any form of enmlsion damage dther bn the foatrix or blank 

ut>uld be fcpresenied by dtbef 4 - or — colour densiiy—usually 
boib^ 

7, If the blank emulsion h too hard — transfer would ensue, and 

possibly — oir. If the blank emulsion be soflcncd lo overcome 
(hese two defects, bleeding or dye spread u-ould increase. A 
mean technii]ue has to be pursued which admiU both defects 
to a lesser degree. 

S. There must ciht the continual problem of mgister. owing to the 
itrelch and shrinkage of new and old matrices (besides the 
iroublei^ experienced with negaut^es. masters^ dupes, etc.* in 
printing^ 

9. A matrix may be unrdinble in its“ keeping qualities,” it may 
dision« perish or shrink at an early age, and cx'iusc breakage, 
damaged pefforaUous, audjumpiagonthe pin belt—this would 
cause off-sync, and oEF-fnirne troubles. 

)0. The possibility of” transfer for air*' (iw foraicr explanation) 
iDUKt always be present. 

11. Quite conaidcmble trouble couJd be caused by transfer edge ” 
owing to poor seating around the pins. Thi^ mij^it be caused 
by a mild fbm of shrinkage (dihci blank or matrix). 

The above defects ar^ peculiar to a pin-belt laachinc. But the more 
usual defects arc stiB present, ij?., scratches {this applies to matrix ox 
well ns blank) either negative or positive, on cell or emulsion, operatioiml 
errors, dye and colour fluciuntions^ etc. 

Tne following description of an iiubibiiion priaiiiig machine paten ted 
by the LB. Corporation is concerned with the means at pftseni em¬ 
ployed by Technicolor tn U.S,A* and 

B.P. 487,941. Dye-Impression Frihling^ Electric Control Sy&icmx, 
LB. Corporaiion. Dec. 28, 1916. Mo. IS509. Convenlion dale. Doc. 
28, 1935. 

(Refenmeo 3ligi|td be mmle iHi Rjpitm 24VA-D 

In the process of nu apporalus for printing in multicolour from a sol of 
photographically prepared gdadn matrices^ the blanks to be priuted 
and ihc matrices arc fixed to supports ond carried through cycles, the 
cycle for the matrices being autoriiatically contToUed and mduding the 
steps of applying excess dye to the matrices, removing a part of this dye, 
and pressing the matrices into contact vriih successive blanks. Pre¬ 
ferably the mairkes are overexposed and overdyed so thal the removal 
of dye results in a gmdxiinn whi^h oonespoiids to the straight pan of ihc 

473 


trOLtJUR riWt.MATQGRAPHV 


chamctjcristic tnrvc of m cwubion. The removal of dye h aJso adjust¬ 
able to aiiain colour balan ce in thei^uUing pictures and may be cifecEgd 
by sprays. Apparatus for the process comprises a sei of machines 
corresponding lo the ii umber of eolours lo be printed, tn ibe foim 
shown, each machine comprises a dye bath 3* Fig. I + endless bands I i 
having supports 26 for the matrices, an oscillating spmy pipe 171 for 
applying further dye, washing sprays 72 for reninving surplus dye, and 
rollers J 10, 111 for pressing the matrices into coniitct with the blanks. 
The dye removal sprays are delivered by ati oscillating tube 40 and may 
be dcdcctod by a movable hood 50 to vary the quantity of dye removed. 
The matrices are carried by blocks 26, Fig. 10, having pins 27 which 
enter holes in the forwm^d end of phites 100 ciifrying the blanks B. 
Aulomatic control of the hood 50 ma y be provid*^. As shown in Fig, 
|7»a pin 252 mounted on the endless carrier 11 in advance of the matriXp 
cto!ies a switch to fiei in cpcratlan a motor P which draws the hood 50 
upwards. At thciop of ifcs travel, a pin on the hewd closes the cut-oui 
svdtch 273 causing the motor to slop and the hood returns under 
gravity. A second pin 154 occupying a pre-set positioD on ihe front of 
the murrix support 26 then clo^^€s one of the sivitches 290 bringing a 
Mop 265 into the tmlh of ihe htiod 50 as il retumi; Preferably the dye 
bath and ^pruyia are maintained at a raised lempemium. Suitable dyes 
for a ihrcc-colcar process are FriogLuyeine for the cyan component, 
acid ruchsin for the inagenta, and resorcine yellow for the yellows 


Technicolor Genemt Pfoccdure 
Activities before pholograpby i 
Colour CofiFrol: 

(a) Colour design of ihe 3ei$. 

(/i) Costume colour selection. 

Set colours are chosen- 

[a) For hue, chroma., and value in retalioa to the cesrames. 
{ti) For relattvc importance of the set. 

(c) For cutting and relationshtp to other sets. 
id) F^ir relationship of above fLictons to the script 

Tlici^ fiUL'toi^ when dccidod upon, fonn the" colour scote/^ 

A colour comrol dopartmeat advises on these factors, 

tfidfr-iip,—Handled by ihc studio, bui thecofour cameniman often 
intervenes. For ejtample, ihere may be compensaifon for sunburn 
during or following cvlerior work. Neck, thmat, hands and arms 
require tixatmcTit. frequently require no make-up. Object of 

make-up is largely to reduce ran^ of flesh colour observahle la various 
Individua]>K Critical caje: must be given to close-ups. 

474 





Fig. Colour bocrti^r tisHi shoi- 
Colour follow afiol 


pr i^^ 









TcclintctiTor camera fn In actitwi for the Afthcn' pfi^dLMJli&n, 

*' A Miitfer pf Lifciiml Dealh.” 

[Br Jl£w/ 4^-VJTfWi! ^mdSmifU 


iF.xtim #. -tTfk 




SUBTRACTIVE 


Tcclmicolor camera art filEBr-balAoccd iq aveniEje 
daylight. Colour-tcmpetatures ^ould not vary by more than 250". 

For studio work the followiiig souroes are used* but lu tadi ca^ 
they are filtered to match a standard daylight. Thtts the filters or *£ocK 
in the camera die imaltorcd! 

High4nicDsity aic, 

Whilt-flanic arc. 

Timgslen filamenl biilbs. 

The GeneiaJ Electric C.P- tungsten incandejiccai bulbs are bumi 
at a colour-temperature of and a MaeBeth artificial daytighl 

glass filter Is iisied to transTorin the radiation to a cDlour^iciiipcraiure 
of 6,000" K. Unflllcrod inky lights are used to simulnie fneUghi ^low. 
Coloured Ughu may be used for special effbets. Large sets are usually 
i[luniimiittl by are lighlifig with occastonid atmiiary inky uniiB^ 
Snud] sets are somedines entirely fit by inky units. 



rai.i^tA 

For exteriors, metaliii: refleclora are undesirable owing to sunfigbt 
directly refiected varying in colour-iempcrature from average dayli^t^ 

For process projection special plalcs art printed of the required 
contrast density and colour, depending on the panicular background 
projccior to be employed. Multiple projcctoi heads project up to 
ilirec matched pjints. Background screens have been pholographed 
up to 28 ft. in width. Cote has to be taken lo achiew foreground- 
background balance. 

Lenses on the Tcclinleolof cameTa arc iwajlable of the followtng 
foci; 25, J5, 40, 50, 70, tOO. 140 mm. Thee ail fit into ialibratiid 
moiinu that At on to a nmsicr focnsiiig mo uni, Gcoc rally, focusing 
IK checked by nwasuremetit. Eye focming has been found fuidiy. 
Stops ms c&libmted on sn itrbitraiy iinthmetical scute. A vety oiigjnal 
Technicolor spwiality is the follo*'-focus aid ivhich takes the form of 
a pair uf SeUyn motois,’ One is atinchcd to the lens mount, and the 
contioUing motor ts held in die lechnieiaii's liand, or fastened lo some 
support if desirable, permiiung the techoicittu to be 50 fL or more 

* Now avAilotrfe on llie lyn^aycliTwni* caiuciu. 


475 













COtOtTR C3?4EHilTUOR APHY 


away froin Lhe cam^^nit and yet to maiiitfitn controJ over Uie Ujufi 
(ocu's, even ibdugi] the camera is blimped/" 

Tlifi motor arrangemenc is highly flexible. There arc eight types 
of motor and eight combinations of motor-tfhcamera gears, ail of 
which can be ebanged in the Jield, The cwLcros can albo be operated 
in reverse. Speeds in excess of 24 pktor^ per second are not per 
missibte^ 

The atmem can be mounted on anything from a spider to a high 
tripod, and on Hny other pioM of cquipmeni as may be desired, such 
as dollic$, three-wheoj pcnimbulaiDrs. four-wbijel vttocitaiors, booms, 
rolling mounts, etc. Special oiounis have bwp used for air phoio- 
gmphy and for underwaicr work. Speed enmems have been made to 
shoot up 10 % pictures per second. The threading time of a Technicolor 
eomcre is about 3 minuecs. 

Technicolor cartoons are photographed by normal cameras using the 
successive exposure method with either roiatieg or sliding filters. The 
negalive is pdiiLcd on a skipping mteriniLtcnt printer. All opijca! and 
ifick clfecis know n (« black-and-white can lx? used for Technicolor. 

Kegatives are developed at night and black-and-white rush prints 
delivered the foliowing afternoon. Colour rush prinu are dcltvcred 
the following evening, 

Wiuton Hoch of the Technicolor ^folio^ Picture Cxjrpotolion wrote 
in 1942:The negntlvie refiorts and ail laboratory contactHS are Iiandlcd 
for the cameraman through the Technicolor camera departrnent, 
which also checks ihc daily log-shcets, and by tbc&e log-shfcia keeps 
a visTy compkte record of every produetton and of every scene phoic^- 
graphed on ihat production. The records bavo proved invaluiible. not 
only lo the camemmaD, but on many occosions to ihc director and 
oihere participating in the production,'’ 

Tecbnieuior ^^Monopock” 

VVilh regard lo the use of Kodachromc monopack for the Techni- 
color record, HcKh says: *' The prcscjit monopack process in latitadCn 
™ibiljt)\ and rone rendtiion b s^uisfectory, but the picture texture 
in grain and tmifomuty lias not .ittalned ihc smooih, Hue texture of 
Lhiee-sLrip,” Progress since this W'os written (1942) has not been 
marked by any radical impfos'cment. 

Of 16-miil. Kodachrome monapack for Technicolor, Wliliam 
Stull {American Cinjemmo^raphrr^ September 1941) says that the 
Technicojof copy ” liad less of the appyarancc of a dupe than he had 
considered possible " and that ihc ■ ‘ tonal range and gradation were 
comparable with the originid Kodachroinc or standard Technicolor/" 
We cannot agree with this rerdict. 

The mofiopadc is used in cameras which are fitted with 
Irnscs, and h^n iti consequence, a chxractctixtk perspective and depth 
476 


SVBTKACTIVE PROECESES 


of field which are reproduced on the 35-nini. cnlorgeinentJ to giire 
vi'bflt Stull describes as *' an uncanny effect on the screen,” 

Technicolor recommend Utat the Kodachrome exposure for Tech¬ 
nicolor reproduction should, be on the low side of normal. 

Darrel Cntlins, British director, has recounted his experiences 
during the making of a documentary which was shot entirely in mono- 
pack, His stale ments do not sirppon the absurdly exaggerated reports 
which have been quoted from American journals. Jt is quite clear 
that oiler all the fuss there has been some disappointment. The cliaracier 
of I he result is only what wias predicted by the writer seven years ago. 
when Dr. Kaltnus confidently predicted the demise of the beam-spUttsr 
CBtneni. How anybody familiar with the theory of colour photography 
could hare imagiiiEd for a momeni that it was possible to get prints 
from negatives extracted from a I6*mm, Kodachrome film which 
could compare with direct separations defies imagination. Even 
” electronic ” maikii^ would not crack thb not. The film was *' Eng- 
lisli Village,’' the first British monopack effort. Cutling say* that they 
included a colour chart for every shot, An tiltra-violci ubsorblog 
filter was used (Y-l). The film In this instance «cms to have b«n 35- 
fitm. Kodachrome. since a Vinten camera was employed. 5lmull band 
tests w^re processed m Harrow, hut the main film had to be sent to 
Rochester for processing, Einishing on September 12, no rushes 
were available until December 3, when a black-and-white cutting 
prim arrired. The colour pilots did not arrive until December 31. 
'‘They were surprisingly good, though some scenes seemed to be 
on the thin side, wbilc'm others there was an occasional fluctuation 
of colour. Greens were rendered on the hard side, and light-soaked 
whites had a pinky halation. Flesh tints tended to ^ hot." Tlw last 
material did not arrive until April 23. The following August (1944) 
Mr. Catling had not seen his film. It thfiTeforc does not seen) to be a 
very practicable proposirion in England as yet. 

Principal U.S.A, productions on monopack so far have been: 

Thun derhead—Son of Flicka," 

" Memphis Belle.*' 

•* Fighting Lady," 

'* Marines at Tarawa.** 
lo mm. Aleutians,*' 

** Saludos Amigos.'* 

Some Timpatrick Travelogues. 

, “XIV Olvropiad—The Glory of Sport ’* {Parl>, 


RriitrejKcs 

ttiurtiAin. A. F,. ■■ Purtniouea Trtpte-Hcad TTiUttitt»ew!|' Proccso l»r(iK<;tor.” 
imttn. Sot. Xfit* Pfr, fire . 33 (Ant- p, DO, 


477 




COLOUR CINEMATOCil^PHV 


" The PotMKiuiit Trausparetitfy FftKcu Pripjoctktti Eiiuipmeni," Joitm. Soc. 
Mat. Fic. Eng-, ■Ul (June I94J), 3^6. 

Moof. W.. “ Techokolor CnwnwlOgfttphy." Jatw, S«l Mot. Fir.. £p]f^ J(t (Aug. 

m2), p. W. ^ 

CaTUHO, D„ “ ShootinE in Munupact," Brit. Jubfti- P^. (Aub- 11 , IMJ.), p. 282, 


Rcsinae at ibv PriiKipa) Tei±iilc<i]or Printiag PaleD0> 

Ex€XTpif ffuiit tht SpeclfientiitKii or ^rriJiffni^nii by prrwuiiidfl of the Contmlkr of 
fi.M Stiltiontry Ctffiitf. 

E.P, 132,580. Comstock^ D, F., und Technicolor, !91S. 

Coloured light is used in priming which will reverse or tjeuiraliste 
the eSieci of difTcrence in the nioge of film densities in the negative 
(gamme control). For negmires having a hi^ contrast gntdiem, 
printing light is used of such wavelength as will produce a positive 
Imving a comparatively tow contfust gradient, and vice ve^ Thus, 
for a two*colour process employing red and green taking filteni, 
ultra-violet and blue filters may be used for printing the positives. 
The process is especially applicable to multicolaur printing on a single 
fil m in which ihc contrast gradients cannot be equalized by dcvclop- 
menL Wall says [4 j; ThU principle was first suggested by Lemann [51 
and had been in oonslani use for many years.” 

E,P, 188,329. Comstock. D. F.. and Technicolor, 1921. 

Describes the eKposure of two films through the celluloid mill the 
superposition of the two Blcnj by cementing them back to bank before 
devclopmeni. Technicolor used double-width film at this period, 
and after printing ii was folded with the tmagies oulwurds. It is stated 
that the developer is to be pyro, subsequently biraching with potassium 
ferrocyanide, fixing wiili hypo, etching away the soil gelatine, and 
staining tlie relief images so obtained. 

E.P. 204.404. Comstock. D. F.t and Technicolor, 1923. 

Tile imbibition film is mounurd For dcvclopmciii after expos^ 
on a thin nictal band, or backing Steel plated with copper js suggesied. 
The film is cemented with a layer of binding Hiaieriol such as amyl 
acetate and lacquer, and fed through pressure rollers and heated to 
120 F, for 30 minutes. The mcial strip ensures perfect rtgisiration 
witen printing by imbibition upon a bhink film. 

E,P. 241.052, Andrew's, i. M,. and Technicolor, 

Processing machinery for dissolving away the unhardened gelatine 
with hoi wtuer which is ilowttl ofi to the film al opposite edges from 
several nozzles. The hot water has a temperature of 120' F. 

E.P. 263.3,31. Ll,S.P. U677.Wi5. Weaver, E. A-. and Technicolor, 1926, 
The gradations in ihe high-lights ofimbibiTion relief images an made 
more gradual than those in the half-tone piotls by exposure uf the film 

478 


SUtSTRACTtVE 


to unirormly distribuied light, eillitr pieviously ur simuhancously 
with the coatacl priming of ihc image proper. The film may be 
rendcmd absorptive to light of a particular colour, and the unifotMy 
enposLng light may bt of that colour. The atposure to uniform light 
may be approximately the tltreshold eapostire, ami both exposures 
arc made from the same side of the Cltn, ciihcr from the citiulsioii 
side or the celluloid side, Either one or all of the images of a multi- 
eolouT positive may have been thus exposed to unifomiiy distributed 
light. 

E.P, 263»m Weaver, E. A., awl Technicolor, 192*, 

The densilics in the shadows of twbibilio'ii reliefs are made at least 
as great as in the half-tone portions. The him is dyed with a dye 
absorptive to light of short wavden^b, and printing U done wiih a 
light of short wavelength tnixe-d with a light of long wavelength. 
A sharp-culling dye such as naphthol ydlow is used, and it is uiicd 
in as concentrated a form as possible. Quinoline yellow is mentioned 
as a restminer pcmiiliing tltc use of maxLtnuin conoentmtion ol lutph-* 
thol ydlow. 

E.P. 264,369. Ball. J. A., and Technicolor, 1926. 

Printing apparatus for imbibition matrices- The machjnc enables 
one negative bearing two-colom records in allcmaring sequence 
to print two separate positive films; two piinring lights are eoiplo 3 ^d, 
one for each gate- The type of negative used in this printer is that 
obtained with a beam-splitier camera of the type described in E.P. 
194,971 1 S 4 SC Chapter V), The arrangement of the inmeta is the same 
as in EJ?. 349,3lS, 

E.P. 270,279. Technicolor Motion Picture Corpomlion, 1926. 

Dyes for tinbibttjan printing arc highly purified in such a way as 
to remove any solid matter or impurities, so that the dye will be ab¬ 
sorbed upon the printing matrix in accordajtoe with the density^ of 
the priming image, without the formation of seir-agglomeiaiing 
oomponents. and will also be freely imbibed into the reocplivT gclawm 
surface vrithout diffusion and without the formatjon of layers or matter 
which tends to adhere to the surface or becomes detachi^ from the 
printing matrix The dye solutions may be " egg-treated "—namely, 
by the addition of the white of egg or like amphotem: colloid followed 
by coagulation, as by boihng, aud removal of the coagulated colloid 
logcthcT with extraneous solids or solid-forming constituents. To 
the dve solution may also be added a viscosity agent to preveoi lateral 
diffusion, and this may comprise a second dye having relalively low 
penetration or dispersion, and high definiiimi with respect to the film 
lo be printed. Two addilied dye compositions for ted and green 
respectively are specified. 


479 


rOLOI^It ClNEMAUfGItAPHY 


E.P. 270^280. Alivflocl^ f. C., and Technicolor^ 192A. 

imbibUicn Ktlicft ^ prepared by ireaiing iJi« f^ektme Yvith □ bi- 
chroirmtc hardenuLg agent and orgaDic Eicid, drying promptly 
to a firm con^isiency and subjecting it to an devaied tern permit urc. 
A coating may consEsi of, for exampkp a geLiUnc solution containing 
pota5:utim bichnomiitje to lie extent of 5 percent, of the used, 

and, say, about ifaitc drops of acetic acid per 100 c^c. AAer drying 
the filtn jt U unirormly heated over u proJimgcd period, say lo W- 
100" F. The surface of \hc film is then washed to remove any excess 
of hardening agent and thoroujd^ly dried. The beating may be done 
in a heated chamber or by heated rollers, Jl Is noted that the ncduciion 
of the chromium before drying the film should be avoided, 

E,P. 2as.l46, Kienninger, J. F.. 1927- 
A method for hEirdenirig Ihc gelatlDie of ibo imbibilioa blank film . 
An alkali bichromate is mixed with Lh* gelatliic logelhcr with an 
activating ageni an alkali sulphite) and a mEtraimng agent (Le.^ 
arnmonium h>dro)iide)i and the latter is removed to pennit the harden¬ 
ing action to proceed. The restramiog ^g?snt may be removed at the 
time of setiing und dehydration of the colloid. The hardeniag action 
is controlled by the addity or ilkulimiy of the mixture and by the 
extent ordehydraiion und lempetattirc. 


E.P, 300*^^118. Ball, J. A., Technicolor and others. 

Imbibition printing apparatus. The films are fed along converging 
paths and a teturding force is applied lo both films in advance of their 
point of coniicl, so that if either of the films has shrunk il receives 
the whole of the relarding force tmiil U is stretched la conroim lo 
the other film, and Uicn both films are tiubjected in the force- 


E.P. 307,659. Comsinck, P, F., and Tcehnlcclor* 1928. 

This patent is so oulstandingly important in the history of the Tceh- 
ntcolor prewss, und ihc speciftenrion so completely describe the nature 
of the imbibition process, that wc do nol hesitate to rtprini practically 
the whole specification for the insinietion of siudcnls {Figi. ISIA-D): 

Jht pthnilit mtm pnacjm in # JlliWfe 

birt m prtM™ ^ UftiicipIrK plcivm tj^vkiu 4 {rttinJlt}- nf pshsisn ifw ppDhbt^ k 
■tmculL li^ 4i:^^m|niu ‘bllxTK.ifizrQ^ Ji^ wTUnl rrUTf 

rc^ curaplf. b pf ^pcbif la wAwat lb* Cff npw a Obn 

tya* uv fbtnt fibd#. me Imin an lo b« sn dUtktinit of wm^wtuatert wki^ in 

ftU|WpMjCk>a^ 4 |^- wticT* flfH Irtuv^ flVNvEtkU lb* 1*4 fnt n4-<inLnpt} bu} bsMltf »prwiUR« 

AB j™ iortitoc-cTwal iajw trf tbt Hi* rilm, A* 

£^?rnp(fifisviuj iflwca mim h* Ulukrflfemii maA mib Wd CTtmiM nf wcvru^ 

AmiMin lb* f Mibtate *pcuii|iLob 4 in USm -rixiaim nr# ktiM flf WCUnm 

td^vnivan nr tb* #Ad nf mirn[TTHFB^ cr ipiic%vnilnc me Kuiu4tiv iff ibt ota^ 

diH^ tM ^ 4iTmlV CWMT IjMOK, An I U Add* Ur 

tKi*4 « h4r^ of pldq7»« u|»n f ««»flltMK«4 nrir. Ip vtiiHuJc^ajihic vwnw il^diid* i» 
uBpaoLiHwl: b» Um at itw SMWiaJ . tbv Tilin nock vfuOf imnilvnd Ibrbi^ 

wkth w vf » :nifdli Dif ilhr ■itvodi* mid dakna modnl k> UL 4n*b^nnHm iiid mt. *nd 

Tinw i<\ drrtMticHK Hiib icfHTKBim a*4 buMdiir. >^ljilt ikt fi^ujw nvliiu ca Ebc mufu nJoeb 
*b«W^ m* 4r* wbL dtnkdiia ftwa ihidi an fttilrtmr ini^nH^ 

EtH f*R IMi piaaffv> an umpdl ■* ^mn uEKiu a li^nf tttifr oTitidiiTfiJ rn^ wfiidh 
Mfoft M WftV g of IBia cfarncig^nB*- iJkw iqiaB: ihi balftbd ftinr 

■^T-lfctF TTrmM Id inur ilMH Ms *pfla b ■ofOl, 4Ad lUi4flMi nny 

4SQ 



















































































































r-iij 252 ^- -Mm^NiHcry for imbibiiioM printing by tlic TcvhRiL-itilf>r Pn^L-ess. l?..P. 307^h$9, 

























































































































































































i-Hh — Miik:Wi*eL‘y fur t^rlniLnif tw ihc TediiihjLtk^r kVijcwsi. ii W HJT.asO- 













































































































SUBTLE ^Ctrvt I^HnCES^EJv 


adtm ilM tm p^PTBtfcni III ^ i JgJm^iu ApntJiy pn^ja u^ Tl*tncfrtrt IK w 

<AUtiLul in lijw «. 4aiLf?rB£t'^ trmnfp^M^rkvn tna ^ ^ imiv ^kii£:pml«li-| 

ptlfoci re0!>4i|44i3|| Pi 1^ liiw ^nul^l AJIJ llHar iJ t ■ lutiPlS^TnlBl fWlild I 'f IHDC Of 

llimMill I niiui'iply nofil dunoir w}^4jl |iqzEj|in«uloii<t^fb« ifrAm khir wfl ih^Imwe iHtiw 
mmbri^ gpqT=dpQniimg. m At ulipptA Ti> U! infliAttT^ ihretfn'rm] ic[^ Swafc; !■ 

Tlw pRwnl mmtinft prcinnsm liw mr e»ih2* ■ iiJUH tu*ffii Him m Iftwcdswrinwini * 
plufahty of mnEflr 'AKhrii OatHi^lldicll li^ Uw ftYfnl cclmiri In tv pqqifan^^L IllnJ «- bLfUfc film iq?^n 
wlvcla tilt icp]n3aci|iip If uwnlWiil lilt ktttiTni Udifl bi imtn'bidivL rl!^ mcthiHf ftf Bm flvmttMq 
Jncludu llt(Udl> ib# l^r impnflUillUl lik nuiiit pr prinllcifi vJlH 4 MliLEfrid ^ 
ntttcf suipb«:fft>^ Uqjda ffpiu lUc nidia iIhcmT, tariirtutf \h» nofvt vf ihw aatriv IQn 

JpA pT«kfccmTK»d- iiaiEwm. juui iaiil*p#|B niib m pwvkujjly n flhtY l-liut ir^ tw 

4 MdiMably cAbci^ pjdi K^iUiii ii ■ pclm «-lMn Iwlbi Hlmi pie riuztsimd in f mitiidj. 

LhtlLiilWiTUqlk Of ±\PXW^V^ rffiHlETlbi llW blAnl Plhl tlw Hhii nMh -tkcfl HlbCT nod P'LlIl ■ bfitldtljt 
>lri|i opf rdaUWl^- puttuuKO BAli fKBpnRminpl 4iPBnv^ii Uncli ti i. ^cfrtl liEiuiiiii. IPbLiIUc. bctOi 
the um iUim oi tmJrnr^ taMdutk/^ {ltHP«E>Ji imib Alwfib uq [mib 

MW rciiiurina a MiiRcital Uww df o^^rtrie u.i tcHTiIrti is^tautofl «r ibc fpinn iJh immA Tltn 
hi Uk nim hun4^v Mt££a,^M nf tJfe? mttaa pad Mttnff aqd 

iq iFEflilLizupf fc4 wc. E-^> m on mikiizg: multttitUpundl 3ifftn^utl4di4a^ pnsipm dw thiM 
CHTnied tq£m b^hk IhrtMtib * «pcttPii Knn rd il«4 niWt«nlLi3y bdoriekiLt 4hh JuuL ti-diunbi^ ty^ 
f-faxwijfaql Id ptErp^ ip llEp A tbff flrtlL 

"Hi* JTHrtrlf film it vknwlwvilir wittidntTTi fdi*r fafnapthTh ftrrm UHm biit^k inil ntul 
*-’nd piAdd pliftiLiich D BftfQiadMiEiV'" tolildtXU ftpl II iD 4 hUtffio’p M itFttiTTfiif tpc ify* fhd dyw 
■^luiiafr cpinrk^r ilNTfrimia «n4 l^viiit ili« ifjlifn Ip i4iiu4k fiir Djibti^aDnt i^tar. U 


ay I_ 

r«[ifac iibnmtirbn lo ibii«ntracK#rtd^ At miwbinr fpt ttirv Id btriirx- 

Tlh abmhduipCllit iftrnAiP liacioddttbfrMqirtfln^l DTiwi^nisniiif nnfml'm dT«ttnv the pti mine 
of Afiiq by ifiibCbHiittt, lEMOruny ttmmim ^iKtUnl of ■ iPtlfii Alitl, rbtBJM Tvt 


nipmt lo 4iKii H:^iit+ Iwcupt nmni hw ^navcyim vm ittiu niitat m Kuuthufciaa chttmuu^ 

tHiitiHiibifi ibjnuiK «iipncobHl paih Bi B oonliiliukia mRM bdit\. mwird fm b e m a iit ttid film 
hVExhir igtd^ Um bqckifti:. mvintfjM Iho mu la viii^h o^nb«nftd nlJl'Initiltlii iluwcEh. 

in £:(tVitdcu p'*i'li^ by tiUank ijf liJ^ lluflilllH inhlor EnriLniblu;t and prailei^ixiiiieid ^cMtll kj 0 , pmiqB ftit 
uilitH^tpqiii^ ^410, uuAHC k-ir mpanuiiii. tkactbUMlJiqu unii’ie, JUid 

dryliiD ilw Qulrti tiin,. pjhT raiaiu- Siiff At nurtnlUc btili 4xi- ibeimt^ ^ cJtcuiE^ Muiu ^te 

lilMhc pTLiTkmd fvr tfuriiq^Qt ilu saitit Jifld bUink Alim ifArn wnm^Lkm fnm |bc ihmUfb 

Af f irjsErqim rt m utJlibdy nniiUitd di-tE oT Apetti^«» MiiimilhMl h BiuV'kllt icfiKatm muTcntnAi tu 
^nUfZP 41pcM ttu fiJlta wllfiMU dbmipdrit 9€ wetrilll iJm opmn Dt pErpi^Uine Imtmuz liqzk:, Midjst 

Aka- Mt liK>tihk 4 wbnvby Iw iMiiMiftft apsm ftu; lamt Aim bbink. miy b* tirAPtd 

mr ft QUfTHiiiipim MqudooB id' PpeiWtiDrvu 

^ lypkKl ftilBftfLtinci Df Ekt* tflvtiktlKql wIRbt 4pvAtd infA Tqfnmn In ftp; primifig i:^mi-M4ffllIld 

fpprqdEciviiiB v^n. troiwinninl dwrunnpapbit filiiu^4 ^uttfic mnbodiioftii} of Ik* apfiararpi ihtftfcv 
Tmfi febtwft In Uit U BJimni ayiHg dmgrtEnk it nhufi I l-ift 252, A-^ k 
F iik I If ft kt^wftl ttdt vitw iHfw if \vur vftiii irranftB in panlkl; 

Re- 2 h ■ ilupftmmftliic traaWf U Rii-1 bw Au^fid, hflfi mrita ffof |wttii[ij|| wttfi **« Pfi4 
ifra ftt ihbHfili nttaram^ in iiifqT0<;4Hl pfffiBmkhn. Kb* wml j ppJ djkrina tW ^« 

Hftb 11 ‘vkftftd In Flfr I biiri| niwd mbtm LhAr ri*i SKmi dydiBi foil 
rat- 2 b Ip ft {niniUbtLmry wudl Vkw iht-Biof Ud pul bq!k, fitmi lixij iPHut* rplli hi laniitailiiuU 

ACtbpi 

^ li B la^ntm BK^tkmt of the flliatt ih4 litli? ^ ^ 

I 1 k-» Jfmitnctiiify dcuU ivtb of thi J!liAJi^liin>il itClkm vT At imMbvIjq iirpuim «t tViupl 

I 

4 ■ 1- ItiipaqqEaJ^ pKliliilE^ ftftd t^nthnibig: flblli Ihr Itfl-liuti ikdiaf Jf i^. l! 

Rl- 5 iif p lup utliiLilnBl ufEitLiil. Lif CEie ixar liE jjaen 4^* lank, ju tiDlbid ftriin Int wmmw witll 

rtAfMCt t.j JHl; J- 

ii H ft t4mEk'<v;4m ^A ifit ttd tiLd tnmi dy«i iBflkA Ln ltd pkiiii nE Ihi* ti—4 4^1* Fkt 5; 

Rl- f k 1 lupBRUidlftftl wtLftl »ctUm laf tiiai imi or 4srtt tan*. ■■ i-mMil m tl^, 

^ t n ftfl tad dT tmih Utda frmn ilw tij^-iHctd-u^ of 11<. 7 im Re. I K 

ti k Bnuilifvpd IvmtlliHiiitti trwU^ Uu tuinr uftfe iw iMflucL tfumher m In 

Tie,' m u ft* *od dkEfttWiH yirntid ^irrm lilt cieliiAa:ii4 vide Fk. 9, 

Fkli 11 n ft <j| j B ^ pcctiijui iiid vji« DTI, Uftft 11—4 J Ht '4 hf (hi ^ i-V j itrrp-t; 

^ 12 U ft Thw on Ikn* ll—12 of Fii <i; 
rJlt^ 11 n ftll paid vhHr Df p EUihT-Oi 
Rfr l4 ki ft ivni(»J pterm ibifoqpli Fift- lit 
n. 15 tri ft piftft nftw 4]| flat buiMift chilli 
14 k ■ rtd* tkyftilDft mr Fte. l?i 

F^ 17 !■ i ykft mi 17—17-rtf ^ „ 

Fk It *1441 inlttriudi ftBfftiloci: wlimi ^Dfi: iBOft Fie 11: ^ 

F%. L4 n tn CnjJ. ckvAlJalT of «)# KlHli fftm Ap ritl'^^hlLJAd jJdftpT fkt> 45: 

30 ■ ■ Abtnikd wnlml Mmimh im Iki* 

ric< 2l: lb rui pqiffttlRd rfftfifWIftliy fiftw bf ciatiDftJiM IniliicaijBtl IIT Tlek I bP 4. iftdOdldl |.l>f dECfDfidO- 
umc imd dotft Littu,. tbi diryuii nemulidl iiid MiBf^triDii-iiiitt Bnkt; 

Fje 3lu lift iilpft nirt ibf ikr>ipitcendu^ 

11 k B vW of iht or tftbeif«ttUTiat 

2J b ft blfi« rlftft CHf Fke 22: 

21 k * WTEiad E>r9 IJf* 14^24 of Vfi 23i nmt 

F% 25 b B knrviuilJjLiJ Kttofl tfOt of Iht mil^'l id dvc UM ftw «4ikb tbi matin 

moiBL 

Mrtwin^ Id lb* ^ jmI Ti, ctw JumAtBiia UlujiniMl liicliMkft rmi uaiHi (k imd 


2h 


4SH 




COLOUJt ClNEMATtiOHAPliY 


tmnM iQ rpt3t40fHfa^ for ibe urjumi^iI. iM<xxM^K •inT* MiAk tihn 

latp -jkn W 1^ d^E (l|J uiii lly q ♦rl4Jl a firi^ ^O}, llwTFtfly pnwtfdftl a contplti* ^a\4i iKfi^i- 
diKtipfl m tla^f iuifH» Mff litu sonuticlwf EUiH i'tt J ilwm H f)di: l»fe% Jliua ut llM :£|i|wliiiu«, fh« r«d^ 4 t^ 
uni! jR) btUS ifn ftaUii. «r}|Bi: jin I'll. 2^ tt ^K|ftfitlmicic nb|i^. Ihic uflll I.R] is iti^Kid u 

diielohc tfxi uaji I ilKHtMulfid ud iIm {u:ntlEi Mdufauahfp ol^ jttroi wticf 

gf qMiliQCH In Uh Iw kUiiJi. 

TSe IttWyt kttitt <ft> turnprlpp ffUtnllv a. iCiK-1.L4flr I, 4I1 h 1 BWliU U«^-dsidhJ 

EMHIIjEb f4jr bi™^| EUm t* bt p^tisADd 1 ima ipfikmln wieJi U» Hii-E^ihni mBtrii lilm ^ 

^B« fflUwPTlIta, IH tHJEIb bu -cntitDirt lJpiu 4 i||i 4 in OiiWUJh* t^Uir UTMni fiir irparattni the FfJrtwl JUlTM y ttd 
IWMU UM litm to M 2 u tIh iWE-d^nul unit IGI c^^iTsurnini c^drutfwe -f, *ljtii ii lit^popS 

tminUiA UP mmi uluhvtititulU ]Anikai l4«4Jnaeim« I, Actd ttaati* r^t t£a:Un^ l||if wfrtiul 

4 men^iwinf iruttn ilyc 

TAfrtiRlt imiiii£uin94iJn4’i»f *rHlbT| 1 li£ falAi^ ji[tnitfr pnnlB^Vttufi U ■ kmK wvUx isink ft. uird 
omMjni, wdh dje Iif* T, ifiw ^irtUfli W djreini ttw irwliic iklm. Mean* acb aOaa provkhil lA^iiaiv 

aiH flKi^te Kmi rE’^ikurErinied iwi4*Wj tbr dyir wfE IimiIII l/raEOT "Wtl fttip WftEftfc ilKKHSiJIft 

1 wun -with Sbskk pMUfiSfi R HIkI tPp vdjpKd 1«> lttCiu4 itae e^itiEinuLPui trtrui b£l| 11, 

luid^^tiM fijiM 2«.nd X Til* b*h n (i pn^bir it iTtni ind fkaibta hm miiwii itiip 

ci^viiuerfiiJ^ muat nf POD^uerMHva md iwn^nsniTPdibk mphd lueh « tiii-btiltd ii™i. Yhir 
mbb*f™«fTKi puripNTim ifiK^urd la Ewdiw ihe hnid< ^ntf ctidt tTjiwEiftclT of 
tbn } I* {Fi |4 , 20 AfU3 2fr}. 3FfHr VUnrplAt tbt loip itl»¥ bo M{i|;iicnirTiu.t 4 lv O OOJ [«•« tfaiA ■ijJi 41 

JHJOl ipu tMpit or i|A p4f< eai^ii lidh S4^™j||hi,-MkW baiapH^t^ plat* U ‘ HJB uryhuecd he «&:Ea 4 ida! iCLUiftS 
liimnit ftttd m funlkct eowfi oIcbiI Uk lunah-iKlLitu kaittrtku ti du onp but «e«i;cd 

Ijlc 4dp0 (r«i. 2a and m Tlw p4hi tia (antebiy rtmmlpd 4 I huE pIj aiihL Mth- 

ittnliiWr pinikt m|i«:kfl> rijiiK«tii IP Eiffir mk. Thfl pin mail Im **JdM| ut uldcnd 
^ 2rt u4 lilr, TUi* Ml i I h anriiod Uiffauih a dhiwd cinrvtdE o^cr u Pttlka 

* ■*« flypfhBalf «w: ipf ilM LituE atid 4niwrimPI> ^oiEtanini fpulljiyjt VI uod l-t, and 

iwdcr Pupy i i (obiiticm^ in UMk DX Which cnMPW ihf nfcruH ihUr ^ a ‘beti. ‘fht ptiti itmj rai Uw 

J£I0CUh U-dl^ W CSCIIl wndtJU^tll itf itw ptni -nf ClOf B3LI^ Bl L'lHj-hmfiwuHy lof tilwi i niipj* ll^ p | tijw 

m lb nii mniwWy ^ lb ilLin. 

J^4« s« ptaTidaj fktt icpualitiit thruFiEd WfD ffiiiffl ilw fUin mtlm i iHid Ml 1|, it^bjiliitf 
palk^i I •m miMi I 3 H, luid fat fiivacrwv^ Wm nairw J fham Uir bfit 11 , imdi ^i policfft 34 wp* dh 
hEkp p»m hied Poc iMtiiqp dJe wt^raued fihw fco d^-KKwsriaJjiit nisiniv an^ swUiitf iIk «jiiie, 

miy ref fo-uw. IhK niean id tb« iUuiuau 4 ciph«limeni truntMO in Ewim iha JtiHchbw 
a^ lu teiEiii * dra^afaiEtJjtg 141 *J r, a rifi™ tuik ISp a JwrijmiiaJ 

ckaiouef jiad a vonicjl dr^nnu c&ambia: 5 a. « 

WSaiuJ Li^ G ^|D IfbJeh ctnwLrt of tht Jilf* jVifV Ut iadicaud bj lUtp nuiocTah prapEmlJ luu a 
MiDd ULdk for pptAiad hiimh HJnv 3 tVnm tlw itak fl, bimI h d^^uiil: 7^ 2 ajuf f!! far ih^ 

|^n’4miii| iftuEvi idm 5 Mowifii by n^lilEt» 22^ ^anilnaiiii ilw Rm ifvrwiMh * tupp^nuhair uttih; 
^ tavmB waui ihcH^ 2r roaiuoofid tb rmn i iti wc wiih vtJ¥ai 23 fFlt 3). Thi*a tanki trt rotlawod 
CI^JIiP3rAcnsmi£i|HhMnliBi4idiHawiUf ufik^.HiiibpqQeyaEii^, IV*p ll'. I2^ 1*^, 

ImIi JJi:—ndaianljitQy wjjft thw dcKiiM wiift rafiHVfln tfi TR^acU 

I nmini latalu 17% M-mi deviRt charntm |ti^* 3B^ Kapa^aivHj. 

IJI r-w d/yl^ di^lpcn 20 , 2 D’ auEomnlia mcstfll foe tairiJonpsi amd lakim up ilua rtuthrix Hlim aftf 
itii iB pbO , at ihfl noalEkv^^- diiivn raelt 2ii„ 2 t' for ial|i| 3 | iip ifw drkd mauu iUm 2 aiul 5 p whJ 
iBiuMPu wciftlikt if ^ an NMpettdad ^ PoEim wpaa frw U»tit H iIm HIdl Cafritt fads, 7 d and W 
m hmuii^ opyu i|bi ccarniKm fnaeJeat JI at ITw 4tilif yad 4if tl^ wdu R and O ftf ib* WiLEEW 

^1 ^ ^ A iiipiily itdTcir llu Mbd% RUa ta bt jidEitid la nwwiEcd al JIP and: ■ lahu-np 

^ ^ ai 32|. A4iy7fe« Ih* anarii rwli iQmd W *iLikr rodi il* 

hlltn Wdy* ttt J) 64 uaotuih^ flu: ptfr^dnit a IU 01 ia aa^iotni llu mirlrii: fllaiE ipi u».—hniiOl hnik^ 
BMciiaiito jEftndi ft riitiEi^ly ncwldcd «i raab Jft. 3V bui bin tboiiby cwTipriauii a lr«r 312 h*v\wm 
piu End 21- bwtryc npod, U« peripbifj' li of thE f dcJ hub ilw -uihaf tzul lia-ntit a H’ilna H «jtir™3 

upon as fifhtaElnB pSa Mi. 

^ ^hd»N?iini/of cffrttbu Ui* aci4ctifHiiin(M*i wtMnpartbe tualri* 

baED ffnen r-etl Ja |.‘a-iili m r^it'dya lo^tilionl Euefa. ai a [iMlky J? and tuik 7 haMlAa ab ciuler thdl 11 
Ity a i^utfiHUiAlud hoik Inw tMW*4 vaH- 1 * and Ibimt BiiidwJ>a «i! 

40 m msui G trllt- -in Sw ^ ' n-raJ *V 

W fttit ttpt.^ IwEndmAi Atwlo kusm 42. •Wb Ihc tonV* » ahd ^ a« 

AfNfp *1 HL UTTN iMJi juii^ iimit *2a, uhich uw patsUd t* and *tnvm EEm> Unf ptfr; 

Bow of injna m u tnn hfi«| 10 the ^^tatl BUtlplA 43. Abm lb* Rwh 4* etk isfo^iiWl 
l^ibBiwtli wuppufu 43 -+ 4S% r^dl hav-btj hAtiunnE-.ii jBfkDnbnri. 44 reulvtl fluDict *4 *«# itytkai 
urohsm uri^u^ fhr a ama of |iulk]>a 47. A Euniltr Mxiai oT pulh^A 47n cPOfWHiH anil affwt 

imh 4 ^ the ipt afie mtnnnad m ih« l«»wr part .>f ao^ii tmk. I^Brti pificj (Fib- 23) hMi a eylin- 

^ an4 Bs*d EUnan 59 with iiHaFfnedlau uhbt 3i Biiipinlio and wc'pwt eIm tdipEv 

• g™ f** wa IJw rwom-- Fh± patloif k nuHiBiNl lalh* aodi uporv bforinai 5 l bavins khiJu I pCdaw 
u^h 4ro mafwd in mical TMtaaa 54 upgo Ehc rcidi of tha ehui fi xnd boU Ja adiHawd 

Pi^vkn by iiN4pw«Fik 5fi, pulfay iunKTiKtino rtHy bw uud w oUtv ftai^ «f tbw at ^p m a im 

Tht mito lacScri ^ ifa* unk 7 lb oonmad lo a w i t a hr a wn^ of wainr mpo 5T B.u!tundkd 

by iTHfye 5i> ouitafE 39 OQttittklfaiii hy valve Ai'i, and an- owflkiw outkt 3^- SlH^fa raw 54 it UkmiHW 
^^***ri *“ hH^iRl wlw eZ, and an oufdn pifM 64 oanwisflod by r*!™ dS bihI ovirilow 

*4. A urpknaiBaiaiy dn n U and vjiw F7 ww 10 wiihdfBHr Iha Rpb akin Jj k IP b# ilktBnkd 
¥\pts 6U bA ap4 6bpm mnMialL iba util oAd. iidu mA 1* and an wiitaNy Utamd hy mvOun Btid nuU 
6^ ». and 70. CkvM-dyf utfii AdkpKrridcd nfth knnilJir cmMecootta (f i|. 5>4JL 42^*43’. *4% fcf% 
64^p and 47' napMJatbr. 

At ifaa ajik tod of uaA tFifep. |, Aand 7| nffinka 7l AuUnapmin E^ooiwMad sit kw 73 an 
imnntid on ttUbef lida of iIib natm film 5, a4tkn m aaEHbd upon Pullen 71. Ti. iml 75 bl 

oofukdi 44 and i^ki a niir of orwanRy dHveuJ wbIv uquIh 76. JJ 11 1 f be kiur 

mpibf flMi (Hffc lit*71 irhfkii nvvjAim klit wunr lankT 7I» naukv?^ 
*" 40,1 IhBT^ 1 costed 12 and bof EE^nlyf b|»CRU 7 v 

43 ll mM fl^ llhf nrals ^fnia thft3^J|puipMia.54 wUkh w an -t-pcinnc A oippotll* 


BMik 1| lo eatch Ilw vaiB i h a a eftos j acyl 
wtkk hai B Jiirp^ar o pw wif 40' lltii y *H ' npic 
laatl ibnwpfh iltar«(HPffiias4MHlEt S^. 

4tl2 


Flpa W Mo±dy T7^t BL- 
□ppoErta tirok M a«d an nk pCpc 


-t-pnniiE pi Op^Otr 

- Inmn^ bAann: 
Eaii pvit VT ia»d 



KUBTHACTIVt l>R«lCt5SES 

fw Pid ctwitKi bfEwi iW fitoi 2 hhI J aihI mmM ll c^apivt of a 

pdUfty ¥J 111 * uwi. I, ■ Piir gf apfHHi4 ££H»tBHwiM roUfn Vi bUlI (Tl*, tfw lotLif 9Z 
luni^ rnQoiHwl in bK^iw «ndv«h| jn M^tkikl giiklM 44 ind! ^-itA 

ypM iJh ind * Moud t™lr campewiJttti rrilflii ID 

#fth iho ttrti mert (hot tiK BpiH »fef k lliiflj *iih « belt 44 cji*f p« Dd;^ 

im Uw ftn» 104. Tlie VAta UtL. 4 Ip wtikh ilmt *kuuiti momifd ^ iiu pmid^ %iib «»lnk4 
tmwiy lot. -a iiiuirt im. and i dciii« w lai. i™i« vur 

1-.^ tfi» tb* UffKt^enKa lUm 2 ftEKl 1 fcfid rtsMl 

huBd Itl iMd^ la lolffia. 3! thn.^ n, «iehn^ tUtt lOi wbJu^fi n rpUnwd 

« hs^ fl pxv prTsnta IDT, 14^ (Ow Uibrf bfffig IPIMIICBI HP J*in± 104 imd mwd lawd 

dM DLtker b:r liO Rdinsifsf by krw |]||, i IhJi JI2 mv rf>lki 109 *iM nlw 

«n4 aUdUiaml iPBirm<if ^nribiwliib « fDuid* mliin IUJm— 

2!^ TIk ehjin^ lOf k iMniHifd dnJnut 4 «cIm |T4. Ej^nndim fWsm cbajadMr 

Jfll k EP^i^Tvfdpl 4 KNi4nni|r 114 {Fi||. 4> oijwikifti flf *£l dnjjj* ipxn fnmwprli ui *ftirfri*frl uj^ 

12 iFtg, 2i uid iciiHning tv Ow BotniDiMicniJ of IIH tirol <?m l-li Th* 
bill MlHp of tiui j:B+dew»y 0* TOrtilidi it Jqft (>{>« Aod tsHvidiHl wMTi lUttHuc huKu 

coiumv^ mtiuncv «kuD«]kt> \M iwunmi in ihemti, of im 113 ir{^ IT Hiwf III t>% mm oi 
wc«d HPr^io- Tfi* lattcr«nflii| of l-fhipid Ivv^tfil iHecw 111 teiTln (be mi(frkj.y | l^fFifaL 
If lod I7> kiy KKW4 119, tidKl utAmii 120 luriitt tihn 111 r«¥ luilk \21 PMilm Ehunchiia^ 

«rut ftdiipwd to uu^^/fKTtt ibn >EnjicAl thm»<rf mliLa m Ofhw inwUaiJtt 123^ upon wbicb ibc rnktuS 
•kmwii IT? «t pippoftcd by Ndnp |WHd Ibioin^ iBiul4t«d iporrHOf# J55, ond heW in CJEleidKl 
pw^D ty rnniUM imiernf hi|R IS&w^K^liKHkd dam 1?^, amd i:CTniiKtioHi lift kndlu W ■ 
toiiiiiHt loimcA Ofvurwiii Tbs- hoiliw uttkt imO ua tbe ■aiilntny' of undult i l4 stpe^oled 
rwrti AM mwotach uMttiitBd apen mu vuib mm fbwnamffkllfi HihlWituti I30<P^ 12 4 Ad lAj. 

^ lon^idted 4fl tfl^iciwJ citcnii co(pne*p!H^iini t* twUi MF Oie 
11, f£iid4wiy 1 1 ft imcdK jp itf r psin <tf nncfc i Hd nlumbc^.eaaipHvini Urn unw 

cbiuib«n |3I I2> hdvbv i ifonri L |4w ^IniiRr ciu^Qlw 111 Minv-d tbfl tiw« tbacnbM by 

Vr puTUioat l3<jk wrth pipy* m judinf ttJa ttumber ill JW iffrtailiifcna a zoiilfBr vr Ivilini 
«wUum ^li lii iMlP? Ebwn^OtitlL T!» inkitvny | tf tbtif far*^{fig. 4| k fuThiwcuj by shcrwibu^ 
mi tjmk IJ^riTTlb# Dukix IUa J| Mviqgcwtriflee. EKjJIty ifr^biJ txw 13? (Fit 2ll ,a ibtcdikUbs 

fMdl9>_|^,AlMl « Tbfeiiiu tllA liL WlthsCtJWAA^feAlt plilkjA J», l*0i. t«QEb of t4n|(4 IT ami 14 tulu 
'mtd iH«4pr mm And 141 And 141 

Al Ita ciil fl™ MHk ll ihAiT it ^vidcd ■ Wawiag dtvisz tu filpu ZI-24> Fnwumcd on hpadw^ 
.11 ^ ifriiidki t*T IdHl by immr% }44 M ibt mini wnMiiiA a 

i ^4 piaE* bA[tdft |-1 opviral £iprflki?ti! 1^ fiif co nm iiiM'lg a -iaunrev of cnrnnfiHBcl Aif 

tp^ tbflwny, ImAfniAfiAN: of Hk l4* And an vpw^ Akte of Ibo flim > m wLiviiiW « pw trf 

Jjjbwlnj filafflJw 154 TO tiiA Mak* I5I braerr** 1^71^1. HN^afAiid iAiuidmi orvnnvfm 1541 
*9^ ^'i| «™™i»d bj A |imr of nanlkt iriAnirtTAae ivbe* 159 ipiMcd iptn In tjnmif 
itbiwfwwcrrT, i$f 1^ 159 tpm^iirtvtbe cItflMbm IW nf bolb 

1^ TM irn-Tiovfra lubcAi 159 bavi loosiEudimll ihlrlA 142 in r mpu ^ d rt^oflioiiikip itmJ dirHietl ai 
S ^ tipffiwd fovoi df kbn fllrrr3. Tbi: I H k fvtlaw«4 |q luoccHion b^r d^irtl dtAntbAn 

IV^ 2fl Ij ilM-dj Inpa dpiCtfUd, 

*l! ® iiwf iOl foF amlim tiw floidktA bdi JI nrs ibpynnd apari upmliii 

iifO did^ oiuiiiitBd In wnEcil lyiirt^Ay* 163 md tenl lo Iw raowd upHtatilly by 

IboJ^OKR. ngf BfiBtltiti 16 J tTJg. 31 i±|A|iiB«l Ki Ibc ah^ cf tlw C«d 1W i^hkh il paA^ ovRt A fwiltny- 

A Int^ntafliikJ noEHlLifi lit (rijp. 2J aiUIIIvI ktdkkji 
iSk*W?S^ ' *1* * blnwEt iiuud im fatopdoM poll iJir e tt nu m tiLAimber tv ^^opciMllnf 

*filrti fi|i^ III tiKif rArtmT Midi ima dsiotbin 30,11 ^ fwpwmAly. Tb* ndo^xtn 

r?!? fF]|_ 2 hi tJifvibd* iba ffl™. bn ubsArvn^l 
i*fih ftio^cw dcMW, d«Te»cLi£4ihm Unix Aftd dnirt hm bm ik-crtind 

flagte oeqpcnM pt^fiArAiTju vnf mdta fcldA h fcnwallv deHinited A lnFi|^ 2 
PFimint«iScblwilidye.Nrt ba wJfl NcrmJSAtppnjwnfroniO h dnkwhrvti. 
i^cmllcTfca, iPw Cfcjnww ef Uhi Hfc-ottd pitkA bwitav udMiipiitiftny idAnckiKl mih 
lSu.£jT* hw *fl3wi™ liu pmAJisf 4?f iM hbpdt iti pvpi fFflm Map incn nutu m ainmdy 

1™au Si btMiuflflw Ijfl bt tiAiaibcsi Tbp <oi|ipspoiKiirej pArtf at tlu AKond Mrim pf ArrmwAl 41* 
lUInatf Ab AB OkOX of lip* fi«|. hill SVdfMd. 

^ * PMllitipiary tMU In. Map apei-aJMXi h.^TiIIM' iXHIt^rMiuA. In bt- nemMoy *«■ iiP lb* * aw luii.A -6 wl 

dlBaklinn uf Tipier, pfiifafsh^ oiauiUtirxd At COttlUIQ I pJ ii p y t A tU fC 


I^MkJSftragfc by 

223 10 ib« mma ^mttt If ind 'tifvnfwin ftbawn) <ofitn?£liqg tba 
wiw iii:m3H 2ft,. TT am oMMd .r 


by-Twni of ifav tnUfy p^pni 175^ || it aIav nooemuy u\ flit uuikj lw jn i__ 

141 indoutkti 142m*.id TinbpMl^tb«ds*lan^7 


t-o*apfTM[3] Air |4 Iti Mia pipe! TZ, ATid An pkBctnc emnirt irnmd UiraugO bMliii* oii|« I |2,.irfvqjueed. 
Pfiraun 4if wifAbit ptopv^hMn u Kt lift And nuMEKMd In i3^ i>*Wb ^aoKud u lA* 

fP(Wk^4 Iv in* obnmbnf 14*, and ■ bj\tp«dic pmmim tbftfiuilt tal^K 133 fa d^imibAn |5i kua 
In 0 pf^Hoted of pmewfod Hifiply <4 waIv fotr Uw ponKM <if conniWi. IhroHj^ 
^iTHw 123. Ruan noenmeif Ut c^snuroli duoi untparoiAH cnadtucm duraia ily bn]i£bliuMiu am IlkoMH 
^ t .1 ItnM 4 Aitd ftl bMy bo itopruwiriEbnned tb* WAiir h lai^k- 4 k ilM pn^wiily brnmtxd or 

iPlM pTvnieA pf i|x roeMicd nf itu invemJatk by imoni nf IIk Apfuniiu thkkk JIU«iyAtftl And ^ 
fMd-drM) Kim 5 pond^ilHi OImHI MH MAI 24 It flfM Ml IB piiu op b^kAI 11 A^ Lb 

■.Ixly £l*r 

24,^ 

ipftPL^d'lEdifcri iit iL* MMUTA e^beSm w* pMmm§d vmt a wkt ef mpkei^ 

■Pl» JfPQtift^ AWny llw inirabtAl EdglA tii lb IftW ttWsatIf described, 

kn pAAiing aid Mi* ptiUm bm Uta film nr eonpgiHpatriEV ■* tbe ^am arh bi^ uttui Mae 

taniilAi' ihouad^r^ ?| fp%_ jjj Mue kamny bciMi irf ttat AtlrrmnditBA xht Uemt, nf tbi 

op«i taji nrati^t ^kb ilki MHtadFoloii tEipdimmIEiiUud nr (BROiAk bohI pvI ol hteIi iim 

PmJtA III Eilc. opiMi rmftal. 

bp|l It it cbAMclts^d by t^rny k^pi^inaib n4«^ftlswhlr bid ikx|llk bihI ptuvulcil mini 


■^3 







ttjivLicb e 
nniiin ibi 


pL i Mrtfc i M p7Pii^f^ i-ift] g' |itiiA ffiMrtlrtii* dl1 ffw cnp^n|| Ibt fUlfix Men fet ■! llw 

llie -Mil kA Him s.«ntis««f ito-«lil|, li «#« AdiMced wwlcf il» pi&tky 9t. 
Rlnt 2 rkA 320 i» H»n ^ ttwraqih iflUA * downwariPj^ j^Jiabk unI into rtrit^ 

w%T\i Uf^ Rhw X 111* pJm upon ^ bdi |1 wafw^ Tl^n^ 

muirii firm 3 ti*hqr lUHicicmly tin* hi Ihc i& dwi^ llEoi 2, l^w 

lu KifciriK Mm J. ind blant fiSni 3ara iMtf hdvAfixd kha pxlf uf coniiai^iiifM 

l}Hn« btTWOT thm mi^A tfc«f nf UlUcil lO. itw bftH 9* twiM of «Klli 4» to HI« h«w»fl HIk 
T tnrfy ral oLm TiEwitk4 MjKin iN ftrTJbh: b^lr 11 and diBt td forie* life Mm* into iflitimtip cpfitoci wnTt 
ckAi iMi Imimaie twrtiiST if^w ba ■jirtaq.tombv prcKrrpd bt m tlw iMqriria 

of Ihfl in- llw lUim ttpon TM PIM of tlif cnaini butk upail whisi tlw yn jnJu4m. _ 

fi(Mt|H 4 ili Ifiripip IW* riMsed ilutijdk jjwmtw l(H ioiocbfltoNx ^E]5+ [n irhkh « p»m 
CBdimtoiUjoTcriitfn lor—iw, iotm— 10^ ri'i#. Jj, Uk™ over tmaiin* win iit ^ 

brtkWM puikn ll>7i:^''IOiD |[4|. r£l finm llxn nJnn^ to ibffndfli eIic Milt bjrcunitull 

Pftniiift o«* iht Uk inUlej 12 xr| lilt ciptndu rf Ihc ipemtoi iurf htoiis »th# i^sd. 

tlffi ila itita bkjfil(Th Hfcwnud fFomWand itnrtrK 3 br uwta^i>vTt puQto? Jbl. 

S cooAlaii I67 10 duunihtf 20 ill irmy br E^Bd ai ihn or, n* plwwn W rnh ,r- 

bflswowi nih^le roUvra. ip itwl ilmiPilt wwiff tuilC md IhWO* 1 (^ 1 ^ a lulmu^^r^ 
ppih in tb# MMitd oe (rerH-dwHii wUI of Hm; BEiWMliyt Jn boocikM wHh ^ ffofo-iftwsif 
mtlrU^lip finallj hi f[tLh£]dElf IMl 12l«) , 

TJM tuaE^ lliw y U HparRtpd f^oiiF Lbc OeIi hr nultlf #¥tf HuEIJOa I4|. llmto^ lotOi flw dKIWnnatt^ltll 

It. imifc* |teiD*if IJ?, pulley S3S. urjer PiOlet* 1-W aflil 140^. and nvgt i£u fint paH^ 

I4fr tsrtwm «ir S«^ R«to tuta 1?!* It i*fc 22. »p nfvrr^ np^ twSl*/ H* 

laxfitocdal (ms™ cluEob^ IV into ioti^ difiUf duanbcr 20, unlutnlc ■piLlI^^ **“ 

ihiflfatoil In 2. Wa£|liu2? art iiApendol alto It »ftfPlOi /loiyito dpcni IMy dipoiMlioi 

icKtpi th» Mr b^Kiw ihc lixEd IM ilryifii fhgniiVT 20 to Trtiin i aln toOiMJi mbrih UMrtMk. 

Tb^ Wt& *0 upmk nvi ^.' ,, , 

Urn ilnibii l*li 11 r^tLtos* to ih» lAflilsixt^Nst 4 «hIw IWllir l l- pMRi our ihe weaipiiHa 

rulky U aMnodef |l^ UitllaT U i(t ^Awfiiir toiklr» 

A. 4iUiubl*-Kd of mJ-twampe dye ipfcipipHi i *ijctw lufp^^lltal to dye toni W laflrt- ibHatUnfli aad a dfiRt^ 
die pTtJitoiii nmtrfi liEin ^iia blunk iilm liiTRigll the apfutotfti to liai iltociHbedl bt opwR 

V*lw 61 ^nd fnbKqiPtiflkly ntd^-liip to* ntott: hr ai -to OlhlOtJdn * aii^M *3 wfiicb R 

to-ntoJ afuir t^lm to aPTOR o™t(Ertrt1ii- TT» cretoHtye ts^A 40 m llltowlM j!? 

|pRcl-cb^ lOiuiJi^ii wLMi ii tlwTenOn ‘mwlaidd la a timabar RsnmR frlr ifljiwttni 

TbaWlt r| iaito^ dihtothiiii*fti M»ile™PeO(ni!«Erfi bo soUiJia accuaileHijof toepi^ 1^ 
drMn nnKbanton I* dto fitto idhJ friikb imoy be adwartBgBWHb' ■yotiwitnuad wto+ ^I4fly I Z 
iAlhniJi^up Ltii fnitfia- Wirt • flie ttocr rally "ht c4iaifnlwdv iWcHtopte, liy citotowwiii of tte 

Oliu 2, iftar IW¥in| ibe heH li, iiuo be dRvn ttoPnih IJ» tnfcwniwrtl iRVi Tlmiiili 
aopuatofc by leiRimw nlMto Of itottH* toti tf emm oalutw onbr h ip te Itaira^ 

ttm pctohU totiiiiiu^ may bt iknv^ aHrwLly tn ilie RtoOd of (pean-dtjrtiin umt and werpWi«^n 
by ibf aantRl iiptrAdn* ijriUfi ^tppaiakua hi lb# fwnc mitoRT to in iJia Itnl Ppcraiioic wtofli m 4 [‘HT 
hoea dcMTibed aaid bnatly ruikd u/i upon rad. >11. . j 

ivipra itfhsuihi Iw Uilv Riiiner lii* aim irl^nt 21« itortdiuLLiiiily drjiffl Ihiiiaab ibe riwUpk • 4^" 
ihiu toEHOtoillllf wtntA. thii wttdA to arrinn aed abo sdehily vt pmU Ibi lelaimow wodaw^V . f 
otoh W^|i alto^naaEto in hin;zptibUJh to tttt werthit and ahfciFptfcw^JiiiJitoicijitlR WRWrt 
d« toJuikim, A«todm|t!> It t* mhifnHJriji oullb^Etily RH. toul IMlimbAj with WnHf bcfoR M iEHR* 

iflE pjisf-in'Unri A . . „L _ ju 

THiitTi. tihtT n di^nii pfoai f*rl.« atolto dJahc iHitoni. pv(li*pe4 by lb« Aiedop uf beak* 
anlwi 3,1. oteriiitllnr it niul tbw* do»nwtoT*J)r .ind i^jTHaidb Umtisb Ow f«W^ wwtftMiP tiiiMa ^ 
Hy wMi4io«iAadn>kd i,VT¥>iJtfi >iii» f^LUkto. k LbofUiudtlT epd imuoniMjf toitti«a^ 

d^-wlOi. bile- to thK tortkpr pf niaifit lltiiRi beiwHWfv ™ dje tt aJ*ii«nL np™! 

TPBPpectht Mxau Ilf iht fllin ■nbwtwitkJlf t» epitcwcmd to iba dqiR i< di™lfipn»at tJjpM 

kayiiia sba UlA nnf ifnTaaly adlwrinv oia loiirtion R effB(5(l¥idjr tesso^ ^ 

71 w1ta4i OTOH uvO ftomHa Itor^Juf IIh i*rt Hltor T™ film paMRtipoudb 

and downwiTdly betavro lh* ■pppcpRl tli nf arudtf ftofu apcrnnaa 90 and al wteieb thnawnflifj' p oM 
ib» Mm ntid writa oit air lit# nJintm vwvR Umi wbiiib k ^iw^bjr adtortad to 
hiih tbe RPinre nlf tbe nHfiiJM. and dimlopid driKton (jiliiyiiiAT li# ieb«mtoi4l ibrnif pW^ 
aiwniad wilb Ibe fmWw fflnr in pf iuwum dliujtaulKw. Tin Blm ttmn puR» dcrtoiaswidly «* 
waui In Iluaif %. . j ^L- 

Ely tlR HitniRCuia cf Lbe mstm ami blAirt finrt R tR ortumtoalik lii|uid>fTW 
|4 iiato Turi;fOR k p (n i^ail »»Hrt' lb# dja wpiW ^be maini Mad iira3 al Hi* miw to« JW 

iidnbicd w adimM au or air Ndilita nre Mttwwfl, Tlw toWri* keSp and hbuil Ellto mW 

rfwtoiRt ltF iltl'>ffHSb™R ni3ninnW«»iri*.VjLa4iARiFliiR*^rPMR ^ 

an ilwf C0ii4iiiRbi*4 ft* afftotiJiiihii jie toUnnhi ntid Mibnieemptodi ftialaci tJMfrfwfaeettT *bbto i* 
nwiiriiMi dcalraMe: pf /or iiiMiEiny tndidliiiiaA. Acotodintly. wbca tbe bbk 11 *Pto knaiiR 

jalVal!^^ 4 bao^ into mb-ty -nd fltototR ^P- ^ 

twwjTiO i3»tHL# bRmn mwun loflml'. I'l. limy a™ spnialid iwly ^iHnoa tttR of 
nbktdi k ETDrtihtoiy f iwifail l» fhi* efi»ie#«*wi aiipitol 1^ ll» rfdkra Tte mum Jll« w 
mmmtttiiMjf UTMtnrti of aye ibanon elfptfl ab InitoMR waEiiiip ecndtol oirt ita tibn felaaih w^ i EmE 
fiu dy# jHiur be lutoinrniaJly fofnjKkRly i™Atod to lb# Ut m irataDjEtton dtsiiw Om 

autoMhicui pock^ .it Ira.™ af eIh bdi dadna aAlcb «h cooRa EKmii tba IH™ nnfaxto m nxto*- 

ei^iaa usli cobor. hi* biU^^n^ auR 

i=:#i-mli^«ia45f ptRimtoabciVl Kid bolfa Amb Artaitomt ^ itm pdba 

and Mkbtot toe mWliitoa hiettniL »«r roa lr#it. \* abtedy attatUMid, iht fnudiim ChailRi bRwRM 
ilM ]HR apti isruuR^B of Um plrai RiRiia cMs futaiM dk^^Elm #r UR dM nnpR 

||b^ iMui-Hri *f ibT into# Luitc 1 iiirt>uin jwUy Aj, liR bpfiU lORf h affa R o/ »ai&f p 
fRtiuEi Es ioecitf, bad tota n i kiwed iROtRti dtawi ItA 

Uperat aHr raatoa bWiRsi dn ifirinfl «MtTrtI«^ fmllua |g^ » |Q^. IWa -^ <ttj4 tU T^lW#. Ij* 
hAW R« hW lizrtlw LtoJ It" a^ildcd to fMH ORt lb# liaiilbg lit ibif. it) 





^UBTItACTlV^ FRdCESSfS 


lilt ciaimdji Aity vpvrji^ ipt iu?|. jm iJctirnL dMKmJj’mj Hpcm ibt iMinfr w>hrtb'^ii. 

Hs^ntiitan uui Irnmidjt^' condbimw. tnd Ut# c^idtfjt^it iJfecrdn^ fliH Hrtrtiriitbnq cf nin^ 

The nip Mt b^wn nadltra 1^"%. ■nd Own inlu 4niJ Cb4 iwduli I [ft 

tiu^fMtcAl pttKt Lift lArMt^K tip^i iq»p tfattFik ^&iiili«llM uKcnnedLilt |ioHje>ii btbnt tmrfoftMj 

□uiiMtmd Hi ■ eoemlitni Kmpcfu.im£. dcu tu tlid tnEumnpu ibrmqH pt^m 

lu of fEi^ni i ^iiHuu of mKJ wwnit ubi:^ ^ dir!,d«i«4 ttimiifh miwii^ f31 
Ai livccut ttv tbrtl twf Mrwndud ilfti^M Aomblmd nnp etot 4jvn i^IrljEi ihIh*! IZ tnd tlHRCc 
PMfk clHnp«|li tlw rffmrnjTcvMkdMJi IIAiu itv IVDj JVl. TIib It^ih 0 I Lhi4 mit fn Jci^irantd 

•lib ntfKvi bi ihe iMpWMiinm cgudJItnn *dd lb? jff?q?iif1|c» LUft (Uf^d^ Ult, tbil Fsj ttw Mmff llj*# 

bcrini b twnoiii Ox uti^nlv bkpk Him hMt HjbAitdulty JkiUM the Li|-t bum lift niiimji 

IJim 4rniJ M i MiifbditliJly dl? bliertj'fom wiikoiit UKV iVr Ihe i!>*? tv tw 

ndboilMiiiJ thiou*li the Elita iw uji h«L JuJaarlaed bi fahm in nrhkU il wfcMtv ufMa Eb 4 &m 

luKlitd. 

The mtlPTI lUin Jp fttkili aMiiiJI llq^pIlLim- 43 lb prfuJjj^ trSHi ^ m 1 ^ 

lUliH. U iiTTnraiBl Inntt faeh 1l hy pitJint 1$, JUM3 lh«Ti ^^3*1 IblUfll^ H tkuwdlUlUi« Umk I7p 
caUedp wiimmliiie t tif Hkolutf hihI jJimpztU, tat irExstnf^ *t\k^ n^ly ^iinipkul^ 

-^ ^ ^ ..._ ^ TffitbJjnwn impmi envr Toikft 113, jrpS I3i^ 

‘flilrtftrff ■ 


TOW?i« md% ifvcm uf litt ihn Ebu _ _ . „„ „ „ . ^ . _ 

HEul pobjud tbnsLiKh rinMms 13 fpnttJfliiifl ii> tX4fiM±tir 


_ _ _ _Ibrtb ^aiOTi aihl Ihtmx KH 

hettrietp tH4VbP kif «|f It'iQI ibe rnpi'jtKt itln IftljCTf MfimP 1^4 trtdch--tlfuEUi^fir wiP9 epIT tujtfilMi VtUI^ 
tiw AdmiKKi MJICr htlt^ [Jrijsd uff H|h»i pu.|»Rl iBw dryiRl cltlWmCT tiwl lbrci|l4b sfan 

wikHE 20. Iee iJhAi Iniwr A pluTftlitr 0 I ^iMKikdil inuii 41 imwiitMt t^'^ fErtiu nn ri^usdnf fftHLi one « 
nw^ fxH Wh bucifl bh iti wi)^ |^£3or ppJii^ iei4 fm tnMfwrpEfcd ifciiitlt mfi* w ufi 

ind i394>ddy lib itte ibrmii^ui ibt cajlBr ■»»i— of iii ibrrra^ llw 

i^ypawiit. ]i b llwn unltpeml tvf*n twI 26, n Indi^alAi, tuiif lb ay'i^difivtitfidl willi Hu 

«»e| 12 by ibe tCBahit iiql dimMiurllE of tht 17, nrf hndv A« (&>4i tfHtDd, ibQ inDErlx filoi 

a ^ n ihuT h EnKj hi i:4i'dx nwi«l billikiid ditmuE istf likUigt i.ni] luHtmibUx mbcif' flw I^eih 
4iLliiiF|i^ djk 4iiil nwy fot pgklk tym ufLut li hai b«c£i jtoUtid UpbiiMii tkb d>[:|qEa Jiuil E^Ltiiiug rtttii 
ratiijf t i fgia 

Rdttmiiij m liiE fabvjdi J, b*i ndw bum l^ted wilEi tbc rid AtfHCt pzf iIm AmI fr^redKiinp 
to ba imparM TIim fUn nr^X b« ptbieri btEi^tcn uu brimi ponha nid llHEict dwei ihdltr 

19} ( 1 ^, J) |t> Urii ASUKdilbl lloritotvLil ib^liia cbn.iirb^ lAT, |l^m ijto Al4n f wipfi |k1 ihff uiIih 
M Uic cdHtjii ot jjiF fr^in |itoii«r ITO^ Hfudy twapum into di >0 IP, tbrv 4 iitiii wltk.lt LI iiih!> pwi ^ 
Miintt*, If tolly ttnt i«kidf it to Ih lunl, h a tuiw nutHud,, but itnlki^x b ^ iwi;xwm±f rw effmbt 
ttsipjttp to prim Jd, with tme ^ wmtK OTkMH-*,. 'Id iktji tniil ll jiwj hs Ipj- mi4 tlmwsh the 

wibv hLdk ft'' of unit O, vliddi o^m b«tt it Uw»utJt|Fp tbiMxipt in'oli-Hniv ilicMiy ah« to tkir uirrripiHj 
to^lE^p JUnd la EJli^aC mu in wnk^ tiilbl i4u4to rf toU* ntilx |mit hrm inpNfiKnJ* tlsM in tib IlfasTliV 


mmiL 

Tbt fkitr H Ibn itotoTwd to Hi# intmirt tud id ilto pmi Q ll^ ZK ti 1 b±t d n ImDcntd in wttor 
ki i^nlc nbar n m ^niAcEird wUft ibf inm. nqtTli. hm In t|u< unh IP nuttit bln i 
Apn ttol Hz tldtififh Hftnwibw i\tf¥k Bitd IbewA In mm <ivcrpull^i 22 in Unde U 

31 btiT'OTi; mjPVWH ibEOliun t^pndidl Aik bitaJi lu|l kt tocmdj:i| Mi ilw turr ^lali » WiMf tlliiWTtf 2 i 
iiWtA Ifacidi tiv hlfn IflTfYUdiatEEy ftcEiPw ii apd tbiiii Vtoeail ^ tnd Itnrina^Titf 171131 SiVCipaimtii'diu'it 

ilto w^k wintr dtolHlpii wtf *J Uw pKtom . Alrcrat lE^tli. Om ititls 2 l may tx nibd »ilh 
b csnil^toiJ thuKhri^Litk- Tte itiui ^ Ihtu t>pton fhlnciih p^toluEt AH wnA- ttolrhWprilEy Lmd 
ink wi™ H 4 Qf 4 «H Hw Pll f I ftTid «nm» iPrti^ cmPlKt wWt iinil a ii«Hfii 4 «If TnHdranl tofl 

I"™ idnv 2 ftp H to cwTxi^ ^ilfi thr dtoipPiwtiEtU ifnkpH aln^b rtttnitol IliKtMn. 

■^Ert P**^*p^ A Ub* fwftctdmtr to dial lUbddr dcK^nbed ^tiH toptoit in lad d>« ihul 

iH PWcktonaiHAhanfa may pnude wb at tondiliu IbcoiMiiiiliaiof III* hsaullixihaK,toc.>; sb* intatrK 
^ w ^pti lidmtih ihe d«rMiLttoii£i;n omk | 3 ^ iiutintf t^jik IH.^ |tontoiu 4 ]l ddtn ttto >ntiu 4 
v!J: ■“riindw un ttmOy IbrtlmerepiiWp Wumnetl^ mltelwitt 3 F Tht 
mEi^ ^>itow«iup«e 4 -upcinml Kll lAvdrylrti md b fot tacin IPutunJ dntmtnufatEU 
wi; ™ •d' »to*P«J BiDik-a pkuiTto- 

Ato btto^ " ihtoidrf iod totri to tlw mutowr drt«Jb«li Ah* ^Ji^rjilpi □»> p kxpt m 
Tar ifHineduit it^enUfi^ % Attadkitt* * tilmUt ILtto ift brta au ip* to Ut# ifwl ^ l4w 

suunt flimaitd ta the eplJ 4/ ip ijiia .ai b« ptutitd, wUiplh m dtitwa tlib^q^h torafpptoatiB.. ihba £u«tnlttf 
t OmniBUOiH nip toniUtltouL 1114- vtuito hcttolJfa of Ihe Iinit vicp Ux na LPf tor lupix. lin inrhn^ lli4 
nutfibiy. ukL 24 . tl4 •Mgw amj ^ w- I-Ik pm toiRi 

iinttott Ehr inodufliiin tl It itA^tturv iMOy in aistto dw tnd dT sia nrir tuum tUtu to ili« 

tmt.of Oh litotnl topK| 1 ^ tdlHcfa J'rtaJi Matkk llliVi to iLc EJtftaW zW tW UttpK ttnimfA Eh* 

■PP«*lti» in Iki* mmict dBzriM. Thn \An^ lb* WAm\ tnl birok Hhw eumpbitlr IIetp^ 
Bppttqto*- ami ptrirt ««than remmna firm Ow wch ntvin btVwis to# mniWiie ttul ih# Riitri% 
nd pEilllH fthni m. HtT^iWil ta Ifattf etirttxpimdtni wkka ortElltm to Orm* l^ltl iKtmailt Ibt 
tf'ptru.u iti i4w ffwerttrf. ipiuiepM'- 

ir itoj ffKWtobv hiEi dflfmai uwm Uton art iti tm iflafd fut ipnmPTi. d» AWsmuT tmr be dd^Hj. 
ttu^« til lb* Qrd tiul II Vkt^ bhuik Aim aiAehaO 10 Ttwend piI datoubbta Itlnr aiiO ud wgrum* 
toniHKEsO cnplEPUpvil^. 9 fhcb. opcratiiid Alii tEqiEux toal Eti* uejh d}'v wrltdiuidU'ihull bt 

r'®r wir dpQifi bexh nlm, tlibtifldli * n ^^tu^rivthb toat eIm dr* UmiIip i^Ih hfl timiwed bo* 
FWmd tolh itdm ibn'jiScd wito ib* ntw miixu mvl ih*i Hwb toiiKclMaif mdi *1*^ be ai(Kw4 
w\ 3 h rcuMd the freafl'O.Tt mit. 

Frtrm Om tottHiitt ii will be *vrt«i dw wihJim: nwltod of totitfrociEpi* fpi* dlbT« t**ffiir Mtdto 
mnvuiHEh pannui tho nUim lo ba lined while ImM hi resbliffd ppimiuii In «Kh mba t* dwi ibex no 
Ei^rsL to tun fpqn toAera m dtEdtn nr *Iuei| twIkliiMar p*lln« Oral If tppfotbaBlviy flT*i*hl ptlftt E'lr 
nop^owy piOii, *hilv iinuiluciiQOd In twpttMttd OdCiltcl. 

_!■ Ajppamlail fat pttollf]| ■ - cinomalmpq^ihlo o| like ■frO-tlnoi'E^c MiN Eknai m. m^biaE ifrip bX 
fiwn llttnEp to ila AAi^ biHinf mdienpm tor twiirfans Oh ftlm lod nip 
nato rutteaim^ lud [vcHm Ehtu tofflibet, duiiuiRiixtl nj mliLiiEiiiti nliw l|^ fur boMm ibi iUtia 
Anirtn iROtwutui afille I* Toce Odtmai. |h# pin# bdn wrutiEfyir mi t tintn*iw ntip aaxk m th* 

mmn mp bf prefiTiiMy * Mpenn ntnilk tabkhv H ^ E’eniil dw Atm *1141 iirh> to Infri akni 
* njilphc Ot ■ eurwd pmih irblie in l*Df coiiffct. 

1 Ai^milui. ACOtHifibp to ctrJm L rmfbM dufKmtsed: In Uitl Lbi b«d4Jtr*| If bi Ihr fnftii of pji 
nuM* heb m.'Ttttiof an itnilLMai pilK a.i<Bif M juil of vllic:ll Iht lliM *[td tlltp arc held to E*o* i^^MraaLl: 

u *fomtJd. 



COtOU}^ 


). Appxjuiilin KGpnfin^ la nl^ina I chm^lviivqd ^ 1^1 tha liirii- «j]il AlMI BflQ tiod 

^hunff *i i4M>C4«iV€ bKOClDiiii d«f Ukt pnUj of Uv 

rttrrP-hlJte u^rju rtl | firf Eliir*' i-hwj-Tirh l i B#wf i-twm Nji KliI rtrtM■■1 !<Il-Hf UH- UEHffTBilUfa 

ijt tha jil^ Ub(l itr^ In Vm 

5, A[ipw44u ^fewufdjHf ddl m> 1 fiinJHT fhamdxFlHiJ m ilui i4h Aip vnd Ifliip m it*tj] 

JttfiDUU CiKlJirt ‘AtliM au biHiaji peii cn n. liquid znedtndU 

A. A[iparuiLH BMigffttiuff la U«ip j fiirthu- dunHfciml b> flwtin tl*r bituU tbe 

Urip 4 ih1 i%\tn *n brouKl^i hot^ coni^ fivi:^ wnt£i- iram tvnak 44X1 1^1. 

7. Aj^nMlUii itutcUillriit ^ iclqlin 1 fuTIb^ dinyattmjwdi mnn^ flOitcb aii Ml k* Bt 

t’is^ V tir 113 H In l^isL for pmsjng 14 k lUin luvi imri tofcituT iDlRnmtmt llw imncl^ 
t. AfpkiftliM ttKonlkfif HI daena 1 funi^ ciLifacikixiAl ibr M*alEi|Ef liucb n ilk»«A 41 

Ij lu l-Jt^ U and 14] fpr roingnnnf |4 h liquid iqiKHC^ fnuq M^aicou tl^ btitt mir 

E.P. 319^924. Kietiningifir, I. P,, and Technicolor, 1928. 

Thii patent is compkmeatary to tP. 307^659- The speed of mo^'e^ 
ment of Lhe films in one of Uie paths is autoimucaQy oontrolkd by the 
speed of a portion of the bl ank fdm outside the said path, so that the 
films move in synchroaism. 

E.P, 322J 73. Tuitb, B- S.* and Technicolor, I92S- 
A method of cleaning dye-imbibiiioii films by iminersion. in a sqlinion 
of ethyl alcohol and not more tlian 2 per cent, of arumcnia and drying. 
Altcmaiivcly, amines^ such as diethyl amine^ may be iiscd+ 

E*P. 344,026. Technicolor Motion Picture Corporation p 
P icture biind records cobtirs and ihe ^nnd record U black-and-white 
whereby colour pktures and records of both high and low acou^tk 
frequendcs may be accurately reproduced from the same him. 

E. P. 345.986. Troland. L. T., and Tcchntcolor, 1929, 

Printing of sou nd tracks as a matrix relief or a dye Lransfer therefroiti. 
The dye h confined to the surface of the gcLaUne so as to improve 
definition. Contact may be increased in the relief by etching oBT alt 
gelntine adjacent to ihc record, leaving banc cetluJold which wilt 
not imbibe the dye. The sarnid tmek b printed front one or moie 
of ihc matrices baling the neJiefs of the piuluTea. 

E.P. 353,96i Kienningex, F.^ and TcchntcolorH 1930. 

Further additions to 307,659 concerning alignment of wheeb 
carrying mairbt and blank (ilins for imbibitioii. 

E_^P. 360+274, Weaver, E. A., and Technicolor, 1930, 

The ticking filters for colour fccotding for two- and thite^olotir 
flltm have special Lransmbsions corresponding to the colotms reflected 
fram the most prommeni objects of the scent. Filters for flesh and 
foiiage are specified, the bands of the two filters being inierlcaved. 
For the red-omnge filler Eastman Veliow and Acid RJiodamine 3R 
are used, and, for the green, Unminc and Fasi Light Green. Naphthol 
Yellow, Quinoline Velluw, Or Aumminc may repiiicc the Eastman 
Yellow, Rose Bengal may be used tostead of Rhodaminep oilier deriva¬ 
tives of Fluuresocln may replace the UnminCp and Paient Blue^ Erio 
486 


St'ATRACTlVF PROCESSES 


Grwrtr or Gnioria Gtccti— da Fait Li^i Greai. Theie filters give ^ 
pale neutmL lini for the blue sky, Lhb colotrr being recorded in cqm\ 
amounts by the two iihers. (A'tfie.—It may be assumed LhuL these 
fillers were ased by TecbiUcolor for productions such a$ Whoopee,** 
in which iwo*colour exteriors appeared.) 

E,R 370,90S. Troland, L. T., and Tecimicoior, 1931. 

Scmuitiincously fccording tricolour components of a soeoc on 
diflerent superposed iiiyers of suilnbly sensitized cototired fimuisiDhs, 
and subsequently Oj^individuuUy one or more Lmnp layers, 

prims being taken befons and nfter each dissolving step to obtain 
individual colour records. The layers imy have difTerent solubiUly 
iff the same solvent at diiTerent tcmpemtiires or in dilTerem solvents, 

E.P. 374,S49. Tfoknd, L. T., and Technicoior, 1911. 

Positive imbibition mnirtce.^ art produced from two-colour records 
comained at difTerent depths nf a single tinuhion or in different ccmi- 
ings on the Eamc ^ide of the support by itaining the records, pnnting 
one mcord wmh light ttan^tnlttecl by the other record, and printing 
the second record by liglil tram mined by the first record. The colours 
flr« not necessarily related to the recorded colours. Tlius for two-colour 
work the colour records are produced in a negati^'C film carrying an 
emulsion having llic outer layer sensitized to warmer colours imd 
dyed orange through out. The emulsion is exposed through the support, 
and aficT development the negudve is fixed in pbln hypo and w-mhed 
until free from dye. Eloth images are then convened into yellow 
or minus blue, and the warmer image is then converted into magenta 
or minus green, and sepurule positive prints are obtained by printing 
with blue and green iight. For example, the images ate converted 
Lo Mcuinil yellow and the surface image to magenta, by aJIowing a 
small amount of acid to diffuse into the film. To fiicllituic sepanste 
treatment cf the images ilic sensitive layers of ihc negative arc pirfcrably 
>cpii ruled by a free gelatine layer. Altemaitvc methods of colouririg 
the images compriiic: (1) colouring the outer image msgenta by limited 
diffusion:, and then cont'cning the other image ro yetiow by chemical 
or dye toningj f2> converting both images lo unexposed silver snlt, 
exposing and dc^^cloping one image without the other and utilizing 
the unexpo^ im^ge a mordanting base for a suitable dye, foltowcd 
by toning of ihe exposed imagCi 

For three-colour a bipack is used, the ffom member of which curries 
an emulsion adapted to record I wo componcfits from which separate 
prints arc obtained, as described above, ibc tear member carrying a 
single emulsion adapted to record ihe ihirxi component, from which a 
print is obtained in the ordiiiury way. 


4€7 


COLOUR C IM£%4At0^llAPH^ 

E.P. 377,D3J. rrolamt, L T.* and Tecbnicolor^ 193 L 
A silver emulsii^n for matnx imbibHion prinling is ualfonnly 
hardened before or after exposure, ami aftei devdoptnem is treated 
with an agent producing softemng in the exposed areas. Rardenuig 
agents mentioned arc ciiroiuc oluui, bichroraatc, formaldehj'dc, pyto- 
goJIoh pyrocftlcchoh or hydroqtiinoac. The sofiening process is carried 
out w\ih oxidizing agcnis such as ^mmonmin nersuEphke or mixtures 
of poias5ium fcrricycknitle ami poiassium penTtansanatCt copper bro¬ 
mide^ nirric acid, and sodiuni perbornte. 

E.P, 3S3320, Troland^ L. and Technicolor, 193 L 
DiSbrentiat ireatfitciiE of images obtained in dilfereat depths of 
an emukion eoLoiir cornpanent images); the image layer h sob- 
jected to liic iwtion of an oxidizing agent having a cenain speed of 
penetration cupric bromide or a -valution of iodine in potassium 
iodide)^ and the action k haemiptcd iqwn teaching ihe desired depth 
by a reducing agent haclng a greater speed of pcnclniiioii sudiuen 
bisulphite or ammoniaf. Following the above action, the lower image 
can be toned with ferric ?;ti1pfiitc or other iron toning solution and the 
tipper image dwd with a dye having an affinity for silver iodide {^e-g- 
stifniniTifi or fnch^inc). The process i$ applicable for the ease of more 
than two superimposed imugi^. 

E.P. 392,785. Trobnd. I, T . nud Technicolor, 1932. 

An imbibition matrix reJjcf comprises interconnected image- 
forming clemcnis of dye-absorbing gclaiinc embedded in a body of 
rebiivcEy non-dS'c-a.bsothing gelatine having approximaiely the same 
ltiIckQe$) 31 any point of the relief, the surface of Uie relief being 
sub^tanijally smcoih. Such a relief is obtained by dc^'cloping a silver 
halide emukion with a luirderiing developer k.^.. pyn^gallol or pyro- 
catcchlu) without redMcer* itnd then subjecting ii to a cotiErolled oxida^ 
lion ireatment ta oxidise the uneAhanxted developer in inch a iruinner 
as to produce a body uf uon-dye^ibsorking bui ixhitiv^ly soluble 
gelatine fifling the spaces between the panicles of dov^loper-bardcncd 
^laiinc. Qxidatio-ii reuy be effected by vk^srously woiiMng in water 
containing di$scih-ed nTr, nr by oxidizing agents such as potussium 
bichromate or fcrricyitnidt, oxidation being cons rolled by regulation 
of the length stud /?H of the oxidizing w-a-th, the coirecntratinn and 
pH of the bichromate or ferricj^inidc, and the pH of the de^T!lop<rr. 
In oji cxitmpfc an exposed film ix ifcated fnr minutes at 64" F. 
ia a developer comprking 

0-S per >srjii. ISraj^iroE, 

0 3 « .. Se4iuJti tfvdrmitcie. 

015 .. „ pfflasaiiiJii ttroiriMk, 

015 .. .. AmmoiUg^ii CbtoThle, 

OO:* ,, Cii;rKAEid. 


SUflTIBtACTtVF PRQCESAFS 


After developmenl the film is pa^ed to a wsab-tajiJc through ^liich 
Vr'Bicr Is drctilaied ^ to be changed completely in abouL 10 minutes, 
the waicr cucenni; at about 64' F. and mih a pH of 6-5. The nim is 
treated for 2 minutes and is next treated for l i minutes in a bath of 
ferricyanide of 14 per cent, streuph, kept al a pH of 3 7 and a tempera^ 
tiire of 65’ F., which oxidizes any remni-ning developer and bleaches 
Lite silver image. After a further for 1J minutes in tvaier at 65^ F, 
und with a pH of 6-5, the film is fixed by treaiimiimt in. a non-acidic 
sodium thiosulphate solution of normaj stpenph and iheu etched 
by w^ict at IKl'^ F. 

E.P. 410,733. Troland. L. T.. and Tcchmcolor* !932, 

Giminless gelatine reliefs, suitable for imbibition pnnling, are ob¬ 
tained from siK'cr halide emulsions of sub^tantiatly tuiifom size 
of grain. To conirol the padient of the relief, the eniulsi™ is dyed 
and may be printed with light of a colour complemenuiry to ihc dye. 
In an example a silver bromide emukion having a gmin size of 01- 
0-4 micron h empIo^>ed and is dyed with a mixture of tartm^ne arid 
naphlhol yellow, 

E.P. 4150,173. Technicolor Motion Picture Corporation. Filed Augusi 
)7, 1936. 

Film gate with daw feed mechjmism liiid fixed registering pins. 
Miirgins of film confined during exposure luid released during fiJni feed. 

E.P, 484^41]. Technicolor Motion Picture Corporation. Filed 
November 4. 1936. 

Gelatine lilm blanks for imhihitlon printing are preftared by treating 
Uie blank in a elution of a hardening agent, the pH of the film and of 
ihc hardening bnih having been previously itdju&ted to produce a pH 
value corresponding to the ixodectric pmni of ilw gelatine during the 
hardening process. The film may be subsequently wnshed in u bath main- 
rained at the Esoekctric point. The process may be used for imbibitioa 
priming films for colour printing on a film on which a sound track bus 
already been printed. For cxcmipk, the ^uud track is developed in a 
non-bardening developer (nietol) and subsequently washed in w^tcr at 
of 7, fished irt neutrui hypo solution, and again washed in water 
a* a pH of 7. It is then hardened in a solution of chmme atum of 
50-52-5 gnL per litre having a value adjusted to 345 by addJtinn 
of ainmonbi* and again washed. 

FF, 4517*941. Corporation. Filed December 28. (935. 

See above, page 473. 

4S9 


COtOL'g CtNEM^TaGAAFHY 


E.P. 4^2^673. Tecbnicolor MoiicD Fjefeiire Corporaiioo* Filed 
F^bruarv 12. 1^37. 

C 43 nversion of pkac polamcd light to dUptica!ly polanxcd light iit 
the prism sys^icm by tin: uk of quurter^irjvQ pkt^. 

E.P. m.991. l.B. Corporatioii. Filed March 10* 1937. 

Maskihg ^nd processing of oau]rii;iycr hints of Ltn^ Kodiuihrome 
iripack type, CompensaiLng the uadc^sircd jihsorpiion by coloMring- 
m alter, for one colour aspnxt, of light which $;hould onJy be abiOrbed 
by unoihcr colour aspect, chjiractprized by fornuhg for ouc of sjjitl 
aspects an uncorrecicd (for example, the green aspect) record oonsUtuted 
by light sensitive cinulslon, developing a record of the other colour 
aspect (for example, the red record) to absorb lighi to which the 
emulsion oonstltuting the lint record kseosiiivCk and thereafter forming 
from ^id light sensitive emuhion record a developable cOTtccted 
colour-aspect record by exposing it ihiough said developed colour- 
aspect record in register therewith, said compens^Liog exposure being 
restricted not to oxhausi the liglit sensitive emuhion forming said first 
record The complete job will depict the red colour-:ispcct of Ehc 
original by the red light ab^rpUon of Ihe cyan colour In one emulsion 
layer whereas the green aspect is depicted by tie suot of tic green light 
absorption of the said cyan record and the green-nbsofpdnn of the 
magenta record in a second emulsion layer (Fig, 253h 

E,P* 536,396, Technicolor Motion Picture Corpomtion^ Filed Sep" 
tember 20, 3939.. 

Compensating background projection prints locnliy by making a 
neptive with local denstty, ftay in the centre, to compensate for “ hot 
spotpiojccticm ddecu, 

E-P. 536*463, Technicolor Motion Picture Corpamtion. Filed March 
7. 1939. 

The travelling rnnnetH or stainless steel* toothed beh on which the 
Technicolor printing by imbibition is accomplished with such perfod 
remstrution of the three printings is made the hMh of a unique 
non-^lip cofiiinUDus printer. The endless belt, carrying ik Ihousands 
of nrgistmllon pin;^, imvvh around two drurnH. Ilie printing galt^ 
iuc respeettvely placed at 9 o^clock on one drum and at 3 o^clock 
on Ihc second drum. One gate i$ for sound priniing and the other for 
the plcium. The object of the invemion is presumably to place the 
images during priming fof^ say* tbe matriccsl in a position identical 
to that which they are destined to occupy when subseqnemly n^d as 
dye matrices for imhibition on a pttet^ly dmilEtr belt (Figs. 254A*B>. 
490 


I tXPOSt TO jCCNC rnOM front 


DG.f 



OtVELOPE #4£CAT1VE3 IM RESf^CTI^rE LASERS 


BLUE JthPJlTlvC/YDJ^W OYEDJ 


mtLt* 


k-' 

— ftCD T, 

ELU^LOIO BACKliNd 


F»G.2 


e. 

R- 


- BtU£-A5PEC’r NEG'^TivE 


S-^iJRECN-ASP£Cr H£C4TivC 
‘RCE>-A^PCCT WEGAT^V£ 


Dl £XPOSC n L^VER W^Th Rtf] LIONT THHQUCt^ BACHING C 
or DEVELCPE fl PGjiThUE iig CVAN jMINUS AED) 

Y PCvELOFCD JlLVER mOW ALL LAYEfIS 


N 


FIG 3 


4mmd 


JUJ^EJCPOSED RESiQuAt POSlTrVES 
''tVAH ftSSiTitfE 


SI PAttriAttV EAfOSE 0 LAYER WITH QREEN uiChT ThRDuCN CTAN POSiT^VE 
AJ MA-SH 

TZn DCYElJOPE G PDSfTiVE IN MAGENtAfWIWVS GREEtlJ 

5ni»^yLLY E AROSE G LAVER WSTH CflEEN LIGHT FROM EHHEP 3l6C 

IZ GCyElOFI exposed fiAUOC AMD REMOVE ilLVEfl 

JJN£KPOS€D RESrtJUAL POSITIVE 
-MAGENTA POSITIVE [COftREGTED) 


FSG 4 



OVAH POSITIVE 


X PARThALLT EXPOSE 6 LAYER WrTH &UUE OR WHITE LIGHT THROUGH 
CrAH ANO iwiACENTA POSITIVES AS MaJhS 

Z! pevclope b Positive in tellgm Iminus blue) 
ffl, TuLLV EXPOSE B layer WiTH BLUE OR WHITE LIGHT 
SlflDCw Elope exposed halioC ano remove Ailvea 


F^G 5 




YELLOW POSiTivi: tCORRECTED) 

MAGENTA 

-CYAN 


Fk 5 . ’ 53 .-E.P. 49 <i, 9 V 7 EH- Corporuiion. fSce p. 4 S».> 


ifiKiJV A. -AJ l 





























Pm. ^^4A - Jc-t*. tirTp;Lini4.'i]ilor Mmkm Ficisifc Cqj fmnHioii- 












































Fitj — E J* 55ti,4('3 of TDchricaf+M Mtalitm PiJ^luri? C-orptir^tkiii. 






































































E-P. TE^>chIti^3olo^ Mduoii Picture Corporaiioir. Filed May 5^ 

1939- 

Fomuiig nn under^xpe^d latent image in tlie illni by underexposure 
to visible light, inteiuiify'mg the imderexposed latent tmage by flashing 
the film witli infm-ntd radiation and developing the liitcm image 
whereby nomial pictures may bo ohiamcd with sub-normal exposures. 


EP. 540t296- Technicolor Motion Picture Corporation, 

Vapour treatment of cdJulose film in the can to nmovate Of prevent 
shrinkage consisting of a solvent and plasdcizef and n solid agenh 
Say 

Camphor ^ ISnsifi* 

,\k:C»Hot . 47 p, 

Esopromngl ** r .. 70 
Dimcmyl phlhulnte ^ .p 

Tcrlisry bulannl 12 

Wciter . .. . 90 „ 


The solidifying agent comprise soap and a dhrous material, such os 
asbestos fibres- 


EP. 543413 , Technicolor Motion Picture Corporation. Filed June 

12, im 

rMfTers from Nos. 307,659 and 353.962 in that the fUm matrix 
and blank him are brought imo coniact under water immediately 
before bdng drawn by the regi^ring pin endless mond belt arasnid 
the p&riphtry &f n drwju instead of travelling after coniact along it 
horizontal path during the imbibition pcriocU It is claimed that 
tfus method increases ihe accuracy of registration by preventing 
sLippagCp and that it eliminates the air space between the films by drawing 
them together tightly immediately dicr they have rtkaefe contact with 
each other. 

E.P. 543429 * Technicolor Motion Picture Corporation Filed October 
IS, im 

Projection printer film motion. The film is tnoved from or on to the 
feeding teeth ta u direction parallel to the axes of the teeth, compming 
guide means for guiding film along a rectilinear path, feed means having 
reciprocatory movement latgihwtse of said path for advancing the 
film &tep by step, said feed means carrying ihe feeding teeth, rodproca- 
tory means for shifting said guide means in a direction perpen^cuhtt 
to said path whereby to move the film on to and off said teeth, and 
means for moving ssid teeth away from said path for threading put*^ 
poses. 


49] 


COLOUR 



E.P* 546*^7^ Technicolor Moiiofi Piciurt Corpomiion. Filed May 1* 

im 

Optical printing of music and picture record bydirtictly ptojecttrig the 
mask m:ord on the picture record^ adjusting the ioiagc of the mask to 
obtain exact register, und printing a pottioit of the pictuco record with 
the lighi imaging thereon the mask record, on an emulsion layer in 
contact with the picture record, tjitlng a paraltd gk$$ plate for the 
obtaining of rtgUter af the iiiiglt film on the two itipcrimposed nlms, 
492 














































































SUatftACttVK PROCESSES 


E.P. 547^16. Technicolor Motion ?kimt CorpomiiofL FiJed Junuary 

E6. tm 

Marked matrices by producing a lateni of a oondpoDFJit scene 
hb a background field against a backings in an imflashed emulsion* 
which is so scnsiCi^ed and d>’ed ihai its density range corresponds to an 
expcKure range whkh i> a compamlively shorl intermediate section of 
the expo^tue range of iIk said oompotient scene record by develppiitM 
ihc tutem image, renovating the gektinc whkh received an exposure 
below the said intcrmedbtie section, and rcndcting the remaioing 
gelatine suteiantihUy opaque for ihc light to be used for printing the 
mask. 

E_P. 549J4U Technicolor Moiion Pkture Corporation. Filed No* 
vember 15^ 1940. 

On tnuliilaycT film exposing at leasi two layers to prim different 
colour^aspod recordsp and siraiillaneously Hashing uniformly, thereby 
altering the contrast, characterized in that the flashing light reaches the 
multilayer film by way of a transparent rcllectof, Itghi of predetermined 
colour from cue diiccLion bciing iransmixted throu^ the reflector 
lo affect one of said layerSp and light of different colour from a differem 
direction being reflected by the refiecior to affect anolher of said tayej^. 

EP, 551,930. Technicolor Morion Picture Corpomiion. Filed Februarj- 
7, 1942. 

RegistTation means on a pin-belt prinler, the pitch of the teeth being 
approximately equal to or a mvlripk of the pitch of the sprocket holes 
in the searing bell so that the seating belt is dt^wn towards the register 
bell by ihc fanwise movement of the teeth relsUtvely to each other os 
the register bcU is curved, ihereby compressing ihe films Into mtiiuaie 
coniacL 

E.P, 532,008. Technicolor Morion Picture Corpora lion* 1943. 

Making a setting of the Teehnkolor prism, compri^ng a method of 
.tdjuatmcTit affording a precise way oreqmilizing the size of the direct 
and rellocicd images viilhoui neqairing any delicate adjusimeni In the 
camem. 

£-P. 553^197r Technicolor Motion Pictiire CorporeiioTu Filed Sep¬ 
tember 8, 194 L 

Making silhouette masks and tornplcmcniary masks for use in the 
travelling mask process of compotriie dncmaiography chameierized in 
that a plurality of frames ore mnde of a foreground scene having a 
du mm y background during each period of kinematographic analysis 
having differ cot latent image characteristics as required for the produc- 
Uon of silhouette masks and compleaientary masks by known meibods. 
Said characteristics being obtained by varying the illumination of the 

493 


COLOUR CINbMATDCHAI>HV 

for^^ound, said variations being made in synchronism ivitta the inlet- 
mitieiu movement^ during each period of kinemaLogniphie analysis 
of ihe camera mectianism by which the plumJily of frames is tn^. 

E*P* 356,ft3L Tcclmkolor Morion picture Corporation* Filed June 15, 
1942. 

Sound tracks and mtiltiJaycr film . Lacquemg sound track area^ or 
picture area* processing the other zone with one or more soLutions. 
removing lacquer with solvent, proctsaing the lirst tone with one or 
more Jiquids the first of which Is immiscible with said solvent and inlcr^ 
mediate, said last two steps removing said solveut with a solvent miscible 
with sciid solvent and also with ^aid one or fint Uqind^ 


LAC<)unR 


Nitrocdjutm t3tJ-W aoconOI 

V. 

10 

Amyl AcetEilc 


. H 

Erier Guin 

j 

Ethyl Akohnl . 

1 B 

a 

Dfbmyl Ptiihflkie 

5 

TolUEDfi . 



Bijiyl Aocuic 

13 

Cjoboit Htek - - 



But>'l Ak»ijlM>l 

12 





E.P. 56] pS22. Technicolor Motion Pieturc Corporation^ 1944- 

A mochjjie for inserting pins in n belt having a series of pin opcoingi^ 
characterireU by feed means for inter mitten tly feeding the bell dong a 
prcdetcfTiiincd path, register tneans including a pUot pin fitting ^id 
openings for accurately positioning the belt between the intemiiitcnt 
feed steps, mid tncaiis aligning with one of mid openings when the belt 
is positioned ^ aforesaid for [nserlLng n pin iu the openiag- {Tht 
rnanufucture of pin beli^.) 

E-P. 563^737, Technicolor Motion Pieiure Corporation. 3 pp. Filed 
in tile United Slates May 4, 1942, and in Great Britain May 4« 1943^ 
Gmnlcd August 23, t944. 

A pin-bcli machine b described on which hlnUTTtay be t^istcred oi 
for printing froin one him lo anuther citKer photographicaJly or by 
imbibition. To keep the mclul bell from slipping on a pair of end 
supporting roJkfs or drums, these ^uppqm arc perforated and provided 
with an airtight coining extending about that part of the roller which 
normally supports the belt. By applying auction to this ateu, the mcial 
belt is rirmly held on the support against slipping. 

E.P, 563,834. Technicolor Motion Picture Corporaiioa. 

Printing picttincs on a dye-absorptive blank by imbibition chtirac- 
lerized in that before printing the pictures from the imbihitiofi miiirix 
the Wank is treated to produce in it a dlJIerenilal hardness which varies 
inversely os ibe density of the colouring matter over the area of the 
picture. 

494 


SI/BTKACTUK PftClCE:SSE5 


E,P. 565^3M, Tpchniralor Moiiyn PictOfe Corporation. 4 pp. Filed 
m United States NoveiDbcr KL, 1942, 

To provide ii tua^k for colour correciion in making thnse-colour 
subixactive prints* whereby the mmk may be C3cpo&eii with light of 
any dt^ired spectral range, which may or may not be ibe same as the 
range of one of :hc colouT-scfRUation records, and w^herefay the imuik 
may be processed along with the colour'^pomtiort roistjrds so ibai 
the mo^k add ihc colour-separation records will sluink to ibe same 
esient and will be available at the same Ume for prinLing. A colour- 
sepanuion latent image and a colour-correctioEi hilcnt itmige are 
produced simullancoiudy by exposing two lilms to difTcrenl portiems 
of the same light tiansmitted along a common optical path and thence 
along branched paths to the two films respectively. The films arc 
subjected to processing ireatmcnt thuL has n like eflect upon their 
size and that the latent images to form cotour-separattoit and 

colodr-correciion records of opposite sign. The records air ihm used 
in combinatiDn lo print a colouT-correctcd piclure. For example, 
a motion picture camera may be employed vrhich has n single^ 
sratisparcntj reflecting surface or bcam-$plUter, m one lieam of which 
a iduihlayer film is expo^d, and in the other beam of which a panchro- 
niaiic film is exposed ihrmigh a yellow filler. The multila^trr him is 
proc^sed to a posiiiw and the panchromatic film to a negative. 
The two are used in cumbimiion to print colour-conectjed separation 
negatives- 

E.P, 565,J!iS. TechnEcotor Motion Picture Corporation. 4 pp. Filed 
ia the United States November 26, 1942. Gmtitcd November 1944. 

To introduce colour correction and a fade-in at the bcginiiing of 
a wene, a fadc^ut at Ifie end of a scene, or a dissoU^ or wipe at the 
jiiactioti of two scenes in a subtractist^ colour modoa picture prints 
and at the same lime to reduce the number of steps necessaTy to secure 
these resuJu or ilie number of stage-produci filmv required for ihcrse 
purposes^ a colonr-sepamllun record fortned on one film^ <i colour- 
comection record or mask on unolher film, and successive frames are 
gradiiiilly blocked oat throughout a short length m one end of the 
mask Eng film* and a colour-corrected picture is printed through both 
of ihcsc records. The blocking rmi on the masking film la preferably 
efTccted by dyeing. 

E.P, 565,836* Technicolor Motion Picture Corporaten. 6 pp. FDcd 
in the Unilpd States April 24, 1942. GranJed November 30, 1944. 

To oveicome faulty register due lo uneven spacing of teeth on a 
eanitr belt used in the imbibition printing of motion picture hhiis in 
colour from separate matrices or in the stripping of the severui layers 
of a multilayer motion picture colour record on to. separate supports* 

495 


IIOLOUR CINItMaTOOHAPHY 

the films are registered wiLh the single lilni op ibc loothed 

cafrier in soeb a mnDiier that ihc same icclJi engage the corfc^pbitdipg 
Sprocket boles of each of the separaie jfilms and of the single film witb 
tvhieh they are regfstcred. 

E-P. 5fe5,fJ38, Techaicobr Motion Picture Corporation. 5 pp. Filed 
m the United Stately April 24. 1942. Granted November 30, 1944. 

A method is described for stripping an emulsion layer from one him 
to nnother wittout injuring or distorting the emulsion hiytr, and for 
positioning it on the new him in the same relaiioiishi|} to the sprocket 
holes nsi on the old film. Jt lUlbrds precise registration and permits 
tin; Ltnnsfer of the layers of a multihiycr film after they are c:^|>o&ed 
and before they are developed. The outer face of the layer to be snipped 
is siu^ to the new base, ihc adhesion betwiccn the layer and the onginai 
baic Ls weakened, and the layer and the ongjnnl b4tse are peeled apart 
in a single apparatu^t tbc layer being ^ttick to the new base and at 
least the latter part of the weakening of the adhesion to the originul 
base being effeaed while the two bascis are travelling in superposition 
on a carrier which may be cndkss, and which has a succession of register 
teeth to hold the bases in reglsler by engaging the sprockcl boles of 
both films. 


E.P* 569.426. 

A system of printing J6-mm. pain of images on one 3S*mm- film 
perforated with 15-mm. f^rforaIlona ^p^ced -95 in. rom ihe edges. 
The film IS silt, after printing and processing, longiiudljuilly along its 
centre line between die two row^ of pictures and iriimning off the 
proteciive edges, A sound track tcuiy be printed Inside each rtjw of 
pictures before the ftloi is slit. The pictures may be formed in relief 
and^ ihc^ 35“mm, film used us a dye-iransfcr matrix before or iiAcr 
■illllitig. The sound tracks may be printed by ImbtblLion or in silver. 

O.S.P- 2,352,914, Rackcti^ F_ Assigned to Technicolor Motion 
Picture Corpomtion. Filed Nov'ember 15, 1940. Granted July 4, J944. 

A photogiTipfiic printing ^pptiratus comprires means for guiding 
II film having iwo differently sensitive emubion taycfSt togclher with 
a colour separation record to be reproduL^d, pm a source of priming 
light, means for projecting the printing light beam tbiough ihe record 
towards the film to be printed, and a Tighi^sourcc providing two bc^mis 
of ffiishiag light of two sjaoctmt ranges respectively, there being 
En<^n& m each of the fiashing beams for coutroUtfig tlte intensity and 
speeinit range of the beams. Duplicate of E.P, 549,14T 
496 


SUHr^^niVE ^ROt-^SSES 

U.S.P- 2,357*924, Andreasj J. M. Assl^ed to Technicolor Motion 
Picture Corporation. Filed Febmarj^ 20. 1941, 

Phoiogniphig colour records printed Ln superposed rcbtiOTi by Ific 
dje-iransfer prcMicss are correct^ for insufficiently ^ironj nbsorpiion 
of light at the ftir red end of the specinitn by the cyan dye. by printiog 
the magenia and cyan dyes in registered superpo^tion, and by priming 
the yellow record In a mixture of two dye componcai£» one componenl 
absorbing blue light and the other componeiLt ubsorbing deep red 
lights the ratio of the iwo compoaents present in all densities of the 
record being approximxitely constant and in ntt antonul sufficient to 
reduce llw preponderance of red in the finished recoed, 

LJ,S,P* 2,363,6E9. Rackett, G, F. .4$sjgaed to TechnEcolor Motion 
Picture Corporal ion, Filed March 2^ 1942. 

A colour-corrected print is made from a coEour-sepamtioa record 
by forming a colour-correcting record of the image on the face of a 
masking lilnii fomiiog ruetdom irregubritics by spreymg trans¬ 
parent lacquer) on the back of one of the films, and then priming 
a ooiraied record on another lilm. Ilic three fdntsarc pressed together 
in luperpoaitioiii and the colour-separation film h intermediate 
between the other two films in back-to-baek cotuact with the ntasking 
Mm. 

U.S.P* 2^366^267. KSenningcr, J, F. Assigned to Teclinioolor Motion 
Picture Corporation. Filed May I, 1940. Cranted January 2, 1945. 

la making a print from a mssiked original film* a projection printer 
is employed and the masking film b fed through the first film pie 
and projected by the objective km on lo ihe sceund film pic, through 
which the origimil film and the prim film mock are fed &imuluiiieously 
and in contacts Huts the priming fight parses through the masking 
nim, then through ihe bits, and finuliy through the original film to 
the print stock. The projected image of the masking film is adjusted 
for mognificatlon with respect to ilic other two tilms^ but no chatigt 
15 made in the focu$^ of tlic projected beam. This adjusinient trLuy be 
effected by iiiesns of an opiicaJly fiat gloss plate in the li^hi beam which 
may be inclined at dificrent angles to the optical axis. 

tJ,S.P. 2,169,116. Rackctl, O. F. Assigned to TccJmicolor Motion 
Picture CorporUliorL Filed April 24, J942. 

In Imhibiiicn priattttg. or in iramifcrring emulsion layers* fmni one 
support to another for colour cinematogniphy, the supports oa which 
the lr 4 insrers are made arc successively carried on an endless-pin belt* 
the same teeth of which eticiigc correspending perforations of the 
supports of fhe several colour cornponents to ensure accurate regisi 0 . 
See EP. S15.S16. 

2i 


497 



COLOUR ClSEM\TO<iRAPHTf 

880,737. Technicolor Moiion Pkiure GorporaTion. Filed m the 
United Si 3 WS Febniary 20, and in France May 2, !V4tK Taken 
from Cifem.Zfrttraibiaii^ 115t P^rt 1, E^44. 

To remove the red cast from sLituaciive mulucoJouT pictures, one of 
the Lhr^ compooein ijmnges is given im addiiionnl ob^iption for the 
exzreme visible red region. This can be done by using a dye which 
shows a secondary absorption ma^tiinwn in ihis regian cr by using 
a mixture of dycs. For exam ple* for the blue image a mixture of brilliant 
yellow and nnphtlioL green may be tiscd, ihe napbthol green furnishing 
the desired additional red aWrpiion. (Tmnsliitiun of Ihe Ccrmiin 
abstract.) Corre^ipaiiit to U.S.P. 2,357.924, 

F*P. 8BS|,037, Techtucolor Motion Pict ure Corpo ra lion. Filed m the 
United States January J6^ 1940* and m Frana: October 30, 1943. 
Taken from OtMitu ZeiUratblan, IJ5, 1360, Part I, 1944, 

In a combination taking process a latent image of one of the two 
elemenis of the combine lion foreground ami backgroimd I 

is produced on a ligbt^senskive layer wliich shows marked sensithing 
maxima for two colours blue and red), wliilc the correspondnig 
elemeot Is illu mina ted wilh one of the colours. I1ie Irdugc so produced 
is developed in a tanning developer and dyed. In the way the 
image of the other cbancni is produced Ln the other colour, (Tftins' 
laii on of the German abstmerL) 

The Technicolor orpniiiation in Fngland Uus issued the following 
instructions for the preparation of threc^olour cartoon negaUve^ by 
the saccessivc-framc method. 

**Thc following Dotes are intended for the general guidance of those 
producers intending the preparation of cortoon or unimaied puppet 
films for reproduction by Tochnkotui' who have not previously sub¬ 
mitted tests of their ^oecessive-frame ncfaiive. They arc noi intended lo 
serve spedficatjona for ftlin-sirip or slide film materLEd, which required 
a difTercrnt type of prtx-edttre in many ways* although the gj^ncfal 
pfocediire for the preparalion of successive-frame ticguli^'e for Elm-strips 
is closely rdiiled.*’ 

1. Camera 

It is desirable that the negative aperture of the cMiera used should 
coofomi to the recommendations of die Society of Modori Picture 
Engineers, that is* with an opening D'H68 in. x0 S3] in. {or 22 mm- ;?' 
16 mm.), pla^^ so that the non-irack edge is 04J10 in, rroin the perfoni^ 
tion boles of the Aim. 

h IS esrentbl that a camera mechanism of very high precision making 
use of a tepstef pin movement he employed^ rince ii will be realised that 
any inaccurades of positioruug the film between luceesrivo exposures 
498 


SUPTR^CriA^ F1^0CE55£5 


m ihe cunjem gat^ wiU tqsuM m colour fringes in the final piiat It is aJH> 
essemtbl that the single frame ml^:llallis ^1 by which succeuive etposuree 
are miidc should bcej^tr^mely iicciimte so ihai there are no irregularities 
of the exposure given to ihc film as each single frume b phoiPgraplied. 

A test of th^ geoerai suiiahiLlly of the camera mcchiinism consisu* 
in photographing a chart with n ierics of ruled Linei in the form of a 
grid, using the negative stoc k and camera set-up in leaded for produc- 
lion* but without ike use of colour hlters. About 100 fL of negative 
should be expired with the chart rigidly mounted, after which the film 
should be wound back through the camera and re-esiposed with the 
chart again rigidly mounted m a position ver)’ slightly dispbceil from 
the first positioD. Thj$ negative should then be developed and a print 
made and projected, or the actual rLcgutive iuclf can be projected. The 
result on the screen should be pedccity steady. wjUiout fiuirtujitioiis of 
density or relative movement betw-ecn the two ima^ of tb^ chart- 
Vartaiions of deasUy most probably indicate an irregularity of the 
otpoiiure mechanism while relaLive tnovemenL of the chon imagiex shown 
that the film registration ot film iraadl mochotusm is at fault 

1. Ciintn FlEttrs 

For printing by Technicolur the three exposures must be made 
through colour filters in the order BluCf Red, Green, This i$ absolutely 
essetifial. The Wratlcn A, U* C scri« of tnc<^tour tillers or ihdr equiva¬ 
lent should be used and we recommend Wratten filters Nos. 25 1 53 and 
47, It very impoJiant that Care is tokmi in the mounting and aitanE^ 
mtni of these filters in order that the resultant image should conform ur 
nur standards of image size and position. Ufimounted gebtine fiUm 
arc most satklactoiy' from thb point of view^ except under canditioris 
where buckling h likely to occur through huinidhy changes in ihc 
camera room. If the filters are mounted in gia^^, upiicftl flats must be 
used and the thickness of each of the three Jfltcts shoiild be identical- If 
the mounting of the filters b insecure or they are allowed to occupy any 
position other than one strictly perpendicular to the optical axis of the 
cofneru the images on the film may be displaced relatively one to the 
other and thus will result in colour fringes through lack of registration in 
the final print 

To check ihese points the test outlined in the first lection should be 
repealed with the fillers in position, the second exposure of the displaced 
chart being madfi wiih the negath^ displaced by one frame so to 
re-flxposc tL^ch Friimc through n dilTcricnt rilier. On prejection of ihc 
result the combined Image should remnln pcrfcctiy stccidy wriih oo 
Tcludve naovcTDcnt between the two images of the chart. If reljitive 
movement t§ found m Uiis rest, although ihc previous test of the camera 
mechanlsn! was sufi^fueccry, the filter mounting and aligrttnent must be 
very cancfulty checked to en$ure that they are exactly peipcndieular to 
the lens axis. 


COLOUR CtSEMATOORA^J^V 


3- Lenses 

h Is naturally essential that only ftilly cobur-coirccled leases stoult! 
be used for this lypc of work and colour prints are likely to be un¬ 
satisfactory if the dcrinition of the resuliant negative falb below 50 lines 
per rnillimetre in any of the Uiw exposures* The maximum photo¬ 
graphic sharpness should be obtained for the green filter image in order 
to obtain the bc^t general definitton and equality of sire ofirnage^ but 
it is desJnibEe that a sample piece of negative should be submitted for 
mea^uremenl of size, ddinition and register since not all lenses arc 
peifectly suitable for this purpose. If posstble thi$ sample should 
include m exposure of the standard Technicolor cartoon lest chart, 
which Includes a definition fan and ni^glsier points, photographed so ns 
10 appear on the film upproximately 1 ' J 8th of its ort|^al size. 

4 . Negadte und Exposure 

Supcfscnsitive panchromatic nc^'Utive Slock closely duplicating that 
manufactured by the Eitstimm Kodak Company at Rochester. New 
York, and perforated with standard Bell and Ho well negative perform- 
lions should be used. It is important thut the loleranoc of perToration 
ditnecsions rcconimerided by the Sociely of Motion Picture Engincci^ 
{S^A'LF.E.f Ip 1941, the same a,^ Antmcan Statidards AssocutticnZ 22, L 
1930) should not be exceeded. Kodak negative niatetialA Background 
—X and Pius - X arc both very suitable but care must be token to 
avoid grub in the processing of the faster iype$, such as Super - XX. 
which is not therefore reoemmeoded for normal work. 

Tht dc^ulopcr used should be a line-grain borax developer and the 
time of development should be such as to produce a contrast equivalent 
to a gumma of 0 65 when measured by a diffuse density measuTing 
instrument finch os a Capstoff-Purdy densitometer* on a ic^ii strip 
exposed on an Eastman type IIB seu^lomc4er mih ihc light source 
adjusted CO mean noon dayliglii. Care must be infccn to avoid a high 
fog level on the Dcgaiive: with normal gray base native rmiterial the 
combined base and fog density should gencraUy lie within the range 
0 30 to 0-35 and should not be allowed to exc«d 0 40. 

The lejvel of exposure given should be such that the diffused deniiiy 
of ihe image of a fbi M hite object on the gnecn filter frame should be 
betwwn i05 and J-30 after subtracting the combined base and fog 
density. The adunl density r^d should ilicferoft be of the order of 
LSO, 

It is impcmot that the balance of exposure through the three fillCJ^ 
should be so adjusted that the gray scale of the Techniculor test chart is 
reproduced asapproxinmiely equal density in each of the three frimes; 
the image of a white or gray card which has a density of 14)0 in the 
frame exposed through ihe green filter ^auld not differ on the red and 
bltie exposures by more thnn D 10 in dcti^ty. 

ioo' 


Vt I^KtirESSM 


LiglitiQg 

The eKpo^urc balance rtfemed to above can be achurved eiih^ by 
adjiisting the illojninaUoEi maldiig use of coiout fillers on ibc 
Iraips if iieeessiiry, in alternaiively by ihe use of neulnil ^y filters 
mounlcd in cortibLnation Wi^th ihe three colour filltri of the camcra- 
If Dormol type half-watt int;asid«^5ccni kmpi. are the source of illumina¬ 
tion a balanced expoiitire will usiuiilly result from the use of a neutral 
gray filter of 25% transmission m combination wiUt the rod filler, and 
a 75 % iransmissiott neutral with the green liller, 

Incande^nt lamps nin at nonrnd voltages uns the most suitable form 
of illuminunlT but care must be taken to main lain tlie voUage consiantT 
since fluctiiatlons during exposures will cause variationi^ in density or 
colour in the filial colour prinL 

Tlic tise of fluorescent gasrdischargo typo lamps b not recommended 
and these should nor be used without extensive colour ic^is, since the 
deficiency of light in certain parts of the spectfutn may enusc the un- 
sati&factpry reproduction of some hues. 

If co'loured lighUng is used lor J^peciat cffcjcis. such as mooinUght or 
firelight, it is dcsirabk that ihc chiirts should be exposed to noTtiiaJ 
Hghttng otdy. 

6. Fhotogyaphy 

k is important that at the begiiming and end of each scene photo- 
Bmphed, a short seciionp say one fool m tcuath, should he exposed on a 
Tcchmcolor test chart, so tltat we can obtain the tnformatiuD on 
photngniphic bahincCp exposure level, devclopmeoi and filter eompo 
ftents which is necessary for colour ptiniing, Th^se charts should ^ 
stored cnrcfutly so as to preserve them in a clean eondiiion and avoid 
fuding^ 

Each lake of every scene should be identified by a card or slate with 
the name of Lhc production ond the number of the scene and lake, 
photographic to length of at least three linear feet (i.e., sis teen cycles 
of colour exposures). If for any reason, st^ch as camera trouble or 
incorrect section i it is necessary to %lop the camera in the course of 
photographing a scene .tnd fcpeni a section of iheactionp the defective 

section must be identified by photographing a card markbti" Cut Back ^ 

on which is written the number of defective frames to be removed before 
printing. 

If a defective scene is later re-phoiographcdi cither in full or in part, a 
new take number should always be used to avoid confusion with previous 
work. 

It is destniblc at the end of each scene that phuiography should be 
contiuued for at least n further three linear feet after the l^ frafne tif 
action required in order to avoid the possibhity of handling damjige 
during asAqmbly for printing- 


501 


COLOiTH CINEMATOGRAPMV 

tt shou^ noted that is h.t po^ibk fadir^ and di$ 5 olvc^ should 
be undwiakcn m the cameni ai the time of photography, since although 
it is possible to make thesse in successive-frame tregative by optical 
printing in the kbor4tory the range is neceEfarUy limited to the simpleiii 
cffecia and the process may involve oonsidemblc delays and loss of time 
in the complcdan of the pictnre. Wipcii, iris masks, and supejimposition 
etTects, cannot be tindertj^ken by kboraiofy work. 

7* Despatch of Negutifes 

All negatives submit Led for printing must be clearly Ldentilied ns 
developed or undeveloped and should carry the niime of tJic producing 
companythe nam^ of the subject, an order ntimbec and note of the 
prints tet^uired. Whenever possible a few typical drawings» models, or 
cclluloidsj should be supplied as a guide lo the colours used. 

The negative must be substanibliy free from matches, finger prints, 
ftbrasinns^ etc., on the base, or emulsion sidcs> and should nut bcciipped 
or otherwise distorted by drying conditions. To ensure this the mils 
iniisl be evenly wound on a suitable centre, carefully wrapped in tisiue 
paper^ and packed lirmly into securely taped cans preferably containing 
a small piece of camphor in a cloth bag. Where several sectioas of 
negative are w^onnd on one centre the ends should not be dipped to¬ 
gether vrith metal or wire paper dip^. as ibis leads to dneb mark^ and 
abrasions during transit. 

It is important that rolU of negative should not contain splices, since 
ihcK have to be made by Technicolor, ta order to run sati$factori1y 
through our tipeda] printers. 

ft. .is^embly 

Where □ film hae been pbotographed as a number of sepanitc soencs 
which have to be put together in the rtmil editing, an assembled black- 
and-white or colour positive cutting copy represcatifig the fiuishcd 
assembly must be supplied to Technicolor for the purpose of matching 
the negative. If a black-and-white print provided it isimportiint lllal 
this should have been printed by Technbotor, since only our prints wiU 
have the coded edge numbers on Ibcm corresponding to those which 
wc put on the negative. 

In delivering sound track negutives or prints to mateh the picture 
cijtttag copy, cane must be taken to see that they are adeqiiately marked 
to iadicate the synchronizatEon required when printing the two together. 

As fat as possible, in sijoceifsive'frurite work* reds of os^mhled 
iiegntlvic mote than about IjOQO ft in length in one seetiem should be 
airoided. Tbij oorresporiiis to a positive print length of about }30fi^ and 
if the completed picture is grestcr in length ihait thb iE is preferable to 
rise the negative in two parts, and to join the potlttvc prints before 
despatch- This is because the storage and haadiiiig of reds of assembled 
502 


SUBTItACTIVK fHOCESSES 


ocfiative greater ih^n i,O0O ft* itt Icfigih js\^ty difficult for use, and the 
possibility of damage is greatiy increased with large reds. 
iExi^/Tcchidcohf 


BWTBH PaTOCIS of XECHKICOUm 
E^. m/m hnw pnit^ *n mie ribn:-plidn* of 

137J0ia Friim System (Cdm^Dclt* D, F.y. 

If *k k» 

TTeusiiy eontrelt?y cflleunal iigiii tGonulcct, D. F.> 

188.32!^ CnMUing of ddoiblt width Rim. 

1^,971 AinmffEmcnL of imstees in inisin syftlem. 
l>tffcftntial liardeiiina- 
Mem! vtrip tuidthifi prior to pruxsshi^ 

2U,9tS ftoemsinj by florioiii® of 

212,134 PriraSysiem- 

238,449 Aegi^crrmiim to <icnraied frtrm. 

241,032 AppiuiUiis for peexessifts relief film. 

253,3JJ Tmlilu^. 

263.650 ToniAS. Dye. 

264,369 Appaoiu^ to printing matnees. 

270^279 Puiificotloft of 

270«2Sd Itodertioa of blontc for imdbitUm. 

>8SJ46 I. » . 

3iX).818 ImbibiiJoo printinfi ippmms^ 

307,659 

319,424 

322473 Cteiining film matrices. 

317,633 Skip pricier to mauricEs- 
341469 Meirix printma from Itnliculnr fihn. 

M4j 026 Sil«f Mind tfnek jmd picture dye image (TroJmid, L TX 
345,9S6 Dye Touinc. 

347,946 Poiitrve intl rtcf: 3 kllve ktu comhlcatioR^ 

349,316 Piism ami fiJtcr combinatkm. 

35DJ tZ Prism system 

350.320 Ajchromatk lens syilmm 

350|656 Alieriiatc cApoture of two eoloure and a tbfrd cduur. 
351,306 Priam divider to three Mpomte filim. 

153,777 Pin Bdts, solikrint of inn& 

353,962 Bin tklt orrengemecu. 

356.243 Henkcmg nicir for irelnbitioti. 

360.27+ Coloor filten. 

370.906 ^4altilayc^ ftlm for relkr prinlmg 
371,429 Pnsm icd GIm anniigmcnrt. 

174.S49 Mmriocaprimrd from til* eolmiTJw^^ 

377,013 Proocwtng of riuiricox. 

382^239 ppRen nnd [Kim lyaiem. 

162.320 Dtflcrentlul dcpUi umnig. 

365.293 Semitniny of malrieea. 

391.763 Treai ftieni of nmtrk£8. 

396*339 Befim-spllttcr emnen. 

410,733 Ermilikwatoiniitrix Rim. 

475^308 Piiam lystcme. 

4»0,t73 Catncni Gate. 


503 



CilLOUR CrN^MAlOCiKAPDY 


4^,4! i Tr«iin»ctu ij/T h ianV, 

492,6^1 PriiiTi sj^Ecm atkd |x4iirmB4 U^U 
534,561 PhOEomaicr. 

536^356 Tafc^-upH Auinmatkally rambl« (cmuon. 

5J6.396 Dark ccnlrc prini fbr hgiLk-f^yjarti n^i 

536.463 Pin Belt Mnter. 

536.464 PwJu savm Iq^l chui]^ 

536.465 Polaroid KTDcn ind figlil iEUomitics. 

537,^ Tech. MdU PiC- Corp^ Feeding wo fUrtli InW oik awre 
Posi Fo^in^ with ItUhi-red. 

53$,0S0 Vicvf-Ftniler. 

53S,G(2S Tech, htot. Pic. Corp, Ms^kuia S>'stcnL 
53S,744 View-Fiiulcrt 

53ft,990 Tedi. Mtrt. Pic. Corp. Haw cuttioft In JieriaJ pbotoarjiphy, 
J3^,223 „ „ ,, TWofiitm^wyinsthrce-^ 

54E>^296 Sotvem mil for trciuttieni of fihnL 
540,474 Register Gluij for printing. 

543.LJ3 ImbUttilon Machine. 

54J,I29 Frinior FPm Feed. 

544.1| 1 Sljpcngthcning fihn cid^. 

544*749 riEm Coupling rievks. 

54S,»2lCr7 Pin Bell. Method of Repslcr. 

546,667 Compel photography. 

547.216 Maying hy compc^ilo uin triccSv 
549, U1 Flaxh oii .MnitOayef Pilm, 

549,544 Tcck MoL Pie. Cofp- Imbiblljois printings 
550,6SJl ^ Mcidif>1ng spoctnil mnimii»ton of 

iinbibiliun dyes. 

5SJ.930 Pin Bell. 

552*003 M.i]iing and lesting up of ptism. 

353,197 Compo^to PllOtograph/. Travtltifig Matlo PtoceSv 
556,631 Sound iiudk liuxiuer. To protect i lotiod track Lntaee iluitng 
processing of iht coknir piefuit apige. 

56L&22 MochhK for itnetiing p^n$ in hcitw 
562,120 Fiulc device* Shultcr. 

563,737 Vectiucn tneotif on Pin Belt. 

563,737 Tech. MoL Pic. Ccoti^ imbtbktian rv^iiinukut 
563,834 Ddfercnttally hiirdcDcd hhmk. 

564,532 Back Projection Screco- 

564,532 Tech. Mc4. Pic» Carp Back projeciion illirniinnUcm. 

564,611 Film Me^pirinc. 

565„3tt4 Musklnf in mulTib>Yr ftiim used in priiin ^yncmL 
565^385 Miuki iind fades* lUc. 

565336 Retisicrine strippiof fifrn on pin. hett 
565*838 Stripping Films. 

569,426 l6-imn. Printinij, 

599,710 Tech. Mot. Pk Cotp, Dye Trnnuftt Madune. 

<Wsfe81 ■4 4* »* t* Blunk hhn incorporaLtius imrgiDal 

teeth subeequeiuly remimhie, 

601,867 Cabling ■ photk i\lm upon furfsce of sa i iti NHlImi mnliis 
and luhsctjucmiy ilripping 

604.256 Tech. Mot. J^c. Corp. Prodiiciog tmf^ ^gy AniAi. soutuFtraCk 
in im imhihhKtn Him. 

607,792 Tech- Mot. Vic. Oorp. Stabte btue-freen dibio (lj«, 

612,730 ii Yt *H Piintma ^nd-trark for matTri. 


504 



SUBTJlACTlVn FROCESSCS 


«16.lti9 Th*. Mot, Pie. Cotp. Varabk tvtccd noiiot for synchroa- 
isiriK ol’Unbibhkm 

6t6,m Tccti. Mot Pk. Qwix Ctmtimiwis firitiiini of «HiwJ-tradL 
on film o&itkd by |im-bdt 

626319 Tcdu Mot Pic, Cotp- Doulrie-cMtol tcUef film and 

byer, 

62a,»4t Tech. Moi, Pit. Corp. Double-coaiod rel«f film and 
tSGcnt layer. 

Aifloioe: 
t.B C<rrp0faii0n 

E.P. 4!n,94l tmWbiJion pdirtb® oiiuliiM of »hc pin^bclt (jrpe. 

f p n%^7 MiukingandpnKessiligormultlliiyierfiltnaoftbcKoOiiehTomc 

IK». 

EaUmiDt Kodak 

E-P. 5T4v13S Apparatus Tof sirippins single Jayeis of a rmilitiiiyct film to 3 
new lUni canicr. 

E.P. 57*.139 A muJtllayer film, tbe iaym of which may bo stnpped. 

US. TtriudeolM PatettO iparlioJi 

I9H 1.146;IMI0 

WIS l,39(|^W3 

1915 US},315 

1915 I.493J4A 

1917 1,M1,31S 

1917 l,57Ci.S09 Film traatBical (W, B. WsioottJ 

1917 1,S73,S9S Dye oompGaiUon (E. 3. Wall, H. Kahiiii*, elc.) 

1917 I,573J96 Colour scnsitioiig CE. J. Wall, U. Kolniiu, etc.) 

1921 1,Sfi3,I0g „ „ (I. A. Ball). 

t«2 |,SM,8I» (D, F. CoimttKfc) 

1923 1,607^40 Film tnatm# sppttraius (D. F. Comrtoch). 

1921 I.677.3W. (L. T, Trotaiul). 

1915 l,«77J10. 

1923 |,«96.tK» (O. F. Coeatock). 

1927 UmM5 IL, T.TreiaDdMtdJ. Whiliiey). 

1929 1,707,699 IW. EL Whilney,) 

1927 t,7ll7.D0 Imbibition Machine (D. Cocntnckl- 
IMS l,71&9S9 Ebcpttntioo for piinting IL. T. Tbolaiidh 

193b ijSDT.SOS ImtubItiEKi prinUng £B, Sogden and B. $. TuUle). 

1929 l.S2l.6aO MuUUoytrninilL,T.Tftibusd). 

1929 1,((44.3D Optical system |l-T. Trotniidl. 

1928 I.m9l2 Dyeing film* (i.T-TrtlatKl>. 

1929 1,1(71,649 Colour Camcni (}> A. Ball). 

1927 J473.2W H, .. .. 

1928 1.889.030 

1929 1,900,140 Imbibition priming IB. Sufdrn and B. 5. Tuitle). 

1931 1,919,673 Imbibition Relieri (!_ T. Troland nnd W. S. Eaton). 

1931 1.923,764 EUliefii (t. T TVotand). 

1929 1,924,8» „ „ 

1929 1,924,901 ApparntiBCl, A. BaU). 

1931 1,926,235 „ 

1929 1,928.709 Muhilayer Film (L T. Ttotimd). 

1929 1,928,714 Pin-bell U-H. WhUney} 


50S 


COLOUR CINEVJAtOGhAfUY 


1^34 1^57,123 

]m 

im l.97S.^:9 

1911 Ip993,576 
1910 2,013.116 
19J4 2,m320 
193J 2,0^,879 
1937 2.072.091 

1934 2,&79,47G 
1937 2,08S.fT7 
1937 

1935 2.147,683 

1939 2.182,142 

1940 2.189.932 
1940 2.l89p933 
1942 2.413.468 

19*5 2,444.786 
1M5 2.444J65 


Bfam-spUuer prism anil vicw-flodcf ih A. 

Lacqnerm^ (L T. Tinalntitll. 

Opiiail iiMaiil for compcnsatijig d^tortJcro whdn -ccunbinEf^it Icey 
3j\d colour prim ff A- 0allj. 

^lonop^li {U T. Trolandj. 

MaItIk {!.. T. TrolojidJ. 

Hanlcnin^ giitaiwje < — Bactwiiit). 

The Tcchnkolof Omirfa 0* A. Hall jiml G. F. Rai:lKlt> 

SounO R-ccerd^ qxtd hTibibiliaa {L, T, TroSaod). 

I* ■■ ** ■■ *1 

Comstodc ftnd Iftc. (" I.B/" Machine;. 

Fzw] Aiul PobrizET. 

Prism (f- A. Ital] stid E PohE). 

Pmm (I. A_ atid W E PdhtJ. 

Colour Mastcine ijiEc^ual ErTpjck ^nd bEpack In a beans- 
«plittcr (O. T. Rnchell^ 

Endless bdl pfintftr (G. F- Ruckeiil, 

Projeetbn ^ound-rrack prrrum^ F. Rsckcil). 


Rf^marks 

C4»nflidering tkt paient hisiory of TecJmtcolar as a whole, 
we arc able to follow the evoludoa of ihc process wy 

ckariy. We can see how ihe experiervee gained during ilic period 
when cemenicd dyed rdicTs were being used must have piepsired ihc 
way for Lhe decision to use such relicr$ for imbibition prmiiiig instead 
of using ihc dyed relief itself the final product- A cemcjitcd pair of 
rilms TTiust have been V'cry ujisailsfactory as a finished nini. No dbubi 
oomniclioi] troubles would liavc been experienced as ihc film aged* 
and projectionists would experienced dtfliculty in focusing 

owing lo the buckling of ihc film. It is mleresting lo obsenc the way 
in which vnriotis piism systems of some complexiiy bud to be rejected 
tn favour of the simple block of two cemented 45" prisim. 

The class of colour obtained is recogiu 2 nblc Tecfinta*hr rohuriag. 
Indeed, in a way, it has ihc same re^uli as the specialiiocd technique of a 
painter which h ihc outcome of per5onal methods of pigment mixture 
and brush work, the subtle ties of wlhdi oflen defy nnulysis, but ihc effect 
is utimistakably apparent in a givian artist"s work. We can already 
say of colour fim processes that they have a look of*^ Technicolor,'’' 
by w^hich must be meant a peculiar quality of colour due to the Ibnita- 
lion of nil colour tones to a restrict^ region. Probably art dircctoni 
of the near future will be ah!c to choose between several equally gi>od 
process^, their choice finally being diciaicd by coasidemtion of 
^iheilc taste alone, based upon an individual preference for ihc colour 
character of a process. It remMus to be seen wbeiher a teDjdeiii:y to 
stylbiauuii or conventiottAlizcLtiort due lo arty iuciereat limitation in a 
process will be a valuable factor or otherwise. 

506 


SUBTRACTIVE PRCJCESSES 


Cotisidjtred as a technical actuAmiiient, the Technicolor process 
i$ a monuineni to the unswerving dcierniinaiion of the group of 
bechnidans responsible for its developmeni. They must have encoun- 
lerod immense dJiheuities. Anybody who has everaUempted to make 
a colour print by imbibition must realize the tremendous task with 
which these men were faced. If the s-arious altermtivo are examined 
as they must have presented themselves in the late niitetecQ-twenlies, 
it seems that imbibitjoi] is almost the last methfMl which would have 
been chosen. Our unstinted Bdntiration should be accorded to 
Dr. Kalmus and his brilltant associates (6). 


TctmNlCOLOft PAHTtrS FOR OfTICAL SmRtlS, FTT. 
(Piutbl List) 


E.P. 101.972 . . Westcoit. W. B.. oul TeJmicolut 19Ji 

E.P. (27,10* . Comstock. D, F, 

EJ*. IJ1,422 . OMMtock,D. F„aiidTedaiM^ 191B 

EJ*. W,97t 

EJ*. 212.114 .. « 1923 

E.P. 347.946 .. Ball, i. A..jiind Tedtnioc^Dr 19M 

F_P. 350.112 .. Tfoliind, L T.. and Tedmloolm 1930 

E.P. JiO^aO .. Ball, A A.. 4ind Technicolor 1930 

l3.P-iSl.306 .. . I9W 

E.P, 373.429 .r „ ,. ., '931 

EP. 3*2.239 . „ [«1 

E.P, 19® 319 , K iv 10 5 ? 

EP. 4T5,W» TccUl Mot, Wc^ C«Kp. Prism Sysitm {eaiherj 19J6 

£P, 536,465 - , „ „ „ ” Polaroiil*' Screen unit 

LlRht letcnsiiy 1939 

E.P-538.080 Tech. Mot. Pic. Corp. ViewfiniJer 1940 

EJ>. 538.744 .. „ .. ., .. .. 1940 

£.£ 552,008 .- „ *, *, PrismidjiislmMit IW2 

U,S.P, 1 JSO,983 - CemUock, D. F,. and Teclmlwtor 1921 

Lr.8.p. 1.451,325 . Ba1|,J, A..endTed]cic«lOr 1923 

U.S,P. 1.493.246 Corowa, D-F., and Teehnkotor 1923 

U.S,p. 1,541,315 .. Ball, J. A.. oiMl Wearer, W, V„.and Technieotox 192S 

U5.P, t.73«,0M . Tech. Mot, Pit Cofp. Prwn System (tailiifr) (923 

ViA-P. 2.0T2.09I The Teduccotor Ctunem. (BnlJ. 1, A., and Rackcli. 

G. FJ <9ST 

U.S.P, 2.182,142 .. Prism and Pottfher. (Jail. J. A) 1939 

U.S,P. 2,189,932 Priun. iBnJl, J, A., and PWil, W. £» 1940 

tJ4J*. 2.189,933 .. 1940 


Rvfereoces 

(1) Kiuav, WiLUAH V, t>„ /Mvn. So€, Mot. Pic, 10. No. 27. p, 2J8, 
ImtiMibui CoSariHg ef SIo$ton Aclwv FHm». 

(I) IvB, r. E., Joynt. Soe. .Mou AT -Bw., ID, So, 25, p. 74. Ivw dahm that the 
dre Imbibition tmKtes of Technicolor b substiuiliBlIy the matbod dserfbed 
■n ht* U.S.P, 1,186,000, 1925, 


507 





COLClI^k CiPjfUATOGMAPHY 

WA.LL, E. J-, Tht /ftowT^ i!}fJhn^*Cohr PfKi^^raphjP, Pu l5<k 
(4) Wjiot* E-1, TAff llhii}f/ Fhai&sP^Ay, p. 6JSr 

W. Brfl. lottfn. PAvl., 3T 11190), pp, S16^ ML 
KmiUCf'i /a*- PhaiueSruphti^^ S (ISSIL P- 18 L 

(6) TkoLaHo^ U So^Tie t’^hok^gical Afpc^^ts of Ndtaml Color Moiton 

Fkturt:*,"" /jiiirn. mt. Pk. £nt , IJ. Na H (1927), 

See a}&o: 

feywr of lAe Cp/wt Cvmmflfee ^ Jowa. Soe. Mah Pk. Ert^.^ Idv Na t (JMli, 
p, 219. ana I«. No. 6 (1932)* p. 79L 

(7) KAtiHtd, 11, X, ** Tfiiihu^or Advoitiu^ in CSnDnaLiind/^ Sof- A//ir 

Pir. 31, No. t (i9JS), p 5M 

HoiiSLKR, Lf Toehflkolor Ptuxognipti^ irndei WaterJ* Amrr. Cinimtt^^ 30^ 
4 lAiitdl 1949), p. 12L 

W, T., iumI Richey^ R A-, ^ ■ TbrefrCoSor ^ublTUKliYe Fholoi^phf,” 
Jmiim. iSw. Wof. SL Na 2 (Feb, 1949), tK t J9. 


tliDiii^D Color 
(Pnriii) 

Coi^jfr?,—The orlgiiiB] record u said to be made on Jenlicnilar film- 
Positive scpaniliom are rmdc on pnndbramatk double- 
coated Olm by optical prinliDg diiecf from the Tentkular Him. The 
printed images on either side of the double-coated fUin are toned 
respectively yd tow and cyan m(h thio-indoxyl and fcrricyanidc. One 
side js subsequently Te^muJsioned, exposed by optica! printing to the 
appropriate IraiicuZar element^ developed, and nickel^oned mageaia 
(nkkd dimetbylgly'oximc). 


m 


CHAPTER 5 


ColourXamears and Beam-Splitting Systems 


AEtmpt the eail onJ l^ewr numd to douhli Nothing so hiifU but search win find 
it out. Herrick. 

T he oariy attempts to obtain several itm^ of the same subject 
for tbe purpose of recording LlueecolouJ- Miatives all mdicate 
an appatently wilFtil disiegaid of elementary optical laws. 
Patent after patent proposes the use of several lenses side by side, 
or one above the oibefi^ or in trefoil arrangeaientt without any auxiliary 
optical cleiTient being Introduced to comet the inevitable pandlax 
which must then occur. Dti Hanron himSielf proposed to use three 
lenses side by side (t)» but he was quite aware of the exisience of 
parallax error. Such parallax is eventually visible m ihc final colour 
picture as a coloured fringe, which is due to the lack of g^metiicali 
coincidence between the difienent points in various planes of lltc subject 
as viewed from two or more angles fTOm which the respeciive colour 
records were photograplicd. This fimdamenial defect is made dear 
to the nottdi^hmc^t by a simple experiiucot. Cover the left eye, 
and with the right eye note the positicra of some object In the foiegrouiid 
fa tcicgmph pole* for example) with reJaiion to some distant ohject; 
then* ivithout moving the head* cover the right eye and with the left 
eye note the rebtivo positions of the two points onoc apin. They 
will be found to have ahered their relative positions with respect 
to each other to a marked extent. The parallax fonge around any 
object w hen the separate images are superposed in a completed colour 
picture is given by the formula 

,, Foal Leogih of Lent »f Lots SepimukHi 
iMnJtm -—- 

CLASSIFICATION OF BEjCM-SPIXITINC SYSTEMS 

1- One Ijens. Beam diviilid Dnee or Tvlce betw^n L^ts and the Filoip 

A. PftiSM Block, For iwo angles tt» each oihir. 

Single film in one gate luul bipsek in the other for three- 
colour; or a stogie (Um in each gale for iwo-colour. Semi- 
reflecting surface on diagonal plane of ptistn cube. 

B. PntSM Block. For three gates and three separate films. 


50 ? 




CQLOVK CtNEMATOCRAPHV 


C- Rotating Mirroiis, For neScction to ra'o or mote gates. 

D. Reflector or Refuectdrs, Images of standard dimensions 

disposed vcrticaliy ooe alwvc the otber oq one fitm support. 

E. Reflector or Reflectori. For two gates or three gstis. 

CThesc might be pellictcs, for example.} One film in e^h 
gate. 

F. Refuctor or Reflectors. For single gate. Beam divided 

to expose front and back of film simultaneously. 

G. Prisms. Reflector, or Reflectors. For two or more sub¬ 

standard images on one normal fmine. 



BtPACK FILM 


GREEM 


Fi(},. 2J6.—Tedmkotor Benm-SpUttcr ucajrdrna to E.P, 198and E.?. 173,429. 


filter : 

Red and 
Rlut Light 


J- Twt* or Minf* Lenses fnlhout BiffltEi-Qb'UlMi. 

Lenses generally sawn off to bring axes closer together. 

3. Tna or More L«h^ befaiail ■ Prism System for Bcam-Dirislon, or 
behind t PaniaUy Reflecting Miimr or Mifiws. 

A, Disposed vertically one above the other. Images of standard 
dimcnMOns, nccessttating a pull-down of two or three 
fmm« for each exposure. Two-lens systems used with 
bipack will provide three-colour negatives io each pair 
of frames. 
















COLOUR'CAMEAAS am? braM-Sputting SV5TEi!4 

[). Disposed lioiizonUiUy Tor luioor liiRCvfiUm, each in a scpainie 
gate but in the siUlie pjane—e.g., the filtnA are nut side by 
side. 

C. Disposed horixontaU;/, the images being recorded on cjcira- 

tvidih fOm. 

D. Two or three picttires of substandard size in the space of 

one no rmal frame. 

E. Two pictures in llic space of one normal frame, but iheir 

axes turned lengthAvtsc to ihc film. 

F. Two images of nonnal size disposed s'cnJcuIty one above the 

other. Pull-doAvn nomiB] and each picture exposed twice 
— i,f., once in each gate. 

G. Disposed at 90' to each other, or at same other angle. Separate 

gates and normal pull-down. 

H. Rotating nurtor divider in front of two or more Jenscs. 

Tire or .^1ore Lenses bcbiiul a Negative Diiergeiit Liuis. The Positive 

Lmves photograph a VirtiaU Imafiv produced by the Ncgntire 

Lens. 

5. Two UT Merc Lenses behind lacIJned GLbss Ftaies. 

6. Twii or JVTore Lenses bcliind a Large Positive Lens. 

CLASS I. One Leas. Beam Dirided Once or TwIm bctweei] 

Leas and the Film. 

1 A. Prtsst Block, Pari of beam refected at ri^ht ang/er lo the axis. 

The Technicolor cUTOcra beiongi to this categoty. E-P- J98.339 
describes o method of mounting a prism block in such a way as lo 
permit removal and replacement without disturb lag the adjusintent 
for imngC'posttioning, Obviously this patent covert only one of many 
possible devices for accompliihing a similar end. E.P. 550.^20. 1930, 
propo<ses to achromatize ilic lens system for the red and green only 
(t'.g,. the two colours of lon^r W!ivcleJigth>- 

In E.P. 373,429, 1931. Technicolor have patented one given arrange¬ 
ment of bipadc and single film used respectively in two gates. The 
patent claims an important advantage in exposing the red and green 
record in separate positions with respect to the dividing beam—e.g., 
that the red and green records should not be provided by the bipaek 
as usAial in two-colour systems, but that the bipack should record 
the blue in freni and lhe red behind. By this means it is powible to 
record both the red and green records cm the same emulsion (pnnchro> 
matic), whereas it would not be possible to employ n panchromatic 
emulsion ns the front film of a bipack, in Uw: words of the patent: 

By (orminj or these like enmisiom llw two Imaja which coatritaite mainly to 
building up the cnulatiuoL or, la oUicr wtudB. supply the *' body/* or *' suhsiasoe " 

511 


colour ClNt^ATOORARHV 


of the fliml piciiuE (the gradatiQiu of the ycUaw po^tive bein^ raiher utt 

which iirwt iticitfbrc b& corduKy biiljmc«d in esposoiE aad ^e^dopmeaL The 

mi imJ £F«n the ilaifni bekim msy be obmijied imiromily niiJ wiih 

racLIEly,. 

In the :^int patent a fourth ** key " print is descKbed (stse 14* 
Fig* 257), This may be a panchromatic emulsion* and it is to be coated 
with a green hiicr on its surface* A yellow filter Is placed at Y to cut 
off blue from both emulsions. Emulsion 14 would be n record of red 
and green light only. The patent states that the black key print is to 
have a gamnm of unity* and that this emulsion may be used to prim 
the sound and the black key print simultaneously« a gamma of one 
being desirable for sound record development. This patent would 
seem to rcsenc to Technicolor the use of the “ classical " bipack in 
conjunction with a single film in any beam-splitting system of the type 
described in E.P. 398 . 339 . 



ria. 2S7.—Ti^OmkolOf. E.P. 173,429. 


InjE.P,. 3B2f239 Tccbtiicolor describe a lens system to be used in 
conjunction with the isame airangeniicnl of films as in the above patens 
373,429, and which has ctjual foci for the red ami blue bipack records 
and EmKimum chromatic correetton For the single grecn-rccottliiig 
negative. A lens system is employed which has a secondary spectrum 
as shown in Fig. 4 (Fig, 25S), in which the derivatiotts of the foci 
for the various wavelengths of the spectruin^^from tin arbitrarily selected 
focus, are plotted against the wavelengths, the piirtcipal colour ranges 
also being indicated tn this diagram. From the curve it can be seen 
that the green range fias a substantmlty horizoniul tangent to which 
each point of the range of the curve is very close, $o that the record 
of thiv range has nn apprpKimutely perfect chromatic correction. 
The fact that the red and blue ranges nre not so well corrected is of 
minor importance, since these ranges do not contribute largely to the 
definitbn of the positive eolour reproduction. However, the average 
foci, or the foci of ihe centres of these marginal ranges, substonually 
512 


















CDLOIIK^AMERAS Nf!] SYSl EKIS 

cmocidc, fcsuiluii^ m $ub$latuiaiLv rooil distaftce Tor the blue 

jnd ttd records (tEie bipaeJt}. The fact that Lbc foci for the j^een ran^ 
on the out haiid^ and tbe red and blue ranges on the other hiuid, 
iiie not equal Is of little eomcquciicc, since this irregularity catibc 
easily adjusted. 


Fig r 



Fh UB.'-Tedintctilor, E-P. 


Tbe same patent describes methods for avoiding scattered light in 
the prism system, A minus^green, or magenta, ftlter is placed in front 
of bipack. TbU is said to et«a out the ineqtuljtios in the trans¬ 
mission of tbe Fed fU ter which is coated on the satfocc of the front fihti 
of the bipack, 

2k 


313 





































COUOt/il CINBMATaclltAl>HV 

rhere is a teadtnicy in pruBi systetps of ihU typ® for liic filto in each 
aperture t* TcfifiCl light of a colour to be recorded at that apcrtiue, 
and this tight may fug the film in the other aperture. This fogging 
(icndcQcy is most pronounced at the sides of the apertures which are 
dose logirtber—namely, near the edge fortned by prism faces 21 and 
23 (Fig. 258). Furihennorc, the prism feces reflect light, as indicated 
by the dotted Line LR, 111* green lighL which is reflected from the fitin 
J is effectively excluded Jjfoio the other apenure by minus-gteen 



Fw. ISV-—Technicolw, EJ, 492,473. 


filter MG. whereas the minus-green light reflKted from film I Is climi^ 
ated by green flllcr G, In order to shield the apertures agiUntt tire 
especially pronounced reflectiofi in the corner between faces 21 and 
23, this corner U made opaque either by bLackenlng the adjacent 
marginal pans of 21 and 23, or by making the margins of the mifrof 
pUiUD M opaque, or, ns shown in the diagram, by providing * notch 
with blackened faces 24 and 25. Id order also to exclude tire lighi 
reflected at surfuoe 22 (as indlcnied by my LR) another opaque cdg^i 
or notch, with blacken^ feces 26 and 27 is provided. The dainis to 
this patent are: 

514 



















COLOLTt-CAMEJlAS BEAM-SPirTTfKG SYSTEMS 

L. Tht art of colour p^wlography, as i;JEmELai in E.Pr churactairftl by the 

nic of a red filter betweffl iaUl froni and haek emuldciiB^ and a friiiiii-erecii filter 
In front of hotb qrmilslonSr 

1 The me of means for o>b$crui:iia£ fionr cuch aperture li^l rcfiected froni ihe 
rei^Q of ibc oihcr dpertnic. 

3, An optical %Ytbem having subsi-inliutiy cqiml foci for Lha rod alMl hhie fKordi 
Mihkh axt JKipcTpoaed sit one apcrttire, untl maximiEin chromtic oocicclioD for the 
¥Ui«o reoetd ai the other npemire 

In E.P. 492p673 Tcclmtcolor deal with \hc eliminatioii iif polarized 
light in a prism syslcm. It is a matter of facJ that piecisclY the same 
means had been employed by ific wTiicr some years pr^viotisjy for the 
Reilingham and Siardey prism deaenbed under Claims 3D (sec page 5381- 
The intensities of the componcal beams are itiade indepeiidem of 
tlie proportion of plane polarized light in the incideni bram by a 
compensating element whieh converts the light into dliptically (in* 
eluding circtilafly) polar ized light before strikmg the reflector. 
shown in Fig. 259- a prism P divides an inddent beam and a quarter- 
wave plate O converts any plane polarized light in the beam L into 
ellipticaily polarized light. 

The patent contains a good descriptioii of precisely the effect which 
ihe writer enccuntcTiod. To quote the patent: 

Wheti phewgniphimt coloar-scpoirslioo rccorda: with [itoSti^n ptcuirc cmmctiu 
nirp^u^ins ■ light sulitier, it vi'its frequejiitly fcTund utiposajhle lo imUnliun iTic 
ihcwctKaliy 4 nd c^perimcnloJly predetermine ratio of light dK^jion: for example, 
ihc rcccrrdiutuii of crflaia wetdii vary so mu4^ lliM, la ihe littal prim, 

th^ appoireU at van lime Ucddediy SJWi* And then again reddcih. After oonsidci- 
abk cxrMrimcntaltnn IL wai Jetennined Uial the prioline procea was not the omac 
x'lfihe traablc, tnit tha t ihc tranvaissioo-teflectkin r^tio of the light dividci vaiictL 
Further Fwaich led lo Ihr coocUision tlwi ibc diiifciilly was due to the fket ilmi 
the liflisi rcflcctoi into ihc camera ftOFn moH ofciectt » niofv or tcis jw^tarEiwh and 
that Ihe cfTeel! of the rcfketor lucU for ilJvidii^ Hfihi bemu of this naiurc varies 
cDiuiderably with tiw piiio of inddcni uniJolimicd and pohLrized Sight rcspccihieEy 
4n\\ Ihe duracioiTiks of ihc pokriaeJ Itadf* 

Designen; of bcitm*sptitlers had better be vv>arncd that this efTect 
is almost bound to cKcur, and there are not many other ways of solving 
the problem. 

Systems of the kind described in I'cchmcoJor patenls E.P. 131,422. 
I94*97L 212.134, 350J11 etc,, in which a prism system with several 
reflections is situaied between the kns and the film. ^ Buffer from ihe 
defect of reqaLriiig too long a path to ruftke feasible the use of n short- 
focus lens such O-s 40 mtu. or 50 mni.+ which is esrentUl in practical 
studio work. The angular field of such n tens will be ssi least 
and it is easy lo sec tliai noiK of these systems would be workable. 

Tcchfiioolor parent E P. 349,318 (see Fig. 260} is interesting in that 
it reveals a method of obtaining thrcc-ooloui records on two lilcns 
aide by side, or upon one film moved two frames at a tirno^ A filter* 
disc coaiaining primary blue-green and yellow libers is rotated in 

SIS 


C^OLOUR 


front of the prum, bebisd which Lhe fiJiers arc respectively magenta and 
greeiL The front half filter used successively with the rear gives 
alLeniatcly: 


Front Fliter. flaeJe Ptdf. Recorxh. 

^Kfinus^radrBlu£-<ifHi (Mjniurpwnl Bhio 

QftCA Cnoi 

(Ninu^blue) Vidkw (Mimii-irwt) Hed 

Grwi Gwi 


Frantt 

1 

2 
i 

4 




In the patcn[ the statement Is made that: 

In li» caw oT Tvpftthr moThta object* pkaqrt* fofnwd tiuQu^ the fiUen S find ® 
al ^ titw will not mahicr pw^h. raultiEie in a latdeacy 

townnte colour frin^; but hy inktoa the nod nnd ^itcn records ilmultanooiishr 
ihir)^ will [taiiter smil when luinc only a idnile iulitlfiimai lailoiir Mieh ns 

blijc, rrinics will ooi bt ootiCBahk for ihe reason that ili« bltio icoord, which is 
^Dw In the ftnni plcinie^ do» net wurlhoic kFfdy to the ddiRitkm of the 

The abow rdcthnd neccs^Utos e^EpoSimc at 4ft fmiiics per second 
in order to register twenty-four cotnpleie colour cocords. With a 
more satisfactory type of prism this would be a method worth further 
devcIopmeaL No bipnck ts to be used. The claimi lo llus patent 
are ns follows: 

5lb 





































COLOUR-CAMERAS ANl> BE A M-3 PLJTTINC SYSTilWS 

1. mfeUsod of makinii i;iFwmut|>iff5p#uc mm? <rf iJte liW havm* Itiro or 
nioi« ^ritt of compkfnmtul iMTrds^ repnsM 4iyi^ iltTRsfcnt cskmr a;ipdct$ Rspec- 
tivcly, to be superpoied Ln iybscqiicQl prindns or projwUnjs operatJonA, 

by i£X 4 >Q 3 inf cLiiTcrirm rocjords tbrcnigli di^crent fiJwta wbiah otetniot dIJreittot 
coirrporicnU of tlw light rcspeoivoly, cluuitiawBKl m llwit laiic biter runcdonj 
^imi^tao^KisJy id ooi^UA^don with eaii of two other illtets, 

1. In that Iwo lilten fiuiL-tion alienoulj^ itl cofyuDcticm with CJtdb 
hirers. 

3. Film ha\in^ ihre* sem of iworth of Uw (Jhioci field irtjitfc stone ^Bbt 

paUa wliieh compiim ^unuliiittfously two of the recotids alone 

paths* each rcconJ bdog exposed thm^gh tw^j mter^ limiilLmeOultf, ftanoving one 
filler from otw pjaih uml ^ubgotiuettiJiy exposing aFKi thcr record aIoor that path. 

4. Simiiltfliicousty with Uie esposMic 4iii0ihcr record » exposed oSong the other 
patbf whl lt£3t filter haviiiB been rcoE^ced b^ aaolher mter. 

5. An oh^cctwe, mcatts for divtdios Light from the objective along bnmdKd paths, 
a filter in e 3 eh of the branehnl paih^* amt « third dliar moving into acid olu of the 
|iath of ihe Light befom tdchitig uJd branched paths- 

t. Apparatus according id Qnlin 5^ Furehef dufietcdnd ^ a rouith fUter 
Hioving into ami util of the path cfT iJk light before reinJuing latd branched jKiths 
aJiernatdy vrith said ihirtl filter. 

E.P. 475.B08 de$crrib«:s a similar tight-dividiag system which would 
give rise to innumerable ghost images aliuo^l impossible so clnnittaLt. 
It would be iiUeroting to know whetbcT this arrangemenl was ever 
sried. It consists of a prism element receiving the ineidem light and 
ronning with at Jeost two additiotud prt£m ekinents nx leaijt two 
parity reflecting surfaces inehned to each other, at least one dement 
having a totally rencctiog surface iocliitcd to the paiLly lenccilng 
surfaces foe deviaiin^E a cotnponcnl beam coming from a partly re¬ 
flecting ^urfiice- The form shown in Fig. 263 fFig, 1) consists of three 
similar right-angled prisms t, 2, 3 placed iacontoci with each other, the 
coniaci surfaces 16. 17 being rendered partly reflecting. A beam K 
incident nortnaJly on the surface 5 of the prism 1 is partly reflected a I the 
surface 16* the reflected beam A being totnUy reflected at Ihc surface 5 
to emerge normally from the surface IL The beam B Ininsmitted by the 
surface 16 is again divided at live surface 17, the beam C reflected by the 
taller surface emerging from the surface 12, while ihe transmiited bami 
1> emerges nottnalty from ihe surface 13- In Fig. 261 (Fie die prism 3 
ii cmirted und ihc prism 2 Is divided into two prlims 32, 33 having a 
partly reflecting couiiLct surfece 37. In ihss form* total reflection oocurs 
at the siirraccs 5* 36- As shown in Rg. 261 (Fig. 3) ihe images, rr, c may 
be recorded on a double-width liim W moving in a direction parallel 
to the apeit Ime of the prism combmfliiotii the iida^ d being recorded 
on an ordinary ftlm F also moving painUcl to this line. AllcrMtivcIy, 
as in Fig. 261 (Fig. 2), the imtiges u. c may be formed on uucoessire 
spaces of an c?rdiiiaTy film 43 moving at right angles ti> the npcA line* ihe 
film 44 uImj moving at right angles to this line. Fig^ 261 (Fig. 4) ^hows a 
system producing four images and consisting of three siniiJar isosceJos 
pTLfnis 61* 62> 63 plaLxd in contact to fonn a comhinalion of e^quikterd 

SI7 




C0LOV« CINBMATOOIIAPHY 

ifiAtisulAr $ec(ion, the contact surfaces 64.65, 66 being partly re0eciitig. 
paths of the rays fonning four images k, tn, it, p, ate clear firom 



i 


Fig. 261 (Fig. 4). With ibis form the images can be viewed simul- 
lanMiusIy in superposition by a lens Q. U.S.P. t,738,095 is referred to. 
Both P, D. Brewsier (EJ*. 130,002) and A. Hamburger (E.P, 
237,441) patented means for adjOiitmcnl of a diagonally divided prinn 
cube to obtain tdeniical images on both ptanes, ]n the foimer paten t 
518 


Ul —Tcdinkgoliw, E.P. 475,M«, 







































colour-cam IRAS AND BEaM-SPLITTINO SYSTEAtS 

the positioos of Uie rEgisuatioR pins, or of ihje sales themselves, could 
be adjusted. The prism cbukl be turned about a vertical axis to adjust 
one imagi! laterahy, and it could also be tillcil Hamburser mounted 


Fkj, 2C3.—boun'Sptittiiu s»sw*n as incd A. Hamliuiaw for t bree co kwr nctf*- 
tivei. Faltmcd jw by Tcdmkoksr Comptaft filter aiGw^ancnct 

•Om 

bis prisS in a metal canier. having bearing suriaccs foimed as parts 
of B sphere; in fact, a speoes of uoivcisai joinl (Fig. 262). 

Bcewster patented a perforalcd metal icflector situated at 45^ 
to the beam (EJ. 100,082). Such reflectors are apt to give diffraction 
fringes and ^hsT minor optical eriors. 

The patent history abounds in ingenioos prism systems which {uve 

519 



timtwvt. 

6tie 


Pi^sm 




EaiiAtAi^h 


Bitii 

mtr 














COLOUR CINEMATOCILAPHY 

been pTOveij impmciiciibk* or which hikve fumbmcntal defects over¬ 
looked by ihcif mvtntor^. 

Any design coming under thb colcgorj must meet Ihe following 
conditions: 

L TIk aperture of the prism system fnuit acconimodnte the whole 
aagulur held of the ob]ecii\'c (perhaps 40'^, 

2. The focus of the objective must be at TtasL ns short as J5 rmn. 
if required.' 

h Perfomied refkctorsand ruled silvering shoo Id bo suspect. 

4. The beam paths through glass must be identical. 

5. Each pan-reflection should take m the whole cone. Any system 

dividififi the beams by feflectlnf part of the cone of rays h 
eenaia to bo defective. 

6h Preferably tlie part-reflecting surfAce should be evenly melEillIzed 
(by CAthodc discharge^ for Instance). 

To avoid the dijftaction given by parallel siK-er rulings, D. F. 
Comstock and Technicolor suggested (E.P, 127^308) silvering la odd 
island patches turned in all dittetions. The wntet has ao iofommtion 
as to the efficacy of this type of reflector. 

Warner Brothers have patented a sicry original three-colour beam¬ 
splitter 35-tarrti camera (Fig. 2b3) in which the three records arc carried 
by iwp filitis only. The two fflm pullndowa actitnis are arranged to 
move the film forward two frames m a time^ thus exposing alternate 
frattirt. One of the two hlms^ having been used iis the rear dement 
of the bipack* is Introduced in a second ^tc such that the unexposed 
frames are now exposed. This method necessarily rc^llSf in only 
half of Lhc liont him being exposed, anil a skipping primer must be 
used subsequently. Negiilives taken with this cnmcni could obviously 
be used for making Technicolor matrkres; ultcinatively^ii b ^uggestod 
by the im-entoi^ that the negatives could be used to make prints 
on a positb^ material of the integral layer type (tiamcly, Agfacotor 
postttve) hy successive or simultaneous printing. This wouJd» no doubit 
work very w^ll, The writer has no mfortnaiioa as to wheLher die camera 
lias In fact been construct!^. The opti^l system b of the conventional 
type and In prinejple is Identical to the Technicolor prism. The re- 
spccUve fK^tioiLs, howc^-er, of the bipeck And single film are radically 
different, iince the single fiitn b exposed on a horizontal plane Ariwa//j 
the prism, the 45" reflrjcting face of w^hich directs the Image down¬ 
wards at SW’ TO ihc optical axis of the lens (Fig- 264), The ms 

illustraied in the patents would be a very bulky insirumcnL, apparently 
exceeding even the iije of the Technicolor mstriimenL (VSn Parents 
2353,797; 23^^378; 2374,014: 1374,015.J 

* Boili the Teduricotcr oaU Durnychrantir cjtl lwe 25 fruit, foeux lemei 

ot fpc^l ikaipn. 

5m 





I 



i-Ki. WiLfoer Iksins-SpJiittfi Qiiiwm for " rKfee-sirfp ” lilm. 


























































FiCi, 26S.^Tlie R us bin icKS- l Cnlour Oimtfti. 


ifiWiwr $2111 






















































COLOUK-CAM^RAS A NO neAH-St>L1TriKC SYSTEMS 

Tfac Ru!}sia.n!i built a (hTee<<»>lour beam-splitier in 19^ known 
ZKS-I (Fig. 265). Hiis W33 (lesigned and constructed in Leningrad 



F»u, S^K^Wurw* BtiMlttn' Beam-^pliiter cunen for " 'nim4trt|r" film. 


under the superYbion of A. A, Mini; (9), Once aguin tho optkn) system 
i$ conventtonal snd foltowa liediiiicalDT in prism type. At utunJ, 
bipack U exposed in one gate and single film i n the other. The potitian 

521 












































COLOUa CIHEVIATOGItAPHY 


or t&e inagimnes u wry odd. The film for the single-film gate is fed 
from and rtttims to a magaziac in the normal podtipn above Uie catnci^ 
body, but tbc bipack fltnw are fed from a magaziae attached to the 
base of the camera. It is said that a 75-inin. //I -S objective » generally 
employed, but a 50-oim. ^n be used if required. The camera casing 
is setT-blimped. It seems that negatives made with this camera were 




Fm. 2fi4.-lr.S.F, Z 374^014 of Wuner SnAben {B. C HmIud). 

used for luinting by a method entailing sucx^ive coating and printing 
of bichrommed geUtine byen. These layers were exposed and dyed 
by methods analogous to Hnatype (namely, without faimtiis a wash- 
ofiT itlicO- Printing requited higb-ptes$ute mcnniry vapour lamps 
In order to obtain adequate U.V, Intensity, nod a sp^ of 750ft, per 
hour was attainod- 

TTw optical system of the Dufnychrome (originally British Tricolour) 
?22 




















COLut^H-CAMliHA^ AKl> iEAM-S^LE T ttNC< SYSTt;^!^ 

camera page 526) bctopg$ no this category p This ciamerar ciesigaed 
by Mfp Jack H- Code and Mr* Gilbert Murrayi is of ihe *" bipaek and 
one '' lype—exposing a bipack of two ^nos at one exposure aperture and 
a third, single film* at a second csposuic plane. A prism block divided 
at 45* and metuii^ with gold provides the two required Ughi paths. 
Blue and red rec^otd negatives am obiainied by rejected light front 
and rear elemeuLS of the bipack respectively* while the green record 
h exposed on ihc single film by imnsmittcd light. Two VitiEcn Model 

H " hhn movciticnts of tlie laiesi type arc incorporated in the 
camera. 

Brnploymcnl of two standard movements efTecti obvious economics* 
but involves certain problems of design. 

In order to avoid threading difficulties ii was decided to make the 
whole of No. 2 mechanism^ operating the film nxording the reflected 
beniOk a movable as^mbly, swinging into and out of its operating 
po^ticFD as required. It was considered necessary to be absolutely 
certain that the design and construction of such a '' swinging gale 
Vi^oulil prove satisractory under all w^orking conditions. 

Various nieasuremciiu, therdbre. were made on the camera in order 
to test the consistency of register of the tdcvanl moving parts of the 
camera mechanism, and also to check for variation of register between 
the two film gates at vaiiotus lemperatuncs. 

The ^wifi^g gate was repeatedly opened and closed, measurcfnent^ 
of position being made at each closure after clamping rightly with ihe 
clamp. A suitable target was mourned on the gate and viewed with a 
microscope mounted on the fixed frame of the camera. Movement in a 
venJoal or horizontal directioa did not exceed O'OOOI inch. 

Mensuremeni of angular position wax made with an auiocollimator 
and reflector^ An angular vurLiiion of J rninLUe about a vertical axis 
was obtained, because of slight variattons tn the ckmping pressure. 
This amouiit represents about Q tXI015 inch over the width of the film 
gate. 

The method of iocafing the prism block with a dovetail slide and end 
stop, pve location both for angle and position, with vuriutions of not 
more than G'OOOZ uidi. 

A crossed fine target gradculc was mounted in each film gate so ihai 
the images were approximately superiinposed when view^ed through the 
prism system with a ioug-foco* mtcruscope. 

The whole camem was placed in a refrigerator and allowed to settle 
to a steady temperature of approximately zero degrees centigrade. The 
camera was then remaved and the nikroscope was set up to view the 
targets through the prism: measuremcnlx were then made of the 
relative position of the targets both horizontally and vertically. 

The icmpcralure gradually raised to approximately TOO' F* 
(38 Ch microscope observations being luken at imervaU. Some 

523 


COLfltlK riNEMATOOttAPHY 




Fig. 2iiA.—DubyiciirafW thnt~t«lu«r coment 


524 














































































AND Atl-SFLITTlNG SYSTEMS 

diflicuJLv was expericiYccd at the \ow^r tempcraiures because of conden- 
satioD on ihe glass surfaces^ but voriatioas measured m dUier direcll^xi 
did SOI exceed 0-1>OU5 ineb. 

The way m which the No. I asscTnbty can be sw^ng away from and 
returned to its opetating position should become appareuc a(^er 
reference to Fig. 266. The main drive rum along the base of the 
camera^ doing .^io. 1 movenacitl through a coiuhination of helical und 
spur gears and 2 movement via a tntiTi of three ^rs located ahead 
of both the mechanism and the shutter. The outer surEaces of the for¬ 
ward bearings of the main shnfL provide the Journals on which the 
whole of the movable assembly is pivoted. 

It will DOW be realized that allbough the dosed or exposing position 
of the movable gate has been referred lo as its operaiiog position, ibc 
mochanism can, in fact, be rotated while in its open or loading position, 
a feature which essential for efficient threading. 

The bearings a! the base of the movable assembly operate lo con¬ 
junction with a tongue ai Ihc top of ihr ^te which ctitcrt a slot for 
lateral location and butts against an anvU at right nngles. to the 
diTCClion of swing. The assembly is locked into its c|o^ position by 
mcjUM of a spring catch and fiiogle thumb-screw. 

Accuruie pbcemeni of the two film-moving mechnni^^ of a colour 
camera lepreicnti only a pan of the problem of ensuring precise 
re^tiatiou betw^n the images forjned at the two gates. Since it is 
essential in practice for the prism block lo be removed easily for clean¬ 
ing, means must be provided for replacing it quickly with at least as 
high a degree of accuracy fts that set for any other associated movable 
component. 

The most convenient method of checking the posirion of the prism 
block in relation to the two exposure apertures is to iLluminate two 
tdentical target images while located in the gates by the regiAieT pins, and 
to view' them from the kus position by means of a simple mJcro^pc. 
The target images may be made photogrBphically upon normal film 
stoc k, or may consist of a pattern of bole^ drilled coincidentally through 
two strips of thin metal carrying accurate negative peiforaliotis. 

Except when the prism block is i>erfccily adjusted, the two targets 
will not appear coincident when viewed through the mtcriiscopc, and it 
seemed desirable tbat any adjustment of ihc prism block should be 
observed continuously through the microscupe without the necessity of 
rejitoving the block from the cameru in order to effect adjmiimcnt in 
any of the dcstrcd dhcctionv. 

The adjustable mount which wa$ adopted is shuwTi iu Fig. 267. 
There ore three direeriorts of movcmesit provided (Ftg* 267A)^ two 
rccliliiicar and one pivotaL All these movements ore controU^ by 
microfneter screws and locked with setscrews. 

The three prism-block movements, together with the prior locittion of 

525 


trOLOtJB CiNEMATflCHAPKV 


the iwo txpoilurfi planes in a precisely vertical poaition at right angles in 
each <31 her with re^siratiori pins b a common h<irizontal pUine, provide 
the means of obtaining perfect regiEtratiOD- 
11 has already been mentioned that the reflecting surface of the prism 
block b metallbed with goJd in order to take advantage of the well- 
known dichroic elTeci which is peculiar to thin films of that metal. With 
the gold surface a single high-speed orthochromatic emulsion is 
Mposod behind a ydlow filter in ihe iransmstied beam, whlfe a bipack 
with a hi^'Speed non-colour-sensititted element in front and a highly 
red-sensitive element in the rear provides the blue and red records, 
respectively. The emulsion of ihe froiit element of the bipack carries a 
red-fliter layer. 



Fia. 267A, — Three dtmctiuiu pf pr«m uebusunent. 

All un^idable result of inserting any light-divi<iing means, except 
Totatmg reflectors, between the camera icus and the film planes is a 
serious increase in the mitiimuin separation which it is possible in have 
between the rear element of the lens and the film planes. As thU 
minimum distance b usnally about 50 mm., even the advantage to be 
gained from the use of a glass with a high index of retraction for the 
prism block does not reduce the efloedve distance suBiciently' to permit 
Inc use of normal 25 or 55 mm. lenses. 

This difliculty bad been met by the use of knses of the negattve^ide- 
phoio type, which ha ve an effective focus oomidera bly less than ibcir bac k 
focus. Unfortunately this solution of the problem ^ve* rise to dsstor- 
lion and cannot, therefore, be considered satisfactory. With this in mind, 
C. G. Wynne, of Wray Ltd., succeeded in computing a 35 mm. objective 
without roMutae to a tupplcmentary Ions, ulthoagb a negative supple- 
raenfary stil! has to be tolerated for a lens of 2S mm, elfectire focus. 

526 










Fiij. 2«7.—Dov«i4n itlidc (or fwLvm mcpwii. DufaydiTOmc canum. 



hiG, 2M{,^5]ng£t-tiEm TTioi:hanitm nnd pri^m block: 
Dufs^lirofTie cuucra. 


I fttt b\r 












Fbg- 2)6!?. —Bipiiirfe removable guide voUer. 

DufjiyeJirtfmtf i;amOT, 



Fjq. 274.—The lui£ F* D. Biwslcr t'r^hi) tLnii D. D. 
Cavcili <krk> with ihc Hrevfiler thne^pHnir cainent! 







COLOUR-rAMERAS AMD BfcAM*8PLITTINO SYSTEMS 

Howvfif, it c^ancioi be sugg^iiEjCd UmL Hii; jjerfonmmcc of ihe objective 
ts ihc only ftvcior uifluendng deSnitton in any camcfa using bipackp for 
the mferior rcsolutign which resulis on the re;ir elernem of Any bipack 
a most serious limitation upon the dchmtion of the tmal composite 
prim, Loss of definition from this cause cannot be avoided* but it can 
be reduced to a minimiini ~m t^o by the of the most suitable 
emulsion (coated at an optimum coadng weight) for the front element 
of the bipack^ and the maintenance of the tnosl perfect contact obtain¬ 
able between the two rdms of the pack coufiUtjCnl vdtb freedom from 
exeessive drag or sermching during exposure. 

A wild metal pressure pad, very Ji^tly sprung, having n pyramidal 
crowit of 0’0Ct2 inch is employed^ This pad is so eScctive in ensuring 
perfect coniaoL between the two films that a resolving power of 30 lines 
per mm. is obtained on the rear element at the same lime as the front 
element resolves 56 lines per moo. 

Focus adjustment may be made at the camera by lueuiis of a control 
knob^ or remotely by mean$ of MapI ip motors, the latter meth od always 
being used when the camera b in \ih blimp. For focusing directly on to 
the single green record film, a ntagniTying [{Kik-through system is 
provided, and the image ii obsen^cd through the po^sure pud 
(Fig. 268). 

Parallax compensadon is effected automatically by the operatipn of 
focusing the camera leas. A MitchclJ sreebimage sdf-focitsing finder 
used, but it haji been found possible to reverse the opdeal bead and 
thereby rediiec the separation between camera and finder lenses to about 
4 incheSH 

The naeuDs by which paniHast h automadcaliy corrected for id! tenses 
Is thought to be novel and should merit detailed dc^criptioti. Each lens 
niDunt carries its own permanently ntiached annular cam, which upon 
insertion of the lens into the camcru, engages whh one of two rollers 
■illached to a pivoted arm (Fig^ B2)^ A fiat beariag surface uitached to 
the inside forward end of the finder ts urged by spring pressure into 
contact with the second roller on the pivoted arm. Upon rotation of the 
lens sleeve during focusing, iU accompanying cum serves lo alter the 
poattiDn of the pivoted arm und with il the angular relalionsliip between 
the tinder and Lhe camera. 

The Mng^ilip motors required for the dual purpose of fociising the teu^ 
and adjusting the view^ finder are somewhat larger than woijJd be 
necessary for focusing onlyi but it i$ considered ihiu the incon^imicncc 
of the additional weighi i$ more itmit olTsei by iht advunLajf!£ of iiu\4ng 
combined focusing and parahox compensation under all operating 
cnntli Lions. 

While a Magic mugurinc could have been made to houic the three 
films, it wm decided that certain ud^'anUiges could be obtamed by using 
one bipack and one singk^film magajtine. The chief advantage of this 

527 


rOlOl H Ct'tiEA^MOGhf^PttY 

amngement ihul with ont loailing from ciith sJdc af the 

camenip it becomes possible to reload while ihc eainem rcmMiis ia ib 
blimp. FurthemionSp ihc problern of mijiLm} 2 in^ him Rap, puriiciilarly 
serious when dim films must be transporttsd iHimultaiieousiy, h to some 
extent simplified w^hen the two films comprising dus bip^ck run through 
ihe camera in combimilioit, aldiough fed from separate l.imfocpi rolls 
and wound up side by side In the same magazine. 

In order to rostrict undesirable movemcm of the blpack loops, while 
$dil pemiUting the two films to turn ihrough a right angle and so enter 
and leave their exposing position: tvitboui undue Lendency lo twisi^ a 
removable imppiag roller is ttsedp and this t$ roiaLed by the progress of 
the films themselves (Fig. 269L 

Tlsis reduction of film flap and Ute extremely quiel Vinteo movemeTils 
combine to produce a colour camera wiih reasonably low^ noise level. 
althoiLgh it b still necessary to employ 3 blimp which is latEC when 
j udged by h lack -antl^ w hi te siandaids- 

The image, fonnctl by the Mitchell finder, which remains attached to 
the cnmeni when the huter is in the blimp^ b conducled through the wull 
of ilic blimp by meuns of u simple series of miirurs. 

I fl. Fkissi Orrx]K. fbr iittee ga/ef <Jw/ r/irte Jtparaie Jilnt-if, 

The prism patented by ihc writer in E.P. 475,415 has been success¬ 
fully made, and photographic teats In a still camera have demons!ruled 
its pmcdcability fFig. 270), No moUcu picture carnets bus been 
constructed to uccommodute the prism, nor Is it likely 10 be>^ The 
test negative showed perfect freedom from registration error aod the 
balui^ of exposure all thai could be desired. A colour filter Is provitlKl 
wuhiD tbe block behtncl cuch of the half-silv'ered surfaces so that ^ny 
stray light rellected from a portion of the prism lying beyond the 
Reeling plane responsible for the formaEion of a luteral image will, 
when finally emerging from ihc face of the prism adjacent to the plane 
in which the $aid iirmgc is to be recorikd, be mmus hght which the 
recording filter li^ capable of iransmltiing, or, if an emuji^ion is us^ 
which doM not require such a filter, which the emulsion capable 
of recording. As shown in the accompanying Dgtrre, ihc block b 
built up from right-angled isos<^Ics pmms 1, 2, 3, 4, The surfaces 17 
and 30 are coated wLib a partially reflecting sutface of aluminium. 
Magenta (mmus^green) filters 21, 22 are intoposed and the prisms 
ceiticiitcd in pairs w^itb hard Canada Balsam and dried off. The hypo* 
Icnuse facel-^ IS, 19 and ICJ* 13 um polished and the surface 
duminl^ed and cemented to the surface* 10, 13, with soft Canada 
Balsam with the inicrposition of a yellow (mtnEis-hlue) filter, and dried 
off. The fitiers ore dy^ liltus of eeUulosc acetate. This may be applied 
in the form of a liquid eontainiiig tlie dye. Of the light entering the 
prism, only red rays are trsnsmUled undeviated. Blue and red will be 
52a 


COtOUR'CMIERAS AND RE Ali-S PUTT I NO,, 5 VST BUS 

reflected throufili tht hluc niter 30 lu fttmt die blue cotnpoiwjit 
Alteniativdy, a bluif-tensitivc emuliioB nmy be used wilbcFOt a Iuict. 
Green and red rays (>-cllo«) ate rcHectcd ihrcugh the green ffllcf 3l 




0 

Fai. 2T0,—E.P. 475.<*l y. Priim to tjlvc iJiree inum on Ibice t»lan» ai fliflii 
i« each frtiwf (Oomwell-CljiMl. 

to pw the graen component record, (Only green llgbl reaches the 
film,) AKenudively, a yellow* (minuspblue) filter way be employed 
wHh ft gfeen-ieoHlive cmulsioni The red hltcr 34 Is optionaL A snmle 
objective 25 is used. By choosing different fihen for inclusion in 


























nci.27t.-E.P. 472^, Klii«tr. 

in ttitJcT to obvinte ibe rormation of ^econdury unages txpeal*^ 
intnrmU nUkctioni. Tba colour Utert 13, 14, IS are ceincnled to ihe 
csiii of ibe cube. The raya incident on ibc cube arc limited by a 
diaphragm 16 (Fig. 271). 

Rcficctor ^stenu such ax that u$ed in the Hillman still camera 
possess paiallaa enx;ra of too serious a nututc to be permitted (E.F. 
357,660). In this bcam'-spliitor soxral metal nfloctors ate of disC' 
ring form and disposed one within the other at difTerent anglw The 
530 


COLOUR CINeMATOOltAPKT 


the bloclc, the planes in which the three-colour compoitcm images 
Htc recorded may be iruerchanged. 

E.P. 472,46& of Kiaver describes a somewhat stnular prism, but the 
leBeciing suifacra 6 and 9 are provided with strips {piesuinably 
fully silvered) and the sucfiiccs of the strips which are turned aaay 
from the ol^jective are rendered non-r^ecting, by blackening. 

















COLOUR-CAMEHAS AND BEaM-SPLITTI NO SVSTEM 5 


rellectort are Jlightly elliplic«l in shape. This systcin must no' ^ 
confused with the dncmatograph bcam-sphuer. also ihe mseniiM of 
A. O, Hillman, which belongs lo Oass >F. s EF is 

exiraorditmrily siniilaf to M. Mi&fiev's EP. 251,027 iitnJ 2*2,767 
ami C. FL Nohe's E.P. 199,044, 1922. 

For the sludcnt other patents of note aic: 


WorVuMTi^ Hk I 
Twyman. F. .■ 

J. S, 

WcalcoUf^^B. 

BeiTLiJili^ A- I 

BuTE?t^» F. L. I 

Ault> FJlmi Lidr I 

M ** Ji 

Oftpime. W. 

Gtw> £• L., BenairdU. A. 
AmuM.it>a((, I. J. V, 
CorewoU-CIyiv. .A 
Reskwr, E, 

TniKDlar Fiitn* LiU- 


„ t.P. 

.. fc P. 7,ti» 

E.P. 101,972 


.. E.P. i$5,647 

, E.P. 295.662 
.. E.P 319,195 
HP. 111348 
E-P, JJ6,14t 
, HP. 280,938 
. HP. 414.2S7 
.. HP. 407.397 


1915 

1915 

1915 

1937 

1937 

1928 

1928 

1929 
1951 
1932 
1932 


IC. Rotating MiRRoiwi. fitr njifctlun 10 two or t7w^ gut^x. 

The earliest suggesUon of a tfunera based upon this ptinctple i8 
probably that ofT. R. DsOhneycr^EP. 22.616.11198), io which 0 tmmr 
was phiced ai 45* to the optical axis behind the objecUve lens. The 
mirror could be rotaHMl, reflccUns the beam in turn to the ^er two 
sides of the catnem. In a still camera inade in 1902, by L. Gaumoni 
and Co. [6: (set Fig. 272). the mirror situated behind she objective 
was carried on an axis parallel 10 the three fltins- In one posUion the 
mirror reflected the image to the film R and iimtiliaitcously 
G At tht end of this exposure the ntirror was moved to pmitton M 
aJd reflected the image to the third plate U, and the opque screen 
E then prevented light from reaching G. This scheme has the germ 

of a possible motion picture camera in il. 

In EP. 141,566, 1919, of i. Dourlctt and M. Cbrctiea. w-ho desenbo 
a onc-lcns camera in which rotating mirrors arc used for succ^siycty 
exposing three films placed on the three sides of a rectangle, the lens 
occupying the fourth, the parent expressly telales to cinematography. 
In F.P, 454,637 of 1913, Gebay used u single lens and three h^s 
on thrw side* of a rcciangle. the lens occupying the fourth ittde. o 
rotating mirrors at ri^i angles to one another, and nt an an^ 0 
w the optical axis, icHecied the image in succ^ion to the three Wm» 
and aSowed it to pass 10 ihe cencral film. This is precisely the same idea 

as Brewster piitented later. . 

The last Hrewster camera (sec ampler 111 made use of two romung 
propeUcT-like mirrots of polished nickel behind the objKtiw at 45 10 


COLOUR CIN^MATOORAPIIV 


\bc axis of liic beam and at 90* to caeh other. Spaces bttuwn the vanes 
permitted tbc light lo p^s to the film opposite the objective; tbe rotatitti 
mirrors successively deflected the beam U> the other li^-o gates, which 
arc at right angles to die orighml beant- The arrangentent was thus 
sttbsiantiaUy the same as that propose by Dourkn aiid Chrclifin, 
E^toviding the mirrors rotate sidBcicnUy fast theneiis no reason to 
anticipate time-pamlbx fringes, and worit which Ims been accomplished 



Fw» -271,—Qaumutti siiH csuktu with nxalnifl mirror (19023 l 



FlO. 273.-^Brryvitcf*f U AP, t JS2.477. 


with the Brawster camera has been entireSy satjsfiictoi7 ui this respect, 
firewater has unjustly been given tbc credit of having originated the 
rotating mirror method. 

The principtl claim in U.S.P, l.B2»477* April 1, 1930, reads; 

The oomboiAlion wiUi n lens, a i^Em-^gntc in. itie nsoj of iJm Icna lo supfwt a 
neeattve 6lm in poiEiion for expemrre, a plum mhror extending betiA^cn dio letu 
amt the fuij ain^aute and ooevpyins a ai an Emgle to Uk of the kn*, 
said mirror haviuit at kw nne lifht-piiiiiba oincEzuag, mcana fbr fcvolving the 
mirctit hi Its o/wn otanc, a tUmrfate aoniiaed to aiii^n A aEfiitive £lm iti posibon 
to mehe bght itflccicd by the miiTDr. means for feedina boih blm» thrmit^ tlw 
immluuKoiiAly ttep by »Kp, a MhatiarfofCTOoimf iHrth 
<if lien thereof, and meajii for Actoaiia^ ihe mirror, the Uiiuicf, and itw nim^rBcdjns 
ineaia In harroocjf N^ith each Other, 

532 

















COtCiUR.’•CA^^ER AS AND BE AM-SFt.ITTlNG SYSTEMS 

The fttlilowing extract is of inleitiU fa which Hrcwsier 
lishetl rhe raa&on Tor his adopiioti of revolving mirrors tor beam- 
spliltrag 

II u sxftcraLiv eOniiscdetJ itinl uny pradiiul ookiur cirnwre mwat miAc iti colmif 
sCRt^mtinns siTnulianccMijih lo avflid muikrabk fisihe* or fringe of ^Icur iuennd 
moviiiE objftit 4114 0141 aU ihn* Mparatlona miai be imidc fr™ iKc view, 
ppittt; otherwise it would be impiT^ibk fegister Eir -tapTriTiiiiw the 

^rnjHiiictii images in the . . t. 

ihc timitalions of a canKoi for maidig jumiilUJMua scpmttiMis ftom 
the same vtcwTwSnt, the next U imttike iow the lequiionieiits ^ tmses with 
ramrti to focal tength and «pe«t. Under sound studw wmditwnv whm nu^ii;^lin 
Ughi h very Snigely in use and ^here aneMSsasivc aniouiii of light cannot be owd on 
nccomii of ihc jnddflBt hcui and stmin on the aeiors eyes, rt is iiMssiify to uac i*e 
fasted possible tens having good coloui coTfoeliOtt. The limiung apenun; al the 

^ The gieat size of the seta used in the atudibf» mid the limited flcwr-fpooe of sound 
make it csscotifli thut ihe colour camera be adjptf d lo iwc n w^angk ^ 
of not over 50 mm. focus, tliemeh -W mm. would be liill bEtiet. At the taM time 
the beam S|ihtling ^yitcnl mml pcmiit the ttse of leases of frani lOO mm. to 150^- 
for sevecai rrawisi In a W mm. camera it is veo dilficuU to gpt a 
splitter radapted to teSkci *wt> images and tranamit one) in the ^mili lengtM m 33 
mm or 35 mm- between the rear vertex of the leui and Lhc fooil ptnne; tn lltc 
dso of the 150 mim /?3 tens the corre 0 ^ light Waving tl« MrvertM r* n^ly 75 ninv 
in diumcler. wh ttdi very ^aUy jncrcas®: the sne of the bcaj^spUttcr if no hm » 
lo be lo4- Where two or three matched Icth» jtc it b nooeanry to have a 
bcam-splitlar in ftont of the Icnse* lo rtf!a;t the Leght rays lOodved from ^ l»iii| 
inUj ibe separate leftMi; and wlbcre one kn^ 1> employ^ the filter he [noced 
behind to divide the liishl myi proJecled (tom the single Icni Into i sroui^ 
We betkve ihh cen be done only tn two wovg; cither by a Kries of ghiivs 
lyr by meins of a highly poUshed miner icvolving al an ungte to the 1 m and In Uk 
palh of hgihl rays. Tha mirTOr oonsBis of u diw having a number of alois m IT so 
that one pottjcm of ibe light rays is iranamittol ihwu^ ibete idots, or opemngi. 
and after pdssLnK ihtoiigli a suitable filler h oeemded as one of ite ^|»rat^; 
Uic portion of the light rays which strilecs ihc polished surfitce of the ttUda is 
Tefkcied ihrough another filler to form the sMind sepatalicMi; a second miOTf 
ravotvinH at right aogks to the fust ii o«4 far malUna the third separaaori. TIw 
mirror usuady has Three blades and meTta at two revoluucHis fcrrcutiiexpo^* 

SL» dial each frame is stposed two or Ibtee times. These repesued esposRjns have 
proved to give exactly the ia™flir«?t upon itic«wn aaiumidiiiM^ti^ 

dtdercnl eolouy sepanitkin*^ - j i, , ,, . 

The glass nrttm inwm iiai the adraiitagc of eKtcndittg. in “ cxtrameiy 
imnortut ,listAacz beiwecn iIk wbj iicne* of ibc lens ninl the focol pl^iw in pro* 
portion la the IimIo of tefnicikjn of the jlsus used. It abu hm the jidvanUp or 
cheapne** when mtnpMnl s,IUi the revolving mltnxii. wtuk Hie dnvrne 

tncdMiiain of llic Cfiitwu is nduoed, Uieniby preventing noise atnl fftludns the sise 

oflhecartKrH , - ■ . _ ii..k, 

TTw levolvins mlrtot system hu the sdviuttaee of not having lo tranunn the lltfhi 
thraunh i^ass, wh^ rewtu m a kwsof tisht< *hU, what»twre iinpanjiirt,* pww _ 
.rfUeflntiwin «sr the edjjes of the pkture If the iflss* P»ih is tw ons- Moh 
I mportnnl of all, it ii ptmible with m rewlving minDr ^ tluw^laur 

^eparaikrm r)U dute separaio filnis from a 30-niinVjf2 tens wtlhaui udding any 
10 lhc ilandiid objective to merttase ihc ligfd palh betwcflir the wm v-mwa artd the 
foeoJ plane. 


533 



COtOUK ClME»ATO0itAPHY 


Uttvjsitt proceeds to ej;Amiac ihc cfftckncy of I he Atand^ni ificototir 
Wnitten lilsers in rvlaUoii lo piificlironniiiE: IHm* mkd reachcis the con* 
oliisbn tlial by usinj^ three stpaml^ films: it h possible to use an ordlfian- 
blue-^iisJuve eoiuisian for ihc blue seperaiioin, and rcmiirk$ that the 
sensjitiveness of this lype of einuLsiofi stop^ ^jlmosl exactly at ihc ideal 
point* and noi !LQ\'i]if to use a filter it^ speed is many times greater 
than by using a standard tricolour blue Utter with a panchromniie 
emulsion. Advantage can be taken of this fact by reflecdug only a 
small portion ^IK>ssibly 10 per cent, to 14 per centr) of the light rays 
received from the blue separation *' Similarly, for the green separation 
he would use an orLhodimmtitic emulsEoa and a K1 filter^ and gaim 
in efficiency would again occur. The red separation will b«: be made 
with a Wraitcn filter No. 25 and a punchromadc emtiblon. He next 
argues (hat them is a great advanrage in being able to adiu^ii the 
development of each him fro as lo compensate For the wavelength 
gumma effect. 1 k examlucs ibe cunditions for printing anti hypothesi^s 
us ideal a film which was later realized by multihiycT three-colour 
positive materials. " The ideal component image would be like a color 
filter* pure color imbedded in the gcbun«" 

The nequirements for a satisfactory beam-spLjEtiug sysEcm could 
hardly be put better ilum in the above paper by Brewster and Millerr 

A patent granted to O. Azzoni comes under this beading. The 
claim seems to be that the mirrors are of sudi a sj^cc and shape as 
to be oipuble of intercepting at one morncm during each revolution 
the groicr pan, and preferably substantially the w^hole^ of the tight 
from die objective, and are driven by mechamsin disposed on the 
Opposite side of the lighi-sen^iiivc surfaces to the objective. As shown, 
light pp$!?ing through the objective O slrikes the sensitive layer N2 
dirccllyj and the sensitive layers N3 w^hen Intercepted by the mirrors 
SI, S3 respectively, both of which are driven by the motor M, Tlie 
mirroT^ are trape/oidnl, ihc w'ider endii being nearer the axis of roui- 
llon (Fig. 275), 

IG. This ctitTs is represmfedhvE.P. 556*436 o/ thr Cojfmcohr Corp.^ 
US.A. 

class 2. Twd or ^■IeJr^■ Lcicies wlthaul Beain^l>lvision 

ThU category miiy be dismissed of historical inkrest only. Such 
an optical arrangement must of necessity give rise to parallax. It ih 
singular that w> many patents were granted for an optical system 
inherently defective (Fig. 276). To include wjihin the normal image 
area two or more minuiture pictures, inventors in tlie early stage* 
of the art bad recourse lo sawH'Ofl" leases in an attempt to get the axes 
of the beams as dose to each other as possible and thus semewhas 
to reduc^e the pnraftax effect. Early pateuLS, such as CIiri 5 tcn 5 cn''s 
E.P. 1M4, I90a, PfenningeFs E.P. 25,m, im and M. Mtiurich^i 
534 


COLOllft*CAHEftAS ®1AM-SPUTT|S<J SVSTBM5 









Fkj. 275.—E.P. 459.636. O, Ammi. 

E.P. i3JS0, 1912, describe such km Bnaugjsmenls. The Gaumoni 
thiw-colour addititi: films esWbited in 1912 were witca »ith iniw 
lenses simibniy sawn off (Gaumcml E,P. 3,220, 19IT).'' 

* Socttie ^nUbseiwnt* Cmmidni. 


535 







COLOUH CmEltlATDf^aArNY 

R. Sp AltiJridgc ia EP. J22,SQ], 1928^ describes a speckl mount 
for SBwn-oJf lenses lo reduce ih^ This type of lens mourning 

was u^cd for 4 time by RaycoL to whom the patent licensed, 
for their two-colour negaiives. Tbe dutnnee apart of the axes of the 
lenses h made to vary with the focusing. Although pandlax is con^ 
sidcmbly reduced, nevertbeJess ii is still present to a degree which ifi 
not permissible m ^rious production. 

In the Zoechrome process (E-P. 172,714. 1920) two or three smaJI 
lenses are used m conjujicti-on with one large lens of nortonl focus. 



pKi. 276.—Sitwinllun aiwl fjiJlai?, 


One normal tens is placed opposite the first frame and three small 
sawTHOff lenacs immediately below^ it opposite the foliowmg fnime. 
Two or three small pictures occupying one frame nlremute with one 
ruUTmine picture. No effort h made to reduce ihc serious parallax 
which occurs in such a sysiem. Apparently, reliance is placed upon the 
colouring method to reduce the t^ndlax colour fringes. TTie foil- 
sidsed picture is printed in black-and-white, and the small picture 
are enlarged and prinicd in superposition by an optical printer. The 
effect of the black-and-whjic key ** image is strong enough to over¬ 
whelm the faint colour fringes introduced by the three enlarged images. 
The colouring process involved recoating the positive film with 
mtilsim for each colour, 


536 



















COLOUH-CAMERAS' ANH REAM-SPLITTING SYSTEMS 


CLASS 3. Two or Mort Lenses behind a Prism System for 
Bcam-DirislM. or hthind « Partially ReOccting Miiror or Mirrors 

3B Diniwed hartionmllv fhr iiin or three /thus, eocfc m a separate 
^ete hut in the nemte plaue^.^ the films are nm side by side. 
Under class 3B. Fig. ITI i*preflw«s diaKramiiiaticalW a pristn 
scheme by Bollioghnni & Stanli-y Ud, \vJiich h&s not heeo actually 
consiructed. It is of interest as a soluiion of the problem of dividing 
the beam in such a way as to permit Lhe gates to be placett in one 
horizoittal plane. 


Vww Unhing in OirttUen 
af Arron 


Fid- 2 T 7 * 


3C. Disposed horizwiialiy, the linages being rreariied on 

Under this doss is the early anccolor fBritishI prism unit illustrated 
eppeirite page 271. (Also see Fig. 3. page 273, Historical Summary,) 
Tltis was constructed for the old Cmechrome Lid. in 1921 uiuler the 
Hilgcr-Workman patents (E.P. 7,ftS9, 1915; F_P. 16.810, 

70-mnis ftUu which wii 5 u$ed had pcrroraliotte down middk of the 
film, besides the usual edge perforations. The unit consisted of a huge 
prism block in ftoni of (wo comptele ohjeciives. 

3D. 73w or three fiieiutes of svhstatuiard size tn the speer of one normal 
frame. 

The bcam-dirider (E.P. miOO) developed by Bellingbam and 
Stanley in collabomfioo wLlh the wriur was bltcrly used as an anb- 
pamlka optical unit for the ftuyco! two-colour addittve process. 
Two pictures were taken in the space of one frame, one beneath the 

537 






















COLOytt riNEMATrjGRAPHY 


Oliver, Tii<? unit was novel in thzii ii iriiidc ti,^ of Toel^nd spor & 
double refracting medixiin. ITie arran^emeni comprised a pri$m of 
ihc NieoJ lypc combinea wiih means whereby the reflected beam 
again T^fleetcil at a sujfaiic parallel with the rcnecliriE surface of the 
prism so as [o emerge parallei to, but spaced fronit the ineideett beam and 
the oomponeai imnsmittcd by Lbc prism. In the form shown (Fig. 
278) the equivaJent of a Nicol prism is Jbnned by two glass prisms 
B. separated by n layer C of doubly refracting materiaL The light 
rejected by itic layer C enters u prism D having a reflecting surface 
E parallel to the layer C, so thnt it emerges from the prism D in a 
di^ion parallel to liiat of ihc beam transmiired by the layer C and 
prism B. A rhoiob G having two parallel rcfleciing surfaces may be 
placed agatn^sl the exit ^urTacc of rbe prism B so os lo alter the dis- 
pLicemcm between the two eoier^nt l>eams without affecting theiT 
parallelism. The optical paths may foe equalized by extending the 



Bellijrtgtiiim Jitul Stanley** E.f, 3*^?t,Ti:iO 


appropriate exit member. The pri^m can be uijcd ciihcf with two 
objectives in rear or with a single lens in front of the dividing prisni« 
i. M. Gutmann and P. AngenJeux in E_P. 437.414 describe an 
oppral system under this category. We quote the abridgment below 
(sec Fig. 279). 

Apparatus for taking cincmotogrnphic picture* Ln naiuruf colouns 
comprises three objectives 01, 02, 03. Figs. 2. 3 and 4 (Hg. 279)* 
mouiuted. close enough together to give simultaneously three separate 
images G, B. Fig, U in one normal picture spuce A of a suijidofd 
cinemaiograpii film, three colour fillers for the three colours, each 
associated with one of the three objcclives an optical system in front, 
of the objectives having a somi-reflect ihe. surface Ml* Fig. 2, and a 
totally reflecting surface M2 located lo secure two of the iina^ R* G 
from a single point of view, and an oblique prism Q, Fig. 4. with 
parallel faces placed uguinst ihe optical system to secure the third image 
B from a different poini of vipw% the optical system and the oblique 
prism being so disposed that none of their faces or edges cuLs off any 
part of tlie ndd of view of any of the three objeciivcs. The optical 
sv'stcm may cont^isi of a prism block having tlic semi-reflecting surface 







COI.OUR<CAME11A» AND flEAM-SFUTTl Nti SITSTIMS 

MI and totally tcHccimg surTuix M2 Inclined ut 4$ sio that ihc incident 
he ntn H is divided between the two objectives Ol, 02, the sutfnee MI 
being hatf-silvercd to a suitable density or fuliy silvered with parts 
of the silvering removed; altemaiively, two paruLlel miTTOrs, one semi' 
ininsparem and the other toUdly reflecting, may be used instead of 
the prism block. In a modiheation, in order to avoid pamllnx, that is, 
to secure the third image from the same point of view os the Sist two, 
a second optical system similar to the optical system P may be airuaged 
obliquely in front of the abovc^dcscribed Hrmngemcnt, la a further 
modificaiion, suitable for use in poorer light, the amingnotent of 



m. 7?!>.—E.P. 4J7,4I4. J, Mk Guimann and P, Angfenieuit. 

prisms P. Q is supplemented by an adjusiable focusing lens placed 
in front to focus the feature of greatest interest at a constant distance 
from the objectives. A second kns may be added to form hJ] ofocul 
system when focusing is efifected at inSniiy. Spexifications 306,329. 
{dost 97 (ij), 385,141. and 419.&94 are referred to," A projection 
system is described in £.P, 443,061. A multiple lens mount is covered 
by E.P. 433.981 

The extremely complex prUm covered by E.P. 459,664 of Bellingham 
and Stanley was made for Gasparcolor Ltd,, under the writer's direction 
(Fig. 230), The bJoclc contains two semi-reflecting and Lmnsmitting sur¬ 
faces A, H to divide two component beams from each other und from 
the third, and three internal surfaces H, F, G, lo rcfleci the beams in 
the required direction, the lengths of the light paths being equal The 

539 























COLOUft CINEMATOOKAPHY 


part of tlJe beam reflected by the partially rectnlHsioled surfaw a 
of Ihc Jix-i’tdcd compoaeot prism I suffers total internal refkctiojt ai 
the oppo^tc sudkee C of this prism, and h then Tcfiected out of Ihe 
combmatioa by the surface F of a triangular prism 5. The uransnutlctl 
betam is loially ft fleeted by the surface H of a triangular prism 2 



FlC. 2B0,—E,P* iiV B dan^ g hurr^ and 


on 10 the p^aliy meuilocoated surTnee & of a rhomb X where tic beam 
1* 4gmn divided. The rcflecled ponion is reflected out of the combina- 
tmo by Utc surface G of the rhomb 3, and the imnsmittcd beam, 
i^r loi^ reflection at the surface D of a rhomb 4. js icflecxed out of 
he combination by the surface E. The three beams emerge parallel 
to each other from the luriaee Y of the combination which is ^rpeu- 
540 












t-liv. :2SL—m ffclllnBhum and Slafilc>“f f .p* 45^,«'iM, 
mount rn|t .inil lens objcclist«- 


^4 MOi 







2fl2,—Prism siccmlinif td BeNliij^ltiini und S-tunIcy V 
F,P* nicT[iiitcd on VinlcEi camcr^l. 


»ii 



COLPUR-CAMEKAS AKD BEASYSTEMS 

dictjlur to ihc eainiaice face X, aod glass distant^c^pjeces 6. 7,8 ensufv 
eqtml light paths. 

An mteresting patent of Bdlinghain and Stanley (E.P, 451,274) 
dcal& with dw gate necessary to accommodate the three sub-standard 
images obtained with the prUm ju^t described. The exposure apertures 
are c^h of a height equal to hnlf the length of film Feed and nf a widlh 
half the picture width of the film, two of them, a, K being spaced apart 
in the longitudinal direction of the film so that the length rf of the inter' 
ventng space equals the film feed, and the third aperture e being located 
beiwcen them but displaced laterally so as to be dear of the space 
between them. The airangesieiit permits the me of larger lenses than 
would be possible if the apertures were juxtaposed, and the aperture 
c may be midway between the apertures tf, so that the leas diameters 
may be a maximum (Fig. 283)^ 




Fij.l. Fij.S- 

Fm, 2 SJ.—E-Pp 451,^74 ofS^tlm^jlnl and Stanley. 

3E, T\s^ pkiiiTi^s in //le spacr of om* mrnioJ frnmet buf tb^fr oxi’j iwned 
len^tkwm i& tin* fihtK 

Under this heading an important group of paienis Is held by Dufay- 
Chromex Lid. which were acquired in 1937 from Cinccolor Ltd., 
originally fonned to develop the patents of O, Daponte and C. Cos. 
The company also owns a Ikcnce of some patents by Adam LUlgcr 
LttL and J. H. Dowell of that firm. 

!n E.P. 346*406 of D* Daponte the principal claims read as follows 
Fig. :&4; 

t. A fKTum ^ml iem 9>'^iein rbselvln; ImitiSH frem the I4me isipcd 

for inwupcs skit by si4e on tbt film, [irefcrubly uormnUiixd HIeu with the 

widlb or harcsooiai line! of each pklurc runnins atUfii or p^niJId to the length 

541 













J=Ki. O, Cktpiintc'1 E.K 


542 















































































































COLOyH-CAMtftAS ANT> HFAM-SpE-l rtf SG AYi^T«MS 

or Use fltm comprreifiii 4l Nghi h^irrHlsvkiifUS priwn i.ynerti Jtui »«i5& 

in «rhicli the beam* hk aepjra^J by such •in jniouni, or un2Unt4 to «eti oilwf 
suc^ an angle, m wntl permit the uw nf kmo 4>r laii^ j|h;riiir4;» ihe lepiiraiioii of 
ilw bcoim bciii^ ficuilly rkiiux]ii md one or f;j£h of Uie bdami radfioetcd by a 
rt^kciing saufacc belwcert one or bai;h leni and ihe lihtt al suiili an dngle ^ form 
the ilifc by slide on ihe film at Ibe mmilnsd separation and pcrmii tbic nic of 

Icn^ of Eboit Toeaf kiiHth- 

1 A, beanMU^^dmj^ kind taking iiri^ atid Iciu lyHieni o En Claim I , coi^tmcted 
^ Lia il^tr beEorc itie km to lum die so ihai ibey appear in ihc 

rciqutrcd oncnidtjon on lit film dnd pctind tlw crmEn uj he tiwini in the LipliiEhl 
posiiion- 

3, A beam-tlivkUng taking system according lo Clawio I uf 2, wtufdn ibc imaged 
are vmt the same way op pp rhe fUm. 

4, A bcnm'divfding mking system uooanling to say of the preceding doims 
whemin tiK lengths of the jialhs of the nmrn and branch bcanis Uirnugh the pmms 
to the Ica'Ses and the ccfroeliie Endke^ of the prisms ate so propt>niufi»d that ihc 
kngihs or Om pmthsof the beants friMti ihc point where ihn mam beam is divided 
to the lenses are optically oquak 

5, A takieg System uccWditig to Clamti I 10 4 in whkh t mirror ii lued between 
the leas and the filni ^nd the i^cnrriOtioD nf lIk Liptical lengths of the paths of tho 
beams is ctrectod before tfir tens. 

This ivn$ IbUowcd by E.P, 349J07 of Adam Hilger Ltd. und J. H. 
Dowell, The patent tmuins with a very important siitusmem which 
^Duld be carefully studied by designers of beaTn-dividiug systems: 

This invention rdatici to coimnu rur colour photogtnphy in wludt n prism or 
combination of prisms is used to fortm a nximbcr of imaesa of equal cash 
image being fonnKt after transmission thrungji a ealoured llltdr, l^ueh ptisms are 
tmuiljy ctmirtTiietcd of gJass ol the fiainc Mraetivo indai tfirougliouip and It k 
found tliDl ihcurKiia:^ ^ fomiKMl, atihemgh of oqual wm for objecti ut Infinity, aw 
net or equii rija; ror rlfiir objoeU- This imeniloji has ror its object locaiu w hereby 
prtsoui con be coasi rutted bo that ihc imuigcs are all of ihc samfi sba for objects 
al alt dkumces. 

The spcciljcaiiou gives demlis of liie necessiiry corrections for two- 
ajid thnie-colour systems: 

Coniidcriiig lltD c3ic of a fwo-ooloiar ettnera, it k lughly importiini Uiat ihc 
optical disesnpe Trom ihe objcci to the hmihoidd be cAdClly equal for both coloun, 
Lind this is fiecured by proper adjuAtmeni erthe two glass patha such iImj 

Lj _ Lf 
Nit Ng 

where Lt b the rocol kisglh or gloss ror one i:okTur ond its refractive index for 
that colour and and the ccirespondjug kfigih and refrocuse indfix for the 
ffther eckmr. Such a system ti cmroi m the ax» for objects M all diiiancok but 
this b not the caac for oblic|ue ruys. With more than two colourt ilie same condi- 
iions hold rnr nU ihe colours. 

The conditioRi naxmty for eompklc ttjtToctltin ol tnaguiikation ac all dbluncrs 
rcr a two or more colour oimcra ure; 

ll j ^ for etch colour h oqual. 

r2) (t bill rlf rnr each colour is where i. b the Icrtgtb CM' gluM p^lhi 
N IS the leTmciivc tntkJL 

r k the angle of rernicUOn 


545 



COLOlifi CtN£]ytATOG>lAPHV 


1 cipnesati lire ecrunElly of ihe tcnr* for ray* ofi tki 

vpTiul uxit iwd cquEiticm ^ enpicsksfs ihc c^uoliiy of iht> local Ituml Mil for 

Tha cofufitiont for titskct conKCkiD aw tlaied iww ^pcctBciliy below bt llw caw 
« a tw<0roiir ofmnt. Fig. I serviiag to iUunwie me ];»JifU;iplv Csee Fig. 2a5j, Tte 
ftsuio repnamii ibc glaa puih shown a* L in Fig. 2 <F||;. 2B5l but with a prism 
tystem aKording lo the invi^uoUn In the Hgiiic And eqijjiti< 5 is" 



Li =Lengih of giasi dommoti to both coltnin R. jmJ G. 

Li ^Length of tscluslve lo oolour R, 

Lj = Ufigili of gloss exclottvc la ualoi,a- Gi 

-Refmelive indo^ of glau common lo boUi H^km» correspondinB la the 
mean wDveloqgth of coLour ft. 

=ftcfnicii'Cc indes of glASii ooinmtA} to hoLti ooloua i.'orTrtfKiiidjnfi to iho 
nimn wnvdangth of colour Q. 


544 


FkQ. 285 ^^P. ot'Adiini HJlgtir Ltd. mi^ I t 13 c»wiMI. 








































COLOUK-CAWERaS ANfi ttEAM- 5 PUTTING ^YlTEMS 


Nti •= R^fracitve etkIcji of cKctuaftis to oniioEEr R comcsipKiruiiifg to the rtic^B 

ijf colour ft. 

=RdrJOlivc Index of ^UtSs cxdn^tve tocoiuur R corresponding loilicuicao 
Ahnvelervvth oT cokiur Q. 

f = Aji^lc of refroudnfi. ihe sufFiiot tippemicd having Lhc aamc nKstiuna ^ 
aiipendcd lo H. 

The Citimiilion Tor exact coTTectien It then expressed by equation I above, which 


beoqms 



Lind eoMMkm 3. wlikh becooici 

L, ten .ffi, -h L, tnn jRt = L, tan tan 

An eiample of a lhrK<obur prism system li ibown in Figs. 5 aiwl h fFig, 285J. 
Litfht entcTis the pti^m A jiod is tllvided at the scfni-ieHcctiiig smiUoc JL Tlie direct 
pull pimnA Lhfougb the prism B la a jecond temi-rd^ectmg surface SZ which ot^in 
divic^ thii piui of the lighi- The direct pnrt pa^iscs through the prtsoi K And h 
fociiKd by tJ» teni g on tite forai plithc fZ The glaw. A. B, and K are all of the 
Bixjuu kind. The w^kyi refli^etcd m titcsurniocs JI und. X2 are subjected lo total reJ^ecUoii 
m ihe piisrns A and D respeciisclj imd pass iJinmgh glasses C and D lo be focuiod 
by Icnsci F niid E al f3 onil/l reipecUicly- The twvi indlreci ijo^igcs onfj and /I are 
eonirecred b>' glastes C and D. ihc irieao of wIhkc refroctM indict and N^ 

for itreir respective cotoiux » eitiLul lu Uic refriicijve indices Np^ aM for thde 

colours in the gla^! A common lo oil colours. The meiboO of procedure ii therefore 
exactly the same the Ursi example for a iwo-cokrur c^ittcra described id con- 
EiDctioii with Fig -1 (Fig- 2S5). with the adOitjon of the direct imo^. 

If, for cxajnple, the ume pnrticvilfiTi ere assumed rn thh the rcTnictive 
index 1"6J:50 ^ould be the vnlue for the refractive Index of glass K individual Co ihc 
dinecE irMg«, consequemly aUo of glass A and ft frif the ^a m c oolouf, ifld it i*iatlld 
only be neee&$ary to deteriiiEne the ktigth of required usfd^iow^: 

According to the rcauti obtained from fomnUa (3). the mtan reduDcd pith length 
equals 2-7B645i so lhal 


Lj -hL, 

N| 


2-7fi(;45 - 


L,H-La ^ 
K150 * * 


u-'isoai 


» thul U-d 50«>1 -2 5-2-OOOL 


1l wiH be seen fcoin Fig. 6 |Fig. 2S5} Lhat, jufiir (u descnbcd in oonneexioft wiih 
Ftg- 3 (Fig. 2S5), the poSnti N, P. and S. where the three componenia of the oblique 
rtiy drawn m finally Leave Use glass, are at ihc same hartrensfaj Im'd^ that is Ihe total 
tateral shift is tbe same fot all three compcrncnlSv and cotuequenlly the throe inna^ 
of lUi object at any dwrji rw . are of the same aiic and tuch ai will register saiixfactjcTTity 
In any subsquust proccu. 


In E.P. 38B|754p Ad^m I^EjJger Lid. und J* H* DowelJ potoittod a 
dividing prism combined wiUt cylindricaS und sphencul lens elcmejiLs 
lo produce two or morer identical imagts from the same viewpoint 
the images having diffcrent mngnifiailions in the humonuU and vertical 
directions, so that one scl of companion images eocUy Dlls one picture 
space on the film gjid the irouges are in close juKtupositJori. 

In Fig, I (Fig: 21^6) the light is rvocn-icd by a cytindocAl imith'c lens I Z and ihen 
enters a ijnKn I baving a Mmi-reJtecUfig lurfooc 3 dividing the beam luio two poruv 
ont of whkh afler reflection hy the siiffucc S p^L^sei through a negiiiwv cylimlrical 
kna 13 and * pwitirt splicm:Al J S* while the other u refleclcd al ibe surfitue 7^ 

2m 545 


COLOITR Cm^MATOORAPFfV 


passes tliri;]u§h tenm H ^uul 16 la the teusa 13 dJid 15^ mid isdcvluied A inlrroril^ 
the iilui«a bclDg (&rmai liiie by fcidie ai Id ami IK Ibe dmcT ^ positive apd 
negative oltndncol IcnscA mmy be porallcl or it dght aiiAks to each ntber, and the 
ipli£j^J lews nMiy be diiposeJ the i^tindiual lecm mstcad oThiiviDg the 

poftflioa showci. yplK^ioil and eyiiadricdl eSemeal* may be cambiiieil b luch a 
my thai nt least cmm km hm n ^hertcal face on one side sad a cylindiicaL face on 
ibc other. The ptUm I may lUclT be pmviiied with spherical or suifaixs, 

insiead of the plane sntnince or suddeea shown. The imges are proje^ed on 
lo a screen H thf oli^ h sviiein whidi coriects the dUtonbq^ su&ih system oons^tin^ 
for eaeh image of a sphcrkal ko^ Z3 (Fig, 3> between cylindrical lenses 24,25. TJto 
axs of the ey Emdrknl kitses may be eitKsed, to which ssue it^ knacs m cither 



l!S--5- 



Fkj. 2*6,—E-P. 3»g JW cf Ad*m 
iLljpcf Ltd- and J. LL Dow^L 


both positive or both negatlit^ or ihe oxea may be paralld. b whkh can the Iciw 
lie pneTerablr of opposite rigns, 

Tijc most iceent of ihe Cinccolor (Brili^) paienls isi E,P. 427.9S3 of 
Adam Hitgcr Lid., and J. H- Dov^iell of that firm. The pnieni is of 
considerable importance, as mcags are proposed for avoiding some of 
the th<»n;uc!il objections to prism-dividing systoma of the type in which 
the prism block is placed in front of two or more objectives. The 
camplete spedfieaiian wilt be quoted in AdL' 

The invention letaiei to the (k»(n of piBtn combioaLiou few w in enmoas for 
colour phaitfgwphy of the type in which, for ihc ptupose orqvoiding paroilaK. the 

* B> permtuion of the Conirtiller af U M. SuuioKrv Ofiko. 


546 

























CUI f»t!«-CAIrtP.f! AS ANt> EEAtr-SfllTTlNC 5YSTEM5 

frw» ihe object enter* s oominan apCftuM and it then divided into or 
nicttc diBerenl beans whidl are condacfcil by priifflt tn the liBhl path* (o « cortc- 
spondinj number of dlfTercnt pholograpblc Iciisci Tbc ccmiluiofls wbkh eo^m tbc 
of melt prism ocunbmalionl *« dissuHcd in tbe spedfinitiein of patent 
No HI 107, and tniaiJ* ate that di«k«d for obiaiiuiie «nial uiagnidcation of ibr 
dHTefcnity coUjiwrtl fanaset of object* »t all ilisianoes by Uw tise of two Of nmie 
dificTcnt kinds of glass in at lean one beam, Case* may arise Mihete llw full oometJon 
ihcnt described is not of priiM iwocssity. and wliere for reducinB time or con of 
munufactiiK a less pcrfeci oorrectioti will be found a saiiifactoiy cooipromiM. 

T he prasHii indention bus for ita objeo means wheicby the prism combinuiion 
mnv be constructed If desired al! of one kind of glnss and yei so Umt the different 
imugea of an ot^ect at any dHtrUK* will lls« equal magrifksuion wilbin icasorable 
pncticsli Ti frtii ^ 

AS Shown in the above-mentienetJ psient spesiikatmn, Uw tateml thifl of an 
oblique r«y oTliglit passing through a parallel-sided pUte. which is the equivalent 
of the pfism aytiem, depends on the refractrix index, and aecpnlingiy the lliiht 
arriving at any paftieular point on the phoiegrapMe plaie away from the axis cornea 
from one point of the object in the case of one colour and from a point ai a finite 
frum the llr« in the case of another colour. This sepamrion sub- 
tendi a negUgibie angle al the camera lenses in ibe case of vxiy distant objects, 
but with near objects the efTect is to produce inutges of differml sum which do not 
register in Lbc processes 

In such sy-stems the lifcJit ot ihc varienwly ctHotirod \n\a^ at the camera 

kflica by iie ttiffcrtiU before sepamLion of t3ic bcama And noE pwisely 

equivulrrii ibercafLcf, The ere uiuiiUy selected to be of equal miM^nilkation 
ttl theiiiseJvn- Tlie coadtlbn for sKurinjp oqueJ magmikation of the various 
b thuE the lateral fihiH relaUvd to each tern of the oblique ray* of lia^nt from 
iht oky^ct due to the of the wy* ili/ou^ ihc prism syiieni ihuuld be Uic 

lumc for each p;iili. 

Another way of expressing this Is to wy that ihe ” i^tiecd dHlaite for ohliqua 
fays from Etw otrlrect lo the len* mtisl bo equoL Sy '* reduced distance for oblique 
ray^ is here meini Ow disuinoe mMstired pruallei with the optical aKti hy which, 
if iht ptism were removed, ihe oWiqEie ray w'ouid imvcl in air from ihe pLme of 
the entrance face of Utt prism to iht where it ciils the opikal axis Disliitction 
is to be made iVom " reduced dtsiimoe as used in cusionusry luin^enclaiuit of 
^Ej^netrki optics, which appKuM only lu ray* on or parullct with ihe axis. Assuniinft 
itwii the principal plane of the kna is ooirKidcFn with ibe exit suifaec of ihe jrriuit, 
the " rciiuked dislauce " is the klist;tncc ol which the kcB wontd be plaocd, measured 
from the cninmwsutfiiccof the prism, if the prism vxfi: removed, that » the posibon 
which the !ein would oocupy w ith only air itt from of u for equal coudiucm* of focus 
and ma^nlBcatlcin. 

In order lo show mare clca/iy ibe disiLiiction between Ehe neduooJ distanoc 
fo-T an oblique rey ajtd ihc tudiJCDd dlslaJiK on the axi* it (imy he stated thai in a 
pafaHel-siOed plate (which h ihe equivalent of a prism of the type here scMusitkied} 
of kngth L and refractive index N the nedooed diiuniwc of a ray on or piiralkl 

wiih ihe axis (that is, a ray normal to the surfsKff^ is niunefiCiilJy equal to 

whoTWi fOf ktd oblktue ray v'l «rn^k oL' ioctdcuoo i. for whkh Uie 

L sec f‘ 

oiiftk of refractiDn i* r, ihe reduced dJsiotice for ifw oWhiuo ray is > eovr. 

\V>wii O. see I. ^nd ccb i = I : we ihen obtun reduced distanot for a nty 

On Dr pnralk! with llic 

U hfcu hecu iiat^ in Ihe specihcaiiooof Pfttent M4.10? that tf ihc reduced disliLjnaei 
ol Iht: pitthi^ triivcTicd bv liglrt td tin vainni* coiaurt ufc oil Duiik cquaL such e 

547 


COLOUR C l N'FAlArOG lt A^IJY 


i5 L'orreci for obj&^s all foi rays on iIh: a\i&, hul tihiift ^ bj,- no 

I he c\ac for oblique tdya. 

Siiicc^ liiO'Ai'^vtr^ th>s trfot in mag^ninculjcTD of liir jnin^s p^i ihe 4t zero^ Jinil 
v«y ^maW for sniiilK ai?alrt of oblique rjyn. can di 9 f?s:]ril ihe redooed dtsiLinofc 
on ihtf Jixis. .ind for 3 Klccicd imgk of ineidciroe imXi^ itw redutwl dltutsce fof 
otitkqiie ray^ on ivio oi more paUw equal U will be sho^n htier Ihut (hi* ii loeom- 
ptishod when llte tlireral ^hitis of tl)c oblique my^ fw ihc dirrcreiu colour^ imasa^ 
3ie also equal for ihe choice nn^ of ab}k|u.iiE.y. anJ il is canveoiem lo consider 
ihe <omljil{ji» ol'equiilLiy for laur^al ihiil 

AccoriHng to tlifi pntsent Insiieniton, the lengths cf pmb tra^ersaJ by llie light 
ilcstinal to fiiTm the irtidgci of oiiTerent i:o£ours lu^ so sc&ccteij ihoi for ^ Toy in- 
cklcni fit a chosen ntjglc of cbUqdiy the toi^i LueraJ ^ift retalive icj the- saWlsig 
Itrt5cs is tlw same far 3 II ihe dilFercnt colaiured inui^s. iTTcspectiw of tl^ 
opbcal path leixifth on ibc eusis, .tud ikK snay be don* wiEhouf noirBstirlly ttsirE^c 
gl04^ Ilf dilfercni reflective propen ies for the dliTcireDt liitiii patlas. 

The aniilc wai pirfcrabiy be chohnt so as 10 keep the errors for other ongks a\ 
small Di possible, duo [lisgard: being paid to the r^lati^t iiitpoTLiiioe of ibc dilTcfeiit 
paru nrrhe fheM uf viciw. 

The accornpanyiixg drawings wrve lo lltostrate the principle of tht invention 
and show two raamples of li^iding priinis in itocoTdamx with it, arid llteieui (sco 
Fig. 2BTj: 

Fig I w a diagmm of rccutred lighl paths 10 q prism ccmbimitEon. 

Fig. 2 il a comespotidifig djd^am ineludmg an air spac*. 

Fig, 5 is a di-figninimndc sectipn of a iwo-ooloar prism systeni, and 

Fig. 4 is El diagmiiurtalio section of a t hrccHODloor prism sj sxcn). 

Sefctnng to 1 is. I {Fig. 2S7i the oplinii oies of the primu have been rectiiicd 
to Ik atoiif the stotfihl IItb A and Ehe comman entranc* fjoe is indicaicd by ihe 
line D, the exit foces lor the colours R Mtid Q being and E, respectively. Tile 
prmdpal plane of Meh lens will be assumed ooificidnat with the esit surface of the 
coiT^ponJing priim or placed ai a n equal diivtancx fmni ihe estit fossi of the prrani 
^ ^ enters the prism lystem at the height h ^bove the optical ails and at an augic 

ofincidfiaoej, the anglos of rcfnfctKin being and r, rcspcctivtly for (be two colours. 
Hie path lertglbs in EJic gfass are theo so scEoclod acoprding lo the iavention that 
both fays paxi out from their respooive e^it faces an the opucai a^is A* or othcfTWsc 
cxpreswl, «0 tbai 

U lan f Ul hirt r,. 

when L, = length of path Iravertcd by lighz of ■t^iiticnulh Rh 
U = length of glass path trivened by light of wai'ckngtli 
r. Jingle of r^fmcitofl for light orrvavtkngth Kh 
f„ “ angle of Rrfrrtcihm for hghi of w^avekngth O. 

When thd gtaii paths ate vj proportioned, ihe reduced dhtiinoa of Ihc nldiqoe 
ia >3 Tire oi» equal for the chosen nngk- io the Optical axis. This vdtl be clear iIkk 
the incident rays tnliet the prismi at eIh stttw heq^t h above ihe optical ,isii Thcffr 
fore (ho reduc^ distance of the oblique rayi tiunkrically equal to A tan —i> 
mu\i he eqiLal, i being the angle of mcidencc. Thiis. siooe the lateral shifb of the 
two myj Telati^Tto the two kiisesarc made optica Lty etiijafc, ami thu ted-uoM dlstuncw 

the obEiqu* rays ate aho optk^ihy cqiwL il foliovi-» f hai two imujgcs of Ldenlieidiy 
equal sfj^ will be ob^ned. ihc ldixE» whkh foiru tbr imugi» hftuii; pLmed iti ihd 
s^mc diilifince from the t%il faces und F^ ceiqiccU^xly. 

It wdl be Understood that equality of irrausc sUv is obuiiped oidy at the orttf cho^n 
angle of iiiddcnce. and also on the optka] axU wlierc erront of mognifkallon be^ 
come lufo, Uuu for smaller cit gn^ator atigks of inciikm ds ima^ w^ll no 
longicr he of equal $i3Cr Also, liincc ihc angle subfeuded by the Inugc will vary 
with the JiUunce of the irtwigie from ihe lens, that ti with the conjupte focus, Ihe 
sekcEjud angle for (hi: oblhiMt my shouul be chosen for ifcu ffttfq i i puSdiion of ^hc 
548 


COl^QUR-CAMEHAS AND BEAM-SPLITTINO SYSTEMS 

fwal niosc, or Tor such pontion of the nwiss of focu* » 'Oo*f lntiwrUni far iJ« 
poiposc ill view. ’Where, however, (he tuivuUr ficia b not lai^ the 

niainitoUQii ii well ^ihin prcK^icul limits ow the v^o\t of ihe BfiMp For 



Dumplo, m oilottr cincmtiiosr^r^y of tlw kind ill wlUch iwo iMa^ art fWmod 
uUjc Ijy vide or one nbuvV' ihe otb^ in ihe apsec^ normiiUy filiod by one icniiRe^ B 
lens of 1-118 lit. fdKiH woiiU! be osed id fnosl casevv Widi a km iho 

54? 





























COLfiUS. CIWEJ^TATOCiRAPliY 


m mAeniftdiilaii Ue^wi ihc iwo for a in w\uch Ibf images nir 

fjijuiiJ lit an uf 6 TrOrtl litc aitts wuuld nol 0QOOjOOi in bclw^en 

the aKis nnd » and ffom $'* 12 Ok diitereiMi;^ wouSd irvcnraso (with tbd o|>paiIic 

lo (t-OOO^i^ Ln, (oi an objoa ni ,1 ft. 4itiaitL't, 

Altetrti^ih clVi while the prism is sUII miide^n of one kind of [jlaii, the pstiii of one 
coiour imai^c atay be irnide thortet iha^n h nequinsl ihc above forrniula+ the length 
of path tboii being iitiBilo up by im air ipaoc; fhai it, imteitl of pLaeirkg feiHPt ill 
Che fanu: dLthinix behind ihe e-%it prom faces ai woiild be the case for equai optical 
path lengths iit h ftven imjfk of inddeat linhi, one of the knatt wottkl be pkixd 
fun tier awuy ki that 

I, tan lun +L* tan l+ 

when? a ths path Umgih in air forihe viitio vri>-ciEnEih as for L^, j.f+ the diwaocc 
the lent is sci back m compared with ibc lens for eoioiir R. 

Fig. 1 iFig, 2S7> Tefirticntsthis case^ in ^hach an nir pach is included for the coioitr 
<j . The aotual exit face from Uie igloia for coioor G is now bm iIm ellecsive 
exit face is the pbiw E^. The diagtam cioqriy shows for ibis case how the litst- 
niifijitioncd fonuiita is obtAim^d. 

hy wny of example., ihe dam for a iwcncolour prism will be worli^ oui^ 'flie 
prism may be of the fonri icbowp in Fig., in and. be composed of one kii’pd of glass 
hn\'ing the fbllawiog optical values: 

\ Um i-5USJ t J175 1 S231 

The prism is planned for Ininantssicn ofh^t of roKin waveEchgth (i.3Q0 fOr the 
R iniage. the mim of N* beuig I 5103, and ibe light for forming ihe G hnage 
rtiexn wflv^fcngih 5.000, for whicTi the comspOKidtng value of N, is I 5165. 

The prism t% made up of two peeves onmtod togeihcii the joimng tuifaec H 
wing partly lilx^red in knowii muiDtter so ns lo reflfict a de^iltcd pcTocnlng® of tt^r 
light and rnmunit the mnL^iinlin: 

b*niii b indicDiod in ihe dinwliig, mecilng ilic euirunce face Uperpeii- 
illcitlaiiy. Tlw 11^1 rdlecti^ al tlw stirfocc 1] passes on to the lefucllng sydUce L 
where ii h refla;ied in a directlno pamlkl wjtii Hit thigimLl direciton of th* light, 
and iUYch on to pa» out at the exit fact F* of the prism. It theti focused hy 
the icM K on the him M. 

The un nsmiittd light p:t3aex on to the rcEkcting siiifooe by which ir iii idlectad 
lo the ftdi boundary* F* tif tlic pimn This light is focused b> the km Q on the 
him M, a mirror S being InlrrpoKd to bring ihc beam of lijht p^nilieJ with she 
other and to rnnke il ahnibr as regiirds left and righL Tbe dotted Hae E„ {% at the 
^me distance from the lens 0 (h the exit face E, frem ilie tens K. Ttiua the dtsiance 
from tlLfl fsicc f „ to the plane rotiTcsepud by the line E* te an air space, at mdioaud 
by U I n FigL 2. 

The value of for the lower pnsni b 5‘3W in., and wt assume tlw ptUui is to be 
made corrH:i for gn angle of h\ From ihc fomiula 

Lt tan f,= tun r. tL, iqh t 
wif phtHin 5-3 lift Tj - ton Tp mn 6 

0-36769 tan tan 6T, 

Tht yfllue 43r b ubtuinod by tml by ntlnnmg values to and cjIctjiLitIng the 
correspoiiiilng valuf of L«. Uy m> doing wt find ihe value {b5523 and 
4 48 1 6, Inserting these vutuei and calculfitiuE ihc value 

U tan r. I.L, tan n.~hL, too i) 

for ndwr angles of intadenoCp wc obtain tlm error tn lateral sfuft, and dividing Ihi^ 
amount hy Ubrnugnifkaiion of the syuem-lhiit is, the distance of object from ibe 
lens dIvKieO by the distance of irmiBo from the Iniu^wc obtain iJbee™ in nmondlia^ 
550 


COLOUft-CAMEHAS AND BEAM-Sfi-lTTlNd SYSTEMS 

tion between the two iinRfe^ at ihe aftfife i- This wiorki «W In inste ei folicnw ftii 
■n obi«st Bi 3 fl. ioii 4 a dinWK« retfwcitvely: 


i 

1 

2* 

3/1. 

,, ,, ,, -dooDoon 

4JJ. 

-{H)00,0009 

-{1000.0019 

-oono.oois 

3* 

-0000.0029 

-O(xnj0022 

4 

. -0^00.0027 

-0 000,0020 

5"- 

-0-OOO.OOI9 

-(HWO,(!015 

b 

,, ,, 0000.0000 

0000,0000 

9^ 

. +OW3,OI24 

4 0^)00,0094 

ir 

. rCOOO,MI2 

4 0 000,0310 


The H sign indicates thnt ibe iinri»c ef eolwir R b the latjer, _ 

It t«nt be naiiceJ that all i)je residual etrere aft amply wrthifl praaitol tnjuir 
ment*. If. hmwsw. the cmws nt the angle ami 12 wwe cofiiidenrf ‘j™ 
itKy eoutd be by wrroaiiie tbc pdjni Tor an angle eicaicr man 0 g but trwre 

wouM fllcourse be m increase Ld error ot siniilkr iiflgles. ^ 

As 11 foihcf cJctmpk n ihree-cokur priim 'viU be \Aorkcd out. TTu* may lx OJ 
iw fom shown in Ftg. 4 (pis. 3371, to (his prism ti^t cm^ »i Z 

fltM divided in known iramner Ji iJw dJvalinB Fw It ml litc 
Main divided « the ditfidin» face T in tiw deamd pmponi™. so a» » nhlnin WW 
i^ges, whkhwouldhe formed Ijy the Eettiei K, Q. w* U all si hn* ted U« ssisc distance 

behind (J* ttsDeoiv* exit Jha» E*. E.. and Efc. . 1 .. icai 

AKtimingilK prism is to he eocuinic(cd cf onefcitet nf^aisslwvms tiK Mme (rptical 
propcTtitt as the oumpte for the twivcotouf prism oF ^ ^ wjih 
Ir^aHvt 6,300 ami 3,000 formini the R and G iniiigis iHpcctjvcly, and Uiai the Itgiit 
fof'thc third image B will be of meirt wartlcnph 4.0*b, the cofnapondiiig value 

“a'cSll'n (dsumeall the paths wll be of slasv strirtspondlnB w^ <Ji^™ri 

cirBg.],imd that thepftihL, will be tin, Ifas befotc thepmm »»becanwttai 

Foj 0.3 nugk of 

U tiii rt-U tanfp, 

rmm whkt'b 

Uunf , 

^ tan Ti 


= 5 9754. 


I 0,107, 

^ tun r. 


fof athtir aiigkln the fislluwijig efft^rv of 

ihc G tniiiecs m obtained, for sn object at 3 11- iimJ 4 ft ttspeetb^ya cakukk 
cuciily qa before 


!■ 

3/?. R. 
<HXia,l>000 

3 A j, 
OOOO.IXIOO 

4/r, R 
0000.0000 

0000,0000 

h" 

IMX)0,CK)00 

{W)00,0fl00 

0000.0000 

0000,0000 

9' 

1^00(1.0004 

iD{]Q0.O0Otl 

-0000.0003 

+0000.0006 

i2 

(HM]O,0Qlb 

4 0000.00! 9 

0000.0013 

+0000,0013 


TFlc !i[3n ijidHiatts iltc pkturc nvagnifkaiian rduiive lo thai of ibe gnsen H«b eigain 
Tt win be seen that the tt^rduil eftof^ m of praoical si^fniitonias. 

tt ifriW idso be lAaf that one or both paths oould be nrade up jfi ci^ c* of 
g!q«tt of differenl irfrTWli^t: indki^, ihal prism pmiuOft to both eoli^ra 

in A iwtHzokiur tanKru uoiiliJ be of croc Itiiid of giess and iht priims individual to 
ihE two colottra of iinolhcf kind of In dlhtr ^otOa tht aetecUdtl of tbc ghiSM 

551 






COtDUR CINEM ArC}GRJ^?HY 


IS m tlie pnaaii«««s^Jely w ittc basis of tcnipti ofpiiib noxptins the refriic- 

j^c sndtM df My gtnsscs whLh mAjjf bd in our tirkif spedlk^Jon 

Pom paih Idnifih and refractive mde% vicrc eo beadjuirtcd to wure ifcte desired result. 

praraturc of Ihc present fnvcniiod can ibo he uxd *witi 3 lenses of ditTcftni 
loM prm7ilu{l tndi ditrcrencc in focus U smail, bv irnkuic the ^tkut 

^ttn trsivet^ by itic light of ihc Vsinoiis ddloiiTi of such Icagl^ an to compensate 
tor rfrt wruili difTcrcocc in niagttiRratioj^ or iho corresponding iait In ihii case 
uccoLmt tnuAi jiho be lakcti of tli£ masnificBtion of diitani images as well ta nrar 
ima^ stQce the ma^iflealion of the iEnsei ^Ooftc would he difTeftnl for diaunii 
oE^ti in prdportii>n to the focsl tengili. 

Tlte procednre wiEI be ouUmed ficrr Uw an^ of a lHi>^lduj' 

Suppose the Iw ccnropofidiiB (o the path rerraouve btkx i* N„ hui a 

Icuttth iVu tiuit conmpdmliitg to S',, CousideraUdn rnusi 
find bft srren to wfiat range t>f focus v.ilf be inost nKful for the purpcBc ill view. 
Md the po%ibm of the focal plane dctcrmiDcd, thm is the di^i4nce from the 
lat which the imaijc will be fotruoit wMcb can be i:ompiiiKl from Uie fomTula 

V=F”D" F etjiiiib the focal \ciLg\h of the rcua, U the ecmivalmt distance 

frtun the Itns lo the in air. and V the distnncc from the Itn* to the imiiee. 
Since the muenilkaiiuo of both iTTragei muit be the samc» 



rmn iho above rdationship it is also clear thiU 


or oiherwisc oppressed 



U, tiUi i ' IJj tan tan lan r. 


frwn Wfhkh obtuin 



Considetitift die tmiier in seaml^ H will be noticed thu( since 

tJ U. 

it H rtar ihm the ofajoct $izc for ftiiuij imgic uf inculence » aijo rroponioriat to 

iC* **" 



552 


COLOUR-Cj^MEHAS BEaM-SP^LITTINO 5Y5tehtS 

VVc ci.li liKicfm $ay ilui Uic %my tn c^ery ligfit p^ih of the lotnl Iflicr4l Mf% bi- 
the eotnmcm crilTancc fiict and Uw kiu ctml the Ltlisfal dhplnoemwnt ow 
Lhe atr iiifiUiKc fiom Lite ohjoci w the <joimiion entrance face ia JinflC^ly propctfttaiul 
KO ihe focftl lengih of the kn^ aMdateJ whh thai Sishs 
It vblii t>c noticed irt ibc abotv th'^i refcrerLCc is ttutk to ihc cUflcrencc m objirtrt 
Spzfl fgr equal ;in^lc c«r iniuScnuaJ r It can be sJiQwn lhal th\% dinbrefiCc ifl otajecl 
wK »anc$pcitidA iq ihc dilTerfiiiDe m iniug^j ita fcsyiting from the Tocar diffeiCftce 
Lrt the IdLkscH^ io tHal^ for iJw point on the object, inyi^ df cqu^l m»c are 
obtained for a chcKscn en^kt I for one of ibe coki>iEn: btti it ^iU be ekir that a niy 
c»ttui 3 g frooi a point on ttM object the ebo«n angte ^ for orw toloar wdl pfoeced 
10 ihe kiur of imy other colout at sin ^njik ^lightly ditTcmt froJii K ™ 
diJTertnw of angle pul compensates for die diffeience in fosil kngtb of the Icrnes. 

Et wil] also be char that the urmaefimcnl first considered i* a spedid ease of the 
niotc gciieral treatment jtui idven. The IcnMA beic^ of cquiil foal length, the sum 
mcatloocd will be equal for idl paiM. Monco^Tcr* iHe lateral dcfipl»«r^nt ow ihc 
air dialtmoc from this object to the common crdrsmcefnoc ii nowequul, smoe tlsc^le 
of mdiieiia; Ls the a^ime for ult eotours. Henoc Oto other term of the Him rtmst bn 
the same for mlTcolonrs, the lounat shift between the common emraniK Dy>c 
ajiii ihc lerw or imme point simllarSy sityLiiod on cadi |KSih in relation w ihe lout. 

Having now pajriicuIiiHy <icKribcJ and oicertamai ihe tutujic of our said tn^ 
ventkm and in what manner site tome is lo be pciformed. we dockie that wbM ww 
claim is: 

tr in or for a gamm for ooEottr photography a liglu-dindins ptisni sspstem in 
which die lengths of paih trav«r^ by the light dcaimed to form Oie iraa^ of 
rmi colours are so «lectcd that for & ray Inddcnt at chimn angle of nbhquity 
the lotiil bterai ihift ralaliie to iluo tahuis Ictiscs is the same ft^r all the dilTcfeni 
colOLircd imascs, inespective of the reduced optical path length rm the ax^ 

1 A prhm system a* dalmed m Cliim I in wl^ the loih ir^yxt^ in ghiss by 
I Igh t for one iinaige corresponds as regards equatily of lateral shift lo a pal n partly 
of fljaw and partly of gif by [tgJil Tor aiwtfiief imjiJji:. tins palhs bciiifi 

rec^ued from the comnson enlranec Ihoc of ihe prism sysEtm lo poinis cquivaleiit 
m relALicm LO Ihe respeedre laisai. 

S- A privin system os clainusd in Claim I, in which ilie liif polhjof ihc ligtil ^isive 
to ibc Ee 4 $cs for idl jmiigiM are eqnali so that the comtssjondii^ p.ms ol the uifiereni 
paths are solely in the 

4. A jjmm system as claimed in Oiitm M or 3 m which one kmd of gloss lueJ 
for all the p3tJ^ 

5. A pmra iyiiem us daimfid In daJm 1. 2 or 3 tn which two or more kinds of 
glass of ditferept refr^dre iiidici^ are nwd tn one Of tnore of ihe tUitercot paths 
iravstsed by light of die difTcranl coEours 

6. A prism sj'Stcrii tnodUkd in rrlniion to those ^Lumed in any of Clcuns * ^ ^ 
in that the jv-rih Itfiitiln «» ^liiiltlJy ndjuited fiwti the yjilwa eo«tpLi)«l aceordtiiB 
to Lho&e cldhits lo ns in conipenfare for small diffirrenccs in locu^ os the corraponH 
mg Jcusiu. 

7. In or fur n two-coloiLT camera a fighl-divuling prism sptcni substamtally 
i«. dcs^ibod with refereute lo Tig. 3 of the ojMfltpanying djawinjp*. 

8 In or tor a EhnjicKOhJur comwa e ILghbdividiiu; pnim tysusm siibstanually 
Us described with rcfcrreicc to Fig- ^ of tTi* oexompanying drewingx 
Dulcd ihc 2nd day pf Oclabcr^ 1934. 

Projcctioit prism ercctJiig systems for ti^ in fiddtiive projtt:tioii 
of picttirosj in which the ipia^^ arc arrange^ side by sidt^ the width 
of I he picture being ^ong. the length of tht MLm, uo& described in 
tP. 394,535 of Atlnm Hilfi^r Ltd. and J. H. DowclL Registration 

555 


CotpUA CiNBMAT(7GKA PMV 

ts effected by mmTemcjji of one of the reBecting surfaces or of a group 
of them, and the rays from the compaoioii utuLges aie contpletcly 




separaud before registration by reflecting surfaces so displaced out 
of coplanar setting ttiai n dividing screen can be brought right up to 
the point where the optical paths of the beans diverge fron one 
another. Figs. 10-12 (Fig. 2S8) show one form for projeclittg pairs of 


Fio, m—D. Uaponbi't F-P. 
















































COLOUit-CA 111 ERAS AND BBA M-5 Pt-lTTl ?V^TRM5 

linages, in ^hich cacti lighi beam undergoes three rellvctioiis at the 
caLhetus faces of nghi-anglc phsmsp Fig. 10 beLng a plan. Fig. It a 
side view^ and Fig. 12 a front view. The rays from the left-hiind image 
are incident on a prism AI by which they are reflecied down lo a 
prism Bl renecting them to the right on to a prism C\ by which they 
are reflected towaids Lhc projection screen. The ray^ from the righi- 
hand loiuge arc rcElecled upwardly by the prism .42, then lo the left by 
iht prism B2, and forwardly by ilw prism C2. The ptism C2 is se|mtiie 
from lie oihen^ and is adjustable about two axes at righl to 

register the projected images on the scr^n; iht other five prisrns arc 
cemenied together. Interfercpoc bciwcen ihc two images is prevented 
by extending the dividing screen S so that ii passes between the prisms 
A I, A2. The dbplficements of the two beams produced by lliis system 
are symmetrical in relation to the axes of the projector, and are small 
enough to allow the light to pass through an ordinary projection 
Window. A mounting for this system es describedn Figs. 13-15 art 
views similiir to Figs.!0-12 of another systern In which each beam under¬ 
goes four Tcfleciions so that the system can be used for the projectipn 
of film taken by a camcfii operating on its side and not fitted with 
erecting device^ the film being used in the projector ihe normnl way 
Totind^ cTnuhion side towards the condenfser. This system com^ 
prises two units, one fur each image, e^ch comprising three right- 
ungled prisms AU Bl, Cl and A2i B3p C2. Each prism BI* B2 Is 
arrauged so that its cathetus face serves as a light eniiancc and exit 
sutfacc^ and the light is refleeicd by each of the other two faces. Light 
from ihe Left»hand image enters the prism AI and is rejected down 
into the prism Bl, the roof edge of which is below the cathetus face 
and inclined at 45^ to the nxis of the lens sysrem. After two reflections 
by the prism Bl the light enters the prism Cl^ by which it is reflected 
towards the scroeo. Light from the right-hand image undergoci 
similar reflections by the prisms A2, B2, C2. With this system the 
emergent rays are in the same hotcrontal plane ai the incideal rays. 
Registration is obtained hy nmking the unit Al, BL Cl adjustable, 
the adjustment indicated in Figs. 13 and 14 being aboul two axes at 
right angles intersecting at the point F, The screen S extends between 
the prisms At* A2.* 

E,P. 346,454 of D. Daponte deals with the same subject-matter 
(Fig. 2£9). The principal claim is: 

All optically folded projccdrig ay*i™ for eombintn* side^bj-sidc imaipa on the 
(iUn Into J t\ngh Image tm the icnxn tuvipig an mirror pluccd in or 

Jicjf to ibc pUinc la which the Lnmgc of the condeoser h formed by the projection 
tens and in combioMion with a i^llt twieelkin lens. 

‘ This ww asod by tlw HriOib RmIeui Syndic^ Ltd. tn pkoc of the 

Fnuuiui bcam-spUller fw jragi 27^>. A c^Ulmnitor wus placed m fteni of the whale 
s^siem. 


535 



irOLOliit CINSIIIATCGR APHV 


Imagi^jt of fiormai dhpQseit vetiicitlly om.* ahove tht other. 
Fuil-iiown normat and each pietttre exposed mice — Le. men m 
each gafe. 

The Hiilmnn camera wifl be referred lo briefly luidcr this taaidini* 
(^'^pp 3F)+ London Film Production!^ Lid. closely a^socLttcd 



Fm. 289.—D, DapcHiie^i E.P, H&,454. 


with Cotourgravuic Ltd,, which was fonned to exploit the iiilhnaa 

patents, T^camemwiis never used for a comnteiciiil him, Ute&tvange- 

meat coiuisted of two lenses, one above the other (Fig. 290), the light 
being divided by polished metal mirrors, llic upper one being ^rfomud 







































COtOUR-CAHEIlAS ANO llF;AM*SPtTTT!N<; SYSTEMS 

(E.P. 404,307* IW3). The gate had two standard ppeitings, two riumcs 
being exposed siniulianeously through the standard two-colour filters 
WnUten Nos. 28 and 40a. The filters were numnwd in an oscillaung 
member (Fig. 291). The ftlm was moved downwards one frame at a 
time and the upper picture received a second exposure throng the 
same filter after having mrived in the lower ftame. Thus every image 
was exposed first in the tipper gate and immediately after in the lowr 
gate. Tlw rotation of the shutter was in the opposite direction to 
travel of the film* and the second exposure of a negative actually 
began before the first exposure of the following negative. It ras asserted 
that the difTcrent motion phases compounded in any one image were 
the result of half-exposures only, and that thcrt ww therefore vc^ 
little ffinging. In practice the time-parallas was distincly vistble m 



1 KJ, 39(1^A. G, Hillman'* iLP. I'JJJ, 


projected pictures and becunie serious in the case of tiuick movcmeitts 
within 20 ft. of the camera. 

In E.P. 414,065 (Hitlrottn, A, G., Johnson, G. H.. and Colour- 
gravure Ltd,) the claims are: 

1. Process for the production on a negative band of colour con¬ 
stituent images fneealives). forming a continuous series, the process 
having the following characteristics: 

(а) Each negative is the result of two or more exposures through 

the same Of similar colour iiliers, 

(б) Each negative (other than the extreme negatives of the band) 

is deposed lo the same beam os the tw««ding negatw and 
also to the same beam as the foUowing tBgativB, each of 
such beams being divided by appropriate means for this 
purpose. 

557 










COrOtm ClN'EMATOCftAfHY 

*” '' **“ further charactcri«ic that 

’'’ P^*"" ' ^ ‘he exposures are 

cilccted by means of a shutter revoiving so that the edges of (be aper* 



Fw. 2 VIj—A. G. Hilloiaii's E,p. 414,0S4, 



Pld.M2.-EJi.4l9.,8>4. 


wnliyy to that m which the hand moves through the camera so 
that the exjwsure of each negaUve commences befmw the «postti 4 of 
ine ivoceeding ne^ive, etc. 

E.P. 4 H 059 of the mhw patentee dealt with meani for rotatins 
for adjiutmciu the metal minots ia front of the objectJvta and the 
detailed design of the oscillating filter sector (Fig/ 291 ). See also 

s ss 















CatOllR-CAMeitAS SYSTEMS 

E,P. 478.500. 483.079. and 478.501. The latter describei Hillman i 
projection system. 

FtTHTHER HtULUAS PA■re^fTS 

E.P. 4S.X.9I7 e.P.494.33J 

t:.P. 483,819 E.P. 4M.334 

E.P. 483.820 

The Franch Franciw camera, with which piciurcs were taken of 
ibc Coronation of Georse VI. was designed w record miniature 
images within the space of a normai frame (see Chapter 11} 



Fkj. m. 


419.894). in which the red and green records were exposed simultane* 
ously and the film moved haif a frame and the blue exposure then made. 
The reflectors in this camera were precisely like those in the Hillman 
eameni. being in front of the pair of objecUvts, nude of nwial and one 
of them perforated (Fig. 292). 

3G. Disposed at 90' fo each other, or at some other attgle. Separare 
gates and normal pulldown. 

Fig. 293 represents an atrangemem of doubtful pmcUcabitUy dc* 
signed merely to illustrate Class 3G. 

3H. Roiajing mirror rfi'virfer fti frxmi o/ two or more lenses. 


559 
















COLOUJt Cl]VEMATU<i1tiVI>ttV 

Tlic Techniwlor patent E.P, 350.»56 proposed a roiaiiDg apenured 

nbjocthes ai right angles lo eauh 


CLASS 4 

4. Two or Mwe Lenses behljid a Negatire Oivefgeot Lent. The PosJttve 
Lenses Photosnpli a Vlitiia] Image proitueed hjr thehlegaNve 

•3' otul M, Audibert [4] patented u method of obitunmir a 

vi«uol image by means of an anterior lens and prisms or mirrors 
tnis Idea whs farthitr improved upon in EP, J 7,023, (913. In F P 





Fuj. 2^.—Tccluticolor, LP, 350, #i(i. 


vSSr.!!!? “ ucgaiiw front lens fanning a 

T r ^ PWitivT lenses in rear to fomi coplanar iouiges. 

Stoied thfii tbisarransemrat considerably reduced paraliaa 
“P posiUve Jcfises has bmiS 

^ divergeot lens all the field 

included belween a distance J and infinity U compressed into a space 

sTt LT.'hl°r^- F fod 

f2^R4.TU^SL ^ “i^factority taken j* found from fjF 

m winch 1 /n repn^Ml. ihn np,„u„ ,f 

l*y mnkin^ R < I to iiicTeace the luminosily of the lensec. 

560 













COLOUH-CAMElfcAS AKO tlTTI NCi SVSTEWS 

Jn E.P. 355,835 thii priodple was funhar modiiied tFig. 295). 
C, D, is a divergent objective. O’, 0\ 0^, are leases producing three 
images on the sensitive surface M, The divergent objective has its 
nodal points N^, N*, in advance of the lenses, so that the aperture of 
the objectives O’, O*. O*. can bo increased or the total length of the 
apparatus reduced- The focal Jeagths of lenses C and D ate respectively 
250 and -90 mm., and these lenses are tnounted so as to be almost 
in contact. 

The Audibert optical system may have oeriam minor defects fioni 
an academic point of view, but these would probably rum out to be 
less than the errors encountered in thnecHwJour superpoation printing. 
There would probably still be found to be a small amount of paraMaa, 
even mking into consideratioii the sluiUow depth of held of the virtual 
imugc. Other defecU, such as coma, might also be present. 



li 


Pki. 295, 


CLASS 5 


5. Two or More Ijenscs bchinil Inclincil Class Plates 

In E.P, 435,222. A- J. Amtilf, a French inventor, proposed to avoid 
pamllax by using indmed parallel glass plates In front of two or more 
objcclivesi. The suggestion is origiiial, and it might provide a saiia- 
fartory nieans of eliimnatiag parallax. 


The pritvipk undertying ihe invwHion vrill bf iJ«»ciibeil by ef eumpte 
with nsfcfwiw to the accompany lag dia*in*i, wherein Pig*. I re 3 are explanatory 
diagranu tFig. 290). ^ , , 

U H known (See Fig- t) dial a phtie having paralM (hew nwvtiig ^ *^*'**1^ 
on ineidreii beam Si dore are tleflKt thii beam hoi dHplocw it luierilfy by n distance 
ti 3\t£h \hal 




E tona the thickfSHs of the phite, i tbc ungki t>f HwiUena, .uiiJ n ihc rtfmtive imlc-t 
of cliB plale. 

Or, approximate^, whmt I » cquaJ lo or pnalkf lhan 10 , 


ti rmulia fram ihu tbui it a pJalc having paralki inclined faoa i* pl^ before 
the objeolvt of a catneni, the reys incidcni u( ihc same angle i tiBm all the pojnis 
of the landscape, whatever be thdr illflaiiBC, are displnctd laictally by the quanbty 

561 






coLoyn ciNUMATOCKAPHy 


RgJ 



Fio. iS6.--E.K4i5^ [A. J. Amullj. 


wifi **** mmitjwikltnj! Oisplttoctiieitt 1 oq the pintc or iIh film 

«= 1 _ 

D bdoK ibe dlitiuu^oT iIk (Mbit contiJeftd ani)/the focal lett^th of ihe objecuw. 





















COLOUft-CAMERAS AKD BE AM-S F1.1TT1 ^G ^YSTBU^ 

It J 4 seen tftat thii d4Sp3ooe™nt ^ on tN fiSm if gj«aicr nf the object is ocaivr. 

It to scetp when D to iflBmty. ^ . 

Tltfra to ihitf ihc pos^biUty of dtopiacing laieniliy the imaffA of iwidtf in phuM 
poiitioMd at II finiio dtoiaiux fi^am the objo:iive in nstaiion lo tlwse of poinii 4t ati 
infinite dtotanoo whkh rematn iked, tJw displaccmeiil being ^renter M the dutamoe 
D of the plane conaidemJ to less* . . 

Ttito pbenonwn^^n to uiiii^cd aocordiin^ to the invcimon m order to corrcci m 

paioIkajL ^ 

Optica) dcvBM ittt already knuwo ctwiprisin* pkus oF iilau bavins paraJIsl 
fjco fflrabliird with objortivts. But the emptoyriMt of iJiofw alaSi plalo hm fat 
obnet in ihtse devices tiiber the conKtion of the diitintcr of the opucal afcw ot 
the obuiafvH for tlje Mannnation of phcnographic views or of counpemanng in a 
ciKmatoenipfiiC projection the wntihooui displuoenieol of 4 nifn. Lq atber word*, 
to thcie deviiK the pleiff of ^ having parallel I’accs fire used ml vamble indliM- 
tiona iti order to obtain the same displ;uxiiuntt of irmigti of ot^ada pojiUDned in 
the sxinc plane. On the tontrary. in the pitsem Invention the glioa placet hflvins 
pi«Uet faces aie used at a dMcl angle in order to cieate diff^l 
of the ntiaget of ihe vnriout planes tpieiiiMlly distant from Uw objociivtt This 

pitodpkwillapixerttiDnickMiyInthefollcMwiiiidescfipuon. , 

In Fig. 2 w indicaiiss the peuaUaa of the point A in rclatton to an infiniidy diicnftt 
Doini poaitioiietl in tha tana direction, in order to suppress this parsllan, a plaie 
haviciit iKtinod parallel facet is placed before the obiectivc 0„ whkh will give to 
the point A in the conveiikol dlreuion a deviaUon wifflacni to return the icnage a, 
iojTi. tliis d^iatkm will be Such that i - 

If / is the focal length of the ohjo«ivi». * the distance betwM the ^ of th« 

objcctivcSi .anil O the tlifUi-QDC tJM poirti A to liic plane of die obicciivcsa iJkjt 

_ - ''/• 


By ibc ^ and i 


2D 

D/=2b 


, r 

whcttce 

Of 

Thcrt to diua obkainail fl wy urnple condition for diimJiaix^ tbe 
a cop^tion which to imlfpsTideni of Use focal Jan^h of ttoe objcotiwe*. jfbto is ex- 
plamcd piuctfcally hy tlw foct ihai when the disiafiisc beEween the hms of ihc ohjec^ 
tive$ Ims been cfiosen, the same s.yslcm of fuifallaJt ccritKlion pIlKcs nijjfht be used 
whiuever be the focal Length oF Uw objective system employed. 

It will be noticed, likewtoe^ that thto isoridltiiMi n independent of the distanoc 
of iho poiiu ooif^ciidei'Od. 

U results from thto that if ibc pamlLax wtrection lia* been ejected for x given 
plane of the objoa space* it wilt be ciTcctcd for cilJ die other phiass* 

The eflbct pfoduced by the pVotc having purjltol (vxa m the suppression oi ilw 
pajuUiut may be cxptcsscd under 4 somewhat different form. The plale hisving paraJbeT 
bto (br dfect to produce a virtual displaoemert from 0 to O’ ^ the Inlet 
apertura of the objectn-e. In order lo auitprtM the psrallux, iho plates v-'ili be ettoteo 
40 that the uptkal ham of all ihc ot^itw art vinmllv breu^t mw cotncidencc. 

One form of practical device, in the «« of mo objeedvo. U ^ 

Each objective O* or 0^ to providodi with, a plate L* of L^* the oliecl or Ut^te pinio 
being lo efled a virtiiai dtoplfl«wit towards each othefn and the amotinl, of 
ihe fwo aite^ The adjaucent faots of the two plates me bladtcned and Joined to^^licr. 

Id the case wiwtr a number of objectives, greater than two^ oje employed, the 
pliixes will be disposed as described hereafter. 

The optical of the monochrBmttUC obflocxi™ are aminged lo p«« through 

563 


COLOrU CfNEMATOOftill'llV 

sq^avm g 3. - A*idi», icsvKlmgtti wiicthet ifw number 

iSVSSl'S 

^ site 5 ™ 

"■JIT^o cf temnJlL te• wmKJ'olfcta^ teki,“x?xl%‘51.rf 

»teh m .„ tetodS, STSSiT ■ ■ " 

pite. dSS'S''drS"^^^ 

»tete «uXi5 ” 

;sr 3 s.;rr:si rhid *” 3 ^“ 

!>.« S”m S™ rl^i?jJIl“"“' ” "“ •»"■«»»!« J~.tw ^ 

C^IjASS 6 

For an exampit of CJass 6 mc page 273, 

Beam-spijttiir Analvms according to CiAsnncATJON 

Cfauj (UNriKt Kingdom Patei™ Only) 


130.002 
f 36,595 
237,94J 
373,429 
407,2*7 
492,673 
466.52* 


B 

204,745 

350,112 

473.415 

472.46* 

503.222 


C 

100,021 

110,395 

141,36* 

4S0.673 

464.637 


D 

101.972 
127,30* 
131,422 
194,971 

340.973 
347.946 


‘ Reprinted by perrnuwon nf ihi: ConitoUo nj" Hu xruMiv* c,",”- 

;5^ wi cf w nu Mujciy , SfaiBunery OHL*'. 








■ ■ 


m 


f 






'r:'- 



1 




















FKi. 2M7.—nt^^iivc rncuJe with Vinicn 
Mudcl H. ifoirtfi^i fli 77 eK]>osum per sdcoiid (p. SfiSK 



—Bell Howell cainm wilK Itirwk 

ma^dne Pn6 ^pcdnl BJite. 






COLOUR-CaMCK a3 and SEAMSV^tRMS 


Cftuf I— 

E F 

100.082 1,073 

503^ 2,463 

47M02 


OmZ 

1.514 1918 
25 . 90 ft S 90 e 
U 450 1912 
322,803 


a 

113.347 

237^9 

312 ^ 

319,195 

324,989 

342,^6 

469,359 

441,907 

474.800 

509,269 

5SSJ67 

556*426 


Cia »3 


A 

B 

c 

D 

147.767 


T .659 1 S >15 

199*044 

163,325 


13 JM 2 .. 

206.820 

276 . J 4 l 


16 ,BID ,. 
1 S, 6 M .. 

257.547 

257.548 

257.549 
398.100 
427,983 
437,434 
459,664 
473*782 


E 

346.406 

346.454 

mio7 

3S&.7$4 

39438J 

427,983 


CAtu4 

15 T, 3 S 5 

209.041 

355,835 

CtasM 5 

435,222 

470.653 

Ctat$ 6 

195,663 

209.041 

274,683 

385,141 


F 

404.307 

414,065 

4140S9 

4l9.m 

47ftp5DD 

483,079 

483,817 

483,839 

483.S2D 

494,333 

4H134 


G 

350.856 


the 72 " METHOD 

This method of Tccordiug colour ncgaitvcs wu^ rc\i\'ed by Gaspar- 
color Ltd* In Engiand io IMS, k was used for a time with some 
measure of success (Fig- 297 ). 

The visibiUly of a fringe is detj^rmined by the fact that if its dimeu- 
slons are such as to subtend less than an angle of I ' 30 ' at a given 
distance it will be impossibk to disiingubh. The following fomtib 
will be found useful: 

Angle in seconds 

^Heigbi lor widi h) of tHnaeJ ^pr d gneot) ^ 





COlOUn ClN^tMATOGRA^HV 

SO long iaA til* distance Is at least 100 rime^ ihe height (or width) of 
fringe or ckmem in quesUon. 

Therefore: 

I DisJnivoo K sii^k in Seconds 

Hfigh, -■ 

T^us» I ' 30^ is the limit of resolving power of the eye* and assume 

^tance of screen from the front row is 25% the limiting fringe in 
inches would be 


125" K !3J M t^econdt of ax) 21,000 


^X^iy (inches). 


30 M &3 ~ 2 dOf 5 ^ 

Suppose the screen to be 20' in width, Ihsu the magoihcaliou wouJd bei 

^,000 * 1 273 (for fiilirt ) 

Therefore ihe octuaj dimeaslons of the fringe or element in questioni 
OH the film must be 

0\r 1 * . 


Tahlb 63 


StrpffJi 

j 

Litteilr 

tkn. 

FHnitfan 

Film. 

Subtended iit 
50/f. 

/fflfir 

Suhltfided at 
25 ft. 

Frif^e m 
Screen. 

J5' I 

' MO* 

1 ifVi" 

57- 

r 54' 

i* 

25' 



54' 

3^ 48' 

*' 

25' 

tv 


3' 48' 

7- 36' 

1 r 

2S' 

1 <■ 

tl' 

5* 42-6* 

U* 25' 

i' 


Rdirenets 

(!) 2,973 {imyiSrii. U (lB 77 )ip. 151 

fteSDAU^ H; E.. PhoL 64 (1924^ p. 390. 

(1) Tedinicolor Motien Picture CofptmjioB^ E.P* 398,339, 

(4> BeiTiiDM, E„ and AiiDmEir, M,, EP. 24,^ (1911). 

( 5 ) TilOKEqt, T* Phou AffT„ 31 ( 1920 ), p. 49 . 

(6) Jahrbuch, (1902), p, 543 (EderS Jafirhi^h drr Phn^tf^j^rafihle mjd R^pfi?titt£^ 
iktfUttetkniky; 

f7> Qxm* Jack H-, *^Ncw Three-Color Camm,** Jct$m, fiw. Msf.Pk. So 
UuiK 1943), p. S4J 

(8) BitEwsTHM, p, ix^ ++ Thfee-CblDr Subtnethre CiasfnftiOfniphy/' Jnum. Sac- 

Mat Pk. Ko. I Om. 1931), p. 49. 

(9) SirAAi,^ Q^, and Jehnv^ Canicni? for Shmtlni 'Three-Colour and Soucul— 
ZKS.l,^^ Kliic. Fhata, Chtm. Ifulusi.^ 1 (!93T). 

(10) V, M,/* TTw Prepumllcm of Ihree-CDtoiir Po»iii%^ with thchronv 

■ted Gdrtianc.^'^ fam. Khim Fiarn.^ $ (Del., I939j* p. 4S. 

(U) FhuscuiatJ^ J-S./* History of Coloyr Photoariifihy,*^ Bovtqa, f 1945), pp, 34-65. 

566 




















CHAPTBA 6 


Bftpack 



S ha^ been stated in the historical luminaTyi the bipack iva^ 


suggested by Ouccs du Kaiiron in F^P. 256p862» lB9S«anii by 


i i A. Gurtner in E.F. 7,924, 1905—Uu5 latter patenting ibe idea 
of combining two platen face to faccp the plate nearer the lena beiag 
coaled ivith a slow chloride^ or chlnro-bromide emulsion semtu^-c 
to blue and violets the emulsion being stained a deep ntaisgc, the rear 
plate wai to have an cmidslon sensitive to orange and red. Other 
bipacks followed- 

The bipack lias played a very important part as a means of reconiing 
negatives for colour cincmatogmphy. G. Batlistmi patented the 
arrangemenc of bipack and a sin^e film in two gates at right angles 
!o give Uircc-colour negatives (E.P. S73, 1915). W, Buchanaii-Taylor 
and others patented a similar arrangcTncnl in E.P, 12.469* 1914, 
The camera contniiicd a sejm-tnuispaTcnt tnirTOr lo reflect the Light 
to gate A accommodating one film^ md to transmit the light to g^tc 
B accommodating two films, the bipack. 

A. Hamburgier and W, E. L Day in E.P. 136.595, 1913* paiemed 
the same semi-dialyte type of camera. Two films sensitive to blue 
and green respectively ran face to face through one gate. The other IHm 
was red sensitive^ passing Uirough a second gate at right angles- The 
patent IS only for the feeding mechanism. Hamburger never used this 
arraugement because he never perfccEcd a three-colour pruning process. 
The Dcbrie camera which was made for his ewmoIout " Polychro- 
mide ” process could be used for thrcc-colonr with minor modificn- 


tions. 


P* D. Brew^sicf was ont? of the first to apply the bipack negative 
system for two-colour recording {E.P. 2,465, 1915), and he was one of 
the first, if not the first, to use regiiicring pias in camerafi and pro- 
icetom 1,359,024, 1920),^ 

Nearly all the two-colour American proct^scs nicmioticd m the 
chapter on subtni€ti\ie processes bipack for negative recordiiig. 
Naiurally, American emulsion manufacturers, conccfUrated on the 
problem aad uUitnaLcly Du Pont produced an excelicni bipack unisx 
the trade name of Dup^c/' The corresponding Eastman products 
are 35-itiiti, Special Negatives, Bip(Jck. OrthovhroftiatiCf exterior T^ipc 


‘ Sw ulM W. V. D. Kelley* p. 2N 


561 



COLOUR 

1234, and Biptick Pniichroimik^ Type J235, TJii; former coniist!^ of 
a red dye-qvercoated orthoohromiitic: film of medimn .speed wiili colour 
sensitivity and contrasi balanced to dayJighi iJlwmination, This is the 
front film lo be used in combi nation witb Type 1235 to make sepaxaLion 
negatives of c.'ttcrior scenes for iwo-colonr printing processes. Eastnian 
■IIso make Type 1236^ known as Bipack OrThochfoitiGFiCt (fiF^riofr which 
is iin oflhochromaiic film with red dye ovcfcoatinfi, similar in use and 
purpose to Type 1234 above, except that its colour sensitivity and 
contrast ate bnbneed for tungsten lUnmmation at 3.200’’ to 3,400" K. 
Type I2J5 is known a.s Bfpack Pn^ichrifmndCj fnjerior and rxirrier. 
It is a pancbroniatic negative film balanced in spi^ and colotir sensi¬ 
tivity for bipack work. It is always used in cembinaiion with one of 
the above orthochroniEiiic films to make colour scpamtion ncgaiives 
of ttt^o-colour printing processes. 

&oih Bell and Howell and the Mitchell Camera Corp. studied the 
special camera rc^jirirements. Suitable magazines were designed and 
changes made in the gate. When hipack h tiscd the focal plane is 
about 0 0045 in. further back from the lens than in (he case of normal 
tllm, beci^uw, ii must be Temembcredr that the front filrn is turned 
emulsion side away ffom the lens and in contact with the ctniilsion of 
the rear film- Then the question of perfect con tact of the emidsiDn 
surfaces of the two films had to receive cartful considcTation^ In 
the Mitchell crameni four small rollers were introduced with satis¬ 
factory results^ Bell and £low'di place two of their normal black-and- 
white magazines one on lop of the other (Fig. 29^), 

Bii:^ck may be used in two ways for ibc recording of three<otour 
negatives. First, in any beam-splitter camera in which the beaiti is 
split into two, there being two gates- Bipnek is exposed in one gate 
and a single film in the other. 

Now in such an arrangement it is obvious that the bipack can be 
used to record either the blue on the from film and the red on the 
back film, or. altcfmativciy, the green on the from film and the red 
on the buck Blm+ The latter choice is possthle because the front film i* 
an ofthochromaik emul^ioiu and therefore sermtlvc to the green 
and blue light over ihe w'holc of these two trichrommic regions. Tire 
former arrangement, in which the blue light is recorded on the front 
film, patented by Tedinicolor in E.K 373,429. 1931 (For full 
description, see Chapter iV, p. 5MA 

When used for three-colour in the above martfier, if the blue is 
recorded on ihe front emulsion of ihc bipack, then no filter is used. 
"iTie front emufsion i$ coated on its surface with a red filter excluding all 
light other Utan red from the rear panchromutk emtd^on. On tht other 
hand, if the green light is recorded on tire front emulsion a yellow^ filter 
tminus-blue) is used^ Naturally these filters arc placed only in ihat part 
of the beam which has been directed tow ards the hi pack" The hipack 
56 ¥ 


aiPACK 


can be placed either in the diTecl beam or ip the diverted part of the 

beam. , r u- i. 

These arrangements presuppose the constr^on of a bipack as 

hitbeno mamifactnied, having a lilter of some kind introduced between 
the orthochromfliic front film and tlie pancbroiuntic back Such 
a filler may be coated on the surface of the front cmulaon or ti may 
be portly embodied in the emubion itself. The filler is ^crally a 
deep red-orange and is essential, otherwise blue or green light would 
reach the back panchromatic film and there be recorded. Technicolor 



Fra. 299.—How Tecluiico]or E.P. 349.318 could be ^ to oWaIjmIuwcoIcut 
rtc^tivta flii IwpiK^! ruUed iis'd frafnes ai a 


claim an advantage in using a magenta filter in connwtiim with a 
bipack, since they dedan; thnt the red filter incorpomted m «bc hip«« 
is subject to slight variaUoii, and that this vsnation ts smooiheo 
out by the fact that the magenta filter with its sharply cut red absori>- 
tioB band stands in front of the bipack. However, the method is act at 
present in use. In other words, the claim U that the alternative method 
of using a yellow filler in order to get a green record on the rtont Elm 
and a red record on the back film would possess the dibadsaniage of 
yielding somewhat irrt^uliir rejulls owing to the slight variations m the 

red filter of the bipack. . 

The second method is to record simultaneously or saccessivcly a 
tnagenia filter record and a yellow filler record on a hipack film (Fig. 







COLOVR C|\'£MATOCitAPHY 

Bj this method, if ihc remrtb are made simultaneous and the 
P cturcs are full-Mze, we shalJ use four times as much negative fdjn as 
hlack^aud-wfuie, l^ausc four frames arc exposed at a time. It is thus 
wluuon of the problem. Also, if both exposures am made 
Jimuhaueoosly. the camem mochaaism would have to pull the film 
dow^ two |ram« at 3 time. On the other hand, beain-sph-iters such as 
ou ^ Jidd/bar miniiure negative 

fEP Photographs Limited 

CE,R 3 WjOOD>, covered this method of takine three-colour neoatives 
case to the notmaJ bipack (see b^lo^ ^ ’ 

in u fiinK , intcresiing subtractive printing process is described 

m which a deydoped positive film is coated with a layer of Eclailije 
pigmeot Or dye-lake tird after drying treated with a bali 
ihc well-known - Carhro ” bleach, The coloured 
'S i^ietieby hardened in proportion to the presence of 

bv :L liberated 

a^d th^ 'be film is washed in hot 

sYJer ^ f !? underlying 

(i“tmir^„d hardened at any stage prior 10 the hol-waler 

cSoriJ?^^'r f-rricyaSSror 

FOcess has pr^biiittes far two-colour films, and it mighl easily 
^louSdTayer! Processing in order to obmin a third 

pr^OosaWo^om^h^ A. Spencer and H. D. Murray is a very oriutnal 
fsiiblractive prirKiples of cotour 
S?iLh J. ii 'o a beam-splitter device of the tvpc 

color. etc.), 'nic two images are recorded on btoaek. Tbb provides 

four iKgiitivc images Uius: ^ prtjviura 


Fraro I 
FntJttae \l 


h 

Tfu- frcfjt Fifm Rironfs. 


BfiHi 


FmjTic ] 


A Vir. //. 

Thr Batk Fi/ffl Rmrdi. 


CiTWH FfMc U 


Rffd 


^ “ mogenu filter is used; for frame II a yellow (Uter. 
fV^rTti printed on double-coated stock. The side printed 

IStwe mrinriM prfmeo- red, The other side printed from 

fih ? (ininus-rtd). These rreords are now projected 

V,1« Which arc nddiiively complemertarv and arc of such 

ibc Wt that absorb those 

570 



BIPACt^ 


Thi« isa very but it poi«^e 4 serious c©mmcicial 

dj tafi vantages. The projection iystetn requites a special rotating 
disc on the projector. No wtilly satisfaciory bcam^spUlter ^ l«n 
designed which will give two fhll-^izcd frames one abow tbe OlhCT. 
Ucking such an optical unit racours* would have to be had to sutn 



Bipojck Nc^tfre 


f 

Kt/W Filtt!' 
(frimD _^ 

1 “ 

lrl 

1 '' 

" 

1 

’9 /^r^vrrffi 

1 

filter 


'1 

1 

% 

h 1 

1 

^ Frames 


Dir^tion cF 
Incidt/it 

FK3. 30K 

standard images such as am obtained in the ilaycol and Cinecolor 
f British) cameras. Finally, it is very doubtful if flicker could be avoided, 
since at normal projection speed there would be twelve idtcrnatmg frames 
having slight colour differences which would certainly be perceptible 

to the eye. . . . 

The above patentees arc responsible for an unporlant bipock priient 
(E.p. 363,000) which claims the method for obtaining three-colour 





































COLOUn CtNEM^TOGRAFHY 

c^posttre wLih a beam-spliitcr camem 
on bipstck mwrmi ol ibe normaE variety, namely, having liie panchro 

(Figs ^ nrsp<JciLvelJ 

Further possible oJtenuitit-e arrnngeTnems are desert bed. 

Ou Pont Bjpuek 

B-F'.^5,it6l describe a bipack from which three separa- 
ihe "-nf ® soq jcjice of operations appli^ to 

dy^^ c^r'l 'nJT*' bipack con^sts of a front blue-sensitivrydlow* 
dyed eJcnient singlenroaied of the norroal type. The roar elcmem 

baS'LyM^SS»S'‘"*fil!'‘' front layer being groen scMitivc and the 
TtiA vin^l .s*Q^U\e. Between the two layers is a red /liter layer. 

fdX.”'*"" '‘" 

!f SS.'S'l"' nT^S” iST* n“ f t 

doubledayer ncgatisxi is bleached and the lop layer only is rcM/eveicmed 

I,?!"" previously from the two^laycr film is 

ii ^ mask and 4 print mtide from the *wo coJiabified The 

rcsulung pi’ll]t wiU be a duplicate ncgaitvc of the destroyed imate which 

dc™n. f ° “Wlireof Ihe doiiUcSiated 

ararS.'" k*"** produwicn of indeptndeiit colour 

separation photographic records from two or more colour secanttion 

su^rposrf on the same support, chamcicriad in 

converMhem Silver ima^ by bleaching all the records to 

by means tonennost record 

undev^lnn.* 1 ■! development and finally dissolving away the 

undevebped ^ver salts which formed the inncimost recori 

processing of the 

tol ^ Clements) of a bipack in which etc sup^rt (or 

to) ^mes two superposed emulsion Uiyers each sensiito to a 

»£l^Hiou “ f-™ 'he ortslnri colour 

Use of Bipack 

weM dlS?^!? procedure in tlic employment of blpack is 

^1 described m a recent paper pre^nied by John Boyle. A.S.c! at a 


BTFA.CK 


convcniion of the S.M.P.E. in October 1946, to which we arc indebted 
for most of ihc information here |ivcn. 

The following changes ate necessary w convert the N.C Type 
Mitchell for bipack: 

1. Move knaesi towards the lUm (emulsion) plane a distance of 

Q O04S id., then use normal enUbrauons For Tmus. Cameras with 
siandard instead of*" slip-ring lens mounts would have to be 
either eye focused or recalibrated. 

2. Adjusting lenses will necessitate "" skiininingthe ground gXas5 

back 0H)045 in, 

3. Remove “ strippershoe back of miiin sprocket and replace 

with"' cutaway shoe. 

A. Lock off clutch. 

5. Substitute either a tbur-Tolier pressure plate, or a solid pressure 
plate, tn the four-roller plate the top roller is straight while she 
other three rollers arc cmwncd 0-003 in- Tlie four-roller pressure 
plate is patented by the CLnccolor Corporation and license for 
use is granted by die patentees. The solid type plate is crowned 
0 003 in. and is of polished chrome. Pressure can be obtained 
with a solid screw or by use of a spring twice the tension of the 
nomtal spring. In practice use U generally made of the solid 
screw^ for the four-roller platCi being i.’areful to avoid * ^ rtm-oiiis. 

Boyle states that Ihe proper adjusimenl of the pressure plate is 
very important: ihsufhcieni; clearance ^vith con^ueni “ punching'" 
will cause perforation damage and out-of^register imsgesi while tw 
much clearance will destroy conuict of the rear negative resulting tn 

breathing "" and out^f-focus pictures p 

A lest chan is photographed at the end of each day i work and the 
paired negatives carefully c^taniined for contacip any lack of which is 
ruinous io the rear images Tlsc back negative should be cain pared with 
a standard uf CJ(ceHeuce retained asa controL 

Coaied kntes Imve given ihe best results and ^aiiafactory pictures 
hare been made with tenses varying in foci from 24-40 mm., but such 
wide-angle lenses must be used with discretion. 

Owing to the difficulty of obtaining adequate illumination with 
tungsten lighting and variations in colour temperature only the exterior 
type of bipack has been used in the Hal Roach Studios* in which a large 
number of twxKolour films have been made^ Gencnitly H-L arcs are 
employed, the generet illumination bdng identical to Technicolor- 

Boyte notes that back light should be kept to a minimum* ocily the 
tieoe^sary amount being used to ^ve detail in hair and separate, the 
colour planer. An undue amount gives bluish highlights- In exteriors^ 
backlight causes grctss and foliage to reproduce as brownish in hue and 
should be avoided. For street scenes and exteriors where there art no 
deep ahadews^ overcast wealhcr conditions have given the best results 


COLOUf^ (TlNtsiIATOCRAPHY 


(H.I, Bics and booster assisting) for foregrounds and fnces. The 
use of an ultra-violci absorbing filter licips in rendition of finb colours 
and textures. In general iho set should be fyHy lighted, avoiding deep 
shadows. With coated lenses at an aperture oV f/^-8 a kcylighl of 500 
is employed, filled to an over-all luniioatioe of 650 foot 
candles. For night effects and somewbat deeper shadows, less fill and 
more cross-light should be used. Night eflFocis are accentuated bv the 
use tjf“ practEcats ■■ ond brightly lit windows. Generally some twcnlv 

tungsten bmps used with Macbeth 

Whitemte filters. Occasionally ordinary incrandesceot spots are 
used without cotreciioo to emphasize r«b or otange. Because of the 
volume of light necessary, targe units arc used as far away from subjecis 
4 ^ set construction will pertuit. The familiar Y-l filter is used on all 
H.l. s^lsj to cut the excessive btue^violet, but as in Tecbnkolor lighting, 
the Mole-Richardson broadsides arc used without filters. The side ores 
give a colour-iempeniture of 5,500" K. The H.l. ares witji I70-Y-! 
arigham gelatines are 5,900* IC. 

Mate-up shoLild be on the light side to avoid a red-orange or sallow 
cotnplexioji. Up rouge should be an orangt-red. Crease has given 
^trer results than “ pancake ’* and no mnkc-up is used above No, 25. 
Owing to the light make-up, blended modelling is used to prevent mask¬ 
ing appearance and to break up colour into planes. For men, a beard 
cover must be used, olhcrwise the beard wUl reproduce as a blue 
shadow. No make-up is used on children. ThieeKsoJour make-up has 
not been a success, indeed suindani black-and-white make-up in ligluer 
valu^ t>eeii foDnd rpore suitable. 

towels and bedding should be dved a buff otherwise Ihe 
whiles will be too “ cold." 

Fluorescent cloth has been sutxcssfully employed to obtain a colour 
ofhi^ saturaUbn. 

Very complete preliminary tests should be made to determine the 
precire reproducUon fin advance) of all the principal costumes and 
rurnitore and Ulterior decoration. 


I^ructitiis for adaptation of standard IkU and Howell camern Fnr 
bipack, (By cimriesy of Bell and Howell Company.) 

Wbeo two films are to be run in the cam era, as for the bipack colour 
proressi Of any other processes requiring such iimogement, it is 
essential to mamrein perfect contact of the two film emuteions during 
ex^sure time, m addition to securing perfect icgistraitonof both films. 

The fie I and Howell " Unit I " film mechanism, which is equipped 
with itor/ofliiry pilot pins and fuJl-fittlng driving pins, is the most 
accrue tntermitteni movement avaiUible and ensures automaticallv 
^rfeci reptw even though dJlferencc in length, due to shrinkage, may 
□e found tn ifie film row stocks. 

574 








FlO. J02. 


f #■ W5! 























*t|PACK 


Tht [Joil tftuJ Howell Unii 1 liim iutcruiitteiit mccbaniiim is, 
furibcrmore* to designed ihat ^ufftcient ekarance cxisu between the 
film register leaves, whieh form live film charinelH, to climinaie all dimers 
of surface scf=alche& and abrasions. During the periods of film motion, 
lie Olm, or films, arc free from frictional eontacts and it is only dmiitg 
stationary periods of exposure that the film is accurately tocoied ai the 
focal plane of ifie photographic lens. 

This control of film positioning n absolutely under control when attf 
film h run into the eamcfii, but aur pockett may form between two fiims 
wbcti they are simullaneoiisjy run ihn>ugh the mechanisms. These air 
pockets are due to the resistance of two relatively large surfaces to keep 
in absolute contacts 

To el iminji ie the possihtiity Of soch occurrence, the Bell and Howell 
engineers have devised means to mcorporate in ihe back register leaf a 
set of Jive rubber buttons which are made to protrude from the inner 
surface of the lead and act as air "‘squeegees*' during the deeting 
Insiani during which the film is stmwnar}" at the aperture and ihe camera 
shutter is not 05 yet in its cycle of exposure. 

With due eonsidenition to ihe above, it quite obvious that the best 
solution to the problem of securing equally sharp ” images for black- 
itnd-whitc singie fUm work and btpack^ double film process, is to secure 
two interchangeable film intermittent mechiiiiisni^. one for biack-ajtd- 
white and one for bipaek work. 

The [wo mechanisms can be delivered so that they are iatciebangcabk 
with absolute security. If a camera in the posBesiion of the user is lo be 
adapted, it h necessary that it be sent complete to our works for 
careful installution of both mechanisms so thai the films register 
perfectly at ihe focal plane. 

If two fUm intenniticiit mechanisms—one for bbek-and-whirc and 
One for bipack^are avaiinblc, there is no need of further concern, as 
they will be perfectly jittetthangieable. However^ at times it will be 
found desirable to use only Lfnii I ” film inlertuiltent mechanism 
which is so constructed us to be rcadtly converted for single or double 
films operation. 

The following instructions coniempLitc such a case. 


InstructiniLv for using a single Loll I B, and IL mtennitlcnl 
mechanism, iofercbnngeabk for singk iH twin Jilms 

A* Ti^Lt {Fig. 302>. Make <iure IhAt you have av'aiJtiblc the two 
wrenches which are delivered as standard equipment wiih each camern 
and ivhich are illustrated in Fig^ 3f02. 

1. Genctat utility wrench No. 231. 

2h Front and rear ball bearing cone wrench No. 233* 

Also prepare two strips of film about 6 inches long, cutting out the 

STS 


COLOUR CJN'eviA rOGRAPHV 

(ilm perfbr jus over a tengih of opproximaldy 3 inches, ns shown in 

■ 'ifi. '2. 

B. Withdraw Uic “ Unit 1" liim mtermitleat lacchanism and, using 
the general utility wTcnch, loosen the lock nm A {Fig. 3} at the rear of 
ihccamerj,, luming it slightly coirnter-tloekwisc as inustrated in Fig. 3. 

C. The cans setting rim A " j Fig. 4) b then lovscned and can be set 
at will, IS it is found that it it difficult to loosen it, use wrench " B " 
(Fig. 1} as illustrated in Fig. 4. 

Do not force the turning of the ring and if it still ofTers rtsisunce with 
the use of the wrench, merely lap the lock nui '* A ” (Fig. 3) with the 
heel of the palm of the hjind to j ar it loose, 

Note that two relerencc dots '* B '* (Fi^, 4, 5 and 6i are eneraved on 
the rim of the cam setting ring w'hieh are to ooiacide with the edge of the 
cJishng" C ■“ (.Figs. 4, 5 and 6) and which by their posilionings set the 
cam “ D *' so that it will bring the film mechanism register leaves, and 
therefore the film emulsion or emulsions, to the focal plane, with 
otaciing precision. 

p. When the two dots" B " (Fig. 51 coincide with the upper edge of 
casting ** C (Fig, 5), the intenniiient film mechanism is set to bring 
the first emulsion at the lens focal plane for biptick (double film) 
operation. 

When the two reference doU " B ” (Fig. 6) are brought to coincide 
with the lower edge of the casting * C (Fig. 6), the intermittem film 
mechanism ts set to bring the film emulsion at the focal plane for 

singb film " operation. 

E. After setting the cam ring at its proper position, lock the lock 
knob at the tear of the camera, using the geiseral ulililv wrerich. turning 
it clockwise as iliustrated in Rg. 3. 

F. You are ready now to insert in the camera the " Unit 1 " film 
inicrmiitcnt mechanism. Sec to it that it is pushed fully home and it 
can Ik easily locked in place with the provided locking latches. 

It is now pr^rible to use the camera for either single film or double 
film work, according to the setting of the camera in and out register 
leaves cam, 

G. The rear rcgtsier leaf"' A ” {Fig. 7> is equipped with five rubber 
buttons " B {Fig. 7J which can be pushed forward (o protrude from 
the inner face of the back leaf, or retracted to be Rush with this leaf 
surface by a combination of leaves and suitable springs. 

When the levers *' C (Fig. 7) are in the position shown in Fig, 7. the 
rubber buttons are llush with the uincr active face of the back, register 
leaf and arc in position for “ single film '' opemtion. 

When the levers “ C ” (Fig. 8i arc pulled out in the posiuon shown in 
Fig. 6, the buttons protrude from the inner active face of the back 
register leaf and arc in position for"' double film ” operation. 

K, Although (he setEiug of the camera cum Is very easy and accurutc 
S76 


IILE^ACK 


if I be iibove instructions nn? folkvwodr il good praclkc tc check the 
tUni tension after the rtiinl adjusimeti t of die rubber buttons b rruide. 

If the buLtuEis are set for single film opcmiion. inkc one tingle picco 
of film eut is shown in Fig, 2 and insert ii in ihc '* Unit 1 ” film inter- 
miitcni inKlmnlsm at the fUm would be Ihroadcd for photographing 
operaiion. 

Tlw fact that ths poriions of ihe film where the perforations arc. are 
cut away, ensLires ItiLi there will be no inLerfcrence from either the pilot 
or Ihc driving pins- 

Using the small crank supplied as standard equipment with the camera 
at the tear single frame shafu make sure that the ragister leaves arc in 
such a poEiiiion that they bring the film lo the lens focal plunc (photo¬ 
graphic position). 

Without disturbing this positioning,, take hold of ihe film strip 
shown in Fig^ 9 and move it up and down in the film channel- 

'ITic film must be ficc to move widtout effort but a siighi rt$^^rance 
(fthn leusLon) must be Ml. 

Experience, easily acquired, will lcl3 when proper tension is applied- 

L If the btiuons are sci for double fihu opcrailon, make the sujiic 
Him tension test, using, however, boih strips of film instead of only 
one. Tension resistance must be fell in either rhe single or the double 
film test. 

J, Tlic double compnnmentp double sci film magazines arc to be 
loaded as iUusirmcd in the general view of ihc Ciuneru. 

It U important that the film loops be formed us illustrated, that is to 
say* ihe front film laopn must be perf 0 ratii}n longer iban ihose of the 
back film. 

The driving and take-up sprocket film guides and the sprocket teeth 
are ^ designed and constriJcted that they take adequate core of either 
single or d ouble film. 

Nt/TE.—It is advisable to make the film lenBioii lest even when 
” Unit V* film mischanisms—one for single and one for doable film—are 
availiihle. Film thicknesses may vary ever so slightly within ucocpituJ 
tolerances^ or film tension adjustments may need checking. Pre- 
cauiionaiy^ iiieasurcs w ill newr be found uscles^s for exact results, 

K. Aficr completing the film tension check, the camera b ready to 
be thre;tded with niw film. 

For single film, the camera k, of course, threaded in the regular way, 
using the standard fdin magazines. 

For double film openitiort, the coupled bipack magazines are 
uicd and the film threaiicd as shown in the general view of Lhc camera. 

ll is kupuitant ihiil the loops of the from film be of greater size (one 
perforation longer) than Use loops of ihc second film. 

The film magazines coupled for bipack work can be disassembled 
into Iw'o single units for individual use with single film. The lower 

20 sn 


rOLDl^R CtNBMJ^,TOCiR.\PHTf 


maj^azine is* however, equipped with a special udaptert ai^d whea used ai 
a single luagazine* Lhe opening on Top of the casiing must be elo^ wiih 
the special cover plate supplied^ and a longer fasiening rod is to be used 
to attach the magazine to the camera. 

L. From Lhc abovc^ it is quite evident that when using the inter' 
changeableUnit I ” fllai Tnechanism for double films, the lens fiscal 
plane of the camera is pujht^d buck an amount sufficient to com- 
pensaie for the thickness of the front fiJm. 

Since the ground glass at the focusing apcrtune is precisely vet for the 
focjil plane of the emulsion of ike single film, corapensiaiiOTi musl be 
devlwd for setting the lens so that it will properly focus at the displaced 
focal planCp To this eObet an inde^ marking is engraved on the Jens 
holder* identified with The reference letter B (Bipack), 

Focus visually the object ihrotigh the regular ground glass and 
before operating ihe camera, rotate the lens uiouni so that the distujice 
morkitig found by vtstial observation is switched to theJ reference^ 
marking engraved in ihe Jens mouiitp 
For extremely cfnse-tip work such as tides, it is suggested That 
a photographic check of the marking be made, and additional 

reference points be dclcrmined according to liie parllculur requirements 
of the operator. 

The above insifuctiojis ate very easily foliowcd» and all operations 
require only a few seconds, if performed in their sequence siid with 
normal care. 


AGFA LENTICLLAR BIPACK. (Not obtainable.) 

By a very ingenious application of ihc lenticular lUm principle 
Agfa showed that it is possible to obtain three-colour negative sepora- 
tions from a single exposed frame of a bipack (E.P. 395,124). The 
front ffim of the bjpack w'as. a norninl lenticular embossed base coated 
wiBi an orlhochromatic emulsion sciisitive to green and blue 
light^K The back tllrn was sirailar to that of an ordiimrv^ hipuck, namely, 
coated wiih a tugh+^specd panchromatic emulsion. The cmukion on 
the front film was coated with a red fulttr to exclude all green and blue 
light from tht back film. Wc had here ii peHccdy normal bipnefc 
of the standard Agfa type as far as emulsion coatings w^ctc. concerned, 
but with ilie difference that the froM film was a lenticular base. The 
front film w’its caused to bear two records by means of placing a banded 
filter on the lens in the u^uaK position* ihut is* just in front of the lens. 
(For a dcscripiion of the optkat principles of tenhcular film see 
^ Lenticular ITocesses.*') The banded filter in this case consisied of 
(WO colmirs. one yellow' and one magenta, divided into three sections, 
iTiiigeiita in ihe middle and a band of yellow on dlhcr iidc, 

578 


mpxcK 


We know that a yellow filter rmnsmiis red and green and absorbs 
and ihaL a magenta fiUcr fran^nnts red and blue and absorbs green* 
Thus red was transmuted by filters, and besides red the yellow 
transmitled gran and the magenta blue, 

Therefore the front £!□], according to ihe optical principles of the 
lenticular process* and by yktiK of tis sensitiuiy to grecti and blue, 
bore a record of aliernate juxiaposed stripes, or bands, reprr^nttng 
in densities varying proportions of green imd blue light and hence 
two of the prlrnaiy records; whereas the back film bore a 
image representing the record of red light. 

AAer exposure the films wens dereloped and reversed to positives, 
or developed as normal negatives if desired. 

In order to print from either Ihe gran or blue record sepanilely, 
it was necessary to prim with coloured light,, using a banded filter 
relatively in the same position as when the picture was exposed. 
The printing had to be done on a FKtnchromalie emulsion. A banded 
hllcr was carefully mounted in a position exactly corresponding to 
that which it occupied in the comcm, a normal step-by-step contact 
printing machine being used {preferably equipped witli pilot pins 
for registTation). For illumimition a special singk-fiLument tamp was 
employed, sontewhal like a sirip lunip, the filament being at 
right angles to I he filler bands. The filament therefore fioiizontal 
and formed a brilllani strip of light immediately bclutid the filters. 
By tcmpomrily blocking out one or olher bund oT the Direr one could 
cxliact a direct negetive record of one of the two banded imag^ on 
the front film. The other part of the filter was then blocked out in its 
turn and the second record extracted. 

Such a lenticular bipack was well suited for primliig upon Caspar- 
color three-colour positive film. Tor this purpose both original films 
were first reversed. By using blue fillers for the two outer sections of the 
banded printing fiJtet and a red filler for the middle band Jt was possible 
to prim the magenta and yellow layers of the Caspareolor film simtiU 
tancously. The yellow bands on the camera filter w^ne responsible for 
the green records on the lenticular film. Replacing yellow by blue, one 
printed the ntagentu layer* which was sens! It veto blue lighi only* Similarly 
Lhc magenta filler was responsible for the blue record on the front film. 
ReplaciDg this by red when piiDting, one printed the yellow layer of the 
Gasparcolor film which was senshivc to red 11^L. Thus these two layers 
could be simultaneously printed each from its appropriate part of Llic 
double Icnticnlur image. The back film w'ith its continuous red record 
was afterwards used to print the other side of the GaSparcolor material 
which was coated with cyan dyed cmuJsionH 
The dimeaxions recommended for the Biter bevnd^r w'erc diffcrttit 
for various camera objectives. The following was an example: 


579 


COtOLTJt €INFMATQ<j£APFKY 


Astro FlhB SChMM. Focys. Typb III 


fitiffhl Ct/BiimL 


Filter, 

Rrw. 

Arc 

»* ^4 

■ ■ 25 111 . 

Z5 mnL 

25 „ 

iyiiith tmmt: 


1 II 7 jiuxi. 

7 mm* 


For priniing from negatives taken with the above Jens: 

ar bands . , .. K mm. 

Wwllh of bnnds .. „ ,, . , 12 

TJe liiter to he plrtoed S| mitiH Vram the piimina 
7l» ipKmf horizontal «tfi|;i.filairH!X£l lanr^ to be usod. 

Lenticular btpaek 15 capable of providing accurate three-colour 
separaiiotif but prints derived from $uch records c^thibh poor resolving 
power and do not stand comparison with tbe best of contemporarv 
proccsses- 


580 











PART TWO 


Nothing has tiiurh fKswer lu brooflcn ihe mincl iis tbc abilll^ lo KnvtiligAii: Systran- 
■itkiiilly ami truly uU t>ut comes under the observciiion in lito. 

hlAROJS AURB-HH- 








CHAPTER 7 


Background or Process Projection 


T he Procs^i Projection Cara miitee of ihe Society of Motion 
Pkmttn EnginecFs in 1939 put forward a i^pon embodying 
detailed rccommcndaiions far proc^^^ss projection ctiuip^at. 
For this jnformRiijop the technical reader hi referred to the origjjo! 
report (I), Here only tJiose aspccU of process projection will be con¬ 
sidered which arise in the ti^ehnique of colour films- 
Process projection, called in Britain "* background projection^” 
a somewhat more precise dcscripiiom assumed great importance 
economically in ratio to the continuous rise in the cost of fUm production, 
Bui whereas vveathof conditions are reasonably reliable in Cnlifomia, 
they are notoriously unreliable in Europe, and partLculariy so in 
Britain; and since process projection, as a lechniquct was evolved 
for the purpose of dispensing with the necessity of location photo^ 
graphy, one would have expected the technology io have reached an 
even more advanced singe in Britaia than in Hollywood, This docs 
not sccni to have been the case, howevcf. and it must be acknowledged 
that the optica) projection apparains developed in America is far 
superior in every way to that with which most British studios have 
hilheno been equipped. This need not have been so had not the pro- 
motors of itudio^ been more luterested in the '* rackets” they were 
working thnn in the equipment Lhey made available to the sincere 
tochiiiciims tliey employed, h need not have been the because it 
would have been a simple matter for any competent studio owner at any 
time in the last ten years to have formed a committee of British miuuifac- 
turers who, betwi^n them, could have devised apparatus in every way 
equal li> the American machines. But the inlcrcsft of those who were iti 
the position to spend money on cquipracnl did not lie in the welfare of 
the rndustiy, evert as a means for increasing Ihcir profits; they were 
concemod alone in persuading the British public to subscribe as quickly 
as possible the maxLmum sum and ilicn re tiring from the business with 
a title and a lortunc collected between tw^o picture booms.- 

It was soon found in Atncrica that the enormous cost of making 
location shots in Technicolor could be avoided only by the maximum 
possible use of process projection. And the most effective mother of 
technical in^^uiion is neecssUy in the form of dollars. 

Compound triple-head projection was the answ^er to the problem ^ 



COLOUR C1NE.MAT0GKAJ>H¥ 

and such a multiple process projector ^viu fiisi constnicicd by those 
Mrdy pioneers WarBer Brothers, who rweived tlie Academy Award 
in 1938 “ for pioaccring the desieJopmenl and for the first pracitcal 
application to moijon pictures of a triple-head background projector." 
Byron Haskiii, of Warner Brotbers' Studios, describes how^ iJti$ con- 
^plion originated in the spedaJ needs of the Technicolor picture 
'* Gold is Where You Find it," in which occurred a sequence of the 
flooding of a vniky, which could only be shot by a combinalioa of 
process projection and minuiture backgrounds. At ihai time colour 
pronss shots were ijmtted (o a 9 ft. ' 131^. screen, und the foreground 
settings, consisting of flinnes, hydraulic guns, and ntnnerous shacks, 
were too large In scale to be combined with such a small screen. 
The job Was impossible with a single projector. Since it was known 
lhai the maxiiiiuin light delivery of which the single projector was 
capable had been reached, the thought occurred that, provided 
ndditionat projections could be superimposed over the one to compose 
it single image, the brilliancy of the picture should be compound 
lespc^lively and, by mtio, expand to the size requited. After dis¬ 
cussion relative to the amount oflight needed we dclcmiined to attentpl 
to superimpose three projectors (tfri because, in theory, this com¬ 
pounding of light would be enougli.” Many diflkutties had to be 
surmounted. The pamila.v which would have resulted from the loeing- 
in of three projectors mounted side by side was avoided by mounting 
two projectors on each side at right angles to a central one and using 
4-in. prisms to reflect the side beams at such an angle us to register 
jxrfcctly upon the screen (vii., slightly more than 45'). Stibscquemly, 
fused quart? optically polished flats with algminizcd first surface 
were substituted for the prisms. 

In Ilie Warner process projector ihe optical part of the projection 
system is rigidly fixed to a metal base forming un optical bench assembly; 
and for the purpose of focusing, the lamp housings and projection 
movemenis are lK>diIy moved back and forth on dovetailed ways. 
Sets of mounts are doodled to accepi matched sets of lenses which are 
" always the same focal distance from the screen, eliminating the 
ne^sity for superimposiiion when changing the sire of the picture." 
llic gun-inouii!: ’* base swings laterally around an axis equidfstant 
rram (he three leases and rotaiK vertically about tlic as is of the iwo 
"outboard " lenses, thus never allering the focal distanoc of any of 
ine lenws from the screen during the poiiiionlng of the picture (2). 

E-areiol Edoiiari of Paramount describes a simHar inslrumenl (3), 
Paremouni at first made the interesting experiment of using ihc 
projector for three-colour additive projeclioTi, employing the iippro- 
priale bJack-und-white plates or films projected through the standArd 
tficoiour hlim. The loss of light was, however, excessive, us will be 
t»bvious if w c consider the rery low cmciencv of the blue filter lo which 
584 


HACHQhOUtiD OR FROt'ESS FROlfeCTtON 



Chit 

\ / yMoitir, 


^moi» i^f?s 


f/rst Sarfbce 




la.'T^p //W2fff. 


7/^ 


Cc/hrg 


jOOOflWrfies 

jWc^j/ne.^ 


ia^ Mdo$^St^ 
J&Ae £/p Dwe- 


^ Ffpop /w. 



Stetson thRO* Centrg. 

FiHp JOJ.—farajiifluxii Tripte-head Proi^pf. of townioum ^ciurtx^ ItK.i 


585 





















































































COlOUk CiNEMATOOftAPIfY 

ihc Oih^f two wouJd hjivfl had to be balanced. Probably there was 
nothing gained as compared with projection by the single instrumeiu 
using a complete subtractive tianspareney. This method was quickly 
abandoned in favour of three identioai Toctuiicolor prinls projected in 
superim|>QsitJon dfid perfectly rcgiivtcred on the $crteni 

The Plaraniount uniE^ lik^ the Warni^ one^ consists osscDtiaLIv of 
three standard Iranspai^^ncy projection units* esch with its own 
hmp-housc, film mo^icjncnt* and opiicat system mounted on w common 
base, and the whole erected in a sound-fmoof booth whicti mny be on 
castors, or else, in turn, (irmly mounted on a concr^ste base (Fig. 303). 

The central projector is placed parallel to ihe axis of projection. 
Tho other tw’t> are mounted at right angles to the aids of projectioUt 
facing inward towards that axis. The two beams from ihe side pro- 
jectop arc rejected by first surface alurtdriaed mirrors at an angle 
of slightly mone than 45'^ The three film movemeals are driven in 
synchronism with the camera by electrically interlocked synebroni^d 
nmSors. There is provided remote focusing control from the camera 
position. The central image is at first focosed and lined tipj afler* 
wards the side images are matched to It in n^gbliation and focus. 
This does not to hive been as convenient an arrangement a$ on tbc 

^^ttrner mstrunjcnt^ and it is probable that it bus since been modified. 
It is said that the iwo sklc images took from three to seven minutes 
to register to the central one. 

ParcioL Tdouart reported that the increase in screen luminance 
was no less than 2S0 per cent, more than was possible with the single 
project t?r. 

It h evident that for the purposes of colour photography the follow¬ 
ing conditions must be met: 

A. There must be the minimum Ifuctuatioii of luminance and 

distribution of energy m the light-$ource. 

B. The colourdernperaturc of the soura: must be a match to that 

of the Ltlummation of the foregroundp 

C. There must be accurate oontreil of the total of the liglit cmiued, 

in order to be able to adjust the ratio of ihc pboiomctric 
value of the foreground to that of the backgroundn This is 
at the discretion of the camera operator. 

Requlrament A has been met by choosing types and sizes of carbon 
for the superlatively high-inten^ity arcs used, as recommended by the 
manur^-ttircrs to give Rinximum efficiency, and comrolling burning 
condiltojis so as to provide mintmtim (luuer. The serpen luminance 
vanution should be less (han 7 2 per cent, per niiaute, but with a 
maximum of 5 per cent, for any consecutive nine-minule shooting 
period. It is laid down that the mtoiiqixm output of an FI .'6 relay type 
condenser system should be 25,0DD lumens, 

5Ub 


BACIEGllOltT4!> OR PROCESS FROjrECTlOK 


Requiremcal B faas been inet by providing tliat tfae carbons be 
burned at within ± 5 amperes of their rate cuTtent. 

Requlretneni C has been met by U» use of a tuAt-resisting diaphra^ 
li^t control which is placed at a suitable point in the relay eondenser 
system. With such a dtaphragm the Light output is easily controlled 
white retaining even distribution. 

It b recommended that a separate power supply be provided for 
the ligbt-sources, inasmuch os a ooustanl line voltage to the arcs ia 
imperative in order to meet the conditions above described. 


Refcrcuces 

<1) StKieiy of Mudoii Pictiue Enijiiiwn, Report oT Uk Process Prjgection Com* 
emttec, Jcmnf.’SoC, WM- Pie. £if., 3i2 fl93?>i PP- 5#5»-W9, 

{!> lliCtEiN, B., Tl« Development arul Pnwtjeal AppiioaiiiM of the Tripte* 
Head Back ground Projector." Journ. See. Fie. £«g., 34 (Marcli I940i 
P.253L 

(3) EouTiKfiT, F-. " Parnmotini Triptc-Head TiKOSpcirency Process Pioiocior, 
Joum. Sx. Afci, Fie. Btg.. 33 (August 1439), p (70. 

" The Paramoiint T«aiii|>iij™dy ftocess PTOjerfJon Equipment" Jfiivii. 
Sx. Mt>t. Pie. Bnf., 40 (June t443). p, 3*6, 

(41 EtHKjMcr, P„ " Htgb'Efflneney SicrcojtUcoii Projector for Culm Bactpouiul 
Show." Jituftt. Soe. Mot. Fie. Eng., 4J (AuEust iW), p. 47. 


587 


CHAPTER a 


Colour Film Sound Tracks 


T he of the sound Glm did not offer an obstucle lo the Tech^ 
nicolor laboratories because it had al'ways been their praetlcc to 
include a key silver print on top of which the dye^ were imbibed 
even in the tlay^i of iwo-co!oiir Technicolor Today Technicolor use the 
silver pdu I generally for the fratne-surroiind and do not include a key 
silver print in the imageareiL From the earliest days of sound the Teehni- 
color track was norma h Indeed, some claims were made as to an Lnlierent 
superiority owing to the opportunity to develop the key positive bearing 
the track to ideal gumma without making any saciifioe lo picture 
quulityj ihc making ofw^hich was conipJclcly Lndepcndeni of the positive 
development stage* Thia may have been pardculariy true of variable 
density track, 

Two-coJour processes other than the cfirlter Technicolorp such as 
Citiecolor and MultkoJor,. employed, howewr^ double-coated film 
stock the respective sides of which w^erc loned generally by inorganic 
agents to rtd-ofungc and grccn-blue. The final image was therefore 
coloured^, although often of considerable opacity, TIk troubles w^hich 
were cjtperieinxd were first described by R. M. Oiss of Multicolor 
in 1921 [11. He rernark^^ ITie itoiind track is printed in blue. In 
variable deia^Uy re^rding the blue track differs from the blaqk-and- 
white track in the increased contrast of tlae blue over the black track 
before lonmg. The blue track is developed to a gamma of 0 5* The 
^ntial property of a good sound track is that there should exi^ a 
linear relation betwecii the in^nsmlssioo of ihi^ positive as viewed 
by a photoelectric cell and the exposure of the negAtive. Bg. 3(M 
shows this rdution for the Multicolor blue track as seen by the cjcsiwm 
and potassium plioloeketric ceils." Otis observed that modulation 
of a blue track was best rendered by a photocell scDsitive mainlv to 
red, such as the cesium cell, since to this cell the blue track would 
be as opaque as black. The Infra-red tniomittance of ferric ferri- 
cyanidc blue-toned silver would not be excessive, since this compound 
has low infra-red transmittance. 

The dilemma was faced at about ihe same lime prior to the W'ar in 
Englnnd by Dr. Etelu Caspar, because in his process for the first lime the 
final image was a pure dye inuige, and since bis positive film was coated 
on both sides he could have had a dye image track in blue on white or 
SttS 





COLOUR FILM SOUND TRACKS 


red on white. The red track fairly salisfuciory with polfl-^slinn oxidis 
photoedb^ but useless with cssium photiKells. Similarly, the blue 
tiTaek wa^ unless wUh cafsiuta cells owmg to cxcessivi? itmtsmittancc 
of deep red, li was therefore essential lo use a silver track with a 
two-layer background of red (yellow minus magenta). As this was a 
reversal bleach-ont process, it follows that a sDver and white track w'^is 
impossible, as the developed silver wai necessary lo destroy the dyo 
in the layers. The procedure adopted was as follows: 

J. The track was printed on the yellow-magenta side, (See Gaipar- 
color.) 

2. The opposite cyan side was fogged on the track area- 



3. Fixed^ Sy^^r v^'as here elimJiLitcd in the unmoduLtied area. 

4. Dye^estfoytfd in area where developed stlv'cr was present. 

5. Tlie developed silver track, in common with lire pkturearea, was 

con^-erted to silver chloride in preparation for elimimlion of 
all silver in the picture arcit* 

h. The sound track was locally redeveloped before reducing the 
silver chloride in the picture area. 

7* Fixed and washed. 

The outcome of this procedure is an opaque silver image on a red 
unmodulated background. This track met the contittianjt imposed 
by the region of seniittlvity of cicsium oxide phoiocclU because the 
transmiitanoe of the red background wag nearly m efficient as clear 
film for the mdiatioii to which the cell was rensitive. The apparatu$ 

5R9 





CotaUK ClNEMATOORAPKr 


fof r^cvelopmg the silver chloride sound track consisted of a coating 
wheel about ij inches In diameieri its coating edge being concave 
with refenence to the filfUp This concave edge dipped into a smaU coating 
trough filled with a viscous soJution oT developer and a meniscus 
was formed with the liim surface. The bcundaiy of the redeveloped 
track was unexpectedly stmight and Liitk or no trouble was experienced 
with development ixtnnEng Into the ptciure area. However, in a labora¬ 
tory this is a delicate and rather messy operation which necessitates 
sklllDd and continuous attention. 

The Gasparcolor sound track redevelopcr foiTnulu was as follows r 


Metol 

Sodium sulphite (atihyd.) 
Hydroquinpne 
Sod. hydroxkfc 
“Nekal" ,, 

Iksitrm . 

Water 

Time I minnte^ 


to gm. 

JJO ,, 

30 « 

50c.c (40% solution^ 
10 „ 

200 gm. 

400 c.t 


l^oTE,^**^ Nckil ti ail LG. Farbcn iradr nanie for Qi? weliinit ^»criE referred to ia 
foimuljt 33 S.5J, llic aBMU a sodhun atkyl rtaphilialcnc iulphomue. 
tC*H„-^SO^L) 


The boundary of the area of action of lids edge defv^elopment has 
to be confined to a zone onty 0 015 in. wide between the uack and 
the picture^ and the oction of the tluid must be absolutely uniform 
across the zone of application with no variutiDn in the vicinity of the 
sprocket holes; and agitation as a niean^» of securing uniforraity ia 
obviously excluded [5}, 

When Agfacolof 35-mm. Negative-Positive was released for feature 
piclu^ rather prematurely in 1941 by order of Ooebbcis and his bench- 
men it was decided to use a silver sound track, and the only way of 
doing this was to restrict the silver bleach (prior to elimination of 
silver from the film) to the picture area, and the method adopted was 
to coat by means of a roller the picture area only with a bleach sufR- 
deaily viscoug to prevent its overlapping the sound track. This was 
exactly the opposite lo the Gasparcolor technique, because the process 
of colour forma (ion was also the opposite* The fotimila for this viscous 
bICEich was: 

Oxymclhyl ce1lutc3c^ Tmile Bamc Cofor- 
eollf. nJK> known ai "TyEow'* ., 60 g.m. 

ferricyAnide . 100 ^ 

Water .. .. ..1.000 cc. 

Time: 3-5 ovimiles^ 


Monopack films being, as a rule, coaled on one side of the film base 
ooly, it is obvious tliat it ia easy to print the sound track as a pure dye 
image if the whole surface of the film is permitted to pass Qirough 
all stages of the processing. The transmitiance of the Agfiicolor 
** blacky* ^ which is constituted by fuh density of colour formation 
590 







COLOUk VILM £OU^J> 


k nil timi? layers^ b viMmlly a iJart b!ub& geey- Ja good samples it h 
surprisingly neutrEl As wfl] later be remarlted^ some advautages 
are to be obtained by prlntmg a track In wbieli the modulation 

is conbned io an iina&s given by the yeilow and magenm layers only. 

In Germany it was soon realized that the existing photosurfnee 
of cssium-silver-oxygen in the standard photocells would be very 



Fill. 305,—I>Mifiity of Aef:»i;okuio4icKl trade as d fmictlofi of iv^ivclcn^i IR. CoriKii 

ilnd P. Gadkh), 



Fio- —Trmmiimioti Of Agf^cotof soaml traek ami fog ui a fimaion of wavo~ 

icngib (R, Gorbeh 4iiit K Galich). 

iQcfiicicat owing to the tnaxhtium sensitivity In the inf rained,' the 
very negion in whicli the dyes fumted in monopack prticesscs have 
high transmittance; there k therefore a narrow modulation range. 
Gorisc)] and Cdriich [25 point out that, “ If we multiply for each 
wavelength the three factors infiucncing thi: magnitude of the photo* 
electric current, that is, Blni transmission, sensitivity of the cell, and 
sound lamp mdiation, as is done in Fig. 305, we obtain the spectral 
distribution of the product of thciic cells as shown by the curves of 

591 






COLOUR CINEMATOGRAPHY 


Fig. 306^ rcprcsenltid by Llie iksignation CRi^iiim oxLdc cell. Tlu: two 
caics of nuiximiini ^fid mlnimpin densUy axe showp^ The area Jying 
beiweeri such a curve and the ab^issji corresponds to the total current 
flowing ihrough tlie photoelectric cell. The area bem^een the average 



FlO- JO^.^Rclutiq^Kip betimn iiholocelE ojxiwl jihU waveEenatli tof Agfamlor 
^nd trade ami 2 plioccTcella of a di^erent lype. The spociral Miwilmty curve* of 
the 2 photocells D* a-duced le> eqtuiJ ewryy iiijnil tuul Thu spectrid charaeleriitkA of 
ihc coaler iBmp nm alM ^howti IR, Ooriseb uud P. Cllrlidi). 



Fm. 30$.—RdJitivc srpcctmrmpnpac of c^iuPt oxkk and pbolocloctric cclh. 

(R. Gorbeb nnd F Ooilicti). 

of the two cimes and the abscissa teprcscats^ therefore, the average 
ptiotoocll currcnl, t!ic area Iselween llie two curves the phoiocdl 
modulation. For ihc cssium oxide cell we cunnot expect gCM>d 
on account of the poor rebiiofi hetween the iw'o areas (Fig, 

30T). 

The nnswer to ibis problem wax foimd in the chunicteristics of the 
corviuni-afitimany atlny culhcHlc (Fig^ 30&). 

592 










COLOUR FILM SOUN'£> fRACKfl 



in the LTitiicd Staled in 1944^ Or. A. M- Clover of R,CA- was 
approucbcd by A. Ball of Du Pont, who was chainnan of the S.P.M.E. 
Color Commiltce, to leam whether a phototube could be provided 
having the same spectral chanicLchsilcs ss the R,C*A. 929t but with 
high seusiiivny^ so that it could be substituted for the e-^ium 
phototube in existing reproducing systems without the necessity 
of providirig additional amplifier gain. The 929 phototube Itas iU 
maximum sensitivity iu the vUibk spoctrtim and has no response 


Fiel 30^,—Ptujioiabe chsiiMitctistics tJ" SI wirfinje iticd in RCA Type fiftS and S4 
Adtfffcc used fn RCA Type 929 and tF 31 IK Cl, Drew and S, W. Jahnwn). 


lo infra-red light- Independently^ the problem was presented lo Dr* 
Glover by M. H. Sweet of Ansco. A now tube with similar cathode 
surface to 929 and with identical spectral characteristic* but with gas 
multiplication of the electron current^ has been developed. This is 
designated tube IP37. The photosurFacc of iho old tube b designated 
SI and that of iht new tube S4 (Fig. 309). 

The new R.C.A* IP37 phototube fulfils the requirements of dye-iiimge 
sound track. Its maximum sensitivity is in tliejifion wavelength 
pan of the visible spectrum between 4^000 and 4^500 A. With a tungsten 
2 f 593 





1 





1 










s 

PEC 

y SI 

r UK 

su 

u c 

HAUi 

WlTlr 

i TU 

TICJ 

ft OS' 

s oa 

!TH 

F 




inn 


54 

1 

Aht 

LIOI 

IT 





1 

A. 




/ 


K 









j 





/ 


\ 

.51 








/ 

1 

; 












z 

b£: 


t 


1 






\ 






IHJ V 
& 
M 

1 ^ 


1 


\ 






\ 







J 



t 













1 



\ 












20 

L 



A 













1 



/ ' 












n 

r- 

-^ 














*500 


lOD 

•0 

00 

r 

r& 

WE 

40 

LENGTH- 

fD« 

AHG5Tf?OM5 

■0« lOt 

900 

III 

no 














































rOLDUft CIHHMAtOGAAPIlY 

filiunem sou™, the product of ihe spi\nnil ivspflnw curve oT the tube 
and a light-source operadug at L879^K, has a maximum tcspoitse at 
4^700 A. Oivmg (0 its predonimimlJy bJue semiUvityp it i$ somewhat 
more seositive to vnriation in ihc tempcnittira of the soura than the 
old pboiosurfbce 13’^ 

Tests were imrricd out by R. O. Drew aitd S. W* iohnsou [4j of 
R.C. A. on Ansco duplicating positive (Fig, 310) {see Aiisco s^tiorip page 
394). Four laboratory tots Were made^ these were—volume level, 
high frequeticy jesponse^ cross moduiuUon^ and rioise measurement. 
The usual volume level lest is to measure the output of a l^OOOnzy'cJc 
tone with full tracL modulation* Fig. 311 shows the output from dye 



Flo. 310. — D>'eduLrat:!efhtics of hivica Tyjw t3:lduptk^im|i cotor fiEm (R. <J. Drew 

And S. W. JohnsonlL 

tracks made in several waySp Tlic UOOO-cyck output from n silver 
1 facie Is taken as the rderence or wm-db- level. Koi» determination^ 
consist in ineasuring the random noise output from an unmodulated 
biased track and comparifig the reading with the l^OOQ-cyde Full 
modulation output. The yjxmodulQtcd biased track consists of two 
clear strips O-Odl in. wide with the remainder of the scanned area 
opaque. Rim noise is caujicd by any phoiographic siregnliirilics or 
grain]ness which may be present, and by scratches and specks of dirt. 
Such dirt tspocks ns appear Over the narrow clear areas produce fairly 
loud noises. Dirt in other iiieas causes noise in proportion to the light 
Ernnsmitted, so that low' densities mean noisy films. The ratio of signal 
to nojjsc, or relaiivc noise tcvel, is not greatly affecicd by some light 
594 
































COLOtJil HLM SOUKO TBACirs 


ab^iptioD in the clear aneas, lince ibis reduces iritensitJe!^ of both 
signal suiil Doisc. Low deiisitie?^ in tbc dark areasi on the otliuer hand, 
raise the absolute magnitude of the nuise and at tite some Lime reduce 
that or Lhc signa], and ore thctdbrt doubly injunoiii. 



RtraODuetD WITH BLyC TU^ - 

flEPftOOUCtD WITH P£D iCNSirrwt TUiE — 

I MCHy aiLVEfl THACrt _ 

ooecAj euLvEft ri^ACtf 


Fro, 311 .—Retnilve cnitptit of coiour trockt (R. O. Dt^cw jmi S. W. /^hnsoa frgm 


Drew and iohnsoa note that the high-rrequeiKy loss and the cross- 
modulation are the rosidl of diffusion of light within the emulsion 
which causes lhc eaposunr to spread outsifk the boundaries of the 
area where exposure is desired. This is espediilly so in the lower layers 

595 








































































































CPLOUn. C]^r£MATOG«AFiiy 

<sTihz tifnulsion (Fig. 3L2). Expo^iure by uLtra-vEoIet light ht\p^ to k^p 
the image m tfa^ surface in recording and printing the lisual silvci 
tracks: and es h known in higJwximrast negatives and positive 
prints exposed to give high densities, the spmad of exposure results 
in oulwntd shifting of the boundaries, or “ spread.” Image 
spread in a negative i& canecUed by imago spread in a print, and negative 
and positive densities are chosen wiUi this object k For this balance the 
cross-inodulation recording is a delicate testp and conditions that pve 
niinimum cross-modulation provide the best sounding prints. Satis- 
factory cross-mod alat ion h 30 db^ below signal 
Since the present motion picture Ansco slock is of the reversal 
type^ the effect of diffusion of light in the emuUion i$ to cat into the 
area which should be opaque and cause image eoniraction inatead of 
image spread. To tteulrali^ this the black area of tiie maetcr has to 



lijf/tC f/t 
Fio. 3lt 


be over-size, thus protecting a slightly larger area than that which is 
to be cleared of dye. Cross-'modulntioQ plots rcveul similar V curves 
to normal negattve-poisitivc prints^ bul the distortions on opposite 
sides of the mlnimujn jxjmt are of opposite sign. Thus^ if the ab^issar 
arc master (or nc^live) density, the branch of the curve to the right of 
Tninimuni means undersize opaque image in the case of m-ersa! prints. 

Reversal printing involves the further problem of keeping the trans¬ 
parent areas clear* and this calls for complete exposure of the etnub 
sloits. On the other hand, since nil the density obtainable is wanted 
in the dark nxeas. this part of ihe Lrack must be almost compleicty 
protected from exposure. 

Drew nnd Johri^n say that the ideal printing master Is a direct ne^ 
corded positive M}. 

As in iLIvtir prints best high-frequency response and density toler¬ 
ances for gcNcd cross-modulation eaitcedation had been obuined 
by confining the exposure os near the surracc as possible^ endeavours 
596 

















COLOUR SOUKO TltACK* 


were ETuide to accompLisli a similar rtsull b^" cle^iug ibe boifom biyer 
by a fogging exfiosui^ to ttd HghC living a two-layer {ydiow-niagmim) 
modulaiion (Fig, M3), Tlie improvement k not marked. The diffusion 
of light imder the of the black area e^ctemis farthest m the bottom 
layer, thus shading off the edges of the image; but since this takes place 
principally in the cyan-dyed layer, and the cyan dye tniftsmits the green 
and blue light to which the 1P37 tube is most senskive^ the pounce 
or absence of some of the cyan dye makes comparaiively tittle difference 
in the phototube current. Such difference as it does make tesuks 
from the fact that the cyan dye is not 100 per cent, transparent in this 
nm^. 



Ro. 31 l.^ScJuUofnctric curves Tnr lypc Nb sefliil^meifiL: ecposijre tif 2 or 
Ansco rever^ibk Type 131 dnplkiatin^ cofaur film, Dcniiticft itieaBuml m 
iTikrcH«kfbii(>mcterwith magaten liaht for the bluc-saisilive pliototube {R. Drew 
iijid S. W, JohriiKsnp /otint- So^. Afai. Pit. Xlay 


Singlo-Iaj^r trucks (j^tlow)* consisting of the top layer onSy^ were 
no good b^ause the tube is ^nsitive to green. 

White light prints give a track which is somewhat blue In irarts- 
tnittance, and tests were made whh a yellow fiUcr in the printing light* 
Thrtfe thicknesses of Ansco No, 25 filter were used for pnming three- 
layer tracks and one thickness for two-layer (Fig. 314), 

Satisfactory cross-modiilatiDn carted kttion for two-layer tracks 
printed from dtber a direct positive or n printed mailer was obtained. 
The 6^000-cycle output is only 3-5 dh. below ihc IpDCX^cycle output. 
Filter^ printing light gives cancel(atlon at lower densituss than does 
white Ugln and alightly increased density tolctunce for 30-db, oiricella- 
tion. Also, direcl-positiVC irmstcrs recorded on the fine-^gmint low-spread 

597 






























CDLOUIt ONEHATOGRAPMY 


E.fC. 1372 giw ilighdy moit 6,000^yde and greater density 

tolerance for 30-db. catjecllalion than is givieti by tnsstets recorded on 
the somewhat coarser-grained E.K. 1357. Ttic tiir&LiyeT track* give 



fw, 314,—^piKiniphDiontetric inuismtHion aims for Anseo 
No*. *3,. 34.25 (R.^O'. Drew aj>d S, W. Johnten, from Jtmm. S, 


yeilow «rija Hi ten 
May 



I-2d 

I 

i- 


AO 


e 

I 

I 

I 


40 








1- 





S0/}s/t/ 

i 

L/rA 





_ 












■ ! 

Peprffcfuced iv/£h 



1 

1 

^ i 

1 

! 1 

a^fue 

_ \ _1 

riT - 


m m 3^ 4^ ^ m 

thrxHjg/t 


315.—CuTTO showing relotton between iJgoal to nsm&e fof Waver biased 
unmodiilaUMl tradk enil number of mns thruu^ u thc 4 ifE-iype tmoieefOT (fL O. 
I>rffw nod S, W. Jefiasoirh 


about 15 db. loss b.OOO-cycb response limfi the iwo-layer tmeki. Both 
g^vc about the same KOOO-cycle resisonse. whieh h 4 db, below that of 
a silver irack4 

Fig* 215 showj* thi: coiapaniBon of a three-Ja>-^r tract used \viih the 
59a 











































COLOUR FILM SOUND TRACKS 


rotl-wn%ltlve 86® tube Jind v^iih rhe blue-sensitive 1P37. Using ihe 
tliree-Liyer imck, tbe 86S lube is itiil Ri u tiisuiivruu^g^, nut only in 
the trmsfteiTcnvy of the dyei to the infra-red light, which produces 
most of the phototube current of liie 868 lubCp but ako in the amtigc- 
ment of the la>^rs, which puts the cjpn dye la^^er at the bottom, or 
farthest from the surface where the prirLtmg light is applied, and hcrtcc 
where k gets the poorest printing eonditions. 

It *5 therefore assumed that good high-frequency response and low^ 
distortion are obtainable with dye tracks used with the !P37 photo¬ 
tubes, with levels slightly below those from silver tracks, and with 
praetically the same signabto-noise ratios. Two-layer tracks have a 
i^omewhat supetior perfomiancc as com pared with ihrec-bycr trackii. 
Good tracks can be mude from either direct posilives or printed ttiuviers, 
provided a good ncgaiivc is uvaiLible for making the master. Masters 
should have higher density nud more image spread for printing colour 
tracks than for making standard silver tracks, and the control for 
minimum distortion follows the usual cross-modulailon test practice. 

The above material is defived from the paper by K- 0_ Drew and 
S. Wp iohnson (4\ and the writer acknowled^s bis indebtcdnics^ to 
the R.C.A. Victor Divistoiip the Radio Corporation of America. 


SaanJ Traits Hf3. SfrlrfiriflJsf. 


4S7.S14 .. 




.. EjisUiian Kodak 

E.P. 4711,^75 .. 

■1 1 



l.G. 

£.P. 4S7,m .. 


. . 

^ _ 

.. T.G. 

E.H. 4B(40B 
£.P- 45J,27| 



-- 

.. Ejistmnn Kodak 

.. t.G. 

E.P. 4:92,711 




- . 

E.P, 4WiJ44 




. . LG. 





. Fasiman Kodjik 

E.P.50S.214 




. LO. 

E.P, 506,SI4 ,, 




.. LG. 

E,P. SIM56 


, , 


. Easitnan Kodak 

E,P,S1I.6I2 .. 

E.P.S20.I7J 


-- 

■■ 

.. Eastnun Kodak 

E.P. 524,114 

EJ*. SSft.WI 


-- 

- 

, Eutmoil Ko<LLk 
Techniecilnr 


MJ Om. ft. **Tht MoJtiLOliJT Fftvsess*"" Jaurn. Sflr. Vf^/, />jr, 15 It* 

1 TMy I^^31L PV'. JinJ J5, 2 ^Fcb Wl), P. 151 
f2j Gotusnii, ft., fliulOftnLicn, P.,*‘ Rt£pro4Lurikon of Cokmf rrlmSonuil fteumR'* 
JmFii. Afifr PfSr 4 J, 3 iScpt JH 4 ), f. 20 , fmm 

KiFioltirhnik^ 14 (April JM2>, pp. 42-6. 

(Jj Gioveh^ Ar A. K./* A PtHUmnhfl for f)ir Ipilli^ Sounil Track,'^ 

jQUftr. Soc. Mot Fin, 4 ^, No. S, 1946 ), p. 37 ^. 

(4^ Djuw^, ft. O., ^itd J^hinsdn, S. 'W,, p^Kimlmirv Rccmdinij Tesu with 

VarbWe-Areu Dve Tracks,*^ Jourtt. .VftiL Fic. fine., 4fi, No. 5, ^May 

im, p- mi, 

(i) Report of ihe S,.M.P,E. Commlilee on Cotor^ Joutn. Soc. \fot Fk. 

No. 6 rDw i945X p. 39^. 


599 










CHAPTER 9 


Toning 


rkfinitioD 

The Conversion of the Tnetallic silver consiiiuimg the plioiographlc 
tn>age to a coiupottniJ capable of selecrive absorplion of light luid there- 
fore more or strongly coloured. AUernaiively the 5ubsutution of 
metallic silver by a coloured compound. 

tk MetaUk Toning 

ip) The metallic silver may be converted^ for e?tiiiDple, to silver 
phide* as in sepia tomag. 

ib) The metallic silver may he substituted by a compound such as 
ferrocynnide. Ferric and uranium toning have been most 
frcquenlly employed^ the fontter giving on excellent cyan 
(femferrocyanide) and the iaiier yielding a reddish ornngc 
(uranium fCTtocyajiide), Mute^ide gives an unstable magenta, 

2. Dye Tuning 

(d) Silver iodide or uranium fertocyanide are bolh strong mordants 
for basic dyes, and thecoa vosionormetallic silver m these salts 
is a simple proofidufe,' Chromium has also been used Copper 
fctrocyanide v.^m patented by Tmube in 1916, 

3, Cote nr Development 

trt) Colour development, the oxidation products of which are in-^ 
soluble dyes which arc piwipitpted logelher with the silver 
developed image. Hxampltis are leuoo indigo and kueo 
thio indigo, 

{h} Colour Coupling by dtvdopmcni In which the oxidation products 
cotiple with a compound either present in ihc developer or 
dispersed tn ihe emulsion to form an insoluble dye. Such dyes 
are generally of the indophenol or indamine class, 

DlfTeremlal Hardening of Gelatine 

(tf) A silver image can be hardened by the action of a blctveh and 
tliereby provide a coloui^ image by the selective action of 
dyes for hardened or unhardcoed j^atme. Olher melhoda 
^ See F-f- ?47 J22 for a bps- {itpcodure for dye (ottkg (A. G- Tdlj. 

6UU 




TON I N G 


eRwt the carvctsc, namely, soften the ^latine in the neigh* 
bourhood of the silver image. 

(ft) Bichromated colloids, such as gelaUnc, con also be employed, 
diffcretituil hardening being produced by the action of light. 
Hie diflkully with this method is tlie requircmeoi for long 
exposure to ultra-violet light. 

TONING FORMUL.t 

Mctaluc Toning foa Two-Coloub PosmvF Fiun (EuuLSios-coiTEo 

ON BUnt SIDlS OP Fttw hASE> 

By Counesy of tyiiTay-Chrwtwx liiniled. London. Enylaml. 

processing Procedure 


Step 

DtrStripliott. 

JiftK 

1 

1 SVa&h fliul uirface wipe . . 

A 

z 

Sttie Tcmifts Cotiw slid) .. k> -* 


I 

Wash 


4 

Geajfnfi thiih 

i 

S 

limniumTanJDS^i^cd-Oraiigc; p . 

5 

6 

WiJh 

5 

7 

FlXaUiOn ii -- a a * - 

1 


Waih ,, .. 


9 

AjiuTiDniii TrcsitmcDt 

t 

10 

V^jish p! <_ ic p* VI «■ 

1 


Total 





AmmaniiJiTi pendptmte 

Perm:Blum ^,1 .. ** 

Water 

so am. 

- 123 .. 

2 litres 

B. 


OxaLkacHS -- «• ■■ 

Water 4- a.. 

„ I50icinn 
21hric4 

Soltrtimt C. 


Polosiifuin foricynnklc .. . t 

Watcr^- -% -V 

- > 100 5m 

Ihtrea 

Sitfutkut i>. 


AmmiMiiiun eluni .. .. .n 1. 

Water.. «* i« pv -- PI 

_ 200^^ 

2 llt«s 


Applied to one side of the filtn hy flotation laethodr For use: Take 

A' .i .. t pan 

B ,, .. i par's 

C .. .. i part 

D .. .. I j pan* 


601 





















COLOUlt riNlHATOCRAPHY 

DiluEc with equal quantity of water. Add Kydrochlofic acid. 10 c,c. 
per 500 e*c* of iont^^ Time at appiicatiJdJn, approximately 2^ tninutts. 

Ckaring llaiti {Preliminary to application of uranium toner to inirrease 
transparency) 


llydrodilork acid 
Putaniiim oxal^ic 
Water .. 


Time; I mimile. 


12 

I littt 


tmportaar. The fi/m is (Otalfy intmersed /rotit ihh 

stagit imw(ird< 

Unuiiam Tonor 



Palassiwn . . 

Lirfinluiri aJiriatc 

Hyctrot-filorie flcid feojic j ^ , 

Pctjt»iuTn fcTTicyanid^ ; 

Wnicr,. 

Tuik: 5 tniniifcs. 

** ■ ii 

12 Rin. 

J0V5 „ 

„ 

? « 

1 ifire 

Fixstiofl 



Sodium thicQufnhiUc 

Water.. _ 

i« .i"., 

■■ ■■ r ¥ 

300 am. 
t litre 

Ammonia Rinse 



Arnmoiua c^SSQ) 

Wftu:r.. .. „ 

¥•« m m 

• ¥ * f . 

1 c.e. 

1 litre 


The function of this atkaline rime t» (o modify the ferne blue to a 
me Which M closer to the complemenlary of the uraoiuin red-omnge. 
in US providing better greys. 

Remarks 

The above fu^ul® wilt give images of remarkobfe transparency. 
The surface appficatioii of the blue toner can be done in a number of 
ways, one successful metliotl being to draw the film forward horizontally 
svhUc m con tacl with u number of ^ dbimetcr glass rods, the level of the 
soluuon being kept roughly J mm. below the surface of the rods. A 
mcniOTs js forojed by capOkry attraction bunveiin the rods and no 
solution creeps through the perforaaona. The sound track is generally 
pnnt^ cm the blue side. The ferriferrocyatiide image giving raiisfactory 
reproduction with cassium-sitver-osygen photocells (red sensitive). 


602 




Ybilow Dye Toncno {CornweuL'Clyse) 
(Transparent) 


TONING 


Mstericit 

PotiUve (say Basunim Fioc Grain Type 1302). 
Processing Pnwdure 


Stip. 

D€9i‘riptkm, 

Titw. 


Development -r 

6 miWL 

2 

FtTbatior 


a 

Wash «* ft ** 

t5 

4 1 

Hanjen *- 

? - 

5 

Wash 

1 .. 

6 

Bleach -* .# 

5 „ 

7 

Dye . if . . 

1-2 

I 

MQTdnni 

*/ 

9 

Rtiue .. .. ^ 

looses. 

IQ 

Clearing i* 

1 mill. 

It 

Wash 

1 haur 

12 

Final clcariitj; i. 

2 m\m^ 

D 

Rinse 



FORMUL/E 

Derdopmeol 

Normal positive fonnuia such as D76* 
Fixation 

Sodium thiosulphate 20%, 

Hirdener 

Chrome alum, 5%, 

Bleach 

Pomsaiiim fenicTBiiJde ,... 
Potflsatum iodide 
Fdt^iuid iHloc^'anate 
Woter.. *. -* 


20 

] litre 


Bleaching should be continued until the silver image has entirely 
dlEttppcared^ leaving ma extremely faint and perfectly transparent image. 
The w^h which follows removes a slight yellow stain. The final 
appearance b fairtly pinkish grey-brown. The image should be perfectly 
transpaient against a dark background. 


603 














COLOUR CJ^EVtATOGiiAPMY 


Dyeing 

Aui^miiiia O 
Alcohol (ladi^truih , 
Waier .. 


Mordbint 

P<3ias$4tiin iodide 
FoLaisiurn fcirky^nkid 
Chromic acid 
RoE^sdum dlL-hnornuitc 
Wnier .. .. ^. 


20 ^ . 
L UtK 


70 tm. 
10 .. 

2 .. 

J 

] litre 


Tbo morffaniing should be coolinued udtiI a btijcl^ n^gitsiV4^ imags is 
cblained. 


CieoHug Bath 

PoUissium mciabJsuJphifep 5 %. 

The yellow image « now visible in its final fotm. but ihc whites are 
fully dyed with the amraminc. 


FbiJi] Clearing Bath 

Hydrochloric detd ^ ^ 

- .. „ :: ;: 


This bath is used if it j$ found that ilie whites are atill stained after the 
wash which foJlows the first clearing bath. 

On Mmpletion of all stages, if the image is still opaque tn the shadows, 
a funner tnerease in ininsparency may be obtained by re-immerston in 
the first bleach. 


VbLLOW COLOUn DEVHjOPMENT of BLUfr'TOtrEO Imace 
Processing Procedure 


Slefi, 






1 

2 

4 

5 

6 
2 
B 
9 
10 
II 


Blue TuninK .* 

CoIdui'D cvtloimictil ** 
Wflsh 

Sodlutn CarbotiAieTicalmciit 
Waib 
Blfiiich 

WfliJi 
Fixaiiufi 

fl ime (DbtOli^ Water) 


2^ ifiiiu. 

I :: 

] " 

" 

'? ii 


604 























TONtNG 


BJoe Toner 
See above. 


PORMULi^ 


Cohuir DcvelopiT (Yellow) 

SoLition A* 

Diethyl p-phc^'lencdb mine hydrochloride 
Sodiiiin tulplule (cryit.) 

Sodkim carbonate ^crysL) 

WQler-. 


O'! Jim. 

.. 

IS .. 
IOOC.C. 


Stituimtt B. 

Fu^l-ocoto-chtoniiiilidc ., 

Elhylgtycol i ^ . . 

Methyl a L-ohal 

Add B 10 A. 


0-6 gm. 
5 cx. 
5 .. 


Sodium Carbomite Tmitmeiil 


Sodiuin carbonate .* ,, KI 

Woicr.^ .. ,, „ _ ,, „ I Sire 

Blenchiiig Bath 

Pota$^um rcrric^uiidc .. .. .. 6 dgrn. 

PotAVnujn bromide ,, ^4 ,, *- lb 

Water.. ,, ,p. ,« ,. Mitre 


Pixing Batb 

Sodiimi ihloeulidialc ^ 20ClgzDi 

*p .. I litre 

Note.—I f Umc ^Its dep^il, add 016 gm, Calgon to No, 7A and 
0^5 gm. CaJgoa to No- 9. 


PHqting-out Magentn (Mnitincz) 

Water^ dUtlElcd 
Gelatine ., < * 

Antntonium oxalate 
Potassium diaxalate 
Fcnic ammonium ovitate 
PoiasiiLim bicjimmntc 
Oxalic OfM . t 
Sodium pbcksphote .* 
Polouhim earbonale 
Fomoiiiun broaiide -# 
Fcnic chloride 
Mcrouic chloride *. 
Alloxan 
Giycertne 


450 «_ 
4iiii. 
« « 
10 

IS .. 
1-5.. 

4 .. 
* .. 

i „ 

4 „ 
4 

Z\ » 
i t 00 ^ 


The LQgredients ire added or dbsalvod in iho order namod wiUi the aid 
of hoatp Suitable tixing agents are, for example^ morcutic chtonde, 
stattiue chloride, silver mtraie^ stannous chloride, etc. This rormulu 
Elves oa cxceJJimt magenta^ but ili^ decidedly Tugiiive to Ught- 


60S 















rOtOEIR CmeWATDQUAPEfY 

Colour Develop.mewt to Waoevta 

or COMPin'ED RLACK-ANI>-WHtTL 51LVP( 
PAJNTS, NAItELY^ NORMAL R£LEA^ POSITlVtS 

Material 

Nortnal positive fine-gmiR or otherwise. 


Processing Procedure 


Si^. 


t 

2 

3 

4 

5 

«f 

7 


Dfsrriptkm. 


Bksidi 

Wa^ .. „ 

Cobuj- ikv-elorinitnl 
Final bEeach 
Wosli 

I 

WsmEi 


Tlw. 


lO 

ID 

S-7 

j 

S 

3 

lO 


Bleadiiog Baib 


Pota&$Nim fcrTH^ygnide , * 

Sodiuni chlorkk 

:. :: 7 

tSfim. 
15 » 

CoJoar Dcreloper (MagejiM) 


S^htktn A. 

piclhyl P-Phcnyleocdiamliie hydrodiloriile 
SodiLun Jij|]:diite {cryiiij 

Sodhitti carbomte (cry«,> _ 

Wilier., 

■•■*■ p' *. ** 

• ^ . ^gm* 

eo ,, 

H. \5 „ 

* - t litre 

SoItlrk^fi B- 

p-Nitnc^phcnylacuEoniinlc .. 

£ihyl fltjrTOf 

Methyl alcohol , ^ '' ** 

50 vx.. 

; . so „ 

Add A to B, 


phcflylaccignitrile is /r-iutro phenjfltnelhylpyrii- 


Friul Bladi 

pHptasiium fcmoaiudc 
Poto^iuin broctiidjc - ,, 
Wfllcr,. 

Fixing Bath 

Sodiuns 

Water*. TT^., 


.. 

J lilie 


.. ♦* 200eiiu 

— 1 litre 


606 



















TONtHO 


TONERS 

FORMULA 

iMinus-filtie MetulUc Tpuct (.Transjisrefit] 

Varttulium 03ulaie»<kluiu)Ti^ 

0?ui|fc avEd. 4atujuUd «otuticn , ^ ^ , 50 

Glycscrin .. .♦ * SO „ 

Wilier IP nuikc .. .. .. t Utni 

For add I part of 5% potassium f^Tricyanidc to IIX) paro of ifie 
above solution^ and bathe l he si Iver image until it h toned^ Rk and smsh 
UiaroughJy^ 


♦Nofne* — To prepare \'anadinni oxulate ^^lutlon! 

AinmcntiiiTi mcievoniuJale orViLniuliiun pcntDxidc 
Oxalic acJd *- .. 5 0 

Water 10 make .. .. ^ 50c.i:. 

Heal and stir untE a dear blue ssoluUon is obt^ned. Tlie vamdat^ 
and vanadium pentoxide are poLsanous, 

Mimss^^rcen Metatijc Toner (I) 

Ih 

Nlckdoiu niLmte . 50 gm. 

Foiasshioi ciime .. .. .* 150 „ 

Nitric leid (to acidiTy) 

WAieftomjike .. .. Mitre 

If. 

DmKth>lj|lyDxjirK (uturaitcd xiliition tn nwthyt 
alcohol) .. lOOc.c. 

Sodium hydroxide p. p , 

WQUrlomnle *. *. .. I htre 

Bleach the silver image in a mixture of 5 parts water, 5 parts J, and 
1 part 5% soltitioD of ^tassium ferricyanide. Wsish for at Icusi )D 
min.f immerse in tl ujiti] toned, fix in an aeid fixing bath, and wash 
thorn ugldy. 


Mbms-<Treefi MetaUic Toner (2) (Creutz^SmithJ 

Sodium dJTTMthyTgtyaximc ... 

NicXcl pritn&iiLm cy anide 
WaicrtoTnake .# 

Bleacher 

Pottttthmi ferricyfliiidc ^ ^ i - 

Sodium carbcintue >.i « « 

Ammoiiiimi njtitiie ». .. -i 

Sodium chloride 

Waier to fraikc * *4 


10 

*a „ 

I Hire 


^ » 
la .. 

m 

1 litre 


aicttch ihe sUvcf iinaec in iibove roraiula, wash for at least 10 min. 
Immerse In loner until toned, fix in itdd fixing bath and wash 
thoroughly. 


607 





COLOUR ClNEMATCHJRAPHY 


MfnuvRcd Mctstlk I'ciiirr 

I 

p4:»luuiiiiii ferrivyanide 
S(>(Jiiim cirbonaic ^ p 
Arnnwnttini nitralc ^, 

SiMliuiH chfodde *, 

W'atct ID zimkc 

ir. 

PDtdAiimt bron^dc , * 

Fenii: ammafkiim] aTiuq 
A cetic iicidp i00% , T 
Water msikc 


30 gm. 

10 p* 

12 - 
10 ** 

I litre 


5~6 gn], 
„ 
n 

I Hire 


Bleach the silver image in I for at least 10 min^ immerse in LI until 
toned, fi\ in an acid bath, and v^^ash thoroti^ly,. 


Colour Dlvllopment 
(□Y&COL'PliW) 

Dyc~cotjpliij|; is likely to be used to an incrajuslng e^leitt ns a sub- 
stiiute for the older metallic toning in process based itpon the ttae of 
Eastman Duplittzed Posliivc Type 1509, cither for iw<h:o1oijt subtrac¬ 
tive prints Of as a stage in the producLlon of three-colour prims. The 
laUcr will require re-coating with emulsion for a thir d priniing or 
bichrornmed gelatine can be used as in Chimkolor (French). The 
roilowtng data is for guidance only and many variations in the formui^c 
Can be itiiroduced iviihoui midoficaiion of the fundniBental principles. 


DevelofHT 

Diolhyl ^phcayknedLajrdiie 9Ll^p^hut^ m 40 m. of 
mclliyl Alcohul ,, .. ,, 

Sodiuni sulphate fcrysuiD ,, 

^iuiti eaibomtc (crystal) p- -- .. !! 

rotaniuni hrotnidc -. , . 

Waicr lo make 


1 gm. 
10 ,, 
BO .. 

Z „ 

J hire 


CoIdut Coupler Stpck Sahitiofi 


Majpmia 

^Nbropheaylitccionirrile 
Mclhyl alcohol .. . , 

» - -- 10 sm. 

J litre 

Yeltow 

7'5'Dicht£ifiicct4[ihidc . ^ 
Mclhyl nioohol 

20 um. 

1 litre 

Cjon 

2-4 t>jclilon>4^aap|;ithat .. p 
Methyl a kfshal 

>>r K- 20 gnr. 

J jhre 


For U50 fake 

Mugfni^ Coloiu Deselckpcr.. tAOCiC. 

tJevdoiMnciii Majpenta Coupler Slock 

Solution .. ,, y 









Ydlow DUio i Dcvclopcf 

Yetiuw Oauplvr Stock SoliitkMt 

l?iD CX^ 

5 

Cycui £>iUo Developer 

Cyan Ccrupler Stock Solution 

5 „ 

Btcncb 


Fouwixifn ferrkyaniUe 

PoLtissiiim bromide .. .* 

Water lo niiiJ«;e 

60 gm, 

.. k IJne 

Fixing Bath (AJkiihie) 


Sodium «tjlp||jic 

Hypo {Sodium ihioftLilpiiiUej 

NVater to moke . ^ 

Add fonmideiyde 

40 gai. 
240 
t litre 
^, iOO ex. 


TtmcUlbJl; 




IkxcripiiMi, 


Timt. 


J 

1 

3 

4 

5 
h 


Colour D(Si^OF)lTlcnt, 65 

Wash 

ajc^lf 

Fix .. i. 



5 mlm. 

\5 .. 

5^7 . 


J M 
JO-15 ,, 
30 ,, 


N«t03* 

It may be found thaL the hue of the cytin h insoffidenlly greent&h to 
give a good acutrsil grey balance! ia this event it po&sihk to shift the 
hue tOM-ard^ green by nddition of the yellow colour coupler in small 
ottiounis until the desired hue is obiaim^. 

A tnixture of the nuigenta jutd yellow couplers wilt give a good 
two-colour red-orange and the cyau may be used ufiultcrcd or plus a 
small quantity of magenta to provide un aocurate complementary to the 
red^orun^. 

Two-colour prims of fair quality can be obiained in om layiT (on 
norma! fine-grain release positive stock) by drying the Jitm subsequent 
to the hleachmg stage and re^xposing on the remaining silver halide. 
The second exposure will require at le^i twice the light of the first 
printing. The first print must be very thoroughly washed after bleaching. 
1^5^ dried, ond re-printed m a register pin step-by-step printing maehipe 
without exposure to while light. The IDm may be safely handled in 
orange light. 


3q 


609 
















QOtOlfR ClNEMATOORAPrtY 


ALTERNATIVE FORMULA 


Dye-CouptDig 

Bkadi 


PoT^iuTu fcrrioimuk 
Sodtkim cjitK^nate 

ATniDDDtMcn njtratc .. 
Sodium chJciddc 
W[it«r lo make 


30 

10 „ 
10 

10 ,, 

I Oivfe 


Colour Developer 


Oswi /: 


p'AminodleUlyljinihae hydfDchloride ^. 
Sodiuin sulphiEe 

Sodiiim cnnwuale _ 

I’oLasdum »u]phCH!yiifutc . * 

Wuterp dkfilted, to make , h 

3 gm. 

!> * 5 ,1 

.. SO „ 

tiltns 

Cyan //, 

p^Hydrot^dfphenyl (of ^hydiDKydiplKny]'/ 
AlcohoL isopropyl 

.. loo ex; 


For iwc* iidci ] purl B to JO parts A.. The mixture does not keep. 


Magrtrtit /, 

^'Ctinino S-diethytuitkinotolucoc hydrochloride 
Sodhtrn Sulphite 

Sodhim carbotialc ” 

Siilphocyoiuic , - .» ^ ^ 

Water. duLillcdk tp moke 


Mattttin //. 

P^NitrophcnykceidniuiTq 

Acetopc 

MdoJioI 1' 


10 „ 
30 

1>5 ^ 
1 litn 


0^75 gui, 
TOex^ 
100 ,, 


For use, add 1 -5 pans B to 10 parts A. Tht mixture does not keep. 

Ytflaw L 

ifin^ 


Diethyl v’-phenytcttedminiae 
Sodiunt lulphite ., 
Sixliunt ciilxinatc 
POLnsiiiun broinidc *. 


Akohol 

Aoetoaceiic e$tcr 


y^Uwil 


iO 
5 
TO 
4^24 


50 CX- 
H) umL 


For use, add O^S part B to 10 parts A. The mixture does not keep. 


Referaicf 

ric. 29 f July t93Tt, p 45, 









CHAPTER fO 


The Processing of TwcnCeleur Prints by 

Deep-Tank HethoOs 


C ONSIDERABLE simplificaiian of ihc processing equipment re* 
qiiiied for ihe usual metallic or d;ye-tuneti two-colour print on 
dupUiized posiiivehasbecome possible by the liseof n protective 
coating which is impervious to the treating solutions and which ciin be 
temoved easily without alienng the characteristics of the treatment 
applied to the unprotected side of the fiim. This mcihod pemiils the use 
of total Unmersion in the solutions at every stage of the process and thus 
eliminates the complex devices previously employed to apply a mordant 
to one side only of the dupUtiz^ film and simiUuiy to apply in metallic 
toning, say, a solution to convert a silver image to a Prussian-blue 
image. 

A modification of the Eastman Univctsal Protective Film Lacquer, 
originally developed by R. H. Talbot, of Eastman Koduh, has been 
successfully used for this purpose and the technique of a pplication fully 
described by John G. Stott, also of Euilmiin Kodah. 

A typical two-colour process Is schematicaily set out as follows;— 



DtsttipiUtn. 


y 

Dct^kifi in .. 

SiSver on both siiiey -of 

1 

-^p aikt fuc in tiypo, . . , * 

Olm 

1 

Waili 


4 

Treui vKt sidf of h\m la fnonJpni 

1 Dyed silver iodide on 

5 

Clmih bnulplikle Kjlu tion .. , . 

one 4kLle 0/ Rim 4nd 

6 

Wash 

sMver nn oUwf side 

7 

Pyie Silver-iodide imaj^ 



Wash ur in add 



in Pimfimn'blue loliitfon 

Dyed iif%Tr iodyjie on 
one side of filiti and 
Pnitaioor-bliic €W» oUwf 
ude 


Wash . 

Slim kidide ^cma^'bd 

II 

Ric and harden 

well as silver 

12 

Wn^h 

cyimidc In 

O 

Df> .... -- .. 

Hoc muldng 



images iriuupqrcoi 


6tl 


















COLOUR CINEMATOORAPHV 


Siep A nequir&i ^pecia! apparatus and many methods bavs? been 
devised by Kelley, Brewster, Capstaff and odiers. The step is always 
difhcult and flotation^l systems involve serious dan^r uf soluUotis 
getting on to the wTong side of the film. Step 7 c^m be performed by 
total immersion as ihe dye will act only upon the mordanted silver* 
The filn> can also be toially Einniersed for Step 9 because the toning 
Solution has little or no effect upon the dye-mordanted image;. 


Mew 


Sifp, 

Dr^tripfion. 

1 Image. 

1 

Dereinp in bticV-u ricFwfiitc dcvcEoflCr . . 

1 SiJvef on bosh dies of 


Slop Euid Ibt In liypo, . 

' fiJm 

3 

Wash 

4 

■ 


5 

6 

Appi^> pr^mecihv m ww mit af/rim 

Pty . 


7 

Iodize in deep lank hy total hnitidrsion * « 

fb'cd silver iodide on 


Cb^r in bisatphiic lofaifen 

one side of ilfm ona 

9 

to 

U 

Remoi-c protective eeiuS ub 4 .. 

proc&aed iiJw imiige 

Wfish 

Dye silver iodklc iniogc ,, 

on Qppmiit skte 

12 

VViwIi or backwniii in acid 


13 

Immerse in Pru^&Iiin-bliie loninff solution 

Dyi^ silver iDdktc on one 
Eide of rtlm and Ptafr- 
iiait-blae Inui^ on 
oppo^tetnde 

t4 

Wajli „ „ ,, 1 

Silver iodJae' lemoved 

ts 

16 

17 

FU aoU tunini .. ' 

well at stlvier fern- 

Wflsil ...... ' 

cyanide in Fnmiaa- 

T>r>. , , ;; 

hltie iiru^i^c makniB 
Einji] Inui.^^ uiiii> 

_ _ 

1 

pjiftnl 


As the E^stmati lacquer nxrritioncd i^j alkali-soluble it will nemnin 
Linnffeeted by immersion in the iodide mordaiuing hath and yet be 
teTnovable in an alkaline solution W'hich does not injure the iodised 
imuge^ The lacquer must be ** bead-applied ** with a coating ihickncsi 
of 0-0002 in. One gallon will c^mi 10,000 feet of film (Fig. 316). The 
lacquer must be applied to dry film and may be Installed in the drying 
cabinet of the black-and-white stage of the process such that several 
drymg loops are avaibble £mer the application of the lacquer to dry the 
coaling properly/* 

Expcrimenls have shown ihai the lacquer may be bcix!- 4 ipplicd well 
into the perforation ;ir<^ wilhoul danger of leakage of the lacquer 
through the perforations (Fig. 317)* 

612 






















fw, ^16.- Apfinmtu^ Tof " bcud urrflaitiQn of liicqiwr to fVInir 



Tk*. 3it. — [Jjrhcih;^ E^pntoii of ^Ini iiidkLilcs arcit LQ 
wlowh l.iitiocr i( sitHiiJotl Ssy hkcuid 4i|Trlii:ut0ih 


^fbir^jq ft. 'fil2j 





Fks. 310 «:akur tSce pr 



VKt. 321, lSf» p bP.t 


l-ldriw f- 



THE FUdCE^SfNG Of TWO-CQLOUH PRINTS 

rtc>cessing ^JuUans shautd be carefully (Uieted to avoid pinholes 
arising from minute particles of dirt. 

The lacquer is removed by immetsion in a 2% solutton of f^odium 
^arbonuic for two minuEes followed by a iwo-minute wash. The 
solution should be replenished ai a rale adequate to prevertt sludge 
nccumubtiag. 

If Prussiiin-bluc toning is carried out hrst the alkafrne soluiloit of 
lacqucT-removcT will convert the ferric fcrrocyanidc to ferric hydroxide, 
which is brownish. This can be noconvcrltd by immersion in n bath of 
acid ferrocyanide, which will add two more steps including a wash to ihe 
sequence of operations. 

Obviously many altemaiives suggest ihemscivea and Lhereis no doubl 
that the lacquer resist technique offers inieresiing scope for the invention 
of new treatments^ 


Reference 

^TOTT^ John G., ^^Thc FroeessiaB of Two^jolor Fnnla f>y Pcep-Tanic MciJioUi^" 
Jtxam. Sof, Ffr, Bfg., 4^. 4 fOci. IW), tT- 


613 


CHAPTER U 


The Stereoscopic Motion Picture in Colour 


W E ^ not concerned in this treatise with the opucuf and geo- 
rtictricaJ probJems of stereoscopic projeciiont ^vhich are diffi¬ 
cult to comprehend wiibouI actual demonstmtion and would 
require many pages for adequate treatiment. B ut reference should be irinde 
to colour photography in retalion tosterooscopy because the indtision of 
colour Uj a sicrcoseopic image enormously cmplmbfics its realbtii; efTcct. 
The addition of apparcni depth, of course, constitutes a further step to¬ 
wards the achievement of au absolute illufiJon of reality- Whereas the 
coiiveiiiioii of the monochroinatic irimge is artislxcoily a cce ptable pro¬ 
viding that the depth effect is in equivalently conventional terms, the 
presence of a complete illusion of three dimensional projection so in¬ 
creases the i^nsation of tealily as to constitme a contradiettoii which 
dcJies the laws of artistic unity. £oiid human figures in grey become 
ghostly dmumic^H it follows thul the tniitd €‘xp6€ts the image to be 
oolnured as soon as it is perceived as a solid in full projection. 

It shoiild he unnecessary to state that genuine stereoscopy h only 
possible by conforming to the fundaineiita] requirement that the fight 
and left eye of the observer mmi respectively peioeive geomemcally 
dtHercat unuges parallactically dispbeed by the inter-ocular (or a 
g^t^ distance may be adopted) distance. The most elegant soluiion 
of this pmhiem so far discovered is the projection of pairs of sicrco 
images with pokri^d light 

If paired projectors are arranged to proj^t stereo pairs of images, 
the resp^livc projection leases may be equipped wiih polarizing filters 
with their polarizing planes respectively at W to each other. The 
observer requires ^ pair of viewing polnrizqtat (spectacles or goggles) 
with th^r nght and left eye pknes of polarization eorrespouding with 
I i nf projECtioD of the right and left eye images (Ftp. 318- 

j I ?j||h 

No^al diffusely reflectiag screen surfaces depolarize inddeol 
polarured light; « is therefore necessary to employ partially specular 
reflectJon and, For this purpose, aluminium paint or lartgoi r has been 
found effective. The inevimbly nurrow angle of reflection obtained with 
this type of screen is a serious disadvantage. Glass bead screens are not 
quite as good but they urertatioiiahly effident^ 

The remarkable Tecbnicolor steretwcopie film presented by ChrjTsIc^ 




the $tEklltiSt*OPiC PICTUEi IN CllLOUk 

Si ihc New York World's Fnlr in 1939^ is the liugcsl stale pubUc ex* 
hibiiion of three dimensional motion pictures so far given. The film 
hftt\ n projeclLoii Icugtfa of sontc I S minuh^ and consisted of a iitop 
motion sequence in which the parts of a Plymouth automobile march, 
dance or sail into their correct position m the chassis tp time with (Jte 
musical accompaniment. The scenario was wriltcn by J- A. Norling 
of the Loncks and Noihng Studios in New York. Norilng also did the 



FtD. Relaiivc inUEtmiiuun DfhiEhi thmu^ tapeepoasd pokrizera. 

whole of the technical control. Port of the film—the part uKing living 
models—wa^ nistde with a pair of Technicolor beam’^spliiter cameras, 
but ihe mechanical nnimauon was photogmphed with a pair of cameras 
using single film and successive sets of Red^ Green and Blue frames^ 
The negative film stock was Eastiuan Kodak, Type 1230. Lighting was 
provided by 3^200'' K. Tungsten filament lamps without filters. Maxi- 
* i.S40,000 pmooa saw thk fitni. The first was Ma^y 4^ 1939.. 

615 
















COI OUR riTfEMATOCKAPHV 

mum rwmiMlbfc volte^ vatiBlbn v^-is 1 voUs in 112, E*ch camera was 
quipped wilh a roialing filler disc wjlh an^ubr soctors of R G B 

and 1^ Blue ^ ^ sector were 2-5^ fed, 7° Green 

offilmpaihs, pn||-d<™'n mechanisms and matched 
iCTs^, the camera was eHsetitiafly two nnonal cameras on a sinule base 
The,r optical sysmms could be made to converge at any point froni 

he vild ‘iLstunce. The iater-ot'olar distance could 

be sofied and iJic focusing mounLs were interlocked (Fie. 320L 
The nperiure plates normally lay in the same plane, but the optical 

S£"fmm“,h ^ ^ compensate for the keystoning 

effect from the toeing la on the two projcctoTS, Inter-ocviar distance 







Fm, 3Jl>.-Diasramorudeahkpmi(xi;,f i^UiibtfflituMas “ PolarokL" (Cpwirsjf 

PflnJ p-7 

die'’'■'ttted from 2-5 lo 5 in. The rotmer value tvas used ihroughotil 

general be mw^r than any object in 
determines the location of the “ window " through 
rnUt* ^ uciion apparuiily lakes place, in a medium close-up the 
^vergence was eight feet from the camcni. Thus, action oocurrinc 
b^ond eight feet appeafed to be beJiind the field frame. Any objcci 
?n CmnV"fk'^' ‘Jamcra nearer than eight feet will apparently project 
[7-5 feet f'or ^ long-shot sequence ihe axes converged at 

were used and the required 
f ^ obttined at an aperture of f &'3. The focal kn^hs of 

in a focdl kn^ih of 50 mm. 

In projection two standard projectors wenr used. To allow the opera- 

\n,;™i *li«e, they were placed five feet apart and the 

opucal axes conver^ such that the images of their apertures cottidded 
M the sciwm Synchronism wus obtained with Sctiyn motors, 

616 




TH[ STEREOiCOPlC MOTIONS PJCtURE IN COLOUR 


All who were privileged to see this film were gneaUv impressed and it ii 
a great pliy that the succcssfLil achievement of genuine stereoscopy is 
unlikely to find general Jippreciaiion in commercial entertain me nt 
owing to the insuperable difficulties presented by ihe necessity of using a 
vlsuid analyser in the form of a pair of spectades^ a goggle, or a plastk 
mask of some deseripiion. The tmde has no clear idea as to how such 
ipechicles could be distrihntol to an audience, how collected after use, 
and stcfilized before re-issue. Furthermore, no producer would con- 
lempLite making a stereo version of n fdm without the certainty of wide 
distribution. So special are ihe photographic limitations tJiat it is 
unlikely tliat it would be possible to include a stereoscopic take while 
making a normal record- The existing screens are useless as they would 
depolarize the light, and for rapid changeover four projectors are 
neededp Fmally^ for adequate screen refIccEancc from a scmi-sptreular 
sLirfactr only a narrow viewing angle is available^ and for correct 
geometrical projection one cannot approach near, or recede furl her 
from, I he screen than within mther restricted limits, other^visc the 
apparent liCide of ihe object undergoes strange iransfoftnaiious cither 
appearing of gigajitk or of Lihiputian proportionsp For these and 
other reasons this method is likely to he reilficted to the home* or 
to specialized industrial and sdcntihc applications. 

For sub-standard projection it is rduUvcIy simple to du'iign simple 
beam-splitung devices, enabling the pair of sicreofic-upic images to be 
placed side by side by dividing the standard frame vertically, although 
ibe projeciion frame will in this case have its longer dimension verlicaL 
which is pictorialJy unsatisfactory ^viih most subject mat ter. 

Similarly obvious devices are such us the recording of sub-standatd 
pairv of ilic norninl proportions side by side wiihtn the nreu of the normal 
55 mm. projection frame,, but This involves a projection system identical 
to that teqtiired for iwo-coloiu additive systems, and necessitates 
considerably gr^itcr enlargement of the film image (Fig. 523 ). 

In the prcsein state of knowledge* it is absurd that inventors and their 
backers conilnue to announce ihe successful achievement of sterecHscopic 
projection systems requiring no special projection, no visual analysers* 
no special screen and so forth. Such claims can be lEnmediatcly dJs- 
uiissed as either fraudulciiT or arising from she phenomenon ihai 
upporcnlly large numbers of people arc almost entirely deficient in 
Mercoscopic perception, atnongst which deficients we must include the 
iti veil lor. Most proposals of this kind fesolvc themselves into efTeuls 
known as pscudoscopic, as for example* the conlinuous lateral dis¬ 
placement of an iniitgc^ to and fro, which conveys a sense of depth by 
the observation of parallactic movement of objects rehitive to one 
another. 

Colour photoernphy in any ease increases apparent stereoscopy by 
use of the illusion uf projccljon resulUinl from the opposition of warm 

617 


cotot^lt CtNEMviTOGilAPKY 


colours eenenilly lo cold colours, namely of rcddi^ to bltUsb colours, 
The Warm colours tend to prcycct nod the cold to recede, prtrtly owins to 
assoctation with the efiects of aerial perspective and partly owing lo the 
cbromaiic aberration of the ej'c. 

References 

" StciHMccpk Mevic in Color." Phmo Ttduiiqm (Feb, IWIJ. p, 30. 

Ritu, Jiws T„ " Tl^ Gcotnetty orSicfeoscepk Ptojcction," fawn. Amtr,, 

31(IWl>,pp. 32S.334. 

lUDGz, A, W., ’’ ,S<eitoKopk Pbotosnphy," Chapnuui 4 itd Halt Ui, Londoo 
(1935), 

C.p' ■ The De%i^opTri^t and Us* «f Stereo l?tioiogEaph> for ^(ucPtlOFittl 
Purpo^^' /04*rjf. Soc. iVfof. Pir. Ehg^ 2& (Jan. tmh P- 3r 
NoauNG, J. A./' ThnS'DimensbiiaJ MPtba Plctuira." lotan. Sx. Mot. Pic- Enr. 
(Dec, m9l pp. 612-^. 


CHAPTER n 


Mak&^up 


T here \s no mudand make-up to be obtained from odc }M and 
applied to all compkxiona for colour dncnmtogniphy. Each 
individual inusi be considered ^pjinitety. The$c arc two guiding 
factors for considerationt 

1 . The natural colouring of the iudi^ddinil which uiu^it form the ba^is 
on wbkb to work. 

2 , The type of character Lo be portrayed. 

According to these ore determined the amount of make-up and the 
actual tones of make-up us^. 


lifctructioiE^ m AppMeatioB of Make-up 

It h Important that the light under which the colour make-up h 
done b daylight, or a good artificbJ daylight. Special glasses can be 
obtained on appUcaUoTi to Dufay-Chromex for use by the make-up 
artist, which will enable him to see his work exactly a$ it will appear on 
the screen. 

Applying Cake MaktMi|i 

First clean the face with melting cream, and wipe clean with soft 
tissue. Pai on a tiny bit of skin nefreshciifif. Then moisten Oie sponge, 
squeezing out the surplus water. Rub sponge firmly over cake and 
apply to the face, beginning with the forehead. You can either wait for 
it to dry, or pat gently With soft tissue, which will hasten the drying 
process. Then brush over with a powder brush, and complete your 
make-up as usual. All areas of flesh visible lo the camera must be made 
up in accordatice with the individual make-up. It is impnruint ih^l thb 
ihould be applied directly and evenly, and then brushed over. Quantity 
of pancake used is as. required. 


Applying lining Colours 

Bciforc applying, the lining colour should be softened with creum, 
fcducijig the present consistency about SO per coal. Then apply by 
patting. Do not rub. 


619 



COLOUR ClSfEMATOGRAPHV 


Powdering 

For colour make-up neutral tints only are uswl. Po^vtiers the same 
tone as the foundation arc geiieraUj' used. The purpose of powdcrini 
IS to help the texture of the skin, ij*., to gise a matt surface, and it ha$ 
nothing to do with the colour of the skin. In some cases Jktic or no 
powder is required. for some characters a dighify greasy texture is 
preferable. Before applying the powder, be sure Ihul the make-up is 
IhoToughly dry, then, with a pouder brush, brush briskly to remove all 
surplus raate-up. The brushing helps to smooth the entire surface ama, 
and also to remove any surplus amount which would ordinarily appear 
too lieavy. Then powder by patting It oser the entire area lighlJy, using 
:iboul oitc-third of ihe usuiil iimoujit that i$ used it) couiparisoni with 
grease paint make-up. After you have powdered, agaia brush with your 
powder brush—this time ligliliy. 

Applying Kougt 

Dry rouge is the most satisTaciory for females. The dry roaee for the 
c celts IS applied with u powder brush, and is blended mj that there will 
^ no demareatioD on the edges. Grease rouge is bcttei for males. 
This should be stippled on. Use only sufTicient colour for street make¬ 
up. ntch the complexion carefuliy during shooting, since cbatiues 
may occur. 


Applying [Jp Range 

Apply the lip rouge in the usual manner, but sparingly. There should 
only be enough lip rouge colouring to cover the natural lip pigment. 
11. m applying, there is u surplus of rouge on the lips, remove by irisert- 
tng a tissue and impressing the lips on this tissue, which will absorb the 
tXHCtss quanttly. Lip gloss used sparingly is advised. This helps to keep 
the np rouge even in appearance, and prevenie caking. 


Applying llighlighi and Shadows 

Whenevtf it is necessary to use lughligbis or shadows apply it to the 
ate^ '“‘“S the base colouring. Tn other words, the highlights 

and shadows are iindcnu^th the base make-up, The highliSiti or 
shadows can be applied with a water-colour brush. The bni.di i.s first 
moistened and then rubbed into the proper colouring of cake make-op 
a^ then applied to the necessary areas. Have this ihoroughJy dry 
^ore applying the base make-up. The base make-up will not smudge 
the highlights or shadows. * 


Use of Grease Paint 

Greure paint is new u.^ as the foundation in place of pancake for 
Dufaycolor. k caa be used in certain cases for highlights, shadows, to 
620 


MAKE-UP 


cover $car5* etc.* bui ihcn only In very scniill qualities. The same 
of tones is used as in pnncakc. 

Sponges 

The scLectioo of sponges b very important. Be sur^ to select a liiw; 
grain sponge of a very soft, silky lexture^ and if possible the type 
thnt has not been bkached. 

Attiftdai Eye l^hcs 

ir re^^nired these can be used quite satisfactorily. 

C^neml Remarks 

A colour make-up is best art hour to two after application, when 
traces of noticeable airtindality di^ppear/and the natural skin texture 
of the individual comes through the make-up. The make-up has by that 
time become part of the individual* U&uaUy a make-up will k^t for the 
whole day's work. It can be re-touched and repaired as necessary. 

The abotne outline applies to straight make-ups for colour dacena- 
tography* The same principles apply to character work; the more 
natural in appearance and colour these can be made to look the 
satisfactory the result. 


Max Factor"^ Make-up for Colour F\Lm 


For Normal Compkxktits 

For Drab and Ydiow COnTpIcxioos . - i.# 

For Bronencs—Very Fair Complexioits 

Sallow or Durk CompleAkins 
For Blotidfis—Very Fair Comptescions 

For FliahHjihtA 

For Shadowing . ■ .« 

For Powderintf ., 

ForLipfl ,, 

For Cbeeki (dry rougc^ 

ForEici 


MftK 


For Nonml Compteniem^ 
Fw Very Dart COfirpIcxions 

For Fair Comotexium 
For Shadowing 
For MighltshES .. 

For Hxiitmc HlgfaliBhls. . 
For Fowderiog ,. 


No. 2lM Pancake 
No. 21L 
No. 2m 
No. 24G 
No. 2m 
No. IJ P 
No. 24K 
No. lA N(Hilral Powder 
Vmniflon and Oimtine lipstidk 
Caroline rt>tj^ 

No- 6 Eye Lining 


No. 24tt Pancake 

No. 24K-2-tL or 25flY Pancake 

N 0 . 24 G 

No.^yHV 

No. 21M 

No- 2tP 

NOi lA ^Jcutral 


621 









COLOUR CINCMATOQltAfKr 


Euzabctu Arden's Make-up for CbLouR Films 

Kmindiitjon 


AHsliiy FoundAtiOD 


Pkit-fl-CitiTic -, 


Rose Ras^hfj for blonde nf modiinn cdhmmg, Hedlieita 
for darker complcJuoTB, or to gJow to pale one. 

Rom Rachd for bk^ode oolotutnj^ or itivc ji IJ^i 
etfeeL Ughi Komiul for medium or darkcx cotn- 
pleikscA. 


Rou^e fltid Lipsfit^k 

Coldcrs are chosen to harmoniK wjlb the colour of the 
costume. 


Biirttl « 


Ciniubar Dniinii 


. ^ A bTowobh red for ihc with coatumes in brown, mniec. 
rua^ ton, olive ^recn. Good for rtdhcudi. 

Rich ftds for iLirk ctIoui^ Aho (br brnmjte coEqnrmg. 


Red Feulhcr -, 
Rpjfal -i 
Stop RiHi 
MontCAiiTUk 


Ckar. bri^t teds for me with neutral colour;, 
mutebing reds, beign, cmalo yellowa and 

A- ereenSr hut not mmivlsb blues. Good with avenjgc 
eomplexidn. 


Ponadi-W Pink ** 
Radiant Peony 
Cydanwti 
Red Cdaui . t 


BJuisl] redi—for use with ctMtumos in winoi fochsia 
.. ami cyclamen ihudea. BlEui, while, mauviiii 

blutt- ParadJae I^nk ft vtiy good with bnahl pinis 
F. atid pnsid). 


Eyeshado 

Brem dmr 
Drama 
French Grey 


M, A soft greyiih'brown cye-shado. 
Moled crecn-bfown with gold alintf 
Blue-grey. 


Bleu Vert 
Sea Blue 
MoJiichiie 
Died Oiibauj 


Th«c ey&^doa are good for lun over the whole IM 
with brighter colour over the pupiL 

□run Cluir for hnown eyes and with i makeup in 
clear rtd. 

DruiM fw any ey«s—foi a dark toned ni&ke-u{i, 

Fnencn urey specially ipx^d for a pastel mokc'^up^ and 
for gn:y or grey-hluo cyc^ fotr IbC'womim with btw or 
white hair. ' 

More colourful oye-shados for uae in combinoiion with 
abme. 

A grpcniih blue. 

Pah blue. 

Bluah green. 

Deep bhifc 




Elizabetf] Arpen's for CbLOUR C£vifmu^</. 


Eyelash Cosmeliqac 

aiitciL .. 

Brown .. 

Blue43lack. a 4 


according 

iQ ruLiintiJ nitor 

I jiff 


Powders 


SpediLl R^hei.. 

Rose Mjsi 

Spraiil Mat Fooed a t. 
Banmu 

Lysatta over Mat Fonef 


Rose Rat^iel .. 


RosctUi Bnnuc 


Light Summer Sun 


For blumlc^ ftfid for a poje 

Uwd ai a lir$t powidcr mdet for a |imk nrnte^p 
we™ with pineH 

Avm^ sklos^ 

For r£ilr+ crearoy ilimi. 

A pink toned powder to give wqmith to ■ pala aXin. 

UwHi #i A moke-iip lo wear with blue -or wine ihadei. 

A dflcpcr powder to give warmth to the aittit ^peciaUy 
to lmnKitc&. Good with eolouri foch os m^berryp 
dark fitrs^ or as a conmm with whtw &ad biHshi 
ooknirtd aimmcr costumes. 

For M stdirtflii dfecr. Used ow a Itghber powd^ it k 
c^tivc. for a make-op fot a hoiiey-blorido with 
whrtep town or ifmn^ or for e dJiikcr compksion 
with bdhiant colours. 

Dark son (on. 


623 


CHAPTER 13 


Colour Sensitometry 


W E have already made clear that ihe requirement for a 
wording material is that iti seniitivities should coitrorm to 
Visual mixture curves for the spectral regions, modulated 
respccLsdy by the three stibitaciive primaries of a given po:?iiive process 
Of laatcnul, and that in a coloured multilayer negative the colour? may 
what wc wjU providing that they an; such as can bc*‘ seen *' only by 
the duly assigned layer. 

Obviously, visual seositometiy of such a negative material cannot be 
tound^ upon neutrality eiacc such a negative could bear a record of a 
^utral wedge 111 the form of a strongly coloured image. The charac- 
tcnstics of each layer could only be c-xplored by a triple photoelectric 
system trunmed to “ sec ' the negative as the layers of the chosen 
positive pnriT Dia|{;nal are dc^tliii^d lo. 

tn fact vi&i^ sensitometry of a coloured negative material is ini^ 
practicable unless wc assume a spectraUy tioa*scloctivc neutral Rrcy 
m the negative results from the combmaiion of the three dyes em* 
bodied in Its layers and that these greys are " seen ” in precisely the 
same manner by each layer of the positive. 

The positive material is to be viewed by the humun eye and the 
problem of its wmhoiwtrj- ^ iirictJy the eonDern of the maoufiicturer 
m the case of raultilaycr materials; u hcretis in printing processes carried 
ou m the bboratory control may be by conventional densitometry as 

or by methods analogous to colorimetry for 

fJiifftychroiDe oc Gajipiircolur- 

ir iT subtracUve dyes or colouring agents do not caisi. 

If they did ejtisi then the colour density of a dye would be a ntmure of 

ht spectrum it is intended to moduLire. 

density for that regton could be determiricd by means of a liltcr irans- 
mmmp only m that region. Thus yellow would be measured with a 
narrow^ui blue tiller cyan with a red filler, and magenta with a green 

idS‘ ^tpproximate ,o the 

m.!; ™ '*«*“ transmitted by thdr 

« '‘tworptions yields gencrelly a triple humped curve. This 

miegrated iransmisston stiitmlfties an achromatic sensation at a curtain 
balance of densities for t^ three dyes chosen, but if the densities of the 
diw dyes are reduced liiieurly the integrated transmisston.s may no 






eULQUa SEfiSITOMETRV 


longer yield spectraJ diatribudons which $lunulnte gfty $£iis4ilian. In 
general, therefore, we caanol apply u^inuptlons derived froin expericace 
with the silver depixsii^ of the black-and-white photogfaphlc imagi;. 
Tlie assumption therefore Ehai the sensitotnetrie curves of three dye 
JinagEs should be coincident in order to yield ncutraliiy h faJse^ and little 
valuable mfonnatiQn can be derived from comiructing theconvciidoiia! 
cunes ttpnesenting the relation between log exposure and the corre¬ 
sponding density, {The H and D curve;} If this is done it soon becomes 
evident that a satisfactory grey scale is rendered by three ciirvc;^ which 
may depart considerably from coincidence. 

Keymer and SundholT (I) were the first to point out diui a new 
quantity was required which would yield identical values for Ute three 
subtractive prirtiaries when their combination sit certain concentrations 
yields visually itcuiraL colour, (Dependiog, of course, on the spectraJ 
distribution of energy of the light source.) They culled this qimnUty 



grauaEquivfllcnie leilfarbdichic*'" or equivalent density,"'^ This is 
the vUuaJ denrity any colour asod In u subtractive process would huv-e 
if it were neutralized by superimpQ^tion of the just required amounts 
of the other two colours sLwd in timt 
R. M. Evans (2) of Eastman Kodak has described a colour densito¬ 
meter which can be used for dctermiriing equivalent densitLes. He poinU 
out that at fir^t sight it would nppeor that equivalent density must be the 
density a colour would have if it were subtmetively combined with its 
exact compIcjnent4iry, But this i$ not the case becuu^: 

If three dyes are chosen which in a certain ratio give neutral grey* 
the visual density of this grey is greater ilian the mnximiim absorption 
density of any orte of the dyes at any w'avdength. This is due to the 
so-called * impurity " of the colours and h ilksiratcd by the arbitrarily 
drawn curves of Fig, 322 In Um Hgurc the deniaity of each dye ol 
each wavclcngib is plotted separately, Ihc density at eoich w^avclcugth 
being dehnod as in the case of silver Images. (This is possible because 
* TlKr [qrm " itrcj-yield ” is bctE« Eaglisti lutd prcrtircd tte aullior, 

2r 


625 






rououk ClJiEMATOCftAPHY 

Mie sensidviiy of the eye to dfjfi rem s^avcfengifis dws ncit cniei.) 

The dcdsity at each %v«vdcngih tot the tlirec dyes combined may then be 
obtairi^Cid by adding the three curves ut each wavelength. jii$t as ncutm! 
densities may be added. Since Ute three dyes have been chosen io give a 
neutral grey when mixcd„ the ikiint-by-poinl addiiion oT the curves gives 
nsc to a fouiih curv'c which is at essentially the same density at all 
^ii\elengths. Being the same at aJJ wavelengths, this density is the value 
thiU would be read by white light on a densitometer^ Note, however. 
ma[ isince each of tlie dyes ha.^ a definite density at eytry w^avdength, the 
final neuLral density is biglicf than any point in any of the curves. It 
the e\act physical complementary for any of the dyes were added to 
that dye, nothing would have been added to its maximum density and 
the Imal neutral densigy woidd have been less in $uch a case than in the 
cast? of the three actual dyes.'' 

Any change in the concentnition of a dye would involve a change in its 
complemcfliiiryH Accordingly visual measurements of density byrnejms 
of an arbiifury hi let ate unrelated to dye processes. 

E^hatejif Qj grey-jielil *" for each siep of a wedge in one 

of ihc constituent subtractive primaries {say, magenta) is the density 
ormed when the required aniounu of the other two colours arc super- 
trnposol on each step to yldd neulraiilv. Such densities mean that 
when equal densities of all three dyw are superimpo^sed the result is 
a neutral gney equal m density at each step to llic other two rccordmg 
clentenis m the subtractive structure. 

l-vant hji5 adapied ihc CapsiatT-Purdy dtinsi tome ter tii wJikh the 
bang measured, is plaecd hi a beam of light in series svjth a 
cneular calibrated neuira! wedge of graduated density (Fig, 323). 

By another path, light frctn the same source is brought around the 
MiTcdgc and both beams of light enter an ejicpiece in such a way ihni 
companson of the briglitnesses of the two may be made to high pre- 
cisfoii. T!)c bngliLiiKS oi the uiiimpeikd beam due lo the length of its 
path IS made less than that of the wedge beam in a known ratio. In 
other words, it requires a dertnite density of, say, 3 4 in the path of the 
light through the wedge to make it equal tlie brightness of the compari¬ 
son ^m. The density of the untijown smnpie may be determined by 
moving die wedge umii tl^ two beams maich, At this point it is known 
' t uie sum of the density of the wedge and the unknown equals 34 
and mslnimcnt may be calibrated to trad the difference between tiiis 
and the actual wedge density, or llie density of the unknown*" The 
advaniap is that the Geld brightness when the beams are matched is 
always the sditic* Plus the grey wedge, three additianaJ wedges are used 
tna^ m tlw actual ihrcc dement colours of the process. 

To mimsure a colour deposit (one of the subtraclives, say. iie/fen*) Utc 
film IS placed in beam C with all wedges at a maximum iranstnission. 
The neutral wedge is then related to equate ibe brightness of the two 
62 « 


CDLOUjt SENSITOM^TRY 


haJsies of (he field. Next each of the other two wedges (namely* the cyan 
and masente) is roUiSed uuLit (be transmiited Light appeairs grey^ The 
brightnesses of the two Imlvesi of the field are then matctied and the 
density is then lead from the noutra! wed^ scale, 

Evans notes:^* ff the colour is not a depodt ofonecoloiit record alone 
but a mixture of two or of ail the records, the diaisity may still be 





Pm. 32J,-^Sdii9nuttc arriuiBefneq i oi coKoiir UfinskiDmciet (R. M, Eveids). 


dctermiried and is of equal vahdUy to Lhai read froin a de^posit of a 
sngle colour if care is taken to add in only those colours in which the 
origina! is tlefident. Where the density correspondjng to one coloui; 
record h all that is desired* there is no need for cMibTalion of any of the 
colour wedges, U is within the capacities of the instnrment, however, to 
caJibrnic itself and when this is done it becomes possible to determine 

627 


































COLOUE CtNEMATOORAPHY 

the cquivjitcnt density of each of the colours in (my tnixtufc. This mnkes 
It possible to determine the curves for each colour record from a stogfe 
photograph of a tieutrd scale or, more convents liy, from a single 
white light in a sensitometer of die conventiotia] type,*’ 

" The calibration and upplication of theinstrumeatfor this purpose is 
carried out as follows: Arbitrary scales are attached to each of the colour 
wrages. If wedge C is to be calibrated, it is set at the first diwsion of its 
arbitruiy scale, say, ten degrees from the point at which the wedge has no 
Mlour The other two wedges art then rotated until the light passing 
through is grey, the brightness of the beam is matched to that of the 
comparison beam, and the * equivalent density * read from the neutral 



e-ff 0-0 M i-s t.g i-r ^4 
lOff OApCrSurw. 


Fm. 324.M::aTQur donjlty oirras of a Miuiitoaienfc xtrtp tR. M. Rvitmi. 


wedge is applied to the wedge being measured. In other words, each 
wedge at successive points is considered as a sample to be measured. 
Md in this way Mch ts calibrated. Any colour may now be spcdlicd in 
t^s of the equivalent densities of each of its oompoticnU. To do this 
the sample » placed in the beam as usual ; the wiedge oorrespondlng in 
colour to the predonunant coJour of ihc sample is left at zero and 
sufficient of each of the other colours is added by means of the wedges 
to give a neutral which is then baJunced with the neutral wcdjw. Tlio 
neui^l wedge now reads the equivalent density of the colour present 
in ibe groitest amount, and ihc den^tics cm ihi- 1hULr/Vi iiii<w4'm>'C 






COLOlfR SeNSITOMETRV 


If a scnsiiometcf nnp 1$ expo$c<t by whue light und the resuLticig 
steps are read, the curves uf each coJoui may be ploiicd independently. 
Fig, 324 shows eoloyr density curves read on a colour densitOTneter of 
ihc lypc Evans describes. They are chosen deliberately to e?thibit an 
unbuliinoed process. The scale appeared neutral at step A, red at step 
and green at step C, 

Obviously such #in instrument must fitted to each process^ the 
wedges being made by the process^ ;iiid the [nler-changeabUJly of 
colours at the wedge and S4unplc positions must be checked over a 
sulBcicnl rajigc before the results can be expected to yield usefal infor- 
mation in Ore conLfol tmd adjustment of the process/^ 

As M* H. Sweet (3) reminds us in di^ussing equivalent density: It 
can be readily ufidcrstood Ehat for every different combination of 
densities of the ihrefi dyes there will be a unique set of three inicgial 
density readings and a coirespondinf set of ctjulvateni density values. 
Those ramiJiar with masking processes may grasp the priudples in¬ 
volved* in fflclH the throe equatioris (all linear) which show the relarjott^ 
ship bet ween the cqtu valent density and the integral density readings are 
identical with those used in connection wtth the automatic fnnsking 
technique in aubifoctive colour procease* (4). 


References 

11 } f tr¥i4EH, Q, and SirNDMOrlt D. , “ Mey:£iiiiemejii oF the Gradition of Color 
itrtef. Ctvjfr^-Litb. Phal. Aht, $ U W)h p- 62- 
(31 Evans, R. Ia, " ACbkjf Densitometer for Suhlmcth^ Processes,” jQstrn.Soc. 
Mol Pic. Big , 31 , 1 (Aufr 193SJ, p. J 94. 

(3) Sweet, M. " Tho Dcmlutmeity of Modern Revenibk Cokr Film/* Joann, 

Soc. iWor- Plcf, Ehg., 44, N*. 6 fJufle (945), p, 419, 

(4) iCxAUS*, P. and Vahoen, L. E-, ” Thtr Semhumedy of Multilayer Cokr 

Amc/, PhiUcgfaph^^ 42, 11 tNov, 19441, p 480 

<S) Ki^cx, P. Hi, ** Color Repmdibction by Color Ptwlography/* F.^A.T final 
Repon No. 977 iMay 19471, 


629 



'ihikiitl 



















PART THREE 


Mtm m «;p»knoo prciit £q cajmir. The md^ ft oa mwcli ^ k 

do^ tifht. 


<5ocTife- 



CHAPTE/i 14 

The Phenomena of Colour Vision and the 

Haking of Films in Colour 


AFTER-I.^TAGES 

IT we a fairly hrigJil paieh of white light for a few 

second^i end then dose ihe eyes can see an image of ihe shape 
of ihc patch persisting. Such a persisting sensation is called an. 

nficrnmage.'" The evidence suppons the opinion that It has its origin 
in the ociiTm+ For instance^ if w'e expoM? one eye only to the stimulns 
we slmJJ find that an aftef-image h confined Lo that eye only. If the 
original stimulus was intense enough it will be observed that various 
changes occur in the colour of the sifwr-image, Noit we find that if 
we fiubttiH to the eyes the sarac !^Uniu1iis« but this time keep the eyes 
open and turn the ga^c to some uniform background, say of white 
or grey, we can still ice tlK after-ittia^ superimposed upon il. Since 
the colour film will oflcn present rapidly votying stimuli to the eye, 
it is well that wc should be acquaintctl with the phenomena of tdler- 
imnges, as it should tliitg prove possible to emphasize coJoui contmitSi 
and thereby to predict the aestheiic effect of cenaiti sequences. The nature 
of the after-image depends upon the quality and the IniCTijiity of the 
first stimulus^ and tipmn the quality mid the intensity of Ihe secondary 
backgrtmnd- 

After-images arc of iw'o kinds^ positive and negative. If we look 
for a few seconds at a while spot and then direct the ^ white 

sitrfece, n black spot surrounded by a halo will be seen* This is the 
fiesathr after-injage. If the original spot is coloured the after-image 
will be i^bserved to be tinged with the coniplernentary colour. Under 
other conditions^ if a brightly ill ummn ted spot h :sceii only momentiiriLy^ 
the after-image will be seen as an illuminated atca. This Is a p^siilve 
ufter-iinagc* and if the first stimuli h coloured the positive after-image 
will be similar in colour, flijth positive and negalive ailerHiniiges 
are continually present in oat normal visual field. After-miages 
persist much lunger than ts generally supposed. A pai^;h of Iff foot- 
lambcrt^ Uimiaarvix if gazed at for half a minute will leave an after-image 
which will persist for Jive seconds. 

A bright psifcb of while will leave 4n after-image which^ though at 
632 



THIt OF COLOUK ViSinN 


first white, wilJ btcr pass through a reguJar wMiuencc: of colour cluingcs. 
These changes are gertcrully in the order: while—greenish while— 
gieeo—ted—blue—grecn—red—blue, over a period of several seconda, 
(During tbU period the image \& positive, afterwards it changes to a 
negative afternmage, which may liave a halo in Iho cotnplenicniary 
colour to the colour wltich the spot assumes at any moment.) 

The effocts are ootnplicated and exhibit divers phenomena, but the 
principal fact for us to leraerabcr is that the lirst after-image of a 
colour stimulus is approximaiety compicmcniary to it, thus; 


Or)f;lnal 

Red 

Onit^fC 

Vclkw 

Grtcn 

Blue 


tllii^resen 
Pe^codic i3[Lic 
BUlc 


Fui|ite 

VclW-Oranflc, 




Thc-se after-images iuc not exactly compkiticntory to the origjfiiU 
cxcliation, aQd Lhisy are negative afier-itnagcs. If we took fixedly at a 
patch of vivid cxilour and observe the after-image upon another 
colour we find ihat the colour of the after-image appriixiijuiie,^ lo that 
coJour which would result front subiructlng the colour of the first 
stimulus from ihfit of the ^onilary background colour. Tho effect 
is somewhat like that of an absorption filler except that the after¬ 
image h often lighier ihun the backgromtd. The following elTects 
are found ITahle 3&>r 


Tabus 64 


Ifwr gau first at: 

Ami afterwards 

itpiiiic 

If hrW/ a^^peitr: 

Red .. .. . ^ 

Hcd 

Lighter and Creyef- 


Oranjse 

aitd D«ntafHijDc| 


Vdlow 

V Ivijl Cl EWFI 


Gmen 

Vi%iU Craen and more Blae 


Blue 

Vivki Rtae-Grcen 



CjiKfi:i[dvBl.ae 


1 VTolet 

Ulinamonne 


Fink 

Paler and fiiWc BHk 


While 



Bluek 

Li^ht BliK-Orecn 

Blue-Grocii .. 

Red 

Afcormiiliv SLiiunia^ cutd l«s 
Orartge 


1 

lAnd SO i}it\ 


A fxe r-iTfiages are ?jiaid to be dtie to two Firstly* to pcfsisiencc 

of the visual process after the slitntilsiiitui has been withdrtJW'ti^ and 
secondly to fatigue. The latter phehomenon h of gneat importance 
in ihe technical lermcmcai of the colour film. By prolonged exposure 

fi33 













ciNEMAToGRArnr 

to one of Ihe primary colours stutiraied. and of fair intcnsiiy* fnilguc 
can be carried so far that v^c can experience ncjirty lotal colour blindness 
lo lighi of that coloiir. After compictt: fatigue for red has been in d need» 
poppies; appear blacl:^ ve^ctniJon blmsh-green^ and coniptexion^ look 
as Uiey do when ilJuminiiied by the old type mercury vapour ii&ht. By 
the prodiKirion of n eertain amount of fatigue cunphast^ can be placed on 
certain parts of ilw picture. For example, tile appaneni vividness of 
some green costumes could be much incTcased by exposure of the eye to 
some areas of red or rose just before tJie greens are to appear, und 
vice versa, Tlic same effect is obtainuble with any other pair of ap^ 
proximaK conaplememarics. 

COLOUR FATIGLTE 

This is generaJly stated to be the cause^ of negative after-images. 
Wlmtev^r the explanation may be* psychobglcal or physiologic^^ 
or boch» whether retinal in its ori^n or cortical, imitlcrs not; we are 
concerned primarily with the fact that the sensation commences to 
alter both in inienstty and quality front ihc mornem the vision is fixed 
upon some part of the visual fietd. Tlie efTcjct is that the apparatus 
responds more and more feebly to tight impulses of ifie wovclcngth 
of tlie Etimulus, until hnalfy, tinder conditions of exiretne iniensiiy^ 
it will no longer respond at all. Wo am temporariLy blinded^ 

Abney J] exposed one eye to red of U 670,if. He then found ihiti the 
pure spectrum hues could be matched to another wavelengih Judged 
by ihc other eye (Table 65). 


TAai,E 65 CAoney) 



FaiigimlEyf 

Vnfatfguftf Eye Afaitih. 

C-63Z 


^ Red ' 

UlKtuUHOfed 


D■63} 

p > 

>. ScArin 

fr6tl .. 

Orange 

«6I0 

-. 

.. 

0-5*7 , 

Ydlow-Oruuge 

fr590 

. T 

. - Vdbw^n^uiiR 

0-S22 

Gieeo Blue-Green 

057’ 

. . 

i Vcl Id w-Y s+Cj recn 

0-300 

BEue-Giten 

13-557 


. . YclTow-Gfccn 

0-4 J2 

Blue BUi^Feen 

0-541 


. . Gnsen 

0-199 

BIue<Triecn 

0-527 

, , 

Cireeii EUtK-Orecn 

O-SOO 

0-517 

* . 

I . Blue-Green 

0-4M 

Btise Blut-Gieea 

0-442 

* I 

.. Blue fULBc^Twn 

UnthaRBcd 

0^«J2 


.. Blue 

0486 

BIub 

0474 

. * 

p. Sapphire 

0-483 

0465 


.. Bi(i*-Vidlet 

0482 


0441 

^ A 

.. Violei 

0451 

Bli^-Vialel 


634 




















THE PtlK-VOaiENA Of COLOUR VUlOS 


Dr. Burdi ( 2 ) fcund '' that af^cr fatigiJiC Tor scarlet gcianiums 
appear blacky calceoladas and sunfloweis various shades of gfoen. 
and marigolds greciL sliadod with black in Uic parts thai are omnge 
to th« noma] cyo* Purple dowers, such as candytuft and ckmatis, 
look violet, and pink roses bright sky-blue. Short exposures--^ 
few seconds to iwo or three minutes — suflke, nod the effect is transient 
passing off In about ten minutes. After fatigue for violet, violet wools 
look black, purple Oowers crimson, some blues greenish, gmii a 
richer hue. A noticeable effect is the tinging of all objects which do 
not reflect violet with that colour. Fauguing with green makes the 
landscape look like a picture painted with vermilion» uluamariue 
and white. The foliage is reddish-grey or bluiah-grey, blue flowers arc 
dirty bluCj red Elowers ore impure red, and every colour but green is 
tinged with green. Fatigue of one eye with purple and ibc other with 
green produced a very weird and exaggerated stereo^pk effect/^ 
These effects hav^ some bearing upon the colour design of sets 
in the colour film* but they must constantly be borne in mind in 
sequences. Consider the case of a momentary glimpse of an exterior 
following an mticrtorp. the prevailing hue in which, kt us say, is orange^ 
Lhen ibc eye^ being adjusted for the warm part of the spectrum, will 
see the colours of the exterior minus red, orange, and yellow.. It would 
appear much too blue—too cold and Ureloss. This effect is often 
vistbk in acLual espericuce in the street w^hen one emerges from a 
restaurant illmnmated with worm artiheia] lighting: the exterior 
looks freezingly cold* and a few moments have to elapse before the 


Table 66.—Appearancb of Spectrum Fatigued Bv Uomr 
OP ff517^ (Green) 


Spccirutn Cokfurs. 


0'65; 

Red 

Bluer and niarirer 

0-633 

Scarlet 

Redder than unfattifiicd colour 

0610 

Oratigfe 

■ |i IH l-H 

OSM 

VelkwOranec 

H 4* TT 

Pinttd] Ofnnse 

0-sn 

Yellow V -o™ 

05S7 

Ycllow^tecn 

Pole Bluc^Puik 

0M( 

Green 

Dirty Wliite 

0-527 

Greet] Btue-Gretn 

h« f. 

0-jn 

Blue-Green 

White^ stighily Blue 

0510 



O-WZ 

Blue 

" I[ 4t Bluet 

0474 

Diirkcr Blue 

Me Blu« 

04» 

BItn-Vioki 

, Puk Vkkt 

0-U( 

ViotcL 

Darlf Purpk 

0429 


Very Dark Purpie 

0-41S 

n 

A Tulhcr Pule Ptirpi^ 


635 











COLOUR CIXSMATOORAPHY 

cje can adapt Etscif to ihc new Uebt, Jrt the film jl wcuM be ncctssjiry 
to grade: [he prinilng of the exterior In tlic instEnct: referred to such 
thai it was warmer than might be correct in other conditions. The 
opposite would be true if a warm inierior followed a long exterior shot. 

Again, we shouJd huve lei take into consideration (he cfTect upon 
compkxions and flesh colour if the observer's eye had been fatigued 
by exposure for some time to a warm colour. Suppose we have bwn 
gazing at ii red door which Is suddenly opened, then the complexion 
of the person enleiin^ will seem to Ik: pale and wan. But this, unfortu¬ 
nately, is an jn:^tance in which hiile can be done, excepi perhaps to 
place an orange filLcr over one of the spotlampa iiluiniiiatijig the face. 
As the person moves through the door tlii^ light could be slowly 
rcducod in volume and by adapEaiioEi we would soon Recover our 
normal sense of flesh colour; 

The advantage of cotour-compcn$alu]g jllaminniion is doubtful, 
except in a shi^rt shot, because the eye quickly adapts itself to a new 
colour balance and futigiEe begins for the second stimulus, while ns- 
cowiy begins in response-power to the primary stimulus. li h im- 
pnaciicablc in mrange fora gradual compensation starting m the junctiori 
of two con I pasting shots. The mix perxnits n brief recovery period 
and Jic|p5 to reduce the distortion of icolour fatigue und the fafk is 
still more cfFcciivc. The period of u fade in oulour $houId be longer 
than tfi bhick-and^whltek as this wiU give the eye lime to recover its 
neutral balancCi 

SI.\RJLTA.\TLaiiS CONYHASl 

There is a reciprocal interne lion between contiguous, or nearly 
conliguous, areas in ihe vcsiiaJ field. Chevreul culled this “ slmuliane- 
ous contrast ha$ also been called spaiiiii indueiiorL"'' Not only 
does every colour elimulus aflect ihe response to the stimulus which 
follows, by means of what has been called suocc$$ive contrust, or fatigue, 
hui W'c also find that every stimulated area of the rettna has some effect 
upon the dmmcieristic response of the neighbouring areas. The 
response of th^ reiirml apparatus depends upon the state of the sur¬ 
rounding area, and tike stimulEted area itself has some effect upon 
the surround. 

When t\vo ffifferent colours are juxtaposed, they modify each olhor 
both in brighiruHis and in hoc, A patch of grey on a white hackgrourkd 
looks darker than when socn agauist a black background, 

Tfic contrast effect i$ greatest at Lhc edges. This can be scon in 
any psiLtcrn consisting of dark and Jlght stripes: ihe light stripe seems 
to be gniduatcd in lighiness. A pbotographic wedge of steps of in¬ 
creasing density exhibits this phenomenon at the juxtaposed edges of 
each step. Sepunition of ihe contrasting colours by black much reduces 
the effect, 

636 


THE FHEJtfOMEKA OF COtOUft VISION 


The most imporiani 4 ;harucierisiic fof us to remember is tluH the 
suiTOuading at^a wads to be modified in the direction of the comple- 
mcniary of the ^limulus. Th^ effect i& most nmried when one of the 
two colours is white. The white may become apparently quite a 
satumlcd huCp indeed, to uu exteui which constituies this phenomenon 
one of the major visual illusions. This eifeci hiis been used by puinters 
for centuries; Leonardo dc Vinci, for instance^ describes ti in detail. 
If Jl is desired to increase the apparent vividness of a hue such as red, 
then this may be accomplished by ptucing its complemcntEury, bluish- 
green, In juxtaposition to it. 

When a tvlutc spot is seen against a surrounding area of a pure 
hue it apjKars to be a pole colour approximntcly^ but not exactly, 
the complemcntafy of the background. Abney gives n table (Table 67) 
which describes the reciprocal modification of pairs of sot united lines. 
Another very interesting tabic of considcrabk importance to tho 
colourist ^ves the effect of the spectrum hues when contrasted with 
white: in each case it was found that the contrast white could be maiched 
by a pure hiic pliti a certain percentage of wiiiie. Tliai the contrast 
whites are not of a hue exactly compkmcniary to the spectrum 
colours is evident if rererenee h made to Table 69 of tnie comple- 
mcntarics. 

Note that, according to Abney, the contTost whitc^ U> green of 0-55Suv 
is a whitish orange of 0 610^ domLuont waveiength. This Is very 
doublTuL irs W'c should expect the conlfust white to be pinkisli^ the 
complementary of 0-558^ being a purple^ 


Table 67 (Abney) 




Juxtaposed 

Origifittt 

Fjftti of ikf Jmtaposititm, 

Red 

-■ 

Oranpc 

Red bccorrK® Ydlowci 

Orange bocomes Grcca- 
CTcy, 

t/ - a 


Gceen 

Red unaKered but brt^lcr 

Gieeti uoiiitiCired but 
briB^tcr^ 

tw - - 

»■ H 

Bftw 

Red becorw tiinn: Orange 

Btnc bo:omc4 GraM:'. 

IP -i 1- 

- 

Vklct 

Rod bcccfnfis Qnmge 

Viotei, DO mufked 
chtmee. 

Grcen 

-■ 

Omn^ 

Giwi beenmes Uiuci 

Ornnse btscomes Vet- 

lOWCT, 

rp 


Bind 

Gte^ l>KotLie$ Oihe 

Hiue hcccifnei mare 

Violet r 

1' 

Orange 

»■ 1 

VSolcl 

Ctxxn becomei YeUewer 

Vk>kt twoTiMs BJycr, 

T 1 

Hluc 

Oniii^ hccffliics Hedditr 

Blue becomes deeper. 

Vloie( 

. 4 

ViaTcl 

Oianjsc bccoTTici Grwilct 

Violet be^oines Bluer. 


Bine 

No fiuirlcd ehflnfc uik« pliuc In cliher. 


637 











rOLOUit CmEMATOGRAFSV 


Table 68 (Abney) 


C^rhur eimtreiUd Appeattmet Jaxu^sed Wlutt. 

^th Wkitt. Celovr produetfi by Cantreut, 


Hue, 

^'ave- 

Uftgrk. 

Hue. 

DtrminBni 

Wave- 

kugih. 

1 

PereenfoRe 
fl/ Wkttc, 





(t*V 


RtJ ^ ^ * ” { 

0672 



om 

0034 


0636 



04 S 4 

0037 

Oniricc f 

0612 

Blue RA R,. , 


04 S 5 

0066 


05 % 



049 ^ 

0070 

YcHsjw ., ., I 

0 ' 5%5 



(HSJ 

OlOO 


i 0569 



0471 

0120 

^ [ 

I 0551 

Qfajipc 


0610 

0 - 1*5 


0541 



05 n 

0-165 

( 

0517 

YcWow-Orange 


0392 

0-170 

i 

0499 



om 

0-375 

Blue p- J 

om 

1 

1 ' 

05 t 5 

0200 

w , ' 

, 0466 

Ydlow ** _ J 

1 

0393 

1 0-250 

Violet * * , *, 

AW vk^kt 

! «, 

om 

1 04 t 0 


Table 69,—List of Cojaplementary Wavelengths for 
iLLirMlNANT C 


IfVlT^ 

lens^h 

ntfnlarjr 

liWii). 

Wavih ' 

kix^th 

CoAfpk^ 

fmfaaeyt 

FFVnw- 
1 higlh 
(.Mil) 

mern&ry 

(Alwli 

m 

5570 

489 

6009 

590 

4859 

400 

1 6<i7-l 

490 

6070 

59J 

486-3 

420 

5A7’3 

m 

6168 

592 

4K6’7 

430 

367-5 

492 

6401 

593 

487-0 

440 

3<S-t> 



594 

487-3 

450 

36S-!» 

368 

4391 

595 

487-6 

435 

369-6 

369 

450-7 

m 

487-9 

460 

370^4 

370 

451^ 

597 

488-1 

465 

571-3 

371 

461 1 

598 

488-4 

470 

573-1 

572 

46^8 

599 

4856 

471 

573-6 

573 

469^7 

600 

485-8 

472 

574-0 

374 

471-9 

605 

489'7 

47J 

374-5 

575 

473-8 

610 

4904 

474 

575-1 

576 

475-4 

6S5 

490^9 

473 

3757 

377 

476-7 

620 

491'2 

476 

57M 

578 

478 0 

625 

491-5 

477 

377 2 

579 

4794^ 

630 

491-7 

478 

5780 

580 

480^> 

640 

4920 

479 

5T9-0 

581 

1 480^3 

650 

492-0 

480 

580-0 

582 

481-6 1 

660 

492-2 

481 

381*2 

583 

4823 

670 

492-3 

482 

3*2-6 

584 

4829 

680 

4914 

4B3 

384*1 

585 

4835 

69Q 

4914 

484 

385-* 

586 

464 1 

700 

4924 

493 

3*7-8 

587 

484 6 

780 

4924 

4M 

3»2 

588 

435 1 



487 

5M-0 

589 

4855 



488 

5965 



. 



638 
































THE FlLENOM£l^A Of COLOUR 

TI)e future art dinxcor^ of tho coloiir film wiLl have to bear in mind 
the following fagts: 

1. The contrast cfTcct k not unifoiii] over tlig whole surface^ hut 
is most marked at Ihe odge^. 

2. Actual contigtuiy of ihe reacting surfaces is noi csscniia] for the 
contrast effect to become apparent. 

3* The e^ent of the background^ as well aa its tightness and hue^ 
modifies the saturation and |ightn<;ss of the contrast colour. 

4. A narrow black line between [he fields dimitushes the contrast. 

5. With black or white grounds the contras! increases with the 
saturation of the coloured held 

6. The induced colour sensation is not the precise complctncntar^ 
of the inducing. 

References 

(J> Abney, Sib (t^JJL p^ 

f2> Besor, Pk,. Pkff, Tnntx. ^y. Joe. Lettukitt, B. J91. I flS^ru J*Air. fluy. Sw.. 
216 ii90&l 

(3> Pamqm* J. llEKfiERT^ An Infrmiiicifm fo iftr Stoify OtfMir VbduJi {l9t5L 
PP^ 11^ 

( 4 > SoiDEH. It. H., ” m Ibe Spiectnil CampbwntariRW*' Jburii. Opt 

JtfT. /tffrer. a/td Jk.J.L, Nqi |2^ p, 1121. 

<5) liABor, A- C, fiamBrnk c/ Ci^tifrimetry^ TecliiiDlO£y Ptcia. Cunbriefie. Mavs,. 
U.S.A., 1936, 

[iJfo " Note m itte lletailpn between mo Fre^ttencics of Cornnkmentary 
Hucs/^ ftwin G. Pricat. Jown. Opt. Jbt Anmr. md itS.L^ 4+ No. 5, p. 401 


m 


COLOUft CINEMATOGHAHI^ 




< 


(/: 


t 


£ 

I 


I 






n 

1.1 

i5j|i^ 

K iJs 
X s 


a H 

E- 

ri 

B 

o- 


g g 

« g”2,= g ^ 

- ° 

.r*t >1. -►i'™ Di, X 

l??is^lli| 



S I E 

^ i* 'S 


JJ - g^j 

E 

S ’ 3^ V I i ^ 




Sillsi 

ill a i 
ls,£ 

= S = S £3-?e:j 


+++ 


sirs’ll It £f = 

tA < 



=J 

w 


s. 


If 


o 

3 


B g 
1 B 
S ^ 


S-C. >■; 

mS Sfi 

^1 

?g 


3fi X 
S 3 
E JE 

oS 

p> 


-E ^ 

S-C 

11 

^1- 

= 1.1 

lll 

l£l 

lit 


.le 

in 

■^1 

S3 

ii 


I 


of 5 

1' 


s 


!£ 

> 


r 


640 













TKE PnRXOMENA Of COLOUk VISION 



u 

a 

a 


s 


tAl 


2s 









COtl^UR. nNILMATOGRAJ-lfV 














THE PHEHOKEKA OF COLOUR ViTiON 



643 







CHARTER 


Colour Harmony 


W HATEVER principles of cofour Iiamsony njay have boea 
ilcfincd in the past* the theories of wliers from Chevreul 
to Ostwald can have ojily IjmiEcd applEoaiioix to a vtsmil 
an ot coniiDumjs tuorion. The relative area oc^'upicd by each com* 
poDCJit lone of a comhinjition (c.g.* by each note of a chord) in the 
case of a tmtic art is af tJio utmost jntportanco, in the motion piaure 
a relationship wbkh might be theoretically admitsble at one moinenE 
tiijght be destroyed, if It did noi become iictivcly disagreeable at 
another moreent immediately after* owing to a considetabk teadjiiit- 
mtn^ of the rcLaifve areas occupied by the consiiiuent lonea u result 
of a movenoeni of masses relative to each Other. This a rather 
acndeimc wny of saying ilsat a dress mighi he very pretty seen against 
a certain pan of a background if fixed there as in a paintings but thnt 
its colour might clash with some other pan of the background If its 
w'carcr mov'ed in front of it* although the tone of this second part of 
the background Wits j^n of an originai hurmony in the firsi position. 

The most stimulaling *" laws ” which have so fm been proposed 
concerning the arrti of individiial tones in a composition are thus 
formnluted: 

1. Tlic area of n given cpIouT should be inversely proponionaj 
to the Saturn tie n of the colour* so that itiff greater the degree 
of saturation the smaller the area. 

2, The area of a gittn colour with relation to its hue should be such 
that the relative area will be greater broadly proportional 
to the diminution of the wavelength. (Less for the long wave- 
knglh end of tJte spectra and mere for the short wave end.) 
3p The area of a colour should be inversely proporiiojial to fi& 
lightness^ so that the greater the lightiiess the smaller should 
be the area. 

Since all ihiw variables arc often present in coinbinations of any 
degree of cotnpkxiiyp it may be said that the first law is the most im> 
portant emc to conform to, and that it provides the goveniing factor. 
It follows tliat tf satutaied colours are used as a means of creating 
centres of imercat upon which the visual attention Is focused back- 
641 




roLtlUR llAJtMfiiXY 


units sboutd be jeiativcty desaiuraicd, suth ilint ihe percetitsgc- 
of ihe dilution with white shouLd be iippTosimatdy proportionai lo 
the area of liu: background as tompHired with the tontrastin]^ cemte 
of itUeiest. 

Some writers on colour hunnony have based their theory of hamouy 
upon the propoi^iLion tJiai die respective clotnenis of n combinfluon 
should consiitute ncutnil grey if their sttmiili were addiiively mixed. 
Thi> necessitates the asaimnpiion that the areas should be so ndjtistcd 
ihai fieutmliiy b the yuicorne of their addition. Howevef^, the history 
of colour harmony gives little if any support for this dicory^ for in 
the vast majority of acknowledged cjtoiuplcs of good colour the har¬ 
monies are of the type in which one tone is predoininani, or else there 
Is a general tendency to warm the long wave end of the spectrum) 
colour. If we could make a ircxnendous patchwork quilt of cAxiy 
picture in tic National Gallery, and then by some means addiiivcly 
niLt all the separate patches, the combined tone w ould be a warm 
grey, but by no means would it compri sc a neutral grey. Tlicir canvases 
curiously Lacking in iheoolottrs of the short wave end of the spectrum. 
WT might be kd to suppose that oiosl of the great painter^ were la 
the two-colour stage of visual evolution. It U hard to account for the 
almost total absence of blue-vioki and violet in the w-orks of so maiiiy 
anists by an aversion lo these colours. As for Rembmudh there h 
not much doubt but Lhat he was e ithe r 3 dicbrortiaL or perhaps even a 
rooDCK^hromal, Lhat rurtst of all the types of colour deficiency, it being 
improbable that he could perceive blue all: nor much green cither, 
judging by the absence of this colour from his paintings. 

Colour harmony is, when it becomes sigmRcan^ a product of 
creative rmaginatipn; and as such it is not subject to maihcmailcid 
analysis. The colour ImrmonLes of a great painter seem to possess 
the power of inducing responses from chords^ so to sptak* vvludi lie 
deep within our natures^ and w hsdi arc but rarely stiri^. How docs 
this occur? Presumably deep-lying enUumt assuciaticjii responae- 
chaias are set in motion. By wliM process of education does one learn 10 
respond cmoiionally to the colouring of sunsets, and in the colouring 
of paintings to the light that never wais t>n land or sen'? It is all very 
mysterious I 

From a sekatHk: pchii of vkw^ it ts possible lo lay down certain 
generalization:s which have a gutdaucc value. For instance, it is true 
that one of ihc principal pleasures to be derived from colour dcpetids 
upon the balances to be cfTectcd between dissimilar colour sensatioiis. 
As soon Uii two different colour areas arc ju^ttaposed we bring about 
the phenomenon of contrast. The two f»en$atiotu may 5 eem eiibcr to 
CO fifl let wit h each other or more or less lo balitnce each other. We kn 0 w 
that the two seusaiiun!) can differ in three w^nys; in huc^ in maturations 
ip lighmes:^. It seems ifiat one of r/re tandithtt.i 0/ baiam:^^ unii r/uve- 

645 


CDLOtr^ CISEMATOCRiLPliV 


(jf fif ihitt ih€ fiwi jfiiim// j^/iyw/rf fon'tr ^ifual siioiuhi^ 

lalve, fmt ifte nujxlmwn of diffcrrnc^. The •Bcnsationit of hue are psycho- 
logically a closed series, aod ihe chromuiiclly diagram in its various 
forms.asa pfi^ntation of the facts dfcdoitrvtsio a, is entirely unsuitable 
an 3T1 expression of the psychological aspect of colour vision. Writers 
like Osmid have choseij a ciicuLir ligwre for tlie bue series, and on 
such a circular diagram those ttoes ^viii possess mtuimum difTcrenLx* 
which lie at opposite points on the circujnTercncc. Most of the writers 
on colour Jiatmoii)- have used the sphericoJ colour solid as the basis 
of their sysietns. Such u circular series of hues is easily divided into 
equal divisio^ of scnsalioii difference, and by dividing the colour 
Circle into various points an equal number of degrees apart it is possible 
to form combinations of two, three, and four, or more, tones. Such 
mmbiuatLOns have been termed dyads, iriadv, and so on. Many of 
Umsa mtervals, nod chords, to bonou the tenninology of music, 
are well-recognized haimonks In the hislon> of die graphic arts 
iTables 70-74). 

Parry Moon and D, E. Spencer have formulnted a geometrical 
colour t^tniction as a basis for Uie study of colour harmony. TheiT 
foundation consists of a re-preseouition of the CJ.E, dutu <0,S-A. 
^(Kitbed diita) of ifac Munsel) colours which they call the ■* Metric 
Colorapce." This is a cylindrical space (known as m space) k which 
umi distance corrciponds to one Mansell chroniu step. They note 
tML the Munscll hues are less eqiiuJly spaced than the value of 

c TOma slops. Thus Muttsell G and DC are too dose together, as are 
K and RP. 

down that colour hartnony was ntt outcome of 
orderly (or measured) ornuieeniem, Thus iinv orderly spacings in the 
colour solid Bhould provide u harmony. Is colour harmony a bmncb of 
georuelty therefore? Jn order to discover the value of this COiuxpl cute 
must first have a metric colour space, and thlt must represent equal 
Mnsauon differences by equal distances for aU three co-ordinates— 
Illness, hue, and saturation lvalue, iitie, and chroma). Constant visual 
adapiatioii lo a neutral stimulus corresponding to Munscll value 5 
was assumed. Tlie three axes (see Fig. 325) are designated «*, 
ny CO otir is indicated by a point P . Lightness diiTcrences ere measured 
in !i dJi^Uon paralicl to the w* axis. Hue is expressed in terms of angles 
about ine axis. Jn cylindrical co-nrdinates fr, r) 

W ’ 1 ctrs oM 
W>« X Ml 
' Min M ^t 

Any coloured light (C.f.E.) can be specified by iX, Y. 2). These co¬ 
ordinates can be transformed to (r, &. j> and the colour can he repre- 
scnitd by a point in space. Ustutlly liie Muiisell notation isemployed. 
(> 4 f> 


rOUMlK klAMMCiMY 

To « close upproximiUion, ^ is rDund lo be direcily proponiortal lo 
Mwnsel! yuhii!, the unit of i^mlue being approxinuiUrly eight timw 
ihe tmit distance measured in ihe r direction. Munsell chr&im b 
mc^ured radially and b approstimaiely ^^rujil to r. correspo^ 
10 the angle &, the len principal htas of the Munsoll syilcm being 
arranged at approximately equal angles sboul Uie r axis. The curr^ 
spondence between ^ space and the Munscll system is not perfect* 

The authors build their theory upon two postulates. 



Fiu. ^The Metrfc Colorapacc ( Parry Mncm urhJ D. E_ Spcflon-i 

Pleasing combinations are obiained when: 

(1) the interval between arty two colours b unambiguous, ami when 

(2) colours arc w chosen thm the fiomis representing than in a 
space ait rthited in a simple geomclnc manner^ 

Varioui possible harTnonics arc classified and the combinwiions 
found it) be by no means equally pleasing- In all the expeiimants the 
anaais were kept equal. Such eftbris to explore the metricsJ l^sji of 
colour liarmony are of freal interests but much more work will have 
to be done before we a EKyehaphysical Svysiem with a u nc-to-onfi 
corres^ndenoe with ihc psychological phenomena of colour atsthclics. 


647 


















COLOUR CINEMATOORAPHV 


FOR THE CONVENIENCE OF STUDENTS A UST IS HERE 
APPENDED OF WELL-KNOWN DYADS AND TRIADS 


Tabu: 70 


DYADS 


Rod 

Red-Ora nirc 
Onjugc 

YeEkw-OriLCkge 
Ydiow _ 
Red 

RciJ-Omiigc 

Onuigs) 

Blue 

Biue^VJolct 
VioUct , * 
Hed*Vlolet 



etw: 

Bliic-VSalet 

Violel 

Yelio^Y*Graen 

Green 

Blue-Green 

YollDw^-Of^Lniir 

Yellow 

YcLtow-Grecn 

Gfwn 


THE FOLLOWING DYADS ARE LESS PLEASANT BUT 
ARE FREQUENTLY EMPLOYED WHEN A RATHER 
VITAL EFFECT IS DESIRED 


Tabi£ 71 

Rcd-Onii 3 |u , , 

Orange ,, 

YcUow-Onmee . . 

VeMow 

Ycnow-Grtctr 

Grwn , p , ^ 

Bloe-Greett 
Wwc 

Brac-Viotet 
Violet .. 

Ked-Vtola 



., VeH&w 
A. YelltTw^reoi 
.. Crttfk 
**, Blue^Grecfi 
Blue 

*- Blufr-Vmlflf 
.. Violet 
.. Rod-Viojk^ 

#p Red 
,, RDd-Oqq^§e 
Orange 

■» Ycliow^anie 


THESE DYADS ARE SADDER AND RICHER 


Tadi^ 72 


fh «5 


RkI 

««K)ninse 

Orange 

Ydiow-Ontiise 

Ydfow 

Ycllow-Gmn 

Great .* 

Bliio-GnecQ 

Blue .. 

3Fue-Vio£et 

Yiokl 

kci$^\\ 6 ki 


YettowrOrangr 

Ydlow 

YenowAOreen 

Green 

Blue-Green 

BJoe 

Blue-Viokl 

VkHet 

ftcd*Vlokt 

lied 

R^-Orange 



















rot.ouil uAKMOttr 


THESE TRIADS ARE CHEERRJl AND NOT UNUK.E THE 
MAJOR CHORDS OF MUSIC IN THEIR EMOTIONAL 
EFFECT 

Table 73 


RkJ 

YcUcpw 

SllK 

Yeltow 

VKue 

Red 

Bluc-Gmti 

R^'Viokt 

YGlIi^w-GranffE 

Ked-Onm^e 

Yeltow-Crecn 

Bluc-Vlelci 

Ydlow^rccn 

BJiiC'Violei 

Red'Or^^ 

mm 

Reii 

Yctiow 

Or&uite 

Giecn 

Viekrt 

Cmn 

Vwtoi 

Omnge 

Bh^Vlokt 

Rod-Gnanse 

YclIftW-CStwi 


BJue-Gn«i 

Red-Vblet 

U\iK<vmn 

Red-Viokl 

Yellow-Omr^ 

Violet 

OraiiBe 

Qnsen 

THE TRIADS 

JN THIS TA&LE ARE 

somewhat 

SOLEMN AND RICHER IN TEXTURE THAN THI 
SERIES 

TaatE 74 

Red 

Yeihjw 

Blue 

Ydlow-Cmnsc 

BTuc^'^men 

Red-Vtolei 


Red'Viokt 

YelloW'Onnac 

Red^rnnee 

VeUonr-GTOo 

Blw^^Vlolel 

Yellcw 

Bhv? 

Red 

Blue 

Red 

Yeltow 

Orsnet 

Omn 

Violel 

Ydlow^rcoA 

flIw-Violet 

Red4)nutgi: 

Blue-ViDki 

RedOmpgc 

YetloW'CiiWD 

Yellaw-OraciBe 

BliUhCiiten 

Red-Vlofct 

Green 

Vicilei 

Oroaae 

Violet 

CkTAiicc 

Grecii 


Western music evolved from the aural recognition of a simple 
harmonic senes of vibraioi>f ratios from which with alight adjusimenis 
we oan ailDpt various n^ueocy orders for scales; Some of the scales 
atie generated by simple frnctionat division of a vibrating string or of 
the column of air in a tube. Whot is rigidly fixed for the musician’a 
ear is above all the tm^rval, or frequency ratio. 

Successive intervals in u tegular order form scales^ and combinations 
of intervals form chords the elements of which possess vibrato^ 
coincidence, or otherwise, Ihiu providing aural stimuli which arc disr 
criminaied a$ mote or less pleasant. To-day probably significance b, 
given priority over pleasantoiss but students must still study “ har¬ 
mony.” Vibratory ratios do not permit of doubt, and the degree of 

649 


COLOUR 


euphony, cnjM:ord 4 ncc* or discordiince, is noi held ^ he d mmicr of 
opinion. In respect of its maiherhaticalJy df fined symbots the musicDK 
lHiiE«agc is unique. Colour combinations have never been derived from 
imervais having a physical basis subject to such mathemaliciil orders. 

For centuries colours have been used in various combinations in the 
inntrnienible manifestations of visual art and countless theories have 
been advanced in an attempt to con si met systems the application of 
which would guarantee colouring equal to that of the universally 
acknowledged tnasterpiet'cs, The failure of such theories when applied 
led many to the concluston that the crafUmcn of the great epochs w'crc 
initialed into some occult secret. Such analysis as has so far been made 
with the aid of modem physical measuring iiisirumenis indicates that no 
common rules can be discovered to explain the coloration of works as 
diverse as the windows of Oartres. a Persian rug, or a Chinese vase 
of one of the best periods. Did these craftsmen obey rales? Was anv 
system ever taught? 

The correct reply is probably that apprentices w'crc taught trudi- 
tioriid coloiiririE applied to the traditional patterns associated with 
specialized techniques. Innovations were ntiempted from time to lime 
Its I ho result of experimejitation by an exceptionally tmaginaiive worker 
and the ins'cntions which met with approval were added to the tradition. 
Id this rnanner stylEsiic whools evolved. Such styles were localized 
geographiciUly and evolution contintied often over lung periods of time. 
As the tischuiquc of a given craft incroatod in complexity with an 
mvoriabic movement towards more elaboration so the colouring 
exhibiis a parallel growth—simple oppositions of niarked coninisl ai 
the primitive stage — subtle and multiple combinaliotis at the height of 
flt the end ovet-eluboration, over'Cmphasis, over-richness, 
vulgarity, ostentation and universal extravagance. We may represent 
the cycle thtes: 


TABti! 75 



* F^rfy. 


1 

| 

Laf^. 



Simple 

Th[ce or 

CtHTipiTtmil 


Simpfer 

dUftrrrulkc. 

cantniitte4 

mme itiG« 

ipxiupii or 

ctirlwoite 

Inii over*- 

I.Ott I 

hue irtlcrn 


maay hue* 

conihinfi- 

cfrLiih&si^nd 
ana viiiffiir 

»3Licni[iort. 1 

uf 

or^iBgli 

aiiil cover¬ 

Efom ev 

Sober Kii ' 

mnlium 

sutttfLiCEun. 

ing a wide 

hi biting 

in eifecl. 

lirofif 

fiilLii'aliw. 

v%<>n)uA 

nuiec of 

ulamdl 


1 

EffpCI# c\f 

ami 

saxujiiEkiii 

riclimi. 

laturLiioai 


incrcMing 

jwwetful 

hui com- 
trimd with 
ufnioAl 
iubtleiy- 
L£l^Ol^d 3nrt, 
illKtii^iisbcd 

TIm pcrltMi 
of rru^E- 
fkeiide 

1 

Nit hue 

conlru£i4 

sfiMyxniuiil 

” bbting^^ 


m 





















C 0 1. f f A K M OK Y 


Whatever Islw ntighi be deduced ft cm a scientific anidysLa of Uie 
Imniciiseliislory afuppJJedcolaui: wDlrdale uj ^intte patterns, for colour 
rdatioiislup!^ have i^en conceived by the onist in the past lyiibiaut 
reference to any extension in time- The mod on picture in colour 
repn^sents the first opportunity for the creation of colour compositions 
in which the combinaiions anc subject to continuous chtiiige, the 
emotional signifirance being built up in $ei(uendaL form. sO exploiting 
I he basic principles of musk and the drama. 

The admonition frciiucndy addressed to Cinnerwinen and others 
concenied with the pkiufbl niipcct of colour fdms that ihey shoidd 
make it il^tdr business lo ^ludy mstitcrpicces of painting ts misconceived. 
The works of die masters, modern or ancient, matiifesi such a lnuiie&- 
diJLJs nmge of expressive means* and so vast an accumulation of styles^ 
that Uic student wouid be \ch confused Lind distracied and quite unabk 
to decide what style to emulate, what effocis to learn to reproduce, or 
whnl hiirmonics to adopt. No common denominator can be discerned 
to cov^r the practice of colouiistij as far apart as Veronese; TinlorcttOi 
Van Gogh and Demin, /Esthetic principles derived from the coniem- 
pludon of sisiik worki^ of art will in general be misleading ^iid subject 
to grave errors when applied to expresihe medin in which the fomr 
(vii.^form in the musical or literacy sense) is revealed in i lapse of time. 
Hence* pictorial composition in the ckask sertse is no guide to the 
unfoLdment of w idea by form or forms in motion. WJuU mtiy be good 
stalk com position at one momeal may be bud u moment later* so that 
the motion picture is not to be conceived os a successful series of 
picturcj^ but rather as an unfoldment of an idea as expressed in terms of 
visual motto ttn 

If thh$ interpretation be conceded* in w^hat direction are we to took 
for guwlance? Surely, to the ballet and to some extent to the principles 
of rhythm and g?^stiirc w hich belong properly m dramatic pnc^wmiution. 
But in both these art forms the myin stresses slmpe and of masx 
in the background liuve been fixed; accordingly U foUuw'h from this 
limitation that a large atoa of the vkuul field has interfered with the 
condition of muty* which states ihai if one part all pam must 

eventually move. The holding immovable of a background ihroughout 
a poem of movemont k to demund of ihe muskal composer that he 
should hold fast to ode ba$s note until the work be eompleled. If the 
background of human rhythmic movemeni can be caused w take its 
own part in the action^ all its elomems to oontioual fluctuation^ a step 
would have been Uikcn towards a visual arl form approaching the 
perfeci sesthctic of music. The reaUzation of this concept can most 
easily be gained by exploiting the inherent capadiies of the motion 
piclurc technique. The contribution of mobile colour composition tt> 
this end will be of prime impartanct Some hintv of future possihiliriev 
have ill this field been given us by Disney. 


651 


CO 1.01] R ClKBMATOfiR AFH Y 

Tilt retinitl field hcing an urta^ titc ^iniull;incous peruopUtPii i>r 
different colours implies division of Uae ancEii Divkioii genemlly resultii 
in boundaries, licnce shapes and contours, which must bear lo one 
another proporUoiu or caiiDsofuTeii, and it k tJte profound mfluence of 
tliis aspect of proportion which so often been oserluoked or wilfully 
disregarded. 

For let there be no mistake^ eUjuusi any conedvabic eombinuijon of 
colours may be made pleasant^ or duly cJCpressive, providing ilie ureas 
alloited Lo the respective tones be rightly adjusted. 

The Commonest fallacy is to discuss tlie harmony of colours as if 
they were entities alwnyis destined to occupy equal areas« as In a pattern 
of Strips equal in widthn 

i.4iaother fallacy easily exposed is implicit in the tbsoiy that when 
unequal areas are allotted to a colleeljoa of various colours^ providing 
tlw intognited light of these (checked by angular ^don in a rotating 
di.^c) is a neutral grey, the condition of harmony will be rticL li would 
not be difTicuit to show that few\ if any, of the acknowledged master¬ 
pieces of dcconicivc art wutild meet this ifisL 

Within ihc last few years, the systematic classincaiions of Oitwald 
atid Munsell have supplied a rationat basis for theories based upon 
measured iniervalsi the rooi idea being to trace paths* cun’cd or other* 
wise, m a three dimensionat colour structure and to divide these patlis 
into symmetrically spaced intervals, jind with further elabotntioii to 
oppose fl series of spaced intervals complementary there to, or to con¬ 
trast them with a conesponding group $ituotcd on a path related to the 
first path by some simple angle. Suidi paths Join the point of a more or 
less saturated hue lying on the surface of the colour solid with -i point 
on the neutral axis. While this tbcoiy cannot be held to e]<plain existing 
worts of art, it is far the cnost cumulating proposal so far advanced and 
upon its further development might w ell be founded [he scalcft, intervals 
and chords which are sure to con&tiLu[c! ilic grammar of a future colour 
language. 

For infornmtion concerning the older theories the reader is refetted 
to the vlassie works on the subject, liucb as those of Chevrtut Rood* 
Rosenstiehl. 

Given the existing slate of liffkirs, riio writer feds strongly that little 
ia to be gained by tiie study of iagentous theorie*, c?ipeicdally when 
exposititin of these Is limited to the use of cutoiir names Of to (lie 
vaguenesses of eolour teitmtiologv^ Wliat possible sense can be con¬ 
veyed to the siudcnt by staling thatorangr humitmiiriss best with its 
complementary* blue *"? What orange? Which blue? TeXtbooLvof this 
kind arc utterly wonhleits and still more ohjeciionnblc are booki dealing 
with I he occult and esoteric signiikance of colour* its spiriiunl value* its 
psyclmlo^kul value, ils curative value, and any other value you care to 
imagine. 

652 


COLOUR HARMOhIV 


Wimt cati said of any bdp as a guidt to praciice? OnJy ihis^ihat 
ji is tisuuJ to juit a musicmn to dirccl tbc musiCt and tlmt it b cqtially 
sensible to ask an artist to direct the colour. Artists, Like nntsidany^ arc 
good, bad and indiSercnt, The wisest course is to choose one held to be 
^ood by other anists. Now that film production is sittmcdug {especially 
in England and !he ContiiKsot) a culturally higher type there is every' 
prospect of a genuine creative artist being chosen for the job of colour 
direction, but tn KoUywood this would be us unlikely to occur as the 
choice of Picasso to design the cover of ihc Saturday Eyenmg Fast. 

The technique of the motion dinwing^ onimated cartoon, or puppet 
film, gives us the key to the ideal procedure. The artist should prep^^re 
a scries of corepoMdotis in colour, Ulustniting vital momonis of the 
action, and bciwwn these can be juscrtcd further outltnc drawings 
iiid.I»itiiig important movcmcDis of colour masses. When the whole 
film hws thus been set out the next stage is to prepare in coinplete detail 
the actual colours of fabrics, coiours of each pan of a set, of each 
costume and of every surface m auy given scheme. This job should be 
carried out by n ^clalbt who has at hand complete data Eo the kni^wn 
reproduction of every colour in ibc whole chfomatic range as rendered 
by the colour process being This specuilisl must also have had 

long experience in the effects realizable hy lighting and he must work in 
close co-opciution with the camera staff. The requirement b that the 
techmclanit must devote the whole of thdr «kil! and knowiedge to the 
realization of the concept of the artist who is primarily responsible for 
the character of the film as a mobile colour composition. In his mm 
it is the duty of the artist to inierprei the story dytuimically and never 
io lose sight of the fact that the colour treatmtut has the sole function of 
cmoiionaJ and tnidlectual emphais, whether this be to impart a 
heightened sense of reality, to gain an illusion of space^ to impart factual 
inforniation more completely or to induce a mood; these powers of 
colotirLng being alwiiys held subservient to the fundamental task of 
belter setting forth the drama of the movement of men in their held of 
action. 

There are certain principles which need not be defined for the artist 
but which should be stated here if only because they have so froqucitily 
been disregarded by makers of colour films:— 

1. SimpHdiy 

commonest error is aver-etoharathn. Not that an Htreinely 
intricate cmbroideiry of colour is ifiicapahJc of being successfully 
accomplislied, but it enormously magni^es the difficulEy of control^ 
and only very rarely can compositions of this kind be brought off 
with su^xess. We are concerned in the motion picture prtrnnrily with 
following the expressions, gestures and actions orthc dramatic character^ 
;ind no visual distnuciion, due to concentraiion upon incidents, should 

653 


COLOL'H Cl SE^MTOOJt APlf Y 

be tolcmted in ekher background or surrounding areas. Haphazardly 
^Itcrcd colour incidents are deiesiabk, especially when these have been 
introduced with the vague idea that the film is io colour and ^&o we mast 
hav?: a vase of flowers here or a cushion there and ihc more vivid the 
fflLour—(he better. Keep the whole scheme simple iheo* and never 
ijitroduce more coLotir for the mere sake of colour. 

3. Area and Sanfm^iofi 

It is a fairly^ sjife rule that the area occupied by a coloui' should be 
fou^y proportional to its saturation; Ihtis, the birger the area ibc 
greyer* the more vivid the colour the sunalier ihe area. But this rule 
applies more rigidly in the case of the warm hues, purple^ ttd^ orange, 
yellow, than to green, blue and violet^ which can occupy lame areas 
without giving rise lo unbalance. 

3, Swf£-cj.wie Contrast 

Always bear in mind that whatever colour chances to be fixated for 
even very brief periods will by retinal fatigue leave the ihusion of a 
!iu|^rpored ghosi-mmge (the after-image) upon any tjcw area upon 
which the vbiiiil oenue b mmed* and that the colour of the new area wUl 
tend to be minus ibe colour of ibe urea first toted. The effect vnIJ be 
observiLble in proportion to the Itiniinosity and to ihe saturation of the 
image fixated. This phenomenon ts the cause of many disturbing 
transitions in straight cutting from one shot to another^ in which the 
predominadng hue is murtedly different. The skilj i>f the colour 
director is needed to foresee (iic preblems of iransition and notatif 
comimdsy with which (he editor wiTI be faced. More or less ncutraJiy 
colotircfl transitional passap$ are used for bridging important colour 
dtmaxesf, and to act as periods of recovery for the retina after violent 
fltmulation. Over and over again one has seen in Aracricon musical 
fanto^its thiv principle flouted^ with eonset^uent colour faiiguc uri-siog 
from lavish boui[uets of colour piled one on another irrespoclivc of 
Successive contrast, untiJ ite uiore ^nsiti^^ of ibe audience mentally 
cry for mercy. 

4 ^ Kuhtii^ty 

Gorgeousiy glorious ' colour caanot equal she ItUense pleasure ilis 
average individual discovers io a sober, cool and mttror-lilcc palette. 
We ought to study Vermeer and Vdasque^ rather than the Baroque 
Rubens and Titian, It is easier lo compose colour mossed Utc the fruit 
on a market ^laiJ than lo match the delicacy of a Girtin watercnlouf. 
ll ts grossly untrue to dlvimiss subtie colouring as w^asicd upon an 
apathetk: public, B^uliful things have a singularly final w'ay of winning 
all hearts and all minds, whether they wsitit to be won or tio. Let your 
lonesi be dLUtcult 10 describe and diflicult (o remcmbcf, 

654 


COLOUR HARMONY 


5 - K<iy 

There b a qimlUy Ln good colour compo^iUon for which ^misLs hnw 
^adopted the musical term Kt-j\ The difficulty of d^^scribiug jiui whaL 
this means is due parity to the inadequate explanations offered by 
artists ihemselives, who haTi-e rarely been com pe ten I to amtiyse their 
petccptioits. Two principles are to be marked—iirsi, a shift of fi'^cry 
chromauciiy in a direction such as would result from the photography of 
a colour temperature soinewliiat tower Lhari that for which the system is 
balanced. Tims if the recording system b Tieuttally babneed lo an 
aver^jgc dayligln of colour Temperature 6,000 " K., the effect of using a 
very dilute daylight ta twfgstm filler will result in a Just perceptible 
increase of warmth. The ptableni here is that in theory a ncutmJ grey 
scale should now ms be rendered by ihc bboratory colour grader 
ueiUrul to ihc projection ilJLtmmant (the Lisual procedure) because 
relative lo ihe uppcanincx! of inch u grey in an equal energy llhiminaut, 
this neutml grey will now be on the golden ” ^idc of neuUuL This 
i.< precisely what liuppcas if varnish a painting with a very dilute 
golden varnish: the whole of chromaticittes is shifted, the shifty 
however^ being greater for the greens, blut^ and Violcis^ than for Lite 
warm colours. The same thing happens when we view un eKteiior 
through speeracks tinied^ say^ very pale ftesh colour. This minus filter 
charigiis Ehe‘' fcey,*^ if the minus filter b dense enough it w^iU cause an 
apparent prfdomiftmice of one hue^ as when daylight scenes are photo¬ 
graphed through a filler (togned to render ihe subject a,s it would have 
appeared illuminoted by moonlight. '' Key in this sense can be 
lechnicatiy defined ai—The employmtni in a composition of a 
chromalicity area or range with its saturaliou maxinue markedly 
indined towards one part of the spectrum. (Viz., ns it w'ould appear if 
plotted on Uie CT.£. chromatkiiy chart.) 

Secondly, there is that neoc^rity of key which relates lo the use of a 
choicer liuc as a recurring m&Uft a device which contributes much 
low^urds achieving unily^ a prerequisite condition of artistic production. 
This principle must be introdoccd wifts discretion if ii h not lo bore by 
becoming obvious. For a woman to w-car dresses of the same colour 
ihtpugbont the film would be ridicuious^ legurdtess of timC;, place and 
clrcumsiiuicc, bin by restriciing the costumes to the wide range covered 
by ail the modificatioiu of saiurafion and luminosity of one hue, the 
desired cfieci of unity will bo obtained. The feeJing must be conveyed 
to Ihc uiidience (hat a certain colour is the pivots or axis^ towards which 
uh other tones converge. For this technique Ihc colour director will find 
a Mimsellailas^ cm in valuable guide. The necessity titat the film mhoiild 
possess emtimUy will also be helped by the coL^iu motif. The prevo- 
iciicc of one line will serve cts a bridge Lo Link Ehc phases of ihc film. 

^ *' Mutuefi Boci cf Colat *' Ojarpany, Ine,, BaiUmoie, 

liiud, U.S.A J, 


655 


CHAPTER U 


Colour Standards: Heasurement and 

Specification 


T he colour coin poser of ihc future will noi worii uritbout Bonrie 
xyitem of arbitrary nefcreocc to deOmte spectficsJioRi. No doubi 
in tfe tarly stages of colour film produciion artists will resort to 
their lazy, imiccuratc ntcthi^s of indicating their ideas by ituans of 
10^1 ly executed sketches in gauche or water-colotirs, but for the 
colour composition of Uie fulurc a method !br indicating colour 
tones is required no Jess accurate than that employed bv an engineer 
when be drafts the steelwork of a skyscraper, b^use'q few rough 
washes wjth a waicr-coJoiir brush of some mixture of pigments famffiar 
to the artist, such us cobalt blue, chrome otunge, light red, etc., bear 
little or no relation to the actual colour which may be finally seen upon 
the rer^n. which is the resultant of a large number of intricately 
rented factors which have been examined in the section of this book: 
aealing with the recording and reproductUm sequence. Nor is it likely 
Uwt the coloration of a given part of q film will begin by a toueIi 
sketch by a palmer wWeb can then be handed over to the technical 
men for its practical rcaliTation. It foUows, therefore, that the film 
colounst ol the future will have to possess as pan of his training a 
worough i^tcry of all the techracal aspects involved in order for 
him to coHaboraic mtelligenily with the specialists comroUutg each 
stap of the colour rceording and rcproduclion. whereas, tbrough 
lack of reahzaLon of these tequirtmems, it is certain that in the early 
stages of colour reproduction painicrs will be called in to suiKnlse 
colour dinsctioq who, by the an lure of thetr environment and trainios, 
are not equipped to tinderstnad even the elements of the theory and 
prnrtice of colour photography. 

Although from a purely sciemilic point of view a colour alias 
provides ait arbitrary and relatively inaccurate method of specification, 
instruments such ns trichromiitic colorimeters or spectrophotoracicra 
are expensive and somewhat inconveuiem for the purpose, so that H is 
likely thill colour aliases wiH provide for the time being the most 
sa^factory method of colour-tone indication, A great number of 
colour atlases Imye been devised. A. H. Munsdl. an Amencan artist, 
devised ihs well-known Munsdl System and in J905 Brat published 
656 





ClHOtfSt SlAKDA(lt^S: ftRWfeST ASP S PlECIf J CATIOS 

A Color NwfilUm {Ij. In I9i5 Thr Color Atia\ ^1? uppearrd. 
Today ?7^^■ Book of Color i^x^nsiituies ihe moai valimbk 

ailfli of pigmented sampler in existence. Ttie samples are ainajiged 
in an order ba$ed on sound priiuriple:^^ and this atla^ has received ivide 
recognition in the United States ei£ a basis fot colour ^pcciticatlon. 
The corresponding German eoloLir syiiieTn^ based on the work of 
Professor W. Ostwald. a renow'aed chemisL, sms tiirat embodied to 
Der Forbadas puhiished in 1517. system has also widely 
adopted, but its fundmncntal basis is not in accordance with modern 
psychological, or psychophysicab teaching, and )L is not likdy to siirvi%^ 

MunselJ recognmd from lie inception of hh work that the three 
cha mettrill ties wbicit dcGnc completely a colour sensation an; hue, 
)ighines£< urtd ^turation^ terined by him hue, value, md chroma 
reapcctj%’Gty. He constructed a cylindrical solid In which the %ertka] 
co-ordinate reprcdenis lightness {value}, angle about she axis re¬ 
presents hues, and distance from the i^xjs rclouvc satunUluii 
(ehroma). The ideal Is a psychological colour solid in which 
cylindrical co-ordinates of Etidideun space represent the prindpal 
attributes of colours perceived us belonging to surfaces and equal 
linear CKteiils represent equal seuse-distanoes. Along ibe colour scales 
tbere is variation in but one iittiibutc ai a time and the scalar grada¬ 
tions ELTc pcTCCplually unifonn. ['urthermore^ any hon 7 jonuil section 
ihiougit Uic solid would define a plane of constant Uehtness (M unsell 
\'alue)i while any vertical plane originating ai the achromatic axis 
would be a plane of constant hue. Fitudlyp a cylindrical section con^ 
ocuiric with the axis w=ould eonsiituic a surfaoe of constant satunition 
(MuiXiidl v/jfwiin)" [3j. 

The Mansell scale uniu of hue. value, and chroma are not equivalent 
perceptually. The relation between these units is as follows: One 
value unit=2 chroma tinils—3 lute units, (at 5 chroma). 

The Munsell notation Is as follows: 

A number and one or two luticrs indicate localion of the given colour 
in the hue cireuir^ which is divided into tOO hue steps. Each of the ten 
principal MunseU hues (R. > K. V. GY. G. BC. B. PB. P. RF> muy 
be accompanied by any number from I to 10 to indicate the ksser 
variolion or steps in the cireuit. The prineipiil hues are undenitood 
to fall at posiitions indic.'ated by the number 5. and it is conventional 
to omit this number tn ;he hue notation. Any hue with a ddsignution 
greater Itian 5 tics foritier along the hue series [clockwise dir?:etion)i 
while designations kss tbun 5 iitdicuic countef-cliKkivisc depanures 
from Ihe principal hue. Thus 9R is a yellowish ictU for it departs from 
R for 5R) by four hue steps in ihc direction of ydhiw-red (YR). 
On the other hand, 2R is a somewhat purplbh-rcd beemisc it lies 
three steps tn ihc counter-clockwise dirocilon toward RF- Numbers 
ranging from 0 to 10 Lndicaie location on the value scale. Thus 
2 t 657 


COtoUR CTNfcMATaCrRAFHY 


v«Jue I,' itidicaies a near bJack, 5/ indicates middle gmy and ' a near 
white. The e;tireme value» or idcul limiis, 0 and Id, me not fcaiiAid 
ID practice. Numbers ranging upward toward* ihentetica! Htnits 
repent degrees of chroma. Upper limits in praclioE depend upon the 
ausiiabilny of suiuible pigments. Zero chroma means on achromatic or 
grey colour in which hue is nbsenL In ihe complete noiation of a colour 
the hue dciignalion is given htai, followed by a fraciionul form of which 
numemior is the value designation and the denominator is the 
chroma designation. Thus, for instance, 7R 3;g specifies a colour 
which ts prcdonimamly red in hut with a minor yellow componeai. 
somewhat low m value and onJy moderately high in chromn, 

A subco^i^ of the Colorimetry Ccuiimittw of the Opucut 
Sleety of America in 1937 undenook a re-spacing of the Munsell 
CO oars with ibe object of smoothing out the spacing into pcrceptuaUy 
uniform wlour scales, in accorJaaM with psychological iudgmetiis 
averaged for a large number of observers. In 1940 the data were 
sumnunzed in the form of avemged visual estimates of the correct 

of each sample. Subsequently, 
m 1M3, ihc subcumiTiEttee published a psychopIi>’$ical system based 
on the IW data which corresponded as closely as possible to an ideal 
psychological colour lolid consonant with practical usefulness. The 
cumnt samples wem re-designated with o revised Mutisel! notaiiou 

It reigns to be seen whether an attempt will be made later to issue 
a revised nUas in confonniiy with these investigations and recommenda¬ 
tions, but It may be discovered iliui modifk^tions wUl perforee have 
to be mude in the MunscE System which might result in ii* bcitiE less 
adaptable to ns acknowledged purpose if it were mude to ennform 
to an ideal of perceptual unironnlly, 

Vu' .Uiaveti £ 0 <fk oj Color should be possessed by every lech* 
oicinn concerned with the produciioii of moibn picrurej in txilour. 
Ji wiU prove to be as valuable an aid to the photogriiphcr as to the 
colour director, constituting, as it docs, a common basis for spcciii- 
caimn. ihscussioti. and lest of the timits of repiodaction. 

The problem is loo vast a subject to receive detailed ircatmem in 

^ ** * lurther informnliott the reader is recommended to 

reao the followmi^ works: 


Kcrtrtitcifis 

Rose w ilm ^ A.^ Tfnit/ iLr lu Casitnur, Partly J. 

iM., ikt dfr Farhtn, Dresden. 1881. 

MU]S3ell^ a. Ji. y( Cahr t\0iailaxt^ U S. A., 

Chroff^riti. u.s A. im. 

imhSisSuS). Ctmfwt tf/ Cohorr, raJSi. LonJon, 

Osiw'AiD. PnoresSQ* Wiuiioj. Bit HbnowUJf ,A*r Ldpriii )9|S 

6S8 


COLOUR STAKDARDS: MEASUREMENT AND SPECJFtCATlON 

GUILD, J., A Ciitioj] Survry of Modem tJct^olepnwnw in die Theory and Tech* 
rvique of CcSorimeiJy enii Atficd jPiw. C&nv., [^26- 

" On the Fixed PoKftta of a CoIorinictTic Sytfem/' JVidinir. Opt. Sftc.i 
Pf . 1*56. 

Sumt, 1., and CuujDw J., Tbe CLE. CckkiinKtjk Slfloda/da and Uieir l/se/" 
Triim. Opt. Sdc,* J3 UWl-2>p pp. 

JUDDf DiAfiE B., " 1931 CLE. Sundmid Observer and Ca^ofclhialo Syaiera for 
Colofhneuy/* JiXtnt. Opt. Am., 2J (1933)^ pp. 359-74. 

Fm, C E., '* Color-Of4cr SysJcmj/* See. Ptc. Epji., ^ No. 2 fFeh. 
m9),p. IE4. 

GtrtLTOP. J. P., Syalem itl Cotof Prercreiioe$*"' Jettm. Se^r \fpt. Pk- 51, 
Nol 2 (Feb- p. 197. 

Ol£nts, j. j., and Kili 4 an< J. T.i" TrkJinnniHic AnjJy^is dF ihc MiiwEl Boot of 
Color*" Ji^UFTt. Opt. See. Amtr., 3M (1940L pp 609-616. 

JiTiD. D, B.p siuid Kelj.v, K. 1-.+ “ SJfliliiJd of Dcsigruting CbJor," AW/r™J ^u-«fii 
efStttmhirdi Jeuftt. t>f Resftm% 23 U^39)fc pp- 353-385. 

f<atitieasoN, D,. ” U«e cf the LCL TristinTiiliis VjJljpcs hi DiiL Cobrimeiry,'* 
U.S^ DepL e/AgHctiitare (May 

KicKER^os, Ctolral Molations for ISCONBS Color Name^,'^ Jv^ra, Opt. 
See- AffiFF . 31 rl94lL pp. 537^91. 

** Mtmieh Book ul Color/' Miuuell Color Comptuiy, 10, Eaii Ffankrtn 
Buhunoix, Md. n929k 


COLOUR SCORES 

If tile Art Director is to be responsible for ihc uolouj' composition 
of the fiUn he sJioulil present Ms ideas tn \hc form of a score. There 
is no olfier way by which be can give the Dinx^tor a clear Idea of the 
reMlion bciween the colour ircatitient of the developmenial rhythm 
of the film as a whole. it is probable that the colour score should 
no: be comiKJiCd nmil the music has bocn recorded. First should 
come the general conccplion of the sound treatment, and aflerwards 
rhe eompositEOn of the li^t. The score should take the form of a 
loose-leaf hoot consisting of a page to each scene mentionqd in ihc 
shooting script. Each page lepresefil in the form of verltsl 
band) Ihe principd colours to lie used in the scene. The w^idth of each 
hiind should be related to it$ prohabk aren in ihc final picture. At 
the top of each band should be given the code number of that particular 
colour in ihc colour aiUs w^hkh Mis been adopted standard in the 
production organisation. No belter ntlas is avaiktbk iMm the Mimscll 
charts, and wc can assume that this atlas will be used For the purpose. 
On luming over the pages of llie score one can see at a glance the 
sequeatiut dynamic of the film, and ihc colour heirmonies should have 
direct psychological relaLiopsliip to the him Ruje'ioh and to the musical 
treaimcnt- A useful suggi^tpon is to piiini the subordinate colour 
elements^ and perhaps also the principal costume harmonies on eieUuloid 
sheets, so that these can be seen superposed on the colour schemes of 
the backgfoiLuds. which should have beejt painted on opaque pstpen 
In this way several diJSeient costumes can be observed in reUlion 

659 


COLOVK ClKti^rATOGAAPHY 

to one bactground. The painting of these colour worts should be done 
by an appieniice textile designer from atlas indications noted down 
by the Art Director, who can work quite efficiently without resorting 
to painting at all. Such young dniughtsnten are a valla bk in Manchester, 
many of whom would, m doubt, be inclined to enter the artistic side 
of tlie moiEon'picture tndastiy\ These dreughtsinen have rnocived 
special traming in tajdng down smooth loatis m solid water-colour. 
Tlicir skill is far beyond that of the average proressional artist, and the 
atxuracy of their work has to be seen to be believed. Thus iho Art 
Direcior would be reliev-ed of the drudgery of painting scores, and he 
would be free to conccntniie his powers on invention.' 

Needless to say, it will be necessary for everyone who is concerned 
with colouring to have a copy of the colour atlas. TJie atlas should be 
kept by, amonpt others, the Make-Up Artist, the Wardrobe Mistress, 
the Dress Designer, and the Set Dresser. The production stall' must 
aocusioni themselves to the correct designation of colours in their 
conversation. ” A nice warm grey” or" A son of bluey-green '* 
inean nothing to ilie colour expert, sind not so very much to the artist. 
When the colour score system lias been adopted, a given colour tone 
can have one. and only one, descriptiont and there is no more doubt 
about its mcaniiig than there esa be as to the significance of the nota¬ 
tion m a musical score. 


THE FUTURE OF THE COLOUR FILM 

On re-reading this section of the last edition of this book fin 1959) 
the amhur is impressed with the accirraey of many of the predictions 
then made. Ji is a fitting moitieRt to review the fornicr maiertol and 
to m^c such comments a.s may be apposite tinder the present altered 
concJjLian of Lhe world. 

The quration was put; ” Will the colour film altogether supplant 
ih^ blacfc-jind^wliitc (Mm'? ^ Not one wocxl of tJie i^ply need be ultcred. 
This "was (he answer:It is extremely unlikely that we are about to 
witness n rapid change-over in picture-amking in any way comparable 
to that which oocurred when sound reproduction became available. 
This stniement is made in spite of the daily repeated prophecy that we 
are in for a revolution in the industry. On the contrary, it is much more 
likdy that ilie proportion of colour films to black-aiid''Whitc will 
gradually, and very gradually, rise during the neit five years. It would 
be very surprising to the writer if in five years from now 
films Off ntijiic in celouf" Mow the position is that probably not more 
than one-tBiih are made in colour today in 1949, und it will still 
be surprising to the w-riter if onc-hulf of all films are made in tjolotrr 
in the year 2000. Tlie reply continues: " Not the least reason for ihitik- 
660 


coroliEi standahm: ano spectncATtON 

ing this, is >he coil of Dcgativc and positive film stock for colour as 
compared with bhitlmnd-white. Unless remarkabie economies am 
be eflected on some other tatporuwt item of the cost of mokiog a 
film, tt is difficult to see how the extra cost of negative and positive 
is going to be borae by the producers; cspcCEflll) as it is universally 
admtUed that ll is going to be impossible to make more out of » film 
jiisit because it happens to be in colour, fur the very simple reason 
that the public will not pay more to s*e it. 'Malurally. we are justified, 
in some degree, in hoping thm uliiniiitcly die cost of ncsfliivc and 
posiiive will perliaps be only u fraction more than blnck*and-'sliite* 
There is Uitle evidence that this is likely to be the position for some 
lime to come, however.” The truth is that the prospect of cheaper 
colour stock ts as distant as ever, if indeed it has not retreated beyond 
the horizon altogether. 

After pointing out that the standard of laboratory processing 
would have to be higher than for btack-and-white, it was stated that: 

“ It is probable that colour priming will remain, for some years to 
come, the prerogative of laboratories, not only possesetuig the most 
up*to-daLc equipment, but which liave the odvsmla^ of a specially 
trained stuff who arc familiar with the pecidiar proWeini involved in 
balancing thietMiolotir printing/' This is Hlill true. 

Nothing has since occurred to upset the vaUdity of the following: 
" To those of us who have bad some years' csqjcricna* of colour films 
it is a remarkable fact that the introduciion of colour imo the incture 
seems to arouse instant erltkisia from ati atidienre wliich will loicrate 
normally any amount of distortion it) black-and-white, it would seem 
as if the normal power of colour identification is very highly developed, 
By this is not meant that the average individual In Europe or America— 
certainly not ihe average male—has a highly developed colour memory, 
but that any slight distortion from the condition of neutral balance 
is very quickly spotted as irnnaruotf. And we have to recognire that 
if ihc colour process was p^rfeci within the illuminniion limiis of pro¬ 
jection, the condition of on f//usifMi would very nearly have been ob¬ 
tained. the third dimension being the only missing factor. Owing 
to this developed seniitiviiy to balance, and probably u» range of hue, 
the audience has hitherto come to regard colour films as being ob¬ 
viously in the espeiimental stage: and this coti^’icUon has built up a 
considerable anLagoaism. which it will take a long time to break down- 
Two-colour films no doubt did an immense deal of harm, and still do so. 
People team to expect gross distortions—In fact, all the. old history of 
red trees and sunbunu cotnplcxioos. U is remark able how men who have 
spent a large part of their lives in pioneering colour prooesws have 
retained their ability to observe faulty colour reproduction in other 
processes, but long familiarity with their own process has blinded 
them to its imperfections; and sometimes to sucb a degree that they 

601 


C0L<1UR CrNEMATOCItAI>t{Y 


are prepancd to swear that brown is green and grey is viold. T^c>' 
are like men in love, who rsnmoL conceive 1 J 141 oilicrs may mc obvious 
faults itt the supposedly perfect person, or ilieir processes are like 
old friends of whose defecis they have Long wased lo be aware." 
How true this still ist And how amazing tho! two-coloiu- processes 
ihoutd have t>eeo raised from the dead againl And how sad, loo! 

Nor necil the foUpwing be retracted: " it can be argued that a 
wrmin lack of realism, an elcmeat of limiiaiion. or what artists 
(painters) call cifmvnffifn, b a desirable artistic quality, but it b unwise 
CO eicpccl the general cUicmagocT 10 appreriaie such ;esthetic refine* 
ments. For them t lie criterion of excellence in colour will be its approach 
to absoluit fidelity. As the writer has again and again pointed out, 
the proper approach to the problem for ihe maker of the colour film 
should be, at liisi anyhovv, to place the minimum stress upon the 
aeeideat of colour as such. The quality of the colouring should be 
such as hardly ever to caU attention to itself. The first colour film 
(o be Tweived with universal aochunatioji will be that one tn which 
^ s^JJ never havi: txen conscious of the colour as an achicvemcni. 
The mclusion of colour will have given us a sensation of welFlwing, 
a geacrnl feeling of greater completeness. At preactu. of course, 
ilurciors are like children who have been given a new tov, and arc not 

quite sure how il \s supposed lO work, nor quite wbai'lt js intended 
for. 

^P*^*^*^*^ t»f Technicolor are prepared to admit that it is n 
I j turned out that this process gained a vimial monopoly 
of the held. It would have b«a u vastly more Iwulthy state of aJTaiis. 
specially in the early stages uf the evolution of tlic colour film, for 
there tci havn been at least three or four alternative ivpes of product. 
Wc ™ predret with almost absolute ccrtainlv that this w long held 
dumiuaiiw of TccJmicotor is coming to an end. We oil know that in 
the piibtre s mmd colour films art synonymous with Tedinicolor, 
Indeed, Dr. KaJmus and his msociates tiuvc added adjectives lo the 
lou^age. for do wc not frequently read of" tcchnieolored sunsets "t 
... gcfiecal availability of the mutlibycr lype of negntlve-posiltve 
bfm should result in the increasing use of colour photography for the 
aewsree. ^At any rate, tlie iDctintcal ]imimiion.v which have hitherto 
rwmcicd lU use for this purpose have been largely dimiiinted, and now 
mere renuuas only the economic barrier to be surmounted. The price of 
positire prints might 1m so high as to require an impossible increase 
CKhibilor irt order to provide nu ^dcqUEitE^ nrtEini. 
Whether any increase in the distributor's charges lii pmcticablB is open 
to question, Tlie trouble is that multilayer film is very costly to ntnuu- 
uctUR owing to the number of coatings and the high pereeittage of 
waste, h IS indeed doubtful if this class of film could be made dlher 
in the UfUted States or in Sritain at a sale price equivalent to that at 


stashahos: mkA iiiiftt'MCNt anp- spbcificatj^n 

which ihe Gcrtnatis are repotted to ha^x sold it during ihcir brief 
period of pipductiQn.' In any case, Agfii probably' suteidi^vcd by 
rhe Nazi Government $p Lhai we cun not jndge whether the econornk 
conditiofis of mfinufactuee wcex in any my normal. The po&iitvc 
slock processed coald hanJiy be sold in Britain 4t Ic^ than sixpence a 
fool, on the basis of sudi information as we nnw possess as to the 
procciSKp of trcinufactmT and the cost of the raw iiuitmaii used. 
At this figure its use would be restricted by the newsreel orgamKalions 
it> films recording event$ of special Entefcsi. That the charaeierisnca 
of the process IcflJ IhemscUcs particoknly well tt> ihe newsred has 
been demonsimtcd convincmgly by films made by tlte Russiansn 
Obviously ihe matenal has latitude approadiing that of monochrome, 
while ihc speed Is adequate to permit very' considenible depth of focus, 
Since over iwcoiy cameras were used for the film of the Sports Fiinldc 
in Moscow, dearly no moTe skid wus required ihan it would be reason¬ 
able to expect of any newareel operator. 

A study nf the utiitude today of ihe Bririith public towarth the 
colour film docs not reveal as yet any decided prcTcrencc for feature 
colour films- There does seem to be a marked antipuLhy to excessive use 
of vivid colour—appuremdy popuLur m Hollyivood—which may be 
due lo a ttfltioTial liking for the restrained and rather sad tones typical 
of the BritSfib sentiment for colour during the ksi hundred yeai^. The 
average cincmagocf is attracted primarily by the iadividmililies oflheir 
favouHie stars and by the story and rreuiiticnt, and tlac quitstion of 
colour is only n subsidiuty factor of tinul polish. On the other hand^ 
there is not the slimiest doubt ihiii the cartoon film is immensely 
preferred in coIouTi which is hardly &urnrising since it is in Lhe untmaled 
drawing thiii colour is discovered to Ik an expressive fitctor of major 
voltie. Newsreels, dueumentarics, and educjtiopal films, arc alE pre¬ 
ferred in colour, 

Had all the sustained efforts of countlt3^$ men of scicn^. technologists, 
and fuuinciers to perfect the mcarts of timklng motion picture's in colour 
had a* their ulUmate end the production of epkemcral entcrrainnieni for 
the masses, one might doubt that success was an adequate reward, 
but luckily die fmiahed tool had work lo be put lo of more iKmument 
valLiu lo ujan, for the colour film it desTined to make a coatribmiofi 
of real value to ctviliaaiiou in education and scteniific research- As 
example we may mention the valuable work which has already been 
done for medidnc and agriculture. Thus the promise of Incnitivc 
reward from the exploltalion of u lechnologicol triiimph has not 
for rhe Unit time resulted in benefits being conferred in ca.ws (inforcseen 
by men moved rather by greed than by desire for mastery of imtcriul 
mejins for the greater public good. 

* Ncvcrtibckss Kodak and l>u Punr have siitoa oflered Cfl^cwr posilivc raw txock 
rtt 44 «jnl» ."I foot 

663 


CV}.OL'tt ClNSUATOaUAPHY 


Man stands at the pcnting of his way. His technical tritunphs offer 
scir-^trmtion or the ciyoyincm of a meaningful existence. He mmt 
choose. A colour film can be brought to shame by the base misuse Of 
csH propagMda, or a colour Mm can reveal a secret of nature and so 
serve the well-bcLug of all roca. We who played our part in the fashion-' 
mg of this tool cannot refuse the chfllleage. Ji a for us to choose 
which ftay it shall be. Choose then as servants, but not as slaves— 

for this in truth is the choke before tis. 


References 

(13 MtfOTji, Ap H„ 4 Ofhr Nmaftm, Eili^ Bosien. 1907. 

^ ^ A#(irwrif Sjmtrn, \ViiUwonii-H«wl«int, M.ildcn, 

*** Subcommittee 

IWOJ Motttelt Cdlots," Jwdffl. Opt. See. Atmt.. ID (Dte 

l4) N^ttALL, !^M., NtcreasoN. D., (uul Judo, d. B., " Rnnl Report of l}» 
^A. Subeommllire ^ tt« Spacing of the Munsell ColotuV jaurn. opt. 
^c«.*HJnrr.,33.N0. fguly (M3j;pp,3aj4}g, 


664 


Characterislies of Color Film Sound Tracks 

A Rcpuri'^^r tlie SMPTE Gitlor ConuniUtie 


Dvaisfl A '»#CKijeja rsatoo rroni kiutnijih IVH}). ib» jS^qoty oiwt {uifiviUuil 

wRi^uiimrt Uit p04dbr« «ltt td bltio-seuBlllfv 

tulua and lAiid^!liiia p}u>toc«ne for ^dJ nprodu^tiii^in. but aporrifk imneilusfiHia 

amid tint Iwi re^idicit 

OuA iifffioiivia nb*tariA t>ti ibt* Mudy ihsajlb id. bilofULAbbti ftiwy ttf ijij . 


u^ipnnuiflA. betmvibr Mml [iliy^ail nhnis^rtorlnllciF of ihif aava^iJ S&^iEiiu l^-nml 

1 * 0 ^ film E?iind Ifw^ka thut wvrtf li to tw ^autiiiT^cwlJn fHknimmfia] 

iktiuL 

Thp giJCHdT^v CuloT CoErniuUw^ under ibfl ChtdiWAidiPp of Dr. U. JL Ihiorr; 
^nvaj^nlUf hMlp In ildj woHtaiid noiCipr^iKiy mi^fw^nlad Cokir 


FUtn &uiid CtntSMit^talbK Thi« latba' iTHEp JUAdni^^ tli* [i.aQ$Hi 7 
dimifib a j|i»^tiiiElA iiiai na 

iUin fmnmfAiitiimra and pupiRiiij iti fmdln^ in iilniar roimb' 

It sbortdii bc nuijfd tbai pt<orfw*lkM cm prtHbi^ mlmfirmti «ith 

cmiibikio in dn« atambiFif ponliom aa dafinod In Abiedciui l^t irLdiidil 

fS&-nnu} Aiu} SC22,S^lfl4T ll^ nmuitimnal fmcitkp aonaiaif than^ dv upt- 

Thiae iiTQ t ha | 4 Wiiiin whtm tlKd to nmlfii liiihB |T Ti.»i^j i cm 0 ^ 

vf^nml print vt4«k bj' outihwt pdjuimif litnii la i gia i tirijsmAb. 

Tbe ^bcoiomSllM iriiliofi to lia ap^teebjunn id tha JttuiDfvUirmm 

wfiM jiiTDiluQta Bre rEpr«{wfiicd, tor tb^ir cxMspamiioft m ikii 


on 

Cotor Film S<K»h 1 Orna^lirMcm 
L Coickmrili, t'toinvan 


A. C. EUana^i^ 
^ O. rNipT 


i. K. WtMr^ 
Cl. C. 9dla«aiU- 

Jtuiuary t, 


Xttmo 


Mfliiu fhiit.uref _ 

Addrw 


Pfcifm'li 


E^uimn 


Aj^winmafr of Tank 


BA54k 


Tlifougb 


Jlriaitv^ TrtLiiAmkEtun to 


CoEii^K^aiUdii 


Infrared 


End 


Diineat 


tiim' 


uns^jsjT 


iCg |JCfMl!!:^lm OtHtmrUnfttoi 




ttifflUlriibo 


FILM 


liiSnSlfSiin” 

Tnto 


DftwMt y m 
Arm VjHM 'f 


AjiffintLit 

AmermiofT 

AFwikS Caiiu 


A^Tii Wdllon, 

OatixiJktij 

Colot Him C<^. of New Yiitk, 


Araorloa 

CiitfiDr^l Aiillitta 

A Drtpwj 

Anaca Dfv. 


(InocalOr^ Ino, 

Di^n^ckrsfAt flcdajr-Gbroti^^ 


lAt-4 
l.ta.p Fdoi Loh, 


Da /'onf 

f^aii£oljw 


hldLi filUu 

LfebotBioriB 

T>u Frmt 
Phato EVtMb 
Lierla Dly, 
Folae^d CoTji^ 


NX 

Jliiighajutatt^ 
Ni V I 


Bnrtaiikp 

Caill. 

Ttumn Dil^ 
ion^ Surmy 
Thartitf Dil- 
toiT^ 3um>^ 
Edj, 

ParUn. 

J]bftton, 


AjdaAolot 

Podiiva 

Anierioolot 


An^o t^oZor 
FtiaUlia 
rdtin Ti'pts 
732 uaim 
CiqoDolor 

Diilaya^lmpmi 

Dufaycotor 

^ . (lufditiye^ 


Yhlhilh'4)mui'n Bhu - hluij k llbck^iflib 

whH« 

ii]iaciueb1w> Opiuiop blup- 

tuaito pay Itwito 

aunooD Hutaoo 

CiiuHiy Uebt Kmivr 

mnicse irmdtdntod 

area 


Vipoquo Biiie- 
pny juaito 
PUlflKX 
Malta CUrfaOA 


Hii^ oiatir 

«urfiw« 

Nanttid IiImIu 
vyf-vhica 
i^niLil.v to 
liJii^1ti‘&fid^ 
vrldto 


I >1 FanL Color Browntsh rock 
Hdwte nuiito 

tJya 226 TjpfT 

l* n 1 iirtib iT 


BJiw^ Bluo 

Normal Nnnnat black- SOw 

and-^vkitie And-wiJto 

Dart, Opiums Lra^ flUi-st 

mk ooloml 
rcoea u back- 
CrcKud 

BrDwnkh led, BrownMi red 

film? 


tuul tilv^ir 

fiHvw 

[iiollArcnito 

Silvtr Aiilikln! 


Iron tone 


J5-yj/ nuf 


■ ■-n,. .,x« .No Inrcirmuiiuit p^^. 

NoLe: Boeuw oE alhnr H,-iM 4 ei 441 . ibouid rwnibh blorll> 4 ini-wy to 

— ..i...... ... .. NViIiitomiaJJiiU,,, 


Utllr. aitb 
uuoA^iM 

lajriflnlfttlna 


Mjwkrato, iritli wilb CiUlr, •idili 

timdefvte to nuenmnn^ iiMahTato 

BucdniiiiB Dudiilation m^ulalkm 

zDOfhllatkm 

Nona Now 6fodar^ to 

maKinmjn Bwaimuio 

irA* ..« ..^ pSomfr ua bliudL-Hiiil^wluto . , 


Kn nurmikor 

tibin 


Modeimto to ^fadnnLia 


tiwkm iu tho ulltnytoffii ami i^wud- 


gHiw 


Mr^lflUic plua 

dy# 

S ro only 

vitr 


litUn 

Maumikm 


tiltlo 

Modoraic 


Litt;Efl 


Ldllo 


little little 

>^Aiw na bliudi^iibtvblfa 


T'cnAar^ifriiif/' 

Tiwlittkookif Mu- 

Ui.iki Fir f^ri} 

lloHy^wd^ 

Colif. 

TeoTcmtolur 
35-in ta 

Slier 

Slier 

SEiBr 

si™ 

.- .. 

. i Va' . SaiiLD 

on ikladkbaiid^wldir. 

rnunlor f>iTrtobdntod 

FUtu Judua- 
trioo^ ICLO. 

te-MM FILM 

WMt Fort Ijee, 

NU. 

Tmooki- 

35-01111 

Norrual 

NoTTIkd 

tUlHNbbok 

^total pint ilyir 

Abiorijt 

Abaori^i 

Scmia 

LrmaiiuiailpD 

Suiiv 

tremmuaaioj 

Ammc^ CWor 

rimkuml AiiUkui 
* Him Corp, 
Apkio Div^, 

Bui^Biiitoi4 

l&-zirini Aoeco 
Cohir 

catLu^ Fdm 
Type 232 

MjiLte lurffuw 

Cliai^ 

aurfiiw 

Bnawnlali 

BOver njlIkkEi 

nMdrralfi iu 

mairiTT¥iiin 

loarCulatioik 

Moderator 

nnuciukiun 

QtodiilaEjon 

Uttk, 

mcMiirato 

modulation 

littU, 

Tm-Klcnito 

[omliilatom 

KoitorArof^Ji 

toaatmaii tCodnlc 

CX 

Itorbetter. 

N.Y. 

cluroenz 

TypnSm 

b^iui^maito 

Ulomy 

llroHiklali 

Nc^j pnrp 
SpyCH Hill fuTlf 

trtsdenilo 

rnorlitlatkm 

^foderMCr 

rnafimum 

nkalutaibn 

Uttliif 

nmxbnmm 

mofiiilatton 

titllr, 

mikdiiinte 

modulatirni 

CrtUC»Lir 

('ikHXOloJf ffkCli 

Tlurbank, 

cm 

CiuJwiijir^ 

mm! nmttk! 
ctirfM 

Bluop j^oBsy 

Flue 

InOQ tDi^e 

Nono 

Nqna 

Moderato to 
auuirnuni 

Moderate to 
tikaximimi 

l>kditfyrAnifiw 

Du/aj^LmmB 
m, FUia Intto 

Xhamei 

Mt, Sumy 

Lhifn^'olmuiili 

Normal bloob^ 
aneA^hite 

Nuraial yat'k^ 
and"whita 

Konnai blaok- 
and-whlte 

ffilver 

- .. 

.. ... ...Same aa Ldonk-^ami^liito 

.yp. 

ToeiiiiltHiloe^ 
EUotkin Pjciitrfli 

Bodyvi^^ 

Ckiif. 

Twliniodof 

Fbmni, 

BlatOc iiukito 

I1l»ek,,d(mr fllACtc 

Sjvor iodidu 
plMi dyr 

Utile 

Mmknittr 

hlodrrato 

M>xlcrat« 

l*wm 

*^ir 

JVadfv 

Corp. 

Teq^nJov 
^ioiton Pititorri 
Cc^ 

liuillyiifMMj, 

f^lf* 

l^oena 

Twibniookki 

W-emn, 

PruooM 

Blna, |i0»Ef 

lilim 1^1 may 

IFue 


Uttia 

U\il0 

Sdodkrato 

LArjjr 


l.liiJpk 

Maximum 


Bonn! 

UaiMimtoiiiO 


No 

inlormnlHio 


No 

mfonuatiuo 

MfKJitfilln 



-'^■i«nl4 ba 

laiMafiiiiry 

No mlofimi^ 

_ lion 

EJUtur 


SaUabiiTtciry 

Na isfmtua- 
fSxm 

No bilurmpr. 

ikm 

Fiihpr 

A ffKfiEviW 

PydnTEHi 

Far dyn tnialc 
drily 

Nat iwiod 

Mihmr 

Aatoa Cnlor 

VndBTrmi 

IJ4Bye 

ttonmne fttN 
tfifisr itiidy 
Nofmal Idack- 

No jirefifnifHT 

Cio;4a£4kr 

Normid lilnrk- 
wl-^kto 

ZSonbiJ Idark- 
amS^fyikiti 

Fltbicr 

Dtkf^yihnmM 

Suitalile^ 

^liHablc^ 

fiullAblo^ 

ElEUirr* 


P« mriiiiUlr 
pJui dyt 

for dyir imek 
m\y 

For Twbllk' 
fdut dye 

No pnkfoTBiici' 

I>M rirjd A# 

/coat £^j 


tnXk pTaleiremH!^ 

No preferesiiJit^ 

No Jmifwtitttai* 

Fofaosfo^ 

Nannal IdiwA^ 
Mml-whtto 

ymrnl blaoi- 
and-^'ltite 

NEkrmal Mtuk* 
aod-arUto 

Khliar 

TivAnaDid^T 

Pirfnmed 

1 gillie 

Utatda 

VXMm , Yar^ 
alklir amn 
imdarred 

IVT^fiPlOir 


fS~inr FfiM 


S^Iodomiii 


Jjwie 


fWflrad 

m 

Xo 

litbHi 

Anmr Cokr 


Twontiaeoded 

iulixmLatinu 


Ptofmad 

Not 

Kjx 

Uibei 



fvcwiutftiiled 

tnformaijdn 


VtvimBBd 

IJttUe 

neokiifte filt^ 
tUer inviaii- 
pvtlon 

Knrmal Itkarkp- 

Nil tuiifcmiea 


KommI bbuk- 

.'lonual ijJjhil;- 

LVilw* 


aocKwIiitii* 

md«4vblie* 

and-irkito* 


Ptaftirr. d* 

r^abb* 

Not nuijm- 


frtdhbalv, 

Fmfmed* 

Nob twum- 

tiliHidrd^ 


■‘V 

/VoA^ 


Virtfdiip 

S'ifll HPf^lIrffr 


fiuaidod * 


anew* 



* Tbn fntawn biokgruiind U mi finu Uud oo andiiilu irhuil^^ fvsaillai w iim wblrtb^ 
lu^ Vfry Jir» Irv^ if Ui« vlL bar m ntdtonii be praoticA ilm iwmiina 

m 


b roi»4d idk^^kily or iW la^lei lam^aini I «i# 2 pokni-x 

rim^Ly^ 


*■ N^inuhl blh«k-a$iJ-«rj|lta ntm tmk. 

» Tnick 14 aitw. tia for It^ricWikd^vluto 


^Tfsrk KamulaTtij KaAtman HUnmi KodeuLTruM. 

* Tnek. ia uaed mk Tttihnie^dikr LO-mm [nMlulifTii prihla 


IW50 JowstAh of tok AMFTE Vm.ijMi W 

Cnft^gkl fftJiO. by ^*>ff 4 / Jft’MM* A^^rrrJL liH-^ f/ /A' 


















































I 


APPEmtX I 


BRITISH PATTINTS COStPLEfB 

PATENT LIST CONTAtNlNa EVERY PATENT 
HAVrWG MME BEARING ON COLOUR 
cinematography 


450.673- Opt., Brewster 
61(5. Ciwpar. 

»7T. HAtHUinkoteirp 2-Cd, 

958. SeiLiituDeix KodiUt. 

45LnSH Lcrawulftr, LG. 

34L Stlb..La 
ti^^H M.L.. kfiKblk. 

452^43. Scrtcn, Dtifay. 

54E Siib.« MiiRilffyier, 

453.23J, Opt., TTBiijKWtciJliir. 

233. MuliJta>eTi Kodak. 

674. Tonittij- 

454*088 

Ixtukiiiitir. 

357. OpL, Leiitiailikr. 

498. Sob.p Koduk. 

499- „ 

788. MuJiiLi^, LG. 

842. IxntkubLrp BipacX* (M.L«). l-Q, 
455.128. Subn, Klk^. 

230l Lcdtkukr, 

37L €^%, FTO- 

556. CoL Fonnct, (MX.), LG. 
456*279. YcHcw FOter. Kodat 


456,617. LenUcukr. 

818. Screen. 

457J26. Cd. Dcv.,(MX.L LO. 

476. Opu. 

654. L^ikukr Sccfte. 

S43. QpL Fnij. Fitter. 

458Ji6. Sub.^ GaJpf r. 

304 „ 

400. (M.U, I.G. 

4{TL Opt. IxniiculM. 

427. If Devnnrdi. 

428. *, 

452. 

4ST . 

458. H 

491. M Pipj. C.M.C Ccifp. 

m. S4lti.p Kpiinlu 
665 f *1 ,* 

459,027. .. Frbiiiti^ (M.L>. lO. 

J34. „ 2-CoIm Tdggi. 

634. Lenlkukr. 

636. Opt.* Jirfwstct* 

664. ,f Pywn (BelliDjihain 4t 
Sbuiie^L 

460|33S. Opi., Ocem-spliiier* 


Abu^vutmiki 


CoL Dev.—Cokiitr DevclisptnenL 
MX-^Miillilaycx pioces. 

Opfl.—Ojilkel *ynthcila i^rocm or 
cxcliisivety optical B^tibjcct matcer^ 
Suh.—Subtractive prPOtoi- 
Screen. — Mcsuk Bqeeeq additive 
pItsCCfS 

Lcntim]tirr^]jenl.kulDi Additive pro¬ 
cess. Embcsssud ^m. 

Mlsc.- MiScxllfliieotEi eetesor}'. 

PreJ.—ProiDctioD. 

2, CbL—Tw^btir. 

Tmbib,—Imbilntiiia process. 

Cot Rend.—Ccibiir Rcndiikiti 


Col. Cdt.—C^DU f eormitiijo. 

Sep. Layer,—ScpttTitTlug layers. 

13^ ty^ —l>yc destiiHrtlno or tUver 
NsacIi procQH- 
CtoL ReL^Golour Reieiieltr 
Um^losi. —UucIwj^kS: 

I.G.—I.G. Farben Indmtrie. 

Didta.—DIITmctkn proeeis. 

SetifiL—ScPJItjM'. 

Ocl-"GckiiiM. 

' Ma*!;—MMfcetL 
. Qrln.^-CjauLplaiL 
Prot—Protecied. 

' P-CC^Proieeied Ctdmir Courier. 

605 




riHiktAFHY 


4W,5a3. 

m. 

6 S3. 

46L006. 

559. 
fill. 

463,140, 

m, 

6J5. 
7IM- 
996. 
464,39fi. 
72J. 
$52. 
465,005, 
090. 
rfi5- 
52J. 
466,290. 
S2B. 
TIO. 
467,m 
fin. 
m. 

014. 

460,50$. 

509. 

560. 

m. 

m. 

946. 

469.JS9. 

759 

4)0.Q74. 

653 

»0t. 

$55, 

914. 

m 

4T1J02. 
297. 
520. 
5^. 
472 J0&. 
224, 
MA. 
644. 
9teH, 
473.422, 
725. 
766. 
782. 
993. 
474^53* 
666 


letlUcufor. 

Slit., IG. 

*, LecitkitEiij' fM.Lli I.G. 

11 k, 

Opt. Li%Eiculii. 

Sub., Kodtili. 

II Allisnn^ 2^34Jfl|, 

Opi, L^ticular. 

Li^tkiikr 

SiCKO. 

Siib.*(M.L.i, J.G 
I jntI i! 3 fclrtf 
Sub., Ga^.Ar< 


[.G 

Misc., Ciiwcofr>^* 

Opi. Ikam-aplittcr. 
rrwiro-Aw". 

Col- Pev.i lM.Lr, 1.0. 

Sub., Owurfcftrtiw/* 

CoL Dis'.* 

Sotmij.. KjxJ^ 

Sub., Caspar. 

Kodiik. 

Opi. Ffinting, Morcru?^ 
MuHiLii>tsr, LG^ 

Suh.H (MX.), r.G. 

Opi, 4kCol. Adililhie 
Sub, (M.L.) Stdnef. 

I, Murray, 

Opl. Beaiu-ipEiiteTi 
Lcniicular. 

Sub,, Spetuxf- 

„ T^siini. (M.l_> 

Ops, Lenlicufar Pnoj. 

„ BcELrn^jjttcr, Kquturek. 
11 Copyici^ Kiiinprcr. 

Sub.p IM.Dp Kodak. 

Scroeei. 

Opt., tCampIcr 
Orf. Den, fM.L.)p J.C. 

Opt. BcanvtplUscr.. 

Sub., Caspar 

II VI- 

Opi. fjernkukr. W, 

n SureCD. 

kk 

I. "CoJ, 

Sub.,*' 

Col- Dev,. Kudttk. 


474k$O0. 

spTiLier, 

0/fmkhrvff^,^* 

Sub., fM,U, i.a 
Opt. Pftun Bostu-tpIlSter. 
Sub., PqSiiik. 
bktlljla>^, Kudj^k. 


m. 

47S,I9L 

415. 

655, 

7$4. 

TtJ^ 

7116. 

m. 

476,460. 

672. 

477,236. 

421. 

524. 

839 

S4B. 

m, 

47U,05e, 

329 

500. 

501 

644 

7Ii- 

735. 

766. 

933. 

934. 
942. 
945i 
983. 
W. 

985. 

986. 

WO. 

991. 

479J52. 

m. 

480,123. 

164. 

25L 

287. 

29L 

487, 

766. 

T78, 

m- 

mjv. 

174. 

275. 

275. 

336. 


Opt.. Ttrknicohw. 

Sub., K^mf^er. 

« Ma]i|layer,{6L(-^ KC. 
Opi. Leailoikr, Tbotiu^ru- 
fiwiimi. 

Opu LfsciiLiilor. 

Sab., Kodak. 

Opf. Semn Pnntjfig. 

Filwts, 

Mivc 
Opt. FfcltJ. 

So^Dcn. 

Opt., NlHttuiu. 

** *f 

Lenticular. 

'll 

Sub^fc CuSpOTv 

OpL 4*Ci?i. Kainpfen 
Coi Dev,» Kodak. 


Col Cor. (M-L.ip 1,0. 

Id 

Lraitiicubr. 

OpL 2^:oL 
Mfiltdaytr* frwrfl/w, . 
Sub.^ 

■ k II 

Opi. LaiiKiitjtTi 
Sub , iM.L), t.C. 

*■ p» -ft 

Screen 

Sub,. (M.t,*. I.G, 

«. Coi [>ev.. I.G. 
ft |M.1..|,XG, 

Opt. 









4S1p30t^ Cot jyov-,m.UlhG 
501 „ p. „ 

W2, CM.L.\ GevDcrt. 
951 Opt. Aililiiivtf PtoI 
4S2JQ&&. y, LcntioJiir. 

614. „ .2-Coi. 

652. MuUlItti'tT, (Ml-J, LG. 
690; OpI. Lcnlkutiij. 

7J3. MuUil&ycTp LG. 

mfioa. Svi,, 

1^0. ,, 

035 . 

079. Opt. HlUmun. 
in. Smind^fMLL LG. 

31 9« LcntkiiJiii:, Koditdc. 

366. Stib. Cupar. 

461 „ 

366. Sub.. (M.L.1 Gjwpar. 
463. H 

4M. I* r* 

541 ^ CM.L). LG. 

Bl% OpL. HiUmaiL 

819. „ 


830. 

878. 

484.096. 

411 

69B. 

797- 

485.1«a 

552 

577. 

S6Z. 

861 

486,005. 

041 

107, 


*i H 

M Lntiiculitr. 

MihC. 

Irnbibititm. Tfckuk^fftir* 
Suh^ LO. 

Dptp LmEkraLir. 

Subt,, Pfiminjs. 

PrijiijiiS. Caspar. 
htlK. 

Sub.. fMX.). i.G 
Sub., mx-h i.c. 

»l »h *|i 

Mkc. Suh. 


424. Sub,. fMX.l t.G. 

495 . ,, 

496 . 

ST7. „ 

839. 0|>t. 

m. Sub.. iMUXli AM. 
916, Opt. Lcutkular. 
487*685, ^ 

769* Soumllbll.llC. 
941 Imblbitlan. E.B. Corp. 
4^8.048. Sub.* LC, 
070. Otrt, 

093, Subi. Gs^apsr. 

108, Sauna. 

391 OpL Lraikdur- 
488. Sub. 

499. Stmttur^ Friiraabr. 
548. Sub,*(MLliC. 


4S8J55. Sub,.fM.Lp>H TO. 

650, Cufur. 

835. Col Cor. 

833. Sob^.(MX.). r C. 

J3W3. 

I«l. .. 

161 

[64 1 ^^ 

185 Mj»c 
274 CoL Dcv.^ (M_ll LQ. 
299. Sub, Col. Dev., SpcMT^ 
333- Op!-, Ccirfftur«?/«W'. 

355. fp IflRtkularp, 

Sn^ I* 

529. Lciuiaubu:^ iCadttk. 
701. p, ICdl. (Belgian). 

823. Lcnikuliir. 

845. Sub., [MX.}p I.G. 

490^451 pp G^upor. 

468. OpL 

Sic MLklina>ejp, LG. 

511 p, ^ 

844. p* ^ 

491836. col. Ci?r.. CiWlMr, 

95S. Sub.-(M.L.l i.G. 

95^. ih p* ** 


¥¥ 

Tr 

ti¬ 

ll- 


CoL r>fv.. iMlip LG. 

523. .. Cof-p fhi,l«?. l.Gi 

648. p, Rend .Oll.L l.Ci 
671 Sub., Ga&par 
6T3. 

711, Sooml., Gu5pnr- 
850, Qpi. Leftuouljiri 
493JOiL Col. Cor. IML^ LG- 
804. Opt. Leoiicultr- 
869. CoL Cor* (MXL LCl 
879, „ l■luli^ 

951. ip KoCUik^ 

494pI44_ SmoX <ML.)t l-G, 

331 Op!,, llilimiiU. 

334. *p 
341 Col. Cot, 

4.56. Opt* Icmiculur 
495plQ0. S4^TKn Prinling- 7^t&. 

J 35. OpL (iLalionlp 

348. f* Lctilkiaurt 
353. Repe^itliut Bock. 

821 Opt- (Urlikh), 

898. „ ScTHti COerpfiapL 

931 Scampi j tier. 

496p049, Mise,p 1,0. 


116^ 

[95. 

145- 


Col. Dt\%^ Kodak. 


4* 


667 






COLOUa 


496.463 

558. 

m. 

75% 

U2I, 

W- 

497.463. 

m. 

753. 

m. 

mML 

W3. 

749. 

762- 

1169. 

870. 

rt. 

874. 

875. 
499,005, 

034. 

IJL 

L85. 

138. 

500J041, 

098. 

312. 

6lt. 

611 

611 

687. 

7M, 

Til 

1J3. 

TI9. 

720. 

T21. 

793, 

794, 

795, 

796, 
798. 
826. 
943. 

501.000. 

001 . 

001 

003, 

040, 

190. 

435. 

661 . 

811 

m. 


CiiT. Dev.* Du Dmi 
Sul?.^ Qiispat. 

Mi^c,, jyjA 
Of^u 

l-Col. Opt. 

CcpI. Cor. 

.. 

,, ,k Du Paol. 

Opt. Lcnikrulur, LG. 

Niue 2-Cotcrtir. 

Sub,, Gu^par. 

CoL Rend. 

Sub.p 

Z (M-U, Koduk. 

If- I4 

II PI M 

I# 4^ M- 

Opt. Bcim-ftpliltct. 
t* ^S^issj, 

CoL LG. 

Sub., tM.L.)p Koebtk 
.. linl^k.LG. 

,, Vene^oJ. 

HP 

Ope. LcniicalAr 
Sub,^ Kodak. 

PI PI 

« a iL While (USjy. 

„ Kodak. 

II 

«l IP 

IP n 

" Kodak. 

PP II 

1^1 |V 

PI *t 

ww I f 

„ SiqcK (Gertnen). 

„ Kodcik. 

II t.G. 

HP tMJL.),K0dSkk. 

t* -I *4 

IP II ri 

Col. Rend., K^k- 
Sdb., I-G. 

Opt (Aujmun), 

Col, Retul.. lunar- Dwm, Corp. 
Opt. Screen. CxiAj>, 

Sob,, Dur^Cliron^jL, 


501960 

501077, 

nx 

313. 

330. 

m. 

m, 

752. 

7SL 

3^4. 

822. 

823. 

324. 

825, 

327, 

845. 

873. 

939. 

940 

m. 

S(W.376 

505^7, 

099. 

214 

m. 

B34. 

861, 

^Xi4. 

25$. 

259. 

IBJ. 

331, 
359. 
450. 
514, 
581, 
637. 
667, 
727. 
327. 

507.009, 

151 

2hL 

351 

418. 

485, 

on. 

B4L 

508.031. 

4*8. 

301 

S09.224. 

2^. 

707. 


CoL Dot’,. KoflAk. 

Siib.j ].G, 

Op4.« Tnic Sl Celuncme Clrrp 
Sub., LQ. 

.* (M L.>p <j49f»r 

■ ■» rr fl 

Opt. 

Sub,. RcKkk, 

CpI, Dev,, KiTdik. 

Sub^ KhIuL iSchiridQd)^ 

Cat 13cv,« Kodak. 

Sub,, Kixliik, 

Col, Dev„ Kodak. 

I* m* 11 


Sub., Kodak. 

Sound. 

Stib- 

II 1.6. 

Cbl Rofid^ IhGp 
Sub, 

OpL 

t, (Iluifun). 

Sub^b MitftiucL 
Du Pont. 

., Cj«ysert 

C*l Car,, [ntcr, Cbcio. Corp- 

■■ dP IP PI PI 

Opt Lentieulur. 

Sub.p t.G. 

IP If 

Filter La^cr* QfniwJbre 
Souttd. LO. 

Col Cor, 

„ Rend. 

Opt MuitisCfWt Scaw, 

IP Dunniirg. 

Col. Cor.. Inter. Chem. dtp. 

Sub, t G. 

.. Qiupu, 


M. VktiKoi. 

» Koduk- 

FiUcf Litycf, l.G 

14 

CoL Road,. LO. 
Leniimkr. 

OpU 

SutiL. Kodak. 





509,9JS. &sb. Layer* 

±10,5;^, Sub . KoO^ 

59S. Col. Rend.* f.G, 

7^. M ki Kodak. 

&94. Sub,^ Gflapun 
511,039. „ LC. 

134. Pspof CFnfflch>, 

4^ Sub. 

535, (. Ge^nert, 

574- Ccrf. R™d., f.G. 
ftW. Scb. Djt Da, iSwib). 

710, Oil. keniL, LG- 
773. 

79a Sub,* I.G. 
m ^ Kodak. 
t04. LeniScular- 
m. Opi. 

512,060. Col Dev.J.G. 

541 Dji POnl- 

559* .. .. Kodak. 

563. Sub. ScAKTriDu^fti^ 
m Col. Rcfid.p Kod^k. 

7iS. OpL Uialtan). 

733, L^tlcikliir. 

751 Col. Dev*, Kodak. 

755. « Rcad.,LGK 

5l3,m Sub. Sep. Layer. P LG. 

244. „ lmb,.LG. 

554- Filter Layer, !.G4 
596. CoL Dev., ttfonL 
5)4,042- Paper, viotl Bufisa (Gefmany 
622. LemicuUit. 

955- Sub.- Gaspai* 

515*536^ Fros . A. G. m 
932. CoL KcfuL, Caspar- 
97|i „ Dov., Kodak. 

516,059, Sub,, Gii^ar. 

113. Cbl. ftend.* Dufay 

514, „ Inier* Qicen OMP. 

536v SouikI, Kodak. 

Siib*Sep.L{ijfler.. LG. 

O06k H ^ M 

> 19. Paper* Schmid lOcrmauL 
StO. CoL RcEul, Macjuiims (Ko¬ 
dak). 

TO* Sub, Oyx Dev., CueipArT 

937* „ Sflpi Layer. T-Gi 

956. ENiTtw:.. OjI. SU^ Cofp. 
517,020. COL Rend.. Kf^lefc- 
193. Uad«s$.J.Gp 
197, 0>L Dev,, llfed. 

265. f, Read.* Kodak- 
32K Filler La^, Curpir 
336. LcnticuEur* 

416, CoL Rmd.^ Kod^k« 


517,424. Sub., Kodak. 

425. IMjm.* CqL R«i. Cofp. 
559. Lah. D>t: Dts^, Gaaiiar- 

980. Sub.. Kodak. 

981. 

I 518,017^ Col. DeC Uf«^- 
215. Sub.. Gb^st- 
4n. ,. 

£12. Sotind, Giupar. 

7IS. Sub,. Kodak, 

7£t. &TVR. IteMon. 

, 812- 
81J; .. 

510,20#. Cal, Rev,. Ilford. 

25J. Pnq., Koin^er (Gcntam). 
419. Sub., Kodub. 

695. Col Dev., Kodak. 

790. pilisr LuiTf. Gaiinr- 
821 , Sub. Imb. iltaliginl 
5J0.076. Kodak. 

ITL Si^Und^ Kcdak- 
4T7^ Sutk.Gaapir. 

, J27, ,, 

I fit CoL Ocv^tUduk, 

529. SuK^Giupafi, 

575, fiUcr Layer, Czspar 

576, tEUtkolan 
52)^50. CoL Dcv.^ GcvacfL 


746. Stlb;i Sdtfiszcl ^Kodok). 

WJ. „ 


3^. *|. 

t* 

835k 1 * ** 

n 

636, ,* ** 

M 

S37, „ ft 

li 

SB8- 

967. Caspar. 

%# 


522^- OoL fteuii, LG, 

190. Paper, Oasparo 
6il. Sub. Dye Dei-, G^par, 

650, Unefass,, KocUiik^ 
ft96* Sub.* Gatr^ar. 

984. p Dye Dcr^v^ CiJncroidr* 
523.0SK CCfT. Rend, Gaspar. 

179 

230! &ih^ Gfl^. ' 

196. OoL p]|per, fkhnuccl f Kodsk), 
507. Sub., GflSpar- 
524^04a Col , Dev., Kodak. 

087* „ Rdui 

1j4, S^nd^ KodaL. 

I5L MuliJUiyef, Kodak. 

32£1. BttcrL&j'er, Kodak. 

365. iJsRiadar. 

3BL 

SOtk Fdfer Kodak. 


669 









CCiVfPtJJI ClNHM\T0GS14rKr 


524,55^. 

551 

534. 

555. 

m. 

557, 

i5S. 

579. 

m. 

9%. 

525.549. 

765. 

SOS. 

SID. 

S74. 

ff7S. 

974. 

526,71^7. 

934. 

527,495. 
329,0.13. 
117. 
1»0. 
279. 
440. 
674. 
707. 
974. 
530,6K5. 
53 J ,246 
261 
312. 
532.09fl. 
726, 

tm. 

S7D. 
533,56®, 
534.814. 
535430. 
MJ. 
41D. 
SI 2. 
536,228. 
117. 
329. 
191. 
463. 
466. 
S7T. 
6T3. 
7D2 
78U 
670 


Sil6.. Kodak. 

IP IP 

MuiuUyo', Kod-itk. 

Col. mv., Kod^k. 

Mitfir , Koduk. 

Soto Swnrouud, 

V\]m LsLycT, Kadak. 

ri *r 

S^b.^ CfiM:cvi<fr. 

Col Dc^., Koduk. 
SubL^Kjjdak 

Dev" Kodak. 

r* -If 

Opt, Prmtief* Jjeiukuigtr* 
iM.L.) tbronch). 

Opu B«rTh«plil(ert Hflrr»aii. 

Sub. t itntiraulHr K|ip1r0fty itr 

CoBlnJ iFraich). 

C^^i I3 cv» 4 KodiiK. 

Fast ScDftilizcrs, Kodak. 

SLiti.p Rllcf l-ayer, 

Tonkiig {SpaiiLih). 

Ik Gaiipar. 

Filter Layeiy. Kodak, 

Sub,, 

Obt- 

rf. 

» Kodak. 

Col. Dov.^ Kodak > 

RendKoduk. 

„ JOeVp^ Kodak- 
Swl[E2£i^ Kodfli. 

CoJ. Di;y., Kodak. 

,, ,, l]ford. 

LMtkUikr^ 

Sub.* Citftsoitfr, 

Sub., Kotlakn 

CoL Rend. 

G3ci|>ar- 

Col. Dcv.^ l>u Font. 

Sub,, Gittpor. 

OpE,p Cinecolor. 

Tetiinieahr. 

Fan P 5 «s, EIHot. 

Sub,* CMX.K KodaL 

Opt.f Tttknieolm’^ 

Sub,* Kodak. 

Col Dev., Kodak. 

Silk, {ikX-K Kodak. 


536,939. 

537.103. 

231 

256. 

466. 

696, 

m 

S6I. 

912- 

928. 

951 

970. 

53KOtl 

DI3. 

100. 

533. 

356. 

628. 

661. 

9L4. 

990, 

539.070 

S90, 

22E, 

266, 

27Q. 

3125, 

391. 

395. 

m. 

510, 

702 

703. 

7SJ. 

937. 

540.272. 

365. 

366. 
368. 

m. 

444 

445, 

451, 

525. 

S4I, 

563 

636 

727, 

760. 

931, 

m. 


Col Dev., Kodak. 

SeEBECiEen^ Kodiik- 

l>lnK:t Coupljcift with Gel., 
Kodak. 

Col Dev,, Kodak- 

M *p 

Opt, r^trA^itoJor, 

CoL RcniL 
i, Dev,* Kodak. 
HypertemiHr^ngp 
Col. Dov.p. Kodak. 


Couplers, Du PonL 
Toniogp Ciffe^otor* 

BI r I 

Tfchtkahr, 

Mstk. Ptiuti, Kodak. 

Col Dev.^ Kodak. 

TVirAfi^fii/Efr. 

Col Ikr^^ Kodak. 

Dye De^tiuction, Kodak- 
MidUla^er Bipack, 

Cbt. Rend.* Kodak- 

j> *w Pi' 

Couplen, Kodak. 

D^ Bleaob* Koduk, 

CsA. E>cv.* Kodak. 

Dye Bleach. Du Pwtt 
Dyo DestruciioUp Kodak- 
Col. Retid.^ Kodak- 
DiflfukiorL. Kodak. 

Dye DdUtKtioa, Kodak. 
DHTu'ilon. Kodak. 

Coll Dav,^ Kotlak. 

Scrticfn Suntsurjd^ ft-T.H- 
Prat Col- CouplQ^t Koduk^ 

>rr Ti VI fi 

Dye Fixer?, Kodak. 

Resin Adda, Ant^^haliaJou^ 
Ilford. 

Co4ouf Eimdsion, Kodak 
Fdlct Layer, Kc^daL. 
Non-DuTiuinfli Kodak. 

D>e Bkach. Kodiik. 

Frot CdtipItTi Kodak 
., Col, Coujdera* Kodak, 
Goupieif, Kodak. 

IP 

Gcvacfl. 

Coj^ Conttwl, Kodak - 
Kodak, 







rUi£r Liivcr. ICixUlM. 

970. TolMGg, A-O. Till). 

97 i . yjilijiayer Totting, A. G > Tu^t 

974. A.a. Ti*llH 

975. M ultib>icr T€niTHta A. G. T nil- 
97bL MuItElay^. Kod^ii. 

9774 1 k u 

979. Multilayer Tomiij^. A- Q, tuH 
541,073. i>it DiFv.p KodBlE. 

i66. MosLAiiw, (M. U > K oduk, 
I9S. Col Anli-mBsIclii^, 

iMX.), K04lAk. 

32S. Q5l Dtv.,Kodjit. 

33S, Fihcr Luyef (in D^c S;dU)i 
KwUitk 

345. Tomiig* (M.L.), A. G. Tii1I. 

5J5k li* k* 41 

353. P,QCk CHj Pont 
589. Vixed Col. Couplm, Kodak , 
339. Oil Coupki^ Kodak. 
m. Cel IJNji., Kodak, 

771 . 

ml Dye K^k 
542,904. Cb\. Coupkr, E^u Font. 
541,113, imbibvUon, 

290. Cot. Cuu 4 ?lei^ Du Fojil. 
F.CC., Mfirtittci. Kodflk 
544,064. P.CC., Kodik. 

100. imbibilkni R.did»* OmrutMlt^- 
120. CoL Couplm. Du FionE. 

132. HuorcKcnt M.L, Koduk. 

|J4, Non^DdFuskin, Kodak. 

135. Cuuplm iit Bxssn Siilt^ Kodak. 
IS9. tHi Fottl 

307. CoL Kodak. 

545,443, „ Dc^-., Dti FodjL 

jji 

• * I i I i IK 4 K 

446, „ „ Kodik, 

529. Filter taycr* Dye Res#n\ 

JEfanl. 

54e.J47. Col Kodak. 

527. Cdt Dn^^^lC-l.lDuFoiitl. 
Oil. Fitter l4i^er. Dye KrikLrt^ 

lirofil. 

667.. FetAflituMr. 

704. D>e Kodak. 

707, „ ,, 

70«. roter Fjiiefp, Kodak. 

S47.0M. Cxil De^,. Kuduk 

216. Trkk MoAkini^ Ttuhtriinttar^ 
442. Cot. Dc\,, IC.E. iUu Fnni). 
519, AuU^miukiii^ Kodak. 

722. Dje Tcrnins, A. G- Tull. 

447. Col. Dei.*, Kodak 
975. Bbcacli Bath. Kodak. 


S4fi,342. SutrulEiiUaii. Kodal^ 

549,141- Contra^ Conifol, TtchiHaihr. 
176 ArUk-diiTuAlOfU 7‘^Hite«4»r. 
544, Vjflfrk Prmlin^ T^thtik&l&r- 
5S7. Tontnu, A- O. Tull. 

68S. Red Ataorbini: Dy'ca. Ti^t:tfni- 

550.023, Filter Dayer, A_ G. lull 
70lt „ p, iPiWo Dy«J, 
KpttiiiL 

994. Tonine, Du Poue. 

551,008. Filter, ^M-i-j-MiwJi- 
116. Transfer, ( M.L),!Du Fonl. 

117-1211. Col. Coupte m lndci5cTiJ+ 
eut Layers^ (M. Lip Du Pont, 
211 Filler Ltycr, A. G* Tull, 
few. Dk ^^>^K Kodiik. 

SOL dlestdi-oui, Kodak. 

614. Mi4akkl& KjodttJc. 

799. Mcliil Toiun^ A. O* Tull, 
sod TcFfiingi A- G, Tull. 

930. reti^udtufoi-. 

552,008. 

009. Cuupkn, Du Punl. 
m Toning A. G-Tull 
351.064. Oil. Dev., Kodak. 

196. Mj4kiiti$ Tcchtuctuc. Kodak. 

230.. n 

377, ToElinbt. eW.p (M,L|, Cooic. 
506. Col, Dev., KodiiA, 

■50'7* ,, ,,, 

5£6» Dye dcs-tr.» Kodak. 

751 . timre Tonin^fc A. G. 1 ull 
752_ SdccUve A, C. Tull 

879. „ ., 

952, Tomu^. A* Gi Tull 

96L ,p .p , 1 ^ 

96i2. PI 

963. Bififtek* A, Q. Tuil 
554^302, RojRitin^ Du Fotil. 

555J0I4, Ftli^ Lu^, Kodak. 

L67, Beanvftplittcf,!BbiEnJ. 

442. p. .f Gcra^n. 

m. U.V, Fiticr Uyor. Kodak, 
728. Aati-difTusion^ Kodnk. 
156.003. FllDe# G<rv»fiii. 

416. Beam-splitter. 

S7T, S4mOp Polotoki. 

611. Scitind TmelL, Ttckniei^^ 
766. CoL Dcv„ Du Font, 

ASS. Couiu^t CoL Dev,, Du Pcmu, 
557,198. Tonutg, A . C* Tuil. 

750. Kodtsk* 

302. mi. H ■■ 


671 





COLOUR CINITMATOGRAMIV 

5J8,W SetwitijEwv K<i4alu 

25$. Fog Inhibttojv Ko^nL. 

452, Fixing SfifTWizcrv, KoLbck. 

835. CoL Dev., Kodul^ 

560,371. Scioetiie Scpanation Mooo- 
poiik Ltiyier, a 4 Upar. 

56L674. MaakitWpiCodiiic. 


I 561,W, CoL fiends Koduk. 

562jt54. Stiokaig, Kod^k^ 

565^584. Ost Cor., T^k/deohr^ 

3fiS, „ „ 

I 566,346. £i«. Ow.. rmw.CHcin, CSarp 


6T2 




















































































































































































APPENDIX 2 


\UNi ANSCO PROCESSING MACHINE. 
MODEL 4C. FOR ANSCO COLOR 

REVERSIBLE HLM. 


SccHm 1 


HV Anscu Cdor icvDmbl4f lA-mm- finictsssiilif Mockl 



developed hy the An«jco E6-fiiin+ Division, ‘widi the cD-opemdaQ oL ihe 


Anieo Eniineerini; iXp^rtinent. The mtwliinc provulc^ tjjc preebc cawoL 
over processing fonditicuns lAhijeh is so lii colour work, li TufthenDorc 

^Idi a prodiicbon volmne ol a verr utiiTactOr^ ^gunc—nbenit >,^00 R. pet hour 
ufopemdem. 

Tt^ niumial discusses the mechanical operAUan, pnncipLcs of film drive, uiiuIIa- 
liott. Anil other iructeti peminiue lo Uic proemioi uuiti. The plumbiim, nMsthad 
of repkMij&hnxi]i, 2 ijid toliuioD-nil^cimi; %yi^crm ere covered In n scpnnttc mjmuj:ii. 
In Uk tycax future 4 m^utuat cif tecosmwtdcd piitakc^ for Aiuco Colcir teveriuJ 
lutHjnitorics will be usuod. Tlii& will discuss^ Hundardized Jncthdds of receiving, 
delivery^ Idciuitkuiioh^ ^cocml daikroDtri pnicti«t> solution ccmtioL smA cohaur 
sciifiilometiy. 

Eniifn^rKithrn 4?/ UnfiJt 

fUTcrruig lo Ihc gcncml dmwing (Fig. 326)p ibe four nuiui uniti. am. wiEh ricspcci 
to die liirectlon of iUni i«ivel; (1^ mm ck^^mor* durkroorai prooekmig scciiuo, 
{3j whildighi processing section, and (4) drying eahinel, 

£l^;vuf^if 0>H—Mouittcd 00 ibe front of ihc elevator c^bltiel is the film fUAgaiinc^ 
with nitn nin-cxu sigjuiii. Theekvjuor ipooLbank is at llic pot for utreet^ 
ing iht dcKcnl of the lower ipooLowfnhly h at and the film breakage indiciTtor 
is all, 

£kvr^ra(77ii Sfrn&n r2>.—The Model AC machine is sapponed eniTre^jr 

on u tpecudly d^oDod oinuimraJ okd fnimework. Tb« me of thU ^ueel rromewvtrtc 
m/ik«$ the machiin endrely setr-mpportitig ditd dlmi nates ihc moesfity of ouppomng 
Ihc drive and hohUng mcchonliim from Uit oeLiins of ihe ik\eUtpltig footti—«a wav 
ctulomary on iIh older modets. Tfib impiovod fcatiue makes it easier to iiJign 
ihe driving imuolliiiiaft imd citsuie* pcrmojaccit allgntneiil: tsf the parts omse ihe 
iKftibly hofi been accoinplkbed. The main itmctund steel framework cousins ol' 
mo iDJepcodeot soctiuEo—one for ihc itokrooni procesaing lecdoii nnd rhe oiher 
for ihc white light pruceuing sectlonn The two am separated by [he dtifkriKim wnJL 
The «o»1 fmtnszwotk of the darkroom tcciKm is $howo on iho drawing by the 
hcuvily outlined members. It ha» many bmetions. It sopporEa the hwgottal 
driiie Sihari I3L’ which dcrivei its power from the drtsit shnR <9> OTiuog from the 
white light leedim. A spiitiL rrtitre g^r ba\ {I0J fonm a Jum^hm of tlx two ihufU- 


' See oiio the section ihnpitih A-A on the drawing- Several parta are de^ifnatod 
on this and on iho plan view^os wtll u on iJit^ ckvation—whanever the Itxalkm 
or form is bener n&alizeii m iceuon or ploii. 


673 



rOLOl?H ATUGiKArHY 


A B|sceiiil box OU travels ui) and dovH> Uw licjcaifOJwE sludl and b amched 
lo tJie miMfl ^poal-battl fnsme |15>^ "Htjc mHtn ated fhamework aUo suprxirts Lhc 
hommuf mediurtbfii for t\w spooi-bank Tronic, h ojniiiiLv of a liobtirti; rKlumw 
^ niosor {iaKilrivtrfnJ huhE chiinu Ti\c coiiiiitrwcisbE? 

ipr ihe ItMio lire botLwd Lei lhc twtj lur^ oonicr pml\ of Ute main fratiii:ifctfrl£. The 
imin fniinc^urk Serves ui n 4i;ppprt for ihe spooi-baak fmme in Itsproee^jg 
poBitJoa ill the four cotn^ rcu pnifiu (16). ti atio providjes ven^f fruid£ iruck^ 
<I7J ^ong wJiicIi i^rwvvd roEl^rs [18) otuuibed to iEk SEWl-banfe frame \fa\vl On 
one hkT ihE comer puna are lociM Ehc ivpo limit swibdws f|9i for iho ^pwl-bonk 
imtrw: hoiai. 

The uiuiti ^pooUhaiik frame {E2t j? j ngtiJ sirycture of oluniiniuTn ajiyEe pJecofi- 
It supports iht seven lilni spoot-biinl:* of this jwx-Uoii l2f3^. the hurinmlaE driw 
assembly fur UKse (Zlk ihe cmsvovcr spools tbe rubber squeti;^ (23), unJ 
the dnp gnjarda iindiir the spoob (24). fejcLi spool'feiirlk cauilsU nf int upper amJ 
Itwer ^Kuibt^or (25 md 25AJ,* apglic side support (261, tlw drive 

nu 127) iipil i\ic two iscar (2S and ISA), One solution tank is desiiimiced 
at 29, jjnd the odieni are obvianj:. 

out of the derkroom section ihirm^ ihc Usht-tiiiiii piiss^ 

DOJ( 1 ^vF'i 

Pnflecftifljf Ssctkm (3).—Tfw Vrhitdijihi processing section Is a jjnEl 
pf^tJ^lly icJcn[jt!al Id principle wisli the darifoom jeclicwi. Li is, a con- 

n^tkliJy iD^ssr imil. 7hh etira Jcnylh ^equeres oentfe posts (31) foi die support 
ol Steel fraiiicY.pik. imd simkal hanging U 2 ppon nxlfi (32) ibr the octelk section 
or tire spoor-bunk frame. 

The second exposure luftlt (33) k located over ibc nrsi tnuk of this Hsction A 
TOond bntakn^ indEcBtor (34) is iniUiJbd as a cruM^^w spool bcnwm tfie ninlh 
una or ihu xetmn, counting I'rmtl the pas^box end. Tbo Vuridriv’c 

unit (3^ IS li>sited in the lupcritructum of tiw; sioet ftnrmrwprk. Oi^r paru 
whjch tlnvl^ the same funtlion as klcnlDciiJ parts in the darkroom mlkm pecil poi be 
cnumeraEcd isgaki here. 

7>ifn.>ffii!rjifwr &/ Dm remotely controlied VarkLrive iddk provider 

pOw'crioj the entire duvelopjrtg macbluic- Variable sooed of from nhniit 3s rn 3h fr. 



by sct-scfef^v 



boxes nne 






Ai*PirND:x 2 


Powr r^f Lbc in the drying; ca&iDcl is taken ofT the hexB^nat &bafE 

Ilf the whitoilght unji ihrmii^ n ^intl tniirt enr bo% flOA't mmititeil on 

A low ^TOo&phcce of i^ic TTiAin fnimet^vjrlc A hfomcoauii ^hiiTi sp^am the sepamEion 
1 :pctH’ttn ttbc 0 car boot and the drying cabtiiet and nurs ihroush the i^stbitiel. it h 
tmeFriipud at louw afvooJ ^tisecnbJ^ by a miEre gejj box Intck whkh it 
gKLTtd [he spoot'baiik iHiafong upon Vkhidi ihc spools are asscmbtetl and fa^teiied by 

( 4 >. — phiDDe^-oDS'icfed mllcE^p lumlns hy friction qf iheconuct 
iJic back of the lilfp^ are ihuwn bHI. Oitt^ ^ the ptiniUcn^ U 9t 41, ihc path 
of iir boin^ iadiiutcdl by turo^’S^. On the machiive end of tbe dry ing cabioet arc 
mounted ihe air s^uttgcei (4J). On the extreme end of ihc drying cabinet the com*' 
pertHlciT ifOlter (,44> and film taktsip wl (431 nre Icscaled Both of these 

lii^l atu liriven by shAfUriE gonred difough tivo^r boxca (4^ nnd4T) to thchoiizonint 
drive ahjifi of the drying cabinet, Sinot both the compems^tor rolSer and riEm itcbi 
have larger diameters thin the legjitar machioc spool*, pear box 47 fimsi redticc the 
r.p.Tu. of the main mochtoe shafting,, and it is, oomequcnEJy, kt \Kvei redactiem 
geuf. 


ti- CoiHTa.1 Ehrlactpleti uf Film E>rite 

FmfwJT Drive 

No sprockets uie used in iho mcjchnw- The film is carr^ and rtopcflcd entirafy 
bj PEmoolhu hiird-Tuhbct spoott Thenefore, tho ddyiug pow applied to the film 
is due to frictsem bctw'e^n the b 5 u:k of the litm nud the spooh* In oriier to have this 
fon^ aet 40 the tiini» a slight tenuon tnusl ba phteod no ihc nitit id bring the back of 
the h]m ugiiinsE tjic ipooL lllis tKHlou U of the order of one ounce or Jess. 

li ia Oftt of the fujKiions of the compdisitor roller at the wtnd-up to apply this 
u;n.^u» If, whlh the madthw b ruoniag. the compauoior is ilUcrtijj*cd i 4 J=id Use 
wtud-up reel atsoh slinck will besto to foint in the last bank of the drying cabinet 
and will pTO^giw in wHveforrfr towards ihc elevator. At the ckacl rrioment ilitck forms 
Ai liny Fowcf in\x spOiiL* (Ims spool stops driving. Jn a few seconds the film will 
stop diTvlna in all parts of the machine- If, on iJ» other hand, the corntwosuior 
is engaged, lUcJc will be taken Up at die ioat roller of tlic dryiiig pjbinel uruj pro- 
giessiveJy frofn tlicre nil the way bi*ck to the ekvi^or, and drhlng force will be 
applied at each spool at fhc moment ^L^£k k taken up. 

Ad kbmical ociioti (4kes plooe whenever a. brcJk in ihe ilFm occurs in eiitur of 
the procesing •onkins or in ihc drying cabsiwL Tins principle then hcdomiA very 
intportaiit> beams the Qlm bchuMl the break flops, aod therefore cannol pile up 
m the mainline ai die hn-akape potoL Breakuea ImU^tors will aiipuii on irtimedliiie 
shut-down before the two serous of the him hatie wpariited too far to perntii lui 
cmcTEency iplifx to be nnide. 

More hnportsiil ilill u ttic beJiavunir of rho him dri^iiu by this pmtdrie in its 
nomm! path thTpugh llie varioui solutions It is wdl knuwu ilruL film espoEids 
in length and widih os h beccaw- wet durjus proeoatini;- also cxpamli and om- 
irjcia In fitim baths of dlfTcfcnt tcinpcrdiurcs. Of of differem chemicid 

cofnpositioni, hut ihc ^^ncral ictukucy h one of progiessive exjmraion, especully 
dtiring iho hrtc huiT^hotir of weitioif- This property of lihti must be compeospied 
for in mitdiuie dev'>elopmcni,i of undue amouhu of tkick will form on die spool' 
banks. Our applicalibn of d» fricUfjtHJjive principle does this cFOcictidy- When a 
(Siljht amouiii of slack forms under d spool, the spool docs not assui in pcqpclUng 


^ Tlw film rtihcn. or spools, are uodercut with a shallow radim, but a tlighily 
rtnuhdal shoulder U provided w a bcanllg surface foi the extreme edye* of ihc fihn— 
dutSkJd the iHcH'omtions. 


675 



roLDim ciN'tSMATOcRAPHT 


the Rta « delay oT fllai driv-c uke» pla*, juid the »pooti ahead tTw non- 
drivin* one take up the sliittk- The pirooeto ii* of emiew, of itiomcniaiy mtun 
dtid itfii observehte in the onUtuny cTamiaaiioii of the fflacfiine,. no d«o:isM« 
amounl of alack U ever pennittad to f«m. It u aka ooiROl u» think ofliic spoola as 
beme driven tVithily fststtr than the film, sitiie a unal] amauni ol' sHppct^ mint 
tike pbtt mwncDtarily on ali driven ipua)% which nre lanrying j^tpuadinj film, 

Lumwr SpDiff'AnttmMy Drirf 

It may be uaketl why ihc !o«« vpoot-aMwitJiei are the driven tmei while ibe 
upper Spoils are allawed to idle. The upper and kwer fdriveiti ipotrt.jtwembjjes. 
sene tniireiy djifereat purposei. The upper 34^e^lb^y can be cotuidered the litm 
ranwr, fw it is these ^la whidiwppoti the weight qfihefitm. Th* lower iuseoiMy 
i» ilte driver, and tlik assembly senes to supply Jlie poweEr for ctinveyinf the ftlni 
ihrwigh the machine, W* have wen that a valujtbiB princfpic of the machme lies 
in its refusal to drive stack litra, aint* Lbc film nilt lose cftoiacl with the lower 
tdrivingt spoob. if ary af the upper spools we driven, the weighi of the film 
ItanEmg oti lbc spook woroid pwe sufflcieui frictiiut to fame drivutg of ihe film- 
even though a break or eojiaidemble airKMints of ilack might JU; aheasl of the driving 
points- 

A furtlier precautiem it taken in prevent the driving of slack lilm. This lies in 
the lurge woahen whktl icpaiate each spool af the upper spool^ssemblicsirani ib 
ailjoining two spools, Thk wqshcr k keyed into a slot in ihc sfena and eumat turn 
It efiemively prewtis arty (op spool frotn drivmg its neighbouring spools by rriciiiiji 
bciwwi the flunscs. 

Vihm Ihe ^icl atm enica ihd dryieg ^titJUci k bfqfiQ 5 to Jose m a£ximru(fli«l 
wTiicr, aiHl in so doifl| staru to miuTi lo appmuiiiately in ori^ginal drv diincmioriSi 
fiy th€ niKldk of the tliJfd dryinji spool4^nk, Oie mm imi tpczomo dry 

TO iho loudi and appmmbb shorter Uijm oneoiciiJi^ ihe tLyf^ut aihtrau n Ji 
Db^Toiu mill the film Mtiol he Ukm out of the eahinet ju ibe same riiljt that it wat 
IP^I in, Et is liK fmicUoEi of ihc rolkir ioeoennertsate for this diflfetetice 

The film antenna ihc cabinei Imi m niis rmticaUj lo tbc imiiii roaot^ive 
•p«d os caladjited from the tpool drarntfimeniDe liojca ihe r.p,in. The compeimior 
howcHu, most have a sEower Odi^ cTy rate Uwn iliis—a vaJiio of ahtnit 08 per cnil 
kai than the nirtiji Hnerd'orc, the oompcnsaiOT huft 4 einsumfcitiK*! 

aiTullcr by this mliic thna would be rwitiited Tof it to deliver film si the rate of ihe 
mum qxjol-dftve, Wiih such cmttpcstwaiion. the filio ihronehont iho (Irriite cubtitei 
remains at ibomiai temion. 


TIL DtvcMhia of Liuif^ 

JEbi'iOfif^r LU 

£Uinttt)t Afitgariar-—The elevator magarine luts two reel i^indks cich of which 
u flnotl with two friction dutch plaia lo pirveni ihe rod of (Um from lurning loo 
freely, and thus ditniimte sLidt foniwiion at the loading potni. -nie frirtion b 
fl^tiiuiUe by a coil spring washer, imtl mn asstHnhly, which pn»« two etuidi 
pUlcs lo^Uutr- a large fell w.-nher temg between the clutch ptalcs. This iidlustment 
^tenW he at the niinhnuni iKcessaiy to pteoent slack formiithiir as the film Ic.wes 
Ihe t«l. The best test of the adjuttineiit a nuide with both u full red niiil an ^ Trw'w* 
empty rail ilie to romUon of iho spindle vunn wi,b the umouiii 

of rum oA Ute loci. While the iruichuK is iij operama, dosely ottacrw the perfoim- 
uiioc of the lower spooi assensWy (of the ebvaion w ihe iJghi of the Rk w; fricUnn 
ndjummcfH of ilw ted spimUcs, The cievaiof jJioufJ, of coune, »uiy op^u duriua 
676 


appendix 


ntJtroAi rannw^ of liw mndilJM FiuihcrmtifX, if thfl <ilin lit dumiiftl Tor 
fmrpctie?*, tlic ekvaloi: wiH slar^ u> clow. M ii cKpcni ijd the rde^ flf ihc cWnpttl 
r'llm, luid flturts lo im'kxl alouvly Jownwurd, the hcJiiiivkiiir ct the i.upp1y rod when tht 
iim'cf ^ptxvl^KTEibL^ antucis. ikte -irmtor bt lo bo closely Tl^ o□UIrtfi^^ 

■MjjibitrtB of the Towtif ipool'fliscmb^y iJit ef ctiurw, a fseror to be eortiiUler&i lien; 
([Jncuued iHiricr £i^vjf 4 >r CMm, page 671*j. In h fn^y not always be 

possible to secure iin iik^l adjustment of iht w>'eral rnatora in^^l'wsil U 
riMssary If* dux!. Iw hand the too fipkl Iboding of the film olV ilie snpply roel 
disTinit tlie fh[S of iho bwor ipool-^assemhly, «p«“i3.lly immciJiatcly after it ciMiacts 

ilbe urresTcrr « x — 

ll ^hcHiltl be added that tthati^v'ey minimum adjustmcnl of ihe ^pintlw ffitiion 
plates iaMnade. iL should be su^unt la priivefii stflfiL ftinhation on nartitlg and stop¬ 
ping ihe inuchine driiTC- ^ , 

It is pFiiin tiuit a fricticm adjusimcnt of ihis Itind resuitj m daenis tensinn on 
Ihe film sdny into tli« ijlevaiur and eho ou the Sim in iJm do^^aror. The value of 
thia temiou is IhDwl the one oimec ot less requ™! to drive i±ri pm lu ihc 

processing sectiatts This fact o ticn fllaimnig^ sltmx the dry lilm will toisrate 
siderabiy paoro ihan iljc wet lOin. A ijitnilar condioen: of umufiial tension 

exists fit. ihe fttm wind-up reel on ihe very (Htd of dw! ittodiinE^ wlicns fiifiher len^toh 
h ftcoc&sary to wpptl up the ftEm properly. Here 4 F-*bi the tilm Is dry. b^evcnlieteis^ 
icrvsion should in the best pfiieiioe be kepi down lo ibe rnijiimnm Viilibe* roMntrftl, 
Tthikm at nil poims In ihe machlsie may be mcMUied b> spllemg a lat^ robber 
hand Into tlie leader snd rutiutng it ihrough the machine At vanous paihls tn ihe 
mndune the nmDunt of unetch of ihc rubber hsnd w nwiaured nodi leeonJed. 
The ttibbci bmd aswnibly ia ibefeiif^er calibroied by Tcmoving it end kx-idiug it 
wi[h variems tukEnce weight*- For each wriEht a !rirtld:t value ia mmurod from the 
rubber b^nd. The reiilUnnshipi ran bo graphai to assist in mrefpolntinR hctwwi 
iTieasorod values. 

Each nipply rod ipindk bsupplied wiih a wmple device to tiFDimciate the revolo- 
itofti of the *piudle hy means of dO audlbk signal As lung ihc opc^tur h^rx 
thh sqpiali he Icruiws that die ■upp^y rod n iKiyEng out him- An ttildilional Mfely 
dtvke niiij be initiilled insjjilc ibe clevaicir eabhtet; this consisfa of a mictoswiteh 
mounted on the inside p;iTtilion and a oonidci'niiifcing piece moinii^ on tlie wwisr 
Jtpoohaaenjbly. Wlwn tlie tisw. die mKicswitcb h diHed nnd a 

bell or huizer sounds. T|ic optmtor tnow* tliat ihii ngnal means the etevulor n 
downg. and If Uiis occiPii wlien the film shoidd he feeding Uh luiuhiRtt.. the^ 
dimi:iUty Ft remedied at onoo before Ibc film breaks owing to a devatot. 

Each spmdlc » further Kippllfiti wiih n lilm ruo^JUt waming signal device. CSn 
the cud of thiidevij!^ a small plailic mllfif h firted* DiirinE operaiiun of the rnaciime. 
this rolbr rtsii ofl the boefe of the film an ihc red. Ihe dpcfa^iur should chrcfc 
fhtily to vx tluiL ihh rolLer tuntt frMly a lim^udjiUfCrwti of the signal nevkx 
b 10 be mitde on insuiltalion., Tina set-screw wtucfi (octs the unn to the ihufu ug j* 
looactrtd, I he piusik: ruUet a pljical in ccnlact with abour 60 ft. of film tin the slan^d 
red: now, wIiLte the lever arm behind the loiding cabinet w held the 

twixchi ibe set^screvi ifi' set in This will give uIkrii one miniilc WLirnliig ul 

liic tuu-otu. A second adjustnieni Is iimtic al ihe rcucruswisii^h* where a bcl- 
ictew ji ii 4 jusled to pre^'cnE more theft the newcMiQfy pressure belnig tippUed U> the 

switch buUOft, , ... i. # L * I 

The machine is deslpicd 10 operaw with L^M) 0 <ft- redv, w hich tiuist be of 
ftfliigtdj type- $c|iiftre spuwlle Itolci ate nficrasiry on both sides. IIMTutlng rods arc 
apt to wobble on the splndXcs- At the tfcvaior ipiaga/Lne ihb may enuie ilie iftuill 
pIftidJe foOct lo make ktcral scrawhra on ihc hack of the fthu- hi the ^sc of 11 k 
w-lnJ-up loek. ihc edges of the ftangci may mw ihtedges of the crstcriiig film. iViatjy 
rceli lire obaerved to k^vc shariP edgm tin tlic cifcujnlcftc’Kc orilw llaages. These are 
iujuriotiK «|Kdaliy if tlwv b^mc aieked. Such rods should be rmi on ■ hitlic 

677 



COtOlrR rtNEMATC>r>ftA V 

roufulqd off With rtrtit Kilfing paper, keeit be teept eJe^n 
QiKf shoufd be 'iEUrcii bi the Cttni pioviJni far ihi* puipiiiCr 
The ittda ,ire *^n lEbe ipinJia m siach ^ manner ih3i tit filnii ^iuch sJicnilii 
be wcnimJ nTtul$icjn *kto Inward, k fed alf Uw boliom of ibc red. amJ the rUm |iomci 
dlfKlIy tu ihe flr^t tpaol of (he uppcf benk in liieefevutoir, wi Ehoui lwiiiui|L 

m i(t pafh. S^tnoe piov^^Tn hu hawi mniic in the Eiujpi/inc for two recl&, it u weH 
m ta^ fldvnnta^ of this by kwpinjg iwtj reels of tUni loadoi nt dJ the one 

reel betnff, of «nirw?^ in rwarve, "Hm wHi redhoc: ihc time in\ioh'cd in splicinj^ on 
new reel when, required, dtice it will not bo occeiSiir> to linniife reds jti the 
ow. ihe fun-oot bnnirr ^oimils> the operator shonfd iftkt the film by ilie 

Qtid bo alert for tho monout. When iht cod of i he film tavei iht iwL the 
“niped In the tittle dei^ icc instdkd fdr ths purjWo. About one fool of ftini 
on ihc rmi reoL Care h taken ilui ihe film do« not tocri' 
W the Cittomrcreocc* of ihe new reel and Ehat II a. led djlKrtls^ frum the botloiu of 
ihe Ttel lo tSae clc\ iiti5r, olcar of Ihc ^lumpiiig device. 

FJriatitr CrJ'Awr.“Thc ctc\'ator cabineL oansiai^ of an upper anJ I jwcf «{>ool' 
iisfiCmbJy, neicher bcitig fnaudltDc-drn'eit. The lowi?r one ii motmtiDci on n H:iia]n 
aii^scnwon which pemtiu it to riao ohnoa to inoct the iippin^ Thii^ h j 

uniqiM; pnnppitf of elevator ?pcioi suspension and «|iiali*:s uneven torquo in (he ck- 
diam iiid uprocket Kttpemkm. If ih« end of the dim b cbmped fot ifiltdng. 

. of Uic film in ihc elevator bcocinieii ihortof us the fotwnrd proc^iu^ 

toi oua puU^tiie filrn out of Uu cJevittuT. The etevoior holds suffidcnt him for ubotd 
lwd mmuics o^roTiou at nCHrmal speed- After tha splioc Hoa been nude and iJk 
mm toicaw. ihe olovatbr open* as the lowtr spoolmsatittbly fulb sEowTv u> ibe 
bottom ^ lEu rabinet, where ils faU is urroted by the nwchflnkai iluili poL To 
piwde n\m fiK ihw psponskm, the Ripply meS mtui feed faster than ntirTTully. 

The Eoii^um on the diam suipcmJDn ij ailjustuble hy lurnbuckh^, and tht^ slinuld 
be %et at ^ mminmm required io inamtain ihe spoohos^ntbly in its proper path 
oq^lind on baUi i:hitiii4% In order to fall, tifw spoofassemhiy mmi overcome 
»w r^flnoc of the ff^oa of Ibc ebun uod beano^. ibc rdedon oF the aewaJ 
nlm iptfoU and of ihe ^pply red spindJe fricilon p\m. The wdghi 
^ I tno loihxn spool-Bssembl)' b more Uipn sLidlueni up do this* and iti order tu prevent 
ill loo rapid faJl it ts couritenreighted by iiwtuuiing oooiainces of loaij shot on the 
wde or the diatn siispensitfft. The amount ot Ihh COulltcTW^ighlraf skiuUI 
be nuaimiim which will pcmiit the lowtjr bank to fall frcun a raised poslitnn. 
While puIIee^ ihe him off a mppjy nd which has ertly a few turns of film on \L 
afui wnu* tt under fnetion due lo the dutch piatis of the nset sptiidM. It iho\M 
iUio be cqtndiadd between the two chains. Too liitJc cmmtetwcijghfiiic wmild pkee 
unnccesMry iinini oa the Ihm wlien tlie fewer bank k in a rm^ tioiitioti: white 
loo mi4di wxjuJd net, of 1 : 01 ™. pcmiit the bank w fall 10 Towet position The 
practice ciT smiintf the lowvf bank down with a stron® jmtl ^houlii he dbcouriMM- 
^»ux thuv stnJn must be taken up by iho Him 00 iha spool-honk. 

— Just before kxvin^ the elevator cabincl, the iWm w looped 
spool of LE breakage tmliaior. Jhi% spool ts kept rolatUiij by the film 
I ■ i* rotatiDn shisnld otax^.is will Happen in Uie rase of a breok-Ui drcuU 
IS doKd 10 Ting a bell or bu£znr. The dcctrieul prmdptcs of this are discutfed in 
bectioa V, po^ 

P^tnaiKg Unit {1} 

Spofij-Baak HFrnmf.—The several p^^rts of the darkroom pnxxraiti® unil 
nave enumerated, the power traitsmJssJnn ffom die Varuiriv^ to the loww 
Wmi-hanls rraowl, and ihe hoisniij^ system for (Ik mom spool-bartk frame oiulhitd. 


^ ll h&t been foucul frreferabEc to load only 1,400 fl. of fibii on Uk i 600-ri reel 
6714 






^I'PESDIX 


ne main -srod-baitk ftaJne is « luifo stmctui* of 4 iTurttnsuni «™tiiial 
to which the spool-bnak suppona aic boittii. in the " U *tite j,t ^ Wi» 

of ihc mMhine h loaitol ibe driw ihdi ^tsscrnWy for ibo soooW^te with m shaft 
ihiifla, coimlinsi, atid ijcar ■Hw boUi chains art: rtiUchcU tfl the 

bank rmmFB &t the fmw nn:i bn i)ie opefftOns i3ie fr^tne ^ 

four boSts at (he four eoniC«. Thew bolti are nosmlEcd on the main 

rraroc^fttk (eicaipt ui iht imiJ. they ihnauted mto tlw 

fmiTOf). The ftiT^>oS-bank fmiM hjctu uioovcd noUcn m each end which nm 
Blcns the vcrtieoi imidc ifftcks baiilt an to the nutin frame- On iltc ipoohli^Pik rnuTK 
aft mtmntAd tlic otss-ovcp tpook bdw^ wiih drip guiirds. end Uic totuiion 

7*r The fcatuiw tif ihe Jcv<--fl Itlemicd spool’hanks of Ihisi seeuoft 

Witt now be Jistossetl with reference to the tteuil drawme Oit the ^plwJ Bctwrai 
assembly dt^winj. Eiifh hank eo«i»ta of fmir stahiieM swel utii^ su^rw Ub> 
boiled lo the ulutntnium frartJe on ooc tide and (o the gear bos, on the otter tdri^J 

sltlo. Thtsc serve as 5iini>ons for the upper siwot-ajMnWy shaft and tolho bcani^ 

and gear (bs of iht lower -ipooi'aMcinbly ahafl On tlw upper shaft ite mouried 
twnniv-flie hnnl-nibber, rree-tuinin* spools Each of ite spool* U_^-ani(^ fimiii 
its nci^bours by vnulieti keyed Into n sUn in the shaft, rbe shaft ft “tdmM to 
tte support bv a pin In the shaft, and the slot is ra»l dooTiwanl. A tobtl of in, 
spool cleaninw it left on Uk rtaft. and thft ft dLuributtd union* the spools Ihc 

wiishet* Across ills shaft ^ . .i. ■c.-n 

The lower tpwl juaetnbly consi«* of twcnt>’-ro(if nwatv,^attJH;hisd to uic i^ft 
by set-Ktewt and jupnroted by plates («}, which hate ilw ftindcon 
s tiicli lobiw ftom slipping over the spool iLinges The plutcs are wip^rl^ by U» 
alisniiie sbuft Hill for the shaft bcsritigi- A tmall Iwp *«JJn! thafi (») ft inserted 
tbiDugli the nlita iiTuJcf the spools to keep the tlmt m ibc proper chamwi. 

The lower Spool fliiaft enters the mhw box on the dri«n end und B rohitrf 
by H vorticitl shaft enicring this imtm Bor boit,' This shaft extends upwanj into the 
tipper mitre mat box boiled uflt3cr ihe*" "U ''-iharped ttluminltim frntw- 
The lower itiiift bearings Jfid ure by the 

Thu top fcon opettiK in a ^tcose cqw. Tl>fi cvutkii for ibc sbeftiiiB m ihi\ lop ee 
bolt arc ^ wim sair^djiahni oil A* an iLiiditionel 

cotdiinif dip* (SI) Eire imLaJIcd araimd iYm A^crttciai ihafu inimedmtcly unucr ine 

^ll^rwhikof Ihe ASMmbl>' have p-afock praphited nibb« ^shingj itilc^kd 
for ad LKOua lubridUoit. Bushiuss upe rioi noceswry in the lo™r 
JSpan: parts for a <ompk\t ipool Unk nutU be era hanJ at ell tiincsv should 
braludc B racitny-asscmhied luwr spool-oiscmbljiu complete with ew box. 

Ii will be in ihc dctflil drawifMf itiat liw have pltruud a Kx^m 

Icnaulcw far caai bouom ipool itlativx to the lop spook of ao) ^Wf T"^ti Kiop. 
SpixificiiJty. ihP space beiwccn any tvio lop tpooh h wtJrally 
liv twllOJlt spool. The tx:aM>n fm (his k thui tlw film most odvaoiiE tta spot^^ 
bank, and ibis b disurihutcd attiaUy bciwisefl 

The iruttimtim ansk of Ea^ral dUpljuaimOTit Li thus cut In \vilL m order to obiiatd 

any nmsibiJliy of plge siretdiirag ibc filoi. . , r 1 . 1 . t 

m.' lira fi^ iMuks 4fC for ibe targe hrsn^cSo^ kink 

oarrbes HJ7 ft of filin- MuJtioking (his by foof »nd nddifig 2 ft for aws^>^■cr^ 
ihe fooiage in iJiis lank « 75^ ft fuJIy ibrieadcd* 


* This ^‘cfiiciil drive shoA ii coupled with Hk tuwtr grar liox a specLil <»Lipbi^ 
i5U u^iiidi hr locked with « mper piit SlitMild ibe dnven tpo^s^bto yam 
for any reason, this pin k expected to ♦hear before daniqge is donfi uj tnc gean 
AT drtw shafts. 

67V 






cot C{SEUhTOCRA9U\ 


T)wr nwnti^d lime orttmuertkiii it ofctDinwl hoik by nn the intitbiiie 

tp^ Ijf by iblppinff loo^. TIk pcwrol iWimtlA for ficurifif tbrto 

h: 

ipoed >- ^Eirtiticrsuon- ijedc ■« Fofltiyt- tTBvttlted b^'' ffini 
per nuBsiw) t<r» mliuilcfr^ 

In oat of Ok proces^tn^ boths will be litc lifnfting fiiciur'N and iIh; macJiinc 

ipo^ wiU be luyiuEcd to givv^ the hico in ilUs tank ihc proper iittnimtoA lime, 
wall tjic banks (or fcwjikJ oortipleldy thraiteJ, If at thii aiab]iitHhl ^popd, ihc 
xnratmKTt jn any othtf tank is nguiwl lo be too Jons, loops must be stmp^ in ihse 
iitnkj io obkiJn the proper timing 

The iMiSa of thw section nre inaOc of ^aiitleu ^IkL with bottoiru hj an 

^tJei to elcutin^ W’hen neceiSfiT^^ OMirflyw outfci \i ntar ilie top. 

inc solutioil rceireulaLjoit Intake is tuU'odliiicod W-io ihe t:<o lc. j| l'e^Jv inches beJow 
this. The d^dopo- uuik « htted with jce tube inJeu. These arc instalkkl betwwJi 
and Imvc onikes poimmg both upwards arul Uuwnwaids. The olber 
tanks orO^ woicin are sin^icwhaiik and* while the soIutEom are oontEnuouaiv 
tepfeme^, no ceattmintion k n^Eiind. 

Tbo film pu£scs oui of ilie Iutu dcviclopcrv throuipt the mbber sipjcc^pe^, nod £oes 
ovfif the crw-ni^r ^pool into the next laok—a rinse tank. In the Model 4C, ^wo 
or inore loop* arc to be finted.^ Eiich loop k 7 ?i sj in, lonif. The spool 

Out of this rinse tatik is ;i special rmt set on on angle lo lead ihc him acro^ to Hk 
pl^ng side of the ctsuin^; bath. TFm detring baih k a singlc-bimk tank, as k ibc 
rolkiwfng hurdetier tank. 

ifchn cToises lo the whildlgbl pTOcessliig section thioij^h the 
U^t-Usht pasHi4>K in I he waJI between the processiEijt ^tioos. i mpclumitizn 

^min W ^ ptaveitis both doora from bcjn^ opened hi gpcc, ihiu diminaung 
me pussibiliKy of whitehgiiEing the liriii dc^dopmg: rooin. An additional poxv-bo^ 
wij.ll fnittie with s^ow p^ineb Li to be mounicd in the wall ojj ilic olher aide of Ihc 
ma;hiitc. The piis^box imy be swilduni o\w la ihk ffin^ ifitshemy e^xr be uko^ 
ttjy la me the spate innk in the whndlght sedkm nr iilcip a bank anywhere- Jhh 
sivj^ wouU brins the him cut of the Ust tank cm the air squeegwddc ofihc ^iag 
cafeiJKi-^r a nor too incomTOfeni shift of Uie clcvaiar c^buxt from it* pwatsiUy 
pbniied liKfliiQo to ibe otiwf side of die machint 


P^octs:rffi^ Senion i3j 

SfamiKr^^iuY TiK flEm commK flungf ihedarkroofii pass^stinto b wash 

lank of one hauls , Ov«r ihk lank jmd focmntjcd on the end of the mdn spool-bank 
™mc u The 4ccond^t-posjjrc liovice- This consiiitA of a mount for i^v^crai Eampk 
Hcaty^nty waterproof sockets and witnig should be provklcd hciei TIk tiimpi 
iwiEcfaed on and off by dwi irutiu drive switch to prevent mc-iting tUm m the e>x:rtl 
of stoppage of dbve, Jn cenins of Ihf wash bank the film is carried up ovar j 
mM spool ttf addiiiond e^pororc. espodally through ihc hock of ihc fiim. 

ftflfxfft-r,—As already noted, ihc whtteliglil prooKiing section of the 
madimo eonilam in gcoefal of unita timllcT or idcttiknl m fijmi i o ihajc in ihc dierk- 
iwm pAKcning ^{loo. k will tlwrcfore be ricccssiiry to point mjl only the swdnl 
fomu here, nt* main fnitiewDirk aiul »fit»ol-hank rr«™ are much loftrer. 
mey muai aocommcidatc nineincn tpool-banka. 1 wo JildiiioLtal tioiju far die main 
fnmie’^k are jirovided in the Mnire of Ihc spin, and ihc long spool-tunk frame 


Jl k preferable, fnmi iNr vicTrpotnl of prraerving ihe shon atop tttd hardener 
in the follownie to^s, eo rfiuc « mjo^ a* Ow isnperature and softness of 
the wbMi water will r^it. This ii c^xdally iniportimt in ihc cok of the time 
foUovrin^ the ooloiif dc%v)D[ii;f tank. 

680 











b MrjifwTitd in ihc cerittre hauBJiJi? sliiiiiTesi fods <3Jli, with adjusiaWc hoj* iimra 
where they the iiiumiFiPum (tioon 

The Tmks ,—Tlie coluui tievekipcr UJit h n Ibj^ jeXHci«:iilaio£l imK ccmtaiisinB 
five i.j>ooi-b!Lnk:f, and Thu^ jjrcwittet i rrnximuJW foowigc of A- Thh h Iblti^wsd 
ivy ittff same i^uenoe < 3 ^ fch&rt liine^ ckaiins; hardi i fii n j!^ and wd^iu^ a* wiLs given 
In the dfldtnKSm soctkjn. I'oor tank^ ^re used Then foilowi a tw-bonk 
;ieE<3rrulatcd bkiu^h liink. which n cMcpliuuil in ^hnt the lank h ni;ide 
cdiiteJ stcci. In this uirtic [be spool-batik sido iricmbers ire coaled with'' Lmtighjii, 
a baked-ofi hikeliic, hjiihcoitosiimi coating. The of the iwo-hank hmi is 

J75 fl. A re^Jar itaiidcss Jittfcl ijiigic-biiuk vn\A]\ Wuk follows, tJwn tt two'^bank hypo 
umk^ which is jemzirciiiatcd- Cfoss-o^srr is made to a finglto hank wash lank« n 
lank ralJows. whkh the Him skip^ in the present pmoess^^ tJjcn a two-bank 
fioal wpsh tank Tliis dhbion of the wi^b fiuo two tnuks a cffidcnl 

washing <ipqfittiim- In ihe wmK lank^. water U tntsodtis:«d at the buiic«Ti and over- 
Row^ q 1 ikw ro^uiif outlet rear the top of tho tank. 

Drying; Caltfinet ( 4 >. 

ibe lUm Iwvea ihe whitchiht aolution section, it is threaded 
dirnagh tht air squeegees Compressed atr at B lo t0 Th. per square inch prerore 
iv bEtjwn on the film passing between pitired nondes^ imving imrrow slits to wumd- 
trote the bLiat These slSu idtouJd bt adjwed to i^irtt sHgllUy downw-irdi ffom 
I he horizontal. SVith ^rreei adj!Qslincnt+ vuj^rfiuous water idioEild be cleared from 
tho pcTiontiDtei und all nirfucc wdihfr retnovod from the film, and the tiim surTaoes 
will not comaci For the adjhstmeni nnd care of the air Uie 

supplkr-s manuiil sbcuhl ^ consuEteil, and am specLuk injunicttons required lo 
auppEement the preseut citsiui:il will be jmpplwd by Answ. 

Cflft/Mf —The drying eabirKi has fuuf long spooi-birnks, eadi fn 4 compajtmfiut 
sepLinuted froiti its ndghbtnir by a iMrbtiOEU but intenxmnecied by hoih lop and 
b04lom air ducUi Each i^nk consnli nf an upt^ dsaembly of idling stwols ami a 
lower assembly of driven spools wiib loop gwa rd pletcA. TIjc top Spools tmve OUite 
bron/jc InuhIneS- Between the upper iind lower t^nks is suspended a large Qintoii 
11atinel-co%^ roller U> poSUh the bnek of the lilm 11 k lo^tt banks are liriven 
by ptywei fitHn the Varidrive* as previoTiily explained- Air from the flryani slSico 
gel dchydmiciT Is tnifoduficd into the drying cabuifit at the Jost ^woFbank and 
exhuLuied bad 10 the dcbvdrjitiw m tlie Ant bank. The silica unit supplies dean, 
dehydrated air. >Joitiui][y* the dchydratvw Is adjuslrd to suiiply air of 30 to 15 per 
CmL R.il, ond n tcmpcmlure of 85^' to ^ F. lEs tnlfodyctkm ul the last spool-- 
bank is o^iotvdy to treat dw dim aboqi to Itmn the oibinei with ihe driest air. 
For operatiuo and nutimcnaiKic of the filktaguE imiu ihc sopplJer i manual should be 
oonsulted^ 

CLtmptAi.Hor The funtlioTu of the campetmipr ruikir—a mbber-iyred 

Wlwel whose miuidc diameter Is 8 8 In.—hava been discussed and ibe mode of 
iladrtre otulijyod. Durdijt the dtenffo-i^vef 10 a ikv, mi at the wifld-up, the conv- 
pcosottor keeps a cOn^itanT pull on ihc film, and therefore no slack 15 let bflck inlo 
ilhc spoohbTinlcB. 

the lUm is led o^t the outer rmi of the toiler add tlien between UUs and the small 
rubber pressure roher* and fn;:mi here to ciiiter wind-op reel diiectly. U b Inv 
portaju iliot no Itire ilLppii^ te-ke pUioe on the corupcrtsaior, Thcfcforc. tmill 
fublwr roller musi always be in Item contact with ihff ccHiipcmaior; an adjiiflahtc 
spring acQomphshei this. The ndjusmwJH of ihc spring should ha chcckea every 
few months. Make the test by puHhig oul sluct from the drying eabinei, shut off 
th^ fTEachinfi drive, and liy to pull tlije"^. 3 NCk illfn qnMlnd- lire ’Compensator by tumlflg 


* TyiK II iTnpro^'cd — wuh double iianlctter and shttiri stop. 


6a I 





CnLOlFl^ CiMEMATOGRAPHY 


rhc wiml-utk retl bj h^vnd. The il!iri shoijtd rnisl any f^^oisibte aeriDkinL of loniiic 
Qti ihc Ukkc-up hecI; iKjli Et vlrouttl s^lip ajiiunii the ccnnpcni?for jroUer 

When thi^candiuna has bean met. the pressuiearthc miail mtkrou the cnmpeimii^t 
U ^uihekni. 

WhHf-vp Sfiirfifi^s.—Tnt po^^er for ihe wind-up is tul:cn off ihc oBmpen- 

wiOT ihul^ns by icaihcr hc^s. Two sjimdrts nre proviiicd m emfer to cHEfiinnio 
Imndlinfi of feels on ihedutOtfens^-cr. EjuOi sfandte is rHJunEed in b bnid^et whkdi n 
so hin^ rliaii ii inny p'pwcrt up imd down ovef n maU are to asiUi in 
the leather belts, Tlie d<kwnvj;3ird %w\ng b Ihniicd setN^orew wfiieli is ioiejide^ 
to relieve the belt or mc^l of the weight of Uk osscnibEy and to tontnij the arourn 
of applied to tttc udndr'Lip reeL Thb adjuatmisni i$ so made thni a minimiifn 
tension is applied to the Him coining ofl'the ooit^i^ the mininsom bedne anii-^ 

u vHicn the film winds up with joit ^w(?tablc ti^htJicts. 


rnMaUiidmi 

Rcfcienar to ihe floor ptan (obmindblc from the Ameo Enjomxnns DcpraxuttccitJ 
will the dinwnsioiH of die coam^ ftioTmE pkn which are to be prepafed fur 
(he main sieef fYameworfc of Ihe tivo piooissing imitA They nre to be 4 in, abo^o 
the kv^l of the fioor. When [he cock^tc fof ihe% ft poiirod^ Eiud bolts io laJce the 
sioci fool pious are sel Irt iml apical cjULctly pjxoTding to dinren^nns Liken oJT 
tile mndilnt The mairt rramewntk i^ klcr set dow-a over these boltis Wedyia 
arc then a|^ikd to raise the foot piotM on of j icl higher. Thu opaition 

fr^ be checked ag^inai the v^mic3.l giiide irflofcis fiiisidc edge^ whirh jAtmU ha 
piUf»D. 

^ Hk dirkr^m And whitefight $ec4ions mnai be in nU^oincnt with each olher. 
cnee the main Dtrfhead drive shaft mmt bo coupkd bctwxcn the two ttrUU wtthiJuL 
undue amoLint of ofiscL Umvera^l joinls provided here will correct, minoc ntis^ 
alignmenl. AlignmEnl rniM t)e cnrefiiUy cheeked. DcfwoeQ tliadoikifDonn woJI ond 
the proceasing sgctlaoL sufScjent spuoe ahouiil be pruviJciJ to ponnlt w-ulktng 
Across the itochme at these points 

The pasa^bax frame is inalatka la tl» wsiU wiih lha entrance nr etit spoob 4 ft. 
11^ in. above the operaiins platform^ And so ihgucd Iniemlly that Uic Alin, 
id passing from cme itrooaaiiig socilon to the other, follow? a practical fy scvtight 
line. The extm witl fhune b similarly Insmtbd at the other aide of itie machine 

The clet^cor it tel up on its angk'inDn fmme* and so positioaed that lit exM 
apoot ii m line with the eittnmoe spool of the dattfooirr pnxe^iim xdinn Tbe 
splicing from the xteOt posa of ihit section shonld be sufficient to nilow dcaning 
betwi^ii the two unila—about ^ in. 

The drying cabmtt a litewbe set op on i^ aiigte-iron frames and la^anusd from 
dte steel frsinc of the whitelighi procca&ing soedem by an umourLl sufficient to 
allow an operaior to pass bctvwu iIk units. 

The Jaierel JociiiDfi of the drying cahfnct imisi bo Airanfed lo en^ge Hk bonom 
nonroDia] dri^v-shaft whit its jse:aj box on the nraiii sieei foirmjiMifL Very probably 
ijw heiglit and level of the nnale-hon frame will havt lo be adjifUed to tome e.'steflt 
wcih «lti™ property io line up the ^aftinf. The cmtpiljtpi m lha thnft it« of the 
ihrM-pmngr^ type witb fibre iruerta. and will tike c^re of slight mJuUgjiRient. 
Couplings of this type ore let with an appwAblc ckuraoco hetwosi ibc face of ihe 
prongs Odd the scat fn the couplinG member, sinco this makes for quieter opemtion 
Wbim properly lined up. ihe foqi plai» of the ftame ihDuhf be bohed to the floor 


• Auto dtuwiflg No E4 CeneraJ Assembly. 

* In imtnlliitiooi: where ■ concrete opcfaiing platfotiq ts pln}in6d+ the cloMwior 
should be aet directly on ibe ctmcrele. 

6S2 







app^khix 


cxpandon \u^ Tilia a. ibo dOM wjtl^ the ungSc^imn fTnlTTC ilT ihts cloviltpf. 
Both w4Kiikji callfben mtc then bdced tb theiriron uiiFporu. 

Eacti spoot-bank rnyrnc Is lo be fei^dfctl up on i» four c^imef real poim^ The 
jv4friute Djliiuimcr^i Ahfiukl pbije ihe upper fuirfi}^ 4j€ ihe upt^er apool levei 

idih ttia boltdm ur ihc flltii^^ itie solution tunita: 

The hisai diaim ore lAdjuaied hj* Lurobudde^. S^jjTkzkpt rhciulij be in Ihf 
4:hajba la relieve ihcm of Use ^^eishl of ihc rmiffl fnscire when it lies an Lu iiest pooiU- 
Thc diPiftt m «ch fraoiw ai« ctdjiatea equally w> Bmi ilie fioin will be qppijed at 
4itt contnu point* of ihe itiochine unflbrnriy. 

With ihe »hi frumoi insiii[k4 fiiid pmJy JowmJ, the umlM mu lo be located 
tutrler ihc tpocl^banki. The tanka are oentreU with ftapect to the spool^banJf (or 
'baftkT) on tho lortg lEmcn^km of the iiiacliino- The locatkui latctnlly fat obiaUied 
by iillowinK 1 ^n. i;4earimi>e between the itui^ of ihp imik tpipmg bikt tide} 
Olid the Oentre of ihr vurtJbiiL dn^u ihnft of coeh SpOof-book. Mcaaiiren^cfit wiJE ahciw 



ArxAinittevf 







xrCw.:-^ 


««>*r 


/iMT 

r—” 




-><C^ tttkvtc 






FiOp 5-—Vajiilrh-e aitd Speed Qum^ Moion- 


nboui H tfi. clearance on the other eftk of the tank* heiween the jEpcHd-banV Angle 
side plopcii anel thc Insidc of the tank, 

Lt is oot necessary io bolt thc tank* to the floor- They arc iimpty set dbtoliy cn 
the coflo^j^ floor ami ihmtmcd op to lewl W TtqurrcuJ. 


V, liJiNCtrkal L'nll^ 

L BreaStnjc^ Itfdicat^ 

Ln Fig. ], ihe o^rn j^p.^1 inkrroswitdi mul of the breakap: indicator i£ ^own 
With Its cle^rtcel cireyit. The tmi i* kept tumini by iJw hlcv which t* paa«d 
o™r A spoof msounteJ on Uie mitw iheA a$ tfafl cum Ai hucrvah;, iiio contp m 
it turns, closes the dioait to the ftJay eoifi W dcpies«tig miirBWwjttJia A umi 
D. The relays nro thereby esergined owJ the ctHtmuts opaned. During, the short 
period when the cam does not depress liwr niicroiw-jichcs, ihe candensen hold 
tfui reUtya s^ifhcBcntly cTnrrgUed lo nuiiuailt the coniacts open. If, how^ever, ihc 

683 


































COLOUR. ciNRMAroOiiAPiiy 


«ca»J. citiscr vnc cm- boih of the micto- 
wc ^ ti* ^ntteiBw lom lu duH**, Uk nrfaj k cle^etfctBlinl, 

rad ^ «t^nj cliHttJ (u ihe hORH. Tlw Jibn spool, erai. anil tmicrdsiivitch unit 
qie rmufuod in |he mdcJilnc- tlie renutinfiiit dectrial npiiamius k rnomHoJ 
outtlilc Uw Immediate Trtflrfiincniren. » ipwhh™ 


i TJidlfWfwfrr (;eiti!rftfor md Spttd 

5iO«AB7fi3A mc^tometer ii tied ro b G.E. Model No 
^ “attufflcnt. culihraied for » rras* rf O-w ft p« miimit 

in <l« wbitelight section, and Jii 

wiDpte circuit need not be dingnmiTEii, 





I, Vmiirivf owl Spfffd Mer/irj 

1 ^ !*“ Tor the Vulctrive (V S. T>jie V.E. Ffrate No. l^SV. tHOO- 

l,W(J r.p.m.) rad ti* qxed controt motor am shown. Tho conitoi motor 0 lO-sob;^ 

** «™l lower posl>t.(«ton etalioo 

loca^ D| Uw ip^ indicator meter tii t)ie whiteliidit socticuL A Uinit twitch k 
in ttilH iind lower ponkm «f ipecd (.-omra] motor cttuiiL 'rTif** wntm ipht 
pnh'buiton stations ftw siurtini und sioppoq; the Varidrivc motor am to be Id- 
BialiftJ. 14 to be liicated in the darttpam sfaetkm 5 >n ihe frani ctjtn« qf 
tlw mu^nc nKtl to Che olcvdtor ciibiacL A iccc^nil n lo he looted In ik? 

Kiipfi ct€i the f™t comesT poii of Ihe mebinis mxi to the nds^ba^. 
The thini^o be locjiEed on Ute front corrKr fwi i?f ihc tmchhie nwi to the itryine 
cniwu TTw mstpiijtic mator mning swiidi b Co he locitod ouc&kk ilic biiwdhiiie 
msKh tne n rea. 


4. Sfitwr {H^Aii^ixhr StreOvn} 

him moior k controficd by meuns «r « wvmitt* HURnetic swhdi mcninted 
od Uw wall opj^te the fioirt of ttw miKhliie rad in ai-ptwinBto craitre of Um 

moccsemR sefliiM, It is actuaied by nsrau* of e waienCjtbi ntte, lower rad stem- 
wiuui auiion with Ihnii swncbea for overtmv^ oontrol (tee Fim 3j 
684 


























APPENDIX 




5. Hitisf M&t0r (Zhargtftwi Sfcitmi 

Thk 19 the mtdo ipeci^Aumt m Hoast moior m tine wtiilofi^i b^i^qcl The 
^itchea lire tci he moitnie^ mi rl^ mU iipp«lTc the front of ihc imiirhiiffi. 

6h S^ijfaf-Eiipp^me- Dffvkt 

A bsink of ms^nAdecent bmps k to be rmninlcd orwer the vraak tank fotioiAaiif 
the pa^-b09t in the wtaitchj^i seciidQ. The bmpi are to be fed from the socondaiy 
side of M f^KVA insulaiion tnuttfunn^. the lamp circtiii k la be ooflimlled by m 
itlAy. Tbc coil of ihii rttay k fed Frdm iJic JOid aide of the maipMlk iwiteft of the 
VAfidrive (sw 4). Mien tbc blm dim ii iioi^ for my feuMii* the leky 
dUs out the MOEtd^powe Ijim ps, end thus os^ibeiiting Uic fihn in the 

Brea of the seoond-expcwuie device, 

7, Cff-a^diing Piaaps 

All cirudAUTtE pitflips sue to be dxnimkled ftnfn waientiglii nmtiii»] mmm 
lodded on ilw wnlJ oppwtilc tbc froni dT the rnachinc in the whiEclighi section. 



Fm. 4.—SwpiMkttpcwure device. 


Vd Sittntii Drrkm fir Film EUvattfr 

A piiermAiijdi e^fterdted fnHo m arm riding on ibe Clm on the supply tod cteet 
# 6^vo4l A.C soui^ inio a bcti ciieuit flivtrtfi an audible sasinil wheti there k only 
*0 fL of tthh left on Ibe raL A Ibe swltidi ilwjuld be tnotWed in the i lO-voJi supply 
to ihc tnuufoimer feedm^ thk sei-^ip to cuabk disconnection erf iki siicml device. 

B. Sttpiiek fir f>^ihjc Cffiiupl 

The silica ga\ dehydrator k to be sivttdtcd on imd off at the drying mbiDid. a 
intilhbkiitoit station opomting a tnapwlic yanine awllcb twted ouiildc the tm- 
mediate area 

[ 0 . Tiff h'ash Air Ci^mprai-iof' 

TTie Nash AJi Contpies«(M. Which ptoviUtt air for ilw Mtvec«M», ii to be uinwd 
m and ofTb? a peah-tnitum ctaikiA lotMteilpa the ibyEhtf cabinet tiear ihe «iuMsee, 
Thk piuii.buitoQ ttfliioB opeiatcn a mopnetic sintttnK switdi ootude ibc mechtne 
nnn. 

\% Leader C^rnfMeoiloni 

The l»kr Ukeo ioio ihe inul oiiuhine k nbotU or about one anil a 

fiAh mlks of him. The leadaf tioie k aboui one houTi foriy-hvo miiiuloi a| 60 (t 

I5S5 








I'OLni-tt ClNt-M^roORADlT 

pM tniniiie. The kadw^odt u unrerfa»T«tS while «paqiK la^Uulose aecinte Ki* 
^ Bkyt /i>r khck^kis^ 

The preferred Iwtler thiekneas is 170 tp IflO it is Wact on am tide 

yadra bl^ Inyw nukct ihe two $iq« easily disUnsuJshjMc 

u£Lc|^ diikfonin sarelightro^ The baJtf oorcnall^ b mu 

Whcncjier nswiuiy laiier it ,p(k»U- Tiui is done in suth a macnw that the 
aplwc will run thnuu^ iIk ntuthiM spools acconlii^ to the rorhjwinif illuiuuiion^ 





'£WAxr^4' 


I + U - ^T\ ^Vtff 






Fig, 5. 


Ahcr each ^ tlw loiiier ia ilgwtv rev.gutitl, as the ed^ mu bcltwn the Bimti, 
fAaminsd tirijUs ^ by lo^oh for teara, defarmatloni. and weak 
** m™«l avgidtqg miuwsHry tenakift ut ii« 
lit lie mach™ and by caieTd huntirjnfi in ^ihstj!. 

jLtttsirf. - With ibe mdchinc ruunEn^. dte lisidcr u Ehreidtd 0>cr 
ordte spool-bmt. one no i he upper 
-assembly, the osher on the lower, ibould witHoui he ibte to iJirod 

machine 3^^.t WMie ihU is beiti^ doiie, h is advisabJe lo 
Junrik^ mEI ihfi lower ^pool shafi bciirines wiih « sojudon oTfrycerine unJ w.iirr 

Neither a wci nor cvw* a (by kader should he left cm ilie MKmI.hsmJti out of the 
without ecciuuulotin* ooiuhleTiihle sTudi at ndi bank, siHX a change 
in K.H, Of (lomial drying woiiltl shrink Uh leader and emw wurring of itio ihafU 
iJ«chMie and Jerder, Slack imw always be pulled Into eskb 
<1» muchioe. To obtain slack, theaiin- 
pe^lor nnd wind-up iwls ore dtccflgaged and Itte spool-drite stnrtcd. Thn bader 

^ ’** ihnn mens- 

the ipoal-hanks, and if the job k a long one the lesulcr *iint>Jd he 

RtU Out Of the inilChilic TinrmHfly 

VJL Nfuinfenatirt 

ihe voHoin iderimu^ and IubrPi:alEne jobs, which i«ui( be 
^uled airf tto Sttictiy uU^red to. or utuatiom am HuMe to Oewlop whidi 
would work to the deimtiem of the mtipui, both as regtitdls qiulii^' and quaniiiy. 

Ctmni^ 

fDli?£/dllti^^* opmlofil thooM peri-oms the 

III acan 1 ^ lwl«hUwausq(«B«»»ithK«micto^ Ifaoy routfhnessofinrfiic* 

“ ™ ™ njSifrfa. Uus is id be rmiin-ud wJih very flue emery Mper juul 

potwM imooUi with mcia cloUt 


To r«Jii£^ the JhrAidinE lunc, 4 ^ecimd grrHip i>r upcraiors nwv ibTcadiua 
m a I>^1; in ihe niadunc eboiil inidwjy down Uw wMtdEidtl KcOon. Tlw teadcr 
i\ uipph&i from A fteJ on * tewU clomped on la ilie spog^bank I'fidme 
&S6 











A.PPfiNDlX 2 


{2^ Wipe mil Iht itruu anchor Oip* on ihe drive aWi of each ^^K3oi-t«uiiL 

(3) Wipe (iff ihc two ccHtipensatof rulkrfit tairtg h ctcari, damp clothe Uico dry 

ihc rolkts. ^ r - 

<4> Ckcui tiM fOlutkm of any ii(5Cunii4latioii*r A of mine aetd 

und water it helpfoi if taJciiirp oiHJonale depWES forni. 

(5) Gcoti tile i-i™>ovcF SpooK tbe pafcfr-bOJt and Iht iiir-sqiiBt^ tpoob of 

ai^y afCQiriitUtioiiS- 

l{J) Daily chedi all |>cttom jitU top spools foi iiii> cakiuns iarboEuiic deposits 
mzLy form, ff hhird water U prewm, ili«c deports sire espocuilly ij;omnioti 
and iTiLisi be etFfuhmlEy refflOveU. AbraiiOEts and Bcmlcbo oti Um boek flf ibc 
Him tiiic result of ncfllfi^ting suxomulatitHi. It ibonid bo rcnioved whcf^ 
e^er nccessmy.AS described below under MoiiUtly DLJiKsfZ}^ 

17J Durbii opqruiioiip iho cruciiinB fhouc, suppoits^ oulakica of tanks amt other 
equipmoni mm be kept dean or sU limes tiy wiptriA dl' ipilkd sotutioiM wfih 
a Oump i^kiib 

(I) Whpt Ehc iriside of the drym tahmeU tududlnst spools and air ducts, with u 
tioun, d^p doth.. 

<2) At the same time, wJmlevur pafis ot'lhe stmiii sled rfsmcwori, spool-Es^ms. fmTne, 
nrid ekvaiEJt latri be miE;h^ from the operating platform should be wiped 
dean. 

(1> Tlve woitlttg pUitfonn w to be hoaed tiff or rnoppotL 

f4> The outsides of the tuEik^s ire lo be bo^ off or oiberwiso ekoned. 


Monikiy DuiUi 

0) General cleaning of hU dust-catehinK intfauw about and oter the nmcMiie 
with foap affll waier. The lEiside of die diyum cahmet may bo mdudod here 
for ^ more thorough ckanbte ilum the wiwkfy one. 
af The apool-banUriwmia be ckanoa tlwsrougMy. The ImileT J* nm out ihrouuh 
tiw drying tiutidneU und ihcn UlO tanks arc covered wiih the p^ywtiod iKiion* 
provided^ those are covered with tl^c nibber bttoUu to prevent doarine etcuU 
and water from cu>[iMmuiiitiD^ the proflessarEg solution^ in tho mttkt- The covers 
of iho whitcliigtii; secuoo Q(e cut to join between liieL>, m that the biitnkd4 
can tuuig down i^iwecn ihtt divipom Those banJj wliidi accumulQSe an 
cncnisisiioji of W’Aict salts uie cleaned with nltw ccid dihitCil aboiit 1 : i In 
water, To do ihis Jab pmpefiy* siaiiiEi:ss iioel donning poos are provui^. 
The top sMOol<i*iembly Umtko^'cd from supports and inirncofod m the spodaJ 
pan of diluio asM The km^cr a»emhly H treaEfid bj“ blocking up the tpoclil 
pail undff the poit^ The angle side pieces EUid the shafting are trcaltd by 
*WHj>biJig the acid ffotn a pan up the lengih of ihc rtwiber. Stiirw of Use spool- 
bonks may Ik ctcttEied ni- rjy cnoLEgh by stnibbicig with ti biiillc brush and water- 
Such bonkg n*cd ivoi be.ocid tmiioL All pcErts. nmit be weH hiwd olT Ui com¬ 
plete the jf»b- 

Onrnriuucr/ ClmniriJS 

The spools in ibe fint dcv'DlopcTp hypo, und cenaju oihcr nmkm will ikiwly 
mccmuiilitie u plntuDg of lilw^ cvklcnetd by -t greyiih mctdlic bIuxil This can bo 
removed by tredtioif the spools in stioug nitric ^mivA about I : li^ followed bsf a 
water finw. 

tl) On the occasion that a irntt isemplied^ il is InuDodiaiely hosed out orp if noco- 
tnry, sembbed dein. Water innks iJiould be fbcn^eutly deaitod to reuwve 
any bacicriat dcpOiUa If they HxtU- 


bS7 


COLO{\R CINEMATOGRAPHY 


^Ailiicti hiiv* tglutjulu lEi ihml Tor a cdnaidcoble time ihpulij be 
iknupeJ itt the lini oppDrtjjnitir scrubbcii liuii. 

of luhripuiiuiii a diiide<3 inio ihrw parti: fd] sh^ifl bcaririgs, (frl !nQlh>r5. 
iimJ ftf) pHif boaciL. 

(n) BsWfTjajj.—Where a fjalbbcinng musl wurt w\ih Lhje fjreaJocn, 

it »JiftvUed Ki oil s|Miiili!ly with a imde E>r machme oil (viswsity S.A,E 10). 
let dmiiiH ftnd ^ipc off excess oi] LhonnishJy. If u bali-hcaiini is uniler a 

d Ughi cup ifrrdjte* it m^ommend^d^ ft ii pQiuidCf^ tEdthcr iicc^^^fy tioi 
otJier^isc dfisJfahlc lo lubricuie the ipooJ bc 4 jiji.^ Huyivliere in ihc mAefiinc 
Thespodsiothe cJe^aldr Ikivc hel^heaiitt^inji^mfliHl, the lipItL Eoatt never 

fequrFT oil The upTwr ajMok In the pTocessing^ soctnim Imit hnishmp of a siHscial 
^phiced rubber anj swe intctniiicl to be lubikuted by the procos&itig soltiuonj. 
The -spooU lit the -J ryiny -^iiihiTiei huV'c OOitc bncmzc busliia^^ and Eire scIf-EubricatiJig. 
iioVhWicr, shouJd any of Ihese spCMiSt sikk. or poi lum freaty, iivey ihutlld be dU- 
mounted inyl the be^nng surfaces ckaiied with kerDseji*^ 

The folkjwijig is a Iki of t-caxUigs which sfwiild be luhricatisd ai tlinstoa every 
Ux months iiTlIeu otheAi^ba Slated: 

it) The bneatiigc indicator spook are oo biU^Kraritics: oil at the pjm;i provklcd^ 
Wipe oil cKceis oil. 

i.S) The Tfici spmdics are on balJ-^bcarinj^; disiuDuiii this 'Uiafbi 4 iDil oil -heafinjoii 
Ufhtly froni ihe ilitn, 

lower spool-bank shafii of ih£ drying cnblnei U. supported oiv one aide b> 
Fafolr bearinits; greo^ cil ihc plug* if thev ever iicwt Ipbric^ffarr. 
t4) The poiSahing ralEcrs in ihc drying cahirwt are on bnll-hcarlTiia' hotk oif the 
enchccillars and oil iparingjy froni the side. Wipe ojf r.iorsj tfU. 

The compens^tDr wheel b on i FtifiEif ball bearing; grease at jlic plug. 

Th# sprocket wheel and duih drive of ihc aponj- h^tii bobi use berth iteeve 
fltiJ FoMf bedrings. Clrcnse llw F^fnir bearings HI the plu® if they ever need 
tt, &ml oil the sleeve bearinjc^^ This naed not be ikmc mpre tluin ouv^ ^very 
year or iwo^ 

f7> Tlw hoist ehuiiia ulumld be tviped with an oily nt^ occ4iloiuilty to pmmrt mat. 

Tmv thouM bUo be dope to ihe chain tuspenakrti of the ekvinpTr 
(8) The Fafair benringi of die ^in drr,e idtiift arc tii be giraKil at dac 
I Sf) The several uitrvcrsal coupUngs n re lo bo oilod sparingly and chocked for 

Hie other i:ouplings are ibkHy of iti^ thrcc-proogcd insert rvpe and should 
not be luhrfoitcd, 

(h) A/niw/.^Ejibcr grease of oil is roi^uired, oa uidkaietl by the nminictiiirefa 
The freitueiv)' of lubrkHiUon h ttry lartabl^ iis wilt be npteii. The fnanufacturem 
^^rc \et>‘ cmphritic in warnme ugaiiwt ovdrdubrknticui. 

il> In ibo case of iKc VarMriwe fspecd rango 3 I, 22d ip 4J0 vpll*. type V.E.. 
SenkI 437*156, J-phese^ ^C^LBOO r,p,m.)* ilh* aopptlei li ao spocifre in bis 
icecmimctakLioru thai ii k jdvkcd lo use only U.^. VUeogrb N'o. I, Lubricutc 
lit I he sevicral pcinlf noted on the aipidieil motor plale tfv*ety nionth. OfrtJ 
of like rnpior bearmt^ ia a " LubrifUali," whidi is greased at the top of iIm 
bearing ftocation I i uaer mnoidcg ihe bauom drain ping. After e^pdline 
okI greji^ with the fBcw, allow iho rnoior to itm a lew miniatci before rcpliic^ius 
dram plug. The company udv^ duii ii « imporwni la mn the Varidrti* 
over Its cdmpEete speed range m IcMl ihrce times a wedt. The Varibelt and 
Varkllans aie io be kept des^n of lubrkitiii, iberefcrte, after gfciULtELB- wip* miy 


m 


* Such uv ArtdtK^ Cottmial. 











iix*?C!S 4 frofl* sluftinis. ll n advised lu sjofitadt and oJtilnitl liidi (ncsJ U J. 
tkorkai Moion ufflec fat itguLar in3;pcc:iicm cumI nMintcfisti*:* cf this unit. 

Tht yn«d eonttollw mestor attsuibaJ m the VtuidTivt u> he iSa 

monilw with a fijw dnn'fc wf nnotot s?il (SA.E* 10) at the ail tub? pro^tded 

O) The G>£, TiichaiMtcT t'JcntMtoi cry^so BC 50 ttilts) n to be at both 

tKarifies * very mornJi, 

14) The two boLii mot™ iQ E. Typo K. 230 voJbs* Mwfcl SK4I, AC Sim to be 
oikd every' year with it few drops of motor ofl. The locid ml moturt rt 
IntemtittenL 

Ut G 0 ^i^ BOJtea —The *evenil near cas«s um id be iubricated with either oil or 
ffrtiiie aa provided hy Ore dc^^. Tbe ptase sJiali be u light cup pceae-* The ell 
shall be 4 sTctmi eylindct oil which coplshii 5 per etnL of lalidw." Tlie oil level a 
to be mdnialjiMi at the levcts indhuud on the SndiiriduaJ case* and not ci^izagdenL 
In gencniU n slight tcmpcnnsitfl riac m iHcoil clk* la pemtinthk; cjcoca^ifo tempera- 
lurt^ irMhiiabs a mUallgftinieiil ot ovcr'lLibridlion. After one tnonth of operation!, 
the on cnscs tkould be draij[ied and mfilkd with freah oil; this li repfe^ied wart yaiir 
thcTt^rtc^- The sewrrai coaes shtHtld J.t the sslitm iln^ be rcgr^Mdi e^pdling 

av much old as possible. If, of course, ihcre re rcivoft to Lhiiik the oil It^l 

Tiim have dtoppad in the oil eases, or the qu-imily of grciJM become sainiy m ihe 
uthcT cflsa. an ipApectioii should thow wbciher addhlon 9 l lub^hi ft requlrod 
III the inueriniiT The fte^oral points of luhrlcjtifm ate now LlonriKU-^ ^ ^ 

jlUThe iwerty-^^ ittiutf cear boJtfis at the ipoohbanka funder mom alinninnifii 
frame) isro fiwJintjly giEftCd ihroufih the lar^ in the matn frame Never 
0 '.-er-gia 3 Ae and nm'Cf use oil in these cases. Of course, Ous lowitr gear boac* 
on i\yc spool+books arc never oiled or ansuscit, t- 

(2l The dcvetimd Wtrrm (at the Vil^kl^^v^c oiilputj tsUc 20 RT. Scrica 26^ 
UT50 r.p,in., ratio IS lo \} U endosad in iin oil csftfr Refill at tiw piup. A 
drip pan is btifll under this imiL . ^ ^ 

(I) The four 6<»ton spiriii outrea mi the mnin drive (Cut. No, arc iti 

oil ca«$- RedSl at the plug, . ,_ . 

(4i The iwQ Botton rwJiictUin gem wttkli arc inh^l with Uic howl moioTs wre sn 
ciT ca^- Sidceth* duty of these imift is so infrequent. It jccns* titsxsatf twmy 
to choeh the oil IctHrl yearly, nwyerurc, c l itti i na t'e Lbe oil dungca' tidvised for 
the otbcTcSJeS^ 

13| Three special geaf baiQ&- ana built aiound the three hcani^oiuil sJuilTs. Creo^ 
at the plug. The shaBi are IQ he wiped ctcpn and tcgrpased at thft 

(6) The four rnllm gear thyites in the dry irq: cabinet aft incased by removinji the 

topuUie, ^ w , I 

(7} At iho wiml'iip^ ihe mitm and the bewl mtucimn ^car hoM^ are to be f 5 reas«d 

Jt the (Hugi And rcfiuwabJe pkEc&. 

in fu^ncrei after the fifid month d machine o^fuion, the operators sliould go 
ovtJ^ the whole ssa^mbly lO tighten all I iiteningi, including Those on i he 
An exception to iJn* h the packms glands of the ^tat cases, whbU ahould be i^t 
in only a UtUo mofe than luiid'iieht Jf roqulrMl lo prevent IciVfte^ 

The muintnnniiee of the Najh Ait CompresFctf^ ihc S»cfriiulil wiu^ litBa, nild the 
Hryant Silica (iel Dehydrator u to be foand tn ihc inttlructioru tMuod by' these 
Suppliers. 

VIEI, Sakty CofisidcnuUjais 

In ilti^ and eogiftoeringof MJthiiw ■ much thoHghl has been given iifword 

the prtveniion of potemial hazards to ihe ftiKhtne cperaiore No Imnmg xhait 


< Such u No 2 Cflttfpliinn, ColDobJ, 
* SiM-h M Cyteuo T.|4a, CoIcHiiBl. 


2X 


6«9 





COLOUR CtMtMArOGRAPIfY 


^ Pfojprtl^ l«w which ^Id tw liBbte 10 laidj kK« ct«htii«. OiMiilt 

wl»«*w fcAihte on maytog pw^Noiwjih. 
Uioc pKoauUoni, lannKttotis tbwid be wmwiI to thoie opmwni wo^i^ 
with the irachinety to ohacm nauihibk oiuitiftn. ^ 

Qmi^ With aojr tumutg ihnft should be ovc^dcd. When about to nix nr lim»r 

raMhme, No one should iiuid the taut* fur tcrtictne 
11 ?*™'^“^' stiuiding iXooh are provided for ihh work, 

nn«t be worn, flbow-jensth rubber jauni^ 
^ A faoK should be btt>i niiminrnmt 

the acid tanks at all limes in the event of ocddenuJ Jtiilling oo iho oiKfSiois. 
-J?J?f***f*' j should tw well irained in the riuictloti of all 

etestrieiims, UiouW be permliied to 

**ATi eSectncul muq^tioasr which, ia some cutcSt cairy 220 vnib. 

AU oj^rnton should be informod that Uk colour developer enn couh dennailtis 

^ b«i lo iivoid 

iinw«s^ lu^. whTO (annuel necessorily occuw, to rime the bamls ea 

. ^? ***P** substances given off by the colour doveloiw ate tn be removed 

When the nuichS not tn prodilSS 
u ralriHr blanket may be tpnmd over ihe iiwio ipoot'tuink fhiine ImiwdtRteiy 

dfc^n™ir^*ii2i^ ^**ij‘*^ cftws-ovef spools. This will help to pnvem 
discoloTiftieOTi of ilic wdJl sirdkm Ic ibe vkfnily. ^ 


* Comptefc iDstru^oni ror prt>v<nCmQ ileiimaiiiii 

ttttd fthoukl \k pO£t<Ad in ftuch colutipdcvtlDpinij roon 


ttwy tw oblamed from Aa^o 


690 




APP£MD:X J 


SURVEY OF LO. FARBEN PATENTS DEALING 
WITH THE QUESTION OF THE ANTS-DSFFU3tON 
FROPERTEES OF COLOUR-FORMERS UNTIL 19^39 


T HEi^iwnJ Mcii E>/all LG.paietita ia to &nd A grmip of such 6 chemical iinjciure, 
ihiif Jitt^hcd w ifitcotoiir-formet molecule, ibc romur heccimctfBat to 
liiffiBioti in to itx biudiue assni, in irvoli cimis gctutMC, Geoenillj^ H 

can be Siiid these groups nir of a high moEccutiir vi^ight oad con^t of long Alipbalk 

chiikii^ OT C3^n. 

ITjc series of these speciEicatioU!? is opened wiUl RPp 45^400 (pet. 193^), ^hPCn ti 
qT a 'iTcij geoenal duiimctcr^ only elnimifis sJi (groups ii^hkhi if introduccifl into ihe 
coupler molecule, impniti ttnti-diiriHion properties EicainplCT ate uumcrou^ lokeo 
from nuMi famiUcs of compouuds in orgnAic chnrujityt Sitich os Fuphiiboyi* tri- 
phtinilic, alilbcnc, 0c. The validity of such a paieut K of «nirtc, very dobtcH^ 
bec^zti^e of its gfitaeial tlmiMcr. In fact, if it find been ^alld, no other patciiU oooJil 
hivve h«rr taken tmt by Kod^ and other ooiupunics, cbiiimng such firmips 
This fqtexit i* follofttsl after ao mimjil of m monitis by □ spccificaiion which 
coukl he regarded os the pstferiii for udi ftitUTE pra-terdA iniceii out to this t/fod by 
t.C. Farbcn. Nnmely, in RF 46S.823 tAU> 193T) there h ctiimed a dycsiuff 
fertritr emumning a mibsiitucni compriiing nn aJijshaikcitrbiM chain of moct th»n S 
oiTboti alo™. Sjearf^ add, spven m ciicrmplc, h said to give comptale Jinlt- 
diffusion to the coupler conuuning it. during the appltcaticm of further laym or 
diirbig Ihe developnicftt of the ftniiihnl iitulli-lnyer pholoprEpldc usiLicrLiiJ. The long 
chain can be introduot^i by ac} latiofl ofaa ojty group piescnt in the dye forr^OT by 
Ihe union of fatty add diionde lo an amiiio gtoiip *n ^ sailuthm of pyridine, TIm 
inanufactuTe of cotour-feruuTS hevittg such u long chain attached diriKily to ihii 
moitcuk iH dtioibM in B P. 502,ti6l 

There is furtJicr claimed tbc tutf odijciico of n grtsup gisTriff soEiibtiity m wzter, 
such os a sulpho groupp liim gi^lrtg certain advantage*. In this way 4 couplet Is 
ohlnhisd wKidi» whik tclrtg wLuble in walcr, ittaini the nffinJly to gflutirw und m 
prevents diffuikm from such e layer A sulpho group can be dJnsedy rntruduad ^fo 
the coupler or into tha aliphuiic chaifi. In the latter caM a fomw ^ re4iet(d with an 

imiatiirnLeJ fitly add ttaidiw wllirfi Iciida itself easHy I & sulphomatiem. 

Tlifi ideaofihc wholepatcol 1* best sviutmod upM follows:—** By Ihc^vtitbitiaiion 
of a caiboa ch;tin of mote ihitn i taifboii Diotm with t jefoup impaning solubitiiy io 
Wilier It bccoTiKS possible to lendfir ot Jeoep sohible in via.iCT the dyesitiif fonticf 
which is to be 0^ and nt the janic tiniE to impmt lo it the property of renJerina 
njutlon Cjd the pboiogmphic emulsion layer By teosnii of these two prupcstie^ it 
becomes possitde to obtain a muitibiiy^r matffuil which does not suRcr from airy 
duadvimtages of tbc wmilcrin^ of dyes from one bycr to another/* 

Tbtrt is ghtsn m a spedfii: tmmpb a imiltliayef material cohAbiing of three laym 
each cofiliibiing a diHerCnt colour^fdTmer, tmnwly:™ 

L iHkcy l l-o?ty l-nuphihoyl arnuic 
OH 




691 


COLOUR Cl^^£Mi^TOGIlA?KV 


2. U<n><4ctU7laniiDO|»ttcnyl> 3 ind)i>| S^fityiaaatoim 

NH.CO.CmH„ 

CH,-Cav 

CH,^ c/ips N 

1. ctecanylofnltio ii^lEc add iHlnbidiiie 

CH*|CH^)iCOpCl^^CO ttii$ c4im|Kiiind is 

mwertjun ^ the naw ipvcn is opm to differem 
Other cxitf]tplt$ r^atuHng i cnttoit chain of iniw Ihaa 5 carboti aionts jire:— 
jhlTturyt unrinoben;fayhi4»Uknjiid^ 

CH^C1U)*COJ^H.(“^CO.CH^CC>.NH(^ 
w*34cuiy laiVjiiDbtttzdi^loraiimlUilc js^cuibcc^ylJc 

f' U fT. KTU 
C,,HrtCO NH^, > 

CjiiimjiJes«nnbinrag bath laq^chiiinaiitl alpho 
1 (T^lpborihepytj 3H4-stury^niiiiotitiraiyl; f^iuatone 
Iptin^ieqtyj^jiminofYbenyl) J-rneUiyl ^-fwotjeotow (sulpfionaieil) 

CH. - CH ^ N . , SO^H 

ct,.. co>-< / 

\_-^NlLCD.CrtH» 

/KWoic ^tilpbo aittmp 3-n»tfayl ^]tytntf}qn« 

CH,- CH=N \ - 

I >-< 

ou-co/ '_ 

P'SiU^iItflcteaiYltniThio boKoyl aedaDiliito 

Ci,H,jSO41)00.NH< ~')co,ai,.caNH 
3 eapfvylArainp t-<isyaiiilith«l£be 
CH,<CH,)*CO.NH_r^ 

^OH 

I ilfijfyl 4N(]-(j)(y a-jiatfuhwnphcnvIimc diBminft (^Mfphinmted) 

OH 


;'HHXTNCH4)/3f,!i0.eH,(ai,),CH, 


/ 


SOJ^ 



'V' 


ooj>;h 



/Nifx:io,c„n. 


“;r£:r»X'i:'if‘S'!ar^js- 

to Uw cdfttm It noHia nppew- itut the AjUtafitlviiy H iJue io ihe «3nniBe ef ila 
«ourJ« m thr phiHotmpht: l«yct Id (he roini em cotovdoi wtSoft. *“"™* * 
692 


Appendix 3 


hijSiiFy pctymenc cart^oKylk vabat^mca fife:— 

Pciytliicorcmic Bu:iiJ« [CHCKCH CJI li COOH 
E^^fDtcin ticid^. 

Pol)'*%inyl<aft>03^1ic MKfa, r^jp*i poljraurylfic !u;kI+ mkciJ pi^lymcdMla wUti 
tfSTTfic, vinyl chlisrt^ Of vinyl 
Polynoeft^ies of tnniej^ aL'id;. 

POjyfucTKkt^ of fiinmv; ackL 

Pol>TnftfMiTri of tfcUiylwJC mdicmic o^id njsil fiiixed jKilymtriffl tci of tTic wsi tlnw 
nufxr^ flctdls with vinyl compoiincb^ 

tifjfTi niolecutdr Vrci^lu wjitipotUMii fitJiti tmikic nail smiiydrirde ot acttylftfie 

OKixrbo?(yTic ndds prepated occoidln^ to Ditls Alder. The» ^ycarbec^ Ik ^ 
ciioed to iwKt ill fonn of thdf 40il ^hUiridei^ *EiliydridK or Oiicfl reactive 
froupa illlschni la tbc colour formci. 

A cQfldwsatiQn product fnjnrpotyvinyl iraklcacMuttliyElrMle Odd iHt-*iituiP|ihiuiol 
or rcspoctircly 3-methyJ 5-pymzoloi3c uemld lx 


<CH - CH- CH- CHI*, 



i&H 



Another modUiodion of tive prindpk of il» loti^ carbon cbalii is (pven m D.F. 
493,<K»0 (Aiirn mm. Which dcali wluiivdy with cnrbohytriia a* fiixuii^ suiiaWe 
for impimias Um^ dciifcd fastness to thii ermikifnir Stvei^ ^vaya uredi^ribcd bow lo 
iutfoduCD such mokxuln ta the coloor conTpCfi^rH; 

11 ) tiy ciicrifsiiDf or cthariryuig the drbosy sroiip of ihe cvbohydmc wiih Ui£ 
coiiplo'* 

lUj lo ^ ajcWc-uniidc cvPiMmilkm. 

(ill) fimmrtg a SebifT's bast This ineihod hu ncit b«h menttoncsti before aiul 
k frohobly tuod for stich carbuhjtlftLls akKidy coniamiii^ i kzio m 
ahJ^iydc poup. 

m poml fct iniuic that In dwogk® a i^arbohydruu. tvtshouki bo takcii to uje one 
which is ^iiibk in wqt*f or capaidc of awollirtg kt it, * 4 ** «Jhilre« eihen* ai dfr- 
scribed tn O.R.F mi 92 . 

IhzSipcclftcaliofi mcdtiofis fot ihc i‘irsidiiBltH:irseofKMlinin«lt>cif Uxde^ 
ooltfUT fcTTtictx Whkh are Mid la btsoUihk bi H^O anti tor this namn to beai^ to 
iocorpotuto in the cmuJslon. Anathtr reninrirtl^e feature is ihiit a \ery hcawf 
CB rbo-chuin cm be intioductd in two iiasss by ^irbinln^ two can»liydrati» lopthor 
or Only oiw carbohydmle with juHJthcf similar Iod^ chain molecule. The foJ loviing two 
exampb^wiil 4 good illuafraUoo of what k mcatii. 

Into the umplcf a ilpewndw ii iniruducal, whidj by lirelf would Mt nialte the 
compound fbit to ditfuMtoq This k then irentoJi with a poly ^ylenhrrirnt. On ilx 
other hand, a hydnMtyl group df lha catbohydralc pul bofislcrihcd with a folly acid^ 
or a E^bohvdiate such as &mcK dextrose or m^r, is iicoied wiib ethylene a«kk 
Dccondins to D R F, 368,413. At* the ttomplre of cokrtir-tonTxn meroiOTitd pwe 
bJiiC'peciH, such as denvativua of i^cctynaplLliioic ebloiidei 


m 



OJLina ClNEMATOCiRAPJTY 


Tte JXI Rf. 4IH.69SI93SJ, is ralhtj i* ihe 

<^ttitid ore Pfllyiwptidc* and lii* impocuiKc of tim jpociikfltj™ lies prabablv in 
ite ^ of geta Hw cr it* ^^noq product an autl-diffiision swup. A* In'ilK 

** “^biimlion *1(1, 

JfliBcJy conrprisR gclatinii imd its {leetndn,!iein prcduLi, iilh-inw^* and 

Of a tjjffereni ^rmter is Rp. 4W.WJ os d dews not gji hack to D.P. 464123 
cototaing of moie tltm S carton wjs duimod.'The 
^{^n»«.(»f ibc ^mponiHh i» this new tpeciSwiinn. the stcwU. mv 
'I* ^ HMilecular wcigbt and complexity uf struelure. In ito 

s^<jr^i*pateni fall. Cholesterol. DUe tuads. ChulJc acidi. eic. It is saJd Uial these 
^ups, bea^ reijctomg the eoopter fasi to difliijicm. have a nivoumble dfcct on die 
K^SuT' ‘be wrftof tetislon and cabling « better flow 

'' r*®posfti to ntilke dywcuff comboncnti 

to dilT^on ^ inirodnanga smiable giopp of aUptoOc chain orewlic ctontekf, 

T'^'r «>10L.r.romtetS havu^Tctoin-fomteii 

nwlc^le HI whnb the miduc of a dycsiulT coinpoiteni occurs » i eolmir-fojiiiing 

wSMpecklly soiiublc ore tbo4 

naphihsil™, luivinB In twtn fBSition to a hydrov 
ciitof no sutatmient qi uIJ or n negative subsiliueni sm* as, for 

2lS,!^itX ‘^^•,“7“'’'dyestuff fonntrt tu* cowlensal unde; 

T; ^ cxjimplc, fommldebydc; fmrn mete crmol 

^ f* polydipheny^^lttlhaIllC dnrivativm which 

^ dyesiuir compDoem several itmij* acconling to the >(w of 

^ oolow-foniMr?, siese here the molecule 

”* components. It h ftirttor cLumed that m ihh 
^ ^Itortrum may he obmlneO. imrliwibrlv Hie darket 

e»>Dur*fontWr having a chain fomicd molecule 
I^^JUr “n * “^Py'wnt «etin as a octlour-fomiins swap 

WWip* which do impart nnii-dilfuBicui, 

L , JiffMs ftoiti the pivvioiis ones, as iw Such ltkiup Is daimed 

*•» propenirt. r.p., Hiose grmjm *s tpccifled 

taUw pr^us ^rtidon* Anaiber twvslty is the fltsi aitcmpicd definition of the 

ttoTwlSra spedfic=iiion. k to to underttood 

cmuhwn. w can to nemoint themlrDni only with difikultv by mv laltmt or dis- 

pc^ medii^ which hovnutUy dissolve of dhpetses the Coupler 

iJr "" iubstituied unldH of malonle adds when; 

or ihe ovtlctfui: aiiJ can be mxoch&d fo ibe nittpiteD Haiti ta 
^Ite to pail of ft carboxylic acid, mter or 

^ p *J^nt I iMolmn that Rehntoqi of Jlfonl Umiicdclftinis. 

m «.r , sih.0J7, a colaur-formcr of the gnicnil fomnda 




as can be SMI. it already included in tbCEhuin afitUi epedficeiJofL Time me 
only ihiw riuiinplci iinen, tumtcly :— 


(I) NH, 00. Ciit, 00 (CH.), CH. 

(K) CH, (CB.),, <Q> ^ <0 

fOii <3^-<3^ ™ CM, CO. NH 

Most Ckf Uvest ^lulufes oi^ wd to be inKOhihTc [md mm ^rootp f houJd hs imro^ 
dihxd, ttich M nkilirho vt csrtwy, ip Import saluMUty to w^ter. 

Hifiji iiio3eaiEar vtsiflbt consliluemi OT^aimoil agum in B.t*. 4^J114 rJtdf 
being rtatumi mbu or ecntvmiaf^ pradiicui «l ih^ wtudi Mre laid lo tbe 
deswd Jiflinesi. t& dSflUsion- Ttieic musi coutaiQ a rcaciivfl grciup, ftjr 

instance, cnrbOAylk cr hydroicyi «iih the aJd of which cah be caiis^ to enter into 
cticmicat reaction with the ofllonr-raiTper. Sfl^itabte mlncm pmodLiclA are described 
tn Bsiii. Soc. CMm, td), 29, 717; ^rrAiv. 251, 34J; 259, i; 59, 

95, 219a 627: 40, 277; 41 451 
As sspedal exainpln sibictic acid has been mentionodL 

The following iwo jpodlkatftiw, B^F- 491,958 and 491,959 193 ®), cine very 

iitnUar to «fldi othef ailil deal, is Ihc pfevit^na one, whb groaps conferring anti- 
diffusion prapcTiica^. New U ibc itstieirani itiai it may be of advaniage lo csomhlae 
on ooccolourTbrmcr moleeuio two coniTHjaenisof motocular weight of dilTOTnl 

kinds as disckj^ in pre^iou^ patcnlL^ 

The cninponctili cUlnwd in ti,F. 491,959 are n^tiea ^ dwivaiira of the 
tnenUidne grcMjjy as doictibed tn Rfeftfirffc lltJl edition, Vqt [1, pp. 498-9* and XC^i 
69, 1401. The whole of I1.P, 491,958 smieca residiBS ithkh do not belnog lo the 
cydlc mcnthaius scrie but winch ™iiiiii at least two ongs directly attached to one 
another, of u^ich least one nna h hyttrogenuied^ Examples mentioned in ft-P- 
491*959 



CO. CH,. CO. HH COOK. 

CO. CH,. CO. NH COOH, 



9t)d til B.F. 491,959 



Ot,- CH, 

Nh/~^)CH<^ ^>CMi 

CH,^QTi 


695 










COLOtra fttKRUATOciitAMfV 

N AnH. Cp. CH, OP./^ 

ck 

.■'CHi I'dJr i'''H 

NH.CD.af,^ ^>CH-ai( * 

^CH, - CH,^ ^CHt- CH, 


CH, 



I-y 


J* nmtiildjw Otni Juving mwpomttd in e«ch 

'*'’**' **”"* “jwbfcof fonafng a c^^^uh ii-i 
t^had outnoJ 1^ nsldue Jialiilc fog^. The ktenl 

JSSSl'SS.' SSTiStStS^ 1 " ■« ■>» l™ d™i„> 

Thte paiHU if ihe nfluuJ hiDdanKntBl liasii orihc Ag&cvlnr pfoeeu. 


696 





APP£N01X 4 


SURVEY OF KOa^K A!«l REIATEO RATEJm 
DtAUNO WITH THE PROBLEM OF THE 
ANn-DirFOSlOM PROPERTIES OF COIjOURo 
FORMERS UFTTIL MARCH m2 


B efore pnxxcdiiv wstb an Indiviilunl tutdy wf iKow paienti fitdn- 

^rveljr Willi j^i-diUuaioti propcnfn of colpui-fomKri in n phoiofrafiljic 
qMieriiJ, ti miKihl bt worth while U) tkiil first wlih a (Kitcnrt of B more goiiefal 

diunwrfcTi. 

B-t*, 5(13vt?SZ (A'ptii 1^39). Tlsii h otit of Phjc inosf fE^matkiibEtii in colour 

phok^j*y ever apptksj Tor, Of fcjny-t*o pr^fci, c^malxilnf ibirty^fixT clahm, 
jv^gs:^ in tDbubrfcrm nrc Hlkd mih ihe of clbcmksl^ suitable 

ciitier aj cfmpltri hi themielvM,. ix at ^n^erTTvdr»J» for their iifi^finraiioTi. Tlic m% 
of Ihc speeifi^Kjn coiuijis of q comprshewiiix wi colour phoioizraphy 

which, hunxver, mia a ^onwwhit cotifuwJ i^tyk. 

rroiTi ihc wealth cf Information dispcrcfcj EJircm^dul; sotne H otftutrily yrorth 
fjtcnlionlnj^ it fbra metal hints fin anti-din'iisiorii tin4 colour ooupliris in gcocfQl 
Tilt ffltticT inttn^tio^ ffaiemuril h made, cJmE li ia not eaay to produce a brilliiaut 
iCTLut ^^EEow component in ihc upper laycf wUh ncoioaoetfc derivalives. witoc 
coupk quL^ijr enough rnily io the preMOcc uf liirso flitunjiiii of 
aiJcatl qnd the coupler, ihcEctoru* ntoii be proscnl in lar^c cjojch ip order to yield a 
Ipood toiagE^ duch aomSilioiTd urc aeliutlly idmii foP rnrn»un 4 [ the diffusion of u 
colDur-formcr, fi he llimfore proposed to iiie u developef which frost Ji yellow 
colmir by difKl oration iirntdtaneoutly wftb reducfion of the dc^'^Ofrrbk iihxi 
tatti to sih-xf, such Ets o-amimi iym, ji^Xylefi£!j 



The actual discovery made by ihc oppl^nts was, that while Et wus Ictiown that aio 
components, m an insolubk fo™, were able to eoupCc, under vieoedio ccmdliinni, to 
tt*o it was aow founil Ihat ijiduiniEK: or sitamdLJhhae dye forTTMitlcm couM 
take pliwe usiiii m bsaluble coupler In n phorofvirnhpc layer. Awprdingly* ihcic ^ 
dmmed a pttxxEi of a mulElJaycr phologmphk nuUcfiaJ Uwolubk ^ <okHir 

coupicrx 

Tbz novdiy And juiiillcaijoti oi* sndb. a ckim ia iiucsiidmabk. |^is£;:hefr in hia 
Pti^ftl paper, in the Z4!if^hrifl /Ur Fhi>t 0 };rifph%\ hat already 

polmi^ Out ihat U would be neoemry to hiive imoluhic couplers in n Ihpacfc 
nmtermf to preveut the dffrujtkm oFlIic former frotn one byer to auoilier FunJunv 
cniotc,^ bn euriy patent of tt.P. 465,^23, is cLaLm^ josoltiblc compound} 

i^ontaliunit Imf; uhain Afmips auli-diOusioii, m well it iho^ whkh 

ant jpftdally made niMcr and dcvclofscr soluhb; 

The deftnftlon ^ven for the lerm " Ireohible,” which » included b the dnitrh h 
rather umuiwl, losotubfc ns defined In ihia specification rtKftns that the csmplej- 
It out mufeaahihlt ihan the nw$X loliitik of ihe folJoii*dntf 
Tfi^^apHthol irbnnc, 

^“Nsphthfd 2-OiriDoaytfc add ^hrtaplithylimwdc* 
a'Naphtho! 4-betuoyl ketone anit the hydiarooe of the kitt named. 


697 



COLOUR Ct^LMATOOR V 


Thli ddijiKifonp txiKrknce ihow:^, la opcft to cftikism, 

KtciTOmoiit of intetw vppcarinji in the s|KelficatjDn Qcmc€m coujikr^ irt fcrtcrul 
flfiil U5cif Eu*i, II li Lhftt c<^tTTilin| eocrrptTiicnli coEiEdmtnK a inJnhoaic 

iidd ciT cQiboKyrk Efotip htt\x Ttronj; Bttbstnniivjliy to gctiiiinc. On iJic otJicf hnndp 
jiriti^ik Kj^droxyl and iield in^thylmc pocp^^ do not ccntfcr tipon iht 
CDDiponettU contiiiniit£ iIicitu adcqiiGitc aFpnity (ot g^l^iicuc on accoiint of itscir 
weak add durmcict. Hato^ccLiElnn hiiit^ abooi a 4;*;rtiiin uffinltj' T-f 
E^ctaiitM nnly in ycry molcL'uiiir ooup^i^ cvmpoftcntiw Similiirtyp the 

mbnafirriity of aliphjuii;, iRKyciu: or hcicroc>'dio omipotmda ctfiftininiog ihc 
■ddmcthykne cmik increiueiij by the IntroducEkRi of bromine into the nwihyiene 
givpup. OT of nitro groops iclo ibe nudons. 

The iionslitfuaihiEity of coopTinip cothponcni^ii ckicrmiitcd^ oDcordiiig to SdLEurdp 
»tdy by ihccnki^menl of the molecule oud therii^lthis iolkiiilnl cbarjcter. 
Ko-weicTp 5TJ4:h b ^talcmenl vconSd iippcsit too Rtmoraltzeil, aa some typtc^iHy high 
ttiolectilEir und hE^hly cohoidiiJ azo dyo diHuitT aortic o^-cn in spite of ihek 
sulphcnk aerd group. 

In Ihc case of ^r^phlbol and tEi 2 jnd 3 aubfiilulion iTrodlit;tJi+ a halogcrt, sulpho 
or caiboxy in the 4 podUos, h displaeod ki Doupling ikvfilcEpmwiL Only if 
Use 4 poiJtion i^ipicd bj' a nim-4ii5pl4rabk fcuduc awili as ilhyl, aryl or aiyltt- 
rifne* duct eCnpTins hike pTai%' In the 2 posiEioD, avid any haltj^^nn suLpiio or car- 
tw«y lk sxtmp tn ihe 2 position n UkEU-hie dbplaged. The dtspbfemcm of ihe aeid 
radkisU \n thc4 posiEFop trukcsiit possible toobtuliieoinpikiely toiihihle inJephcamla' 
fn^eotipLjng eDutponents which m held lub&lanlively by the gdaEJiM 

Anoilicr fenture of ilaij spociScntiui] is ihc i±ie of ppedpitEiEing asetits in the 
emulsion. Eiitd ifvc use of salts of iheoouptBr at de^ol in claims {y^ 9, 10 Eind IT 
tlaioi & ipec.iiks a eouplin^ ilc^iiFi^rper whldt ts prepifred wiih jilSphalk flirihK=SH 
diitmines, pobTlhiicnanimes or guimidine#: whik clAlms 9, IQ and 1 1 chtiiu cDuplIng 
cwnponCnta whkh coiisisi -tif imoluble sails foTinfid b> i he Ttn^icm Ixtween n ht^ 
rnoEeciiEar wtiahE coupling comp^ent of acid dmacter^ aM u liigh rrioIccLibi 
welelit otiiiTrie nilrogon bAMr. Claim IQ is s spedfA' cjuimpic thcreor claiming n salt 
ofn sulphonk add derived fjcm ^z^Tuiphihot wiih quifune, diwhomfot, UiplKnyk 
l^idlne cirsimilnr of^ie hue^ whUc ckirn 11 fpedOes ^ isIchjriiH hiiriimi, nnigoe- 
injnl, or Lead of dm; taJl L^f a coMphni^cotnpciocnE of Dddchamiter. 

Of Ihc iwmty-sevefi e»0Scs of fabnlatcdi chemiaal fames it k tulfidcnt to lay thal 
they tompiiie a faltiy comptete IndeA i'tf nil the known famllifia of afomaiic organic 
ctiembrni^ TabTcs II and II irivc easily prepated inrnicrialciit and polyvalent 
CDiLplinie caitrrnimdi tniiahk for catrjiog ani ihe mvertiloo:. Table grvfis 
cxantpla of high molecukr iXnipUn^ cQmponmtA and indioiEca their method of 
rrtcpWrwtioh from Ksmpler coupTinp components TdWc V idN'K cisampTci of colour 
Goitplim w likh aic itMik by condenunp ulmphir compoftent^ wtih high polymer 
cnmpmmd/i. 

Tlie Vnaiklity of swell a bwd pateni H vary ^iiiealiortftble and one might wonder 
for what reaaofi it wtw fifed by Seftimel for Kodak LlmlEcd. This speeiJkotJon b 
fi^llownt by 4 number of polenljb wliLdi Jmve beoti divided ont. mimcly., EI.P* 503,814- 
832 hicluuMe. 

B.P-SQ3,1tZ3i (April I929> b vImiUr to the Agfa sspcdfkalign 479,838 which 
dKCnbcs a compcijni'd Tiinx to diffusion, cibictiued by reociJpig a knnw'p coliXirTomicr 
with a highly polyiTinic c&rbo^ytic add, or wlih ■ mixed poIymcrlsaEc. Cofonr- 
rormcfn whJkb Ml under the «oope rif this pjumt and which are fnit to diffioioii ore 
oNamed ’by.ccrn.dcnsmg xvo or more molfoilea of a cnirtpoutid containing u coupling 
funcUon with an alJphAtk e/illoidal pdiyhydrfKcy> oimpoiihd mch a* a rarbohydraie 
fiee H.p* 483.000, TO- Fntbcnl, for euinrple, polyomyloM. or n polybydrosty com* 
pound siasdv At cdhiloK Iiec li.P. 4ff.I,000, I.G. Farbcn}, m u piirilally acylaied 
cdlidw or a poiyvinyfik^Dl (see B F. 479,838. T.G Fiiiben). AlturuiIveJy, iho 
coirpling ctTrnptmctjl may be ut^nuted hy comhiains two or more roolecnin of a 


APPEKr>lK •! 

cafEipotmd a ocHiplinjt fiiocdon a paTytiyEriDcd comjxsutiiJ fcftich 

produced by pobniCTs™^ phenol (let B.P. LQ* Faristn). A etiuplinji roinv 

piotitnt> bcobMinp:l bya abnilsrccnibirtati^ 

^Tih pnlyarnhsc* im or polynicrititblo conTmtuidi. 

fKP. 5^U*825 4Pd Sa3.S2b (.Ajffi! Bolh ti^HKifioilloni OW palfliiliof U JdliSon 

to B P. 50J JJl Both deal With ajlimr-farmm which ire fnsoluhle ax doflo^ in Ihc 
lattstf n^tcDT Emd wttkb are, ^sahl m be fmt UJ* diffuslonH The cfunpouiidi 

{ 1: ^ it Tfgjf Mt ftot iitw, hat then is a po^Jble novelty Sn their imdcctilsir siruitiirti 
The fum, U.P. 503.^25, deal* wilh ooloyr componetil* ^bkh ha^'c iw iUTcttnl 
^uplins OitidJon^s ui om motocule^ Ttii* ^ heft Slbsiniicd by ihrec c^tumplci; — 

OH 

<~ScH*. CO. CH,. CO. CH, 




The jnlHiinU&ion prepeiiici of these ctini|K>uiJdif is pitihahly due lo their tow 
*clubiliiy, aiui lo the formaiion of lar^c dyo nfiolccnk^ lEie hnt two of the e%amplw 
oiapliiiji wlih im mote* and ihs tWfd with ilira motes of the developer. The hue 
obtarntd from soeh cDlour-forme^ ooflUdiDitB mixed cDupling ffinctitm'i wotdd he or 
(icTM interest. no it^ercitiJc to this oocun ta the Ri^ctflcsUiorL 

O F. 50J,$36 if sOTlltr to the fore^Mng In xhaX it docs not dlsctoac any new coronr 
ccKtpler, h«i with iho dlfltrence that it claim of the rormar to ooi^of * dyo 
tnoketde Of a IfniifO dcftvftU™- In ihis case the hnal dye ii lootrtposw (n the dye 
molecule and aJw oftlic dye fonrwd by ooupliw By the priM» of coScwir de^irioiT* 
mem the hnlnmirc formed h towdublc kcatisacatkflii. wbUe the .nvchuiigcd coupling 
component ki mno^ by h. 

The imxesa h cssmtinlly ihai of elimiiwiiofl coupSlns dc^^fibed in B P- 5Q3,8-.4 
which rt oouplhti compancoit bisolubtc in Ihc alkali ii*Ad for thrc dey'ftlop^ and 
removing tbo dc^^eloper lolubln ooupliog product - Thfi residual componcni d then 
conve!i«d into a coloured inia^. 

With $05,^34 fPfefay lOTh by M Murtinci, a new seeks of apecilKSitton* 
Ittwed by Kodak h sttifted A* ill tlWK pAicrtJS aic biiicd on iloii of Martw^^s tt i* 
neoc$sary to desetibe it here hi more deiiLlL 
Thit patanT Introdticcs a oompkidy pp# ide* in the kMaUi^afion of cobuf-formeTS 
10 their appro|idaie lay^ In all previous rpecifl<:flrion* colouf-formcra wore 
claimed whidh have been nuute fa*! to dilTuviini by oombinins them with cut iw^anic 
residue of high molcailjr vrai^i. In B 483^74 inich a residiiD, which in ihh caie 
u a aatunil or symlmik nsin^ ia <kscnbed A^^ottliag to lkP+ 305314 tlw colour- 
ftmner b fijoaS in potiiion by mertm oTa nuttinilcr 4riifeial t^ithcihl fcwn or gam 
tesiii Such u ca^pbony» gum daracnar or gum lamlarach whld^ t* not chemidUy 

699 


COLav^ ClNe^MMOORAPIlY 

iombtricd. bni uiuteil wrih it In a pufcty waj. Hm iniWttion fnaj be camod 

<rtit by fcmnijiy a MRulkm isl a n^in and otdisiif-fomicr In n conimmt iolwt itnj 

fiTKi^itming Hmfham a of rcaiii und isjlcnxr-dhrmer ** in mEemit tft phviiiail 

^itii cudi who- btii cumblftal. 

Thi^ miatiinfi cf the colour-ffdtrncr and nSiJn m:^y be ptcctpiiaEed inlLi a 

4(jrnirn« itmukion or ^pcbtui* aii>nc or cKhcr snitat^ colloid toiuUci^i, and 4ub- 
sftuxfcnily iocorponitoJ In n wnillive Biiijl$l&ji. ti i% idaimed that r^is dod cuJiitif- 
fonnm Eire impended in tht cmiilrnoi] in a fine diBcn$Ee: di^perBJon of pnriklEs In 
tadi of which h presem belli rain And tokHif-^TonncT. 

TIib invcfil (Dit If based on the fuppo^tkni ihdt Midi ^ '^ 30 ldlJ^'^oIT^re^^ bcin^ In 
mcinuif r^%uQl Kweintianwiifa n mkiu tbt aalun of rho and 

thiw if pie\%nted from tnijznitin^^ ti> other kycEs^ btil if noi piciwitcd from i^oiour 
eoL^Jmg H^tb oKidniiQn product of ihc developer acirng on ckivolopable filvtr 
huhde grains ndjaoent to the- coupia-re^fn paltlcic 

Thl^ pnndpic of 6yc ^tion hikt now been talLeji tip by Kodaks wbo^ af flatcd. 
bii^x KSfued a Inrgic number of npedliE^Liioiis tntwd cm thlantindple. The lirst of Mh 
pafeti^ ii (jEib' t!M(h (Koddki. Tiwt ia no liLfTcrcDcc in principle 

betuecfii the fwci^omjj Slurtincf apecfflairion and the Koiijk opic, HowciiTr+ ii 
«aits ifiat KcHbk Isave not oaly up ilv jjJea Iml hav^e ilsn wxirkAl out die 
rradie^ appikntkm snul fo earned the immnton a *icp forw^mt 

invention consists, acomline to Kodak, in ptoviding i meibod of makiiig a 
ictiillKc colmif p^togmphic eCement which contprisck, 4 ki a single supiporL one or 
more Uyen eiamstirtu of dilfettinlbLEly ocdfiur'«nsiti2ed etniilil^ of filiicf bnlidei. 
oDnimning n coVimr in a ** wnter^insohEblei waicr-penneabic btodcr. The 

w-aier-lfftohiblc, w^tc-r-pcrmn^bii^ WndoT may be a tsier Mjch af cdlidosa 

nitraic oi aoetolc. Other binders wbkh cnii be i.cN:d, m natural caifiiL suck as furr* 
maalit; gum dammiir, gnin samkrach^ or ^ihetic n&akiA fuch af pofytrtyinoies, 
pc^lymctJty Lurry Lola, polyi^lnyl noetflic ot a counmrone-uidene resin 

itpldciae ibe Ecm " w^terrniioiubte, wuicr-pcniiaiibfc ” by *" Oolour-Tottum 
in iniimatn phvidat conUicr iiitb twof the hinder^/' ihdre it no nirtJceable difference 
bctwwt Ihis fiod the M^ine^^ ipccLEImlinfi. The only nioTlly Jd.\ for Kculalc to 
claim in tjtr of the i™ watsar^insofubk, »^at$r-pemifiahle Nmkr." 

The bcsi rmults arc mid lo be obiaEnrd by ituit^ wutcr^inimucihle scdvenuir to the 
tisc of tt^ict-mikdble lolv'cnta^ ludi n» n fewer nb^l, ro as^i in the tDOOfponuHjn, 
icthniie^ crysLiEEizalion of ivcndcring of die ooimtr couplers, and also by udng 
roTmei which cry moic sofeblc Uura 1 ;4^1KbeniDyIiiixbimino)bcnzciiu fettl Eefc 
soloWc iJiQJX J i4-dkhloro S-bcnTnybniinu l-naphlbol, m an aiowm toTLiiiiHi muTn' 
tftinedai bciween pH 8^5-pH II. 

An intaresiing point ri mink with regard To ihe diffkujty of penetmiion by the 
denelopcr into bmden^ cspeciully celluEosk binders^ ^hicli » tjmt a ** porosity 
nwdjEkr " stn ^ incorpomted hi the binder. The cumpfes onoied art i^nally 
known a^ pJositdz^er or high bollfeg lolvtnite foe odlakwnxerv 

There :tre l wo paimH of addldon to ilw* one, H,f. 524.^54 ami 524,^55, Tl)c firrt 
cMins die use uf feyeriiecptaJning the bbrnler In as-sceieiino wlih colmrof-annirn, and 
tm seicimd the tise of ‘wfller-pcniteabfe etllulc^se cJerhalfvci in purLladiir, an liindfiig 
raaleriil. 

A new idea isii A'ii^TH into ihe problem of i^jiii-dllTuaioa lu fiuP.^dv^^iDee. I940|. 

U lijs been fniuid ihial colpor couplers thow nmeh tess tend^ney to wande/ 
10 uetd solulioDs thrm in Eslkalme, iuhI rhut if lijig emtilsijfliu comtAining them are so 
rwer*trcd+ crened nnd proressed tfwn they pre nevw scibjloeiod to Eiqohl bailis other 
lhart ihoic which lUf ornn ^cid dunneuef, irrtlil the aniplnig drrefepmcrtl has talren 
piece; tbomcolonrcouplcn w-hkh mU dhfrHo imdnr alkuilDe condiiions ism nc^er- 
tbekss he mail withmit iwidue dMiision lahiitt JiTaec, PrefemWy liw cniubion tl 
iTiuiiiiaincd below^H 6^5, most dcwibly be^ow y([ 5-5 cliiTiogincoroorritiiCMU cooling 
and prelimhrery prnccHing^ 

700 


A?PENI^IX 4 


An developer rcunjib would be, u givsi by ibc spccnkAiion:— 
j[»-Pklh>iiimioe pbcziylei'idi^Lnc HCI .. ». 30 

Svdkm . ,, .. 10 e- 

P^u^siiim bwnide . . 3 g. 

Water to make up Lp .. .. .. 

Tbc film it immmcil In ibc add juivi kinu €riuugh to vti il thtirDu^lyH, 

otic nittiiilc being sufficietiU and h then nt|H»ed for 5 mi;iiiile% to iirtimthniii Vii|Hmr, 
vvhen* mlottr devctoiKmwit tak(» place. The film is ihcn ^'OJlhcd m a ti^uid of 
ddiily low pH value lo avoid ruillitr colour de^'elopoicni. 

U is uecesuiy to iociiidc io th^ survey of patents iskcn ouk by Kodiik UnuTedi a 
whtdi hu boEti gmntcd uj Elliot snd Smi^, tif Bairt^t. In patent E9-f odJuldn 
BhJ*, 53bv329 {Ihlay to BP. M}5^S14 of Nfortlrici?^ the resms sdeoted Tor wure 
ihc reiinoiis reoLiion prpdufli of polyliask addfi and polyhydrk jkolmlH vxriouviy 
desctibed ns phthaUic i>r akkyd mh^s. and jilso kmuKti under the rc^titctrcd trade 
mark or''Glyptitls'''iiad'^Faritlacif^^* ^Its i.>f i^sins am not eluded in ihe ebim- 

it b stmed tku by emptuykus sudt tt^ins die depth tmd brjlibnod of Ihc colour 
Einiigc is ImpfDvcd. The iu^^dlcr!! do oQl duifn ibe fjjcatlan of iLtc colour-l'ormer jo 
Lhc bindtiT but by careful wfdJrii; stole khal ibedilfusicn of iheeolimr- 

fomiK is iTiiiliiTjirid to such a ttegiiee that it k possible to develop^ to one aod the 
tiftic developer, istyan. eisnlainios dOTcreTil eolouT'fomiera wilhoul oLfUiniiiy de- 
ttradad colour IrDiiges. ’^Tlie crumples of uses ^ven stn similar to those of the 
MenzDcr. patent. 

Aitutlter Kodak patent running dtlftc lo one rf A$^*$ k tTF* t duDe 

In B.P. bsued to hO. Farben, colnui-formfirs arc dairrwd which fmve 

been mndff to dilFiiskin by ihe intrcducticii of one oi more poJypcpildc «rr 
protein rtsiducs, In lire ejtainpFw |ivicn. ^tdatine hufi been siri^ad mi as bem^ 
especmily uKful and advmtia^ou!^ 

Ill B.F. 537p25l!i Kodak waj uilowedi by ehnn^n^ in lotoo way tho above clnlni^ to 
ptilkry tho tilui^ uf ihis spedfiemionH Ttic ddim as pot forbid by Kodak leads: 

A photo^phk mabcrml having 4i i«i.t one coofinit coftioinmit ai hitsder oit 
organic carbo;^i or aulfdicmy l dcrlvtuftie of n protem wtuefi denvatt\'c dls5ol\^es m 
H,Q to tu^u A Aolution whicb will j^[ oo mm oocllng." 

The only dilfermcc between tiial clalni and tilt Atffa one is tfiiit the Kodak datm 
is ptyssihly even mdne gcnetiil 

J ?cwfi\«r,.4d.lJIcraij^ Uhe pfepsiratlon ofsudiCOupktifB.P. 537^356) Is diiclDsed 
in iJjpq tntamble. While Agfa,. befi>rc it cninhilKd Its coupler whit thc fclatme, bo^bd 
the jfeLiLitte for cmc hour with etwe. Mccibc add and so degraded Ik, Kodak Jiiniiangd 
to combine tl^e ooJour-fomicr widioyt desradaiion of the gelniinc, but by a very 
complicoicd procedure. Tht de^gntiiaiion ehbeted by Agfa k appurtndy not for the 
purpow of obtaining a morcaulKablo ptotcin, but todfe^ ibo combination ofcalcMir- 
fotmer ftnd protein m on easy moitficr. 

lE^lh While tlucrcniT described aod known nmncroui oolmir^ 
eouplrn coniaiEung ihc grouping —NH^CQ— It bos beeq foimd., acemding to the 
knveaiiors^ ilaii ibc gnmphig —MH—OO— can betriadc mote wslshtiit to djfTuskici 
by replacing the bydrugon atom on ibc amide nitn^jen arom by a monovalciiT orgiink 
group mu contalnki:^; i^ciltit^iliiing^ groups^ e.f.» an alk}^ or omlkyU fuittcuiiuly i 
benwl ^ip, The e^Tplanutkin ofTcred fe thal ifie hydrogen otfiaclKd to The ambde 
nittogeti aidita appem Mnrnewhat ionmibte^ whLk by teplocms ik with m orgtmk 
nidKml no iimitatJan cotilil lake ploj^ It Is stllj hanJ to see thaL u great dLDerenCe in 
atitl-ddrunfon propettics ouulil exist between the two coixipoundt: 7 - 


OH OH 



701 


COLOUH CINEMATOGRAPHY 

Hiawricr. (ookiHE lliroiiEh ilie e»Aipks. ane wP] obKn« that tjie hvimocn iv 
usually Hjbttiuiiiid l y yroup* which by ihcmKhu m aaid to impart api^iimiEion 
jiiDfCiiics and arectuimetl b> l-G- f iirhen in B.P. (CsriwudmiiH cfwJfline 

tii' fiv^ or liuifv tpoJi Jioms. j 

The cliiim ii r&iLrkted to tiic of l-cuiphUiol 2-<ar^v!k add and 

4<3tb<»(>‘lk 01^ 

il muif b^n^viiiiLdj^UA to EOcukict msw j pmcnX whkii does not ictnail^ concern 
iitieir wi!h ihc LtRli-iUtrusJDQ propecLTca orcoEo(jx4omiccsta hut deab with the ^tinit 
of bodii» Ui Uws Omubion. La B.P. (Oc*. L^l), she dy^ body j$ inooi- 

poniicd in iiu inixitiiiry carruir whLcii musi bt iubsuaiMy uauJubk in water and 
abk io fctalfi ihc dye body ia a dissolved or diapmed coudJiioa- Tbc iRture and 
omcimE or ilw iiiuHiary catricr mey be atich ihm ihe rUyr penides of soliiiion o^ 
duEpemon of ibc dye body ihetKui w liQuid parrkla or sotidi or what 1< called a 

Iktiud ioUiiioa/^ By the icrm " iiquid aoluUoa ** mebaWy ts me^nc Mh crypal- 
line aioieriflH which ape capable of dissotviatf «oiid dye bodies by bocftawB^ lk|md In 
ihat procets, StKh AiLuUiuy enrnffi deaaribcd. miy be rcimcd od formert Thev utc 
u^UtiiU' liquids iii ordinuiy loiiperaEuie or tow mcltim^ soHdi, ead the EnK^st useful of 
them cantaLas om of nwe poW ffronps such ui halo^n ncoats, tiydroxy L CiUi>oxylic. 
Eunidr or keto pou{». 

li woiiJil be Gxpecfed ituil Uwrec auxaluaiy odifkrs or oil formers w ould dJfkr froni 
Ihc wslcr-solubkp w^^lcriKTTueabk Hmkn in ttafi Uw devdopetp or uoy other 
solttiinn tn which this carrier is ioso^utde^ could niM diiTu&e Lhrouidi or aflfcci the dye 
punick. But oae uf the speafied m^iiremenu of those cauten li iiatcd lo Ik p^- 
me^bilhy lo bm iu^oluhitity in phoioempluc processing sidutim. The spedfkatiori 
prmtrks ft lut of mbsianra which can be «d as such iuxiiljiry carTwi?. Thb fiat 
b added to in putcQt of DddiUtm S.P, 5 ^p 525 . 

B.P, 544»^bh tOct, | ^t| deab cxcluuvtrly wish pcn^ily inoditkrs as disclosed in 
Ur?. ^24,154. U includei a Liil of Kuit^bk- hinii boiling advents jmJ plastki/er which 
be used for ihtii (yurTXJSc, 

B.P* 540,pJ6t and 54(1,3^ tOtl. L94t| lErc paLaiU of nddilion lo Bi'. 524.1 $4, nnd 
deal with the pmcucal applkatiOD ot wiitcr^iruoluHc. w jter^jmeable bindm hot 
ftddiunhiiiy to wlmi has iilready been disclosed previously. 

A fatbef iaijenithu klcit roems the content of BhP, S40+5ft3 (DcLk 1941k 

It b common know jetlgc thiit by iresuing aelmuie with an ntdehyde ituch as fonnal>^ 
dchydc Uic EcUtiiK is lurdeaciL Thii Is probably dus lo a chmital ftociifm taking 
pbee sjJTdlar to i he fonrim [ion of SchifT^s baset_ Ajtxordiitit to l hij mveiiJian a com¬ 
pound b ihcorpomted hi tlic eainEsion, having iwxj carboxyl groups diokle- 
hydM, Oikeioacs) together with n coltiur-cmLpIci: hsvirm i fw smitip group. When 
such a coupler nivd the compciltad cxniminkig ihe Ltuboxyl ^oup m aiixcd with the 
ertiiitnirm, one c^rbox^l group oftiic said ootnpouml leucti chcniktaliy with ilwamlini 
group of tlic coupler anilthe oilitr oirboxyl group runts with Ebe amino group of the 
ptotdn ttektineh ?hus comblninfl the coupkr with ft. The amina group of the 
coupler^ whkh reacts^ is prererably a primary ammo grtnip. but other Jirdncs rncy be 
uijcil. Clyoiulh ducclyj or Lemphlhatikhyde arr futlabk caitmyl compounds 
tfardcniiig of ihe geTaime aiope by giyojcal Joes nut prevent diBuskm of a cduplcf 
withoLit a free drriirkf gtoup, 

AnoLlicr tlidJkii5iy encoLiatcired nsbig colDLir^iipIcrt ^ssodaKd with a wwta’- 
rraqlubl>^- water-pcrmcubic lander Is dealt wlih m B.P. (Dee* f94]>d 

ProoKsiug baihi sonHtini<& do ncn aa to a suirkkai ntmi w sulTkicnUy Si^pidly 
upon Ihe coluurH.-oupkr? diipcrsed;; ofiai very weak hdJ somethnos no colour at nJI 
b pTDduceil, It is knrvwn that dljHXned liquid coltw^urmen of low aaluhlllty arr 
maw amettflWc i* Evracefi^lng Iwths than kw solid particLss of colotir-cmiplcfs. 
Hiiiwri.Acr, llic ntunbn-orsuch cnuiikn h very sanll. 

The Invczuqraof this psiteot hare now foinsd tJiai colour-coupkrSs, whkh m seJids 
UBiicr ordirHiry eandiiiom, can be cdmcrtcd mio liquids of oil consUicrKy by »tic 
702 


Al-^liKPSX 4 


adtiittim urccrtuin hi^l buiimie uJ'^Mik coinpcuoiii wlikll ^re hiischliible or on^ \cry 
»ii|^iJy soluble m vainer {uid m the lA'ct pfiocu^r^pliuj ciuuisMm- In liiii wa> ailour- 
E,QUpl«ni are inaiituiucil in Uquid solulk^l iti itiu anuEsitus, tSec ll_r^ 540^65.)! 
Such or^^liiio OKUpOuiHis whkh are cipiblc of fonrun^ Itqmil soiiiiioia arc icrmcU 

iiiN^ormm-'' Lo cirikr lo cbUiln n fOoil flniiiUir^jng Are 

^-u^pslcd stidi 4 if " Garilisol trtiii&tercJ tnu!u fiiaEkJ 0£ ** Axvtic Sytttux T/' 

A very till luppLieU of colour^wfilm miuibk for 1i^r wUh Util; 

pT WLtmi luvefltiQiir ALL 4^ ocuplct^ iUC ^iij|0ieslc^oOaiijio ‘Sotttc K^oup whkh 
hat bccu cluinutU, hi out or euKKbO' spa.nikrjiban, os unpiiniai; a£tj-illMiiuin Eo thi; 

RiofefcOiit. Thii 4Uit8tat!i llliii lUv pJm-iUilitihjrj of Uic toujilcr ly olhef 
layers a ool sd peri'ett cA il il ckLnmL 'whm di§pcr»ii in Uic Ocaoibed uithioti. 

Ttvc injciwtofig dtacloniit a lintlc, that a nkinibcr of oil fortEw puscsi ihc 
suiptaims pioperiy of i:a»iing a sliift io the altsorptioii of Uic foitited diirinjf 
■colour (k^iVlcipmcEit. 

ll k n&LAsajry to conaldtr Mioin a patcitt. aanicly UJP. 513^606 iMitrdi 

J942E3* ^ hkti foLlott’s directly on hil Iflll U-F. 5-05,KM and which hai hocomc 
iiuetuly Uv« paittiii piJetti fta^ all Uwfolkiwirtii flpj[UicatkW(daiiiuiiy protKii\c colour 
coupling ppDiKsscs. 

Appaxtutly the iffialkmltofn of Uia cohsur-formcre by intaLQi ^ tmIim don fiot 
completely soti-c thff problem of dMused ptijjr«^ Chi cEoser cxaiTitnaliDri each point 
of luKuse k represented by a drele endOMua tJte area of djifuvttm The Icnalireid 
partkka iipp^reuU) are acted uptHt by tnddtjred developer ctiMuiikp Into iliem frotit 
the duldde, that k, from the vuikHJt atiwt hiilhlc irains sZluaicd all nround them 
e\'a jome flnite ara produeme. Uierefanf. a ecreie of iiuajje difriLbiiin. 

I1ikk achieved by the precipitation of tltesibvriAh in tba pre^iencei:^'^ resiR and n 
walaf Rbhuion of the phutopaphic; hhHlcr such at ifeiubtre. Sonic luhiUttiOi^ 
tspe eiflil y if ■soluble hi iticuhol of pthd %'okkUie solvetti^ n^y be aUnu^cd iituncdiately 
aftei^ ihe pnccipitalion of the siliper tuiJIdc, before the resin pntlklck ire fully fotnxd^ 
wui thereby become tncoipomteiJ during Uie growUi in the subs^uetit ripeum^. 

MUz a\ novelty k cottetmed the patcai k limply m nnpruvemcfift on his 
pmtom one- Howircrt^ lire B^iflcitjori conteiiu m Uit^ amount af lud'ul Ure 
setipUve cxamplefi, w Kich are uu uppEicaiJon. -of botn patents. 

B.P. 544,OM tVfoxtti 1W1>. This b actually a p.ilctil of scloetiun fnhtl H.?. 
524 JM, mu iTuot ^ted as wiu 

The coupier is dkpeBfid in an nJltalinc cniultion wish po^viavl pliEhnlAit or 
ceUuki^ areiite phlhaLale. Thne subcumcci appear to bnvt a. [lifih solvent oclEcm op 
the ooIour-TonncTp which reems to cmisc them lo become stremfily asaoehiicd phy^ 
ciiUy but Op! cotnbfticdehcmlcally, ami on jccounl of their own retaiiwhMt molocu- 
hr weLglU they show Ikile tendtAcy to dltfuse throiu^h ihealltaiint geiaitneH although 
ihey ELTfi comi^Ecly miselblc with Blkofmc ^tuilnc soluiionA. 

tlllot ondSttflA. Jti U-F, 526,^29, mlflctcti upeclai rcsirt&siich as glypiak or pindDcs 
to obtain diRpersJon of colourdoimej;^ hii the emuLnon. U ml^t be rcmembcreil 
tluit ti wAi tbeu spcdally ptunted out iti tliii repufl tbnl suits of such resita were not 
iiKluded m the laveulion. 

Jr the pjictu ht\xd lo Kodnk. H P- 544,tJ4 iSUirh l^4l\ it k JMled lluli the 
tendenev- of a d>icslufr or colour-former to ddfuse con be ttducod by adding to the 
otiukion, tthilc itlll in liquid ^te hefenc coating^ a wAic^solubk tidl of a 
iwin Of A wujtcr-kiicHublc mcLnl aalE orn iiciin^ I'bcinvention ctm thus be earned cnil 
Cut by adding u walcr-soluble salt of n min to the emokitm^ (/>) by ftddlrtE 4 
insoluble metal salt ofu iwn to Uie emukion, or by adding to the emuEskHi both a 

’WBrer'Solublersaii of ■ resin and a wascr-wlublc metal coinpcund whkh will react 
with the min «il to form u wtitsa-dtiK^uhlti resin salt. 

In all Uurse three cases tlH resull obtained k piotHibay the some as there is obfriined, 
dtipcT^ed in l he ciniil^n* a wnter-imolubk nietoJ salt of a resre 

The nHin ^t can bi^ one of a jmtuial or syathetic tain, for imtaucc, shellac^ 

7CI5 


C'Ul.OUK CtNEMArOGR.APH'h 


wfJophoxy, amn msaik^ domtuKr. muluidi, w« gJyi^l icsiii. In cm oruwfer- 
(oidtiblesBlf ircftn, tKcfcillDwingmeiaS 


Miimiiitn 

Cakmm 

Stronihim 

Bfljii4Jia 

AJummimn 


Cnilrmuni Gobsilt 

MjinBBl>C*g Comxf 

7Joc T?^stiiTl 

Cenum 
NEdcel 


Ad It cui be i-wi, tlwelkaU wi*i 4 such 4s K ma U Ai« rnn huJtidcii In ihc 
list. The woioa be ruundin the drHdaxiHr gisiaj of U.t». 34I.35S,. asued to JQu 
PcFtti In Due- which ckiim Ihe me of^t^rr-solubk lalU oTnU^d 
Jn at p&tmt of ndcKibo fi.P, S44,t3S flVtirdi 1941)* Imokbte aalt* of mIm itto 
dunneiLbesiJA ihoae of ceruin nutate, those of orgunie bas»af coinph^ siruc- 

itne or high vool^lar weight ludi as qijiiiino oj* dnchonlitUL A a|tceia| pomi k 
m^de Utut i1 B only ihe min w?tk:h fomts on in$ohibtc salt noil not the dy^f^rming 
sobUsncc. 

^icwn^ylublc, mier^penraabk " binding aganii art ckJiDcd Sfi B,P. 
555,7M They jtre hydralynd nnuiniiit^hi^^Te^ esters, cthen or ether 

roTTned wiib organic or tmxtgnnk uad* or okobotev The hydroly/rd nsurnii 
a™ cm iJe used In ihe Ibnn of their sali^ chher M^ter-solubk or wneer-cwolulrfe. 
Tbo mventioii doe* not, ho^'evef, Incliiile the uie of siihi of hydrolyml bia 
Amonji the aulvimwi^ churned by the use orsuch mtetanees Mti— 

Ip rommiJon of a finer dnfTcnic^ thda the parent min. 

2. Tne^^asfid entity for dtesel^mg the dye^iirrmni mbshrooe. 

3, Adio^nicTit of iht degree of hydnjiytts of the resiixs^ by tiR-tp^ sidtttbte oolds or 

ikobole Hrf estmlk^ikm or eihefj^catlan, produefs of the ceEractlvs indes^ 
of gdatme cart he obtained, tiius cUmJnetinB light sealtcf md nutloaudaoe* 
vHwo gthitine te employed as the carrier. 


SpedfkntkMM 


I.G.^ 


Kodak'i 


4S«.4IX> 

4a34tta 



479,g3S 

469,W3 

5IHJS2 

527^3 

503*814^26 

530.6SS 

505,SM 

336,3» 

512,752 

537436 

524,134 

53S.91>4 

524,554 

5«U63 

524,555 

»D,36e 


489.16] 

4»U95£t 

4S9,t64 

489^74 

49K939 

540,368 

544,0f4 

540J25 

544,134 

540,563 

544,135 

540,667 

541,558 

555,72« 

54I4B9 

543.MM: 



704 



APPENDrX J 


NOTESON THE USHOFANSCO COLOtt. CAMERA 
FILM TlfFE 135 


L BaclAii« 

Type 735 H baJmKX 4 l daylight niimiination* for Eunr^i 
two h^rs nni:r ^iinroe hats^ b^oiv tiinici^ m s-r^dkidJ dtiylf^hi 

such *i the corotmujly uiai axe lompi of 5^400 K. colour ii^mpcraturd. 

n. Fdm Speed 

A. ASA Eipo^trf hiiex A'd. -6 

a, rulings by the older Waipa timl C-Ji 

Weslra «I 5 

-- 8 

C When usiDE .taru Cofor OaiTmJtwf 10 on llbe camera lexis, 

the ^octrt« lltnt is reduced by two stops. If is SLiggeiied thni the 
coavenion filtet should be used, an bolb th&cspdsute meler imd ihe !cm in 
order re Tcud rbe tlluiTEcruaiOii. 

HL Lnis Hirers Rmimmeiided 

A. Araev Bfier 10 conv^ 5.2)00 K. ruf^en rtlmmuiilkm U? 

tUyliglit qualify. 

b. It IS ftccmifwndeti ihnf hoic flltcr^ be umiI on nil Interior and ^erior 
phofOEiupby with Type 735. Tha Aimco f/F-15 or [/F-16 is siiitublfl, u la 
■bo fhe WiBlten il4A. WUh heavier hare cooiUtions iho Ansoo 
£;F*t7 or flhcfS nw he uksL ^ higher nuntbers giviug heivMiT c«i* 
In the visihLr blut^violeL 

IV. Iii^titte 

The lighting rapured for bes4 ftsulti is rtprereainilve of that practised lo cuodeTO 
cobnr photography^ SomEnvhaisoflcrllghfingoOMCWti^ norenilly employed 
in cspoaing bta^ and vi'hlte ncigiiii^ici ti odviaabic. Colour reprudiicilon prcvitles 
tone nuKlutailorw and rcnOiUoii of detail that mighit ord^rity be ochlcved Uifougli 
lighiing in black and white photography* A aoioibtc ratio of kty light to EH light h 
2 ;0; ihk mllci should not cacsed A X*>. Riio lia^l ^ lidpJlil in givliig relief aud 
roundniess. 

Sonrta In rtpr«ctaiiie oombtnoiionsi 
A Ejvtenorx; 

Key: SiudiGht. 

^ofe: A Dcutml white scrim may be used lo ^xid odvoniti®? with tunlLglu to 
soften the shadows un LJose^ups. 

Fith (o) Hi^ifitotfliy arc spot lamps, with Y4 Mifin. 

<*> Nculiul white refloctocs* preferaiify with dllftoe or icnil-diffu» 
smfDOcs. 

2Y 7D5 


COLOUR cmCUATOCjRAPltV 
H. tlilQ:^; 

fcVj'i Higb-intcnMiy mv lstinii», with V*) fitter*. 

® £»i«re^,«od ur i'fi]amja i.tood «iiti 
MacMth tfHiitrUte lillw- ll u re^oninteaikfi thul *rt bnHids be uKO 
rn-ihe tontdpml QIL 

V. Mflke-ttp 

Nujnititnei niiLlu-4p with dart ml or blucs^ed lipoiicfc rtdcmiJ. Tbe JinslKL 
or roiw -aiwunit of vsry pure red wiihout mny oj^nKfi or velbw hui:, jiod 

ihedarkiMssdcijred. In^ncnl 
ll It desfmbtc to AviPHl nutkOijp prepmtiom ttm ctmiiiiii a pnMlumEiutna itf tvowir 
□r jtUow^ US wcU ai ihoac cf pm'pliiji cjf grey 

iVuff - Teits shottM be ittudeon i£idt>i(luaJ lutitb to itetemime itw epUmum iiEtlc. 
up cooibinitiiuji with ttw nnicrtub used, 

VI. Sei and Cusiuinc Colour* 

r the monnuKfactiMy resulti In oalour nnulitioii. ihc eoloun mioidod 

for produclum uw m i«j. waidrobc riitefinl* and wailnotiun stloutd be pttMHtHl 
untter repreaenlative li^btuiu ojndiiioM, Those hues jind «lout loua whkh we 
reprod^ to best adt^aninee may ihcn be sdwied viewing prints of i*» »e»t 

« h wrtiposition in each Kene^. of^suHt, enlm^^ 

screefi tmMits. 

VlJ^ C^rkrchUn h andlto]! 

Unimppcd Type 7JS iioci shield be iuutdkd is total ikrfcness only. aBiticulurly 
wound on u fewinifer. Even dark green Mfuiise safeligw/nflay W 

VllL OrlKlital luuiiic CJharaererisfita on type 736 

The nomtiil imuBe soR gnnkuoo and » appreclablv darker tbOJi a piokcuou 
uawptmeney. The ^,0- hsiuu« i„ be somcwtoi 

ITuper etposwo will produce the foitowiag visuni Himiii].^ 


Wack (PhDt(^£ni;iihcdj 


oxy^o—im 


The niflj(irt»uin tknaitty m on itnc^^pcnfid una wiM Uauully bif m ihs nam 2'W'K- 
IX* PnHiuctiDn luif] Te^ 

At the Old or«aj;:h scen^of icqucitGC rcpimettiiog^ tjt ccHtdltkvi urikjiiliut 
0 lypral 4c«nfi entlcoit ^puiure shutiid be irunSa, wirh an 4/u^cv C^hr OW/suitabh 

!I^r^ ? T1? ^ '^Pl’W'hreilitty IP ft. of a XlUt tost sihouU be 

h^uded at the end of ouch roll for procie«ins testL Abo. a full Ihnaa 10 ft. Lake of 
Uie elwi ju dcsjnilile on eoah davH shooting of a pktun. 


706 



APPENDIX $ 


PROCESSING CONTROL PROCEDURES TOR 
ANSCO COLOR FILM* 

Br J. E. EUTta aj® L V* Runvan 
A nsco^ BinshamtofL N«w Vtirfc 


Rt^pnujfil by kmd pvimhskjn of tkiK S&cwty of MoHoff 
Pwiwv Oiid Arutv, Sbi^fiomioit, i^tTv 

yatk 


Summer _proccHinf ^niAuoHii peondl ttw suNttwn 

a3fii»ilidm. CTyHy nperiam ahuWfld Uul freqWPM cf ITOMWillg wjIu^Jpqft 

MW K^Tiubtf fmtid*i mtp iteriM Meh iwUw wi/lh mufcincbrK 
CdflETfih JAd ka-vt pKrta lIlDmifMl fpf mvALiiQEU lltt p FMMJj PI 

iqmtoibfirtw* Cfliwirtkits iiidilfaiulTr C4»U?t^liAC*rflHlBc™ijpti 

or Atlulkin, dwKidint m ilH pmwiixrt wiidpcaifil^ bu? bi AdRuiWi b? <li 4 nf]Cif lU 
Uritlliiuiiiu of lU fllK 


T llt GODim'uciiia processing of Ansco colof fSini nxiiijEvs i:onlrol of fp«d, 
^adoucK). fofi. D-nraii,, anil ofhcrv^tritibSesoomnMtn to thcf iwasl^fi ofblaclr- 
itiul-¥fhiie films, Iwi wili ibc compEiEiiilnB fiictor tiurt these voriabki mu« be 
kct>i cCHifUini m each of three syperimpos(?d rmidtiiMi Uym. 

When thk color flint was fir^t UHroducDit, Ireilijfinl ebunj^ of pnxes^ns 
£ulutkHij were ^idviscd lo prct^i the dciciioi:niii3^ effbcis of nfing bihJ exhnirrijem- 
Wirh ejtpmcncc, metbpdi of pn9CHiin« control isnuloriJiy lia^c evolved ii5iiig 
cornimiooi fcplcciiahina procedures controlled by sensitonnrtric nnd iin44|yttca! tem. 
Tli« paper piwms on outibc of ihc csacnitai corurol fltepa noxsiary ut each 
operatisB of a proccadii^ labootory. ThJwifih the use of (hesa pmciiw an 
c:>tperieiwd conirol man icun mniiiiam a ^ of proccsimijfi soliitioftt Snt^finitelyi 
Tesit are ouilincd not only for actuaJ cimctiinc opcfuiloiB bui also to chcclE mw 
chcniioUs and indMdual mixs of soluiioiis. Although cssscriUaUy desipud for 
nmiioo picture labcHi$tOfi«. the basic itietlKKli art blsQ applicable to foil- nod 
ihcel-fllm pftKsssing units, and wilti ditfcrertl toeJoper rcpkntsbm, to tbo pro 
cessing of Printon. 


|» Bask Comml Mctliods 


ThiwsDrKr 4 l control metbocK phmosrwhic. tnalyticnlaBilpH,«« nnanimEndcil 
for the wIiMB hsting crpcnuions- The necessary tots areoatlincd bdeHy fii J. 
For finiptc ioluuota sudi u short uop and hardener, simple pH t«u sidUcA. For 
devekipCT solniiow and nctunl nwchluc coatiolt* both pliotoiptiplile nnd analyticaJ 
dnj noccssaryi A clMinicnJ siaiuiard is ti#ed os Ttie bsids for all Ihas. A supply 
of higb^pDrily chwiiicob ihwuki bo maintaiiied as Un: pracTssiny stuodanli and type 
lolutiods should be [Kepaml fn>m these chtrnkaH wiih wxupio minma. 


A. pH Tests 

«H » ganlrolled v»iUi Chlomaii «r Beckman Ubonnoiy Model pH irtstnimcnB 
using Klaswflloinel electrode wslffm. Other biimimeot* of equal sensitivity wuM 
suffice. All pH teadinp tndiKlin* those of deveiojws giveu M the paper are bas^ 
«o the me of a nwmol plnss electrode. It is recosniped ihm the use nT ui etawode 
introduces sodhmt wn enors due to tlw high sail concentmtiOT of the »futioiu 
In piueticei since the salt comseiiiiiiiion remaens cousianl, oonsutenl sikl utefitl 

• F^wstwl Mi» l*r l*«. “ 0“ Conwatfw In dnJUS hfasSa. 


707 



COLOUIt CINBMATOGtlAPHV 


readings are obioined luul m> ittsnpt it mode (o cgneci ilw tbiia, if a sj ri sl 
electee destgiuiid for hi^ ult ooncentratioiu at a pK {10 id i b tned. tbe 
readily will rings about O-lO Mghex ihnii indicatal Id ibis mper 
It U to be c|iiph«t»ed that except foe iharl stop and biirdeDn wlutiont which are 
fully eonitollcd by pH. the pH ait osed meidy is a guide, Soturioni bsu be 
Kiected BDd trouble located if pH nKasureiucnis fail outside tjornial limits, hut 
proper pH docs not ensore sattifhctoiy pcTfoTmanec. 

B. Ftf 4 h) 4 jiifjik Tesli 

Tbeic cui be diviiiicd into t^ pJhSh (Ji photoipqip^'c aolioioo cdtqtrql Iftts aw-d 
{ 2 } pBoio^rnpIn'c tests made on irm rhJn^^ dunng opmiiDiL 



OOTU/)^ Of^ Tsi^TlNQ pROCJ^Oot^ 


F». ] 


L i^hQiQstopklc Sifiatlmi Con/m/ Tt^su 

T^s to letTDMj are used fof toting fnw iruiiCTiLEi,, mtulion miKcSg in Joi^^ng 
po^le wqiTCCft of irotibio with macMise solutiana. The i^oigreplik lot romiAi 
•hnplr m prtKcsaine dupUciuc sctuiitnmctrk urips of a>1or film ihro^ iJitf sVm^MTd 
cy<A^ colCT-filTn proosiln® wospc that thcjrtri|»ttre*|mi»a m the scluikM m br 
leacd and tirfp nm titrough the Hnnple loTurkkn <md one through ilie ii'pe 
loluu^. Thac snuttornctric strips ihould be upened <m the wimcr ^ cf coTor 
enr^icn ibe mnehiu win prcBssi. A supply of him of 4 STTviEfo emuli^on number 
lumaent tcf ^veral mcmi^ control opcmtion dtouhi be aside to avoid too 
ftt^uaii typi^ fn ofcmulfioRL Either lime or iii.tenuiy^^3c;;4k seimtotttttiv fnay ba 
ushL a though iiitiifi9 ity->6cflle tniliunicniJ 4re recomniKniiDd become ibey ^vc 1 more 
tcoiT^ indi^on of a flim'i pr^cUcuJ peifomin]]e& The mnmrneni, haTwer* 
nmM ^^fpuhle of highly ccprodiEilde rouf imd should be adu]^ed to produce a 
doIqt ibIiuicc close to neutrair Both vimaJ aod tlcmitomiifcr Tnesiunment^ am 

wiitmlhr exjKMcd ftEm, Lntent^imaBc chungsei in 
cKpot^cd lonpi ane ooiimiuy or orndJl nmgniiiiile!. Howuver* It xi reo^nnmertded for 

7 €e 






















APFFNmx b 

Q^(b»iini AiQiistecicy Dial no cxpoiult$ tbuji lw(j TnODtbt ol^ ba uwii far 
conlml nurk. 

n f*5^ j i?i1 fhnt BdLydan be dAiie under imrcrulf^’ controlled oandUlons 
of Agilaiiofl, time, and tcmpcwuie *o that the symm d^elf liat nrpnKlocfbint]^ 
efCfltef tti^Q foliition toleraiaoe to be tested, in. tMuctkc it h possible to dooMtij^ 
oppoiatus that witt pvt rcauiti de^iaiinB by nol rnqre Ihoo | itop speed Of ^ stoii 
color baLukCC when Identical jolutbm ore ti5^^d for type End wmpic- This deptc 
of reprodudbiEity rec^urranKOhaiiical agitation, water b^thi$ forffllytion icmpcfatim 
oontrolK md tncihoda of quickly chan^g llltn fiom solution lo toluElofi. In the 
Assco laboratoryv m upfanuti-i has beeti constricted erttployin^ a smes of irtflinTeaa- 
ittcl tubes taoh holding 14 litres of softitiCFCi fFigs. 2 and S). St^McUtl reeks eafih 
holdiag tutJ J5-nmir strips Jn tt him slide-type hotder lit Into the tubc& A robber- 
edged vane, with s verticat rnovwDctu operotedbya series of pulleys over the tohejs 



Fio. Z 


built Into each rack. The whole unit is set intoa woief hEtiJr with tfimperature control. 
]| Is not JWiieffsary to employ csacily fhifs dc^'an of apr^nttus, but mechaniod 
tion ift strongly twommeaded. 

Pbolagraphio subtton coni rol tribi are interpreted by reeding the color deiuiitki 
of the type add sattiplc tcnsitonietrie strips on on Atss^ color detisitoniefeT^ and 
comparing the pEott^ resatis for speed* doniity^ and cokr-bslEtioe dhTcTerm. 
Accepiabte tolerances In pTooessma solulioits twoessarily am high, but specific 
acceptable limit* imist dsp^ wmawhai on cm;anHtQticcs. In general, soluTfoniS can: 
l» Eccepied lhai do not give tpred dlfTcnssc^ ipeatcr than 1 stop or cokn^balance 
diOcrcnces sreuter than 1 stop Itom type- Should an occasion an» where both the 
fim 4i!vcl»t«r and colu/ ileveloper or iJwlf tctpeciive rsplenisiicn jlitiw 1 .^top 
<olor'tulaflw dtffer«». berth in the »rao dJiuctioo, tbc odoibiiuitioii obvious^ 
tWHjId proilLKa ui iniokrabk iQnll on tlic mnchinei 


709 







COLOUR I.UJvEliAroGRAFltY 


madiififr^acKuiS ^Isua aiv fOComm«Hkd far ibe KKktikm nmirot teit 
<wcj>c npicnhher vituiJca&yrctcsicd wiil» T^ihirds th&dfivdoping tiiiwaf 
cEi^Ir basic solutlao^ It U ilisfunble^ fllithniAh nol abfolutiity ncossary, itioi Ibe 
sa^iitlon coniroi test moirhiiie aiHl Pie piooc^sin^ nwbinc lum out do^y nistdKJ 
OPoi pifTefetsocs la otfiltilloii will rmike ibis dilTIciilt. The procedure for 
chcmicony Adjusting colat bxlande described in itic sccPcmi 4Mi madikte adjintmcnt*! 
\i^utild iioi be 4p|tli»bk in ilua cm because d b oeocssary that the satution camral 
mflchifie operate to tst ihc ciaei machiew rcnfittidat, 

^ PhatOfcmpkic T^rr cf M&ckinc Operutkw 

TTic ^utc puTp&ie bchiiul all pft^nniaiiry ofeourae, [oconuiol the aciual 

devetopiti^ machijic. Toi this end ihe g^reatell teUance ist ploocil do plKHographie 
ocfitrob beeouK ihnc indite duectly the results the uiojcIito is ptoduein^. Tes! 



F«l J 


strips are run thrcKieh ii i5- to KMUiruEe iDterals, As llie strips come oAT the 
irmchiiie^ they ore ffuldrly rainpai^ vifiually with the prt^xding vutps and ibe color 
dmitiw of three repr«oahitlv« ioc; middktooe, auid shoulder read and ploi led 

ai shown ixi Fig. 4i The contml chnrt lhal gradiialiy tccnTnulatei os a result of plOT-^ 
ting these cani/nuout strips H of value in contraliiiig the By ccumecl' 

mg the poinbi the graph it consuudcdi n moaiug record ii obiaiued of the speed 
and coIrFT'baloiice fiuclufltloiu. Speed ioercAies in reiimihle Jllm m de^ed py a 
drop in oJl layer demiiies, a speed dccr»» by $ dse in all dcn&fUi^ oolec- 
hnJnitce shifls ore denolcd by imKttial i.:luin«e4 in the varioui layer Uouitico. 

As can be seal froni Pg. 4^ miiior nuctuations lu ovejTHill speed jod very slight 
dniatkuti in color balaiia oeetir between smeitlve ikseloprmtitT. These floctua^ 
lions are Donnal In the best regulated machines made to daic and am couxd by i 
voriesy oTidfom all mhiof in character but whkh ncId up to measurable dififerenaa. 

The vatinbleB which caniiut be ibsoluidy cemiroUed indu Je liight dif^enm la 
710 






APPENUIX 6 


riiii) cnmhiiiai« Qirti dmikuK loluikin mi«9» dncloplTii eJiih nmi 

icmpctBfum. cmnikiioD fiL(n> dryicf cocidlciom, anil tvtsa fwl dcfuixomeiry,. 
Thw ndditrv^ nuiy ucicHint w madk u plm minu* I iiop Biteed 

VKrIallon ita wcil aj color-baliiiysc iliiUs of plm ot indttiia I slop. It b ihc cootJtH* 
maa^4 w di$lbliEau1t tnUffCtirr a ftnctiiatkm is wtibin tbs optbnum 

opcratin^rapcibliiiy of ius uppamus and a. ilcviAUociTbjit rc^pirmou improper emuroL 
For this graphical rdcIhiHli^ ^ cmpla^vd. By ralEowing sudh a tmpbt it a 
pCki»jbCc toomtrel Ehe mndiineciaput within namiw httili*. Fig- lll1;td^r^hsa»ctth«r 
scne$ ofdn'siopmcnUE li am bexen ihni fiw dcvtlsfmictits A fhcmigh 3 ftnetuatians 
T^ngisd upvmrd afid Oowttwanl In i fairiy re^uior pititm. Thb wn* fiorrml inadiinc 
opcfitticn- Bi:^i]rfin$ with B. afthougfi Ihc fhjctuations were still up und down^ i^nc 



COtdUCtiTiyE ITitm * r/zMH iifTC*W-E 

Fig- 4 


maji>rity wm running higher cijorrffiii in dcnaiiy. Thif io the coairolinan lndii:itled 

n definiic trend lownrd longer s|Hcd that would require i;orreciivn maa-iorcK. Since 
Ihb rbe WEnaceonipanicd tw a jl^t gain In the nuipoitti Etnil yellow demiry over the 
c-yon Ujiir in the- miildktofbe region fcknmiiy \'Z} imij also in ibc fhi^Ldcr dentilks^ 
be Jncrcaicd Ihc rcpknishmcnl n-icoiTilK Ftrrt develtfpcff by ld%. As am be kch by 
C" to Z> ^lllm C to hud pssx^^ threnish ibe ftr$l developer before the carrection 
cuoJd be RppEiedh thii change of repteiwhinenr niic achieved the dcKhed reanli iu tlie 
speed increased and the rufour baijicfc bcca^ more nenlmh 

tn cuw of qiicsiionnbic dcviaikins in tiu Enrplw o'rniplete scnshrirrietHc ctirres 
shcHiU be tdemed for ihe trips involved. For Benecd purposes^ the IhrocHtcp plot 
will: Kutlicc. 

Many machine openiiofs will prefer Eonin a pktorUl type In additicm to i.heKnM- 
lomnric lypc, since tha givcj ibein a clearer piclmo of ihc (tcludl cfToct of mediint 

711 






















COiOlfR CIKEMa-TOGIIAPHV 


differences cm piemre 43ualj|;y. The interpretairien of rtkieriaf iirips shoeld, ofeourK, 
be given ^mnOitry emphniii ai crfmiui^d ID tbe nicne Aocitraie, hunwncal inierprc^ 
tniion of ihc serwi lofwcric ctjnirol strips. 

Wto ilcvbiiaiu dccut in the nwhine pholQgrAphte testis it la admable to imi q 
chcTnicn) oniitj'sis immediaicly lo ftx ibe cause of the JcviaiiocL Photojgoplile side 
irm fliso rmy be mnde by ihe soluiion conitet nmcluiifi lo coTnp^re: a soluiion 
wlthdrawii from a otaehtne tank nlth a type solupott Pro^'ided ptopci pre-cbeciing 
of sotuiiom k made nt tite rhot of mixing, no serious deviations e%«- should occur^ 
Suth dlFcienccs as do occur will nomially arise lituu m exewive amciuTii of high or 
low key Utm expoeum^ or frcmi eiiwegrive aeratiou of sokrtion dine to Jeoky circulation 
punipi cr from the aging of ususetj iiaUiMom. 



Fw, I 


C AoiilytKaJ Coflirob 

The analjjiSEv procedure for the ckveioptr and bfcach solution^ ii oullined in tlie 
poper hy Bnuuier, Meana^ and 5^ppcri.* For routine m^hinc opccvitiom ccimpletc 
devotoper analy^ should be mn approrimntcly every 40 hours. Brondde annSysii 
of deveJerpers iliould be run eytjy 4 lo 8 hours at. clmrifici m bromuk cnooentniijon 
art an uccuibeo indkation of improper rtplenishmcnf nJc. Bleach titratiom shordd 
be run ^t f^hour intcrvnis. The condition of ih* bfeach cun be judged roughly by 
visiudly Doting the tfurt tequiird for tlae bleach 10 etch out the ailw mitihalo Iftyer- 
Rlcsch perfemnanco is gcTterall> saiisfaclory if tfui loket placo in onc-diini ibe toml 
bkaching liinc. 11 ahctild iKvcr e3soced is^i^-liaif the toUd hleaclimg ihne. 

The iLcer lank should be analyzed for stiver omient at bicrvali of 3 boufi of 
machine opcriiioiia. Fixer pctfarovmce k MiolacKffy If time of ckaring does not 
noecd one-half iouJ lime of fixing 

712 


















APPE^^?IS t 


IL hTflchiH C«itnil rtml Dulu 

SiiocKsfii] ^plcnishrrwnl can be carried oiM On Kay* type of equipment bevLug fully 
ei^rLtrulicti Jind leprodiidble (ettipm rmc niid condilions. Wi t hin the Anuo 

JjfpUT, the iysidm hss- been adupuhJ ifi mimiiiftrt used for t&mrn. 51m pTtic£$&inB ^ 
described by t^ojnesr/ Tor JS-rnm film proDtssins m described by Hurth and 
S^hiulfifch,* flod for net-type aheei>dlitt proocSiinfL matiliines varying from a large 
machine eo im&IJ vaiK-^teiEiiied ll^lfoD tanks. The Viihie of j^pJcxu^hrntni is 
qu^ondble Rit tuaTid-aBptaUoii syiEems. The sroieat t^lroE narmuily ti rthtidricill 
with Uim size jrsstchHKi lhal are in consiiuic nlhet ihao Itijcrmittcni uje. U is 
desirahlc maultain dsnlinucnn ftUrntjon s,>itcrm m both color and Tiref-dtsclopCT 
iLtnkjj aj Ehe bulld-tip of gclaiin ^iticles, ipeeks of ojtidLced djc^cioper, ufid other 
fjccrjoi itmlerwl hiiten the chemical bneokdown of iwJuiiDnE. Proper filtration wjll 
keep both first dev'elopcr tmtl toJor devetoper dear and liglit in color after rm^nilb 
of operation. 


A. ModificAtJExti of Ptxwmfng Solulkm!i In 0»tn[y Colour Huhtiw' 

The widely vuryi^i^ atpiJitjcm coEuiElkmc^^tlrrg hi the diffoimt type! of processing 
equipment intrcKliKx a coirtpliIcciiUnB factor bocatisc varkitions In agitadLin om prtKlwx 
diffovar color bcibiiicf:%. Paitial eompemation fpj- tbwe balance diffcrcoeM can bo 
obialxitd liscrcAsmB or decreasing dcielcipina limes. However* tn onto to achtew 
the efosest pwible rrutches in speed, sradauen, and color babnee, it is sorw^in^ 
neceuaiy to make sti[tEii dtemioil chang^ in Uk pfoeeuing ioLutkw ihemfdvta, 

Thtmosi comtn^m tool* for modifying culor-balaoce difTcrcnccs resulting fnim 
dilTct^i agitation eoEiditiiiHu are vadaihmi of ihe ihioo juiiite and iodide oonocn- 
imrioTiiS in the fifii dodoper soluilon. Chemkul unalyyr^ of No, 502 iim dcvi:lop«r 
has iho^ ihul jodide accdutubtes durfng film de^'elopmenr, imcL depending some- 
Ui iiat on iJie tyi« of tilni processed. exp<More level afid vok™ of repkiiEiber iujileil, 
ntiTinjijly ftathes an cqiUiibriEiin of from 3 to 0 mipi. per Hire ordetniuper, lodklc- 
analyau meUkod^ and a dkcuMiicin of iodide equilibrium rur bln^-And^vrhiie film 
oe^elopCTE wcregi™ by Hanson, and Glasoe. ^ ^ 

Preciioil t«U cokiT fltfn show that ev-ai a umall conceninitmfi of Iodide 
an approciabEc restraining cfTccl on Ihc yellow crtid mag^ltn lavrrt giviiig uii 
oEfoctive ip^ loss In ibew liiywi and n tn the over-all color bobtooe tow.ird the 
biowfi. Il can be shown tUat acoimuJatiDn of iodide hr respdtmbFc for a large part 
of the cpkir-^btiliincc shi/ta ihai ChCimr when a ftrsi dmioper ia iised^ If small 
amouDls ofpotiuattim iodide are uddeJ mitiolly lo the fite^ de^violicr, the color- 
buMno^ changes are reduced. We Jias'e ddopied the practia of adding small quaji titles 
of potassium kididie to fresh No. 50G fitsi ik^'ekipei. No ii^didc ii mkled to iKe 
reptoiisbcr soluiiim. 

Druler iroccuing crniditiooi: where only moderate agiuitton il encountered las la 
Pako preoesaing) blulsh-cynn color bnLtnou aft often cncwiutcrod because iho 
lint developer h mw acthx on Hr lop la icTsofthc film aiul docs not easily pcncirate 
to die botlCTn la^. Increased first ^^wdupmetit times under JiucN coiufitkmAdo nos 
change tha rclaili^ mes of dcreEupnicnc in the lajcrs. Ilovrevieri ihc mamicnoncs 
of a higtier than normal iodide eonuentratron wifi resiraln Hrsl dcvrlim'mcfit iii ibc 
lop loytfs more ihno tn iho cyan bycr^ and by use of slightly kjOgcr than iiomia! 
developing limes a nmrenil color bctlimcc can lie 4c:hkicd. In ihis csLie^ ii h 
fiooasmy to rnuifimhi thif lugli Iodide cocccnlraliDn by jddinj a small jmoiint to the 
repletitsher sotuiioti. 

The above color-balsncc shirts are cucatial for Uic proocssing of Types 234, 634, 
235, and 635 ahaet^ rolL and 55-fluii. ^anridge films, amcc ihcse malerfaJs musi be 
bolariccdsothcy-uiq be procesaed uicceisTidly bath by iiiikateariwrt)i hand-pruocssitii 

713 



DJLOUk ClKEMAZOCiXAfHY 


ouJfib and ^ fKldry Obvious!^' n ^ not necs«i«7 ns acMestt a soKralletl 

Domial balRDoe for a niBchtnc uied lo pmss a t^iniiris-Eypc atm whou balEinar i> 
fiarniEUjr modiilcd b$ pnbimg filters^ bui it h ot enuHt «seri[Ltil tJuii wbare^cf 
biilxM a obtiuiicd be fnaiTiratnciJ comisi^cnt^. 


B. RftUciiKlimciu E^ixciiiift 
Jd Gcmrat 

Thfi rollowing dcvcJqpcr leplcnishen 'vcrc iftBrEffli out the [iiia{y&i& 

technique ileactibed hy Emipci, McarUr stud Zijppcii,* AJtiiou^ the exact replfiniiib- 
ment tales may rebuilt adjuatnieeit fram time to time, use of ihe wIEi 

maintain the soEution insred^ts vzry do« to their iniiial conffiiimtioTts. 

Cjfeatcr ihtin 10% voimiJoa in rcptcnishTncni rales mvly ts tfecw^iy. Trends 
ihjif are not ccFrrecled by kkH change^ c'^tntually ire ttmd to li nwchiuttcaE at 
ph>^r fauiE. Such difUcuiiiei LhimEd be »lwd by chcnikal of the solutions 

m doubt. Through iJie hiunvlcd^ of ihe ftlm responae to diO^brem chemJcal vntia^ 
llwis, skilled comrohneta have imluiHirLcd cotor balancfit and ipocd m-cr 

momhf of opemlicftr The cxjct efTccti pouduccd. by phoEoipninhic ^airiations 
iqmewhat ^iuong dMenni emntfioiis depending on t be oxnct eoior hdlnnce of the 
emulsion. Tn geitcfBl. vtoriIgiis of color de^eloiaer the hcavter densities d 
prcaler ilegrpe ihm the lo'AtU' dcanities^ t^hert^is VTnialiona in first tkvebper cause 
deviatlorn in ihc mw-nil speed ind balance of the film. 

Relatively qunniities of repfemshfirs m uErllzal in most (n ihc flni 

Lkve^jop^, ibe nie is higJi lo sivcKd buihl'-up of bromiibc fn the devdoper. In tlw? 
color devtsloper^ rcplenuluncnl rate te high because ibt rcpienEdier solmicm U 
neaif^ ns coocemrmpil aa possiblei Broifniiic liDciuntij^ict leo stowiy in |J^ co-ior 
developer it is noccasury to add it in the tepleEiUher soludini tu nuLmiain ihc odginal 
^miCHEni. The ihon stop and hardener solutions are repienisbctl at these higb rates to 
prevrrrt HCdinajJaEion of mntainJfuimss So coatLmjous lepknishmcnt n 

UKd wtth the ble^'h pd fixing hmhs. The Wcach ii shifted to a s^armte issik, 
rcjuvufiaicd 'wiih bromine 4nd aflcr adding Add! tional ulu fo maLe op for r hosc lost 
hy difution, is reiunaal lo ihc maclime tank, Tlic fixer k nvcd to cAtajuniionp 
dumped inio a large aock for uilphide r« 33 >m>' of silver. 

L Dgtalitd ftrptfnldmvrft Proc^ihtre 

The lepkeii^hnietlt rates givai in lids paper are based on the mtes used for the 
Aiiico and I5^nro. dMiopiag madifoes. Olher machines may perforin best 

'v'iib slightly moklified conditiom qt fotiniiJa^. fn replenishment ralci noimaily 
vftjy illishlly during routine opcmlion of any lingTc machine. Howev ef , rhe formulas 
and tni«t ofreplenlshmcni ILsied provide a dose appr^^utnaihm of rlie reii^tTcments 
of Bny'ittMchinc and arc to be nxommended as a jaarting-poinE. 

Thfl dcvdoperreplcitUhers were formtiLEcd uiuigrsoluUoriHindlysis techniques and 
^hen used in comhiruulofi wdh pholo^j^iie and anulysa t«fi have mflmiafrted 
detcippm over periods of mmtElu ht the Armti Idbontorks^ 

It is recommended ihai 3-5 to S-B ingm. per Ejunt of poEnssiujTi iodtde be addfd to 
ffeih lanki of Ko. 503 Rnrt dcvdlpper. Ajialysfi data indkiaic ihai the normal iodide- 
cquiUbrinm raws arouml these fignrEs, sub^octiuamcvrtuE lo the exposure level ofthe 
film ^fnccssstL 

Cli jjtgES in frrai dci^lo{»er activity an evkhitK^d by pwr-all speed chenges of ihe 
ciamplctc film. The exact cokr-balame dvifcrcnccs obtauied tty Inocascd of dc- 
ciAtKd animmi* of fim tkvdopnicnl vjjy slightly fmti film usTlIrn, bui generally 
lEKCeascv of fiixi developmonl sherw up as fcduced magcabii density In iltc hajjnoc- 

lliffl wJutlofi Is lepIcfiTAhed el a raie necesnry^ to malntiiTn a pH of 5-0 lo 5’J. The 

7H 


APPENDIX 6 


tABLI ] —FUOT D^'WUOirUL kjtPtiJmHMEbnf 



1 J^o.501FiFMi 
D€Trloptri. 

m. 502 /r.3 Flr;sf 
Drwhpfr RgpfettLfht-n 

Ciluon 

1 vm. 

MS ftn. 

Meiot . * 

3 

32 

Sodium Sulphite 

50 

50-0 

Hydrot^ainone 

0 

7'5 

Sodium Carbonate .. i 

40 

4tHl 

PoteasiLim Brnmide .. p n 

2 


Sodhim Thiocyonalc .. i - 

1 

I'4 

Sodium Hy droxide 

— 

hi 

Water to make 

1 hire 

1 Mtnt 


Bdsi« rettlwilimeiii mie — ^ film 


TaU-E t StCiT RznrKlKHUEMT 



So. tf59 

Stop. 

Mp, mSkiiffStop 
iJtJftlmhkEr far So. £591, 

Glacial Acclk: Add . 


5 cx. 

10 ^c. 

Sodium Acetute 

1 ' 

10 am. 

20 RO ln 

Water to moke 


f htre 

1 Rtc^ 


fmh 5 /?H fresh 4 7^ SO 

1k$BC re^tcn^mcni mv—24 tejO. 35'fnin. ftlirr 


voUiniti of repknii^ur i^cai cnoii^ la pt'OvHlc uilTidmE laluiian diiMiip) to nr«f^ii 
^ecmutihiijon ofe^ewivv iJcvelop>er soliUion. If the tliart »£op pH n mamiiiiwd at a 
h^lbcrpH than 5 ,5, inermeJ hinkniiq^ will mull fniin ihc No; liartlmf. Out 
rediuced short sEopping at:lioti und iiiiimtitrti^ w[ll be abljiltud. A pH lower then 5-0 
prothJCR tc» tunknmg by ihe No. 901 huTiJencr eumI a pH Tower Ihan 4^5 tmy 
tivt cUfUcalijf with iilm bhsteriue. 


T^ilt 3 .--Hapdengr Keflekeshment 

fThisc fiiactoiDru^ appty lo iIb soJiiiian oscO eflcr cither hrji or i^ofor cbeveloperj 


^ N^^. 901 Hofiititfr. 

So, 90) a-p&Kijfaf- 

PaUt$9hiiu Owopic Ahim . 

1 30 gm. 

30 

Water to make 

1 1 Ulrc 

1 Eitre 


Basic fcptcubhirianl mto—30 c.c./ft, filin 


Till* solutiou krepknioheO withibesame sotulion oj the oiitpiul at a me nemury 
tp the Lmk pH apfwaitimakiy 3-3 lo 4-0. if tlic pH ri^cii (ulihoujch the 

iiKTe&ic up to a pl-f of about VO) chrome uliim. dlu^se and scum 
may also resok. if the pH foils bekm 3^3« reduced hatOcnlrii b abmh^ii Since n 
aobitiou of chrome oluttt will hyilroi>™ <m s^tandmit. fber suh^uem rebasc of oclii 
ceum a aetural dJtip of pH. The cojp'^ver of u ufual} quautiiy of alkoJi k nor 
imdesirahtc because It aids in inalutiinle^ ilie aptimum pHr 


71S 





















cfitoim ciNiT^fAioriWAPHr 

Table 4-—CcfcLon EtevEi.o7fP RmxpfliHwiEwr 



A^CoIar 

j4-60S k-1 CWw- 
Dctffojtfr Ki'pltfitthtr. 

Calgon 


I'Q jon. 

l-dpn. 

Sodrum Bi^phiu *. 

■ 1 

2-D 

7-3 

S^l .. 


443 

5-i 

Sodium Carbonate 

^ . 

67-5 


FotoHium Bromklc .. 

^ a. 

14) 

<S«6 

Water to make 

-- 

1 litR 

1 litre 


Sasic rEpIcnistrnicnl rale—23 c-e./fl. jS-mm. fi^fn 


Use of this fcpEcnislicrp like ihc ftTi^ developer i^Iciuiticf»is desipurd to rruivimw 
the orl^gmai coticefiijrAiitHt of dcwlop^ inpedienta- itcgiiiar bromide atiAl^ts win 
ustllst Id TTuimtfliniiiif the proper rcrlcuiihmeoi raic. No rnJldc is ndded to this hnliu 
Analysis indkaiei focne iodid« U flcciimiilAied during iise, but the fonmila is 
Teldth-ely ittscnsJthr lo this fesirucner in the quoniitics 

Tabix. 5 *—Hi_eacii Rr^LEvisfcru&T 
S>. 713 Blmeh, 


Mono Sodium Dtbisiv Potits&lLkm FerHcyetnklr . IDO gm. 

Potasium Bromide IS 

Dlbnsjc Sodltini Plioiphate . . . . 40 

Sodiimi Bisulphnie ^ ^ , 

Wati^iomake k. t Hire 


tl Is jocommeiided ihat No, "311 ble^di be SnlcrmitlEntJy with htoinirK 

siddilioiUp. 

Ourin 4 i noimal bleaching opcralkms, bloi^^h rdyiusiiQn is caused by depleiloti of 
rmicyttiridc and bromide iom a* well as by dllhition of the bleach sotuiipd by witler 
carried into the lank b^' the wet him. The ucctimulidlun of ^brrecytinide lorn slovirs 
ibe r^le Pf bkadiing to n moth greater oocfil than would be pltdLiCd from ihe 
depletion of ferricyiitiide In rracikc. it coftcenTration of potatsMtim ferrucyanide 
Sjxaicr than 5 per lllfc should be avokled. Tlicse coiimitTQtkms am he dclecicd 
usini dtlier rhe ptHcnriomcter method described by Bruimcr* Moam^ and Zapperi* 
orjfdesfiml, the cokirimetrw method tkscribed by Vaitcn and 
Tbe fcTTocyanidc can then be rcoxidiBCd to ferrkyonide by the direct addition of 
liquid bromine to the «oliitictllH This reocllnn produces bromide itm equlv^enl 10 
the number of re-oTcidized fcrricyanidc iemtand thusdfectlveJy Fegtocrat® the bleach 
bath. The chcmioil rcactiom of Uwh exhaunkm and iqjusTmiiiOFi ao^ in 
Table 6 . 

Table 6 

BfcmrJf BjKkaustion. 


[. 4A;B 44K,Fe<CN}4-^ AffiFcfCNh H 3K*Fd;CN;i* 

M. Ag^FctCKji* + 4 KBr-> IQFe(CN)j t 4 AsBr 


Bkach Rfju%Witiart. 

4lC,Fc<CN>*+4Bt-^>4lC*Fc<CNlp f4KBf 


716 






















APPENUfX ^ 


Ii k roeolwneiailed a biw* biith tc ndo^OTiicd ai [men^ak pcwrap™^ m 
25 ft. of 35 mm, pcf lliio of mnk soluiicm. This b can^tantly dm» by 
two hani'nibberor ommic mlxto# umki for tho bka^ti with p^mtits bo tijat thoaohi- 
iwn may be pmnpcd from the rnachim: umt todttef tank Vat ibc njui^ua- 

lion trratti^l wliilc irradiinti opfifitliMi k oaoHnufflJ uhttj the othirr lank of bka4;h 
jf^luiion^ 

A btepeb of 25 ft per litre fKitmally comSEp<3JKLs to n poEoffimm^ 

feTToeyanidc coDCeocratteD of ^'5 to 5'0 rol per liire^ With mo^t toctmred) ^mUcs of 
bromiDe, roughly [-OS sm. of 035 cu.e3ti.ptr Filre would be fo reiuwmse 

iho bteacb compktdy^ lo poBctk*, JHiw-flver, in order to avoid iht dan^r of adding 
on ciKCH of bromint wliidt wouM (dve fuiTTnig and would be dangenjiuJy 

aelivr both on ibe ffiJor fibn and on tho lankjk spool banks, and lo Forth* ft H 
dtsiTHblc to retain a small inmemnt of fcmpcyamde In the bkach, normally HI gm 

per Ii ire or cilluvikm to the eshatwl Jon pmdiiOTl by 5 ft. of filni pcf Hijt- 

The addition of bromine should be made in 4 weli-vmi Haled nMin or with ■ hood 
over the took. Ihoiretive clothing iifKl itrolcs ahmild be worn, os wntoci wiib llw 
bfomioe will bad bumt The uddilion BhonJd be made slowly with wgoroas 
tthring coniinucd for mnnmirm of 30 miniitey after the bromine Edition k conv 
fdete. The bromine wdU be ajaimftntcd more nipidty and with lisss fuming if it is firaJ 
dissolved in 5 to 10 limes its own vixlume of Mid Tnethunnl and the mklure then udded 
to tlM blcueh Hiking tank. 

A second poicntioiiteter titmtiofi should be iTiade afio- the hromtoe aodJiAcm ta 
check the oocttracy of ihc repleniihmcrtt. 


5, 0/Dlhded Bkarh 

The dElulion of ihe bkada by the wet film am he c<MTBcJcd by nptking additions of 
the orlj^l chernicali in the same proportion es they were originally cooipoaniieiL 
The degree of dilution can be drtcdwl by spedfte^iTavity rnettaurememt irtitig u 
bydrtimcicr. No chcmkni addltioni areti«tssar>' unlesi iht dirufion exemda 10%, 
The specific gravity of fresh bleach No. 713 ii approsiniately M ID m 2 SrC. Upon 
ditiition, ihe spoiftc grovily h reduced- An estimate of Ihe desree can be made from 
ihe folJowing calculation: 

5p4ci:ftc Gravity of Freah BJench Minus 

Spedfic Gravity of EJ lluted Bleadi 10 0 ^ Pcj Cteal, Loss of Df> 

Kpedfic Grevdy of Fresh Bleach Mimu Salts of Original Bleach 
l.OOD {SpedOc Gravity of Waux) 


Table 7 may be uud os a pdde for deiemiEning the required umoutill of solid 


chemicals. 


TAWJe7 


BUach, Sp^ifh Gravily. 


f!bn Bltaeh Skf. 713 , 


Oiighrel Specific Grevity 

At S*/ ntliLtlcIh 



Al rH!u<lOft 
Ai 10% Dilulion 
Al 15% Dtlulian 


At 5% ralutliib 


IHO 

M04 

l-WS 

1093 

1007 

1081 

1076 


T17 











COLOUtt CTSEMATAGIiAPltV 



718 














T*hiIi pKotMaNa ScilJ/tiiiH Mixjii 


Af'PHNBtX ft 





















TaILE la—Twiwa JUOLURED }>Ulill>H| MaCH^NU Op&HAtltlN 


COLOtfR CtN£14ATdGRAPHV 



720 





















731 
















r:01.0UR CIKEM ATOGHAPHY 
4. L*Mffvf 

No repIrakfvTient cr itjuvvmitjoii b hbconuLkirndcd Tor i he fixer. Eloclrv^ 

l^ticnurlhud^ at'silver ^ diniteijll ro dpply to n^uttoJ oriiikulErwtKiRa lulhi 

k li rceoiniiieoded ibpJ Ibc No- JtOd fixer be iii^ uttUle iiijvcr eMiii^ciiimioa of jibout 
2-5 un. pci lime it icaebeU or iJie linne of cLe^ring exoetdi tulf ihc total ttvalliibrc 
fixing, time. Wbeii Shb point u rciiiJM<ih ilwr fixer xoluiion be JtjibiKxt by t* 

fresh baih. The used soiiiEton nmy be ErctiEcd with sulphides lo recover the iillvcr. 

IJE. Sttmoury- of Teirfnii; apcni lions rtcoontteddi^l Pcir Contrel of Color- 
rrocttsinit l^ilmnlpry 

Au. TcmIr^ trf Umm Mnleriab 

The iccomiTKiidcd raw nuiefi^l lesti ore Eabuktcsd to Tobfc 8; The fr^ucncy ol 
Ecsts ¥filJ; of oourxr^ iic^scud princirully m ihe vuppty siitaiioo, uim of fhJpmcoH 
reccKcd^ and Dumber of miiJuifi^urers' iot numbers iovol^. BmpbaBis sliotiM be 
ptiimJ jaoprc-ieiiitm^ill louofiicvickjpmg wdinni ili5iilplfi.Ee,aiidiHocyaxi^ie^ 

since vtniaEKMQ In ilicsc clicjiilcnlt arc mutt UkcJy to itfibcl retullt. Les s ollontion it 
m)^red wiih the oihtt tbcmicQlt onjyc tbt ctinsisfcticy of ^ oew suurce (if tnpply 
hat been osccTtaiucxL Jt h oa^ixoblc to k«p eUi^TuI nscoids of itock^ ilatc each 
diemkaJ iwired, umJi dale of its use for ready rerciiticr; io tfadE.ing down yAriatioos 
In u solution iniAr 

A ihorottgb pre-temofi poltcy m\l oftto prevcRi bad solutiontnixetand ttducc the 
possibility of rnsii;hlntr slowdown because of lohition supply. 

IE. Tcslinv <kl SotuEkivt Ml^ 

The recommended ns« for solution inixes are shown In Tiihle 9. CousidembEe 
jitteuLkm thmiJd be fsoiil to prele»lu:ig wluliim raiwt before they srre placed cm the 
madUne. Unless errors of rtfluilan or of pceviixiiijy ujiobserred chemi^ 

difiemKCi 4fe dciccled ai iliii poini, tttrality of machine output will saiffcr- 

C. Testidft ihirhiff M:»£hlDc Opcntlkui 

The icai* nt di i O c t icd in Tabic 10 shouid be ttiade at ^mJsicnt Laorx'iilft ut provide 
ft cofuinnt f\ow of brroimation to ihe madib^eanrrel fJiemist. 

In order to make oorroct docisiotis when phoEoigruphic iau indicate trendi 4 wny 
from nonml, the toudrol chetttist should have ui fiiiml complete records of icmpera- 
fiiire und pH ii-oriuiions of jiU sofutioitx ax well jli anaiysi^ i^4kvatoren. 

Adtium kdfpmntv 

Tlw :mlboTs wish lo acknowledge with Untnks the aaiatit m of Mn. A. ctiid 
Mr. J Kofl-idak in ibis work. The coop^Tion of \1r A Itnimier in njp'plyinK 
ftnalytlcaJ diita hiu been helpful. 


* kdCftOCM 

11 ^ Sweet., M. H.. ** r^nsjEometry of niiHbtTi reverulik color film,'* /. St>r. Ahw, 
ffcf. £rtiir,p 44 IJume, 1945), PP. 419-43*. 

12^ Bkkk£P[, a, H., Jk,. Mew*, p. B * in,, dwl ^Ai-rtEf. H. H.. " of 

dcvdopcriund bleat-h Tor Aittco color film," J. Stif. Mol Picl. Eng; Uii* issue, 
pp. 25-36, 

(Jf i'OflliEIT, J, L,, ** MocbjiM prcQi:SMii.( of I 6 >ii'ini Aoko color Q}jn.'* / AW. 
Mot. J*iri. Eng., ■*$ (Sovember. IW5l, pp^ 313-327, 

722 


ArPCNDIlV ft 


HAhw,H,C.,MdStn<*DUCH,K.," UbonitoiyfardeviiloitmeBl 
tnotfan pictum." /. Soe, Met Pitt, £»w- fal* i»«, pp- 50-S*. 
f J> Evans. R, M-. Hanson. W. T.. J»., ind Glasoe. " *“*‘*** “'“'Ij**' *“ «" 

MQ Ucvc^opcr," J^ Sac. MiH. .PW, &S.. 3* CFtfaioiy, J?42|, jj|». 180-1B8. 

16> Evans. R. M., Hasbon. W, T., J*., and OtAsne, f. K., “ Synihetic agid ^ 
vekwcts analysis." I-Sx. Mot, Pitt, fijjf.. iS tFeijnmry, IMat. pp. IW-lUrir. 
(I) VAtDeK, L, E. and SfAliv, E. Q,," Rapid t«at fw Tanicvanide blcaeii cxhaii*' 
liM J, Sof. Met, Pkt, £nf .* IDettmhcr. I W», pp. dilMSJ. 


723 


APPENOtX 7 


ASA1.YS1S OF DEVELOPEKS AND SLEAOi 
FOR A^SCO COLOR FILM* 

Bif A. If. BflLUV'NER. F. K HAwa, Jit., und 
H. K. ZaItght^ 

Aiu£i>, Bjnito^iicktip New yoifc!. 

Rf^tinstil fy kimi vf fhr Se^iely fr/ Maiian 

Pkiurr mtd Aiise&, 

rfflt 

l h#w * uf.f ■ Pbhliihatj prvc^diDT* f(ir biuzk-iBiit^liAt 44wlo^ ^ ieiw«d Nfw 

mrthodi «i dncrjlHd nr aia om ipi^UfM (9 ilu ■cemcV rhuikcd for 4be cwapleH 

OOnarol of fell ciMTiuldtffttj ili« EfcvTlo|}«Tm u»d fur AriuA To »n[uui] ^g^oitiaD 

i™r $4 n. prmdm b prcwttttd, ibs dcFmninUkMi of rotnK7«iii4'« mi Jn iJib Kriutkifi. 

jptrwfqcfioa 

I T has bosn nccogniad jOfrve Tintc ttuiE iIk aocuntlc ormlyiUi €f bLacL^'jtud^wfute 

dcvvbpm^ ACilutjffiu » e^Kdilljy impofunt tn the of contiiiuDicily 

nrJemahMi dfivekipen. A* ihown by B^lca iimi Runyin.' it is of twn gttalnr 
lirporhmK fit cofor-Froooaina bcttiute ooltir balance mmt he 

maiiitaiiiod ampn^ji. tjifee diifFcin]! cfnu^lonL In tbt pasi few yeutrs, mtid^ 

have qppsixed i^i ihc iKhnical liti^rnttore OTneemtn^ the uuUyns orblnek-and-whitc 
phoia^fnifriiic dcwlopm, but outhuMf been puHuhsd cm the eimlyth uT de- 
vriopcTi used Taz pnKfisaiDg eolojr flhn bwaiiUp uniii reccnlly, co\or film was 
prcwsAl onfy by the manufactuin’. 

LiUk hm a]ip»r^ in the Eiteraujfe coaomnng the <xiniros Df photographs; btoach 
soltaiim, but wlKui tbii »]iiilon t% to be regcnmicd, Ji dwibetS by Betes iiid 
Runyimw' a mei^iDd for its aiiiU>sis H oecesaty. 

The pnxedures here tSesxi)^ for lN tncni pssn, adapfuuium ct methods 
prcvyouvly reported for lik with tlie usual bkcksmd-whlre dcvclopera. They hnvc 
been edected for their btcevityp shnplicity, anti accura^ and have beee used for the 
control of cnntinuotuJy rcplcniihed sotutkim for lome iimt by iimkilkd techniaaiH 
and require no ipecuU Otfuipincnc other tMo g potcntioirKtar. 

DiscB&skH 

Tlie prw±dur^4>#co3Kd hme have heetj adapted eipeciflUy for use wilh the Ansco 
deveJopera Jiiled in Tilde L but may be lued for other deveb^ with tome mcjdi- 
hcitton. 


Table I 


Firsi Devtiopcr-^A-5iyi 

Wiler, 63- lo 90‘ Fahrmhait 

750 mElliUtres 

WetDl PH 

SocUom Sulphite 

3 pn- 
SO ,p 

llydroquinone » 

Ckrborutc Monohydrate 

h ,p 

4D ,p 

Sodium ThiocyaxLiie , ' .. 

2 

Potusslizm Bromide , 

2 !! 

Wafer io mukr 

t litre 


^ rVMit*d Mil Up ^MmCwniHnteSicBEi sfptf y gi , 

724 












APi>BN[>IX 7 




Wfltcr^ ^5* 10 70’ FahrraJwil 
C^on .. 

Sodium BifiuTphtEc 

Difitbyi-^henylenedismina FiydrocWariik 
Sodium CarboEULle Monohydrolc 
PotasduEn Brojukk 
Waitft to miitje 


TSO miliilkitd 



i - 

57-5., 


I lh» 


I>eiirmittaiion ofMftot md 

Th£ Jim dfivcIofKT y«tl Lu the An»o cok>rpiwcss is sinulorio the usual tevenal 
firit dcvcEofKr ctmiaifiiriE iOd±uin lldeKyanMe. 

All (he eafikr mctiiads tbr tbo detertnination of mctol and hydroqutflone were 
based on two scporaur Mirictioia of the developing and pussn^cd Kvmil 

diudvaulii^e^, one of which wim the iletcrmifiatiocL of roetol by dil!crcnii?c_ Biatiin- 
bach* inildc a dehniic advance in 15M6 by deveribin^ M siujjle methyl aixtalc cjttnn:' 
iksfi method mvolvinif a poicnlkmKtrk add litnaiofi af metol foik^wed by oxldalimi 
of boih mctol [md hydroctoinoiw with iodino. Shaner and Sparks* modified Ihii by 
mtug a Lr-tube e:etractor and melhyl cUxyl keloue tu Mlvimi. Ibe dilThaiiiy in deicr^ 
ifTtnirtp the end“lKynt Jti the JodJivc titrution it a dLsadvanlage ccon^n lo bo^b 
methods. When the pH k itwifliiiinod at h\5 to 7-(K itw Kj-liktiim U h* hhit|kly i^oktred 
by oxidiilion product^ it it eitictuciy difHcuh to tee live blue ^laxclviodinc cnd‘< 
point, Oxidatiork ut low pll vpiUu^ rcfiiitts in a nearly' colotictt Ksolctlonp but the 
ioJETK q^idadon it mt ^uuiiitativu. 

of ihc small sanrple used in the Shancr and SpLirks prTiQciluO:^ the voltmx 
of acid itDeded to titriHe the metoi h very htulLI. Four ilcvdopcn, cited by these 
nathafs^ containing 2^), 3-0, 0*^ and 0-35 of molyt pcf titre, require onl)' 116^ 
1-74,0^1 J, and tUSTniniliiTmofO-l ntTrmaL acid w hen detemiirKd in ac»ntanEpe with 
ibeir procedure. Hven IT (he pfoceduft is changed :and O‘05 fionttal odd k tued* the 
volumes needed atesiiil too small for reasonable aceuticy' with urduimy cquilttoaii. 
Moreover^ with a «inple of thi^si^. the imictiiit of iTwtcil prcf^eni ti too Ilttk to itivc 
a usable infleciion in the liLraiion curvei 

ThedouilvantsLBc oTthe kodiheiitmUon may be av^ijdcd by g?dal:£iuK Uiedevclopais 
With oerk sulphate. Sum this oxidalion it nafdrmed in a s^rtmgXy add finikin, 
highly colored Ddduttfni fFtoducii are not fornircd, and die ead-point it oudy 
obaerved. Slotl* described a «ric Sulphate (hint tun (o dotermbe developing agcntK 
but he determined the cnd-poifd pDlentiameirkalJy Use of the orilto-fibmanthroline 
fenou^ pouipCex t.f^rroM^ lu Indiaiior mnkes the Utmtion Kimpicf arul Dk^fer tb^ 
colOT change is easily disccmitde. 

Fgujlly :(^sdiatOfy results Imve boca dbtmned wiih nvLhyl aocEatOp ethyl aceiate^ 
or isopropyl oocmic oa cxtiactJng solvent. Wilh (he methyl flcttaie uhJ. q tJight dark 
color appenfcd dudng ibe ecrit sulphnie (hritian which may be obje^tiooeHe- btU 
no inch doirkeniJis occurred with the other iw* oceiaieSv Methyl ethyl ketunc, the 
soh'oit iivfd by Shatter and Sparki» ts hlself oxidizied by oete rmlphaiCp and thererme 
coimof be used. 

This modified Eaumbttch procedatt itmdviag the add titmtiou of metol and ceric 
sulphale oridaliDu of both mctol and Liydroquiahne hiu been tested cut devaiopet 
A-502 with vtLriatitWi ift the conccnlrtiuon of ihe devctopiug sgeuTi from 30*; kB lo 
20% flWft than nunnaL Within this TBage, ihemctol detfinEinfltbn waa tbund lo be 
^cmnitc kj lOCb7±^4% and the hydroauinoufi to 9$-Sil-5%- Octaflimd values 
flbow (00% cre probably ditc Itt mechitiiical carryof tnica of davelypiUg solo- 
lion with iIk sohcEit. 


725 






CINR^A rOGUAPlIV 


a/ HyiirochioridUp 

JrydJOChiorlde or iu dcrivutivci tmy be e:^tmi:{«d! in 
cjmotfy ihc suTiK mtuirrcr as incU)! fuuI hyciroquinoiMr J[ ntfi> be Utr^ied wEth odd 
ibc iMi'vt jm meial, but lincr k U rtipcr batic umt hydnhiLiinpne prcwrtt/U better 
iaflectk-n point h obtained fet ihc titnuioci cane- U inny iiso be OTUdkod ^wiih eerie 
hiilphiite. mtd ihifc 0)iid]lliAli u^ing femrin indiatcir «i prerctml to ilu polmliortKiHe 
Add dtrotlati bci-^uase faBter Ltiid Bimpkrr. on additioo ot ihc ccnc 

fulphiiic, n hrighi tticrry red eofor is pTodiiecd whidt is an iniefian^diatc OA-idaiitvn 
piKKlucL Tlte imeasiiy of thi$ i^lur 30<Mt radiei a tauxiinum, ^nd ihen hc^m. lo 
fade uiiEjl joii before ihc end-point it dis^ppean^ and U repl^wd by ibe 
pink uidb&igr coJor observed in ihe mclol-hydriKjuinone liirsitkifi. AnnEher (cv- 
drops of TCa^t produce tbp usuiil fndicatQr ctiEor 


Deifrmfaathjt ofSiniium umi 

The hbidphitc usod in dcvclopef A-WJ L-v convefied lo luEphiie by Ihc sodliiui 
csrboEulc. The sutijc AuiJylic:il pfocedunt for the ^uEphiEo ion is, l hcrcrore, epptknbic 
to both ikvtlancf>. Afi^iii^n end Shiner* ond Sroti* hioris dn.-ir;jbed ^ ph?c^urt in 
wtikh an ncidiileii ^UiniLird iodine solution \x iitnticd witjt the developer. Thii 
meihod rtmy be uxd rorihcsc developers exoepr thei n weaLci iodiue ^ohaian should 
be used for developer A-^, since it contftuifi 4 vwy smwU uimiiiJil i^suEphilc loca. 
The only prccuiiiion rcqiurcd is Lhat suft^icni leid be pnesem lo keep Ehc lolutloii 
below pH 4 during iKe eniirc tbriiihin 4111I ihm prevent oxidflitnn of the dcv«]oi;ung 
UBcnis,, 

This method was foond to be ccct^mle to for coniixnlTiiiloni ningtng 

rroni 50% le^ Ko 25% maie thnD llte cDncenlrations normally u-HOd. 


0 /^wHum Ciif6uimle 

£vaii.v iind iLjnson* described! n pftvcdEire in which carbon dJotiJe nnd nulplnir 
dioxide ore iibci^ii») by odditcation of the dcvi£h>per. ihi: suJphur dioxide is thc3i 
oxidfi»d to nilphule and ihn remaining cnrbon dioxide li measmed rohuueiriedlEy. 
AtkJnsun and Shiaaer* dcinmijied carbon dtoxidc by nhtoj-piion in soda linw or 
Asoritc. A simpicr fnethod descril^cd by StoTl* involved the poEcntioftvuic ihfation 
of the developer with sliindsrd &c\d uiiny giasi nr plkuiiiuni and cnlonicl clecirndes* 
fn ihip titralion. the lim inflection fKiioi in the litmlion curve ccjtoapondi lo ihe 
duuige uf c^fhofliBte to b^rbonate, hut bt^Huae of ihc hnderrog .icllm of the buJ- 
nhitc present, thb [uflcction is not al ad sharp, 
vve hove Pnmd h easier und fjsier m tiinitc ibe developer directly wlih «tandaiil 
4 icid to abOLil jid I 4 ijpey color of methy [ ciruujp>uKligo carmine). 111 wbidt point ibe 
ctrbnunlc h&E hern compicicly neiitrati^ed . and the tuJpEiite li^s been eon verted U t 
blsuJpbitc^ By dfdixning the votanic of tidd lequiird for the suTphlle pixMt^ ibc 
corbonaTO cfintem may be cakuhttod. liincodm^ldpcr A-hOfi has no alicidinity due 
to sulphiiEe, na deductlcin is jcqaircd, Tliis tnctlimJ uf deierniirtins carbuiuie wns 
round 10 be nccitmsc to ^ ± I %. 

^ Foiostiam Br^rmidr 

Since developer A'5Q2 conminv tiiLocyojiato wJduJi hfilmvcs ^ery umiUrly to 
hrtjmiik. n separatum of The two iruftt bt cfleciuj. To determine bromide in the 
presence of chloride or thioc-yujiaie. Atkinson and StiuEiei* nEtcuunicmled j railMi 
kuphy iodomeUic prcccdurc. To deccrniinc bromide in the prcscfw of chloride, 
Sioit* used Ihc method «f £v.uia, Hunsuit, and CJhwoe^ tn whkh ibe Oevebper was 
bDilcd, acidified nml boiled agiiin, cookd, and tiEmicd poEcntbnKirfciilly wlih silver 
726 




rrilTQte tumg sihiO' ^md calomel dectrtKlct- Tlw nw^hod nismiml line tsseA In I4ic 
preseoce of thiooimaJo bccfuiBc tLc bolliD^ icjmc bui nat nil of live 

ibiocjmniilc. 

Polauuuiii bftHTiidie iiuy \k UetcnniiKd fn devdoptr A^'SO^ m the I'D u> 
3 5 am. f?er litre %ilfi jio ncoimy of i(Xl-fl3.0'3% by caJdmion wiih 30% hydrogen 
peroxfde folkiutct by the stindnrd Voifiurd bromide procedure. 

Devdoper does noicomarn thioqyAttate^ hwi does con eftinride kms from 
ihc colouT-ckvelopIng ascnt whurh h added m rbe fomt of ju hyditwhHmde. Tl'w 
itifltfaod of Evens, Uonron. and Olaw^ died above givn saEisfLiclory rcsulla. but it 
hoE bwi found thni boiling, tsUxr before qr liAer ncfdilkntion, h nmniicnsiiry. Aller 
B!ddificadon, tbe bromide may be Oetcrmifieil by poteolionaetrk; litratlDn with sUw 
nitrate. Experknee bat ^bown lhai no advantage n aaiitcd hy ihe^ikUiiofi of horimii 



Fjq. I^^HtniLkin puts for bromide phit ibjotyEnaie. 

nhraUt todium aceuiep tir Alutnimim u m idmctimo fccommciukd. The 

above prooedure fpive an accMracj’ of |00'0:ii0*5% for couceplrariona of J-O io 
i'5 gtn. of pote&iini] bromide per litre 

No iTKihod lus been reported for iha dcieimmaiion oflKlocytiiuite in dev^open. 
ScpoiatkHn of ihiocyinvne from bromiik i» a teagiEiy procedure. Since i he volubiUtles 
^ailvtr ihiccyofiale and bromide ire jbemt the tame, they ore ret^H^tUod togeiho- 
iUiii cnnrvot be diCTerentliited b>-tbe u»Uitl pOEcnikomeirrlc lIlrstioFi. However, ihctiim 
of bromide and thiocyanate may be determinca and. by ikdocriuo of the time cuued 
by the brotnidep the Lhlocyjuiede eoooentrariaci eaMlBi^ The Volhafd method 
cfuinoi be used boanse the dcrelopkng agonifi pracm fobtx the farfe km iild«d ai 
indkntoF, 

The uuii of bromide juid thiocyaimte rrny be ronwkntly determined by addib- 
cahmt of the davetoper and difoi;t poietitiometrk tiiiailOD wilh nimlard tiSer niioite 
to the Meetcon poroi utiOB tilver who and cEdomeT electrods (Fig. ||. With thit 
nrocediire the thfocyanAte viu dctetmlned wuh an mimcy of I00± I %- 

727 






COLOttR CINEMATOORAl-ffV 


DifiErmtrwlkm ^Fprr&r^lik ti Mlwh 
Ai]5cd color blrach A-7J3 li** ibs foLlowillf compofltron: 

Dipowsium Mopo Sodium Ftjrffcj.inlde or Pota^iium Fmknifiide , lOQ imt 
PoUmIum Urofnide _ , _ 13 ' 

Dibaaic Sodiiini Phosphait ” 40 *' 

Sodium fii$\ilptii]ic ” >c 

Wilier to fRBtc . ,, :; " :: ;: lui^n 

Diinai(iifl«soincortlul£n^:ywiycUioib]ix^ %'ard£n visd SctaTV^ 

ileacniX^ a cotcrinwtrk proccdunj for Ihe nspEd dtlemiiiiiiu^ of colur bieacfa 
^xhoiiiiKta. Wbcn ihe bk^h toEuiioo to ba rc^nemxcd with hnomioe jyidfsciibcd 
t>y Bacci and AuiiykUi^^ the ion of fttfocyjuudi? ittuii; be dcieanloed ixtore 

ftocurately ibim ii possiblo Wilh ihe ocIarinKtr% mcfhod Stuidju;^ ientbookt oa 
minlysu deveribe thm dcwnnuajuixio of fcirocyiietjik in add lobitjon by 
titntioo ^Hh potAssiuni pcrnmnaaoiii^ or cerk sulphate. Either of ibese oiidimti 



Fiu- 2.—Effoci of dirutioa on tirtotion of ruTac>'i!Liiidc lo H lMgK 


be used vAih bicacli A^7J3^ bijt becauM of ibo doqi cdor of itie wluticm^ ihe 
tilratioti tnteu be foUovred poiontiomeirkdlly. [n ihe permafi^gnnatc lllniljoOp coti- 
cidenUc lime H rc^iimed for the poientjal to fefieb cqEiillbrium M the md^TOiin b 
approached. Wirh i»ric Mlphutc eqidJibriurn bnesclied moro rapidly ind tlu Icogih 
of iitne rr(2tured for the tlimUiao b thin ibortenod- h b nDcciisury ilwi tits sampk be 
dtluied Si described, sinoe the pmlxlon aod fna^itudcofihefidSocikmiiiiii^^ by 
tbe^k conieot mF ihc sotutloo IFbf. 2). *nie terk ihdptuiic metltod; gave an nccunsy 
of SW'S (hS to tJjcr laiige of 2-S to 10-0 giri. of CeiTDcytmkle ioo per line'. 

Proetdorea 

tkirtmi/taiioii of //>i/rOfWnunr 

4b Afrrol-^Pipeiie u 25'Ojnl. $ainpk of developer lolo tlS-ml ic^fc^iyi iirtf y y \iri r^ 
Add! 2 dretp^ of thyiTioi blue bidfcator and ootstO’Cric KiJphiiric ucld ujiljl the color 
of ibc ^luliom juat luriii ydEow l/iH 0 to 8’5), Add 12 pn. patwinm bfoinide, 

728 






ArPENOix 7 


25 rd. of Etututc, ihnkc for 3 m^tiuLa ^luL th«ftAUDUk' iIk 

compfcidy. Drain rlw eqwuf lai-cr into R SCMnl braticr, nJlow^ a unall omaMilt 
or jtolvcfit 10 ^ccr ihc siopK»cic bore. Pour Hk soJvent into a »q:itill dry beulfcr^ 
ftciiiin ibc aqucgui portion to tbe TuniKil. riniK the besker with an BLddEtiomL 25 ml. 
of md odd this lo the ruiinaL kefwdi the ihaking md ^eparaiion. 

Pout the solvent exlrocl^ toniaEnlo^ rrto$t of I bo developing aiEcnii. 

rrofn the fitfl ta n lenind ftnii to n third imaH dry beaker, and Umiily lo a 40D-ml. 
beaker. After ilrainiDit oCf Uh? Eiqueoiji Eayrr. p<a$ the tecond {xrrlion of solvent 
ibnxij^h the same three wnoJI bo^km to ihc dOCJ^fnL beiler. 

Add lOO inf. of dEitlikJ wttis eml SO ml, of methanol to the combined solieol 
laym amJ liiratc potofiilornctiicsiKly with appraxiinaidy O OS nortn^l hyttiochlorMr 
Kid« mine S^ms and ^lumel islectrtidra, and nsechitittCitl uhrini;. Plol tite tilmlinii 
cuivc ClTjcfH vmvM mlilHittesE of acid find dclennine ihe inltettfon point. 

Cmpi of metof per line= 

ii'>HS>£ Jiilllitilft^ of hydiocbloric odd >i ntsmrality of hydrqchlofic sdil. 


ff, Afle# the add ittralion Rdd 5 mi of Ottc-Ut-Ortc ndphiiiric oeid 

and 2 drops of >0025 mofsf femic mdirator rc-phenfinthroHnc ferrous cample.^). 
Titrate with dpentyximiLldy 01 nonrial oeric tidphitie Kihitiofl* ntiR^ rruxtuniical 
stirring, until tbe pinkHcyrange color rhnn^^ lo sjccnsh yellow ami Ermolm changed 
for 30 uconds. 

Grumi of hydroquinDne per IEtrt:= 

2-20 l^milUliiiH Ct(^J,^{|Driuiilit^ G^SOA — g”™ P? . 

Dtifftriimuim q/" Dkfkyt-p~pAifn^ti‘^dlu»iij^ CA/bridr 
A U’O-iiiL tmnple of tkv^pef is «Ktmcted e^raciLy m dcscziticd m the procdtoe 
for rwoi AAcr Ihe nddilion of IQO ml. of dbtiUed waier» 50 mi ef melhimai S mU 
of one-to-MK sulphiiric ii£iii amlldfijiti of0*025 molarfmoin indiaiiof to ihecom¬ 
bined golveni bycTf, the tohicioti is titrated with apprcximamly {hr namial certe 
sulphide wlulicm 4£ dewibcd fllstW- 

Graim of dicJthyl-J^phcf 1 yJcmcdisrnir|^ hydjwhlorfdNi^ 

4-0] minilitm Ce{SO«), Knonnality 

Oeferrmnutkm <3/JWi'um Sutpkitc M Drtvhpwr A-StH 
PJooc 4 porUon of ihe dorclopcTin a IS-ml. horet. PipeitcIO-Oml. of approximoiely 
(^5 normiLl iodiDc soJuUaa intu 4 ISO^nil, Erlemieyer flatk contDiniiis 100 mU of 
dUlilled water and 5 mi -of conccniratcdi hydrocbloric add. Titrate the iodine 
solutlmi with ttic ileveJoper unlit the iodine eoluf ^ ooerfy ilixbaTped. Add J nil. 
ofaiarch $olotlon and coniimic Uie fitraiioii uiitlT the enfuijoci becomes C 0 lorb$s. 

Gram» of sodEum sulphtle per litre 

milliliiTea of kxlinex i>onnaiity of iodmex 63 
mllllHtpei: ^velopef requite 

Oetprmimfivn vf S^mn Biuitphhr in Ih^vrtitprr y|-iiOS 
Place A poilion of Ihe de velpper In a 25-ml. bunelr Fipcl I c 5*0 ml, orap^f odmately 
0-1 normal iodine srluilon into ISCMul ErEcnrocvcr llnsk containljig 100 mL of 
diilillcil water and 5 ml. of cnneatlTMted hydrochfork Trtmte ihe iodinE si^lii^ 

729 




CUIOUH riMI^MAlOGItAnHV 


HcKl VifitK ItK <fevdDper until ibc icKiinc ci>lor Jm us^riy disdiiifflisiL Ailii 1 ml, fsf 
^tantih tolkilimi ftnd continue ihe lilrui jiui until the ivliuiron becomes colorticss. 

Grams or sodium bisuiphiie per tslrc= 

ndtlititi^ of iodine xit^rmitUiv of iodine x 52 
nitlttlitmi dcrelupcr requiKd 
f>rie/‘rjmatii^n CletAvt^c 

Pjpeiic a 2CHI-ml. mmjpfe of do'cloper into a 250*ml. RrhsntiHLviir ([sak, cout^inin^ 
100 ml. ^ dtfUJkd WHlcr and 4 drp|H of fnctJ^I onin^HodlGO coiminfi ictdicaTor." 
nuate with appf oxitiniel^ I oomml li>!drodikkrk to Uw $ft>' cnd'poim. 


Grains of todlitm carbonaic monoh^mlt per fitte A'502*-' 

tnilliim HQx oorTtialily Ha—CC^’l Hsrann per hirt) 

0-323 

Groms of sodium cajhonnie mum^hydnifc per Nue A-605= 
nrtHilitm IIG x normality llC\ 

OtierrnifMiitift c/ Paiasjium hs ^^302 

Pipette a 25'O-ml* sample of developer mto b 5W)^L £rkaji»yerda&kL Add JO ml 
of J0% hydrogen peto^dde and wtimi genily uain a. vigorous itncfion bc^ns and then 
remo™ the $mtnx of heaJl. When ihe Ttacckm has RibstdAl. heal to boiling and t»ll 
for 3 irnnuteL pxjl, mid lOCI mi ofdiRilUed waur^ and ncutmli^ lo atkodd tsaper hy 
dropwise addition of tme-to-otte nitrie add and then «tiJd 3 mL m ettoew- 
Add ItHt mlp of ApfrosimataTy (M nomtal silver nitrate rrom a pypetu folToued by 
3 tatnraEod ferrk nminaniiitti sulpItntesolulKTn whkh haa been iJighiJy acidified 
with ililTic add. fJf d^^iml Id mL ofchlororomf muy be added and the soJulinn: uell 
shaken to oc^ilAlc the poBdiHlate) Titrate with appmsiniately £Ht5 FUMinal 
ammoniuTTi Ihiocyamiic Eu ihc Jippesmnce of i lUrty pink color which perdAii Ihr 
^tcconth. 


Gramt of potassium bromide per ntrc= 

476L(t0xnorm(ufjcy AgNO^)—(milHIitres NHiSCMxnQrmuJjly NH^SCN)] 

p43iOTifmn BrvmtJfi iVi ih^vciopfr A^60S 

Pirwtte a SO'CMni nmpk of developer into a 40t>^. btuker and nculmiroe to 
idkaad paper by the irurcful uddidou of opo^lo-'noc uilrk oddL and then add nboat 
5 mi in Titiace potentiomefncally wtih approKimarefy O'I outmal titver 

nitrate u^ng silsifr md i;uili!imcl ebctrodi^ The end-poinl fa itie jrtllecilqfi m the 
curve of milUvrdlt lemii rmUilltret- 


Graim of potassium bromide per lttrc« 

2 lax millltitm AfNOjXnomiahty AgNO* 

VttmntnatioR H^atiiun TktpcyvtiUff ts O^vArhprr ,4-502 

Pjpctic a 13-ll-iril, sample of dendopcrmto u 400'mi beaker ccmuiining 100 mi of 
distilled water. Add cnhMiMxie lUjJphurk add uMil the solutkm Jus ■ pH of about 

TJ?** ind^tiPi U- ptceafva by diaalvinf tH jfiit. irtinjp jijnj fl-ii |rni, iwiTI gw tBiMflOff irt 

I jn mdiuiti^ ar 4 awr. 7 w Oiit pt?m N Ihkwi MM lha EEuUlk fWJ mUw wliiAowiirt l Mt*WU «j» 

730 







Zitnd liitiita por«tui(Fmi±ni»ll> with j ptirmima tdy Q^J nontMi lihrcr mjnitc tuoajc 
kUvct 3nd catofueE (loclrodci- Tbccilii'^Kiifi* i* tFtc FnUccltoFi In ihc rurfc^of millivolti 
millOirm- 

Clromt af tiHliiim tliiAcy:imh[« per 

1 inllHliontt aafrndlii^ 


Deieminaiioft of FtmcymUfr Skath 

Pipette 5<KHnI. of bleach sdlulion inCD a 40D-ini beoiiicf, ddd ml. o( wmn- 
imi^ h>'dJnKhl(iric otid oAd tUhtie iP abciui 30D ml. with diitfitoit M^ater, Titiate 
potendDUKtricaily with approKiniAEC^ 0- f nonml luiphalc plqUmm? iutd 
calcrnid ckcmdi^ Tnice the e^td-paiju as the mlbction in the cum of millhraltji 
i^enus irdliilltfcs or. In it^jlinc cktennitititTonsu tfrrAic la tbAt mtEli'n^h wfiidn 

cqire^pondi lo the inflecimn point. 

Citmt of ferrixyianklff itm ixit lll]T=^ 

4^^4KmllHliiw CKSO^J^acitonnnJJiy CtiSO^h 

Adt-ttowied^tsKnl 

Wc wish to t-Ap f i 4 4S OtiT thjmks in R. C JohnsioTi niul C. A. Aftkni who aiikled 
with the f*apgriT TKifif LI I work ajiii to J- £. Baici and L V.. RLioyan for thd r vaiiuihle 
uigftcstioiu- 


trviiH KBr per !Je«1 
4‘7fi 1 


Kelemivon 

i\i BjitbSv J. Eh enJ IIwnyaK L V.. ** PtixeeiJni conirol pn3cci|tim IW Ameo 
color filmp" >- Soc^ Moi. Brg^t ihit issne, pp, 
iZ^ ButWAACit* H. '' Arp Imjironctl fnclhoil for the ikmininttllnii of hydro- 
itumoiie and mciol In pboUlpfHphm di^itikipej^/^ / Sot. Mai. Pin. E/ig., 47 
<No™^hcrp 1946). pp, 40WO». 

13) SrariMp V- C, und S^aa^j, M. E/' AppJioiikHS of methyl ethyl ketooe to the 
of developer! for elon and hydrottuinonc/' Soc, Mai. Fkt. 47 
< November, 409-1 Hr * 

f4) SoTiT^ low G.* “ The appficaoon of poiaiUumetiic methods lo ikvetoper 
antilysb/* J. Sc*r. Met, Pki^Brx^* 3^ tJolyi I942h Pt^ 37-55- 
(5> R, Bu and Skakea^ V. C., " Chcvntral AiUflystit df photographii; 

dcYclopen imd fixlo^ haih^,*' /kfot. Pkt. MlMiy, 1940^ pp^ 445^524. 
(6> £vans. R. M, nod Hansos^. W. T.^ Ih-p ** Cbemkal acialyaii of an MO 6t- 
vekuper/" / Sor. Met. Pkt, Eos , J2 ^Mnith, 1939). pp. 307-33t. 

(T> EvAJtt, M.* tfA?an«p W, Tr, la., odd GuKsm, R K„ ** Synihdik: 

(kveTopers by ana^b/* A Sac- Mot, Flrin J&fSv IH (Fthrumy. I44jjip pp. WH-207i 
(S) VAitDCR,EEHitod^AA¥,EG./' Repldimrorfenicyiitihlohbacheah^ 

J. See. Meh PleL Enn.^ 47 fl>e«mber, 1 Wp). pn. 45tMS3. 


73 ! 



AFPENDiX 3 


METALXrC^ALT TRACK ON ANfSCO 
COLOR RLM.* 

J, U Fcirju^ 

Anww, Nfw Ycrt 


permi.tJtiGn of jA? 

Pkiurp Ea^bietr^^ U^.At Omf Bin^htmiottf iVn* 

York 

f^akv^iL^ta^ c™^Wi^U 2 H (maiLirtpqi fipimiy'i* of iii* luhtTKih* ■Ciilor' tuu t ’VHtuJ 

^ MiflWjw petMUm ^pM9d KTWn ^cTimr. TIi 4 tEwamam detutii- wUb: 
^ b Uu imir tmfnniwl it UseTe*jkin rf BvlwXnKKrScii 

J*. ^ leTHlII-rt feptn i?f dib cxsiiitTi-fiiifK- phcitqiclw. WllJli faf izukm Buinciwi. -lWb 
owtcMio dtilcrnui&Jlr pnMwttidi thi: ftftir» ikut iba lOuwJ^™* 
nd tiifal wiitiiQUI aOififfticix thi* dyt IMfiilT Kita fhii TUMf **™~ nhiA > 
*rtic±i dmefvatLil u^inuitl oi ibe tmmd'mclt mt$a hr N scoHkiia^liibftl. 


T KL meihcnl of |>roc4S^mg Ansco a>[or liiin has beca ftr^aeiaicil in niFtiMr^u^ 
jiiHl i4k prfKEdiut for tmdua& prtxe4San^ of rfr^mnv Ansoo color 
film hw wen presented.^ Jn thk process^ iJbe silver u Tcs^tovnl fhors tlie iirras^ 
Ac^p leatiTijp a>’e In ihc ilirw lai^-m. The {^ibitutfion {nmxlmujfi de^isJfey) of the 
vubiwmv colon—cian, nuMpsntit, and >ellms‘—hju n viiuiU Ocuiiiy af from 3-S 
10 3, whbLh ot tsflkricnt to prcuiuce 0o<Kl serwn cotiUast. The miixJmiim daiuily 
W^ilc beznit visually opaque, iraiiutlils the fiu-ctU and neuNfifra-red m^lkm 
A toiuid tmds on Anaco color hlnip ptoixaidd In tlw iwuil way, 1$ n dye ii)u±, the 
k made tip of i lie tyan^ ma^ntia ^ and [ow frcmi the three (syett- 
Thew dy<» (Ffc^ !> have good iibaorplioti iu the ™bk: reffCon ofilic speLlnmu twl 
ihr fa^il Auil infra-ied. If a tradt <jf ihhi kjnd hi ptjyed m toind- 
repTi^udiig c^uiiprncnt uUhimK a. hUie-sscTtstivt phtJloniheiMeN wi that deaRjibeil 
by Olowf and Moots' (fig. 2)* the teaulltnK volume will compare fAvourjblv with 
0 itlver ijuck pluj^ on coni^lcmut e^1Jipm]enl iFly 3j, 

Moii ^d-jiro^tipo coiiipmeni, bova^, nsei a «*ium-type idiotoiubc 
l li. Tak applus iwirtkijla.riy to 16-iimi projectors- Thk tube hm most ofhs 
tciuitiv^ Ell the near lufrn-red reifion of the ipoetmui. The dye truciCi thcrefnrei ii 
not « dowtil m n incEaUki type of track for modulating 4 i Hght beam ftom an ui- 
conaescefit tourec when rend by a cdJum-type piwiiotubc- 
The eauHt jutd tnent tliro^t npproacTi to ibe solution ofthk problem A to suggest 
the ^ of a Muc-setuJtive phototube SltK^e it %«ms unhLely ihai sn ehangc>om 
lo hfHc-KJiffltbrephoLonibcs will be made for some time, different Jal proos&iiig of the 
picfure and iOund tra£ik h ne«e^ eo fusikc ihc lOLind^track modnlaUodV pewiuc lo 
infra-red UghL Diffcrcnliai treatment of (he sourtii-lraek arci ofmotion piclure i'iJjti 
B not new » ilu moiioit pktun; Iniluitiy. The paieni !jic™tiire’ dcscribct mnny 
[iroGcdiiTcs and rticlhods for such ircatrncnLs^ each one nmj^e or leu spvdal and 
uui^ted lo ihe process being used Al! such prwesses involt'e spKuil eouipntent and 
zechniciuR wh^ add eilni steps to thn prooesaing pnxediue. Fuflhcrrtiare, becmcK 
!b* wund treck muit J^eanfined to u defimte Area of the film spcctftcaXly ilthntd by 
«t^i«hcd standards/ pneeuion nppUcfttkin equfpnsml ii required and skilled 
toctmicums rnust be available lo operate iL 
Picitwl liicialLire* tcachfis thut. In the case of KodxiebramCi, the ^nund-inick areii 
moy » tr^^ % tolutiOD of a sulphide plus an. iodiilc in order to the 

metolik suin in the somuFrnx'k Jitlo And tbut mcze&sa iu opsMJty ro iofn^rod light. 

Pf^oiml Octul*i l«l, HI Lhc CoiTOrtIwi Irr WtOiatlgliFrt 




A (viticeduit! for ktcmwing the ofndty of l^vti. Aitico coki' iluplkiUffifi ffim 
lo Enfn-ToJ h^l l^eoi woric«4 oul fd iha bKIvct batidiH forming th« modD- 
Uiiom m ccmwud io iRwci- uilphkle. TO* treatnion |miUiKe» a Knmd rrtteii <m 
Ansco color film wluf^ comptui:^ r^vounlbdy hi volume ■wiLli a iilm imek wtiexi 
rcf^rodiKtd on ih^ Cimvcntkinil itTd-tpuiiire phetomb^ (Fig. 3%, Cartful rmsmu^ 
nxnti have Dot shown miy wioua dutonicini fnldroducHi in the ijBcfc by thii treai^ 



Fjd, t. 



Fhi/2* 

meni. Lbitcnifi^ul coni^riutn^ bd^wi » treaty twk ^nd .1 siiver trade on n 
fsTge mimber of iwpkt indicated chat there ii « xiighi inensw in nobe level owr 
ibe liivQ- track, boi id im otse wot thb fhttiKl fttiflldefit lo be judged d^jectiOQablc. 

Ucfoitimutelyk the flitet layer locd kn Adsod color film wei found to oontribute A 
*{jgbi stain to Lhe dear area. TtK itmhmnti dlnorpUnn bond of thii stolD, hottvvn; 
does (lot ccimapbod to the pcaJe of senaidviiy of Uic ccMim photo lurface: ilienfm 
il ii not 10 DbiectHinable ki a visjiit inttMUioa of the track mjjghi uadicaiei. 


733 
















































For TCVtfiibkHype film, the Viurablc-areii foui^d imck it fucfcrahlc and 

^tlta iTBdt irtitmenf of iMi IdAd dd rcvoiit^ colof filni, Lbc churwiicr^lics of the 
imud ifiack Icod it btsi lo tho vfiriahFk^arci Dwthod. 

Fo r ecc TOcnfcal reajons, the proaiiare 4iul etfuipment utod fof tmliog tbd him 
been oat to opcriite in connoction with the Ansco oalor-filni pfoceswm 


OPS 


■* .1 

i 1 ll 





^4»jr.r Ai 


Jl 




f] 

i-' 

\ 


jL 

. m 

*v 

' i 

\ 

\ 



i 


\r — 

'TT— 



J 



^ 1 





*■ • 

\ 






\ 1 






t 


Fig. 3. 



niadiiiisx3pcTiUjnK^ixhcnonnAlimccs»kiig«p6o<t The agutpiv^t 
eny type of develi^bg machine i^mdint ft anlfmin otouty Om JUM A uaiforni 
flow of film Ihrough the equipment Ia abn^iidy fswfm ltl iwiti. 

In pnet^, ninx li ii ■ nveml pmxm. (he tounrf tmefc cm Affi^oolor 
CKtiiit Hhn b exposed from a pmliiV&Eype kaclt, A mohM l«k ||vin« dtEfftO- 
734 










































ArfENDlX S 



Fw* S. 



Flo. 6. 


735 










COLOUtl 


laniha. favaumbk for pciaimit on hlAitk^azui-Mliiic nr^xrvl^ dupllciiio^ scocfc will 
he ^ittuhk fnr puntiaK on Awjo cDlor duiptlicniimf (ibrr, pmiiin4£p the cukrr 

Him i» pnii;£Md IH ihc i^m\ way op tn Lbe vmh faifore tlw cokjjr Oe^'^per In the 
mirfdte of this, wiwh, tbc Him kid cm I of the imo iIk 
c>qurpmcflt iTahle 4>. In ihc sorntd-tm^-crejiimB oqulpmenu the film is £ifii stfrfiiise^ 
dried to prevent cfccpkttf of the iitmtis wliitkMi bcyoiul ihe Axtu Allocated for the 
tmrnd troclt. Tliifi diymg ia teompliihed to passing Uw film ifimnidi sir squeeim 
tFii. 5} tuKl ttei into fl fmaJI di^ln^ eabim!i 6), Hbh dicing requim ubour 
504ecoods. From the drym^ehomber, the Alin k Led over the MppUonorioj^r and 
Iwie the ^^reaiing loliitioa h applied to the triple ™ ^ I-jg, Ttw t^iion of 
the soEiition jft very only ahoui 15 «ecoail^ ure required ly convert the silver 

tAiiLt I.^Amco Oamn l&wi. Sodw-Fajki Pbocess 


.! 

Si 

k 


“S 


Fini Develop ,, 
L Rmie 
Stop 

4. HiudeAer. * 

5. Wa&li end fifccood 
Expose,, 


S~14 mimito 
5-to seconda 
3 tninutea 


&JKiiid-Track TzeadJiicni 


Appi'oxinulely Z minntiA 


Dr>- 


t. FinUh Wiisli . 
7* Color Des'dop^ 
& Rin^ .. 

9h Stop 

10. Hardener 

11. Wash 
II Blcaid} . 

II. Wa^h 

14, Fix 

15. Wish .. 

Iti. Dry 


A. Feed to Edie^Treatmg iDevtco 

B. Air Squeegee nod Snr&ice 

45-55 leconds 
C Edge^TieaHng. Soluiion A^licariou 

D. RcAJtion Tiittfi—15 M pof nli- 

E. Jet Wash (TmcL Down wtml)— S sccorwiE 

F. Return to Color ProcesaiDg: MaiJiine 


Apj^xlmately I itOnlitc 
tO -15 minuLs 
S-lOseamdi 
J miiuim 

5 

6 ” 

6 

I :: 

9 „ 


hnJidei ill tfic tnifck lo lilver sulphide. The treating solution BeswnliiiJly cm aqufhoas 
Mlutioo CFf iodlLim Aulphide with CdJoap:^ WS^]tX}{!iydrox>^ih^l cdlukue) uikka to 
mcTCSM the riKosity iTabfe 3^ AtVcrlliii miction* line excels soluiior k waahol oil 
|ii« trade urea and the fibn is jvtmsad to the Witlh Ejok ftont which It w^tf taken. Hrif 
entire treatment lequira nhont 75 ttconch. After its rcium to the wnah Lmk* the 
him ccciinuca on through the loi of the prwess in iJv tmial vaj. 

Txule 1—Bxifr-TaaATOENT &X4ltl0^ FOttMtltA 


Otlloatro WS'lOO -ki , , 100 dr. cm 

Sodium Sulphide tAnhydrous) .. .. 

WaUfiomoke .. ,, ^ 


Althcugh ihi* process of qiesaiiig the track n^pdies care, Ji h n sicUgbUbfiwd 
ptocodure and h tnot mMf or odnremx The uduiimv eonULms sodiunr tul^ldc^ 
bowevBf. the amounl of solution requiied k imal}, ooly about JO cu. or m third 

736 
















AltPENDlX K 



F«. % 





3a 


737 












COLOUR CrNFMATOQftAPHV 


of sill Ounce IS rci|iinei] tor 100 (cef mI" tllm, TlKritTons thi handOnj; of ^bc soJulton 
|Tr\'$cni^m oi finzHrdu in this ntooraing Inbciiratoiy If ordit^r^ pm-auiiun-^ 

tire tnhai. 

Th£ itnjl n corTi|iti4;i anJ ponablc im a»4crs <Fiis= i^), bind when usfti ic ti itddvciJ 
iilmig^c the devclopitiifi madiiiic uid renLtitu there ihruusb the iiait. Bnm for 
madiincft coDiicLU(M»Iy pnxxssin^ souDd film, die portable conytritctJoji 
H deeirabk. ThH type of ccFitsrruciion ntnV^ it pi^hlc to mow niwi out oFtlic 
way to sivo riec 30CCSS to the pncteetnnp luachine for mtilittciunjicc mid ckflnin^ 

TTw unit iiidr doo noi propel ihe HJrrt. Thri U aocompliEhod eniiiely by the prti- 
«es4in£ madiioc. Acttully, the procasLog nuudime pulh the film the sounds 

tetidc-tmttiri^ unit. In mder thai no iindEic vtmin be ptuced on the film, the sound* 
inKt-trcatiDu imh id tiHtdencyMlrhen, ihut k, the ahafts ill this rolbi^ of the drying 
cabinei June luminsf in loose Toilers After Icavini; the drying; cabinet, the IHm it ftut 



Fki^ 


Over u roJkr cluster lo ipiuJe ft ooiiufaiely over the cdjte^Ueailiuf roUcr iFiy- 
Herr, tl^ lound-tmidt 9rni eoruet in conlsu:! with m bead oTlhc cdgc-rrealing soiunon 
carried on ihe ilighlly cmu w periphery of the jppikator wiicvL The heaJ wheel 
irawht 41 u slightly rale of ^pccd thqn ibe film end iei the same derccEloiUi at 
the fdniH This maiuUkiia a tmlfomi head In iscmiun whH ihn Indk urean 
The amount of solmion appUed h controNial by Uw depm of dip of ihc appTkatar 
viiwd in the solutiuiL and latcraf imwemeni of i he wheel k conrredted by lw^ mmo^ 
rneter ai^iUblrnttnu on ftic epphailor aj^-inbly- With ihc^ adjusimenti, no difficulty 
bai iKcn cxpcnoTKcd In nmfioing I he fnuiL aiea within the etlubtkhcd itandanl. 
After cdfc-t/e-dtiiuL ^ solution k alkiw^di lo futtct for 15 i«cc>nili Jind ii then 
removed by 4 itpedai tpmy wathiuB ific ^xocsa wlutbn off the imefc urea f Flg^ 
fiom tbift points, dw film ft netunied to ihe proceuliti machine and oominiiei on 
ihrouRh the r«f of ibr prows in liw usiiul way* 

73 « 



APPENDIX 8 


Soiiiul tracks proaoiAed iD tfan wxy src pemnneiai nnd ajt na moit iub^loct t0 
icnUchet and Uum nocnuii aHv^r KHmd tracks maiie on blackniiid-wlifiir 

^bn. Any subsequent trcatmcfU, uicK us Uicquerin^ emxinj^ whicli tan be j»ppUed 
tfitiWy w the co\nt film* wfl! net hann the tMted saund track. 


RcCcfucc* 

|iy J. " Machine processing of Ibromii Ansco color fUm^^ J. Sat, 

Mot, Pkt Ens.. 45 ^NovOTtwT* I Wj, pp, 31S-K7. 

^2) CtibvEitr and Maome, A, A phoi^tube fot dye liDifE ioiind track/* 

A Jfee, Mo/. PH. 46 (May, 1 Wj, pp* 379 - 387 , 

(3> QtOVBi uiid '* A hlgb tensitiw photo-<u£rrmT/* Elaetrmicj, Auput, 
1940. 

(4) Duvt*, K. 0„ andJrjl&iptsS, W,/* ^r^iminnry stiuod itack icsli with vas^nble- 

im dye ttAcks,*' M&t. PH. 46 (May, pp. 387-405. 

(5} Gomch« R.^ ttnd GiWACti, P.t RejmxIuctKin of color Ulni oound rcoerdi,*^ 

J. S(K- Mftr fikt, 43 CSeptmbn; 1944>, pp. 206-214. 

(6) ScEUi^Etx, KiAOiecMk, p. 4&4i 19Z9. 

(7J U.S. Pirau 2.143, Tgl- L973v4<3^ and 

(8) ASA Standard Z52,»1944 d" tuaxedinf Stnndard. 

(9> ujs. mm lasijsii^ 


m 


appendix 9 


DU PONT COLOR F[LM. 

I>u PMU Tm iS-ntfii. C««ar PiHttiiv Film Tor P^rwkml LTk 

Mj 3 iiiiractiif«d by E- L Dli Foni dc itnd CgEnpany, WHmlnicKitu 


T hltli ivnuybAbk ptodLU.1 Is a muilUiyer Eim Cos rckase jarmtin^ (ftcnn Uitte 
colour xpoTAiion oc^tiv^. The lllm Ii3^ throe hgfat sensIlivE Isyeii, 
seiismred diffisrently »ihut ihe desired layer coq Is exfwod by Mtst4 

IfgllL 

The light fcmitlvtt filfcr biiikli? gruim m cnclt layer are iuspeudod in thm syo* 
tbctk polymer laym whidi combine the funcrJoca pr emier nmJ oohntr scnmtofi^ 
Jbst pobmer molDciiteft Siaw studied la tb«tl dimikally llis iwesary coloccr- 
fonnini lUucbjre to produce die three tuhtrodiiia p r umry coltnn^ yeUo4-, rrtApniii 
and cyan. 


COLOUR SENSIDVITY 



D£V£iJC>P€D COLOUR 


/AaGEHTA 

CYAN 

YELLOW 


CROSS SECTION OF FILIA 

Fki. ]. 


Tbc sUw grnmit when drveiPpecL are latitrmtcly ui cdhioci wiltJi ibe cotouMonii^ 
ipg:gn>u|»s Thb naulu in wy high dftdeccy of dyo fonmitkici nod ihn use pf my 
Ihin loyen for incrcasA! rtsolutipn. 

The iirKpommt ma^ta Iflynr b on lap white thakasi mipuftniil yellow Inyer b on 
liKbattoiiL lliis conrdbatrn la shaipnc^ of defloiikut, (S«a'owi«ilin» above.V 


PrbitinH 

OppvefUipaaJ types of regniniiiDii piintipg equiptneni may be uacd. Cohriu 
flUc» are uicd m order id reoonl the eofoiir separation reemdr id iIk upprondaie 
Jayenof tbe ouiliilayer positive The ictiueoce of printing wt oi fpltowt^ 


CaiowSeptirafioFf 

Red 
Crecn 
Blue ri 


Fiffer t/and/of 
Prbtibig 
Coming 2403 

Comeng StJ3 fttMlf-U$R-knwj 
Du Pofti Ddender fiiOO 


740 











Frnuins w be -csriicd out satafacfcdly uiiiis ^ resiseeiiiig stef^-fimn^r 4i 21 feei 
per ixmuite, with iHuntiiUtiiao TronuLSOO W. dcnr |ir*>octiaEt-i>piJ luutpiciL fikment 
tinip vviUi e $pt3iencal reflector. The oxpMiim in iwier-carKtlc^soaiods ^^enlti^e4 to 
priHltijoe A ftcutnU or n Ueruity of J4> uv: 

(nlift^e^ iittw> Meler-candte-^icconds 

RtidcKpu (cyimima^j SSO i. », li 

Green CKp. (yellow irrmsel ^30 ,« *■ 


ProcesslAE 

Du Pout Cotor Etdew Powtiw Film may be pRoocssed iti oomenikuud types cf 
drkeh^iat; miidiinet having mfuiUe leiik amuttfotneut pamit the se^jtieece 
proemmu opcmtioiw shown ImIoWh Frocesaine mhiwsis of four cliemicai st^ with 
puitaNa riMcs imd winha at appropriate (HiiiUf, b»scd on TO F. pmxsaw^ t^3> 
pcfoiiire. 


1. Devdop 
Z iUme 
3. Fix 
4^ Wash 

5. fllwidi* 

6 . W»h 

7 . Fix 

8. WAAh 


M I I 





10 ininufK 
5«lO seeofxb 
§ minLiEcx 
S ** 

5 .. 

I .. 

I M 

]0 


The litocP gi«Jt above one to be considered apfanximnie and wdJ wy Mtjthity fotf 
individuat pcoocssiuii machiueah depcbdimi upon conditions of agital lon^ ete^ 

The flhu carries an intidintiticHi backiri^ which ts romoyed ontomiUkailly duiinf 
procenlnK. 


ProcbHfato Sokdhmi 

Cohtdr Orithpt^ 
P-oirdno dicthyianihfie hydrochkiriUe ^ 
Sodium lulphitc * r » 
Sodium cwboiuie muuobydnifc + 
FoLaaittmi brondde 

fiAirr 

Hypo *- *■ >“ 

Sodium lolphite ** «- 

Eorux 

Acetic acid gtocinl 
Poiwhim aUim 
Water to ^ . 


B/tiich 

PouJsikjtn ntrrk^’anidc j: 

Boricaetd ** 

Bonix 

Water io -y -* 


5^1 lb, 
afro .. 
^8 .. 
40 

aCI’Osall. 


if>12 lb, 

12 5 ,, 

. 3.TS4<lc-e. 
J4 6lb. 
2MH2t EnW 


20&‘0lb. 
3M „ 
<0-5 4i 
iSMBalL 


* ir«aV^k^e(^ tnck iB«nak>74d« ttiii mvy «ociir iAr « l-tMaier "wb ri?itu«l« 1 

rpdetwatbMptiK*^ wStAp ^ 9 . ^ 

741 









COLOUR:; CIHiHATOOR^FHY 

Steand Fixer 

Hypo .* 4ia-0Lb. 

Wftiarto ,, 2iOQg»IL 

T1» above IrtfoRiuUm hM beeii mcloded ocniitesy ol Du Poni fie Nemoun ^ 

Company. u> whom the writn 1» BrsiifiiUy indcbud. 


7 « 


APPENDiX to 


gevacolor 

by Pht}U^Friktnii\ Gewta^t, Atttwtrp^ 

Much ot'tbe follwmi tLim haa bec« luifpliej by Oevwrt UJ-. otlanlnit, by ^^tm 

■coitnHy h IS iftckiuM. 

CUi^flcaMoK. Thitc-tolour lubunctivc pewicas. Ifileiml tripack. cmulwcjn 
bjw iih:«|Mmiin|| iwn-difTiHuig colo«r«oap(K». Colour fi^uih^^posittvt 

Csntrra- Noirrul. 

Ff^Jtction, rtfomwl. 

J^ofiTwl with tunable iiKidiis for for ookiur* 

Fmtwfrtjt. Colour dcvciopwiitni w^jth gotour empKht^ ocMupouj^tb. 


Tytek# GEVA 4 ," 0 tflft Film 


tt'AAA 


AeadStur. 



Nesaiivc. Daylight 
type. Nltiaie Base. 
Podiive, Release^ 
Nitrate Baric- 

u n 

Chniera Record 



Release Prfnitiig 


TriAcnil {teertftlittt. The oft^ns of ihis pfooess nrc Hkulicsil (o Agfacolor (Wj 
pp. 355*^>. furltwrinore. U *i TMsoiubb to ftiiiimc tbut ibo Ls made 

iObaitiniuLtl)' to flccoKtimcc with ihs OTuistop c^itini ^nd senjit^ikg dflbi io 
hat ffNAL RWORT Wl* piibUihcd by iltc VS. DepiirliT»nl of C«nmHw 
f w PP- luvc n nitmbK of colour wupkn, so thw ii itay 

be ihai mil the iwuplcn ure not idcnikat m the ona. 

Strwtwr. The of boUi nCfticive ami posttivc 6ljrtt Jteems to be tdcoibal 

to Ajfjicolot 19* dJid Tttbb St). Tbc blue Ikght^KMTicr bctM^ the ig p tayp r 
(blue wttrdiiii) dnJ ib< «eoml lihwi f^rdinB) \$ coUoiiliil sllmor^ owre- 
spoudlnjf. ftci dtiubl, to ihe Germun conoidBl llilw otuIhor Type OOS*4 
riATIHJ). 

ProccBifltt^ The proocsabitB of Oevucclor N vciy ijititlttr to thnl of A^Bfacotorii as 
will he o'ideni llofn i* cotnpaiiiort of the tespcciFve ilme-tiblea ami fonttulje fice 

pp. 

riroccM«mi FocimalB! 

Aryoftrr ur Ce/iuir 

JSbJltfltwr /I 

N-4iethyl p-phnt>lmtiiitirnioe sulphate ,. A'O pit. 

Water (diUJlkd) ,, •* %- 2«H)ex* 


743 












COtOl^l CIN&MATOGftAPJir 


TlMB'TAWJi* G^AfXkUMt ?'^K;iATm>'fN3(SrT1VG 


T>mstgmr 


Colour DcveJopmiait 
Spray Rtnw,. 
FiTtin^Bith 
Spray Wash 
Oollohlal Silver Bleach 

Ruim 

Bleach Bath -, 
ViKoii$ Bkich 
Stop Bath ,* 

Spray Wash * 

i. 

spm Wash 
Hanunio^ Bath opd 
StabiliKer 
Spray Wash i. 




77*jr 

(mik.). 


8 

15 


Total 

Time, 


15 


Qimt ^ 


omft 

S 

orrih 

omit 

5 

5 

Z 

S 

15 


38 


43 

4a 

50 

55 

m 


ftnWivr bt'/rA tUver rmtk. 


Time 

(mh.Y 

TbUi 

Tlmr, 

Teuip. 

fiB- 

m 

10 

1 6rF.±r 

10-8 ±0<! 

8 

Jl 

rm 

I't 


15 

33 

Sil*F.-M=F. 


4 

37 

6S'=F.i:2* 

4-24-04 

—0-0 

i 

m 

M 


oinit 

, — 


5'Oil-O 

4 

[ 43 

i— . 

2 

45 

II5"R±2' 


5 

50 



5 

55 


ft'fttl’O 

2 

57 

S9'^F.— 

5 

h2 


108^0-2 

15 1 

r 

1 



Sat$itiaa B 

SodJum Sulphite (cmi.1 , * 

Hy tojrykxmne HCL 
^lum Carbofiate (anhy^l . , ., 

rki44aiuni Broftdde fIbr poffitivej 
Polmiinn Bromide (ror tvgaltvc} 
Water Idiatill^) ,, 


« d 40 gm. 

11 ,, 

. 50*0 .. 

.. Z5 » 

- « .1 

000*0 

Add SohitJcm A lo B at Iciti 24 lioun bafon: iw. 


FmrfMtor /Veynt/vc PosIUtnf C^huf 
Saftitioa 4 

Nniifithyl Mheroikiicdiairiim iniphatc 
Water (dxstiUed) to malDc . ^ 


30 gm, 
IQOO c^. 


Satutiim 3 

Sodhim Solphite (cryat.) 

HydruaylainiPe HCL a 

Sodium Garbcnate , ^ .. ” 

Woter (diitlilodMo make ,, 

S^lioo A B B at koA 24 houi* hefoK me. 
Uas 50 litm pet 1,000 metrea of flbn procawd. 


H .. 

50fl „ 

000-0 C.& 


fMWf &r/A 11 jf) 

isa«ass?“"r’ •,• ;r 

Sodtuni Sulplijto (unhyd.) 

Amic Acid ^ 

Pota$aium Alum . . 

Add Watier lo rm^ 


5000 giii^ 
120 
J30 

lO-O CAL 

12-0 piu 
TO iiire 


744 



























iffENWJc 10 


Baih 


Acetic Acid (sli^arj ^. 

SoJlttm Hydroxide 

PoiaHtUim Ferricyanidif 

Fountium Bromide 

Add Water to male* 

iSOtfjJ, 

iS'Oulvi' 
„ IWVO .. 
lOO .. 
Ifl litre 

The caikiidJi] sflw yellbw filter Uyer is remtivcd in ilus biwelk 

fixing Bath 

200-0 pn. 

too .. 

l-Olilf* 

SodltifO Ulloiulphutc (,hjrpo> . * 

S^ram Sulphite (anltyd.i 

Add Water to make ,. 

/fanimhs imtStabUiztr 


E^^nmiilin (40% stock solution) - - ^ 

Sodium Cirtmuare (urttyd.) 

Add Wj^itcr loiniike 

„ 12 5 cjt. 

10*0 pi- 
l-OfiLrc 


SubiiBU the coloim aind rrcwsiiA jubMjqiHsnt r4<liim 
(tenffiwJ; »50 lilies per i.OOO metres oTfilm [FEvdSifiL 


SreurA/oe CMaldal Sit**r filter Uiyer 
(for iVnitive wltli ftOulud-trackj 


Antic Ad4 (ibciaH - . ' j 

Sodium Hydroxide (cauuic $odal 
Potnsi^inn FeiTic2raiiidc 
Add Wucr to malice 

Rtnewiili IjOlUMfot mcli^ of mm v^t^osss&A, 


0^75 m- 
10 litro 


Visintm Skaeh 

{to Pdfjiivt ptcLure iuca* korring $oiiniHmk 
CAiboxyme^hyi CciTulcrtc .e - 

Potjusiiim FcirkyaiilLle 
^fkai . . .. 

Renewal l ISO litncs to I^OOO iTK-tl^ ^ (i^i'OiessHl 

AW.’-50 »m. the carboxymrthyl wliuk^ *re ndtW 
IJJOO«. afi^er. AHn catnuml 

dnaotvn compkteJy. The potawistm forkyinuk tittd SchM m liwfl ii±i«JSvca *ii wic 
Aotuika 


Swp S^iih fi/r P'iMi^ut Binuh 
Sodium Sgiphkte ^ fiohyd-^ 

Water 

Renewal; lOO litr*i jref t.W meifei of Him pccMSaoJL 


jO-0 pn. 
\Ai litre 


l*ri*tln*. Printing nuKhino mi»t etnboUy meaiH fc« cnitwr p dinj ^ ^ 
iiaa of oaiupeiuiitiitg niiere. Tite caitlniuou* piinw ile^b^ on p. 300 |* 

suitable. GeWmaunmcnaihe Debr« “ 

eoUttirfllter bimO awl IlsJiiconlfol (s« M75). Uglw !?! 

« uFttfflbfectorv owruii to dbim^ of eoEcuf tnnpetatitre itrtd cniec 

cJSTAdorfmjtJy, liybt fins mn« be «*i.Iaied by » 

745 


COLUUK CtN£UA11>GBtArHY 

diaphrastn as ia ibc “ MaUpo " iMnd, nr ibe inxriiaii HaTncultat iilieis «$ in rhc 
Dufoycolor printmg mAdlinc. 

Gewai compeiHailns filim, Ydtow {inhwu blue), MownM (minis giwn) and 
gfwi (itoniu Rd) ilia fupptied in b Mrin of ilx r^ujiRiI iteroitka, daiculnt 
OO—10—30—»~*0—90. 

Selectian of Uh appropriate combmation b made In (wa 

(e) Prims jwe made mtng ib« foTiiswLng tnbulHeed oombhuiloia: 


dVa. jAt 

apertitnt hj rAv 

r. 


(Qtm) 

C 

4 

00 

00 

00 

4 

30 

00 

00 

4 

<0 

00 

00 

4 

90 

00 

00 

6 

00 

10 

00 

fr’ 1 

30 

30 

00 

6 

60 

m 

00 

€ 

90 

30 

00 

1 

GO 

00 

JO 

7 

30 

00 

30 

7 

60 

00 

30 

7 

90 

00 

30 

T 

OO 

60 

00 

7 

10 

60 

00 

1 

£0 

m 

00 

7 

90 

60 

00 

4 

SO 

90 

00 


30 

90 

00 

9 

€0 

90 

OP 

9 

SO 

90 

00 

10 

CO 

00 

m 

10 

30 

00 

60 

10 

60 

00 

60 

10 

so 

00 

60 

15 

00 

00 

90 

13 

30 

00 

90 

13 

60 

00 

90 

13 

90 

00 

90 

9 

00 

30 

30 

10 

00 

60 

30 

n 

OO 

90 

30 

\i 

00 

30 

60 

l3 

1 ^ 

30 

60 

15 

00 

90 

60 

15 

00 

30 

90 

Iti 

00 

60 

90 

IB 

OO 

90 

90 


746 

















APFBNC*!! to 


(d) Ai fbithtr pitnl Is iunrie luJoig the be^l Al[er comtHiiation iVoni te^^ tn) n 
pH^fl]terror6ud sMm) flrtd then the fottowing amssary comblfiitiOitt: 


duen^ fv iht 

VWifeiii- 

n 


iC)iKin\ 

c. 

4 

00 

00 

m 

4 

10 * 

cto 

DO 

4 

20 

00 

DO 

4 

30 

00 

DO 

5 

OO 

LO 

DO 

j 1 

10 

10 

DO 


20 

HO 

00 

5 1 

30 

10 

DO 

5 

00 

20 

OD 

5 

]Q 

20 

00 

S 

20 

20 

DO 

5 

30 

20 

00 


oo 

30 

00 

IS 

ID 

30 

DO 

6 

20 

30 

00 

4 

30 

30 

DO 

5 

_ 


10 

s 

to 

— 

LO 

s 

to 

— ^ 

10 

5 

30 

— 

10 


_ 


20. 

ft 

ID 

— 

20 

ft 

20 

— 

m 

fti 

SO 

— 

20 

T 

__ 


30 

7 

10 

— 

30 

7 

20 

. — 

30 

7 

30 

i — 

30 

ft 


to 

10 

7 


2fl 

ID 

1 


10 

to 

7 

___ 

10 

TO 

ft 


20 

20 

ft 


30 

20 

ft 

— 

10 

30 

9 



30 

9 

— 

! 30 

30 


When jiulgin^the positive, the cocrect^Ato be nppUtd i« cu use a filter of Ihr wnc 
hue ds that wb^ It pmlomiQfliii the pfv^ectiDci Uliinimfloi- xnd 

vice ¥crn for the nc^Btiiie. 


741 






















rOtQVk C*NEMATOORAPHr 


Ct^UTt 

CiMroerKWT t& Ar ap^i^rd wAirn vA^jiitiift^ 

Fifsiiitt. 

A'eSTiir/w?. 

Cyan 

Maaenia 

Yclfow 

Blue 

Red 

Greer 

Cyim 

Maucnlft 

Vdlow 

Cyan, htagenlu 
¥dlow* Mn^mu 
Cyan. Vdlow 

MasantOf YeTlow 
cyan* Yellow 
cyan, hfoeent:! 
Yellow 

Cyan 

Muecnla 


ftnaJ omibmalJun for prmuing h detoTnincd by aildine Uie ** firisfifjce " 
5c«m# (ftwc m ^ibow) to tEu b»^ iilieK TouimI fonc^ foj. 


TTic iiTO followi'DR jitlvtaniott dre picn lo- iJcitKHislr&lje I Ik Aboiw S— 
f II Tlct nilcnij^aA ptf^nEim (fiseU a^tcciuJ, for Momple, C30 uad M60^ arc (1^ 
C2l>amlMl0. 

ffi ihMfopt, tK comjxiHd flf the 

ffltere C30 lC30mti| OO) amJ WniMm and M10). 

fifi If imng Oltcrs C30 iu?hi MfiO 1 ^% a prc-llltiu„ J| in n^^sfitry EKc^diuM m the 
f^iA of the ^rantl irlai, to adj filim Mmartd ¥20* rl» fin[iJ rambdniiiwn wll ihert 
bccfinic: 


VIO 

^f7i0<»M6O-Ml0> 

CM 


U K o& wdl to note hrt that the upeniim in the Molipti bnmJ » ihcw m ibe 
ahme nnt« ^ in agcortblnx wirh the ygiicr ckrt^iy of ibe maKntii 

or bit«>grKn tSItcTi in use diie to the ifrcy omilcnl of ihse dyci. 

Forevr^ 10 poutii incrcAae in ihc bli^fnnn lliter^ iht apcfiun? fiijf t be foinraied 
^ one unit. Tor itn inciiMM of 20 polnli (n the msniMTiq Hlttr, the Dperiuft be 
increased oyoneunit. 

the djic* tiaed in oil the htten were idca^ ona, a oornhlfiaiioii of one of 
each ihrK colours of ihc vame uunbet wiO ^irt a grey density ixm^pocidlnN 
to * diTcficrtCe m ape^ut^ of F5 unl^ 

Bc^St tlK m mJnit theupcitute rfiuii he reduced by li unitt formry 10 
flmnbeci which the three filters art sutinltaneou»Ey dccreuiedr 


/f 

^ be lubntJlutcd by the oombinaUofl 
MSO and GIO. ohultied by mbti^hif from the tnstra ofeocfi filler die number 20, 
i^., the snuiUeat of ihc throe tndka, 

Thbt redoclkm in ihr dcnsiiy of ifac Erhci mmi be cofirpemated ljy ■ coftwm^tinR 
roduct^on in tht dinmeter of tlicaperture in dm coBirnl hsnd. 

tii FlattLieow£i»«mlui:iiotilni1ie<lmijt/uriheiWflliere,tv‘hiihwiMnkuliJ 

mslanct, a dontox of 


20 
10 " 


1-J- 3 unita 


74 « 













AFPBKDJX 10 

Tben ^Iovm f-oi tlv la denaiiy^ of the iifnt hLul^'gR]el^ 

30 

or dcciTAte in the nuEfcnifl Ghcf of ^ x 1 » I imii. 

30 

20 

lycmoMc hk ibc blue^pfccQ fllto* of — x 1 =2 mdu. 

10 

En It decrem of 20 iirnt) for nU three fjlten imm he coir^wujted hy a 

dficicw of 2x hS^l4-l -l7S«6 unili in iho number of the jipei1ui« hi the control 
bond. 

la order to coircct for umicr or over exposuie in Ibe oefatiHi'C, apenum must be 
oiiber (kotaKd or ixwmisnt To ikdliUie tlili cootro], mii with yarioai fipertum 
t&tea mint be ndded to both tW strips. 

SondPrint^ Sound is pnriied in the uJiml moftiier. However^ in order to ffitnid 
n drop ia qiudity due to lighl diDh&ma thmugh ihe ihJ^ncas of thocmursiofis^ n bhic 
Otter CNp. nuut be insointid. In ihie wuy the sound tmJe U ooJy itoordea In 
the top Inyer^ 

Events an provin^f comet the ptedktion nuult hi the Historkul SumiTuto 
tpp. 2X^7). Alnady we htive An^ Ne^tutive end Fositiw Co^r Film* Gevaert 
K^itvc imd Positive Color ¥i\m, imd a Fcmnn ttbUinol Nci^tvc kukI Posiiive 
Color Filtu profflt&ed shortly' Ail tbeslD maierfals w dB^niivei of A^dcolor. 
A^ocolor nc^tive and pofiitivr is heinn made in RtissUi^ slid in Gemutny It li 
comltuito life Qgahidt the 1.0- plentit L^wkusenv where A^s □tode hromidc papa. 


749 


AFPENDtX ft 


THE DUGROMACOLOR PROCESS 

t^ROMACOLOR is no iiddttive pnxca» dneloped in Fnuitic bj RoseJ 
uunuvCciX^Gd^srt, out Andri Marx. Special lensea. of which thcdetefli 

iff not revealed^ m usbd (<tr intina iM pn^jectif^ ami arc saki toeUminaic 
j^rnUfa. Partaking fJu lens suhI praci Mock stated la tv adnivtahlle to any coiwa. 


i 





Fu. L. 



*ia®prise$ a bcnm-spliutiig gotnponem ptovidto^ tlitoe suh-^niodml unases wiilun 
w area of ■ smslc fciiiM; Stuidiird ttkolotir fillers are cmploi^. Lmt fi o* 
32-mm, focus or pcater may be used li is ctoimed tfiaifact ihai the 

formiiijtl« tbi« im ii^ are paialtel to aoc another mates iha use of a 1^^ 

lem unciecemry.” Froni thcikaa'fpiion li seems tbai the beam^liUcr block h 

750 



















APPEHOIX 11 


ptooed bemtcn 4 sinik iitoo^tivi! 4mJ iii« mi40e plm. A muLclple kii«^ uzili env^ 
pk>>^ io project Iho Uifec imascs in^iperfHi^hkHi oit iht sovcOf The braoD-^iiiicr 
muiPMunl apfftm lo »ceraiiDtc uapq^ jthm potlii. mad m mam Tpr d^uiilNni 
tbesfi piilM ii Indkotedw 

Kfiienee 

BLtMMKC, Q,* t# Oh^JV. 25,4» No, 22+<FdJfUW* 1^9^ 


* 


751 


APPENDIX 12 


FURTHER PROCESSES RECENTLY ANNOUNCED 
CHltaMART 

f AiiglD'Afncrititii Colour Phoici^rapiuc indiuifitii. Ltd., 

30. Queca‘s Grovv, St, JmtmS Wood, Lotiilon,) 

C^s(fii^{k)n.—T*'if‘ w lhtw<(^r n«iiiLi(V)e^poaith« tmihildyer praohi, ihr 
tirmiiion laym incorpavatinE nDn-difFu^n^ colour joii pi prc. 

Camera, —^Jontirti, 

KcrjiBit 

— ZMonniil, with iuli^bb incuiu for gfadin^ for ^our^ 

iiuDor nUHlilicuiuiib atiltl to tic iimilnr to the procening or 
A^iicolor tnoE^oQ pkiurc Ei|m 

(k-DcTHl Ellescrlpikm 

T^iii process u upon ihc paiticf4s of Hojit von Fr^umltplkri ft Huttg/inan 
lul^l ru^ng ht tnjttiLCKj, Tw " prouc^s^ ” hfivc been f^escribed. A twchcolouf 
^ SiiT?plox prooESi, md lhnK><olPur iKftith^HpotiHve iruieruU 
C4Ucd ibe Oiromarr Tricolor " proexss, 

StfvrlK 

Tbc NrixpEour proces^i coniiiiiiA oF a iw{>layer Jieftiitivc f!iAUriat of iiDOith(iUo:if 

oetiBOr 


Te?p 

Filler Liiycr 
BofEom 


Smjfriztfis' 

CiUi^^fr Iftcorpui:tztai 


Ortho 

Cyan 

— 

— 

— 

roUobdol Sttver 

Red Sertsiii^od 
iKo Qrmn Schii.)| 

i 



1 Flfm Bftvr 



For ilw iwiiivc prim a lAtttJnftJ- nmieriftl i* uioJ of itnonhodift tiii«utfe. 
Tilt 'op ^ jcmiiunt (no gnoen Koiiiizinu and eontahu a ycJJow cotipJcf, 

W middl^yw h a/jo red sanfitljE^ (no gmnjcasittnmt) luid containc a ntBgeata 
^plcr. The tottom la>cr i* btccii aeojtUzcid (orUio) and conuina g cyan owinter 

EiS!?? “ *‘**««> »*>'•« !«Mw tintoin blue) nher which na^ 

wtad In doraity. nun mniply red sod gr««n |(ghi atmatsi ftom the muenU and 
cyan 1*^ of the orfgiiwl (oeoitt with mow or Icsa. oaivo Mue li^ tnaanltted 

SSSX5',£?£.“'”"°*““'. 1. 

752 






















12 


i1 udiiinicd Uml Uir blue vpced of ibc cop laycrpcrmits a ocrfaiDunDUDl of 

oautrol over the Ia>m prcfercmiaily pruitedi}i mauriaJ to Ihif tximX 

of dcscribic^ the rewU at ** iwo jukI b coIdot. f^ec Tecbnitbioim aih} 

Qo«co^.> 

For Lbs yellow inrlofuiB Alleriiu [Uord filler^ 101-110 ure employed. 

** Clinaiimil TckoIcKr " Nci^Attve-l^-o^va Prtwe^ 

llie ihroooolour ueliiUvc-imitivc pmeea au&oumd by the company u UkorUy 
10 becom nvallable has ihe follo^ms chumdcrHCk^^ Tbo ficgxiiVD ii a tiipadc of 
cmoDcn'cnlkFnAl duisir of wliicb ibe inp tnyrr can be nrlptwL Ihk Uyef h \Auc 
idialtht ]itki] cooimtts ao colCKir coupler. 


[ff 1 0 I r [ g iB\ r_ 











^ Atf- £(wr iff 
{hrvgt Mv 


Z€iV 

w 


^rJ!^ 





SgSi 















JWi^ 


^r<A*r 


^vraoAudv 


ffASn* fr^ 

iw pe^ftjvw 


I filiic wauitevp-- No coupkr 

StrippIftE pbiOc intetljiyer dyed yellow 
i Red tAtOi ltd Mofcnla coupler 

Ortho scnticls^ ^ Cyan coupler 
nhti Buie 
AdiI-1lii1o bAckiuA 


TbA positive miccrinl lo be nuied «itb Lhh hits the foUowinje ccmmtaiiHi t 


I Redactmilad —Mneenw coupler 
i Oribo tomitind— €ym coupler 
I CcUoidiil Yellow Filter 

Elliic 9 a»hbK — Y'dltTn eoupEcr 


3B 


753 




















































COLOUR ClNEMAlOOKAFliy 
XreHtlre Pnxt»iiiK ['nKuRuw 

TTie blue a^tivu nnptiiDfi teyer is J«cloped, ibwil, ud dried v*iiboui 

piasiie ioicilayef tvhidt 
^ impKTiKabJt It U fhHjibla to nctlw « (wajjivB tfyplicaic pr^ 
f™ the «lvw int«^ now pnseoi m ilw top lajTer only by tneom ortnfn>red behi it 

Mumlly bcin* W After thJt " tawnlfcr'” 

to “is:t£s?.te'iics 

M.JSio^^^.SS*****'*!?* **^? positive (luplieate ncprcicntiBg tiu blue 

Mptua^, ^ an oftgniBl ttvo>layer colouc ncKative rtpresenTuic ibe gntm ami teu 
wparaitm. ti it the mtcotioji of the iaveotciT that these two tiiRts sbali contprise i he 
wJeuial" master aesftthics.-' The i«si »iuac is lo woceeU lo n^e« firiT^ 
Uiicitnajid-white dupilcale nesaiitv from the " lavender and iheo nnxml to 
duplKsne the two-laj-cr colour nefsiive up<in ■ speeisi putlive dupiti* SS. 

Colour PosiiiTc MA!itcr DqpUcstlni; Mefnial 
Smictiiic: 


* Stmltipjf); 

1 Cuupitf Incinparaied 

Ke4 ^enHEtzs^l 

(Nfl gmn adinsiiijjifrtn) 

Estra red Mj^isana 

Ortho 

Cycuj 


hrirf^ materiHl which yief* an Jnicnnedinie t»Joiir Boilstw, 

KekM CViJoitr PttsitiiFr 

foUwln* Utwrlhudos muctiw. 

“jer 13 Oiue «asjtjw tjnfy and i^untoim a ydlow colour coup^t. 

Sm*tiunf j 


S^miUtzing 

1 fnCitrpvratfi/ 

1 -- 

1 Fitiif Lay^r 

lUd scasiU^ 

(No jciiuti£iition) 

Mafcnl^ cotjplef 


Oitbo 

Cyan Coupler 


— 


Cc^tdaJ'jil^ryeUDiA' niuf 

1 

i 

o 

1 

1 

u 

Ydktw coLipliT 



Film box 
















































Apn^l>^> I- 


llic liuplk^ite iwo-Uyei: utkntf ii«auti\ic ii lunl to piint the ujyptr iftTo laycfi arwJ 
the bltKit-and-^tedopliwitc negzuive i^pdimod upon tbe opp^tc fluk of iM slod. 
tbraoih tbt HJni a btkic flltcf betni empkpjwd to mirici the ptifiUoE Ofilit 
ftrktiy lo the blue rc^^oo of ih£^ spectnim. ^ 

□imiooiifift the skiplicatioB the synUieih atnl andytk utnild luiti out 
be ai follow:— 




# [ 4 I a I V I * 1 


1 


ws^mm 

i 1 1.-II4 

pwwjp' “ 


^ n.i 

^ 1 




yAt* jra Ajbj^ 








j-Wf? 


—1 

m 


r 





W 






m 


1 

m 


m 

m, 


tra/wrfrrret 
/w ^ 

*yja 


I i IJ 


Mi^ntm 














jp t J | g [ »^ ] g | ^ 


Prm.'eniiap 


Devodhui^t Ttuh-TAMJ 
CHiujWAitTSWLo ** MsoAtivi j&jn Pwnv£ 


1 Sft^pl 


71w 

(A/hw*) 

Total Ttme 
^^f^ra.'^ 

1 

Dr^elopnicnt *» 

:■# 

10 

1 ' 

1 2 

Rinse 


1 

11 


Atid Stop &alh 

X 

f 

12 

4 

WosblnB 


m 

42 

1 5 

Itochioe Baih 

-r. 

; 7 

49 

0 

Wasliioe 

»« 

7 

S6 

7 

a 

Fkifttf 

Wrt5ttPli 

’» " 

1 

JO 

64 

74 

9 

tSic 0;t*L[nf> 

r s 

6 

ao 

10 

Fmal WAih 

-- 

7 

87 i 


755 
































































COJ.DUR Cl>i£MATOCk4PKV 

pf ti^ imposed ntgatlve md {lOiitive Chromort Ttkokxr ncs^mx 
maieruit wUI be wmlte to itic Simplest *" i^Aro-colour Aegaiivc and posdivc. The 
in^iot cLuins tluif tiuplkzUe ookrai niifiAitvts mu be made of sopcfiof Quality io 
olhg coicmr atgawi^p^ prooESies, but no evidaw 1 q wipport of Uiis dalui 
tula been pit^tcQ to iho tndimf} it the due of writing. 


Reiurkjt 

lib iaip«$iblc *1 tn«$ent to corumeni upon (be ndvimtafK or diudvuiaiRj of 
tfwc uiiiB4tiil tmtUlhyw filmt dnee ul ibe tinw at «r!(ia£ tpo UHte TOrkhir^ 
deinonitrttteil to enqble any relUitilc caacbMloD lo be draiWL Tb«e wouM «on (it 
be BO reaum why the " Simplex " proem iboutJ imi be eapible of Bcceatoblc 
tvnxolour prinu, bui it b doubtful wbct|»r ibo claim of lile tponsmT^ ibb 
PpHm ibu trie prooeu preduen cooaiderably belter resuJu iliui tny of Uk 

lapack proccase* tiow in «i«M7iefciai iwe ** can, bi fact, he opheld, 


ALKACOLOL'U 

lAJf* PluoiogTi^phtc Labomtorkap Lid.^ 

Wwdour Strict, Ijjiidon, W.I4 

Chiifficathn ,—TVoeoloiir pruoeai, 

NoimoJ, equipped wtflbk preisttrt pkic aM bipods nw^a^me. 
FVm S/cK*-—G f\ am Hipoci Film h mcd. 

Duplittzai poilijvB rnjidt by GcviMri+ nuindyp conicd on front mvX 
rn^fU^ppon. Obviomly, rcgisiwtn^ pin prmiiap maebim mujit 

' The man^^red colour dc^Tlopmeni 

KS car^ out by a mi; of magcflU and ^km golmf developers The 

^ b ctihiwd 10 give mitmiil istilit 

"*“■* •*“* cyan ,i,B b w omdeat «d 
nraorto. Tliedmiii^ h gomi and tbn volume level ksaid no he only dinhtlv lawn 
than ihni given by a nivct track. j j- 

ReBnrk% 

EMrtct cokittt devdopment at a ptcicodure ho* noi ao fflr gn'en rdiablc reaitlii tor 
motioq pc^ proeettfog, it temiiitu to he teen wbeiber ihe Alfu (ecbniciBni 

“ '*'• * I. i-»««« « 

Tbc toreeoau (be cjrly produciion of a Mpiliva^po*ij|« TOtHibvtt 

thiwolour prooesi, "niii. however, wonhl involve ibe provitioii of very oteniivc 
ftnuhion ooobnB pliuit not at prcscni e( ibe dbpotal ofihbcomniOTy. The nnnerinl 
would p^uRiabty coutotni to the publtabed epcdOcaliODs of Agfacolor is^pilM] and 


756 


APPENDIX il 


RECF>fr 


G.1C.C^ Compajct Sivntrc ILklimhiallX^ 

1 30 - m tfmff, i 10 * »:> ExptrimetttN " ** SfUifTr S/H>tlinhL Thti mm com- 

pris« a ISD-amp. K.L Arc Lttnip botfy* b^i ibe imenol niccfiallii^ H specaOly 
dcstsncO tiJ jicciirrnTiQdatsJ tjtt 10 k W. CcunpACl Suim Luitip, Tlw 10 kW. (fiJOp 
VDOiuilcd vcitlcflUy with a. 2tV'[iL di-iDjCtci FrtSMl len* hi front uad ii "splKsncal 
UickiiT^ mirror bchinil thtf laitip. Slnmncrnm *' mcchnnism h Full 

filodrkal im! ni«[::hnnk:iil intcrlot^ arc to cfuurc »iifiety to Ihc lamp and to 

I he opemEor. The bnlliuti rCAuiiance vhth th\t imif ta Bcpamic Tronr the spoihi^t, but 
ihe itirtlng nvcIujiriTn k an iwn of ilw Ininp tniu/it. 

Two types of itattihs fiwsizilflmun stie uvoifabk. one of the lyp* where ilw tump 
must 1» allEmtEd to coul dnwn l^cforr it mm be ro^iarted^ ihe othofi of the hot ne- 
Stan type , where ilie la trip can be rv^Earled Immediately. 

35 iiT^. m A IK) Crntmcf " Si^at^ thn jpenhahi U u onm^ 

plelcly Lmitln Uiat tlu hali^s-l and control rticehiinistit Fomu an intesrat 

part of the lump hoiue, ^nd a twin core mbk fitted with a ipidcr pins cuTnej frnm liw 
oniiiroJ parwh The H k W. bntp rnuuniud vcnkally with a 10 in_ dmirtctcr Fresftd 
lens in front oftho lamp and a aphcTicat btiokinig mifTtyr hchinjd \U Tull iimmeficLg 
hi pfxii\i6ed. Here ttgairt* UiU elwtrkal and medunknJ icllorlndkt lire provided to 
eoSiire safety. 

35 n^pK (11 Comr^orr " Srmm rmufi^ typt. There 

iifTiL^ use theiojina iamp aa the 35 amp- (.1} kW.) Crairpact Stxirco iituilhi Spotliyhti 
Optiudfy they are in estry wty >hidiir to the irmniialSy opeooed t>'pca. With the 
remi^ia conirol op lo to. unfti can be uitcf^cottEiociiid from one hauti ccFoimllef, eml 
bmp smkinfi and shniEcr Cfhtmif 0 o--/ur,+ »immcnnf and fuH llahl onipoi—are con- 
trolied rrom the one ecntn^lScr. Tlic nombee wtdcH -um be remoidy c^iiitroUed it not 
limiled to 6; ajimuny » art cequiml fora paitlailarset can be oonEieoed in banka of 
6 and remotely conlf 

** Cifmpdct *" AVuJi'ee llmtJ Ti^rrh. For burglary scenes and the biter Tltc toreb 
approxlnfiaiely the taim as an nrdmary loieh^ but AceoittmAlaiiet a [2S-wati 
Omrn Compact Ikrurcc Ltmip. tU canttoi merhimism proi-'idEfi for aiiiomttik: sSm* 
merins whim ibe toreh ii plae^on the resi. 

M'ft T>pe ^ (" The Bniir ^*1 

The Anierkan Mok-Rkhurdson kmp, nicknamed The Ofis distlnjpdilifld 
by an bcededinsly hish eftkteocy; a« comparcid wfih the Type |t0 Lamp, mi incresK 

50% In contni—rmm I5fl to 12S ampst,'—inereaicfi the JEgtii iiutpul three or Four 
tijn«- 

A feature of Ihe Briii&H mixkl ii that aectn to iht rnechiini^ secured no4 
I bmu^ Joor? bi the kmp^oiilep but by pivolbif the whL>Je of the mcchi nlsm towards 
the rear. An mdirttiioji Is provided shawms when tht posilke oarhop it rtearm^ the 
end of iis^niTu bv Ihe lUihlng of :i. pilot lamp. wbkliicnis:ilao Lti a pokEily linliatof. 
The Inmp is filled with a 2d in. FiieEni:l kns^ 

MakDcnanoc is fauilitnied by the cosy removal of die inedmntvm frofn the lump- 
tiouKr The bumnig; hours of a Lamp are indkaicd on n counter. 

Remote Cnnind System for Slwfb IJs^ling 

Mole-Rkbardion iFugbrnlh LtiL, b£ii« dcmohiilrzled sydem fiyr dmvroimt a 
number of lights simuthinccudy bo^ nernom control oofisisEin^ of shuttm of tbe 

757 



COLllUk ATOakAP8V 


Ven^liiiji^blinjJ type:, e^h pToWiled wilh a m^^xD? dfi\<. The 

-vyticro drepemtEorn resembles ihe ScEsyn but opcTiiEct aO' the r>.C of ihc un: 

Wiisfily, 

cojuroi imit oombli of a tappc4 tnppu^ un ^onnKtnl iq Bppn^ 

piiiue pu)« m ihs^K-pcile stntm of 4 ^djJ niotor, vdl^n which s onnaruit' 

rptalea^ il3 moveniott exdftly followEnE ihc moveiruMit dT Lhc v'tmlTD] contacts, 

A sin^c band cofitrol will ojjemEC BX ^hutiefS. which may, of course, be on lumpjt 
of dLffcFenl lype^ or for cxainpb with difTeneiidy coldun^ bllm; I'unher^ n rcvminc 
vwhch Oo shulEcr motor ^rcib^c^ it to be cillia opened or dcood on the nhiVT' 
rrmi of rhe comto^JcTp so that q graduoJ duinge of coioiw may he etrecieil. 

By cnEuii ofa molor-tirivtoconiT^lkT, up to 2D0 lampi can becoatrotled in 
of 50, Fufiherrnorc, the shunm can he made 10 ctose iniUaniJincoi^ly, nod may be 
operatod by m pmctkal switch on ihe Mt. 

A urn I hm been construcEnl coiuiaUnB of a spoi rail fiitcd with five stud^ tamps, 
cortqirHini; two M-R Type 170 arcs opcraiinB In terjes and fitted wilh aLftonram^ 
atnfiemg^ tw ** Dimrc^'' and two M-R Type 4 Senior Solimspoi-lainp(s- AII are coii- 
tmilod by meom of contnetora cpcral^ fttam -4 enisle on the FlooTp pro^idinj 
remotely opemted switchlti^, diimniUf und colour-idum^B- 

Recent compaci source lamps nuui^aciured in En^Tand by this contpany are a 
spotlijshi desi^nod to fake u 10 or 5 IcW, Jamrp. Thii b remote controtkd and 
mote lijht than the M^R Type JTO ai |0 ^cW. The larnp may be tlmcV. diimncd. 
fcKUicd and simmered l^ian 4 small controller. Ruq-up linsc b only 3 to 4 minuie^ 
and a mtiilcin^ circuit cftablea the arc 10 be re-i.gnitcd if it has boexi switched olT A 
built-in molor controls focus and another u dirroTung; ilmticr^ 

A remote conirqlled fioodli^ is dcligDcd for 5 to 2'5 kW. Iam{^ and at the 
fcFTiTKrTiitin; produces twice as much light aaa Duarc.'" 

Middpk H.D. Lhdrrksit EqnipnKiii 

MuJiipk tt. D. Industnca^ LkL^ provide the followmj; Ijjjhtmg oqyipmetu: 

1 ^W'. Compass " Spvrce i^mp^ ^it aH-vtaih^r This lamp h daigned fnr 

mudmum lli^, i^iween the oulsido of ihe refieclcM' and tlw: uulia- casing a Ctm- 
tinuoqs iifr diculutkni is ntamtanicd.. I bus adueviuE dlldeocy m coolins^ IE h 
operated by one iiwilch which autumalicaliy allowi a time lag from ihe irriilul 
striktng to Um full capacity of Ehe lainfu^ which vario from I to 21 minutd. 

This imh ii also tnade udng q 2| fc W. bulb and b adopluble etlhet aa a sky-pen or 
in standard 2 kW. spot housuss. 

10 JtfF. LoTtip. Slmikr in and coniiruction m the 5 and 71 kW. modek, 

ti™ units hare ihree sw-itcheft at tlu rear, Ihe lintmcrtag, sinkiit#^ and main- The 
ioitint ram-up period is approximately 15 minutes. The oren, or pre^hcaUiig armnfie- 
mciii. is auiomoj rally operated m each caw from the main switch. With ihccMpiion 
of the ballast misioncc^ which ii housed In a sepnniir unit, Eilher on eIm aland or in 
any oonttinieltt posiU^ on tlm floor or gantry, the whole of the ciccttiual and 
mechanicifi cQuipincnt Is housed in the rear of the lampv a patcnteii feature of all 
lamps mautifiietiimJ by this companyH 

Site mtiliitr utt light tef^scopk itatnt. The 

i>lHicfil system comprises a 3 in. QuLnee rrtsnti Im in coojmH^tion wjih a iphertcai 
mirror. The whole Is cxtnsmaly lijihs, the latal wel^t, itieludinK ata4Jd and 25 fl. 
cable, being only tO lb. The stand imables the lamp to be adjusted 10 a lidglii of lO ft. 
with perfect lafety. 

A lOCl IK rnodd u also manufactured or aimllar ded^ nndi conatruciluii, bin 
incOfporiJLcs a 2 in. plano-convex lens. 


7S8 


Taiiuj 7 <i.—C oLOWHfiriRic: SPtaPiCATioHs ut> Written Lioat Fhiers. (Communication No, 1050 . 

KoUAK illSEAJlCM Laiiohatohies.) 


Q 

I 


c;^vi-*iri44 a^iDO0 99^ 

ssss| |s||| ||t{ 

HP9# 


. e;!S3£k 

■' ?tt"t I???? ?l?1? 5S|lp? s?f 

^ llfil il^il ili^§ U%%% iis 


ssjss;^ c^i=g '£?i^Se le=»3 §%§ 

^ ????!! ????! |SS”? *?* 

*iWL.^irtt~ .^aoai? 90999 

s^^sri sisai a|i|| lilll fs^s 

-v^H-ia !*<►-TiC-^-w ■r9# 

rki»i mu U%ts lii 

. mil s=2iE «|||= piai |Ki|s |£i§v ill 

sS 3S3 SSSgS SS? 

-pisKs ??s?5 iafsii ffssl 1?$^? 


** 5?|i| s?lrl IItII llllf 



wm n fJhA mm fiiQS-e^S OdDE^O 

ssa^s sssss |a|is illil |i« 

^■ 9 —a.»-;^p .'4 iri 4 B-inpH^ ^ ^ 

mm um ia^s^ mu '*=* 


s^asas ass 


„ BMsi §BI^ kS«&s iiiSa 

„ s^gasg =ESS3 3£i3ft e;ft«=£ liSia SasSS SSf 

^ ^Br|? =5-1^? ?9=?i Illil llill Ilf 

Illil Ipli Illil ll^i mil imi III 
^ illil illil Sim wssz spi| fiK 

‘"TTr*^ 


^ .< 2 . z 


759 

















Ta^lb 76,—CuLOUJVurrBLtc SPECtFitrATtoss i>f Light Filtehu. 




3^11$ 

-^T^9^'^> 

«»^mw-Die' 

SS5«? 

i&ssLj? 



<i( 

3Sllg 

•m » ir^ Q 

4b-iri 

r4 


kf- ¥1A A 


sRRii 



Iti 


EP SISSS 
i,b 


m 


illfi 


i|ap 

|^|S 


lllii 




mrm 

mm 


mi ill 


IKK S^?S 


II lim Hill iilll im ii^ifl 


»lwi ?fl 


sS S£S=I 3SS5* 5^=23 sgssa laa 

jqa Si??| Ss ?22 ¥i@35 sflsl? §#l? T^r 


H Bg S3==5 

- fl III?? 
' II1181 
** II llfl^ 

- n liis| 


SnPKS 

S3??S 

S3^is? 


s 'i^ nw u> 

SS! 61 ^P 


j_.r--rri'pr^ 
•^n^te-aci 


^i^ri-O 

IliSi 


SSgss 

ii^-l 

^ 5 H(r 








—— 




s^sisf 


d» 5^. 5 ^ 1- S 


&KSS*2 

S22Sf=a 

^T:'rvTTiiR 


l!P}C3S ftps 
iSE?? 26 = 

^41H>lif- mCJ-i-i 

ssfci¥ SH 

i"f?*?'“ ■»*— 

s;Si; 








liiil 


?| l|3|?l fiiif lllii Hill iiiiil 


mU m 

« 

:=kX 


SlSRsS 2^5 


«<'-£3 i^lsR iiA9^ 

;r#TT? 

tilil 
»II lifi lllii 


mvir-P--^- 


S5lil 


ssiss 

i3SI5 


:^?3 


■»rj^.& -if-saiA 

mm^ 


%m$ m 


m 
flip I?? 


rssgss 

5-=^-c H M 


ilill lillli Hill III 




Bi6=i 


>1 iS 

" fl 


- 


mi% lii?? 


?PS3 


Ifiil 


l=t 








p333l 


< < 


iiiiii 

a2as5,i 


lllii 111 
lllii 111 

SsliRR 


■*n ^-JE ti-l 


760 













SI sisis iKii im ilP PP Ksi ills Ills 

ii |gii i»ii iiiii iii tiii im nil m siii M 

li KEii IIIII Hill pH ill Iii? ill Hfl ii Iii 

II IIIII illlf Hill nil Hi liii? iill 55?! I?*? =?*l 


|ili 


II |g|| IIIII IIIII till ilii iiiii Pii nil Isi 

si lim Hill iiiii iiti iii iiii ilii till 


U Iiiii iini iini ilii llll nm im m SIIS im 
IS mss iKP sss IIP sssi zm- S3« mz an isn 

ii sslil sl?i? IsSr iiis rIIs 

II IIIII IIP nil? Hif iiH iiiii ip PI PI m 

II mil IIIII iini nil ip fiin ip pi pi ip 

^s"''a —psi iii? SISQ aisas! &ssj siss |§|g |$ 3 g 

sa lissi lilt "ft? 


{2 griSE 2psa 

Im Oc-Ot^ 




__ s-i««s aiasS SSI3 2:E*sa fffiSS 

IS ilisl mil lllll III! lEsf? =|?g |?|3 i$il l??= 

Rl SERSS spaa giiil mi if 

2| Itt”? 55i?? s=;>3 


ipll till ip ilii isli 

Si «I5S sSsSi aSSsi HP »«» Hi! 

E iiiii iiiii iiiii isil hil iiiii ilii ilii. iisi Ills 

M iPi iPI IIIII Pi Pi SIIH illl HU HI? IIH 

I? pll Hill pll nil liii IIP Ilii llfi PH PI 

lili pill nil Ilii ll 


SK "£.1;-= EIhsS S^Eail 

II Mill Iiiii pill nil 


mi 


m PIP Pli HP m m 
p iPII illH illil till ItP “P* iiP iSl IPI 

Sftiss 3335S ssa«s s^ss pcII^ essI sll^ ssl? ssss 

761 









PERSONAL NAME INDEX 


AbHnv^ Sir Winiain, 4. ( 8 J. ^34 557 
63». 6J9 

Adrian. E E>.. 3n.2E> 

Alficri, C A.. 731 
Ajldrld(c, R. S„ 26E 3J4 
AlUwn, D. K,. 

Aras," Miiick,"467 
Andrtia*. J, M, . 496 
AjJdTCTfs. S. .y., 454 . 478 
Ajiaeniew, P„ 279 
AJUHtTfuiE. ■*■ J. V., 33f 
AiBulf, A. J., 561. S62 
Aatafkv. 331 
Atkinson, R, B., 726. 731 
Atwciol E C,.4S0 
Anbcrt. 640 
Audiben, M.. 34,278, 560. 566 
Asani, O.. 334. 535 

T. TlMiniit 21, 313 

flalinWm. t. H,. 231 
Bsriss, I'cm. 669 
Bwiet, A..64J 

Baiw, 3, E., -W, 707, 724. 728. 731 
BattKiini, (i., 141,434.. 36? 

Baunibach. H. L.725.7JI 
Beck. C., H 3 s 

Bcm^rn, L. 25. 266, 268. 537, S40. 

qq5 

Benmtl, C. N., 8 , 9,15 

a^tlo, I. W„ 14, 33, 43J. 454, 45S. 

BereeaftJ, R. (te. 285 ,315 
Bemaridi. A.. 261,26». 531,6fi5 

Btnehum, R. It. 46 . 47.409 
Bpictton. J. Stmn. 18 
flUiichiif(l,J.. 221 , 250 ,<i 40 
BlenunoD;, O,^ 751 

Btiaamico. Ourlcs. 21,22 

feaoeau. r, E, 278 
^itmc, H. K,, 82,83 

Bowjlltth. F. T. 69,81, *2.83,95 
Boyto, lo^. 29.13B, 329, 372. 57J 
™«**M'ld 8 c. F. C,, 227, 241, 344 
Brrwttcr, p. D,, 11, 35, 141, 258. 337 

i«; akili: 111- 

Brock, G. C. 357 
Brodlnto. 230, 6*1 

Bmimt, a. H.. Jr,, 712. 714. 716. 722, 

762 


Brvim, w. J,. 25 

Bih±4haD-T3yl(>r, W„ 141. 454 *67 
^1, A. J,,4, 145, 147. 151, ISI. 184 
Boncfi. Pf„ 

Bufwr, P. L, 531 
Dutfcr. E T.. 33 
llmtistph. L J„81 

CAttnikLL, Ivw, 334 

Ct^air, J, G*. 11, 35, 324. 336, 337, 

Cai^, W.|i.,3fS 

DiUma Darrel. 357, 359. 477,478 

Ctuiiwelliir. p. M., 3J2. 338 

CliiiiKnnii,C, W., 7 

Qiniimaii, W., 331 

Qwvi^, M. E, 636, M4,652. 664 

gfrtion, M.. 531,532 

Oirble^, CP., 3.284. J13.420. 53* 

Clnri. A. B., 454 

aqrke,awriei o,. (5, 37.135 

Clarkson, M. E. I^, ITO. 171. 172, |71. 

^*75*75^76, ITT, 178. (79, ISI 

Cofchk P. W.. 641, 612, 643 

Cobkntr, W. W., 2(2 

Colvig, Fltiio, 18 

Cainbes, Maorice, 333 

434. 455, «9.478, 480, 3CH, 507, 320 
CcfUTier. J, r.. 643 
ConraJL A. IL, 

Cooper, Mormt, 4S6 

3A 258. 416, 417. 418, 
^451, 521. 566. 671 
^rm«n>Clm, A.. 529.531. 601 
Certtofl, F. SL, 2i 
C**, C., 541 
CtiK. H, N..454 
Co*, S»mct J„ 9, to. 271. 275 
tr^nd. W. T.. 29, 37. 3K, 329 
Oiek«,J?. H., 31,328 
Cmp. C O., 668 
Crot, Charhs, 4 

JXtfHreiuit, Louts. 39 
Dftllnttycr, T. R., 53J 

^ 

Damiood.'GtEwe, (2.455 
Dusotivlllir, M. I. J,, 332 
paiiiul, E B„ 37, 51. 4St 
IJasi*. R.,51 

Day, E W. U 141. 340, 567 




t-BkiOiKAt 


Debenham, W. F„ 508 
Debnc, Aiidt^, 22i 33! 

Denfn. 65i 

DWJcr. U, 4, J8,412, 413,433 
DleixiL'h, Mdrlene, 16 
Dimey, Walt, 14,456,651 
Dourten, J., 531. 532 
nowsli. 3. H., 311, Ml. 543. 544. 545, 
546. 54y. 553 

Downes, A. C. 6«. 81. 82, »5 
Oresler, A., 119.181 
Drew, R. O., 593.3M, »J. 5!tt-399.739 
Oubcay. J. A., 270 
Duerr. H. H,. 392.394.409 
Dufay, Uwit, 20. 21,34. 36.285 
■lu Haunin, Ditcoo, 3, 4, 11. 27. 38. 33, 
37, W. 4(, 14!, 283, 234,354.413.509 
Dumai, Roger, 750 
Dunninc. H., IB. 668 

Dushnian. S., 82,97,316 


Eir'ltw. R, D.. 454 
Eaion, W. S., 36, 505 
Bder. J. M., 566 

E«l*c.r,S,.9 . 

Edouarl. A, F., 4T7. 534, 586, S«7 
Edwards. B. J., 33 
Edwank, E., 33,452, 454. 455 
EIcnbaea, 82 
Efwjy. Maujkf. 13,19 
Emenon. W. B., 312 
Eneelkins. E-, 643 

Evans. R. M.. 181. 625, 626. 627, iii28, 
639,711, 726,731 


pAiavASki, Douglas. )3 
Fanner, Howard, 4 
Fambam, R, E., 56, 82, 83 
Peehner, G. T., 221.640 
Feme. C F., Ml. 642 
Ferry. E. S., 643 

Fischer. Rudolph. 23. 34^ 37. 351, 354. 

355, 356,420,429.450.697 
Fleet, R-, 37 

Forrest, J, I*. 37, 399, 400, 409, 721 
723.732, 739 
Fdiiih1.QG., 82 
Fok. C. B., 6M 
Fax, W. F^l 1, 261 
Ftaitklyn. uuiter, 12 
FmtuelMlitr, Hans von, 152 
FrtLuer, Del, 447 
French, J. W.. «t, 64! 

Fremel. Augustine. 72 
Fritlmnn. V. M,. 

Friedman, i. S., 31, 135, 181, 324. 351 
138,420, 451, 566 
Fricsi^Teene, C H;, 11. 21, 263 
Fnes(>Gretnc. W,.4. 5.6. 7. 8.9.18.33 
Frlm.K., l£l 


CiAumtfM), R. E,, 642 
Geory. D. H.. 316 
Geboy, 531 

Gbuoe. P. K., 113,733.726.727,731 
Gtorer, A. M., 409, S93,599.731 739 
Gorisch, R., 409. 591. 591 599. 739 
Gorlkh, P.. 409,591.592. 599, 739 
OcDssel. G., 750 
CulMlbrd, J. P„ 664 
Gunddflni^. A. M., 330 

HArs. R. M., 409 

Hanttnirger, Aron, 18,35,141. 359. 

334, 339, 340, 341 518, 5l9. 51f7 
Hamltey, C, W.. 57.61,83.81,88 
Hnn^tKiEl, Max. 18 
Hankins, N. A.. 83 „ 

HflusM, W. T., Jr„ 113.123.126. 727, 

Hatvoutt. WOlljtiT) M-. 351388 
Hutdy, A. C, 96. Ill 119. 129, 1+*, 
149. 181.239. 385. 386. 639 
Harris, C. J,, 7 

Harriren, B C., 26 ., .,. 

Hflflicti. o, B.. 21 109. no, in, U3, 

119, 120, 129, 181, 152. 183,184. 293, 
300. 610 

Harrison, Kay, 13,275 

llorreun. W- H, 26 

Harrison. W, W„ 610 

Harsii. H. C. 135. 392. 394. 409. 713 

Hartley. Sir William.^ 10 

HasUn, B. C, 512. Sir/. 584 

Haurai), Ducos du, 3,4. II. 27, 28, 33. 

37.39.41, 141.383,284,354.413.509 
Kecht.S.,640 
Heller, 0„ SI 

Kelreltnlu', Hetmaisi Von, 3. 37, -39. 
235 

Hem;indcr‘Mejta. A„ 11,18. 35,325 
UmsioD, B. 669 
Heyrrter, G., 635, 619 
Hw-Ha!lcll. C G„ 82, 195. 197, 301, 
201 203, 2W, 209 
Mickey, H,. 26t 
HrgJtflin, J. S.. 9. 531 
Hillman. A. O., 26. 275. 531. 557. 539, 
666 667 

Hoch. W., 37,476,478 
Koernuinn. IL. 385 
KotnoTka. B,. 354.451 
Homer, R, O,. 31 109, JIO. 111. 113, 
129 

Hont, L.. 26. 342 
HObi. A. vrei. 4 
Hudetey. V.. 34,178 

IsETdSt, H,. 4, 33 
Tmel. H. IL. 643 
hw. A- G., 643 

763 





KaVIE index 

jv«,RE.,4.3. IU30S 
Ivt*. H. E,. 251 

iAOm, W. 19 
Jcmy. ].. 566 
Jerome. WVT,. 12 
Johns. W. E.. 27a 
Johnson. C, tt, 5S} 

JoJtn^ H. M,. 643 
JohiMoti, S. W., 593-599, 730 
Johiuwn. ft. C, 731 
Jolley. A. C. 147. TSi 
Joly, J^4,34, 294.315 

Jones. Robert E., IS 

Judd. r». fl., 230 , 244. 251. 663. 664 
Judge, A. W..6ig 
Judkins. S, L,, 409 
Jmnwux. Benjanln, 6, 7. 33 

KjALU W C S3 

A- H..25.66S.669 
38«, 629 

^ et-Dorjitn, A.. 20, 3S, 318, 319 

feTste""- 

Kennedy, C, 618 

Kferautiger. J, F„ 460, 454, 486, 497 

Knnball , H. R. 30. J1 

KBlkr. L. R„ 283 

JjlavCT. L, 25. 530 

Knisihl, QuiJeton, 33 

KOflig. ^ 4. 220, 641 

Korpniflan. G,. 453. 454 

Korde. Alesmukr, 276 

Kowalqfc, J., 722 

Kmuie. p., 629 

KuJm. H,23 

UWEHT. O, E. V„ 640 

Umbfcnt. R. £., 21 

l4inc!kcUer,.F. N.. 311 

i4U4»llsi-l3ividian, W, N,, A 7, 33. 34 

La»4JS, dt, 37 

Ijiwihe. A. R.. 12 

l^ihy, Witatm, 43it 

Ue.F, M,.5. 33 

Uw. H. W..458 

IfWy. E., II, 34 

R, £., 317 

Ljndmmui. R. u. J7, n 63,87.88 
ppsiaim, Cebricl. 317 

1^!;- ®’* 22i<. 2S0, 

251,640.641 

Luckrah, M., 102. All, 642, 6il 

LuroliTr. A„4,315 

764 


12J, 129. 

149. 156,157, 181, 244, 248, 249,251. 

vW 

^latPhenon. R.G., 83 
Mumaidijin, R., 15 

Lady DietiB. 18 

ManiieA UoiKdd. 23,36, 35J. 451 
Ntanth, FretJeriek. 16 
Mntnase. A.. 180.181 
Martin. [_ C, 25| 

Martitiei, M.,24,668, 699. TOO. 701,703 
Mar*, Andre. 750 
Maiibcwa.Glni £,,319 
MiUirich, Me, 536 

MawelL Jnmes aerit. 3. 4.17, 39. 129 
Mayer, 641 

Mebansugh. J- W.,4, 284. JI3 
Mcfliu. p, B,.Jr„7l2,7I4.1IAT22 724 
Mcaihem, A. R., 640 
Mob. C. el K., >7. 264. 3T5. 324, 430. 
451 

Miller, Arthur J., 28, 344 
Mills, T. A.. 19 
Minn, A, A., 521 

MOeti, L, 671 

MdJc, Petnr, 68, 82 

MtJon, PSiry, 6«. 647 

Mw«. A. R„ 599, 732, TJ9 

MoJitan, E. K., 4SI 

Mmgsn, W. X. 231 

Mos4, F. K.. 642, 643 

MtinMlI, Ah H.. 652. 656, 657, &h3. 6*4 

Murray, Gilbert. 523 

Munny, R D., 129,14J. 1BJ, 316. 570 

NlAlE, D, M,. 193 
NeuEausa, K., 410 
NewiiaH, Sidney M.. 663 
bicwtenT, A, J„4. 147, m 
NewiiMi. Sir (sane, X 37 
Sbcholoui, J. M., 610 
NtckeHDH. Doiralliy, 251. m 
McTW. Jneph N,, 39 
Noct, E, B,. 82 
Nolte. C R, 531 
Norlons, J. A,. 615, 618 
NofWrtMd, Don. 94 

Null. M. R.. 81 ,® 1 , ISS. m. 191. 193. 

305 

Nulling, p. G , 640 , 641. 641 

OrrExiiAUtlta, W. M„ 436.4Si 
Oliver L. W., 143,145. 147, 184 
Oilwald, W.. 644. 646, 652. 657, 664 
Oils, Riuwll M., 339. 588, 599 

PAMAfai, J, Kerbcri. «39 

Pfennlnger, Otm. 6, 8* 33, 34. 536 

Pnsasso. Pablo. 653 

Rttenne. M- R. 640 

TO, F. R G-, 48.49, 51, 219, 250 

PlOTKlLa Mj13I, 9S 







lFjt>EX 


D. 35 
PlttiHfi.J. H..2SA 
Ptoquiiv M2 
Pohl W. E., 507 
PiSrtcf. T. C. 6^3 
Prkssi, L G., 51 
piirkiiuc, 2^ 


racwtfh g. f.p m, m. kit 

Raifttcy, Ail 7 
ItwiJ, G,, 641, (542 
Hitnscr, R. K., J5^ 557. m 
RjcckiTKlr, E., 531 
ft»d, Mrs. A.. 722 
Kflfves, P., 640. 611. 643 
6*S 

RemiaUU H. E,.566 
Rmnahufu R0>v 456 
Rcuihcr^ R., tf I 
Ricluird, A. P.|4Ll 
RJchardson. £. C. 6S, 72. £2 
Rooil, O. 664 
RcbinAon^ 352^ J8S 
R<5d«efs* A« 57i 61, R5. 57, U 
Rood, 0,N.. 652 
Roic,C £,.552, m 
Rorcznlidih M. A,, 652, 665 
Rcnix. I_ H.. 29. |30. |43. 272. 273 
Rubens, 654 
Rule, 3uhn T,, 6l« 

Runyen, L V.. 707^72*. 73ft, 731 
Ryde. L W., 82 


SAiosidiiv. Wiksqn, L5 

Sanger-Shepherd, R.4. 33 

Sc H^ ^lj V hr^ K. 723 

Sdwub. W, R., 227, 243. 244 

Schode, Kttfl 39 

Scheffer. W.*2»4 

Schcncli, Jo^h. 12 

Schiiud. K.. h, 4t9i 66ft, 669, 698, 739 

Sdilecr. S.,640 

Schtwidur, WiJJielro, 354, 356, 365. J66, 
369. 376 

Schuluc, W,* M5 
Schwertur. ^ P. 420 
Sauy.E, G.,716, 723, 72», 731 
Secmjui. T^663 
Sdwyu. E W. R, 4B.49,5I 
Senoett, Mac. 14 
ScjmiHtr. M* W., J24 
Sferau F.. 23 

Sh^, V. C* 725. 726. 73t 
Sksmi. tL, 37.4S0 
Shukfl. R. H., 639 
Sitdih, George Albcd* 6. 7, ft, 9. 31 
Smiih, J.. 330. 354 
SmJlhi Lmard, 15 
Sldlh.T^ 237*251.664 
Spari*. M. R.4 72S. 731 


Sptflter. Di A,* 21* T29, 143. 145. J47. 
1»I^184. 290, 251, 5t5. Jlfi. 410, 570, 

Spcftw. D. E, 646, 647 
S{jULl.O.*566 

Sum^* 25. 266. 26Si 537* 540. 541* 
665 

SlettatRSir P* Makohap 10. 21 
Si. Lfflilfl. J. A*&2 
Siou, John G„ 611. 611. 726. 733 
Siull. Wdlkin. 476 
SuBdbi. 36. 37, 454. 504. 505 
Sumitiafl; E>.* 625, 629 
Swann. J W,* 31 
Sweei, M. H.* 593* 639* 722 
J,* 27ft 

TM-ftor. R, R. 611 
Tnlhdi, Willfami Fm, 39. 641 
Tesj. S. R. 331 
Ttucngoitl. 412 

Thumaa* R.* 25. 31. 31* 2SJ 
TbcmiHan, B. H.« 44ft 
Thompscn. R*431 
TTwtha^.T.,566 
ThomtsMi, J. E,. II 
Titian. 654 
Truute. A.r 133^ 411 
Trokml. L. T. 23, 15* 56. 37, 326. 350, 
451, 45M55, 4ftM«9i 5<4. 505* 507, 
50ft &40 641 

TuJ». A g'. 409, 450. 600. 669. 671 

TuJtKTp E R.. 5> 33 

Tuttk, a 36, 37.454* 4ft6, 504, 505 

Twyman, F.* 9* 531 

TyndaU* a F.. 234. 351 

UbM?i. Chiirk^ 5, 6. 7. 33. 3S 

\MJm% R.. 2ft, 4J3 
Van Go^. Vincent. 651 
Viirdcn* L F_. 409. 629. 716^ 723. 72fl* 
731 

Vdaaquez, 656 
VeUc, kteurke. 279 
Vermeer* 654 
Vencmeifie^ 651 

Vfcfccrtwff.T.* 169^179. tftj 
Vidal. L* 2ft4;3t5 
Vlad* LKmanLd du, 637 
VWi,J.,275 
Vc^H. W,.4 

Wall, E J.. 7* 11, 11. 35. 2U, 454, 

504, 508 

Wanger* Woliej-* 456 
Warbifl-icwLF i.,25t 
Wameke. U. 33.452,453.454,455 
W^iaVtf ^ E A, 454. 478, 479, 436 
Weaver. E R* 37. 507 
WesvtT*ES.,ft9 


765 



PERSONAL SA»E INDEX 


Webb, i. H-, 147 

Webb,W.,4i4 

Weber, E. tU 217,218. «W 

Wedleewootl, Tbomt*, 

Wen. F„ 321. 334 

Wckh, Kila, 12.455 

W^trtL W. B.. 12, 35, 451, 455, J04, 

While, D. k . 152.5W, (*8 

WJiiwey. John Huy. J5.3b. 4%. 504.5» 

Wikot, tierben. lb 

Wltdin8.T.S-. 143 

WUnuiins. C., 156 

Whiit. F. E., 454 

Wong, Amu May, 12 

Wtxi^ Afthiir, 21 


Worintwi, 14,9„51t 
Wm«q|!. (t. E, 83 

Wri^U W. D., 107, 139, 152-155, 161, 
162,164-16B. 171, J7J, ISt. 213. 219. 
227*233, 239. ISO, 251 
WuttlMffs. F. I-, 129, ]>1, 385,186 
Wydioff,A..37 
Wy-nne;, C* O., S26 


Yate. Herbert J., 27, 28, 337, 344 
Vootie. M.C..4M 
Voime. HiDniiu, 3,37,39.229 
V«lc, J. A. C, 129, 18) 

^ATFEiiT, R, H.. 7)2, 714, 716.722, 724 
.Zavetky. R. J., 81.83, IS7. l!tS 


SUBJECT INDEX {Mam 


Icicj], S5 

Abwiitiknn, d^piEitycm^ amj (hw, 103 
AciUttmic dev Sckwcs, 3 
Achncnnjitic Stimuliu^ 225 
Adatn mgKt, 10. 27J, 54i, 55J 
Adiiptaticm, oTc^^ 213 

AOtlitw Coltmr PriKesB, 4. -40,110 J H. 
263-324 

lenikulijr, 317-324 

*ifmjliAncQti» nrojaUian, 163 
thrvc-coloiurp 377-324 
iWMfoiir, U, 240-241 
AddiOve ¥ihm^ prinlioif tU; J62-1^ 
Addlii^-e Primnila^ 
poiiim rcpwdiiemti In, 147*I£4 
AddiUvv FtDccfticAt 
As^'&tolor LeniiojlEir, 

BA4$fud,27y 
UwKh, 269*770 

^ linmlttmcouv projtctkiu. 263064 
uabMior f Bril oh), 271 
I>ufa>^lcir, 29MI6 
■FfTUidtia, 279 
Gttimtemie 277 

^cfal reqtamriciiis, 264-263 
Gilniore,77P 
HirmacL XIW 
Henult» 2SI 
HillmaOyXJU* *7/ 

Kon^. XJU 
Hi»3eky, XiU 

Undcular, 317024 

MiiMpifui* 

Mrak, 283-3 £6 
l^inciurtp 2S0, 2S1 

766 


f</ertfj[c'tr m m/ic) 


AOdilivc 
Rayool, 763*269 
kooxixplcjf. 272-77S 
SzEOPpanik^ 27| 

Tcchiibnlor, eaiiy^ 451, 452 
T7KimaH‘«k»^ XJH, -Ml, 283 
ihrcsc-cefouTi 377024 
, 264-274 

Additive Syvtcmi (set Additive 
ObSlK^y 

ef the Cak>ur S^tkia* X 
Afifii, labarBiocy, SW 
AHjCf-niijagK^ 632^W 

A^acoierr film, 353-383 
fai:tacy«26 

tcmioilaj' bipucki 578-580 
AgT^lOf, fibn. 24,36^ 29, I30J3A. 280, 
318. 345p 350p 35t. 153-383. 413 
t6mm rwo^l. 26^ 130 
AiTGCiicaiv-iiafidc, 27 
anti-halAtkin Jfivex, 362 
coating dflUt, 382 

colm^r eoFTttienssikin m pnntmg, 374 
coloor coiTDctioii^ 376 
icoJoiif izpmiiKtkm, Ihrtiii of 
COTBCT, 385-388 
offitsor, 359 

def k nxim illurnimUoft for, 376« 377 
devdoptr, 3S6 

coutiDti ittid scniltinng deltip 
378, 379 

nmiUiait <^dea» 380, 311 
future rdnoa, L940-45, 358 
rllitr vomtHfuiions, fm pfiniiioee 375 
cri£ini 354 

pfimiiifc fieg^thc-pavitivci 37J 



sueiEcr iKDtx 


A^-ioolur olfiL 

procmme formaltf^ ncssirj^'pcisv 
tive, JTO 

pro^iin^ fomuilAr, 16 mm rcveru^ 

I^roccsjdns 366-364 
scnsifn ily af ixgattve^ 363 
sauhiYity of 363 

itimiiizcTf and colour couplcri.chOT^ 
Cfll rmiula, M3, 3U 

of 364 

»ound IracX, 

spectral scofitivittes of^ 362« 361 
fttmeture otf 360-361 
lypcs of film. 355 
vIscoulMcucK 366, 369t 590 
yellow mit?f ahsorplion, 362 
Afif^lor Unticutor Ptoers*, 20, S2i, 

m 

Sctooi Plftte, 2S4 
AJcIo Clatf, 443 
AJychJK, definilkm of« 234 
Andf6 liebrie Qc,, 22 
Aiulyw, tnloui, ^ 

Ami}>Tii^ colour photo^mphic^ 38 
Arafco Colocp film* 24. 27p J?+ 130, 133, 
m 316. 345 ,351. 415.420 

l^mn re^cr^wl, 404 
ATctl>ids of dcvclcmrs uihI blc^h for, 
72^721 

ciTUlylkal control 7l2 
boitic oantrej ni«:(ho(h« 702 
eD^cHir boliUKit of, 705 
cokKtr MUers for, 405^2 
^lour printing film type 212,135 
dayUghE c^pofujc jpjidc. 404 
ildbcu in, tuul 403 

duplicating 6lm, type ll]Lp 391 
c^p4>flufc gtjidi^ rnr tunj^cn lllu- 
miniiikHi, 405 
niton ToconiftHmdti!, 1D5 
lighting for, 705 
mochlric oontrcl, 711 
nmcftinciy for devtlu|tEirutti, 39W01 
tnnlhe^up foi. 706 

modificiition of proceuing solutiofa 
to duLDfc colour bnlunce, 713 
nc^liw IStnin, 27. 130,113 
oDc-strip cofor tepai^iOD him. 113- 
i34, m-m, 196-397 
opifcnl prinlJTig ofp 394-395 
pstnJa] process^ of, 4Ctti 
photcvmphi: tHti^ 70$- 
tests, W 
potfitivo 35mm, 27 

proonsiDg coulnol prooedurw Torn 
?a7~7JS 

pf ow&ifig tbifK-tdhJc, 399 
replepishmcni of dlhit^ bkucb, TI7 
cv^enithrnenE procedure^ 714 
repkniihTncnt procedure, rormolE 
for, 715 


Ansco Color, Him 
solution control tests, TOS 
iSDiidd irxM, iKtnillw of* 397-39S-' 
of, 20t5 

(citing of matcrinli, 72&-72} 

(c^ts of irmcihioe opcralitm. 716 

lypcs of film, 369 

use of Type 735* Wf2-70& 

Aim-a 16niin Color Fflut, 
compkte process, 716 
tnelalfiiMdlt nack Ou. 732-T39 
timc4iibk for, 716 
ireaimeiii for sound inicles* 132*739 

AnsCO, Inc-, 27,11.46,350 

Amco Proocssfng MiuJiine for I6mni» 
671-6» 

Aperture, litin. mdlini intensity, 

ere., ISU 

Arc LinipSr 62. 63 
for ntoibn picture set Hglnhtg, 74 
Imnd-fcd, 1S6 
hj|b Intenutyi 69-71 
mirror, 1S6 

mirror aradi condensing lens combiined. 

m 

M-R. type 456 ipnt Uunp, 7Z, 75 
ruutirtg peialiiYiei IS6 
spoctrid energy dlstnbutiao of* 69*71 
types and coLonr of light On the screen. 

m 

type 450 H.I. me lompj 72, 75 
Art bireelor^ 659 
Autochroiue Screen Plate, 2B4 
Am Dyes^ 

111 tilcoefi^ut proeeties, 420 
dy'C'fdrmiiig tubsiiitttWj, 421 


BacKchOumj Froloction* 
Koduduterie. fofi 44S-430 
Builel, Kndi ihe coSoue fitm, 651 
0310] Dow, i2 
Barnett l£nsign Ros» 24 
BaitSa-ni PrucraSi, 32* 279 
BiniimiiivFriv Cbhw Atlas, 3S5 
Bean>Splitter Cnmera*, 
flfeiwter, XIU. 15, 25fl, 4fQ 
Busch, 269 
Otmucolor, 412 
Cinmior* la 271 
Dufaydiroine* 25A, 414, 522^52S 
Fiurtcitak 559 
KuntburWr, 253, 340 
HilliraiD. 275, 276 
Pirvehoil, ML 
Folychromidc, L9 
Rayc^, Kill* 265, 266 
Russian, 53D 

Tedadcotor* I4. L12, 255, 457 
Wiimcr Brm^^ 520 
Beam-Splitter Patents.. 

USE of, 561, 565 


7€7 



INDL); 


Sca£n-^j^]llicj Pnunav, 
u^jusmicnL of, by Biev^'stcr. 515 
of, l?y 518 

AiZDtiL OM 33^ 

BelBoBJiflcn & . XSU. 3.537. 

Ji8. 53^- 540. S41 
25 

CiDCchninTer 537 
ConiirtPietK1yTi«» 525 
Da^ionli^, 54 h 543 
dsipa f rt^irerdcTii^ 520 
Diifaychromc, 522, 526 
Fnmciui, J2 

GuimAno aoil An^coiniA^ 5J8i 55^ 

HAtnbiir^r, A.^ 519 

flATTiion^ XiJl 

HillmAii, XHl 

Monl,X!Jl 

HiiiteIey>,Xlir, 24 

Kamibr. A a. 25 

K£nw. U XUhl5, 530 

Klein, Xm 

XllJ. 75. 2$$ 

Kolu. 37 

Tecbnkjolor. 493. 5IO-5J& 

ThoniiiA, XllL 25 
licam-5pUitcr Syatema, 

Artiuir, 561 
AuOibcrl, 560^561 
B4&iaiu. 32 
ByscK. 26^ 269 

CmegoEor (Brii»h). 141,271,570 

CosmocolorT 26 

DuPnyibhiprnc. 414 

Fraucim, 2^1. 37.179. 2m 

HiirriiPn. W, H.. A IL C, 26 

HiJlmiin. A. Q.. 26, 775, 276 

Ho«l, L.26 

Phitih^rLTS 

Kaycol. 765,266, 570 

ftoiix. 79, 57, 143. 272. 773, 274 

Tedinkolpf, 5iQ~S)f( 

Thonifl^icgJor, 79 

Stwi|t " 15,456 

Bel! A ||pi«:li Co., 270. 453, 461, 500. 
568 

EliO^ck camcna. 574^578 
BeUbtham A Stiinky Ltd., 265. 537 
Bertnm Prottt&, 

EUchromate. 28 

BioKopc CUiYtcru Lfrban. 6 
Bipndi. 3p II. J4M44 h 326,567-5^ 
Asfp |4J 

biic ideti vf. 33. 37 
cormrticrn of Mitchell cumcni for, 

CdoU:^ afrippliijt. 130 
ComuvIl'ClvTtc, 143, 144 
dermitSon ci< 30. 461 
**Dwi3»ck/^ 142, 326, 329. 56t 
m Font, 79. 130. UL 3^. 572 
Humuin Typea, 568 

76W 


Ge^auitc, 376 
fkvmi, slriiT^nv, I JO 
Kodak, ^ppuig^ ^30 
fTPvul^ ibrecs^iilom tie^tiva 
a banirtplilttr. 142;. 461 
strippi68i 137, 138 
T<!diQk:<ijot ptic patmh 461 
ihTMHulOQr EL^aw fifOfn* 571 
liirec-cDlour strippiii^ 130 

twD-ctiJthir, 1^, 326 
usfi ci; 572-574 
B.LP, Siudtw,2l 
Bisick Bedy, IS 
nuikunra, 49 
Block FirDtft,Thc,3^ 

’'Blank/' T^cknicoltw, 4*5 
ilscripLido. 467, 468 
formnia for dcvclopmcfti, 465 
pLiicni for tynchroiin^ motkm o!, 
486 

BIciKb. Ansco, r^pl eniiJifTM nl 719 

akAcblae bnOt. 

A^acolot. 370 
viacoys^ 37i 
BlcacdViHit PtocisaT 23 
OaAiHircolOT, 419^27 
BrewMet pTtKUM. ^10.4] I 
BriEEhiLm Gt\ikim Co.. 7fi. 81. 574 
Br|(bh Jj]i«rE]aitiqiii)l PictLireip 21 
Briit^ Lipo Film Cwp. Lid. 30 
Brit^ MovwioDc Newi. 21 
British Rtalki Syodkatc Lid.. 279. 555 
Briliih ''niDm5aM4ou5io]i Co:^64. IfW 
BriiUhTricolfliir. 32 
Biilifth Trtcdknir Processed Ltd,, 52. 
4f4 

cajiunt 32 

Buicit Pfocras 26, 2 ^, 269 

Caomium Mcrcnry Umim. 64 
C^imn Oxkte FftOtocclf. 589 
c^xiiun^aiiUoKiny alloy cathock?. 592 
^-Cabrai,” Chfuiec sp 26U 162 

Cniidic dcfijiltki^^ oF. lOO 

CsM»Uia-Furdy DcmJxqnxtcr. 500 
CarboQ An^ 67. 63 
for rrnikm. piaui^' m li^hiiH)^ 74 
prgicctliKi wllhp dAEii 187 
W^ITal endj^y dasiribiHiioii el* 67, 70. 
71 

Cardinal SiiinulK, 113 
CaroUmr Imtituti!. Stockhalrlf. 213 
Curidcin FBm. 
and Ir&irht, 131 

ui i wwk of ijt. X 
ChaovA ONilO GIa£|. 262 
Cliduce-Ptax^oni GijBA, 459 
Chnrlfri, lirindin^ vT. 650 
Cheese-aiwcTf, S2 
Ch«mlc«kRf, 331 
CHmkelor. 28, 472-474 




suBJKrr imwx 


Chiws* ojIou/ of. 

CliOtU, irtLBlfiil, M9 
Qiraimiit 

ChrCHimll, 7S2-7Mf 
duplk:4lElnft iiiitcruit 154 
g«ncntl dtscription of, 737-756 
nnxxsflinit tlme-UiWc fOf* 755 
^SimpIcJi pfocw. T55 
"TrJcolaf" pfCHXsa. 755 
Outmatk Sllmtilui. 225 
ChrotTifliictiy. 

CfTCOpUt^iOll of. 
dcfinMan cf. 43i. 207 
diasniin, I C.h CCl-E^). ^3 
locus of Pktjickilui nadiators, M 
spedfic;iiion of In fhc chromaikitsT 
diufTuni, 236 

QiromatudEy Co^iUnutc^i 234 
procedure for cvuiuMltfS, 23&p 240 
latdc of the fpoctruoi* 242 
OiroTiW^. 

CfirojTi^lfn, Sodfitt, 279 

Oif onHHCope. 4 

Chn-skr, «trt«»coiHc coJdut film. bU 
CLE- {Cofnmjsskin Lhtcnuiticuuik dc 
reclairajo), S3. lOS, Hi, ^ 
colour nuxinrc curv^. 255 
di$lvn:pu.tl{jn codTicwaits of Jf ^ st. 141 
stnnikrij illumiiuintii, 237 

irJchromaiit: tiysi^ of ti^kiur sped- 
Ikalimu lOtt, 233-251 
|ris4mu]lu$ vnlwk 24] 

CTpechromc Ltd., % 537 
CinocoloriBritv^L L0«35i I43»15£, 27 Ir 
372, 537. 54b 
CsmxfhtUd^thSAy 
CinecoTor Corporjiikm 24, 

2S-30, 139. 140, UK 327, 3^, 
ilihSlL W 573 
liiboratonffl, 30, 3.27 
ofrtkul priotcr. 330 
rMueotf, 331 
projcLticut s)3lonv 271 
Hrrnn ledinique. 329, 331 
wuud truck. 5SS 
Clttocolorer^pk 1J 
CinomaEOgfaphy. irtWiUoTi 4 
CcLifiuf^ iA.iEh efinjuMoii^ 19. 29 
Cobnll. bloc, 45, r02, 103 
Colio BoTulclE Lid., 9 
^‘Color Atbi/' The, 657 
Cokurauim Process, 312 
ColoffRni Process* 531. 347 
ColoHmetric Purity, 
definlUoti of, 225 
Co!0fijticU>. 23M51. ^ 
of two-colouf nddithY; sjmtKcsis, 2Ml 
KpecHkmians of 'Wntiicn lishi filters, 
759-761 

Colorinwuy Conmuiiec of Ibr Optical 
SockEy of AnicHcii* 233, 658 
ColorvphffH tneiric^ 6*7 

Mr 


Cokn-icviK! Htsldiiii£» LuL, 21 
ColiHif, 

iidditive proems. 4 
iiocFtpaTiitor, 193*1.9^ 
complcrwntnrr^ 63S 
(klintdon of. 206 
direcuiiut. XV 
dbe, H,2T7 
fnti^, 634^36 
liamvauyk 644^SS 

Hiiiiure turves iuiin* real rctmitct 
poimarijnK *09 
mixtai:o of primartes;* 39 
ofe^icrkir 49 

rotary shuitcr. $ 

659 

scciprs, D^erkippin^, 33 
scmitonietry, 624-629 
sixiiiiurds^ 656-65^ 

Colo ur ^^amc ras I 

liuil bcam-spJSllJm® systetm, 3^]!9^5tf6 
Colour CtitmpnmtoTi iridkatctiB, 193-193 
Co\ov^ Cofiipusiiloiv XI 
Colwif Cuorkrt. 351, 352. 355,154 
idiD prottetflL 

mmey of LG. pAictils an.nnluijl!usjL?ti 
pTopcTEks of. 69/-6W 
survey of KodaL :iud telatecl patcuE* 
<ia sniidilfiieioii profujitlei of, 
m^704 

Colour Crufl. 332 
Colour Dcrtsilonieler, 625-627 
Colour Dcvckipment, 606-6(0 
tkescripEiofi of. 429 
for toning, 60S 
Ust of LG. potent*, 353 
orrftoil piGfiL 34 
putcnis^ lilt of, 353 
prEiudtfy. 355+ 428 
mondi]r>'« 555^ 428 
Ojiemr iKrcci km. XV 
Colour Fatittutf, 6344i36 
Colour Filin, 
jf^beiics of. X 
fuEurt ol+ 660-661 
liiniiuiiotia oL XiV 
Ct^TUT^vure Ltii.* 275. 556, 5S7 

Colour Hafnvmy, 6#-655 

sji4 Area, S52 
■aiiid neutral etcy. 64^ 
iU%i nnd iululutkui. b54 
avoEution of, 650 
key* 655 
iitTit^kksr, 633 
Myia of I 650 
Subtlety fiu 654 

Colour MixEUtii Curv^ iMuis of Cl.lL 
I fiiuenl, 235 
Colour Musie, XI 
'* Colour Notslwn/'A. 657 
Colour FbDEQsrapits Lld.t 570 
' Coiour PfHuogr^plijf Ltd., 11 


769 





SlJlIJECT IKREX 


Coloyr Stiirkiiirdi^, wp^wcniciiit and 
Mwifiotiidti, 

CoEtJUf Tcaupcraltire, 

A!ul H’LiVtlETipli dT rnaxioiijni cntrK>f 

dMTt or 86 
dcHnilion <3^ ^8, 
fitter for raising 138 
of atfim ftfCi, 
iifljiihi «oi]ra3^ 

dfidoKy of MaMa C Um%p*, 87 
Colour TcmpersiUiric Mcteri 89, V4 
dift^mri of, 9) 

Eaitmiio, 440 
Helios, 94 
Nonvood, 94 

predftktn of meauiremcnf^ with. 94 

Spectra, 94 

tiTimTiiuiion cunei of IllEm lised in. 
90 

Colour Trjniiparcncy, 41 
Coloural Ul&hls, 
mi^ijire of, 3 
ihrvt<aloiired, 4| 

Colimihia Kcoire^ Coro.^ 30 

Com^^t-Sourct lljumjSrajors 

G, LC.* 7:^7 

H. D. {ndijfirtcs Lid., 75g 
M.RT>je450,757 

Compixci^urDC Lamps, fij 
metviiry vapoui Uiiip^, 67 
Compaisatiog Filter, 
for Agfocolori 375 
for Adko Color, 407 
fUfT Dufaycolor printing, 304 
for KoducHn^itw, 441, 442, 443 
Ctrnipkarwntary Coknin, 751ttHne^ 
wavetefiiEihA und list oL 638 
ConM-:i0*2H 

ConsoikiBtcd Flkn DuimiiriEs, lac., 18. 

27,135, 343, 344 
CoftCimi, 

Icasl perceptibh; turnjnnnoe, 233 
simutlanicoits^ 636 
uicoesive, 635,654 

Contrail of m cmutiion wymg wltli 
'ftiivtJenglh, 120 
Corooitrion I'itm. 
l35f Fcoudra, 559 

Cmmocoto Pnooesa, X(]J 
Cosmoukir Corporatton, Xfil. 24 534 
Cyai'is, dcOdendea ISj 

DAiaiJCRji£)CTn'FE, 39 
Doiicotour. 332, 333* 346 
Davoo Sitica Get 434 

“Dcchro,” ifi Tcchidootar^ 466 
Demilofneter, 

CB|»tiir-Purdy, 500, 626 
Eutixuui Kod^ colouip 625-627 
Dri^ejopcr, 

control of Agl'acolorf 369 
770 


Dswiopcr, 

Ooplh, 182, 290. 291 

for Ai^UjCoJor, JTO 

Tar Gairfwcolcir. 425 

for Technkdlor ”Wank,” 465 

^Imultalicous devekipK-llAluro^ 183 

uHsxal, rSi. 133 

Tedmicokir nmiriK famuiirt. 464. 488 

De^dopm^. 

automatic rmmhincry for Ansco Color 
dEm, 399 

of Ga^pujcolor, 425 
oTTccfinicclor 465 

of TochnieoJot tmmji Khn, 463 
ofTceJamcoJof 463 

tlme-lubtc, A^acolor Ithnrn reVenaL 
372 

Agfacojof ocgati^i^rHKU- 

llve, 372 

timotable. AniKO Cviot jiKrtion pk:^ 
lure film. 399 

Guparcokurr 424 

tirue4fLbk,TcchjikoJormii^^ ilm, 464 
Didimism, 

in iwo-colour ptocews, 258 
Dichromoled Q^iin Pforcsi, I i 
Di^fimim GJuss, 301 
Dilfraciknii, 

livokUmcc of, by parallel nilitiia cm 
mwTOr, 520 

Dioptodironie Plate^ 285 

DiiCt 

nolaling ooloitr, Gamnoot. 277 
Disdmpp J-arrTt^, 
marcui^-cadmiiirn, 63-67, ISS 
Di&Eribution, 

cixlfkicm cmw of tO obaervenk 23) 

Gisiribustu'D Cjoelftetenii, 

C.LB, jFJP 2 ilircmih the coiml cnerg;^ 
ipectnim, mbk of^ 241 
of caidinial 5tknuJi in an eijual cPctgy 
ipecmnti, 234 
R. G. a, 109 
Djvogtng J>oon, B1 
Doaiiinani Waveleneth, 2t)f7 
dt&mLbn of 225 
Dooitfuuor. 

Gmnii'ft ihmy^ 212,21J. 
DoubJflKwaJtt) Film, IIJ9,2|, 126,128 
DTigiafiJ paton, 34 

*^I>ijnbI*-sj]6iecn,*^ nepniw or poakl^ 
33P 

CinecolOT, 330 

t6i«n, sfioctril rmnsmisiion cur™ 

of, 149 

ttaeau prrmEtics pknicd mt CILE. 

Him miin I SO) 

DLfa>«S™, 32,12!l. 344.15(, 
bcam-splittcf. 414, iT2-iJ* 
comcri. 522-52® 
diKnuiicfiia dT iHunaria, 41$ 




ai/SJiCT INDtiX 


l>ufbt>xttrtinieH 

cokxnmcti>' for 6^4 
print^itg oft 41^^ 416 
|}roc£$j|, 

pn>dm£ag of, 416 
9Ulitm-thie rutnuf it$, 41J 
iJtftc^trhs ammtftiTOH, 414 

BuTa^JOhzixim Lid,, m, 21, 22, 32, 
25S,271-2»5.4i4.54| 
r>tJf9yt^olor Aim, XIH. 10, 25.66, 130. 
2ML 2^t 

I6mfn ocvmal lilin, |14 
oodoLir grailiuf^ pcseiijv«^{wirlv«, M3- 
306 

DuT^^'COtoi: Co. Inc* 21 
cxpoifuic tflbbi 30Si 314 
nc^iuivc^ t30 

iKfKAtivc dcs^opmcnt, 312, 313 
ncpathr-poutivc proctssing, 290 
onpnal pitcnl, 36 
pjitcfkl lilt, 316 
priniicg nuLcbuus, 300-302 
pflnL&« buljncifig or, 192 
Duf^y, ‘-DifcFfiiochftOTO"* Plittc, 20 
DttgrtHTWolor, 750-75/ 

142,329 

1>[^1 Italian of Colouj Film, 

Chromsrt mclhod, 752'756 
DupUlEBod Fitm &lDdt, 

Du Pont, 29, 126 
Eastonm. 2$. 326 
326 

proj^ion of, 328 

Du Pimti E.L tic Ncmoiftt & Compunyi. 
24. 336 
bipack, 329 
-*DunBck/- 329, 567 
printing of, 740 
pmocsaing of, 741 
prcM:i«sina so[utk>mt 74J 
rekaae tolout po$itlv«, 27^MS^ 740*742 
4tirlppinsU$ftc^lourbipack, ty(K 138 
275. CD^or ivka^ posiiivt; 740- 

"^DurbarorDcihC^Tbe, 8 
Pyidbi, Il3t of colour^ 648 
Dye-Oheadi Procc&ua. 

GuEpcircokir, 419*42? 

Dye Lakes, fpectrai itHoctioD fiictari of, 
105 

MarcLuiting^ 

Dyes, 

bluogrccn, ipoctral reflccKion dumo 
tCTH^or, 163 
cyan, dclliieikcns of* 111 
ideal rorsubuucihie process, 162 
iiTjigc^, ipectnl refifi^tjon dmw- 
tcfutici 163 
ruBtemaa, lic^icndcA oL 181 
reiT^d ideal, 171 

ftai prlimLfkf, duDmeUciiy mn^ of, 
179, ISO 


Technicolot, 46T 

lypkat of coiTirncrdill prwesxi, 163 
ydkrw, ipcctnil reflection chcunctef'- 
UtfcE oi, 164 

yellom ddklenda of, 181 
Dye-Toning Ftooess^ ll, 6QQ-5I0 
Pt^ydiicimidct 19 
Dy^^TmAsTiff Process, 452, 453 
fomulte for, Tedmicolor* 466 
printing sound intcis by. 486 
Technicolor techniquer 466, 467 

Eastmas Color Negative, 27, 130,132 
Eatumn Color Poiitjvc, 27 
Easlntnn Kodbk. 24, 21^ 499 
protective htm Ucouer, 61 f 
thiK^irip Him. 12y 
Type 1234 iyni. 142, 568 
Type 1235 fUm, 142, 568 
Type 1236 film, 142, S6« 

Ekladironu^ Blni, 27,151 
Ektacotor, itetfaiivo Jilm, 27. IM, 138 
Elliot & Semf. 701, 701 
Emeritld Green, spvctTui leftecitmoc of, 

m 

Einuliif^, coutini^ 19 
Eiki^' Emission, and temperature, 65 
Equivalent Density, 625 
Exdlaljon Pnrtly, 
ctoHniiion ofi 123 
£ipwure. 

table for Dufuyeotor nwiirc, 308 
Eye,2£iS^2iO, 

relive spoctruJ luminiince curve oC 
224 


pATKlUa, CDlour, 6M-636 

Film, 

dmtblo comedy V[,t3 
emboiMdi 25 
ItniiciJlnf. 20, 25 

feliUive sendiivffy tif, v». wavdcngili 
of mdialioni 87 

cakulatiDa for nidnomaiic ejialyw. 
124-L28 

colorimotric BpcciEcatioiu of Wmtten 
lighl Hltcfs, 705-707 
coDipeiufltmg. for Dufayuote prmi- 
304 

for priniiog Agfiicoior, 375 

for priming Ajisoo Color. 405-407.705 

kteal tnkhig, 110 

optima oombioed ukiDg and viewing^ 
ILO 

Ihrrrt-cri-ilfiinr. 40 

triCdfOur, 40, ID6. 122, IZl, 131, N8, 
J49.15S, 139, IM 4JJ 
iricolouT, compcfsaiicn «f, 127, |2S 
tricakMii, f<ji ITuldycfattmc, 415 


77t 



.^UttJECT INDFX 


ntlOTi, 

ixfcolctur^ for scpar^rtoii ttom Kl{>^ 
dktomc^ 134 

irkdcnin OI42ift 

tHvo^bijr projisctloiij 123 
Wi^lldi^ for iiicomivc frame, I % I 
Wraticn threeKolour^ 122 
Wrailcn )23 

Y-l, 76. ai, tm. 574 
FirafNftUonal, 14 
Riisj, S2 
FluUitionp 
toning by^ 29 
MiiDTCEoent Lainp. 60, 62 
i'oot-c;mdlli^ 
deflmtkm oT, 100 
Foot-ianibcrt, deOnnion of, lOO 
Fort Lee (C43QSi3ljdalcd Film Iruli^ 
triesl^ia 

Foji Co^otir. 22, 332 
FroiKiu FrcKxiA, 32. 279, 2»0, 253 
Fnuiciid-RraUtii, 279, 555 
I resncl Isii. 72, 76, Si 
Fric&e^eene FaiciiU Lid., 7^ 9 
Ftuicolor, 25, 141, J33, 347 


CA^ARCOUPJt. fEm^ XIU, 23, 25, 140, 
35a,^/iM27 

iiiringcmcnt pf anuisjori Invert 4i2 

bl«4d] bkUi, 425 

colotimctiy for, 634 

developer, 425 

dve-bl«£;h« 425 

CaApdrco)or Iflc,, 24, 419 

CBsparoolor Lid., 23, 419, 565 

iiistoiy of 41942L 

nioduotf do^iclopiTicni of, 424, 5^9 

patEms, 426, 427 

prinlitig of 421-424 

liroosi, 37 

liiOce^aiEii forniuJf ^ 425 
tradf* 5S&, m 

MJund iracfc developer, 415, 590 
fof proCoAing, 424 

Gale, 

cameni, firar three su b-iUiajLird irmigei, 

Caumw, i., & Co., 531 
Cttiumunt, Socitti Ha.bliidemcm%. 10* 
277, 536 

Gtftimonteotor, 10 

Getieral Anllrnc dt FdiP Coiit,, 27, IJ3* 
350 

OoTiinJ Cnduftlrie^ Ud.. 11, t6, J75 
GevBccikir* 29* 350, 415 
de^-ekmnmi fiitjo^ob^c, 744 
(cniM'fll d«&cripikin of, 74i'749 
prinlEnG jilret eombinjiiiaos, 7*6-749 
procesBine stolutioM, 744-745 
sound fyrjoting, 7*9 
Ocvaertp Fboro Prodofts, 23* 326. 350 
Gitmoie Colour, 270 

772 


”GloriQC3( A.d’ventUJ'c^'^ITlei Ifl 
Gobo^Sl 

GreaK paJttl. 620 

GTcy-ykid, 625, 636 


Hal Rouih Siudlos, m. 573 
HLarntonkokc, 333, 334 
KArmofiv, colour. 64HiSS 
jLpacin], 644 

Romioolar, J», 22, JM 1+b 
R.D. Lijdiiiojg Equipmetti, 75^ 
KelKhromy* 5 

Helios, Colour Temperature Meter, 94 
Keruuli Trichrewne Procew, 2*2 
Kigh-intensity Carhon Arc* 63* ^ 
chstiij^ of oolcmr witia siicf cur* 
reui roclitCTiDfu 194 
for btpack photogradhy, 573*574 
spoctnU energy dlilrfPiitiAn nf, 69, 70, 

type 450 H.L jjts; lainp, 72. 75 
HiglT'Prtfiiiiure Ditchnige i-impn, 63, 64, 
65,66,67 

cadmium rdcrairy* 66, tK9 
Hiltmafi Process, XIH. 273, 276 
Kiit.20T,21» 
d^Hnition o(, 207 
humun diDcrimination of, 2l9 
mlniinum chunge of mivchmcil^ p«- 
«piiblt 22i, 222 

uuvel^gth Ilmlii of the prlncipai 
ht», 222 

""HydroTvisc,^* 454 
itiveuiion ot^ 452 


LB- auiPtmJ.Ta5«, 37* 454, 467, 473, 
4B9, 490 

Brili&lr pdunts. 5(H 

"I-*;** DytTfanjrw Mathiiw, 30. «7. 
473,474 

LCL llntcriuiiiofial CemnnnHon on 
iHumtiuition), tj, 106 
colour temporntiire, S3 
LG. FarbcH rtidLutiie. Xll, 25, 27^ 339 
419,421 

Ilford CoJour Fllni, 130 
Ilford Lid., 21, 21,24 

tlltiiniEunt. 

SUUKkltJ BT 

A. , B5* 172, 237 

B. . B5, 234, 237 

C. 85, 237 
6Jitr fat, 238 

LlijimUuanl.4, 
artijfk^, 52 

chronuLlkiiy et^cirdinjLies ol, 97, 99 

ene^ mm/e^ of, 50 

having i^minupui spectra, 53 

dJ^jitlttucMm ipecita, 52 
having fairiy hKOniintjAus vpceint, 52 




£UHi£CT 1NI>£^X 


llUmUtuition, 

Ktticmt data, 
rdcrcxux&, ^ 
f tiidki. 67-K;: 

uiiitA, convefiiQii fiulon foT^ 101 
Imbibition Priiitb>g^ 14» IS 

i:ieattli]1£ TiaiiTll£»lor irnbihitinn. fiirm t, 

4S6 

Aral paieni. 13 
hB. itEnchinc fpf, 4'?3^ 474 
iirkxntioD of. 452« 4^4 
procc^. L£ 

Tcchitiookrr ledmiituu'i 46^73 
Imbiikhiofi PriiutCEfi Mudiiiie, IT 
imperkl Cbanloil Xndualnea Ud., IM 
[mprmkitwiis, 2^ 
liat«|ptiU Mask, 130* 113 
trucinil Trtpa^^ 130-Ui 
A^koIw* 3ii-JSS 
Aiam Color, 3S8-409 
colour nim* I JO 
Gaapurcofor^ 414^27 
Kodachrame. 4ZT-45I 
maik. 133 
nc®iiliv< njtn. 25 
JMcfVfll* rmiiikaifp r4l? 

Jodidff Morckntin^ 19 
UrudJiitksiip rcduL'iioa Z1 


J. Arthupi Qtg^ntolJon U±, 32 
JtIliPs. 80 
Jp=^Pt Film, 4SJ 


iCALICilXmit^ 19 

Katinua, Conntoci. md 455 

419 

Kiv't L^bomtcdca Ltd.. 2J 
Ktflld'DDriftii Colour E\1iii Corp., 20 
KcIli^lOf, 18. 29, Jj5.146 
Kc^dacdor, IS, 24* 2^, J29 
’*Kcy^*' and colour harrEiDw, 655 
Key Printer, black, E4 
imate* bloc^-aiid-wlutep IS 
KineniicoSor. 8. 9.18,13 
of Anwkai* 8. 261 
KJ^lsu Corp., 20 

Kodaciiromc (OfbghuiJ pfoces:^^ 11- 
Ji6p14l 

(prKnt proctsA^, 15, 21* 14. 21* IS, 
37,130. 111. 171145,351. 415. 420, 
42 L 417^5} 

tOfnm, mat fen- hbck-HTid-^ilc 
pripiipfi, 436 

buc3L|j^ouml j^Jodkin ilkle. 44S450 
chemittry of ednur cnupliiiB devel¬ 
opers. 428 

expofuire lable, dayliglii. 435 
capo»tre tablit. pbolo flood, 436 
filtai for. 414 
originti patent. 36 


Kodachromf, 

primntie*, irproducricnt tjy, iT7 
I primano, mbtractive, 176 
proocssEiij; oP, 4J0, 411 
fesolvlng |KRKr*4J4 
f enmd (JTick 431» 411 457 

^ apecuil mdoopnek. 155 
I ap«d, daylight type. 435 

L speed. Ijpo A* 45i 

aiPihJtMrc of* 428 
TtohnicokUk use of. 437 
Type 5265, iiiainictlom for haLmomi, 
443-445 

lypei of, dnta, 414. 4l3 
Kowhroine^ lAmm. 24^ 130, 3JO. Ill, 
J50 

colour gradfUfi of prijita, 437. 438 
W0mpcm4irioe fnw« Pof, 44|. 442 
dupSkmiO of, 433, 437, 437445 
exposure laibjc, duyllidil, 415 
exposure tnbkp p^to-flood, 416 
nilers fOE. 434 

imerniDdiiiie fro^ 436 

orJgtfULl record for Te^mcotoft 447, 
448 

resotvfiig p<nm, 416 
icpartitiOD Iw^ti^ froni. 33C! 
aouml printing, p^scrjl irutinctsttni. 

445.446 

aiunuiic ai^cr exposures. 412 
Tccbnicnlor< twe df, 457 
tiiUng Qxvd copying service in« 433 
type 5265* ifiartucfiom for tNilBiAdtit& 
443-445 
types of, 411 
KodflcoItJi, 

bmicukr, 20, J/R.12D 
ntnltilayet i3e:gciiyc^ 24.118 
mw process, 17. T30 
Kodnk, 9.15, 20, 24 
inuiic, black^Euul-whifc* 13 


LaCQUEH. 

Easons proteettve^ 611 

for Koda^rerne sound iracit 4 J2 

tvidovaI of^ 411 

TcchttkoEof Ibrniulu for itmnd truck, 

493 

""U CucanKba,'" i5. 456 
Uinibert, ikHmilon of. 1:00 
LAwkiy Apparatus Co. Ltd.. The. 22 
[.mtliwur Bipack (AgfaV. 578-580 
Lernkuler mcc», 20, 31T, Iffl 
Agfaoolor, 20 

fibiu 30,25,28, i JO, 144, 145, |17.118 
bnEEcuLirbipac^ S78-3S0 
Ihrt cf patents, 123 
system, origin of. 34 
Ugbi* 

I deflniiiun of, 206 
mixing of coliKired. 19 


773 






tighiine, 

for Ehifaycolor. W 
for ICodachroftie. 434,43S 
TKhmccrior jntiTitctioni for 
ail*® rrtme, 4^-502 
Ughling Eauipmcfit^ 

0-E.Cv ^ompaLi-aourc^, 7S7 
H.D, Tndoslrfes, T58 
Lishincaa, 
ddiniikin cvf^ 219 
m Mimstll syatcm, 

Li ghf-source, 

for Diira}00l0T^ 30t 

for record IniL 4B 

ideal, 

imrwu; (umimtfice or, $3 
iMrninafTO elTId^ki of vmioua, 57 
of cquii ond viirjgua ooiour 

icmpcruLiircs. 6fl 
prinmr>% 45 
projection, 45, 184-Ifll 
secomlftiyp 45, 100^106 
leznpcmtuxfis oft ^ 

Umiuttl, generui value. In vi£ion, 2Jt 
Ufnikk, for make-up, 621 
London Film Productions Lid.^ 17<S, 
S ^6 

Lubdcalkin, 

of bipiKk, by Technicolor, 461 
Lumen, ddbiition of, 99 
Liimf nance, 

American end Owman recommerKliL^ 
lions, 100 

cAlcuhuion of. In C.LE. 13T 

conUaat, teisi ncrupllblc!, 2U 
foiitor of tlie pi-ojoctk>n fitfeco, 195 
rdntivc spectmL curve of, 224 
3cnalbilii>‘ to of, 120 

units of, 100 
LdminHity, 2li 
de&iiiion of, 20t 
of nnllnnl cjxr^, 232 
Lies. ikAnhicni of, tCO 

MACflcnr "Whitedile** Fiticf, I4G, 574 
Maj^ezita delidencies ofp 131 
spKtml refloclton chsrsctcnsucs of 
L65 

**MaEic Lnnicm," triplet 40 
Maisnacokif, IS. 22, 29, 30, )4|* 329p 
^^5^ 

Make-up, 619-62$ 
epplytns, etc,, 310, 311 
Qiiabcth Arderpp 62L 623 
for Bipock, 140 
(at DtlfAyeolorp 309-3 
for Tecfankol^r^ 474 
lipstick, 622 
Mttx Fictor, fr2l 
powder, 624 
roujse, 620, 622 
Mkskf for negative. 130 
774 


Maakjns, 

KodachiXHTic of rm{ltlla>iEr ftlmi. 
Tech, paL, 490 

optical j^intiriB of Tnavk anti picture. 
Technicolor, 49 [ 

Techrtkolor patent for, 494, 497 
MJiaaehiLicits Iwltgte of Technology, 
ll2p 451, 455 
Matnoca^ 

brmfijpg mntrid and ^^hlank" mio 
emt^t atoimd djurp, 491 
ny^Jnf to '‘hlaniu'' 46® 

OXkluiti^ tmth fWi 464 
patertiby 1-T.TrtiUnd, 487,488,4S9 
nrtallDe iOiutd tmeka wiih^ 486 
Tecbttieolor developer foniuik, 464 
T&.'httk:olor, priniinf of 463 
(xe Matnoesl 

_MUX Fkiot 3.1oke*ijp. 330, 312, 621 
Mean Sphcficnl iMcmily, deHniltof^ of, 
100 

Mclanochromosoope, 
projecfEon addtiive, 3 
Mcreufoid Ti^ Switch* 468, 472 
Mcfnirjr-Ciiriiilium DLwhnji^ Lamps, 
Spectral erwrjy diatrlbuLinn of 65. 66, 

m 

Mercury V*poui TuEiea, 52 
MetaUie Toning, 600-610 
Mefrk '"Cobrapiicc,” 646, 647 
M.aM., I J, ]5p l4,30,457 
MUlikmtxru deTmiikm of ICO 
Mtidvell Cimera Cotp., 568 
Mmute, pf three coSoiua^ 107 
irfehrumatie dam, 152 
Mobile Colour Composiiinn, 65J 
I Modulator^ 

Graitit'^ ihwry, 213, 2l J 
Moiri, piumi, 
dimmiitkin of 292-299 
iliunimatlon of 22 
in DuraycoJnr, 2S5 
Mole-Rjchnrdson, 

sotitr spoi, C.F. diitrihviinn 

o f 79 

"Junior' solar apoL C.P. diatribitllEMt 
of 80 

'' Mid^l" spotlampp CF- diHiribcitiDci 
of 79 

Mole-RiduirdBotT lot, 66, 574 
Mor^nilc [cfbctomctei. 195-205 
rcfttole control ejatortp 757*755 
“rifle onii,” 34,55^ 195 
scoop, 69 

"SdpicfT ■ atilar ipot. CP. dtatyltmtion 
of, 30 

tunxiten EtliiJimii apoElapinv, dc., 39 

Twfn Broadside, 69p 574 

type 40 Biwdridc lamp, 77, i4i>. Mi 

lype 90 Ate ^poilamp. 77 

typo 170 ^odnn^p, 7® 

type 450 H.i: arc Lump, 7L 75, 757 









Fiat BIlw, 102 I 

Mpnopuin FkturK Carp.« 30 

Mijswspack. m. I 32 - 13 S, 3 SL 4 lS I 

AfifaDofor. 

Adsco. 37, 415, 39M09 
Ga&potfcolijri -^1^27 
GevMolcn 4J5 

KodachrOTc, 13. 415.417^JD 
T«clmitt>4on 15, 457,47^, 477 
Trotand PflCcnt, 16 
Mfirdantin3< dwt, 1^ 

MiATgziTi Crucime Co. Ltd., 1^3 
Morva.Tiii Proces^^ 270 
Mo«ak ScTBCfi Pxtxw, tlO 
tfjcncnir deutcriprion, 2S4 
'‘Movienood" Ijmp, 57 
Multktrior, 22, 13.3. M l . 3.56^37^. .14?S 
patcnu. 339 

Sl 3 WHj iMJck, 538 

Mulilbytr iU!m. ^30 
l^thtum Kodnk patents, list OL 450 
for lechnkclor^ 4S7 
oristnsr 13 
potnits, tisi of. 351 
Muniell Book ofColotrr. lOft, ^55. 
Mintsell Color COn 
Mmuell Ky&leoi, 46. 646. 656, 657 
fli«l cwJoar hormonv, 646 
lumplefL. r^roductifKi df^ 48 
Mink;, 

dcvcTopjmcof of, 

NaTdonai Carbon Co. InCr^ 68^ 7| 
Natknaal GaHciy, 645 
Natioiutl Phyucat LabcnUiO', 101$ 
Natural Coloiu KinaniaLoiraj^ Co., 8 
KcBatfve-PoUtive,. 22, IS2 

nf DulaycolorH 23 
priX(»stns flf CbroinaH^ 752-756 
moocislciff of DtifovchiTTme, 183, 163> 
r64 

Nccn 1 ubc, 51 

Nqov Rhr^ of €yt and elacirkal un- 
pubes. Ill 
Nemnl Gney, 
nod colour horTTmoy^ 645 
id coldur ilemiionuitry, 635 
Nkkol Salt, icitdoE ^Ithf 29 
NkoK 

privn, oi besin-^lltlei. 53P 
Niggcri, M, 

Nitron Tube, 53 

Norwood^ ca\ai tcmfiefalure mcicr. 94 


OiuEirnvEft, 

vertically di^pcwd saiMTOlf, XUt, 6 
One-Scrip, cDlarscpciniLimi Hint, IL 133 
Optka} Hfiaro Dtviilcn, 

32 

Fmndtft, 32 
RfHrt. 32 
TIiOmasoDloi. 32 


Opncakiz Aki- Ges-^ 315 
CHlwald S^^lon, 651,657 


P.iirsTiics, uod ihc cotobT Him, XIV 
P«imcn|L ilw arl of undcol^Tfilim, 651 
PmtvOke* Majt Fiunor, 6lV+ 61J 
P^odxromo^iop, 17 
Fftr^iiUdunt PitiltRS Itic.. 30. 534. 535 
Paienlf, 

list ^ BrilisK Patenls 450673*566346, 
on ootour clnCdULLdsraphj^, 665*672 
survey of t.G. psiltflis dcnlhig with 
BnU-dldmioa nropenies of colour 
forTnera, ^14596 

Survey of Kodak paicnu dealing with 
imti-dHTusioii jjtopcsiies of cokitii’ 
fonms. 697. 7W 
i*aihe PkUitCt Ltd., 22 
Focrlm SSI 

PtffjstcouQ of 4 

Feruti of Mimich, 319 
Photochemical Record, 45* 129-141^ 
Photocolor Process. 

Phftto^aphlc Eifecih^ne$a, 
vf. cdlDur-LttiTtpenituic, 4(8 
PlidicMwetric Ternas. 99. 100. 101 
Photon. dcAnilkifi of* lOO 
Ptiotopic, lummosity carve, 212 
Phototube (for Bound track h 
Tyiwm599 
., 929. S93 
J.P. 37, 593 
. S.L593 
., SA.5t3 

Phyii^l Respofue Arc. 3L5, 316. 217 
Pfayikni Response in Radiant Stimulus, 
43. 306-H3 

Pt^nKnled Paper Sample^ ca}njl4l«l 
reptodiKtkiti of, I5n 
PtBfnents, 

plotted Qfi d-E. chon* 161 
spectral Tdkcinh fftciorapf 103^ 104 
Pill Belli, 

dye irapsfer nmdimo, 29, 30 

pins in, Tc^^icolor naient 

494 

ofl iB. tfOTHifef niojchirie. 469 
rcKHiration rncam, Technicolor, 4^3 
Tcdinicolcu paieot for. 490 
Phwtypc. 28, 412, 4|3p 453 
Fincbart PrwM(, 260^ 281 
PiBc^-tlhmiu PtocL, 10 
Pioneer Filins. 14 
Pkmecr Pictures Jne^ 13^ 436 
PloBck^t Constant. 98 
Plonckum distilbulicio of cnci^ at 
vorioui lErnpcratuies, 9f 
PtiEBticLzcT^ 

Tedtirkolor patent for treatrnem of 
him m can* 490 
ricniKoTdr^ At»co, iJf 


775 







StiBlfcCt INUjfX 


PknflkitiascDpc; 4 
PoiiaillBm, 7^ 

Ptikri^ 

dimiEmitan of in primi iiyueniv 515 
i» in vtcTKMcofik; praicctifan, 614-615 
PcliXitromkifi Process, 19,2SS, 334. 

J4a 

" Pol^oiiuin OiromchiinK [ique.'" 27, 33 
P«fliu%Ts Repradik:iKm, 45 
ftddilivr, 45 
uibtnurtivc. 45 
Pmtet COlotii^ 102. lOJ 
P-RXI ProductJws Im;,. 30 

Preface to J u Edition, X-Xtl 
Preface to 2nd Ediikin. XII-XV) 
Pfimaro^ 

<WkkticlM of* ISI 

fTAdiucI sbpf* 1?(3 

hypoLbcticflJ, dbsofhjnE In nomiiuljy 
iniuirattiTis 174, J75 

hypatisftical stibifTictive ivmhesk, 

possible of. 171 
ideal Ttclen^br^ Jft9* |?2 
^ idiromutidjy ranee of. 

IT? 

Ko<loi^oinc. suhtrojctive^ ij^muii 
173* 175-177 
rtal ctyc, 1T9 
^Ibpin^Med. 170. 173 
TochDiixi£or+ chroniLitidty range of. 

«ubqnu.im* gnimil of. 

Primar> COkmr Dt^^lopiticm. 41» 
Pnm4T> Cdotirs, 

GuikfkajKl BulFfi. 151 
rnwlure of, 39 

Printtfy- Light-uource, 45^ 4H 
Pfmtcf. 

aklppicg* g, 12 
4Wj>by-^tcp. 11.39 
Printing, 

of addhri% filmi, 1^^2-184 
of DufiycOlor Otm. IS2-184. >92-29fl 
twosiPloor sdibcm^ive, 11 
Pram. 

divider* XUl, 12 
Tochnif^^ar^ 12, 14 
Tfichoicoloj. setting op, 493. SJO^ 512 
Prizmii Ptoew. IB. 39, 329, 355. 

iTizma loc,^ It 
PfOosss Pn^ccticm, 383-587 
Pro^Ki Prelection Cammittoe, 583 
Projection. 

eiWliive tricolDur, 4. 6. 40 
Gncrolor. 171 
dotg whli caibod nira. 13T 
Fnndtfl tyElort^ 21^. 280 
l-DUman tj'stem, I16 
lens, Thomascolar, 281.382 
Itiht AOum* 184^188 
Projection U^[ Soujoc. 45 

776 


Projwai^ Sensen, 

Amerkan and German nccommcchia- 
ilom fiw iimUnance, 300 
urohniticin of* 200 

cokHiT measuiKuenti at centre or 
icrocn. 19t 

colour of li^i ypcHi. IB9 
di/octivity of, 19® 
luTnimmcc faclor of, 195-205 
S.M.PE- IiimiiMUKO sioiukird, 200 
spectral cneriy di^lribulion of bght 
upon.IBS 

Pnnkntiul AsAifanee Co.^ 16 
Pnudan abe. 102* 1®3 

^btcftl RwpcHHie* 216.317 
Pt^\:hkin| RcEpcmse to Rsdicnit Slimiiliis. 
41, 2D6-233 

Ps^xtitMphpknT AspozU of Vakm. 214 
Psycho-pliysicai! Rdationship». 314 
Psyxdiopliyaki* 214 
Purity* Odmalian of, 308, 225 
Prro. 

tanning ociioti nf* 453 
Techitkolor fermiila fcM" Fnairix (tc- 
VcEopmiait, 4M, 488 

Radiation* mogn of eleoro-mapHik'. 96 
Radio aty Mnsiclisll* 15 
FUyeoi, XUl 
BnElsli Cot^^ation. 20 
enmeo* r9,165. 2U6 
opfical 3iy»an* 30 
proccja. 19. 35. 250, 261* 
range of cotoor in. 263* 26S 
reiicoduction of 168 
Recnfdina Flw, 129-146 
Recnfdinfl Sequence. 45.46* 48 
Rectangdjir UnUbmi Chroittjitjdli 
Scale C&^afd imtK. 243-147 
Referenoe FttttuiriH,. diuiribtitkui curves, 
fof*iXftam. 167 

Rcfcr^ Sliniiili tCLF_ systerri lH I OR. 

RcflKltsfflCter, Moffianite. 195-205 
RcS^swring Fim. 141. 336* 4fi9 
Rcsistralkm. 

means on a pin-bcti primer* 493 
Relaiivc SKctml LumnnuTO 222 
cieveof 224 
Redef* 

octnented, 12 
dytd. 452 
polatine. 12 
itrui^* 33 
imbibitujn. 453 

process, 452 

Reprodmition Plunt, 43, 189-205 
Reproductioo Piimiu-ies^ 
control of 6y Rpeclrgil msitivity of 

the AepamiMm negaiiwca, | j 7* 118 

in ^b^ive pnw^ sdcntilkiiiimt 
of* 116 




SUBJErt INORX 


RiiprKXlucEiDrf Sequence^ 45, 4^ 
t^epuMk Pj^ure$ Carp,, 27^ 30^ 344 
R£«cau, t>ufsy, 

btawJimp jnd dyeine operftUcit, 2S» 
TTiturnfa^iint of. 
pk>l[«d ofi-CXEL 150 

pcintii 3 £ tif r^^cmiHYpc lilm* 162 
raCcr,2»7 

Re$poitic ProoeiA, 215 
Rdtiro. m~2U 

R,<j.a. Pitmarles. for matching stimuli. 
U7, I4ii 

dKhard Thomiu Eoitrpn$«^ 32 
Roacb^ Htil Sludiua, Im., 30 
Rods.UO. 2J1 
RotaLliig Mirrors^ 

Hi biizim'4pliHa^331-534 
Bot>4TS(cr Avatem, 552. 551 
DiillmCT’cr. 531 
Geboty, 531, 532 

J, IkoiirkD aad M* Chrtlien, 5JI, 532 
Rau£c, 

□pptiring^ 620 
for cmkic^p. £22 
RohmIuTp 143. 272-275, m 
muliiple iftukgc Dtigatm. Ur 
Royal liuUtutbiu 7 

Royal PlioiDgrapiuc Souety, XX11« 5, 23 
Royal Socic^ of Arts, 6^ 7^ 10 
RrU.es, CcHordinoici^ 
ihirty uEected ordinai«t fof txm> 
puiiiift, 247 

RudifiiiiL, prmxsslug of Agfiuolorp 26 
Satubatu^n, 2L« 

comfoctably diKnnunailve of, 
227 

dcfinllioT] oT, 2(W, 226 
in MooscU system^ 657 
lose of,iu pdininE mosak imagn, 29l 
scale ort22S 
Scales, uiuikikl^ 649 
Scawi* 

An-wrican and Gemwn motniiicnd*^ 
lions, 200 
colDTatjon of, 200 

colour nwasurtnstkls al craltc of, Ul 
ilirKtKity erf, 
lumtnarKC factor, 195 
lypicul British datii, 107 
Sqteen Guild Prod.,. JO 
Saetfl Pmeexiv 
mouk, 130 

Screen RcRector, 45,18^9-203 
Scrim , 80 

SwondaiY Caloor Developfircnt, 428 
Sdcctod-Qrdicmio^ 

ineilitid cf eompuiing trktirniilo^ 
valo«,250 
Selenium Clasi^ 261 
SeittSdiahtc. system. 14,33,141.454.5*7 
Senncti Cofcar. 22. U2 


Somikuu 

airv^ for ^^hite lighi KpectruTu. 229 

Steuii^lilyt 

to dincrciicc^ of lumlfunt.^. 220 
to ditfcmiucs of wavelenfths^ 219 
lo porily diHcrenccs, 225 

to UlUIUttCHL, 226 

Scfisitometer^ Euarmnn Type IIB., 500 
Sranltcnnetryt colour, 024 
ScpojiaiiQu Negativti, 
ihrecK^lmur, 41 

iSfO^lotifK 12 

^'Se^esiiy-Two** Method. 565. 566 
Shutter, mtEMy colour. 33 
Siemens and HoiaJte, 310 
SjUtS, m 

Silver Chlufkle. ooion of li|thl uiion, 3^ 
Simuluiteous Contrast, 636-639 
Sioale Frum MuJt:iplc linage^ 130, 140. 
141 

Sinus Kkuien Film, 342 
i6ttmn 

Onocolorp 29 
Kodachrofite, S* 

Skipping Ptinier^ 

k3|^p259 

ScLUUU, 61 
Sciimd, 

reproduction in DaTuyocilor, 30* 
Sound Truckp 
CinccoJor, 58$ 

colour fOm. gcnertil i^KeripBun. 58^ 
599 

dcwloprncnt of AgfucotiCif, 36i, 369 
Outsycolor, 306 
UcqucT for KcKlacttromD. 432 
Mullkcilar, 588 

nonovsl of protcdivc lacquer^ 433 
Tecbnkolof, 58t 

tneatttKril fof Ansco lemmc^rlWm, 
732-739 

SixEdul IndudJortp 6i36 
"Spedik Brightness.^' 19« 

"*Stwlk ColotiTp" 201 

Sp^ra, colour tempcnlurc rreAer. 94 

S^fOcokir, J42 

Spcctiul. kjE^jcscibn FuL'tom^ at dry 
poitdered pigmentSp H>3 
Spectrum, 

ehronmiidti' otxudlnMcs ofi 242 
murmre of fluted wa^’e^enoth^ 39 
I Spill 

Splefidkolof ProccabS, 427 
Spoi Projoctor* 81 

Standard Colour Mialurc Data (CJ.E. 
' Qntcm), 235 

StonJaiil Observer fCLE i.vateml, 108, 
147,233,234 

Suradian, dehniiioii of, 99 
Sterooicooic Colcuir Fihn. 6}4^t8 
at Nflvv York Wrjrld't Fnir, 615 
Todinkolot, 614 


777 





^lEBJECT 


SUmuU^ 

piimary vtlOAl. 41 
incbrmmiic, 4J 
Slimuiui froa^, 2t^ 

SLetIK Sttutiodip IS 
SUippIn^ Tnpock. 130, 07 
Tecfinicolor palenl (W* 4*ii5 
SludM? Jllumiruiik}]!. 6S~3| 
for DufqjfMik5r, 30^ W 
fcrcraioei, 
ijtrm* used hi, 77 
SubitKziive 
coHipiuaikin of, \2\ 
errors b, 1^, llSS 
SuhtrmtTvc lYimAiici, 41 
Subtructivc Prooftss^ 41, 325-503 
nuij^e of 4^lotur» which can be rc- 
pmhiCAi tn, 161 

SiibtmjcLtve Prpcmcsp ihreocolour. 150- 
50jf 

Asfacolw, 353-m 
Ansso CdJoi, 3M-4<59p m-73^ 
Bertrand^ 409 
Brewster. 410 
British Tricolour^ 414 
ChimicolE^r^ 4/2 
Chromait, 7J2-756 
CWTKCOlOTt X1U 
Diifbychrdnie, 4i4^/st 
DuKTcmaoolot. 7J0-7J/ 

DibnituL 4lS 
On Pn^ 740^?42 
Gwpnrcolor* XLH, 4/^2/ 

0Ciicrel descTipUiJU. 35(^352 
Gevaculor, 743*749 
Kodochrome, 427^Si 
Spicndicolor, ^7 
Tcclmicobr. XHJ. XV. 45J-S07 
Subtruciive Presses, two-cclonr, 425 - 
J49 

Airecolour, 7i-tf 
ChcTTucolcv, 33/ 

Chionurt, 732^736 
ClrieccloF^ 329-^331 
€a1orctal1:« 332 
C0lormm,iJ/ 

DuscDkufp 332 
Color, 332 
FuIIcoJcm’, 333 

BCDcral description^ 12M2B 
KuimonkoEoT, JS3 
Kodachrome ieaityj. 33$ 

MAesacolnr, 337 
Miilticolox, 

Pboiocoint, JiP 
Polychromak. 339 
Sennett Color, 342 
Sirius^ 342 
Spectfecelor, 342 
Sunmiary of, 346-J49 
Tochtdehrome, 343 
Tmeoior. S43 

77i< 


Subirqai^T Procesaes. twOiColoiaT, 
Ufacolor^ 34S 
Successive Contrast, 

Aiul ctikMir haTindny» 654 
Suoo»&i^ic Exj»ouirt, 

QyunKint 277 

Soccessive frame (method). 131 
for Dnfa^dirbne, 414 
for Tcchrtkolor, 457, 49S-S02 
Siin.%1, chmiffc of coloof befw^i SI 
S>^thc^ 

eddirii^ 4^ 4i, I47-15H 
colour phoEo^ohitv 
dyftj, cDloilaiiaa oC codom? rwalTme 
from superposjiion oh 166 
idul. 167 

d^^, ID subtnicijvi: proc^ 161 
Sublmcfivo, 4, 7* 156-184 
MibLractivc, HmflJiltons of, 171* 172 
trkJironuiUc, 4L 
two^olour^ 25^262 


TaYIjd*h Ta^^lor Hobson UA, 450, 
459,460.461 

Taylor* Taylor, Eiob&on A Coofcc U«L, 

461 

Tcchakhrofme, 31^ 14J, 238, |15. 32A, 
328 ,343 347 ^ ^ 

Tcchnisuilqf/Xllt, XV. 4S/^307 
I6fmn mcihod of printidir. 4^ 
"Wank," 465 
British patents oh 502-50t 
enciu. 28. 350.437,476 
canipa* film fm, 131 
camera fiiimfor ipedal purpoica. 4S6 
esmera paicnu, roceui, 461 
colonr cOfttroJ, 474 
^^colutif Jeero,” 474 
Idsloiry of, 455, 4Sfi 
imbibition CBcbniauc, 468-473 
labOfiEtor>', 12^14 
Uboratory* Brillsh, 16^ 45ft 
lenus, 45M6t. 475 
ItfliLtijmi, 475 
liohiiog kiels for* 73 
nuiko-up, 474 

monopiick, use of, 457, 47ft, 477 
mot^n^emre corporaiJan, tj, 16, 

oiniral systems, list oTpafonts, 507 
Of liha of. 454, 455 
pat^, oh 478 
primiog of, 465-474 
pimEii, balanong of. |$2 
pnsm, Ktimg up, 493 
proocHuije of inailrix, 4ft3, 464 

pMOoasaag i3[f negative, 4^3 
producikma, 16, IT 
reproductidn range, 177 
«ciuiui trade* 438* 5iS 
Mrippitig tripack. 137 
lubfniciivc primafpcx 176 






fninK. iiiBUih:tiDm for^ 

4^502 

(licccunv rrome mgAili-e, 457 
Tcchnicolw UiL, Z76. 451. 

46t 

thre&^thp dim nrruoficnicnt. 457 
iwtxolor. 325, S4S 
L?.S. pAtjeni^p 504-505 
Tclfis'ision, 38 

Th«or«iical B;uti. af colaur 
KfUphv, 38 

Tbomtas^lor. XIU, 31* 32, 37. 141. 

:iL m. Ml 

TbDiosojvColojr, 7B, 

Three<okfur. m0^tll^c, IV 
Three-cclo«r Fhaiaynpb^^ 
odidiiAr projection. 6, 277-2S4 
first proposal, 39 

fumljimcnlul condiUom Ten; Faithf ul 
TcproduL'tioa^ 106^121 
lo l^ih ccfimf^K 4 
Aobiraet ptoccis^, 15^111 
Thro^coimjr Pirsxrcsi, 
fuzidiiJTij^^l conditiou for rdthful 
reprodudiDn by^ 106^121 
limantionK of* 145* )46 
rrmge of ooluur» wfiicb mn be repro- 
dUi:nj in, Ifil 
Threo-r&poiw SyMcci. 
hypotlieaji of. 3 

“Thfw-Strfp" fiTwibod), m, 131* 132 
for Tecfiiikwloi. 457 
ra^iailiun of. 453 
neemAc for Duf^'ctirod^p 414 
TlirahoW. geoml. 217 
Toning, 60iMf0 
blue, 601 

by coloyr dc^vtoprri^ittp 60M06, 

6fO 

formtiku W-6m 
prtnlinR-our ma^fontsu 60S 
(ivci-cowr, 326, 327, ® | 
unmium. ^ 
vkith nieltd $^lt, 29* 607 
yellow dye, 603 
TnaOs, liit of, 649 
Trichromatic, 
iuuly^b. 45 

muuiTv ciirveg of Apectni^ pjtnMdB, 

107 

mUturc data. Wright's* t53 
vi^n* 1 

Trichrorrutic AnalyAhT 106^129 
Tri^brcrmAdc Cok^ur Mixturt. 271-213 
Trichroitiatie Doln 
WnghT"! dctennlnation of, 232 
Tricluomacic Record, 45,129-146 
Trkokitir, 40, 

idoat TectnJQEuLur primaries, 169 
leprodturtiiyn by hyporhetin:^ net- 
angular twimait#!. 172 


TriedouTp 

reprodtidiotl by sjupioft^idcd r«l' 
angoinr nrimarics. 173 
Tficotour Analyud. Olters for, 106 
TrwtourFlJlCTa, 40. r06* til llj. tJi* 
146^ i4^»p 158, m, 160, 415 
TrScoJoyr Filter Rjittn^ 121 
ccmTpcT^ljkm of, 122 
oOrTKtidrt for tungntcn lighi, E22, L2.1 
Tniinciif Ca-ordmnies, 
of specmiin Idcus. 24* 

Trimbie LabordCOiies Jnc. 28, 533 
Tripiai±, 3 

TriptfrrHcad PFooBi Projector iWar- 
neriy, 5S4 

Fanumonril* 584-586 
Triplc-LctB 

GaimiijnK^ 10 

Triple Reieeptot Analyser. 107 
TrisdmijliA Dtniihiiipp Codhdcnr^, 
for ccnnpatrng R,ypCS. co-mlinates. 
245 

Trisiimuliu Specifiaaiions. cakobtion 
0^239 

TrktimuitA Values, 234, 241 
Tnicolor, 18,27,28.30,37, H\J4J-S4S, 
349 

Tunpten Fibment Lompi, 53 
chAnKteriArtf of* 5 $ 
cncT^ curve of it 100-wuti btnp. 91 
for modeHirrE Eight, 60 
for sei llghtifig. 60 

lights vmii% unci ctrioiuf lernpemiun. 

Mote-Ridimboit, 59 
Dpmiicd an ofkr than rated voIhikc, 
53 

opcriLtoU on creer-vottiige, 54 
spectral ericrey di^iribkiUon. 57 
20ih Century-Foji Fiim Cmrp. Inc., 135, 
457 

Two-Colour CmemiiiogTuptiy. 

general dewiptiort. 253-258 
TifA>Cd!oiir Prirug. 
prcc^in^ of by docp-liink 

Two-Col£Hif Proms, 7, 253-262 
additive syatheus, 25W262 
filtert for, 256 
KcKfiK-htOmc. 336 

reproduction of cv^tirs In, ^7.25S 
reproduciioti of fpoctrum,, 255 
subtrnctrve. getmJ prmdpki. 335- 
3^ 

subtractive proeessts. 325-349 
Technkolor Diens, IJ 
toningp 126, 327. 601. 602 


Vf*. 26p 357 

LabowoHes, Roperick^ 360 
output of AgTaculor* 360 
procesring laboratories^ 359 

779 




AUBJBCT IHDVX 
Ulkoldir' 

UltninuraH Blue, 102 . lOJ 
United AniiW Ootp,. 31 
UidvciMl PJctwtt Ca tut, 30 
Ufimium. lepjnjt, 29, S27 
Urtvm Tndjnn t 

^ 6S7 

spctaral rdkctloD of* 1W5 
Vidwfujdcr PAralltttlfll Qwii/ol, Ttdim- 
colcvr, 461, 4^ 

W.. Ud.. 22 

vjSSTSS'»SSJS‘“*^" 

Vittinl lUunon, XtV 
Visual Sumuluv 2ti 
ami ertcr-iiRnae. 633 
Vilucolor, 23 
Vjimtniipb, 16 

Warmer Bn».. 14, 3#4 

bewi-splitiiar. 520 
Woifa-oir Relief PnxaH. 4J2 
"I^Moaetiin,'* The, 236 

waw’* Lew, 2!7 ,218 
White, equii eneniy> 83 
■WWlexIite’* Mjiebeth PiTier. 140, S74 
Winoo* ai]d Newton, IG2 
Winimr Blue, 102, IM 
WrattoQ Filteri, 

w stwcacBltMH or. T 0 «- 1 V 7 , 


WiattenFlHem, 
for QoIhlV rriiitariec, 1311 
for Xodocticimit 434 
for Tedinioiiuf uK.Tmtvo^RmHt. 499 
lihotcimotiv, OJ 
(Kimiry faicn, 147 
tf^oui, I06i 123,133, J3i. 13* 
iTmliw, colermieiTic tped^tiou 

tnci^cmr, oompcoistioii for. 122 
ttioolour, for succeuiive^iuine uw^ 
tbod, 131 

tricolour, mixture cume of, 149 
tti^oor, plotud oa CtE. dlBBiam, 

icimlour.epectid Rl9»o«piiii9H«f, I6D 
tricwn^ spectnt tntivmhiioM of. 

twocotour. 123. 236,251 
Wny Ud.. 316 

X YZ(CI,Eeo,ordlint)OX 147,333,234 
*. f, i. m the C.LE systisn. 234.340 
X, y. I, in the C.t,£ eyuetn, 334,240 

V^^ d^ionciwof, I8i 
Y*! Rllcft. 76^ 81, 140, 374 
YouiiK^tRihollZ iTw^, 229 
Young eHypotheus. lOf 

ZDecHnow. 19.53fi 
Zoetrupe, 4 


bubWei,aiHl amdam ortighi idlKted 

iwf mi rorm*. each In t"a nieiio futfwtr/ of tfiym (J. M. W. TimNE*). 


ap 



™ EN tK 













» « 


I 




md 



-L^ K 

ft 




i 


% 

I 






V 




/ 




CENTRAL ARCHAEOLOGICAL LIBRARY, 
Q . NW DELHI 




Sqgje No. . 
n8.534V0or-l5O62 


Au ttinr — 




elneaato^^apfcQr* 



‘*J book tftat is shift *> 

_rvtnlA 


i 


^ GOVT. OF INDIA 

Depaitinent of Aid»*^lesy ^ 

NEW DELHI- ^ 


Please help 
ctetn Mid mtrrinf'
Internet Archive Audio

Featured

Top

Images

Featured

Top

Software

Featured

Top

Texts

Featured

Top

Video

Featured

Top

Mobile Apps

Browser Extensions

Archive-It Subscription

Save Page Now

Full text of "Colour cinematography"

See other formats
